imagePRESS C10000VP Series Service Manual - en - 13.0 PDF

Revision 13.
imagePRESS C10000VP/
C8000VP Series
Service Manual
Important Notices
Important Notices
Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation, maintenance, and repair
of products.
This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this manual that does
not apply to your locality.
Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products.
When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the
need arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new
edition of this manual.
The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law.
Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies.
Copyright
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, reproduced or
translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the consent of Canon Inc.
Copyright CANON INC. 2015
Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.
Explanation of Symbols
The following symbols are used throughout this Service Manual.
Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation

Check. Remove the claw.
1x
Check visually. Insert the claw.
1x
Important Notices
Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation

Check a sound. Push the part.
Disconnect the connector. Connect the power cable.
1x
Connect the connector. Disconnect the power cable.
1x
Remove the cable/wire from the Turn on the power.

cable guide or wire saddle.
1x
Install the cable/wire to the cable Turn off the power.

guide or wire saddle.
1x
Remove the screw. Loosen the screw.
1x 1x
Install the screw. Tighten the screw.
1x 1x
Cleaning is needed. Measurement is needed.
The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and
mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation.
In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol, the arrow
indicates the direction of the electric signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing the delivery unit
door, which results in supplying the machine with power.
2. In the digital circuits, '1' is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low".
(The voltage value, however, differs from circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD
signal goes on when '0'.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field. Therefore, the operations
of the microprocessors used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of
the DC controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other purposes, and
major changes will be communicated in the form of Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant Service
Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults in the machine.
Contents
Contents
Safety Precautions...............................................................................................1
Laser Safety........................................................................................................................................ 2
Handling of Laser System................................................................................................................... 2
Turn power switch ON.........................................................................................................................3
Safety of Toner....................................................................................................................................4
About Toner..........................................................................................................................................4
Toner on Clothing or Skin...................................................................................................................... 4
Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery............................................................................................. 4
Points to Note before Servicing...........................................................................................................4
Points to Note at Cleaning...................................................................................................................5
1. Product Overview.............................................................................................6
Product lineups....................................................................................................................................7
Host machine........................................................................................................................................7
Pickup/Delivery System Options............................................................................................................ 8
Scanning System Options....................................................................................................................11
Function expansion system options...................................................................................................... 12
Features............................................................................................................................................ 14
Product Features................................................................................................................................ 14
Features at servicing........................................................................................................................... 15
Specifications.................................................................................................................................... 21
Product Specifications......................................................................................................................... 21
Power Supply Specifications................................................................................................................ 22
Weight and Size..................................................................................................................................22
Productivity (Print Speed).................................................................................................................... 23
Paper type.......................................................................................................................................... 27
Name of Parts................................................................................................................................... 33
External View......................................................................................................................................33
Cross Section View............................................................................................................................. 39
Power Switch......................................................................................................................................39
Control Panel......................................................................................................................................40
2. Technical Explanation................................................................................... 42
Basic Configuration........................................................................................................................... 43
Functional Configuration...................................................................................................................... 43
Controller System..............................................................................................................................44
Overview............................................................................................................................................ 44
Controls..............................................................................................................................................50
Laser Exposure System.................................................................................................................... 64
Overview............................................................................................................................................ 64
Controls..............................................................................................................................................67
Image Formation System.................................................................................................................. 73
Overview............................................................................................................................................ 73
Controls..............................................................................................................................................84
i
Contents
Fixing System..................................................................................................................................140
Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 140
Controls............................................................................................................................................155
Pickup Feed System....................................................................................................................... 193
Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 193
Controls............................................................................................................................................208
External Auxiliary System................................................................................................................271
Counter Control.................................................................................................................................271
Fan Control.......................................................................................................................................277
Power supply.................................................................................................................................... 287
Protection function.............................................................................................................................291
Power-saving Function...................................................................................................................... 293
Effect of the Hub Which Supports Spanning Tree................................................................................ 297
Embedded RDS.............................................................................................................................. 298
Product Overview..............................................................................................................................298
Limitations........................................................................................................................................ 300
Service cautions................................................................................................................................300
E-RDS Setup.................................................................................................................................... 301
Error code and strings....................................................................................................................... 304
Updater............................................................................................................................................308
Functional Overview.......................................................................................................................... 308
Limitations and Cautions....................................................................................................................313
Preparation....................................................................................................................................... 314
System Management Operations....................................................................................................... 322
Maintenance..................................................................................................................................... 328
FAQ................................................................................................................................................. 329
DCM................................................................................................................................................ 332
Function Overview ............................................................................................................................332
Export All by Remote UI.....................................................................................................................333
Import/Export by Service Mode (External)........................................................................................... 335
Import/Export by Service Mode (Internal)............................................................................................ 342
List of items which can be imported.................................................................................................... 347
3. Periodical Service........................................................................................ 377

Periodical Service Operation Item...................................................................................................378
Process Unit..................................................................................................................................... 378
Primary Charging Assembly...............................................................................................................380
Developing Assembly........................................................................................................................ 382
ITB Unit (1/2).................................................................................................................................... 384
ITB Unit (2/2).................................................................................................................................... 386
Secondary Transfer Unit.................................................................................................................... 388
Registration Feed Unit....................................................................................................................... 390
Filter.................................................................................................................................................392
Primary Fixing Assembly (1/3)............................................................................................................394
Secondary Fixing Assembly (1/3)....................................................................................................... 400
Tandem Pass / Bypass Pass / Fixing Merging Pass Unit......................................................................406
ii
Contents
Delivery Reverse Unit........................................................................................................................ 409

Duplex Decurler Unit......................................................................................................................... 412
Options.............................................................................................................................................413
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning............................................................... 417

List of Parts .................................................................................................................................... 418
External / Internal Cover.................................................................................................................... 418
Main Unit.......................................................................................................................................... 424
Electrical Components.......................................................................................................................429
Main Controller System................................................................................................................... 476
Replacing the Main Controller PCB 1..................................................................................................476
Replacing the VIDEO PCB.................................................................................................................477
Replacing the HDD............................................................................................................................480
Replacing the Main Controller PCB 2..................................................................................................482
Replacing the DC Controller PCB....................................................................................................... 484
Laser Exposure System.................................................................................................................. 486
Dustproof Glass (Y/M/C/Bk) Cleaning Procedure.................................................................................486
Replacing the Laser Scanner Units (Y/M/C/Bk)................................................................................... 487
Image Formation System................................................................................................................ 490
Replacing the Primary Charging Assemblies (Y/M/C/Bk)......................................................................490
Replacing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor HP Sensors (Y/M/C/Bk)......................................493
Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Plate (Y/M/C/Bk).........................................................493
Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Plate Cleaning Pad (Y/M/C/Bk)....................................500
Replacing the Primary Charging Wire Unit (Y/M/C/Bk)......................................................................... 501
Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly Shield Plate (Y/M/C/Bk)......................................................503
Replacing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder (Y/M/C/Bk) and Primary Charging Wire
Cleaning Pad Slider (Y/M/C/Bk)...................................................................................................... 504
Replacing the Primary Charging Wire (Y/M/C/Bk)................................................................................ 505
Replacing the Drum Units (Y/M/C/Bk)................................................................................................. 507
Replacing the Drum Cleaning Units (Y/M/C/Bk)................................................................................... 512
Replacing the Drum Cleaning Front/Rear Edge Seals (Y/M/C/Bk).........................................................513
Replacing the Drum Cleaning Blades (Y/M/C/Bk)................................................................................ 514
Replacing the Pre-exposure Lamp Units (Y/M/C/Bk) ........................................................................... 515
Replacing the Photosensitive Drums (Y/M/C/Bk)................................................................................. 516
Replacing the Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure Units (Y/M/C/Bk).............................................................. 518
Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure Units (Y/M/C/Bk)................................................................519
Replacing the Drum Cleaning Kits (Y/M/C/Bk)..................................................................................... 520
Replacing the Drum Cleaning Brush Rollers (Y/M/C/Bk).......................................................................522
Cleaning the Drum Patch Sensors (Y/M/C/Bk).....................................................................................524
Replacing the Developing Assembly Lower Plate (Y/M/C/Bk)............................................................... 528
Cleaning the Developing Assembly Lower Plate (Y/M/C/Bk).................................................................530
Replacing the Drum Patch Sensors (Y/M/C/Bk)................................................................................... 530
Replacing the Potential Sensor.......................................................................................................... 534
Pulling out the Process Units (Y/M/C/Bk)............................................................................................ 536
Cleaning the Drum Unit Support Shaft (Y/M/C/Bk)............................................................................... 539
Pulling out the Pre-registration/Feed Unit ........................................................................................... 540
Replacing the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt Unit...............................................................................540
Replacing the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt Tension Roller............................................................... 541
Replacing the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt......................................................................................545
Replacing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller...................................................................................547
Replacing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Grounding Spring 1..................................................... 548
iii
Contents
Replacing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Grounding Spring 2..................................................... 548
Replacing the Secondary Transfer Cleaning Unit Edge Seal Bases (Rear and Front).............................549
Replacing the Secondary Transfer Cleaning Unit.................................................................................549
Replacing the Secondary Transfer Cleaning Case...............................................................................550
Replacing the Secondary Transfer Cleaner Drive Unit (9,000,000 Sheets)............................................ 554
Cleaning the Secondary Transfer Cleaner Drive Unit (1,000,000 Sheets)..............................................563
Replacing the Secondary Transfer Scraper Sheet............................................................................... 564
Replacing the Secondary Transfer Cleaning Brush Roller (Right/Left)...................................................566
Replacing the Secondary Transfer Bias Roller Cleaning Blade............................................................. 567
Replacing the Secondary Transfer Inlet Lower Guide...........................................................................568
Secondary Transfer Inlet Lower Guide / Secondary Transfer Outlet Separation Guide Cleaning
Procedure..................................................................................................................................... 569
Pulling out the ITB Frame Unit............................................................................................................570
Replacing the Leading Edge Registration Patch Sensor Cleaning Shutter............................................. 572
Leading Edge Registration Patch Sensor Cleaning Procedure..............................................................572
Replacing the ITB Cleaning Unit.........................................................................................................573
Replacing the ITB Cleaning Brush Roller............................................................................................ 574
Replacing the ITB Cleaning Blade...................................................................................................... 575
Replacing the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit.............................................................................578
Replacing the Secondary Transfer Inlet Upper Guide...........................................................................581
Replacing the ITB..............................................................................................................................583
Cleaning the ITB Idler Roller.............................................................................................................. 589
Cleaning the ITB Steering Roller........................................................................................................ 589
Cleaning the ITB HP Sensor.............................................................................................................. 590
Cleaning the ITB Edge Sensor........................................................................................................... 591
Replacing the ITB Inner Surface Cleaning Scraper Unit....................................................................... 592
Replacing the ITB Torque Limiter....................................................................................................... 593
Replacing the Primary Transfer Roller (Y/M/C/Bk)............................................................................... 594
Replacing the Process Unit Cover...................................................................................................... 595
Replacing the Sub Hopper Stirring Motors (Y/M/C/Bk)......................................................................... 596
Releasing the Pressure of the ITB Unit............................................................................................... 597
Replacing the Registration Patch Sensor Unit..................................................................................... 598
Cleaning the Registration Patch Sensor Shutter, Registration Patch Sensors (Front/Middle/Rear),
and ITB Patch Sensors (Y/M/C)...................................................................................................... 599
Replacing the Developing Assemblies (Y/M/C/Bk)............................................................................... 600
Replacing the Sub Hoppers (Y/M/C/Bk).............................................................................................. 603
Replacing the Color Sensor Unit.........................................................................................................603
Cleaning the Color Sensor Unit.......................................................................................................... 608
Moving the Toner Supply Assembly (when the POD Deck is not connected)......................................... 611
Moving the Toner Supply Assembly (when the POD Deck is connected)...............................................612
Replacing the Hopper Unit (Y/M/C/Bk)................................................................................................615
Fixing System..................................................................................................................................620
Replacing the Fixing Air Pump Unit.....................................................................................................620
Pulling Out the Primary Fixing Assembly.............................................................................................621
Replacing the Primary Fixing Web Unit............................................................................................... 622
Replacing the Primary/Secondary Fixing Web..................................................................................... 624
Replacing the Primary Fixing Refresh Roller Cleaning Air Nozzle......................................................... 626
Replacing the Primary Fixing Roller Collection Roller...........................................................................627
Replacing the Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Unit................................................................................. 628
Replacing the Primary Fixing Assembly (when working with 1 person).................................................. 629
Replacing the Primary Fixing Assembly (when working with 2 or more people)......................................631
Replacing the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Thermoswitch................................................................... 633
iv
Contents
Opening/Closing the Primary Fixing Upper Unit................................................................................... 635

Replacing the Primary Fixing Roller, Bearings, and Insulating Bushes.................................................. 638
Cleaning the Primary Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor.............................................................................. 644
Replacing the Primary Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor............................................................................ 644
Replacing the Primary Fixing Roller Main Thermistor........................................................................... 645
Cleaning the Primary Fixing Roller Thermoswitch................................................................................ 646
Replacing the Primary Fixing Roller Thermoswitch.............................................................................. 646
Replacing the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Unit..................................................................................647
Replacing the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt.........................................................................................649
Replacing the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Inner Oil Coating Roller..................................................... 651
Replacing the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Pressure Pad Cover and Primary Fixing Pressure Belt
Pressure Pad.................................................................................................................................654
Replacing the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Steering Roller..................................................................656
Replacing the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Inlet Thermistor.................................................................657
Replacing the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Bearings 1, 3, 4 and 5 and the Primary Fixing Pressure
Belt Bushings................................................................................................................................ 659
Cleaning the Primary Fixing Inlet Guide.............................................................................................. 661
Replacing the Primary Fixing External Heat Belt Unit........................................................................... 662
Replacing the Primary/Secondary Fixing External Heat Roller Thermistor............................................. 669
Replacing the Primary/Secondary Fixing External Heat Cleaning Roller................................................ 672
Replacing the Primary/Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Thermoswitch.............................. 673
Replacing the Primary/Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Thermoswitch.............................. 675
Replacing the Primary/Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Heater......................................... 676
Replacing the Primary/Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Heater......................................... 679
Replacing the Primary/Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt/Roller Bearings/Insulating Bushes.............. 683
Replacement of the Primary/Secondary Fixing External Heat Drawer Harness Unit............................... 685
Replacing the Primary Fixing Refresh Roller....................................................................................... 689
Cleaning the Primary Fixing Delivery Lower Separation Claw............................................................... 691
Replacing the Primary Fixing Delivery Lower Separation Claw............................................................. 691
Cleaning the Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Separation Air Nozzle.........................................................692
Replacing the Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Separation Air Nozzle....................................................... 693
Cleaning the Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Connection Lower Guide and Roller.................................... 695
Replacing the Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Lower Roller.................................................................... 696
Replacing the Primary Fixing Sub Station Air Flow Unit........................................................................698
Pulling Out the Secondary Fixing Assembly........................................................................................ 700
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Web Unit...........................................................................................701
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Refresh Roller Cleaning Air Nozzle.....................................................703
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Roller Collection Roller...................................................................... 704
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Unit.............................................................................705
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Assembly (when 1 person working alone)........................................... 706
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Assembly (when working with 2 or more people)................................. 708
Opening/Closing the Secondary Fixing Upper Unit.............................................................................. 710
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Roller, Bearings, and Insulating Bushes..............................................714
Cleaning the Secondary Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor......................................................................... 719
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor........................................................................719
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Roller Main Thermistor.......................................................................720
Cleaning the Secondary Fixing Roller Thermoswitch............................................................................721
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Roller Thermoswitch..........................................................................721
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller, Bearings, and Insulating Bushes................................722
Cleaning the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Sub Thermistor........................................................... 727
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Sub Thermistor..........................................................728
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Main Thermistor........................................................ 728
v
Contents
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Pressure Refresh Cleaning Roller.......................................................729

Replacing the Secondary Fixing Pressure Refresh Roller.....................................................................730
Cleaning the Secondary Fixing Inlet Guide..........................................................................................732
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Thermoswitch............................................................733
Replacing the Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt Unit...................................................................... 734
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Refresh Roller................................................................................... 741
Cleaning the Secondary Fixing Delivery Lower Separation Claws.........................................................742
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Delivery Lower Separation Claws....................................................... 743
Cleaning the Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Upper Separation Plate..................................................744
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Upper Separation Plate................................................ 745
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Lower Roller................................................................ 746
Replacing the Primary Fixing Refresh Air Blow Valve Unit....................................................................748
Replacing the Secondary Fixing Refresh Air Blow Valve Unit............................................................... 749
Replacing the Atmospheric Pressure Relief Valve Unit.........................................................................750
Replacing the Relief Valve Unit.......................................................................................................... 751
Replacing the Pressure Gauge Unit....................................................................................................751
Replacing the Air Filter Unit................................................................................................................752
Replacing the Fixing Air Tube Filter.................................................................................................... 753
Replacing the Fixing Air Pump Filter................................................................................................... 754
Pickup / Feed System..................................................................................................................... 756
Replacing the Pre-fixing Feed Right Unit.............................................................................................756
Replacing the Main Station Duplex Feed Right Unit............................................................................. 758
Replacing the Main Station Duplex Feed Middle Unit........................................................................... 760
Replacing the Main Station Duplex Feed Left Unit............................................................................... 763
Cleaning the Pre-fixing Feed Sensor 1/Secondary Transfer Outlet Sensor............................................ 767
Replacing the Cross-feed Unit............................................................................................................767
Replacing the Cross-feed Roller Cleaning Member..............................................................................768
Replacing the Cross-feed Roller......................................................................................................... 768
Cleaning the Cross-feed Roller Cleaning Member, Cross-feed Unit, and Cross-feed Rollers.................. 769
Pre-fixing Feed Belt Cleaning Procedure.............................................................................................770
Cleaning the Pre-fixing Feed Belt Cleaning Brush................................................................................770
Replacing the Pre-fixing Feed Left Unit............................................................................................... 771
Cleaning the Tandem Feed Roller 1, Tandem Slave Roller 1, Tandem Feed Roller 2, Tandem Slave
Roller 2, and Tandem Guides......................................................................................................... 772
Cleaning the Bypass Feed Roller 1, Bypass Slave Roller 1, Bypass Feed Roller 2, Bypass Slave
Roller 2, Bypass Feed Roller 3, Bypass Slave Roller 3, and Bypass Guide........................................ 774
Replacing the Sub Station Duplex Feed Left Unit................................................................................ 775
Replacing the Sub Station Duplex Feed Right Unit.............................................................................. 777
Replacing the Tandem Feed Unit....................................................................................................... 781
Replacing the Tandem Feed Roller 1 and Tandem Feed Roller 2......................................................... 784
Replacing the Bypass Feed Unit.........................................................................................................787
Replacing the Bypass Feed Roller 1/ Bypass Feed Roller 2/Bypass Feed Roller 3.................................789
Replacing the Fixing Merging Path Unit.............................................................................................. 792
Replacing the Fixing Merging Path Feed Belts.................................................................................... 794
Replacing the Fixing Merging Bypass Decurler Slave Roller and the Fixing Merging Bypass Decurler
Drive Roller................................................................................................................................... 795
Cleaning the Fixing Merging Unit Bypass Decurler Drive Roller............................................................ 796
Replacing the Fixing Merging Unit (Lower).......................................................................................... 796
Replacing the Tandem Feed Roller 3..................................................................................................798
Replacing the Bypass Feed Roller 4................................................................................................... 801
Cleaning the Fixing Merging Path Feed Belt Opposition Roller............................................................. 804
Cleaning the Tandem Feed Roller 3, Tandem Feed Slave Roller 3, and Fixing Merging Guide............... 805
vi
Contents
Cleaning the Bypass Feed Roller 4, Bypass Feed Slave Roller 4, and Fixing Merging Guide..................805
Replacing the Duplex Decurler Unit.................................................................................................... 806
Replacing the Duplex Decurler Unit (Upper)........................................................................................ 807
Replacing the Duplex Decurler Unit Feed Belts................................................................................... 808
Replacing the Duplex Decurler Slave Roller and Duplex Decurler Drive Roller...................................... 809
Pulling Out the Delivery/Reverse Unit................................................................................................. 810
Cleaning the Delivery/Reverse Flapper Flag........................................................................................810
Replacing the Color Sensor Unit Sponge Roller...................................................................................811
Replacing the Delivery Decurler Slave Roller 2, Delivery Slave Roller 1, and Delivery Slave Roller 2...... 812
Cleaning the Delivery Roller 1, Delivery Slave Roller 1, Delivery Roller 2 and Delivery Slave Roller 2..... 815
Cleaning the Duplex Reverse Roller and Duplex Reverse Rear Roller.................................................. 816
Replacing the Duplex Reverse Roller and Duplex Reverse Rear Roller.................................................817
Replacing the Delivery Reverse Roller 1 and Delivery Reverse Roller 2................................................ 819
Replacing the S2M 30T Pulley/Delivery Roller 1/Delivery Reverse Front Roller..................................... 822
Cleaning the Delivery Reverse Roller 1/Delivery Reverse Roller 2/Delivery Reverse Rear Roller............ 825
Cleaning the Delivery Reverse Front Roller.........................................................................................827
Replacing the Delivery Roller 3.......................................................................................................... 828
Replacing the Delivery Upper Guide Unit............................................................................................ 830
Replacing the Delivery Guide (Lower) 3.............................................................................................. 832
Replacing the Delivery Decurler Slave Roller 1....................................................................................832
Replacing the Delivery Roller 2.......................................................................................................... 833
Replacing the Delivery Reverse Rear Roller........................................................................................834
Cleaning the Delivery Decurler Roller Opposition Roller.......................................................................835
Replacing the Delivery/Reverse Front Slave Roller.............................................................................. 835
Replacing the Delivery/Reverse Unit One-way Clutch.......................................................................... 839
Replacing the Delivery/Reverse Unit Decurler Backup Roller Cleaning Brushes.................................... 840
Replacing the Left/Right Deck Unit..................................................................................................... 840
Replacing the Left/Right Deck Pickup Unit.......................................................................................... 843
Replacing the Left/Right Deck Separation Pad.................................................................................... 845
Replacing the Left/Right Deck Lifter Motor Unit................................................................................... 846
External / Auxiliary System..............................................................................................................848
Replacing the Main Station Upper Right Suction Filters........................................................................848
Replacing the Main Station Upper Left Suction Filters..........................................................................848
Replacing the Main Station Rear Ozone Filters (Y) / (M/C/Bk).............................................................. 849
Replacing the Main Station Rear Toner Filters (Y/M/C/Bk)................................................................... 850
Disassembling/Cleaning the Sub Station Exhaust Duct Unit Ozone Filter/Filter Base............................. 851
Replacing/Cleaning the Sub Station Rear Middle Ozone Filter..............................................................853
Replacing the Power Unit Station Ozone Filter.................................................................................... 854
Replacing the Sub Station Front Left Cover.........................................................................................855
Replacing the Waste Toner Container................................................................................................ 855
Replacing the Main Station Front Upper Cove..................................................................................... 856
Disengaging the Power Unit Station....................................................................................................859
Replacing the Main Station Rear Covers.............................................................................................861
Disengaging the Sub Station.............................................................................................................. 862
Options............................................................................................................................................ 869
Replacing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller...................................................................................869
Replacing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller............................................................................ 870
Replacing the DADF + Reader Unit.................................................................................................... 871
5. Adjustment................................................................................................... 876
Basic Adjustment.............................................................................................................................877
vii
Contents
Image Position Adjustment.................................................................................................................877

Adjusting the Side Registration...........................................................................................................887
Density Adjustment of Color Sensor (Only When imagePRESS Server Is Installed)............................... 888
When replacing parts...................................................................................................................... 893
Main Controller..................................................................................................................................893
Laser Exposure System ....................................................................................................................896
Image Formation System................................................................................................................... 898
Fixing System................................................................................................................................... 915
Pickup Feed System..........................................................................................................................919
6. Troubleshooting...........................................................................................923
Making Initial Checks...................................................................................................................... 924
List of Initial Check Items................................................................................................................... 924
Test Print......................................................................................................................................... 925
Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 925
Selecting Test Print TYPE..................................................................................................................925
How to check test print...................................................................................................................... 926
Image Adjustment Basic Procedure................................................................................................ 930
Making Pre-Checks........................................................................................................................... 930
Gradient adjustment in density between the front side and the rear side................................................931
Adjustment of density difference (1/3)................................................................................................. 932
Troubleshooting Items.....................................................................................................................935
List of Troubleshooting Items............................................................................................................. 935
Failure diagnosis of the air flow in the fixing system............................................................................. 935
Wrinkles in the Pressure Belt............................................................................................................. 938
Forcible stop of paper feed.................................................................................................................938
Message "Adjusting the fixing assembly" does not disappear............................................................... 940
Power Supply Error Diagnosis Flow....................................................................................................940
Image failure....................................................................................................................................944
Image with Crepe Marks/Image with Scrawled Marks.......................................................................... 944
Image of separation failure in the Primary Fixing Assembly.................................................................. 947
Lines in the vertical direction.............................................................................................................. 948
Soiled image on the 1st side of 2-sided print....................................................................................... 948
Soiled trailing edge/soiled paper edge on both sides of 2-sided print.....................................................949
Soiling of spots at Secondary Transfer Outer Belt intervals.................................................................. 950
Soiling of spots at ITB intervals.......................................................................................................... 950
Bk soiling at the front edge on the back side........................................................................................951
Vertical white line on solid image of each color....................................................................................952
Vertical lines due to poor transfer at the ITB........................................................................................ 953
Pinhole soiling (ring mark)..................................................................................................................953
Soiled image due to paper dust.......................................................................................................... 954
Lined image at the trailing edge of the 2nd side of 2-sided print............................................................ 956
Lined image on the 1st side of 2-sided print........................................................................................ 957
Image failure due to poor gradation performance.................................................................................959
Soiled back (Slip-through of patch-like toner)...................................................................................... 961
Toner soiling at the edge of 13 x 19 size paper....................................................................................961
Actions to Be Taken When Hue Variation Occurs (imagePRESS Server B4100/B5100 Series).............. 968
Faulty Feeding.................................................................................................................................969
viii
Contents
Measure against 0110JAM (Secondary Transfer Outlet Sensor Delay Jam).......................................... 969
Measure against 0112JAM (Pre-fixing Feed Sensor 2 Delay Jam)........................................................969
Measure against 0300JAM (wrong detection of double feed) at feeding of Washi (JPN Paper)............... 969
Actions to Take When Paper Double Feed Occurs.............................................................................. 969
Controller Self Diagnosis.................................................................................................................984
Introduction.......................................................................................................................................984
Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 984
Basic Flowchart.................................................................................................................................986
Controller System Error Diagnosis......................................................................................................986
Debug log........................................................................................................................................ 991
Purpose............................................................................................................................................991
Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 991
Collecting System Information............................................................................................................ 994
When to Obtain Logs.........................................................................................................................998
Network Packet Capture.................................................................................................................. 1000
Version upgrade............................................................................................................................ 1007
Overview........................................................................................................................................ 1007
Version Upgrade via SST.................................................................................................................1010
Version Upgrade using USB flash drive Storage Device.....................................................................1029
Troubleshooting.............................................................................................................................. 1044
Version Upgrade via CDS................................................................................................................ 1045
7. Error/Jam/Alarm......................................................................................... 1080
Over View......................................................................................................................................1081
Location Code.................................................................................................................................1081
Pickup position code........................................................................................................................1081
Pickup size..................................................................................................................................... 1082
Points to Note When Clearing MN-CON............................................................................................1082
Points to Note When Clearing HDD.................................................................................................. 1082
Error Code.....................................................................................................................................1083
Error Code Details........................................................................................................................... 1083
Jam Code...................................................................................................................................... 1733
Jam Type........................................................................................................................................1733
Jam screen display specification.......................................................................................................1733
Host Machine (Main Station)............................................................................................................ 1734
Host Machine (Sub Station)..............................................................................................................1736
Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-K1................................................................................................. 1738
POD Deck-D1................................................................................................................................. 1740
Secondary POD Deck-D1................................................................................................................ 1742
POD Deck Lite-C1........................................................................................................................... 1745
Document Insertion Unit-N1............................................................................................................. 1745
Paper Folding Unit-J1...................................................................................................................... 1747
Perfect Binder-E1............................................................................................................................ 1748
High Capacity Stacker-H1 / Secondary High Capacity Stacker-H1...................................................... 1750
Multi Function Professional Puncher-A1............................................................................................1753
Finisher-AN1 / Saddle Finisher-AN2................................................................................................. 1755
BOOKLET TRIMMER-D1.................................................................................................................1757
BOOKLET TRIMMER-F1................................................................................................................. 1758
Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer-A1.........................................................................................................1759
Alarm Code................................................................................................................................... 1760
ix
Contents
Alarm Code Details..........................................................................................................................1760
8. Service Mode.............................................................................................. 1963

Overview....................................................................................................................................... 1964
Entering Service Mode.....................................................................................................................1964
Points to note when using Service Mode...........................................................................................1964
Service Mode Menu.........................................................................................................................1964
Service mode item explanations....................................................................................................... 1965
I/O information enhancement........................................................................................................... 1965
Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description................................................................................... 1967
COPIER > OPTION > BODY, Item Segmentation.............................................................................. 1968
Security features............................................................................................................................. 1969
Switching Screen (Level 1 < - > 2).................................................................................................... 1970
Language switch............................................................................................................................. 1971
Back-up of service mode..................................................................................................................1972
The data output of the service data print........................................................................................... 1973
Introduction of situation mode...........................................................................................................1974
COPIER (Service mode for printer)...............................................................................................1976
DISPLAY (State display mode).........................................................................................................1976
I/O (I/O display mode)......................................................................................................................2101
ADJUST (Adjustment mode)............................................................................................................ 2145
FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)........................................................................................ 2243
OPTION (Specification setting mode)................................................................................................2298
TEST (Print test mode).................................................................................................................... 2420
COUNTER (Counter mode)..............................................................................................................2429
FEEDER (ADF service mode).......................................................................................................2628
DISPLAY (State display mode).........................................................................................................2628
SORTER (Service mode for delivery options)...............................................................................2635
OPTION (Specification setting mode)................................................................................................2664
MISC (Individual setting mode).........................................................................................................2678
9. Installation.................................................................................................. 2685
How to Check this Installation Procedure......................................................................................2686
Description on the parts included in the package............................................................................... 2686
Symbols in the Illustration................................................................................................................ 2686
Checking before Installation.......................................................................................................... 2687
Selecting the Installation Site............................................................................................................2687
Checking the Installation Space........................................................................................................2687
Order of Installing the Host Machine and Options.............................................................................. 2688
Points to Note When Moving This Host Machine................................................................................2690
Explanation for Safety......................................................................................................................2690
Points to Note at Installation.............................................................................................................2691
Unpacking..................................................................................................................................... 2692
Checking the Contents.................................................................................................................. 2694
Installation Procedure....................................................................................................................2697
x
Contents
Preparing the Starter....................................................................................................................... 2697

Positioning and Securing the Main Station........................................................................................ 2697
Before Installing the Deck................................................................................................................ 2699
Before Installing the Feed Assembly................................................................................................. 2700
Installing the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt (Only When Secondary Transfer Outer Belt Is Included)...2702
Engaging the Primary Transfer Roller............................................................................................... 2710
Connecting the Main Station and the Sub Station.............................................................................. 2713
Connecting the Waste Toner Connecting Pipe...................................................................................2719
Connecting the Main Station and Sub Station with the Cable..............................................................2720
Connecting the Power Unit Station................................................................................................... 2722
Installing the Primary Fixing Assembly.............................................................................................. 2727
Installing the Secondary Fixing Assembly..........................................................................................2729
Installing the Duplex Feed Assembly................................................................................................ 2730
Installing the Waste Toner Receptacle.............................................................................................. 2732
Installing the Process Unit................................................................................................................2732
Installing the Image Reader Unit / Printer Cover................................................................................ 2738
Installing the Upright Control Panel...............................................................................................2739
Product Name................................................................................................................................. 2739
Checking before Installation............................................................................................................. 2739
Checking the Contents.....................................................................................................................2739
Installation Procedure...................................................................................................................... 2739
Installing Others............................................................................................................................ 2744
R-HDD Label...................................................................................................................................2744
Service Book Holder........................................................................................................................ 2745
Turning ON the Main Power Switch.............................................................................................. 2746
Registering the Speed License......................................................................................................... 2746
Checking the Settings of the Image Reader Unit/Printer Cover........................................................... 2748
Setting the Toner Container............................................................................................................. 2748
Supplying the Starter....................................................................................................................... 2749
Checking the Height of the Primary Charging Assembly.....................................................................2752
Executing Auto Adjust Gradation (Full Adjust)................................................................................... 2755
Registering Paper to Adjust..............................................................................................................2755
Executing Correct Shading...............................................................................................................2756
Auto Correct Color Tone Settings (Register Correction Pattern)..........................................................2757
Image Position Adjustment...............................................................................................................2758
Paper Settings................................................................................................................................ 2772
Affixing the Label.............................................................................................................................2773
Checking the Serial Number.............................................................................................................2777
Setting Method when the High Capacity Stacker-H1 Is Installed......................................................... 2777
Record of Complete of Instruct to User............................................................................................. 2778
Connecting to the Network............................................................................................................... 2778
When Relocating the Machine...................................................................................................... 2779
Works Before Relocation................................................................................................................. 2779
Works After Relocation.................................................................................................................... 2784
Tab Feeding Attachment-E1......................................................................................................... 2786
Reader Heater Unit....................................................................................................................... 2787
Checking the Contents (Reader Heater Unit-G1)............................................................................... 2787
Checking the Parts to be Installed (Europe, Australia only).................................................................2787
Check Items When Turning OFF the Main Power.............................................................................. 2787
xi
Contents
Installation Outline Drawing..............................................................................................................2787

Cassette Heater Unit-32................................................................................................................2792
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power............................................................................... 2792
Voice Guidance Kit-F2.................................................................................................................. 2801
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power............................................................................... 2801
Checking the Settings...................................................................................................................... 2807
Operation Check............................................................................................................................. 2807
HDD-related Option.......................................................................................................................2808
Combinations of HDD Options..........................................................................................................2808
Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit................................................. 2808
Setting Before Turning OFF the Power............................................................................................. 2809
Check Item When Turning OFF the Main Power................................................................................ 2809
Installing the System Using SST.......................................................................................................2818
The download of the Maintenance Assist Tool................................................................................... 2819
Checking the Security Version..........................................................................................................2820
Checking the Security Mark..............................................................................................................2820
Setting the Mirroring........................................................................................................................ 2820
Informing the System Administrator That Installation Is Complete....................................................... 2821
Executing Image Quality Adjustment.................................................................................................2821
Long Sheet Tray-C1...................................................................................................................... 2822
10. Operator Maintenance............................................................................. 2823

Overview of Operator Maintenance...............................................................................................2824
Operator Maintenance Parts............................................................................................................ 2824
Preparation for Introduction...........................................................................................................2825
Target Equipment............................................................................................................................2825
List of Parts Requiring Replacement/Cleaning................................................................................... 2825
Allocation of Work........................................................................................................................... 2829
Installation of Operator Maintenance Software...................................................................................2829
Initial Setting................................................................................................................................... 2834
Version Upgrade of Operator Maintenance Software......................................................................... 2842
Introduction Workflow....................................................................................................................2846
Overview........................................................................................................................................ 2846
Installation / Initial Settings...............................................................................................................2847
Replacement / Cleaning of Parts...................................................................................................... 2847
xii
Contents
Refurbishing the Fixing Assembly.....................................................................................................2848

Reconditioning of the Primary Charging Assembly and the Secondary Transfer Belt Unit..................... 2848
11. Maintenance Assist Tool......................................................................... 2849

Maintenance Assist Tool............................................................................................................... 2850
Introduction..................................................................................................................................... 2850
Overview........................................................................................................................................ 2851
Usage.............................................................................................................................................2852
Announcement................................................................................................................................ 2854
APPENDICES..................................................................................................2856
Service Tools ................................................................................................................................2857
Special Tools.................................................................................................................................. 2857
Solvents and Oils............................................................................................................................ 2859
General Timing Chart.................................................................................................................... 2861
Basic Sequence.............................................................................................................................. 2861
General Circuit Diagram................................................................................................................2864
General Circuit Diagram - Main Station - 1/5......................................................................................2864
General Circuit Diagram - Sub Station - 1/2.......................................................................................2869
General Circuit Diagram - Sub Station - 2/2.......................................................................................2870
General Circuit Diagram - Power Unit Station - 1/2............................................................................ 2871
General Circuit Diagram - Power Unit Station - 2/2............................................................................ 2872
Backup Data..................................................................................................................................2873
Detail of HDD partition ..................................................................................................................2883
Soft Counter List............................................................................................................................2884
Soft counter specifications............................................................................................................... 2884
Removal........................................................................................................................................ 2889
Overview........................................................................................................................................ 2889
Work Procedure.............................................................................................................................. 2889
xiii
Safety Precautions
Laser Safety.......................................... 2
Handling of Laser System..................... 2
Turn power switch ON...........................3
Safety of Toner......................................4
Notes When Handling a Lithium
Battery............................................... 4
Points to Note before Servicing............ 4
Points to Note at Cleaning.................... 5
Safety Precautions
Laser Safety
Since radiation emitted inside the machine is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam
cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation.
Therefore this machine is classified in Class 1 laser products that are regarded as safe during normal use according to
International Standard IEC60825-1.
Handling of Laser System

This machine is classified in Class 1 laser products.
However, inside the machine, Class 3B laser beam is emitted and is hazardous when entered into an eye.
When servicing the area around the laser assembly, be sure to turn off the main power.
If you must service while the power is turned on, be sure to keep the followings:
• Do not use a screwdriver or tools that have a high level of reflectance in the laser path.
• Remove watches and rings before starting the work. (They can reflect the laser beam, possibly hitting an eye.)
The machine's covers that confine laser beam radiation are identified by means of warning labels (Figure). If you must open the
cover, be sure not to enter the laser beam into an eye during the work.
The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950-1).
Diese Maschine ist der Klasse 1 der Laserprodukte zugeordnet.

Innerhalb der Maschine wird jedoch ein Laserstrahl der Klasse 3B ausgestrahlt und es ist gefährlich, wenn dieser Strahl in die
Augen gerät.
Bei Servicearbeiten am oder in der Nähe des Laserteils zuerst das Hauptgerät abschalten.
Bei Servicearbeiten, die unbedingt bei eingeschaltetem Gerät durchgeführt werden müssen, auf jeden Fall die folgenden
Vorsichtsmaßnahmen beachten.
• Keine stark reflektierenden Schraubenzieher oder ähnliche Werkzeuge direkt in den Lichtpfad des Laserstrahls bringen.
• Vor Beginn der Arbeit Uhren, Ringe und ähnliche Gegenstände abnehmen. (Reflektierende Laserstrahlen könnten sonst in
die Augen geraten.)
Die Geräte-Abdeckungen, die Laserstrahlen reflektieren können, werden durch besondere Warnaufkleber gekennzeichnet (siehe
Bild).
Muss die Abdeckung geöffnet werden, besondere Vorsicht walten lassen, damit der Laserstrahl nicht in die Augen gerät.
2
Safety Precautions
Turn power switch ON

The machine is equipped with 2 power switches: main power switch and control panel power switch.
The machine goes on when the main power switch is turned on (i.e., other than in low power mode, sleep mode).
CAUTION:
Do not turn off the main power switch while the progress bar is indicated, during which access is made to the HDD. If
deprived of power, the HDD can suffer a fault (E602).
3
Safety Precautions
Safety of Toner
About Toner
The machine's toner is a non-toxic material made of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dye.
CAUTION:
Do not throw toner into fire. It may cause explosion.
Toner on Clothing or Skin

• If your clothing or skin has come into contact with toner, wipe it off with tissue; then, wash it off with water.
• Do not use warm water, which will cause the toner to jell and fuse permanently with the fibers of the cloth.
• Tonner is easy to react with plastic material, avoid contact with plastic.
Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery
CAUTION:
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950-1).
CAUTION:
Wenn mit dem falschen Typ ausgewechselt, besteht Explosionsgefahr.
Gebrauchte Batterien gemäß der Anleitung beseitigen.
Points to Note before Servicing
CAUTION:
Disassembly/assembly work should be performed as follows.
1. Turn OFF the main power of the host machine.

2. Turn OFF the breakers (ELB1, ELB503 (USA Only)).
3. Disconnect the power plug from the outlet.
4. Pullout the lever [1] of the Breaker (ELB1) in the direction of the arrow and set the lock [2] to the breaker as needed.
4
Safety Precautions
USA Only
ELB503
ELB1
USA Only
[1] [2]
Points to Note at Cleaning
CAUTION:
When performing cleaning using organic solvent such as alcohol, be sure to check that the component of solvent is
vaporized completely before assembling.
5
1 Product Overview
Product lineups..................................... 7
Features.............................................. 14
Specifications...................................... 21
Name of Parts..................................... 33
1. Product Overview
Product lineups
Host machine
㼕㼙㼍㼓㼑㻼㻾㻱㻿㻿㻌㻯㻝㻜㻜㻜㻜㻌㼂㻼㻌㻛㻌㻯㻤㻜㻜㻜㻌㼂㻼
The underlined numerical value indicates the print speed (ppm: page per minute).
imagePRESS C10000VP imagePRESS C8000VP

Print speed 100 ppm 80 ppm
Positioning High-Production machine
Target machine: imagePRESS C7010/C6010 Series
*: The speed of the host machine is determined by the license option.
7
1. Product Overview
Pickup/Delivery System Options

■ Combination
The type of connectable pickup/delivery system options differs according to the model.
LONG SHEET TRAY-A1

POD Buffer Unit-A1
Upright Control
Panel-F1
POD Deck Lite-C1
POD Deck
Adjuster-A1
imagePRESS C10000VP
POD Deck-D1 Secondary POD Deck-D1
Multi Function
High Capacity Stacker-H1 Perfect Binder-E1 Professional Puncher-A1 Document Insertion
Unit-N1
Long Sheet Tray-C1
Two-Knife Booklet Finisher-AN1 Paper Folding

Trimmer-A1 Booklet Trimmer-D1 Saddle Finisher-AN2 Unit-J1
Booklet Trimmer-F1
8
1. Product Overview
■ Required Options/Conditions
Product name Required options, conditions, etc. Remarks
imagePRESS imagePRESS
C10000 C8000
Secondary POD Deck- • Pickup method: Air separation method Yes Yes
D1 • Pickup capacity: 1,000x2+2,000 sheets (80 g/m2)
• Paper type: Plain paper, coated paper
• Paper size: B5 (182 x 257 mm) to 13" x 19.2" (330.2 x 487.7 mm)
• Paper weight: 52 to 350 g/m2
• Double feed detection: Options
* It cannot be used in combination with LONG SHEET TRAY-A1.
POD Deck-D1 • Pickup method: Air separation method Yes Yes
• Pickup capacity: 1,000x2+2,000 sheets (80 g/m2)
• Paper type: Plain paper, coated paper
• Paper size: B5 (182 x 257 mm) to 13" x 19.2" (330.2 x 487.7 mm)
• Double feed detection: Options
* It cannot be used in combination with LONG SHEET TRAY-A1.
LONG SHEET TRAY- • Pickup method: Simple retard method Yes Yes
A1 • Pickup capacity: 1 sheet
• Paper type: Thin paper, plain paper, heavy paper, recycled paper, color
paper, transparency, film, label paper, coated paper, texture paper,
bond paper, letterhead, and vellum paper
• Paper size: Custom paper size 13" x 19.2" to 13" x 30"
* Cannot be used together with the POD Deck-D1
* Use the extension tray together with the pickup/delivery side.
POD Deck Lite-C1 • Pickup method: Retard + air assist method Yes Yes
• Pickup capacity: 4,000 sheets (64 g/m2) / 3,500 sheets (80 g/m2)
• Paper type: Plain paper and coated paper
• Paper size: Postcard (100 x 148 mm to 13" x 19.2" (330.2 x 487.7 mm))
* Cannot be used together with the POD Deck-D1
Upright Control Panel- Option for the host machine Yes Yes
F1
Control Panel Attach- Kit for installing the Upright Control Panel (hinge and base). Yes Yes
ment Kit-A1 Required when the Control Panel is selected.
Document Insertion • Pickup capacity: Max. 400 sheets (200 sheets each for the Upper Tray Yes Yes
Unit-N1 and the Lower Tray)
• Paper type: Plain paper, recycled paper, color paper, heavy paper,
coated paper, and thin paper
• Paper size: B5 to 13" x 19" (330.2 x 482.6 mm)
Inserter Option control- Required for installing the Inserter when the Finisher is connected Yes Yes
ler Kit-A1
Multi Function Profes- Staple Finisher/Booklet Finisher is required at the downstream side. Yes Yes
sional Puncher-A1 (Not use for (Not use for
CKBS, CHK, CKBS, CHK,
TW) TW)
Perfect Binder-E1 • Paper size: Cover: B4 to 330.2 x 487.7 mm Yes Yes
• Contents: B5 to 320.0 x 228.6 mm
• Paper weight: Cover: 90 to 350 g/m2
• Contents: 52 to 163 g/m2
• Stack thickness: 1 mm to 25 mm (excluding the cover)
• Trimming range: Top and bottom: 13 to 79 mm
• Fore edge: 6.5 to 49.5 mm
• Max. finishing size: 216 mm to 297 mm
• Min. finishing size: 138 mm to 203 mm
High Capacity Stacker- • Paper size: 140 x 178 mm to 330 x 488 mm Yes Yes
H1 • Stacking capacity: 3, 000 sheets x 2 trays
HC Stacker-F1 end- Option for High Capacity Stacker-H1 Yes Yes
module cover (Not use for (Not use for
TW) TW)
9
1. Product Overview

imagePRESS imagePRESS
C10000 C8000
Paper Folding Unit-J1 • Folding type: In-3-fold, out-3-fold, 4-fold, and Z-fold Yes Yes
• Paper size: In-3-fold, out-3-fold, and 4-fold: A4R, Z-fold: A4R, B4, and
A3
• Paper weight: In-3-fold, out-3-fold, and Z-fold: 52 to 105 g/m2, 4-fold:
52 to 90 g/m2
* Finisher-AN1/Saddle Finisher-AN2 is required on the downstream side.
Puncher Unit-BS1 • Option for Finisher-AM1 / Saddle Finisher-AM2 Yes Yes
• Inch, 2 holes / 3 holes (Use for USA, (Use for USA,
CAN, CLA, CA, CAN, CLA, CA,
CSPL, CIPL, CSPL, CIPL,
CKBS) CKBS)
Puncher Unit-BT1 • Option for Finisher-AM1 / Saddle Finisher-AM2 Yes Yes
• AB, 2 holes (Use for USA,
CLA, EUR,
FRA, UK, DL,
ITA, CA, CSPL,
CIPL, CKBS,
CHK, TW)
Puncher Unit-BU1 • Option for Finisher-AM1 / Saddle Finisher-AM2 Yes Yes
• SWE, 4 holes (Use for EUR, (Use for EUR,
FRA, UK, DL, FRA, UK, DL,
ITA, CA, CSPL, ITA, CA, CSPL,
and CIPL) and CIPL)
Finisher-AN1 • Paper size: 140 x 178 mm to 330 x 488 mm Yes Yes
• Stacking capacity: High capacity mode ON: 1,000 + 4,000 sheets
• High capacity mode OFF: 1,000 + 2,000 sheets
Saddle Finisher-AN2 • Paper size: 140 x 178 mm to 330 x 488 mm Yes Yes
• Stacking capacity: High capacity mode ON: 1,000 + 4,000 sheets
• High capacity mode OFF: 1,000 + 2,000 sheets
• Saddle stitch stacking capacity: Max. 30 copies
Long Sheet Tray-C1 Option for the long length paper pickup unit Yes Yes
(Use for USA, (Use for USA,
CAN, CLA, CAN, CLA,
EUR, FRA, UK, EUR, FRA, UK,
DL, ITA) DL, ITA)
Booklet Trimmer-D1/F1 • Maximum number of sheets for trimming: 50 sheets (80 g/m2) Yes Yes
• Delivery Tray capacity: 30 booklets (Booklet size: A4, 40 sheets, 80 g/
m2)
* Saddle Finisher-AN2 is required.
Two-Knife Booklet Trim- • Maximum number of sheets for trimming: 50 sheets (80 g/m2) Yes Yes
mer-A1 • Delivery Tray capacity: 30 booklets (Booklet size: A4, 40 sheets, 80 g/
m2)
* Saddle Finisher-AN2 and Booklet Trimmer-D1 are required.
POD Buffer Unit-A1 Required when installing the External Pickup Unit. Yes Yes
POD Deck Adjuster-A1 Required when installing the External Pickup Unit. Yes Yes
10
1. Product Overview
Scanning System Options

Duplex Color
Image Reader
Unit-K1 Printer Cover-K1
ADF Access
Handle-A1
Reader Heater
Unit-G1
Use for
USA,CLA,CA,CSPL
,CIPL,CKBS,CHK

Duplex Color Image • Simultaneous duplex reading
Reader Unit-K1 B/W (1-sided/2-sided) : 600 dpi=120/120 ipm, 300 dpi : 120/200 ipm
Color (1-sided/2-sided) : 600 dpi=70/70 ipm, 300 dpi : 120/140 ipm
• Paper weight:
<1-sided> AB configuration: 38 to 220 g/m2 inch configuration: 50 to 22 0 g/m2
<2-sided> 50 to 220 g/m2 Color original or color-mixed original: 64 to 220 g/m2
• Stacking capacity: Max. 300 sheets
*: Reader Attachment-B1 is required.
Reader Attachment-B1 Option for Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-K1
ADF Access Handle-A1 This handle is used to support opening and closing of the DADF.
Reader Heater Unit-G1 JP, EUR, ASIA, AUS, KOREA, and CHINA: Option Use for
• 230 V region: Service parts USA,CLA,CA ,CSPL,C
• 208 V region: Service parts IPL,CKBS,CHK
11
1. Product Overview

Printer Cover-K1 Required separately when used as a standalone printer
Function expansion system options

■ Required Options/Conditions
HDD Data Encryption

& Mirroring Kit-E1
Voice Guidance Kit-F2
3.5inch/256GB
HDD-Q1
Removable
HDD Kit-AM1
Removable
HDD Kit-B1
imagePRESS Removable
Server HDD Kit-B2
B5000/B5100
imagePRESS
CR Server
A8000
imagePRESS
Server
B4000/B4100
PRISMAsync
Operating
PRISMAsync for Panel
imagePRESS C10000VP-A1/A2
12
1. Product Overview
● Hardware Products
imagePRESS Server B5000/ Selectable Control Panel: Upright Control Panel-F1.
B5100
imagePRESS Server B4000/ Selectable Control Panel: Upright Control Panel-F1.
B4100
Removable HDD Kit-B2 No compulsory options and particular conditions.
Removable HDD Kit-B3 No compulsory options and particular conditions.
HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring When executing the mirroring function, 3.5inch/256GB HDD-Q1 is required.
Kit-E1
3.5inch/256GB HDD-Q1 It is required when using the mirroring function with HDD Data Encryption
& Mirroring Kit-E1.
Removable HDD Kit-AM1 No compulsory options and particular conditions.
Voice Guidance Kit-F2 No compulsory options and particular conditions. Not use for
CKBS,CCN
PRISMAsync for imagePRESS Selectable Control Panel: PRISMAsync Operating Panel.
C10000VP-A1/A2
PRISMAsync Operating Panel Selectable server: PRISMAsync for imagePRESS C10000VP-A1/A2.
imagePRESS CR Server A8000 A server, a monitor, a keyboard and a mouse are included in this product.
● License Products
At the time of installation, obtain the license number according to the license certificate included. Then, enter the obtained license
number from the Control Panel of the machine.
The applicable functions are enabled.
There is no physical installation work at the time of installation.

Graphic Arts Package Premium Web Ac- No compulsory options and particular conditions
tivate
GUI KIT-A1 No compulsory options and particular conditions Not use for CKBS, CCN
Fiery Compose No compulsory options and particular conditions
Fiery Impose No compulsory options and particular conditions
Fiery Impose and Compose No compulsory options and particular conditions
Color Universal Send Kit-AB1 No compulsory options and particular conditions Not use for FRA, UK, DL, ITA
Universal Send Advanced Feature Set- No compulsory options and particular conditions Use for USA, CAN, CLA
G1
Universal Send Advanced Feature Set- No compulsory options and particular conditions Use for EUR, CA, CSPL, CIPL, CKBS, CHK,
H1 TW, CCN
Universal Send Security Feature Set-D1 No compulsory options and particular conditions Not use for CA
Universal Send Digital User Signature No compulsory options and particular conditions
Kit-C1
Web Access Software-H1 No compulsory options and particular conditions Not use for CKBS
imagePRESS C10000 License No compulsory options and particular conditions Not use for CHK, TW, CCN
imagePRESS C8000 LICENSE No compulsory options and particular conditions Not use for CHK, TW, CCN
13
1. Product Overview
Features
Product Features
High Primary High High

reliability Charging image quality image quality
Assembly
High High
Developing productivity productivity
High Assembly
image quality Laser
Scanner Unit Toner
High High
productivity reliability High
image quality
Fixing Y M C Bk
Assembly
Patch Sensor
Y M C Bk
Y M C Bk
High Secondary High

Color Sensor image quality Transfer reliability
Outer Unit
Laser Scanner Unit

Adoption of a Laser Scanner Unit supporting 2400dpi
Adoption of multiple laser exposure
Adoption of VCSEL laser
Developing Assembly
Adoption of cylinders with groove
Primary Charging Assembly

Adoption of a shutter mechanism in the Primary Charging Assembly
ITB Patch Sensor

An ITB Patch Sensor has been newly added.
Color Sensor
A High-precision Color Sensor has been adopted.
Fixing Assembly
Adoption of air separation function (Primary Fixing Assembly)
Adoption of External Heat Belt (Primary/Secondary Fixing Assembly)
Addition of air cleaning of Refresh Roller (Primary/Secondary Fixing Assembly)
Addition of spiral projection to Web Roller (Primary/Secondary Fixing Assembly)
Addition of shifting function of Fixing Separation Claw (Secondary Fixing Assembly)
Addition of a Refresh Roller (on the Pressure Roller side of the Secondary Fixing Assembly)
14
1. Product Overview
Toner
Adoption of CV toner (Consistently Vivid toner: Toner that is consistently vivid)
Adoption of Secondary Transfer Outer Belt

Adoption of Secondary Transfer Outer Belt
Features at servicing
■ Introducing the Maintenance Assist Tool
Maintenance assist tool is a support tool developed to reduce the work time of service technicians.
Use of this tool enables the service technicians to work efficiently according to the use cases.
As a result, it can contribute to the reduction of work time as well as improvement of workability of the service technicians.
Canon Maintenance Assist Tools Version 1.0.0
Diagnosis EP Process
Troubleshooting Error Code Log Jam Code Log
Information Monitor
Adjustment Major
Installation Task
Information Adjustments
Parts Parts
Parts Catalog
Information Replacement
Inspection Preventive
Test Print
Information Maintenance
Support Service General

Information Manual Circuit Diagram
Search
ALL Right Reserved Canon Inc., 2015
<Main Features>
1. Provides step-by-step support for the works according to the use cases
Service mode can be executed directly from the content of the main menu.
2. Directly linked to service mode
3. Enables to browse various contents.
(Service Manuals of the machines and options, Parts Catalogs, FAQs)
15
1. Product Overview
■ Improved Parts Lives

Improvement was made to this machine in a way such that its major parts would have longer life than those of the existing models.
This has reduced service visits of the service technicians.
Current model This machine
Primary Charging
Assembly
Developing Assembly
Secondary
Transfer Outer
Belt
0 30 100 150 200 300
Life (unit: 10,000 sheets)
■ Introduction of Operator Maintenance

This machine adopts operator maintenance, in which some of the maintenance works such as periodical replacement of parts
and cleaning that have been conventionally performed by technicians are performed by operators at user sites.
This enables to reduce service visits of the service technicians.
Furthermore, in order to have many users utilize this maintenance, improvement has been made to this machine in a way such
that part of the operator replaceable parts can be easily replaced.
No screws needed for Fixing Web
16
1. Product Overview
No screws needed for Primary Charging Assembly
A handle dedicated to Fixing Assembly
■ Reducing the Load in Cleaning the Inside of the Machine Due to Toner
Scattering
With the existing models, a load was put on the service technicians due to the soiling inside the machine caused by toner
scattering.
With this machine, the load in cleaning the inside of the machine has been reduced by implementing the following three
improvements:
17
1. Product Overview
1. Addition of Toner Holder on the rear side of the Waste Toner Case
Current Machine < iPR C7010VP Series > This Machine < iPR C10000VP Series >
Waste Toner Container
Toner Holder
Waste Toner Waste Toner
18
1. Product Overview
2. Addition of toner collection mechanism to the Drum Unit Support Shaft
Developing Assembly Drum Drum Cleaning Unit
ITB Drum Unit Support Shaft
Current Machine < iPR C7010VP Series > This Machine < iPR C10000VP Series >
Drum Unit Support Shaft Drum Unit Support Shaft
Developing Assembly
Lower Plate
Drum Unit Support Shaft Drum Unit Support Shaft
Drum Drum
Toner ITB Sponge Toner ITB
19
1. Product Overview
3. Addition of toner cleaning function to the Process Unit (Toner Tray + Toner Cleaning Tool)
Toner Ejection Lever

Screw
Driver
Toner Cleaning Tool
Toner
Toner Tray
Process Unit
20
1. Product Overview
Specifications
Product Specifications
Item Specifications
Machine installation method Console type
Photosensitive medium 84-mm diameter OPC Drum
Exposure method Laser exposure method
Charging method Corona charging method
Developing method Dry, 2-component development method
Transfer method Intermediate Belt transfer method
(Primary transfer, secondary transfer: Transfer Belt method)
Separation method Air separation method (Primary fixing), Upper Separation Guide (Secondary fixing)
Pickup method (Deck) Air separation method
Drum cleaning method Cleaning Blade + Fur Brush Roller
ITB cleaning method Static cleaning method
Fixing method Roller fixing method
Toner type Non-magnetic negative toner
Toner supplying method Set-on
Toner level detection function Yes
Leading edge image margin 2.5 mm +/- 0.5 mm
Left/right image margin 2.5 mm +/- 0.5 mm
Warm-up time
• High speed startup OFF (Until 7 min or less
copy operation is ready)
• At recovery from sleep mode 7 min or less
First copy time (full color) 25 sec. (at pickup from the Right Deck, use of plain A4/LTR paper, and straight delivery)
Image gradations 256 gradations
Print resolution Max. 2400 dpi x 2400 dpi
Maximum image guaranteed area 320.6 x 482.7 mm (When using Long MP Tray-A1: 320.6 x 757 mm)
Maximum printable area 323 x 482.7 mm (When using Long MP Tray-A1: 323 x 757 mm)
Paper type (Pickup from deck) Thin paper, recycled paper, plain paper, heavy paper, color paper, vellum paper, bond paper,
texture paper, coated paper, pre-punched paper, label paper, tracing paper, and film
Paper weight
• Pickup from deck 60 to 350 g/m2 (Coated paper: 70 to 350 g/m2)
• Auto 2-sided mode 60 to 350 g/m2 (Coated paper: 70 to 350 g/m2)
Paper size (Pickup from deck) A3, B4, A4R, LDR, LGL, LTRR, A4, B5, LTR, Executive, B5R, 12 x 18, 13 x 19, SRA3, Exec-
utiveR, 4 on 1 postcard
Pickup capacity
• 1k Receptacle 1,000 sheets
• 2k Receptacle 2,000 sheets
• POD Deck Lite 2 3,500 sheets
Duplex method Through path
Memory capacity For Main Controller 1: 1.5 GB
For Main Controller 2: 2 GB
HDD capacity 1 TB
Environment temperature range See Chapter 9, "Checking the Installation Environment."
Environment humidity range See Chapter 9, "Checking the Installation Environment."
Operation noise 84 dB or less
Rated power supply Reference:“Power Supply Specifications” on page 22
Maximum power consumption
• At Printing 10000 W or less (USA), 13000 W or less (Other)
• While in sleep mode 4998 kWh (USA), 4871 kWh (Other)
Dimension 2586 (width) x 1152 (depth) x 1456 (height) mm
21
1. Product Overview
Item Specifications
Weight Approx. 1215 kg (Main Station + Sub Station + Power Unit Station + Upright Control Panel-F1)
Power Supply Specifications

Product name Power supply Japan North America EUR
source V (V) I (A) V (V) I (A) V (V) I (A)
(number of cables)
imagePRESS C10000VP/C8000VP Power outlet (1 or 2) 200 60 208 3 in di- 380 - 415 32
(Main Station) ameter:
30
1 in di-
ameter:
20
1 2 1
POD Deck Lite-C1 Power outlet (1) 100 2.4 120 - 127 2.2 220 - 240 1.2
POD Deck-D1 Power outlet (1) 200 - 208 5.0 200 - 208 5.0 220 - 240 5.0
Secondary POD Deck-D1 Power outlet (1) 200 - 208 5.0 200 - 208 5.0 220 - 240 5.0
Multi Function Professional Puncher-A1 Power outlet (1) - - 115 3.8 230 2.0
Perfect Binder-E1 Power outlet (1) 200 3.0 208 3.0 220 - 240 3.0
Finisher-AN1 Power outlet (1) 100 10.0 120 - 240 8.0 120 - 240 8.0
Saddle Finisher-AN2 Power outlet (1) 100 10.0 120 - 240 8.0 120 - 240 8.0
High Capacity Stacker-H1 Power outlet (1) 100 - 240 2.5 100 - 240 2.5 100 - 240 2.5
Document Insertion Unit-N1 Power outlet (1) 100 - 240 1.0 100 - 240 1.0 100 - 240 1.0
Paper Folding Unit-J1 Finisher - - - - - -
Trimmer-D1/F1 Finisher - - - - - -
Top/Bottom Edge Trimmer-A1 Power outlet (1) 100 4.5 120 - 127 4.0 220 - 240 2.3
Weight and Size

Product name Width (mm) Depth (mm) Height (mm) Weight Ap-
prox. (kg)
imagePRESS C10000VP/C8000VP 2586 1152 1456*1 1200
(Main Station + Sub Station + Power Unit Station)
Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-K1 590 635 263 7.5
(Including Reader Attachment-B1)
POD Deck Lite-C1 633 686 574 68
POD Deck-D1 982 792 1095 250
POD Deck-D1 1793 792 1095 480
(When the Secondary POD Deck-D1 is connected)
Multi Function Professional Puncher-A1 795 445 1040 102
Perfect Binder-E1 922 791 1300 308
Finisher-AN1 800 792 1239 132
(Including
Punch)
Saddle Finisher-AN2 800 792 1239 184
(Including
Punch)
Puncher Unit-BT1 Built in the Finisher 3
Puncher Unit-BS1 (US) Inside the finisher 3
Puncher Unit-BU1 (EUR) Inside the finisher 3
High Capacity Stacker-H1 899 745 (1250*2) 1141 120
High Capacity Stacker-H1 1803 745 (1250*2) 1141 240
(Secondary)
Document Insertion Unit-N1 746 793 1407 61
(Including Inserter Option controller Kit-A1)
22
1. Product Overview
Product name Width (mm) Depth (mm) Height (mm) Weight Ap-
prox. (kg)
Paper Folding Unit-J1 336 793 1190 71
Trimmer-D1 1575 770 1040 152
(Including Con-
veyor Assem-
bly and Output
Tray)
Trimmer-F1 2095 779 1040 178
Top/Bottom Edge Trimmer-A1 536 770 1040 145
(Excluding the
conveyer and
Output Tray)
*1: When the Control Panel is installed

*2: When outputting to the Output Tray
Productivity (Print Speed)

■ imagePRESS C10000VP
Paper Productivity (sheets/min)
Size Paper Paper Paper weight Color B/W
width length (g/m2) 1-sided 1-sided 2-sided 1-sided 1-sided 2-sided
(mm) (mm) Straight Reversing Straight Reversing
Delivery Delivery
B5 257.0 182.0 60 to 105 113.8 101.3 102.9 106.0 94.7 96.1
106 to 170 105.4 98.4
171 to 220 88.3 88.3 88.3 82.9 82.9 82.9
221 to 350
EXEC 266.7 184.2 60 to 105 112.7 101.3 102.9 104.9 94.6 96.1
106 to 170 104.3 97.3
171 to 220 87.3 87.3 87.3 82.0 82.0 82.0
221 to 350
K16 270.0 195.0 60 to 105 108.1 100.1 102.2 100.7 93.4 95.3
106 to 170 98.5 98.5 98.5 92.0 92.0 92.0
171 to 220 82.4 82.4 82.4 77.4 77.4 77.4
221 to 350
A4 297.0 210.0 60 to 105 102.0 100.0 102.0 95.0 93.2 95.0
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to 350
LTR 279.4 215.9 60 to 105 100.0 100.0 100.0 93.1 93.1 93.1
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to 350
B5R 182.0 257.0 60 to 105 87.0 87.7 73.6 81.0 81.6 69.0
106 to 170 65.8 65.8 65.8 62.0 62.0 62.0
171 to 220 49.5 49.5 49.5 47.4 47.4 47.4
221 to 350
EXEC-R 184.2 266.7 60 to 105 84.5 84.5 73.5 78.7 78.7 68.8
106 to 170 63.4 63.4 63.4 59.8 59.8 59.8
171 to 220 47.7 47.7 47.7 45.7 45.7 45.7
221 to 350
LTRR 215.9 279.4 60 to 105 81.4 81.4 73.4 75.8 75.8 68.6
106 to 170 60.6 60.6 60.6 57.2 57.2 57.2
23
1. Product Overview

Delivery Delivery
LTRR 215.9 279.4 171 to 220 45.5 45.5 45.5 43.7 43.7 43.7
221 to 350
A4R 210.0 297.0 60 to 105 77.4 77.4 73.2 72.1 72.1 68.3
106 to 170 57.0 57.0 57.0 53.8 53.8 53.8
171 to 220 42.8 42.8 42.8 41.2 41.2 41.2
221 to 350
LGL 215.9 355.6 60 to 105 66.5 66.5 60.1 61.9 61.9 56.2
106 to 170 47.6 47.6 47.6 45.2 45.2 45.2
171 to 220 35.7 35.7 35.7 34.6 34.6 34.6
221 to 350
B4 257.0 364.0 60 to 105 59.2 59.2 59.2 55.4 55.4 55.4
106 to 170 52.7 52.7 52.7 49.6 49.6 49.6
171 to 220 44.1 44.1 44.1 42.0 42.0 42.0
221 to 350
K8 270.0 390.0 60 to 105 55.2 55.2 55.2 51.7 51.7 51.7
106 to 170 49.2 49.2 49.2 46.4 46.4 46.4
171 to 220 41.2 41.2 41.2 39.3 39.3 39.3
221 to 350
A3 297.0 420.0 60 to 105 57.5 57.5 57.5 53.5 53.5 53.5
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to 350 51.4 51.4 51.4 48.2 48.2 48.2
11 x 17 279.4 431.8 60 to 105 56.2 56.2 56.2 52.3 52.3 52.3
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to 350 50.0 50.0 50.0 46.9 46.9 46.9
SRA3 320.0 450.0 60 to 105 54.2 54.2 54.2 50.5 50.5 50.5
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to 350 47.8 47.8 47.8 44.8 44.8 44.8
12 x 18 304.8 457.2 60 to 105 53.5 53.5 53.5 49.8 49.8 49.8
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to 350 47.2 47.2 47.2 44.3 44.3 44.3
13 x 18.5 330.2 469.9 60 to 105 52.2 51.9 52.2 48.6 48.3 48.6
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to 350 45.9 45.9 45.9 43.1 43.1 43.1
13 x 19 330.2 482.6 60 to 105 51.0 49.7 51.0 47.5 46.3 47.5
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to 350 44.7 44.7 44.7 42.0 42.0 42.0
13 x 19.2 330.2 487.7 60 to 105 50.5 48.8 50.5 47.0 45.5 47.0
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to 350 44.2 44.2 44.2 41.5 41.5 41.5
A4-Tab 297.0 222.7 60 to 105 97.5 97.5 97.5 90.8 90.8 90.8
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to 350 96.9 96.9 96.9 90.2 90.2 90.2
24
1. Product Overview

Delivery Delivery
LTR-Tab 279.4 228.6 60 to 105 95.5 87.7 73.6 88.9 81.9 69.2
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to 350 94.3 87.8
■ imagePRESS C8000VP
Delivery Delivery
B5 257.0 182.0 60 to 105 90.9 90.9 90.9 85.9 85.9 85.9
106 to 170 84.3 84.3 84.3 79.8 79.8 79.8
171 to 220 70.6 70.6 70.6 67.2 67.2 67.2
221 to 350
EXEC 266.7 184.2 60 to 105 90.1 90.1 90.1 85.1 85.1 85.1
106 to 170 83.4 83.4 83.4 79.0 79.0 79.0
171 to 220 69.8 69.8 69.8 66.4 66.4 66.4
221 to 350
K16 270.0 195.0 60 to 105 86.0 86.0 86.0 81.3 81.3 81.3
106 to 170 78.7 78.7 78.7 74.5 74.5 74.5
171 to 220 65.9 65.9 65.9 62.7 62.7 62.7
221 to 350
A4 297.0 210.0 60 to 105 81.0 81.0 81.0 76.5 76.5 76.5
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to 350
LTR 279.4 215.9 60 to 105 80.0 80.0 80.0 75.6 75.6 75.6
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to 350
B5R 182.0 257.0 60 to 105 68.4 68.4 54.2 64.6 64.6 51.6
106 to 170 52.7 52.7 52.7 50.2 50.2 50.2
171 to 220 39.6 39.6 39.6 38.2 38.2 38.2
221 to 350
EXEC-R 184.2 266.7 60 to 105 66.3 66.3 54.2 62.6 62.6 51.6
106 to 170 50.8 50.8 50.8 48.5 48.5 48.5
171 to 220 38.1 38.1 38.1 36.8 36.8 36.8
221 to 350
LTRR 215.9 279.4 60 to 105 63.7 63.7 54.1 60.2 60.2 51.4
106 to 170 48.4 48.4 48.4 46.2 46.2 46.2
171 to 220 36.4 36.4 36.4 35.2 35.2 35.2
221 to 350
A4R 210.0 297.0 60 to 105 60.5 60.5 54.1 57.2 57.2 51.3
106 to 170 45.5 45.5 45.5 43.5 43.5 43.5
171 to 220 34.3 34.3 34.3 33.3 33.3 33.3
221 to 350
LGL 215.9 355.6 60 to 105 51.6 51.6 51.0 48.7 48.7 48.2
106 to 170 38.0 38.0 38.0 36.4 36.4 36.4
25
1. Product Overview

Delivery Delivery
LGL 215.9 355.6 171 to 220 28.6 28.6 28.6 27.9 27.9 27.9
221 to 350
B4 257.0 364.0 60 to 105 47.3 47.3 47.3 44.8 44.8 44.8
106 to 170 42.1 42.1 42.1 40.1 40.1 40.1
171 to 220 35.3 35.3 35.3 33.9 33.9 33.9
221 to 350
K8 270.0 390.0 60 to 105 44.2 44.2 44.2 41.9 41.9 41.9
106 to 170 39.3 39.3 39.3 37.5 37.5 37.5
171 to 220 32.9 32.9 32.9 31.7 31.7 31.7
221 to 350
A3 297.0 420.0 60 to 105 44.2 44.2 44.2 41.8 41.8 41.8
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to 350 41.0 41.0 41.0 38.9 38.9 38.9
11 x 17 279.4 431.8 60 to 105 43.1 43.1 43.1 40.7 40.7 40.7
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to 350 40.0 40.0 40.0 37.9 37.9 37.9
SRA3 320.0 450.0 60 to 105 41.5 41.5 41.5 39.2 39.2 39.2
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to 350 38.2 38.2 38.2 36.2 36.2 36.2
12 x 18 304.8 457.2 60 to 105 40.9 40.9 40.9 38.6 38.6 38.6
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to 350 37.6 37.6 37.6 35.7 35.7 35.7
13 x 18.5 330.2 469.9 60 to 105 39.0 39.0 39.0 36.9 36.9 36.9
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to 350 36.6 36.6 36.6 34.7 34.7 34.7
13 x 19 330.2 482.6 60 to 105 38.9 38.9 38.9 36.8 36.8 36.8
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to 350 35.6 35.6 35.6 33.8 33.8 33.8
13 x 19.2 330.2 487.7 60 to 105 38.6 38.6 38.6 36.5 36.5 36.5
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to 350 35.3 35.3 35.3 33.5 33.5 33.5
A4-Tab 297.0 222.7 60 to 105 76.4 76.4 76.4 72.2 72.2 72.2
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to 350
LTR-Tab 279.4 228.6 60 to 105 74.7 74.7 54.2 70.6 70.6 51.8
106 to 170
171 to 220
221 to 350
26
1. Product Overview
Paper type
Following shows the types of usable papers.
See the table below for the custom paper size.
Type Feeding direction (mm) Width direction (mm)

Custom paper size 1-1 364 to 487.7 304.9 to 330.2
Custom paper size 1-2 297.1 to 363.9
Custom paper size 1-4 182.0 to 279.3 320.1 to 330.2
Custom paper size 1-5 228.7 to 279.3 304.9 to 320
Custom paper size 2-1 457.3 to 487.7 257 to 304.8
Custom paper size 2-2 364 to 432.0 257 to 297.0
Custom paper size 7 (long length) 487.8 to 630.0 139.7 to 330.2
Custom paper size 8 (long length) 630.1 to 660.0
Custom paper size 9 (long length) 660.1 to 762.0
Custom paper size 10-3 364 to 432.0 297.0 to 304.8
CAUTION:
Paper of the custom paper size 7 to 9 (long length paper) can be used with the External Pickup Unit.However, the minimum
size (width) is 279 mm.Therefore, do not use paper whose width is smaller than this size with the External Pickup Unit.
■ Pickup List_1
Paper Type (g/m2)
• Thin 1 (64 to 79), Thin 2 (60 to 63)
• Plain (80 to 105)
• Recycled 1 (64 to 79), Recycled 2 (80 to 105), Recycled 3 (210 to 256)
• Color (64 to 79), Heavy 1 (106 to 128), Heavy 2 (129 to 150), Heavy 3 (151 to 180), Heavy 4 (181 to 209), Heavy 5 (210 to
256), Heavy 6 (257 to 300)
27
1. Product Overview
• 1-Sided Coated Thin (70 to 79), 1-Sided Coated 1 (80 to 105), 1-Sided Coated 2 (106 to 128), 1-Sided Coated 3 (129 to
150), 1-Sided Coated 4 (151 to 180), 1-Sided Coated 5 (181 to 209), 1-Sided Coated 6 (210 to 256), 1-Sided Coated 7 (257
to 300)
• 2-Sided Coated Thin (70 to 79), 2-Sided Coated 1 (80 to 105), 2-Sided Coated 2 (106 to 128), 2-Sided Coated 3 (129 to
150), 2-Sided Coated 4 (151 to 180), 2-Sided Coated 5 (181 to 209), 2-Sided Coated 6 (210 to 256), 2-Sided Coated 7 (257
to 300)
• Matte Coated Thin (70 to 79), Matte Coated 1 (80 to 105), Matte Coated 2 (106 to 128), Matte Coated 3 (129 to 150), Matte
Coated 4 (151 to 180), Matte Coated 5 (181 to 209), Matte Coated 6 (210 to 256), Matte Coated 7 (257 to 300)
• Textured 1 (80 to 105), Textured 2 (106 to 128), Textured 3 (129 to 150), Textured 4 (151 to 180), Textured 5 (181 to 209),
Textured 6 (210 to 256), Textured 7 (257 to 300)
• Vellum 1 (80 to 105), Vellum 2 (106 to 128)
• Pre-Punched 1 (64 to 79), Pre-Punched 2 (80 to 105)
• Bond (80 to 105)
Paper Type Pickup position

LONG SHEET Paper Deck of the POD Deck-D1/ POD Deck Lite-C1 Document Inser-
TRAY-A1 Main Unit Secondary POD tion Unit-N1
Deck-D1
A3 No Yes Yes Yes Yes
B4 No Yes Yes Yes Yes
A4R No Yes Yes Yes Yes
B5R No Yes Yes Yes Yes
B5 No Yes Yes Yes Yes
A5R No No No Yes No
11x17 No Yes Yes Yes Yes
LGL No Yes Yes Yes Yes
LTR No Yes Yes Yes Yes
LTRR No Yes Yes Yes Yes
STMTR No No No Yes No
SRA3 No Yes Yes Yes Yes
EXEC No Yes Yes Yes Yes
EXEC-R No Yes Yes Yes Yes
OFFICIO No Yes Yes Yes Yes
E-OFFICIO No Yes Yes Yes Yes
B-OFFICIO No Yes Yes Yes Yes
M-OFFICIO No Yes Yes Yes Yes
A-OFFICIO No Yes Yes Yes Yes
A-LTR No Yes Yes Yes Yes
A-LTRR No Yes Yes Yes Yes
GLTR-R No Yes Yes Yes Yes
GLTR No Yes Yes Yes Yes
GLGL No Yes Yes Yes Yes
AFLS No Yes Yes Yes Yes
FLS No Yes Yes Yes Yes
K8 No Yes Yes Yes Yes
K16 No Yes Yes Yes Yes
K16R No Yes Yes Yes No
F4A No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Irregular size A* No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Irregular size B* No No No Yes No
Irregular size C* Yes No No No No
28
1. Product Overview
Irregular size A: Irregular size 1-1, Irregular size 1-2, Irregular size 1-3, Irregular size 1-4, Irregular size 1-5, Irregular size 1-6,
Irregular size 2-1, Irregular size 2-2, Irregular size 2-3, Irregular size 2-4, Irregular size 2-5, Irregular size 2-6, Irregular size 3-1,
Irregular size 5-1, Irregular size 5-2, Irregular size 5-3, Irregular size 5-4, Irregular size 10-1, Irregular size 10-2, Irregular size
10-3, Irregular size 10-4, Irregular size 10-5, Irregular size 10-6
Irregular size B: Irregular size 6-1, Irregular size 6-2
Irregular size C: Irregular size 7 (LONG SHEET), Irregular size 8 (LONG SHEET), Irregular size 9 (LONG SHEET)
■ Pickup List_2
Paper Type (g/m2)
• Heavy 7 (301 to 325), Heavy 8 (326 to 350)
• 1-Sided Coated 8 (301 to 325), 1-Sided Coated 9 (326 to 350)
• 2-Sided Coated 8 (301 to 325), 2-Sided Coated 9 (326 to 350)
• Matte Coated 8 (301 to 325), Matte Coated 9 (326 to 350)

Deck-D1
A3 No Yes Yes Yes No
B4 No Yes Yes Yes No
A4R No Yes Yes Yes No
B5R No Yes Yes Yes No
A5R No No No Yes No
11x17 No Yes Yes Yes No
LGL No Yes Yes Yes No
LTR No Yes Yes Yes No
LTRR No Yes Yes Yes No
SRA3 No Yes Yes Yes No
EXEC No Yes Yes Yes No
EXEC-R No Yes Yes Yes No
OFFICIO No Yes Yes Yes No
E-OFFICIO No Yes Yes Yes No
B-OFFICIO No Yes Yes Yes No
M-OFFICIO No Yes Yes Yes No
A-OFFICIO No Yes Yes Yes No
A-LTR No Yes Yes Yes No
A-LTRR No Yes Yes Yes No
GLTR-R No Yes Yes Yes No
GLTR No Yes Yes Yes No
GLGL No Yes Yes Yes No
AFLS No Yes Yes Yes No
FLS No Yes Yes Yes No
K8 No Yes Yes Yes No
F4A No Yes Yes Yes No
Irregular size A* No Yes Yes Yes No
29
1. Product Overview
*
■ Pickup List_3
Paper Type (g/m2)
• Clear Film (151 to 180)
• Translucent Film (151 to 180)

Deck-D1
A5R No No No Yes No
30
1. Product Overview
■ Pickup List_4
Paper Type (g/m2)
• Labels (151 to 180)

Deck-D1
A5R No No No Yes No
*
31
1. Product Overview
CAUTION:
Paper of the custom paper size C (long length paper) can be used with the External Pickup Unit.However, the minimum
size (width) is 279 mm.Therefore, do not use paper whose width is smaller than this size with the External Pickup Unit.
■ Pickup List_Other
Paper Type (g/m2)
• Transparency (151 to 180)

Deck-D1
Paper Type (g/m2)

• Tab 1 (151 to 180), Tab 2 (181 to 209)

Deck-D1
LTR No Yes Yes Yes Yes
32
1. Product Overview
Name of Parts
External View
■ External Cover
● Front side of the machine
[5]
[4]
[3]
[6]
[25]
[2]
[24] [1] [7]
[23]
[22]
[21]
[8]
[20]
[19]
[18]
[9]
[10]
[17]
[11]
[12]
[16] [13]
[14]
[15]
No. Name No. Name

[1] Controller Left Cover [14] Waste Toner Receptacle
[2] Controller Upper Front Cover [15] Sub Station Front Left Cover
[3] Main Station Upper Front Cover [16] Sub Station Left Lower Cover
[4] Toner Supply Left Cover [17] Sub Station Left Upper Cover
[5] Toner Supply Upper Cover [18] Sub Station Upper Front Cover
[6] Toner Replacement Outer Cover [19] Sub Station Upper Left Cover
[7] Main Station Front Upper Cover [20] Sub Station Upper Right Cover
[8] Main Station Front Right Cover [21] Main Power Supply Switch Cover
[9] Main Station Front Right Lower Cover [22] Main Station Upper Left Filter Cover 1
[10] Right Deck [23] Main Station Upper Left Filter Cover 2
[11] Main Station Front Left Cover [24] Main Station Upper Left Filter Cover 3
[12] Left Deck [25] Main Station Upper Left Cover
[13] Sub Station Front Right Cover
33
1. Product Overview
● Rear Side of the Machine
[38] [1]
[2]
[37]
[36] [3]
[35] [4]
[34]
[33] [5]
[32]
[31]
[6]
[30]
[7]
[29]
[8]
[28]
[9]
[10]
[22]
[11]
[27] [12]
[26]
[13]
[25]
[24] [14]
[23]
[22] [15]
[21]
[20] [16]
[19]
[18] [17]
No. Name No. Name

[1] Reader Face Cover [20] Main Station Right Rear Cover
[2] Sub Station Upper Rear Cover [21] Vertical Path Rear Cover
[3] Fixing Filter Cover [22] Face Cover
[4] Sub Station Rear Cover 1 [23] Main Station Right Lower Cover
[5] Delivery Filter Cover [24] Vertical Path Lower Cover
[6] Sub Station Rear Cover 2 [25] Vertical Path Cover
[7] Sub Station Rear Cooling Fan Cover 2 [26] Main Station Right Front Cover 3
[8] Sub Station Rear Cover 3 [27] Vertical Path Front Cover
[10] Sub Station Rear Cover 4 [29] Main Station Right Middle Cover
[12] Main Station Rear Right Cover [31] Main Station Right Upper Cover
[13] Main Station Upper Rear Cover 1 [32] Toner Supply Right Filter Cover
[14] Main Station Rear Cover 1 [33] Toner Supply Right Cover
[15] Main Station Rear Cover 2 [34] Toner Supply Rear Cover
[16] Main Station Rear Cover 4 [35] Controller Rear Cover 4
[18] Main Station Upper Rear Cover 2 [37] Controller Rear Cover 2
[19] Main Station Rear Left Cover [38] Controller Rear Cover 1
34
1. Product Overview
● Power Unit Station

[1] [2] [3]
[8] [9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[4]
[5]
[13]
[6]
[7]
No. Name No. Name

[1] Power Unit Station Rear Cover 1 [8] Air Pump Cooling Fan Cover 2
[2] Power Unit Station Rear Filter Cover [9] Sub Station Exhaust Duct
[3] Air Pump Cooling Fan Cover 1 [10] Sub Station Exhaust Duct Filter Cover 1
[4] Handle Protection Cover [11] Sub Station Exhaust Duct Filter Cover 2
[5] Power Unit Station Rear Cover 2 [12] Sub Station Exhaust Duct Filter Cover 3
[6] Power Unit Station Rear Auxiliary Cover [13] Cable Cover
[7] Power Unit Station Rear Cover 3
35
1. Product Overview
● Inner Cover
[1]
[4]
[2]
[28]
[27] [3]
[26]
[25] [5]
[24]
[23]
[6]
[22]
[21] [7]
[20] [8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[19]
[12]
[13]
[18] [14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
No. Name No. Name

[1] Toner Replacement Inner Cover [15] Sub Station Inner Cover 2
[2] Toner Supply Front Cover [16] Sub Station Duplex Inlet Cover
[3] Process Unit Cover [17] Delivery Reverse Cover 3
[4] Primary Charging Assembly Cover [18] Delivery Reverse Cover 5
[5] Intermediate Transfer Unit Cover [19] Delivery Reverse Cover 4
[6] Main Station Inner Right Lower Cover [20] Delivery Reverse Cover 2
[7] Lower Feed Cover [21] Delivery Reverse Cover 1
[8] Pre-registration Cover [22] Fixing Frame Cover
[9] Main Station Duplex Feed Cover [23] Fixing Merging Cover
[10] Pre-fixing Feed Upper Cover [24] Secondary Fixing Front Lower Cover
[11] Pre-fixing Feed Lower Cover [25] Secondary Fixing Front Upper Cover
[12] Pre-fixing Feed Left Cover [26] Tandem Feed Cover
[13] Primary Fixing Front Lower Cover [27] Primary Fixing Front Upper Cover
[14] Sub Station Duplex Feed Cover [28] Sub Station Inner Cover 1
36
1. Product Overview
● Lever
[1]
[2]
[3]
[3]
[4]
No. Name No. Name

[1] Process Unit Cover Release Lever 1 [3] ITB Unit Cover Release Lever
[2] Process Unit Cover Release Lever 2 [4] ITB Frame Unit Release Lever
37
1. Product Overview
● Long Sheet Tray -A1 (Option)
[1]
[3]
[2]
[5]
[4]
No. Name No. Name

[1] Pickup Cover [4] Tray
[2] Side Guide Plate [5] Pickup Side Cover
[3] Alignment Tray
● Upright Control Panel-F1 (Option)

[4]
[5]
[3]
[7] [6]
[2]
[8]
[1]
[9]
[10]
[11]
No. Name No. Name

[1] Control Panel Front Cover [7] Hinge Upper Cover
[2] Clear Cover [8] Hinge Lower Cover
[3] Tally Lamp Lens [9] Arm Upper Cover
[4] Control Panel Rear Cover 2 [10] Arm Lower Cover
[5] Control Panel Rear Cover 3 [11] Control Panel Mounting Base
[6] Control Panel Rear Cover 1
38
1. Product Overview
Cross Section View

Toner Container
(Y)/(M)/(C)/(Bk) Process Unit
Laser Scanner Unit (Y)/(M)/(C)/(Bk)
(Y)/(M)/(C)/(Bk)
Tandem Feed Unit
Secondary Fixing
Fixing Merging Path Assembly Y M C Bk
Unit
Bypass Feed Unit
Y M C Bk
ITB Unit
Y M C Bk
Vertical Path
Unit
Sub Station Duplex

Left Feed Unit Secondary Transfer
Delivery Reverse Sub Station Duplex
Unit Main Station Lower Pre-registration Unit
Unit Right Feed Unit Left Deck
Feed Unit
Primary Fixing Main Station Duplex Right Deck
Waste Toner Container Feed Unit Registration Unit
Duplex Decurler Assembly
Unit
Power Switch
■ Types of Power Switches
This machine has the Main Power Switch and the Environment Heater Switch.
Turning ON the Main Power Switch supplies the power in the usual case (except when the machine is in sleep mode).
The Environment Heater Switch supplies or blocks the power to the Drum Heater, the Cassette Heater and the Reader Heater.
■ Points to Note on Turning ON/OFF the Power Switch

• Do not turn OFF the Main Power Switch while the progress bar (to be displayed when the power is turned ON) is displayed,
which indicates access to the HDD.
• Be sure to turn OFF the main power switch when turning OFF the power. (The conventional shut-down sequence process
is not needed.)
• After turning OFF the power (after turning OFF the Main Power Switch), do not turn ON the main power switch again unless
the screen disappears.
Do not turn OFF the power during downloading.
■ Shutting Down the Host Machine in an Emergency

This equipment is equipped with a breaker for detecting overcurrent and electric leakage in order to prevent electrification.
In the event of an emergency, be sure to turn the breaker switch to OFF (toward the circle) to turn OFF the power.
39
1. Product Overview
Control Panel
For PRISMAsync model, refer to PRISMAsync service manual.
■ Control Panel
Upright Control Panel-F1
[9] [7]
[10]
[1]
[2]
[8]
[14]
[13]
[3] [11]
[12]
[4] [5] [6] [15] [16]
No. Name No. Name

[1] Main Menu Key [2] Custom Menu Key
[3] Status Monitor/Cancel Key [4] Volume Adjustment Dial
[5] Brightness Adjustment Key [6] Touch Panel Display
[7] Energy Saver Key [8] Numeric key
[9] Settings/registration Key [10] Counter Check Key
40
1. Product Overview
No. Name No. Name

[11] Stop Key [12] Operation Pen
[13] ID (Authentication) Key [14] Clear Key
[15] Reset Key [16] Start Key
■ Main Menu
Settings/
Reg.Shortcut
Show All
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[5] [6]
No. Name No. Name

[1] Copy [2] Scan and Store
[3] Access Stored Files [4] Print server
[5] Shortcut to Settings/Registration [6] Fiery
■ Settings/Registration Menu
Settings/
6HWWLQJV5HJLVWUDWLRQ Reg.Shortcut
6HOHFWDQLWHPWRVHW
723 3UHIHUHQFHV
[1]
$GMXVWPHQW0DLQWHQDQFH
[2]
)XQFWLRQ6HWWLQJV
[3]
0DQDJHPHQW6HWWLQJV
[4]
/RJLQ &ORVH
No. Name No. Name

[1] Preferences [2] Adjustment/Maintenance
[3] Function Settings [4] Management Settings
41
2 Technical
Explanation
Basic Configuration............................. 43
Controller System................................44
Laser Exposure System...................... 64
Image Formation System.................... 73
Fixing System....................................140
Pickup Feed System......................... 193
External Auxiliary System................. 271
Embedded RDS................................ 298
Updater............................................. 308
DCM.................................................. 332
2. Technical Explanation
Basic Configuration
Functional Configuration
The machine may broadly be divided into the following functional system blocks; document exposure system block, controller
system block, laser exposure system block, image formation system block, fixing system block and pickup/feed system block.
Controller system
HDD Main Laser exposure system
controller
Option 1/2 Laser Laser Laser Laser
scanner scanner scanner scanner
board unit(Y) unit(M) unit(C) unit(Bk)
DC
controller
Document exposure system

Drum unit Drum unit Drum unit Drum unit
Reader Exposure (Y) (M) (C) (Bk)
CCD
controller lamp
ITB
Image
formation system
Pickup/feed system Fixing system
Decurler Registration
Delivery Fixing Transfer Pickup
Unit Unit
Duplexing feed
Flow of paper Left Deck Right Deck

Flow of signal
Laser beam
43
Controller System
Overview
Main controller PCB 1 controls the entire system. Main controller PCB 2 mainly controls image processing
Main controller PCBs 1 and 2 are connected through the riser PCB.
■ Specifications/configuration
● PCBs
[8] [7]
[5]
[3]
[6]
[2]
[9]
[10]
[12]
[4]
[11]
[1]
No. Name Reference

[1] Main controller PCB 1
[2] TPM PCB
[3] Flash PCB
[4] Memory PCB (512MB)
[5] Riser PCB
[6] Main controller PCB 2
[7] SRAM PCB
[8] COUNTER PCB
[9] Memory PCB (1GB)
[10] HDD1
[11] Video PCB
[12] ECO PCB
Parts name Function, specifications, features

Main controller PCB 1 CPU: Control of the entire system
Various controls (memory, control panel, electric power, voice), I/Fs, RTC
Flash PCB Boot program
TPM PCB To generate and save encryption key
Available only when TPM settings is ON: Management Settings > Data Management > TPM Settings
(default: OFF)
Not available with China models
Main controller PCB 2 CPU: Image control
Various image processing (color space conversion, enlarge, reduction, rotation, composition, com-
pression, rasterizing, resolution conversion, image binarization), delay memory control between drums,
HDD control, I/Fs (reader, USB (device))
44

Open I/F PCB Interface: Print Server
imagePRESS Server B5000/imagePRESS Server B4000/PRISMAsync for iPR C10000VP-A1/ IPR CR
Svr
Riser PCB I/F (main controller 1 - 2, main controller - HDD, main controller - DC controller)
HDD 3.5 inch SATA I/F
Up to 2 HDDs can be mounted in the case of mirroring configuration.
BOX data, Address book, security information (password, certificate)
Op.: Option HDD MIRROR KIT (2.5inch / 250GB)
The details are appendixes : Backup Data
● Memory
Main controller PCB 1
DDR2-SDRAM DDR2-SDRAM
(On Board) (DIMM)
J12
J13 㻰㻵㻼㼋㻿㼃㼋㻭㻌㻮㻻㻭㻾㻰
BAT1

DDR2-SDRAM (On Board) 1 GB (standard)
Used for saving image, program data
DDR2-SDRAM (DIMM) 512 MB (standard)
Used for saving image, program data
DIP SW A BOARD Select Priter Server(imagePRESS Server/PRISMAsync)
Lithium battery (BAT1)) For RTC
Life: approx. 5 years
BAT1
DDR2-SDRAM(M1) DDR2-SDRAM(M0)
J13
DDR3-SDRAM(S)
DDR3-SDRAM(P)

DDR2-SDRAM (M1: On Board) 1 GB (standard)
Rasterizing, rendering, resolution conversion, coding / decoding
DDR2-SDRAM (M0: DIMM) 1 GB (standard)
Rasterizing, rendering, resolution conversion, coding / decoding
DDR3-SDRAM (P) 2 GB (standard)
Print image processing, delay processing between drums
DDR3-SDRAM (S) 256 MB (standard)
45

SRAM 2 MB
To save data in Settings / Registration / Service Mode and image data management information
in HDD
The details are appendixes : Backup Data
Lithium battery (BAT1) For SRAM backup, Life: approx. 5 years
● I/F, connector
J1025 J20 J21
J8 J5 USB(H)
Riser J17 TPM
J11
J7 LAN
Flash
J15 Fan
J4 UI
External I/F
J6 Mini-USB
Internal I/F J13
DIP_SW
No. Function, specifications No. Function, specifications

J13 DIP SW BOARD J11 Flash PCB I/F
J4 Control panel I/F J5 USB I/F (Host) *For Service use only(System version
Upgrade, Collecting Debug Log, DCM(Import/Export)
J6 Unused J8 TPM PCB I/F
J15 Fan I/F J1025 Unused
J7 LAN I/F J21 Unused
1000BASE-T / 100BASE-TX / 10BASE-T
Priter Server(imagePRESS Server/
PRISMAsync/IPR CR Svr)
J17 Riser PCB I/F J20 Unused
External I/F
Internal I/F
J1010 J14
Riser
Bypass I/F
/ open I/F
J22
Reader
Jack No. Function, specifications

J14 Riser PCB I/F
J22 Reader I/F
J1010 Open I/F PCB
imagePRESS Server/PRISMAsync/IPR CR Svr
46
● Function expansion
Main controller PCB1
DIP_SW_A BOARD
DIP_SW_A BOARD
Name Function, specifications, features

DIP SW A BOARD Select Priter Server(imagePRESS Server/PRISMAsync)
DIP SW ABOARD
Via the DIP switch settings, the communication between engine and Priter Server isenabled.
Off(0)
On(1)
No. Name
1 DIP switch
2 Power switch
3 Power LED
4 Tally LED
The DIP switch has four bi-state (OFF/ON) switches. The table below gives an overview ofdifferent states.
DIP switch Priter Server Boot Mode IP Address

PRISMAsync Normal boot mode 134.188.254.21
㻻㻲㻲
㻻㻺
㻿㼃㻝㻿㼃㻞㻿㼃㻟㻿㼃㻠
47
DIP switch Priter Server Boot Mode IP Address

PRISMAsync Safe download mode (2 + 8 key boot) 134.188.254.21
㻻㻲㻲
㻻㻺

EFI Normal boot mode 10.255.255.1
㻻㻲㻲
㻻㻺
Power switch:
The Power switch (push button) located on the DIP switch board is not used.
The behaviour of the switch is equal to the "Energy safer key" on the Canon user interface.
LED:
The DIP switch board has two LEDs.
The Power LED is used to identify wether the engine is energized or not.
CAUTION:
If the Power LED is On and the Tally LED is OFF this could indicate a problem during the start-upsequence. The problem
occurs before the main controller software is fully operational.
LED Color Function Information

Tally LED Amber Processing / data indi-cator Controlled by maincontroller software
Power LED Green Main power indicator Controlled by hard-ware
Open I/F PCB
Open I/F PCB
Name Function, specifications, features

Open I/F PCB imagePRESS Server B5000/imagePRESS Server B4000 /PSYNC IPR C10000VP-A1
48
● HDD
FSTDEV Image data (Box, etc.)

TMP_GEN Universal data (temporary file)
TMP_PSS For PDL spooling
TMP_FAX FAX data
APL_SEND Address book, filter
APL_MEAP MEAP application
APL_GEN Universal data
APL_KEEP MEAP saving data
APL_LOG System log
IMG_MNG Text management table
PDLDEV PDL-related file (font, registration form, etc.)
FSTCDEV Job archiving (chasing)
THUMDEV Thumbnail
BOOTDEV System software (System, language, RUI, etc.)
CRBDEV For Advanced Box
APL_CDS For distribution server
■ Boot / Shutdown sequence

● Boot sequence
Main power switch ON [ ]: program storage location
- Hardware initialization processing
- Initialization process of hardware

- Starting BIOS
[Main controller PCB 1]
- Starting IPL, OS
[Flash PCB]
- Starting system software for main/sub CPU

[HDD -> DDR2-SDRAM]
[Main controller PCB 2]
- Starting application
Standby screen display
NOTE:
Due to the high speed startup, the progress bar and the activating PCB are not synchronized. For this reason, the progress bar
cannot be utilized for troubleshooting. See the following error code list for the troubleshooting.
Related Error Codes (major error codes):

E602: Error in HDD
• 0001: Failure in recognizing HDD. Boot partition (BOOTDEV) is not found at startup.
49
• 0002: There is no system software for the main CPU.

• 0006: There is no system software for the sub CPU.
E613: Failure in memory (main controller PCB 2)
• 1536: Capacity shortage of DDR2-SDRAM (M0, M1) (1.5GB required)
E748: Error in board (Flash PCB)
• 2010: IPL (Initial Program Loader) is not found.
• 2011: OS is not found.
● Shutdown sequence
Before turning OFF the main power switch, it is necessary to perform HDD completion processing (to prevent damage on the
HDD), cooling of the internal printer (to prevent fixed toner due to high temperature) and exhaust (to prevent smeared image due
to chemical reaction of ozone in the machine and photosensitive drum). This sequential processing is called "shutdown sequence"
and was executed on the legacy models manually (by holding down the power supply switch on the Control Panel for a specific
duration).
When the main power switch is turned OFF on the main body, Main Controller PCB 1 detects this operation and then the shutdown
sequence starts / executes automatically.
NOTE:
In addition, hardware shutdown sequence exists. If shutdown sequence is not executed normally due to occurrence of software
trouble, the machine is shut down in after during some period of time progress by the timer in the AC Driver PCB. If it is not shut
down within after during some period of time progress, failure of the AC Driver PCB is suspected.
Controls
■ Overview
Item Control Detail Reference
Image processing control Convert the image data input from the external device or
reader unit into the video data and send it to DC controller.
Backup battery Data backup battery in case of power failure or disconnection
of power plug.
Power save function Reduce the power consumption at standby mode.
Security function Encryption key, certificate, protection of password.
HDD mirroring function (option) Mirroring processing of HDD data.
Removable HDD (option) HDD is installable/removable by user.
■ Image Processing Control

Copy
To DC Controller
HDD Reader
I/F HDD
writing/reading
Image processing
R䚷esolution conversion,
I䚷
mage rotation,
Print type image 䚷
JPEG compression/extension
processing
Extension processing
Tile raster conversion
Image data buffer

(memory)
Main Controller Riser PCB Main Controller

PCB 1 PCB 2
50
Print
Network To DC Controller
HDD
I/F Rendering
HDD
writing/reading
Image data buffer

(memory)
LAN
Controller

PCB 1 PCB 2
SEND
HDD
Network
Reader
HDD Image processing

writing/reading
䚷
Resolution conversion,
䚷
Image rotation,
䚷
JPEG compression/extension
Data conversion
䚷Tile raster conversion
䚷JPEG encode
LAN Image data buffer
Controller (memory)

PCB 1 PCB 2
■ Backup Battery
Main controller PCB of the host machine has one lithium battery as a data backup battery in case of power failure or disconnection
of the power plug.
Main Controller PCB1
Item Description
Type of battery Lithium battery (3V, 620 mAh)
Life of battery Approx 5 years (when the power plug is disconnected)
Replacement of battery Battery cannot be replaced independently on service site.
Main Controller PCB2
Item Description
DC Controller PCB
Item Description
51
Item Description
■ Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password Protection)

The main controller PCB 1 of the host machine holds a new PCB named "TPM PCB". "TPM" stands for "Trusted Platform Module",
which collectively refers to the chip set for generating and storing encryption keys and computing public key encryption.
TPM Board
The TPM PCB protects security information (passwords, certificates, and encryption keys) stored in the HDD and SRAM. Note
that this PCB does not protect set, registered or stored data other than security information.
The TPM key embedded in the chip is used to encrypt / decrypt security information.
TPM PCB
HDD / SRAM
Encryption key Public key for User

for password SSL certificate
communication
The TPM key is protected from illegal access in a virtually perfect manner, thus the security information of the host machine is
securely protected even in the following conditions.
• When the HDD and / or the main controller PCB is taken out from the host machine and installed in the MFP with the different
serial number (the model information held in the TPM PCB is specific to the machine originally enabled the TPM setting)
• When the system of the host machine is hacked via the network
Enable this function in Setting / Registration mode.
Management Setting > Data Management > TPM Setting -> ON (OFF by default)
52
● Operation overview (When the TPM setting is "ON")
MN-CON1
TPM PCB
TPM key
HDD
MN-CON2
SRAM
Password
Password Certificate
Certificate Key
Key
Common Key
Security information (password, certificate and encryption key to be used for various applications) is linked with the common key,
so it is encrypted and stored in the HDD/SRAM. Without the common key, decoding is disabled.
When the TPM setting is set to "ON", the common key itself is encrypted. The common key is linked with the TPM key. Without
the TPM key, decoding is disabled.
It is extremely difficult to take out the TPM key from the outside.
TPM PCB can be used on this machine only, so it cannot be used on the other machines. (E746 occurs)
Related Error Codes

E746 (Error in encryption)
• 0031 Hardware error
Cause: TPM PCB is not mounted, TPM PCB from other machine is installed, TPM chip is faulty
Remedy: Mount the appropriate TPM PCB, Replace with a new TPM PCB
● Works before / after introduction

Execute the following in Setting / Registration mode ("TPM setting" is OFF by default).
1. Enable the feature
2. Backup the TPM key
3. Restore the TPM key
4. Disable the feature
The works above are basically done by users.
CAUTION:
When the TPM setting is set to "ON", advice users on the following:
Back up the TPM key swiftly after the setting is ON
• Keep the password used at backup securely
• Never lose the USB flash drive with the backup TPM key file saved
• The TPM key should be restored after the TPM PCB is replaced due to failures or the like.
Unless the key is restored, the security information (passwords, encryption key, and certificates) cannot be used.
When the key restoration is failed due to the USB flash drive lost or others, "Initialize All Data / Settings" should be executed
to reactivate TPM functionality. The security may be undermined if the old Setting / Registration data are maintained as it
is.
53
1. Enable Functionality
CAUTION:
Setup of "System Management PIN"
It is recommended for users (administrators) to set the system management PIN before installing TPM.
The TPM key is backed up after the TPM setting is set to "ON". However, the key backup is permitted only once. Unless
the key is properly backed up, users other than administrators may illegally obtain the backup file. To avoid such risks
effectively, the system management PIN should be set.
1. Set Management Setting > Data Management > TPM Setting to "ON".
2. Click "Yes", and restart the machine.
This setting is enabled after the machine is restarted.
2. TPM Key Backup

The TPM key backup file can be stored only in USB flash drive (supported file system: FAT32).
Note that this file requires the memory free space of several MBs.
1. Insert the USB flash drive to the machine.
The USB I/F (host) is found at the side of the control panel as well as the main controller PCB.
CAUTION:
Ensure to insert only one USB flash drive.
If the backup job is started with 2 or more USB flash drives connected, the message is shown to notify that the backup is
failed.
NOTE:
The USB flash drive holds the TPM key backup files by serial number. Thus, backup files for multiple machines can be saved in
a USB flash drive.
54
2. Click [Back up TPM Key] in Management Setting > Data Management > TPM Setting.
3. Click [Password] to enter the password (4-12 digits). Then, enter the password for confirmation.
4. Click [OK] to initiate TPM key backup.
55
5. Click [OK] on Backup Completion Screen and remove the USB flash drive.
CAUTION:
The following may cause failures in backup.
If any of the following is detected, the backup process is aborted and the message and the cause for the failure are shown
on the screen. Take an appropriate measure to recover this.
• The USB flash drive is not inserted to the machine
• 2 or more USB flash drives are inserted to the machine
• The USB flash drive has insufficient free memory space
• The USB flash drive is write-protected
• No key is found
CAUTION:
The USB flash drive should be securely stored.
Give advice users on the following points.
• The USB flash drive should be securely stored
• Once the TPM key backup file is saved in the USB flash drive, never save the backup file on a server or the like
accessible to unanimous users.
NOTE:
Name of TPM key backup file
The serial number for the machine is automatically assigned as the backup file name.
3. Restore of TPM key

Procedure is about the same as the backup work.
Difference between restore work and backup work: Rebooting is necessary (turn OFF and then ON the main power) after
completion of restore work.
1. Connect the USB memory that saves TPM key.
2. Select the following: Management setting > Data management > TPM setting; and click [Restore TPM key].
3. Enter the password set in the backup process.

4. Click [OK] on Start Restoration Screen. The restoration process is started.
5. Click [OK] on Restoration Completion Screen. Remove the USB flash drive and turn OFF/ ON the main power switch.
56
CAUTION:
The following may cause failures in restoration.
If any of the following is detected, the restoration process is aborted and the message and the cause for the failure are
shown on the screen. Take an appropriate measure for recovery.
• The USB flash drive is not inserted to the machine
• 2 or more USB flash drives are inserted to the machine
• The USB flash drive is security-protected
• No TPM key is saved in the USB flash drive
• The TPM key saved in the USB flash drive is not for the machine
• The wrong password is entered
• After the TPM key was backed up, [Initialize All Systems/ Settings] was executed
• SRAM (the main controller PCB 1) or HDD is crashed
4. Disable the feature

To set "OFF" for the TPM setting, execute [Initialize All Data / Settings].
● Related Error Code

E746: Error in encryption
• 0031: Error in hardware
• 0032: Error occurred and the system is unrecoverable
• 0033: Error occurred but the system is recoverable
• 0034: The error occurred when clearing HDD while TPM setting was ON
● Target data for encryption/decryption (reference)

Type Application/Function Security Information Storage Desti-
nation
Password/PIN BOX BOX Password HDD
Password for encryption at BOX backup SRAM
Password for SMB server at BOX backup SRAM
Send Password for a file destination of Address Book HDD
Password for POP3 server SRAM
Password of time stamp PDF SRAM
PIN for destination list (in destination setting) SRAM
UI Service mode password SRAM
Network FTP authentication password SRAM
User name and password of proxy authentication client SRAM
Others A password for AeAgent UI login SRAM
User info of the device login HDD
Department management data (including administrator pass- SRAM
word)
Encryption key MIB Authentication key and encryption key for SNMPv3 SRAM
57
Type Application/Function Security Information Storage Desti-

nation
Certificate/Private SSL, AMS Device key pair (SSL, AMS) HDD
key Signature SEND User key pair HDD
Others User environment data Keyring information (password) HDD
■ HDD mirroring feature (option)

This option enables HDD data mirroring (RAID1).
If one of the HDDs is faulty, the other one operates as "master".
Master (HDD1)
HDD Mirroring Kit

250GB
Standard Mirroring PCB
LED PCB
Ch A
Backup (HDD2)
Ch B
250GB
Option
58
■ Works before using this functionality (installation)

Install the mirroring PCB and LED PCB HDD1 is connected to Ch A on the
for HDD1 mirroring PCB
Slot.2 (HDD2)
Slot.1 (HDD1)
CH B
CH A
Install HDD2 HDD2 is connected to Ch B on the

mirroring PCB.
Slot.2 (HDD2)
Slot.1 (HDD1)
Turn ON the main power
CH B
CH A
Turn ON the mirroring feature
Turn ON the main power
The storage data of the 1st HDD is

Start “Rebuild” automatically copied to the 2nd HDD (this
operation is called “Rebuild”.
Complete “Rebuild”
Rebuild progress is shown as messages on the status line of the control panel.
"Copying data to HDD. xx%"
NOTE:
• This machine can be used even during "rebuild" process (operation is performed with HDD1)
• The HDD will not be damaged even if turning OFF the power during "rebuild" process. "Rebuild" is resumed once the power
is turned ON the next time. This does not apply in the case of blackout or disconnecting the power code during "rebuild"
process
59
● HDD reading / writing operation

At reading: At writing:
Data is read by HDD1 (master HDD) The same data is written to each HDD at
only the same timing
Main controller PCB 2 Main controller PCB 2
Mirroring PCB Mirroring PCB
HDD HDD HDD HDD

1 2 1 2
The ACT LED (green) on the LED PCB is lighted up / blinking if reading / writing to each HDD is performed properly.
In the case of failure:
• The LED (red) on the LED PCB is blinking. If one of the HDDs is faulty, the operation continues by using the other one as
"master".
• If both two HDDs are faulty, E602 error is shown on the control panel to stop the operation.
● List of operation status (LED)

HDD operation statuses are indicated with 4 LEDs mounted on the LED PCB.
The green LED shows that the operation is normally in progress, while the red LED indicates any failures.
The table below lists HDD statuses indicated by each LED.
For example, when HDD1 is in access, the green LED on the side of HDD1 (ChA) blinks in a high speed.
Status HDD 1 (Ch A) HDD 2 (Ch B) Name of Mode

GREEN LED RED LED GREEN LED RED LED
Normal (standby) --- --- --- --- Mirror mode
Accessing to HDD1 A (*1) --- --- --- ----
Accessing to HDD2 --- --- A (*1) --- ----
HDD1 failed --- A --- --- Degrade mode
HDD2 is faulty --- --- --- A Degrade mode
Copying data to HDD1 (Rebuild) --- / A B --- / A --- Rebuild mode
Copying data to HDD2 (Rebuild) --- / A --- --- / A B Rebuild mode
Both HDDs failed or Master HDD failed --- (*2) A --- (*2) A Halt mode
--- : Not lit A : Lit B : Blinking at an interval of 0.5 seconds

*1: The LED is blinking in a high speed
*2: The green LED may be lit
● Description of Modes
The mirroring system of this machine consists of 4 modes.
The modes in parentheses show the mirroring system statuses.
The status flows among the modes below during operation.
The table below lists descriptions of modes and operational overview.
Name of Mode Description Master HDD Status Backup HDD Status

Mirror Mode Both HDDs are normally operated In normal operation In normal operation
Degrade Mode Any trouble occurred in the backup HDD sus- In normal operation With troubles (HDD not installed/
pends mirroring operation. The machine can HDD in trouble)
be used under this condition, however, the
backup HDD should be replaced at the earliest
convenience.
60
Name of Mode Description Master HDD Status Backup HDD Status

Rebuild mode The data of the master HDD is copied (rebuilt) In normal operation In recovery from the trouble
to the backup HDD. The machine can be used (Copying data of Master HDD)
under this condition.
Halt mode Both HDDs are in trouble (see *1) In trouble (HDD not installed/ With troubles (HDD not installed/
HDD installed not registered/ HDD installed not registered/
HDD disconnected while the mir- HDD disconnected while the mir-
roring board is in operation) roring board is in operation)
*1: Turn OFF/ ON the power in this mode, the mode returns to the previous mode.
Mode Flow at Start-up
Turn ON Main Power Switch
Flow to Mode at Previous Job Completion
Halt Mode Mirror Mode Degrade Mode Rebuild Mode
Trouble See Overview of Trouble

Trouble Recovery
Backup HDD
Both HDDs Either HDD
In which HDD? In which HDD?
Degrade Mode Degrade Mode

Master HDD
See Overview of See Overview of

Trouble Recovery Trouble Recovery
Unable to detect Unable to detect

Master HDD at Start-up Master HDD at Start-up
Halt Mode
Halt Mode Halt Mode Halt Mode
See Overview of Trouble Recovery
Mirror Mode
61
Mode Flow during Operation
Mirror Mode
Trouble
Either HDD
In which HDD?
Both HDDs Degrade Mode
See Overview of
Trouble Recovery
Halt Mode
Master HDD
In which HDD?
Backup HDD
Halt Mode
Rebuild Mode
Trouble
Unable to detect Unable to detect

Master HDD Backup HDD
HDD Status?
When successfully Degrade Mode

Rebuilt
Halt Mode
Unable to detect Master HDD
Halt Mode
See Overview of
Trouble Recovery
Mirror Mode
● Overview of Trouble Recovery

When any trouble occurs in the mirroring system, take the action for recovery appropriate to each mode.
The HDD in trouble can be located by the red LED on the LED PCB.
In case the master HDD cannot be located, turn OFF/ ON the power to check whether the green LED is lit on the LED PCB.
The firstly blinked green LED (ChA or ChB) in a high speed tells the Master HDD, which is accessed firstly. The green LED not
lit on a channel tells the location of Backup HDD.
Name of Mode Status Action for Recovery HDD1 HDD2

(ChA) (ChB)
Red LED Red LED
Mirror Mode Normal (at standby) Under normal operation --- ---
Degrade Mode HDD1 in trouble 1. Check the connection between HDD1 and A ---
(see *1) Mirroring Board or Main Controller PCB 2.
2. When the trouble is not recovered, replace
the HDD1
HDD2 in trouble 1. Check the connection between HDD2 and --- A
Mirroring Board or Main Controller PCB 2.
HDD2.
Rebuild mode Copying data to HDD1 Copying (under Rebuild) B ---
(Rebuild)
Copying Data to HDD2 Copying (under Rebuild) --- B
(Rebuild)
Halt mode Both HDDs in trouble 1. Check Master HDD and Backup HDD (see A A
*2)
the two HDDs (format the replaced HDD and
download the system software).
--- : Not lit A : Lit B : Blinking at an interval of 0.5 seconds
62
*1 "The hard disk needs to be replaced. (Call service rep.)" is displayed on the Touch Panel Display. The alarm history of the
service mode 310006 is displayed by CODE list.
COPIER > DISPLAY > ALARM-2
*2: Never install the HDD used in the other model. The used HDD holds the ID specific to the firstly-installed machine, thus this
machine is unable to recognize it. If done, you need to reinstall the HDD recognized in this machine.
*3: Degrade or Halt mode is a condition where data protection that is the purpose of mirroring is not enabled. It is necessary to
swiftly replace the faulty HDD with a new one and perform Rebuild process.
● Points to Note in Servicing concerning Mirroring Functionality

1. The modes other than Mirror Mode indicate troubles, which require swift recovery.
The power can be turned OFF even during Rebuild process. However, it is recommended not to turn off the power and wait
until the mode flows to Mirror Mode. In addition, HDD removal after power-OFF is guaranteed only in Mirror Mode.
2. The mirroring board controls Master HDD and Backup HDD. This control is performed based on the HDD serial number and
the model serial number instead of slot locations.
If HDDs are replaced in a careless manner during servicing in the field, the Master and Backup HDDs may be switched.
Ex) When the master HDD is in trouble, the mirroring board automatically recognizes the backup HDD as the master. Thus,
the master and backup HDDs are switched even without changing the slot locations.
If the Master HDD cannot be located, turn OFF/ ON the power to check on which channel the green LED is lit on the LED
PCB.
The firstly-blinked LED (ChA or ChB) shows the Master HDD, which is accessed firstly after power-on.
3. For users who intend to use the removable and mirroring functionality concurrently, instruct them not to change the removable
HDD location in advance.
Change of HDD locations after power-OFF is allowed as specifications only in Mirror Mode.
Otherwise, HDD removal or change of location is not guaranteed.
4. The following conditions are required to replace HDDs at power-ON.
• Removable HDD is extended
• Either HDD is in trouble
CAUTION:
Be sure to use a new HDD when replacing the HDD.
5. Upgrading should be done only in Mirror Mode while mirroring in ongoing.

Upgrading in Degrade or Rebuild mode is basically prohibited. Always prioritize Mirror Mode when you take any actions.
■ Removable HDD (option)

With this option, users can easily install or remove the HDD (slot-in/out).
This option is assumed to be used for: enhancing information security at government/public offices or private companies.
• Remove the HDD after the close of work to be kept in a safe.
• Install the HDD at the start of work. Make the HDD locked during operation.
NOTE:
• To use this option, no setting is required with the software.
• The user needs to prepare a key because there is no key with this kit.
63
Laser Exposure System
Overview
This machine has four Laser Scanner Units above each color station.
Main Controller PCB 2 (UN986㸧

Video signal
Riser PCB (UN985) DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198)

Video signal Control signal
Laser Interface PCB (UN950)
Scanner Motor Drive Signal

Laser Drive Signal
BD Signal
Laser 1
Laser 2
Laser 31
Laser 32
Secondary Collimator Lens

BD Lens
Cylindrical Lens
Laser Driver PCB
APC-PD PCB
APC Lens
Half Mirror
Polygon Mirror
BD PCB
Laser Scanner Motor
Reflection
Mirror
Imaging Lens
La
se
r 32
La
La ser
se 2
r1
Photosensitive Drum
It applies laser to the image on the negatively-charged drum.
Image area
Non-Image area Non-Image area
Laser ON
Enlarged view
■ Characteristics
Adoption of new Laser Scanner Units
64
32 beams Laser 1
Laser
Shooting
Port
Laser Driver Laser 2
Laser 31
Laser 32
Polygon Mirror
2400dpi
<Vertical Scanning
Reflection Mirror Direction>
Imaging Lens Current This
machine machine
2400dpi
1200dpi
2400dpi
<Horizonal Scanning Direction>
1200dpi
Current
machine
Photosensitive Drum
This
machine Scanning of 2nd line
2400dpi
32
16
32
1
17
Scanning
of 1st line
Multiple
exposure
Higher Image Quality

• 2400 dpi resolution
The engine resolution has been increased to 2400 dpi from the previous 1200 dpi in both the horizontal scanning direction
and vertical scanning direction.
• Multiple exposure
This machine performs exposure twice by overlapping the 16 beams which are half the total beams.
Higher speed
• Simultaneous emission of laser beams producing 32 lines
High speed printing is achieved by the simultaneous emission of 32-line laser beams at a time.
■ Specifications
Item Description
Laser Beam Wave length Approx. 680 nm
Laser type Red laser
Laser output 1mW
Number of laser beams 32 beam
Resolution 2400 dpi
Scanner Motor Type Brushless motor
Revolution Approx. 32,800 rpm
Number of Polygon Mirror surfaces 5
65
Item Description
List of Controls Laser Activation Timing Control Laser ON/OFF Control
Horizontal Scanning Synchronization Control
Vertical Scanning Synchronization Control
Laser Intensity Control APC Control
Image Position Correction Control Horizontal Scanning Write Start Position Correction (Explained in the
Image Formation section)
Vertical Scanning Write Start Position Correction (Explained in the Im-
age Formation section)
Horizontal Scanning Copy Ratio Correction (Explained in the Image
Formation section)
Horizontal Scanning Single Copy Ratio Correction (Explained in the Im-
age Formation section)
Duplex Copy Ratio Correction
Others Laser Scanner Motor Control
Laser OFF Control
■ Parts Configuration
BD Lens
Secondary Collimator Lens Cylindrical Lens
APC-PD PCB
Laser Driver PCB
APC Lens
Half Mirror
Polygon Mirror
Laser Scanner Motor
BD PCB
Reflection
Mirror
Imaging Lens
Imaging Lens
Reflection Mirror
66
Name Function
Laser Driver PCB Generates a laser beam.
Cylindrical Lens Adjusts the focus (vertical scanning direction).
Secondary Collimator Lens Adjusts the focus (horizontal scanning direction).
BD Lens Collects the light beam for BD (write start timing detection).
APC Lens Collects the light beam for APC (Auto Power Control/light intensity adjustment).
Half Mirror Reflects part of the laser beam to the APC-PD PCB.
Imaging Lens Causes the laser beam to form an image on the drum.
Reflection Mirror Reflects the laser beam to the drum.
APC-PD PCB Ensures constant laser beam light intensity for each line.
Polygon Mirror Scans the laser beam in horizontal scanning direction.
Laser Scanner Motor Rotates the Polygon Mirror at a specified speed.
BD PCB Detects laser beam as a BD signal.
Controls
■ Overview
Laser Interface PCB Laser Scanner Unit
Laser ON/OFF Control

Laser Driver PCB
Horizontal scanning
Synchronous Control
Vertical scanning
Main Synchronous Control
Controller Riser Scanner Motor Unit
PCB 2 Board
APC Control
Laser Scanner Motor Control
Laser Shutter Control
Item Purpose/Content
Laser Activation Timing Con- Laser ON/OFF Control Turns the laser beam ON or OFF according to the combination of laser con-
trol trol signals.
Horizontal Scanning Syn- Aligns the write start position in the horizontal scanning direction.
chronization Control
Vertical Scanning Syn- Aligns the write start position in the vertical scanning direction.
chronization Control
Laser Intensity Control APC (Auto Power Control) Ensures constant laser beam light intensity for each line.
Digital Registration Control Digitally corrects distortion and skew of the image data.
Duplex Copy Ratio Correction Corrects the magnification ratio on the front and back sides by performing
image processing.
Laser Scanner Motor Control Rotates the Polygon Mirror at a specified speed.
Control to Turn OFF Laser (Safety of Laser) Prevents the inside of the machine from being exposed by laser beams.
■ Laser Activation Timing Control

● Laser ON/OFF Control
Turns the laser beam ON or OFF according to the combination of laser control signals.
67
Control signal Polygon Morror

Laser
Laser Interface Driver
PCB PCB
Video signal Laser Beam
<Execution timing>
After power-on
<Control description>
The Laser Interface PCB switches between four modes (Force Off Mode, APC Mode, Print Mode, and Standby Mode) based on
the laser control signals.
Mode Laser Status Remarks

Force Off OFF Clears the light intensity setting determined by the APC.
APC ON Adjusts the laser intensity.
Print mode OFF/ON Emits the laser according to the video signal.
Standby mode OFF The machine is in standby mode.
Print Image formation

instruction ready timing
PSTBY PINTR PRINT LSTR PSTBY
BD
1 Laser
2 Laser
3 Laser
࣭ ࣭ ࣭
࣭ ࣭ ࣭
࣭ ࣭ ࣭
32 Laser
Forcible
Mode name Standby APC Standby
mode APC mode/PRINT mode OFF
mode mode
mode
● Horizontal Scanning Synchronization Control

Aligns the write start position in the horizontal scanning direction.
<Execution timing>
Every 32 lines.
1. Laser phase coefficient inside the ROM on the Laser Driver is sent to the Laser Interface PCB (when replacing the Laser
Scanner Unit).
2. The Laser Interface PCB forcefully activates the Laser 32 laser diode on the Laser Driver PCB by setting the APC mode to
the Laser 32 laser control signal.
3. The BD PCB is located on the light path of Laser 32 laser beam and the laser beam is emitted to the BD PCB.
4. The BD PCB generates the reference BD signal by detecting the Laser 32 laser beam, and sends the signal to the Laser
Interface PCB.
5. The Laser Interface PCB generates the horizontal scanning synchronization signal every 32 lines based on the laser phase
coefficient and the reference BD signal.
6. The video signal sent from the Main Controller is output to the Laser Driver PCB according to the horizontal scanning
synchronization signal.
68
BD BDPCB
PBD ASIC signal
signal
(UN965/UN966/
Horizontal UN967/UN968)
scanning Laser
synchronous phase
signal coefficient Laser 32
EEPROM
generation
assembly Laser 31
Main
Controller Video Laser
PCB 2 Video signal Driver Polygon Mirror
(UN986) signal Horizontal PCB
scanning (UN953/UN954/ Laser 2
synchronous UN955/UN956)
signal
(T) Laser 1
Laser Interface PCB

(UN950)
APC-PDPCB
(UN961/UN962/
UN963/UN964)
Laser 1 T
Laser 2 T
Laser 3 T
Laser 32 T
Standard BD
● Vertical Scanning Synchronization Control

Aligns the write start position in the vertical scanning direction.
<Execution timing>
At every print
• Synchronization control in the vertical scanning direction is performed with reference to the PTOP signal (image formation
start signal).
• When image formation becomes possible, the PTOP signal (image formation start signal) is generated, and each color laser
lights up at the timing delayed by the spacing between drums based on this signal.
69
Print request signal Image formation

(Start Key ON) ready timing
PSTBY PINTR PRINT LSTR PSTBY
Laser Scanner Interval to stabilize

Motor (Y,M,C,Bk) the rotation*1
PTOPVLJQDO
Y-TOPVLJQDO
Laser Y is ON
M-TOPVLJQDO
Laser M is ON
C-TOPVLJQDO
Laser C is ON
Bk-TOPVLJQDO
Laser Bk is ON
■ Laser Intensity Control

● APC (Auto Power Control)
Ensures constant laser beam intensity for each 32 beam.
<Execution timing>
While the Polygon Mirror is rotating (non-imaged area)
1. The Laser Interface PCB outputs the laser control signal to the Laser Driver IC in the Laser Driver PCB.
2. The Laser Driver IC sets APC mode, and sequentially forcibly activates laser diodes (LD1 to LD329 ). At the same time, the
Laser Driver IC monitors the light intensity of the laser diodes (LD1 to LD32) using photodiodes (PD), and adjusts the input
to the laser diodes to ensure that the light intensity from each laser diode has uniform intensity.
Laser Driver PCB
LD32
Laser Beam
APC-PD PCB
PD
Power Supply +5V Laser Control

Circuit Laser Driver Signal Laser
IC Interface PCB
Amplifiter
Circuit LD2
LD1
■ Digital Registration Control

In the printer engine, the image dots are formed at undesirable positions for a variety of reasons, causing color displacement and
color unevenness.
While image position (color displacement) correction control can correct the positional displacement caused by offset in the
vertical/horizontal scanning direction or the copy ratio, distortion or skew of the image cannot be corrected.
Therefore the digital registration digitally corrects image data using the Main Controller based on distortion or skew information
sent from the image position (color displacement) correction control.
■ Duplex Copy Ratio Correction

Corrects the magnification difference between the front and the rear due to shrinkage level between the 1st side and the 2nd
side.
70
During 2-sided printing, the paper temporarily shrinks when it passes through the fixing area after the image formation of the 1st
side. If image formation on the 2nd side is continued as-is, the image on the 2nd side is extended (which makes the the image
on the 2nd side larger than that on the the 1st side and causes a mismatch in copy ratio) when the paper size returns to the
original size after the paper is delivered outside the machine.
<Execution timing>
At image formation on the 2nd side of 2-sided print
When the 2nd side is printed, the following controls are executed with consideration of paper's shrinkage level.
Reduces the image by skipping image data.
Enlarges the image by adding image data.
<Laser Lighting>
Horizontal scanning
Without Correction
With Correction
Vertical scanning
■ Laser Scanner Motor Control

Rotates the Polygon Mirror at a specified speed.
<Execution timing>
At power-on and startup.
1. The motor speed control unit on the Laser Interface PCB forcefully rotates the motor.
2. It detects the speed detection signal (FG, BD), compares it with the reference signal generated by the reference signal
generator, and controls the acceleration signal (ACC) and deceleration signal (DEC) to keep the standard speed.
APC-PD PCB (UN961/UN962/UN963/UN964)
Laser Scanner Motor(M104/M105/M106/M107)
BD PCB
(UN965/UN966/UN967/UN968)
ACC
DEC
FG
BD
Laser Interface PCB
Laser Control Signal (UN950)
<Related error code>

• E100: Laser Scanner Motor BD Error
• E110: Laser Scanner Motor Error
71
■ Control to Turn OFF Laser (Safety of Laser)

Prevents the inside of the machine from being exposed to laser beams.
<Execution timing>
At power-on and startup.
The Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB stops the Laser Driver power and the output signal when a cover (e.g. the Main
Station Front Cover) is opened. By doing so, laser exposure is prevented.
Laser Driver PCB

(UN953/UN954/UN955/UN956)
For driving the driver circuit

(data retention)
For driving laser
Laser Interface PCB Main Station

(UN950) Power Supply Relay
PCB
(UN102)
DC5V
DC/DC Main Station Front Right Cover Switch
SW111
DC3.3V
DC/DC Main Station Front Left Cover Switch
SW112
Multi-purpose Tray Cover Open/Close Switch

SW113
Vertical Path Cover Open/Close Switch

SW116
DC12V
12V Power Supply
Power Unit Limiter
PCB B
PCB (UN401)
(UN531)
72
Image Formation System
Overview
An elastic ITB is adopted to achieve optimal secondary transfer for various types of paper. The material of the elastic ITB has
been changed from resin to rubber in order to realize highly reproducible images with increased transfer efficiency even on rough-
textured paper.
In addition, high image quality has been realized by the addition of a cooling function to the Color Developing Assembly, which
lowers the temperature in the area surrounding the Developing Assembly to improve stability of hue and prevent deterioration of
developer and toner.
■ Roles/Functions
Various Specifications
Item Roles/Functions
Specifications of the Drum Unit Drum type OPC Drum
(Photosensitive Drum) Drum diameter (mm) 84 in diameter
Cleaning mechanism Brush Roller + Blade
Process speed (mm/s) iPRC10000VP : 464, iPRC8000VP : 348
Specifications of the Developing Diameter of the Developing Cyl- Upper: 24.5 in diameter, Lower: 20 in diameter
Assembly inder (mm)
Developing method Dry, 2-component
Toner Non-magnetic negative toner
Detection of the toner level in None
the Developing Assembly
Specifications of the Primary Charging method Corona charging
Charging Assembly Diameter of the Discharge Wire 60 in diameter
(micro meter)
Cleaning mechanism Engagement of the Cleaning Pad
25-second cycle
Specifications of the Toner Con- Toner level detection Detection by video count/Piezo (Piezoelectric Oscillator) Sensor
tainer Toner fill-up amount Approx. 1600 g for each of Y, M, C, and Bk
Specifications of the Intermedi- ITB (Intermediate Transfer Belt) Elastic, seamless
ate Transfer Unit Circumferential length 2236 mm
Width 360 mm
Belt drive Driven via gears by the ITB Drive Motor
Cleaning mechanism Bias Roller + Brush Roller + Blade
73
Toner Container
Laser Scanner Unit
Thermopile
Potential Sensor
Thermistor Encoder Thermopile
Potential Sensor Thermistor
Developing Primary Charging Assembly

Upper Cylinder
Developing
Assembly
Developing Drum Cleaning Brush Roller

Lower Cylinder
Photosensitive Drum
Primary Transfer Roller ITB (Intermediate Transfer Belt)
Process Unit (Y) Process Unit (M) Process Unit (C) Process Unit (Bk)
ITB Patch Sensor /

Registration Patch Sensor
ITB Drive Roller ITB Cleaning Brush Roller (Downstream)

Steering Roller
ITB Cleaning Brush Roller (Upstream)
ITB Cleaning Bias Roller (Downstream)
Secondary Transfer Inner Roller
ITB (Intermediate Transfer Belt)
ITB Cleaning Bias Roller (Upstream)
Post-Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator

Leading Edge Registration Patch Sensor
Secondary Transfer Outer Belt
Intermediate Transfer Unit
Secondary Transfer Cleaning Brush Roller
Secondary Transfer Cleaning Bias Roller Secondary Transfer Cleaning Bias Roller
■ Drive Configuration
● Process Unit
The Process Unit of each color has one of each of these motors.
Motor Driven object

Developing Motor • Developing Upper Cylinder
• Developing Lower Cylinder
• A Screw
• B Screw
• C Screw
• Waste Toner Feed Screw (Developing Assembly side)
Drum Drive Motor Photosensitive Drum
Drum Cleaner Motor • Drum Cleaning Brush Roller
• Waste Toner Feed Screw (Drum Cleaning Unit side)
74
Motor Driven object

Developing Assembly Knock Motor Knock Plate
Solenoid Driven object

Drum Patch Sensor Shutter Solenoid Drum Patch Sensor Shutter
DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198)
Drum Driver PCB (Y/M/C/Bk) (UN125/UN126/UN127/UN128)
M133 M142
M127 M141
M115 M M M139
M121 M140
Knocking Plate Cam
Photosensitive
M203 Drum
M204
M205 M
M206
Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB

(UN102)
Drum Cleaning
A Screw Brush Roller
B Screw
Developing
Upper Cylinder B Screw Developing
Lower Cylinder M134
Waste Toner Feed Screw M
M128
M116
M122
C Screw
Process Kit Driver PCB (Y/M/C/Bk) (UN161/UN162/UN163/UN164)
Code Parts name

M133/M127/M115/M121 Developing Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)
M142/M141/M139/M140 Drum Drive Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)
M134/M128/M116/M122 Drum Cleaner Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)
M203/M204/M205/M206 Developing Assembly Knock Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)
<Related error codes>

• E012: Drum/ITB Drive Motor error
0x00: Drum Drive Motor error (x = 1: Y, 2: M, 3: C, 4: Bk)
FF**: Drum Drive Motor drive convergence timeout
• E016: Drum Cleaner Motor error When the motor lock signal is not detected although a specified period of time has passed.
0x00: Drum Cleaner Motor error (x = 1: Y, 2: M, 3: C, 4: Bk)
• E023: Developing Motor error
0x00: Developing Motor error (x = 1: Y, 2: M, 3: C, 4: Bk)
75
• E820: Drum Cooling Fan error

010x: Suction Side Cooling Fan error (x = 1: Y, 2: M, 3: C, 4: Bk)
020x: Exhaust Side Cooling Fan error (x = 1: Y, 2: M, 3: C, 4: Bk)
0301: Error in the Process Unit Side Front Cooling Fan (Y)
0302: Error in the Process Unit Side Rear Cooling Fan (Y)
0303: Error in the Developing Assembly Cooling Fan 1 (Y)
• E998: PCB connection error PCB connection detection port error
010x: Suction Side Cooling Fan error (x = 1: Y, 2: M, 3: C, 4: Bk)
1000: Process Unit Driver PCB (Bk)
1001: Process Unit Driver PCB (C)
1010: Process Unit Driver PCB (M)
1011: Process Unit Driver PCB (Y)
1100: Drum Driver PCB (Bk)
1101: Drum Driver PCB (C)
1110: Drum Driver PCB (M)
1111: Drum Driver PCB (Y)
76
● Transfer Area
Cartridge Motor
Drive Signal
Hopper Hopper Hopper Hopper
Driver Driver Driver Driver
PCB (Y) PCB (M) PCB (C) PCB (Bk)
(UN165) (UN166) (UN167) (UN168)
M146 M145 M143 M144
Hopper Assembly Y M C Bk
Y M C Bk
Developing Assembly M133 M127 M115 M121
ITB Drive Motor Drive Signal M142 M141 M139 M140
M109 ITB
Developing Motor
Developing Motor
Developing Motor
Developing Motor
Cleaning Motor
Cleaning Motor
Cleaning Motor
Cleaning Motor
Drive Signal
Drive Signal
Drive Signal
Drive Signal
Drive Signal
Drive Signal
Drive Signal
Drive Signal
ITB Driver PCB Drum Driver PCB Drum Driver PCB Drum Driver PCB Drum Driver PCB
(Middle) (UN217) (Y) (UN125) (M) (UN126) (C) (UN127) (Bk) (UN128)
Code Parts name Code Parts name

M109 ITB Drive Motor M141 Drum Drive Motor (M)
M115 Developing Motor (C) M142 Drum Drive Motor (Y)
M121 Developing Motor (Bk) M143 Toner Container Motor (C)
M127 Developing Motor (M) M144 Toner Container Motor (Bk)
M133 Developing Motor (Y) M145 Toner Container Motor (M)
M139 Drum Drive Motor (C) M146 Toner Container Motor (Y)
M140 Drum Drive Motor (Bk)
77
For information on the drive configuration of the Secondary Transfer Unit, refer to Overview of the Secondary Transfer Unit.
● Toner Supply Area
Process Unit Driver PCB (Y/M/C/Bk) (UN161/UN162/UN163/UN164)
Hopper Driver PCB (Y/M/C/Bk) (UN165/UN166/UN167/UN168)

(UN102)
M138 M137 M193 M146 M195

M132 M M131 M M191 M M145 M M198 M
M120 M119 M190 M143 M197
M126 M125 M192 M144 M196
Toner Strring Blade
Toner Strring Blade
Toner Feed Screw
Toner Strring Blade
Toner Feed Screw
Code Parts name

M137/M131/M119/M125 Sub Hopper Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)
M146/M145/M143/M144 Toner Container Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)
M193/M191/M190/M192 Toner Container Slide Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)
M195/M198/M197/M196 Hopper Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)
M138/M132/M120/M126 Toner Feed Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)

• E025-0100: Hopper Motor error (Y)
• E025-0200: Hopper Motor error (M)
• E025-0300: Hopper Motor error (C)
• E025-0400: Hopper Motor error (K)
• E025-0110: Toner Container Motor overcurrent detection error (Y)
• E025-0210: Toner Container Motor overcurrent detection error (M)
• E025-0310: Toner Container Motor overcurrent detection error (C)
• E025-0410: Toner Container Motor overcurrent detection error (K)
78
• E025-0120: Sub Hopper Motor overcurrent detection error (Y)

• E025-0220: Sub Hopper Motor overcurrent detection error (M)
• E025-0320: Sub Hopper Motor overcurrent detection error (C)
• E025-0420: Sub Hopper Motor overcurrent detection error (K)
• E025-0150: TD ratio upper limit error (Y)
• E025-0250: TD ratio upper limit error (M)
• E025-0350: TD ratio upper limit error (C)
• E025-0450: TD ratio upper limit error (K)
• E025-0151: TD ratio upper limit error (Y)
• E025-0251: TD ratio upper limit error (M)
• E025-0351: TD ratio upper limit error (C)
• E025-0451: TD ratio upper limit error (K)
79
● Waste Toner Feeding Area
Fixing Duplex Pre-fixing Feed Process Unit Process Unit Process Unit Process Unit
Feed Driver PCB Driver PCB Driver PCB (Y) Driver PCB (M) Driver PCB (C) Driver PCB (Bk)
(UN311) (UN107) (UN161) (UN162) (UN163) (UN164)
M138 M134 M132 M128 M120 M116 M126 M122
Developing
Assembly Y M C Bk
Drum Cleaning Unit
Toner Exit Slot
Developing
Toner
Exit Slot
M180
ITB Cleaning Unit ITB Cleaning Unit Toner Feed Screw
Waste Toner
Container ITB
M108 Secondary Transfer
M179 Inner Roller
Secondary Transfer
Cleaning Unit
Waste Toner Buffer
M314 ITB Cleaning Unit
Toner Discharge Screw
M183 M210
Secondary Transfer
Waste Toner
Feed Screw
Secondary Transfer
Waste Toner
Discharge Screw
Secondary Transfer/
Duplex Driver PCB
(UN106)
DC Controller PCB 1-2

(UN124)
■ Bias Types
● Process Unit
• As preparation for laser exposure, the surface of the Photosensitive Drum is uniformly charged with negative potential.
• Residual toner on the surface of the Photosensitive Drum is collected and cleaned to prepare for the next printing (primary
charging, laser exposure, developing, and primary transfer).
80
Item Specifications
Photosensitive Drum Primary charging method Corona charging
charging DC component rating specification range -1300 to 0 V (standard value: -1100 to -700 V)
DC component voltage correction factor Environment Sensor
Developing bias AC component standard value 1700 Vp-p (fixed)
DC component rating specification range -1000 to 0 V (standard value: -700 to -500 V)
Voltage correction factor Environment Sensor
Toner blocking bias DC component standard value -1350 to -1550 V
Primary Charging Grid Plate
0V
-1300V
Developing Cylinder
0V
-700V
1700Vp-p
Splash Prevention
0V
-1350V
-1550V
● Transfer Area
Item Specifications
Primary transfer bias Transfer method Roller transfer
Transfer target Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB)
DC component rating specifica- -2,000 to +7,000 V
tion range
Voltage correction factor Environment Sensor
Secondary transfer cleaning bias DC component rating specifica- Upstream: +2,500 to +3,000 V
tion range Downstream: -2,000 to -1,000 V
Secondary transfer bias Transfer method Roller transfer
Transfer target Paper (transfer material)
DC component rating specifica- -10,000 to 0 V
tion range
Voltage correction factor Paper type, Environment Sensor
Post-Secondary Transfer Static Elimination DC component rating specifica- 0 to +2,500 V
Bias tion range
ITB cleaning bias DC component rating specifica- Upstream: -5,000 to 0 V
tion range Downstream: 0 to +5,000 V
81
ITB Cleaning Bias (Downstream) Primary Transfer Bias
7,000V
5,000V
ITB Cleaning Bias (Upstream)
0V
0V -2,000V
0V
-5,000V
Secondary Transfer Bias

Secondary Transfer
0V Cleaning Bias (Downstream)
0V
-10,000V
-1,000V
Secondary Transfer -2,000V
Post-Secondary Transfer
Cleaning Bias (Upstream)
Static Elimination Bias
3,000V
2,500V
2,500V
0V
0V
High voltage is supplied by the High Voltage Unit to the blocks of the image formation system. See the various sections for details.
Developing High Voltage PCB

(Y/M/C/Bk)
(UN133/UN134/YM135/YM136)
Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage PCB

(Y/M/C/Bk)
(UN137/UN138/YM139/YM140)
Toner Blocking High Voltage PCB

(Y/M/C/Bk)
(UN194/UN193/YM191/YM192)
Y M C Bk
Developing Cylinder
Photosensitive Drum
82
ITB Cleaning Bias Roller (Downstream)
Primary Transfer Roller

Post-Secondary
Transfer Static Secondary Transfer
Eliminator Cleaning Bias Roller
Secondary Transfer
Cleaning Bias Roller
ITB Cleaner ITB Cleaner Post-secondary Transfer Secondary Cleaning Secondary Transfer Primary Transfer
High Voltage PCB 1 High Voltage PCB 2 Static Elimination High Voltage PCB (+/-) High Voltage PCB High Voltage PCB (Y/M/C/Bk)
(Upstream) (Downstream) High Voltage PCB (UN971/UN972) (UN116) (UN112/UN113/UN114/UN115)
(UN148) (UN149) (UN108)
* 1 sheet each for Y, M, C and Bk
■ Print Process
2.Laser Beam Exposure Photosensitive Drum
1.Charging
8.Photosensitive Drum Cleaning

3.Developing
Y M C Bk
4. Primary 4. Primary 4. Primary 4. Primary

Transfer Transfer Transfer Transfer
7. ITB Cleaning ITB
Delivery Fixing 6.Separation 5. Secondary Pickup

Transfer
Secondary Transfer Outer Belt Cleaning Rotation Of Photosensitive Drum/ITB

Flow Of Paper
Function Block STEP Function

Static latent image for- 1 Primary charg- 1. As preparation for pre-exposure primary charging, the Photosensitive
mation block ing Drum is irradiated by the Pre-Exposure LED to remove residual charge
from the drum surface in order to prevent density unevenness.
2. As preparation for primary charging laser exposure, the surface of the
Photosensitive Drum is uniformly charged with negative potential. The Pri-
mary Charging Assembly has been adopted to indirectly apply charges
from the Charging Wire to the Photosensitive Drum.
2 Laser exposure On the negatively charged surface of the Photosensitive Drum, the area ex-
posed to the laser beam has higher potential, and that area form a static latent
image.
Developing block 3 Development Contact development is performed by non-magnetic, 2-component develop-
ment. Negatively charged toner from the 2 (upper and lower) Developing Cyl-
inders adheres to the static latent image on the surface of the Photosensitive
Drum to create a visible image.
Transfer block 4 Primary transfer The purpose is to transfer the toner image on the surface of the Photosensitive
Drum to the paper via the ITB. Toner on the surface of the Photosensitive Drum
is transferred to the ITB by applying positive charge from the back side of the
ITB. This process is sequentially performed on each of the Y, M, C and Bk Drum
Units.
83
Function Block STEP Function

Transfer block 5 Secondary Toner on the ITB is transferred to paper.
transfer
6 Separation With the curvature separation method, the paper is separated from the Secon-
dary Transfer Outer Belt. A positive charge determined by the paper type is
applied to the Static Eliminator to ease separation of the paper from the Sec-
ondary Transfer Outer Belt.
Intermediate Transfer 7 ITB cleaning After secondary transfer the ITB is cleaned by the Brush Rollers to remove
Belt (ITB) cleaning residual toner from the ITB. The Brush Rollers which are engaged with the ITB
block attract residual toner with the charged Bias Rollers. Toner collected by the
Brush Rollers, after being scraped off via the Bias Rollers by the Cleaning
Blades, is fed by the Toner Ejection Screw and ejected to the Waste Toner
Buffer.
Photosensitive Drum 8 Photosensitive 1. Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure
cleaning block Drum cleaning Due to the potential difference at the edge of the toner layer on the ITB, a
minute gap is formed between the drum and the ITB, where a discharge
phenomenon occurs and a drum memory is formed. Residual toner ad-
hering to the Cleaning Blades is attracted to this drum memory area. Drum
cleaning pre-exposure is performed to erase this drum memory.
2. Drum cleaning
Residual toner adhering to the Photosensitive Drum is removed to clean
the Photosensitive Drum.
Secondary transfer - The residual toner from the patch image is removed and the ITB and Secondary
cleaning block Transfer Outer Belt are cleaned. The brush rollers applied to the Secondary
Transfer Outer Belt are charged by the bias rollers to attract the residual toner.
Toner collected by the Brush Rollers, after being scraped off via the Bias Rollers
by the Cleaning Blades, is fed by the Toner Ejection Screw and ejected to the
Waste Toner Buffer.
Controls
■ Process Unit
The Process Unit consists of the Developing Assembly, Photosensitive Drum, Primary Charging Assembly and the Drum Cleaning
Unit.
There is one of each of them for each color (Y, M, C and Bk), and the basic configuration is the same for all colors.
Developing Assembly
Drum Cleaning Unit
Drum Patch Sensor Photosensitive Drum
Drum Patch Sensor Shutter Solenoid
● Primary Charging Bias Control

The primary charging bias generates a uniform negative charge over the entire surface of the Photosensitive Drum to prepare in
for electrostatic latent image formation by laser exposure.
There are two types of primary charging bias as follows.
• Primary charging DC bias (PRIMARY-Y, PRIMARY-M, PRIMARY-C, PRIMARY-K)
• Grid DC bias (GRID-Y, GRID-M, GRID-C, GRID-K)
84
The primary charging bias is generated by each of circuit boards UN137, UN138, UN139, and UN140 (the Primary Charger High
Voltage PCB) and applied at specified timings to the Primary Charging Wire and the Primary Charging Grid Plate according to
signals (HV-PRIM-Y-GRID-ON, HV-PRIM-M-GRID-ON, HV-PRIM-C-GRID-ON, HV-PRIM-K-GRID-ON) from DC Controller PCB
1-1.
The grid DC bias value is determined by the result of potential control.
Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage PCB (Y/M/C/Bk) (UN137/UN138/UN139/UN140)

• E065-0101: Primary Charging High Voltage output error (Y)
• E065-0201: Primary Charging High Voltage output error (M)
• E065-0301: Primary Charging High Voltage output error (C)
• E065-0401: Primary Charging High Voltage output error (K)
● Primary Charging Assembly Cleaning Control

The Primary Charging Assembly has a Cleaning Pad to prevent soiling of the Primary Charging Wire and Grid Plate.
<Execution timing>
• When the fixing temperature is 50 deg C at power-on (warm-up rotation)
• Whenever the time count reaches the following values during continuous printing (job interruption)
• iPR C10000VP: When drum rotation time reaches the equivalent of 6,500 images
• iPR C8000VP: When drum rotation time reaches the equivalent of 5,200 images
• At last rotation for jobs that take more than the time indicated below
• iPR C10000VP: When drum rotation time reaches the equivalent of 5,500 images (A4)
• iPR C8000VP: When drum rotation time reaches the equivalent of 4,400 images (A4)
• In the case of executing "Clean Wire" in Settings/Registration
When the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor rotates the Cleaner Screw clockwise/counterclockwise, the Primary Charging
Wire and Grid Plate are cleaned by reciprocating motion (approx. 35 seconds) of the Cleaning Pad that moves in conjunction
with the Cleaner Screw.
DC Controller PCB 1-2 outputs Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor drive signals via the respective Process Unit Driver PCBs
to perform Primary Charger cleaning control.
The signals output to the respective Process Unit Driver PCBs by DC Controller PCB 1-2 are "PRIM_WIRE_CLEANER_MTR_
CW" and "PRIM_WIRE_CLEANER_MTR_CCW". Primary Charger cleaning is performed when the respective Process Unit Driver
PCBs output drive signals (see Memo below) to their respective Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motors.
The relationship between signals output by DC Controller PCB 1-2 and Primary Charger cleaning operation is as follows.
• When PRIM_WIRE_CLEANER_MTR_CW is "1": The Cleaning Pad moves to the front side.
• When PRIM_WIRE_CLEANER_MTR_CCW is "1": The Cleaning Pad moves to the rear side.
85
NOTE:
Drive signals from the Process Unit Driver PCB (Y) to the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (Y):
• PRIM-WIRE-CLEANER-MTR-Y-CW
• PRIM-WIRE-CLEANER-MTR-Y-CCW
Drive signals from the Process Unit Driver PCB (M) to the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M):
• PRIM-WIRE-CLEANER-MTR-M-CW
• PRIM-WIRE-CLEANER-MTR-M-CCW
Drive signals from the Process Unit Driver PCB (C) to the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (C):
• PRIM-WIRE-CLEANER-MTR-C-CW
• PRIM-WIRE-CLEANER-MTR-C-CCW
Drive signals from the Process Unit Driver PCB (Bk) to the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (Bk):
• PRIM-WIRE-CLEANER-MTR-K-CW
• PRIM-WIRE-CLEANER-MTR-K-CCW

(UN124)
Cleaning Screw
Primary Charging
Wire Cleaner Primary Charging
Hp Sensor Wire Cleaning Motor
(Y/M/C/Bk) (Y/M/C/Bk)
Grid Plate
Primary Charging Wire
Grid Plate Cleaning Pad
Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad
● Primary Charging Shutter Control

To prevent uneven potential on the Photosensitive Drum caused by discharge products (nitrogen oxide) accumulated on the
Primary Charging Assembly.
86
Screw

Primary Charging Wire Cleaninng
Grid Plate
Motor (M118, M124, M130, M136)
Cleaninng Pad
Cleaninng Pad
Grid Plate
Shutter
<Execution timing>
• When the Main Power is turned OFF
• When a specified period of time has passed after the machine moved to the energy saver mode
• During engine sleep
The shutter is opened or closed by the cleaning mechanism of the Primary Charging Wire.
The Primary Charging Shutter is made of fiber and usually taken up by the bobbin.
The drive of the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M1) moves the Cleaning Pad to the rear and the shutter taken up by the
bobbin becomes extended to make the shutter closed.
Because the shutter comes between the Grid Plate and the Photosensitive Drum, discharge products from the Primary Charging
Assembly do not reach the Photosensitive Drum.
The Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor HP Sensor (PS240/PS241/PS242/PS243) detects opening/closing of the shutter.

• E060-0101: Primary Charging Wire Shutter operation start error (Y)
• E060-0201: Primary Charging Wire Shutter operation start error (M)
• E060-0301: Primary Charging Wire Shutter operation start error (C)
• E060-0401: Primary Charging Wire Shutter operation start error (K)
• E060-0110: Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP displacement error (Y)
• E060-0210: Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP displacement error (M)
• E060-0310: Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP displacement error (C)
• E060-0410: Primary Charging Wire Shutter HP displacement error (K)
● Pre-exposure LED Activation Control

Pre-exposure LED activation control eliminates residual charge of the static latent image before the Primary Charging Assembly
applies negative potential charge to the surface of the Photosensitive Drum.
By eliminating residual charge from the Photosensitive Drum surface, uneven density in the print image can be prevented and
images can be formed stably.
The DC Controller PCB 1-2 outputs a Pre-Exposure LED Unit irradiation signal via each Process Unit Driver PCB to execute Pre-
Exposure LED activation control.
87
The signal output from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 to each Process Unit Driver PCB is "PRE_EXPOSURE_LED". When each
Process Unit Driver PCB outputs the irradiation signal (PRE_EXPOSURE_LED_Y, PRE_EXPOSURE_LED_M, PRE_
EXPOSURE_LED_C, PRE_EXPOSURE_LED_K) to each Pre-exposure LED Unit, pre-exposure (elimination of residual charge)
is executed.
The relationship between the irradiation signal output from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and lighting of the Pre-Exposure LED is
as follows.
• When PRE_EXPOSURE_LED is "0": The Pre-Exposure LED turns OFF.
• When PRE_EXPOSURE_LED is "1": The Pre-Exposure LED turns ON.
Process Kit Driver PCB (Y/M/C/Bk)

(UN161/UN162/UN163/UN164)
Pre-exposure LED
(Y/M/C/Bk)

• E065-0111: Pre-Exposure LED open-circuit error (Y)
• E065-0211: Pre-Exposure LED open-circuit error (M)
• E065-0311: Pre-Exposure LED open-circuit error (C)
• E065-0411: Pre-Exposure LED open-circuit error (C)
● Drum Cleaning Unit

The Drum Cleaning Unit is located next to the Photosensitive Drum in the Process Unit, and collects residual toner from the
surface of the Photosensitive Drum.
In preparation for the next printing, the surface of the Photosensitive Drum is cleaned by collecting residual toner that was not
transferred to the ITB.
The Drum Cleaning Unit consists of the following parts.
• Drum Cleaning Blade
• Scraper
• Side Seal
• Drum Cleaning Brush Roller
• Waste Toner Feed Screw
• Drum Cleaning Pre-Exposure LED
88
Waste toner collected by the Drum Cleaning Brush Roller and the Drum Cleaning Blade is scraped off by the scraper in contact
with the Drum Cleaning Brush Roller and is fed to the Waste Toner Feed/Collection Unit by the Waste Toner Feed Screw.
Drum Cleaning Blade
Scraper
Drum Cleaning Brush Roller
Waste Toner Feed Screw
Drum Cleaning
Pre-exposure LED (Y/M/C/Bk)
M134
M128
M
M116
M122
Code Parts name

M134/M128/M116/M122 Drum Cleaner Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)
A. Drum Cleaning Brush Roller/Waste Toner Feed Screw Drive

The DC Controller PCB 1-2 outputs the Drum Cleaning Motor drive signal via each Process Unit Driver PCB to execute
Photosensitive Drum cleaning.
The signal output from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 to each Process Unit Driver PCB is "DRUM_CLEANER_MTR_ON". When a
Process Unit Driver PCB outputs a drive signal (DRUM-CLEANER-MTR-ON-Y, DRUM-CLEANER-MTR-ON-M, DRUM-
CLEANERMTR-ON-C, or DRUM-CLEANER-MTR-ON-K) to its Drum Cleaning Motor, cleaning of the Photosensitive Drum is
performed.
• When "DRUM_CLEANER_MTR_ON" is "0", the Drum Cleaning Brush Roller and Waste Toner Feed Screw do not rotate.
• When "DRUM_CLEANER_MTR_ON" is "1", the Drum Cleaning Brush Roller and Waste Toner Feed Screw rotate.

• E016-0100: Drum Cleaning Motor error (Y)
• E016-0200: Drum Cleaning Motor error (M)
• E016-0300: Drum Cleaning Motor error (C)
• E016-0400: Drum Cleaning Motor error (K)
B. Drum Cleaning Pre-Exposure LED

The surface potential of the Photosensitive Drum may be changed (become uneven) due to gap discharge that can occur during
the primary transfer.
Gap discharge occurs when a solid image on the upstream side (primary transfer is performed first) of the Process Unit passes
through the downstream side (primary transfer is performed later) of the Process Unit.
When the surface potential of the Photosensitive Drum changes, a latent image is created, causing occurrence of lines on the
image.
To avoid this latent image (uneven potential), the Drum Cleaning Pre-Exposure LEDs make the potential uniform.
The DC Controller PCB 1-2 outputs a Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure LED irradiation signal via each Process Unit Driver PCB to
control light of the Drum Cleaning Pre-Exposure LEDs.
The signal output from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 to each Process Unit Driver PCB is "PRE_CLEANER_EXPOSURE_LED".
When each Process Unit Driver PCB outputs the irradiation signal (PRE_EXPOSURE_LED2_Y, PRE_EXPOSURE_LED2_M,
89
PRE_EXPOSURE_LED2_C, PRE_EXPOSURE_LED2_K) to each Drum Cleaning Pre-Exposure LED, drum cleaning pre-
exposure (removal of uneven potential) is executed.
The relationship between the irradiation signal from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and lighting of the Drum Cleaning Pre-Exposure
LEDs is as follows.
• When "PRE_CLEANER_EXPOSURE_LED" is "0", the Drum Cleaning Pre-Exposure LEDs turn OFF.
• When "PRE_CLEANER_EXPOSURE_LED" is "1", the Drum Cleaning Pre-Exposure LEDs turn ON.

• E065-0112: Drum Cleaning Pre-Exposure LED open-circuit error (Y)
• E065-0212: Drum Cleaning Pre-Exposure LED open-circuit error (M)
• E065-0312: Drum Cleaning Pre-Exposure LED open-circuit error (C)
• E065-0412: Drum Cleaning Pre-Exposure LED open-circuit error (K)
● Drum Patch Sensor Shutter Open/Close Control

ATR patch detection (supply amount adjustment) and real-time multiple tone correction (Bk only) are performed by reading the
patch image formed between sheets with the Drum Patch Sensor.
<Execution timing>
Timing of when each patch image is formed
• ATR patch detection: small size - every 28 sheets (large size - every 14 sheets)
• Real-time multiple tone correction (Bk only): small size - 9 times every 56 sheets (large size - 9 times every 28 sheets)
* When both overlap, ATR has priority, and no patch image is formed during ATVC control.
Normally, the Film Shutter is closed to reduce soiling on the window of the Drum Patch Sensor.
During patch detection, the Drum Patch Sensor Shutter Solenoid is turned ON to pull the wire and open the Film Shutter. Moreover,
between sheets before execution of ATR patch detection, the Film Shutter is opened and closed to perform background detection.
The position of the Drum Patch Sensor differs between Y/M-color and C/Bk-color because the position of the patch image differs.
In addition, patch images of Y/C-color and M/Bk-color are formed alternately between sheets.
The patch images of the four colors do not overlap on the ITB because the four color patches are formed at different positions
and different timings.
Drum Patch Sensor
Wire
Film Shutter
Patch Sensor
Shutter Solenoid Open Sensor
Drum Patch Sensor

Shutter Solenoid
Process Unit Driver PCB (Y/M/C/Bk)

(UN161/UN162/UN163/UN164)
● Drum Heater Control

Photosensitive Drum sensitivity varies according to the installation environment (temperature and humidity).
This machine has a planar Drum Heater on the inside of the Photosensitive Drum and a thermopile and thermistor on the surface
of the Photosensitive Drum to control the temperature of the Photosensitive Drum.
The surface temperature of the Photosensitive Drum is continually measured by the thermopile and thermistor, and is kept
constant by repeating ON/OFF of the Drum Heater.
This machine uses a thermopile (contact-less infrared sensor) that better tracks the surface temperature of the Photosensitive
Drum and detects the temperature with higher accuracy as compared with conventional thermo sensors.
<Execution timing>
• When the Main Power Switch is ON
90
• When the Main Power Switch is OFF and the Environment Switch is ON (with the power plug connected)
The control temperature of the Drum Heater is controlled so that the drum surface temperature is between 36.5 and 42.5 deg C
(the setting can be changed in service mode (Lv.2)).
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-LSR > DH-ADJ
1. Based on the value of the Environment Sensor 2 (UN142), select the Photosensitive Drum surface control temperature by
referring to the table of temperature and moisture content.
2. The drum surface temperature is detected by the thermopile.
3. Based on the detected temperature of the drum surface, the drum surface temperature is kept constant by repeating
ON/OFF of the Drum Heater.
4. When the Drum Thermistor detects the upper limit temperature (50 deg C), the Drum Heater is turned OFF.

(UN161/UN162/UN163/UN164)
Photosensitive Drum
Thermopile
Thermistor
Drum Heater
Environment Heater Driver PCB (UN101)
91
Main Power Switch

Environment Sensor 2 (SW108)
(UN142)
ON
ON
Environment
Switch (SW107)

• E062-0100: Drum Heater (Y) initial low temperature error
• E062-0200: Drum Heater (M) initial low temperature error
• E062-0300: Drum Heater (C) initial low temperature error
• E062-0400: Drum Heater (K) initial low temperature error
• E062-0101: Drum Heater (Y) high temperature error
• E062-0201: Drum Heater (M) high temperature error
• E062-0301: Drum Heater (C) high temperature error
• E062-0401: Drum Heater (K) high temperature error
• E062-0102: Drum Heater (Y) low temperature error
• E062-0202: Drum Heater (M) low temperature error
• E062-0302: Drum Heater (C) low temperature error
• E062-0402: Drum Heater (K) low temperature error
■ Developing Assembly
The Developing Assembly develops electrostatic latent images formed on the surface of the Photosensitive Drum through
Developing Bias Control, thereby making them visible.
Developer inside the Developing Assembly is stirred and circulated by multiple screws and cylinders. Toner Blocking Bias Control
is performed to prevent contamination by undeveloped stray developer.
ACR Control is performed to extend the life of developer.
The names and functions of the main parts making up the Developing Assembly are as follows.
Part Role
A Screw (Supply Cham- To supply developer to the Developing Upper Cylinder.
ber)
92
Part Role
B Screw (Stirring Cham- It stirs toner supplied from the Sub Hopper and developer returned from the Developing Lower Cylinder and
ber) sends it to the Supply Chamber.
Blade It levels developer of the Developing Upper Cylinder to forms it into a uniform layer.
Developing Upper Cylin- It retains developer.
der
Developing Lower Cylin-
der
C Screw It sends developer that was not developed from the Developing Lower Cylinder to the Stirring Chamber.
Developing Assembly It vibrates the Developing Assembly to prevent toner from coagulating.
Knock Motor
Knock Plate
Developing Assembly Temperature and humidity of developer is detected.
Environment Sensor
Cam
Developing Knocking Motor
Knocking Plate Blade
Developing Assembly
A Screw
Developing Lower Cylinder

Developing Upper Cylinder
B Screw
Developing Environment Sensor Collection roller

C Screw
● Developing Bias Control

There are two types of developing bias as follows.
• Developing DC bias: The bias that generates potential difference with the Photosensitive Drum, causing developer to stick.
• Developing AC bias: Helps improve image quality.
These biases are generated by the various Developing Voltage PCBs (UN133, UN134, UN135, and UN136) and applied to the
upper and lower Developing Cylinders at prescribed timings determined by DC Controller PCB 1-1.
93
Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB (UN102) DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198)
Developing High Voltage PCB (Y/M/C/Bk)(UN133/UN134/UN135/UN136)
● Toner Blocking Bias Control

The toner blocking bias returns toner scattered from the Developing Assembly back to the Developing Cylinder due to the
difference in bias between the Collection Roller and the Developing Cylinder during development.
The DC Controller PCB 1-1 applies the toner blocking bias (negative DC) generated on each Toner Blocking High Voltage PCB
through each Developing High Voltage PCB to the Collection Roller.
The bias value is determined by the developing DC bias and the developing AC bias.
Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB DC Controller PCB 1-1

(UN102) (UN198)
Developing High Voltage PCB (Y/M/C/Bk)

(UN133/UN134/UN135/UN136)
Toner Blocking High Voltage PCB (Y/M/C/Bk)

(UN194/UN193/UN191/UN192)
● ACR Control
With ACR (auto carrier refresh) control, developer in the Developing Assembly is replaced a bit at a time in order to extend the
life of the developer.
Carrier is supplied a bit at a time along with the toner.
94
When the amount of developer increases, it is discharged from an outlet located on the downstream side of the supply chamber
inside the Developing Assembly.
An ACR Discharge Selection Switch is provided on the Developing Assembly to correct for shortages or excesses of developer
that may result from differences in printing speed by the host machine.
A Screw
B Screw
ACR Ejection Rate Change Switch
● Toner Anticoagulation Control

The Developing Assembly Knock Unit just above the Developing Assembly provides toner anticoagulation control.
In the Developing Assembly Knock Unit , the Developing Assembly Knock Motor rotates the cams, and the Knock Plates vibrate
up and down to the movement of the cams.
The Knock Plates are located on the front side and the rear side, and they move up and down alternately.
The vibration of the two Knock Plates at the front and rear prevents toner from coagulating in the Developing Assembly.
95
Developing Knocking Motor

(M203/M204/M205/M206) Developing
Assembly
Developing Knocking Unit
Knocking Plate Cam
Developing
Assembly
● Environment Control in the Developing Assembly

Environment control in the Developing Assembly is executed to reduce hue variation due to environment change in the Developing
Assembly.
Based on the temperature and humidity of the developer measured every second by the Developing Assembly Environment
Sensor, the laser power determined by potential control and the amount of toner supplied by ATR control are corrected.
The correction is performed during potential control or PASCAL control.
● Airflow Control
In order to prevent toner soiling on the Drum Patch Sensor, toner around the Drum Patch Sensor is ejected through the Primary
Exhaust Duct.
Primary Exhaust Duct
Drum Patch Sensor
96
■ Transfer Unit (ITB Unit)

The Transfer Mechanism consists of the Primary Transfer Unit and the Secondary Transfer Unit.
• Primary Transfer Unit: Toner on the Photosensitive Drum is transferred to the ITB.
• Secondary Transfer Unit: Toner on the ITB is transferred to paper.
Photosensitive Drum Photosensitive Drum
ITB Patch Sensor /

ITB Drive Roller
Primary Transfer Roller Primary Transfer Roller

Primary Transfer
Steering Roller
Assembly
Leading EdgeRegistration Patch Sensor

Secondary Transfer
Assembly ITB (Intermediate Transfer Belt)
ITB Drive Roller

Primary Transfer Roller
ITB Cleaning Brush Roller (Downstream)

ITB Cleaning Bias Roller(Downstream)
ITB Cleaning Brush Roller (Upstream)
ITB Cleaning Blade

ITB Cleaning Unit Toner Feed Screw
ITB Cleaning Unit Toner Discharge Screw
Secondary Transfer
Post-Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator Cleaning Brush Roller (Downstream)
Secondary Transfer Cleaning Brush Roller (Upstream)
Secondary Transfer
Secondary Transfer Cleaning Bias Roller (Upstream) Cleaning Bias Roller (Downstream)
Secondary Transfer
Secondary Transfer Cleaning Blade (Upstream) Cleaning Blade (Downstream)
Secondary Transfer Cleaning Unit Toner Feed Screw
● Transfer Bias Control

The three types of transfer bias used in the Primary Transfer Unit are as follows.
1. Primary transfer bias
DC positive bias used for transferring toner from the Photosensitive Drum to the ITB.
This is generated by the various colors' Primary Transfer High Voltage PCBs (Y/M/C/K) (UN112, UN113, UN114, UN115)
upon command from DC Controller 1-2, and applied to the Primary Transfer Roller.
Upon jam recovery, this becomes reverse DC bias (with the same polarity as the toner) to return toner from the ITB to the
Photosensitive Drum.
97
2. ITB cleaning bias (upstream)

DC negative bias used for removing positively charged residual toner from the ITB.
This is generated by the ITB Cleaning High Voltage PCB (Upstream) (UN148) upon command from DC Controller 1-2, and
applied to the ITB Cleaning Bias Roller (Upstream).
After adhering to the ITB Cleaning Brush Roller (Upstream), residual toner on the ITB is attracted to the ITB Cleaning Bias
Roller (Upstream) by the applied bias. The toner is then collected by the ITB Cleaning Blade (Upstream) that is engaged
with the ITB Cleaning Bias Roller (Upstream).
3. ITB cleaning bias (downstream)
DC negative bias used for removing negatively charged residual toner from the ITB.
This is generated by the ITB Cleaning High Voltage PCB (Downstream) (UN149) upon command from DC Controller 1-2,
and applied to the ITB Cleaning Bias Roller (Downstream).
After adhering to the ITB Cleaning Brush Roller (Downstream), residual toner on the ITB is attracted to the ITB Cleaning
Bias Roller (Downstream) by the applied bias. The toner is then collected by the ITB Cleaning Blade (Downstream) that is
engaged with the ITB Cleaning Bias Roller (Downstream).
The four types of transfer bias used in the Secondary Transfer Unit are as follows.
1. Secondary transfer bias
DC negative bias used for transferring toner from the ITB to the paper.
This bias is generated by the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB (UN116) upon command from DC Controller 1-1, and
applied to the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller.
2. Secondary transfer cleaning (upstream)
DC positive bias used for removing negatively charged residual toner from the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt.
This bias is generated by the Secondary Transfer Cleaning High Voltage PCB (UN971) upon command from DC Controller
1-2, and applied to the Secondary Transfer Cleaning Bias Roller (Upstream).
After adhering to the Secondary Transfer Cleaning Brush Roller (Upstream), residual toner on the Secondary Transfer Outer
Belt is attracted to the Secondary Transfer Cleaning Bias Roller (Upstream) by the applied bias. The toner is then collected
by the Secondary Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade (Upstream) that is engaged with the Secondary Transfer Cleaning Bias Roller
(Upstream).
3. Secondary transfer cleaning (downstream)
DC positive bias used for removing negatively charged residual toner from the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt.
This bias is generated by the Secondary Transfer Cleaning High Voltage PCB (UN972) upon command from DC Controller
1-2, and applied to the Secondary Transfer Cleaning Bias Roller (Downstream).
After adhering to the Secondary Transfer Cleaning Brush Roller (Downstream), residual toner on the Secondary Transfer
Outer Belt is attracted to the Secondary Transfer Cleaning Bias Roller (Downstream) by the applied bias. The toner is then
collected by the Secondary Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade (Downstream) that is engaged with the Secondary Transfer
Cleaning Bias Roller (Downstream).
4. Post-secondary transfer static elimination bias
DC bias used for to prevent corrupt images on paper separated from the Secondary Transfer Belt; eliminates charge from
the back of the paper to prevent the toner image from shifting due to charge movement.
This bias is generated by the Post-secondary Transfer Static Eliminator High Voltage PCB (UN108) upon command from
DC Controller 1-2, and is applied to the Post-secondary Transfer Static Eliminator.
98
ITB Cleaner ITB Cleaner Primary Transfer Primary Transfer Primary Transfer Primary Transfer
High Voltage PCB High Voltage PCB High Voltage PCB High Voltage PCB High Voltage PCB High Voltage PCB
(Downstream) (Upstream) (Y) (UN112) (M) (UN113) (C) (UN114) (Bk) (UN115)
(UN149) (UN148)
ITB Cleaning Bias Roller

(Downstream)
Post-Secondary Transfer Static Eliminator
ITB Cleaning Bias Roller (Upstream) Primary Transfer Roller
Secondary Transfer
Post-secondary Transfer Secondary Transfer
Static Elimination
High Voltage PCB
secondary cleaning high voltage PCB (+/-) High Voltage PCB
(UN116)
(UN108) (UN971/972)

DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124) (UN198)
● Overview of the Primary Transfer Unit

The Primary Transfer Unit has five motors to drive the rollers and open/close the shutter.
Their operation is controlled by the DC Controller through the ITB Driver PCB or the Registration Patch Sensor Driver PCB.
• ITB Drive Motor (M109)
It rotates the ITB Drive Roller to move the ITB.
• Registration Patch Sensor Shutter Motor (M155)
It opens and closes the shutter when the Registration Patch Sensors (PS134 to 136) detect the patch image of each color
on the ITB.
Reference: “Image Position (Color Displacement) Correction” on page 135“Real-time Multiple Tone Control” on page 131
• ITB Steering Motor (M111)
It tilts the shaft of the Steering Roller to correct skew of the ITB.
• Leading Edge Registration Patch Sensor Shutter Motor (M114)
It opens and closes the shutter when the Leading Edge Registration Patch Sensor (PS110) detects the leading edge patch
image on the ITB.
• ITB Cleaner Motor (M108)
It rotates the ITB Cleaning Brush Rollers to collect residual toner from the ITB.
It also rotates the screws in the ITB Cleaning Unit to eject the collected toner.
99
DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198) DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124)
Registration Patch Sensor Driver PCB

ITB Driver PCB (Middle) (UN217)
(UN159)
M109 ITB Drive Roller ITB M155 PS134-136
Steering Roller
ITB Cleaning Brush Roller
ITB Cleaning Unit

Screw
M108 M114 M111

PS110
ITB Driver PCB (Right) (UN219) ITB Driver PCB (Middle) (UN217)
DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124) DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198)
● ITB Speed Control

The ITB Drive Motor (M109) rotates the ITB Drive Roller to drive the Intermediate Transfer Belt at a constant speed.
However, in actuality the ITB speed is subject to variations in speed itself, and the load applied when paper enters the Secondary
Transfer Outer Belt causes variations as well.
To maintain constant ITB speed, this machine monitors encoders that are coupled to the ITB Drive Roller.
ITB Drive Roller Encoder Sensors A/B (PS221/222) count encoder rotation as pulses and feed back the amount of ITB Drive
Roller rotation to DC Controller 1-1 to control speed.
At this time, ITB Driver Roller HP Sensor (PS223) determines the starting position of ITB Drive Roller rotation (the home position).
Further, since variations in ITB speed differ for each individual Intermediate Transfer Belt, a profile of speed variations is
automatically generated for each unit.
This profile is stored in DC Controller RAM each time the Intermediate Transfer Belt rotates.
DC Controller 1-1 corrects ITB speed by referring to this profile and the results of measurement by the encoders.

(UN198)
Encoder
ITB Drive Roller
ITB
PS222 PS221
ITB Driver PCB (Middle) ITB
(UN217)
PS223
M109
ITB Drive Roller ITB Driver PCB (Middle) (UN217)
The home position of the Intermediate Transfer Belt is detected by sensing reflective spots that are located at the edges of the
ITB by the ITB HP Lower Sensor (PS101) and the ITB HP Upper Sensor (PS102).
100
Since the home position can be detected by either the ITB HP Lower Sensor or the ITB HP Upper Sensor, it can be determined
more quickly than would be possible with a single sensor.

ITB
PS102 ITB Driver PCB (Middle) (UN217)
Reflecting Surface
PS101

PS101 ITB HP Lower Sensor PS102 ITB HP Upper Sensor
● ITB Displacement Correction Control

Images can be displaced due to the ITB shifted off center of the rollers while the ITB is running.
This machine prevents image displacement by detecting the direction and amount of the ITB displacement every 70 msec with
a sensor and correcting the displacement of the ITB.
When the ITB has shifted toward the front or rear, the displacement amount of the ITB Edge Sensor Flag is detected by the ITB
Edge Sensor (PS100) and is fed back to the DC Controller 1-1.
Based on the displacement amount, the DC Controller 1-1 drives the ITB Steering Motor (M111) to rotate the cam.
When the cam rotates and moves the Support Arm on the front side of the Steering Roller up and down, the Steering Roller tilts
upward/downward.
Tilting the Steering Roller generates a difference in the displacement force at the front and rear of the ITB, and the ITB can be
thus shifted back to the center of the rollers.
The home position of the ITB Steering Motor is detected by the ITB Steering Motor HP Sensor (PS104).
Since the configuration of the edge of the ITB differs from ITB to ITB, a profile of the edge configuration needs to be created in
service mode when the ITB is replaced.
ITB displacement is corrected by checking the profile and the result of measurement by the ITB Edge Sensor.
101
ITB Driver PCB (Middle) (UN217)
ITB
PS100
ITB Displacement Sensor Flag
Cam
M111
PS104 Steering Roller
Support Arm
The home position of the ITB is detected by the ITB HP Lower Sensor (PS101) and the ITB HP Upper Sensor (PS102). For
details, refer to "ITB Speed Control".
NOTE:
After replacing the ITB, create a profile of the edge configuration in the following service mode.
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INIT-ITB
● Leading Edge Registration Control

The machine forms a leading edge patch image immediately before the image to be printed in order to align the paper with the
image on the ITB.
When the Leading Edge Registration Patch Sensor (PS110) detects the leading edge patch image, paper feed starts. The image
on the ITB is transferred to the paper at the Secondary Transfer Unit after paper skew and speed are adjusted.
The Leading Edge Registration Patch Sensor is normally separated from the ITB by the shutter, and performs detection when
the shutter is opened when necessary.
The shutter is opened and closed by the Leading Edge Registration Patch Sensor Shutter Motor (M114).
The shutter home position is detected by the Leading Edge Registration Patch Sensor Shutter HP Sensor (PS105).
102
ITB Driver PCB (Right) (UN219)
M114
Shutter
PS110
ITB
PS105
● ITB Cleaning Control

A residue of positively and negatively charged toner remains on the ITB following secondary transfer.
The ITB Cleaning Unit electro-statically removes each of these from the ITB.
Reverse DC bias is applied to the ITB Cleaning Bias Roller (Upstream), applying a negative charge to the ITB Cleaning Brush
Roller (Upstream) with which it is in contact.
After adhering to the ITB Cleaning Brush Roller (Upstream), positively charged toner is attracted to the ITB Cleaning Bias Roller
(Upstream) and then scraped off by the ITB Cleaning Blade.
DC bias is applied to the ITB Cleaning Bias Roller (Downstream), applying a positive charge to the ITB Cleaning Brush Roller
(Downstream) with which it is in contact.
After adhering to the ITB Cleaning Brush Roller (Downstream), negatively charged toner is attracted to the ITB Cleaning Bias
Roller (Downstream) and then scraped off by the ITB Cleaning Blade.
The scraped-off toner is fed by the ITB Cleaning Unit Toner Feed Screw and ejected to the Waste Toner Buffer by the ITB Cleaning
Unit Toner Ejection Screw.
All rollers and screws in the ITB Cleaning Unit are driven by the ITB Cleaner Motor (M108).
103

ITB Drive Roller ITB

(Downstream)

(Downstream)
ITB Cleaning Blade

(Upstream)
M108
ITB Cleaning Unit Toner Feed Screw
ITB Cleaning Unit Toner Discharge Screw
● Overview of the Secondary Transfer Unit

The Secondary Transfer Unit has three motors to drive the rollers and to engage and disengage the Secondary Transfer Unit.
These operations are controlled by the DC Controller through the Secondary Transfer/Duplex Driver PCB.
• Secondary Transfer Drive Motor (M183)
The following rollers and screw rotate to perform secondary transfer and eject the collected toner.
• Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
• Secondary Transfer Cleaning Brush Rollers (2 pcs)
• Secondary Transfer Cleaning Bias Rollers (2 pcs)
• Secondary Transfer Waste Toner Feed Screw
NOTE:
Secondary Transfer Outer Belt Rotation Sensor (PS920) detects rotation of the Secondary Transfer Drive Motor (M183).

• E013-0010: Secondary Transfer Drive Motor speed error (with the sensor ON)
• E013-0011: Secondary Transfer Drive Motor speed error (with the sensor OFF)
• Secondary Transfer Pressure Release Motor (M184)

It engages the Secondary Transfer Unit with the ITB when secondary transfer is performed, and disengages the Secondary
Transfer Unit when secondary transfer is not performed.
• Secondary Waste Toner Ejection Motor (M210)
• Secondary Transfer Waste Toner Ejection Screw
104
Secondary Transfer Outer Roller

ITB
PS166 Secondary Transfer

Cleaning Brush Roller
M183
Secondary Transfer
PS920 Cleaning Bias Roller
Secondary Transfer
Secondary Transfer
Pressure Release Shaft
Secondary Transfer
M184 Cleaning Brush Roller
PS205,PS167
Secondary Transfer
Waste Toner Discharge Screw M210
Secondary Transfer/Duplex Driver PCB (UN106)

PS166 Secondary Transfer Outlet Sensor M183 Secondary Transfer Drive Motor
PS167 Secondary Transfer Pressure Release HP Sensor M184 Secondary Transfer Pressure Release Motor
PS920 Secondary Transfer Outer Belt Rotation Sensor M210 Secondary Transfer Waste Toner Ejection Motor
● Secondary Transfer Outer Belt Cleaning Control

The Secondary Transfer Unit collects residual toner from the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt and ejects it to the Waste Toner
Buffer.
Secondary transfer cleaning consists of secondary transfer cleaning (upstream) and secondary transfer cleaning (downstream)
for attracting residual toner of different polarity from the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt.
Positive DC bias is applied to the Secondary Transfer Cleaning Bias Roller (upstream) and negative DC bias is applied to the
Secondary Transfer Cleaning Bias Roller (downstream), and their Secondary Transfer Cleaning Brush Rollers contacting them
are charged (+/-) .
After the residual toner from the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt is picked up by the Secondary Transfer Cleaning Brush Rollers
according to the polarity, it is attracted to the Secondary Transfer Cleaning Bias Rollers and scraped off by the Secondary Transfer
Cleaning Blades.
The scraped toner is carried by the Secondary Waste Toner Feed Screw and ejected into the Waste Toner Buffer by the Secondary
Transfer Waste Toner Ejection Screw.
The rollers in the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt and the Secondary Transfer Waste Toner Feed Screw are driven by the
Secondary Transfer Drive Motor (M183).
The Secondary Transfer Waste Toner Ejection Screw is driven by the Secondary Transfer Waste Toner Ejection Motor (M210).
Due to clogging with waste toner, rotation of the Secondary Transfer Waste Toner Ejection Screw slows down, which also slows
down rotation of the Secondary Waste Toner Ejection Motor ,and an error is detected.
When this period exceeds a specific amount, the DC Controller 1-2 displays the error on the Control Panel.
105
ITB
Secondary Transfer
Cleaning Brush Roller
Secondary Transfer
Secondary Transfer
Cleaning Blade
M183
Secondary Transfer
Secondary Transfer Cleaning Brush Roller Waste Toner Feed Screw
Secondary Transfer Cleaning Blade

M210
Secondary Transfer Waste Toner Discharge Screw

M183 Secondary Transfer Drive Motor M210 Secondary Transfer Waste Toner Ejection Motor
Secondary Transfer Waste Toner Feed Screw
Secondary Transfer
Waste Toner Discharge Screw
Secondary Transfer
Secondary Transfer
M210 Cleaning Brush Roller M183
Secondary Transfer/Duplex Driver PCB (UN106)

M183 Secondary Transfer Drive Motor M210 Secondary Transfer Waste Toner Ejection Motor
106
● Secondary Transfer Unit Engagement/Disengagement Control

The Secondary Transfer Unit is engaged with the ITB when the image is transferred from the ITB to the paper, and is disengaged
when not needed.
The engagement/disengagement operation is performed by the Secondary Transfer Pressure Release Motor (M184) controlled
by the DC Controller PCB 1-2 through the Secondary Transfer/Duplex Driver PCB. This operation is detected by the Secondary
Transfer Pressure Release Motor Position Sensor (PS205) and the Secondary Transfer Pressure Release HP Sensor (PS167).
When engaged, the Secondary Transfer Pressure Release Motor rotates the Secondary Transfer Pressure Release Shaft
clockwise.
The Secondary Transfer Unit is pushed up along with the Pre-fixing Feed Unit to a position where the Secondary Transfer Pressure
Release Motor Position Sensor switches from ON to OFF.
To disengage, the Secondary Transfer Pressure Release Motor rotates the Secondary Transfer Pressure Release Shaft
counterclockwise.
The Secondary Transfer Unit is lowered along with the Pre-fixing Feed Unit to a position where the Secondary Transfer Pressure
Release HP Sensor switches from ON to OFF.
NOTE:
Disengagement is executed also during initial rotation.
M184
PS167
PS205
Secondary Transfer/Duplex Driver PC (UN106)
Code Parts name

M184 Secondary Transfer Pressure Release Motor
PS167 Secondary Transfer Pressure Release HP Sensor
PS205 Secondary Transfer Pressure Release Motor Position Sensor
107
When The Secondary Transfer Assembly Is Locked !

ITB
Pre-Fixing Feed Unit
Secondary Transfer
Pressure Release Shaft
PS205 PS167
M184 PS205,PS167
When The Secondary Transfer Assembly Is Unlocked !
PS205 PS167
Code Parts name

PS167 Secondary Transfer Pressure Release HP Sensor
PS205 Secondary Transfer Pressure Release Motor Position Sensor
M184 Secondary Transfer Pressure Release Motor
■ Toner Container
● Toner Supply Mechanism
The Toner Supply Mechanism consists of the Toner Container, Stirring Screw, Feed Screw, Hopper and Sub Hopper.
The toner fill-up amount is 1600 g for the Toner Container, 2100 g for the Hopper, and 40 g for the Sub Hopper.
As described later, Toner Container Presence Detection, Hopper Unit Drive Control, Toner Level Detection and Toner Supply
Control are the same for each color.
108
Toner Container
Toner Strring Blade Toner Strring Blade
Hopper
Sub Hopper
Toner Feed Screw
Toner Strring Blade
● Toner Container Detection

The presence/absence of Toner Containers in the Hopper Unit is detected by the Toner Container Sensors (Y: PS126, M: PS125,
C: PS123, Bk: PS124).
The detection results are passed to DC Controller PCB 1-2 via the various Hopper Driver PCBs.
Sensor Flag Toner Container Sensor
ON OFF
Toner Container
● Toner Supply Mechanism Drive Control

The Toner Supply Mechanism is driven by the Toner Container Motor, Toner Container Slide Motor, Hopper Motor, Sub Hopper
Motor, Toner Feed Motor and gears. The Toner Supply Mechanism of each color has one of each of these motors.
109
Motor Driven object

Toner Container Motor Toner Stirring Blade (Toner Container)
Toner Container Slide Motor Toner Container
Hopper Motor • Toner Stirring Blade (Hopper)
• Toner Feed Screw (Hopper, between Hopper and Sub Hopper)
Sub Hopper Motor Toner Stirring Blade (Sub Hopper)
Toner Feed Motor Toner Feed Screw (Sub Hopper)
Process Unit Driver PCB (Y/M/C/Bk) (UN161/UN162/UN163/UN164)

(UN102)
M138 M137 M193 M146 M195

M132 M M131 M M191 M M145 M M198 M
M120 M119 M190 M143 M197
M126 M125 M192 M144 M196
Toner Strring Blade
Toner Strring Blade
Toner Feed Screw
Toner Strring Blade
Toner Feed Screw
Code Parts name

M193/M191/M190/M192 Toner Container Slide Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)
M138/M132/M120/M126 Toner Feed Motor (Y/M/C/Bk)
● Toner Level Detection

Piezo sensors are located at the sides of the Hopper and Sub Hopper to detect whether toner is present.
Toner in the Hopper is detected by Hopper Toner Level Sensors1 and 2, and toner in the Sub Hopper is detected by Sub Hopper
Toner Level Sensor 1.
110
The toner level is judged from the combined detection results (ON/OFF) of the various sensors.
Sensor name Y M C Bk
Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1 TS130 TS132 TS134 TS136
Hopper Toner Level Sensor 2 TS131 TS133 TS135 TS137
Sub Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1 TS106 TS104 TS100 TS102
The results of toner detection by the various sensors are conveyed to DC Controller PCB 1-2 via the Hopper Driver PCB or the
various Process Unit Driver PCBs.
Hopper Toner
Lever Sensor 1
(Y/M/C/Bk) Sub Hopper Toner
Lever Sensor 1 (Y/M/C/Bk)
Hopper Toner
Lever Sensor 2 (Y/M/C/Bk)
The Remaining Toner Level is judged from the ON/OFF combinations of the respective sensors and relevant information is
displayed on the Control Panel.
The relationship between sensor ON/OFF results, toner levels, and Control Panel display is as follows.
Control Panel display Sensor ON/OFF Toner level

- Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1: ON Toner Container contains toner, Hopper contains
Hopper Toner Level Sensor 2: ON toner (full): 100 to 54%
Sub Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1: ON
Ready to replace the toner car- Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1: OFF Toner Container empty, Hopper contains toner
tridge. Hopper Toner Level Sensor 2: ON (full, 2 hours worth): 54 to 16%
Replace toner cartridge. Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1: OFF Toner Container empty, Hopper contains less
Hopper Toner Level Sensor 2: OFF than 2 hours worth of toner: 16 to 0%
Replace toner cartridge. Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1: OFF Toner Container and Hopper both empty: 0%
Hopper Toner Level Sensor 2: OFF
Sub Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1: OFF
● Detection of New Toner Container
Toner Container ID Read Sensor

(UN909,UN910,UN911,UN912)
Barcode
Toner Container
Each Toner Container has a unique bottle ID.
111
The bottle ID is printed as a bar code on the Toner Container, and is read by its Toner Container ID Read Sensor (UN112, UN113,
UN114, or UN115) when the Toner Container is installed to the host machine.
The read Toner Bottle ID is saved in the DC Controller, where up to 1,000 IDs can be stored. The host machine determines
whether the Toner Container is new or old on the basis of the read bottle ID.
Toner Bottle Counters (X = 1 to 4: Bk, Y, M, and C)
General Name Counter No. Advancement of the counter

Toner Bottle Counter 007X When a new part (a new bottle ID number) is detected
Toner Container Installation/Removal Counter 008X When a new part (a new bottle ID number) is detected
(including premature removal) When the same bottle ID number as that of a bottle which had been
inserted before is detected
When a Toner Bottle with an unidentified bar code is detected
Unidentified Bottle Counter 018X When a Toner Container with an unidentified bar code is detected
<Related alarms>
Toner Bottle replacement alarm: 100100-XXXX (-XXXX represents the foregoing counter number.)
An alarm is generated when 007X or 018X advances.
The 008X alarm is generated only when a partially used toner bottle previously removed from the Host machine is reinserted. (It
is not generated when a new Toner Container or a Toner Container with unidentified bar code is detected.)
The alarm log is maintained in the host machine, and a notification is sent to UGW.
● Toner Supply Control

Toner supply type depends on conditions at each sensor. There are three types of toner supply, as follows.
• Supply from Toner Container to Hopper
• Supply from Hopper to Sub Hopper
• Supply from Sub Hopper to Developing Assembly
When three hours passes after the last toner supply, such as during low-duty image printing or after non-use for a long time, the
Hopper Motor rotates for five seconds to stir the toner and prevent solidification.
A. Supply from Toner Container to Hopper

Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1 detects toner every 100 msec. When Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1 is continuously OFF for 20
times (two seconds), DC Controller PCB 1-2 outputs a drive signal to the Toner Container Motor and through the Hopper Driver
PCB to the Hopper Motor. The Toner Container Motor runs for five seconds to supply toner from the Toner Container to the
Hopper. The Hopper Motor stirs the supplied toner. After toner is supplied, Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1 returns its new toner
detection status.
If Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1 is still OFF when the toner detection status is returned, the toner supply operation is repeated.
When this toner supply operation has repeated 100 times the Toner Container is judged to be empty, and the Toner Container
Replacement message is displayed on the Control Panel.
However, pressing the Hopper Cover Switch (Y: SW104, M: SW103, C: SW101, Bk: Sw102) stops toner supply immediately.
B. Supply from Hopper to Sub Hopper

Sub Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1 detects toner every 100 ms. When Sub Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1 is continuously OFF for
seven times (0.7 seconds), DC Controller PCB 1-2 outputs a drive signal through the Hopper Driver PCB to the Hopper Motor.
The Hopper Motor runs for six seconds to supply toner from the Hopper to the Sub Hopper. After toner is supplied, Sub Hopper
Toner Level Sensor 1 returns its new toner detection status.
If Sub Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1 is still OFF when the toner detection status is returned, the toner supply operation is repeated.
When this toner supply operation has repeated three times the toner is judged to be exhausted and printing stops as the no-toner
animation is displayed on the Control Panel.
Toner Supply After No-Toner Animation Display
After a print job has been stopped with Sub Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1 turned OFF, the following operations are executed
when the Toner Container is replaced. At this time, "Preparing toner..." is displayed on the Control Panel and no new print jobs
are accepted.
1. The Toner Container Motor continues to run until Hopper Toner Level Sensor 2 turns ON.
Hopper Toner Level Sensor 2 detects toner every 100 ms. When Hopper Toner Level Sensor 2 is continuously OFF for ten
times (one second), the Toner Container Motor runs for ten seconds to supply toner from the Toner Container to the Hopper.
After toner is supplied, Hopper Toner Level Sensor 2 returns its new toner detection status.
If Hopper Toner Level Sensor 2 is still OFF when the toner detection status is returned, the toner supply operation is repeated.
When this toner supply operation has repeated 50 times the Toner Container is judged to be empty, and the Toner Container
Replacement message is displayed on the Control Panel. The print job remains halted.
When Hopper Toner Level Sensor 2 turns ON, operation proceeds to 2).
112
2. The Hopper Motor continues to run until Sub Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1 turns ON.
Sub Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1 detects toner every 100 msec. When Sub Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1 is continuously
OFF for seven times (0.7 seconds), the Hopper Motor runs for six seconds to supply toner from the Hopper to the Sub Hopper.
After toner is supplied, Sub Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1 returns its new toner detection status.
If Sub Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1 is still OFF when the toner detection status is returned, the toner supply operation is
repeated. When this toner supply operation has repeated 30 times the toner is judged to be exhausted and printing stops as
the no-toner indication is displayed on the Control Panel.
When Sub Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1 turns ON, the "Preparing toner..."
indication is cleared from the Control Panel and normal printing operation resumes.
C. Supply from Sub Hopper to Developing Assembly

Toner is supplied from the Sub Hopper to the Developing Assembly.
DC Controller PCB 1-2 outputs a drive signal through the Process Unit Driver PCB to the Sub Hopper Motor to supply toner to
the Developing Assembly.
Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB (UN102)

(UN161/UN162/UN163/UN164)
M195 M146 M137

M198 M145 M131
M M M
M197 M190 Toner Container M119
M196 M192 M125
Sub Hopper Assembly

(Y/M/C/Bk)
Developing Assembly
(Y/M/C/Bk)
Code Parts name


• E025: Hopper Motor error When the motor lock signal is not detected although a specified period of time has passed.
0x00: Hopper Motor error (x = 1: Y, 2: M, 3: C, 4: Bk)
• E027: Block Supply Toner Motor error
0x01: Toner Motor lock (x = 1: Y, 2: M, 3: C, 4: Bk)
0x02: Toner Motor sequence error (x = 1: Y, 2: M, 3: C, 4: Bk)
• E028: Toner Container Slide Motor error
0x01: Toner Container Slide Motor lock (x = 1: Y, 20: M, 3: C, 4: Bk)
113
■ Toner Collection Mechanism

● Toner Collection
This machine feeds and collects used toner discharged from the outlets of the four image formation units (Developing Assembly,
Drum Cleaning Unit, Secondary Transfer Cleaning Unit and ITB Cleaning Unit).
Waste toner is collected at two locations: in the Waste Toner Container and the Waste Toner Buffer.
The metal spring has been eliminated from the Waste Toner Buffer, and the Waste Toner Buffer Solenoid has been added as a
measure to keep the Waste Toner Buffer Full Sensor Window clean.
When the predetermined condition is met, the solenoid vibrates the Waste Toner Buffer so that waste toner drops away from the
sensor window.
Waste Toner Buffer Solenoid(SL420)

Sheet
SL420=OFF
Sheet Waste Toner Buffer Full Sensor
(TS128)
Toner
SL420
TS128
SL420=ON
SL420
Toner
TS128
Flow of Toner
To Waste Toner Container
114
Sub Station Main Station
Drum Cleaning Unit Drum Cleaning Unit
Drum Cleaning Unit Drum Cleaning Unit

Developing Developing Developing Developing
Assembly Assembly Assembly Assembly
Y M C Bk
ITB Cleaning Unit
Secondary Transfer Cleaning Unit
Waste Toner Buffer

Waste Toner
Container
Developing Assembly
The Developing Motor (Y/M/C/Bk) (M133/M127/M115/M121) rotates the Waste Toner Feed Screw to feed toner.
Drum Cleaning Unit

The Drum Cleaner Motor (Y/M/C/Bk) (M134/M128/M116/M122) rotates the Waste Toner Feed Screw to feed toner.
Toner collected from the Developing Assemblies and Drum Cleaning Units is fed to the Waste Toner Buffer by rotation of the
screw in the Waste Toner Pipe driven by the Drum Waste Toner Feed Motor (M180).
The Drum Waste Toner Feed Motor is also used to stir accumulated toner in the Waste Toner Buffer.
Secondary Transfer Cleaning Unit

The Secondary Transfer Drive Motor (M183) rotates the Waste Toner Feed Screw to feed toner, and the Secondary Transfer
Waste Toner Ejection Motor (M210) rotates the Secondary Transfer Waste Toner Ejection Screw to collect toner into the Waste
Toner Buffer.
• E013-0012: Error in speed of the Secondary Transfer Waste Toner Ejection Motor
ITB Cleaning Unit

The ITB Cleaner Motor (M108) rotates the Waste Toner Feed Screw to feed toner into the Waste Toner Buffer.
Toner in the Waste Toner Buffer is fed by rotation of the screw in the Waste Toner Pipe driven by the Buffer Motor (M179).
The Buffer Motor is also used to stir accumulated toner in the Waste Toner Buffer.
Toner fed from the Waste Toner Buffer is fed into the Waste Toner Container by rotation of the screw in the Waste Toner Pipe
driven by the Waste Toner Feed Motor (M314).
Until the Waste Toner Container becomes full, toner is fed into the Waste Toner Container without being accumulated in the
Waste Toner Buffer.
When the Waste Toner Container has become full, toner can be temporarily accumulated in the Waste Toner Buffer, but the
Waste Toner Container must be promptly replaced.
115
Fixing Duplex Pre-fixing Feed Process Unit Process Unit Process Unit Process Unit
Feed Driver PCB Driver PCB Driver PCB (Y) Driver PCB (M) Driver PCB (C) Driver PCB (Bk)
(UN311) (UN107) (UN161) (UN162) (UN163) (UN164)
M138 M134 M132 M128 M120 M116 M126 M122
Developing
Assembly Y M C Bk
Drum Cleaning Unit
Toner Exit Slot
Developing
Toner
Exit Slot
M180
ITB Cleaning Unit ITB Cleaning Unit Toner Feed Screw
Waste Toner
Container ITB
M108 Secondary Transfer
M179 Inner Roller
Secondary Transfer
Cleaning Unit
Waste Toner Buffer
M314 ITB Cleaning Unit
Toner Discharge Screw
M183 M210
Secondary Transfer
Waste Toner
Feed Screw
Secondary Transfer
Waste Toner
Discharge Screw
Secondary Transfer/
Duplex Driver PCB
(UN106)

(UN124)

M108 ITB Cleaner Motor M134 Drum Cleaner Motor (Y)
M116 Drum Cleaner Motor (C) M133 Developing Motor (Y)
M115 Developing Motor (C) M179 Buffer Motor
M122 Drum Cleaner Motor (Bk) M180 Drum Waste Toner Feed Motor
M121 Developing Motor (Bk) M183 Secondary Transfer Drive Motor
M128 Drum Cleaner Motor (M) M210 Secondary Transfer Waste Toner Ejection Motor
M127 Developing Motor (M) M314 Waste Toner Feed Motor
116
● Waste Toner Full Level Detection

This machine uses a magnetic sensor and waste toner count to detect the level of waste toner.
DC Controller 1-2 refers to the detection result of the magnetic sensor and waste toner count for each output when the power is
turned on or the front cover is opened or closed.
On these occasions, if the detection result of either the magnetic sensor or the waste toner count exceeds a specified level, DC
Controller 1-2 sends either "Waste toner full alert" or a "Waste toner full" message to the Main Controller.
A. Detection by Magnetic Sensors

1. Detection in the Waste Toner Container
There are two magnetic sensors on the left side of the Waste Toner Container: Waste Toner Full Sensors 1 (TS301) and 2
(TS300).
When the toner level detected by the Waste Toner Full Sensor 2 exceeds the specified value, the Waste Toner Container
nearly full notification message is displayed. Printing is allowed to continue.
When the toner level detected by the Waste Toner Full Sensor 1 exceeds the specified value, the Waste Toner Container
full message is displayed. Printing can still continue, but after the message appears, the Buffer Motor (M179) and Waste
Toner Feed Motor (M314) are stopped, and the subsequent waste toner accumulates in the Waste Toner Buffer.
Detected to (location) Waste toner Message type Message

level
Waste Toner Full Sensor 2 (TS300) 80 % Waste Toner Container Waste toner is near full. (Replacement not yet nee-
nearly full notification ded.)
Waste Toner Full Sensor 1 (TS301) 100 % Waste Toner Container Replace the waste toner container.
full
CAUTION:
The display timing of the Waste Toner Container messages (nearly full notification and full message) cannot be changed.
2. Detection at the Waste Toner Buffer

The Waste Toner Buffer Full Sensor (TS128) is on the rear of the Waste Toner Buffer.
To keep the Waste Toner Buffer Full Detection Sensor Window clear, when the specified condition is met, the Waste Toner
Buffer Tapping Solenoid vibrates the Waste Toner Buffer so that waste toner drops away from the sensor window (the
solenoid is turned ON and OFF three times in a period of 100 ms in each tapping operation ).
When the toner level exceeds the specified value, the Waste Toner Buffer Full message is displayed. Also, the Drum Waste
Toner Feed Motor (M180) stops, and the machine operation stops.
Detected to (location) Waste toner Message type Message

level
Waste Toner Buffer Full Sensor (TS128) 100% Waste Toner Buffer full Replace the waste toner container.
When replacing the Waste Toner Container, the recovery mode is activated and toner in the Waste Toner Buffer is fed to
the Waste Toner Container. Operation restarts automatically when the Waste Toner Buffer Full Sensor turns OFF.
CAUTION:
The display timing of the Waste Toner Buffer Full message cannot be changed.
NOTE:
• The output of the Magnetic Sensor for detecting magnetic bodies changes depending on the amount of carrier in the waste
toner. The DC Controller PCB 1-2 determines the amount of toner collected in the Waste Toner Container or the Waste Toner
Buffer according to the change in sensor output.
• The recovery mode is activated when the Waste Toner Container is replaced after the Waste Toner Buffer has become full.
During replacement, when the OFF state of the Waste Toner Full Sensors 1 and 2 is detected, waste toner in the Waste Toner
Buffer is automatically fed to the Waste Toner Container.
117
Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB Pre-fixing Feed Driver PCB

(UN311) (UN107)
SL420 TS128
M180
Waste Toner Buffer

SW109
Waste Toner
Container
M179
SW300
TS301
SW110
TS300 M314

M179 Buffer Motor SW300 Waste Toner Ejection Lock Switch
M180 Drum Waste Toner Feed Motor TS128 Waste Toner Buffer Full Sensor
M314 Waste Toner Feed Motor TS300 Waste Toner Full Sensor 2
SW109 Drum Waste Toner Lock Switch TS301 Waste Toner Full Sensor 1
SW110 Transfer Waste Toner Lock Switch SL420 Waste Toner Buffer Solenoid
B. Detection by waste toner count

With this machine, a waste toner count is used as an auxiliary means of detecting waste toner quantity, protecting against the
possibility of problems that result if the Waste Toner Full Sensor fails.
The waste toner count uses a software counter is used to count the number of sheets printed, and the quantity of waste toner
collected in the waste toner container is calculated from that value.
When the counter value reaches 150,000, a alert message is displayed to warn that the Waste Toner Container is almost full.
Printing is allowed to continue.
When the counter value reaches 200,000, a message is displayed indicating that the Waste Toner Container is full. Printing can
still continue, but after the message appears, the Buffer Motor (M179) and Waste Toner Feed Motor (M314) are stopped, and
the subsequent waste toner accumulates in the Waste Toner Buffer.
Counter values Message type Message

150000 Waste Toner Container almost full alert Waste toner is near full. Replacement not yet needed.
200000 Waste Toner Container full Replace the waste toner container.
CAUTION:
The display timing of the Waste Toner Container messages (nearly full notification and full message) cannot be changed.
This counter value is reset when the Waste Toner Receptacle is pulled out.
Therefore, if the Waste Toner Receptacle is opened and closed before the Waste Toner Container is replaced, the waste toner
quantity calculated from the waste toner count will not reflect the actual toner quantity.
Be aware that the waste toner count is only an auxiliary backup to the Magnetic Sensor.
Further, if the waste toner message disappears when the Waste Toner Receptacle is inserted, it means that the waste toner
count is showing that that the container is full. Since this may indicate trouble with the Waste Toner Full Sensor, you should check
the sensor and replace it if necessary.
118

• E013-0001: Waste Toner Feed Path lock error
When output of the Drum Waste Toner Lock Switch (SW109) is "1" for more than 1 second
If clogging of toner collected from the Developing Assembly and Cleaning Unit prevents rotation of the Waste Toner Screw
when the Drum Waste Toner Feed Motor (M180) is driven, the Waste Toner Screw Drive Gear is pressed and the switch
goes ON.
After checking the Drum Waste Toner Feed Motor and replacing it if necessary, start the following service mode to clear the
error.
<When ejecting all toner in the Waste Toner Pipe>
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > WTNR-ALL
<When ejecting all toner in the Waste Toner Pipe from the Developing Assembly and Cleaning Unit to the Waste Toner
Buffer>
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > WTNR-BUF
When output of the Waste Toner Ejection Lock Switch (SW300) is "1" for more than 1 second
If clogging of toner collected prevents rotation of the Waste Toner Screw on the Sub Station side when the Waste Toner
Feed Motor (M314) is driven, the Waste Toner Screw Drive Gear is pressed and the switch goes ON.
After checking the Waste Toner Feed Motor and replacing it if necessary, start the following service mode to clear the error.
<When ejecting all toner in the Waste Toner Pipe from the Waste Toner Buffer to the Waste Toner Container>
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > WTNR-BOX
When output of the Transfer Waste Toner Lock Switch (SW110) is "1" for more than 1 second
If clogging of toner fed from the Waste Toner Buffer prevents rotation of the Waste Toner Screw on the Main Station side
when the Buffer Motor (M179) is driven, the Waste Toner Screw Drive Gear is pressed and the switch goes ON.
To clear the error, check or replace the Buffer Motor, and then execute the following service mode.
<When ejecting all toner in the Waste Toner Pipe from the Waste Toner Buffer to the Waste Toner Container>
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > WTNR-BOX
• E013-0006: Waste Toner Full Sensor adjustment error
• E013-0021: Waste Toner Full Sensor 1 error
• E013-0022: Waste Toner Full Sensor 2 error
• E013-0023: Waste Toner Buffer Full Sensor error
• E013-0033: Soiled Waste Toner Buffer Full Sensor window
• E019-0001: Drum Waste Toner Feed Motor error
• E019-0002: Waste Toner Feed Motor error
• E019-0003: Buffer Motor error
■ Image Stabilization Control

● Overview of Image Stabilization Control
The quality of the printed image is affected by changes in the installation environment and deterioration of the image formation
parts due to long-term operation.
This machine performs image stabilization control to achieve stable printing over a long period of time.
Image Stabilization Control
Control Description
Potential control Determines the charging condition, laser power and developing bias
ATR control Determines the toner supply amount
D-max PASCAL control Determines the image density correction voltage
PASCAL control Determines the laser power and gradation adjustment table
Real-time multiple tone control Determines the gradation adjustment table (partially laser power)
ATVC control Determines the transfer bias
119
Laser Scanner Unit
Potential Sensor
Developing Toner
Density Sensor
Drum Patch Sensor
DC Controller
Potential
D-max PASCAL Contorl ATR Control
Control
Real Time Multiple Tone Control Drum Patch Sensor

(ITB Upper Patch Sensor:Y/M/C) (Bk Only)
Main Controller
gamma-LUT
gamma-LUT
Color Sensor PASCAL Contorl
* D-max PASCAL control is performed as one step of PASCAL control.

ITB Cleaning Bias Roller (Downstream) (Upstream)
Constant Current Control ATVC Control
● Image Stabilization Control Timing

Execution items for image stabilization control differ according to the machine's environment, condition of image formation parts,
etc.
120
Timing Time Type of control

Conditions for re- Cleaning Poten- D-max Grada- Real- Image Primary Patch ATR
execution quired of the tial PASCA- tion PAS- time mul- position Transfer Sensor (patch
(sec.) Primary Con- LAL CAL tiple tone correc- ATVC Adjust- forma-
Charging trol control tion ment tion)
Wire/Pre-
Transfer
Charging
Wire
Warm-up rotation auto adjustment (at power-on)
The temperature Approx. Yes Yes Yes*2 Yes Yes Yes
of the Fixing Roller 160
is 50 deg C or low-
er.
At recovery from sleep mode
15 Yes *3 Yes
Paper interval auto adjustment (during a job)
At every specified ---- Yes*1 Yes
paper interval
At job interruption Approx. Yes
every 6,500 120
sheets (5,200 (Approx.
sheets)*4 140)*4
Last rotation auto adjustment (at the time of completion of a job)
At last rotation Approx. Yes Yes
when 5,500 20
sheets (4,400
sheets)*4 have
been processed
Full adjustment
At auto gradation Approx. Yes Yes Yes Yes*2 Yes Yes
adjustment 180
o: Implemented
In real-time multiple tone control, the conditions for the patches to use change depending when the control starts and the
execution conditions.
Yes*1: Up to 5-gradation patches are generated on 3 types of screen between sheets.
Yes*2: Multiple tone control is executed by generating 10-gradation patches on 3 types of screen.
Yes*3: Executed as appropriate according to the time elapsed from the previous job to the current job.
*4: The figure in parentheses indicates the case of iPR C8000VP.
The control items executed in each sequence are shown below using iPR C10000VP as an example.
Power On Print Start
PRINT
WUPR STBY STBY .....
Page 1 Page 2 ........ Page 28 ........ Page 56 ........ Page 90
CNTR
approx. 160 (sec.)
1 Primary Charging Wire Cleaning

: ATR Control (Patch Sensor)
2 Secondary Transfer ATVC Control
3 Potential Control
4 Primary Transfer ATVC Control
5 Image Position Correction Control (Color Displacement)
6 Real Time Multiple Tone Control
Sequence Control description

CNTR At warm-up rotation after the first power-on
121
Print Start (7,500 Print : iPR C10000VP)
PRINT
...... STBY INTR
Page 1 ........ Page 2468 ........ Page 2500 ........ Page 4500 ........
approx. 10 - approx. 25 (sec.)
1 Secondary Transfer ATVC Control *1

3 Image Position Correction Control (Color Displacement) *1
PRINT
LSTR
........ Page 6500 STOP1 Page 6501 ........ Page 6972 ........ Page 7500
approx. 120 (sec.) approx. 20 (sec.)
1 Toner Feed Screw Rotation *2 1 Toner Feed Screw Cleaning

2 Secondary Transfer ATVC Control
4 Primary Charging Wire Cleaning
5 Fixing Refresh Roller
: ATR Control (Patch Sensor) 6 Patch Potential Control
Sequence Control description

INTR At initial rotation
STOP1 At job interruption, every 6,500 sheets for iPR C10000VP, and every 5,200 sheets for iPR C8000VP
LSTR At last rotation after 5,500 sheets (iPR C10000VP) or 4,400 sheets (iPR C8000VP) have been processed
*1: Executed as appropriate according to the time elapsed from the previous job to the current job.
*2: The screw is rotated in the reverse direction to increase the effect of ejecting waste toner in the ITB Cleaning Unit.
● Potential Control
Even when the same voltage is applied, the surface potential of the Photosensitive Drum will vary with deterioration of drum
sensitivity, environmental variations, and electrostatic latent image factors.
This machine uses potential control to achieve stable print quality.
Potential Control is performed by charging the surface of the Photosensitive Drum to a uniform voltage, and then measuring the
potential while varying laser power and graphing the relationship.
Based on this graph, laser power is de3termined according to the voltage required to obtain the specified contrast.
<Execution timing>
• At time of warm-up rotation at first power-on (when turning OFF and then ON at less than 50 deg C fixing temperature)
• When executing the service mode after drum replacement (forcible warm-up rotation, drum replacement mode, etc.)
• At auto gradation adjustment
NOTE:
Potential control can also be performed at any time with the following service mode.
COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > DPC
At this time, ATR control (patch background detection) and ATVC control are also performed.
122
1. Setting the drum surface reference potential
First, set the dark area potential Vd, which becomes the reference for voltage control.
Take the target value of dark area potential under a given temperature and humidity as Vd_target.
Take the Potential Sensor measurement resulting when Vgrid = Vd_target - 80 (where V is the offset value) is applied to the
Primary Charging Grid Plate as Vd_rgh.
Calculate the Primary Charging Grid Plate correction voltage as the difference between the measurement result and target
value (Vd_rgh - V_target).
The target value Vd_target is achieved through correction of Vgrid by application of the calculated correction voltage to the
Primary Charging Grid Plate.
Note that measured drum surface potential Vd_rgh declines as the sensitivity of the Photosensitive Drum deteriorates.
Also note that the calculated correction voltage for the Primary Charging Grid Plate will vary according to temperature and
humidity.
2. Measurement of Drum surface potential
Next is measurement of the potential VL, which is produced in bright areas by laser beam exposure.
The potential of the Photosensitive Drum's surface is measured by Potential Sensor while varying the laser power through
14 levels, and a graph of the results is prepared as shown in the figure below.
Potential (V)
F0H E0H D0H C0H B0H A0H 90H 80H 70H Laser power
3. Determination of laser power

Finally, required laser power is calculated from the bright area potential target value VL_target for a given temperature and
humidity.
VL_target is obtained from the following expression.
VL_target = Vd_target - (Vback + Vcont)
Where (Vback + Vcont) is the voltage for obtaining needed contrast, and varies according to the environmental humidity and
temperature.
Vback is the voltage for removing fogging when copying, and Vcont is the voltage for correcting image density.
The value obtained for VL_target is applied to the above graph, and laser power is determined from the corresponding point.
Potential (V)
VL_target
F0H E0H D0H C0H B0H A0H 90H 80H 70H Laser power

• E060-0131: Primary Charging Wire cleaning error (Y)
• E060-0231: Primary Charging Wire cleaning error (M)
• E060-0331: Primary Charging Wire cleaning error (C)
• E060-0431: Primary Charging Wire cleaning error (K)
• E061-0111: Potential control grid bias lower limit error (Y) *1
• E061-0211: Potential control grid bias lower limit error (M) *1
• E061-0311: Potential control grid bias lower limit error (C) *1
• E061-0411: Potential control grid bias lower limit error (K) *1
• E061-0112: Potential control grid bias upper limit error (Y) *2
123
• E061-0212: Potential control grid bias upper limit error (M) *2

• E061-0312: Potential control grid bias upper limit error (C) *2
• E061-0412: Potential control grid bias upper limit error (K) *2
• E061-0181: Insufficient laser power error (Y) *3
• E061-0281: Insufficient laser power error (M) *3
• E061-0381: Insufficient laser power error (C) *3
• E061-0481: Insufficient laser power error (K) *3
• E061-0182: Laser power adjustment error (Y) *4
• E061-0282: Laser power adjustment error (M) *4
• E061-0382: Laser power adjustment error (C) *4
• E061-0482: Laser power adjustment error (K) *4
• E061-0191: Patch potential control error (Y) *5
• E061-0291: Patch potential control error (M) *5
• E061-0391: Patch potential control error (C) *5
• E061-0491: Patch potential control error (K) *5
• E061-0192: Upper limit error in the patch image laser power determined by the patch potential control (Y) *6
• E061-0292: Upper limit error in the patch image laser power determined by the patch potential control (M) *6
• E061-0392: Upper limit error in the patch image laser power determined by the patch potential control (C) *6
• E061-0492: Upper limit error in the patch image laser power determined by the patch potential control (K) *6
*1: When Vgrid >/= -400 V
*2: When Vgrid </= -1200 V
*3: When the difference between Vd and Vl is less than 200 V with the Potential Control Laser at maximum output
*4: When the difference between VI at maximum and minimum output of the Potential Control Laser is less than 100 V
*5: When the Patch Image Laser power </= 30(H)
*6: When the Patch Image Laser power >/= D0(H)
● ATR Control
This machine performs ATR control to supply the appropriate amount of toner to the Developing Assembly.
ATR control involves the following three processes.
• Calculate the toner supply amount from the video count value.
• Measure the patch density with the Drum Patch Sensor and correct the toner supply amount.
• Measure the toner density in the Developing Assembly with the Developing Assembly Toner Density Sensor and correct the
toner supply amount.
M137/M131/
M119/M125
TS129/TS124/
TS126/TS125
PS120/PS117/
PS111/PS114
Process Unit Driver PCB

㸦Y/M/C/Bk㸧(UN161/UN162/UN613/UN164)
124
Code Parts name

TS129/TS124/TS126/TS125 Developing Assembly Toner Density Sensor (Y/M/C/Bk)
PS120/PS117/PS111/PS114 Drum Patch Sensor (Y/M/C/Bk)
Developing
Main Controller DC Controller Assembly Drum
Sub Hopper Motor
Toner M
Toner
Video Supply
Count
PG
PS
Measured Density Drum
Patch Sensor
Target Density
T/D Ratio
TS
Developing Toner
Density Sensor
<Execution timing>
• Control of the supply amount by the video count: When printing, executed for every sheet
• Correction by the Drum Patch Sensor: When printing, executed every 28 sheets of small size (14 sheets of large size)
• Correction by the Developing Assembly Toner Density Sensor: When printing, executed for every sheet
1. Control of the supply amount by the video count:
The amount of toner supplied is obtained from a graph showing the relationship between the video count value and the toner
supply amount.
This graph is obtained by linear interpolation of five points at the boundary conditions.
The Sub Hopper Motor (Y/M/C/Bk) (M137/M131/M119/M125) rotates according to the obtained toner supply amount.
Toner Supply Quantity (mg)
1200
1000
800
600
400
200
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800
Video Count (dec)
2. Correction by the Drum Patch Sensor

The DC Controller forms a patch image on the Photosensitive Drum of each color (Y, M, C, Bk).
The patch image is read by the Drum Patch Sensor (Y/M/C/Bk) (PS120/PS117/PS111/PS114), and the DC Controller is
notified of the measured density.
The DC Controller compares the measured result with the target density and corrects the toner supply amount.
125
3. Correction by the Developing Assembly Toner Density Sensor

The Developing Assembly Toner Density Sensor (Y/M/C/Bk) (TS129/TS124/TS126/TS125) detects the TD ratio of toner in
the Developing Assembly.
The DC Controller suppresses excessive correction by the Drum Patch Sensor depending on the difference between the
detection result and the target density 9%.
In the [A] part in the following figure, despite the high TD ratio, a low patch density is detected and excessive toner supply
is attempted.
In the [B] part, despite the low TD ratio, high patch density is detected and toner supply stoppage is attempted.
In these cases, correction processing is stopped and only supply control by video count is executed.
T/D Ratio(%)
ATR Error
13
Supply Stop
12
[A]
11
Normal Supply
8
Light Dark
6
[B]
5
Forcible Supply
4
Forcible Max Supply
3
Error

When the drum background measurement value (service mode: P-B-P-Y/M/C/K*1) is less than 150
• E029-0110: Error in drum background light intensity (intensity of light reflected from the drum surface) lower limit (Y)
• E029-0210: Error in drum background light intensity (intensity of light reflected from the drum surface) lower limit (M)
• E029-0310: Error in drum background light intensity (intensity of light reflected from the drum surface) lower limit (C)
• E029-0410:Error in drum background light intensity (intensity of light reflected from the drum surface) lower limit (K)
*1: Service mode for the drum background measurement value
COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > P-B-P-Y
COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > P-B-P-M
COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > P-B-P-C
COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > P-B-P-K
● PASCAL control
PASCAL control (image characteristic correction control) is performed to obtain ideal image characteristics.
Printer PASCAL is performed as PASCAL control.
NOTE:
PASCAL control is performed by executing "Auto Gradation Adjustment" in the Settings/Registration.
Basically, correction is carried out using the Color Sensor Unit, regardless of whether a Reader Unit is attached.
Patch images are read by the four Color Sensor Units (UN900/UN901/UN902/UN903) on the Host Machine's Reverse/Outer
Delivery Unit, and image characteristics are corrected based on the results.
1. D-max PASCAL control: One sheet of paper is output that contains 10 patch patterns for each color.
2. Gradation PASCAL control: Four sheets of paper are output that contain 22 patch patterns for each color.
3. Based on the results, the machine rebuilds the image characteristic table.
D-max PASCAL Control

The image density varies depending on factors such as environmental changes, photosensitive drum sensitivity degradation and
toner deterioration.
This machine performs D-max PASCAL control (image density correction control) to achieve stable printing.
D-max PASCAL control forms a halftone image on the Photosensitive Drum while changing the laser beam emission time, and
the potential at each emission is measured.
126
Next, the density and potential are coordinated by scanning the halftone image on the test print with the color sensors, and the
voltage Vcont for correcting the image density is determined.
Main Controller DC Controller Drum
PG
UN
Potential Sensor Paper
PG
UN
Color Sensor
Vcont
Potential Sensor (Y/M/C/Bk)
Potential Measurement PCB

(Y/M/C/Bk) (UN129/UN130/UN131/UN132)
Color Sensor Control PCB (UN904)
Color Sensor Unit 1 Color Sensor Unit 2 Color Sensor Unit 3 Color Sensor Unit 4
(Bk) (UN900) (Y) (UN901) (M) (UN902) (C) (UN903)
<Execution timing>
at PASCAL control (the first sheet of test print).
127
1. Measurement of the bright area potential
A solid image (test print) generated by the DC Controller is formed on the Photosensitive Drum.
At this time, while changing the laser intensity at each pixel in 10 levels, the potential in the bright area is measured by the
Potential Sensor.
Based on the measurement results, the DC Controller creates a graph of the relationship between the laser light intensity
and the bright area potential.
Potential (V)
Laser-irradiating
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F time length
2. Measurement of the density value

The solid image (test print) generated by the Main Controller is printed.
Just like the foregoing step, halftone images are output while changing the laser intensity at each pixel*1.
These halftone images are scanned by the Color Sensor Units*2, and the DC Controller is notified of the density values.
The DC Controller creates a graph of the relationship between the laser light intensity and the measured density.
Density
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Laser-irradiating
time length
*1. With printer PASCAL control, only the major 11 levels are output because the patch is too large to form all levels on a
sheet.
*2. In the case of printer PASCAL control, the image is scanned by the Color Sensor Units 1 to 4 (UN900/UN901/UN902/
UN903) of the Reverse/Outer Delivery Unit.
128
3. Determination of the image density correction voltage (Vcont)

The above two graphs are combined, and the bright area potential VL_target required to obtain the specific density (1.6) is
obtained.
Potential (V)
0.0
Laser-irradiating
0.2
time length
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
Density
From this VL_target, the image density correction voltage Vcont is calculated.
Vcont = Vd - VL_target - Vback
Where Vd is the dark area potential, and Vback is the voltage for removing fogging when copying.
In the potential control, based on the Vcont obtained in D-max PASCAL control, the laser power required to obtain the
specified bright area potential is determined.
Gradation PASCAL
Gradation PASCAL corrects image characteristics using the 4 Color Sensor Units at the Reverse/Outer Delivery Unit, and control
can be provided from only the host machine without the reader.
A 22-gradation patch image for each color (C, Y, M and Bk) is created by the Main Controller, generating four sheets.
The patch images are scanned by Color Sensor Units 1 to 4 (UN900/UN901/UN902/UN903) when each sheet reaches the
Reverse/Outer Delivery Unit, and the Main Controller is notified of the density values.
From these density values, the Main Controller creates a gradation characteristic table to obtain ideal image characteristics.
129
Activation
Main Controller
Output Patch Image
Printer
Feed To Reversing/External Delivery Unit
Color Sensor
Scan Patch Image
Color Sensor
Output Luminance Value

Actual Image
D-Max Correction Characteristic
100
1.7
(Color Sensor)
Density Value
(Color Sensor)
Output Luminance Value
1.6
1.4
250 290 300 Ideal Image

Voltage Vcont Characteristic
Main Controller
Create Image Characteristic Table 0 100

(M,Y,C,Bk) Data Output (Main Controller)
Auto Gradation Adjustment

PASCAL
PG
First Sheet
(D-Max)
UN
Potential Sensor Paper
PG
UN
Color Sensor
Vcont
Second
To PG
Fifth Sheet
UN
LUT Color Sensor
Real Time
PG
Multiple Tone - 10 blocks
Control Reference Data
PS - 3 screen x 4 color
Target Density Drum Patch Sensor
(Bk Only)
PG
- 10 block
PS - 3 screen x 4 color
Target Density ITB Patch Sensor
(Y/M/C)
ITB
130
● Real-time Multiple Tone Control

This machine carries out real-time multiple tone control to realize ideal gradation characteristics.
Real-time multi-gradation control uses ITB Patch Sensors to read patch images formed on the Photosensitive Drum or between
images on the Photosensitive Drum, and the gradation characteristics are adjusted to maintain uniform density variation.
The two types of this control operate according to the situation determined by machine location.
• Real-time multiple tone correction (full correction) “Real-time Multiple Tone Correction (Full Adjustment)” on page 132
• Real-time multiple tone correction (paper interval correction) “Real-time multiple tone correction (paper interval correction)”
on page 132
PS120/PS117/PS111/PS114

(UN161/UN162/UN163/UN164)
Code Parts name

PS120/PS117/PS111/PS114 Drum Patch Sensor (Y/M/C/Bk)
PG
- 10 blocks
- 3 screen x 4 color
Convert PS
Measured Density Drum Patch Sensor
(Bk Only)
Target Density
LUT
131
Main Controller DC Controller ITB
PG
- 1 block
- 3 screen x 4 color
Convert PS
Measured Density ITB Patch Sensor
(Y/M/C)
Target Density
LUT
Real-time Multiple Tone Correction (Full Adjustment)

This adjustment is performed for gradation adjustment.
At power-on, after auto gradation adjustment, or after multiple tone correction, a real-time multiple tone patch is printed, and the
controller is updated based on the scanned density detection result.
<Execution timing>
• At warm-up rotation after the first power-on
• After execution of full adjustment of auto gradation adjustment
• After execution of quick adjustment of auto gradation adjustment
A 10-gradation patch image pattern is formed on the Photosensitive Drum for each color (Y, M, C, Bk) or on the ITB.
The patch image pattern is scanned by the Drum Patch Sensor (Bk) (PS114) and the ITB Patch Sensors (Y/M/C) (PS902/PS903/
PS904), and the DC Controller is notified of this data.
The DC Controller converts it to density values and notifies the Main Controller.
Based on the amount of change in this density value, the Main Controller creates a gradation characteristic table for obtaining
an ideal halftone image.
<Patch pattern>
A YMC patch to be printed on the ITB and a Bk patch to be printed on the drum are printed separately to perform sampling.
For each color, a pattern of 30 patches is printed at 2-mm intervals, each approx. 16 mm in the horizontal scanning direction and
approx. 20 mm in the vertical scanning direction.
Real-time multiple tone correction (paper interval correction)

Adjustment applied to paper interval gradation adjustment.
In between paper sheets, real-time multiple tone patches are printed, and the Controller is updated based on the read density
detection result.
<Execution timing>
• Real-time multiple tone patches are printed in 20 out of 28 paper intervals (large-size conversion).
* This does not affect productivity because it is done by paper interval control.
The Main Controller sends the screen pattern to the DC Controller.
The DC Controller creates patch image patterns by combining the screen pattern received with dither images corresponding to
the various colors (Y, M, C, BK) and forms color patches in between images.
The patch image pattern is scanned by the Drum Patch Sensor (Bk) (PS114) and the ITB Patch Sensors (Y/M/C) (PS902/PS903/
PS904), and the DC Controller is notified of this data.
The DC Controller converts this data into density values and sends those values to the Main Controller.
The Main Controller compares the density values with the real-time multiple tone reference data and corrects the gradation
characteristic table.
<Patch pattern>
A YMC patch to be printed on the ITB and a Bk patch to be printed on the drum are printed separately to perform sampling.
The size of the patches is about 16 mm in the horizontal scanning direction, and about 20 mm in the vertical scanning direction.
132
Patterns of different densities are printed in each interval between paper sheets.
• Dark current correction control
With the LED unit unlit, the sensor values are read and retained as the dark current values.
When the real-time multiple gradation patches are read, the retained dark current values are subtracted, and the results are
used as the patch reading results.
• Window soiling correction control
Because the registration patch detection window deteriorates as it becomes soiled, control is performed to correct the values
read by the sensors according to how much the window is soiled.
● ATVC Control
Voltage is applied to the Primary Transfer Roller to transfer the toner from the Photosensitive Drum to the ITB. Voltage is applied
to the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller to transfer the toner from the ITB to the paper.
Although the voltage applied is the same, the potential on the roller surface varies due to factors such as moisture in the device
and individual variability in the rollers.
The machine performs ATVC control to determine the optimal transfer bias.
Due to the ATVC control, the current flowing through the roller when voltage is applied is measured and a graph showing the
relationship between the current and the applied voltage is created.
On the basis of the graph, the voltage to be applied to obtain the target potential on the roller is determined.
Primary Transfer Primary Transfer Primary Transfer Primary Transfer

High Voltage PCB (Y) High Voltage PCB(M) High Voltage PCB(C) High Voltage PCB(Bk)
(UN112) (UN113) (UN114) (UN115)
Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB (UN116)
<Execution timing>
• At warm-up rotation (door open or recovery from a jam)
• At last rotation after 5,500 sheets (4,400 sheets for iPR C8000VP)
• At initial rotation every hour (Primary Transfer Roller)
• At initial rotation 5, 10, 20, 40 and 60 minutes after job start and every 60 minutes thereafter (Secondary Transfer Inner
Roller)
• At job interruption every 6,500 sheets (5,200 sheets for iPR C8000VP)
On the basis of the measured results, linear interpolation is performed twice, and a graph showing the relationship between the
applied voltage and the detected current is created.
On the basis of the graph, the target voltage Vtarget required to obtain the target current Itarget is determined.
1. Determination of the target current
The target current Itarget is determined based on the temperature and humidity information obtained from the Environment
Sensors.
133
2. Derivation of the approximate voltage value

Measure the current Ia while applying the voltage Va which is estimated to be close to the target voltage Vtarget.
If Ia is larger than the target current Itarget, Vb = Va - ∆Vr (offset value) is applied. If la is smaller, Vb = Va + ∆Vr is applied.
Then, the current Ib at that moment is measured.
By connecting the two points (Va, Ia) and (Vb, Ib) with a straight line, a linear graph of primary approximation is obtained.
The voltage value Vrough for Itarget is determined on the basis of this graph.
Current (A)
Id
Ic
Ib
Ia
Voltage (V)
Va Vb Vc Vd
3. Derivation of the target voltage value

The current value Irough is measured while applying Vrough.
If Irough is larger than Itarget, Vc = Vrough - ∆Ve (offset value) is applied. If Irough is smaller, Vc = Vrough + ∆Ve is applied.
Then, the current Ic at that moment is measured.
By connecting the two points (Vrough, Irough) and (Vc, Ic) with a straight line, a linear graph of primary approximation is
obtained.
The voltage value Vtr for Itarget is determined on the basis of this graph.
Current (A)
Id
Ic
Itarget
Ib
Ia
Voltage (V)
Va Vb Vtr Vc Vd
In the case of the secondary transfer bias, the paper type is added to the correction factors. A voltage with the paper allotted
voltage Vp added is applied to the Secondary Transfer Roller.
● Low-Duty Discharge Sequence

To prevent decrease in density caused by charge buildup on the toner when low-duty images are continuously output.
<Execution timing>
At last rotation or paper interval after a specified number of sheets* have been printed in a job whose average image duty is lower
than the specified value (default: 2%)
* Varies depending on the average image duty.
When executing the discharge sequence for a certain color, if another color is close to the discharge execution condition, they
are executed at the same time.
When the foregoing conditions are met, after discharging toner of the particular color on the Photosensitive Drum, the toner is
recovered by the Photosensitive Drum Cleaner.
<Related service modes>

Setting of the image duty integrated values for low-duty toner discharge
134
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV > DEVVTH-Y

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV > DEVVTH-M
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV > DEVVTH-C
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV > DEVVTH-K
● Image Position Correction Control

Image Position (Color Displacement) Correction
Color displacement caused by shift of the irradiation position of the Laser Scanner Unit is corrected.
Execution timing
• At interruption during a job after a specified period of time has passed (after 5 min, 17 min, 47 min, and 107 min, and every
60 minutes thereafter), or at initial rotation when a job starts (executed between sheets when a specified period of time has
passed during a job)
Control description
M pattern is used as the reference. The amount of displacement of the patch pattern of each color is detected, and the image
position is corrected.
UN159
Registration Patch Sensor (Rear)
M155 (PS136)
Patch Image
Registration Patch Sensor (Center)

PS133 (PS135)
Shutter
Registration Patch Sensor (Front)

Steering Roller (PS134)
Type of control Control description Patch pattern position used* Execution timing
Correction of the write The laser write start timing is changed. Rear/Front/Center At a fixed time interval
start position in the hori-
zontal scanning direction
Correction of the write The write start timing in the vertical scan- Rear/Front/Center At a fixed time interval
start position in the verti- ning direction (TOP signal) is changed.
cal scanning direction
Image skew correction The digital registration correction value is Rear/Front/Center At a fixed time interval
changed.
135
Type of control Control description Patch pattern position used* Execution timing
Correction of the magnifi- The overall number of pixels in the hori- Rear/Front/Center At a fixed time interval
cation ratio in the horizon- zontal scanning direction is increased or
tal scanning direction decreased.
* Patch pattern position used (Rear: PS134, Front: PS135, Center: PS136)
<Tilt> <Horizontal Scanning>
Reading Direction Of The Patch Reading Direction Of The Patch
M Y M M Y M M Y M M Y M
Displacement Amount Displacement Amount Displacement Amount Displacement Amount
Displacement Amount Displacement Amount
<Vertical Scanning> <Magnification>
Reading Direction Of The Patch Reading Direction Of The Patch
M Y M M Y M M Y M M Y M
Displacement Amount Displacement Amount
Displacement Amount
Displacement Amount
Patch reading direction
136
M M
M Bk M C M Y M Bk M C M Y M
10 Sets
Reading Direction Of The Patch
● Overview of Patch Sensor

With this machine, patch images of each color are read regularly by the Patch Sensors to perform halftone correction.
There are two types of Patch Sensors (one for color and one for Bk).
As for the Patch Sensor for color printing, 3 sensors are arranged to read patches on the ITB (PS902, PS903, and PS904).
Floating toner in the vicinity of the Intermediate Transfer Belt contaminates the Patch Sensors. This can lower the output of the
light-emitting part.
Because of this, the Guide Plate has been provided on the shutter surface, and the Patch Sensor emits light and receives reflecting
light from the Guide Plate on a regular basis.
This makes it possible to raise the sensor output level to maintain it at a constant level when output of the LED Assembly is
reduced by contamination of the Patch Sensor.
Patch images cannot be read with the Patch Sensor for B&W printing because color of the ITB is black. Therefore, patch images
are formed on the drum, and the sensor reads the images. Because of that, the sensor for B&W printing (PS114) is located
opposite the drum.
ITB Patch Sensor (C)

(PS904)
ITB Patch Sensor (Y)
(PS902)
Normal image area ITB Patch Sensor (M)
(PS903)
C Patch
Y Patch
ITB
M Patch
137
Bk Drum
Drum Patch Sensor (Bk)

(PS114)
Bk Patch
<Shutter:Close> <Shutter:Open>
Guide Plate Sensor

Shutter
Patch
ITB
Sampling of the drum background (Bk)

To prevent uneven reflection from the drum, the background for a whole circumference of the drum is sampled by the Patch
Sensor without forming patches.
When reading patch images, the sampling results of the drum background are corrected.

• Display of Bk patch target laser power
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT > P-LPW-K
• Display of Y target patch contrast potential (2/3 speed)
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT > PVCON2-Y
• Display of M target patch contrast potential (2/3 speed)
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT > PVCON2-M
• Display of C target patch contrast potential (2/3 speed)
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT > PVCON2-C
• Display of K target patch contrast potential (2/3 speed)
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT > PVCON2-K
• Display of Y target patch contrast potential (1/2 speed)
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT > PVCON3-Y
• Display of M target patch contrast potential (1/2 speed)
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT > PVCON3-M
• Display of C target patch contrast potential (1/2 speed)
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT > PVCON3-C
• Display of K target patch contrast potential (1/2 speed)
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT > PVCON3-K
• Adjustment of Patch Sensor light intensity
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > PT-LPADJ
• Display of Patch Sensor LED light intensity
COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > P-LED-DA
• Display of Bk base light intensity (P wave) at ATR control
COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > P-SENS-P
• Display of Bk base light intensity (S wave) at ATR control
COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > P-SENS-S
138
● Automatic Color Tone Correction

Automatic color tone correction uses the 4 Color Sensor Units of the Reverse/Outer Delivery Unit to correct the color
characteristics (changes in color), and this control works only on host machines that do not have the Reader Unit. A multicolor
one-screen patch image is created by the Main Controller, and a total of 3 sheets are output.
The patch images are read by the Color Sensor Units 1 to 4 (UN900/UN901/UN902/UN903) when each sheet arrives at the
Reverse/Outer Delivery Unit, and the Main Controller is notified of the chromaticity values. On the basis of these chromaticity
values, the Main Controller creates a four-dimensional image characteristic table and corrects the image data so as to conform
to the chromaticity data of the correction pattern.
Startup
Main Controller
Output the patch image
Printer
Feed to the Reverse/Outer Delivery Unit
Color Sensors
Read the patch image
Correction pattern Printer

Chromaticity values of
the correction pattern Output the chromaticity values
Check the differences between the chromaticity

values of the correction pattern and the chromaticity
values at the moment, and create four-dimensional
LUT so as to conform to the chromaticity values
of the correction pattern.
Main Controller
Create four-dimensional LUT

(CMYK -> C’M’Y’K’)
Main Controller DC Controller
1 screen, 3 sheets
PG Paper
Chromaticity
Current
values of the
chromaticity Color Sensor
correction
values
pattern
Four-
dimensional
LUT
139
Fixing System
Overview
1. Supporting of high speed printing
The belt method has been adopted for external heating of the Fixing Roller. This enables higher speed printing compared
to the previous roller heating method, because it has a wider nip width and more heat that can be applied to the Fixing Roller.
2. Adoption of the air-blowing method to separate thin paper in the Primary Fixing Assembly
This machine is equipped with an Air Pump (compressor). This improves the paper separation performance when separating
thin paper by blowing air on the separation nip area (the paper leading edge).
3. Adoption of the air-blowing method to clean the Refresh Roller

Air is blown to the Refresh Roller while performing the refresh operation for the Fixing Roller to prevent the Refresh Roller
from being clogged.
Cleaning by blowing air enables a longer Refresh Roller life compared to the previous adhesive cleaning method using a
rubber roller, because the burden on the Refresh Roller is reduced. The longer life of the Refresh Roller also leads to a longer
life for the Fixing Roller.
Refresh Roller
Cleaning Air Nozzle
Primary Fixing
Refresh Roller
Primary Fixing Roller
Primary Fixing
External Heat Belt Unit
Primary
Fixing Roller
Separation
Air Nozzle
Primary Fixing
Paper
Pressure Belt
Primary Fixing Assembly
NOTE:
Illustrations/Text in This Chapter
• The illustrations in this chapter only show the Primary Fixing Assembly in some cases (replace images of the Pressure Belt
with the Pressure Roller for the Secondary Fixing Assembly).
• When the symbols and names of electrical components (such as motors and sensors) and signal names of the Primary Fixing
Assembly and Secondary Fixing Assembly are described in illustrations and text, the symbols and names and signal names
of the Secondary Fixing Assembly are described in parentheses.
Example) M300 (M305): Primary Fixing Drive Motor (Secondary Fixing Drive Motor)
140
■ Specifications
Item Function/Method
Fixing method Single fixing (belt fixing)
Tandem fixing (belt fixing + roller fixing)
• Primary Fixing Assembly: Belt fixing
• Secondary Fixing Assembly: Roller fixing
Heater Primary Fixing In the Fixing Roller Two (main heater/sub heater integrated)
Assembly In the Inlet Roller One
In the External Heat Upper/ Two/two (main heater/sub heater integrated in both)
Lower Rollers
Secondary In the Fixing Roller Two (main heater/sub heater integrated)
Fixing Assem- In the Pressure Roller One
bly
In the External Heat Upper/ Two/two (main heater/sub heater integrated in both)
Lower Rollers
Control tempera- Refer to the control temperature for each mode
ture
Detection of fixing Primary Fixing Fixing Roller • Main Thermistor: THM301 (center of the roller, non-contact)
temperature Assembly • Sub Thermistor: THM304 (far edge of the roller, contact)
Inlet Roller • Main Thermistor: THM300M (center of the roller, contact)
• Sub Thermistor: THM300S (rear edge of the roller, contact)
External Heat Upper Roller • Main Thermistor: THM302M (center of the roller, contact)
• Sub Thermistor 1: THM302S1 (rear edge of the roller, contact)
• Sub Thermistor 2: THM302S2 (front edge of the roller, con-
tact)
External Heat Lower Roller • Main Thermistor: THM303M (center of the roller, contact)
tact)
Secondary Fixing Roller • Main Thermistor: THM306 (center of the roller, non-contact)
Fixing Assem- • Sub Thermistor: THM309 (rear edge of the roller, contact)
bly Pressure Roller • Main Thermistor: THM310 (center of the roller, non-contact)
• Sub Thermistor: THM311 (rear edge of the roller, contact)
External Heat Upper Roller • Main Thermistor: THM307M (center of the roller, contact)
tact)
External Heat Lower Roller • Main Thermistor: THM308M (center of the roller, contact)
tact)
Fixing temperature During warm-up/standby/printing/last rotation/power-saving mode
control
Down sequence Yes
Protection function Detects the following errors, and stops the power distribution to the heater when an error is detected
• Temperature detection by the Main/Sub Thermistor
• Stop of power distribution by the thermoswitch (TP)
Primary Fixing Fixing Roller TP300 (front edge of the roller, contact)
Assembly Operating temperature: 218 +/- 8 deg C
Pressure Belt TP301 (center of the belt, non-contact)
Operating temperature: 150 +/- 5 deg C
External Heat Upper Roller TP302 (front edge of the roller, contact)
External Heat Lower Roller TP303 (front edge of the roller, contact)
Secondary Fixing Roller TP304 (front edge of the roller, contact)
Fixing Assem- Operating temperature: 218 +/- 8 deg C
bly Pressure Roller TP305 (front edge of the roller, non-contact)
External Heat Upper Roller TP306 (front edge of the roller, contact)
141
Item Function/Method
Protection function Secondary External Heat Lower Roller TP307 (front edge of the roller, contact)
Fixing Assem- Operating temperature: 250 +/- 10 deg C
bly
• Disconnection of thermistor (software detection)/Paper wrap detection
Separation mecha- Primary Fixing • Separation Roller + air blow*
nism Assembly Separates the paper by engaging/compressing a small-diameter (20 mm) Separation Roller
to the Fixing Roller to make a localized curvature change and blowing air from the Inner
Delivery Upper Separation Air Nozzle. Prevents the paper from wrapping around the Fixing
Roller.
• Lower Separation Claw
Prevents the paper from wrapping around the Pressure Belt due to downward curl.
Secondary • Upper Separation Guide
Fixing Assem- Prevents the paper from wrapping around the Fixing Roller due to upward curl.
bly • Lower Separation Claw
Prevents the paper from wrapping around the Pressure Roller due to downward curl.
Cleaning mecha- Fixing Roller (Primary/Secondary Fixing As- By the Collection Roller, Cleaning Web, and Refresh Roller
nism sembly)
Pressure Belt (Primary Fixing Assembly) None
Pressure Roller (Secondary Fixing Assembly) By the Refresh Roller
External Heat Belt (Primary/Secondary Fixing By the Cleaning Roller
Assembly)
Refresh Roller (Primary/Secondary Fixing As- By blowing air
sembly)
Pressure Refresh Roller (Secondary Fixing By the Refresh Cleaning Roller
Assembly)
*: Separation by blowing air is only performed for thin paper.
142
● Cross Section View
Fixing Feed Assembly
Refresh Roller
Cleaning Air Nozzle Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt Refresh Roller
Assembly Cleaning Air Nozzle
Refresh Roller
Tandem Feed Path

Refresh Roller
Primary Fixing
Assembly
Single Feed Path Separation Air Nozzle
NOTE:
• Primary Fixing Assembly: Belt fixing
• Secondary Fixing Assembly: Roller fixing
143

Refresh Roller Air Nozzle
Refresh Roller
Cleaning Web
External Heat Belt
Web Roller
External Heat Cleaning Roller
Collection roller
Fixing Roller
Separation Air Nozzle
Inlet Guide
Separation Claw
Inlet Roller
Steering Roller
Separation Pad Pressure Belt
Pressure Pad
Oil Coating Roller
Name Features/Function/Method Remarks

Fixing Roller Fixes toner to paper 80 mm diameter
External Heat Belt Keeps the temperature from being decreased during continuous Width: 355 mm
printing
External Heat Cleaning Roller Cleans the External Heat Belt
Cleaning Web Cleans the Fixing Roller via the Collection Roller
Web Roller Engages the Cleaning Web to the Collection Roller
Collection Roller Temporarily collects the toner on the Fixing Roller
Refresh Roller Removes damage on the surface of the Fixing Roller
Pressure Belt Improves the evenness of gloss Width: 348 mm +/- 2 mm
Inlet Roller Controls the Pressure Belt temperature 20 mm diameter
Steering Roller Corrects belt displacement
Oil Coating Roller Reduces friction on the sliding area of the inner surface of the belt 10 mm diameter
Includes silicone oil
Pressure Pad Forms proper fixing nip
Separation Roller Separates paper from the Fixing Roller 21 mm diameter
Inlet Guide Determines the entry angle to the fixing nip area (to prevent the
paper trailing edge from curling up, wrinkles, and scraping)
Separation Air Nozzle Separates thin paper by blowing air to the paper leading edge
Fixing Separation Claw Separates paper from the Pressure Belt
Refresh Roller Cleaning Air Nozzle Cleans the Refresh Roller by blowing air
144
Secondary Fixing Assembly

Refresh Roller Air Nozzle
Refresh Roller
Cleaning Web External Heat Belt
Web Roller
External Heat Cleaning Rolle
Collection roll
Fixing Roller
Separation Upper Guid
Separation Claw
Inlet Guide
Pressure Refresh Cleaning Roller

Pressure Roller
Pressure Refresh Roller
Name Features/Function/Method Remarks

Fixing Roller Fixes toner to paper 80 mm diameter
External Heat Belt Keeps the temperature from being decreased during continuous Width: 355 mm
printing
External Heat Cleaning Roller Cleans the External Heat Belt
Cleaning Web Cleans the Fixing Roller via the Collection Roller
Web Roller Engages the Cleaning Web to the Collection Roller
Collection Roller Temporarily collects the toner on the Fixing Roller
Refresh Roller Removes damage on the surface of the Fixing Roller
Pressure Roller Fixes toner to paper 70 mm diameter
Inlet Guide Determines the entry angle to the fixing nip area (to prevent the
paper trailing edge from curling up, wrinkles, and scraping)
Upper Separation Guide Guides paper to the inner delivery area
Fixing Separation Claw Separates paper from the Pressure Roller
Refresh Roller Cleaning Air Nozzle Cleans the Refresh Roller by blowing air
Pressure Refresh Roller Removes damage on the surface of the Pressure Roller
Pressure Refresh Cleaning Roller Cleans the Pressure Refresh Roller
145
● Thermistor/Thermoswitch/Heater
THM302 THM303
S2 TP303 S2 THM303
M
THM302
H308 M
THM301 THM302
S1
THM303
S1
THM304
TP302
H307
THM300 TP300
H306
TP301
THM300
M
H305
Code Name Function/Method

Thermistor
THM301 Primary Fixing Roller Main Thermistor Non-contact type (temperature control, abnormal
temperature rise detection)
THM304 Primary Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor Contact type (abnormal temperature rise detec-
tion)
THM300M Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Main Thermistor Contact type (temperature control, abnormal tem-
perature rise detection)
THM300S Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Sub Thermistor Contact type (abnormal temperature rise detec-
tion)
THM302M Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Main Thermistor Contact type (temperature control, abnormal tem-
THM302S1 Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub Thermistor 1 Contact type (abnormal temperature rise detec-
tion)
THM302S2 Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub Thermistor 2 Contact type (abnormal temperature rise detec-
tion)
THM303M Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Main Thermistor Contact type (temperature control, abnormal tem-
THM303S1 Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub Thermistor 1 Contact type (abnormal temperature rise detec-
tion)
THM303S2 Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub Thermistor 2 Contact type (abnormal temperature rise detec-
tion)
Thermoswitch
TP300 Primary Fixing Roller Thermoswitch Contact-type (218 +/- 8 deg C)
TP301 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Thermoswitch Non-contact type (150 +/- 5 deg C)
TP302 Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Thermoswitch Contact-type (250 +/- 10 deg C)
TP303 Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Thermoswitch Contact-type (250 +/- 10 deg C)
Heater
H305 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Heater Halogen heater: 400 W
146

H306 Primary Fixing Roller Heater Halogen heater: 1300 W
Main/sub heater integrated
H307 Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Heater Halogen heater: 1260 W
H308 Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Heater Halogen heater: 1260 W
THM308
S2 TP307 THM308
THM307 M
S2 THM307
H302 M
THM306 THM308
S1
THM307
S1
THM309
TP306
H301
THM311
TP304
THM310 H300
H303
TP305

Thermistor
THM306 Secondary Fixing Fixing Roller Main Thermistor Non-contact type (temperature control, abnormal
THM307M Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Main Thermistor Contact type (temperature control, abnormal tem-
THM307S1 Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub Thermistor 1 Contact type (abnormal temperature rise detec-
tion)
THM307S2 Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub Thermistor 2 Contact type (abnormal temperature rise detec-
tion)
THM308M Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Main Thermistor Contact type (temperature control, abnormal tem-
THM308S1 Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub Thermistor 1 Contact type (abnormal temperature rise detec-
tion)
THM308S2 Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub Thermistor 2 Contact type (abnormal temperature rise detec-
tion)
THM309 Secondary Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor Contact type (abnormal temperature rise detec-
tion)
THM310 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Main Thermistor Non-contact type (temperature control, abnormal
THM311 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Sub Thermistor Contact type (abnormal temperature rise detec-
tion)
Thermoswitch
TP304 Secondary Fixing Fixing Roller Thermoswitch Contact-type (218 +/- 8 deg C)
147

TP305 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Thermoswitch Non-contact type (150 +/- 5 deg C)
TP306 Secondary Fixing External Upper Roller Thermoswitch Contact-type (250 +/- 10 deg C)
TP307 Secondary Fixing External Lower Roller Thermoswitch Contact-type (250 +/- 10 deg C)
Heater
H300 Secondary Fixing Roller Heater Halogen heater: 1300 W
H301 Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Heater Halogen heater: 1260 W
H302 Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Heater Halogen heater: 1260 W
H303 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Heater Halogen heater: 400 W
● Sensor
PS301 PS352
PS302 PS382
PS906
PS306
PS907
PS300
PS303
PS305 PS905
PS307
PS304 PS311
PS309
PS308
Code Name
PS300 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt HP Sensor
PS301 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Position Detection Sensor (Front)
PS302 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Position Detection Sensor (Rear)
PS303 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Pressure Sensor
PS304 Primary Fixing Inlet Sensor
PS305 Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 1
PS306 Primary Fixing External Heat Roller HP Sensor
PS307 Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 2
PS308 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Displacement HP Sensor
PS309 Primary Fixing Web HP Sensor
PS311 Primary Fixing Web Absence Advance Notice Sensor
PS352 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Retry Sensor
PS382 Primary Fixing Refresh Roller HP Sensor
PS905 Primary Fixing External Heat Belt HP Sensor
PS906 Primary Fixing External Heat Belt Position Front Sensor
PS907 Primary Fixing External Heat Belt Position Rear Sensor
148
PS315 PS383
PS314
PS910
PS316
PS909
PS312
PS908
PS313
PS317 PS320
PS917
PS318
Code Name
PS312 Secondary Fixing Inlet Sensor
PS313 Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 1
PS314 Secondary Fixing External Heat Roller HP Sensor
PS315 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller HP Sensor
PS316 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Pressure Sensor
PS318 Secondary Fixing Web HP Sensor
PS320 Secondary Fixing Web Absence Advance Notice Sensor
PS383 Secondary Fixing Refresh Roller HP Sensor
PS908 Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt HP Sensor
PS909 Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt Position Front Sensor
PS910 Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt Position Rear Sensor
PS917 Secondary Fixing Separation Claw HP Sensor
149
Refresh Roller
M302 Cleaning Air Nozzle
Refresh Roller
PS311
External Heat Belt

M301 M335
SL302
PS306
PS382
Cleaning Web
PS309
External Heat Cleaning Roller
PS369
Web Roller PS307
PS305 Fixing Roller

Collection Roller
M300
PS304
Separation Air Nozzle PS300 PS303
PS308
Fixing Separation Claw
PS352
PS301 PS302 Inlet Guide
M303
Inlet Roller
M304
Steering Roller
Pressure Pad
Separation Roller
Oil Coating Roller
Code Name Code Name

SL302 Primary Fixing Web Solenoid PS300 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt HP Sensor
PS301 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Position Sensor (Front)
M300 Primary Fixing Drive Motor PS302 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Position Sensor (Rear)
M301 Primary Fixing External Heat Roller Pressure Motor PS303 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Pressure Sensor
M302 Primary Fixing Web Pressure Motor PS304 Primary Fixing Inlet Sensor
M303 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Pressure Motor PS305 Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 1
M304 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Displacement Control Mo- PS306 Primary Fixing External Heat Roller HP Sensor
tor
M335 Primary Fixing External Heat Belt Displacement Control PS307 Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 2
Motor
PS309 Primary Fixing Web HP Sensor
PS311 Primary Fixing Web Absence Advance Notice Sensor
PS352 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Displacement Retry Sen-
sor
PS369 Primary Fixing Lever Sensor
PS382 Primary Fixing Refresh Roller HP Sensor
150
M307 Refresh Roller

Cleaning Air Nozzle
Refresh Roller
PS320
External Heat Belt

M306 M336
SL303
Cleaning Web PS314

PS383
PS318 External Heat

Cleaning Roller
Web Roller PS370
PS317 M305
Collection Roller PS313
Fixing Roller
PS312
PS315 PS316
Separation Upper Guide
Separation Claw
Inlet Guide
M308
Pressure Roller
Pressure Refresh
Cleaning Roller Refresh Roller
Code Name Code Name

SL303 Secondary Fixing Web Solenoid PS312 Secondary Fixing Inlet Sensor
M305 Secondary Fixing Drive Motor PS314 Secondary Fixing External Heat Roller HP Sensor
M306 Secondary Fixing External Heat Roller Pressure Motor PS315 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller HP Sensor
M307 Secondary Fixing Web Pressure Motor PS316 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Pressure Sensor
M308 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Pressure Motor PS317 Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 2
M336 Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt Displacement PS318 Secondary Fixing Web HP Sensor
Control Motor
PS320 Secondary Fixing Web Absence Advance Notice Sen-
sor
PS370 Secondary Fixing Assembly Lever Sensor
PS383 Secondary Fixing Refresh Roller HP Sensor
■ Basic Sequence
● At Power-on
First power-on conditions
The surface temperature of the Primary Fixing Roller is 50 deg C or less
151
Power ON
Code Name WMUP䠍 WMUP䠎 WMUP䠏 STBY
H306M Primary Fixing Roller Heater䠄Main䠅
H306S Primary Fixing Roller Heater䠄Sub䠅
H305 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Heater
Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller

H308M
Heater䠄Main䠅
Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller
H307M
Heater䠄Main䠅
H308S
Heater䠄Sub䠅
H307S
Heater䠄Sub䠅
H300M Secondary Fixing Roller Heater䠄Main䠅
H300S Secondary Fixing Roller Heater䠄Sub䠅
H303 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Heater
Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller

H302M
Heater䠄Main䠅
Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller
H301M
Heater䠄Main䠅
H302S
Heater䠄Sub䠅
H301S
Heater䠄Sub䠅
M300 Primary Fixing Drive Motor
M305 Secondary Fixing Drive Motor
M303 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Pressure Motor Detach→ Attach→ Detach→
M308 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Pressure Motor Detach→ Attach→ Detach→
M301 Primary Fixing External Heat Roller Pressure Detach→

Motor
Secondary Fixing External Heat Roller Pressure Detach→
M306
Motor
M302 Primary Fixing Web Pressure Motor Detach→ Attach→ Detach→
M307 Secondary Fixing Web Pressure Motor Detach→ Attach→ Detach→
FM338 Primary Fixing Belt Cooling Fan 5
FM331 Primary Fixing Separation Cooling Fan 1
FM313 Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Cooling Fan
FM421 Primary Fixing Main Thermistor Cooling Fan
FM337 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Cooling Fan 5
FM315 Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Cooling Fan
FM420 Secondary Fixing Main Thermistor Cooling Fan
Turned on
Rotated at Rotated at
in the time Duty control
3/4 speed 1/4 speed
sharing mode
Interval Definition
WMUP1 (warm-up 1) The time until the surface temperature of the Fixing Roller reaches 160 deg C after the power is turned
ON
After reaching this, the machine shifts to WMUP2
Purpose: To clean the Fixing Roller with the web, and heat the Pressure Pad to prevent image failure
(Primary Fixing Assembly)
152
Interval Definition
WMUP2 (warm-up 2) The time until the surface temperature of the Pressure Belt reaches 100 deg C (Primary Fixing As-
sembly)
The time until the surface temperature of the Pressure Roller reaches 90 deg C (Secondary Fixing
Assembly)
After reaching this, the machine shifts to WMUP3
Purpose: To heat the Pressure Belt (Pressure Roller)
WMUP3 (warm-up 3) The time until the surface temperature of the Fixing Roller reaches 174 deg C (Primary Fixing As-
sembly)
The time until the surface temperature of the Fixing Roller reaches 160 deg C (Secondary Fixing
Assembly)
After reaching this, the machine shifts to STBY
Purpose: To disengage the web, Pressure Belt (Primary Fixing Assembly), and Pressure Roller (Sec-
ondary Fixing Assembly)
STBY (Standby) The machine can receive print request signals
153
● At Printing
Code Name 䠯䠰䠞䠵䠥䠪䠰䠮䠬䠮䠥䠪䠰䠨䠯䠰䠮䠍䠨䠯䠰䠮䠎䠨䠯䠰䠮䠏䠯䠰䠞䠵
H306M Primary Fixing Roller Heater䠄Main䠅
H306S Primary Fixing Roller Heater䠄Sub䠅
H305 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Heater

H308M
Heater䠄Main䠅
H307M
Heater䠄Main䠅
H308S
Heater䠄Sub䠅
H307S
Heater䠄Sub䠅
H300M Secondary Fixing Roller Heater䠄Main䠅
H300S Secondary Fixing Roller Heater䠄Sub䠅
H303 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Heater

H302M
Heater䠄Main䠅
H301M
Heater䠄Main䠅
H302S
Heater䠄Sub䠅
H301S
Heater䠄Sub䠅
M300 Primary Fixing Drive Motor
M305 Secondary Fixing Drive Motor
M303 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Pressure Motor Attach Detach
Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Pressure Attach Detach

M308
Motor
Primary Fixing External Heat Roller Pressure Attach Detach
M301
Motor
Secondary Fixing External Heat Roller Attach Detach
M306
Pressure Motor
M302 Primary Fixing Web Pressure Motor Attach Detach
M307 Secondary Fixing Web Pressure Motor Attach Detach
FM338 Primary Fixing Belt Cooling Fan 5 Depends on the paper size
FM331 Primary Fixing Separation Cooling Fan 1 Depends on the paper size
FM421 Primary Fixing Main Thermistor Cooling Fan Depends on the temperature
Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Cooling Depends on the paper size

FM337
Fan 5
Secondary Fixing Main Thermistor Cooling

FM420
Fan
Turned on
Rotated at Rotated at
in the time Duty control
3/4 speed 1/4 speed
sharing mode
Interval Definition
STBY (Standby) The machine can receive print request signals
INTR (Initial Rota- The interval from when the print request signal is received until the image signal is sent
tion)
PRINT (Print) The interval from when image formation starts until paper is delivered
LSTR1 (Last Rota- The interval until the temperature detected by the Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor is 10 deg C or less above the
tion 1) print control temperature
LSTR2 (Last Rota- The interval until the temperature detected by the Pressure Belt Main Thermistor is 10 deg C or less above the
tion 2) print control temperature and the temperature detected by the Pressure Belt Sub Thermistor is 10 deg C or less
below the print control temperature
154
Interval Definition
LSTR3 (Last Rota- The interval until the surface temperature of the Fixing Roller, the surface temperature of the External Heat Roller,
tion 3) and the surface temperature of the Pressure Belt become higher than the standby control temperature
Controls
■ Overview
Item Description
Fixing Path Switch Control Switches between the single fixing path and tandem fixing path
Fixing Drive Control Drives the Fixing Roller and Pressure Belt (Pressure Roller)
Fixing Roller Temperature Control Adjusts the fixing temperature to prevent fixing failure
Down Sequence Control Reduces the print speed according to the paper type and temporarily puts the machine in standby
to prevent fixing failure
Paper Wrap Detection Detects paper wrapping around the Fixing Roller and the Pressure Belt (Pressure Roller)
External Heat Belt Unit Engagement/ Engages and heats the Fixing Roller to assist fixing temperature control
Disengagement Control
Pressure Belt Displacement Control Adjusts the displacement of the Pressure Belt to prevent damage to the Fixing Roller and the belt
(Primary Fixing Assembly)
External Heat Belt Displacement Corrects the displacement of the External Heat Belt to prevent damage to the belt
Control
Pressure Belt Engagement/Disen- Applies pressure to the Fixing Roller and Pressure Belt for fixing
gagement Control (Primary Fixing Disengages the Fixing Roller and Pressure Belt to improve jam removability and prevent the tem-
Assembly) perature increase of the Pressure Belt
Pressure Roller Engagement/Disen- Applies pressure to the Fixing Roller and Pressure Roller for fixing
gagement Control (Secondary Fix- Disengages the Fixing Roller and the Pressure Roller to prevent fixing failure and improve jam
ing Assembly) removability
Cleaning Web Drive Control Removes toner remaining on the Fixing Roller with the Cleaning Web to prevent fixing offset
Cleaning Web Level Detection Detects the remaining Cleaning Web
Cleaning Web Engagement/Disen- Applies pressure to the Web Roller and the Collection Roller to remove toner remaining on the
gagement Control Collection roller
Disengages the Web Roller and Collection Roller to prevent deformation of the Fixing Roller
Refresh Roller Engagement/Disen- Engages the Fixing Roller with the Refresh Roller and evens out the surface of the Fixing Roller
gagement Control to prevent scratches on the Fixing Roller and uneven gloss
Pressure Refresh Roller Engage- Engages the Pressure Roller with the Pressure Refresh Roller and evens out the surface of the
ment/Disengagement Control (Sec- Pressure Roller to remove claw marks on the Pressure Roller made by the Fixing Separation Claw
ondary Fixing Assembly)
Separation Air Blow Control (Primary Blows air towards the leading edge of paper to separate thin paper
Fixing Assembly)
Refresh Roller Cleaning Air Blow Blows air on the Refresh Roller to prevent clogging of the Refresh Roller
Control
Fixing Separation Claw Engage- Engages the Fixing Separation Claw to prevent thin paper from wrapping around the Pressure
ment/Disengagement Control (Sec- Roller
ondary Fixing Assembly) Disengages the Fixing Separation Claw according to the type of paper to feed to prevent Sepa-
ration Claw marks on the Pressure Roller
Protection function Stops power distribution to the heater when the fixing temperature is abnormally high
■ Fixing Path Switch Control

The fixing path is switched by turning the Fixing Flapper Motor (M309) ON and then OFF to move the flapper up and down.
During standby, the flapper waits in the home position (approx. 110 degrees clockwise from the sensor OFF position). When
printing starts, it switches to the position for either the tandem fixing path (primary fixing + secondary fixing) or single fixing path
(primary fixing only), according to the following conditions.
155
Conditions for the single fixing path

• Plain paper, recycled paper, color paper, tab paper, vellum paper that are 150 g/m2 or less
• When gloss correction is set to "-4" in Settings/Registration (System management mode)
• Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Correct Uneven Gloss
M309
Single Feed Path Flapper
Code Name
M309 Fixing Flapper Motor
156
Conditions for the tandem fixing path

Paper other than the above (heavy paper that is 151 g/m2 or above, and transparency, coated paper, and embossed paper,
regardless of its weight)
Tandem Feed Path
M309
Flapper
Code Name
M309 Fixing Flapper Motor
■ Fixing Drive Control

The Fixing Roller and Pressure Belt are driven by the Primary Fixing Drive Motor (M300).
The Pressure Belt is driven by the transmission of the drive to the Fixing Roller from the Fixing Drive Motor via the Gear/Timing
Belt. This drive configuration is adopted to prevent slip when the Pressure Belt is driven by following the Fixing Roller (to prevent
the Pressure Belt from slipping against the Fixing Roller).

The Fixing Roller and Pressure Roller are driven by the Secondary Fixing Drive Motor (M305).
The Pressure Roller rotates by following the Fixing Roller.
157
M300
(M305)
Fixing Roller
Timing Belt
Pressure Belt
Code Name
M300 (M305) Primary Fixing Drive Motor (Secondary Fixing Drive Motor)
Each Fixing Motor is driven at 1/3 of speed during standby and at normal speed during printing.

E014-0100 / E008-0101: Fixing Motor error (Primary Fixing Assembly)
E014-0200 / E008-0201: Fixing Motor error (Secondary Fixing Assembly)
■ Fixing Roller Temperature Control

This is a control for adjusting the fixing temperature to prevent fixing failure.
This machine has fixing temperature control tables that are selected according to the fixing temperature control mode and the
paper type.
The fixing temperature control mode is classified into the following two modes.
1. Productivity Priority (Auto/Manual)
2. Image Quality Priority (Standard Gloss/Low Gloss)
This fixing temperature control mode can be switched in Settings/Registration.

• Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Switch Fixing Temperature Adjustment Mode
Setting values: Productivity Priority (Auto) (default), Productivity Priority (Manual), Image Quality Priority (Standard Gloss),
Image Quality Priority (Low Gloss)
158
The gloss can be adjusted for each paper type. (However, it cannot be adjusted for some paper types.)
• Settings/Registration > Preferences > Paper Settings > Paper Type Management Settings*
Setting value: -4 to +4 (default: 0)
Increasing the value increases the gloss.
Decreasing the value decreases the gloss.
*: This item is not displayed in Settings/Registration by default. It can be displayed and made available by setting "1" for the
following service mode.
COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > IMGC-ADJ
● Temperature Control in the "Productivity Priority (Manual)" Mode
NOTE:
The productivity in "Productivity Priority" mode is not always more improved than the productivity in "Quality Priority" mode in all
prints.
The productivity may remain unchanged according to the paper type.
When [Productivity Priority (Manual)] is pressed, 4 modes are displayed. The most frequently used combination of paper type
and weight can be selected from the 4 modes.
The temperature control table is switched to an appropriate table (The control temperature is raised or lowered.) depending on
the paper type if necessary. The switching of the tables is executed before starting print or during printing. In the case of switching
during printing, the printing is temporarily stopped to switch the tables, which generates a waiting time.
159
Purpose: To secure the fixing performance and feedability.
NOTE:
With the "Quality Priority" mode described below, the operation for switching to the appropriate temperature control table according
to the paper type is performed more times than the "Productivity Priority" mode.
<Viewing this table>

Yes: The default temperature control table
Numeric value columns: The top row indicates the control temperature of the Primary Fixing Assembly and the bottom row
indicates the control temperature of the Secondary Fixing Assembly.
-: Not used
S: Single fixing path
T: Tandem fixing path
any: The previous control temperature used for the Secondary Fixing Assembly
*A waiting time is generated when the control temperature is switched.
160
Uncoated paper (plain paper), 1-sided coated paper
Environment tempera- Uncoated paper (plain paper) 1-sided coated paper

ture of 20 deg C or
more
Mode type Pri- Sec- Paper weight (g/m2) Paper weight (g/m2)
mar on- 60 to 80 to 106 129 151 181 210 257 301 70 to 80 to 106 129 151 181 210 257 301
y dary 79 105 to to to to to to to 79 105 to to to to to to to
Fix- Fix- 128 150 180 209 256 300 350 128 150 180 209 256 300 350
ing ing
S S S S T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
As- As-
sem- sem-
bly bly
(deg (deg
C) C)
Heavy Pa- 185 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
per Priority 170 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
B
160 - - - - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes - - - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
150 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
140 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any - - - Yes - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Heavy Pa- 180 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
per Priority 170 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
A
160 - - - - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes - - - Yes Yes Yes Yes - -
150 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
140 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any - - - Yes - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Standard 174 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
170 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
160 - - - - Yes Yes Yes Yes - - - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes - -
150 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
140 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any Yes Yes Yes Yes - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Thin Paper 164 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Priority 170 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
160 - - - - Yes - - - - - - - - - - - - -
150 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
140 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - 152 Yes Yes Yes Yes - - - -
120
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any Yes Yes Yes Yes - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
161
2-sided coated paper, recycled paper
Environment tempera- 2-sided coated paper Recycled paper

ture of 20 deg C or
more
Mode type Pri- Sec- Paper weight (g/m2) Paper weight (g/m2)
mar on- 70 to 80 to 106 129 151 181 210 257 301 60 to 80 to 106 129 151 181 210 257 301
y dary 79 105 to to to to to to to 79 105 to to to to to to to
Fix- Fix- 128 150 180 209 256 300 350 128 150 180 209 256 300 350
ing ing
T T T T T T T T T S S S S T T T T T
As- As-
sem- sem-
bly bly
(deg (deg
C) C)
Heavy Pa- 185 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
per Priority 170 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
B
160 - - - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes - - - - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
150 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
140 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any - - - - - - - - - - - - Yes - - - - -
Heavy Pa- 180 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
per Priority 170 - - - -
A
● Temperature Control for the "Productivity Priority (Auto)" Mode

The optimal temperature of the Fixing Assembly is automatically adjusted. Gloss may slightly change because productivity is
prioritized.
If there is no "Yes" in the column of the set mode, the mode shifts to the nearest mode for temperature control.
E.g. When uncoated paper (80 to 105 g/m2) is used with "Heavy Paper Priority B" set as the mode type:
There is no "Yes" in the column of the Heavy Paper Priority B mode => There is no "Yes" also in the column of the Heavy Paper
Priority A mode => Temperature control is performed in standard mode with "174 deg C" for the Primary Fixing and "any (The
previous control temperature used for the Secondary Fixing Assembly)" for the Secondary Fixing.
● Temperature Control in the "Quality Priority" Mode

With the "Quality Priority" mode described below, the operation for switching to the appropriate temperature control table (to
increase or decrease the control temperature) according to the paper type is performed to obtain the optimal fixing quality (fixing
performance and gloss).
The switching of the tables is executed before starting print or during printing. In the case of switching during printing, the printing
is temporarily stopped to switch the tables, which generates a waiting time.
<Viewing this table>

Yes: The default temperature control table
-4 to +4: The temperature control table when the value in "Adjust Gloss" is changed
-: Not used
S: Single fixing path
T: Tandem fixing path
any: The previous control temperature used for the Secondary Fixing Assembly
NOTE:
The default control temperatures after the "Productivity Priority" mode is switched to the "Quality Priority" mode are as follows:
164 deg C for the Primary Fixing Assembly 160 deg C for the Secondary Fixing Assembly
162
Uncoated paper (plain paper), 1-sided coated paper
Environ- Uncoated paper (plain paper) 1-sided coated paper

ment tem-
perature of
20 deg C or
more
Pri- Sec- Paper weight (g/m2) Paper weight (g/m2)
mary on- 60 to 80 to 106 129 151 181 210 257 301 70 to 80 to 106 129 151 181 210 257 301
Fix- dary 79 105 to to to to to to to 79 105 to to to to to to to
ing Fix- 128 150 180 209 256 300 350 128 150 180 209 256 300 350
As- ing
sem- As-
bly sem-
(deg bly
C) (deg
C)
190 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
170 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
160 - - - - - - - +4 +4 - - - - - - - +4 +4
150 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
140 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
185 180 - - - - - +3 +3 +2 +2 - - - - - +3 +3 +2 +2
170 - - - - - - - +1 +1 - - - - - - - +1 +1
160 - - - - +3 +2 +2 Yes Yes - - - - +3 +2 +2 Yes Yes
150 - - - - - - - -1 -1 - - - - - - - -1 -1
140 - - - - - - - -2 -2 - - - - - - - -2 -2
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
180 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
170 - - - - +2 +1 +1 - - - - - - - +1 +1 - -
160 - - - +2 +1 Yes Yes -3 -3 - - - - +2 Yes Yes - -
150 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
140 - - - - - -1 -1 - - - - - - - -1 -1 - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4 - - -
174 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
170 - - - - - - - - - - - - - +1 - - - -
160 - - - - Yes -2 -2 - - - - - - Yes -2 -2 - -
150 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
140 +2 +2 +1 +1 -1 -3 -3 - - - - - - -1 -3 -3 - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - -4 -4 - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any +1 +1 Yes Yes - - - - - - - - - -4 - - - -
164 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
170 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
160 - - - - - - - - - - - Yes Yes - - - - -
150 - - - - -2 - - - - - - -1 -1 - - - - -
163
Environ- Uncoated paper (plain paper) 1-sided coated paper

ment tem-
perature of
20 deg C or
more
mary on- 60 to 80 to 106 129 151 181 210 257 301 70 to 80 to 106 129 151 181 210 257 301
ing Fix- 128 150 180 209 256 300 350 128 150 180 209 256 300 350
As- ing
sem- As-
bly sem-
(deg bly
C) (deg
C)
164 140 - - - - - - - - - - - -2 -2 -2 - - - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - -3 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - +1 -3 -3 -3 - - - -
any Yes Yes -1 -1 - - - - - - - -4 -4 - - - - -
152 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
170 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
160 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
150 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
140 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - +1 Yes - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - -1 - - - - - - -
any -1 -1 - - - - - - - - -4 - - - - - - -
144 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
170 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
160 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
150 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
140 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - Yes - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - -1 - - - - - - - -
any -2 -2 - - - - - - - -4 - - - - - - - -
2-sided coated paper, recycled paper
Environ- 2-sided coated paper Recycled paper

ment tem-
perature of
20 deg C or
more
mary on- 70 to 80 to 106 129 151 181 210 257 301 60 to 80 to 106 129 151 181 210 257 301
ing Fix- 128 150 180 209 256 300 350 128 150 180 209 256 300 350
As- ing
sem- As-
bly sem-
(deg bly
C) (deg
C)
190 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
170 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
164

ment tem-
perature of
20 deg C or
more
mary on- 70 to 80 to 106 129 151 181 210 257 301 60 to 80 to 106 129 151 181 210 257 301
ing Fix- 128 150 180 209 256 300 350 128 150 180 209 256 300 350
As- ing
sem- As-
bly sem-
(deg bly
C) (deg
C)
190 160 - - - - - - - +4 +4 - - - - - - - - -
150 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
140 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
185 180 - - - - - +3 +3 +2 +2 - - - - - +3 +3 +2 +2
170 - - - - - - - +1 +1 - - - - - - - +1 +1
160 - - - - +3 +2 +2 Yes Yes - - - - - - - Yes Yes
150 - - - - - - - -1 -1 - - - - - - - -1 -1
140 - - - - - - - -2 -2 - - - - - - - -2 -2
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
180 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
170 - - - - - +1 +1 - - - - - - +2 +1 +1 - -
160 - - - - +2 Yes Yes - - - - - +2 +1 Yes Yes -3 -3
150 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
140 - - - - - -1 -1 - - - - - - - -1 -1 - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any - - - - - -4 - - - - - - - - - - - -
174 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
170 - - - - +1 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
160 - - - - Yes -2 -2 - - - - - - Yes -2 -2 - -
150 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
140 - - - - -1 -3 -3 - - - +2 +1 +1 -1 -3 -3 - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any - - - - -4 - - - - +2 +1 Yes Yes - - - - -
164 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
170 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
160 - - Yes Yes - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
150 - - -1 -1 - - - - - - - - - -2 - - - -
140 - - -2 -2 -2 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3 - - - -
165

ment tem-
perature of
20 deg C or
more
mary on- 70 to 80 to 106 129 151 181 210 257 301 60 to 80 to 106 129 151 181 210 257 301
ing Fix- 128 150 180 209 256 300 350 128 150 180 209 256 300 350
As- ing
sem- As-
bly sem-
(deg bly
C) (deg
C)
164 110 - +1 -3 -3 -3 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any - - -4 -4 - - - - - +1 Yes -1 -1 - - - - -
152 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
170 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
160 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
150 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
140 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 +1 Yes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - -1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any - -4 - - - - - - - Yes -1 - - - - - - -
144 180 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
170 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
160 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
150 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
140 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 Yes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 -1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any -4 - - - - - - - - -1 -2 - - - - - - -
Texture paper, vellum paper
Environ- Texture paper Vellum paper

ment tem-
perature of
20 deg C or
more
mary on- 60 to 80 to 106 129 151 181 210 257 301 60 to 80 to 106 129 151 181 210 257 301
ing Fix- 128 150 180 209 256 300 350 128 150 180 209 256 300 350
As- ing
sem- As-
bly sem-
(deg bly
C) (deg
C)
190 180 - - - - - - - +2 +2 - - - - - - - - -
170 - - - - - - - +1 +1 - - - - - - - - -
160 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
150 - - - - - - - -1 -1 - - - - - - - - -
140 - - - - - - - -2 -2 - - - - - - - - -
166
Environ- Texture paper Vellum paper

ment tem-
perature of
20 deg C or
more
mary on- 60 to 80 to 106 129 151 181 210 257 301 60 to 80 to 106 129 151 181 210 257 301
ing Fix- 128 150 180 209 256 300 350 128 150 180 209 256 300 350
As- ing
sem- As-
bly sem-
(deg bly
C) (deg
C)
190 130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
185 180 - - +2 +2 +2 +2 +2 - - - - - - - - - Yes Yes
170 - - +1 +1 +1 +1 +1 - - - - - - - - - - -
160 - - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -3 -3 - - - - - - - - -
150 - - -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 - - - - - - - - - - -
140 - - -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 - - - - - - - - - - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
110 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
any - - -4 -4 -4 -4 - - - - - - - - - - - -
180 180 +2 +2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
170 +1 +1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
160 Yes Yes -3 -3 -3 -3 -3 - - - - - - - Yes Yes - -
150 -1 -1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
140 -2 -2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
130 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
120
● Energy Saver Mode

When the machine has migrated to a power-saving mode (energy saver mode/low power mode/sleep mode) from standby, the
target control temperature is set lower than during standby, and the amount of power to the heater is reduced. In addition, the
fixing drive system is stopped during a power-saving mode.
Mode type Target control temperature (deg C) (with the standard mode)
Primary Fixing Assembly Secondary Fixing Assembly
Fixing Roller External Heat Pressure Belt Fixing Roller External Heat Pressure
Roller (Top/ Roller (Top/ Roller
Bottom) Bottom)
Standby mode 174 190 100 140 150 80
Energy saver Set to -10% 172 0 0 140 150 80
mode Set to -25% 172 0 0 114 113 68
Set to -50% 143 0 0 7 0 40
Low power mode 172 0 0 32 0 47
Sleep mode 0 0 0 0 0 0
167
■ Down Sequence Control

Down Sequence due to Continuous Printing
When the fixing temperature dropped during continuous printing with previous models using the roller fixing method, the print
speed was lowered or printing was stopped until the target temperature was restored (down sequence).
This machine uses two External Heat Rollers for both the Primary and Secondary Fixing Assemblies to prevent the temperature
from dropping during continuous printing, so the print speed is not lowered with a down sequence like previous models.
However, printing is stopped in the following cases:

1. When the paper width is switched from a small size to a large size
Reason: To prevent the gloss of the image edge from becoming too high due to the temperature rise on the edges of the
Fixing Roller.
2. When the control temperature is switched to that of another paper type
3. When a temperature increase of 25 deg C from the control temperature is detected by the Main Thermistor of the Pressure
Belt
Reason: To prevent image failure and uneven gloss.
Down Sequence for Low Temperature Environments

When the environment temperature is low, the print speed is lowered or the machine is put into standby to prevent image failure.
Environment temperature Description

15 deg C or higher and less than The productivity of coated paper that is 257 g/m2 or more is halved
20 deg C
10 deg C or higher and less than The productivity of all paper is halved
15 deg C
Lower than 10 deg C Print operations are not performed, to prevent toner from sticking to the inside of the Fixing Assembly
Down Sequence due to Edge Temperature Rise

The print speed of this machine is 100 ppm for 1-sided printing of A4/LTR paper. The print speed differs according to the paper
size and print mode (1-sided/2-sided).
Even with the same size paper, if the paper width is less than A4 (279.4 mm) and the paper weight is the prescribed weight (106
g/m2) or more, the print speed is decreased because it is necessary to increase the paper interval to prevent fixing failure due to
the temperature rise at the edges.
■ Paper Wrap Detection

Paper wrapping around the Fixing Roller and Pressure Belt (Pressure Roller) is detected by the Inner Delivery Sensor.
When the Inner Delivery Sensor detects a delay of the paper leading edge, it determines that a paper wrap jam has occurred,
stops the Fixing Motor with a brake, and then disengages the Pressure Belt (Pressure Roller) from the Fixing Roller to perform
jam removal.
The Fixing Inlet Sensor executes detection of remaining paper at recovery from paper wrapping jam following its occurrence.
168
PS305
PS304
Code Name
PS304 (PS312) Primary Fixing Inlet Sensor (Secondary Fixing Inlet Sensor)
PS305 (PS313) Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 1 (Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 1)
The sensor flag of the Fixing Inlet Sensor links with the engagement/disengagement of the Pressure Belt Unit and has a
mechanism for moving up and down.
At power-on or recovery from a jam (when the Pressure Belt Unit is disengaged), it moves above the paper feed surface and
detects remaining paper.
During printing (when the Pressure Belt Unit is engaged), it is positioned below the paper feed surface so that it does not affect
the paper feedability.
Fixing Roller
Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag

Pressure Belt Unit
Fixing Inlet Guide
PS304 (PS312)
169
Fixing Roller
Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag

Pressure Belt Unit
Fixing Inlet Guide
PS304 (PS312)
Code Name
PS304 (PS312) Primary Fixing Inlet Sensor (Secondary Fixing Inlet Sensor)
The Secondary Fixing Assembly has the same mechanism, except for the Pressure Belt Unit being replaced by the Pressure
Roller.
Control description
1. When the Inner Delivery Sensor detects a delay of the paper leading edge during printing, the Fixing Motor is stopped with
a brake.
• Jam code
0114: When a jam occurs in the Primary Fixing Assembly
0119: When a jam occurs in the Secondary Fixing Assembly
2. The Fixing Inlet Sensor detects remaining paper at recovery from a jam and at power-on/off.
• Jam code
0A13: When a jam occurs in the Primary Fixing Assembly
0A18: When a jam occurs in the Secondary Fixing Assembly
■ External Heat Belt Engagement/Disengagement Control

The External Heat Roller in the External Heat Belt Unit has a heater, and the External Heat Belt engages and heats the Fixing
Roller when printing to assist temperature control.
During standby, it is disengaged from the Fixing Roller to prevent the deformation of the Fixing Roller due to pressure.
The External Heat Belt (External Heat Belt Unit) is engaged to/disengaged from the Fixing Roller by the transmission of the drive
of the External Heat Engagement/Disengagement Motor to the Cam Shaft.
The External Heat Belt HP Sensor detects the home position to control engagement/disengagement of the External Heat Belt.
170
M301
(M306)
Cam Shaft
PS382
(PS383)
Cam Shaft
External Heat Unit
External Heat Belt
Fixing Roller
Code Name
M301 (M306) Primary Fixing External Heat Roller Pressure Motor (Secondary Fixing External Heat Roll-
er Pressure Motor)
PS306 (PS314) Primary Fixing External Heat Roller HP Sensor (Secondary Fixing External Heat Roller
HP Sensor)

E842-0101: External Heat Roller HP error (hardware detection) (Primary Fixing Assembly)
E842-0201: External Heat Roller HP error (hardware detection) (Secondary Fixing Assembly)
E842-0121: External Heat Roller Engagement/Disengagement error (Primary Fixing Assembly)
E842-0221: External Heat Roller Engagement/Disengagement error (Secondary Fixing Assembly)
E842-0122: External Heat Roller Disengagement error (Primary Fixing Assembly)
E842-0222: External Heat Roller Disengagement error (Secondary Fixing Assembly)
E842-0123: External Heat Roller Engagement error (Primary Fixing Assembly)
E842-0223: External Heat Roller Engagement error (Secondary Fixing Assembly)
■ Pressure Belt Displacement Control (Primary Fixing Assembly)

The Pressure Belt tends to be displaced toward the direction of the shaft when driven. Since the displacement of the Pressure
Belt may damage the Fixing Roller, it is controlled to always detect the position of the Pressure Belt while it is driven to keep it in
the center.
171
M304 Fixing Roller
PS308
Steering Roller
Pressure Belt
PS301
PS302
Swinging Arm
Sensor Arm
Code Name
M304 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Displacement Control Motor
PS301 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Position Sensor (Front)
PS302 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Position Sensor (Rear)
Control description
1. Before the drive of the Pressure Belt starts, the home position of the Steering Roller Shaft (displacement) is detected. The
position where the sensor flag above the Swing Arm Shaft blocks the light path of the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt
Displacement HP Sensor (PS308) is the home position.
M304
PS308
Sensor Flag
172
2. The position of the Pressure Belt is detected using the Sensor Arm engaged to the end surface of the Pressure Belt and the
Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Position Sensor (Front/Rear) (PS301/PS302).
Pressure Belt PS301 Sensor Arm
PS302
[D] [B] [A] [C] [E]
PS302 PS302 PS302 PS302 PS302
PS301 PS301 PS301 PS301 PS301
Code Pressure Belt position

[A] Center
[B] Towards the far side
[C] Towards the near side
[D] Further towards the far side than position [B]
[E] Further towards the near side than position [C]
173
3. When position [B] or [C] is detected, the Pressure Belt is moved to the center. The drive of the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt
Displacement Control Motor (M304) turns the Shaft Supports of the Steering Roller on the far side and near side in the
opposite direction from each other. This tilts the Steering Roller Shaft and moves the Pressure Belt to the near side or far
side in the shaft direction.
M304
Pressure Belt
Steering Roller Steering Roller

Support Support
M304
Pressure Belt

Support Support
M304
Pressure Belt

Support Support
174
4. When position [D] or [E] is detected, an error occurs and the drive stops because the belt displacement correction will not
make it in time.
However, when the first time this happens an error avoidance jam occurs (0CF1), which can be cleared by the user.
If belt displacement is detected again after the jam is cleared, an error occurs and the drive stops (and cannot be recovered).
Belt full displacement detection
This is the first time that the NO

machine detects full displacement
of the belt
YES
Retry Error jam (0CF1)
Clear the jam
E007-0101 error (Stops the drive)
Standby

E007-0101: Primary Fixing Pressure Belt displacement error
E007-0110: Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Displacement Control Motor drive error (from far side to near side)
E007-0111: Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Displacement Control Motor Drive error (from near side to far side)
■ External Heat Belt Displacement Control

The displacement of the External Heat Belt is adjusted to prevent damage to the belt. Adjustment is performed by tilting the entire
External Heat Belt Unit.
The Pressure Belt is controlled to retain a center position, but the External Heat Belt is controlled by displacing the belt so that
its far side and near side change for a prescribed time.
PS906
(PS909) External Heat Belt Unit
PS907
(PS910)
PS306
(PS314)
M335
(M336) Fixing Roller
Code Name
PS906 (PS909) Primary Fixing External Heat Belt Position Front Sensor (Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt Position Front
Sensor)
PS907 (PS910) Primary Fixing External Heat Belt Position Rear Sensor (Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt Position Rear
Sensor)
PS306 (PS314) Primary Fixing External Heat Roller HP Sensor (Secondary Fixing External Heat Roller HP Sensor)
175
Code Name
M335 (M336) Primary Fixing External Heat Belt Displacement Control Motor (Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt Displace-
ment Control Motor)
The first time the External Heat Belt is fully displaced, an error avoidance jam occurs (0CF1), which can be fixed by the user.
If belt displacement is detected again after the jam is cleared, an error occurs and the drive stops (and cannot be recovered).
Belt full displacement detection
This is the first time that the NO

machine detects full displacement
of the belt
YES
Retry Error jam (0CF1)
Clear the jam
E007-0102(E007-0202) error
(Stops the drive)
Standby

E007-0102: Primary Fixing External Heat Belt full displacement error
E007-0120: Primary Fixing External Heat Belt Displacement Control Motor error (from far side to near side)
E007-0121: Primary Fixing External Heat Belt Displacement Control Motor error (from near side to far side)
E007-0202: Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt full displacement error
E007-0220: Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt Displacement Control Motor error (from far side to near side)
E007-0221: Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt Displacement Control Motor error (from near side to far side)
■ Pressure Belt/Pressure Roller Engagement/Disengagement Control

The Pressure Belt (Pressure Roller) is engaged to/disengaged from the Fixing Roller according to the status of the machine, such
as whether it is printing or in standby.
The Pressure Belt Unit rises to engage/disengage the Fixing Roller by the transmission of the drive of the Pressure Belt Pressure
Motor to the Swing Shaft.
176
Fixing Roller
M303
(M308)
Pressure Belt
Pressure Belt Unit
Support Mount
Pressure Belt Unit
PS300
(PS316)
Swing Shaft
PS303
(PS315)
Code Name
M303 (M308) Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Pressure Motor (Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Pressure Motor)
PS300 (PS315) Primary Fixing Pressure Belt HP Sensor (Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller HP Sensor)
PS303 (PS316) Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Pressure Sensor (Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Pressure Sensor)
The position control of the Pressure Belt Unit is performed based on the Pressure Belt HP Sensor. The Pressure Belt Pressure
Sensor detects the status of engagement/disengagement.
PS300
Paper
PS303
Swing Shaft
The Secondary Fixing Assembly has the same mechanism, except for the Pressure Belt Unit being replaced by the Pressure
Roller.

E842-0111: Pressure Belt Engagement/Disengagement error (Primary Fixing Assembly)
E842-0211: Pressure Roller Engagement/Disengagement error (Secondary Fixing Assembly)
E842-0112: Pressure Belt Disengagement error (Primary Fixing Assembly)
177
E842-0212: Pressure Roller Disengagement error (Secondary Fixing Assembly)

E842-0113 Pressure Belt Engagement error (Primary Fixing Assembly)
E842-0213: Pressure Roller Engagement error(Secondary Fixing Assembly)
■ Cleaning Web Drive Control

In order to prevent fixing offset, toner residue on the Fixing Roller is collected on the Collection Roller and then removed by the
Cleaning Web.
Web take-up Roller
Fixing Web Unit
Cleaning Web
Collection Roller
Fixing Roller
The Cleaning Web is wound around the Web Take-up Roller by the transmission of the drive of the Fixing Web Solenoid to the
Web Take-up Roller Drive Gear via the One-way Clutch.
Cleaning Web
Web take-up Roller
Fixing Web Solenoid

(SL302/SL303)
Code Name
SL302 (SL303) Primary Fixing Web Solenoid (Secondary Fixing Web Solenoid)
178
Amount of web taken-up
Condition Paper size Number of times Web Solenoid is turned ON

At power-on*1 - Twice a second
At jam recovery
At Fixing Roller refresh
At printing Small*2 Once every two sheets fed
Large*3 Once every sheet fed
*1: Only when jam history remains (when the power is turned OFF and then ON without performing jam removal)
*2: Paper whose length is LTR or shorter
*3: Paper whose length is longer than LTR
■ Cleaning Web Level Detection

Whether the level of Cleaning Web is low is detected.
Control description
1. The Cleaning Web that was wound around the Web Feed Roller when it is first started to be used is wound around the Web
Take-up Roller as copying and printing is performed.
2. When the remaining Cleaning Web is less than the prescribed amount, the Web Level Detection Arm 1 is moved in the
direction of the arrow by the cut-off that alerts the level which is provided at the edge of the Cleaning Web. Then, the Web
Level Detection Arm 2 linked to the Web Level Detection Arm 1 blocks the light path of the Fixing Web Absence Advance
Notice Sensor. This sensor displays the warning "Cleaning web is nearly low (Printing is possible)" on the Control Panel.
Cleaning web cut-off
Web take-up Roller
Edge of the cleaning web Edge of the cleaning web
PS311
(PS320)
Cleaning Web
Web feed Roller Web Remaining Level Detection Arm 2
Web Remaining Level Detection Arm 1
179
3. If printing continues without replacing the Fixing Web, the machine stops when approximately 48,000 sheets (converted to
A4/LTR) have been printed, and displays the message "Replace cleaning web unit" on the Control Panel.
CAUTION:
Take care, as printing cannot be performed if the machine is turned OFF and then ON again.

COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-WEB
: Primary Fixing Web Parts Counter
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX2-WEB
: Secondary Fixing Web Parts Counter
■ Cleaning Web Engagement/Disengagement Control

When cleaning the Fixing Roller, the Cleaning Web is engaged to the Collection Roller by the Web Roller.
When the Fixing Roller is stopped, the Web Roller is disengaged from the Collection Roller to prevent deformation of the Fixing
Roller due to pressure. (It is disengaged from the entire Web Unit.)
The Web Roller is engaged to/disengaged from the Collection Roller by transmitting the drive of the Web Pressure Motor to the
Swing Shaft.
The Web HP Sensor detects the position to control the engagement/disengagement of the Web Roller.
M302
(M307)
Swing Shaft
Web Roller
Fixing Roller PS309

(PS318)
Code Name
M302 (M307) Primary Fixing Web Pressure Motor (Secondary Fixing Web Pressure Motor)
PS309 (PS318) Primary Fixing Web HP Sensor (Secondary Fixing Web HP Sensor)
180
Engagement/Disengagement Operation Conditions

[A] Engaged while the Fixing Roller is driving (to remove toner remaining on the Collection Roller)
[B] Disengaged while the Fixing Roller is stopped (to prevent deformation of the Fixing Roller due to pressure)
[A] [B]
Swing Shaft
Web Roller
Collection Roller
Fixing Roller
Sensor Flag
PS309 (PS318)
Code Name
<Related error code>

E842-0131: Fixing Web engagement/disengagement error (Primary Fixing Assembly)
E842-0231: Fixing Web engagement/disengagement error (Secondary Fixing Assembly)
E842-0132: Fixing Web disengagement error (Primary Fixing Assembly)
E842-0232: Fixing Web disengagement error (Secondary Fixing Assembly)
E842-0133: Fixing Web engagement error (Primary Fixing Assembly)
E842-0233: Fixing Web engagement error (Secondary Fixing Assembly)
■ Refresh Roller Engagement/Disengagement Control

When a large volume of paper is fed continuously, streaks of damage may occur on the surface of the Fixing Roller. The Fixing
Roller is refreshed at the prescribed timing to remove this damage.
The Fixing Roller is rotated for the prescribed amount of time with the Refresh Roller (that has a rough surface) engaged to the
Fixing Roller, to scrape the surface of the Fixing Roller and remove the damage.
181
Refresh Roller Refresh Roller
Fixing Roller
Fixing Roller
Scar
The engagement and disengagement of the Refresh Roller is performed with the drive of the Web Pressure Motor, as is the
engagement and disengagement of the web.
The position control of the Refresh Roller is performed based on the Web HP Sensor. The Refresh HP Sensor also detects that
the Refresh Roller is in the prescribed engagement position.
The Refresh Roller is cleaned by air blown from the Refresh Roller Air Nozzle to maintain the refresh performance of the Refresh
Roller.
M307
(M302) Web Unit
Refresh Roller
Cleaning Air Nozzle
Swing Shaft
PS382
(PS383)
Refresh Roller
PS309
(PS318)
Code Name
M302 (M307) Primary Fixing Web Pressure Motor (Secondary Fixing Web Pressure Motor)
PS382 (PS383) Primary Fixing Refresh Roller HP Sensor (Secondary Fixing Refresh Roller HP Sensor)
182
Transition of Engagement/Disengagement States

[A] During standby/printing
The Web Roller (Web Unit) and Refresh Roller are disengaged from the Fixing Roller.
[B] During cleaning of the Fixing Roller
The Web Roller (Web Unit) is engaged to the Collection Roller.g The Refresh Roller is not engaged to the Fixing Roller.
[C] During refresh
The Web Roller (Web Unit) and Refresh Roller are engaged to the Fixing Roller.
[A] [B] [C]
Web Roller
Web Roller Web Roller
OFF OFF ON
ON OFF OFF
PS382
(PS383)
PS309 Collection Roller Fixing Roller
(PS318)
Refresh Roller
Cleaning Air
Refresh Roller Refresh Roller Refresh Roller
Nozzle
Swing Shaft
Fixing Roller Fixing Roller Fixing Roller
Execution timing
Whether to execute the refresh operation is determined at the following timing. If determined to "execute", refresh operations will
be executed. The execution time differs according to the refresh level setting value described below.
• When starting to interrupt during printing (*1)
• When switching the paper size during printing (from a smaller paper size to a larger paper size*2)
• At the last rotation after printing
• At warm-up on the first start up of the day (when the surface temperature of the Fixing Roller is lower than 50 deg C)
*1: When the continuous drum rotation time reaches 4400 seconds (which corresponds to approx. 4000 to 5500 sheets of
continuous printing of small size paper), the printing is stopped, and cleaning of the Primary Charging Wire is forcibly executed.
Refreshing operation is also executed at the same time.
*2: Determined based on an internally referenced table for refresh control.
183
Job A Job B Job C
PRINT PRINT LAST PRINT LSTR
Cleaning of the Change of the paper size

primary charging wire (from small size to large size)
Nth PRINT STOP ! N+1th PRINT N+9th PRINT STOP ! N+10th PRINT
A A
Is refresh sequence No
to be executed?
Yes
Refresh sequence
END
Conditions for execution

When the total value of the refresh counter* reaches the specified value (the specified value differs according to the refresh level
setting value described below)
*: The number counted for this counter differs according to the paper type and size, and a maximum of two is added for each
sheet fed.
Example:
Paper size Number counted Paper size Number counted

A5R 1 STMTR 1
A4R 2 LTRR 2
A4 1 LTR 1
A3 2 LGL 2
LGR 2
<Refresh level setting for the Fixing Roller>

The following service modes and Settings/Registration items enable to change the timing to start the refresh operation and the
execution time.
Service mode (Lv. 2):

COPIER > OPTION > USER > FX-CLNLV
Settings/Registration:
Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Maintenance > Fixing Roller Auto Refresh Level
NOTE:
The above Settings/Registration item is displayed on the "Maintenance" screen by setting "1" for the following service mode.
Setting range: -5 to +5 (default: 0)
184
The setting value changes the timing to start the refresh operation (refresh counter threshold value) and the execution time.
Refresh level setting values -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5

Primary Minimum operation counter - 7500 7500 500 500 500 500 250 250 250 250
Fixing As- threshold value
sembly Refresh time per sheet None Nor- Nor- Nor- Nor- Nor- Nor- Nor- Nor- High High
mal mal mal mal mal mal mal mal
Secondary Minimum operation counter - - 7500 - 2000 1000 500 - 250 250 250
Fixing As- threshold value
sembly Refresh time per sheet None None Low None Low Low Nor- None Nor- High High
mal mal
CAUTION:
Advancing the timing to start the refresh operation or lengthening the execution time may abrade the surface of the Fixing
Roller and accelerate the wear.

COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > FX1-CL-E
: Executing the refresh operation of the Primary Fixing Roller
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > FX2-CL-E
: Executing the refresh operation of the Secondary Fixing Roller
<Related Setting/Registration modes>

Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Maintenance > Refresh Fixing Roller
NOTE:
■ Fixing Separation Claw Engagement/Disengagement Control (Secondary

Fixing Assembly)
In the Secondary Fixing Assembly, the Fixing Separation Claw engages the Pressure Roller to separate thin paper from the Fixing
Roller in order to prevent thin paper from wrapping around the Pressure Roller.
In addition, the Fixing Separation Claw is disengaged from the Pressure Roller according to the type of paper fed to prevent
damage on the Pressure Roller by the Separation Claw.
185
Fixing Separation Claw = Engagement

Condition: Coated paper (180g/m2 or less)
Plain paper (150g/m2 or less)
Fixing Separation Claw = Disengagement
Condition: Coated paper (181g/m2 or more)
Plain paper (151g/m2 or more)
Fixing Roller Fixing Roller
Fixing Roller
Separation Claw Separation Claw

Separation Claw
Pressure Pressure Pressure Roller
Roller Roller
Execution timing
Interval Condition Condition

During printing Engagement When the humidity is less than 65 %
Plain paper: Less than 210 g/m2
Coated paper: Less than 257 g/m2
Textured paper: Less than 210 g/m2
Transparency, Film, Labels
When the humidity is 65 % or more

Plain paper: Less than 210 g/m2
Coated paper: Less than 301 g/m2
Textured paper: Less than 257 g/m2
Transparency, Film, Labels
Disengagement Paper other than the above
The Fixing Separation Claw is engaged/disengaged by the drive of the Secondary Fixing Separation Claw Disengagement
Solenoid (SL412).
In addition to separating thin paper, the Fixing Separation Claw is also engaged/disengaged in the following cases to detect errors
and notify error codes.
• At power-on
• At recovery from sleep mode
• When the door is closed

E197-02A2: Fixing Separation Claw Disengagement Solenoid connection error
186
■ Pressure Refresh Roller Engagement/Disengagement Control (Secondary

Fixing Assembly)
• Refreshing to remedy damage from the Fixing Separation Claw
Since the Fixing Separation Claw is engages to the Pressure Roller when separating thin paper, the claw damages the
surface of the Pressure Roller.
The Pressure Roller is periodically refreshed to prevent image failure due to damage from the Fixing Separation Claw.
• Refreshing to remedy the accumulation of foreign matter on the Pressure Roller
When a large volume of paper is fed, paper dust and toner components can get stuck on the surface of the Pressure Roller.
When these are accumulated, uneven gloss may appear on the image after fixing due to the change in the releasing and
fixing performance of toner.
The Pressure Roller is periodically refreshed to prevent this.
The Pressure Roller is refreshed by being engaged with the Pressure Refresh Roller for approximately 5 seconds each time.
Execution timing
During printing.
Conditions for execution

The above two refresh operations are executed when either of them reaches the following threshold value, with the decision
made in parallel.
• When the Fixing Separation Claw has been engaged for 500 seconds or more (total time)
• When the counter that counts according to the paper length (small size advanced by 1 and large size advanced by 2) reaches
500 sheets or more
<Refresh level setting for the Pressure Roller>

The following service modes and Settings/Registration items enable to change the refresh frequency and the refresh time.
Service mode (Lv. 2):

COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING > FXPCLNLV
Settings/Registration:
Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Maintenance > Fixing Roller Auto Refresh Level
NOTE:
Setting range: -5 to +5 (default: 0)
The setting value changes the timing to start the refresh operation (refresh counter threshold value) and the execution time.
Refresh level setting values -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5

Refreshing the damage Refresh frequency - 6000 500 500 - 500 250 - 500 500 100
by Separation Claw (seconds/refresh)
Time for each re- - 18 1.5 3 - 3 1.5 - 5 10 5
fresh (seconds)
Refreshing the soiling Refresh frequency - 6000 500 - 500 500 - 250 500 500 100
on the surface (sheets/refresh)
Time for each re- - 18 1.5 - 3 3 - 1.5 5 10 5
fresh (seconds)
CAUTION:
Advancing the timing to start the refresh operation or lengthening the execution time may abrade the surface of the Fixing
Roller and accelerate the wear.
187

COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > FX-CLN
: Refresh operation for the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller (glossy streaks)
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > FX2PR-CL
: Refresh Operation for the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller (image failure)
NOTE:
Make sure to output a 2-sided solid Y-color PG after executing FX2PR-CL.
■ Separation Air Blow Control (Primary Fixing Assembly)

With the Primary Fixing Assembly, air is blown to the leading edge of the paper when performing fixing separation to achieve
separation of thin paper.
Separation Air Nozzle
Primary Fixing
Paper Pressure Belt
Execution timing
When thin paper reaches the primary fixing nip outlet
Control description
An air pump is started to blow air once for 150 msec.
■ Refresh Roller Cleaning Air Blow Control

Air is blown to the Refresh Roller to prevent the Refresh Roller from becoming clogged.
188
Refresh Roller
Cleaning Air Nozzle
Primary Fixing
Refresh Roller
Execution timing
This is executed at the same time as the Fixing Roller refresh operation.
Control description
1. The Air Pump is started, and the Refresh Roller Air Cleaning Nozzle blows air to the Refresh Roller while reciprocating, by
periodically turning a solenoid valve ON and OFF*.
*: Cycles of blowing for 50 msec then waiting for 300 msec
When refreshing the Refresh Roller of the Primary Fixing Assembly and Secondary Fixing Assembly at the same time, air
is blown to both Refresh Rollers alternately, because if the solenoid valves are opened at the same time the air pressure
drops and the cleaning ability is lowered.
2. When the Refresh Roller is disengaged, the Air Pump and motor are shut down to complete the operation.
189
■ Protection Function
● Protection Circuit
Fixing Duplex
Feed Driver PCB
Primary Fixing Assembly (UN311)
DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124) CPU
Thermoswitch
Main Sub Sub
External Heat
Upper Roller Excessive temperature
increase detection
Main Sub Sub (software detection)
External Heat
ADC FPGA
Lower Roller
Main
Fixing Roller Sub
Main Sub
WD
Pressure Belt
monitoring
circuit
Primary Fixing
Outer Driver PCB Divider circuit
(UN304)
Connection
detection
Excessive temperature
increase detection
(hardware detection)
Heater
error detection
Thermistor
tear detection
CPU
monitoring
circuit
Heater error detection

Triac
short detection
OR
Heater
Heater OFF circuit
control circuit
AC Relay AC Relay Relay OFF circuit Relay

FET
(H) (N) control circuit
Relay
FET Relay OFF circuit
control circuit
Paper wind
detection circuit
Primary Fixing
Heater Driver PCB Sensor failure FPGA
detection circuit Error detection
(UN306)
190
Fixing Duplex
Feed Driver PCB
Secondary Fixing Assembly (UN311) DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124) CPU
Thermoswitch
Main Sub Sub
External Heat
Upper Roller
increase detection
Main Sub Sub (software detection)
External Heat
ADC FPGA
Lower Roller
Main
Sub
Fixing Roller
Pressure Main
Sub WD
Roller monitoring
circuit
Secondary Fixing
Outer Driver PCB Divider circuit
(UN305)
Connection
detection
Heater
increase detection
error detection
CPU
monitoring
circuit
Heater error detection

Triac
short detection
OR
Heater
Heater OFF circuit
control circuit
AC Relay AC Relay Relay OFF circuit Relay

FET
(H) (N) control circuit
Relay
FET Relay OFF circuit
control circuit
Paper wind
detection circuit
Secondary Fixing Sensor failure FPGA

Heater Driver PCB detection circuit Error detection
(UN307)
Name Function Remarks

CPU Monitoring Circuit Monitors erratic behavior of the CPU
Connection detection Detects the disconnection of thermistor connector
Detection of heater error Detects abnormal temperature rise of the heater
Detection of External Heat Roller Detects the engagement of the External Heat Roller when the Fixing Mo-
HP tor is Stopped
Prevents the External Heat Roller from staying engaged on the Fixing
Roller.
Detection of triac short-circuit Detects damage/short-circuit of triac
Detection of abnormal temperature Detects abnormal temperature rise of the heater
rise (hardware detection)
Thermistor open circuit detection Detects the disconnection/connection status of thermistor Primary Fixing Assem-
bly only
Detection of heater error (hardware Detects abnormal temperature of heater
detection)
Heater Control Circuit Heater Off
Relay Control Circuit AC Relay Off
191
Name Function Remarks

Heater Off Circuit Heater Off
Relay Off Circuit AC Relay Off
AC Relay Blocks AC Line
Thermoswitch Blocks AC Line
Detection of abnormal temperature Detects abnormal temperature rise of thermistor (by software detection),
rise (software detection) Heater/AC Relay Off
192
Pickup Feed System
Overview
■ Specifications
Item Description
Paper storage method Front-loading method
Pickup Assembly 2 Decks (Right, Left)
Long Sheet Tray-A1 (Option)
Paper size Deck (Right, Left) B5/B5R to 330 mm x 487 mm (13" x 19.2")
60 g/m2 to 350 g/m2
Long Sheet Tray-A1 (Option) Length: 487.7 mm to 762 mm, Width: 210 mm to
330.2 mm
64 g/m2 to 256 g/m2
Stacking capacity Deck (Right, Left) 2000 sheets (80 g/m2)
Long Sheet Tray-A1 (Option) 1 sheet
Paper size switching Deck (Right, Left) By user *1
Long Sheet Tray-A1 (Option) By user *1
Pickup method Air separation method
Paper feed reference Center reference
Display of Recording Pa- Yes (Control Panel/Level LED)
per Level
Transparency detection Yes (Transmissive Sensor)
Heavy Paper Auto Detec- Yes (Displacement Sensor)
tion
Double Feed Detection Yes (Ultrasonic Sensor)
Paper Length Detection Yes (Prism Reflection Sensor)
2-Sided Copying Method Through-pass duplexing
Related Settings/Regis- Display Remaining Paper Message
tration *2 Inch Entry
Cassette Auto Selection ON/OFF
Select Paper Type
Paper Type Selection Screen Priority
LTRR/STMT Original Selection
Multi-Purpose Tray Defaults
Register Custom Size
Offset Jobs
Job Separator Between Jobs
Job Separator Between Copies
*1: Input from the Control Panel

*2: For details, refer to the user manual.
193
● Unit (Main Station)
Registration Unit
ITB Unit Pre-registration Unit
Secondary Transfer
Outer Belt Unit
Pre-fixing Feed Pre-fixing Feed

Left Unit Right Unit
Main Station Duplex Main Station Duplex

Feed Left Unit Feed Middle Unit Left Pickup Unit Lower Feed Unit Right Pickup Unit
Left Deck Main Station Duplex Right Deck Vertical Path Unit
Feed Right Unit
194
● Unit (Sub Station)

Secondary Fixing Assembly Tandem Feed Unit
Delivery/Reverse Unit Fixing Merging Path Unit Bypass Feed Unit Primary Fixing Assembly
Duplex Decurler Unit Sub Station Duplex Sub Station Duplex

Feed Left Unit Feed Right Unit
195
● Sensors (Main Station)

[15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10]
[23] [22] [21] [20] [19]
[24] [25] [26] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9]
No. Name Code No. Name Code

[1] Left Deck Pullout Sensor PS701 Double Feed Sensor (Transmission) UN122
[12]
[2] Left Deck Merging Sensor PS160 Double Feed Sensor (Reception) UN123
[3] Lower Feed Sensor 1 PS161 [13] Pre-feed Sensor 1 PS139
[4] Lower Feed Path Paper Length Sensor (Left PS210 [14] Pre-feed Sensor 2 PS140
Rear)
Lower Feed Path Paper Length Sensor (Left PS212 [15] Pre-feed Sensor 3 PS141
Front)
[5] Lower Feed Path Paper Length Sensor PS214 [19] Registration Front Sensor PS146
(Right Rear)
Lower Feed Path Paper Length Sensor PS217 [20] Registration Sensor PS151
(Right Front)
[6] Lower Feed Sensor 2 PS162 [21] Secondary Transfer Outlet Sensor PS166
[7] Right Deck Pullout Sensor PS601 [22] Pre-fixing Feed Sensor 1 PS172
[8] Right Deck Merging Sensor PS163 [23] Pre-fixing Feed Sensor 2 PS200
[9] Vertical Path Sensor PS164 [24] Duplex Standby Sensor 3 PS171
[10] POD Deck Path Sensor PS220 [25] Duplex Standby Sensor 2 PS170
[11] Transparency Sensor (Rear) PS137 [26] Duplex Standby Sensor 1 PS169
196

[11] Transparency Sensor (Front) PS138
● Sensor (Sub Station)

[15] [14] [13] [9] [12] [8] [7] [6] [11] [5] [10] [4] [3] [2] [1]
[16] [17] [19] [26] [27] [18] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] [25]

[1] Primary Fixing Inlet Sensor PS304 [15] Delivery Sensor 3 PS339
[2] Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 1 PS305 [16] Delivery/Reverse Front Sensor PS342
[3] Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 2 PS307 [17] Delivery Reverse Sensor 1 PS335
[4] Tandem Sensor 1 PS326 [18] Delivery Reverse Sensor 2 PS336
[5] Tandem Sensor 2 PS327 [19] Duplex Reverse Sensor PS340
[6] Secondary Fixing Inlet Sensor PS312 [20] Duplex Reverse Rear Sensor PS341
[7] Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 1 PS313 [21] Duplex Path Inlet Sensor PS344
[8] Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 2 PS317 [22] Duplex Standby Sensor 6 PS347
[9] Merging Path Upper Sensor PS325 [23] Duplex Standby Sensor 5 PS346
[10] Bypass Sensor 1 PS322 [24] Duplex Standby Sensor 4 PS345
[11] Bypass Sensor 2 PS323 [25] Duplex Path Sub Station Outlet Sensor PS350
[12] Merging Path Lower Sensor PS321 [26] Reverse Remaining Paper Sensor (Left) PS919
[13] Delivery Sensor 1 PS337 [27] Reverse Remaining Paper Sensor (Right) PS918
[14] Delivery Sensor 2 PS338
197
● Roller (Main Station)

[21] [20] [19] [18] [17] [16] [15] [14]
[26] [25] [24] [23] [22]
[28] [30] [1] [3] [32] [6] [33] [7] [9] [11] [13]
[27] [29] [31] [2] [4] [5] [8] [10] [12]
Code Name Code Name Code Name

[1] Left Deck Belt Drive Roller [12] Right Deck Merging Roller [23] Secondary Transfer Inner Roller
* 2: Left Deck Pullout Roller [13] Vertical Path Feed Roller [24] Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
[3] Left Deck Pullout Auxiliary Roller [14] POD Deck Path Feed Roller [25] Fixing Feed Drive Roller 1
[4] Left Deck Merging Roller [15] Feed Roller 1 [26] Fixing Feed Drive Roller 2
[5] Lower Feed Roller 1 [16] Feed Roller 2 [27] Duplex Feed Roller 3-2
[8] Lower Feed Roller 4 [19] Cross-feed Roller 1 [30] Duplex Feed Roller 2-1
[9] Right Deck Belt Drive Roller [20] Cross-feed Roller 2 [31] Duplex Feed Roller 1-2
[10] Right Deck Pullout Roller [21] Cross-feed Roller 3 [32] Duplex Feed Roller 1-1
[11] Right Deck Pullout Auxiliary Roller [22] Registration Roller (Lower) [33] Paper Retainer Roller
198
● Roller (Sub Station)

[22] [20] [23] [17] [15] [9] [8] [5] [3] [1]
[21] [19] [18] [11] [10] [7] [6] [4] [2]
[24] [26] [28] [30] [32] [16] [14] [13] [12] [38]
[25] [27] [29] [31] [33] [34] [35] [36] [37]
Code Name Code Name Code Name

[1] Primary Fixing Roller [14] Bypass Feed Roller 3 [27] Delivery Reverse Roller 2
[2] Separation Roller [15] Bypass Decurler Upper Roller [28] Duplex Reverse Roller
[3] Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Up- [16] Bypass Decurler Drive Roller [29] Duplex Post-reverse Roller
per Roller
[4] Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Low- [17] Bypass Feed Roller 4 [30] Duplex Decurler Upper Roller
er Roller
[5] Tandem Feed Roller 1 [18] Delivery Roller 1 [31] Duplex Decurler Drive Roller
[6] Tandem Feed Roller 2 [19] Delivery Roller 2 [32] Duplex Feed Roller 7
[7] Secondary Fixing Roller [20] Delivery Decurler 1 [33] Duplex Feed Roller 6-2
[8] Pressure Roller [21] Delivery Decurler 2 [34] Duplex Feed Roller 6-1
[9] Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery [22] Delivery Roller 3 [35] Duplex Feed Roller 5-2
Upper Roller
[10] Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery [23] Delivery Pre-reverse Roller [36] Duplex Feed Roller 5-1
Lower Roller
[11] Tandem Feed Roller 3 [24] Delivery Reverse Rear Roller [37] Duplex Feed Roller 4-2
[12] Bypass Feed Roller 1 [25] Delivery Reverse Roller 1 [38] Duplex Feed Roller 4-1
[13] Bypass Feed Roller 2 [26] Color Sensor Backup Roller
199
● Main Station
M181 M188 M183 M164 M168 M159 M158 M157 M156
M176
M178
M177
M187 M186 M185 M701 M702 M175 M173 M174 M172 M601 M602
Code Name Code Name

M156 Pre-registration Motor 1 M178 Vertical Path Feed Motor
M157 Pre-registration Motor 2 M181 Pre-fixing Feed Drive Left Motor
M158 Pre-registration Motor 3 M183 Secondary Transfer Drive Motor
M159 Pre-registration Motor 4 M185 Duplex Feed Motor 1
M164 Registration Motor M186 Duplex Feed Motor 2
M168 Cross-feed Motor M187 Duplex Feed Motor 3
M172 Lower Feed Motor 4 M188 Pre-fixing Feed Drive Right Motor
M173 Lower Feed Motor 2 M601 Right Deck Pickup Belt Motor
M174 Lower Feed Motor 3 M602 Right Deck Pullout Motor
M175 Lower Feed Motor 1 M701 Left Deck Pickup Belt Motor
M176 POD Deck Path Feed Motor M702 Left Deck Pullout Motor
M177 Right Deck Feed Motor
200
● Sub Station
M318 M324 M323 M312 M305 M310 M300
M334
M320
M321 M322 M332 M331 M329 M311 M327 M330 M328
Code Name Code Name

M300 Primary Fixing Drive Motor M323 Pre-delivery Feed Motor 1
M305 Secondary Fixing Drive Motor M324 Pre-delivery Feed Motor 2
M310 Tandem Feed Motor M327 Duplex Feed Motor 6
M311 Bypass Feed Motor M328 Duplex Feed Motor 4
M312 Merging Path Feed Motor M329 Duplex Feed Motor 7
M318 Delivery Motor M330 Duplex Feed Motor 5
M320 Delivery Reverse Motor M331 Duplex Feed Motor 8
M321 Duplex Reverse Motor M332 Duplex Decurler Drive Motor
M322 Duplex Post-reverse Motor M334 Bypass Decurler Drive Motor
■ Paper Path/Interval Speed

1. Pickup Position - Pre-registration Position
< Other Than Long Length Paper >
201
p1
A
Interval Paper feed speed

[A] 1000 mm/sec
p1: Pre-registration stop position
< Long Length Paper >
A
p1

[A] 285 mm/sec
2. Pre-registration Position - Primary Pre-fixing

< Other Than Long Length Paper >
202
p2 p1
D C A
B

[A] 853.3 mm/sec (100 ppm), 652.4 mm/sec (80 ppm)
[B] 928 mm/sec (100 ppm), 696 mm/sec (80 ppm)*1
[C] 464 mm/sec (100 ppm), 348 mm/sec (80 ppm)*2
[D] 467 mm/sec (100 ppm), 351 mm/sec (80 ppm)*2
* 1: Approximately 928 mm/sec (100 ppm), 696 mm/sec (80 ppm) (the feed speed cannot be identified because it is an interval
where paper is cross-fed)
* 2: Performs leading edge registration control and decelerates.
p2: Deceleration position (the deceleration point is determined by the registration control)
< Long Length Paper >
p2 p1
D C A
B

[A] 285 mm/sec
[B] 928 mm/sec (100 ppm), 696 mm/sec (80 ppm)*1
203

[C] 464 mm/sec (100 ppm), 348 mm/sec (80 ppm)*2
[D] 467 mm/sec (100 ppm), 351 mm/sec (80 ppm)*2
* 1: Approximately 928 mm/sec (100 ppm), 696 mm/sec (80 ppm) (the feed speed cannot be identified because it is an interval
where paper is cross-fed)
* 2: Performs leading edge registration control and decelerates.
p2: Deceleration position (the deceleration point is determined by the registration control)
3. Primary Fixing Assembly - Secondary Fixing Assembly Delivery Position
C B
D
B A

[A] 470 mm/sec (100 ppm), 351 mm/sec (80 ppm)
[B] 472 mm/sec (100 ppm), 356 mm/sec (80 ppm)
[C] 482 mm/sec (100 ppm), 366 mm/sec (80 ppm)
[D] 489 mm/sec (100 ppm), 373 mm/sec (80 ppm)
204
4. Secondary Fixing Assembly Delivery Position - Delivery Position

(a) During face-up delivery

[A] 489 mm/sec (100 ppm) => 1000 mm/sec (100 ppm), 373 mm/sec (80 ppm) => 1000 mm/sec (80 ppm)
(b) During face-down delivery
p1
p2
p4
B p3
205

[A] 325 mm/sec => 750 mm/sec
[B] 750 mm/sec
Paper feed speed accelerates at the stage where the trailing edge of the paper passes through the Secondary Fixing Assembly
or Bypass Decurler. In terms of control, it accelerates when the leading edge of the paper reaches the acceleration position.
The acceleration position differs depending on the paper sizes as follows.
p1: Acceleration position 1 (227.1 mm or shorter paper)
p2: Acceleration position 2 (B4 (364.0 mm) or shorter paper)
p3: Acceleration position 3 (paper longer than B4 (364.0 mm))
p4: Delivery reverse position
(c) Duplex path

Main Station:
A
p5 p6 p7
206
Sub Station:
A
p1 p2 p3 p4

[A] 750 mm/sec
p1: Duplex reverse position

p2: Duplex standby position 6
207
Controls
■ Overview
● Main Station
Pre-registration Unit Vertical Path Unit
Pre-fixing Feed Secondary Transfer

Left Unit Outer Belt Unit
Pre-fixing Feed
Righit Unit Registration Unit
Left Deck Left Pickup Unit

Right Deck Lower Feed Unit
Main Station Duplex Main Station Duplex Main Station Duplex Right Pickup Unit
Feed Left Unit Feed Middle Unit Feed Right Unit
Unit name Control name

Right Deck/Left Deck • Lifter control
• Open/Close control
• Paper surface detection
• Paper level detection
• Paper detection
• Paper size switch-over control
• Auto change function
Right Pickup Unit/Left Pickup Unit • Air pickup control
• Pickup fan control
• Pickup operation
Lower Feed Unit Paper length detection
208

Pre-registration Unit • Pre-registration control
• Double feed detection
• Paper thickness detection
• Registration Roller engagement/disengagement control
Registration Unit • Cross-feed registration control
• Leading edge registration control
• Cross-feed Roller engagement/disengagement control
Secondary Transfer Outer Belt Unit Secondary Transfer Roller engagement/disengagement control
Main Station Duplex Feed Unit Duplex standby control, Page passing control
● Sub Station
Secondary Fixing
Assembly
Fixing Merging Bypass Feed Unit
Delivery/Reverse Unit Path Unit Tandem Feed Primary Fixing
Unit Assembly


Primary Fixing Assembly • Fixing Path switch control*
• Fixing drive control*
Tandem Feed Unit -
Bypass Feed Unit -
Secondary Fixing Assembly Fixing drive control*
Fixing Merging Path Unit Bypass Decurler control
Delivery/Reverse Unit • Delivery control
• Reverse control
• Duplex reverse control
• Jam residual paper ejection control
• Delivery Decurler control
• Path switch control
209

Duplex Decurler Unit Duplex Decurler control
Sub Station Duplex Feed Unit Duplex standby control, Page passing control
*: Refer to the Fixing System for details.
■ Basic Sequence
● Pickup Timing from the Deck
This machine performs image formation before pickup in both the Right Deck and Left Deck.
The pickup start time is determined by the calculation shown below based on the Y-TOP signal (vertical scanning synchronization
signal (Y)).
Pickup Start Time = Timage - Tpaper - Tstop

• Timage: Image travel time from Y Exposure Position (A) to Secondary Transfer Position (D)
• Tpaper: Paper feed time from Pickup Start Position (B) to Secondary Transfer Position (D)
• Tstop: Pre-registration Standby Time* (Pre-registration Stop Position (C))
*: The Pre-registration Standby Time is 100 mm/sec
T image
D
C
PS141 T paper
B B
■ Long Sheet Tray

● Configuration
NOTE:
The Long Sheet Tray is optional (Long Sheet Tray-A1).
Paper can be fed manually from the Multi-Purpose Tray when the Long Sheet Tray-A1 is mounted.
210
Multi-purpose Tray Multi-purpose Tray

Separation Roller Pickup Roller
Manual Feed Extraction
Upper Roller
PS801
Last Paper
PS800 Sensor Roller
Manual Feed
Extraction Lower Roller Paper Sensor Flag
Code Name
PS800 Multi-purpose Tray Paper Path Sensor
PS801 Multi-purpose Tray Last Paper Sensor
● Pickup Operation
1. When the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Solenoid (SL800) turns ON, the drive is transmitted to the Semi-toothed Gear which
rotates. The Middle Plate Fixation Member is released, and the Middle Plate rises.
Semi-toothed Gear Semi-toothed Gear
SL800
Holding Plate Holding Plate Holding Plate Holding Plate
Fixing Members Fixing Members
2. The Multi-purpose Tray Pullout Roller, Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller, and Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller are
rotated by the drive from the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Motor (M800), and only a single sheet of paper is picked up and fed.
Manual Feed Manual Separation Roller/

Extraction Roller Manual Feed Roller
M800
● Paper size detection

The paper width is detected according to the output from the variable resistor driven by the Slide Guide movement.
Width alignment of the Slide Guides in the Multi-purpose Tray is performed by the user moving the Slide Guides when loading
the paper.
211
Veriable Resistor
Manual Feed Tray
Side Guide(Rear)
Side Guide(Front)
● Last paper detection

Last Paper Detection is performed to ensure that image formation is not performed on the ITB when there is no paper.
The Last Paper Pickup Roller only rotates when the last paper has been fed. When the Last Paper Pickup Roller rotates, a pulse
signal is output from the Multi-purpose Tray Last Paper Sensor (PS801) by the slit in the roller. The last paper is detected if four
or more output pulses are detected.
PS801
Last Paper Roller
PS801
Last paper roller
212
■ Left Deck/Right Deck

● Lifter control
The lifter is driven by the Lifter Motor via the Lifter Wire. The lifter ascends or descends as the rotation direction of this Lifter Motor
changes.
Ascent Control
When the Deck Interlock Switch and Deck Open/Close Sensor turn ON, the deck is judged to be loaded and the lifter ascends.
After this, the paper surface is monitored by the Upper Limit Paper Surface Sensor, Lower Limit Paper Surface Sensor, and
Intermediate Paper Surface Sensor, and the lifter stops when it reaches the lower limit of the area where pickup is possible.
In case the lifter does not stop ascending for some reason after the Upper Limit Paper Surface Sensor turns OFF, the machine
has a Lifter Upper Limit Sensor to prevent breakage of the host machine due to excessive ascent.
Furthermore, a Foreign Matter Sensor is fitted to prevent damage to the Lifter Wire, plastic gears, etc. to take into account the
cases where there is foreign matter in the receptacle that strikes the ceiling before it reaches the position where separation of
paper by air can begin.
Descent Control
The lifter begins descending when the Open button is pressed on the Deck Front Cover, and descends until it reaches the position
where it passes the sensor flag on the Deck Supply Position Sensor (sensor OFF => ON => OFF).
Since the sensor flag of the Deck Supply Position Sensor is held back by the paper if paper is supplied in this state, the lifter
descends further to the position where the stacked paper passes the sensor flag.
The lifter repeats this descend operation each time paper is supplied until it reaches the position where the Lifter Lower Limit
Sensor turns ON (maximum paper supply position).
In case the lifter does not stop descending for some reason after the Lifter Lower Limit Sensor turns ON, the machine has a Lifter
Lower Limit Switch to prevent breakage of the host machine due to excessive descent.
Storage close sensor

Foreign Particle
Lifter Upper
Sensor
Limit Sensor
Trailing Edge Lifter
Trailing Edge Sensor 2 Lifter Wire
Sensor 1
Deck Level Sensor (Left)
Deck Level Sensor (Right)
Left Side Fan
Lifter Motor
Deck Open/Close Deck Interlock Switch

Solenoid
Lifter Wire
Receptacle Supply
Position Sensor
Right Side Fan

Lifter Lower Limit Switch
Lifter Lower Limit Sensor
Name Code Name Code

(Left Deck/Right Deck) (Left Deck/Right Deck)
Trailing Edge Sensor 1 PS715 / PS615 Deck Interlock Switch SW703 / SW603
Trailing Edge Sensor 2 PS716 / PS616 Deck Supply Position Sensor PS709 / PS609
Foreign Particle Sensor PS713 / PS613 Right Side Fan FM706 / FM606
213
Name Code Name Code

Deck Open/Close Sensor PS707 / PS607 Lifter Lower Position Sensor PS712 / PS612
Lifter Upper Limit Sensor PS714 / PS614 Lifter Lower Limit Switch SW702 / SW602
Deck Level Sensor (Left) PS711 / PS611 Deck Open/Close Solenoid SL703 / SL602
Deck Level Sensor (Right) PS710 / PS610 Left Side Fan FM707 / FM607
Lifter Motor M703 / M603
UN603
Right Deck
Storage Close Sensor Pickup
Foreign Particle Sensor Driver PCB
Lifter Upper Limit Switch

UN703
Lifter Wire
Left Deck
Pickup
Driver PCB
Lifter Motor
UN602
Right Deck
Driver PCB
Deck Interlock
Lifter Wire Switch
Storage Supply UN702
Position Sensor
Left Deck
Driver PCB
Lifter Lower Position Sensor
First Page Lift Down Limit Control

In the case of paper that has excessive downward curl or upward curl, it cannot be attracted because the paper surface separates
from the Attraction Belt.
In the case of downward curl, the air blown from the Air Floatation Nozzle lifts up the leading edge of the paper. Since the paper
surface height is determined by the leading edge of the paper surface link, the paper cannot be attracted.
In the case of upward curl, since the air blows to push the paper leading edge downwards, the paper cannot be separated.
214
When the paper has a lower curl
Paper surface link Paper Floatation nozzle
When the paper has an upper curl
In order to ensure that the gap between the Attraction Belt and the paper does not become too large, the lifter is controlled to
ensure that it does not descend below a designated amount while preparing for pickup.
Paper Surface Height Control

If the paper surface height of the leading edge becomes unstable due to separation of paper by air, smooth transfer to the next
pickup operation may not be possible.
In this machine, control is performed while preparing for pickup and during pickup so that the lifter moves to the appropriate
position in preparation for the next pickup.
When the Intermediate Paper Surface Sensor is ON and the height of the paper trailing edge reaches reference A or reference
B, it is judged to be the appropriate position and the lifter stops.
Whether to employ reference A or reference B is determined by the paper size, weight, surface nature, and environment.
Bottom surface of
the suction belt
Trailing Edge Sensor 1 Trailing Edge Sensor 2

14 mm
ON 17 mm
Reference A
ON
OFF
Reference B
OFF
Furthermore, when the Intermediate Paper Surface Sensor is ON and the amount of ascension of the lifter per sheet of paper
becomes greater than a designated amount, the lifter stops.
The designated amount of ascension per sheet of paper is determined by the paper size, weight, surface nature, and environment.
In cases other than the above, the lifter ascends.
Note that if the Intermediate Paper Surface Sensor turns ON while the lifter is ascending and the following time elapses after the
trailing edge of the preceding paper passes the Pullout Sensor (ON => OFF), the lifter stops.
• Paper of weight 150 g/m2 or less: 60 mm/sec or more
• Paper of weight greater than 150 g/m2: 100 mm/sec or more
Lifter Control Timing
At power-on
After the lifter has ascended until the Lower Limit Paper Surface Sensor turns ON to judge the presence of paper, the lifter
descends to the lower limit position and the counted number of paper level is reset.
If there is no paper at this time, automatic air flow adjustment of the fan is performed. After the lifter has ascended until the Lower
Limit Paper Surface Sensor turns ON again, it descends to the supply position (the position where the Deck Supply Position
Sensor changes OFF => ON => OFF).
If there is paper, the lifter ascends until the paper surface reaches the area where the paper can be picked up (Lower Limit Paper
Surface Sensor turns ON) without performing the automatic air flow adjustment of the fan.
215
When the deck is open
NOTE:
If the power is turned ON while the deck is open, the lifter descends until it reaches the lower limit position. The counted number
of the paper level is reset but the automatic air flow adjustment of the fan is not performed.
When the Open button is detected as pressed, the lifter descends for 1.0 sec and then the deck opens.
The lifter descends to the supply position.
When the deck is closed

The lifter ascends until the paper surface reaches the area where paper can be picked up (Lower Limit Paper Surface Sensor
turns ON).
Note that if a level difference is formed when the paper is loaded such that the trailing edge of the paper is at a higher position
than the leading edge, the upper limit of the trailing edge paper surface detection (Trailing Edge Sensor 1 OFF and Trailing Edge
Sensor 2 ON) may be reached before the lifer reaches the area where the paper can be picked up (Lower Limit Paper Surface
Sensor OFF).
If this happens, the lifter ascends for a maximum period of 300 mm/sec (approximately 3 mm). If Lower Limit Paper Surface
Sensor turns ON within the 300 mm/sec, the lifter stops at that point.
When preparing for pickup

First page lift down limit control and paper surface height control are performed.
1. The lifter position (encoder count value) is recorded.
2. Each fan is driven at the appropriate air flow according to conditions such as the paper size and environment.
3. The lifter stops after the following operation is performed for a maximum of 10.0 sec.
• If the paper surface is lower than the middle of the area where paper can be picked up (Intermediate Paper Surface
Sensor OFF), the lifter ascends.
• If the paper surface is higher than the pickup upper limit (Upper Limit Paper Surface Sensor OFF and Lower Limit Paper
Surface Sensor ON), the lifter descends. The operation of descending for 300 mm/sec and then stopping for 700
mm/sec repeats. When the paper surface has reached the appropriate position (Intermediate Paper Surface Sensor
and Upper Limit Paper Surface Sensor both ON), the lifter stops at that time.
4. The following operation is performed for approximately 3.0 sec.
• When the lifter has descended by the designated amount or more from the position recorded in Step 1, it ascends to
the designated amount. If the designated amount is not enough, the lifter stops at that point. Note that if the Intermediate
Paper Surface Sensor is OFF, the lifter ascends until it turns ON.
5. The Deck Pickup Solenoid is turned ON.
During pickup
Paper surface height control is performed.
If the paper surface is above the pickup lower limit (Lower Limit Paper Surface Sensor ON) after the trailing edge of the preceding
paper has passed the Pullout Sensor (ON => OFF), the Deck Pickup Solenoid is turned ON.
If the paper is adhered to the Attraction Belt (Suction Completion Sensor ON) after 140 mm/sec have elapsed from when the
Pullout Sensor turned OFF, paper pickup becomes possible.
If paper is not adhered (Suction Completion Sensor OFF), paper pickup becomes possible after a maximum of 300 mm/sec wait
time. If the Suction Completion Sensor turns ON within 300 mm/sec, paper pickup becomes possible at that point.
If paper pickup is possible, and if the paper interval from the preceding paper is sufficient, pickup begins.
Once the leading edge of the paper has passed the Pullout Sensor, the Deck Pickup Solenoid turns OFF.
*: If Lower Limit Paper Surface Sensor remains OFF after 140 mm/sec have elapsed after the Pullout Sensor turns OFF, the
Deck Pickup Solenoid turns ON after a maximum of 1 minute wait time. If the Lower Limit Paper Surface Sensor turns ON
within 1 minute, the Deck Pickup Solenoid turns ON at that point.
On Pickup Completion/When Jam Occurs

In order to wait for the air flow from the fans to abate, the lifter stops for 5.0 sec after all fans have stopped.
At this time, if Lower Limit Paper Surface Sensor is ON, the lifter descends temporarily until the sensor turns OFF, and then it
ascends until the sensor turns ON again.
If the Lower Limit Paper Surface Sensor is OFF, the lifter ascends until the sensor turns ON.
Note that if a jam occurs or paper gets caught in the Pickup Assembly, Lower Limit Paper Surface Sensor will not turn OFF even
if the lifter descends because the Paper Surface Link will not descend.
Because of this, if the Pullout Sensor is ON, the lifter descends until the Lifter Lower Limit Sensor turns ON.
Lifter Error Detection Control

During Lifter up and down motion operation, the following three error detection controls are performed.
216
An alarm occurs on the deck where a fault is detected, and cannot be used.
Upper Limit Detection

The lifter might not stop ascending due to a failure of Paper Surface Sensor, etc. and may damage the receptacle or Air-operated
Pickup Mount.
The Lifter Upper Limit Sensor detects the lifter upper limit to prevent the lifter from ascending excessively.
Lower Limit Detection

The lifter might not stop descending due to a failure of Paper Surface Sensor, etc. and may damage the receptacle.
The Lifter Lower Limit Switch detects the lifter lower limit to prevent the lifter from descending excessively.
Foreign Matter Detection

If small size paper is loaded in the receptacle and the lifter ascends with foreign matter or surplus paper, etc. in the empty space,
the foreign matter may reach the upper limit before the Paper Surface Sensor detects the paper. At this time, the lifter attempts
to continue ascending and damages the receptacle.
The Foreign Matter Sensor detects foreign matter when the Foreign Matter Sensor Flag comes into contact with foreign matter,
and stops the lifter from ascending.
Foreign Particle Sensor

Lifter Upper Limit Sensor
Foreign Particle Sensor Flag Right Deck
Pickup
Driver PCB
(UN603)
Lifter Left Deck

Pickup
Driver PCB
(UN703)
Right Deck
Driver PCB
(UN602)
Left Deck
Driver PCB
(UN702)
● Open/Close Control
When the Open button on the indicator of the Deck Front Cover is pressed, the Lifter Motor rotates and the Lifter begins to
descend.
1 sec after this, the Deck Open/Close Solenoid turns ON and the lock of the deck is released. The deck where the lock was
released pops out several centimeters toward the front due to the spring force.
The reason for the delay until the lock of the deck is released is to prevent paper from getting caught on the guides or other parts
due to the deck opening after paper that is in the middle of being fed falls onto the lifer.
The Deck Open/Close Solenoid turns OFF 400 mm/sec after it turns ON.
When the deck is open, the LED on the Open button lights up in green. If the lifter is operated at this time, the LED flashes.
During pickup, the locked LED lights up in orange and the deck does not open.
Load the deck by pushing it into the machine by hand. When loaded, the Deck Interlock Switch and Deck Open/Close Sensor
turn ON, and the lifter ascends up to the pickup position.
217
Deck Interlock Switch
Lifter Motor
Deck Open/
Close Sensor
Deck Open/Close Solenoid
Right Deck Driver PCB (UN602) Left Deck Driver PCB (UN702)
Right Deck Pickup Driver PCB (UN603) Left Deck Pickup Driver PCB (UN703)
Lock LED
Open button
● Paper Surface Detection

In this machine, the lifter ascends or descends to keep the paper surface at the designated height in order to feed smoothly.
The up and down motion of the Lifter is controlled based on the paper surface detection result.
The accuracy and speed are increased by performing paper surface detection at the leading edge and trailing edge of the paper.
Paper Surface Detection at Paper Leading Edge

The paper surface height at the leading edge is detected by three paper surface sensors.
Detection timing:
• When the Lifter ascends when the power is turned on or after the deck is closed
• When preparing for pickup
• During pickup
• When pickup completes
Paper Surface Detection at Paper Trailing Edge

The paper surface height at the trailing edge is detected by two Trailing Edge Sensors.
This is supplementally used when the paper surface height cannot be detected at the leading edge such as when the paper is
attracted to the Attraction Belt.
218
Detection timing:
• When the lifter ascends after the deck is closed
• During pickup
Paper Surface Detection at Paper Leading Edge

The paper surface of the leading edge is detected by Upper Limit Paper Surface Sensor, Lower Limit Paper Surface Sensor, and
Intermediate Paper Surface Sensor.
The Paper Surface Sensor Flag which operates in conjunction with the Paper Surface Link rotates when the Paper Surface Link
which touches the paper moves up and down, turning each sensor ON and OFF.
There is a position displacement between each Paper Surface Sensor and the Paper Surface Sensor Flag relative to the direction
of rotation. The height of the paper leading edge paper surface is identified by using this displacement.
Paper Surface Sensor 2
Right Deck
Pickup Intermediate
Driver PCB Paper Purface
(UN603) Sensor
Paper Surface
Sensor 1
Left Deck
Pickup Paper Surface
Sensor Flag
Driver PCB
(UN703) Paper Surface
Link
Paper Presence Paper Presence
Sensor Flag Sensor
Upper Limit Paper Surface Sensor

Middle Paper Surface Sensor
Lower Limit Paper Surface Sensor
Paper Surface Link
Paper Surface Detection Arm
Paper Surface Sensor Flag
The status of each sensor at each lifter position and the operation of the lifter at these times are shown below.
Upper Limit Lower Limit Middle Lifter

Paper Surface Sensor Paper Surface Sensor Paper Surface Sensor moves down
Pickup OFF
Upper Threshold
ON ON Lifter stops
Pickup Available Area
Pickup ON
Lifter
Lower Threshold moves up
(Standby position) OFF OFF
OFF
Sensor name Code Meaning of ON Meaning of OFF

(Left Deck/Right Deck)
Upper Limit Paper PS703 / PS603 Lifter is ascending Paper surface is at the upper limit or
Surface Sensor higher
Lower Limit Paper PS704 / PS604 Paper surface is at the lower limit or high- Paper surface is at the lower limit or low-
Surface Sensor er er
219
Sensor name Code Meaning of ON Meaning of OFF

(Left Deck/Right Deck)
Intermediate Paper PS705 / PS605 Paper surface is in the intermediate po- Lifter ascending conditions
Surface Sensor sition
Note that Lower Limit Paper Surface Sensor is also used by the paper present detection control.
Paper Surface Detection at Paper Trailing Edge

The paper surface at the trailing edge side is detected by the Trailing Edge Sensor 1 and the Trailing Edge Sensor 2 on the
Trailing Edge Guide Plate.
The Paper Surface Sensor Flag operates in conjunction with the Retainer Plate which touches the paper, and turns each sensor
on and off.
The Trailing Edge Sensor and Paper Surface Sensor Flag have different heights at the front and rear. The height of the paper
trailing edge paper surface is identified by using this displacement.
Trailing Edge Sensor 2

2mm
1mm
Trail Edge Guide Plate

Retaining Plate
Right Deck Driver PCB (UN602)

Left Deck Driver PCB (UN702)
Right Deck Pickup Driver PCB (UN603)

Left Deck Pickup Driver PCB (UN703)
During pickup, the detection result of the Trailing Edge Sensor is used to determine when to stop the lifter during operation.
The Lifter stops in the following cases:
• When the Intermediate Paper Surface Sensor is ON and the height of the trailing edge paper surface has reached reference
A or reference B.
Whether to employ reference A or reference B is determined by the paper size, weight, surface nature, and environment.
• When the Intermediate Paper Surface Sensor is ON and the amount of ascension of the lifter per sheet of paper becomes
greater than a designated amount
The designated amount of ascension per sheet of paper is determined by the paper size, weight, surface nature, and
environment.
220
Bottom surface of
the suction belt
Trailing Edge Sensor 1 Trailing Edge Sensor 2

14 mm
ON 17 mm
Reference A
ON
OFF
Reference B
OFF
● Paper Level Detection

The amount of paper remaining in the receptacle is detected by the Deck Level Sensor (Right) and Deck Level Sensor (Left).
The encoders that follow each Lifter Motor is monitored by each sensor, and count the pulses as the Lifter Motors rotate.
The height of the paper is calculated based on the number of counted pulses taking the case where there are no sheets of paper
as the reference, and the number of sheets is then calculated based on the configured media type.
The counted number is reset when the lifter moves down and the Lifter Lower Limit Sensor activates when the power is turned
ON.
During pickup, lifter control is performed to ensure that the paper surface is kept at the appropriate height.
Since the amount of paper remaining cannot be determined accurately if the lifter is lowered, it is calculated by subtracting the
number of sheets actually fed from the number before feeding.
The timing with which the encoders on the Deck Level Sensor (Right) and Deck Level Sensor (Left) turn ON and OFF is out of
sync. Whether the lifter is ascending or descending can be determined from this gap.
The paper level is displayed by the level LED on the indicator on the Deck Front Cover.
221
Deck Level Deck Level

Sensor Right Sensor Left
Encoder
Lifter Lower
Limit Sensor
Lifter Motor
Deck Level
Sensor Left
Lifter Motor
Deck Level
Sensor Right
Right Deck Driver PCB (UN602) Left Deck Driver PCB (UN702)
Right Deck Pickup Driver PCB (UN603) Left Deck Pickup Driver PCB (UN703 )
● Paper detection
Whether or not there is paper in a receptacle is detected by the Paper Sensor.
When the paper runs out, the Paper Sensor Flag passes the Paper Sensor, and the Paper Sensor turns OFF.
Sensor: On
Paper Presence Sensor
Paper Presence Sensor Flag
222
Sensor: Off
Paper Presence Sensor
If the Lower Limit Paper Surface Sensor is ON and the Paper Sensor is OFF, it is determined that there is no paper.
When there is no paper, the lifter descends to the supply position (the position where the Deck Supply Position Sensor change
OFF => ON => OFF).
(Front face) Paper Presence Sensor

(Rear face) Lower Limit Paper Surface Sensor
Lifter Paper Surface Sensor Flag
Judging of whether or not there is paper is performed at the following times.

• Immediately after the lifter ascends to detect the paper surface position when the power is turned ON or the deck is closed
• During pickup operation
When the deck is open, the presence of paper is judged as "undetermined".
NOTE:
The orange paper supply LED on the Indicator on the Deck Front Cover does not flash when there is simply "no paper".
If there is no auto cassette change destination when "no paper" occurs, the paper supply LED for the deck that caused the job to
halt flashes in sync with the red error lamp on the host machine's Control Panel.
The paper supply LED stops flashing when the job is canceled or paper is refilled.
If there is a POD Deck and the mode for leaving paper in the auto cassette change is configured, the status is judged as "no paper"
when there is approximately 100 sheets (varies depending on the paper weight, etc.) of paper remaining in the deck.
Paper supply LED
223
● Paper Size Switch-over Control

The paper size is configured in Settings/Registration after the Side Guide Plate and Trailing Edge Guide Plate are moved
to match the paper size.
1. Select Settings/Registration > Preferences > Paper Settings > Paper Settings.
2. Select the pickup location where the paper is loaded and then click [Set].
3. Select the paper size.
● Auto Cassette Change Function

Auto Cassette Change is a function that reduces the down time during continuous printing.
When the pickup slot that is currently supplying paper runs out of paper, paper is automatically picked up from another pickup
slot that is loaded with the same size paper.
This function is configured in Settings/Registration.

Settings/Registration > Function Settings > Common > Paper Feed Settings > Paper Drawer Auto Selection On/Off
Select the target pickup slot from among all of the pickup slots (Right Deck, Left Deck, POD Deck, Secondary POD Deck) including
the Pickup Option.
When [Optimal Productivity] is selected in the [Paper Drawer Auto Selection On/Off] screen, paper can be supplied without
stopping for switching since the pickup slot switches before the paper is completely used up (approximately 100 sheets remaining:
80 g/m2).
If [Optimal Productivity] is not selected, the paper in the pickup slot can be completely used. Note that since the print operation
stops temporarily if the paper runs out, a slight down time occurs for cleaning the preceding image that was printed.
When the paper runs out, print operation

is suspended and there will be downtime.
Flow of Job
Main deck Main deck Main deck Main deck

Paper Drawer Auto Selection: OFF (Right, Left)
Downtime
(Right, Left)
Downtime
(Right, Left)
Downtime
(Right, Left)
Secondary POD Secondary POD

Paper Drawer Auto Selection: ON Main deck POD deck POD deck POD deck
Productivity Priority: ON (Right, Left) Lower deck Upper deck Middle deck deck
Lower deck
deck
Upper deck
The machine switches the pickup source

continuously, and there will be no downtime.
Secondary Secondar
Paper Drawer Auto Selection: ON Main deck POD deck POD deck POD deck POD deck deck
Productivity Priority: OFF (Right, Left) Lower deck Upper deck Middle deck Lower deck Upper dec
For image cleaning there

will be slight downtime.
The pickup order follows the predetermined priority.
224
If the same media is loaded in all of the pickup slots, it is switched in order from the Right Deck (priority: 1) to the Middle Deck of
the Secondary POD Deck (priority: 8) .
4 7
5 8
2 1 3 6
Example: If you specify the Middle Deck of the Secondary POD Deck as the pickup slot without selecting [Optimal Productivity]
When the paper in the Middle Deck of the Secondary POD Deck runs out, the pickup slot switches to the host machine's Right
Deck, and then switches in order down to the Upper Deck of the Secondary POD Deck (priority: 7).
Finally, when the Upper Deck of the Secondary POD Deck runs out of paper, the printing operation stops. Furthermore, the Paper
Supply LED for that deck flashes together with the red error lamp on the host machine's Touch Panel.
4 7
5 8
2 1 3 6
Example: If you specify the Middle Deck of the Secondary POD Deck as the pickup slot with [Optimal Productivity] selected
The pickup slot is switched from the Middle Deck to the Lower Deck of the Secondary POD Deck Middle Deck (priority: 6) when
the remaining paper in each reaches approximately 100 sheets.
Next, it switches to the Upper Deck of the Secondary POD Deck (priority: 7); however, since the amount of paper remaining in
the other pickup slots is already insufficient, it will not switch to another pickup slot even when the remaining paper reaches
approximately 100 sheets, but will supply until the paper runs out (solid line area).
After this, it switches in order of highest priority (1 => 2 => 3 => 4 => 5 => 6 => 8) as soon as the paper in each runs out (dotted
line area).
Finally, when the Middle Deck of the Secondary POD Deck runs out of paper, the printing operation stops. Furthermore, the Paper
Supply LED for that deck flashes together with the red error lamp on the host machine's Touch Panel.
4 7
5 8
2 1 3 6
If there are no other candidate pickup slots to switch to even when [Optimal Productivity] is selected, pickup continues until all of
the paper is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the mode when printing small quantities of less than 100 sheets.
■ Deck Pickup Unit

This machine prevents double feeds and realizes stable high-speed pickup by using an air-operated pickup system.
In conventional roller pickup systems, the Pickup Roller is replaced as a consumable part.
In the air-operated pickup system, there are no parts to replace, which increases the durability of the equipment.
Furthermore, thin paper, heavy paper, and coated paper can also be supported by adjusting the amount of airflow depending on
the conditions.
225
After the paper has been separated by the air blown from the Air Floatation Nozzle, the paper is sucked to the Attraction Belt.
At this time, the paper is separated by air blown from a Separation Nozzle so that only the topmost paper is attracted to the
Attraction Belt.
The attracted paper is transported to the feed path by the rotating Attraction Belt.
Paper Suction belt Separation nozzle
Floatation Separation Floatation

nozzle air duct air duct
● Air Pickup Control

The Pickup Assembly blows two different types of air onto the paper in order to increase the separation performance.
• Air Floatation
Generated by three Air Flotation Fans. This blows onto the paper from Air Floatation Nozzles via Air Ducts to float the paper.
It can also be made into warm air as necessary by the Air-operated Pickup Heater.
• Air Separation
Generated by two Separation Fan. This blows onto the paper from Separation Nozzles via Air Ducts to separate only the
topmost single sheet of paper.
In the case of large size paper, it is possible that separation may not extend all the way to the trailing edge even when air is blown
onto the leading edge of the paper.
The air flows all the way to the trailing edge of the paper through improving the floating performance using two Side Fans in the
Deck Assembly, and through limiting floatation at the left and right with four claws.
The Trailing Edge Guide Plate retains the paper trailing edge from the horizontal direction and from the upper direction so that
the paper does not become spread around.
When the Deck Pickup Solenoid turns ON, the Suction Shutter opens and the paper adheres to the Attraction Belt due to suction
by the Attraction Fan.
Deck Pickup Solenoid

Paper Suction Fan
Air Floatation Fan
Suction Shutter
Suction Belt
Air Duct
Claw
Air Pickup Heater
Air Separation Fan
Side Air Floatation Fan
Claw
Paper
Side Air Floatation Fan
Trail Edge Guide Plate
226
NOTE:
The mechanism for supplementing the air-operated pickup in the Deck Assembly is used when paper is loaded by the user.
• Side Guide Lock Mechanism
When the Lock Lever is raised, the Side Guide Plate can be moved. When the Lock Lever is tilted forwards, the Side Guide
Plate cannot be moved.
This mechanism prevents the paper from becoming displaced by the recoil of pushing in the deck.
Note that since the Lock Lever automatically tilts when the deck is pushed in, it has no effect on opening and closing the deck.
• Paper Retainer Mechanism
Floating of the paper can be limited by the 4 claws on the Side Guide Plate.
• Trailing Edge Retainer Mechanism
When the Move button is pressed, the Trailing Edge Guide Plate can be moved to align with the trailing edge of the paper.
Retaining
plate Claw
Shift button
Trail edge guide plate Side guide plate (rear)
Claw
Lock lever
Claw
Side guide plate (front)
Steps of Air Pickup Control

1. When the pickup preparation signal from the host machine is received, the following fans turn on.
Name Code Name Code

Attraction Fan FM701 / FM601 Air Flotation Fan 2 FM705 / FM605
Separation Fan 1 FM702 / FM602 Air Flotation Fan 3 FM708 / FM608
Separation Fan 2 FM703 / FM603 Right Side Fan FM706 / FM606
Air Flotation Fan 1 FM704 / FM604 Left Side Fan FM707 / FM607
Each of the fans operates under conditions according to the media type and environment.
227
2. If the paper is coated paper and the environment sensor detection result is in the following table, the Air Floatation Air Heater
turns ON.
The warm air reduces the humidity and increases separation. However, paper is not picked up until the Air Floatation Air
Heater reaches the designated temperature.
Temperature (deg C) Relative humidity (%) Absolute moisture content (g/m3)

Less than 14 Greater than or equal to 60 5.6
Greater than or equal to 14 and less than Greater than or equal to 40 4.8
22
34
38
42
46
Greater than or equal to 48 Greater than or equal to 18 13.5
3. Floatation air is blown onto the paper from Air Floatation Nozzles in three locations via the Air Floatation Ducts.
Multiple sheets of paper on the surface float up.
Floatation nozzle Floatation air duct
4. When the pickup start signal is received, the Deck Pickup Solenoid activates and the Suction Shutter opens.
Paper is attracted to the Attraction Belt by the air near the Suction Duct sucked to the Attraction Fan.
At this time, since the Separation Air blows from Separation Nozzles in six locations via Separation Air Ducts, only the topmost
paper is attracted.
Deck pickup solenoid
Suction belt Suction duct Separation nozzle
Separation air duct
228
5. If paper is attracted to the Attraction Belt after 140 mm/sec has elapsed from when the Deck Pickup Solenoid turns ON, the
Attraction Belt Motor turns on and the Attraction Belt rotates.
The Attraction Belt transports only a single sheet of attracted paper to the Deck Pullout Roller.
Note that whether or not paper has been attracted is determined by whether or not the Suction Completion Sensor turns on.
Suction End Sensor Deck Pull-out Roller
6. Once the leading edge of the paper has passed through the Pullout Sensor, the Deck Pickup Solenoid turns OFF.
Pull-out Sensor
7. If the following conditions are satisfied, the pickup continues from Step 4 in the procedure.
• 140 mm/sec have elapsed since the trailing edge of the leading paper passes the Pullout Sensor.
• There is a sufficiently large interval between the leading paper and the following paper
• The following paper is at the position where it can be attracted
● Pickup Fan Control

This machine controls each fan related to air-operated pickup in order to support a wide variety of paper types and environments.
Attraction Fan
Flow rate adjustment is not performed on the Attraction Fan after it is turned ON.
The operation of paper attraction is switched by opening and closing the Suction Shutter.
The Suction Shutter opens and closes by the Deck Pickup Solenoid turning ON and OFF.
Separation Fan/Air Flotation Fan

• Separation Fan 1
• Separation Fan 2
• Air Flotation Fan 1
The air flows of the Separation Fan and Air Floatation Fan are adjusted in order to reduce individual differences in the equipment
and deck.
When the deck is closed and there is no paper when the power is turned ON, the air flows of the Separation Fan and the Air
Floatation Fan are automatically adjusted at the same time.
In automatic air flow adjustment, the number of fan revolutions is adjusted to reach the target value and this is recorded in the
Main Controller PCB. As a result, it is updated each time the automatic air flow adjustment is performed.
When paper is picked up, the air flow is adjusted by changing the number of fans and the revolution according to the following
conditions.
• Automatic Air Flow Adjustment Results
229
• The paper information set in Settings/Registration (paper length, paper width, weight, surface nature)
• Temperature and humidity detected by the environment sensors (absolute moisture content)
Note that if automatic air flow adjustment cannot be performed such as when there is paper in the deck when the power is turned
ON, the adjustment results stored in the Main Controller PCB are used to perform adjustment of the air flow.
Side Fan
• Right Side Fan
• Left Side Fan
The air flow of the Side Fan can be adjusted by changing the number of fans and the revolution (switching the voltage) according
to the following conditions.
• The paper information set in Settings/Registration (paper length, paper width, weight, surface nature)
• Temperature and humidity detected by the environment sensors (absolute moisture content)
● Pickup Operation
When the pickup start signal is received from the host machine, pickup starts if the following conditions are satisfied.
• No jam has occurred
• The Front Cover is not open
• There is paper in the receptacle
• The Air Floatation Air Heater has reached the designated temperature, or temperature control is not needed
The paper loaded in the receptacle is lifted up to the designated pickup position by the Lifter.
If the paper is attracted to the Attraction Belt after 140 mm/sec after the pickup start signal is received, the Attraction Belt Motor
and Pullout Roller Motor turn ON.
Attraction Belt Motor rotates the Attraction Belt and picks up the paper. Refer to air pickup control for details on the mechanism
by which paper is attracted to the Attraction Belt. (Reference: “Air Pickup Control” on page 226)
Next, paper is fed to the feeding path by the Deck Pullout Roller.
Once the Pullout Sensor has detected the leading edge of the paper, the Deck Pickup Solenoid turns OFF.
Immediately after the Deck Pickup Solenoid turns OFF, the attraction force to the Attraction Belt remains. If the attracted paper
is fed by the Deck Pullout Roller in this state, wrinkles occur due to the tensile force. Therefore, the Attraction Belt Motor turns
OFF after the paper has advanced by (paper length - 182.0) mm* from the Pullout Sensor.
After this, the paper is fed only by the drive of the Pullout Roller Motor.
* In the case of transparencies, (paper length - 152.0) mm
The pickup operation sequence is performed at 1300 mm/sec.
Deck Pickup Solenoid Suction Belt Deck Pull-out Roller
Pull-out Sensor
Suction Belt Motor Pull-out Roller Motor
Right Deck Pickup Driver PCB (UN603)

Left Deck Pickup Driver PCB (UN703)
230
■ Lower Feed Unit

The paper fed from the Left Deck and Duplex Path Assembly is fed to the Vertical Path Unit.
PS210 PS214
PS160 PS161 PS212 PS217 PS162
Duplexing Left Deck Vertical Path

Assembly Feeding Assembly
M702 M175 M173 M174
Lower Feeding
Assembly
Code Name
M173 Lower Feed Motor 2
PS160 Left Deck Merging Sensor
PS161 Lower Feed Sensor 1
PS210 Lower Feed Path Paper Length Sensor (Left Rear)
PS212 Lower Feed Path Paper Length Sensor (Left Front)
PS214 Lower Feed Path Paper Length Sensor (Right Rear)
PS217 Lower Feed Path Paper Length Sensor (Right Front)
● Paper Length Detection

The degree of shrinkage in the vertical scanning direction of the 2nd side of the paper from the time passing between the Lower
Feed Sensors is detected.
The detected degree of shrinkage* is corrected by the leading edge registration control. The leading edge margins of the 1st side
and 2nd side of 2-sided print are made the same.
*: This includes correction such as paper skew (θ) and roller speed differences.
NOTE:
Correction of the degree of shrinkage in the horizontal scanning direction is performed by the Polygon Motor speed change control.
Step of Paper Length Detection

Step 1:
After the Lower Feed Sensor 1 (PS161) has detected (ON) the leading edge of the paper, timers are started on the four
Lower Feed Path Paper Length Sensors (PS210/PS212/PS214/PS217).
Step 2:
The ON => OFF timing of the four Paper Length Sensors is measured, and the paper length is calculated according to a
formula.
231
• Paper length = Amount of time required for the paper to pass P1 (PS210, PS212)
• Degree of skew = Time difference between the paper leading edge reaching PS210 and PS212
• Feed speed = Time until the paper leading edge reaches P2 (PS214, PS217) from P1 (PS210, PS212)
Step 3:
The degree of shrinkage is calculated from the calculated paper length and degree of skew, and is applied to the leading
edge registration control (adjusts the deceleration timing).
<Top View> P1 P2 Skewθ
PS210 PS214
PS161
Lower Feed Roller2 Lower Feed Roller3
PS212 PS217
PS161 PS210 PS214

Lower Feed Roller2 Lower Feed Roller3 PS212 PS217
Code Name
P1 Primary detection position
P2 Secondary detection position
PS210 Lower Feed Path Paper Length Sensor (Left Rear)
PS212 Lower Feed Path Paper Length Sensor (Left Front)
PS214 Lower Feed Path Paper Length Sensor (Right Rear)
PS217 Lower Feed Path Paper Length Sensor (Right Front)
NOTE:
This control only matches the leading edge margin of image. To change the image size based on the degree of shrinkage, it must
be manually input from Settings/Registration or service mode.
NOTE:
If there is a fault (error) in the Paper Length Sensor, jam code: 0D94 occurs while paper is passing.
Related Service Mode

If you have replaced the Paper Length Detection Sensor, check that the sensor is mounted correctly by using the following service
mode.
• Automatically adjust the distance between the Lower Feed Path Paper Length Sensors
COPIER > FUNCTION > SENS-ADJ > PL-D-EXE
• Input the length of the adjustment paper between the Lower Feed Path Paper Length Sensors
COPIER > FUNCTION > SENS-ADJ > INPUT-L
• Display the feed speed of the adjustment between the Lower Feed Path Paper Length Sensors
COPIER > FUNCTION > SENS-ADJ > PL-SNS-V
■ Vertical Path Unit

The paper fed from the Right Deck and Lower Feed Unit is fed to the Pre-registration Unit.
232
Pre-registration
Unit PS162 PS163 PS164 PS220 M176
Right Deck Vertical Path

Lower Feed Unit Unit
M178 M172 M177
Code Name
PS163 Right Deck Merging Sensor
PS164 Vertical Path Sensor
PS220 POD Deck Path Sensor
M176 POD Deck Path Feed Motor
M177 Right Deck Feed Motor
M178 Vertical Path Feed Motor
■ Pre-registration Unit
The paper fed from the Vertical Path Unit is fed up to the pre-registration stop position and stops (pre-registration stop). Paper
that has stopped at the pre-registration stop position is fed again to the Registration Unit.
The Pre-registration Unit performs paper thickness detection, double feed detection, transparency detection, and pre-registration
stop control (Pre-registration Motor speed change control/Pre-registration Release Motor control).
233
UN122 UN123 PS137/PS138 UN179
Registration Unit Pre-registration Unit
P1
Vertical Path Unit
Code Name
PS137 Transparency Sensor (Rear)
PS138 Transparency Sensor (Front)
UN179 Paper Thickness Sensor
UN122 Double Feed Sensor PCB (Transmission)
UN123 Double Feed Sensor PCB(Reception)
P1 Pre-registration stop position
● Pre-registration Control
During the pickup operation, the pickup time can vary depending on the paper type and paper size in use as well as the
environment. Therefore, the machine executes pre-registration stop control to ease such variation.
A. Pre-registration Stop Position

The pre-registration stop position is the position 57.5 mm in the downstream direction with reference to Pre-feed Sensor 3 (PS141)
NOTE:
Since this machine performs image position alignment using pre-registration stop, the paper does not stop at the Registration
Rollers. Cross-feed correction of paper is performed by the cross-feed registration control. (Reference: “Cross-feed Registration
Control” on page 239)
B. Pre-registration Control
1. When the Pre-feed Sensor 3 (PS141) turns ON after the paper is fed, the Pre-registration Motors 2/3/4 (M157/M158/M159)
are operated for 57.5 mm of pulses and then stop.
The paper feed speed up to the pre-registration stop position is 1000 mm/sec.
Note: A registration arch is not formed because there is a cross-feed mechanism.
2. After a fixed time (Tprereg) has elapsed based on the Leading Edge Patch Sensor signal, the Pre-registration Motors 2/3/4
(M157/M158/M159) are operated to feed the paper to the (leading edge registration control) Cross-feed Registration Unit.
The feed speed after the pre-registration turns ON is 853.3 mm/sec (100 ppm), 652.4 mm/sec (80 ppm)
T prereg = T image - T paper
• T image = Leading Edge Patch Sensor Position (A) - Secondary Transfer Position (C)
• T paper = Pre-registration Stop Position (B) - Secondary Transfer Position (C)
234
M159 M158 M157
A
T image
C
B
T paper
B-1. Pre-registration Motor Speed Change Control

Pre-registration Motors 1 to 4 perform pre-registration speed change control according to the pre-registration control.
Pre-registration Motors 1 to 4 perform acceleration and stopping based on the upstream sensors using the pre-registration speed
change control, and turn ON pre-registration based on the Leading Edge Registration Patch Sensor.
The following table summarizes the operation standards of the pre-registration speed change control.
Motor Operation Operation standard

Pre-registration Motor 1 (M156) Startup 1st Exposure Start
Acceleration Vertical Path Sensor (PS164)
Stopped Pre-feed Sensor 3 (PS141)
Pre-registration ON Leading Edge Registration Patch Sensor
(PS110)
Acceleration Vertical Path Sensor (PS164)
(PS110)
Acceleration Pre-feed Sensor 1 (PS139)
(PS110)
Acceleration Pre-feed Sensor 2 (PS140)
235
Motor Operation Operation standard

Pre-registration Motor 4 (M159) Stopped Pre-feed Sensor 3 (PS141)
(PS110)
M162 M161 M160
PS141 PS140 PS139
B-2. Pre-registration Release Motor Control

Pre-registration Motors 1 to 4 perform pre-registration engagement/disengagement control of Pre-registration Motors 1 to 4
according to the pre-registration control.
The Pre-registration Pressure Release Motors 1 to 3 apply pressure on Feed Rollers 2 to 4 based on the upstream sensors, and
release it when the Pre-registration Motor turns on.
The following table summarizes the operation standards of the Pre-registration Release Motor control.
Motor Opera- Operation standard Pressure release control

tion
Pre-registration Pressure Re- Pressure Pre-feed Sensor 1 (PS139)
lease Motor 1 (M160) Release When pre-registration ON Performed with all paper sizes
lease Motor 2 (M161) Release When pre-registration on Not performed for paper sizes
less than 376 mm
lease Motor 3 (M162) Release When pre-registration ON Not performed for paper sizes
less than 228 mm
236
M162 M161 M160
PS141 PS140 PS139
● Double Feed Detection

Ultrasonic sensors (transmission/reception) that are located between Feed Roller 1 and Feed Roller 2 of the Feed Unit perform
double feed detection. Once it is judged that double feed has occurred, the machine stops printing due to a jam.
Ultrasound has the following characteristics, and is able to detect double feeds regardless of the media (plain paper, heavy paper,
color paper, transparency, etc.).
• During propagation, there is a large attenuation at density boundaries (air-paper).
• The amount of attenuation does not change depending on differences in the color or thickness of the object being measured.
Detection timing
Between 80 and 300 mm/sec before the paper enters the Sensor Assembly
Steps of Double Feed Detection

Step 1:
Double feed detection is started
Step 2:
"Double Feed" is judged
Step 3:
The double-fed paper is fed up to the pre-registration stop position and stops with a jam. (Jam code: 0300)
237
1)
UN122
Feed Roller 4 Feed Roller 3 Feed Roller 2 Feed Roller 1
UN123
2)
3)
Code Name
UN122 Double Feed Sensor PCB(Transmission)
UN123 Double Feed Sensor PCB(Reception)
NOTE:
The cause of the case in which a double feed is detected (jam code: 0300) even though there is no double feed can be open circuit
of the cable of the Double Feed Sensor, disconnection of the connector, or a failure of the Double Feed Sensor.
NOTE:
The POD Deck (option) also has a double feed detection function in the same way as this machine. When a double feed occurs
in the POD Deck, only the double-fed paper is ejected to the Escape Tray of the POD Deck. At that time, the jam code is 2800.
● Paper Thickness Detection

Paper thickness detection is performed in order to prevent damage to the Fixing Roller surface and to prevent scratching of the
Secondary Transfer Roller due to feeding of paper thicker* than the specifications.
The paper thickness is found by detecting the Feed Roller 1 height using the Paper Thickness Sensor (UN179) and calculating
from the displacement amount between when there is paper and no paper.
If paper that exceeds the specification thickness is detected, a jam is judged and the paper is fed to the pre-registration position
and driving stops.
*: Specification thickness: Paper thicker than 420 μm (weight 350 g)
Steps of Paper Thickness Detection

Step 1:
The position (height) of the Feed Roller 1 when there is no paper during the initial rotation is measured by the Paper Thickness
Sensor (UN179).
Step 2:
The position (height) of the Feed Roller 1 is measured by the Paper Thickness Sensor (UN179) when the paper is fed to the
Feed Roller 1*.
238
*: The detection timing is based on the Vertical Path Sensor, POD Path Feed Sensor, and POD Deck Pullout Sensor
(optional)
Step 3:
The paper thickness is identified from the position (height) of the Feed Roller 1 when there is paper/no paper based on the
measured value.
• If the paper is within the defaults (thickness is within 420 μm)
Paper feed continues.
• If the paper is thicker than the defaults (thickness exceeds 420 μm)
Paper is stopped at the pre-registration stop position.
UN179 UN179
Feed Roller 1
Feed Roller 1

• Paper Thickness Sensor Rank Setting
COPIER > ADJUST > MISC > DF-S-RK
■ Registration Unit
The paper fed from the Pre-registration Unit is fed to the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt Unit.
The Registration Unit performs cross-feed registration control, leading edge registration control, and Cross-feed Roller
engagement and disengagement control.
PS146
Secondary Transfer Registration Pre-registration Unit

Outer Belt Unit Unit
M164 M168
Code Name
PS146 Registration Front Sensor
M164 Registration Motor
M168 Cross-feed Motor
● Cross-feed Registration Control

In order to deliver higher productivity, cross-feed registration control is performed to continuously perform cross-feed correction
and horizontal registration correction.
239
Cross-feed correction is performed by the Cross-feed Roller pushing the fed paper into the Cross-feed Push-on Plate until it stops.
The Cross-feed Push-on Plate is moved to the position corresponding to the paper size by the Cross-feed Push-on Plate Jogging
Motor (M167). Furthermore, the position of the Cross-feed Push-on Plate is detected by the Cross-feed Push-on Plate HP Sensor
(PS149).
Horizontal registration correction is performed by the Registration Roller shifting the cross-feed corrected paper to the center.
Shifting of the Registration Roller is performed by the Registration Swing Motor (M166). Furthermore, the position of the
Registration Roller is detected by the Registration Roller Slide HP Sensor (PS150). During horizontal registration correction, the
Cross-feed Roller is moved up and down by the Cross-feed Release Right Motor (M169), Cross-feed Release Middle Motor
(M170), and Cross-feed Release Left Motor (M171) because the Cross-feed Roller needs to disengage from the paper. The up
and down motion of the Cross-feed Roller is detected by the Cross-feed Roller Pressure Release HP Sensors 1 to 3 (PS152,
PS153, and PS154).
M166
Flow of paper
Sliding operation
PS150
Operation to be
engaged/disengaged
Registration Roller
PS154
PS153
PS152
PS149
M171
M170
M169
Cross Feed Paper
Sub Roller M167
Cross-feed
Roller
Cross-feed Push-on Plate
PS150 <TOP VIEW>
PS149
Cross-feed Push-on Plate Cross Feed Sub Roller Paper

Registration Roller
PS154 PS153 PS152
Cross-feed Roller <Side View>
Code Name
M166 Registration Swing Motor
M167 Cross-feed Push-on Plate Jogging Motor
M169 Cross-feed Release Right Motor
M170 Cross-feed Release Middle Motor
M171 Cross-feed Release Left Motor
PS149 Cross-feed Push-on Plate HP Sensor
PS150 Registration Roller Slide HP Sensor
240
Code Name
PS152 Cross-feed Roller Pressure Release HP Sensor 1
Steps of Cross-feed Registration Control

Step 1:
When printing starts, the Cross-feed Push-on Plate moves to the position according to the size of the fed paper.
<Top View>
<Side View>
Step 2:
When the paper is fed to the Registration Unit, the paper is fed diagonally towards the front* by the Cross-feed Rollers 1 to
3.
*: Since the Cross-feed Rollers are oriented diagonally towards the front
241
<Top View>
<Side View>
NOTE:
Since the paper is fed diagonally, the nip pressure of the Cross-feed Rollers is set weak. Therefore, the paper feed speed can
vary depending on conditions such as the paper type, size, and 1-sided/2-sided. Therefore, the machine executes leading edge
registration control to ease such variation.
NOTE:
Since the paper is fed diagonally, the Pre-registration Unit Feed Rollers 2 to 4 are released by the Pre-registration Pressure Release
Motor control when the paper is fed to the Cross-feed Roller.
Step 3:
Paper that is fed diagonally is corrected for cross-feed by coming into contact with the Cross-feed Push-on Plate.
<Top View>
<Side View>
242
Step 4:
When the leading edge of the paper passes the Registration Roller, the Cross-feed Roller is disengaged from the Cross-
feed Roller. After this, the Registration Roller is shifted towards the rear to correct the side registration. (Center reference)
<Top View>
<Side View>
Step 5:
The Cross-feed Roller engages with the Cross-feed Roller along with the passing of the paper, and cross-feed correction for
the following paper is performed.
<Top View>
<Side View>
Step 6:
When the trailing edge of the paper passes the Registration Roller, the Registration Roller moves towards the front, and the
side registration correction for the following paper is performed.
243
<Top View>
<Side View>
Step 7:
When printing finishes, the Cross-feed Push-on Plate and Registration Roller are moved to the home position.
<Top View>
<Side View>
Skew Correction Adjustment

Displacement correction of the leading edge, trailing edge, and margin in the image area in the vertical scanning direction can
be adjusted by entering the skew correction amount in Settings/Registration.
• Control Operation
At power-on or at recovery from jam, when the Cross-feed Angle Adjustment Motor (M400) makes a full turn
counterclockwise, the Cross-feed Angle HP Sensor (PS400) detects the home position utilizing the Sensor Flag on the dial
attached to the motor.
After that, when the dial stops at the position (default) memorized by the DC Controller or the position set by skew correction
in Settings/Registration, the Cross-feed Push-on Plate stops at the skew adjustment position.
244
M400 PS400
<Related Error Codes>

If the Cross-feed Angle Adjustment Motor has been rotating for a specified period of time but the Cross-feed Angle HP Sensor
cannot detect it, the following error code is notified.
E015-0060: Feed system error (cross-feed adjustment dial control error)
Cross-feed Correction Method in Settings/Registration
NOTE:
Cross-feed correction requires adjustment for all paper types used by the user.
1. Press Settings/Registration > Preferences > Paper Settings > Paper Type Management Settings.
2. Select the paper type to edit from the list and press [Details/Edit].
3. Press [Change] in "Adjust Image Position" in the <Details/Edit> screen.
4. Press [Do Not Use Scanner] in the <Adjust Image Position: Select Method> screen.
5. Press [Set Details] in the <Adjust Image Position> screen.
6. Press [Corr. Image Misalignment] in the <Set Details> screen.
7. Perform correction based on the test page measurement values or arbitrarily-output image.
• If correction is performed using the test page measurement values
1. Press [Output Test Page] in the <Corr. Image Misalignment> screen.
2. Set the number of copies of the test page to output and then press [Next].
245
3. Select the pickup location where the custom type is configured and press [Start Printing].
=> The test page is output.
246
4. Measure the length of "i" and "j" of the output test page.
247
NOTE:
Measure the length of "i" and "j" as follows:
5. Return to the <Corr. Image Misalignment> screen and enter the measured values of "i" and "j" for both the front side
and back side.
NOTE:
This machine performs the calculation such that the print area and paper become parallel using the entered values and h = 360.0.
• When performing correction based on an arbitrarily-output image
248
1. Measure "I" and "J" in the front and rear margins on the left leading edge and "h" in the left edge length of the image
area.
NOTE:
Be sure to measure "i" and "j" perpendicularly to the paper edge.
h
i j
If the values are measured perpendicularly to the image, the skew correction cannot be executed correctly.
h
i j
2. Return to the <Corr. Image Misalignment> screen and enter the measured values of "i", "j", and "h".
NOTE:
This machine performs the calculation such that the print area and paper become parallel using the entered values
8. Press [OK].
Output the test page again as necessary and check that it has been corrected. If any further adjustments are required, repeat
the above procedure.
● Leading Edge Registration Control

This is performed in order to ensure that the image position and paper position are correctly aligned.
When the leading edge of the paper passes the Registration Sensor (PS151), the paper leading edge precedes the image leading
edge.
Because of this, the paper feed speed is decelerated to align the positions.
249
PS151 M165 M159 M158 M157
PS110
M164
Code Name
PS151 Registration Sensor
PS110 Leading Edge Registration Patch Sensor
Steps of Leading Edge Registration Control

Step 1:
Leading edge patch Bk is printed on the ITB.
Step 2:
The leading edge of the feed paper stops aligned at the pre-registration stop position [A].
Leading Edge Patch Bk
PS110
PS151
A
PS141
Code Name
PS141 Pre-feed Sensor 3
Step 3:
The leading edge patch on the ITB is detected by the Leading Edge Registration Patch Sensor (PS110), and after the
designated time has elapsed, the Pre-registration Motor is driven and the paper is fed.
250
PS151 PS110
PS141
Step 4:
The leading edge of the paper is detected by the Registration Sensor (PS151).
At this time, the Registration Motor (M164) deceleration timing is calculated from positions of the image leading edge and
the paper leading edge.
NOTE:
In the case of 2nd side of 2-sided print, the Registration Motor deceleration timing is calculated by considering the degree of
shrinkage determined by paper length detection.
Step 5:
The Registration Motor (M164) is decelerated. (928 mm/sec => 464 mm/sec (100 ppm), 696 mm/sec => 348 mm/sec (80
ppm))
PS151 PS110
PS141
M164
Step 6:
The Registration Release Motor (M165) is driven when the paper reaches the Secondary Transfer Roller, and the Registration
Roller is released.
251
M165
PS110
PS151
PS141
M164
NOTE:
Since the Registration Sensor (PS151) cannot detect transparent sheets such as transparencies, the paper leading edge is
detected by the Front Registration Sensor (PS146) to decelerate the Registration Roller.
■ Duplex Feed Unit

The paper fed from the Delivery Reverse Unit is fed to the Lower Feed Unit.
The Duplex Unit performs decurler control (ref: “Duplex Decurler Control” on page 262) and standby control.
252
Main Station:
Pre-fixing Feed Main Station Duplex

Left Unit Feed Middle Unit
Main Station Duplex

Feed Right Unit
253
Sub Station:
Delivery/Reverse Unit

● Duplex standby control

Steps of Duplex Standby Control
Step 1:
The paper is fed to p2 (standby position 6) by the duplex reverse control.
Step 2:
If there is no paper at the downstream standby position (the Downstream Duplex Standby Sensor is OFF), the paper is fed.
Step 3:
If there is paper downstream, the paper stops at the standby position.
When the trailing edge of the paper at the downstream standby position passes the Standby Position Sensor, the Duplex
Feed Motor is driven again and feeds the paper.
254
PS346
PS344
PS345
PS341
PS350
PS340
p1 p2 p3 p4
PS347
M321 M322 M331 M329 M327 M330 M328
Code Name Code Name

p1 Duplex reverse position p2 Duplex standby position 6
p3 Duplex standby position 5 p4 Duplex standby position 4
PS340 Duplex Reverse Sensor PS341 Duplex Reverse Rear Sensor
PS344 Duplex Path Inlet Sensor PS347 Duplex Standby Sensor 6
PS346 Duplex Standby Sensor 5 PS345 Duplex Standby Sensor 4
PS350 Duplex Path Sub Station Outlet Sensor M321 Duplex Reverse Motor
M322 Duplex Post-reverse Motor M331 Duplex Feed Motor 8
M329 Duplex Feed Motor 7 M327 Duplex Feed Motor 6
● Page Passing Control

In a job including 1-sided printing and 2-sided printing, page order switching control (2-sided pages are printed before 1-sided
pages.) is performed to shorten the paper interval between 1-sided printing and 2-sided printing.
In this case, in order to secure the reverse delivery path of 1-sided printing, the duplex path of 15-sheet circulation for small size
is changed to 13-sheet circulation. This decreases the productivity to a level lower than usual but decreases the time required
for switching from 1-sided to 2-sided. Thus the productivity can be improved in total depending on the combination of 1-sided
pages and 2-sided pages of the job.
255
Normal control and page passing control of a job including 1-sided printing and 2-sided printing
Cases where page passing control is stopped

The cassette is automatically changed when the paper in the deck runs low because the page numbers become out of order if
the paper runs out.
When an empty paper warning (remaining paper: approx. 50 sheets) is generated, the page passing control is stopped, and the
control is switched to normal control.

• On/Off of page passing control In a job where 1-sided printing and 2-sided printing are mixed
COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW > D-EXPRS
■ Delivery/Reverse Unit
The paper fed from the Secondary Fixing Assembly and Bypass Feed Unit is fed to the Duplex Decurler Unit or ejected.
The Reverse/Delivery Unit performs delivery control, delivery decurler control (ref: “Delivery Decurler Control” on page 262),
reverse control, duplex reverse control, and jam residual paper delivery control.
256
Delivery/Reverse Unit
Reverse control
Delivery De-curler
control
Duplexing reverse
control
● Delivery Control
The available delivery methods are face-up delivery and face-down delivery.
Switching between the paths for face-up delivery and face-down delivery is performed by switching the Delivery Reverse Flapper
after the paper has passed through the Merging Path Upper Sensor (PS325).
257
Fixing Duplex
Feed Driver PCB Reverse/Outer Delivery Driver PCB(UN310)
(UN311)
M318 M324 M323
PS314
PS337 PS325
PS339 PS338
M319
● Reverse Control
In the case of face-down delivery, delivery is performed by performing the reversal operation at reverse point [A].
When the leading edge of the paper reaches the Delivery Reverse Sensor 1 (PS335), the paper is fed by the designated distance
and stops (the trailing edge of the paper is at the position of the reverse point)
When the reverse point is reached, the Delivery Reverse Motor (M320) rotates in reverse and delivers the paper.
258
Fixing Duplex Reverse/Outer Delivery Driver PCB

Feed Driver PCB (UN310)
(UN311)
M318 M324 M323 M312
PS339 PS338
PS342 PS325
A
PS335
M320
Code Name
M312 Merging Path Feed Motor
M318 Delivery Motor
M320 Delivery Reverse Motor
M323 Pre-delivery Feed Motor 1
M324 Pre-delivery Feed Motor 2
PS325 Merging Path Upper Sensor
PS335 Delivery Reverse Sensor 1
PS338 Delivery Sensor 2
PS342 Delivery/Reverse Front Sensor
UN310 Reverse/Outer Delivery Driver PCB
UN311 Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB
● Duplex Reverse Control

When paper is fed to the Duplex Feed Assembly, the paper is reversed at the duplex reverse point [A].
When the leading edge of the paper reaches the Duplex Reverse Sensor (PS340), the paper is fed by the designated distance
and the Delivery Reverse Motor (M320) is stopped (the trailing edge of paper is at the reverse point).
When the paper has reached the reverse point and there is no paper at duplex standby position 6 (Duplex Standby Sensor 6
(PS347) is OFF), the Duplex Reverse Motor (M321) rotates in reverse and feeds the paper to the Duplex Feed Assembly.
259
M320
A
PS340
M321 M322
Code Name
M320 Delivery Reverse Motor
M321 Duplex Reverse Motor
M322 Duplex Post-reverse Motor
PS340 Duplex Reverse Sensor
● Jam residual paper ejection control

Residual paper in the host machine is ejected to the jam residual paper ejection area to improve jam removal when a jam occurs
during a page passing control job or in the delivery option.
Jam residual paper

ejection area
• When a jam occurs in the host machine during a paper passing control job, paper in the downstream of the jammed paper
is ejected to the jam residual paper ejection area and the delivery option. Paper in the upstream stops due to jam.
260
• When a jam occurs in the delivery option, paper in the host machine is ejected to the jam residual paper ejection area.

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > JAMEXIT
: Jam Paper Auto Ejection On/Off
■ Decurler control
This machine has three decurlers. Each decurler is controlled depending on the media settings information (paper type, paper
size) and video signal (image density), and removes curls from the paper.
Bypass Decurler
Delivery Decurler
Duplexing Deculer
● Bypass Decurler Control

The degree of curl during single fixing is made the same as tandem fixing.
The position of the Bypass Decurler has two stages: the disengaged position (HP) and engaged position. It is determined by the
the Bypass Decurler Engagement/Disengagement Motor (M333), and can be changed depending on the paper type, image
density, and size.
The decurler switching operation is performed 20 mm in front of the decurler.
261
M333 M333
Cam
PS353 PS353
Bypass Decurler
Upper Roller
Bypass Decurler
Drive Roller
<Disengaged> <Engaged>
Code Name
M333 Bypass Decurler Engagement/Disengagement Motor
PS353 Bypass Decurler Engagement/Disengagement Motor HP Sensor
● Duplex Decurler Control

Curls in the paper are removed in order to keep the compression distance to the Primary Fixing Assembly of the 2nd side of 2-
sided printing uniform.
The position of Duplex Decurler has two stages: the disengaged position (HP) and engaged position. It is determined by the
Duplex Decurler Compression Distance Adjustment Motor (M325), and can be changed depending on the paper type, image
density, and size.
The operation to switch the decurler is performed 20 mm in front of the decurler based on the Duplex Reverse Start.
Cam M325 M325
PS343 PS343
Duplex Decurler
Upper Roller
Duplex Decurler
Drive Roller
<Disengaged> <Engaged>
Code Name
M325 Duplex Decurler Compression Distance Adjustment Motor
PS343 Duplex Decurler HP Sensor
● Delivery Decurler Control

This control is performed in order to reduce the stack height of delivered paper.
The Delivery Decurler has a decurler for Face-up Delivery and a decurler for Face-down Delivery, and the Upper Decurler operates
during Face-up Delivery and the Lower Decurler operates during Face-down Delivery.
The decurler pressure has a total of 8 levels available and switches depending on the image density and paper type.
262
PS333 Upper Decurler Adjustment Cam 2
Pressure Plate M316
Upper Decurler Lower Decurler

Upper Decurler
Lower Decurler
Adjustment
Drive Roller
Roller 2
Upper Decurler
Drive Roller Lower Decurler
Adjustment
Roller 1
M315 Pressure Plate
PS332
Lower Decurler Adjustment Cam 1
Code Name
M315 Delivery Decurler Compression Distance Adjustment Motor 1
M316 Delivery Decurler Compression Distance Adjustment Motor 2
PS332 Delivery Decurler HP Sensor 1
PS333 Delivery Decurler HP Sensor 2
Related Setting/Registration modes

The Decurler Pressure can be changed from Settings/Registration.
• Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Action > Correct Curl for Each Paper Drawer
263
■ Jam Detection
● Jam code list
Main Station
PS141
PS146
PS140
PS151
PS139
PS166
PS220
PS172
PS200
PS164
PS171
PS162
PS170
PS163
PS169
PS601
PS701
PS160 PS161
264
Sub Station
PS337 PS325 PS321 PS317 PS313 PS312 PS323 PS327
PS326
PS338
PS322
PS339 PS307
PS342
PS305
PS335
PS304
PS336 PS350
PS341 PS345
PS340
PS346
PS344 PS347
PS919 PS918
Jam code Sensor XX

Name Code 01: Delay Jam 02: Stationary 0A: Residual
Jam Jam
XX01 Right Deck Pullout Sensor PS601 Detected Detected Detected
XX02 Right Deck Merging Sensor PS163 Detected Detected Detected
XX03 Left Deck Pullout Sensor PS701 Detected Detected Detected
XX04 Left Deck Merging Sensor PS160 Detected Detected Detected
XX05 Lower Feed Sensor 1 PS161 Detected Detected Detected
XX06 Lower Feed Sensor 2 PS162 Detected Detected Detected
XX07 Vertical Path Sensor PS164 Detected Detected Detected
XX08 Pre-feed Sensor 1 PS139 Detected Detected Detected
XX09 Pre-feed Sensor 2 PS140 Detected Detected Detected
XX0A Pre-feed Sensor 3 PS141 Detected Detected Detected
XX0E Registration Front Sensor PS146 Detected Detected Detected
XX0F Registration Sensor PS151 Detected Detected Detected
XX10 Secondary Transfer Outlet Sensor PS166 Detected Detected Detected
XX11 Pre-fixing Feed Sensor 1 PS172 Detected Detected Detected
XX12 Pre-fixing Feed Sensor 2 PS200 Detected Detected Detected
XX13 Primary Fixing Inlet Sensor PS304 Not detected Not detected Detected
XX14 Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor PS305 Detected Detected Detected
1
XX15 Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor PS307 Detected Detected Detected
2
XX16 Tandem Sensor 1 PS326 Detected Detected Detected
XX17 Tandem Sensor 2 PS327 Detected Detected Detected
XX18 Secondary Fixing Inlet Sensor PS312 Not detected Not detected Detected
265
Jam code Sensor XX

Name Code 01: Delay Jam 02: Stationary 0A: Residual
Jam Jam
XX19 Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Sen- PS313 Detected Detected Detected
sor 1
XX1A Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Sen- PS317 Detected Detected Detected
sor 2
XX1B Merging Path Upper Sensor PS325 Detected Detected Detected
XX1C Delivery/Reverse Front Sensor PS342 Detected Detected Detected
XX1D Delivery Reverse Sensor 1 PS335 Detected Detected Detected
XX1E Delivery Reverse Sensor 2 PS336 Not detected Not detected Detected
XX1F Duplex Reverse Sensor PS340 Detected Not detected Detected
XX20 Duplex Reverse Rear Sensor PS341 Detected Not detected Detected
XX21 Duplex Path Inlet Sensor PS344 Detected Not detected Detected
XX22 Duplex Standby Sensor 6 PS347 Detected Not detected Detected
XX28 Bypass Sensor 1 PS322 Detected Not detected Detected
XX29 Bypass Sensor 2 PS323 Detected Not detected Detected
XX2A Merging Path Lower Sensor PS321 Detected Detected Detected
XX2B Delivery Sensor 1 PS337 Detected Detected Detected
XX2C Delivery Sensor 2 PS338 Detected Detected Detected
XX2D Delivery Sensor 3 PS339 Detected Detected Detected
XX2E POD Deck Path Sensor PS220 Detected Detected Detected
XX2F Duplex Path Sub Station Outlet Sen- PS350 Not detected Not detected Detected
sor
XX31 Reverse Remaining Paper Detection PS918 Not detected Not detected Detected
Left Sensor
XX32 Reverse Remaining Paper Detection PS919 Not detected Not detected Detected
Right Sensor
● Remedy When a Jam Occurs

Operation When Delay/Stationary Jam Detected
• Although the upstream drive of the sensor that detected the jam is stopped, the downstream drive is not stopped, and the
paper is delivered before the drive stops. In the case of a door open jam, the paper feed is stopped at the same time as when
the door open is detected.
• If the paper has not reached the pre-registration standby position, the paper is fed to the pre-registration standby position.
(Forced feed control: Improves jam removability when a jam occurs in the Registration Assembly)
• In order to improve jam removability, if the paper stops at a position where it is difficult to clear the jam, the paper is fed to a
position where jam removal is easy. (Forced feed control)
Method for Clearing Jams

Remove the paper by following the Touch Panel.
Jam Recovery
After the jammed paper has been cleared, remaining pages are printed. When a jam ocurs, the DC Controller notifies the Main
Controller of the page ID where the jam occurred, and the Main Controller executes page reordering of the job from that page
ID. The DC Controller (engine) resumes printing according to each page information in the reordered job.
● Delay Jam
Deck Pickup Assembly (Right Deck, Left Deck)
If the paper leading edge does not reach the sensor position within the specified feed time after the Deck Pickup Solenoid turns
ON
266
START
INTR / PRINT
[T] [T]
Pick-up Solenoid
Jam Check
Normal Abnormal
Pull-out Sensor
T: Specified feed time
Pickup Assembly Solenoid Delay Jam Sensor N

Right Deck Right Deck Pickup Solenoid (SL601) Right Deck Pullout Sensor (PS601)
Left Deck Left Deck Pickup Solenoid (SL701) Left Deck Pullout Sensor (PS701)
Other Delay Jams

With the exception of the Pickup Sensor delay jam, the idea of the delay jam detection timing for the other sensors is basically
the same.
Jam check is performed in a certain period of time after

Turn on the copy start key, or
the sensor N-1 detects the lead edge of paper.
settle the print settings.
INTR / PRINT
I I
Sensor N-1
0.04 to 0.2 seconds 0.04 to 0.2 seconds
Jam Check
Normal Abnormal
Sensor N
Arrival of paper to the sensor N is

If the paper does not reach the sensor N
monitored for approximately 0.13 seconds.
during this period, it is considered as a delay jam.
Delay Jam Recovery Sensor N Sensor N-1

Right Deck Merging Sensor (PS163) Right Deck Pullout Sensor (PS601)
Left Deck Merging Sensor (PS160) Left Deck Pullout Sensor (PS701)
Lower Feed Sensor 1 (PS161) Duplex Standby Sensor 1 (PS169)
Lower Feed Sensor 2 (PS162) Lower Feed Path Paper Length Sensor (Right Rear) (PS214)
Lower Feed Path Paper Length Sensor (Right Front) (PS217)
Vertical Path Sensor (PS164) Right Deck Merging Sensor (PS163)
Lower Feed Sensor 2 (PS162)
Pre-feed Sensor 1 (PS139) Vertical Path Sensor (PS164)
Pre-feed Sensor 2 (PS140) Pre-feed Sensor 1 (PS139)
Pre-feed Sensor 3 (PS141) Pre-feed Sensor 2 (PS140)
Registration Front Sensor (PS146) Pre-feed Sensor 3 (PS141)
Registration Sensor (PS151) Registration Front Sensor (PS146)
Secondary Transfer Outlet Sensor (PS166) Registration Sensor (PS151)
Pre-fixing Feed Sensor 1 (PS172) Secondary Transfer Outlet Sensor (PS166)
Pre-fixing Feed Sensor 2 (PS200) Pre-fixing Feed Sensor 1 (PS172)
Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 1 (PS305) Primary Fixing Inlet Sensor (PS304)
Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 2 (PS307) Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 1 (PS305)
Tandem Sensor 1 (PS326) Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 2 (PS307)
Tandem Sensor 2 (PS327) Tandem Sensor 1 (PS326)
Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 1 (PS313) Secondary Fixing Inlet Sensor (PS312)
Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 2 (PS317) Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 1 (PS313)
267
Delay Jam Recovery Sensor N Sensor N-1

Merging Path Upper Sensor (PS325) Merging Path Lower Sensor (PS321)
Delivery/Reverse Front Sensor (PS342) Merging Path Upper Sensor (PS325)
Delivery Reverse Sensor 1 (PS335) Delivery/Reverse Front Sensor (PS342)
Duplex Reverse Sensor (PS340) Delivery Reverse Sensor 2 (PS336)
Duplex Reverse Rear Sensor (PS341) Duplex Reverse Sensor (PS340)
Duplex Path Inlet Sensor (PS344) Duplex Reverse Rear Sensor (PS341)
Duplex Standby Sensor 6 (PS347) Duplex Path Inlet Sensor (PS344)
Duplex Standby Sensor 5 (PS346) Duplex Standby Sensor 6 (PS347)
Bypass Sensor 1 (PS322) Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 2 (PS307)
Bypass Sensor 2 (PS323) Bypass Sensor 1 (PS322)
Merging Path Lower Sensor (PS321) Bypass Sensor 2 (PS323)
Delivery Sensor 1 (PS337) Merging Path Upper Sensor (PS325)
Delivery Sensor 2 (PS338) Delivery Sensor 1 (PS337)
Delivery Sensor 3 (PS339) Delivery Sensor 2 (PS338)
● Stationary Jam
Normal At normal operation
Jam check is performed in a specified period after

Turn on the copy start key, or the sensor N-1 detects the trail edge of paper.
settle the print settings.
INTR / PRINT
Specified period Specified period

Jam Check
Normal Abnormal
Sensor N
(L = Paper Length)
When paper is detected in this timing,

it is considered as an accumulation jam.
Sensor N Sensor N
Right Deck Pullout Sensor (PS601) Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 1 (PS305)
Right Deck Merging Sensor (PS163) Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 2 (PS307)
Left Deck Pullout Sensor (PS701) Tandem Sensor 1 (PS326)
Left Deck Merging Sensor (PS160) Tandem Sensor 2 (PS327)
Lower Feed Sensor 1 (PS161) Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 1 (PS313)
Lower Feed Sensor 2 (PS162) Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 2 (PS317)
Vertical Path Sensor (PS164) Merging Path Upper Sensor (PS325)
Pre-feed Sensor 1 (PS139) Delivery/Reverse Front Sensor (PS342)
Pre-feed Sensor 2 (PS140) Delivery Reverse Sensor 1 (PS335)
Pre-feed Sensor 3 (PS141) Merging Path Lower Sensor (PS321)
Registration Front Sensor (PS146) Delivery Sensor 1 (PS337)
Registration Sensor (PS151) Delivery Sensor 2 (PS338)
Secondary Transfer Outlet Sensor (PS166) Delivery Sensor 3 (PS339)
Pre-fixing Feed Sensor 1 (PS172) POD Deck Path Sensor (PS220)
268
Sensor N Sensor N
Pre-fixing Feed Sensor 2 (PS200)
At Power-ON
The DC Controller checks for the presence of paper in this machine (above the corresponding sensors) immediately after power-
on, immediately after the covers are opened and closed, and immediately after the covers are opened and closed after jam
processing.
The engine internal drive system and high voltage system all stop until the remaining paper check finishes.
Sensor N Sensor N Sensor N

Right Deck Pullout Sensor (PS601) Primary Fixing Inlet Sensor (PS304) Duplex Standby Sensor 6 (PS347)
Right Deck Merging Sensor (PS163) Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 1 Duplex Standby Sensor 5 (PS346)
(PS305)
Left Deck Pullout Sensor (PS701) Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 2 Duplex Standby Sensor 4 (PS345)
(PS307)
Left Deck Merging Sensor (PS160) Tandem Sensor 1 (PS326) Duplex Standby Sensor 3 (PS171)
Lower Feed Sensor 1 (PS161) Tandem Sensor 2 (PS327) Duplex Standby Sensor 2 (PS170)
Lower Feed Sensor 2 (PS162) Secondary Fixing Inlet Sensor (PS312) Duplex Standby Sensor 1 (PS169)
Vertical Path Sensor (PS164) Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 1 Bypass Sensor 1 (PS322)
(PS313)
Pre-feed Sensor 1 (PS139) Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 2 Bypass Sensor 2 (PS323)
(PS317)
Pre-feed Sensor 2 (PS140) Merging Path Upper Sensor (PS325) Merging Path Lower Sensor (PS321)
Pre-feed Sensor 3 (PS141) Delivery/Reverse Front Sensor (PS342) Delivery Sensor 1 (PS337)
Registration Front Sensor (PS146) Delivery Reverse Sensor 1 (PS335) Delivery Sensor 2 (PS338)
Registration Sensor (PS151) Delivery Reverse Sensor 2 (PS336) Delivery Sensor 3 (PS339)
Secondary Transfer Outlet Sensor (PS166) Duplex Reverse Sensor (PS340) POD Deck Path Sensor (PS220)
Pre-fixing Feed Sensor 1 (PS172) Duplex Reverse Rear Sensor (PS341) Duplex Path Sub Station Outlet Sensor
(PS350)
Pre-fixing Feed Sensor 2 (PS200) Duplex Path Inlet Sensor (PS344)
● Other Jams
Paper Thickness Detection Jam
Paper thickness detection is performed in order to prevent tearing the Fixing Roller surface and to prevent damaging the
Secondary Transfer Roller due to paper of thickness exceeding the standards. When paper that exceeds the specified thickness
is detected, a paper thickness detection jam occurs. (Reference: “Paper Thickness Detection” on page 238)
[Paper Thickness Detection Jam]
0D00
Double Feed Jam

When double paper feed is detected, a double feed jam occurs. (Reference: “Double Feed Detection” on page 237)
[Double Feed Jam]
0300
Transparency Jam
When the following conditions are satisfied, a transparency jam occurs.
Transparency jams are detected by the Transparency Sensor (Front): PS138 and Transparency Sensor (Rear): PS137.
[Transparency Jam]
0D90: If transparency that cannot be fed is fed
0D92: If non-transparency is fed with transparency set
0D93: If transparency is fed with non-transparency set
269
Paper Size Mismatch Jam

The paper size is confirmed in this machine by the Control Panel setting.
The size of paper actually fed is detected by the Vertical Path Sensor: PS164 (when feeding from host machine deck) and the
POD Deck Path Sensor: PS220 (when feeding from POD Deck, Paper Deck, or Long Sheet Tray).
If the paper size detected by this machine differs greatly from the paper size that is actually fed, a paper size mismatch jam occurs.
[Paper Size Mismatch Jam]
0D91
Sequence jam
If the following symptoms occur, a sequence jam occurs. (no detection sensor)
[Sequence Jam]
0CA2: If a jam caused by an accessory occurs and the paper cannot be ejected
270
External Auxiliary System
Counter Control
■ Overview
This machine has software counters which count the number of prints/copies according to the job type. Counters are displayed
by pressing the Check Counter key on the Control Panel.
Target Number displayed for each counter (in service mode)/Item Country
Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6 Counter 7 Counter 8 Code
Japan*2 Total 1 Total (Black Total (Full *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 JP
& White 1) Color + Sin-
gle Color 1)
101 108 125 000 000 000 000 000
Japan*3 Total 2 Copy (Full Total A (Full Copy (Black Total A *1 *1 *1 JP
Color + Sin- Color + Sin- & White 2) (Black &
gle Color/2) gle Color/2) White 2)
102 231 148 222 133 000 000 000
Japan*4 Total 1 Total (Black Copy (Full Total A (Full Total (Sin- *1 *1 *1 JP
& White 1) Color + Sin- Color + Sin- gle Color 1)
gle Color/1) gle Color 1)
101 108 232 149 118 000 000 000
Japan*5 Total 1 Total (Full Total (Full Total (Black Total (Black Scan (Total *1 *1 JP
Color + Sin- Color + Sin- & White/ & White/ 1)
gle Color/ gle Color/ Small) Large)
Small) Large)
101 123 122 113 112 501 000 000
Japan*6 Total 1 Total (Full Total (Full Total (Black Total (Black Total (Sin- Total (Sin- Scan (Total JP
Color + Sin- Color + Sin- & White/ & White/ gle Color/ gle Color/ 1)
gle Color/ gle Color/ Small) Large) Small) Large)
Small) Large)
101 123 122 113 112 111 110 501
Taiwan Total 1 Total (Black Copy + Print Copy + Print Total (Sin- *1 *1 *1 TW
& White 1) (Full Color/ (Full Color/ gle Color 1)
Large) Small)
101 108 401 402 118 000 000 000
UL *2 Total 1 Total (Black Copy + Print Copy + Print Copy + Print Copy + Print *1 *1 US
& White 1) (Full Color + (Full Color + (Black & (Black &
Single Col- Single Col- White/ White/
or/Large) or/Small) Large) Small)
101 108 407 408 403 404 000 000
UL *3 Total 2 Total (Black Copy + Print Copy + Print Copy + Print Copy + Print *1 *1 US
2) (Full Color + (Full Color + (Black & (Black &
Single Col- Single Col- White/ White/
or/Large) or/Small) Large) Small)
102 109 407 408 403 404 000 000
General Total 1 Total (Black Copy + Print Copy + Print Total (Sin- Total 1 (2- *1 *1 SG/KR/CN
& White 1) (Full Color/ (Full Color/ gle Color 1) sided)
Large) Small)
101 108 401 402 118 114 000 000
UK *2 Total (Black Total (Black Total (Full Total (Full Scan (Total Print (Total *1 *1 GB
& White/ & White/ Color + Sin- Color + Sin- 1) 1)
Large) Small) gle Color/ gle Color/
Large) Small)
112 113 122 123 501 301 000 000
240V UK *3 Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 GB
101 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
271
Target Number displayed for each counter (in service mode)/Item Country
Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6 Counter 7 Counter 8 Code
CA Total 1 Total (Black Copy (Full Copy (Full Print (Full Print (Full *1 *1 AU
& White 1) Color + Sin- Color + Sin- Color + Sin- Color + Sin-
gle Color/ gle Color/ gle Color/ gle Color/
Large) Small) Large) Small)
101 108 229 230 321 322 000 000
FRN *2 Total (Black Total (Black Total (Full Total (Full Scan (Total Print (Total *1 *1 FR
Large) Small)
112 113 122 123 501 301 000 000
FRN *3 Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 FR
101 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
GER *2 Total (Black Total (Black Total (Full Total (Full Scan (Total Print (Total *1 *1 DE
Large) Small)
112 113 122 123 501 301 000 000
GER *3 Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 DE
101 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
AMS *2 Total (Black Total (Black Total (Full Total (Full Scan (Total Print (Total *1 *1 ES/SE/PT/
& White/ & White/ Color + Sin- Color + Sin- 1) 1) NO/DK/FI/P
Large) Small) gle Color/ gle Color/ L/HU/CZ/SI/
Large) Small) GR/EE/RU/
112 113 122 123 501 301 000 000 NL/SK/RO/
HR/BG/TR
AMS *3 Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 ES/SE/PT/
101 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 NO/DK/FI/P
L/HU/CZ/SI/
GR/EE/RU/
NL/SK/RO/
HR/BG/TR
ITA *2 Total (Black Total (Black Total (Full Total (Full Scan (Total Print (Total *1 *1 IT
Large) Small)
112 113 122 123 501 301 000 000
ITA *3 Total 1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 IT
101 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
*1: Hidden by default. Can be changed in service mode.

*2: Counter display type: type 1 (the following service mode set to "0")
COPIER > OPTION > USER > CNT-SW
272
<Terminology>
• Large: Large-size paper (paper length exceeds 364 mm in paper feed direction)
• Small: Small-size paper (paper length is 364 mm or less in paper feed direction)
• Total: When a piece of paper is delivered, the counter is advanced by 1
• 2-Sided: The counter is advanced by 1 for paper delivered in 2-sided mode
• Country code: Can be changed in the following service mode:
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CONFIG
Coun- Country/Region Coun- Country/Region Coun- Country/Region Coun- Country/Region

try try try try
Code Code Code Code
JP Japan DK Denmark BG Bulgaria MY Malaysia
US USA FI Finland BO Bolivia NZ New Zealand
GB Great Britain PL Poland BR Brazil PE Peru
FR France HU Hungary CA Canada PH Philippines
DE Germany CZ Czechoslovakia CH Switzerland PY Paraguay
IT Italy SI Slovenia CL Chile RO Romania
AU Australia GR Greece CY Cyprus SK Slovakia
SG Singapore EE Estonia HR Croatia TH Thailand
NL Netherlands RU Russia ID Indonesia TR Turkey
KR Korea AD Andorra IE Ireland UA Ukraine
CN China AL Albania IL Israel UY Uruguay
TW Taiwan AM Armenia IN India VE Venezuela
ES Spain AR Argentina IS Iceland VN Vietnam
SE Sweden AT Austria LU Luxembourg
PT Portugal BA Bosnia-Herzegovina LV Latvia
NO Norway BE Belgium MX Mexico
• Three-digit number in the counter column: Setting value of the following service mode items (COUNTER2 to 8 can be
changed).
COPIER > OPTION > USER > COUNTER1
■ Count-up timing
Count-up timing differs according to the following:
• Print mode (1-sided/2nd side of 2-sided print, 1st side of 2-sided print)
• Delivery Position (Finisher, Stacker, Perfect Binder)
Delivery position Print mode

1-sided print/2nd side of 2-sided print 1st side of 2-sided print
Count-up timing
1 When the machine configuration consists of When the trailing edge of the paper passes through When the trailing edge of the
the Host Machine only Delivery Roller 3 paper passes through Duplex
Reference sensor: Delivery Sensor 3 (PS339) Feed Roller 1-1
2 Finisher-AN1 Tray A (Upper Tray) When the trailing edge of the paper passes through Reference sensor: Duplex
Saddle Finisher-AN2 the Delivery Roller Standby Sensor 1 (PS169)
Reference sensor: Upper Delivery Sensor (PS5)
Tray B (Lower Tray) When the trailing edge of the paper passes through
the Sort Delivery Roller
Reference sensor: Lower Delivery Sensor (PS6)
Saddle area When the trailing edge of the paper passes through
the Saddle Inlet Delivery Roller
Reference Sensor: Saddle Inlet Sensor (PS101)
273
Delivery position Print mode

1-sided print/2nd side of 2-sided print 1st side of 2-sided print
Count-up timing
3 Trimmer-D1 When the trailing edge of the paper passes through When the trailing edge of the
the Saddle Inlet Delivery Roller paper passes through Duplex
Reference Sensor: Saddle Inlet Sensor (PS101) Feed Roller 1-1
4 High Capacity Stack- Delivery Tray When the trailing edge of the paper passes through Reference sensor: Duplex
er-H1 the Delivery Tray Outlet Roller Standby Sensor 1 (PS169)
Reference sensor: Delivery Tray Outlet Paper Sensor
(21B6)
Stack Assembly When the trailing edge of the paper passes through
the Stacker Outlet Roller
Reference sensor: Stacker Outlet Paper Sensor
(Center) (21B27)
5 Perfect Binder-E1 When the trailing edge of the paper passes through
the Signature Delivery Roller
Reference sensor: Timing Sensor (S5)
<Related service mode>

The following service mode setting can be used to change the count-up timing when connecting a delivery system option.
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CNT-TMG
0: The counter is advanced when paper is delivered from a delivery system option (default value)
1: The counter is advanced when paper is delivered from the host machine
When set to "1", count-up timing corresponds to 1 in the above table.
Main Station
PS169
274
Sub Station
PS339
Finisher-AN1
Saddle Finisher-AN2
PS5
PS6
PS101
275
High Capacity Stacker-H1
21B6
21B27
Perfect Binder-E1
S5
● Long Original Counter

This machine supports long length paper and has a Long Original counter.
Long length paper can be used from the Multi-purpose Tray by setting the following service mode (Lv.2) to "1".
276
COPIER > OPTION > USER > MF-LG-ST
Parts Counter Specifications

When counting the number of sheets, the count value depends on the paper length.
• Small (324 mm or less): 1 count
• Large (487.7 mm(19.2 in.) or less): 2 counts
• Long length paper (487.7 mm(19.2 in.) to 648 mm): 3 counts
• Long length paper (648 mm to 864 mm): 4 counts
Fan Control
■ Fan Locations
● Main Station
FM110 FM401
FM108 FM400
FM112
FM140
FM114
FM143
FM407 FM113 FM109

FM115
FM406
FM405 FM107
FM111 FM130
FM163
FM424
FM402
FM404
FM120
FM403
FM425
FM137
FM121
FM134 FM135
FM428
Code Name Function Error codes

FM107 Process Unit Cooling Fan (C) To cool the Process Unit E820-0103, E820-1103
FM108 Process Unit Exhaust Fan (C) To exhaust air from the Process Unit E820-0203, E820-1203
FM109 Process Unit Cooling Fan (Bk) To cool the Process Unit E820-0104, E820-1104
FM110 Process Unit Exhaust Fan (Bk) To exhaust air from the Process Unit E820-0204, E820-1204
FM111 Process Unit Cooling Fan (M) To cool the Process Unit E820-0102, E820-1102
FM112 Process Unit Exhaust Fan (M) To exhaust air from the Process Unit E820-0202, E820-1202
FM113 Process Unit Cooling Fan (Y) To cool the Process Unit E820-0101, E820-1101
FM114 Process Unit Exhaust Fan (Y) To exhaust air from the Process Unit E820-0201, E820-1201
FM115 Pre-Transfer Exhaust Fan To exhaust air from the Pre-Transfer Charging As- E823-0001
sembly
277
Code Name Function Error codes

FM120 Pre-fixing Feed Right Rear Fan To attract paper to the Pre-fixing Feed Belt E805-0402, E805-1402
FM121 Pre-fixing Feed Right Front Fan To attract paper to the Pre-fixing Feed Belt E805-0401, E805-1401
FM130 Registration Feed Driver PCB Right Cooling To cool the Registration Feed Driver PCB Right E822-0501, E822-1501
Fan
FM134 Pre-fixing Feed Left Front Fan To attract paper to the Pre-fixing Feed Belt E805-0403, E805-1403
FM135 Secondary Transfer/Duplex Driver PCB To cool the Secondary Transfer/Duplex Driver PCB E822-0502, E822-1502
Cooling Fan
FM137 Pre-fixing Feed Left Rear Fan To attract paper to the Pre-fixing Feed Belt E805-0404, E805-1404
FM140 Main Station Right Cooling Fan To cool the Main Station E822-0301, E822-1301
FM143 Main Station Power Unit Right Cooling Fan To cool the Main Station E822-0304, E822-1304
FM163 Main Station Power Unit Left Cooling Fan To cool the Main Station E822-0305, E822-1305
FM400 Main Station Right Middle Cooling Fan To cool the Main Station E822-0302, E822-1302
FM401 Main Station Right Rear Cooling Fan To cool the Main Station E822-0303, E822-1303
FM402 Developing Assembly Left Front Cooling To cool the Developing Assembly E820-0301, E820-1301
Fan (Y)
FM403 Main Station Exhaust Assist Fan To exhaust air from the Main Station E820-0302, E820-1302
FM404 Developing Assembly Cooling Fan (Y) To cool the Developing Assembly E820-0303, E820-1303
FM405 Main Station Upper Cover Front Suction Fan To perform intake of air to the Main Station E807-0101, E807-1101
FM406 Main Station Upper Cover Middle Suction To perform intake of air to the Main Station E807-0102, E807-1102
Fan
FM407 Main Station Upper Cover Rear Suction Fan To perform intake of air to the Main Station E807-0103, E807-1103
FM424 Registration Motor Cooling Fan To cool the Registration E822-0A01, E822-1A01
FM425 Cross-Feed Motor Cooling Fan To cool the Cross-Feed Motor E822-0B01, E822-1B01
FM428 Secondary Transfer Motor Cooling Fan To cool the Secondary Transfer Motor E822-1E01,E822-0E01
278
● Sub Station
FM357
FM358
FM334
FM333
FM332
FM331
FM421
FM427
FM420
FM336 FM360
FM350
FM359
FM327
FM328
FM326
FM409
FM408
FM354 FM310 FM314

FM362
FM355 FM312 FM381
FM319
FM338 FM313 FM337 FM320
FM315
FM318
FM423
FM415
FM414
279
No. Name Function Error codes

FM310 Primary Fixing Power Unit Cooling Fan To cool the Primary Fixing Heater Driver PCB E805-0901, E805-1901
FM312 Primary Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan To exhaust heat from the Fixing Assembly E805-0201, E805-1201
FM313 Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Cooling Fan To cool the fixing inner delivery area and paper E822-0201, E822-1201
FM314 Secondary Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan To exhaust heat from the Fixing Assembly E805-0202, E805-1202
FM315 Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Cooling To cool the fixing inner delivery area and paper E822-0202, E822-1202
Fan
FM318 Delivery Lower Cooling Fan To cool the paper passing through the delivery area E822-0102, E822-1102
FM319 Delivery Upper Cooling Fan To cool the paper passing through the delivery area E822-0101, E822-1101
FM320 Duplex Decurler Fan To cool the paper passing through the Duplex Decur- E822-0401, E822-1401
ler
FM326 Station Interval Cooling Fan 6 To cool the joint between the Main Station and Sub E822-0606, E822-1606
Station
Station
Station
FM331 Primary Fixing Separation Cooling Fan 1 To cool the Pressure Belt (separation part) E805-0701, E805-1701
FM332 Primary Fixing Separation Cooling Fan 2 To cool the Pressure Belt (separation area) E805-0702, E805-1702
FM336 Reverse Outer Delivery Cooling Fan To cool the Reverse/Outer Delivery Driver PCB E822-0503, E822-1503
FM337 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Cooling To cool the Pressure Roller E805-0305, E805-1305
Fan 5
FM338 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Cooling Fan 5 To cool the Pressure Belt E805-0105, E805-1105
FM350 Delivery Decurler Cooling Fan To cool the paper passing through the delivery area E822-0402, E822-1402
FM354 Main Station Upper Exhaust Fan To exhaust air from the Main Station E822-0801, E822-1801
FM355 Main Station Lower Exhaust Fan To exhaust air from the Main Station E822-0802, E822-1802
FM357 Tandem Guide Upper Cooling Fan To cool the tandem feed area and paper E822-0902, E822-1902
FM358 Tandem Guide Lower Cooling Fan To cool the tandem feed area and paper E822-0903, E822-1903
FM359 Bypass Guide Front Cooling Fan To cool the bypass feed area and paper E822-0904, E822-1904
FM360 Bypass Guide Rear Cooling Fan To cool the bypass feed area and paper E822-0905, E822-1905
FM362 Merging Guide Rear Fan To cool the merging area and paper E822-0901, E822-1901
FM381 Fixing Uneven Gloss Prevention Left Fan To cool paper to prevent uneven gloss E822-0703, E822-1703
Station
Station
FM414 Sub Station Lower 24V Power Supply Cool- To cool the Power Supply PCB E804-0104, E804-1104
ing Fan
FM415 Sub Station Upper 24V Power Supply Cool- To cool the Power Supply PCB E804-0105, E804-1105
ing Fan
FM420 Secondary Fixing Main Thermistor Cooling To cool the Main Thermistor E805-0502, E805-1502
Fan
FM421 Primary Fixing Main Thermistor Cooling Fan To cool the Main Thermistor E805-0501, E805-1501
FM423 38V Power Supply B/C Cooling Fan To cool the Power Supply PCB E804-0202, E804-1202
FM427 Delivery Feed Motor 2 Cooling Fan To cool the Delivery Feed Motor E822-0C01, E822-1C01
280
FM412
FM411
FM422
FM417
FM410 FM418
FM416 FM419

FM410 24V Power Supply Lower Cooling Fan To cool the Power Supply Assembly E804-0101, E804-1101
FM411 24V Power Supply Middle Cooling Fan To cool the Power Supply Assembly E804-0102, E804-1102
FM412 24V Power Supply Upper Cooling Fan To cool the Power Supply Assembly E804-0103, E804-1103
FM416 13V Power Supply Cooling Fan To cool the Power Supply Assembly E804-0000
FM417 Main Station Rear Upper Cooling Fan To perform intake of air to the Main Station E822-0D01, E822-1D01
FM418 Main Station Rear Lower Cooling Fan To perform intake of air to the Main Station E822-0D02, E822-1D02
FM419 Compressor Cooling Fan To cool the Compressor E805-0601, E805-1601
FM422 38V Power Supply A Cooling Fan To cool the Power Supply Assembly E804-0201, E804-1201
281
● Pickup Deck
FM604
FM605
FM608
FM601
FM602
FM704
FM603
FM705
FM606
FM708 FM701
FM702 FM607
FM703
FM706
FM707

FM601 Right Deck Attraction Fan Pickup -
FM602 Right Deck Separation Fan 1 To separate paper -
FM603 Right Deck Separation Fan 2 To separate paper -
FM604 Right Deck Air Flotation Fan 1 To float paper -
FM606 Right Deck Side Right Fan To separate (large size) paper -
FM607 Right Deck Side Left Fan To separate (large size) paper -
FM701 Left Deck Attraction Fan To pick up paper -
FM702 Left Deck Separation Fan 1 To separate paper -
FM703 Left Deck Separation Fan 2 To separate paper -
FM704 Left Deck Air Flotation Fan 1 To float paper -
FM706 Left Deck Side Right Fan To separate (large size) paper -
FM707 Left Deck Side Left Fan To separate (large size) paper -
282
● Controller
FM502
FM500
FM501

FM500 Main Controller Cooling Fan 1 To cool the Main Controller E880-0001
FM501 HDD Cooling Fan To cool the hard disk drive E880-0005
FM502 Controller Cooling Fan 2 To cool the Controller BOX E880-0004
283
■ Drive Sequence
● Main Station (Except Deck Unit)
Main power switch ON Control panel power switch OFFࠉ Main power switch OFF
Warm-up Warm-up Standby Print At printing In In Sleep JAM When paper Error When cover When fixing
rotation Finished lowvoltage powersaving absence open assembly
mode /low-voltage release
No. Parts Name mode lever open
FM107 Process Unit Blowing Fan (C)
FM108 Process Unit Exhaust Fan (C)
FM109 Process Unit Blowing Fan (Bk)
FM110 Process Unit Exhaust Fan (Bk)
FM111 Process Unit Blowing Fan (M)
FM112 Process Unit Exhaust Fan (M)
FM113 Process Unit Blowing Fan (Y)
FM114 Process Unit Exhaust Fan (Y)
FM115 Exhaust Fan
FM120 Fixing Feed Right Rear Fan
FM121 Fixing Feed Right Front Fan
FM130 Registration Feed Driver Right Cooling Fan
FM134 Fixing Feed Left Front Fan
FM135 Secondary Transfer

/Duplex Driver Cooling Fan
FM137 Fixing Feed Left Rear Fan
FM140 Main Station Right Cooling Fan
FM143 Main Station Power Unit Right Cooling Fan
FM163 Main Station Power Unit Left Cooling Fan
FM400 Main Station Right Middle Cooling Fan
FM401 Main Station Right Rear Cooling Fan
FM402 Developing Assembly

Left Front Cooling Fan (Y)
FM403 Main Station Exhaust Assist Fan
FM404 Developing Assembly Cooling Fan (Y)
FM405 Main Station Upper Cover Front Suction Fan
FM406 Main Station Upper Cover Middle Suction Fan
FM407 Main Station Upper Cover Rear Suction Fan
FM424 Registration Motor Cooling Fan
FM425 Cross-feed Motor Cooling Fan
FM428 Secondary Transfer Motor Cooling Fan
:Full speed
:Half speed
:85%
● Main Station (Paper Deck)

FM601 Right Deck Suction Fan
FM602 Right Deck Separation Fan 1
FM603 Right Deck Separation Fan 2
FM604 Right Deck Air Flotation Fan 1
FM606 Right Deck Right Side Fan
FM607 Right Deck Left Side Fan
FM701 Left Deck Suction Fan
FM702 Left Deck Separation Fan 1
FM703 Left Deck Separation Fan 2
FM704 Left Deck Air Flotation Fan 1
FM706 Left Deck Right Side Fan
FM707 Left Deck Left Side Fan
:Full speed
:Pre air flotation
:Air flotation
:Attraction
284
● Sub Station
FM310 Primary Fixing Power Unit Cooling Fan
FM312 Primary Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan
FM314 Secondary Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan
FM318 Delivery Lower Cooling Fan
FM319 Delivery Upper Cooling Fan
FM320 Duplex Decurler Fan
FM326 Station Interval Cooling Fan 6
FM336 Reverse Outer Delivery Driver Cooling Fan
FM337 Secondary Fixing

Pressure Roller Cooling Fan 5
FM338 Primary Fixing Belt Cooling Fan 5
FM350 Delivery Decurler Cooling Fan
FM354 Main Station Upper Exhaust Fan
FM355 Main Station Lower Exhaust Fan
FM357 Tandem Guide Upper Cooling Fan
FM358 Tandem Guide Lower Cooling Fan
FM359 Bypass Guide Front Cooling Fan
FM360 Bypass Guide Rear Cooling Fan
FM362 Merging Guide Fan
FM381 Fixing Uneven Gloss Prevention Left Fan
FM414 Sub Station Lower

24V Power Supply Cooling Fan
FM415 Sub Station Upper

24V Power Supply Cooling Fan
FM420 Secondary Fixing

Main Thermistor Cooling Fan
FM421 Primary Fixing Main Thermistor Cooling Fan
FM423 38V Power Supply B/C Cooling Fan
FM427 Delivery Feed Motor 2 Cooling Fan
:Full speed
:Half speed
:Full speed or half speed depending on the mechanical and process conditions
:50%
:25%

FM410 24V Power Supply Lower Cooling Fan
FM411 24V Power Supply Middle Cooling Fan
FM412 24V Power Supply Upper Cooling Fan
FM416 13V Power Supply Cooling Fan
FM417 Main Station Rear Upper Cooling Fan
FM418 Main Station Rear Lower Cooling Fan
FM419 Compressor Cooling Fan
FM422 38V Power Supply A Cooling Fan
:Mixed speeds (full and half)

:Full speed
:Half speeda
:Only when the compressor is driven
:Driven for 30 minutes after a job at half speed
285
● Controller
FM500 Main Controller Cooling Fan 1
FM501 HDD Cooling Fan
FM502 Controller Cooling Fan 2
:Mixed speeds (full and half)

:Full speed
:Half speed
286
Power supply
■ AC Power Supply Configuration
AC inlet Main Power Switch
(SW108)
Breaker
㸦ELB500㸧
H
3.3V All-night Main Controller
AC Filter Unit Terminal
Power Supply PCB
N 㸦UN504㸧 Mount
(UN503)
Environment Switch
(SW107) 12V Power Supply PCB A (UN530)
12V Power Supply PCB B (UN531)
24V Power Supply PCB A (UN520)

24V Power Supply PCB C (UN522)
Drum Heater system
24V Power Supply PCB D (UN523) Main Station

24V Power Supply PCB E (UN524) Power Supply Relay
PCB
24V Power Supply PCB F (UN525)
All-night (UN102)
3.3V drive 38V Power Supply PCB A (UN532)
Deck Heater Switch
(SW106) Power Unit Relay PCB Power Unit Limiter PCB
㸦UN401㸧
(UN400)
Non-all-night
12V drive
Right Air Heater
(H601)
All-night
12V drive Right Deck Heater
(H602)
Left Air Heater

(H701)
Deck Heater
Relay PCB Unit Left Deck Heater
(UN801) (H702)
Power Unit Station
Drum Heater Thermopile
Interlock Switch All-night Power Supply
(SW120)
Drum Heater (Y)

Temperature control (H103)
Drum Heater (M)

Drum Heater (C)

Drum Heater (Bk)

Environment Heater Driver PCB

Main Controller (UN101)
24V Power Supply PCB H (UN527)
24V Power Supply PCB I (UN528)

Primary Fixing Roller Heater (H306)
24V Power Supply PCB J (UN529)
Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Heater
38V Power Supply PCB B (UN533㸧 (H308)
Fixing Relay PCB
38V Power Supply PCB C (UN534㸧 Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Heater
㸦UN402㸧
(H307)
Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Heater (H305)
Primary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN306) Secondary Fixing Roller Heater (H300)
Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Heater

(H302)
Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Heater

Secondary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN307) (H301)
Sub Station Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Heater (H303)
Reader Heater
287 (Option)
Code Name Function

Power Unit Station
ELB500 Leakage Breaker To cut off voltage in case of voltage abnormality
SW108 Main Power Supply Switch To input AC
SW107 Environment Switch To turn ON/OFF the power to the Drum Heater and Reader Heater (op-
tion)
SW106 Deck Heater Switch To turn ON/OFF the power to the Right Deck Heater and Left Deck
Heater
UN503 3.3V All-Night Power Supply PCB To supply 3.3 V (all-night) to the Main Controller Unit
UN504 AC Filter Unit To remove switching noise
UN400 Power Unit Relay PCB To act as an AC filter for Main Station's secondary power supply, to
relay for ON/OFF switching, and to distribute power to each standard
power supply
UN520 24V Power Supply PCB A To supply 24 V to electrical components in the Main Station (various
UN521 24V Power Supply PCB B Driver PCBs, Process Unit Driver PCBs, Laser Scanner Units, etc.)
UN522 24V Power Supply PCB C
UN523 24V Power Supply PCB D
UN524 24V Power Supply PCB E
UN525 24V Power Supply PCB F
UN532 38V Power Supply PCB A To supply 38 V for electrical components (Registration Feed Driver PCB
(Left), Secondary Transfer/Duplex Driver PCB, and Vertical Path/Lower
Feed Driver PCB) in the Main Station
UN801 Deck Heater Relay PCB To distribute AC power supply to Deck Heaters and Air Heaters, and
protect PCBs at the time of error due to FUSE
Main Station
H100 Drum Heater (C) To control the temperature of Drum (C)l
H101 Drum Heater (Bk) To control the temperature of Drum (Bk)
H102 Drum Heater (M) To control the temperature of Drum (M)
H103 Drum Heater (Y) To control the temperature of Drum (Y)
H601 Right Air Heater To improve paper separation performance when used under highly hu-
mid environment or when coated paper is used (Right Deck)
H602 Right Deck Heater To prevent paper from absorbing moisture (Right Deck)
H701 Left Air Heater To improve paper separation performance when used under highly hu-
mid environment or when coated paper is used (Left Deck)
H702 Left Deck Heater To prevent paper from absorbing moisture (Left Deck)
UN101 Environment Heater Driver PCB To drive the Drum Heater, Reader Heater (option), Right Deck Heater
and Left Deck Heater
UN102 Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB To supply 5, 12 and 24 V to DC-DC Converter and electrical compo-
nents in the Main Station
UN401 Power Unit Limiter PCB To distribute secondary power supplies (12VA/12VB/24VA to 24VF/
38VA) and protect from overcurrent
Compressor Cooling Fan Drive PCB, Air Relief Valve Drive PCB and
connection PCB
To act as a Drive PCB of FM417/418
Sub Station
H306 Primary Fixing Roller Heater To control the temperature of the Primary Fixing Roller
H308 Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller To control the temperature of the Primary Fixing External Heat Upper
Heater Roller
H307 Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller To control the temperature of the Primary Fixing External Heat Lower
Heater Roller
H305 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Heater To control the temperature of the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt
H300 Secondary Fixing Roller Heater To control the temperature of the Secondary Fixing Roller
H302 Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller To control the temperature of the Secondary Fixing External Heat Up-
Heater per Roller
H301 Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller To control the temperature of the Secondary Fixing External Heat Low-
Heater er Roller
288
Code Name Function

H303 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Heater To control the temperature of the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller
UN306 Primary Fixing Heater Driver PCB To drive the heater in the Primary Fixing Assembly
UN307 Secondary Fixing Heater Driver PCB To drive the heater of the Secondary Fixing Assembly
UN402 Fixing Relay PCB To act as an AC filter for Sub Station's secondary power supply, to relay
for ON/OFF switching, and to distribute power to each standard power
supply
UN527 24V Power Supply PCB H To supply 24 V for electrical components (various driver PCBs, etc.) in
UN528 24V Power Supply PCB I the Sub Station and Reader (option)
UN529 24V Power Supply PCB J
UN533 38V Power Supply PCB B To supply 38 V for electrical components (various driver PCBs, etc.) in
UN534 38V Power Supply PCB C the Sub Station
289
■ DC Power Supply Configuration

Reader(Heater)
24V
12V-B-1
3.3V
5V
12V Driver PCBs
24V
24VH 24V
24V Power
Supply PCB H
RMT
(UN527) Fixing Duplex
12V-SEESAW is a power supply which is generated from Feed Driver PCB
㸦UN311㸧
24VI
12V B-4 and turned OFF in synchronization with OFF of 24V Power 3.3V
Supply PCB I
the main switch. (UN528) RMT- IL-DOOR 5V
12V Driver PCBs
24VJ 24V-IL
24V Power
Supply PCB J
RMT- IL-LEVER
(UN529)
38VB
38VPower
Supply PCB B
RMT- IL-DOOR
(UN533)
38VC 12V-SEESAW
38VPower
Supply PCB C
RMT- IL-LEVER
(UN534)
Sub Station
Left Front Door Switch
(SW301)
Sub Station
AC
Right Front Door Switch
IL-DOOR (SW302)
Primary Fixing
12V-SEESAW Lever Switch
(SW303)
12V Power Supply A 12VࠉB-1
(UN530) 12VࠉA Fixing Relay PCB Secondary Fixing
(UN402) Lever Switch
12VࠉB-3
IL-LEVER (SW304)
12V A-1,B-2,B-4
12V Power Supply B Sub Station
(UN531) 12VࠉB
3.3V
Power Unit Station
DC Controller 5V
Power Supply PCB
(UN103) DC Controller
12V A-1 12VࠉB-2
Power Unit
Limiter PCB 24V
(UN401)
24VA
24V Power Supply PCB A
(UN520) RMT
RMTs
24VB 24VB
24V Power Supply PCB B
5V(All-night)
(UN521) RMT
24VC 12V B-4 5V(All-night)
24V Power Supply PCB C
(UN522) RMT 12V-IL Laser
Scanner Unit
24V
24V Power Supply PCB D 24VD
(UN523) RMT-IL
24VE Main Station

24V Power Supply PCB E 5V
(UN524) RMT-IL
12V B-2
Driver PCBs
24V Power Supply PCB F 24VF 24V
(UN525) RMT-IL
38VA
38V Power Supply PCB A Main Station
(UN532) 12VࠉA-2 Power Supply Relay PCB 5V
RMT-IL 5V(All-night) Drum Surface
(UN102) Process Unit Temperature Sensor
AC 12V B-2
12VࠉA-3 Driver PCB (UN183~UN186)
Main Controller 24V (UN161~UN164)
RELAY-ON RMTs
AC 5V(All-night)
Unit Relay PCB 3.3V(All-night)
(UN400) 3.3V All-night 3.3V(All-night) Environment Heater

IL-RELAY-ON Power Supply PCB 12V B-2
(UN503) Driver PCB
(UN101) Drum Heater
12V-IL
Interlock Switch
(SW120)
Main Station 5V
Front Right Cover Switch
(SW111) 12V B-2
12V SEESAW Driver PCBs
Main Station 24V-IL
Front Left Cover Switch
(SW112)
Vertical Path Cover
Open/Close Switch
(SW116)
Multi-purpose Tray Cover

Open/Close Switch
(SW113)
290
Code Name Function

Power Unit Station
UN503 3.3V All-Night Power Supply PCB To supply 3.3 V (All-Night) to the Main Controller PCB
UN522 24V Power Supply PCB C
UN524 24V Power Supply PCB E
UN525 24V Power Supply PCB F
Driver PCBs, Process Unit Driver PCBs, Laser Scanner Units, etc.)
UN401 Power Unit Limiter PCB To distribute secondary power supplies (12VA/12VB/24VA to 24VF/
38VA) and protect from overcurrent
Compressor Cooling Fan Drive PCB, Air Relief Valve Drive PCB and
connection PCB
To act as a drive circuit for FM417/418
Main Station
UN101 Environment Heater Driver PCB To drive the Drum Heaters, Reader Heater (option), Right Deck Heater,
and Left Deck Heater
UN102 Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB To supply 5, 12, 24 and 38 V for DC-DC converters and electrical com-
ponents in the Main Station
UN103 DC Controller Power Supply PCB To supply 3.3 and 5 V for DC-DC converters and DC Controller PCB
UN161 Process Unit Driver PCB (Y) To drive various electrical components in the Process Unit (Y)
UN162 Process Unit Driver PCB (M) To drive various electrical components in the Process Unit (M)
UN163 Process Unit Driver PCB (C) To drive various electrical components in the Process Unit (C)
UN164 Process Unit Driver PCB (Bk) To drive various electrical components in the Process Unit (Bk)
UN183 Drum Surface Temperature Sensor (Y) To measure the surface temperature of the drum (Y)
UN184 Drum Surface Temperature Sensor (M) To measure the surface temperature of the drum (M)
UN185 Drum Surface Temperature Sensor (C) To measure the surface temperature of the drum (C)
UN186 Drum Surface Temperature Sensor (Bk) To measure the surface temperature of the drum (Bk)
None Laser Scanner Units (Y/M/C/Bk) To irradiate laser beam
Sub Station
UN311 Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB To supply 3.3, 5, 12, 24 and 38 V for DC-DC converters and electrical
components in the Sub Station
UN527 24V Power Supply PCB H To supply 24 V for electrical components (various driver PCBs, etc.) in
UN528 24V Power Supply PCB I the Sub Station and Reader (option)
UN529 24V Power Supply PCB J
UN533 38V Power Supply PCB B To supply 38 V for electrical components (various driver PCBs, etc.) in
UN534 38V Power Supply PCB C the Sub Station
Protection function
■ AC/DC Internal Protection Circuits
• 3.3V All-Night Power Supply PCB (UN503)
• 12V Power Supply PCB A (UN530)
• 12V Power Supply PCB B (UN531)
• 24V Power Supply PCB C (UN522)
• 24V Power Supply PCB D (UN523)
• 24V Power Supply PCB E (UN524)
• 24V Power Supply PCB F (UN525)
• 24V Power Supply PCB H (UN527)
• 24V Power Supply PCB I (UN528)
291
• 24V Power Supply PCB J (UN529)

If overcurrent or abnormal voltage occurs due to trouble such as a short circuit at a power output, there are functions to protect
against overcurrent and overvoltage to prevent damage to the Power Supply PCBs by automatically cutting off output voltage.
Actions to take when an abnormality occurs:

1. Turn OFF the main power switch
2. Remove the cause that activated the protection circuit
3. Restart the machine
Note that abnormalities caused by ground faults do not require Power Supply PCB replacement.
If an abnormality is found in power supply operation after restart of the machine under other abnormal conditions, replace the
Power Supply PCB.
■ Protection Circuit Built in the DC Controller Power Supply PCB (UN103)

Main Station
• DC Controller Power Supply PCB (UN103)
• Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB (UN102)
Sub Station
• Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311)
If overcurrent or abnormal voltage occurs due to trouble such as a short circuit at a power output, there are functions to protect
against overcurrent and overvoltage/low voltage to prevent damage to the Power Supply PCBs by automatically cutting off output
voltage.

3. Replace the DC Controller Power Supply PCB (UN103)
■ DC Power Supply External Protection Circuits

12V Power Supply PCB A (UN530)
• Controller
• DCON
• UI Power Supply
The output branches off to the above 3 systems and each system has a function to protect against overcurrent
If a fault such as a short circuit occurs to the output of each power supply which causes overcurrent, output voltage from the AC/
DC Power Supply of 12V Power Supply PCB A (UN530) is automatically cut off.


• Sub Station
• For Main Station load drive, Driver PCBs
• Reader power supply
• Around the laser scanner
The output branches off to the above 4 systems and each system has a function to protect against overcurrent
292
If a fault such as a short circuit occurs to the output of each power supply which causes overcurrent, output voltage is automatically
cut off for each system, which is displayed as an error.

24 V DC Power Supply PCBs

24 V Power Supply PCBs A, B, C, D, E, F, H, I, J
• 24V Power Supply PCB D (UN523)
• 24V Power Supply PCB E (UN524)
• 24V Power Supply PCB F (UN525)
• 24V Power Supply PCB H (UN527)
• 24V Power Supply PCB I (UN528)
• 24V Power Supply PCB J (UN529)
The output branches off to the 3 systems for each 24 V Power Supply PCB, and each system has a function to protect against
overcurrent
If a fault such as a short circuit occurs to the output of each power supply which causes overcurrent, output voltage from the AC/
DC Power Supply is automatically cut off.
Note that the fault location is specified for each system, which is displayed as an error.

Power-saving Function
This machine provides "Standby", "Energy Saver", "Low Power and "Sleep" modes.
Furthermore, the "Sleep" mode is subdivided into the following: "Sleep Standby", "Sleep 1" and "Deep Sleep".
293
Control panel
Reader
State of power
supply ON
Energy Saving
State of power
Enginesupply OFF
Main Controler
Auto Low Power Timer
Press Energy Saver key
Press Auto
Standby Energy Saver key *2 Energy Saving Low Power Timer Low Power
Press
Energy Saver key
Press Energy Saver key Job end *3 Job end *4
Press Energy Saver key *1 Job submission Job submission

Auto Sleep Timer Auto Sleep Timer Auto Sleep Timer
Sleep Mode
Sleep Standby
Energy Use Energy Use

“Low” “High”
Job end Job submission
Job submission Job end
Deep Sleep Sleep 1
Hard disk drive

protection timer
*1. If the Energy Saver key is set to "Sleep Mode"

*2. If the Energy Saver key is set to "Energy Saver Mode"
*3. When the auto low power timer is not up
*4. When the auto low power timer is < Auto Sleep Timer>
< Related Settings/Registration >

• Settings/Registration > Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Mode After Energy Saver Key Pressed
Specifies the mode to transition to when the Energy Saver key is pressed
Setting values: Energy Saver Mode, Sleep Mode
• Settings/Registration > Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Auto Sleep Time
Specifies the time (auto sleep timer) until migrating to the Sleep Mode
Setting values: 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 minutes; 1 hour; 90 minutes; or 2, 3, or 4 hours
• Settings/Registration > Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Low Power Mode Time
Specifies the time (auto low power timer) until migrating to the Low Power Mode
Setting values: 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 minutes; 1 hour; 90 minutes; or 2, 3, or 4 hours
■ Standby Mode
The mode that the machine is running or can start operation immediately and all power is supplied in this mode.
294
< Conditions of transfer from Standby Mode to other modes >

• To Energy Saver Mode (Standby -> Energy Saver)
When the Energy Saver key is pressed (if "Mode After Energy Saver Key Pressed" is set to "Energy Saver Mode")
• To Low Power Mode (Standby -> Low Power)
When the auto low power timer is up
• To Sleep Mode (Standby -> Sleep)
• When the Energy Saver key is pressed (if "Mode After Energy Saver Key Pressed" is set to "Sleep Mode")
• When the auto sleep timer is up
< Conditions of transfer from other modes to Standby Mode (Energy Saver/Low-Power/Sleep -> Standby) >
• When the Energy Saver key is pressed
• At occurrence of an error
• When it is the time set in Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings
■ Energy Saver Mode

Power consumption is reduced by lowering the temperature of the Fixing Assembly according to the energy saving rate setting
(changeable by Settings/Registration). In this state, the engine can start more quickly than it can from Sleep.
• Settings/Registration > Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Change Energy Saver Mode
Setting value: -10% (default), -25%, -50%, Zero Restore Time
• When "Zero Restore Time" is selected, DCON/RCON does no special processing.
• When "-10%", "-25%" or "-50%" is selected, standby power is reduced by the lowered DCON fixing temperature. The
target temperature is different for each engine.
Transition to this mode occurs only when the Energy Saver key is pressed while "Mode After Energy Saver Key Pressed" is set
to "Energy Saver Mode" in Settings/Registration.
The Energy Saver key LED lights during energy saving.
< Conditions of transfer from Energy Saver Mode to other modes >
• To Standby Mode (Energy Saver -> Standby)
• When the Energy Saver key is pressed
• To Low Power Mode (Energy Saver -> Low Power)
• To Sleep Mode (Energy Saver -> Sleep)
• When a job occurs
< Conditions of transfer from other modes to Energy Saver Mode >
• From Standby Mode (Standby -> Energy Saver)
When the Energy Saver key is pressed (if "Mode After Energy Saver Key Pressed" is set to "Energy Saver Mode")
• From Sleep Mode (Sleep -> Energy Saver)
At job completion (the auto low power timer is not up)
■ Low Power Mode

This mode decreases power consumption by using a lower temperature in the Fixing Assembly. In this state, the engine can start
more quickly than it can from Sleep. Power is reduced more than Energy Saver Mode (at -10% and -25% energy saver rates).
Printing is available within 30 seconds after returning to Standby Mode, (Energy Star compliant).
Transition to this mode occurs only when the auto low power timer is up.
Users cannot check transition from Energy Saving Mode to Low Power Mode.
During Low Power Mode, the Energy Saver key LED is lit.
< Transfer conditions from Low Power Mode to other modes >
295
• To Standby Mode (Low Power -> Standby)

• When Energy Saver key is pressed
• To Sleep Mode (Low Power -> Sleep)
• When a job occurs
< Transfer conditions from other modes to Low Power Mode >
• From Standby/Energy Saver Mode (Standby/Energy Saver -> Low Power)
• From Sleep Mode (Sleep -> Low Power)
When a job is completed (auto low power timer < auto sleep timer)
NOTE:
When "auto low power timer" and "auto sleep timer" have the same setting values and the set time from Standby state has elapsed,
transition to the Sleep Mode (instead of the Low Power Mode) occurs.
■ Sleep Standby Mode

The state that only the Control Panel is off while the power is supplied to all other parts.
Presence of a job is determined and if there is no job, the mode is shifted to Deep Sleep/Sleep 1 mode.
When a job is submitted during sleep (Deep Sleep/Sleep 1 mode), the mode shifts back to this mode.
■ Sleep 1 Mode
In this state, the Control Panel is off and therefore power is not supplied to the printer or scanner, but all-night and non-all-night
power is supplied.
If the following setting value is set to "High" in Settings/Registration, the mode shifts from Sleep Standby mode to this mode.
• Settings/Registration > Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Sleep Mode Energy Use
The mode migrates to Sleep Standby mode when a job is submitted during this mode, and to Standby mode when the Energy
Saver key is pressed.
■ Deep Sleep Mode

In this state, the Control Panel is off while only all-night power (3.3 V) is supplied.
If the following setting value is set to "Low" in Settings/Registration, the mode shifts from Sleep Standby mode to this mode.
When any of the "Conditions for Not Entering Deep Sleep" applies, transition to this mode does not occur.
The mode shifts to Sleep Standby mode when a job is submitted during this mode, and to Standby mode when the Energy Saver
key is pressed.
● Conditions for Not Entering Deep Sleep

Software Setting
Setting value: High
Hardware status
• The Serial Coin Vendor is connected
• An iSlot Extension Card is connected
• A USB device is connected to the host machine
System performance status

• An application is communicating via network (CPCA) (when a CPCA-dedicated port has a TCP connection, or within 15
seconds after reception of UDP)
296
• A print job or scan job is processing/waiting

• During report job processing
• During a forward send job/receive job
• During SEND job processing
• During distribution of device information
• During export/import by remote UI
• VNC connection in progress
• The Resource Downloader is executing a task (such as downloading font data and creating a backup).
• During backup of Mail Box documents
• While an Advanced Box file is open (reading/writing). In common with SMR/WebDAV
• Settings/Registration > Access Stored Files > Network
• Printer/scanner functions are stopped
• During save job processing (including processing to save in the Advanced Box or other storage after scanning is completed,
just like SEND)
• When storing a print job (or other job) using memory media
• Weekly shutdown timeout in UI has occurred
• An Alarm Service has been set within 10 minutes with the following functions
• Memory receiving start/end time
• Report specified print time
• Setting to send at a specified time (SEND)
• POP interval
• DHCP setting (server-specified interval)
• eRDS setting (server-specified interval)
• SNTP setting (server-specified interval)
• Auto delivery of device information
• Backup of Mail Box documents at a specified time
• Sleep Mode Exit Time setting
• Auto Shutdown Time (auto shutdown timer)
• Auto Shutdown Weekly Timer setting (weekly shutdown)
When the timer is running

• The sleep mode exit timer is running (for 15 seconds when recovering from Deep Sleep)
• The hard disk drive protection timer is running (when recovering from Deep Sleep, for 55 minutes after hard disk drive startup.
However, after a print, scan, or fax job is completed, this timer is disabled.)
• The network timer is running (within several seconds set by the following service mode (Lv. 2); default value is 15 seconds)
COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK > WUEN-LIV
• The wake up packet timer is running (for 10 minutes after receiving a wake up packet)
• Timer is running after link-up (for 1 minute after network communication starts since machine power-on)
• The Send job completion timer is running (for 127 seconds after image-only job completion)
Effect of the Hub Which Supports Spanning Tree

If the network has been set as a loop, data keeps staying in this loop, causing the data transfer efficiency to be lowered.
To avoid this, a feature called spanning tree is provided in some hubs. When this feature is enabled, devices newly connected
to the hub can perform data communication with the network after about 10 to 50 seconds (depending on conditions).
When entering and exiting Deep Sleep, this machine is electrically disconnected from the network.
Therefore, when connected to a hub with the spanning tree feature, network communication is disabled for up to about one minute
when recovering from Deep Sleep.
Therefore, immediately after recovering from Deep Sleep, the following phenomena may occur.
• Device status cannot be retrieved
• Printing disabled
• Cannot log in with log-in application
If these symptoms cause problems, take one of the following measures:
• Try avoiding Deep Sleep (set the following Settings/Registration value to "High").
• Turn OFF the spanning tree feature in the hub.
• Request users to use the hub which supports Rapid Spanning-Tree Protocol (RSTP) that resolved this problem.
297
Embedded RDS
Product Overview
■ Overview
Embedded RDS (hereinafter referred to as E-RDS) is a monitoring program that runs on the host machine. When the monitoring
option is enabled by making the setting on this machine, information such as the status change of the machine, counter
information, and failure information are collected. The collected device information is sent to a remote maintenance server called
UGW (Universal Gateway Server) via Internet, thus allowing for e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote (Remote Diagnosis
System).
The following device information/ status can be monitored.

• Billing counts
• Parts counter
• Firmware info
• Service call error log
• Jam log
• Alarm log
• Status changes (Toner low/ out, etc.)
Since high confidentiality is required for the information shown above, it performs communication between this machine and the
UGW using HTTPS/ SOAP protocol.
Customer
Environment UGW
This machine
Firewall Internet
Sales Company
DNS Server Proxy Server Administrator
■ Features and benefits

E-RDS embedded with a network module in advance can realize a front-end processing of e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote
system without attaching any extra hardware equipment.
■ Major Functions
● Service Browser
Service browser is a web browsing functionality only for service technicians in charge, and is used for referring to the FAQ contents
which is connected to UGW.
In order to grasp on which devices the service browser is enabled, when the status of the service browser is changed from disabled
(0: OFF) to enabled, E-RDS sends the browser information to the UGW.
298
● Service mode menu Transmission

E-RDS sends the target service mode menu data to UGW in the following cases:
• When a specific alarm and service call error are detected
• When the setting is changed in service mode
The following shows the transmission timing and the target data for transmission in service mode menu:
Transmission timing Transmitting data Error retry

When the following alarm is detected. COPIER Display ANALOG No
HV-STS
Alarm codes for transmission: CCD
0x060002, // Fixing DPOT
0x060004 to 0x069999, // Fixing DENS
0x090005 to 0x099999, // Dram
FIXING
0x100006 to 0016, 0x100022 to 0099, 0x100101 to 9900, // Development
0x300001 to 0x309999 // High voltage SENSOR
MISC
HT-C
HV-TR
P-PASCAL
When the following service call error is detected. COPIER Display ANALOG No
HV-STS
Error codes for transmission: CCD
E000 to E00F, // Fixing DPOT
E020, // Development ATR DENS
E060 to E06F // High voltage
FIXING
SENSOR
MISC
HT-C
HV-TR
P-PASCAL
When a value is set to [COPIER - Adjust] subordinate's Service mode menu. COPIER Adjust Yes
(Transmission will be done at 60 min, later of setting)
When the first communication test is done. COPIER Display ANALOG Yes
(For transmission process, 5 minutes after the execution) HV-STS
CCD
DPOT
DENS
FIXING
SENSOR
MISC
HT-C
HV-TR
P-PASCAL
Adjust
NOTE:
Target transmission data are only the items under LEVEL1 and 2 in the service mode.
299
Limitations
■ Service Mode Menu Transmission Function
1. In the following cases, service mode menu data is not transmitted.
• When an unsent alarm log or service call log has been detected by E-RDS at power-on
• When an alarm log or service call log to be resent due to a transmission failure is detected
• When transmission of service mode menu executed at the time of detection of an alarm or a service call error ended in
failure
• If a new alarm or service call error occurs while service mode menu data is being obtained after detection of an alarm
or a service call error, the data being obtained is not sent.
2. If alarms/service call errors successively occur, and if the time of the host machine is corrected or changed while the log is
being sent, service mode menu data may not be properly sent. It is because a Link No.* may be applied to the old log although
it should be applied to the new log.
* Link No.:
A common number for linking the service mode menu data with the alarm log/service call log data to be sent
After completion of log transmission, the service mode menu data is obtained, and is sent with this number attached.
3. Transmission of the data of changes made in service mode menu settings is not performed instantly, but performed when a
specified period of 60 minutes elapse after the change of service mode menu settings is detected or when a communication
test is performed at the time of power-on. (There is a time lag.)
4. When service mode menu settings (COPIER > Adjust) are made, transmission is performed even when no change is made
in the target data to be transmitted.
Transmission of service mode data is also performed when changes are made in the service mode setting value not subject
to transmission (items other than Level 1, 2) or when settlement of a value is performed without changing the setting value.
Service cautions
1. After clearing RAM of the Main Controller PCB, initialization of the E-RDS setting (ERDS-DAT) and a communication test
(COM-TEST) need to be performed. Failure to do so will result that the counter transmitting value to the UGW may become
unusual.
Also, after replacing the main controller board, all settings must be reprogrammed.
2. The following settings in service mode must not be change unless there are specific instructions to do so.
Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW.
• Set port number of UGW
SERVICE MODE > COPIER > Function > INSTALL > RGW-PORT
Default : 443
• URL setting of UGW
SERVICE MODE > COPIER > Function > INSTALL > RGW-ADR
Default : https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010
3. If the e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote contract of the device is invalid, be sure to turn OFF the E-RDS setting (E-RDS :
0).
300
4. With this machine, a communication test can be conducted from the [Counter Check] on the Control Panel.* When conducting
a communication test from the [Counter Check] on the Control Panel, pay attention on the following points:
• During a communication test, do not take any actions such as pressing a key. Actions are not accepted until the
communication test is completed (actions are ignored).
• When a communication test is being conducted from service mode or from the [Counter Check] on the Control Panel,
do not conduct a communication test from the other. These operations are not guaranteed.
NOTE:
*The user can conduct a communication test and seen the communication test result.
If the communication results in failure, an error code (a hexadecimal number, 8 digits) appears on the touch panel display.
E-RDS Setup
■ Confirmation and preparation in advance
To monitor this machine with e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote, the following settings are required.
● Advance preparations
The following network-related information needs to be obtained from the user's system administrator in advance.
Information item 1
IP address settings
• Automatic setting : DHCP
• Manual setting : IP address, subnet mask and gateway address to be set
Information item 2
Is there a DNS server in use?
If there is a DNS server in use, find out the following.
• Primary DNS server address
• Secondary DNS server address
Information item 3
Is there a proxy server?
If there is a proxy server in use, find out the following.
• Proxy server address
• Port No. for proxy server
Information item 4
Is proxy server authentication required?
If proxy server authentication is required, find out the following.
• User name and password required for proxy authentication
● Network settings
Based on the results of the information obtained in "Advance preparations", make this machine network related settings.
See Users' Guide for detailed procedures.
301
CAUTION:
When changes are made to the above-mentioned network settings, be sure to turn OFF and then ON the main power of
this machine.
● Installation of the CA certificate (Arbitrary)

Perform installation or deletion of the CA certificate if necessary, and turn OFF and then ON the main power of this machine.
• Installation of the CA certificate: Perform installation from SST or Remote UI.
• Deletion of the CA certificate: When the following operation is performed, the CA certificate in the factory setting is
automatically installed.
CAUTION:
After following procedure, the registered key and CA certificate are deleted, and only the CA certificate installed at the
time of shipment is registered.
It is therefore necessary to check with the user in advance.
1. Select (LEVEL2) COPIER > Function > CLEAR > CA-KEY and touch the [OK] button.
"OK!" is displayed if the CA certificate is initialized.
When "NG!" is displayed, see the section of "Troubleshooting" to execute the remedy, and then perform initialization of the
CA certificate again and check to see if the CA certificate is initialized.
2. Turn OFF and then ON the main power of this machine.
CAUTION:
If a key and a CA certificate have been registered in order to use a function other thanE-RDS, it is necessary to register
again from SST or Remote UI.
■ Steps to E-RDS settings

1. In the following service modes, initialize a set value of E-RDS.
Select COPIER > Function > CLEAR > ERDS-DAT and touch the [OK] button.
NOTE:
This operation initializes the E-RDS settings to factory setting values.
For the setting values to be initialized, see the section of “Initializing E-RDS settings” on page 304.
302
2. Enable E-RDS function and execute communication test.

(a) Select COPIER > Function > INSTALL > E-RDS.
(b) Press the numeric key [1] on the control panel (the setting value is changed to 1) and touch the [OK] button. (The data
is reflected to the setting value field.)
CAUTION:
The following settings i.e. RGW-PORT and RGW-ADR in Service mode must not be change unless there are specific
instructions to do so.
Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW.
NOTE:
This initiates the communication test between the device and the UGW.
(c) Select [COM-TEST] and then touch [OK].

The communication test with UGW will be executed.
If the communication is successful, "OK!" is displayed.
If "NG!" (failed) appears, refer to the "Troubleshooting" and repeat until "OK!" is displayed.
NOTE:
The communication results with UGW can be distinguished by referring to the COM-LOG. By performing the communication test
with UGW, E-RDS acquires schedule information and starts monitoring and meter reads operation.
■ Steps to Service Browser settings

1. In the following service modes, enable a service browser.
Select COPIER > Function > INSTALL > BRWS-ACT and then touch [OK].
NOTE:
When the status of the service browser is changed to enabled, E-RDS sends the browser information to the UGW at this timing.
If the connection is established with UGW successfully, "OK!" is displayed.

When "NG!" is displayed, perform the steps referring to "Troubleshooting" until connection is established with UGW.
2. Turn OFF and then ON the main power of this machine.
3. Make sure that "1 (: ACTIVE)" is set under COPIER > Display > USER > BRWS-STS.
4. When the above-shown setting values are enabled, [Service Browser] is displayed in the Service Mode screen.
303
NOTE:
Generally, once service browsing is enabled, to stop the service browsing, execute BRWS-ACT again, turn OFF and then ON the
main power of this machine.
■ Initializing E-RDS settings

It is possible to clear the FLASH data of E-RDS and change the E-RDS setting back to the default value.
● Initialization procedure
Execute the following service mode.
Select COPIER > Function > CLEAR > ERDS-DAT and then touch [OK].
● Setting values and data to be initialized

The following E-RDS settings, internal data, and Alarm filtering information are initialized.
• COPIER > Function > INSTALL > E-RDS
• COPIER > Function > INSTALL > RGW-ADR
• COPIER > Function > INSTALL > RGW-PORT
• COPIER > Function > INSTALL > COM-LOG
CAUTION:
In case of replacing the CA certificate file, even if initialization of E-RDS is executed, the status is not returned to the factory
default. When installing the certificate file other than the factory default CA certificate file, it is required to delete the certificate
file after E-RDS initialization and install the factory default CA certificate file.
For detailed procedures, see “Steps to E-RDS settings” on page 302.
Error code and strings

The following error information is displayed on the communication error log details screen.
(Here, "server" means UGW.)
• The error information are displayed in the following form.
[*] [Character strings] [Functional classification (Method name)] [Error details provided by UGW]
NOTE:
"*" is added to the top of the error text in the case of an error in communication test (method name: getConfiguration or
communicationTest) only.
No. Code Character strings Cause Remedy

1 0000 0000 SUSPEND: mode changed. Unmatched Operation Mode Initialize the E-RDS setting (ERDS-DAT).
2 0500 0003 SUSPEND: Communication Turning OFF and then ON the Perform a communication test (COM-TEST).
test is not performed. main power of this machine while
the communication test had not
been performed although E-RDS
is enabled.
304

3 0xxx 0003 Server schedule is not exist Blank schedule data have been Perform and complete a communication test
received from UGW. (COM-TEST).
4 0xxx 0003 Communication test is not per- Communication test has not Perform and complete a communication test
formed completed. (COM-TEST).
5 84xx 0003 E-RDS switch is setted OFF A communication test has been Set E-RDS switch (E-RDS) to 1, and then per-
attempted with the E-RDS switch form a communication test (COM-TEST).
being OFF.
6 8600 0002 Event Registration is Failed Processing (event processing) Turn the device OFF/ ON.
8600 0003 within the device has failed. If the error persists, replace the device system
8600 0101 software. (Upgrade)
8600 0201
8600 0305
8600 0306
8600 0401
8600 0403
8600 0414
8600 0415
7 8700 0306 SRAM version unmatch! Improper value is written in at the Turn the device OFF/ ON.
head of the NVMEM domain
(nonvolatile memory domain) of
E-RDS.
8 8700 0306 SRAM AeRDS version un- Improper value is written in at the Turn the device OFF/ ON.
match! head of the NVMEM domain
(nonvolatile memory domain) of
Ae-RDS.
9 8xxx 0004 Operation is not supported Method which E-RDS is not sup- Contact help desk.
porting attempted.
10 8xxx 0101 Server response error (NULL) Communication with UGW has Perform and complete a communication test
been successful, but an error of (COM-TEST).
some sort has prevented UGW
from responding.
When (Null) is displayed at the
end of the message, this indi-
cates that there has been an er-
ror in the HTTPS communication
method.
11 8xxx 0201 Server schedule is invalid During the communication test, When the error occurs, report the details to the
8xxx 0202 there has been some kind of error support section.
8xxx 0203 in the schedule values passed After the UGW side has responded, try the
8xxx 0204 from UGW. communication test again.
8xxx 0206
12 8xxx 0207 Internal Schedule is broken The schedule data in the inside of Perform a communication test (COM-TEST).
8xxx 0208 E-RDS is not right.
13 8xxx 0221 Server specified list is too big Alarm/Alert filtering error: The Alert filtering is not supported by UGW.
number of elements of the list
specified by the server is over re-
striction value.
14 8xxx 0222 Server specified list is wrong Alarm filtering error: Unjust value Alert filtering is not supported by UGW.
is included in the element of the
list specified by the server.
15 8xxx 0304 Device is busy, try later The semaphore consumption er- Try again a communication test after a period
ror at the time of a communica- of time.
tion test.
16 8xxx 0709 Tracking ID is notmatch When upgrading firmware, the Obtain the sublog, and contact the support de-
TrackingID notified by Updater partment of the sales company.
differs from the thing of UGW
designates.
17 8xxx 2000 Unknown error Some other kind of communica- Perform and complete a communication test
tion error has occurred. (COM-TEST).
18 8xxx 2001 URL Scheme error(not https) The header of the URL of the reg- Check that the value of URL of UGW (RGW-
istered UGW is not in https for- ADR) is https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agen-
mat. tif010.
305

19 8xxx 2002 URL server specified is illegal A URL different to that specified Check that the value of URL of UGW (RGW-
by the UGW has been set. ADR) is https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agen-
tif010.
20 8xxx 2003 Network is not ready, try later Communication attempted with- Check the network connection, as per the initial
out confirming network connec- procedures described in the troubleshooting.
tion, just after turning OFF and Perform a communication test (COM-TEST)
then ON the main power of this about 60 seconds later, after turn on the device.
machine in which the network
preparations are not ready.
21 8xxx 2004 Server response error ([Hexa- Communication with UGW has Try again after a period of time.
decimal]) [Error detailed in been successful, but an error of Check detailed error code (Hexadecimal) and
UGW]*1 some sort has prevented UGW [Error details in UGW] from UGW displayed af-
from responding. ter the message.
22 8xxx 200A Server connection error • TCP/IP communication fault • Check the network connection, as per the
• The IP address of device is initial procedures described in the trouble-
not set. shooting.
• When proxy is used, make the settings for
proxy, and check the status of the proxy
server.
23 8xxx 200B Server address resolution er- Server address name resolution • Check that the value of URL of UGW
ror has failed. (RGW-ADR) is https://a01.ugwdevice.net/
ugw/agentif010.
• Check that Internet connection is available
in the environment.
24 8xxx 2014 Proxy connection error Could not connect to proxy serv- Check proxy server address / port and re-enter
er due to improper address. as needed.
25 8xxx 2015 Proxy address resolution error Could not connect to proxy serv- • Check that the proxy server name is cor-
er due to name resolution error of rect.
proxy address. If the proxy server name is correct, check
the DNS connection, as per the initial pro-
cedures described in the troubleshooting.
• Specify the IP address as the proxy server
name.
26 8xxx 201E Proxy authentication error Proxy authentication is failed. Check the user name and password required in
order to login to the proxy, and re-enter as nee-
ded.
27 8xxx 2028 Server certificate error • No route certificate installed • Install the latest device system software.
in device. (Upgrade)
• Certificate other than that in- • Correctly set the date and time of the de-
itially registered in the user's vice.
operating environment is • Execute CLEAR > CA-KEY, and turn OFF
being used, but has not and then ON the device. (The CA certifi-
been registered with the de- cate at the time of shipment is automati-
vice. cally installed.)
• The date and time of the de-
vice is not correct.
28 8xxx 2029 Server certificate verify error The server certificate verification Check that the value of URL of UGW (RGW-
error occurred. ADR) is https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agen-
tif010.
29 8xxx 2046 Server certificate expired • The route certificate regis- Check that the device time and date are cor-
tered with the device has ex- rectly set.
pired. If the device time and date are correct, upgrade
• Certificate other than that in- to the latest system software.
itially registered in the user's
operating environment is
being used, but has not
been registered with the de-
vice.
• The device time and date is
outside of the certificated
period.
306

30 8xxx 2047 Server response time out Due to network congestion, etc., If this error occurs when the communication
the response from UGW does not test is being run or Service Browser is being set,
come within the specified time. try again after a period of time.
(HTTPS level time out)
31 8xxx 2048 Service not found There is a mistake in the UGW Check that the value of URL of UGW (RGW-
URL, and UGW cannot be ac- ADR) is https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agen-
cessed. (Path is wrong) tif010.
32 8xxx 2052 URL error The data which is not URL is in- Check that the value of URL of UGW (RGW-
putted into URL field. ADR) is https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agen-
tif010.
33 8xxx 2058 Unknown error SOAP Client fails to obtain SOAP Perform and complete a communication test
Response. (COM-TEST).
Possibility of a problem in UGW
or of a temporary problem in the
network load.
34 8xxx 2063 SOAP Fault SOAP communication error has Check that the value of port number of UGW
occurred. (RGW-PORT) is 443.
35 xxxx xxxx Device internal error An internal error, such as memo- Turn the device OFF/ ON.
ry unavailable, etc., has occurred Or replace the device system software. (Up-
during a device internal error grade)
phase.
36 xxxx xxxx SUSPEND: Initialize Failure! Internal error occurred at the ini- Turn the device OFF/ ON.
tiating E-RDS.
*1: [Hexadecimal]: indicates an error code returned from UGW.

[Error details in UGW]: indicates error details returned from UGW.
307
Updater
Functional Overview
■ Overview
Updater provides functions that enable network communication with Content Delivery System (hereinafter CDS) or Local CDS
to install firmware and system options.
Firmware Installation
Updater function enables users to distribute firmware through networks. Particularly on e-Maintenance/UGW (called NETEYE
in Japan)-enabled devices, firmware can be updated remotely, which effectively slashes costs incurred in field services.
System Option Installation

By linking devices to CDS and License Management System (providing the function to manage licenses; hereinafter LMS),
applications can be installed in devices via Updater, regardless of those embedded (system options) in devices.
■ Firmware Installation
The service technician is involved in the following 5 firmware installation methods by introducing CDS:
Delivery method Download instruc- Update timing Versions which can be delivered
tions given by Older than the cur- Same as the cur- Newer than the
rent rent current
a. CDS Remote Up- UGW Automatic No Yes*1 Yes*2
date
(Download and up-
date in conjunction
with UGW)
b. CDS Remote UGW Manual Yes Yes*1 Yes
Download
(download in con-
junction with UGW)
c. CDS On-site Local UI Automatic No Yes*1 Yes*2
Download Manual Yes Yes*1 Yes
(manual download
and update)
d. CDS Scheduled UGW Scheduled No No Yes*2
Update Method
(UGW-linked Period-
ical Download and
Periodical Update)
e. Update using SST SST - Yes Yes Yes
(Service Support
Tool)
*1: Do not execute Updated Module.

*2: Versions for which remote update is enabled can only be selected.
a. CDS Remote Update (download and update in conjunction with UGW)

By registering delivery schedule and update settings on a device which is an imagePRESS Series device and uses UGW in
advance, full remote firmware updates will be achieved. The device downloads firmware updates from CDS and then updates
the firmware with the acquired firmware updates.
The management department will announce when the implementation of this method starts.
308
1) Set up customers,
device types, distribution
dev on
schedule and the
sch
3) Give a firmware distribution UGW com
command for download ad Sales Company
command to e-RDS. / Partner
UGW Operator
Notify di
2) Notify distribution
e-RDS inform
inf ormati
ation to CDS.
information
4) Download
firmware
CDS Canon Inc.
Firmware Upload
Updater Firmware
Writin process is
5) Writing
ted upon
automatically started
download completed.
b. CDS Remote Download (download in conjunction with UGW)

By registering delivery schedule and update settings on a device which is an imagePRESS Series device and uses UGW in
advance, firmware updates can be delivered before the service technician visits the customer. This makes it possible for the
service technician to check the status of the device and then manually update firmware when he/she visits the customer.
1) Set up customers,
3) Give a firmware distribution UGW device types, distribution Sales Company
command to e-ROS. schedule and the / Partner
command for download
2) Notify distribution UGW Operator

㼑㻙㻾㻰㻿 information to CDS.
4) Download
firmware CDS Canon Inc.
Firmware Upload
㼁㼜㼐㼍㼠㼑㼞 Firmware
Service 5) Writing process is started by

Technician manually executing Updater.
c. CDS On-site Download (manual download and update)

For a device which is an imagePRESS Series device and is connected to an external network, the service technician can download
firmware updates and update firmware using service mode. This makes it possible for the service technician to update firmware
without using a PC when it is necessary to update firmware when he/she visits the customer.
1) Manually execute
Updater. Canon Inc.
CDS Firmware Upload
Fir
Updater
Firmware
2) Firmware
distribution
Service
Technician
NOTE:
An external network refers to a network which connects this machine and CDS via the Internet.
d. CDS Scheduled Update Method (UGW-linked Periodical Download and Periodical Update)
For devices with an update function using UGW, scheduled update settings can be made from UGW. If scheduled update settings
are registered on UGW in advance, Updater of the device will periodically and automatically update firmware.
309
㼁㻳㼃 6DOHV&RPSDQ\
㻠㻕㻌㼑㻙㻾㻰㻿㻌㼏㼔㼑㼏㼗㼟㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼕㼚㼟㼠㼞㼡㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚㻞㻕㻌㻿㼏㼔㼑㼐㼡㼘㼑㼐㻌㼡㼜㼐㼍㼠㼑 3DUWQHU
㼠㼛㻌㼐㼕㼟㼠㼞㼕㼎㼡㼠㼑㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼒㼕㼞㼙㼣㼍㼞㼑㻚㼟㼑㼠㼠㼕㼚㼓㼟㻌
㼁㻳㼃㻌㻻㼜㼑㼞㼍㼠㼛㼞
㻟㻕㻌㻺㼛㼠㼕㼒㼥㻌㼐㼕㼟㼠㼞㼕㼎㼡㼠㼕㼛㼚
㼑㻙㻾㻰㻿
㼕㼚㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼠㼛㻌㻯㻰㻿㻚
㻡㻕㻌㻼㼑㼞㼕㼛㼐㼕㼏㼍㼘㻌㼒㼕㼞㼙㼣㼍㼞㼑㻌
㼐㼛㼣㼚㼘㼛㼍㼐㻯㻰㻿
&DQRQ,QF
Devices with 㻝㻕㻌㻲㼕㼞㼙㼣㼍㼞㼑㻌㼁㼜㼘㼛㼍㼐
update function 㼁㼜㼐㼍㼠㼑㼞
㻲㼕㼞㼙㼣㼍㼞㼑
㻢㻕㻌㼃㼞㼕㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼜㼞㼛㼏㼑㼟㼟㻌㼕㼟
㼍㼡㼠㼛㼙㼍㼠㼕㼏㼍㼘㼘㼥㻌㼟㼠㼍㼞㼠㼑㼐㻌㼡㼜㼛㼚
㼐㼛㼣㼚㼘㼛㼍㼐㻌㼏㼛㼙㼜㼘㼑㼠㼑㼐㻚
e. Update using SST (Service Support Tool)

For a device which is an imagePRESS Series device and is not connected to an external network, firmware updates cannot be
delivered using any of the 4 methods explained above. Firmware updates to be released from now on is scheduled to be delivered
via CDS, instead of distributing master CD as before. In the field, it is possible to download firmware updates from CDS with the
Web browser on a PC and so on.
CDS Canon Inc.

Firmware Upload
Firmware
Download firmware to PC.

1) Downlo
Sales Company
2) Update via SST.
S / Partner
Service technicians download

firmware firstly from CDS to
Service Technician
update it via SST.
NOTE:
By introducing CDS, firmware updates can be delivered using the following 4 methods.
For details, refer to the e-Manual.
Delivery meth- Download Update Versions which can be delivered

od instructed from timing Older than Same as Newer than
the current the current the current
CDS on-site Local UI/Remote Automatic No No Yes*1
download UI Manual No No Yes*1
Periodical down- Local UI/Remote Scheduled No No Yes*1
load UI
(Periodical down-
load and update
set up on site)
Special download Remote UI - Limited versions only
and update (separately acquired)
using remote UI
Local CDS on-site DFU*2 Automatic × × Yes*1
download
*1: Latest versions for which remote update is enabled can only be selected.
*2: iW EMC/iW MC Device Firmware Update Plug-in
■ Installing System Option

The following is the installation method of system option which is enabled by applying CDS.
310
a. LMS-linked System Option Installation

If an imagePRESS-series device is connected to the external network, user can gain access to CDS from [Settings/Registration]
to install a system option.
Sales Company
LAN LAN LMS
5) Manuals, etc. 2) License

User Authentication
LAN
Manual
CDS 3) Create LF
Upload
1) Enter LAN
Canon Inc.
4) Transmit LF
Application
LAN: License Access Number

If a customer enters LAN
LF: License File
purchased from the sales company
(DSN: Device Serial Number,
to the device, a LF can be installed.
automatically sent to CDS upon LAN
entered.)
■ System Configuration
The system configuration when using CDS is shown below.
MEAP application
User Dealer LMS Manual
Sales
Internet
Company
License Manual
Access No. Readme
CDS
Application/License
Updater Business
Firmware Application Group
eRDS Firmware
UGW
QA
Service Command for Firmware Distribution
Technician
Canon Inc.
■ List of Functions
The matrix below shows the list of functions provided by Updater.
Category Function Service Mode [Settings/ Remote UI UGW-

Registra- linked
tion]
Firmware Checking firmware compatibility Yes - - -
Checking special firmware Yes - - -
Checking latest firmware version - Yes Yes -
Registering/deleting firmware distribution Yes Yes Yes -
schedule
Confirming and downloading firmware Yes Yes Yes Yes
Updating downloaded firmware Yes Yes Yes -
Cancelling downloaded firmware Yes Yes Yes -
Acquiring firmware distribution information reg- - - - Yes
istered from UGW
Notifying firmware version information - - - Yes
System option Inquiring license for system option - Yes Yes -
Installing system option - Yes Yes -
System Management Settings Yes - - -
Testing communications Yes Yes Yes -
311
Category Function Service Mode [Settings/ Remote UI UGW-

Registra- linked
tion]
System Management Displaying update logs Yes Yes Yes -
Displaying system logs Yes Yes Yes -
Internal system error noti- Notifying internal system error occurrence to Yes Yes Yes Yes
fication distribution server
■ Distribution Flow
● Firmware Installation Flow
Service technicians provide firmware install services in the following 5 methods.
a: UGW-linked download and update
b: UGW-linked download
c: Manual download and update
d: UGW-linked periodical download and periodical update
e: Update using SST
: Operator of each company : User operation
Firmware
Market Release
㼐
a 㼑
b
c
UGW setting
for distribution Firmware acquisition Register the firmware
(UGW-linked)*1 in the Local CDS
Distribution setting & Distribution setting & Distribution setting &

Executing the task
Download Download Download
Scheduled download Automatic download Download via SST from Device Firmware
Via Service mode Via Via
Update Plug-in
(Local UI) Settings/Registration Settings/Registration
(Local UI) (Remote UI)
Apply (Update) Apply (Update) Apply (Update)

Scheduled update Automatic update Via Service mode Via Via Update via SST Automatic update
*1: Schedules for UGW-linked distribution are maintained on CDS.
● System Option Installation Flow

System option installation method using service mode is not provided. Be sure to use the [Settings/Registration] to install.
312
License Access
Number Acquisition
(packaged with the
product)
Device Serial No.

Acquisition
(from the device)
License Key License File

Acquisition Acquisition
(from LMS) (from LMS)
Install distributed System Option System Option

Install
application Install Manual Install
Via
Via Via Via
Settings/Registration
Settings/Registration Settings/Registration Settings/Registration
(Local UI)
(Remote UI) (Local UI) (Remote UI)
Limitations and Cautions

■ Limitations
Changing Date/Time on Device
When a user changes the date/time setting on the device (including change of the setting according to daylight saving time), the
firmware distribution may not be performed as scheduled.
But there is not the problem if it is time adjustment of several minutes with NTP servers.
Change of Setting from Service mode

Any settings from Service mode will be enabled after restarting the device.
■ Cautions
Concurrent use of Updater functions
Multiple users cannot use Updater functions on a device concurrently by using it together with Remote UI.
Coexistence of Remote UI and other tools

Users logged in SMS (Service Management Service) are unable to use Update functions from Remote UI.
Using Updater function from Remote UI

Upon the following operations done, Updater functions are suspended from Remote UI for certain duration.
• When a user exits Web browser without clicking [Portal] or [Log Out] button in the setting of Remote Login Service via SMS
• When a user exits Web browser without clicking [Portal] button in the setting of not to use Remote Login Service via SMS.
• When a user exits Web browser without clicking [Log out from SMS] or [To Remote UI] button.
Wait for EOJ (end of job) Function

Firmware update will be triggered only after the following jobs are completed.
This is the Updater-specific specification.
Job/Function type Receiving Printing Queued print jobs Sending Queued send jobs
COPY - Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ - -
PRINT Wait for EOJ (end of Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ - -
job)
I-FAX Receipt Cancel processing to Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ
trigger update *
Report Print - Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ - -
SEND - - - Cancel processing to Cancel processing to
trigger update * trigger update *
313
*The data are guaranteed even if cut off in the middle of a job.It becomes the recovery object after the device reboot and carry
out send / reception again.
Even during transfer, Pull SCAN job processing is cancelled soon after scanning is completed.
Firmware update is cancelled if the jobs are not completed within 10 minutes. If this occurs, the error code, 8x001106, will be
returned (different numbers will be shown for x depending on the execution modes).
Firmware update is executed if the jobs stated above are not in the queue.
Follow the shutdown sequence to reboot the device after the firmware is updated.
Preparation
■ Preparation
The following preparations are required to upgrade the firmware using the Updater.
Distribution Settings of Network set- Enabling Enabling the Enabling the Enabling enabling the
name Vice-Com- tings linkage with [Update Firm- [Manual Up- scheduled Local CDS
pany of UGW ware] button in date] button update (*1) button
Sales the [Settings/ on the remote
Registration] UI
menu
CDS remote update - - - -
method
CDS remote down- - - - -
load method
CDS on-site down- - - - - -
load method
CDS scheduled up- - - -
date method
CDS on-site down- - - - -
load method by lo-
cal UI
load method by re-
mote UI
Special download - - - - -
and update using
remote UI
Local CDS update - - - - -
method
*1: It is required when configuring the schedule update setting from the Control Panel.
■ Settings of Vice-Company of Sales

With devices sold in the following countries/regions, it is necessary to change the settings of vice-company of sales from the
default setting in order to use the CDS firmware distribution. Be sure to do this because if the necessary changes are not made,
it may not be possible to select the target firmware.
Country/region of sale Default setting of the sales company Change the setting of the sales company to:
Canada US CA
Latin America US/SG LA
Hong Kong SG HK
Change the settings of the vice-company of sales in the following service mode.
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CDS-CTL
314
NOTE:
The settings of the vice-company of sales in CDS-CTL for each country/region is shown below. If the setting is different, change
it to the following setting.
List of CDS-CTL setting values and the target vice-company of sales
Japan: JP China: CN Canada: CA Singapore: SG Latin America: LA

USA: US Hong Kong: HK Korea: KR Europe: NL Australia: AU
■ Network Settings
● Connecting to External Network
The method of connecting to external network is similar to a normal network connection method. Refer to user manual of the
device for details.
NOTE:
"External Network" here means the network connecting the device to CDS via Internet.
● Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server

This section describes how to confirm the URL setting of the distribution server.
1. Start [Service Mode].
2. Press [Updater] button.
3. Press [Software Management Settings] button.
315
4. Press [Settings] button.
5. Ensure to enter "https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif" in the field beside the [Delivery Server URL]
button.
If the URL is not entered or a wrong URL is entered in the field, click [Delivery Server URL] button to show the virtual keypad.
Check the URL and enter the correct one.
6. Press [OK] to set the entered items.

Now the URL of the distribution server is successfully set.
● Communication Test
This section describes how to check if the communication is normally done to the distribution server and/or the file server.
NOTE:
Since CDS and Embedded RDS are different servers, even if an Embedded RDS communication test succeeds, a CDS
communication test needs to be performed.
316
4. Press [Test Communication] button.
317
5. Press [Yes] button.
Obtain the download file information for communication test from the distribution server (to execute the communication test
to the distribution server).
Using the download file information for communication test, the contents for test are downloaded from the file server (for the
communication test to the file server).
6. Upon the communication test completed, the communication test result screen is shown.
Press [OK] button to exit this operation.
■ Enabling UGW Link

To execute [UGW-linked Download and Update] or [UGW-linked Download] when installing the firmware, the service technician
must specify the following settings to link with UGW in advance.
1. Set "1" in the following service mode.
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-UGW
2. Specify "Set" for the following settings.
[Firmware Distribution] on the [Customer Management] screen of the UGW WebPortal settings
NOTE:
• See "imageWARE Remote Operator’s Manual / e-Maintenance Business Operation Manual" for how to operate UGW
WebPortal.
• [Distribute Firmware] should be set on [Customer Management] screen for staff in charge of setting for [Enter customer
information] or [Command for firmware distribution] in order to allow them to select the desired device on [Firmware Distribution
Information] screen.
• If [Distribute Firmware] is not shown on [Customer Management] screen of UGW WebPortal, appropriate authorities may not
be set to each account in Firmware Distribution Information. Contact the Sales Company HQ concerned for confirmation.
■ Enabling the [Update Firmware] Button in the [Settings/Registration] Menu

Setting this service mode enables/disables the [Update Firmware] button in the [Settings/Registration] menu so that whether or
not to permit firmware installation by users using Updater can be set.
Set "1" when enabling the [Update Firmware] button and set "0" when disabling it.
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-FIRM
318
• Example of the Updater screen when the [Update Firmware] button is enabled (setting value: "1")
• Example of the Updater screen when the [Update Firmware] button is disabled (setting value: "0")
■ Enabling the [Application/Option Installation] Button

By changing the following service mode, whether or not to display the button for installing applications for users (system option,
etc.) in the [Settings/Registration] menu can be set. When the setting value is "0", the button is hidden whereas when the value
is "1", it is displayed.
COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-MEAP
• Example of the Updater screen when the setting is "1" (enabled)
• Example of the Updater screen when the setting is "0" (disabled)
■ Enabling the [Manual Update] Menu on Remote UI

By changing the following service mode, whether or not to permit firmware installation by users can be set.
319
Set "1" for permitting the firmware installation by users by enabling [Manual Update] menu on the remote UI, and set "0" for not
permitting it.
When it is enabled, [Manual Update] menu is displayed in [Settings/Registration] menu of the remote UI.
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > LOCLFIRM
• Example of the Remote UI of Updater when [Manual Update] menu is displayed by enabling it
• Example of the Remote UI of Updater when [Manual Update] menu is hidden by disabling it
NOTE:
In order to use manual update of the remote UI, firmware for manual update is required.
For regions where firmware update by users is not supported, manual firmware update function cannot be used even if [Manual
Update] menu on the remote UI is enabled.
■ Enabling the [Scheduled Update] button in the [Settings/Registration] menu

Setting this service mode enables to change whether to display or hide the scheduled update setting button for users.
Set "1" to display it on the Updater in service mode and [Settings/Registration] menu. Set "0" not to display it on neither of them.
When this setting is enabled, the button for setting scheduled update is displayed and ON/OFF of scheduled update and update
schedule can be set.
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-LVUP
320
• Example of the Updater screen when the setting value is "1"
• Example of the Updater screen when the setting value is "0"
■ Enabling the Firmware Update Using Local CDS

By changing the following service mode setting, firmware update function using the local CDS can be enabled.
Set "1 when enabling the firmware update function using the local CDS, and set "0" when disabling the function.
When the function is enabled, the local CDS setting button [Connected Server Setting] is displayed so ON/OFF of the local CDS
connection or setting of connection destination server can be configured.
COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >LCDSFLG
• Example of the Updater screen when the firmware update function using the local CDS is enabled (setting value: "1")
• Example of the Updater screen when the firmware update function using the local CDS is disabled (setting value: "0")
321
System Management Operations

■ Various Setting
● Setting URL of Distribution Server
This section describes how to set URL of the distribution server.
5. Press [Delivery Server URL] to show the virtual keypad. Enter the URL.
• [Delivery Server URL]: Enter the "https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif".

● Setting Log Level

This section describes how to set system log levels.
322
5. Select a log level from [Log Level] dropdown list.
[Log Level]:
Select one of 5 levels ranging from [0] to [4].
See the table below for logs output in each level.
Log Level Log Output

Trace Information Important Mes- Ordinary Error System Error
sage
0 - - - - Yes
1 - - - Yes Yes
2 - - Yes Yes Yes
3 - Yes Yes Yes Yes
4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
323
NOTE:
This list shows the contents of the Log Output.
Log Output Description

Trace Detailed logs for debug
Information Logs related to operations done on the system
Important Message Update logs output by firmware type
Logs related to enabled functions by system option
Ordinary Error Logs for ordinary errors
System Error Logs for internal system errors
6. Press [OK] button to set the selected log level.

Now the log level is successfully set.
■ Displaying Logs
● Update Logs
This section describes how to confirm System Option Installation Logs and Firmware Update Logs.
4. Press [Select Log Display] button.
324
5. Press [Display Update Logs] button.
6. System Option Installation Logs and Firmware Update Logs are shown.
● System Logs
This section describes how to confirm System Logs.
325
4. Press [Select Log Display] button.
5. Press [Display System Logs] button.
6. Updater internal logs are displayed.

NOTE:
See the section of "Debug Logs" under "Version Upgrade via CDS", "Version Upgrade" of Chapter 6 "Troubleshooting" for more
detailed information.
■ Communication Test
326
327
NOTE:
Since CDS and Embedded RDS are different servers, even if an Embedded RDS communication test succeeds, a CDS
communication test needs to be performed.
Maintenance
■ Upgrading Updater
The firmware installed in the device should be also upgraded when upgrading Updater. See the section of “Version upgrade” on
page 1007 for more detailed information.
Setting information and logs (update logs/system logs) are carried over.
■ Formatting Hard Disk

When formatting the HDD or replacing the HDD, the settings initialized in format or replacement should be restored. See the
section of “Preparation” on page 314 for more detailed information.
NOTE:
When formatting or replacing HDD, distribution schedule, downloaded firmware (not updated yet) and logs (update/system logs)
will be deleted.
■ How to Replace Controller Boards

• Main Controller Board PCB
The network and service mode setting should be set again after initialization. See the section of “Preparation” on page 314
for more detailed information.
■ How to Replace Devices

All settings should be set again because no data are inherited. See the section of “Preparation” on page 314 for more detailed
information.
328
FAQ
■ FAQ on Installing Firmware
Q: Is it also possible to downgrade firmware with using CDS?
A: Firmware can be downgraded in some methods shown in the table below. If download and update are performed consecutively,
firmware can’t be downgraded.
Distribution Method Downgrade Possibility

UGW-linked Download and Update No
UGW-linked Download Yes
Manual Download and Update(Timing to Apply : Manual) Yes
Manual Download and Update(Timing to Apply : Automatic) No
UGW-linked Periodical Download and Periodical Update No
Q: When installing firmware, does it take less time in "manual download and update" compared to
"update via SST"?
A: It depends on the number of devices to update firmware.
When updating the firmware on a device, it takes more time in "manual download and update" compared to "update via SST".(It
depend on network environment)
As for the time to update firmware to multiple devices, "manual download and update" takes less time compared to "update via
SST" because updating the firmware to multiple devices can be executed simultaneously.
Q: How can we confirm that the firmware is properly updated after "UGW-linked download and update"
done?
A: You can confirm this in E-mail or the Device List on UGW-linked screen.
E-mail to notify firmware update will be sent from CDS server to the addresses set as destinations at the time of distribution setting
to notify update completion.
On UGW-linked screen, search the device of your interest on [Select Device] screen to find the distribution status per device as
shown in the search result.
Q: In the course of "UGW-linked download", what will happen if the user downloads the firmware before
the service technician update the firmware downloaded with "UGW-linked download" before?
A: The previously downloaded firmware in the method of "UGW-linked download" will be overridden by the subsequently
downloaded one.
This is because only one downloaded firmware can be held on the device.
The firmware downloaded in the method of "Service mode-linked download" and "UGWlinked download" can be checked/deleted
from [Settings/Registration] screen, but cannot be updated, so it cannot be updated by the user unnoticed by the service
technician.
Q: What happens if the user registers another distribution schedule when the distribution schedule
has been set in "manual download and update"?
A: The distribution schedule subsequently registered by the user will override the existing schedule. This is because only one
distribution schedule can be held. Any existing distribution schedule is deleted and the newly registered distribution schedule is
made valid.
Q: How is an individual response edition of firmware distributed?

A: Any individual response edition of firmware can be installed in all the methods provided by service technicians. Before installing
the individual response edition, ensure to obtain the ID and password separately.
Q: If the device is down during firmware update, can the device be started using the older firmware
version?
A: No, it is impossible to start the device using older versions. If this occurs, the service technician in charge should reinstall the
firmware via SST. See the section of "Troubleshooting on Firmware Installation" under "Version Upgrade via CDS", "Version
Upgrade" of Chapter 6 "Troubleshooting" of this manual for more detailed information.
Q: If the device is down during firmware download, is it possible to download the firmware again?
A: Firmware cannot be downloaded again automatically. Instead, the error is notified in E-mail. The user should register the
firmware distribution schedule again accordingly.
329
Q: Can we cancel the operation during firmware download?

A: Yes. [Cancel] button is shown.
Q: E-mail is sent to users to notify update completion. Can service technicians also receive such a
notification?
A: Yes. The notification E-mail is also set for the service technician in charge if the user enters his/her E-mail address at the time
of firmware distribution setting.
Multiple E-mail addresses can be entered in the field.Delimit each E-mail address with "," (comma) or ";" (semicolon) when you
enter multiple E-mail addresses in the field.
Q: How long does the firmware update take?

A: Approx. 30 min. However, this does not include the download time. Download time relies on the network environment.
330
■ FAQ on General Matters of Updater

Q: What preparation is needed in each installation method?
A: See the table below for preparation required in each installation method.
• For updating firmware
Distribution Settings Network Enabling Enabling the Enabling the Enabling enabling the
name of Vice- settings linkage with [Update Firm- [Manual Up- scheduled Local CDS
Company UGW ware] button date] button update (*1) button
of Sales in the [Set- on the re-
tings/Regis- mote UI
tration] menu
CDS remote up- - - - -
date method
CDS remote down- - - - -
load method
CDS on-site down- - - - - -
load method
CDS scheduled - - -
update method
load method by lo-
cal UI
load method by re-
mote UI
Special download - - - - -
and update using
remote UI
Local CDS update - - - - -
method
*1: It is required when configuring the schedule update setting from the Control Panel.
• For install system option
Installation Method Network settings Enabling [Install Application/

Options] Button
LMS-linked Installation -
LMA-linked installation via Local UI
LMS-linked installation via Remote UI
Q: How can operations using Updater be masked on the users' side?

A: Be sure to perform the following from the service mode.
• Masking Firmware Installation: Change the setting of the service mode (CDS-FIRM / LOCLFIRM) to "0".
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-FIRM
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > LOCLFIRM
• Masking System Option Installation: Change the setting of the service mode (CDS-MEAP) to "0".
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-MEAP
Q: Can the communication be cancelled during the communication test?

A: Yes. During the communication test, "Cancel" button is displayed.
331
DCM
Function Overview
■ Overview
DCM (Device Configuration Management) is a function to migrate the device settings infomation (e.g.: Settings/Registration Basic
Information and Service Mode Settings). In terms of the description in the User’s Guide, it is synonymous with "Import/Export All".
Service mode setting values can be exported from the screen of service mode.
While the existing method supported only the case of backing up setting values for the same machine, DCM now supports the
following 3 cases:
• The same machine (backup for the purpose of providing against emergency)
• A different machine of the same model (setting values are migrated collectively to multiple machines when replacing a host
machine)
• A different model (e.g.: the setting values are copied from an old model to a new model)
■ Items to be Exported
The following shows the items to be exported.
Only setting values are exported. Image data such as scanned image cannot be exported.
Export by remote UI Export by service mode

Settings/Registration Basic Information Yes -
Paper Type Management Settings Yes -
Forwarding Settings Yes -
Box Settings Yes -
Department ID Management Settings Yes -
Main Menu Settings Yes -
Favorite Settings Yes -
Address Book Yes -
Quick Menu Settings Yes -
User Setting Information Yes -
Web Access Settings Yes -
Service Mode Settings Yes* Yes
* Not exported by default in the case of export by remote UI
For items to be imported, refer to "List of items which can be imported".
■ Method of Import/Export
The following shows the methods to import/export DCM files.
• Import/Export by remote UI
• Import/Export by service mode
• Import/Export using iW Management Console DCM Plug-in
Store the backup data in the following location.

• Export by remote UI > PC
• Export by service mode > USB flash drive/internal HDD
Even if data has been exported by one method, it can be exported by another one. (E.g.: Data which was exported by remote UI
can be imported by service mode)
For details of iW Management Console DCM Plug-in, refer to the e-Manual of iW Management Console DCM Plug-in.
■ Limitations on DCM General

• With DCM, stored data in Box, MEAP application, and system option license cannot be migrated.
• A DCM file exported to the internal HDD is not deleted even when the machine is restarted. Only 2 files at a maximum are
stored in HDD. When there are more than 2 files, the oldest file are deleted.
332
• After importing a file, the machine must be restarted. If executing import without restart, NG is displayed and a file is not
imported. This operation is not guaranteed.
• When importing DCM file including "Service Mode Settings" and "Settings/Registration Basic Information" separately,
perform it in the following procedures.
1. Perform the import of the DCM file including "Service Mode Settings" earlier
2. Restart the host machine
3. Import the DCM file including "Settings/Registration Basic Information"
• As include "Service Mode Settings", if the process is not completed within 5 minutes in the case of export and 15 minutes in
the case of import, the item performed at that time is continued until it ends, but the final result becomes ERROR.
• DCM files to which no password is set when exporting by service mode cannot be loaded from collective import by remote
UI. When assuming to perform collective import by remote UI, password must be set to data to be exported.
• Following limitations are applied to password for DCM file.
• Character string of software keyboard: 0 to 32 characters
• No password is set when 0 character is entered (The setting in which no password is set is allowed only export by service
mode)
• No space is allowed in the middle of a password
• Password is case sensitive
• At the time of following setting, host matchine does not recognize USB flash drive. The DCM function is not usable, too.
[Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [External Interface] > [USB Settings] > [Use MEAP Driver for External USB Device]
= "On"
Export All by Remote UI

Changing the value of a related service mode item can include items of "Service Mode Settings" in a DCM file that is to be exported
by remote UI.
A DCM file exported by remote UI can also be imported by service mode without using remote UI.
For details of import/export by remote UI, refer to the this machine's e-Manual.
■ Limitations about Import/Export by Remote UI

• An import/export process ends with error while the following specific job is executed.
• Executing/waiting any jobs (sending, forwarding, receiving i-fax, printing reports, functions specified by the Delayed
Send mode)
• During an Import/Export Individually operation
• Viewing the address book using the Remote UI from another imagePRESS series
• Delivering the device information
• While error is occurring
• Backing up inbox data
• If this function is executed with a print job simultaneously, it affects the operation such as; UI is locked, or a print job is cleared
by restart after import. So it requires careful operation.
• A device rejects an import/ export request during shutdown.
• If this function is executed with device information distribution or remote UI import/ export (Individually) simultaneously, the
first coming job takes priority and they are controlled exclusively.
• If this function is executed with a firmware update by a CDS (Updater) simultaneously, a firmware update process takes
priority, and this function is stopped temporarily by restart.
• When error code is issued, this function ends with error.
• If the display language before import differs from that after import,, a setting value of a text corrupts in some cases. The
character corruption can be solved by changing the display language to the appropriate one.
■ Batch export procedure

Preparation
• PC and web browser
• USB flash drive to store the data of reference machine
1. Complete the device setting as a reference machine.
2. Connect the USB flash drive to the copy destination machine.
333
3. Change the setting value of the following service mode to [1] to display "Service Mode Settings" on remote UI.
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER > SMD-EXPT
[0]: Hide the "Service Mode Settings" (Def.)
[1]: Display the "Service Mode Settings"
4. Export including "Service Mode Settings" from remote UI.
5. Copy the DCM file to the root folder of the USB flash drive using a PC.
7. In the following service mode, change the setting value to "0" to hide "Service Mode Settings" on the remote UI.
■ Batch import procedure

Preparation
• PC and web browser
• USB flash drive to store the data of reference machine
NOTE:
• If necessary, copy the DCM files to be imported using a PC in advance. Be sure to store the DCM files in the root folder of
the USB memory.
• Do not change the extension from ".dcm" (only ".dcm" files can be recognized)
1. Complete the device setting as a reference machine.
2. Copy the DCM files to be imported using a PC in advance.
4. Change the setting value of the following service mode to [1] to display "Service Mode Settings" on remote UI.
[0]: Hide the "Service Mode Settings" (Def.)
[1]: Display the "Service Mode Settings"
334
5. Import including "Service Mode Settings" from remote UI.
6. In the following service mode, change the setting value to "0" to hide "Service Mode Settings" on the remote UI.
Import/Export by Service Mode (External)

Import/export by service mode allows the selection between USB flash drive and internal HDD for the save destination of DCM
files.
The procedure of import/export when USB flash drive is selected is shown below.
The DCM files to be exported contain only the items of "Service Mode Settings"
The DCM files to be imported can have been exported either by service mode or by remote UI.
■ Export Procedure
Preparation
• USB flash drive
Required when exporting to USB flash drive.
It needs to have been formatted to be recognized by the device. No firmware registration is necessary.
1. Connect the USB flash drive and check that it has been mounted.
335
2. Log in to service mode and press [BACKUP].
3. Select [LIST] after the screen moves to <BACKUP>.
4. When saving to USB flash drive, enter "1" and press [OK].
5. The names of DCM files saved in USB flash drive are displayed. Press [->].
336
6. Select [PASSWD], enter a password from the software keyboard, and then press [OK].
NOTE:
Limitations regarding the password
• No password is set when 0 character is entered
Limitations regarding the DCM file no password
• DCM files exported without password can only be imported by service mode.
• They cannot be imported by remote UI.
7. After entering the password, select [BACKUP]. Press [OK] to execute export.
8. "OK!" is displayed in the status column when the processing is successfully completed. Press [<-].
337
9. Select [LIST], enter "0" and press [OK]. Unmount the USB flash drive.
It can also be removed by pressing the Remove button on the main menu.
Reference: The specification of the name of the exported file
iPRC10000VP_WEK00008_V0107_0001_2015_0519_154943.dcm
Model S/N Export
YYYY_MMDD_HHMMSS
Main controller DCM File format

firm ware version
DCM Job
management number
■ Import Procedure
Preparation
USB flash drive
1. Connect the USB flash drive.
2. Log in to service mode and press [RESTORE].
3. Select [LIST] after the screen moves to <RESTORE>.
338
4. When referring to USB flash drive, enter "1" and press [OK].
5. The names of DCM files saved in USB flash drive are displayed.
6. Select [SELECT].
339
7. Enter the selection number displayed on the left side of the file to be selected and press [OK].
"*" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the file has been selected.
NOTE:
Up to 8 DCM files are displayed in one screen. It is necessary to switch screens when there are more than 8 files.
8. When the correct file is displayed, press [->].
340
NOTE:
"<-" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the selection of the file has been confirmed.
"***" is displayed after the password is entered.
10. After entering the password, select [RESTORE]. Press [OK] to execute import.
2.
12. Select [LIST], enter "0" and press [OK]. Unmount the USB flash drive.
It can also be removed by pressing the Remove button on the main menu.
341
Import/Export by Service Mode (Internal)

Import/export by service mode allows the selection between USB flash drive and internal HDD for the save destination of DCM
files
The procedure of import/export when internal HDD is selected is shown below.
It can be used when recovering the initial status after having tried multiple setting changes temporarily for troubleshooting, etc.
CAUTION:
DCM must not be used when replacing PCBs. Be sure to perform backup of DCON/RCON in service mode
Maximum of 2 files can be saved in the host machine's HDD
■ Export Procedure
Preparation
There is no need to newly prepare for saving to internal HDD.
1. Log in to service mode and press [BACKUP].
2. Select [LIST] after the screen moves to <BACKUP>.
3. When saving to the internal HDD, enter "2" and press [OK].
342
4. The names of DCM files saved in internal HDD are displayed. Press [->].
CAUTION:
Limitations regarding the password
• No password is set when 0 character is entered
6. After entering the password, select [BACKUP]. Press [OK] to execute export.
343
■ Import Procedure
Preparation
There is no need to newly prepare for saving to internal HDD.
1. Log in to service mode and press [RESTORE].
2. Select [LIST] after the screen moves to <RESTORE>.
344
3. When referring to internal HDD, enter "2" and press [OK].
4. The names of DCM files referred to in internal HDD are displayed.
5. Select [SELECT].
6. Enter the selection number displayed on the left side of the file to be selected and press [OK].
" *" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the file has been selected.
345
7. When the correct file is displayed, press [->].
NOTE:
"<-" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the selection of the file has been confirmed.
"***" is displayed after the password is entered.
9. After entering the password, select [RESTORE]. Press [OK] to execute import.
346
2.
List of items which can be imported

The following shows the items to be imported for this model.
Note that the setting values are not imported in cases such as below:
• Items which are originally not included in a DCM file (E.g.:"Settings/Registration Basic Information" of a DCM file exported
by service mode)
• Items not defined in the target import range (below cases A through C)
• The options and functions related to the setting values do not exist
The following cases may be possible for the Import function.
Case Target import range Description

Case A The same machine Import to the same machine (on the assumption of backup and restoration)
Case B The same model Import to a different machine of the same model (the same series)
Case C Different model Import to a different machine of a different model (a different series)
■ Settings/Registration Basic Information

Setting Information Case A Case B Case C
Preferences
Paper Settings Paper Settings
Post Card Yes Yes No
Long Multi-Purpose Tray Defaults Yes Yes No
Register Custom Size Yes Yes No
Display Settings Default Screen after Startup/ Restoration Yes Yes Yes
Default Screen (Status Monitor/ Cancel) Yes Yes Yes
Copy Screen Display Settings Yes Yes Yes
Store Location Display Settings Yes Yes Yes
Switch Language/ Keyboard On/Off Yes Yes Yes
Switch Language/ Keyboard Yes Yes Yes
Use Keyboard Shift Lock Feature Yes Yes Yes
Display Remaining Paper Message Yes Yes Yes
No. of Copies/ Job Duration Status Yes Yes Yes
Notify to Clean Original Scanning Area Yes Yes Yes
Change Display of Paper List Screen Yes Yes Yes
Paper Type Selection Screen Priority Yes Yes Yes
Change Default Display for Paper Type List Yes Yes Yes
Switch Millimeter/ Inch Entry Yes Yes Yes
ID/ User Name Display On/ Off Yes Yes Yes
Display Remaining Toner Error Message Yes Yes Yes
347

Preferences
Timer/ Energy Settings Date/ Time Settings Yes Yes Yes
Time Format Yes Yes Yes
Quick Startup Settings for Main Power Yes Yes Yes
Auto Reset Time Yes Yes Yes
Restrict Auto Reset Time Yes Yes Yes
Function After Auto Reset Yes Yes Yes
Auto Sleep Time Yes Yes Yes
Sleep Mode Energy Use Yes Yes Yes
Auto Sleep Weekly Timer Yes Yes Yes
Time Settings for Auto Adjust Gradation Yes Yes Yes
Energy Saver/ Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings Yes Yes Yes
Mode After Energy Saver Key Pressed Yes Yes Yes
Change Energy Saver Mode Yes Yes Yes
Low Power Mode Time Yes Yes Yes
Perfect Binder Energy Saver Mode Time Yes Yes Yes
End the Perfect Binder Energy Saver Mode Yes Yes Yes

Preferences
Network Use FTP PASV Mode Yes Yes Yes
Use HTTP Yes Yes Yes
Proxy Settings Yes Yes Yes

Preferences
Accessibility Key Repetition Settings Yes Yes Yes
Reversed Display (Color) Yes Yes Yes
Adjustment/ Maintenance
Adjust Image Quality Correct Density Yes Yes Yes
Full Color Printing Vividness Settings Yes No No
Fine Adjust Zoom Yes No No
Color Balance Yes No No
Low Temperature Environment Mode Yes No No
Correct Uneven Gloss Yes No No
Adjust Drum Temperature Yes No No
Special Smoothing Yes No No
Adjust Action Speed/Precision Priority for Double Staple Yes Yes No
Fine Adjust Perfect Binding Finishing Size Yes No No
Adjust Perfect Binding Glue Application Yes No No
Alignment Adjustment When Stapling Yes No No
Finisher Tray A Alignment Adjustment Yes No No
Finisher Tray B Alignment Adjustment Yes No No
Maintenance Fixing Belt Auto Refresh Level Yes No No

Function Settings
Common Paper Feed Settings
Paper Drawer Auto Selection On/Off Yes Yes No
Suspended Job Timeout Yes Yes Yes
Paper Output Settings
Output Tray Settings Yes No No
Specify Max No. of Sheets to Load in Stacker Yes No No
Auto Eject Paper on Stacker Tray at Job End Yes No No
348

Common High Volume Stack Mode Yes Yes No
Offset Jobs Yes Yes Yes
Job Separator Between Jobs Yes Yes Yes
Job Separator Between Copies Yes Yes Yes
Job Separator After Remov. Stacker Ppr. Jam Yes No No
Different Paper Sizes for Output Tray Yes No No
Align Output Paper of Diff. Sizes (Diff. Width) Yes Yes No
Unprocessed Tab Paper Forced Output Yes Yes Yes
Print Settings
Print Priority Yes Yes Yes
Output Report Default Settings Yes Yes Yes
Superimpose Image Quality Priority Yes Yes Yes
Register Characters for Page No./Watermark Yes Yes Yes
Copy Set Numbering Option Settings Yes Yes No
Scan Settings
Timing to Raise Feeder Tray Yes Yes No
Feeder Jam Recovery Method Yes Yes No
Scanner Noise Settings Yes Yes No
Streak Prevention Yes Yes No
B&W Scan Speed/Image Quality Priority Yes Yes No
LTRR/STMT Original Selection Yes Yes No
Remote Scan Gamma Value Yes Yes No
Auto Online Yes Yes Yes
Auto Offline Yes Yes Yes
Generate File
Image Quality Level for Ltd. Color/Compact Yes Yes Yes
PDF (Limited Color) Resolution Settings Yes Yes Yes
OCR (Text Searchable) Settings Yes Yes Yes
Trace & Smooth Settings Yes Yes Yes
OOXML Settings Yes Yes Yes
Include Background Images in Word File Yes Yes Yes
Specify Minimum PDF Version Yes Yes Yes
Format PDF to PDF/A Yes Yes Yes
Optimize PDF for Web Yes Yes Yes
256-bit AES Settings for Encrypted PDF Yes Yes Yes
Rights Management Server Settings Yes Yes Yes
Register Finishing Size Yes Yes No
Set Authentication Method Yes Yes Yes

Function Settings
Copy Auto Collate Yes Yes No
Image Orientation Priority Yes Yes No
Auto Recognize Original Orientation Yes Yes Yes
Select Color Settings for Copy Yes Yes Yes
Send Common Settings
Display Confirmation for Favorite Settings Yes Yes Yes
Default Screen Yes Yes Yes
TX Report Yes Yes Yes
Communication Management Report Yes Yes Yes
TX Terminal ID Yes Yes Yes
Delete Failed TX Jobs Yes Yes Yes
Retry Times Yes Yes Yes
Data Compression Ratio Yes Yes Yes
349

Send YCbCr TX Gamma Value Yes Yes Yes
Allow Non-ASCII Characters for FTP Sending Yes Yes Yes
Use Divided Chunk Send for WebDAV TX Yes Yes Yes
Confirm SSL Certificate for WebDAV TX Yes Yes Yes
Limit New Destination Yes Yes Yes
Always Add Device Signature to Send Yes Yes Yes
E-Mail/ I-Fax Settings
Register Unit Name Yes Yes Yes
Communication Settings SMTP RX Yes Yes Yes
POP Yes Yes Yes
SMTP Server Yes Yes Yes
E-Mail Address Yes No No
POP Server Yes Yes Yes
POP Login Name Yes No No
POP Password Yes No No
POP Interval Yes Yes Yes
Authent./ Encryption Yes Yes Yes
Confirm SSL Certificate for SMTP TX Yes Yes Yes
Confirm SSL Certificate for POP RX Yes Yes Yes
Maximum Data Size for Sending Yes Yes Yes
Default Subject Yes Yes Yes
Allow Unregistered Users to Send E-Mail Yes Yes Yes
Full Mode TX Timeout Yes Yes Yes
Print MDN/DSN upon Receipt Yes Yes Yes
Use Send via Server Yes Yes Yes
Allow MDN Not via Server Yes Yes Yes
Restrict TX Destination Domain Yes Yes Yes
Auto Complete for Entering E-Mail Addresses Yes Yes Yes
Receive/ Forward Common Settings
Print on Both Sides Yes Yes Yes
Select Drawer Yes Yes Yes
Reduce Fax RX Size Yes Yes Yes
2 on 1 Log Yes Yes Yes
Print RX Page Footer Yes Yes Yes
YCbCr RX Gamma Value Yes Yes Yes
Interrupt and Print RX Jobs Yes Yes Yes
Handle Files with Forwarding Errors Yes Yes Yes
Set Fax/ I-Fax Inbox
Use I-Fax Memory Lock Yes Yes Yes
Memory Lock Start Time Yes Yes Yes
Memory Lock End Time Yes Yes Yes
Divided Data RX Timeout Yes Yes Yes
Always Send Notice for RX Errors Yes Yes Yes
Store/ Access Files Common Settings
Limit Box PIN to 7 Digits/ Restrict Access Yes Yes Yes
Mail Box Settings
Box Security Settings Yes Yes Yes

Set Destination
Change Default Display of Address Book Yes Yes Yes
Address Book PIN Yes Yes Yes
Manage Address Book Access Numbers Yes Yes Yes
Include Pswd. When Exporting Address Book Yes Yes Yes
350

Register LDAP Server Yes Yes No
Auto Search When Using LDAP Server Yes Yes Yes
Register/ Edit LDAP Search Conditions Yes Yes No
Change Default LDAP Search Conditions Yes Yes Yes
Acquire Remote Address Book Yes Yes Yes
Make Remote Add. Book Open Yes Yes Yes

Management Settings
Device Management Device Information Settings Yes No No
Device Information Distribution Settings
Register Destinations Yes Yes No
Set Auto Distribution Yes Yes No
Restrict Receiving Device Information Yes Yes Yes
Restrict Receiving for Each Function Yes Yes Yes
Set Paper Information Yes Yes Yes
Communication Log
Report Settings Yes Yes Yes
Display Job Status Before Authentication Yes Yes Yes
Display Job Log Yes Yes Yes
Save Audit Log Yes Yes Yes
Store Key Operation Log Yes Yes Yes
License/Other Remote UI Yes Yes Yes
Access by General User Yes Yes Yes
Access PIN Yes Yes Yes
Message Board/Support Link Yes Yes Yes
Remote Operation Settings Yes Yes Yes
Data Management Back Up/ Restore Settings
Backup Location Settings Yes Yes Yes
Auto Backup Settings Yes Yes Yes
HDD Data Complete Deletion Yes Yes Yes

Settings/Reg.Shortcut Yes Yes No
■ Box Settings
Function Settings
Receive/ Forward Common Settings
Set Fax/ I-Fax Inbox Set/ Register Confidential Fax Inboxes Yes Yes Yes
Memory RX Inbox PIN Yes Yes Yes
Store/ Access Files Mail Box Settings
Set/ Register Mail Boxes Yes Yes Yes
■ Department ID Management Settings

Management Settings
User Management System Manager Information Settings Yes Yes Yes
Department ID Management
Register PIN Yes Yes Yes
351
■ Main Menu Settings

Main Menu Settings
Setting File Yes Yes Yes
■ Favorite Settings
[Previous Settings] is not imported.

Function Settings
Copy Register/ Edit Favorite Settings Yes Yes No
Change Default Settings Yes Yes No
Register Options Shortcuts (Regular Copy) Yes Yes No
Register Options Shortcuts (Express Copy) Yes Yes No
Send Common Settings
Register Favorite Settings Yes Yes Yes
Edit Favorite Settings Yes Yes Yes
Change Default Settings Yes Yes Yes
Register Options Shortcuts Yes Yes Yes
Store/ Access Files Common Settings
Scan and Store Settings Yes Yes No
Access Stored Files Settings Yes Yes No
Copy Basic Features Screen
Color Balance (Options) Yes Yes No
Access Stored Files
Mail Box (Print) Color Balance (Options) Yes Yes No
■ Address Book
Set Destination
Register Destinations Yes Yes Yes
Rename Address List Yes Yes Yes
Register One-Touch Yes Yes Yes
■ Forwarding Settings
Function Settings
Receive/Forward Common Settings
Forwarding Settings Yes Yes * Yes *
* If you specify the address in the Remote Address Book as the forwarding destination, the forwarding settings will not be imported.
However, if the machine, which exports setting information, and the target machine for importing use the same Remote Address
Book, the forwarding settings can be used in the target machine for importing.
■ Quick Menu Settings

Quick Menu Settings
Button File Yes Yes No
352
■ Paper Type Management Settings

Preferences
Paper Settings Paper Type Management Settings Custom Type *1 Yes Yes *2 Yes *2
*1 : When receiving paper information, you can specify whether to register all received paper information or only the basic
information of each paper type.
*2 : In case B or C, only <Name>, <Category>, <Weight>, <Size>, <Finish>, <Type>, <Color>, <2nd Side of 2-Sided Page>,
and <Adjust Creep Correction> are imported when importing paper information. In case A, all paper information is imported.
■ Web Access Settings

Web Access Settings*
Favorites Yes Yes Yes
Settings Yes Yes Yes
* If favorites are registered as the shortcut buttons or [Default Screen after Startup/Restoration] settings in the target machine for
importing, the registered information is changed when importing the setting information of Web Access settings.
■ Service Mode
NOTE:
• It needs to have been formatted to be recognized by the device. No firmware registration is necessary
• When necessary, copy the files which you want to import using a PC in advance. Be sure to store them in the root folder of
the USB flash drive
• Do not change the extension from ".dcm" (only ".dcm" files can be recognized)
• It is desirable to connect the USB flash drive before entering service mode
● COPIER
ADJUST
Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C

COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJ-X Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJ-Y Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJ-Y-DF Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY STRD-POS Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJ-X-MG Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJY-DF2 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST ADJ-XY ADJ-Y-MG Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK-T Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK-L Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK-R Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK-B Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD W-PLT-X Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD W-PLT-Y Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD W-PLT-Z Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD SH-TRGT Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD 100-RG Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD 100-GB Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTAR-R Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTAR-G Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-M1 Yes No No
353

COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF2-S1 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD 100DF2GB Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD 100DF2RG Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2R2 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2R10 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2B2 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2B10 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2G2 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2G10 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-M1 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF-S1 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH-R2 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH-R10 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH-B2 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH-B10 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH-G2 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH-G10 Yes No No
354

COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2K2 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH2K10 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH-K2 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFCH-K10 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTAR-BW Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTBK-G Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTBK-B Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTBK-R Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CCD DFTBK-BW Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST COLOR ADJ-Y Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST COLOR ADJ-M Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST COLOR ADJ-C Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST COLOR ADJ-K Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST COLOR OFST-Y Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST COLOR OFST-M Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST COLOR OFST-C Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST COLOR OFST-K Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST COLOR LD-OFS-Y Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST COLOR LD-OFS-M Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST COLOR LD-OFS-C Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST COLOR LD-OFS-K Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST COLOR MD-OFS-Y Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST COLOR MD-OFS-M Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST COLOR MD-OFS-C Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST COLOR MD-OFS-K Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST COLOR HD-OFS-Y Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST COLOR HD-OFS-M Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST COLOR HD-OFS-C Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST COLOR HD-OFS-K Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST COLOR PL-OFS-Y Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST COLOR PL-OFS-M Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST COLOR PL-OFS-C Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST COLOR PL-OFS-K Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST COLOR PM-OFS-Y Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST COLOR PM-OFS-M Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST COLOR PM-OFS-C Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST COLOR PM-OFS-K Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST COLOR PH-OFS-Y Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST COLOR PH-OFS-M Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST COLOR PH-OFS-C Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST COLOR PH-OFS-K Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CST-ADJ MF-A4R Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CST-ADJ MF-A6R Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CST-ADJ MF-A4 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CST-ADJ MDK1-A4 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CST-ADJ MDK1-A5R Yes No No
355

COPIER ADJUST CST-ADJ PDK-A4 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST CST-ADJ PDK-A5R Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST DENS REF-Y Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST DENS REF-M Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST DENS REF-C Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST DENS SIGG-Y Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST DENS SIGG-M Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST DENS SIGG-C Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST DENS SIGG-K Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST DENS HLMT-PTY Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST DENS HLMT-PTM Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST DENS HLMT-PTC Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST DENS LLMT-PTY Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST DENS LLMT-PTM Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST DENS LLMT-PTC Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST DENS ALF-C Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST DENS P-K-K Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST DENS HLMT-PTK Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST DENS LLMT-PTK Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST DENS REF-K Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST DENS DMLMT-HY Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST DENS DMLMT-HM Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST DENS DMLMT-HC Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST DENS DMLMT-LY Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST DENS DMLMT-LM Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST DENS DMLMT-LC Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST DENS CONT-Y Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST DENS CONT-M Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST DENS CONT-C Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST DENS CONT-K Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST DENS P-TG-Y1 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST DENS P-TG-M1 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST DENS P-TG-C1 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST DENS P-TG-K1 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST EXP-LED PR-EXP-Y Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST EXP-LED PR-EXP-M Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST EXP-LED PR-EXP-C Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST EXP-LED PR-EXP-K Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST EXP-LED AF-EXP-K Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST EXP-LED AF-EXPK2 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST EXP-LED AF-EXPK3 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST EXP-LED PR-EXPY2 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST EXP-LED PR-EXPM2 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST EXP-LED PR-EXPC2 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST EXP-LED PR-EXPY3 Yes No No
356

COPIER ADJUST EXP-LED PR-EXPM3 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST EXP-LED PR-EXPC3 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REGIST Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-C1 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-MF Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-DK Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-REFE Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-DUP1 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ PFIX-FAN Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ ADJ-MDK1 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ PFIX-SPD Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ EXT-SPD Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ DCR1-SPD Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ DCR2-SPD Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ LP-CST Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ LP-DK Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ LP-DUP Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ LP-MDK Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ LP-MF Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-1 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-MF-1 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REV-SPD Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ PREG-SPD Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-REV1 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-SPD1 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ CT1-PKLV Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ DK1-PKLV Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-STOP Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ CIS-INIT Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ L-INIT Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST FEED-ADJ REG-L Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI DIS-TGY Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI DIS-TGM Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI DIS-TGC Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI DIS-TGY2 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI DIS-TGM2 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI DIS-TGC2 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI OFSTAC-Y Yes No No
357

COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI OFSTAC-M Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI OFSTAC-C Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI OFSTACY2 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI OFSTACM2 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI OFSTACC2 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI OFSTACY3 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI OFSTACM3 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI OFSTACC3 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI PRI-FREQ Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI DHT-ON Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-PRI CHG-TBL Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR PRE-TR Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-TGT1 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2TR-SHR1 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-PPR1 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-ENV1 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-CLR1 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR TR-DUP1 Yes No No
358

COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGY Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGM Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGC Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGK1 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGK4 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2EL Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR POSTSW-K Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 2ELSW Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGY2 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGM2 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGC2 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TK12 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGY3 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGM3 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR 1TR-TGC3 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR CLN1-I1 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST HV-TR CLN1-PI1 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-H-Y Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-H-C Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-H-K Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-V-Y Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-V-C Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-V-K Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-H-M Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG REG-V-M Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG MAG-H Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG MAG-V Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG ANGLE-1 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG MAG-V-K Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG SLP-1 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG TRPZ-1 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST IMG-REG DRM-SPD1 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST LASER LSADJ1-Y Yes No No
359

COPIER ADJUST LASER LSADJ1-M Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST LASER LSADJ1-C Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST LASER LSADJ1-K Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST LASER LSADJ2-Y Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST LASER LSADJ2-M Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST LASER LSADJ2-C Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST LASER LSADJ2-K Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST LASER M-ADJ-Y Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST LASER M-ADJ-M Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST LASER M-ADJ-C Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST LASER M-ADJ-K Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST LASER M-ADJ2-Y Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST LASER M-ADJ2-M Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST LASER M-ADJ2-C Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST LASER M-ADJ2-K Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST MISC SEG-ADJ Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST MISC K-ADJ Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-ADJ Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-EN Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-CNT Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-EN2 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-CNT2 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST MISC WT-ER-LV Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST MISC REOS-PG Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST MISC SEG-ADJ3 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST MISC K-ADJ3 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-ADJ3 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-EN3 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS-CNT3 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST MISC SH-ADJ Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST MISC SH-ADJ2 Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST MISC FAN-HIGH Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST MISC FAN-STBY Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST PASCAL OFST-P-Y Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST PASCAL OFST-P-M Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST PASCAL OFST-P-C Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST PASCAL OFST-P-K Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST SENS-ADJ UP-ED-OF Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VCONT-K Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK-Y Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK-M Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK-C Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK-K Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT PT-VCT-Y Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT PT-VCT-M Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT PT-VCT-C Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT PT-VCT-K Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VDGAIN-Y Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VDGAIN-M Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VDGAIN-C Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT LPGAIN-Y Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT LPGAIN-M Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT LPGAIN-C Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK2-Y Yes No No
360

COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK2-M Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK2-C Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK2-K Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK3-Y Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK3-M Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK3-C Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VBACK3-K Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT LPW-C Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT LPW-K Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT LPW-M Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT LPW-Y Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VCONT2-Y Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VCONT2-M Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VCONT2-C Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VCONT2-K Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VCONT3-Y Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VCONT3-M Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VCONT3-C Yes No No
COPIER ADJUST V-CONT VCONT3-K Yes No No
DISPLAY

COPIER DISPLAY DENS DVS-CLNK Yes No No
FUNCTION

COPIER FUNCTION CLEANING FX-CL-FQ Yes No No
COPIER FUNCTION CLEANING FX-CLN Yes No No
COPIER FUNCTION CST MDK1-A4 Yes No No
COPIER FUNCTION CST MDK1-A5R Yes No No
COPIER FUNCTION CST PDK-A4 Yes No No
COPIER FUNCTION CST PDK-A5R Yes No No
COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL E-RDS Yes Yes Yes
COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL RGW-PORT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL RGW-ADR Yes Yes Yes
COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL CDS-CTL Yes Yes Yes
COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL BIT-SVC Yes Yes Yes
COPIER FUNCTION MISC-R 1PCLBUDR Yes No No
COPIER FUNCTION MISC-R 1PCLBOVR Yes No No
COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DEBUG-1 Yes Yes Yes
OPTION

COPIER OPTION ACC COIN Yes No No
COPIER OPTION ACC DK-P Yes No No
COPIER OPTION ACC CARD-SW Yes No No
COPIER OPTION ACC STPL-LMT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION ACC SC-TYPE Yes No No
COPIER OPTION ACC CC-SPSW Yes No No
361

COPIER OPTION ACC USB-MSK Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION ACC UNIT-PRC Yes No No
COPIER OPTION ACC DA-PUCT Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION ACC MIN-PRC Yes No No
COPIER OPTION ACC MAX-PRC Yes No No
COPIER OPTION ACC MIC-TUN Yes No No
COPIER OPTION ACC SRL-SPSW Yes No No
COPIER OPTION ACC PDL-THR Yes No No
COPIER OPTION ACC CR-TYPE Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION BODY W-CLN-T Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY PRI-FAN Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY MODEL-SZ Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY SCANSLCT Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY PASCAL Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY SENS-CNF Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY CONFIG Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY RAW-DATA Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY IFAX-LIM Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY W/SCNR Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY FX1BC-SW Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY SMTPTXPN Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY SMTPRXPN Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY POP3PN Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY ORG-LGL Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION BODY ORG-LTR Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION BODY ORG-B5 Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION BODY UI-COPY Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY UI-BOX Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY UI-SEND Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY UI-FAX Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY D-CLN-TM Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY FTPTXPN Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY INTPPR-1 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY PRN-FLG Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION BODY SCN-FLG Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION BODY INTROT-1 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY INTROT-2 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY NWERR-SW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY DEVL-PTH Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY STS-PORT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY CMD-PORT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY MODELSZ2 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY OHP-PTH Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DFDST-L1 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DFDST-L2 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY NS-CMD5 Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY NS-GSAPI Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY NS-NTLM Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY NS-PLNWS Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY NS-PLN Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY NS-LGN Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY T-CRG-SW Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY MEAP-PN Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY TMIC-BK Yes Yes No
362

COPIER OPTION BODY SVMD-ENT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY DH-MODE Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY ENVP-INT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY W-CLN-PH Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY CDEV-IDL Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY PCHINT-1 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY PCHINT-2 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY PCHINT-V Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY FXWRNLVL Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY FXMSG-SW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY CHNG-STS Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY CHNG-CMD Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY ANIM-SW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY MEAP-SSL Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY SC-L-CNT Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION BODY MIX-FLG Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION BODY REPORT-Z Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION BODY IFXEML-Z Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION BODY BMLNKS-Z Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION BODY KSIZE-SW Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION BODY LPD-PORT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY ORG-A4R Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION BODY PDF-RDCT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY REDU-CNT Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY REBOOTSW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY VP-ART Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY VP-TXT Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY UI-PRINT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY WUEV-SW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY WUEV-INT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY WUEV-POT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY WUEV-RTR Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY SJB-UNW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY IMGC-ADJ Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY UI-RSCAN Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY UI-EPRNT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY UI-WEB Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY UI-HOLD Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY WEBV-SW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY PASCL-TY Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION BODY CARD-RNG Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION BODY WUEN-LIV Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY COMP-PRT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY ARCDT-SW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY AST-SEL Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY REGM-SEL Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY 2TR-RVON Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY SJOB-CL Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY DHCP-12 Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY DHCP-81 Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY PT3-INEX Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY IFX-CHIG Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY USB-RCNT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY UNLMTBND Yes No No
363

COPIER OPTION BODY DNSTRANS Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY MIBCOUNT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY FX-MODE Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DRY-CISU Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY RMT-CNSL Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY EVLP-SPD Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY PROXYRES Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY WOLTRANS Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY DF2DSTL1 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DF2DSTL2 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY 802XTOUT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY IKERETRY Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY SPDALDEL Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY NCONF-SW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY ABK-TOOL Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY DMX-OF-Y Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DMX-OF-M Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DMX-OF-C Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DMX-OF-K Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY IKEINTVL Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY DK5-REST Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY INSRT-SW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY PINT-REG Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY SP-LINK Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY W/RAID Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION BODY PSWD-SW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY SM-PSWD Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY FX-SPD-1 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DEV-SP1 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY RPT2SIDE Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY AFS-JOB Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY AFC-JOB Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY AFC-EVNT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY UI-SBOX Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY UI-MEM Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY ILOGMODE Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY ILOGKEEP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY PSCL-MS Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DMX-DISP Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY UI-NAVI Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY INVALPDL Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION BODY IMGCNTPR Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION BODY CDS-FIRM Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY CDS-MEAP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY CDS-UGW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY LOCLFIRM Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY RSHDW-SW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY TR-BND1 Yes No No
364

COPIER OPTION BODY TRCLN1-P Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY FX-WUT Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-ST1 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-ST2 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-ST1L Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-ST2L Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-OHT Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-L Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DWN-TMP Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY EDG-WAIT Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY CHG-INT Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY L-PWR-SW Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY SCR-SW Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY IPTBROAD Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY T1HP-POS Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION BODY DK4-TURN Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY FX-ERRSW Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY FX-U-ERR Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY D-EXPRS Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION BODY FCOT-DSP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY MC-FANSW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY PFWFTPRT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY FXMSGSW2 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DK1-AIR Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY BXNUPLOG Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY TFL-RTC Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION BODY D-MXDSZ Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION BODY UI-CUSTM Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY BUSI-SW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY SDLMTWRN Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY USZ-FEED Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY IPMTU Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY DDNSINTV Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY ITB-TYPE Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY FAX-INT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY PDL-Z-LG Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION BODY CDS-LVUP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY PRI-SHUT Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY AMSOFFSW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY USEUPTNR Yes No No
365

COPIER OPTION BODY UA-OFFSW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY MIB-NVTA Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION BODY TAB-SW Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY SCT-BTN Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY DFEJCLED Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY SVC-RUI Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION BODY PSCL-TBL Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY BGE-OFS Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY USER-DSP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY LCDSFLG Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY BKDH Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION BODY STNDBY-A Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY SDTM-DSP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY NWLOGINT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY MEDIASP1 Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY MEDIASP2 Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY BXSHIFT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY ENV-SEQ Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION BODY HOME-SW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY NO-LGOUT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY T-DLV-BK Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY WT-WARN Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY JM-ERR-D Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY JM-ERR-R Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY FX-MODE1 Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION BODY FX-MODE2 Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION BODY PRCLNSW Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY PR-CLN Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY VLAN-SW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY VLAN-PKT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION BODY TGT-3 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY ADJVPP-1 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY AFTR-FB Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY BK-4C-SW Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DITH-FB Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY EXPFL-C Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY EXPFL-K Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY EXPFL-M Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY EXPFL-Y Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY F/B-2 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY F/B-3 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY FL-FB Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY FX-FAN3 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY FX-FAN4 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY HIGH-C Yes No No
366

COPIER OPTION BODY HIGH-Y Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY HIGH-M Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY INT-FB Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY LOW-C Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY LOW-Y Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY LOW-M Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY LPMAX-K Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY LPMIN-K Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY LUT-C Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY LUT-K Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY LUT-M Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY LUT-Y Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY PSCL-TG1 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY PTN-AFTR Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY PTN-INT Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY PTN-MNG Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY R-FREQ-L Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY R-FREQ-S Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY S-DITH Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY TGT-2 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-EM1 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-EVLP Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-GC1 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-H1 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-L2 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-L3 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-MC1 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-P1 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-P2 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-POST Yes No No
367

COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-R1 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-TH1 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY TMP-TH2 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY TR-BNDSW Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DLV-FAN Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY RFREQ-TM Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY CIS-LED Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY CIS-LV Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY CIS-SW Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY CIS-TH Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY CST1-PSP Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DK1-ALVD Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DK1-ALVU Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DK1-LDWN Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DK1-PSP Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DRBNDSW1 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DRBNDSW2 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DRBNDTM1 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DRBNDTM2 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY PDK-REST Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY PSCHG-SW Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY CLN-RT Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DEVREFLV Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY PBJ-ORD Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY IMGWIDTH Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY R-V-MULT Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY R-ACT-TM Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY R-LTMP Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY RFREQ-SW Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY ADJVPP-Y Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY ADJVPP-M Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY ADJVPP-C Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY ADJVPP-K Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY VTHOF-Y Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY VTHOF-M Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY VTHOF-C Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY VTHOF-K Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY VTHLOF-Y Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY VTHLOF-M Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY VTHLOF-C Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY VTHLOF-K Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DEVLVTHY Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DEVLVTHM Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DEVLVTHC Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DEVLVTHK Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DEV-STOP Yes No No
368

COPIER OPTION BODY SCWSP-Y1 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY SCWSP-M1 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY SCWSP-C1 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY SCWSP-K1 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DVS-REF1 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DVSCT-Y2 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DVSCT-M2 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DVSCT-C2 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DVSCT-K2 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DVSCT-Y3 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DVSCT-M3 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DVSCT-C3 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DVSCT-K3 Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DEV-EXT Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY KSPITHUM Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY DRROT-SW Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY CLN-TM Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY 4CBKSPIT Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY CPSCR-SW Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY ROT-COND Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY ITBROTSW Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY PDMX-O-Y Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY PDMX-O-M Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY PDMX-O-C Yes No No
COPIER OPTION BODY PDMX-O-K Yes No No
COPIER OPTION CST U1-NAME Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION CST CST1-P1 Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION CST CST1-U1 Yes Yes No
369

COPIER OPTION CST D1-ASIZE Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION INT-FACE IMG-CONT Yes No No
COPIER OPTION INT-FACE AP-OPT Yes No No
COPIER OPTION INT-FACE AP-ACCNT Yes No No
COPIER OPTION INT-FACE AP-CODE Yes No No
COPIER OPTION INT-FACE NWCT-TM Yes No No
COPIER OPTION INT-FACE VTRNS-TO Yes No No
COPIER OPTION USER COPY-LIM Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION USER SLEEP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER SIZE-DET Yes No No
COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER2 Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER DATE-DSP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER MB-CCV Yes No No
COPIER OPTION USER CONTROL Yes No No
COPIER OPTION USER B4-L-CNT Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION USER MF-LG-ST Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER CNT-DISP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER COPY-JOB Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION USER OP-SZ-DT Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION USER NW-SCAN Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER INS-C/S Yes No No
COPIER OPTION USER HDCR-DSP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER JOB-INVL Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER LGSW-DSP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER TAB-ROT Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION USER PR-PSESW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER IDPRN-SW Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION USER CPRT-DSP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER PCL-COPY Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER CNT-SW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER TAB-ACC Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER BCNT-AST Yes Yes Yes
370

COPIER OPTION USER PRJOB-CP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER DFLT-CPY Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER DFLT-BOX Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER DOC-REM Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER DPT-ID-7 Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER RUI-RJT Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER CTM-S06 Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER FREG-SW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER IFAX-SZL Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER IFAX-PGD Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER MEAPSAFE Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION USER TRAY-FLL Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER PRNT-POS Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER AFN-PSWD Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER PTJAM-RC Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER PDL-NCSW Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION USER SLP-SLCT Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION USER PS-MODE Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER CNCT-RLZ Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER 2C-CT-SW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER LDAP-SW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER FROM-OF Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER DOM-ADD Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER FILE-OF Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER MAIL-OF Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER IFAX-OF Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER LDAP-DEF Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER FINGM-SW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER DK3-ASST Yes No No
COPIER OPTION USER FREE-DSP Yes No No
COPIER OPTION USER TNRB-SW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER CLR-TIM Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER HDCR-DSW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER SNMP-COA Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION USER SNMP-COU Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION USER BWCL-DSP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER STPL-MAX Yes Yes No
COPIER OPTION USER SCALL-SW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER SCALLCMP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER USBH-DSP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER USBM-DSP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER USBI-DSP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER CTCHKDSP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER USBB-DSP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER USBR-DSP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER POL-SCAN Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER JA-SBOX Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER JA-DFAX Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER JA-REP Yes Yes Yes
371

COPIER OPTION USER JA-FREP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER JA-BOX Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER JA-FORM Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER JA-PREV Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER JA-PULL Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER JA-PDLB Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER JA-JOBK Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER JA-JDF Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER JA-RUI Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER JA-WEB Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER EXP-CRYP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER SLEEP1SW Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER CNCL-ATH Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER EZY-SCRP Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER DMN-MTCH Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER SNDSTREN Yes Yes Yes
COPIER OPTION USER FAXSTREN Yes Yes Yes
● FEEDER
ADJUST

FEEDER ADJUST DOCST Yes No No
FEEDER ADJUST LA-SPEED Yes No No
FEEDER ADJUST DOCST2 Yes No No
FEEDER ADJUST LA-SPD2 Yes No No
FEEDER ADJUST ADJMSCN1 Yes No No
FEEDER ADJUST ADJMSCN2 Yes No No
FEEDER ADJUST ADJSSCN1 Yes No No
FEEDER ADJUST ADJSSCN2 Yes No No
● SORTER
ADJUST

SORTER ADJUST PNCH-Y Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST CV-REG-L Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST CV-REG-S Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST CV-CENT Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST CLCT-SB Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST ALG-F-A4 Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST ALG-R-A4 Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST ALG-F-L Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST ALG-R-L Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST GLUING Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST STK-DLV Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST GRP-CHNG Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST SIZE-H Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST SIZE-W Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST CV-LNG Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST 10RGT-1 Yes No No
372

SORTER ADJUST SLD-MTR Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST STK-VR0 Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST STK-VR25 Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST GLU-LOW Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST GLU-UP Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST GLU-EDG1 Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST GLU-AMT1 Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST GLU-MOVE Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST GLU-TEMP Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST GLUAMT1C Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PF-A3Z1 Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PF-A3Z2 Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PF-B4Z1 Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PF-B4Z2 Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PF-A4RZ1 Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PF-A4RZ2 Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PF-LDRZ1 Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PF-LDRZ2 Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PF-LGLZ1 Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PF-LGLZ2 Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PFLTRRZ1 Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PFLTRRZ2 Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PF-A4RC1 Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PF-A4RC2 Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PFLTRRC1 Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PFLTRRC2 Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PF-A4R31 Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PFLTRR31 Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST STP-F1 Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST STP-F2 Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST STP-R1 Yes No No
373

SORTER ADJUST STP-R2 Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST SDL-STP Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST SDL-ALG Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST SBRL-MTR Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST RTR-DWA4 Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST ST-ALG1 Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST SW-UP-RL Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PUN-V-RG Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PRCS-RET Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST UP-CL Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST DW-CL Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST THC-CL Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST THC-PUSH Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST OFST-STC Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST THN-STC Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST STP-P-CH Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST TRY-NIS Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST TRY-SU Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST FIN-NIS Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST 1SHT-SHF Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST SDL-SWCH Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST SDL-ALM Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST THN-STCL Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PF-LGL41 Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST PF-LGL42 Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST SC-OFST Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST KEY-RPT Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST SET-SHFT Yes No No
SORTER ADJUST JOB-SHFT Yes No No
MISC

SORTER MISC PRESET Yes No No
SORTER MISC SORTEDGE Yes No No
SORTER MISC DOCORI Yes No No
SORTER MISC LSFST Yes No No
SORTER MISC RCVRYMOD Yes No No
SORTER MISC HEADORI Yes No No
SORTER MISC STOPTYPE Yes No No
SORTER MISC C0SGNL Yes No No
SORTER MISC S0SGNL Yes No No
374

SORTER MISC C0PW Yes No No
SORTER MISC C0DLY Yes No No
SORTER MISC FSC2D Yes No No
SORTER MISC LSC2D Yes No No
SORTER MISC C4SZ Yes No No
SORTER MISC C4SWDL Yes No No
SORTER MISC DFSHMIN Yes No No
SORTER MISC OPSHMIN Yes No No
SORTER MISC DFMINTIM Yes No No
SORTER MISC OPMINTIM Yes No No
SORTER MISC DFMINSET Yes No No
SORTER MISC OPMINSET Yes No No
SORTER MISC DFMINJOB Yes No No
SORTER MISC OEMSNSR Yes No No
SORTER MISC TOUTS3 Yes No No
SORTER MISC TOUTS4 Yes No No
SORTER MISC EXTFIN Yes No No
SORTER MISC NOFSETAF Yes Yes No
SORTER MISC C5C6JDU Yes No No
SORTER MISC C5C6JDSD Yes No No
SORTER MISC C5C6BD Yes No No
OPTION

SORTER OPTION BLNK-SW Yes No No
SORTER OPTION MD-SPRTN Yes No No
SORTER OPTION SDL-PRS Yes No No
SORTER OPTION BUFF-SW Yes No No
SORTER OPTION TRY-EJCT Yes No No
SORTER OPTION PN-SKEW Yes No No
SORTER OPTION MHPN-OHP Yes No No
SORTER OPTION TBWRNLVL Yes Yes No
SORTER OPTION TBPCOUNT Yes Yes No
SORTER OPTION TBP-POSW Yes Yes No
SORTER OPTION CURL-SW Yes No No
SORTER OPTION TRY-OVER Yes Yes No
SORTER OPTION ST1-LMT Yes Yes No
SORTER OPTION ST2-LMT Yes Yes No
SORTER OPTION GLU-OF1N Yes Yes No
SORTER OPTION GLU-OF1C Yes Yes No
SORTER OPTION TRM-LMT Yes No No
SORTER OPTION TRY-PATH Yes Yes No
SORTER OPTION PRCS-SP1 Yes No No
SORTER OPTION STCR-DWN Yes No No
375

SORTER OPTION BUFF-INT Yes No No
SORTER OPTION PRCS-SP3 Yes No No
SORTER OPTION NSRT-STC Yes No No
SORTER OPTION STP-MAX Yes Yes No
SORTER OPTION SDL-MAX Yes Yes Yes
SORTER OPTION VFLD-MAX Yes Yes Yes
SORTER OPTION NEAT-MIX Yes No No
SORTER OPTION NEAT-SW Yes Yes Yes
SORTER OPTION TRM-CNT Yes Yes Yes
SORTER OPTION THN-TRSW Yes No No
SORTER OPTION THN-SW Yes No No
SORTER OPTION SWGUP-SW Yes No No
SORTER OPTION CALG-SW Yes No No
SORTER OPTION THN-STK Yes Yes Yes
SORTER OPTION ST1-MFH Yes Yes No
376
3 Periodical Service
Periodical Service Operation Item.... 378
3. Periodical Service
Periodical Service Operation Item
Process Unit
Bk
C
M
Y
[7]
[10]
[6]
[9]
[10]
[8]
[11]
[9]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
No. Part Name Parts No. Estimated Q't Estimated Service Modes Remark Con- Operator
time re- y life (sheet), (Parts counter) tents mainte-
quired for Cleaning sub items minor nance
replace- timing * items parts
ment
[1] Drum Cleaning FM2-9298 Less than 4 2,000,000 CLEANING PRE-EXP-Y Cleaning with CLEA
Pre-exposure Unit 45 minutes - PRE-EXP-M lint-free paper NING
(Y/M/C/Bk) PRE-EXP-C moistened
PRE-EXP-K with alcohol
378
replace- timing * items parts
ment
[2] Drum Unit Support - Less than 4 500,000 CLEANING DRM-SFTS Clean with dry CLEA Yes
Shaft 10 minutes 500,000 lint-free paper NING
[3] Developing As- - Less than 4 2,000,000 CLEANING PKIT-LFY Clean with dry CLEA Yes
sembly Lower 45 minutes 2,000,000 PKIT-LFM lint-free paper NING
Plate (Y/M/C/Bk) PKIT-LFC
PKIT-LF
[4] Drum Patch Sen- FM1-H019 Less than 2 2,000,000 CLEANING DV-P-S-Y Cleaning with CLEA
sor (Y/M) FM1-H020 45 minutes 2 - DV-P-S-M lint-free paper NING
Drum Patch Sen- DV-P-S-C moistened
sor (C/Bk) DV-P-S-K with alcohol
Drum Patch Sen- 4,500,000 DRBL-1 DV-P-S-Y Re-
sor (Y/M) - DV-P-S-M place-
Drum Patch Sen- DV-P-S-C ment
sor (C/Bk) DV-P-S-K
[5] Photosensitive 8533B Less than 4 1,500,000 DRBL-1 PT-DR-Y Re- Yes
Drum (Y/M/C/Bk) 45 minutes 1,500,000 PT-DR-M place-
PT-DR-C ment
PT-DRM
[6] Drum Cleaning FC5-8829 Less than 4 1,500,000 DRBL-1 CL-BLD-Y Re- Yes
Blade (Y/M/C/Bk) 45 minutes 1,500,000 CL-BLD-M place-
CL-BLD-C ment
CLN-BLD
[7] Drum Cleaning Kit FM2-9258 Less than 4 1,500,000 DRBL-1 BS-SL-Y Re- Yes
(Y/M/C/Bk) 45 minutes 1,500,000 BS-SL-M place-
BS-SL-C ment
BS-SL-K
[8] Drum Cleaning FE8-2737 Less than 4 1,500,000 DRBL-1 CL-FUR-Y Re-
Brush Roller 60 minutes - CL-FUR-M place-
(Y/M/C/Bk) CL-FUR-C ment
CL-FUR-K
[9] Drum Cleaning FL2-2707 Less than 4 1,500,000 DRBL-1 SID-F-Y Included in the Re-
Front/Rear Side FL2-2708 45 minutes 4 - SID-F-M Drum Clean- place-
Seal (Y/M/C/Bk) SID-F-C ing Kit ment
SID-F-K
[10] Drum Cleaning FL0-2642 Less than 4 1,500,000 DRBL-1 EDGE-F-Y Included in the Re-
Front/Rear End FL0-2643 45 minutes 4 - EDGE-F-M Drum Clean- place-
Seal (Y/M/C/Bk) EDGE-F-C ing Kit ment
EDGE-F-K
[11] Drum Cleaning FL2-2709 Less than 4 1,500,000 DRBL-1 SU-SHT-Y Included in the Re-
Scoop-up Sheet 45 minutes - SU-SHT-M Drum Clean- place-
(Y/M/C/Bk) SU-SHT-C ing Kit ment
SU-SHT-K
*
• Upper
iPR C10000VP (Intermittent printing of 100 sheets per job) / iPR C8000VP (Intermittent printing of 80 sheets per job)
• Lower
(ORP) iPR C10000VP (Intermittent printing of 100 sheets per job) / iPR C8000VP (Intermittent printing of 80 sheets per job)
379
Bk
C
M
Y
[4]
[6]
[5]
[3]
[7]
[8]
[2]
[1]
repla- timing * items parts
ceme
[1] Primary Charging FM1-K629 Less than 5 4 4,000,000 PRDC-1 PRM-U-Y Re- Yes
Assembly minutes (100ppm) PRM-U-M place-
(Y/M/C/Bk) 2,880,000 PRM-U-C ment
(80ppm) PRM-UNIT
500,000
(100ppm)
360,000
(80ppm)
[2] Primary Charging - Less than 4 500,000 - - Cleaning with CLEA
Assembly Shield 30 minutes 4 (100ppm) lint-free paper NING
Plate (Y/M/C/Bk) 360,000 moistened
(80ppm) with alcohol
when replac-
380
ceme
[2] Primary Charging - Less than 4 - - - ing the Pri- CLEA
Assembly Shield 30 minutes 4 mary Charg- NING
Plate (Y/M/C/Bk) ing Wire
[3] Primary Charging FC0-9857 Less than 4 500,000 PRDC-1 PRM-G-Y Re-
Assembly Grid 15 minutes (100ppm) PRM-G-M place-
Plate (Y/M/C/Bk) 360,000 PRM-G-C ment
(80ppm) PRM-GRID
-
[4] Primary Charging FM2-9257 Less than 4 500,000 PRDC-1 PRM-U-Y2 Re-
Wire Unit 30 minutes (100ppm) PRM-U-M2 place-
(Y/M/C/Bk) 360,000 PRM-U-C2 ment
(80ppm) PRM-UNT2
-
[5] Primary Charging FB4-3687 Less than AR 500,000 PRDC-1 PRM-W-Y Re-
Wire (Y/M/C/Bk) 30 minutes (100ppm) PRM-W-M place-
360,000 PRM-W-C ment
(80ppm) PRM-WIRE
-
[6] Primary Charging FL2-0464 Less than 4 500,000 PRDC-1 PRM-F-Y Re-
Wire Cleaning Pad FL2-4271 30 minutes (100ppm) PRM-F-M place-
(Y/M/C/Bk) 360,000 PRM-F-C ment
(Primary Charging (80ppm) PRM-F-K
Wire Cleaning Pad -
Holder,
Primary Charging
Wire Cleaning
Slider )
[7] Primary Charging FL0-0508 Less than 4 500,000 PRDC-1 GR-PAD-Y Re-
Assembly Grid 15 minutes (100ppm) GR-PAD-M place-
Plate Cleaning 360,000 GR-PAD-C ment
Pad (Y/M/C/Bk) (80ppm) GR-PAD-K
-
[8] Primary Charging - Less than 4 500,000 CLEANING - The operator CLEA Yes
Wire Cleaning Mo- 10 minutes (100ppm) cleans this NING
tor HP Sensors (Y/ 360,000 part when re-
M/C/Bk) (80ppm) placing the
- Primary
Charging As-
sembly
(Y/M/C/Bk)
with a blower.
*
• Upper
• Lower
381
Developing Assembly
Bk
C
M
Y
[1]
[2], [3]
ceme
[1] Dustproof Glass - Less than 5 4 100,000 CLEANING DP-GRS-Y Clean with dry CLEA Yes
(Y/M/C/Bk) minutes 100,000 DP-GRS-M lint-free paper. NING
DP-GRS-C If it is badly
DP-GRS soiled, clean
with lint-free
paper mois-
tened with al-
cohol.
[2] Developing As- FM1-A304 Less than 4 3,000,000 DRBL-1 DV-UNT-Y Re-
sembly (Y/M/C/Bk) 15 minutes - DV-UNT-M place-
DV-UNT-C ment
DV-UNT-K
382
ceme
[3] Developer 8537B Less than 4 3,000,000 DRBL-1 DV-MT-Y Re-
(Y/M/C/Bk) 8536B 45 minutes - DV-MT-M place-
8535B DV-MT-C ment
8534B DV-MT-K
*
• Upper
• Lower
383
ITB Unit (1/2)
[3]
[2]
[4] [1]
[7]
[9] [2] [1]
[8]
[5]
[4]
[6]
[5]
[6]
[5]
[7] [9]
384
ceme
[1] ITB FM3-1644 Less than 1 2,400,000 DRBL-1 TR-BLT Re- Yes
30 minutes 2,400,000 place-
ment
[2] Primary Transfer FC8-6852 Less than 4 1,000,000 DRBL-1 1TR-RL-Y Re- Yes
Roller (Y/M/C/Bk) 15 minutes 1,000,000 1TR-RL-M place-
1TR-RL-C ment
1TR-RL-K
[3] ITB Steering Roller FC7-1858 Less than 1 2,400,000 CLEANING ITB-IROL Clean with al- CLEA Yes
45 minutes 3,000,000 cohol and lint- NING
free paper.
Then, clean
with lint-free
paper mois-
tened with wa-
ter and wipe
away moisture
with dry lint-
free paper.
[4] ITB Idler Roller - Less than 2 2,400,000 CLEANING ITB-IROL Clean with al- CLEA Yes
45 minutes 3,000,000 cohol and lint- NING
free paper.
Then, clean
with lint-free
paper mois-
tened with wa-
ter and wipe
away moisture
with dry lint-
free paper.
[5] ITB Cleaning FC5-9156 Less than 2 2,000,000 DRBL-1 ITB-CLN1 Re- Yes
Brush Roller 30 minutes 2,000,000 place-
ment
[6] ITB Cleaning FC6-4910 Less than 2 2,000,000 DRBL-1 ITB-BLD1 Re- Yes
Blade 30 minutes 2,000,000 place-
ment
[7] Secondary Trans- FM1-A359 Less than 1 3,000,000 DRBL-1 2TR-INRL Re- Yes
fer Inner Roller 30 minutes 3,000,000 place-
Unit ment
[8] ITB Cleaning Unit FM1-A366 Less than 1 9,000,000 H-DRBL-1 ITBCLN-U Re- Yes
15 minutes 2,000,000 place-
ment
[9] Secondary Trans- FL0-0362 Less than 1 4,500,000 DRBL-1 2TR-E-GU Re-
fer Inlet Upper 10 minutes - place-
Guide ment
*
• Upper
• Lower
385
ITB Unit (2/2)
[7]
[9]
[3]
[8]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
ceme
[1] ITB Torque Limiter FE3-1826 Less than 1 1,500,000 DRBL-1 TRQ-LIMT Re-
15 minutes - place-
ment
[2] ITB Inner Surface FM2-2145 Less than 1 3,000,000 DRBL-1 ITB-SCRP Re- Yes
Cleaning Scraper 45 minutes 3,000,000 place-
Unit ment
[3] ITB Edge Sensor WG8-5830 Less than 1 2,400,000 CLEANING ITB-IROL Cleaning with CLEA Yes
45 minutes 3,000,000 a blower brush NING
386
ceme
[4] ITB HP Sensor FM1-G742 Less than 2 2,400,000 CLEANING ITB-IROL Cleaning with CLEA Yes
45 minutes 3,000,000 a blower brush NING
[5] Leading Edge FL2-2024 Less than 1 2,000,000 DRBL-1 PCH-S-T Re- Yes
Registration Patch 15 minutes 2,000,000 place-
Sensor Cleaning ment
Shutter
[6] Leading Edge FM2-9256 Less than 1 500,000 CLEANING TREG-SNS Clean with wa- CLEA Yes
Registration Patch 30 minutes 2,400,000 ter and lint- NING
Sensor free paper.
[7] Registration Patch FM0-1481 Less than 3 500,000 CLEANING REGP-SNS After cleaning CLEA Yes
Sensor (Front/ 15 minutes 500,000 with a Blower NING
Middle/Rear) Brush, clean
with lint-free
paper mois-
tened with wa-
ter.
[8] ITB Patch Sensor FK3-3203 Less than 3 500,000 CLEANING REGP-SNS After cleaning CLEA Yes
(Y/M/C) 15 minutes 500,000 with a Blower NING
Brush, clean
with lint-free
paper mois-
tened with wa-
ter.
[9] Registration Patch - Less than 1 500,000 CLEANING PCH-SHTR Clean with a CLEA Yes
Shutter 15 minutes 500,000 blower brush, NING
and then with
water and lint-
free paper.
*
• Upper
• Lower
387
Secondary Transfer Unit
[11]
[5] [4]
[1]
[8]
[3]
[8] [9] [9]
[12] [7]
[4]
[6]
[5]
[2]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[10]
388
ceme
[1] Secondary Trans- FL0-0359 Less than 1 1,000,000 CLEANING 2TR-EX-S Cleaning with CLEA Yes
fer Inlet Lower 10 minutes 500,000 lint-free paper NING
Guide moistened
with alcohol
The operator
cleans this
part when re-
placing the
Primary
Charging As-
sembly
(Y/M/C/Bk)
with a blower.
[2] Secondary Trans- FM1-A344 Less than 1 500,000 CLEANING 2TR-EX-S Cleaning with CLEA Yes
fer Outlet Separa- 10 minutes 500,000 lint-free paper NING
tion Guide moistened
with alcohol
[3] Secondary Trans- FM1-A345 Less than 1 9,000,000 H-DRBL-1 2TR-BL-U Re- Yes
fer Outer Belt Unit 10 minutes 3,000,000 place-
ment
[4] Secondary Trans- FE3-1953 Less than 1 3,000,000 DRBL-1 2TR-BLT Re-
fer Outer Belt 30 minutes - place-
ment
[5] Secondary Trans- FE4-6066 Less than 1 3,000,000 DRBL-1 2TR-ROLL Re-
fer Outer Roller 30 minutes - place-
ment
[6] Secondary Trans- FE4-6081 Less than 1 3,000,000 DRBL-1 2TR-SP Re-
Grounding Spring ment
1
[7] Secondary Trans- FE4-6082 Less than 1 3,000,000 DRBL-1 2TR-SP Re-
Grounding Spring ment
2
[8] Secondary Trans- FE4-6085 Less than 2 1,000,000 DRBL-1 2TRCL-RL Re-
fer Cleaning Brush 30 minutes - place-
Roller (Right)(Left) ment
[9] Secondary Trans- FC5-9426 Less than 2 1,000,000 DRBL-1 2TRCL-BL Re-
fer Bias Roller 30 minutes - place-
Cleaning Blade ment
[10] Secondary Trans- FL0-5503 Less than 1 1,000,000 DRBL-1 2TR-SIDS Re-
fer Cleaning Edge FL0-5504 15 minutes 1 - place-
Seal (Front) / Sec- ment
ondary Transfer
Cleaning Edge
Seal (Rear)
[11] Pre-fixing Feed - Less than 1 500,000 CLEANING 2TR-EX-S After cleaning CLEA
Sensor 1, Secon- 10 minutes 1 - with a Blower NING
dary Transfer Out- Brush, clean
let Sensor with lint-free
paper mois-
tened with al-
cohol.
[12] Secondary Trans- FL0-7716 Less than 1 1,000,000 DRBL-1 2TCLSCRP Re-
fer Scraper Sheet 15 minutes - place-
ment
389
• Upper
• Lower
Registration Feed Unit
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
ceme
[1] Cross-feed Roller FL2-4074 Less than 3 500,000 CLEANING SS-RG-RL Cleaning with CLEA Yes
Cleaning Member 15 minutes 500,000 a blower brush NING
Cross-feed Roller Less than 4,500,000 DRBL-1 CR-R-CLN Re-
Cleaning Member 10 minutes - place-
ment
[2] Cross-feed Roller FC5-9721 Less than 3 500,000 CLEANING SS-RG-RL Cleaning with CLEA Yes
15 minutes 500,000 lint-free paper NING
moistened
with alcohol
Cross-feed Roller Less than 4,500,000 DRBL-1 CR-RL Re-
15 minutes - place-
ment
390
ceme
[3] Pre-fixing Feed FC6-8098 Less than 8 500,000 CLEANING 2TR-FDPS Cleaning with CLEA Yes
Belt 10 minutes 500,000 lint-free paper NING
moistened
with alcohol
[4] Pre-fixing Feed FL3-2902 Less than 1 500,000 CLEANING BLT-BRSH Cleaning with CLEA
Belt Cleaning 10 minutes - a blower brush NING
Brush
*
• Upper
• Lower
391
Filter
[1]
[7]
[5] [4]
[2]
[6]
[8]
[3]
[9]
[8]
392
ceme
[1] Main Station Up- FC9-5783 Less than 5 3 1,000,000 PRDC-1 AR-FIL1 Re- Yes
per Left Suction minutes 1,000,000 place-
Filter ment
[2] Waste Toner Con- FM2-2058 Less than 5 1 50,000 DRBL-1 WST-TNR Re-
tainer minutes - place-
ment
[3] Main Station Rear FC7-4563 Less than 5 3 2,000,000 PRDC-1 OZ-FIL2 Re- Yes
Ozone Filter minutes 2,000,000 place-
(M/C/Bk) ment
[4] Main Station Rear FC9-6014 Less than 5 1 2,000,000 PRDC-1 OZ-FIL6 Re- Yes
Ozone Filter (Y) minutes 2,000,000 place-
ment
[5] Main Station Rear FB2-4383 Less than 5 4 500,000 PRDC-1 TN-FIL1 Re- Yes
Toner Filter minutes 500,000 place-
ment
[6] Main Station Up- FC9-6046 Less than 5 3 1,000,000 PRDC-1 AR-FIL4 Re- Yes
per Right Suction minutes 1,000,000 place-
Filter ment
[7] Sub Station Rear FC6-2035 Less than 5 1 500,000 CLEANING OZ-FIL-M Clean with wa- CLEA Yes
Middle Ozone Fil- minutes 500,000 ter and lint- NING
ter free paper.
Less than 5 2,000,000 PRDC-1 OZ-FIL4 Re- Yes
minutes 2,000,000 place-
ment
[8] Sub Station Ex- FC6-2035 Less than 5 3 500,000 CLEANING OZ-FIL-M Clean with wa- CLEA Yes
haust Duct Unit minutes 500,000 ter and lint- NING
Ozone Filter free paper.
Less than 5 2,000,000 PRDC-1 OZ-FIL3 When replac- Re- Yes
minutes 2,000,000 ing the Ozone place-
Filter, be sure ment
to clean the fil-
ter base
(FC6-8137)as
well.
[9] Power Unit Station FC6-3483 Less than 5 2 2,000,000 PRDC-1 OZ-FIL5 Re- Yes
Ozone Filter minutes 2,000,000 place-
ment
*
• Upper
• Lower
393
Primary Fixing Assembly (1/3)
[11]
[6]
[3] [5]
[2]
[7]
[4]
[3]
[10]
[1] [2]
[8]
[9]
ceme
[1] Primary Fixing FL1-1151 Less than 1 500,000 DRBL-1 FX-UP-RL Re- Yes
Roller 30 minutes 500,000 place-
ment
[2] Primary Fixing FE4-9405 Less than 2 1,000,000 DRBL-1 FX1-BUSH Re- Yes
Roller Insulating 30 minutes 1,000,000 place-
Bush ment
[3] Primary Fixing XG9-0419 Less than 2 3,000,000 DRBL-1 FX1-BEAR Re- Yes
Roller Bearing 30 minutes 3,000,000 place-
ment
394
ceme
[4] Primary Fixing FM1-A391 Less than 1 500,000 CLEANING FX1-THTS Cleaning with CLEA Yes
Roller Thermos- 30 minutes 500,000 lint-free paper NING
witch moistened
with alcohol
Primary Fixing Less than 1,000,000 PRDC-1 FX-TSW Re-
Roller Thermos- 30 minutes - place-
witch ment
[5] Primary Fixing FK2-6479 Less than 1 1,000,000 PRDC-1 FIX-TH1 Re-
Roller Main Ther- 30 minutes - place-
mistor ment
[6] Primary Fixing FK2-6478 Less than 1 500,000 CLEANING FX1-THTS Cleaning with CLEA Yes
Roller Sub Ther- 30 minutes 500,000 lint-free paper NING
mistor moistened
with alcohol
Primary Fixing Less than 1,000,000 PRDC-1 FIX-TH1 Re-
Roller Sub Ther- 30 minutes - place-
mistor ment
[7] Primary Fixing Re- FM1-T299 Less than 1 500,000 DRBL-1 FX-RF-RL Re- Yes
fresh Roller 15 minutes 500,000 place-
ment
[8] Primary Fixing De- FM3-2100 Less than 6 500,000 CLEANING FX1-THTS Cleaning with CLEA Yes
livery Lower Sepa- 10 minutes 500,000 lint-free paper NING
ration Claw moistened
with alcohol
Primary Fixing De- Less than 4,500,000 DRBL-1 EX-CREW1 Re-
livery Lower Sepa- 10 minutes - place-
ration Claw ment
[9] Primary Fixing In- FC7-4644 Less than 1 4,500,000 DRBL-1 FX1IN-RL Re-
ner Delivery Lower 15 minutes - place-
Roller ment
[10] Primary Fixing In- - Less than 1 500,000 CLEANING FX1-THTS Cleaning with CLEA Yes
ner Delivery Sepa- 10 minutes 500,000 lint-free paper NING
ration Air nozzle moistened
with alcohol
[11] Primary Fixing In- - Less than 1 500,000 CLEANING FX1-THTS Cleaning with CLEA
ner Delivery Lower 10 minutes - lint-free paper NING
Guide, Roller moistened
with alcohol
*
• Upper
• Lower
395
[9]
[10]
[8]
[6]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[7]
[4]
[3]
ceme
[1] Primary Fixing FE3-2344 Less than 1 500,000 DRBL-1 FX-WEB Re-
Web 15 minutes - place-
ment
[2] Primary Fixing Ex- FE3-1881 Less than 1 3,000,000 DRBL-1 F1-EX-BL Re-
ternal Heat Belt 30 minutes - place-
ment
[3] Primary Fixing Ex- XG9-0882 Less than 4 3,000,000 DRBL-1 F1-EX-BE Re-
ternal Heat Roller 30 minutes - place-
Bearing ment
396
ceme
[4] Primary Fixing Ex- FM1-N365 Less than 4 3,000,000 DRBL-1 F1-EX-BE Re-
ternal Heat Belt In- 30 minutes - place-
sulating Bush ment
[5] Primary Fixing Ex- FE3-8031 Less than 1 3,000,000 DRBL-1 FX-EX-C1 Re-
ternal Heat Clean- 15 minutes - place-
ing Roller ment
[6] Primary Fixing Ex- FK4-1411 Less than 1 1,000,000 PRDC-1 FXEX-TH1 Re-
ternal Heat Roller FK4-1412 30 minutes 1 - place-
Main Thermistor ment
(Upper), (Lower)
[7] Primary Fixing Ex- FM1-A379 Less than 1 1,000,000 PRDC-1 FX-EX-TS Re-
ternal Heat Upper 15 minutes - place-
Roller Thermos- ment
witch
[8] Primary Fixing Ex- FM1-A379 Less than 1 1,000,000 PRDC-1 FX-EX-TS Re-
ternal Heat Lower 15 minutes - place-
witch
[9] Primary Fixing As- FM1-A376 Less than 1 9,000,000 FIXING FX-CNT Re- Yes
sembly (200V)/ 10 minutes 500,000 place-
FM1-A467 ment
(240V)
[10] Primary Fixing Ex- FM1-A377 Less than 1 9,000,000 DRBL-1 FX-CNT Re- Yes
ternal Heat Belt (200V)/ 10 minutes 1,000,000 place-
Unit FM1-A411 ment
(240V)
*
• Upper
• Lower
397
[12]
[1]
[2]
[8]
[9]
[4]
[5]
[10]
[3]
[9]
[11] [8]
[6]
[10]
[7]
398
ceme
[1] Primary Fixing FM1-A385 Less than 1 9,000,000 H-DRBL-1 FX-BLT-U Re- Yes
Pressure Belt Unit (200V)/ 15 minutes 500,000 place-
FM1-A409 ment
(240V)
[2] Primary Fixing FL0-0358 Less than 1 500,000 DRBL-1 FX-BLT-U Re-
Pressure Belt 30 minutes - place-
ment
[3] Primary Fixing FL2-5453 Less than 1 500,000 DRBL-1 FX-LB-OR Lubrication Re-
Pressure Belt In- 30 minutes - place-
ner Oil Coating ment
Roller
[4] Primary Fixing FL2-6259 Less than 1 500,000 DRBL-1 FX-LB-PC Lubrication Re-
Pressure Pad Cov- ment
er
[5] Primary Fixing FL2-2648 Less than 1 500,000 DRBL-1 FX-LB-PD Re-
Pressure Pad ment
[6] Primary Fixing FC5-9766 Less than 1 3,000,000 DRBL-1 FX-LB-ST Re-
Steering Roller ment
[7] Primary Fixing FM1-N242 Less than 1 1,000,000 DRBL-1 FXBLT-B1 The following Re-
Pressure Belt 45 minutes - 4 parts are replace-
Bearing 1 Kit placed at the ment
same time as
a service kit.
- Primary Fix-
ing Pressure
Belt Bearing 1
x2
- Primary Fix-
ing Pressure
Belt Bushing x
2
- Washer x 2
- E-ring x 2
[8] Primary Fixing XG9-0407 Less than 2 1,000,000 DRBL-1 FXBLT-B1 Re-
Bearing 3 ment
Bearing 4 ment
Bearing 5 ment
[11] Primary Fixing FK2-3094 Less than 2 1,000,000 PRDC-1 FXLW-TH1 Re-
Pressure Belt Inlet 45 minutes - place-
Thermistor ment
[12] Primary Fixing In- - Less than 1 500,000 CLEANING FX1-THTS Cleaning with CLEA Yes
let Guide 30 minutes 500,000 lint-free paper NING
moistened
with alcohol
*
• Upper
• Lower
399
Secondary Fixing Assembly (1/3)
[11]
[6]
[5]
[3]
[2] [7]
[4]
[9]
[3]
[1] [2]
[8]
[10]
ceme
[1] Secondary Fixing FL1-1152 Less than 1 500,000 DRBL-1 FX2-UPRL Re- Yes
Roller 30 minutes 500,000 place-
ment
[2] Secondary Fixing FB4-3689 Less than 2 1,000,000 DRBL-1 FX2-BUSH Re- Yes
Roller Insulating 30 minutes 1,000,000 place-
Bush ment
[3] Secondary Fixing XG9-0419 Less than 2 3,000,000 DRBL-1 FX2-BEAR Re- Yes
Roller Bearing 30 minutes 3,000,000 place-
ment
400
ceme
[4] Secondary Fixing FM1-A391 Less than 1 500,000 CLEANING FX2-THTS Cleaning with CLEA Yes
Roller Thermos- 30 minutes 500,000 lint-free paper NING
witch moistened
with alcohol
Secondary Fixing Less than 1,000,000 PRDC-1 FX2-TSW Re-
Roller Thermos- 30 minutes - place-
witch ment
[5] Secondary Fixing FK2-6479 Less than 1 1,000,000 PRDC-1 FX2-TH1 Re-
Roller Main Ther- 30 minutes - place-
mistor ment
[6] Secondary Fixing FK2-6478 Less than 1 500,000 CLEANING FX2-THTS Cleaning with CLEA Yes
Roller Sub Ther- 30 minutes 500,000 lint-free paper NING
mistor moistened
with alcohol
Secondary Fixing Less than 1,000,000 PRDC-1 FX2-TH1 Re-
Roller Sub Ther- 30 minutes - place-
mistor ment
[7] Secondary Fixing FM1-T299 Less than 1 500,000 DRBL-1 FXRF-RL2 Re- Yes
Refresh Roller 15 minutes 500,000 place-
ment
Delivery Lower 10 minutes 500,000 lint-free paper NING
Separation Claw moistened
with alcohol
Secondary Fixing Less than 4,500,000 DRBL-1 EX-CREW2 Re-
Delivery Lower 10 minutes - place-
Separation Claw ment
Inner Delivery Up- 10 minutes 500,000 lint-free paper NING
per Separation moistened
Plate with alcohol
Secondary Fixing Less than 4,500,000 DRBL-1 FX2-SEPA Re-
Inner Delivery Up- 15 minutes - place-
per Separation ment
Plate
[10] Secondary Fixing FM1-K630 Less than 1 4,500,000 DRBL-1 FX2IN-RL Re-
Inner Delivery 15 minutes - place-
Lower Roller ment
[11] Secondary Fixing - Less than 1 500,000 CLEANING FX2-THTS Cleaning with CLEA
Inner Delivery 10 minutes - lint-free paper NING
Guide moistened
with alcohol
*
• Upper
• Lower
401
[9]
[10]
[8]
[6]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[7]
[4]
[3]
ceme
[1] Secondary Fixing FE3-2344 Less than 1 500,000 DRBL-1 FX2-WEB Re-
Web 15 minutes - place-
ment
[2] Secondary Fixing FE3-1881 Less than 1 3,000,000 DRBL-1 FX2-EXBL Re-
External Heat Belt 30 minutes - place-
ment
[3] Secondary Fixing XG9-0882 Less than 4 3,000,000 DRBL-1 F2-EX-BE Re-
External Heat Roll- 30 minutes - place-
er Bearing ment
402
ceme
[4] Secondary Fixing FM1-N365 Less than 4 3,000,000 DRBL-1 F2-EX-BE Re-
External Heat Belt 30 minutes - place-
Insulating Bush ment
[5] Secondary Fixing FE3-8031 Less than 1 3,000,000 DRBL-1 FX2-EXC1 Re-
External Heat 15 minutes - place-
Cleaning Roller ment
[6] Secondary Fixing FK4-1411 Less than 1 1,000,000 PRDC-1 FX2EXTH1 Re-
External Heat Roll- FK4-1412 30 minutes 1 - place-
er Main Thermistor ment
(Upper), (Lower)
[7] Secondary Fixing FM1-A379 Less than 1 1,000,000 PRDC-1 FX2-EXTS Re-
External Upper 15 minutes - place-
witch
[8] Secondary Fixing FM1-A379 Less than 1 1,000,000 PRDC-1 FX2-EXTS Re-
External Lower 15 minutes - place-
witch
[9] Secondary Fixing FM1-A396 Less than 1 9,000,000 FIXING FX-CNT2 Re- Yes
Assembly (200V)/ 10 minutes 500,000 place-
FM1-A468 ment
(240V)
[10] Secondary Fixing FM1-A377 Less than 1 9,000,000 DRBL-1 FX-CNT Re- Yes
External Heat Belt (200V)/ 10 minutes 1,000,000 place-
Unit FM1-A411 ment
(240V)
*
• Upper
• Lower
403
[7]
[6]
[9]
[8]
[3]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[1] [3]
ceme
[1] Secondary Fixing FL0-0515 Less than 1 500,000 DRBL-1 FX2-LWRL Re- Yes
Pressure Roller 30 minutes 500,000 place-
ment
[2] Secondary Fixing FM0-4206 Less than 2 1,000,000 DRBL-1 F2-PR-BS Re-
Pressure Roller In- 30 minutes - place-
sulating Bush ment
[3] Secondary Fixing XG9-0477 Less than 2 3,000,000 DRBL-1 F2-PR-BR Re-
Pressure Roller 30 minutes - place-
Bearing ment
404
ceme
[4] Secondary Fixing FM3-2876 Less than 1 500,000 DRBL-1 FX2-PRRF Re- Yes
Pressure Refresh 45 minutes 500,000 place-
Roller ment
[5] Secondary Fixing FL0-5521 Less than 1 500,000 DRBL-1 FX-RFCBL Re- Yes
Pressure Refresh 45 minutes 500,000 place-
Cleaning Roller ment
[6] Secondary Fixing FK2-6479 Less than 1 1,000,000 PRDC-1 FX2LWTH1 Re-
Main Thermistor ment
[7] Secondary Fixing FK2-6478 Less than 1 500,000 CLEANING FX2-THTS Cleaning with CLEA Yes
Pressure Roller 30 minutes - lint-free paper NING
Sub Thermistor moistened
with alcohol
The operator
cleans this
part when re-
placing the
Secondary
Fixing Pres-
sure Roller.
Secondary Fixing Less than 1,000,000 PRDC-1 FX2LWTH1 Re-
Sub Thermistor ment
[8] Secondary Fixing FM1-D361 Less than 1 9,000,000 PRDC-1 FX2-LWTS Re-
Thermoswitch ment
[9] Secondary Fixing - Less than 1 500,000 CLEANING FX2-THTS Cleaning with CLEA Yes
Inlet Guide 30 minutes 500,000 lint-free paper NING
moistened
with alcohol
*
• Upper
• Lower
405
Tandem Pass / Bypass Pass / Fixing Merging Pass Unit
[3]
[5]
[4]
[9]
[17]
[18] [10]
[19] [12]
[20] [11] [1]

[21]
[2]
[6]
[16] [7]
[13] [15] [8]

[14]
ceme
[1] Tandem Feed FE4-1199 Less than 1 1,000,000 CLEANING SBS-PPTH Cleaning with CLEA Yes
Roller 1 10 minutes lint-free paper NING
406
ceme
[1] Tandem Feed FE4-1199 Less than 1 1,000,000 CLEANING SBS-PPTH moistened CLEA Yes
Roller 1 10 minutes with alcohol NING
[2] Tandem Feed FE4-1199 Less than 1 1,000,000 CLEANING SBS-PPTH Cleaning with CLEA Yes
Roller 2 10 minutes 1,000,000 lint-free paper NING
moistened
with alcohol
[3] Tandem Slave FE8-1249 Less than 1 1,000,000 CLEANING SBS-PPTH Cleaning with CLEA Yes
moistened
with alcohol
[4] Tandem Slave FE8-1249 Less than 1 1,000,000 CLEANING SBS-PPTH Cleaning with CLEA Yes
moistened
with alcohol
[5] Tandem Guide - Less than 6 1,000,000 CLEANING SBS-PPTH Cleaning with CLEA Yes
10 minutes 1,000,000 lint-free paper NING
moistened
with alcohol
[6] Bypass Feed Roll- FE4-4455 Less than 1 1,000,000 CLEANING BYPS-DRL Cleaning with CLEA Yes
er 1 10 minutes 1,000,000 lint-free paper NING
moistened
with alcohol
moistened
with alcohol
moistened
with alcohol
[9] Bypass Slave Roll- FE8-1249 Less than 1 1,000,000 CLEANING BYPS-DRL Cleaning with CLEA Yes
moistened
with alcohol
moistened
with alcohol
moistened
with alcohol
[12] Bypass Guide - Less than 6 1,000,000 CLEANING BYPS-DRL Cleaning with CLEA Yes
moistened
with alcohol
[13] Fixing Merging FE4-5819 Less than 8 4,500,000 DRBL-1 JOIN-BLT Re-
Path Feed Belt 30 minutes - place-
ment
[14] Fixing Merging FC7-1597 Less than 1 1,500,000 CLEANING JOIN-RL Cleaning with CLEA
Unit Bypass De- 30 minutes - lint-free paper NING
curler Drive Roller moistened
with alcohol
[15] Fixing Merging FC7-1598 Less than 1 1,000,000 DRBL-1 B-DCR-RL Re-
Unit Bypass De- 30 minutes - place-
curler Slave Roller ment
[16] Fixing Merging FC7-1569 Less than 1 1,000,000 CLEANING JOIN-RL Cleaning with CLEA Yes
Pass Feed Belt 5minutes lint-free paper NING
Opposition Roller
407
ceme
[16] Fixing Merging FC7-1569 Less than 1 1,000,000 CLEANING JOIN-RL moistened CLEA Yes
Pass Feed Belt 5minutes with alcohol NING
Opposition Roller
[17] Tandem Feed FE4-5817 Less than 1 1,000,000 CLEANING JOIN-RL Cleaning with CLEA Yes
moistened
with alcohol
[18] Bypass Feed Roll- FE4-5818 Less than 1 1,000,000 CLEANING JOIN-RL Cleaning with CLEA Yes
moistened
with alcohol
[19] Tandem Feed FE8-1249 Less than 1 1,000,000 CLEANING JOIN-RL Cleaning with CLEA Yes
Slave Roller 3 10 minutes 1,000,000 lint-free paper NING
moistened
with alcohol
[20] Bypass Feed FE8-1249 Less than 1 1,000,000 CLEANING JOIN-RL Cleaning with CLEA Yes
Slave Roller 4 10 minutes 1,000,000 lint-free paper NING
moistened
with alcohol
[21] Fixing Merging - Less than 9 1,000,000 CLEANING JOIN-RL Cleaning with CLEA Yes
Guide 10 minutes 1,000,000 lint-free paper NING
moistened
with alcohol
*
• Upper
• Lower
408
Delivery Reverse Unit
[15]
[12] [11]
[15] [14] [17] [16] [16]
[8]
[17]
[1]
[2] [1]
[19]
[12]
[3] [9] [18]
[11] [18]
[2]
[3]
[10]
[14]
[4]
[4]
[13]
[9]
[5]
[5]
[7]
[7]
[6] [6]
409
ceme
[1] Delivery Roller 1 FC9-5909 Less than 1 1,000,000 CLEANING EX-DSWBK Cleaning with CLEA Yes
moistened
with alcohol
[2] Delivery Roller 2 FC9-5911 Less than 1 1,000,000 CLEANING EX-DSWBK Cleaning with CLEA Yes
moistened
with alcohol
[3] Delivery/Reverse FE3-2353 Less than 1 1,500,000 CLEANING EX-DSWBK Cleaning with CLEA Yes
Rear Roller 30 minutes 1,000,000 lint-free paper NING
moistened
with alcohol
moistened
with alcohol
moistened
with alcohol
[6] Duplex Reverse FC9-9464 Less than 1 1,500,000 CLEANING EX-DSWBK Cleaning with CLEA Yes
Roller 10 minutes 1,000,000 lint-free paper NING
moistened
with alcohol
[7] Duplex Reverse FC9-9464 Less than 1 1,500,000 CLEANING EX-DSWBK Cleaning with CLEA Yes
Rear Roller 10 minutes 1,000,000 lint-free paper NING
moistened
with alcohol
[8] Delivery Reverse FU6-0378 Less than 1 4,500,000 DRBL-1 EXIT-CL Re-
Unit One-way 10 minutes - place-
Clutch ment
[9] Delivery Reverse FL3-5095 Less than 2 1,000,000 DRBL-1 DCT-BRSH Re-
Unit Decurler 10 minutes - place-
Backup Roller ment
Cleaning Brush
[10] Color Sensor FE3-2028 Less than 1 4,500,000 DRBL-1 CSE-RL Re-
Sponge Roller 10 minutes - place-
ment
[11] Delivery Decurler - Less than 1 1,000,000 CLEANING EX-DSWBK Cleaning with CLEA Yes
Roller Opposition 15 minutes 1,000,000 lint-free paper NING
Roller 1 moistened
with alcohol
[12] Delivery Decurler - Less than 1 1,000,000 CLEANING EX-DSWBK Cleaning with CLEA Yes
Roller Opposition 15 minutes 1,000,000 lint-free paper NING
Roller 2 moistened
with alcohol
[13] Color Sensor Unit FM1-A312 Less than 4 1,500,000 CLEANING CL-SNS Cleaning with CLEA
15 minutes - a blower brush NING
[14] Delivery Decurler FC5-9904 Less than 1 2,000,000 DRBL-1 DCURL-RL Re-
Slave Roller 1 30 minutes - place-
ment
[15] Delivery Decurler FC5-9904 Less than 1 2,000,000 DRBL-1 DCURL-RL Re-
Slave Roller 2 45 minutes - place-
ment
[16] Delivery Slave FE8-1249 Less than 1 1,000,000 CLEANING EX-DSWBK Cleaning with CLEA Yes
moistened
with alcohol
410
ceme
[17] Delivery Slave FE8-1249 Less than 1 1,000,000 CLEANING EX-DSWBK Cleaning with CLEA Yes
moistened
with alcohol
[18] Delivery/Reverse FC9-5909 Less than 1 1,500,000 CLEANING EX-DSWBK Cleaning with CLEA Yes
Front Roller 30 minutes 1,500,000 lint-free paper NING
moistened
with alcohol
[19] Delivery/Reverse - Less than 5 1 1,000,000 CLEANING EX-DSWBK Cleaning with CLEA
Flapper Flag minutes - a blower brush NING
*
• Upper
• Lower
411
Duplex Decurler Unit
[1]
[2]
ceme
[1] Duplex Decurler FC7-4600 Less than 8 4,500,000 DRBL-1 DUP-BLT Re-
Unit Feed Belt 30 minutes - place-
ment
[2] Duplex Decurler FC7-1598 Less than 1 1,000,000 DRBL-1 B-DCR-RL Re-
Slave Roller 30 minutes - place-
ment
*
• Upper
412
• Lower
Options
No. Category Item Parts Q' Estimated life, Parts counter Con- Remark
Number ty Cleaning timing tents
iPR10000 iPR8000 sub minor
VP VP items items
1 Duplex Im- A Roller FC8-5577 1 80,000 80,000 DRBL-2 DF-PU-RL Replace-
age Read- ment
2 er-K1 Knurled B Roller FL2-9608 1 80,000 80,000 DRBL-2 DF-FD-RL Replace-
ment
3 Sponge C Roller FB2-7777 1 80,000 80,000 DRBL-2 DF-SP-RL Replace-
ment
4 Dust Collecting Sheet FC8-5633 2 80,000 80,000 DRBL-2 LNT-TAP1 Replace-
ment
5 Dust Collecting Sheet Type E FC8-5727 8 80,000 80,000 DRBL-2 LNT-TAP2 Replace-
ment
6 POD Deck- Attraction Solenoid FL2-1785 3 6,000,000 6,000,000 H-DBL- D1-U-SL Replace-
D1 A1 ment
7 POD Deck Pickup Roller (A) FL0-4500 1 1,000,000 1,000,000 DRBL-2 PD-PU-RL Replace-
Lite-C1 ment
8 Feed Roller (B) FC0-9450 1 1,000,000 1,000,000 DRBL-2 PD-SP-RL Replace-
ment
9 Separation Roller (C) FC0-9631 1 1,000,000 1,000,000 DRBL-2 PD-FD-RL Replace-
ment
10 Document Inserter Pickup Roller-Upper 4A3-3870 1 100,000 100,000 DRBL-2 IS-P-RL1 Replace-
Insertion ment
11 Unit-N1 Inserter Separation Roller- 4A3-3868 1 100,000 100,000 DRBL-2 IS-S-RL1 Replace-
Upper ment
12 Inserter Pickup Roller-Upper 4A3-3869 1 100,000 100,000 DRBL-2 IS-F-RL1 Replace-
ment
13 Inserter Torque Limiter-Up- 4A3-3888 1 1,000,000 1,000,000 DRBL-2 IS-TQLM1 Replace-
per ment
14 Inserter Pickup Roller-Lower 4A3-3870 1 100,000 100,000 DRBL-2 IS-CL1 Replace-
ment
15 Inserter Separation Roller- 4A3-3868 1 100,000 100,000 DRBL-2 IS-P-RL2 Replace-
Lower ment
16 Inserter Pickup Roller-Lower 4A3-3869 1 100,000 100,000 DRBL-2 IS-S-RL2 Replace-
ment
17 Inserter Torque Limiter-Low- 4A3-3888 1 1,000,000 1,000,000 DRBL-2 IS-F-RL2 Replace-
er ment
18 Inserter Electromagnetic 4H3-0290 1 1,000,000 1,000,000 DRBL-2 IS-TQLM2 Replace-
Clutch-Upper ment
19 Inserter Electromagnetic 4H3-0290 1 1,000,000 1,000,000 DRBL-2 IS-CL2 Replace-
Clutch-Lower ment
20 Reversal Solenoid FL2-7191 1 1,000,000 1,000,000 DRBL-2 IS-RV-SL Replace-
ment
21 Through-Feed Inlet Antistatic 4F8-0048 1 6,000,000 6,000,000 DRBL-2 IS-ELM1 Replace-
Needle ment
22 Through-Feed Outlet Anti- FL3-3418 1 6,000,000 6,000,000 DRBL-2 IS-ELM2 Replace-
static Needle ment
23 Finisher- Feed Belt FB5-9103 2 3,000,000 3,000,000 DRBL-2 SORT-2 Replace-
AN1 / Sad- ment
24 dle Finish- Stack Delivery Roller Static FE3-0006 1 3,000,000 3,000,000 DRBL-2 FIN-ERT Replace- Lower de-
er-AN2 Eliminator-K ment livery slot
(inside
Swing
Guide)
413
VP VP items items
25 Finisher- Upper Delivery Static Elimi- FC9-3038 1 3,000,000 3,000,000 DRBL-2 NON- Replace- Upper de-
AN1 / Sad- nator-N2 SORT ment livery slot
26 dle Finish- Inlet Static Eliminator FC9-1432 1 3,000,000 3,000,000 DRBL-2 SDL-STC1 Replace- Saddle
er-AN2 ment Feed Up-
per Guide
27 Saddle Intermediate Static FL3-2005 1 3,000,000 3,000,000 DRBL-2 SDL-STC3 Replace- Saddle
Eliminator ment Feed Up-
per Guide
28 Saddle Inlet Roller Static FC9-1393 2 3,000,000 3,000,000 DRBL-2 SDL-STC2 Replace- Saddle In-
Eliminator ment let
29 Saddle Feed Guide Lower FC9-1394 3 3,000,000 3,000,000 DRBL-2 SDL-STC4 Replace- Saddle
Static Eliminator ment Feed Up-
per Guide
30 Saddle Disengagement Roll- FL3-2010 2 1,000,000 1,000,000 DRBL-2 SDL-RL Replace- Disengage-
er ment ment
Sponge
Roller
31 Saddle Alignment Roller FC8-7495 4 5,000,000 5,000,000 DRBL-2 SDL-JRL Replace- Saddle
ment Alignment
Roller
32 Neat Paddle FL3-7459 4 3,000,000 3,000,000 DRBL-2 FN-PDL-U Replace- Upper and
ment lower deliv-
ery mouth
33 Belt Roller FC6-6148 2 6,000,000 6,000,000 DRBL-2 SORT-2N Replace-
ment
34 Stapler FM2-6541 1 500,000 500,000 DRBL-2 FIN-STPR Replace-
ment
35 Punch unit FE3-1671/ 1 1,000,000 1,000,000 DRBL-2 PUNCH Replace-
FE3-1672/ ment
FE3-1673
36 Booklet Cutter (Upper Blade) FC3-4391 1 500,000 500,000 DRBL-2 TRM-CUT1 Replace-
Trimmer- ment
37 D1 / Book- Cutter (Lower Blade) FC3-3043 1 500,000 500,000 DRBL-2 TRM-CUT2 Replace-
let Trim- ment
mer-F1
38 Two-Knife Cutter (Front Upper Blade) FC3-6269 1 500,000 500,000 DRBL-2 TRM-CUT3 Replace-
Booklet ment
39 Trimmer- Cutter (Lower Blade) FC3-6394 1 500,000 500,000 DRBL-2 TRM-CUT4 Replace-
A1 ment
40 Cutter (Rear Upper Blade) FC3-6270 1 500,000 500,000 DRBL-2 TRM-CUT5 Replace-
ment
41 Cutter (Lower Blade) FC3-6394 1 500,000 500,000 DRBL-2 TRM-CUT6 Replace-
ment
42 Perfect Trimming Blade Plate FM1-B633 1 11,000 11,000 DRBL-2 CUT-HLDR Replace-
Binder-E1 ment
43 Trimming Blade 4Y8-3057 1 40,000 40,000 DRBL-2 BND-CUT Replace-
ment
44 Flapper (Stack Rotation As- FL2-9852 1 13,000 13,000 DRBL-2 PB-FLAP Replace-
sembly) ment
45 Stack Thickness VR Sensor 4Y8-3092 1 50,000 50,000 DRBL-2 ST-DT-VR Replace-
ment
46 Torque Diode (Stack Rota- 4F3-0589 1 50,000 50,000 DRBL-2 TQ-DIOD Replace-
tion Assembly) ment
47 Torque Limiter (Stack Rota- XG9-0583 1 50,000 50,000 DRBL-2 PB-TQLM2 Replace-
tion Assembly) ment
48 Waste Paper Buffer Shift Mo- 4G3-2004 1 50,000 50,000 DRBL-2 WBF-MTR Replace-
tor ment
414
VP VP items items
49 Perfect Gripper Motor (Front/Rear) 4H3-0430 2 100,000 100,000 DRBL-2 GRIP-MTR Replace-
Binder-E1 ment
50 Waste Paper Wiper Plate 4F3-0592 1 40,000 40,000 DRBL-2 WPR-PLT Replace-
ment
51 Switchback Roller (Stacking FC9-2351 2 1,000,000 1,000,000 DRBL-2 SWBK-RL Replace-
Tray Assembly) ment
52 Corrugation Roller (Middle) 4G3-1167 1 1,000,000 1,000,000 DRBL-2 BND-COLL Replace-
ment
53 Corrugation Roller 4G3-1168 4 1,000,000 1,000,000 DRBL-2 BND-COLL Replace-
ment
54 Trail Edge Retaining Roller 4G3-1166 1 1,000,000 1,000,000 DRBL-2 BEHL-RL Replace-
Unit ment
55 Deodorizing Filters FC6-4242 3 1,000,000 1,000,000 DRBL-2 DEO-FIL Replace-
ment
56 Deodorizing Filter Unit (glue 4G3-1196 1 1,000,000 1,000,000 DRBL-2 DEO-FIL Replace-
vat) ment
57 Deodorizing Filters/Sheets 4Y3-0017 1 1,000,000 1,000,000 DRBL-2 DEO-FIL Replace-
ment
58 Torque Limiter (Cover Trans- FL3-1552 1 1,000,000 1,000,000 DRBL-2 PB-TQLM1 Replace-
port Assembly) ment
59 Static Eliminator Upper (Sig- 4A3-2770 2 2,000,000 2,000,000 DRBL-2 BND-STC1 Replace-
nature Delivery Assembly) ment
60 Static Eliminator Lower (Sig- 4A3-3512 2 2,000,000 2,000,000 DRBL-2 BND-STC2 Replace-
nature Delivery Assembly) ment
61 Static Eliminator (Stacking 4G3-1143 1 2,000,000 2,000,000 DRBL-2 BND-STC3 Replace-
Tray Assembly) ment
62 Static Eliminator (Cover 4A1-8890 2 2,000,000 2,000,000 DRBL-2 BND-STC4 Replace-
Transport Assembly Right ment
Upper)
Transport Assembly Right ment
Lower)
Transport Assembly Left) ment
Transport Assembly Delivery ment
Outlet)
66 Glue Vat Unit 4G3-1133 1 2,000 2,000 DRBL-2 HEATER Replace-
ment
67 Flapper (Stack Rotation As- 4A3-2317 2 40,000 40,000 DRBL-2 STR-SHT Replace-
sembly) ment
68 Press Plate FL2-9851 1 40,000 40,000 DRBL-2 PRS-PLT Replace-
ment
69 Static Eliminator (Stack Ro- 4A3-1134 4 40,000 40,000 DRBL-2 BND-STC5 Replace-
tation Assembly Inlet) ment
70 Cutter Base FM1-D206 1 40,000 40,000 DRBL-2 CUT-BASE Replace-
ment
71 Static Elimination Fab- FC9-2371 2 40,000 40,000 DRBL-2 BND-STC6 Replace-
ric(Right) (Stack Rotation As- ment
sembly Outlet)
72 Static Eliminator (Left) (Stack 4A3-2898 1 40,000 40,000 DRBL-2 BND-STC6 Replace-
Rotation Assembly Outlet) ment
73 Torque Diode (Stacking Tray 4F3-0589 1 50,000 50,000 DRBL-2 TQ-DIO2 Replace-
Assembly) ment
74 16T Gear (Stack Rotation FU5-0258 1 50,000 50,000 DRBL-2 STR-GR Replace-
Assembly) ment
415
VP VP items items
75 Perfect Slide Drive Shaft (Stack Ro- 4A3-2274 1 50,000 50,000 DRBL-2 SLD-SFT Replace-
Binder-E1 tation Assembly) ment
76 20T Gear (Aluminum) (Main 4S3-0372 2 50,000 50,000 DRBL-2 MNG-GR1 Replace-
Grip Assembly) ment
77 20T Gear (Resin) (Main Grip 4S3-0373 2 50,000 50,000 DRBL-2 MNG-GR1 Replace-
Assembly) ment
78 Paper Fold Front Lower Roller Drive FK2-4588 1 1,000,000 1,000,000 DRBL-2 PF-CL1 Replace-
Folding Clutch 1 ment
79 Unit-J1 Fold Front Lower Roller Drive FK2-4588 1 1,000,000 1,000,000 DRBL-2 PF-CL2 Replace-
Clutch 2 ment
80 Fold/Disengagement Sole- FM4-4117 1 1,000,000 1,000,000 DRBL-2 PF-RL-SL Replace-
noid ment
81 Through/Folding Branching FK2-4585 1 2,000,000 2,000,000 DRBL-2 PF-FL-SL Replace-
Flapper Solenoid ment
82 C-fold Stopper Solenoid FK2-4587 1 3,000,000 3,000,000 DRBL-2 PF-ST-SL Replace-
ment
83 C-fold Tray Branching Flap- FM3-2290 1 3,000,000 3,000,000 DRBL-2 PF-TR-SL Replace-
per Solenoid ment
84 Through-Feed Inlet Antistatic FL3-3406 1 6,000,000 6,000,000 DRBL-2 PF-ELM1 Replace-
Needle ment
85 Through-Feed Outlet Anti- FL3-3418 1 6,000,000 6,000,000 DRBL-2 PF-ELM2 Replace-
static Needle ment
86 High Ca- Flip Ring 107001213 4 1,000,000 1,000,000 DRBL-2 STK-FLIP Replace-
pacity 9 ment
Stacker-H1
416
4 Parts Replacement
and Cleaning
List of Parts ...................................... 418
Main Controller System.....................476
Laser Exposure System.................... 486
Image Formation System.................. 490
Fixing System....................................620
Pickup / Feed System....................... 756
External / Auxiliary System............... 848
Options..............................................869
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning
List of Parts
External / Internal Cover

■ Host Machine (Front Side)
[5]
[4]
[3]
[6]
[25]
[2]
[24] [1] [7]
[23]
[22]
[21]
[8]
[20]
[19]
[18]
[9]
[10]
[17]
[11]
[12]
[16] [13]
[14]
[15]
No. Parts Name No. Parts Name

[1] Controller Left Cover [14] Waste Toner Receptacle
[2] Controller Upper Front Cover [15] Sub Station Front Left Cover
[3] Main Station Upper Front Cover [16] Sub Station Left Lower Cover
[4] Toner Supply Left Cover [17] Sub Station Left Upper Cover
[5] Toner Supply Upper Cover [18] Sub Station Upper Front Cover
[6] Toner Replacement Outer Cover [19] Sub Station Upper Left Cover
[7] Main Station Front Upper Cover [20] Sub Station Upper Right Cover
[8] Main Station Front Right Cover [21] Main Power Switch Cover
[9] Main Station Front Right Lower Cover [22] Main Station Upper Left Filter Cover 1
[10] Right Deck [23] Main Station Upper Left Filter Cover 2
[11] Main Station Front Left Cover [24] Main Station Upper Left Filter Cover 3
[12] Left Deck [25] Main Station Upper Left Cover
[13] Sub Station Front Right Cover
418
■ Host Machine (Rear Side)

[38] [1]
[2]
[37]
[36] [3]
[35] [4]
[34]
[33] [5]
[32]
[31]
[6]
[30]
[7]
[29]
[8]
[28]
[9]
[10]
[22]
[11]
[27] [12]
[26]
[13]
[25]
[24] [14]
[23]
[22] [15]
[21]
[20] [16]
[19]
[18] [17]

[1] Reader Face Cover [20] Main Station Right Rear Cover
[2] Sub Station Upper Rear Cover [21] Vertical Path Rear Cover
[3] Fixing Filter Cover [22] Face Cover
[4] Sub Station Rear Cover 1 [23] Main Station Right Lower Cover
[5] Delivery Filter Cover [24] Vertical Path Lower Cover
[6] Sub Station Rear Cover 2 [25] Vertical Path Cover
[7] Sub-Station Rear Cooling Fan Cover 2 [26] Main-Station Right Front Cover 3
[8] Sub Station Rear Cover 3 [27] Vertical Path Front Cover
[10] Sub Station Rear Cover 4 [29] Main Station Right Middle Cover
[12] Main Station Rear Right Cover [31] Main Station Right Upper Cover
[13] Main Station Upper Rear Cover 1 [32] Toner Supply Right Filter Cover
[14] Main Station Rear Cover 1 [33] Toner Supply Right Cover
[15] Main Station Rear Cover 2 [34] Toner Supply Rear Cover
[18] Main Station Upper Rear Cover 2 [37] Controller Rear Cover 2
[19] Main Station Rear Left Cover [38] Controller Rear Cover 1
419
■ Power Unit Station

[1] [2] [3]
[8] [9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[4]
[5]
[13]
[6]
[7]

[1] Power Unit Station Rear Cover 1 [8] Air Pump Cooling Fan Cover 2
[2] Power Unit Station Rear Filter Cover [9] Sub-Station Exhaust Duct
[3] Air Pump Cooling Fan Cover 1 [10] Sub-Station Exhaust Duct Filter Cover 1
[4] Handle Protection Cover [11] Sub-Station Exhaust Duct Filter Cover 2
[5] Power Unit Station Rear Cover 2 [12] Sub-Station Exhaust Duct Filter Cover 3
[6] Power Unit Station Rear Auxiliary Cover [13] Cable Cover
[7] Power Unit Station Rear Cover 3
420
■ Inner Cover
[1]
[4]
[2]
[28]
[27] [3]
[26]
[25] [5]
[24]
[23]
[6]
[22]
[21] [7]
[20] [8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[19]
[12]
[13]
[18] [14]
[15]
[16]
[17]

[1] Toner Replacement Inner Cover [15] Sub Station Inner Cover 2
[2] Toner Supply Front Cover [16] Sub Station Duplex Inlet Cover
[3] Process Unit Cover [17] Delivery Reverse Cover 3
[4] Primary Charging Assembly Cover [18] Delivery Reverse Cover 5
[5] Intermediate Transfer Unit Cover [19] Delivery Reverse Cover 4
[6] Main Station Inner Right Lower Cover [20] Delivery Reverse Cover 2
[7] Lower Feed Cover [21] Delivery Reverse Cover 1
[8] Pre-registration Cover [22] Fixing Frame Cover
[9] Main Station Duplex Feed Cover [23] Fixing Merging Cover
[10] Fixing Feed Upper Cover [24] Secondary Fixing Front Lower Cover
[11] Fixing Feed Lower Cover [25] Secondary Fixing Front Upper Cover
[12] Fixing Feed Left Cover [26] Tandem Feed Cover
[13] Primary Fixing Front Lower Cover [27] Primary Fixing Front Upper Cover
[14] Sub Station Duplex Feed Cover [28] Sub Station Inner Cover 1
421
■ Lever
[1]
[2]
[3]
[3]
[4]

[1] Process Unit Cover Release Lever 1 [3] ITB Unit Cover Release Lever
[2] Process Unit Cover Release Lever 2 [4] ITB Frame Unit Release Lever
422
■ Long Sheet Tray-A1 (Option)
[1]
[3]
[2]
[5]
[4]

[1] Pickup Cover [4] Tray
[2] Side Guide Plate [5] Pickup Side Cover
[3] Alignment Tray
■ Upright Control Panel-F1 (Option)

[4]
[5]
[3]
[7] [6]
[2]
[8]
[1]
[9]
[10]
[11]

[1] Control Panel Front Cover [7] Hinge Upper Cover
[2] Clear Cover [8] Hinge Lower Cover
[3] Tally Lamp Lens [9] Arm Upper Cover
[4] Control Panel Rear Cover 2 [10] Arm Lower Cover
[5] Control Panel Rear Cover 3 [11] Control Panel Base Unit
[6] Control Panel Rear Cover 1
423
Main Unit
■ Main Station
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[6]
[5]
[8]
[7]
[12]
[11]
[15]
[10]
[9]
[14]
[13]
No. Parts Name Reference

[1] Hopper Unit (Y)
[2] Hopper Unit (M)
[3] Hopper Unit (C)
[4] Hopper Unit (Bk)
[5] Laser Scanner Unit (Y)
[6] Laser Scanner Unit (M)
[7] Laser Scanner Unit (C)
[8] Laser Scanner Unit (Bk)
[9] Process Unit (Y)
[10] Process Unit (M)
[11] Process Unit (C)
[12] Process Unit (Bk)
[13] Developing Assembly
[14] Drum Unit
[15] Primary Charging Assembly
424
[1]
[2]
[3]
[11]
[9]
[10]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]

[1] ITB Frame Unit
[2] ITB Unit
[3] Registration/Feed Unit
[4] Pre-registration Unit
[5] Registration Unit
[6] Main Station Duplex Feed Righit Unit
[7] Main Station Duplex Feed MiddleUnit
[8] Main Station Duplex Feed Left Unit
[9] Secondary Transfer Outer Belt Unit
[10] Pre-fixing Feed Righit Unit
[11] Pre-fixing Feed Left Unit
425
[5]
[6]
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]

[1] Right Deck
[2] Right Pickup Unit
[3] Left Deck
[4] Left Pickup Unit
[5] Vertical Path Unit
[6] Lower Feed Unit
426
■ Sub Station
[3]
[2]
[5]
[1]
[9]
[4]
[8]
[6]
[7]

[1] Primary Fixing Assembly
[2] Secondary Fixing Assembly
[3] Tandem Feed Unit
[4] Bypass Feed Unit
[5] Fixing Merging Path Unit
[6] Delivery/Reverse Unit
[7] Duplex Decurler Unit
[8] Sub Station Duplex Feed Left Unit
[9] Sub Station Duplex Feed Righit Unit
427
■ Power Unit Station
[2]
[1]

[1] Air Pump Unit
[2] Power Supply Cord Base Unit
428
Electrical Components
■ Solenoid
SL403
SL402
SL401
SL400

SL402 Drum Patch Sensor Shutter Solenoid (C) SL400 Drum Patch Sensor Shutter Solenoid (Y)
SL401 Drum Patch Sensor Shutter Solenoid (M) SL403 Drum Patch Sensor Shutter Solenoid (Bk)
429
SL800
SL601
SL603
SL701
SL703

SL701 Left Deck Pickup Solenoid SL601 Right Deck Pickup Solenoid
SL703 Left Deck Open/Close Solenoid SL800 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Solenoid
SL603 Right Deck Open/Close Solenoid
SL410
SL411
SL302
SL412 SL303
430

SL302 Primary Fixing Web Solenoid SL410 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Cooling Switch Sol-
enoid
SL303 Secondary Fixing Web Solenoid SL411 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Cooling Switch
Solenoid
SL412 Secondary Fixing Separation Claw Disengage-
ment Solenoid
SL420
No. Parts Name

SL420 Waste Toner Buffer Solenoid
431
■ Motor
M121
M140
M206
M115 M124
M126
M122
M139 M125
M205
M127 M118
M120
M116
M141 M119
M204
M133 M130
M132
M128
M142 M131
M203
M136
M138
M134
M137

M134 Drum Cleaning Motor (Y) M116 Drum Cleaning Motor (C)
M137 Sub Hopper Motor (Y) M119 Sub Hopper Motor (C)
M138 Toner Feed Motor (Y) M120 Toner Feed Motor (C)
M133 Developing Motor (Y) M115 Developing Motor (C)
M203 Developing Knock Motor (Y) M205 Developing Knock Motor (C)
M136 Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (Y) M118 Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (C)
M142 Drum Drive Motor (Y) M139 Drum Drive Motor (C)
M128 Drum Cleaning Motor (M) M122 Drum Cleaning Motor (Bk)
M131 Sub Hopper Motor (M) M125 Sub Hopper Motor (Bk)
M132 Toner Feed Motor (M) M126 Toner Feed Motor (Bk)
M127 Developing Motor (M) M121 Developing Motor (Bk)
M204 Developing Knock Motor (M) M206 Developing Knock Motor (Bk)
M130 Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M) M124 Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (Bk)
M141 Drum Drive Motor (M) M140 Drum Drive Motor (Bk)
432
M196 M192
M144
M197 M190
M143
M198 M191
M145
M195 M193
M146

M197 Hopper Motor (C) M198 Hopper Motor (M)
M190 Toner Container Slide Motor (C) M191 Toner Container Slide Motor (M)
M143 Toner Container Motor (C) M145 Toner Container Motor (M)
M196 Hopper Motor (Bk) M195 Hopper Motor (Y)
M192 Toner Container Slide Motor (Bk) M193 Toner Container Slide Motor (Y)
M144 Toner Container Motor (Bk) M146 Toner Container Motor (Y)
M180
M184
M179
M210
M314
M188 M183
M181
433

M183 Secondary Transfer Drive Motor M180 Drum Waste Toner Feed Motor
M184 Secondary Transfer Pressure Release Motor M179 Buffer Motor
M188 Pre-fixing Feed Drive Right Motor M314 Waste Toner Feed Motor
M181 Pre-fixing Feed Drive Left Motor M210 Secondary Transfer Waste Toner Ejection Motor
M172
M176
M177
M174
M173 M178
M175
M185
M186
M187

M174 Lower Feed Motor 3 M173 Lower Feed Motor 2
M172 Lower Feed Motor 4 M175 Lower Feed Motor 1
M177 Right Deck Feed Motor M187 Duplex Feed Motor 3
M176 POD Deck Path Feed Motor M186 Duplex Feed Motor 2
M178 Vertical Path Feed Motor M185 Duplex Feed Motor 1
434
M155
M111
M114
M109
M108

M109 ITB Drive Motor M155 Registration Patch Sensor Shutter Motor
M111 ITB Steering Motor M108 ITB Cleaning Motor
M114 Leading Edge Registration Patch Sensor Shutter
Motor
M156
M157
M161
M158
M160
M162
M166 M159
M169
M164
M165
M167 M400
M168
M171
M170

M156 Pre-registration Motor 1 M400 Cross-feed Angle Adjustment Motor
M157 Pre-registration Motor 2 M168 Cross-feed Motor
M158 Pre-registration Motor 3 M169 Cross-feed Release Right Motor
M159 Pre-registration Motor 4 M170 Cross-feed Release Middle Motor
M166 Registration Swing Motor M171 Cross-feed Release Left Motor
435

M160 Pre-registration Pressure Release Motor 1 M164 Registration Motor
M161 Pre-registration Pressure Release Motor 2 M165 Registration Release Motor
M162 Pre-registration Pressure Release Motor 3 M167 Cross-feed Push-on Plate Jogging Motor
M800
M602
M601
M603
M702
M701
M703

M800 Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Motor M702 Left Deck Pullout Motor
M602 Right Deck Pullout Motor M701 Left Deck Pickup Belt Motor
M601 Right Deck Pickup Belt Motor M703 Left Deck Lifter Motor
M603 Right Deck Lifter Motor
436
M105
M104
M106
M107

M104 Laser Scanner Motor (C) M106 Laser Scanner Motor (M)
M105 Laser Scanner Motor (Bk) M107 Laser Scanner Motor (Y)
M328
M330
M327
M329
M325
M331
M332

M329 Duplex Feed Motor 7 M332 Duplex Decurler Drive Motor
M330 Duplex Feed Motor 5 M325 Duplex Decurler Compression Distance Adjust-
ment Motor
M328 Duplex Feed Motor 4
437
M301
M302
M300
M338 M335
M306
M307
M304
M305
M303
M339 M336
M308

M303 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Pressure Motor M304 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Displacement Con-
trol Motor
M302 Primary Fixing Web Pressure Motor M338 Primary Fixing Refresh Roller Reciprocation Mo-
tor
M300 Primary Fixing Drive Motor M335 Primary Fixing External Heat Belt Displacement
Control Motor
M301 Primary Fixing External Heat Roller Pressure Mo- M308 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Pressure Motor
tor
M307 Secondary Fixing Web Pressure Motor M339 Secondary Fixing Refresh Roller Reciprocation
Motor
M305 Secondary Fixing Drive Motor M336 Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt Displace-
ment Control Motor
M306 Secondary Fixing External Heat Roller Pressure
Motor
438
M310
M309
M311
M312
M334
M333

M310 Tandem Feed Motor M312 Merging Path Feed Motor
M309 Fixing Flapper Motor M334 Bypass Decurler Drive Motor
M311 Bypass Feed Motor M333 Bypass Decurler Engagement/Disengagement
Motor
M316
M318
M323
M324
M315
M319
M337
M317
M320
M322
M321

M320 Delivery Reverse Motor M322 Duplex Reverse Rear Motor
M316 Delivery Decurler Compression Distance Adjust- M321 Duplex Reverse Motor
ment Motor 2
M318 Delivery Motor M323 Pre-delivery Feed Motor 1
439

M315 Delivery Decurler Compression Distance Adjust- M324 Pre-delivery Feed Motor 2
ment Motor 1
M337 Color Sensor Shutter Motor M317 Delivery Decurler Motor
M319 Delivery Reverse Flapper Motor
■ Fan
FM109
FM107
FM111
FM113

FM113 Process Unit Blowing Fan (Y) FM109 Process Unit Blowing Fan (Bk)
FM107 Process Unit Blowing Fan (C) FM111 Process Unit Blowing Fan (M)
440
FM115
FM130
FM424
FM120
FM121 FM425
FM137
FM134 FM135 FM428

FM425 Cross-feed Motor Cooling Fan FM120 Pre-fixing Feed Right Rear Fan
FM115 Pre-transfer Exhaust Fan FM121 Pre-fixing Feed Right Front Fan
FM130 Registration Feed Driver PCB Right Cooling Fan FM135 Secondary Transfer/Duplex Driver PCB Cooling
Fan
FM428 Secondary Transfer Motor Cooling Fan FM137 Pre-fixing Feed Left Rear Fan
FM424 Registration Motor Cooling Fan FM134 Pre-fixing Feed Left Front Fan
441
FM604
FM605
FM608 FM601
FM602
FM603
FM704
FM606
FM705
FM607
FM708 FM701
FM702
FM703
FM706
FM707

FM606 Right Deck Right Side Fan FM706 Left Deck Right Side Fan
FM607 Right Deck Left Side Fan FM707 Left Deck Left Side Fan
FM601 Right Deck Attraction Fan FM701 Left Deck Attraction Fan
FM602 Right Deck Separation Fan 1 FM702 Left Deck Separation Fan 1
FM603 Right Deck Separation Fan 2 FM703 Left Deck Separation Fan 2
FM605 Right Deck Air Flotation Fan 2 FM705 Left Deck Air Flotation Fan 2
442
FM401
FM110
FM400
FM108
FM112
FM114 FM143 FM140
FM407
FM406
FM405
FM163
FM403
FM404
FM402

FM140 Main Station Right Cooling Fan FM114 Process Unit Exhaust Fan (Y)
FM143 Main Station Power Unit Right Cooling Fan FM112 Process Unit Exhaust Fan (M)
FM163 Main Station Power Unit Left Cooling Fan FM108 Process Unit Exhaust Fan (C)
FM400 Main Station Right Middle Cooling Fan FM110 Process Unit Exhaust Fan (Bk)
FM401 Main Station Right Rear Cooling Fan FM405 Main Station Upper Cover Front Suction Fan
FM403 Main Station Exhaust Assist Fan FM406 Main Station Upper Cover Middle Suction Fan
FM402 Developing Assembly Left Front Cooling Fan (Y) FM407 Main Station Upper Cover Rear Suction Fan
FM404 Developing Assembly Cooling Fan (Y)
443
FM421
FM334
FM333
FM332
FM331
FM420

FM421 Primary Fixing Main Thermistor Cooling Fan FM332 Primary Fixing Separation Cooling Fan 2
FM420 Secondary Fixing Main Thermistor Cooling Fan FM333 Primary Fixing Separation Cooling Fan 3
FM331 Primary Fixing Separation Cooling Fan 1 FM334 Primary Fixing Separation Cooling Fan 4
FM357
FM358
FM360
FM359

FM357 Tandem Guide Upper Cooling Fan FM360 Bypass Guide Rear Cooling Fan
FM358 Tandem Guide Lower Cooling Fan FM359 Bypass Guide Front Cooling Fan
444
FM427
FM336 FM350

FM350 Delivery Decurler Cooling Fan FM336 Reverse Outer Delivery Cooling Fan
FM427 Delivery Feed Motor 2 Cooling Fan
FM327
FM328
FM326
FM409
FM408
FM354 FM310 FM314

FM362
FM355 FM312 FM381
FM319
FM338 FM313 FM337 FM320
FM315
FM318
FM423
FM415
FM414

FM326 Station Interval Cooling Fan 6 FM354 Main Station Upper Exhaust Fan
FM314 Secondary Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan FM355 Main Station Lower Exhaust Fan
445

FM362 Merging Guide Rear Fan FM338 Primary Fixing Belt Cooling Fan 5
FM381 Fixing Uneven Gloss Prevention Left Fan FM337 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Cooling Fan 5
FM319 Delivery Upper Cooling Fan FM315 Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Cooling Fan
FM320 Duplex Decurler Fan FM313 Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Cooling Fan
FM415 Sub Station Upper 24V Power Supply Cooling Fan FM312 Primary Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan
FM423 38V Power Supply B/C Cooling Fan FM409 Station Interval Cooling Fan 2
FM414 Sub Station Lower 24V Power Supply Cooling Fan FM328 Station Interval Cooling Fan 8
FM318 Delivery Lower Cooling Fan FM327 Station Interval Cooling Fan 7
FM408 Station Interval Cooling Fan 1 FM310 Primary Fixing Power Unit Cooling Fan
FM412
FM411
FM422
FM417
FM418
FM410
FM419
FM416

FM412 24V Power Supply Upper Cooling Fan FM417 Main Station Rear Upper Cooling Fan
FM411 24V Power Supply Middle Cooling Fan FM418 Main Station Rear Lower Cooling Fan
FM410 24V Power Supply Lower Cooling Fan FM419 Compressor Cooling Fan
FM422 38V Power Supply A Cooling Fan FM416 13V Power Supply Cooling Fan
446
FM502
FM500
FM501

FM501 Controller Cooling Fan 2 FM500 Main Controller Cooling Fan 1
FM502 HDD Cooling Fan
■ Sensor
PS182 PS224
PS232
PS179 PS228 PS404

PS227
TS125
PS177 PS230 PS403 PS114

PS229 PS243
TS126 TS102 PS115
PS187 PS226 PS402 PS111
PS225 PS242
TS124 TS100 PS112
PS401 PS117
PS241
TS129 TS104 PS118
PS120
PS240
TS106 PS121

PS120 Drum Patch Sensor (Y) PS111 Drum Patch Sensor (C)
447

TS129 Developing Toner Density Sensor (Y) TS126 Developing Toner Density Sensor (C)
PS226 Drum Encoder Sensor A (Y) PS228 Drum Encoder Sensor A (C)
PS401 Patch Sensor Shutter Solenoid Sensor (Y) PS403 Patch Sensor Shutter Solenoid Sensor (C)
PS187 Drum HP Sensor (Y) PS179 Drum HP Sensor (C)
PS225 Drum Encoder Sensor B (Y) PS227 Drum Encoder Sensor B (C)
PS240 Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor HP Sensor PS242 Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor HP Sensor
(Y) (C)
PS121 Toner Feed Screw HP Sensor (Y) PS112 Toner Feed Screw HP Sensor (C)
TS106 Sub Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1 (Y) TS100 Sub Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1 (C)
PS117 Drum Patch Sensor (M) PS114 Drum Patch Sensor (Bk)
TS124 Developing Toner Density Sensor (M) TS125 Developing Toner Density Sensor (Bk)
PS230 Drum Encoder Sensor A (M) PS224 Drum Encoder Sensor A (Bk)
PS402 Patch Sensor Shutter Solenoid Sensor (M) PS404 Patch Sensor Shutter Solenoid Sensor (Bk)
PS177 Drum HP Sensor (M) PS182 Drum HP Sensor (Bk)
PS229 Drum Encoder Sensor B (M) PS232 Drum Encoder Sensor B (Bk)
PS241 Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor HP Sensor PS243 Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor HP Sensor
(M) (Bk)
PS118 Toner Feed Screw HP Sensor (M) PS115 Toner Feed Screw HP Sensor (Bk)
TS104 Sub Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1 (M) TS102 Sub Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1 (Bk)
TS136
PS203
TS137
TS134
PS219
TS135 PS204 PS128
PS124
TS132
PS207
TS133 PS201 PS127
PS123
TS130
PS218
TS131 PS213 PS129
PS125
PS216 PS130
PS126

PS216 Toner Container Slide Sensor 2 (Y) PS201 Toner Container Slide Sensor 2 (C)
PS218 Toner Container Slide Sensor 1 (Y) PS219 Toner Container Slide Sensor 1 (C)
PS126 Toner Container Sensor (Y) PS123 Toner Container Sensor (C)
PS130 Hopper Cover Sensor (Y) PS127 Hopper Cover Sensor (C)
TS130 Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1 (Y) TS134 Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1 (C)
TS131 Hopper Toner Level Sensor 2 (Y) TS135 Hopper Toner Level Sensor 2 (C)
PS213 Toner Container Slide Sensor 2 (M) PS204 Toner Container Slide Sensor 2 (Bk)
PS207 Toner Container Slide Sensor 1 (M) PS203 Toner Container Slide Sensor 1 (Bk)
PS125 Toner Container Sensor (M) PS124 Toner Container Sensor (Bk)
PS129 Hopper Cover Sensor (M) PS128 Hopper Cover Sensor (Bk)
TS132 Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1 (M) TS136 Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1 (Bk)
448

TS133 Hopper Toner Level Sensor 2 (M) TS137 Hopper Toner Level Sensor 2 (Bk)
TS128
PS167
PS166
PS205
PS172
PS920
PS200
TS301
TS300
PS328
PS329

PS172 Pre-fixing Feed Sensor 1 TS300 Waste Toner Full Sensor 2
PS167 Secondary Transfer Pressure Release HP Sensor PS329 Waste Toner Cover Switch Sensor
PS205 Secondary Transfer Pressure Release Motor Po- PS328 Waste Toner Container Sensor
sition Sensor
PS200 Pre-fixing Feed Sensor 2 PS920 Secondary Transfer Outer Belt Rotation Sensor
TS128 Waste Toner Buffer Full Sensor PS166 Secondary Transfer Outlet Sensor
TS301 Waste Toner Full Sensor 1
449
PS220
PS164
PS162
PS214 PS163
PS210
PS231 PS217
PS174
PS161 PS212
PS169
PS170 PS160
PS171

PS231 Lower Feed Guide Open/Close Sensor PS174 Vertical Path Cover Open/Close Sensor
PS160 Left Deck Merging Sensor PS220 POD Deck Path Sensor
PS161 Lower Feed Sensor 1 PS212 Lower Feed Path Paper Length Sensor (Left
Front)
PS210 Lower Feed Path Paper Length Sensor (Left Rear) PS217 Lower Feed Path Paper Length Sensor (Right
Front)
PS214 Lower Feed Path Paper Length Sensor (Right PS171 Duplex Standby Sensor 3
Rear)
PS162 Lower Feed Sensor 2 PS170 Duplex Standby Sensor 2
PS163 Right Deck Merging Sensor PS169 Duplex Standby Sensor 1
PS164 Vertical Path Sensor
450
PS136
PS904
PS135
PS133
PS902
PS903
PS134
PS100
PS101
PS104
PS110
PS102
PS105
PS221
PS222 PS223

PS903 ITB Patch Sensor (M) PS105 Leading Edge Registration Sensor Shutter HP
Sensor
PS135 Registration Patch Sensor (Middle) PS102 ITB HP Upper Sensor
PS904 ITB Patch Sensor (C) PS101 ITB HP Lower Sensor
PS136 Registration Patch Sensor (Rear) PS100 ITB Edge Sensor
PS902 ITB Patch Sensor (Y) PS110 Leading Edge Registration Patch Sensor
PS134 Registration Patch Sensor (Front) PS222 ITB Drive Roller Encoder Sensor B
PS223 ITB Drive Roller HP Sensor PS133 Registration Patch Sensor Shutter HP Sensor
PS221 ITB Drive Roller Encoder Sensor A PS104 ITB Steering Motor HP Sensor
PS137
PS143 PS138
PS146 PS139
PS209 PS144 PS142
PS140
PS150 PS149 PS141
PS147 PS400
PS151
PS152
PS154 PS153
451

PS146 Registration Front Sensor PS142 Cross-feed Pressure Release Motor HP Sensor 1
PS149 Cross-feed Push-on Plate HP Sensor PS139 Pre-feed Sensor 1
PS400 Cross-feed Angle HP Sensor PS138 Transparency Sensor (Front)
PS154 Cross-feed Roller Pressure Release HP Sensor 3 PS137 Transparency Sensor (Rear)
PS153 Cross-feed Roller Pressure Release HP Sensor 2 PS144 Cross-feed Pressure Release Motor HP Sensor 3
PS152 Cross-feed Roller Pressure Release HP Sensor 1 PS147 Registration Roller Release HP Sensor 1
PS141 Pre-feed Sensor 3 PS150 Registration Roller Slide HP Sensor
PS140 Pre-feed Sensor 2 PS151 Registration Sensor
PS143 Cross-feed Pressure Release Motor HP Sensor 2 PS209 Registration Rear Sensor
PS801
PS800 PS173
PS610
PS611
PS614
PS604
PS602
PS601
PS613
PS605
PS607 PS616 PS603
PS710 PS609
PS714 PS606
PS711 PS704 PS615 PS612
PS702
PS701
PS713
PS705
PS707 PS703
PS709
PS706
PS712
PS716
PS715

PS707 Left Deck Open/Close Sensor PS612 Right Deck Lifter Lower Limit Sensor
PS713 Left Deck Foreign Particle Sensor PS616 Right Lower Trailing Edge Sensor 2
PS712 Left Deck Lifter Lower Position Sensor PS610 Right Deck Level Sensor (Right)
PS716 Left Lower Trailing Edge Sensor 2 PS614 Right Deck Lifter Upper Limit Sensor
PS710 Left Deck Level Sensor (Right) PS605 Right Deck Middle Paper Surface Sensor
PS714 Left Deck Lifter Upper Limit Sensor PS603 Right Deck Upper Limit Paper Surface Sensor
PS705 Left Deck Middle Paper Surface Sensor PS601 Right Deck Pullout Sensor
PS703 Left Deck Upper Limit Paper Surface Sensor PS606 Right Deck Suction End Senor
PS701 Left Deck Pullout Sensor PS609 Right Deck Supply Position Sensor
PS706 Left Deck Suction End Senor PS604 Right Deck Lower Limit Paper Surface Sensor
PS709 Left Deck Supply Position Sensor PS602 Right Deck Paper Sensor
PS704 Left Deck Lower Limit Paper Surface Sensor PS611 Right Deck Level Sensor (Left)
PS702 Left Deck Paper Sensor PS615 Right Lower Trailing Edge Sensor 1
PS711 Left Deck Level Sensor (Left) PS800 Multi-purpose Tray Paper Path Sensor
PS715 Left Lower Trailing Edge Sensor 1 PS801 Multi-purpose Tray Last Paper Sensor
PS607 Right Deck Open/Close Sensor PS173 Multi-purpose Tray Open/Close Sensor
PS613 Right Deck Foreign Particle Sensor
452
PS367
PS350
PS345
PS368 PS346
PS347
PS366
PS344
PS343

PS347 Duplex Standby Sensor 6 PS367 Duplex Right Open/Close Sensor
PS346 Duplex Standby Sensor 5 PS366 Duplex Inlet Guide Open/Close Sensor
PS345 Duplex Standby Sensor 4 PS343 Duplex Decurler HP Sensor
PS350 Duplex Path Sub Station Outlet Sensor PS344 Duplex Path Inlet Sensor
PS368 Duplex Left Open/Close Sensor
PS306
PS382
PS309
PS905
PS906 PS311
PS907
PS352
PS305
PS301
PS307
PS300
PS303
PS314 PS302 PS304
PS308
PS383
PS318
PS908
PS909 PS320
PS313 PS910
PS317
PS917 PS315
PS316
PS312
453

PS305 Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 1 PS317 Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 2
PS906 Primary Fixing External Heat Belt Position Front PS917 Secondary Fixing Separation Claw HP Sensor
Sensor
PS907 Primary Fixing External Heat Belt Position Rear PS311 Primary Fixing Web Absence Advance Notice
Sensor Sensor
PS909 Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt Position PS905 Primary Fixing External Heat Belt HP Sensor
Front Sensor
PS312 Secondary Fixing Inlet Sensor PS314 Secondary Fixing External Heat Roller HP Sensor
PS315 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller HP Sensor PS320 Secondary Fixing Web Absence Advance Notice
Sensor
PS316 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Pressure Sen- PS908 Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt HP Sensor
sor
PS910 Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt Position PS352 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Displacement Retry
Rear Sensor Sensor
PS309 Primary Fixing Web HP Sensor PS301 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Position Front Sen-
sor
PS306 Primary Fixing External Heat Roller HP Sensor PS304 Primary Fixing Inlet Sensor
PS382 Primary Fixing Refresh Roller HP Sensor PS308 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Displacement HP
Sensor
PS318 Secondary Fixing Web HP Sensor PS300 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt HP Sensor
PS383 Secondary Fixing Refresh Roller HP Sensor PS302 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Position Rear Sen-
sor
PS307 Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor 2 PS303 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Pressure Sensor
PS362
PS324
PS326
PS327
PS364 PS363 PS322
PS353 PS325 PS323

PS365
PS321

PS362 Tandem Guide Open/Close Sensor PS323 Bypass Sensor 2
PS324 Flapper HP Sensor PS325 Merging Path Upper Sensor
PS327 Tandem Sensor 2 PS321 Merging Path Lower Sensor
PS326 Tandem Sensor 1 PS364 Merger Upper Guide Open/Close Sensor
PS322 Bypass Sensor 1 PS365 Merger Lower Guide Open/Close Sensor
PS363 Bypass Guide Open/Close Sensor PS353 Bypass Decurler Engagement/Disengagement
Motor HP Sensor
454
PS333
PS360
PS337
PS338 PS342
PS332 PS339
PS334
PS361
PS335
PS900 PS914
PS336 PS341
PS340

PS333 Delivery Decurler HP Sensor 2 PS342 Delivery/Reverse Front Sensor
PS360 Delivery Upper Guide Open/Close Sensor PS334 Delivery Reverse Flapper HP Sensor
PS332 Delivery Decurler HP Sensor 1 PS335 Delivery Reverse Sensor 1
PS900 Roller Engagement/Disengagement Sensor PS914 Color Sensor Shutter HP Sensor
PS361 Reverse Guide Open/Close Sensor PS341 Duplex Reverse Rear Sensor
PS339 Delivery Sensor 3 PS336 Delivery Reverse Sensor 2
PS338 Delivery Sensor 2 PS340 Duplex Reverse Sensor
455
PS175
PS176

PS175 Main Station Front Right Cover Open/Close Sen- PS176 Main Station Front Left Cover Open/Close Sensor
sor
PS370 PS330
PS915
PS916
PS369
PS381
PS918
PS919 PS331
456

PS330 Sub Station Right Front Cover Open/Close Sen- PS919 Reverse Remaining Paper Sensor (Right)
sor
PS915 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Cooling HP Sensor PS918 Reverse Remaining Paper Sensor (Left)
PS916 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Cooling HP PS370 Secondary Fixing Assembly Lever Sensor
Sensor
PS369 Primary Fixing Lever Sensor PS381 Reverse Outer Delivery Lever Sensor
PS331 Sub Station Left Front Door Open/Close Sensor
■ Heater
THM103
THM102
LED103
H101
LED113
THM101
LED102
H100
LED112
THM100
LED101
H102
LED111
LED100
H103
LED110

H101 Drum Heater (Bk) H102 Drum Heater (M)
THM103 Drum Thermistor (Bk) THM101 Drum Thermistor (M)
LED103 Pre-exposure LED (Bk) LED101 Pre-exposure LED (M)
LED113 Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Bk) LED111 Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (M)
H100 Drum Heater (C) H103 Drum Heater (Y)
THM102 Drum Thermistor (C) THM100 Drum Thermistor (Y)
LED102 Pre-exposure LED (C) LED100 Pre-exposure LED (Y)
LED112 Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (C) LED110 Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Y)
457
H601
THM601
H701 H602
THM701
H702

H702 Left Deck Heater H602 Right Deck Heater
H701 Left Air Heater H601 Right Air Heater
THM701 Right Deck Floatation Air Thermistor THM601 Left Deck Floatation Air Thermistor
TP303 THM302
M THM303
THM302
S2 M
THM302
S1
THM303
S2
THM303
THM304 S1
THM301 TP302
H308
H307
TP300
H306
TP301
H305
THM300
S
THM300
M

THM302S2 Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub H308 Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Heater
Thermistor 2
458

TP303 Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Ther- H305 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Heater
moswitch
THM304 Primary Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor THM303S2 Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub
Thermistor 2
THM301 Primary Fixing Roller Main Thermistor THM302S1 Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub
Thermistor 1
TP300 Primary Fixing Roller Thermoswitch THM303S1 Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub
Thermistor 1
TP302 Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Ther- THM303M Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Ther-
moswitch mistor
TP301 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Thermoswitch THM300M Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Main Thermistor
H307 Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Heater THM300S Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Sub Thermistor
H306 Primary Fixing Roller Heater THM302M Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub
Thermistor
TP307 THM308
M
THM308 THM307
S2 M
THM308
THM307 S1
S2
THM307
S1
THM309
H302 TP306
THM306 H301
TP304
H300
THM310
TP305
THM311
H303

THM309 Secondary Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor TP306 Secondary Fixing External Upper Roller Thermos-
witch
THM306 Secondary Fixing Roller Main Thermistor TP305 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Thermoswitch
TP304 Secondary Fixing Roller Thermoswitch H301 Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller
Heater
H300 Secondary Fixing Roller Heater H302 Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller
Heater
THM310 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Main Thermis- THM307S2 Secondary Fixing External Upper Roller Sub Ther-
tor mistor 2
THM311 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Sub Thermistor THM308S1 Secondary Fixing External Lower Roller Sub Ther-
mistor 1
H303 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Heater THM307S1 Secondary Fixing External Upper Roller Sub Ther-
mistor 1
THM308S2 Secondary Fixing External Lower Roller Sub Ther- THM308M Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Thermistor
mistor 2
459

TP307 Secondary Fixing External Lower Roller Thermos- THM307M Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Thermistor
witch
ELB503
ELB500
ELB501
ELB1

ELB500 Breaker ELB1 External Operation Handle
ELB501 Leakage Relay ELB503 Breaker
460
■ Switch
SW102
SW101
SW103
SW104

SW104 Hopper Cover Switch (Y) SW101 Hopper Cover Switch (C)
SW103 Hopper Cover Switch (M) SW102 Hopper Cover Switch (Bk)
SW116
SW109
SW110
SW300

SW116 Vertical Path Cover Open/Close Switch SW300 Waste Toner Ejection Lock Switch
461

SW110 Transfer Waste Toner Lock Switch SW109 Drum Waste Toner Lock Switch
SW113
SW603
SW602
SW703
SW702

SW602 Right Deck Lifter Lower Limit Switch SW703 Left Deck Interlock Switch
SW603 Right Deck Interlock Switch SW113 Multi-purpose Tray Cover Open/Close Switch
SW702 Left Deck Lifter Lower Limit Switch
462
SW111 SW120
SW112
SW108

SW111 Main Station Front Right Cover Switch SW108 Main Power Switch
SW112 Main Station Front Left Cover Switch SW120 Drum Heater Interlock Switch
SW304 SW302
SW303
SW301
463

SW302 Sub Station Right Front Door Switch SW301 Sub Station Left Front Door Switch
SW303 Primary Fixing Lever Switch SW304 Secondary Fixing Lever Switch
SW500
SW107
SW106

SW500 Breaker Test Switch SW106 Deck Heater Switch
SW107 Environment Switch
464
■ PCB
UN186
UN207
UN185 UN164
UN206
UN192
UN184 UN163
UN926
UN208 UN930
UN408
UN191
UN183 UN162
UN925
UN209 UN929
UN407
UN193
UN161
UN924
UN928
UN406
UN194
UN923
UN927
UN405

UN929 Primary Charging Contact PCB B (C) UN192 Toner Blocking High Voltage PCB (Bk)
UN407 Developing Temperature/Humidity Sensor PCB UN164 Process Unit Driver PCB (Bk)
(C)
UN191 Toner Blocking High Voltage PCB (C) UN186 Drum Surface Temperature Sensor (Bk)
UN163 Process Unit Driver PCB (C) UN207 Potential Sensor (Bk)
UN185 Drum Surface Temperature Sensor (C) UN925 Primary Charging Contact PCB A (C)
UN206 Potential Sensor (C) UN930 Primary Charging Contact PCB B (Bk)
UN193 Toner Blocking High Voltage PCB (M) UN408 Developing Temperature/Humidity Sensor PCB
(Bk)
UN162 Process Unit Driver PCB (M) UN926 Primary Charging Contact PCB A (Bk)
UN184 Drum Surface Temperature Sensor (M) UN928 Primary Charging Contact PCB B (M)
UN208 Potential Sensor (M) UN406 Developing Temperature/Humidity Sensor PCB
(M)
UN194 Toner Blocking High Voltage PCB (Y) UN924 Primary Charging Contact PCB A (M)
UN161 Process Unit Driver PCB (Y) UN927 Primary Charging Contact PCB B (Y)
UN183 Drum Surface Temperature Sensor (Y) UN405 Developing Temperature/Humidity Sensor PCB
(Y)
UN209 Potential Sensor (Y) UN923 Primary Charging Contact PCB A (Y)
465
UN168
UN912
UN913
UN911
UN167
UN166
UN910
UN254
UN165
UN909
UN253
UN252
UN251

UN253 Hopper Switch PCB (C) UN252 Hopper Switch PCB (M)
UN911 Toner Container ID Read Sensor (C) UN910 Toner Container ID Read Sensor (M)
UN913 Toner Container Driver PCB UN166 Hopper Driver PCB (M)
UN167 Hopper Driver PCB (C) UN251 Hopper Switch PCB (Y)
UN254 Hopper Switch PCB (Bk) UN909 Toner Container ID Read Sensor (Y)
UN912 Toner Container ID Read Sensor (Bk) UN165 Hopper Driver PCB (Y)
UN168 Hopper Driver PCB (Bk)
UN159
UN115
UN150
UN217 UN219
UN113 UN114
UN112
UN116
UN148
UN149

UN113 Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (M) UN114 Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (C)
466

UN217 ITB Driver PCB (Middle) UN159 Registration Patch Sensor Driver PCB
UN115 Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (Bk) UN148 ITB Cleanig High Voltage PCB (Upstream)
UN112 Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (Y) UN149 ITB Cleanig High Voltage PCB (Downstream)
UN116 Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB UN219 ITB Driver PCB (Right)
UN179
UN123
UN122
UN104
UN100
UN972
UN971
UN108
UN106

UN123 Double Feed Sensor PCB (Reception) UN106 Secondary Transfer/Duplex Driver PCB
UN100 Registration Feed Driver PCB (Left) UN108 Secondary Transfer Static Elimination High Volt-
age PCB
UN104 Registration Feed Driver PCB (Right) UN971 Secondary Transfer Cleanig HV PCB (+)
UN122 Double Feed Sensor PCB (Transmission) UN972 Secondary Transfer Cleanig HV PCB (-)
UN179 Paper Thickness Sensor
467
UN800
UN603
UN602
UN601
UN604
UN703
UN702
UN701

UN703 Left Deck Pickup Driver PCB UN601 Right Deck Indicator Driver PCB
UN603 Right Deck Pickup Driver PCB UN602 Right Deck Driver PCB
UN800 Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Sensor PCB UN701 Left Deck Indicator Driver PCB
UN604 Right Receptacle Environment Sensor PCB UN702 Left Deck Driver PCB
UN956
UN960
UN964
UN955
UN959 UN968
UN963
UN954
UN958 UN967
UN962
UN953
UN957 UN966
UN961
UN965

UN957 Laser Scanner Relay PCB (Y) UN959 Laser Scanner Relay PCB (C)
UN965 BD PCB (Y) UN967 BD PCB (C)
468

UN961 APC-PD PCB (Y) UN963 APC-PD PCB (C)
UN953 Laser Driver PCB (Y) UN955 Laser Driver PCB (C)
UN958 Laser Scanner Relay PCB (M) UN960 Laser Scanner Relay PCB (Bk)
UN966 BD PCB (M) UN968 BD PCB (Bk)
UN962 APC-PD PCB (M) UN964 APC-PD PCB (Bk)
UN954 Laser Driver PCB (M) UN956 Laser Driver PCB (Bk)
UN142 UN131
UN132
UN411
UN412 UN130
UN102
UN129
UN107 UN410
UN101
UN141
UN409
UN921 UN105
UN198
UN103
UN124

UN102 Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB UN141 Environment Sensor 1
UN103 DC Controller Power Supply PCB UN130 Potential Measurement PCB (M)
UN105 Vertical Path/Lower Feed Driver PCB UN142 Environment Sensor 2
UN412 Potential Measurement Relay PCB (Bk) UN132 Potential Measurement PCB (Bk)
UN411 Potential Measurement Relay PCB (C) UN131 Potential Measurement PCB (C)
UN129 Potential Measurement PCB (Y) UN101 Environment Heater Driver PCB
UN409 Potential Measurement Relay PCB (Y) UN921 Pick-up Option Communication Driver PCB
UN107 Fixing Feed Driver PCB UN198 DC Controller PCB 1-1
UN410 Potential Measurement Relay PCB (M) UN124 DC Controller PCB 1-2
469
UN128
UN127
UN126
UN136
UN125
UN140
UN135
UN139
UN134
UN138
UN133
UN137

UN139 Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage PCB UN136 Developing High Voltage PCB (Bk)
(C)
UN135 Developing High Voltage PCB (C) UN134 Developing High Voltage PCB (M)
UN127 Drum Driver PCB (C) UN133 Developing High Voltage PCB (Y)
UN128 Drum Driver PCB (Bk) UN138 Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage PCB
(M)
UN126 Drum Driver PCB (M) UN137 Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage PCB
(Y)
UN125 Drum Driver PCB (Y) UN140 Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage PCB
(Bk)
470
UN304
UN316
UN305
UN317
UN903
UN902
UN901
UN900
UN310
UN904

UN317 Secondary Fixing Inner Driver PCB UN900 Color Sensor Unit 1 (Bk)
UN316 Primary Fixing Inner Driver PCB UN901 Color Sensor Unit 2 (Y)
UN304 Primary Fixing Outer Driver PCB UN902 Color Sensor Unit 3 (M)
UN305 Secondary Fixing Outer Driver PCB UN903 Color Sensor Unit 4 (C)
UN904 Color Sensor Control PCB UN310 Reverse/Outer Delivery Driver PCB
471
UN917
UN916
UN306
UN918
UN311 UN307
UN528
UN527
UN534 UN402
UN533
UN529 UN920

UN306 Primary Fixing Heater Driver PCB UN917 Primary Fixing Refresh Air Cleaning Blow Valve
Unit
UN307 Secondary Fixing Heater Driver PCB UN918 Secondary Fixing Refresh Air Cleaning Blow
Valve Unit
UN311 Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB UN533 38V Power Supply PCB B
UN402 Fixing Relay PCB UN528 24V Power Supply PCB I
UN920 Delivery Option Communication Driver PCB UN529 24V Power Supply PCB J
UN534 38V Power Supply PCB C UN527 24V Power Supply PCB H
UN916 Air Separation Blow Valve Unit
472
UN525
UN524
UN523
UN522
UN521
UN520
UN503
UN531
UN931
UN530
UN801

UN503 3.3V All-night Power Supply PCB UN521 24V Power Supply PCB B
UN931 Compressor Driver PCB UN531 12V Power Supply PCB B
UN801 Deck Heater Relay PCB Unit UN522 24V Power Supply PCB C
UN524 24V Power Supply PCB E UN520 24V Power Supply PCB A
UN525 24V Power Supply PCB F UN530 12V Power Supply PCB A
UN401
UN532
UN915
UN400
UN506
UN914
UN504
473

UN504 AC Filter Unit UN400 Power Unit Relay PCB
UN914 Air Pump UN915 Air Pressure Release Solenoid Valve Unit
UN401 Power Unit Limiter PCB UN506 AC Filter
UN532 38V Power Supply PCB A
[8]
[6]
[7]
[5]
[3]
[13]
[2]
[1]
[9]
[14]
[10]
[12]
[4]
[11]

[1] Main Controller PCB 1 [8] COUNTER PCB
[2] TPM PCB [9] Memory PCB (1GB)
[3] FLASH PCB [10] HDD1
[4] Memory PCB (512MB) [11] Laser Interface PCB
[5] Riser PCB [12] ECO PCB
[6] Main Controller PCB 2 [13] Open Interface Board (Normal)
[7] SRAM PCB [14] Open Interface Board (EFI)
474
[1]
[6]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]

[1] CPU PCB [4] LED Driver PCB
[2] Numeric Keypad PCB [5] Volume PCB
[3] Sub Key Switch PCB [6] TALLY PCB
475
3. Remove the Controller Left Inner Cover [1].

Main Controller System • 2 Screws [2]
Replacing the Main Controller 2x

PCB 1 [2]
■ Pre-preparation
1. “Actions before Replacement” on page 893 [1]
2. “Actions after Replacement” on page 893
■ Disassembling the Main Controller [2]

PCB 1
NOTE:
When assembling the Controller Left Inner Cover, be sure
to store the handle [1] of the Main Controller PCB 1 in the
[A] part of the Controller Left Inner Cover to install the
cover.
1. Open the Controller Left Cover [1]. [A]
[1] [1]
2. Open the HDD Cover [1]. 4. Disconnect the connector [1] of the Control Panel
• 1 Screw [2] Communication Cable.
1x 1x
[1]
[1]
[2]
476
5. Remove the Main Controller PCB 1 [1].

NOTE:
• 2 Screws [2] • When replacing the Main Controller PCB 1, be sure
to transfer the TPM PCB [1], FLASH PCB [2], Memory
PCB [3] and DIP Switch PCB [4] that are installed on
2x [2] the old Main Controller PCB to the new one.
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3] [4]
• When installing the Main Controller PCB 1, be sure

to turn over the 2 Lock Levers [1] and the handle [2],
and push in the Main Controller PCB 1 [3] with both
hands to secure it.
[1]
[2]
[3]
Replacing the VIDEO PCB

■ Disassembling the VIDEO PCB
477
1. Open the Controller Left Cover [1]. 5. Remove the Reader Cable Member [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
2. Remove the Controller Rear Cover 1 [2].
• 1 Boss [3]
• 3 Screws (Brack) [3]
• 1 Hook [4]
[3]
3x
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
3. Remove the Controller Rear Cover 2 [1]. 1x
[3]
4x
[2]
[1]
[2]
6. Disconnect the Reader Communication Cable [1].
• 1 Connector [2]
• 2 Wire Saddles [3]
• 4 Edge Saddles [4]
[2]
[2]
4. Remove the Controller Rear Cover 3 [1]. 1x
[1]
4x
[2]
6x
[2]
[3]
NOTE:
When the Image Reader Unit is installed, perform steps 5
and 6. [3]
[4]
[1]
[4]
478
7. Remove the Controller Box Cover [1]. 8. Remove the Controller Box Rear Cover [1].
• 8 Screws [2] • 1 Connector [2]
• 6 Hooks [3] • 4 Wire Saddles [3]
• 4 Screws [4]
[2] [2] • 4 Hooks [5]
[3] [3] [2]
8x
CAUTION:
When disassembling/assembling, do not deform the
Grounding Spring [A].
[2] [1]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[A]
1x [2]
4x
[4]
4x
[1]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[5] [3] [5] [3] [5]
479
9. Disconnect the 4 VIDEO Communication Cables [1]. 11. Remove the VIDEO PCB [1].
• 8 Connectors [2] • 10 Screws [2]
• 1 Edge Saddle [4]
10x
8x
[1]
6x [2]
[2] [2]
[4] [2] [2]
[3]
Replacing the HDD
[1] [3]
■ Pre-preparation
10. Disconnect the 9 connectors [1], remove the 3 Wire
Saddles [2] (remove from the plate) and the 2 Edge 1. “Actions before Replacement ” on page 893
Saddles [3], and then move the harness [4].
9x ■ Disassembling the HDD

[1]
[1] CAUTION:
[1] [1]
Be careful not to drop the HDD.
1. Open the Controller Left Cover [1].
5x [1]
[2]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[4]
480
2. Open the HDD Case Cover [1]. 5. Remove the HDD Case [1].
• 1 Screw [2] • 4 Screws with washers [2]
[2]
1x
4x
[1]
[1]
[2] [2]
[2]
3. Pull out the HDD Unit [1].

6. Remove the HDD Plug Fixation Plate [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
• 2 Pins [3]
[2]
2x
[3]
[1]
[1]
4. Remove the HDD Case Cover [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
2x
[2]
[1]
481
7. Disconnect the Conversion Connector [1]. 3. “Moving the Toner Supply Assembly (when the POD
Deck is not connected)” on page 611
4. “ Moving the Toner Supply Assembly (when the POD

Deck is connected)” on page 612
■ Disassembling the Main Controller

PCB 2
[1]
NOTE:
Assembling the HDD
1. Be sure that there is no gap between the HDD [1] and NOTE:
the [A] part of the Conversion Connector [2]. When the Image Reader Unit is installed, execute steps 1
and 2.
[1]
1. Remove the Reader Cable Member [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
• 1 Boss [3]
• 1 Hook [4]
[4]
[1]
1x
[2]
[3]
[2]
[A] [A]
[A] [A]
Replacing the Main Controller

PCB 2
■ Pre-preparation
1. “Actions before Replacement” on page 893
2. “Disassembling the Main Station Front Upper

Cover” on page 856
482
2. Disconnect the connector [2] of the Reader 4. Remove the Interface PCB [1].
Communication Cable [1]. • 7 Screws (TP) [2]
• 2 Screws (Binding) [3]
• 1 Connector [4]
1x
[2] CAUTION:
When disassembling/assembling, do not deform the
Grounding Spring [A].
[1]
3. Remove the Main Controller PCB 2 Unit [1]. [A]

• 2 Screws [2]
[1]
2x
[2]
7x 1x
[2] [2]
[4] [2]
[2]
[1]
2x
[3]
483
3. When Replacing the DC Controller PCB 1-1

NOTE:
• When replacing the Main Controller PCB 2, be sure
“How to Replace the Parts” on page 895
to transfer the COUNTER PCB [1] and the Memory “Before Replacement” on page 895
PCB [2] that are installed on the old Main Controller “After Replacement” on page 895
PCB to the new one.
4. When Replacing the DC Controller PCB 1-2
[1] [2] “How to Replace the Parts” on page 896
“Prohibited Operation” on page 896
■ Disassembling the DC Controller

PCB
(DC Controller PCB 1-1 / DC Controller PCB 1-2)
• When installing the Main Controller PCB 2, be sure

to turn over the 2 Lock Levers [1] and the handle [2],
and push in the Main Controller PCB 2 [3] with both
hands to secure it. 1. Remove the DC Controller Cover [1].
• 9 Screws [2]
[1] • 2 Hooks [3]
[2] 9x
[1]
[3] [3]
[2]
2. Remove the Connector Plate [1].

• 1 connector [2]
• 1 Screws (M3x6) [3]
• 2 Screws (M2.6x6) [4]
[3]
1x [2]
3x
Replacing the DC Controller

PCB [3]
■ Pre-preparation [1] [4]
1. “Detaching the Power Unit Station” on page 859
2. “Disassembling the Main Station Rear Covers” on

page 861
484
3. Remove the DC Controller PCB 1-2 [1].

• Disconnect all the connectors [2].
• 8 Screws [3]
[2] [3]
8x
[1]
4. Remove the DC Controller PCB 1-1 [1].

• Disconnect all the connectors [2].
• 8 Screws [3]
8x [2] [3]
[1]
485
2. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly Cover [1].

Laser Exposure System • 1 Claw [2]
• 1 Hook [3]
Dustproof Glass (Y/M/C/Bk) [2]

1x
Cleaning Procedure
■ Cleaning the Dustproof Glasses
(Y/M/C/Bk)
[3] [1]
NOTE:
This procedure describes the procedure for the Dustproof
Glass (Bk). be sure to perform the same procedure for the
Dustproof Glasses (Y/M/C) as well.
[Y] [M] [C] [Bk]
1. Open the Main Station Front Right Cover [1] and the
Main Station Front Left Cover [2].
[2] [1]
486
3. Remove the Dustproof Glass Unit [1]. 5. Wipe the recess [A] on the back of the Dustproof
Glass with dry lint-free paper [1].
CAUTION:
Be sure to pull it out slowly so as not to damage the CAUTION:
surface of the Dustproof Glass. Be sure to leave no unwiped areas at the edge [B] on
the back of the Dustproof Glass.
[1]
[A] [1]
[A] [B]
CAUTION:
• When installing the Dustproof Glass Unit, slowly
push it into the machine with the mark (UP) [1] up.
Replacing the Laser Scanner

Units (Y/M/C/Bk)
■ Pre-preparation
[1]
In the case of Laser Scanner Unit (M/C/Bk), perform steps

2 or 3.
2. “Moving the Toner Supply Assembly (when the POD


4. When Replacing the Laser Scanner Units

“1. Moire adjustment” on page 896
“<How to see the chart for moire adjustment>” on page
897
4. Wipe the front and back glass surfaces [A] of the “2. Adjustment of the Leading Edge Right Angle (Based
Dustproof Glass with dry lint-free paper. on an Assumption That the Right Angle Accuracy of the
Paper Is Correct) (Perform only when replacing the M-
color Laser Scanner Unit)” on page 897
CAUTION:
“<Adjustment Procedure>” on page 898
If it is badly soiled, wipe it with lint-free paper moistened
with alcohol; and then, wipe it with dry lint-free paper.
■ Replacing the Laser Scanner Units
[A]
(Y/M/C/Bk)
487
NOTE: CAUTION:
This procedure shows the steps to be taken in the case of When assembling the Dustproof Glass, slowly push the
Laser Scanner Unit (Y). Perform the same procedure for Dustproof Glass into the machine with the mark [1] (up)
the Laser Scanner Units (M/C/Bk). up, taking care not to damage the surface of the
[Bk] Dustproof Glass.
[C]
[M]
[Y]
[1]
CAUTION:
Do not disassemble the Laser Scanner Unit because it
has been adjusted before assembly.
NOTE:
1. Pull out the Dustproof Glass [1]. When removing the Laser Scanner Units (Y/M), be sure to
remove each of the plates attached to the top rear of the
Laser Scanner Unit (See Step 2).
CAUTION:
Be sure to pull it out slowly so as not to damage the
surface of the Dustproof Glass.
2. Remove the plate [1] corresponding to either Y or M-
color Laser Scanner Unit that is to be removed.
• 1 Screw [2]
[1] [M]
[1] [Y]
1x
[2]
[1]
[2]
488
3. Remove the Laser Scanner Unit [1].

CAUTION:
• 4 Connectors [2]
• When installing/removing the Laser Scanner Unit,
• 1 Wire Saddle [3]
be sure to hold the 2 [A] parts with both hands.
• 3 Screws [4]
CAUTION: [A]
• Do not remove the screw [2] as the Positioning Pin
[1] of the Laser Scanner Unit has been adjusted
and assembled.
[2]
[A]
[1]
• After removing the Laser Scanner Unit, be sure to
cover the Photosensitive Drum [1]with a sheet of
paper [2] to prevent it from being exposed to light.
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
4x
1x
[2] [2]
3x
[4]
[4]
[1]
489
2. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly Cover [1].

Image Formation System • 1 Claw [2]
• 1 Hook [3]
Replacing the Primary [2]

1x
Charging Assemblies (Y/M/C/Bk)
■ Pre-preparation
1. “When Replacing the Primary Charging Wire” on
page 898
■ Disassembling the Primary

Charging Assemblies (Y/M/C/Bk)
[3] [1]
NOTE:
This procedure describes the procedure for the Primary
Charging Assembly (Bk). be sure to perform the same
procedure for the Primary Charging Assemblies (Y/M/C)
as well.
[Y] [M] [C] [Bk]
[2] [1]
490
3. Release the lever [1], and pull out the Primary • Do not touch the grid [A] of the Primary Charging
Charging Assembly [2]. Assembly.
CAUTION:
Points to Note when Removing Primary Charging
Assembly (Y/M/C/Bk)
[A]
Since E060 error (Primary Charging Wire error) may
be displayed or black line may appear on an image due
to deformation of installed parts, note the following
points when handing the Primary Charging Assembly
(Y/M/C/Bk).
• When holding the Primary Charging Assembly, do
not hold the center of the Shield Plate [1] of the
assembly.
• Be sure to hold the handle [A].
[1]
NOTE:
The color of the Primary Charging Assembly is identified
by the color of the label [3].
[1]
[3]
[A]
[2]
• Be sure to place the Primary Charging Assembly

on a sheet of paper [1] with the grid [A] side facing
up.
[1]
[A]
[1]
[A]
491
• Be sure to check that the 2 Claws [4] of the Primary

CAUTION: Charging Assembly Grid Plate Cleaning Pad [3]
• When installing the Primary Charging Assembly, are
check that there is clearance [A] between the fitted in the 2 notches [2] of the Primary Charging
Shutter Sheet [1] and the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Plate Cleaning Pad Holder [1].
Assembly Grid Plate [3] and the Leaf Spring [2] is
not deformed. [3]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2] [1] [2] [1]
[2]
[A]
[3] [3]
[4] [2]
492
1. Clean the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor HP

NOTE:
Sensor [1] using the blower [2].
• Install the Primary Charging Assembly while aligning
the protrusion [1] of the Primary Charging Assembly
with the mark [2] on the machine and the [A] part of
the Primary Charging Assembly with the rail [B] on
the machine.
[1]
[2] [1]
[B]
[2]
Replacing the Primary

Charging Assembly Grid Plate (Y/
[A] M/C/Bk)
■ Pre-preparation
1. “ Disassembling the Primary Charging Assemblies
(Y/M/C/Bk)” on page 490
Replacing the Primary 2. “When Replacing the Primary Grid Plate” on page
899
Charging Wire Cleaning Motor HP
Sensors (Y/M/C/Bk) ■ Disassembling the Primary
Charging Assembly Grid Plate
■ Pre-preparation (Y/M/C/Bk)
■ Cleaning the Primary Charging Wire

Cleaning Motor HP Sensors
(Y/M/C/Bk)
NOTE:
This procedure describes the steps for the Primary
Charging Wire Cleaning Motor HP Sensor (Bk). be sure to
perform the same procedure for the Primary Charging
Wire Cleaning Motor HP Sensors (Y/M/C) as well.
493
1. Place the Primary Charging Assembly [3] with the

CAUTION: Shutter Arm [1] and the Cleaning Pad Arm [2] on the
• Do not touch the surface [A] of the Primary front side.
Charging Assembly Grid Plate [1].
• Do not bend the Primary Charging Assembly Grid
Plate [1].
[3]
[A]
[1]
[1]
[2]
NOTE:
Point to check when replacing the Primary Charging
Assembly Grid Plate
Be sure to use a Primary Charging Assembly Grid Plate 2. Move the Shutter Arm [1] and the Cleaning Pad Arm
having notches [A] for letting the Primary Charging
[2] until they stop.
Assembly Grid Plate Cleaning Pads protrude through the
notches. • 2 Screws [3] (to loosen)
• 4 Bosses [4]
[A]
494
• When moving the Shutter Arm [1] and the

CAUTION: Cleaning Pad Arm [2], do not put too much force
• Be sure not to place the Grid Plate [A] with its in the direction of the arrow [A]. The Primary
upside down when performing the work to prevent Charging Assembly Grid Plate Cleaning Pad [4]
the Leaf Spring [B] of the shutter from deformation may come off from the Primary Charging
when loosening the 2 yellow screws [1] securing Assembly Grid Plate Cleaning Pad Holder [3],
the Shutter Arm and the Cleaning Pad Arm. resulting damage on the Charging Wire [5].
[1] [1]
[2]
[A]
[A]
[1]
[A]
[1]
• When opening and closing the Shutter Arm [1] and [4]
the Cleaning Pad Arm [2] manually, be sure not to [5]
pull them in the direction of the arrow [A] strongly.
When they pass through the [B] part of the Primary
Charging Assembly Grid Plate [3], they may
damage the Primary Charging Assembly Grid
[3]
Plate [3], Shutter Sheet [4] and Leaf Spring [5].
[B]
[1]
[2]
[3] [4] [5] [1]

[2]
[A]
[3]
[4]
2x [3]
[4]
[4]
3. Move the Shutter Arm [1] further until it stops, and

secure it.
• 1 Screw [2]
• 2 Bosses [3]
495
CAUTION:
• When removing the Shutter Sheet [1], releasing
just one Shutter Hook [2] and lifting up a part of the
sheet may cause deformation of the Leaf Spring
[3] on the back of the sheet. Therefore, do not
release the Shutter Hooks [2] one at a time.
[1]
[3]
[1]
1x
[2]
[3]
[3]
[2]
4. Place the Primary Charging Assembly with its grid • Be sure to push the Claws [3] of the Shutter Hooks
[A] side facing up, and remove the Shutter Sheet [2] [2] with your fingers when installing/removing the
from the Shutter Slider [1]. Shutter Sheet [1].
• 2 Claws [3]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[1]
496
CAUTION:
[A]
Before removing the Primary Charging Assembly Grid
Plate, be sure to check that the 2 [A] parts of the
Primary Charging Assembly Grid Plate Cleaning Pad
are fitted in the notches [B] of the Primary Charging
Assembly Grid Plate.
[3]
2x
[3]
[B] [A] [A]

[2]
[B]
[A] [A]
[1]
5. Press the lever [1] and remove the Primary Charging

Assembly Grid Plate [2].
• 2 Hooks [3]
497
CAUTION: NOTE:
Do not touch the Primary Charging Wire [1]. Assembling the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Plate
1. Install the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Plate [1]
[1] with the [A] part pointed downward.
[1]
[1] [3]
[1] [A]
[1]
[A]
[2]
2. After installing the Primary Charging Assembly Grid
Plate [1], check that the 2 [C] parts of the Primary
Charging Assembly are fitted in the 2 holes [B] on the
Primary Charging Assembly Grid Plate [1].
3. The 2 [D] parts of the Primary Charging Assembly
Grid Plate Cleaning Pad should be fitted in the 2
notches [E] in the Primary Charging Assembly Grid
Plate.
498
4. The 2 [F] parts of the Primary Charging Assembly 5. Be sure to check that the Leaf Spring [2] on the back
should be fitted in the 2 holes [G] on the Primary side of the Shutter Sheet [1] is not deformed when
Charging Assembly Grid Plate. installing the sheet.
[B]
[C]
[1]
[1] [2] [1]

[2]
[F] [D]
[G]
[E]
[D]
[F]
499
6. After installing the Shutter Sheet [1], check that there 7. Be sure to check that the 4 Claws [B] of the 2 Shutter
is clearance [A] between the Shutter Sheet [1] and Hooks [2] are fitted in the 4 notches [A] of the 2
the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Plate [3] and the Shutter Sliders [1].
Leaf Spring [2] is not deformed.
[B]
[B]
[B]
[B]
[A] [A]
[A] [A]
[2] [1] [2] [1] [2]
[A]
[3] [3] [1]
[B]
[B]
[B]
[B]
[A] [A]
[A] [A]

Charging Assembly Grid Plate
Cleaning Pad (Y/M/C/Bk)
■ Pre-preparation
2. “Disassembling the Primary Charging Assembly

Grid Plate (Y/M/C/Bk)” on page 493
3. “When Replacing the Grid Cleaning Pad” on page

898
500
■ Disassembling the Primary 3. Place the Primary Charging Assembly with the [A]
side of the Grid Plate Cleaning Pad facing up, and
Charging Assembly Grid Plate remove the Left Plate [1] and the Guide Block (Left)
Cleaning Pad (Y/M/C/Bk) [2] of the Primary Charging Assembly.
• 2 Screws [3]
2x
[A]
1. Place the Primary Charging Assembly [3] with the

Shutter Arm [1] and the Cleaning Pad Arm [2] on the [3]
front side.
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3] 4. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Plate

Cleaning Pad [2] from the Primary Charging
Assembly Grid Plate Cleaning Pad Holder [1].
• 2 Hooks [3]
[1]
[2]
[2]
2. Loosen the screw [3] of the Shutter Arm [1], and
move the Shutter Arm [1] and the Cleaning Pad Arm
[2] to the center of the Primary Charging Assembly. [3]
[1]
[1]
[2]
1x
[3]
Charging Wire Unit (Y/M/C/Bk)
[4]
■ Pre-preparation
[4]
501
2. “Disassembling the Primary Charging Assembly 5. Lift the block [2] with tweezers and remove the
Grid Plate (Y/M/C/Bk)” on page 493 Primary Charging Wire Unit.

Grid Plate Cleaning Pad (Y/M/C/Bk)” on page 501
[2]
4. “When Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly”
on page 899

Charging Wire Unit (Y/M/C/Bk)
[A]
[1]
1. Use tweezers to grasp the end [1] of the spring and ■ Assembling the Primary Charging
free the spring [2] from the hook [3].
Wire Unit (Y/M/C/Bk)
2. Free the Primary Charging Wire [4] from the groove
[A].
[1]
CAUTION:
Do not touch the Charging Wire [A] directly with hand.
[3]
[2]
[A]
[4]
3. Remove the Cleaning Pad [1] from the Mounting

Base.
[A]
[1]

[A].
502
1. Using tweezers, insert the block [1] into the slot [B]
and pass the Primary Charging Wire [2] through the Replacing the Primary
groove [A].
Charging Assembly Shield Plate
(Y/M/C/Bk)
■ Pre-preparation
[1]

[B]
4. “Disassembling the Primary Charging Wire Unit

[A]
[2] ■ Cleaning the Primary Charging
Assembly Shield Plate (Y/M/C/Bk)
2. Insert the Cleaning Pad [1] into the Mounting Base
[2].
[2]
1. Clean the inner side [A] of the Primary Charging

Assembly Shield Plate and the inner side [B] of the
Left Plate with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol
[1].
[1]
3. Pass the Primary Charging Wire [1] through the [A]

groove [A], and then use tweezers to grasp the end
[2] of the spring and hitch the spring [3] to the hook
[4].
[1]
[2]
[B]
[4]
[3]

[A]
Charging Wire Cleaning Pad
Holder (Y/M/C/Bk) and Primary
[1]
4. After hooking the spring, check that the Charging

Wire is not bent or twisted.
503
Charging Wire Cleaning Pad 1. Remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad
Holder [1].
Slider (Y/M/C/Bk) • 2 Claws [2]
■ Pre-preparation


4. “When Replacing the Grid Cleaning Pad” on page

898 2x [1]
■ Disassembling the Primary [2]
Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder

(Y/M/C/Bk) and Primary Charging
Wire Cleaning Pad Slider (Y/M/C/Bk)
2. Remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad

Slider [1].
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Do not damage the Charging Wire [2] when
disassembling/assembling.
[2]
[1]
[A]
504
NOTE: Replacing the Primary

Assembling the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad
Holder (Y/M/C/Bk) and Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Charging Wire (Y/M/C/Bk)
Pad Slider (Y/M/C/Bk)
1. Push the Charging Wire [3] against the 2 pads [2] of the ■ Pre-preparation
Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider [1] to install.
[2] 2. “Disassembling the Primary Charging Assembly

[3]
4. “Disassembling the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning

Pad Holder (Y/M/C/Bk) and Primary Charging Wire
Cleaning Pad Slider (Y/M/C/Bk)” on page 504
[1] 5. “When Replacing the Primary Charging Wire” on

page 898

NOTE:
Charging Wire (Y/M/C/Bk)
2. Push in the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Slider
[2] until it is secured by the 2 claws [1] of the Primary
Charging Wire Cleaning Pad Holder.
2x
1. Use tweezers to grasp the end [1] of the spring and
free the spring [2] from the hook [3].

[A].
[2] [1]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[A]
[4]

[A].
505
4. Lift the block [2] with tweezers and remove the 2. Cut off the end (extra wire) [A] of the twisted
Primary Charging Wire Unit. Charging Wire with nippers.
NOTE:
[2] The loop [3] can be easily formed by wrapping the
Charging Wire [2] once around the Hex Key [4] and then
twisting it for three or four turns.
[4]
[3]
[A]
[1]
[2]
5. Cut off the old Charging Wire from the block of the
[1]
Primary Charging Wire with nippers.
■ Assembling the Primary Charging

Wire (Y/M/C/Bk)
[2]
[1]
CAUTION:
[3] 2.
0
m
m
[A]
[A] 3. Hook the loop at the end of the Charging Wire [1] on
the stud [2].
[1] [2]
1. Unwind approx. 5 cm of the Charging Wire [2] from
the 0.06 mm (wire-diameter) Charging Wire Reel [1]
and form a 2-mm-diameter loop [3] at the end.
(REAR) (FRONT)
506
4. Pass the Primary Charging Wire [1] through the 7. Clean the [A] part of the Charging Wire with lint-free
groove [A]. paper moistened with alcohol [1].
[1]
[A]
[A]
[1]
8. Pass the Primary Charging Wire [1] through the

5. After hooking the Charging Wire [2] on the Charging groove [A], and then use tweezers to grasp the end
Wire Positioning Part [1] on the rear side of the [2] of the spring and hitch the spring [3] to the hook
Primary Charging Assembly, hook the Charging [4].
Wire Tension Spring [3] on the Charging Wire at the
position shown in the figure below, and twist it.
6. Cut off the extra length [A] of the Charging Wire with [2]
nippers.
[3] [2] [1]
[4]
[3]
(REAR) (FRONT) [A]
[1]
9. After hooking the spring of the Primary Charging

Wire, check that the Charging Wire is not bent or
twisted.
Replacing the Drum Units

(Y/M/C/Bk)
■ Pre-preparation
[A]
2. “Disassembling the Process Unit Cover” on page

595
3. “Releasing the Pressure of the ITB Unit” on page

597
4. “When Replacing the Photosensitive Drum” on page

909
507
■ Disassembling the Drum Units (Y/M/ 1. Lift up the Developing Assembly Pressure Release
Lever [1], pull it to the front until it stops, and release
C/Bk) the Developing Assembly [2].
NOTE:
The color of the Developing Assembly is identified by the
color of the label [3].
NOTE:
This procedure describes the procedure for the Drum Unit
(Bk). be sure to perform the same procedure for the Drum
Units (Y/M/C) as well. [1]
[Y] [M] [C] [Bk]
[3] [2]
2. Remove the Drum Shaft Knob [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
CAUTION:
When installing or removing the Drum Shaft Knob [1],
be sure to tighten or loosen the screw [2] while holding
CAUTION: the Drum Shaft Knob [1] in order to prevent the
Points to note when handling the Photosensitive Drum Photosensitive Drum from rotating clockwise.
A Photosensitive Drum is used in this machine. Note
the following since the sensitivity of the Photosensitive
Drum may be deteriorated. [2] [2]
• When having removed the Drum Unit from the host
machine, be sure to cover the Photosensitive
Drum with a Lightproof Sheet (or paper) so as not
to directly expose the drum to light.
• Never place the Drum Unit in a location where the
unit or the drum is exposed to direct rays of the sun
(e.g. near the window).
[1] [1]
1x
[1] [2]
508
3. Disconnect the connector 1 [1]. 6. Hold the Drum Unit with one hand holding its front
lower part and the other hand holding the right side
[1] face, and horizontally pull it all the way out.
1x
CAUTION:
Be sure to pull it out carefully so as not to damage the
surface of the Photosensitive Drum.
4. Remove the Drum Unit [1].

• 1 Connector [3] (with a connector hook)
• 1 Connector [4]
• 1 Screw [5]
[2]
1x
[5]
2x
1x [1]
[1]
[4] [3]
[2]
5. Hold the handle [1], and pull out the Drum Unit [2] to
the position as shown in the figure.
509
7. Place the Drum Unit [2] by standing its foot [1], and with the [A] and [B] parts aligned with the grooves
immediately cover the Photosensitive Drum [4] with [1] and [2].
a Lightproof Sheet (or paper).
CAUTION:
NOTE: When installing the Drum Unit, be sure to pay attention
Be sure to place a sheet of paper under the Drum Unit to its underside so as not to damage the surface of the
since the unit may be soiled by waste toner. Photosensitive Drum.
[2]
[1]
[A]
[1]
[4]
[3]
■ Assembling the Drum Units (Y/M/C/

Bk)
[2] [B]
1. Remove the Lightproof Sheet (or paper), set the foot

of the Drum Unit back, and then install the Drum Unit
510
2. Secure the Drum Unit [1]. of the Drum Shaft with the groove [3] of the Drum
• 1 Screw [2] Flange.
• 1 Connector [3]
• 1 Connector [4] (with a connector hook) CAUTION:
• 1 Wire Saddle [5] Be sure to rotate the drum in the direction of the arrow
in the figure (counterclockwise) in order to prevent the
Scoop-up Sheet from flipping.
1x
[1]
[2]
2x
1x
[3]
[2]
[1]
[4] [5] [3]
CAUTION:
Dispose of waste toner accumulated on the paper
according to the method specified by the local
regulations.
3. Connect the connector [1].
[1]
1x
4. Rotate the side face of the Drum Flange [1]

counterclockwise by hand, and align the groove [2]
511
5. Install the Drum Shaft Knob, aligning its protrusion of the Developing Pressure Unit, and lock the
[1] with the groove [2] of the Drum Flange. Developing Pressure Release Lever [2].
• 1 Screw [3]
CAUTION:
When installing or removing the Drum Shaft Knob [1],
the Drum Shaft Knob [1] in order to prevent the
Photosensitive Drum from rotating clockwise.
[2] [2]
[2] [1]
[B]
[1] [1]
[A]
[2]
[B] [A]
Replacing the Drum Cleaning

Units (Y/M/C/Bk)
■ Pre-preparation
[1] 2. “Disassembling the Process Unit Cover” on page

595

1x 597
4. “Disassembling the Drum Units (Y/M/C/Bk)” on page

508
■ Disassembling the Drum Cleaning

Units (Y/M/C/Bk)
[3]
6. Be sure to push in the Developing Assembly [1] such

that the protrusion [A] of the Developing Assembly
Front Cover is on the left side of the protrusion [B]
512

CAUTION: 597
• Do not damage the edge of the Drum Cleaning
Blade [1]. 4. “Disassembling the Drum Units (Y/M/C/Bk)” on page
• To ensure not to damage it, be sure to place the 508
unit with the Drum Cleaning Blade [1] facing up.
5. “Disassembling the Drum Cleaning Units (Y/M/C/
Bk)” on page 512

Front/Rear Edge Seals (Y/M/C/Bk)
[1] 1. Remove the Pre-exposure Lamp Unit [1].

• 2 Screws [3]
1. Remove the Drum Cleaning Unit [1].
• 1 Connector [2]
• 5 Screws [3] 2x 2x [1]
5x
[3]
[3]
[2]
1x
[2]
[1]

Front/Rear Edge Seals (Y/M/C/Bk)
■ Pre-preparation

595
513
2. Remove the Drum Cleaning Front Edge Seal [1] and 1. Remove the Pre-exposure Lamp Unit [1].
the Drum Cleaning Rear Edge Seal [2]. • 2 Wire Saddles [2]
• 2 Screws [3] • 2 Screws [3]
2x 2x 2x [1]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[1] [2]
[2]
Blades (Y/M/C/Bk)
■ Pre-preparation

595

597

508

Bk)” on page 512

Blades (Y/M/C/Bk)
514
2. Remove the Front Edge Seal [1] and the Rear Edge 3. Remove the Drum Cleaning Blade [1].
Seal [2]. • 3 Screws [2]
• 2 Screws [3]
1x
[1]
2x
[3]
[3]
[2]
NOTE:
Assembling the Drum Cleaning Blade
1. Be sure to assemble the Drum Cleaning Blade in the
[1] [2]
direction shown in the figure while ensuring that the
Blade Holder Boss [A] of the Drum Cleaning Blade [1]
and the bent part [B] of the Blade Guide are oriented
CAUTION: correctly.
Points to Note When Installing the Drum Cleaning
[1]
Front/Rear Edge Seals
Be sure that the edge of the Drum Cleaning Blade [1]
is not caught under the Leaf Spring [A] of the Drum
Cleaning Front/Rear Edge Seal.
[A] [A]
[1] [1]
[B]
[A]
Replacing the Pre-exposure

Lamp Units (Y/M/C/Bk)
■ Pre-preparation
[A] [A]
[1] [1] 1. “ Disassembling the Primary Charging Assemblies

595

597

508
515
5. “Disassembling the Drum Cleaning Units (Y/M/C/ ■ Disassembling the Photosensitive

Bk)” on page 512
Drums (Y/M/C/Bk)
■ Disassembling the Pre-exposure
Lamp Units (Y/M/C/Bk)
1. Remove the 2 Fixation Pins [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
1. Remove the Pre-exposure Lamp Unit [1]. 2x

• 2 Screws [3]
2x 2x [1]
[1]
[3]
[2]
2. Hold the Photosensitive Drum Shaft [1] and the sides

[2] of the Photosensitive Drum, and remove the
Photosensitive Drum [3] and Photosensitive Drum
Positioning Plate (Front) [4].
[2]
[1]
Replacing the Photosensitive

Drums (Y/M/C/Bk)
[4]
■ Pre-preparation
[2]
595
[3]
597

508

Bk)” on page 512
516
3. Remove the Photosensitive Drum [1] from the Photosensitive Drum [3] and Photosensitive Drum
Photosensitive Drum Positioning Plate (Front) [2]. Positioning Plate (Front) [4].
[1] [2]
[1] [2]
NOTE:
When replacing the Photosensitive Drum, be sure to clean
the Drum Unit Support Shaft.
[4]
4. Clean the Drum Unit Support Shaft [2] using lint-free
paper [1].
[3]
3. Install the 2 Fixation Pins [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
[2]
[1] 2x
NOTE:
When replacing the Photosensitive Drum, be sure to clean
the Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure Unit.
[1]
■ Assembling the Photosensitive

Drums (Y/M/C/Bk)
[2]
1. Install the Photosensitive Drum Positioning Plate

(Front) [3] to the Photosensitive Drum [1] without
removing the Lightproof Sheet (or paper) [2].
[2] [1] [3]
2. Align the Photosensitive Drum Shaft [2] with the

groove [1] in the Drum Unit, and install the
517
4. Remove the Lightproof Sheet [1]. 1. Change the direction of the Drum Cleaning Pre-
exposure Unit [1].
CAUTION:
Be sure to pull the Lightproof Sheet (or paper) in the 1
direction of the arrow in the figure (counterclockwise)
in order to prevent the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet
from flipping.
2
[1]
[1]

Pre-exposure Units (Y/M/C/Bk)
■ Pre-preparation

595

597

508

Bk)” on page 512
6. “Disassembling the Photosensitive Drums (Y/M/C/

Bk)” on page 516
7. “Assembling the Photosensitive Drums (Y/M/C/Bk)”

on page 517

518
2. Remove the Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure Unit [1]. 4. “Disassembling the Drum Units (Y/M/C/Bk)” on page
• 1 Connector [2] 508
• 1 Screw [3]
Bk)” on page 512
CAUTION:
Remove or install the Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure
Bk)” on page 516
Unit while the Photosensitive Drum is removed. This is
to avoid damaging the surface of the Photosensitive 7. “Assembling the Photosensitive Drums (Y/M/C/Bk)”
Drum. on page 517
8. “Disassembling the Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure

Units (Y/M/C/Bk)” on page 518
■ Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Pre-

exposure Units (Y/M/C/Bk)
[2]
[1]
[3]
1. Drop the toner dust accumulated in the [A] part of
the Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure Unit onto paper
and clean the unit.
NOTE:
Assembling the Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure Unit CAUTION:
1. Align the [A] part of the Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure Dispose of waste toner accumulated on the paper
Unit with the groove [1] of the Drum Unit. according to the method specified by the local
regulations.
[1]
[1]
[A] [A]
Cleaning the Drum Cleaning

■ Pre-preparation

595

597
519
2. Clean the plate [A] of the Drum Cleaning Pre-

NOTE:
exposure Unit with lint-free paper moistened with
The Drum Cleaning Kit is composed of the following 5
alcohol.
parts:
[A] • Drum Cleaning Front Edge Seal [1]
[1]
• Drum Cleaning Trailing Edge Seal [2]
• Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet [3]
• Drum Cleaning Front Side Seal [4]
• Drum Cleaning Rear Side Seal [5]
[2]
[1]

Kits (Y/M/C/Bk) [5]
■ Pre-preparation [3]

(Y/M/C/Bk)” on page 490 [4]

595
1. Remove the Pre-exposure Lamp Unit [1].
3. “Releasing the Pressure of the ITB Unit” on page • 2 Wire Saddles [2]
597 • 2 Screws [3]

508
2x 2x [1]
Bk)” on page 512

Bk)” on page 516

Kits (Y/M/C/Bk) [3]
[2]
520
2. Remove the Drum Cleaning Front Edge Seal [1] and 4. Remove the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet [1].
the Drum Cleaning Rear Edge Seal [2]. • 2 Screws [2]
• 2 Screws [3]
2x
2x
[1]
[3]
[3]
[2]
NOTE:
Assembling the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet
[1] [2]
• Be sure to install the Drum Cleaning Scoop-up Sheet
[1] after installing the Drum Cleaning Front/Rear Side
Seals to the Drum Unit.
CAUTION: • Be sure to fit it with the 3 bosses [2].
Points to Note When Installing the Drum Cleaning
Front/Rear Edge Seals
Be sure that the edge of the Drum Cleaning Blade [1] 3x
is not caught under the Leaf Spring [A] of the Drum
[1]
Cleaning Front/Rear Edge Seal.
[A] [A]
[1] [1]
[2]
[A] [A]
[1] [1]
3. Turn the Drum Unit on its side while taking care not
to spill toner.
521
5. Remove the Drum Cleaning Front Side Seal [1] and

the Drum Cleaning Rear Side Seal [2]. Replacing the Drum Cleaning
• 2 Stepped Screws [3] Brush Rollers (Y/M/C/Bk)
• 2 Screws [4]
■ Pre-preparation
4x [4] 1. “ Disassembling the Primary Charging Assemblies

595

597
[3] 4. “Disassembling the Drum Units (Y/M/C/Bk)” on page
508
[3] 5. “Disassembling the Drum Cleaning Units (Y/M/C/

Bk)” on page 512
[2]
Bk)” on page 516
7. “Disassembling the Drum Cleaning Kits (Y/M/C/Bk)”

on page 520
[1]
Brush Rollers (Y/M/C/Bk)
NOTE:
Assembling the Drum Cleaning Front/Rear Side Seals
1. Push down on the [C] part of the Drum Cleaning Front
Side Seal from above so that the edge [A] of the Drum
Cleaning Front Side Seal and the edge [B] of the
Mounting Base are parallel, and install the seal with
the screw [1].
1. Remove the Motor Cover [1].
[C] • 1 Wire Saddle [2]
• 4 Screws [3]
1x 4x [3]
[A]
[B]
[3]
1x
[2]
[1] [1]
[3]
522
2. Remove the Drum Cleaning Motor Unit [1]. 5. Remove the 2 N-rings [1], the gear [2] and the 2 Shaft
• 4 Screws [2] Supports [3].
[1] [3]
4x
[2]
[1] [3] [2] [1]
[2] 6. Remove the 2 Felt Seals [1] from the groove [A].
3. Remove the Gear Unit 1 [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
2x
[1] [1]
[A] [A]
7. Remove the Drum Cleaning Brush Roller [1] and the

[1]
[2] 2 Felt Seals [2] from the Drum Cleaning Unit.
4. Remove the Gear Unit 2 [1]. [2]

• 2 Screws [2]
[2]
2x
[2]
[1]
[1]
523
8. Remove the 2 Felt Seals [2] from the Drum Cleaning ■ Cleaning the Drum Patch Sensors
Brush Roller [1].
(Y/M/C/Bk)
[2]
[2]
[1]
NOTE:
Assembling the Drum Cleaning Brush Roller
1. When installing the Drum Cleaning Brush Roller [1],
be sure to install the 2 Felt Seals [2] by orienting them
in the direction shown in the figure.
[2]
[1]
Cleaning the Drum Patch

Sensors (Y/M/C/Bk)
■ Pre-preparation

595

597

508
5. “Pulling out the Process Units (Y/M/C/Bk)” on page

536
524
NOTE: CAUTION:
• This procedure describes the procedure for the Drum When cleaning the Drum Patch Sensor (Y/M/C/Bk), be
Patch Sensor (Bk). be sure to perform the same sure to clean the Patch Sensor Shutter Solenoid
procedure for the Drum Patch Sensors (Y/M/C) as Sensor (Y/M/C/Bk) as well.
well.
[Y] [M] [C] [Bk]

1. Clean the Patch Sensor Shutter Solenoid Sensor [2]
with a blower [3] by aligning the tip [B] of the blower
[3] with the [A] part of the Harness Guide [1] on the
rear side of the Process Unit.
NOTE:
Since it is hard to see the Patch Sensor Shutter Solenoid
Sensor [2] with the Process Unit pulled out, blow the
blower out approx. 10 times by using the [A] part as a
guide.
• The Drum Patch Sensor [1] has a shutter [2], which

is opened and closed by the solenoid [3] and the wire
[4]. When cleaning the Drum Patch Sensor [1], be
sure to use the Shutter Open Tool [1] to open the
shutter and clean it. [3]
• The shape of the member [5] for installing the Drum
Patch Sensor Solenoid differs between that for Y/M
and that for C/Bk. The following shows the difference
in the position [A] for installing the Shutter Open Tool.
[1]
[1]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4] (Y/M) [2]
[A]
[1]
[B]
[5]
(C/Bk) [2]
[A]
[3] [3]
[B]
525
2. Prepare the Shutter Open Tool [1] included with the Plate [2] with the U-shaped groove [4] of the Shutter
host machine. Open Tool [3] aligned with the Solenoid Shaft [5].
(Y/M)
1x
[1] [1] [3] [2]
3. Insert the Shutter Open Tool [3] between the

Solenoid Sensor Flag [1] and the Solenoid Stopper
[3]
[1] [4] [2]
(C/Bk)
[1] [3] [2]
[3]
[1] [4] [2]
526
4. Clean the surface [A] of the Drum Patch Sensor with

CAUTION: lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
Check when Installing the Shutter Open Tool
• The top side [A] is leveled when holding the top
side [A] and pushing it to the left after installing the NOTE:
Shutter Open Tool [1]. Since there is a difference in level between the case of the
Drum Patch Sensor and the surface of the sensor, it is
• After installing the Shutter Open Tool [1], holding
difficult to reach the sensor surface with lint-free paper. Be
the top side [A] and moving it to the right and left
sure to fold the lint-free paper as shown in the figure and
does not cause the Shutter Open Tool [1] to come use the end [A] to clean the sensor surface.
off. If it comes off only by being moved to the right
and left, perform the step 2 again.
[A]
[A] [A]
[1] [1] CAUTION:

When cleaning the sensor surface [A], be sure not to
wipe the Shutter Film [B], otherwise the Drum Patch
Sensor Shutter Film may be deformed.
[B] [A]
CAUTION:
Do not wipe it with dry lint-free paper; otherwise, toner
is attracted by static electricity.
527
6. Remove the Shutter Open Tool installed in step 2.
NOTE:
Checking the operation of the Drum Patch Sensor Shutter
1. Push the Solenoid Pin [1] in the direction of the arrow
to check that the Drum Patch Sensor Shutter [2]
opens and closes smoothly. The shutter may not
open and close smoothly due to the following causes.
• When the Drum Patch Sensor Shutter Film is
deformed, replace the Drum Patch Sensor.
• Refer to "Removing the Drum Patch Sensor
Shutter Solenoid Unit (Excluding the Solenoid
[A] Pin with Wire)" to reconnect the wire that is
connected to the Drum Patch Sensor Shutter.
Do not operate this machine under such conditions.
It may result in damage to the machine and output
image error.
2. Check that the Drum Patch Sensor Shutter [2] is
completely opened and that the entire sensor
measurement area [3] is visible when the Solenoid
Pin [1] is pulled. The sensor measurement area
should not be visible when the Drum Patch Sensor
Shutter is closed.
5. Clean the surface [A] of the case of the Drum Patch
Sensor with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
[1]
[A]
[2] [3]
Replacing the Developing

Assembly Lower Plate (Y/M/C/Bk)
■ Pre-preparation

595
528
3. “Releasing the Pressure of the ITB Unit” on page 2. Remove the Developing Assembly Lower Plate [1]
597 by holding it with both hands.

536
■ Disassembling the Developing

Assembly Lower Plate (Y/M/C/Bk)
1. Remove the 2 screws [2] while supporting the

Developing Assembly Lower Plate [1].
[1]
CAUTION:
Since toner remains on the Developing Assembly
Lower Plate, take care to remove it without scattering
the toner.
2x
[2]
[1]
529

NOTE:
597
Assembling the Developing Assembly Lower Plate
• Do not allow the Developing Assembly Lower Plate 4. “Pulling out the Process Units (Y/M/C/Bk)” on page
[1] to touch the drum [2]. 536
5. “Disassembling the Developing Assembly Lower

Plate (Y/M/C/Bk)” on page 529
■ Cleaning the Developing Assembly

Lower Plate (Y/M/C/Bk)
[2]
1. Drop toner [3] that remains on the Developing

Assembly Lower Plate [2] onto paper using dry lint-
[1] free paper [1].
• Be sure to install the plate with the claw [1] aligned
with the hole [2]. CAUTION:
Discard the toner according to the specified method.
2x
[2]
[1]
[1] [3]
Replacing the Drum Patch

Sensors (Y/M/C/Bk)
[2]
■ Pre-preparation
Cleaning the Developing
Assembly Lower Plate (Y/M/C/Bk) 595

■ Pre-preparation 597
1. “ Disassembling the Primary Charging Assemblies 4. “Disassembling the Drum Units (Y/M/C/Bk)” on page
(Y/M/C/Bk)” on page 490 508
2. “Disassembling the Process Unit Cover” on page 5. “Pulling out the Process Units (Y/M/C/Bk)” on page
595 536
530
6. “Disassembling the Developing Assembly Lower 2. Release the hook[2] while pulling the wire [1].
Plate (Y/M/C/Bk)” on page 529
7. “When Replacing / Cleaning the Drum Patch CAUTION:

Sensor” on page 910 Do not push in the wire [1] in the direction of the arrow,
“Replacement Procedure” on page 910 otherwise the wire [1] may come off from the pulley [2].
“Actions after Replacement” on page 911
■ Disassembling the Drum Patch [1]
Sensors (Y/M/C/Bk)
[2]
[1] [2]
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface [A] of the Drum Patch Sensor
when disassembling/assembling.
[A]
[1]
[2]
1. Remove the Drum Patch Sensor [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
• 1 Boss [3]
2x
[3] [1]
[2]
531
3. Remove the Drum Patch Sensor [1].

CAUTION:
• 1 Connector [2]
• There are 2 kinds of marks for the Drum Patch
• Harness Guide [A]
Sensors [1]; one for "Y/M" and the other for "C/Bk".
Be sure to use the Drum Patch Sensor of the
corresponding color.
1x
[1]
[2]
[2] [1] [2] [1]
[A]
• T Do not touch the surface [A] of the Drum Patch
Sensor when disassembling/assembling.
1x
[2]
[A]
[1]
• Do not push in the wire [1] in the direction of the

■ Assembling the Drum Patch arrow, otherwise the wire [1] may come off from
the pulley [2].
Sensors (Y/M/C/Bk)
[1]
[2]
[1] [2]
NOTE:
This procedure describes the procedure for the Drum
Patch Sensor (Bk); be sure to perform the same procedure
for the Drum Patch Sensors (Y/M/C) as well.
532
1. Connect the Sensor Harness to the Drum Patch the direction of the arrow to install the Drum Patch
Sensor [1]. Sensor.
• 1 Connector [2] • 2 Bosses [4]
• Harness Guide [A] • 2 Screws [5]
[3]
1x
[2]
[2]
[1]
1x
[1]
[1] 2x
[2]
[A]
[4]
2. Check the direction of the end of the wire [1] to hook [5]
it on the hook.
[1]
[1]
3. Fit the protrusion [2] of the Drum Patch Sensor [1]

into the groove of the plate, and hook the hook [3] in
533
4. Affix the Barcode Label [1] included in the Drum

NOTE:
Patch Sensor over the Process Unit.
Checking the operation of the Drum Patch Sensor Shutter
1. Push the Solenoid Pin [1] in the direction of the arrow
[1]
to check that the Drum Patch Sensor Shutter [2]
opens and closes smoothly. The shutter may not
open and close smoothly due to the following causes.
• When the Drum Patch Sensor Shutter Film is
deformed, replace the Drum Patch Sensor.
• Refer to "Removing the Drum Patch Sensor
Shutter Solenoid Unit (Excluding the Solenoid
Pin with Wire)" to reconnect the wire that is
connected to the Drum Patch Sensor Shutter.
Do not operate this machine under such conditions.
It may result in damage to the machine and output
image error.
2. Check that the Drum Patch Sensor Shutter [2] is
completely opened and that the entire sensor
measurement area [3] is visible when the Solenoid
Pin [1] is pulled. The sensor measurement area
should not be visible when the Drum Patch Sensor
Shutter is closed.
[1]
[2] [3]
Replacing the Potential

Sensor
■ Pre-preparation

595
534

597 CAUTION:
Assembling the Primary Exhaust Duct (Lower)
4. “Disassembling the Drum Units (Y/M/C/Bk)” on page 1. If the black harness is pulled by the hook of the
508 Primary Exhaust Duct (Lower), the connector [1]
may be disconnected. Be sure to check that the
connector is connected properly.
536
6. “When Replacing the Potential Sensor and Potential

Control PCB” on page 911
■ Disassembling the Potential Sensor
CAUTION:
The space between the drum surface and Potential
Sensor is narrow, so if the operation is performed with
the drum installed, the drum surface may be damaged.
For this reason, be sure to perform the operation after [1]
removing the drum.
1. Remove the Waste Toner Case [1] from the [A] part.
2. When installing the Primary Exhaust Duct (Lower),
2. Remove the Primary Exhaust Duct [2]. be sure to insert the 2 hooks of the Primary
• 3 Screws [3] Exhaust Duct (Lower) properly. If the Light-
• 2 Hooks [3] blocking Plate of the Primary Exhaust Duct
(Lower) is not oriented in the correct direction, the
[3] laser light path may be blocked and the drum may
not be irradiated by the laser.
[1] 3. Remove the Potential Sensor [1].

[A] • 3 Wire Saddles [2]
• 2 Screws [3]
3x 2x
[2]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
535
4. Remove the Potential Sensor [1] from the Potential 1. Remove the Dustproof Glass Unit [1].
Sensor Holder.
CAUTION:
Be sure to pull it out slowly so as not to damage the
surface of the Dustproof Glass.
[1]
[1]
Pulling out the Process Units

(Y/M/C/Bk)
■ Pre-preparation
1. “ Disassembling the Primary Charging Assemblies NOTE:
Assembling the Dustproof Glass Unit
Slowly push the unit into the machine with the mark (UP)
2. “Disassembling the Process Unit Cover” on page [1] up.
595

597
■ Pulling out the Process Units UP

(Y/M/C/Bk)
[1]
NOTE:
This procedure describes the procedure for the Process
Unit (Bk). be sure to perform the same procedure for the
Process Units (Y/M/C) as well.
[Y] [M] [C] [Bk]
536
2. Remove the Drum Shaft Knob [1].

NOTE:
• 1 Screw [2] Assembling the Drum Shaft
1. Rotate the side face of the Drum Flange [3]
CAUTION: counterclockwise by hand, and align the groove [1] of
When installing or removing the Drum Shaft Knob [1], the Drum Shaft with the groove [2] of the Drum
Flange.
(Be sure to rotate the drum counterclockwise in order
the Drum Shaft Knob [1] in order to prevent the
to prevent the Scoop-up Sheet from flipping.)
Photosensitive Drum from rotating clockwise.
[1]
[2] [2]
[1] [1]
[3]
1x
[2]
2. Install the Drum Shaft Knob, aligning its protrusion [1]

with the groove [2] of the Drum Flange.
• 1 Screw [3]
[2]
[1] [2]
[1]
1x
[3]
537
3. Free the harness [1].

[1]
• 2 Wire Saddles [2] [A]
• 1 Connector [3]
• Remove the screw [4].
[1]
[3] [4]
2x [2]
1x
1x
[2]
4. While holding the harness [1], hold the handle [2] to 7. While holding the harness [1], hold the handle [2] to
pull out the Process Unit [3] for approx.10 cm. pull out the Process Unit [3].
[1]
[1]
10 cm
[3]
[3]
[2]
[2]
5. Take out the Toner Dust Tool [1].
[1]
[1]
6. Push the Toner Dust Tool [1] against the upper part
of the shutter [A] and lightly hit the tool with the
handle of a screwdriver in order to drop toner from
the shutter [A] into the Waste Toner Case [2].
(To prevent toner soiling)
538
8. Discard the toner accumulated in the Waste Toner

NOTE:
Holder [3] in the Toner Case [2] of the Waste Toner
How to store the Process Unit
Receptacle [1].
When storing the Process Unit [1], be sure to hold the
harness [2] upward to prevent it from being trapped.
[3]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
Cleaning the Drum Unit

NOTE:
If toner has scattered around the [A] area of the Process Support Shaft (Y/M/C/Bk)
Unit, clean it with lint-free paper.
■ Pre-preparation
[A]
■ Cleaning the Drum Unit Support

Shaft (Y/M/C/Bk)
1. While rotating the Drum Unit Support Shaft [1]

counterclockwise about 5 turns, clean the toner [2]
accumulated on the shaft.
[2]
[1]
539
Pulling out the Pre- [1]
registration/Feed Unit
■ Pulling out the Pre-registration/
Feed Unit
[2]
[2] [1]
Replacing the Secondary
Transfer Outer Belt Unit
■ Pre-preparation
1. “Pulling out the Pre-registration/Feed Unit” on page
540
2. “ When Replacing the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt

Unit and the Drive Roller” on page 909
■ Disassembling the Secondary

2. Release the lock [1] of the lever (B-G1), and pull out
the Pre-registration/Feed Unit [2].
Transfer Outer Belt Unit
CAUTION:
• Do not touch the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt
[1].
• Be sure not to damage (bend, dents) the surface
[1] [2] of the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt [1].
• Be sure to place the Secondary Transfer Outer
3. Release the 2 locks [1] of the Leaf Springs on the Belt Unit [3] on a piece of paper [2], etc.
right and left of the rail as necessary, and pull out • Be sure to place the Secondary Transfer Outer
the Registration/Feed Unit [2] to the maximum. Belt Unit [3] in the direction as shown in the figure
to prevent the belt from being damaged.
[3]
[1]
[2]
540
1. Remove the Secondary Transfer Belt Guide [1]. 1. Remove the Pre-fixing Feed Upper Cover [1].
• 2 Screws [2] (to loosen) (It will be used as a base for keeping the Secondary
Transfer Outer Belt Unit standing while you work on it.)
• 2 Screw [2]
2x [2]
[2]
2x
[1]
2. Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt Unit [1]. [1]
2. Remove the gear [1].

• 1 N-ring [2]
[1]
[2] [1]
3. Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Holder

(Front) [1].
Replacing the Secondary • 1 Screw [2]
Transfer Outer Belt Tension

Roller 1x
■ Pre-preparation
540
2. “Disassembling the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt

Unit” on page 540 [2] [1]

Transfer Outer Belt Tension Roller
541
4. Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller

Grounding Spring Holder 2 [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
[2]
1x
[1]
1x [2]
[3]
[1]
6. Attach the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Holder

(Front) [2] to the Pre-fixing Feed Upper Cover [1].
5. Attach the screw [1], which had been securing the • 1 Boss [3]
Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Holder (Front), to
the hole [3] while holding down the Shaft Support [2], [2]
[1]
and release the tension of the belt.
CAUTION:
When tightening/loosening the screw [1], be sure to [3]
turn the screw by pressing the shaft [2].
(Otherwise, the Shaft Support [2] can be damaged)
1x
[2]
7. Make the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt Unit [1]

stand on end by fitting the end [B] of the Secondary
[1]
542
Transfer Outer Roller Holder (Rear) into the groove 8. Remove the screw [1], attach the removed screw [1]
[A] in the Pre-fixing Feed Upper Cover. to the hole [3] while holding down the Shaft Support
[2], and release the tension of the belt.
CAUTION:
Do not leave the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt Unit CAUTION:
[1] standing on end. When tightening/loosening the screw [1], be sure to
(Because it may fall down.) turn the screw by pressing the shaft [2].
(Otherwise, the Shaft Support [2] can be damaged)
1x
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
1x 1x
[1] [1]
[2]
[B]
[A]
[3]
543
9. Wrap paper [2] around the Secondary Transfer Outer

Belt [1] and remove the Secondary Transfer Outer CAUTION:
Belt Tension Roller [3]. • Be sure to align the hole [A] of the plate [1] of the
Secondary Transfer Outer Belt Tension Roller with
• 1 Boss [4]
the center of the bearing [2] and tighten the screw
[3] to prevent the plate [1] of the Secondary
NOTE: Transfer Outer Belt Tension Roller from being
There are 2 front and rear Belt Guides [A] inside the placed on the bearing [2] when assembling.
Secondary Transfer Outer Belt. When removing or
installing the belt, move it according to the configuration of
the inside [B] of the Belt Unit.
[B]
[A]
[2]
1x [A]
[4]
[1] [3]
• After installing the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt

[3]
Tension Roller, push the bearing [2] in the shaft
direction and check that the heights of the plate
surface [B] of the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt
[1] Tension Roller and the surface [C] of the bearing
[2] are the same.
[2]
[B] [C]
[2]
544
CAUTION: ■ Disassembling the Secondary

Check that no part of any of the 2 Belt Guides [A] inside Transfer Outer Belt
the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt is on the Secondary
Transfer Outer Belt Drive Roller.
If any part of them is on the roller, release the tension
of the belt and then adjust the position of the Secondary
Transfer Outer Belt.
[A]
CAUTION:
During disassembly/assembly, be careful not to
damage the inside of the Secondary Transfer Outer
Belt [1].
[1]
[A]
[A]

Transfer Outer Belt
■ Pre-preparation
540

Unit” on page 540

Tension Roller” on page 541
545
1. Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt [1].

NOTE:
• When installing the new Secondary Transfer Outer
CAUTION: Belt, install it to the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt
There are 2 front and rear Belt Guides [A] inside the Unit with the Protection Sheet [1] wrapped around it,
Secondary Transfer Outer Belt. When removing or and remove the Protection Sheet immediately before
installing the belt, move it according to the installing the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt Unit to
configuration of the inside [B] of the Belt Unit. the host machine.
[1]
[B]
[A]
• Note that the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt is a

critical control part, and information during
manufacture is managed. When replacing the
Secondary Transfer Outer Belt [1], always affix the
Lot No. Label [2] as shown in the figure.
[1]
[2]
[1]
546

Assembling the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt Transfer Outer Roller
1. When installing the Secondary Transfer Outer
Belt, be sure that the 2 bearings [2] of the
Secondary Transfer Backup Roller [1] is secured
to the 2 Shaft Supports [3].
If the 2 bearings [2] are not firmly secured, the
Secondary Transfer Outer Belt may be damaged.
[2] CAUTION:
• Do not touch the surface of the Secondary
Transfer Outer Roller.
[3] • Place the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller [2] on
[1] a sheet of paper [1].
[1] [2]
[3]
[2]
2. When installing the Secondary Transfer Outer

Belt, be sure to align the center of the belt [1] with
the center [A] of the roller. 1. Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller [1].
[1]
[1]
[A]
CAUTION:
Be sure not to deform the Secondary Transfer Outer
Replacing the Secondary Roller Grounding Spring [1].
Transfer Outer Roller


[1]
540

Unit” on page 540

Tension Roller” on page 541
4. “Disassembling the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt”

on page 545
547
Replacing the Secondary Replacing the Secondary

Transfer Outer Roller Grounding Transfer Outer Roller Grounding
Spring 1 Spring 2
■ Pre-preparation ■ Pre-preparation
1. “Pulling out the Pre-registration/Feed Unit” on page 1. “Pulling out the Pre-registration/Feed Unit” on page
540 540
2. “Disassembling the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt 2. “Disassembling the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt
Unit” on page 540 Unit” on page 540

Tension Roller” on page 541 ■ Disassembling the Secondary
4. “Disassembling the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt”
Transfer Outer Roller Grounding
on page 545 Spring 2
5. “Disassembling the Secondary Transfer Outer
Roller” on page 547

Transfer Outer Roller Grounding
Spring 1
Grounding Spring Holder 2 [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
1. Lay the Secondary Transfer Belt Unit [1] on its side.

1x [1]
[1]
[2]

Grounding Spring 1 [1].
• 1 Screw [2] 2. Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
Grounding Spring 2 [1].
[2] [1]
• 1 Screw [2]
1x
[2]
1x
[1]
548
1. Remove the Secondary Transfer Cleaning Unit Edge

Replacing the Secondary Seal Base (Rear) [1] and Edge Seal Base (Front) [2].
Transfer Cleaning Unit Edge Seal • 2 Claws [3]
• 4 Hooks [4]
Bases (Rear and Front)
■ Pre-preparation
540

Unit” on page 540

Transfer Cleaning Unit Edge Seal 1x
[4]
1x
Bases (Rear and Front)
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3] [3]
NOTE:
Be sure to place a sheet of paper, etc. [1] and place the CAUTION:
Secondary Transfer Cleaning Unit Edge Seal Base (Rear) Check that the 4 hooks [3] of the Secondary Transfer
[2] and Edge Seal Base (Front) [3] on this to prevent toner Cleaning Unit Edge Seal Base (Rear) [1] and Edge
soiling. Seal Base (Front) [2] are fitted properly.
[2] [1] [3]
[1]
[2]
[3]

Transfer Cleaning Unit
■ Pre-preparation
540

Unit” on page 540
549
■ Disassembling the Secondary ■ Disassembling the Secondary

Transfer Cleaning Unit Transfer Cleaning Case
CAUTION:
1. Remove the Pre-fixing Feed Upper Cover [1].
Be sure to place a sheet of paper, etc. [1] and place the
Secondary Transfer Cleaning Unit [2] on this to prevent • 2 Screws [2]
toner soiling.
[2]
[2] [1] 2x
[1]
1. Remove the Secondary Transfer Cleaning Unit [1].

• 4 Screws [2] 2. Free the 2 harnesses [1].
4x • 2 Connectors [4]
[2] [1] [4] [1] [2]
4x [1]
2x
Replacing the Secondary [4] [3]
Transfer Cleaning Case

■ Preparation
540

Unit” on page 540
3. “Disassembling the Secondary Transfer Cleaning

Unit” on page 550
550
3. Remove the Secondary Transfer Cooling Fan [1]. 6. Remove the Harness Guide [1].
• 1 Wire Saddle [2] • 1 Claw [2]
• 1 Screw [3] • 4 Hooks [3]
• 2 Bosses [4]
[2] [3]
[3] [4] [2] 1x
1x
1x
[1]
[1]
7. Remove the Secondary Transfer Cleaning Case [1].

4. Remove the Harness Cover [1] in the direction of the • 3 Screws [2]
arrow.
• 5 Hooks [2]
3x
[1]
[2] [2]
[2]
[1]
5. Disconnect the 3 connectors [1], and open the Snap [2]

Band [2] and 2 Edge Saddles [3].
[2]
3x
[3] [2]
3x
8. If powder shaved from the shaft is scattered on the
area [A] that was hidden under the Secondary
Transfer Cleaner Drive Unit of the removed
[1]
551
Secondary Transfer Cleaning Case, clean it with lint- [3] [2]

free paper moistened with alcohol.
1x
[1]
[1] [A]
3. Secure the harness with the 2 Edge Saddles [1] and
Snap Band [2], and connect the 3 connectors [3].
■ Assembling the Secondary Transfer
Cleaning Case [2]
3x
[1]
3x
1. Insert the 2 pins [A] of the Secondary Transfer

Cleaning Case [1], and install the 3 screws [2].
[3]
3x [A] 4. Install the Harness Cover [1].

• 5 Hooks [2]
[2] [1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
2. Install the Harness Guide [1].

• 4 Hooks [2]
• 1 Claw [3]
552
5. Install the Secondary Transfer Cooling Fan [1].

• 2 Bosses [2]
• 1 Screw [3]
[3] [2] [4]

1x
1x
[1]
[1] [A]
6. Install the 2 harnesses [1]. 8. Open and then close (raise and then lower) the
• 2 Connectors [2] Secondary Transfer Cleaning Case [1] (together with
• 1 Edge Saddle [3] the Pre-fixing Feed Right Unit) one time.
NOTE:
[2] [1] [4] This aligns the Waste Toner Ejection Mouth [A] at the
2x bottom of the Secondary Transfer Cleaning Case [1] with
[1]
the Waste Toner Receiving Mouth [B].
4x
[A]
[2] [3]
7. Be sure to put the Relay Connector [1] into the hole

[A].
CAUTION:
Otherwise, the cable may be caught.
[1] [B]
553
9. Install the Pre-fixing Feed Upper Cover [1]. [4]

• 2 Screws [2]
1x
[2]
2x
[1]
[1] [3] [2]
2. Remove the Secondary Transfer Drive Unit [2] from

the Secondary Transfer Cleaner Drive Unit [1].
• 4 Screws [3]
• 1 Shaft [4]
CAUTION:
Transfer Cleaner Drive Unit When removing the Secondary Transfer Drive Unit [2],
(9,000,000 Sheets) be sure not to damage the Sensor Flag Installation
Shaft [3].
■ Preparation
540

Unit” on page 540

Unit” on page 550
If you remove the Secondary Transfer Cleaning Case,
proceed to step 4.
[2] [3]
Case” on page 550
[3]
4x
Transfer Cleaner Drive Unit (with the
Secondary Transfer Cleaning Case
Removed)
[1]
[2] [4]
1. Remove the Sensor Flag [1] and Tension Spring [2].

• 1 Claw [3]
• 2 Hooks [4]
[3]
554
3. Remove the Secondary Transfer Cleaner Drive Unit

[1]
[2] from the Secondary Transfer Cleaning Case [1].
• 4 Screws [3] [2]
• 2 Pins [4]
4x [A]
[2] [3]
[1] 2. Install the Secondary Transfer Cleaner Drive Unit [1]

to the Secondary Transfer Cleaning Case [2].
[2] • 2 Pins [3]
[4]
• 4 Screws [4]
4x
[3] [3]
■ Assembling the Secondary Transfer [2]
Cleaner Drive Unit (with the [1]

[3]
Secondary Transfer Cleaning Case
Removed)
[4] [4]
1. Apply grease to the 2 gears [2] on the rear side of the CAUTION:
Secondary Transfer Cleaner Drive Unit [1] and the Be sure to check that the 2 Timing Belts [2] of the
outer diameter area [A] on the roller [3]. Secondary Transfer Cleaner Drive Unit [1] have not
• Approx. 60 mg of grease (FY9-6005) should be come off.
applied to each area.
[2]
NOTE:
If the gears [2] and roller [3] of the Secondary Transfer
Cleaner Drive Unit [1] are soiled, clean the 2 gears [2] and
roller [3] with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
[1]
555
3. Apply grease to the outer diameter areas [A] on the

2 shafts [2] of the Secondary Transfer Cleaner Drive CAUTION:
Unit [1]. • When installing the Secondary Transfer Drive Unit
[1], be sure not to damage the Sensor Flag
• Approx. 20 mg of grease (FY9-6005) should be
Installation Shaft [3].
NOTE:
If the shafts [2] are soiled, clean them with lint-free paper
moistened with alcohol.
[A]
[2] [3]
• Before installing the screws, fit the hole [A] on the

plate of the Secondary Transfer Drive Unit [2] onto
[1] [B] (the portion with a smaller outside diameter) of
the Stepped Shaft [3] of the Secondary Transfer
[2] Cleaner Drive Unit [1].
4. Fit the hole [A] on the plate of the Gear Unit [1] onto
[B] (the portion with a larger outside diameter) of the
Stepped Shaft [2].
[B] [A] [B] [A]
[1] [2] [1]
[3]
[B] [3] [2]

[B]
[A] [A]
5. Install the Secondary Transfer Drive Unit [1] to the [A] [A]
[B] [B]
Secondary Transfer Cleaner Drive Unit [2].
• 2 Shafts [3]
• 4 Screws [4]
[A] [A]
556
NOTE:
Be sure to put the plate [A] under the Secondary Transfer
Cleaner Drive Unit [1].
[4]
4x
[A]
[1] [2]
[2]
Transfer Cleaner Drive Unit (without
[1] [3]
Removing the Secondary Transfer
Cleaning Case)
[4]
6. Install the Tension Spring [1] and Sensor Flag [2].

• 2 Hooks [3] 1. Remove the Pre-fixing Feed Upper Cover [1].
• 1 Claw [4] • 2 Screws [2]
[3] [2]
1x 2x
[1]
[2] [4] [1]
7. Rotate the gear [2] clockwise to check that the

Secondary Transfer Cleaner Drive Unit [1] moves
smoothly.
CAUTION:
If the gear [2] cannot be rotated, assemble the
Secondary Transfer Cleaner Drive Unit [1] again.
557
2. Free the 2 harnesses [1]. opened, and remove the 3 screws [4] with the Pre-
• 2 Wire Saddles [2] fixing Feed Right Unit [1] closed.
[1]
4x
[4] [1] [2]
4x [1]
[4]
2x
[2]
[4] [3] [3]
3. Remove the Secondary Transfer Cooling Fan [1].

• 1 Screw [3]
• 2 Bosses [4]
[3] [4] [2]

1x
1x
[4]
6. Remove the 3 screws [2] of the Secondary Transfer

Cleaning Case [1].
[1]
4. Remove the Sensor Flag [1] and Tension Spring [2]. 3x

• 1 Claw [3]
• 2 Hooks [4] [2]
[4]
1x
[1]
[2]
[1] [3] [2]
5. Remove the screw [3] of the Secondary Transfer [2]

Drive Unit [2] with the Pre-fixing Feed Right Unit [1]
7. Remove the Secondary Transfer Drive Unit [2] from
the Secondary Transfer Cleaner Drive Unit [1].
• 1 Shaft [3]
558
Transfer Cleaner Drive Unit, clean it with lint-free

CAUTION: paper moistened with alcohol.
When removing the Secondary Transfer Drive Unit [2],
be sure not to damage the Sensor Flag Installation
Shaft [3].
[1] [A]
[2] [3]
Cleaner Drive Unit (without Removing
the Secondary Transfer Cleaning
Case)
[1]
[2] [3]
1. Apply grease to the 2 gears [2] on the rear side of the
Secondary Transfer Cleaner Drive Unit [1] and the
8. While supporting the Secondary Transfer Cleaning
outer diameter area [A] on the roller [3].
Case [1], remove the Secondary Transfer Cleaner
Drive Unit [2]. • Approx. 60 mg of grease (FY9-6005) should be
• 4 Screws [3]
• 2 Pins [4]
NOTE:
• If the gears [2] and roller [3] of the Secondary Transfer
4x Cleaner Drive Unit [1] are soiled, clean them with lint-
free paper moistened with alcohol.
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2] [A]
[4]
[2] [3]
[3] [3]
9. If powder shaved from the shaft is scattered on the

area [A] that was hidden under the Secondary
559
2. While supporting the Secondary Transfer Cleaning [A]

Case [1], install the Secondary Transfer Cleaner
Drive Unit [2].
• 2 Pins [3]
• 4 Screws [4]
4x
[1]
[2]
4. Fit the hole [A] on the plate of the Gear Unit [1] onto
[1] [B] (the portion with a larger outside diameter) of the
Stepped Shaft [2].
[2]
[3]
[4] [4]
[1] [2]
CAUTION:
Be sure to check that the 2 Timing Belts [2] of the
Secondary Transfer Cleaner Drive Unit [1] have not
come off.
[2]
[B]
[B]
[A] [A]
5. Install the Secondary Transfer Drive Unit [2] to the

Secondary Transfer Cleaner Drive Unit [1].
[1]
• 2 Shafts [3]
3. Apply grease to the outer diameter areas [A] on the

2 shafts [2] of the Secondary Transfer Cleaner Drive
Unit [1].
NOTE:
If the shafts [2] are soiled, clean them with lint-free paper
560
7. Install the 3 screws [1], and install the screw [4] of

CAUTION: the Secondary Transfer Drive Unit [3] with the Pre-
When installing the Secondary Transfer Drive Unit [2], fixing Feed Right Unit [2] opened.
be sure not to damage the Sensor Flag Installation
Shaft [3].
CAUTION:
Before installing the screws, fit the hole [A] on the plate
of the Secondary Transfer Drive Unit [2] onto [B] (the
portion with a smaller outside diameter) of the Stepped
Shaft [3] of the Secondary Transfer Cleaner Drive Unit
[1].
[2] [3]
NOTE:
Be sure to put the plate [A] under the Secondary Transfer [B] [A] [B] [A]
Cleaner Drive Unit [1].
[A]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[3] [2]
[2] [3]
6. Insert the 2 pins [A] of the Secondary Transfer

Cleaning Case [1], and install the 3 screws [2]. [A] [B] [A] [B]
[A]
3x
[2]
[A] [A]
[1]
[2]
[2]
561
[2]
4x
[1]
[3] [1] [2]
[1] 10. Install the Secondary Transfer Cooling Fan [1].

• 2 Bosses [2]
• 1 Screw [3]
[3] [2] [4]

1x
[4]
1x
8. Install the Tension Spring [1] and Sensor Flag [2]. [1]
• 2 Hooks [3]
• 1 Claw [4] 11. Install the 2 harnesses [1].
[3]
1x • 2 Wire Saddles [4]
[2] [1] [4]

2x [1]
4x
[2] [4] [1]
9. Rotate the gear [2] clockwise to check that the

Secondary Transfer Cleaner Drive Unit [1] moves [2] [3]
smoothly.
12. Put the Relay Connector [1] into the hole [A].
CAUTION:
If the gear [2] cannot be rotated, assemble the CAUTION:
Secondary Transfer Cleaner Drive Unit [1] again. Otherwise, the cable may be caught.
562
14. Install the Pre-fixing Feed Upper Cover [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
[2]
2x
[1]
[1]
[A]
Cleaning the Secondary

13. Open and then close (raise and then lower) the
Secondary Transfer Cleaning Case [1] (together with Transfer Cleaner Drive Unit
the Pre-fixing Feed Right Unit) one time.
(1,000,000 Sheets)
NOTE: ■ Preparation
This aligns the Waste Toner Ejection Mouth [A] at the
bottom of the Secondary Transfer Cleaning Case [1] with 1. “Pulling out the Pre-registration/Feed Unit” on page
the Waste Toner Receiving Mouth [B].
540

Unit” on page 540

Unit” on page 550
If you do not remove the Secondary Transfer Cleaning
[A] Case, proceed to step 6.

Case” on page 550
5. “Disassembling the Secondary Transfer Cleaner

Drive Unit (with the Secondary Transfer Cleaning
Case Removed)” on page 554
6. “Disassembling the Secondary Transfer Cleaner

Drive Unit (without Removing the Secondary
Transfer Cleaning Case)” on page 557
■ Cleaning the Secondary Transfer

Cleaner Drive Unit (1,000,000 Sheets)
[1] [B]
563
NOTE: ■ Disassembling the Secondary

Cleaning is required every 1,000,000 sheets. Transfer Scraper Sheet
1. Clean the 2 gears [2] and roller [3] of the Secondary

Transfer Cleaner Drive Unit [1] with lint-free paper
moistened with alcohol [4].
[1]
1. Remove the Scraper Sheet Cover [1].
[2]
• 2 Screws [2]
2x [2]
[4] [2] [3]
2. Apply grease to the 2 gears [2] of the Secondary

Transfer Cleaner Drive Unit [1] and the outer
diameter area [A] on the roller [3] you cleaned.
applied to each area. [1]
[1]
2. Remove the Secondary Transfer Scraper Sheet [1].
[2]
• 4 Screws [2]
• 2 Screws [3]
[A]
4x
[3]
[1]
[2] [3]
[3]

Transfer Scraper Sheet
[2]
■ Pre-preparation 3. Place a sheet of paper, lightly tap the Secondary

1. “Pulling out the Pre-registration/Feed Unit” on page Transfer Cleaning Unit while tilting it, and then drop
540 toner accumulated in the [A] part onto the paper.

Unit” on page 540

Unit” on page 550
564
4. Clean the [A] part of the Secondary Transfer

Cleaning Unit with lint-free paper. CAUTION:
Be sure that the 4 hooks [3] of the Secondary Transfer
Cleaning Unit Edge Seal Base (Rear) [1] and the Edge
Seal Base (Front) [2] are fitted properly.
[3]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[A]
[1] [2]
CAUTION:
Be sure to clean the Secondary Transfer Cleaning
Case when replacing the Secondary Transfer
Scraper Sheet.

Case” on page 550
NOTE:
Assembling the Secondary Transfer Scraper Sheet 6. Place paper and drop toner accumulated in the [A]
1. Install the Secondary Transfer Scraper Sheet [2] part by tilting the Secondary Transfer Cleaning
under the Secondary Transfer Cleaning Bias Roller Case.
[1].
[2] CAUTION:
Discard the toner according to the specified method
without scattering it.
[1]
[A]
[2]
[1] [1]
[2]
565
7. If toner is attached to the 2 Grounding Springs [1] of

the Secondary Transfer Cleaning Case and the [A] CAUTION:
part around the gear, clean them with a blower [2]. • Do not damage the Scoop-up Sheet [1] when
[1]
[A] [1]
[2]
• Do not touch the surface of the roller.

8. “Assembling the Secondary Transfer Cleaning
• Place the Secondary Transfer Cleaning Brush
Case” on page 552
Roller (Right/Left) [2] on a sheet of paper [1].
[2] [1]
Transfer Cleaning Brush Roller
(Right/Left)
■ Pre-preparation
540

Unit” on page 540

Unit” on page 550

Unit Edge Seal Bases (Rear and Front)” on page
549
5. “When Replacing the Secondary Transfer Cleaning

Brush Roller (Right/Left)” on page 910

Transfer Cleaning Brush Roller
(Right/Left)
566
1. Remove the Secondary Transfer Cleaning Brush

Roller [1] on the right side. Replacing the Secondary
• 2 N-rings [2] Transfer Bias Roller Cleaning
• 1 Gear [3]
• 2 Bearings [4] Blade
[2]
[4] ■ Pre-preparation
[1]
540

Unit” on page 540

Unit” on page 550

[4] Unit Edge Seal Bases (Rear and Front)” on page
[3] 549
[2]

Transfer Bias Roller Cleaning Blade
2. Remove the Secondary Transfer Cleaning Brush

Roller [1] on the left side. CAUTION:
• 2 N-rings [2] • Do not touch the surface of the blade.
• 1 Washer [3] • Place the Secondary Transfer Bias Roller
• 1 Gear [4] Cleaning Blade [2] on a sheet of paper [1].
• 2 Bearings [5]
[1] [2]
[2]
[5]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3] [2]
567
1. Change the direction of the Secondary Transfer 3. Remove the Secondary Transfer Bias Roller
Cleaning Unit [1]. Cleaning Blade (left side) [1].
• 4 Screws [2]
CAUTION: • 1 Spacer [3]
Be sure not to damage the Scoop-up Sheet [1].
4x
[1]
[2] [1] [3]
NOTE:
Assembling the Secondary Transfer Bias Roller Cleaning
Blades
When assembling the blades, reuse the removed spacers
[1] and attach them to the new Secondary Transfer Bias
Roller Cleaning Blades [2].
[1]
[2]
2. Remove the Secondary Transfer Bias Roller
Cleaning Blade (right side) [1].
• 4 Screws [2] [1]
• 1 Spacer [3]
4x
[2]
[1]
CAUTION:
[3]
The spacers differ in thickness depending on the blade.
When reusing the spacers, be sure to attach them as
they were originally attached (in number and location)
without getting the left side and right side mixed up.

Transfer Inlet Lower Guide
■ Pre-preparation
540
568
■ Disassembling the Secondary 1. Clean the Secondary Transfer Inlet Lower Guide [A]
with lint-free paper [1] moistened with alcohol.
Transfer Inlet Lower Guide
[A] [1]
1. Remove the Secondary Transfer Inlet Lower Guide

[1].
• 2 Screws [2] (to loosen)
2x [2]
2. Put a sheet of paper [2] between the Secondary

[1] Transfer Belt [1] and the Post-secondary Transfer
Static Eliminator Holder [3] to prevent the Secondary
Transfer Belt [1] from being soiled.
[3] [2]
[1]
Secondary Transfer Inlet

Lower Guide / Secondary [2]
Transfer Outlet Separation Guide

Cleaning Procedure
■ Pre-preparation
540
■ Secondary Transfer Inlet Lower

Guide / Secondary Transfer Outlet [3] [1]
Separation Guide Cleaning

3. Clean the Secondary Transfer Outlet Separation
Procedure Guide [2] with lint-free paper [1] moistened with
alcohol.
4. Pull out the piece of paper [3] while paying attention

not to scatter the soil.
CAUTION:
Do not push the rowel [4] too hard when cleaning.
(Otherwise, the rowel may come off)
569
[2]
3. Unlock the 4 Release Levers [2], and remove the ITB
[1] Frame Unit Cover [3].
• 1 Stepped Screw [4]
[2]
1x
[3]
[4]
[3] [1] [4]
4. Turn the 2 ITB Frame Unit Release Levers [1] to

release the pressure.
[4] [4]
5. Holding the handle [2], pull out the ITB Frame Unit
[3].
CAUTION:
Do not grip the [A] part of the ITB Frame Unit Release
Pulling out the ITB Frame Unit Lever [1], or you may get your hand caught.
■ Pulling out the ITB Frame Unit

[A]
[1]
[1]
[2] [1]
[1]
2. Turn the lever (B-G1) [1] to unlock it.
[2] [3]
570
CAUTION:
When storing the ITB Frame Unit, be careful not to get
your fingers caught in the [A] part between the ITB
Frame and the rail.
[A]
[1]
NOTE:
Storing the ITB Frame Unit
1. While pushing the 2 Release Springs [1], push the
ITB Frame Unit [2] to release the lock. [2]
CAUTION:
When lowering the ITB Unit, be careful not to put your
hand in the [A] part between the ITB Unit [1] and the
ITB Frame [2].
Otherwise, you may get your hand caught.
[1]
[2]
2. Holding the 2 ITB Frame Unit Release Levers [1],

store the ITB Frame Unit [2] in the host machine.
[2] [1] [A]
[1] [2]
6. If necessary, holding the 2 handles [1], lift the ITB

Unit [2] until it stops and then lower it to the lock
position.
571
1. Remove the Leading Edge Registration Patch

NOTE:
Sensor Cleaning Shutter [1].
How to lower the ITB Unit
1. Holding the handle [1], pull the lever [3] while lifting • 1 Lock Spring [2]
the ITB Unit [2]. • 1 Hook [3]
2. Lower the ITB Unit [2] while pulling the lever [3], and
release both hands once it passes through the lock
release position. (The ITB Unit will lower slowly.)
[1] [3]
[1]
[3] [2]
[2]
Replacing the Leading Edge

Leading Edge Registration
Patch Sensor Cleaning Procedure
Cleaning Shutter
■ Pre-preparation
■ Pre-preparation
1. “Pulling out the ITB Frame Unit” on page 570
2. “Disassembling the Leading Edge Registration
2. “When Replacing the Leading Edge Registration Patch Sensor Cleaning Shutter” on page 572
Patch Sensor” on page 914
■ Leading Edge Registration Patch

■ Disassembling the Leading Edge
Sensor Cleaning Procedure
Registration Patch Sensor Cleaning
Shutter
572
1. Clean the surface [A] of the Leading Edge

Registration Patch Sensor in the single direction CAUTION:
with lint-free paper [1] moistened with water. • Be sure to place a sheet of paper, etc. [1] and
place the ITB Cleaning Unit [2] on this to prevent
toner soiling.
CAUTION:
• Be sure not to wipe it with dry lint-free paper; [2]
otherwise, toner is attracted by static electricity. [1]
• After cleaning, check that there is no cloudy soiling
(caused by the external additive for toner) on the
surface [A] of the Leading Edge Registration Patch
Sensor.
[A]
• Be careful not to touch the bottom side of the ITB
Cleaning Unit with the palm of the hand.
(Because the Shutter [1] on the bottom side may
slide open, allowing toner to spill.)
[1]
[1]
Replacing the ITB Cleaning

Unit
■ Pre-preparation
■ Disassembling the ITB Cleaning • Be sure to keep the ITB Cleaning Unit [1] away
Unit from coming in contact with the ITB [2].
[1] [2]
573
1. Remove the ITB Cleaning Unit [1]. 2. “Disassembling the ITB Cleaning Unit” on page
• 1 Screw [2] 573
[1] [2] 3. “When Replacing the ITB Cleaning Brush Roller/

Cleaning Blade” on page 909
1x
■ Disassembling the ITB Cleaning
Brush Roller
1. Remove the 2 Side Seal Plates [1].

NOTE: • 2 Screws [2]
Assembling the ITB Cleaning Unit • 2 Hooks [3]
1. Align the edge [1] of the ITB Cleaning Unit with the
frame [2] of the ITB Unit.
2. Connect the terminal of the ITB Cleaning Unit with the 2x
terminal of the ITB Unit, and fit the holes [3] of the ITB
Cleaning Unit to the bearings [4] of the ITB Unit. Then,
[3] [1] [3]
tighten the screw.
[3]
[2]
2. Remove the ITB Cleaning Unit Lower Cover [1].

[4] • 1 Screw [2]
NOTE:
When removing the ITB Cleaning Unit Lower Cover [1], be
careful not to scatter toner.
1x
[2] [1]

Brush Roller
[2] [1]
■ Pre-preparation
3. Place paper on the D-cut [A] of the shaft of the ITB
1. “Pulling out the ITB Frame Unit” on page 570 Cleaning Brush Roller to avoid damage, and remove
574
the 2 screws [2] and the 2 gears [3] while holding the 5. Remove the 2 Bearing Holders [1] and the 2 bearings
D-cut [A] with nippers. [2].
[A] [1]
2x
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
4. Release the Bearing Holder Retainer Lever [1].
[2]
[1]
[1] 6. Remove the 2 ITB Cleaning Brush Rollers [1].
[1]

Blade
■ Pre-preparation
2. “Disassembling the ITB Cleaning Unit” on page

573
3. “Disassembling the ITB Cleaning Brush Roller” on

page 574
4. “When Replacing the ITB Cleaning Brush Roller/

Cleaning Blade” on page 909
575
■ Disassembling the ITB Cleaning 3. Tilt the ITB Cleaning Unit [1] and drop the toner [2]
on paper.
Blade
CAUTION:
Discard the toner according to the specified method
without scattering it.
1. Remove the ITB Bias Roller Cleaning Blade [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
NOTE:
If there is too much toner around the ITB Bias Roller
Cleaning Blade, drop the toner on a sheet of paper placed
under it before work.
2x
[1] [1] [2]
[2]
2. Remove the spacers [1] and the other spacers [2]

behind them.
[2]
[2]
[1] [1]
576
4. Remove the ITB Cleaning Unit Left Upper Plate [1]. 5. Remove the ITB Bias Roller Cleaning Blade Unit [1].
• 2 Hooks [3] • 2 Adjustment Plates [3]
• Adjustment Sheets [4]
2x
[2]
2x
[3] [3]
[4] [4]
[1] [3] [3]
CAUTION: [1]
When attaching the ITB Cleaning Unit Top Left Plate,
check that there are 2 stirring balls [2] inside the ITB [2]
Cleaning Unit [1].
[1] CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop the disassembled Adjustment
Plates/Adjustment Sheets [1] onto the [A] part inside
the ITB Cleaning Unit.
[2] [A]
[1]
6. Remove the ITB Bias Roller Cleaning Blade [1].

• 4 Screws [2]
4x
[1]
[2]
577
1. Release the Belt Tension Lever [1].

Transfer Inner Roller Unit
■ Pre-preparation
2. “When Replacing the Primary Transfer Roller/

Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit” on page
909

Transfer Inner Roller Unit [1]
CAUTION:
Be sure not to touch the surface [A] of the Secondary
Transfer Inner Roller.
[A]
CAUTION:
• Be sure not to release the Belt Tension Lever [1]
without lifting the ITB Unit. (Otherwise, the ITB [2]
may be damaged.)
[2]
[1]
578
2. Release the lower side [1] of the ITB from the 4 Belt 3. Remove the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit
Retainer Sheets [2]. [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
CAUTION:
Be careful not to bend the Belt Retainer Sheets [2].
1x
[2]
[1]

Inner Roller Unit
[1]
[2]
[2]
1. Check that the Belt Tension Lever [1] is released.
NOTE:
When installing or removing the Secondary Transfer Inner
[1]
Roller Unit [1], be sure to widen the gap [A] between the
ITB and the ITB Unit during the work to avoid damaging
the ITB.
[1]
[A]
579
2. Install the unit so that the [A] parts of the Secondary 3. Take the 12 Belt Retainer Sheets [2] hidden under the
Transfer Inner Roller Unit fit into the rails [1] of the ITB [1] out to be on the ITB.
ITB Unit. (If the 4 Belt Retainer Sheets [2] on the lower side cannot
be taken out to be on the ITB, return the Belt Tension
CAUTION: Lever to the engaged state, and then take the Belt
Be sure to support the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Retainer Sheets out to be on the ITB.)
Unit with your hand until it butts against the rear side
of the ITB Unit because the ITB Unit is tilted. CAUTION:
[1]
[A]
[2] [1]
[2]
[2]
[2]
4. Move the ITB so that the distance [A] between the

edge [1] of the ITB and the end [2] of the roller of the
580
ITB Unit is the same at the rear side and the front 6. Take the 4 Belt Retainer Sheets [2] hidden under the
side. ITB [1] out to be on the ITB.
CAUTION: CAUTION:
When moving the ITB to the center of the roller, be sure Be careful not to bend the Belt Retainer Sheets [2].
to move it with the ITB Unit lifted. (Otherwise, the ITB
may get damaged.)
[A]
[2] [1]
5. Return the Belt Tension Lever [1] to the engaged

state. [1]
[2]
[2]
NOTE:
Check that a click sound of locking the Belt Tension Lever
is heard.

Transfer Inlet Upper Guide
■ Pre-preparation

Transfer Inlet Upper Guide
[1]
NOTE:
If the 4 Belt Retainer Sheets on the lower side cannot be
taken out to be on the ITB in step 3, execute step 6.
581
1. Remove the Secondary Transfer Inlet Upper Guide 3. Remove the Guide Holder and the spring from the
Unit [1]. Secondary Transfer Inlet Upper Guide [1].
• 1 Screw [2] (to loosen) • 1 Guide Holder [3]
• 1 Spring [4]
CAUTION:
Be sure to keep the Secondary Transfer Inlet Upper NOTE:
Guide Unit [1] from coming in contact with the ITB [2]. When replacing the Secondary Transfer Inlet Upper Guide
[1], remove and reuse the E-ring [2], Guide Holder [3], and
spring [4].
[2]
[A] [5]
[2] [1]
[3]
[4]
1x
[1]
[2]
[1]
2. Remove the E-ring [2], and free the end [A] of the
spring from the hook [5].
582
NOTE: CAUTION:
• When assembling the Secondary Transfer Inlet • Be careful not to bend or damage the ITB [1].
Upper Guide, fit the end [A] of the spring into the Hook • Place a sheet of paper and place the ITB on it to
[5] and fit the tip [B] of the spring into the hole [C] of avoid damaging it.
the Guide Holder.
[B]
[C]
[A] [5]
• When installing the Secondary Transfer Inlet Upper

Guide Unit, fit the pin [1] into the hole [A].
[1]
• When touching the surface of the ITB [1], touch the

[A] parts (approx. 10 mm from the belt edges). Be
sure not to touch the belt surface except the [A]
parts.
[A]
10 mm
[A] [1]
10 mm
Replacing the ITB [1]
■ Pre-preparation
1. IIn order to prevent the ITB from being damaged,
1. “Pulling out the ITB Frame Unit” on page 570 place a sheet of paper [1] on the ITB Frame Unit [2]
2. “Disassembling the Secondary Transfer Inlet Upper
Guide” on page 581

573
4. “When Replacing the ITB” on page 909
■ Disassembling the ITB [1]
[2]
583
2. In order to prevent the ITB from being damaged, fold 4. Release the ITB [1] from the 6 Belt Retainer Sheets
a sheet of paper [1] into two and place it over the ITB [2].
Frame Unit Frame [2] as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
[1]
[2]
[1]
CAUTION:
Be sure not to release the Belt Tension Lever [1]
without lifting the ITB Unit. (Otherwise, the ITB [2] may
be damaged.)
[2]
[2]
[2]
[1]
3. Release the Belt Tension Lever [1].
[1]
584
5. Remove the ITB [1].

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to bend or damage the ITB [1].
CAUTION: • Place a sheet of paper and place the ITB on it to
Be careful not to damage or bend the surface of the ITB avoid damaging it.
[1]. Especially be careful not to catch the [A] part of the
ITB Unit with the belt.
[1]
[1]
• When touching the surface of the ITB [1], touch the

[A] parts (approx. 10 mm from the belt edges).
(Be sure not to touch the belt surface except the
[A] parts.)
[A]
10 mm
[A]
10 mm
■ Assembling the ITB
[1]
1. In order to prevent the ITB from being damaged,

place a sheet of paper [1] on the ITB Frame Unit [2]
[1]
[2]
585
2. In order to prevent the ITB from being damaged, fold Then, put the sheet on the rollers [3] at both ends
a sheet of paper [1] into two and place it over the ITB and pull it up about half the width [A].
Frame Unit Frame [2] as shown in the figure.
[3]
[2]
[1] [2] [1] [A]
3. Check that the Belt Tension Lever [1] is released. 5. While spreading the ITB [1] with both hands, align
the belt to the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller [2]
and then to the Drive Roller [3], and put it shallowly
[1] on the left part [4] of the ITB Unit.
CAUTION:
• When installing the ITB Installation Sheet, be sure
that the cut-off [1] of the ITB Installation Sheet is
on the front side and that the joint [2] is aligned with
the right end (the Steering Roller) [3] of the ITB
Unit.
[3]
[1] [2]
4. Put the ITB Installation Sheet [1] on the Secondary

Transfer Inner Roller [2] at the bottom of the ITB Unit.
586
6. Then, put it on the Steering Roller [5] at the right 8. Once the ITB [1] is attached to the far edge, remove
edge of the ITB Unit, and slide it to cover about half the ITB Installation Sheet [2].
of the unit, keeping the belt parallel with the unit.
[A]
CAUTION:
• The ITB needs to be installed in the correct
direction. Be sure to install it with the white sticker
[1], which is affixed to the inner face, on the rear
side.
[1]
[1] [2]
R 9. Take the ITB Position Flag [1] out to be on the ITB

[2].
[2] [1]
[3] [2] [5]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
7. Holding the non-image area [A] (approx. 10 mm from

the belt edge) on the rear side of the ITB [1],
gradually slide it evenly toward the rear side of the
ITB Unit.
587
10. Before returning the Belt Tension Lever to the ITB Unit is the same at the rear side and the front
engaged state, take the 12 Belt Retainer Sheets [2] side.
that are hidden under the ITB [1] out to be on the ITB.
(If the Belt Retainer Sheets on the lower side cannot be CAUTION:
taken out to be on the ITB, return the Belt Tension Lever When moving the ITB to the center of the roller, be sure
to the engaged state, and then take the Belt Retainer to move it with the ITB Unit lifted.
Sheets out to be on the ITB.) (Otherwise, the ITB may get damaged.)
CAUTION:
[A]
[2] [1]
[2] [1]
12. Return the Belt Tension Lever [1] to the engaged

state.
NOTE:
Check that a click sound of locking the Belt Tension Lever
is heard.
[2]
[2]
[2]
[1]
11. Move the ITB so that the distance [A] between the
edge [1] of the ITB and the end [2] of the roller of the
NOTE:
If the 4 Belt Retainer Sheets on the lower side cannot be
taken out to be on the ITB in step 10, execute step 13.
588
13. Take the 4 Belt Retainer Sheets [2] hidden under the 3. “Disassembling the ITB Cleaning Unit” on page
ITB [1] out to be on the ITB. 573
4. “Disassembling the ITB” on page 583

CAUTION:
■ Cleaning the ITB Idler Roller
1. While rotating the ITB Idler Roller [1] by hand, clean

the whole circumference of the roller with lint-free
paper [2] moistened with alcohol.
2. Clean with lint-free paper moistened with water and

wipe away moisture with dry lint-free paper.
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[2]
NOTE:
Note that the ITB [1] is a critical control part, and
information during manufacture is managed. When [1]
replacing the ITB [1], always affix the lot No. Label [2] as
shown in the figure.
Cleaning the ITB Steering

Roller
■ Pre-preparation
[1] 1. “Pulling out the ITB Frame Unit” on page 570


573

[2]
■ Cleaning the ITB Steering Roller
Cleaning the ITB Idler Roller

■ Pre-preparation
1. While rotating the ITB Steering Roller [1] by hand,
2. “Disassembling the Secondary Transfer Inlet Upper clean the whole circumference of the roller with lint-
Guide” on page 581 free paper [2] moistened with alcohol.
589
2. Clean with lint-free paper moistened with water and 1. Clean toner in the grooves [2] of the ITB HP Sensor
wipe away moisture with dry lint-free paper. (Lower) [1] with a blower [3].
[1]
CAUTION:
Be careful not to directly touch the sensor surface with,
for example, lint-free paper during cleaning.
[2]
Cleaning the ITB HP Sensor

[2]
■ Pre-preparation

Guide” on page 581 [1]
3. “Disassembling the ITB Cleaning Unit” on page [3]

573
4. “Disassembling the ITB” on page 583 2. Holding the grip [1], pull the lever [3] while lifting the
ITB Unit [2].
■ Cleaning the ITB HP Sensor 3. Lower the ITB Unit [2] while pulling the lever [3], and
release both hands once it passes through the
590
position where the ITB stands up (The ITB Unit will 4. Blow toner in the grooves [2] of the ITB HP Sensor
lower slowly). (Upper) [1] with a blower.
CAUTION: CAUTION:
When lowering the ITB Unit, be careful not to put your Be careful not to directly touch the sensor surface with,
hand in the [A] part between the ITB Unit [1] and the for example, lint-free paper during cleaning.
ITB Frame [2].
(Otherwise, you may get your hand caught.)
[1] [3]
[2]
[2] [1] [A]
[1] [3]
Cleaning the ITB Edge Sensor

■ Pre-preparation
[2] 2. “Disassembling the Secondary Transfer Inlet Upper

573
■ Cleaning the ITB Edge Sensor
1. Holding the grip [1], pull the lever [3] while lifting the
ITB Unit [2].
2. Lower the ITB Unit [2] while pulling the lever [3], and
release both hands once it passes through the
591
position where the ITB stands up (The ITB Unit will

lower slowly). [3]
[2]
CAUTION:
When lowering the ITB Unit, be careful not to put your [1]
hand in the [A] part between the ITB Unit [1] and the
ITB Frame [2].
(Otherwise, you may get your hand caught.)
[A] [B] [A] [B]
[2] [1] [A]
[1] [3] Replacing the ITB Inner

Surface Cleaning Scraper Unit
■ Pre-preparation


573
[2] 4. “Disassembling the ITB” on page 583
3. Insert the end [2] of a blower in the hole [1] of the ITB ■ Disassembling the ITB Inner
Unit, and clean toner on the [A] face of the ITB Edge
Surface Cleaning Scraper Unit
Sensor and the [B] face of the Sensor Flag with the
blower [3].
CAUTION:
Be careful not to directly touch the sensor surface with,
for example, lint-free paper during cleaning.
592
1. Remove the ITB Inner Surface Cleaning Scraper Unit ■ Disassembling the ITB Torque
[1].
• 1 Screw [2]
Limiter
1x
1. Remove the ITB Torque Limiter Cover [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
[1]
2x
[1] [2]
NOTE:
Assembling the ITB Inner Surface Cleaning Scraper Unit
1. Align the protrusion [1] on the ITB Inner Surface
Cleaning Scraper Unit with the hole [2] of the ITB Unit,
and install the ITB Inner Surface Cleaning Scraper [2]
Unit [4] using the screw [3].
2. Remove the ITB Torque Limiter [1].
[4] [3]
1x [1]
[1]
[2]
NOTE:
Assembling the ITB Torque Limiter
1. Be sure to align the protrusions [A] of the ITB Torque
Limiter with the holes [B] of the ITB Torque Limiter
Cover at installation.
• 2 Bosses [1]
[B] [A] [1]

Replacing the ITB Torque
Limiter
■ Pre-preparation
593
1. Release the Lever [1] of the Primary Transfer Roller

Replacing the Primary Unit [2] for the color to be removed, and pull it out.
Transfer Roller (Y/M/C/Bk)
[Y] [M] [C] [Bk]
■ Pre-preparation
2. “When Replacing the Primary Transfer Roller/

Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit” on page
909
■ Disassembling the Primary Transfer [2]
Roller (Y/M/C/Bk)
CAUTION: [1]
Be sure not to touch the surface [A] of the Primary
Transfer Roller.
NOTE:
Assembling the Primary Transfer Roller Unit
Do not let go of the Primary Transfer Roller Unit [1] until it
butts against the rear side of the ITB Unit. Otherwise, it
may fall inside the ITB Unit and be damaged.
[1]
[A]
2. Remove the bearing [1] from the Shaft Support [2].
594
3. Remove the Primary Transfer Roller [3] and the

bearing [4]. Replacing the Process Unit
Cover
■ Disassembling the Process Unit
Cover
[1]
[4]
[2]
[2] [1]
[3]
NOTE:
Assembling the Primary Transfer Roller
When installing a new Primary Transfer Roller, be sure to
install it without removing the protector paper [1] wrapped
around it. Remove the protector paper [1] after installing
the roller to the Primary Transfer Roller Unit.
2. Unlock the 3 Process Unit Cover Release Levers 1

[3] and the Process Unit Cover Release Lever 2 [2],
and remove the Process Unit Cover [4] while holding
the handles [3].
• 2 Stepped Screws [5]
[5]
2x
[1] [1]
[4] [2]
4. Remove the 2 bearings [2] from the Primary Transfer

Roller [1].
[2]
[3] [3]
[5]
[1] [1]
[2]
595
NOTE: ■ Disassembling the Sub Hopper

• When installing the Process Unit Cover, align the 2 Stirring Motors (Y/M/C/Bk)
cut-offs [A] with the 2 pins [1] on the host machine
side.
[A] [1] NOTE:

This procedure describes the procedure for the Sub
Hopper Stirring Motor (Bk); be sure to perform the same
procedure for the Sub Hoppers Stirring Motors (Y/M/C) as
well.
[Y] [M] [C] [Bk]
• Lock the 3 Process Unit Cover Release Levers 1 [1],

and then lock the Process Unit Cover Release Lever
2 [2] while pushing the [A] part.
(Or the pin [3] of the Process Unit Cover Release
Lever 2 may not be properly set and E260-0026-05
may occur.)
[1]
1. Remove the 4 clamps [1] and the 3 connectors [2].
[2]
4x
3x
[A]
[1] [1]
[3] [2] 2. Remove the Toner Supply Level Detection Flag [1].
• 1 Grip Ring [2]
Replacing the Sub Hopper

Stirring Motors (Y/M/C/Bk) [1]
■ Pre-preparation
595 [2]
596
3. Remove the Hopper Stirring Motor Unit [1]. ■ Releasing the Pressure of the ITB
• 2 Screws [2]
Unit
[1]
2x
1. Turn the lever (B-G1) [1] to unlock it.
2. Unlock the 4 Release Levers [2], and remove the ITB

Frame Unit Cover [3].
• 1 Stepped Screw [4]
[2] [2]
[2]
4. Remove the Sub Hopper Stirring Motor [2] from the
Motor Cover [1].
1x
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3] [1] [2]
CAUTION:
Apply the appropriate amount of grease [2] to the gear
[1] of the new motor. Discard the toner according to the
specified method.
[1]
[2]
Releasing the Pressure of the

ITB Unit
■ Pre-preparation
595
2. “When Releasing Pressure of the Intermediate

Transfer Unit” on page 898
597
3. Turn the 2 ITB Frame Unit Release Levers [1] to

release the pressure of the ITB Frame Unit [2]. CAUTION:
• Do not place the Registration Patch Sensor Unit
[2] with the Registration Patch Sensor Shutter [1]
CAUTION: side down, or the Registration Patch Sensor
Do not grip the [A] part of the ITB Frame Unit Release Shutter [1] may be deformed.
Lever [1], or your hand may get caught.
[2] [1]
[A]
[1]
[1]
[1] [2]
• When holding the Registration Patch Sensor Unit

[2], do not touch the Registration Patch Sensor
Shutter [1], or the Registration Patch Sensor
Shutter [1] may be deformed.
[1] [2]
[1]
[2]
Replacing the Registration

Patch Sensor Unit
■ Pre-preparation 1. Hold the handle [A], and pull out the Registration
Patch Sensor Unit [1] for approx. 20 cm.
• 1 Screw [2]
595
2. “Releasing the Pressure of the ITB Unit” on page CAUTION:

597 Do not drop the Registration Patch Sensor Unit [1].
3. “When Replacing / Cleaning the Registration Patch
Sensor” on page 914
2. Hold the Registration Patch Sensor Unit [1] with one
4. “When Replacing the ITB Patch Sensor” on page hand holding its front lower part and the other hand
914
■ Disassembling the Registration

Patch Sensor Unit
598
holding the left side face and the right side face from 2. “Releasing the Pressure of the ITB Unit” on page
its bottom, and horizontally pull it all the way out. 597
3. “Disassembling the Registration Patch Sensor Unit”

on page 598
■ Cleaning the Registration Patch

[A] Sensor Shutter, Registration Patch
Sensors (Front/Middle/Rear), and ITB
Patch Sensors (Y/M/C)
20 cm
1. Remove the Registration Patch Sensor Shutter [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
• 2 Hooks [3]
[2] [1] [3]

1x [1]
CAUTION:
When installing the Registration Patch Sensor Unit, be [2]
sure to align the rails [A] with the rails [B] on the host
machine side.
[A] [B]
2. Clean the 3 Reading Adjustment Plates [A] of the

Registration Patch Sensor Shutter with a blower [1].
CAUTION:
If the soiling cannot be removed by the blower, be sure
to clean it with lint-free paper moistened with water.
(Cleaning with ethanol is not possible as it causes
clouding)
Cleaning the Registration

[1]
Patch Sensor Shutter,
Registration Patch Sensors
(Front/Middle/Rear), and ITB
Patch Sensors (Y/M/C)
■ Pre-preparation [A]
1. “Disassembling the Process Unit Cover” on page 3. Clean the 3 surfaces [A] of the Registration Patch
595 Sensors (Front/Middle/Rear) and the 3 surfaces [B]
of the ITB Patch Sensors (Y/M/C) with a blower [1],
599
and then wipe them toward one direction with lint- ■ Disassembling the Developing
free paper moistened with water [2].
Assemblies (Y/M/C/Bk)
CAUTION:
• Do not wipe them with dry lint-free paper. It is
because toner may be attracted due to
electrification.
• After cleaning, check that there is no cloudy soiling
(caused by the external additive for toner) on the
3 surfaces [A] of the Registration Patch Sensors
(Front/Middle/Rear) and the 3 surfaces [B] of the NOTE:
ITB Patch Sensors (Y/M/C). This procedure describes the procedure for the
Developing Assembly (Bk); be sure to perform the same
procedure for the Developing Assemblies (Y/M/C) as well.
[B]
CAUTION:
Do not touch the Developing Cylinder [1] when
[1] [2] disassembling/assembling.
[A]
[1]
[1] [2]
1. Turn the lever (B-G1) [1] in the direction of the arrow.
Remove the Stepped Screw [2], turn the 4 levers [3]
in the direction of the arrows, and then remove the
Replacing the Developing Intermediate Transfer Unit Cover [4].
Assemblies (Y/M/C/Bk)
1x [3]
■ Pre-preparation
595
2. “When Replacing the Developing Assembly” on

page 900
“Before Replacement” on page 900
“Actions after Replacement” on page 900
3. “When Engaging/Disengaging the Developing

Assembly” on page 903 [4] [1] [3]
[2]
4. “When Replacing the Developer” on page 904

“Before Replacement” on page 906 2. Remove the 2 clamps [1] of the Developing
“Actions after Replacement” on page 906 Assembly, and disconnect the 2 connectors [2] (with
connector hook) and the connector [3].
3. Lift up the Developing Assembly Pressure Release

Lever [4], pull it forward until it locks, and then pull
600
out the Developing Assembly [5] forward to remove 5. Remove the Environment Sensor Cover 2 [1].
it. • 1 Screw [2]
NOTE:
The color of the Developing Assembly is identified by the 1x
color of the label [6]. [1]
[1] [2]
2x
3x
[2]
[3]
6. Remove the Environment Sensor PCB [1].

• 1 Connector [2]
[4] [2] [6] [5] 1x
NOTE:
When replacing the Developing Assembly with a new one,
be sure to transfer the Environment Sensor PCB from the
old PCB to the new one by referring to steps 4 to 6. (This [1]
is because the Environment Sensor PCB is not attached
to the Developing Assembly provided as a service part) [2]
4. Remove the Environment Sensor Cover 1 [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
■ Assembling the Developing
Assembly (Y/M/C/Bk)
1x
1. Install the removed Environment Sensor PCB and

the Environment Sensor Cover to a new Developing
Assembly of the same color.
[2]
[1]
601
2. Be sure to set the switch of the Developing of the Developing Pressure Unit, and lock the
Assembly according to the print speed of the host Developing Pressure Release Lever [2].
machine.
(E.g.: For imagePRESS C10000VP, set the switch to
"100")
[1]
[2]
[1]
[B]
3. When inserting the Developing Assembly, check [A]

that the Pressure Release Lever is pulled out, and be
sure to fit the protrusions [1] on the upper side of the
Developing Assembly into the rail [2] at the host
machine side and fit the protrusion [3] on the lower [B] [A]
side of the Developing Assembly into the rail [4] at
the host machine side. 5. Be sure to put the Grounding Wire [1] through the
Wire Saddles [2] as shown in the figure below.
Otherwise the Grounding Wire may be caught in the
rotating disk due to the rotation of the Sub Hopper
Toner Stirring Motor [3].
[2]
2x
[1]
[1] [2]
[3]
[1]
[3] [3]
[4] 6. Affix the label [1] of the corresponding color to the

front [2] of the Developing Assembly. The label is
4. Be sure to push in the Developing Assembly [1] such
that the protrusion [A] of the Developing Assembly
Front Cover is on the left side of the protrusion [B]
602
included with the Developing Assembly provided as

NOTE:
a service part.
This procedure describes the procedure for the Sub
Hopper (Bk); be sure to perform the same procedure for
the Sub Hoppers (Y/M/C) as well.
1. Remove the Sub Hopper [1].

• 1 Connector [2]
• 4 Screws [3]
[2]
[3] [3]
1x
[1]
4x
CAUTION:
When storing the Developing Assembly into the host
machine, be sure that the Developer Supply Mouth
Cover [2] is secured with the claw [1].
[1] [3] [2]
[2]
Replacing the Color Sensor
Unit
■ Pre-preparation
1. “Disassembling the Sub Station Front Left Cover”
on page 855
2. “Pulling Out the Delivery/Reverse Unit” on page

810
[1] 3. “When Replacing / Cleaning the Color Sensor Unit”
on page 914
■ Disassembling the Color Sensor

Replacing the Sub Hoppers (Y/
Unit
M/C/Bk)
■ Pre-preparation
595
2. “Disassembling the Developing Assemblies (Y/M/C/

Bk)” on page 600
■ Disassembling the Sub Hoppers (Y/

M/C/Bk)
603
2. Remove the Delivery Cooling Fan Duct [1].

CAUTION:
• 2 Screws [2]
• Check that the parts have the same serial code
number [1]. Be sure to replace the two parts of a
color at the same time. [1]
2x
[1]
[2]
• Do not touch the sensor surface [A] of the Color

Sensor Holder Unit and the White Plate [B] of the
White Plate Holder Unit. Do not use alcohol or 3. Unlock the lever (C-C1) [1] and open the Reverse
ethanol solution to clean them. Guide [2].
[1]
[2]
[A]
[B]
1. Remove the Delivery Reverse Cover 4 [1]. 4. Remove the lever (C-C1) [1].
2x 2x
[1]
[1]
[2] [2]
[2]
604
5. Unlock the lever (C-C1) [1] and close the Reverse 6. Remove the Reverse Guide Plate [1].
Guide [2]. • 3 Screws [2]
CAUTION:
Be careful not to catch the 4 Flat Cables [1] when
[1] disassembling/assembling.
[2]
[1]
3x
[1]
[2]
[2]
605
8. Remove the Delivery Reverse Driver PCB [1].

NOTE:
Be sure to fit the hook [B] into the hole [A] on the rear side
when installing the Reverse Guide Plate. • 10 Wire Saddles [3]
• 1 Reuse Band [4]
• 2 Screws [5]
• 2 Hooks [6]
[A] 17x 11x 2x
[1]
[5]
[B] [6]
[4]
7. Remove the Delivery Reverse Driver PCB Cover [1].

• 4 Screws [2]
[2]
• 1 Hook [4] [3]
[5]
4x 1x 9. Remove the Color Sensor Holder Unit [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
[2] • 1 Flat Cable [3]
• 3 Harness Guides [A]
• 2 Hooks [4]
[4]
[3]
1x 3x 1x
[3]
[2] [1] [1]

[2]
[4]
[A]
[2]
606
10. Remove the Reverse Duct Cover [1].

CAUTION:
• 4 Screws [2]
• In order to prevent wrong assembly of the set of
• 2 Hooks [3]
parts of the Color Sensor Holder Unit and the
White Plate Holder Unit, be sure to write down the [3] [3]
[1]
numbers 1, 2, 3, or 4 engraved on the plate, the
[2]
serial code [1] of the Color Sensor Holder Unit, and
the serial code [2] of the White Plate Holder Unit. 4x
4
3
2
1
11. Remove the Sponge Roller Unit [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
[1]
[2]
2x
1 2 3 4
[1]
[2] 12. Remove the White Plate Holder Unit [1] to be

replaced.
• When connecting the Flat Cable, be sure to align
the blue line [B] of the Flat Cable with the white line • 2 E-rings [2]
[A] of the PCB.
[1]
1x
[A]
[B]
[A]
[2]
607
13. Remove the 2 springs [2] from the White Plate Holder
NOTE:
Unit [1].
• When installing the White Plate Holder Unit, be sure
• 2 Hooks [3] that the spring [1] and the E-ring [2] are positioned
correctly.
NOTE:
Attach the removed 2 springs [2] to the new White Plate
Holder Unit [1] when installing the unit.
[2]
[3]
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
NOTE:
• When installing the White Plate Holder Unit, install it
with its wider end [A] up.
Cleaning the Color Sensor

Unit
■ Pre-preparation
1. “Disassembling the Sub Station Front Left Cover”
on page 855

[A] [A]
810
■ Cleaning the Color Sensor Unit
608
2. Remove the Delivery Cooling Fan Duct [1].

CAUTION:
• 2 Screws [2]
• Check that the parts have the same serial code
number [1]. Be sure to replace the two parts of a
color at the same time. [1]
2x
[1]
[2]
• Do not touch the sensor surface [A] of the Color

Sensor Holder Unit and the White Plate [B] of the
White Plate Holder Unit. Do not use alcohol or 3. Unlock the lever (C-C1) [1] and open the Reverse
ethanol solution to clean them. Guide [2].
[1]
[2]
[A]
[B]
1. Remove the Delivery Reverse Cover 4 [1]. 4. Remove the lever (C-C1) [1].
2x 2x
[1]
[1]
[2] [2]
[2]
609
5. Unlock the lever (C-C1) [1] and close the Reverse

Guide [2].
3x
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[2]
NOTE:
Be sure to fit the hook [B] into the hole [A] on the rear side
6. Remove the Reverse Guide Plate [1]. when installing the Reverse Guide Plate.
• 3 Screws [2]
CAUTION:
Be careful not to catch the 4 Flat Cables [1] when
disassembling / assembling.
[A]
[B]
7. Open the Color Sensor Holder Unit [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
[1]
[2] [1]
1x
610
8. Clean the sensor surface [A] of the Color Sensor Unit 2. Remove the Toner Supply Front Cover [1].
with a blower [1]. • 2 Screws [2]
[2]
[1] [A] 2x
[1]
Moving the Toner Supply

3. Remove the Toner Supply Right Cover [1].
Assembly (when the POD Deck is • 2 Screws (Black) [2]
not connected) [2] [2]
■ Pre-preparation 2x

■ Moving the Toner Supply Assembly

(when the POD Deck is not
connected)
[1]

• 4 Screws (Black) [2]
[1]
4x
[2]
[2]
611
4. Move the Toner Supply Assembly [1]. 1. Open the Deck Right Front Cover [1].
• 8 Connectors [2] When the Secondary Deck is connected, open the
• 3 Screws [3] Secondary Path Front Cover.
8x
3x
[1]
[3]
2. Press the latch [1] in the direction [A] and open the
Upper Deck [2].
[2]
[3] 3. Pull out the Upper Deck [2] in the direction [B].
[2] [A]
[2] [B]
[1]
[2] [1]
4. Remove the Deck Upper Front Cover [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
[1]
2x
Moving the Toner Supply

Assembly (when the POD Deck is
connected)
■ Pre-preparation
Cover” on page 856 [2]
■ Moving the Toner Supply Assembly

(when the POD Deck is connected)
612
5. If only the POD Deck is used, refer to step 5-1) , 5-2) .If 6. Remove the Deck Upper Rear Cover [1].
the Secondary Deck is connected, refer to step 5-3) . • 3 Cover Rubbers [2]
5-1) Remove the Deck Right Rear Cover [1]. • 3 Screws [3]
• 5 Screws [2]
[2]
3x
5x [3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2] 7. Remove the Escape Tray [1].

• 7 Screws [2]
5-2) Remove the Deck Upper Right Cover [1].
• 3 Screws [2] (to loosen) [2]
[1] [1]
3x 7x
[2]
[2]
5-3) Remove the Secondary Path Upper Cover [1]. [2]

• 1 Cover Rubber [2]
• 2 Screws [3] 8. Open the Buffer Path Front Cover [3].
2x [1] [2]
[3]
[3]
613
9. Remove the Buffer Path Upper Cover [1]. 12. Remove the Toner Supply Front Cover [1].
• 3 Cover Rubbers [2] • 2 Screws [2]
• 5 Screws [4]
[2]
[4] 2x
[1]
[3]
5x
[2] [2] [4]
[4] [2]
13. Remove the Toner Supply Right Cover [1].

[4]
• 2 Screws [2]
[2] [2]
2x
[1]
10. Remove the Toner Supply Rear Cover [1].

• 3 Screws [2]

• 4 Screws (Black) [2] [1]
[1] [3]
7x
[2]
[4]
614
14. Move the Toner Supply Assembly [1].

Replacing the Hopper Unit
CAUTION: (Y/M/C/Bk)
When moving the Toner Supply Assembly [1], do not
let the harness of 8 connectors [2] to be open circuit. ■ Preparation
1. Open the Toner Replacement Outer Cover [1] with
the power ON.
• 3 Screws [3]
[1]
8x
3x
2. Press the toner replacement button [1] and remove

the Toner Container [2].
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[2]
[1]
3. Turn OFF the power.

5. “Moving the Toner Supply Assembly (when the POD


(When installing the Hopper Unit, the Toner Supply
Assembly needs to be moved in order to properly
connect the shutter of the Hopper Unit and the Supply
Pipe of the host machine.)
615
7. Remove the Controller Rear Cover 4 [1]. ■ Disassembling the Hopper Units (Y/
• 4 Screws [2]
M/C/Bk)
4x
[2]
NOTE:
[1] The following explains the procedure to remove the
[2] Hopper Unit by mainly using the Hopper Unit of Bk color
as an example.
8. Remove the Toner Supply Rear Cover [1].
• 3 Screws [2] 1. Remove the Toner Supply Upper Cover [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
• 3 Hooks [3]
3x
[3]
2x
[1]
[2]
[2]
[2]
NOTE: [1]
In the case of removing the Hopper Unit (Y), refer to step
9.
2. Remove the connector of the [A] part of the Hopper
Driver PCB.
9. Remove the Hopper Left Cover [1].
• 1 Reuse Band [2]
• 3 Screws [2]
[A]
[1]
6x
3x
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
NOTE:
In the case of removing the Hopper Unit (Y/M), refer to
step 3 .
In the case of removing the Hopper Unit (C/Bk), refer to

step 4 .
616
3. Remove the Harness Support Plate (Y/M) [1]. 5. Holding the [A] part, remove the Hopper Unit (Bk) [1].
• 2 Connectors [2] • 4 Screws [2]
• 2 Screws [3]
[2]
• 2 Hooks [4]
4x
2x
2x
[2]
[4]
[4]
[A]
[1]
[3]
[A]
[1]
4. Remove the Harness Support Plate (C/Bk) [1] and the

Environment Sensor Unit 2 [2].
• 3 Screws [5]
• 2 Hooks [6]
2x
[4]
4x
[3] [4] [3]
3x [6] [6]
[5] [2] [1] [5] [5]
617
Procedure to Manually Remove the Toner Container 3. While releasing the shaft [1] by shifting it in the
1. Insert a precision screwdriver [1] or the like into the direction of the arrow [A], continue to turn the gear
position indicated in the figure, and open the Toner [2] in the direction of the arrow [B] by hand.
Container Cover [2]. The end [3] of the Toner Container approaches the
gear [2].
NOTE:
The cover is secured to the inner plate by the
magnet.
[2] [1]
[A]
[B]
[3] [2] [1]
4. When it has reached the nearest position, continue

to turn the gear [2] in the direction of the arrow [B]
while releasing the shaft [1] by shifting it in the
direction of the arrow [A].
The Toner Container will then move to the opposite
direction [C].
NOTE:
The following procedure is explained using overhead
views of the Hopper Assembly.
2. While releasing the shaft [1] by shifting it in the

direction of the arrow [A], turn the gear [2] in the [C]
[A]
direction of the arrow [B] by hand.
The end [3] of the Toner Container turns and moves
in the direction of the arrow [C].
[B]
[3] [1]
[C] [2]
[A]
5. Continue to turn the gear until the Toner Container
stops moving.
6. Remove the Toner Container [1] in the direction of
[B] the arrow.
[1]
[3] [2] [1]
618
Procedure to Manually Install the Toner Container

1. After setting the Toner Container, turn the gear [2]
in the direction of the arrow [B] while releasing the
shaft [1] by shifting it in the direction of the arrow
[A].
[C]
[B] [A]
[3]
[2] [1]
2. While releasing the shaft [1] by shifting it in the

direction of the arrow [A], continue to turn the gear
[2] in the direction of the arrow [B].
The end [3] of the Toner Container approaches the
gear [2].
[A]
[B]
[3] [2] [1]
3. When it has reached the nearest position, turn the

gear [2] in the direction of the arrow [B] while setting
the shaft [1] in the direction of the arrow [A].
Continue to turn the gear [2] until it stops moving.
[C]
[A]
[B]
[3] [2] [1]
619
2. Release the grip [1], and remove the Air Valve [2].
Fixing System • 1 Wire Saddle [3]
[1] [1]
Replacing the Fixing Air Pump
Unit
■ Disassembling the Fixing Air Pump
Unit
1x
CAUTION: [3]
[2]
The Fixing Air Pump Unit is heavy, so be careful not to
drop it.
1. Remove the Power Unit Station Rear Cover 1 [1].

• 9 Screws [2]
9x
[1]
[2]
620
3. Remove the Fixing Air Pump Unit [1].

CAUTION:
• 1 Connector [2]
• Be sure to start the work after the Fixing Assembly
• 6 Screws [3]
gets cold enough to prevent burn injury.
• 2 Hooks [4]
• When the External Heat Pressure Plate [1] is
engaged with the Fixing Assembly, the 3 gear [2]
of the Fixing Assembly may rotate and catch a
finger, so do not touch the 3 gear [2] of the Fixing
Assembly.
[4] [4]
[3]
[3] [3] [3]
6x
[1]
1x
[2]
[2]
[1] • The 3 Primary Fixing Web Unit Pressure Gears [1]

may rotate and catch your finger, so do not touch
the 3 Primary Fixing Web Unit Pressure Gears [1].
[3]
[1]
1. Open the Sub Station Front Right Cover [1].
[1]
Pulling Out the Primary Fixing
Assembly
■ Pulling Out the Primary Fixing
Assembly
621
2. Unlock the lever (C-A4) [1], and pull out the Primary 1. Release the lock [1], and remove the Primary Fixing
Fixing Assembly [2]. Web Unit [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
3. Release the 2 locks [1] of the Leaf Springs on the

right and left of the rail as necessary, and pull out
the Primary Fixing Assembly [2] to the maximum. [2]
[2]
NOTE:
Action to take when the lever of the Primary Fixing Web
Unit is not turned
When installing the Primary Fixing Web Unit, the lever [3]
may not be able to be turned to the lock position because
the Lock Arm [2] hits the plate [1].
Remove the Primary Fixing Web Unit, and assemble it by
the following procedure.
[1]
[2]
[1] [2]
Replacing the Primary Fixing

Web Unit [3]
■ Pre-preparation
1. “Pulling Out the Primary Fixing Assembly” on page
621
2. “When Replacing the Fixing Web” on page 919
■ Disassembling the Primary Fixing

Web Unit
622
CAUTION: NOTE:
When lifting up the Fixing Web Unit Engagement/ 1. Rotate the Cam Shaft [2] while lifting up the Fixing
Disengagement Frame [1], be sure not to get your hand Web Unit Engagement/Disengagement Frame [1],
caught. and place the Fixing Web Unit Engagement/
Disengagement Frame [1] on the cam [3].
[1]
[3] [1]
[2]
[2] [1]
2. Install the Primary Fixing Web Unit [1] to the Primary

Fixing Assembly, and turn the lever [2] to lock it.
[2]
[1]
623
1. Remove the Fixing Web Roller (take-up side) [2]

Replacing the Primary/ while holding the Fixing Web Retainer Plate [1].
Secondary Fixing Web
■ Pre-preparation
For the Primary Fixing Assembly, refer to steps 1 and 2.

621
2. “Disassembling the Primary Fixing Web Unit” on

page 622
[1] [2]
For the Secondary Fixing Assembly, refer to steps 3 and
4.
3. “Pulling Out the Secondary Fixing Assembly” on

page 700
4. “Disassembling the Secondary Fixing Web Unit” on

page 701
■ Disassembling the Primary/

Secondary Fixing Web
2. Remove the Fixing Web Roller (feed side) [2] while

holding the Fixing Web Retainer Plate [1].
[1] [2]
NOTE:
The Fixing Web Unit is a common unit that is compatible
between the Primary Fixing Assembly and Secondary
Fixing Assembly. Disassembly/assembly work should be
performed using the same procedure.
CAUTION:
• Do not touch the surface [A] of the Fixing Web
Roller.
[A]
■ Assembling the Primary/Secondary
Fixing Web
NOTE:
The Fixing Web Unit is a common unit that is compatible
between the Primary Fixing Assembly and Secondary
Fixing Assembly. Disassembly/assembly work should be
performed using the same procedure.
624
1. Place the Fixing Web [1] as shown in the figure. shaft with the Shaft Support [4] on the other side of
• Blue line [2] the Fixing Web Unit to install the Fixing Web.
• Green line [3]
[3] [2]
[1]
[1]
[3] [2]
2. Holding the Fixing Web Retainer Plate [1], while

aligning one end of the Fixing Web Roller (feed side)
[2] with the Shaft Support [3] of the Fixing Web Unit,
align the other end with the Shaft Support [4] on the
other side of the Fixing Web Unit to install the Fixing
Web Roller.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
CAUTION:
Be sure to place the Fixing Web Level Detection Flag
[1] inside the Fixing Web [2].
[2]
[1]
[4]
3. Holding the Fixing Web Retainer Plate [1], while

aligning the shaft [2] of the Fixing Web with the Shaft
Support [3] of the Fixing Web Unit, align the other
625
4. Rotate the gear [1] in the direction of the arrow to 2. Remove the Nozzle Guide [1].
remove slack from the Fixing Web [2]. • 1 Screw (W Sems) [2]
[2]
[1]
1x
[1]
[2]

Refresh Roller Cleaning Air
Nozzle
■ Pre-preparation
621

page 622 3. Move the Tube Clamp [1] by using needlenose pliers,
and remove the Primary Fixing Refresh Roller
■ Disassembling the Primary Fixing Cleaning Air Nozzle [2].
Refresh Roller Cleaning Air Nozzle
[1]
1. Remove the [A] part at the front of the Primary Fixing

Refresh Roller Cleaning Air Nozzle [1].
• 1 Screw (W Sems) [2]
• 1 Boss [3]
[1]
[2]
[2]
1x
[A]
[3]
626
3. “Opening/Closing the Primary Fixing Upper Unit” on

CAUTION: page 635
• When attaching the Air Tube, check that the end
[3] of the Air Tube is connected between the 2 4. “Disassembling the Primary Fixing Roller, Bearings,
marking lines [2] (approx. 2 mm) on the Refresh and Insulating Bushes” on page 638
Roller Cleaning Air Nozzle [1].
Roller Collection Roller
2.0 mm
[3]
[2] [1]
1. Remove the 2 N-rings [1].
• Be sure to install the Tube Clam [1] in the direction

of [B], not [A]. Otherwise, operation of the Refresh
Roller Cleaning Air Nozzle is restricted, and it may
cause cleaning failure.
[1] [1]
[1]
CAUTION:
[A] [B] Do not drop the 2 bearings [1] and the 2 bushings [2]
at both edges of the Fixing Roller Collection Roller
since they are not secured.
[2]
Replacing the Primary Fixing [1]
[1]
Roller Collection Roller [2]
■ Pre-preparation
621

page 622
627
2. Free the front side bearing [1] and bushing [2] from ■ Disassembling the Primary Fixing
the hole, and remove the Fixing Roller Collection
Roller [3]. Inner Delivery Unit
CAUTION:
When removing the Fixing Front Upper Cover, be sure
[3]
to check the position of the Sensor Flag [1].
If the Sensor Flag is at the position [2], the Fixing
Assembly cannot be disassembled/assembled
because the External Heat Unit of the Fixing Assembly
is under pressure.
[2] [1]
[1] [2]
NOTE:
The Fixing Roller Collection Roller [3] can be installed
more easily if the rear side bearing [4] and bushing [5] are
installed in the hole [A] of the Fixing Assembly.
[A]
[5]
[4]
[3]

Inner Delivery Unit
■ Pre-preparation Release the pressure from the External Heat Unit by
the following steps.
1. “Pulling Out the Primary Fixing Assembly” on page 1. Install the Fixing Front Upper Cover.
621 2. Put the Fixing Assembly in the host machine.
3. Close the Sub Station Front Right Cover.
2. “Disassembling the Primary Fixing Web Unit” on 4. Close the Sub Station Front Left Cover.
page 622 5. Turn OFF and then ON the machine to restart it.
628
1. Remove the Primary Fixing Front Upper Cover [1]. 4. Pass the Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor
• 2 Screws [2] (to loosen) Harness [1] through the inner side of the [A] part of
the plate.
2x [1]
[A]
[2] [1]
2. Remove the Fixing Upper Connector Protection

Cover [1].
5. Remove the Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Unit [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
• 1 Fixation Pin [2]
• 1 Screw [3]
• 1 E-ring [4]
1x
1x
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
3. Remove the Harness Guide [1].

• 1 Connector [2]
• 1 Screw [4]
• 1 Boss [5] [4]
[1]
• 1 Connector [6] (not use)
1x 1x 1x
[4]
Assembly (when working with 1
[1]
person)
■ Pre-preparation
[5]
621
[3]
[2]
page 622
[6] 3. “Disassembling the Primary Fixing Inner Delivery
Unit” on page 628
4. “Disassembling the Primary Fixing External Heat

Belt Unit” on page 662
629
5. “Opening/Closing the Primary Fixing Upper Unit” on 3. Remove the Primary Fixing Front Lower Cover [1].
page 635 • 2 Screws [2] (to loosen)
6. “Disassembling the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt
Unit” on page 647
2x
Assembly (when working with 1
person)
[1] [2]
1. Close the Primary Fixing Upper Unit [1], return the 4. Loosen the 2 screws [1] securing the Primary Fixing
Positioning Pin [2], and tighten the 2 screws [3]. Assembly.
2x [1] 1x
[2] [3]
[1]
[3] [2]
2. Remove the lever (C-4A) [1]. 1x

• 2 Screws [2]
[2]
[1]
2x
[1]
630
5. Hold the 2 handles [1] to remove the Primary Fixing ■ Disassembling the Primary Fixing
Assembly [2].
Assembly (when working with 2 or
[1]
more people)
CAUTION:
When removing the Fixing Font Upper Cover, be sure
is under pressure.
[2]
[1] [2]
NOTE:
Be sure to fit the 2 pins [1] on the bottom of the Primary
Fixing Assembly into the 2 holes [2] in the Fixing Assembly
Base when assembling.
[1]
[2]

Assembly (when working with 2 Release the pressure from the External Heat Unit by
or more people) 1. Install the Fixing Front Upper Cover.
2. Put the Fixing Assembly in the host machine.
■ Pre-preparation 3. Close the Sub Station Front Right Cover.
4. Close the Sub Station Front Left Cover.
1. “Pulling Out the Primary Fixing Assembly” on page 5. Turn OFF and then ON the power of the host
621 machine to start the host machine again.
631
1. Remove the Primary Fixing Front Upper Cover [1]. 4. Remove the Primary Fixing Front Lower Cover [1].
• 2 Screws [2] (to loosen) • 2 Screws [2] (to loosen)
2x 2x
[1]
[2] [1]
[2]
2. Remove the lever (C-A4) [1].
5. Loosen the 2 screws [1] securing the Primary Fixing
• 2 Screws [2]
Assembly.
[2]
2x
1x
[1]
[1]
1x
3. Lift up the lever (C-A5), and open the Primary Fixing

Inner Delivery Unit [2].
[2]
[1]
6. Hold the lever (C-A5), and close the Primary Fixing

[1] Inner Delivery Unit [2].
[2]
[1]
7. Hook the handle [2] on the black sheet [A] of the

Fixing Assembly [1].
632
8. Hook the Lock Arm [3] on the hook [4] to secure the 9. Remove the Primary Fixing Assembly [1].
handle [2].
CAUTION:
[4] [3]
• Because the weight of the Primary Fixing
Assembly is 30 kg or more, be sure to work with 2
or more people.
• follow the procedure described in "Disassembling
the Primary Fixing Assembly (when working with
1 person)".
[2]
[A]
[1]
[1]
CAUTION:
Be sure to fit the 2 pins [1] on the back of the Primary
Fixing Assembly with the 2 holes [2] in the Fixing
Assembly Base when assembling.
[2]
[1]

Pressure Belt Thermoswitch
■ Pre-preparation
621
2. “Disassembling the Primary Fixing Assembly (when

working with 2 or more people)” on page 631
633
■ Disassembling the Primary Fixing 2. Free the Sensor Harness [1].

Pressure Belt Thermoswitch • 1 Edge Saddle [3]
7x
[2]
CAUTION:
Do not deform the thermistor/thermoswitch.
The thermistor or thermoswitch detects the
temperature of the Fixing Assembly, and stops power
distribution to the heater when the temperature [1]
abnormally rises.
Therefore, the thermistor or thermoswitch must have
proper contact with the Fixing Pressure Belt Inlet [3] [1]
Roller.
If the thermistor or thermoswitch [1] is deformed so that 3. Remove the Primary Fixing Inlet Guide Unit [1].
it does not contact the Fixing Pressure Belt Inlet Roller • 2 Screws (M4) [2]
[2] properly, the temperature may be detected • 1 Screw (M3) [3]
incorrectly, causing the Fixing Assembly to overheat. • 2 Bosses [4]
Be careful to avoid applying excessive pressure when
cleaning the thermistor/thermoswitch.
CAUTION:
When removing the Primary Fixing Inlet Guide Unit [1],
[2] [1] be sure to avoid damaging the Primary Fixing Roller [2]
and the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt [3].
[2] [1]
1. Remove the Bottom Right Plate [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
• 1 Hook [3]
[3]
2x
[4]
3x
[1]
[3]
[2] [2]
[1]
[2] [3]
634
4. Remove the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt

Thermoswitch [1]. CAUTION:
• 3 Screws (RS W Sems) [2]
to check the position of the Sensor Flag [1]. If the
• 2 Terminals [3]
Sensor Flag is at the position [2], the Fixing Assembly
• 2 Bosses [4]
cannot be disassembled/assembled because the
External Heat Unit of the Fixing Assembly is under
CAUTION: pressure.
Do not remove the screw [2] in the Primary Fixing
Pressure Belt Thermoswitch Fixation Plate [1] as it is
secured after having been adjusted. [1] [2]
[2]
[1]
[4] [1] [3]

3x
[3] [2]
Release the pressure from the External Heat Unit by
1. Install the Fixing Front Upper Cover.
Opening/Closing the Primary 2. Put the Fixing Assembly in the host machine.
Fixing Upper Unit 4. Close the Sub Station Front Left Cover.
5. Turn OFF and then ON the machine to restart it.
■ Pre-preparation
621
■ Opening/Closing the Primary Fixing

Upper Unit
635
Opening/Closing the Primary Fixing Upper Unit 4. Open the Primary Fixing Upper Unit [1].
while on the Host Machine
CAUTION:
1. Remove the Primary Fixing Front Upper Cover [1]. The Primary Fixing Upper Unit is heavy, so when
• Screws [2] (to loosen) opening/closing it, be sure to hold the [A] part of
the lever (C-A5) and the handle [B] (black flocked
surface) of the plate on the rear side, and open/
2x close it slowly.
[A]
[B]
[2] [1]
2. Lift up the lever (C-A4) [1], and open the Primary Fixing
[2] [1]
[1]
3. Slide the 2 Fixation Pins [1].

Opening/Closing the Primary Fixing Upper Unit
When Removed from the Host Machine
2x
1. Remove the Primary Fixing Upper Cover [1].
• 2 Hooks [3]
[3] [1]
2x
[1] [2] [2] [1]
[2]
[3] [2]
636
2. When working on the Primary Fixing Assembly after 3. Lift up the lever (C-B5) [1], and slowly open the Primary
having removed it from the host machine, be sure to Fixing Inner Delivery Unit [2].
place the Primary Fixing Upper Cover [1] to the right of
the Primary Fixing Assembly. It then serves as a base to [2]
stably open the Primary Fixing Upper Unit [2]. [1]
[1]
[2]
4. Loosen the 2 screws [1], and slide the 2 Fixation Pins

[2].
2x
NOTE:
Assembling the Fixing Upper Cover
1. Fit the 4 claws [1] of the Release Lever of the
Pressure Plate into the holes [2] on the Pressure
Plate before installing the Fixing Upper Cover [3].
[1] [2] [2] [1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
637
5. Open the Primary Fixing Upper Unit [1]. 2. “Opening/Closing the Primary Fixing Upper Unit” on
page 635
CAUTION: 3. “When Replacing the Primary Fixing Roller” on page
• The Primary Fixing Upper Unit is heavy, so 916
when opening/closing it, be sure to hold the
[A] part of the lever (C-A5) and the handle [B]
(black flocked surface) of the plate on the rear
side, and open/close it slowly. Roller, Bearings, and Insulating
[A]
Bushes
[B]
• When opening the Primary Fixing Upper Unit

after having removed it from the host
machine, be sure to use the Primary Fixing
Upper Cover [1] to support the Primary Fixing
Assembly [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]

Roller, Bearings, and Insulating
Bushes
■ Pre-preparation
621
638
1. Remove the Heater Retainer Plate [1].

CAUTION:
• 1 Connector (with a hook) [2]
• Do not touch the surface [1] of the Primary Fixing
• 1 Heater Harness [3]
Roller.
• 1 Screw [4] (to loosen)
1x
[1]
1x [4]
[3]
[1] 1x
[2]
• Do not touch the surface [1] of the Primary Fixing 2. Free the Heater Harness [1].
Heater. • 1 Connector (with a hook) [2]
[2]
1x
[1]
1x
[1]
[A]
• When disassembling and assembling, do not
break the Primary Fixing Heater [1].
3. Slide the Primary Fixing Roller Heater [1] to place it
in the Primary Fixing Roller [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
4. Wrap a sheet of paper [2] around the Primary Fixing

Roller [1].
639
5. Release the front and rear locks [3] of the Primary 7. Remove the Primary Fixing Heater [2] from the
Fixing Roller [1]. Primary Fixing Roller Unit [1].
[1]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1] 8. Disassemble the Primary Fixing Roller Unit.

• 2 E-rings [1]
• 1 Gear [2]
• 1 Gear (with Key Member) [3]
• 2 Primary Fixing Roller Insulating Bushes [4]
• 2 Primary Fixing Roller Bearings [5]
• 1 Primary Fixing Roller [6]
• 1 Key Member [7]
[6]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[1]
6. Remove the Primary Fixing Roller Unit [2] while
keeping the Primary Fixing Heater [1] inside.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[7]
[1] [5]
[4]
NOTE:
When replacing the Primary Fixing Roller Insulating
Bushes, be sure to apply grease (FY9-6026) [1] to the
whole surfaces of the inner circumference [A] and outer
circumference [B] of the Primary Fixing Roller Insulating
Bushes.
[B]
[A]
[1]
640
NOTE: NOTE:
How to distinguish between the Primary Fixing Roller Assembling the Primary Fixing Roller Heater
Insulating Bush and the Secondary Fixing Roller 1. Insert the Heater Mounting Guide [1] included with
Insulating Bush the new Primary Fixing Roller Heater into the Primary
• The Primary Fixing Roller Insulating Bush [1] has a Fixing Roller Unit [2].
blue line at the flange [A].
• The Secondary Fixing Roller Insulating Bush [2] does [1]
not have a blue line at the flange [A].
[1] [2]
[2]
[A] [A] 2. Insert the Primary Fixing Roller Heater [1] into the
Heater Mounting Guide [3] from the connector [2]
[B]
side.
[1] [2]
CAUTION:
Identifying the Primary Fixing Roller Unit
The following shows how to identify the Primary Fixing
Roller and the Secondary Fixing Roller.
Primary Fixing Parts number FL1-1151

Roller Marking [A] [1]
Wrapping pa- Brown
per [B]
Secondary Fix- Parts number FL1-1152
[3]
ing Roller Marking [A] Groove on the
rear side [2] 3. Remove the Heater Mounting Guide [1] from the
connector [2] side of the Primary Fixing Roller Heater.
Wrapping pa- Blue
per [B] [2]
[1] [2]
[1]
[A]
[B]
641
CAUTION: NOTE:
Point to check when replacing the Primary Fixing Roller Assembling the Primary Fixing Roller Unit
Heater 1. When installing a new Primary Fixing Roller Unit, be
• Be sure to check that the Heater Connector sure to install it without removing the paper wrapped
around the new Primary Fixing Roller. Remove the
Insulator [1] and Heater Retainer Plate [2] are
wrapping paper only after installing the Primary
installed properly.
Fixing Roller Unit [1] in the Fixing Assembly.
• Be sure to check that the Heater Connector 2. With the Primary Fixing Heater inside, install the
Insulator [1] is installed properly to the Heater Primary Fixing Roller Unit [1] by aligning the end
Retainer Plate [3] and Heater Retainer Spring [4]. faces [A] of the bearing with the inside of the Bearing
Retainers [2] of the Fixing Assembly, and the flanges
[2] [1] [B] of the bearing of the Primary Fixing Roller Unit with
the outside of the Side Plates [3] of the Fixing
Assembly.
[B]
[A] [A]
[2] [3] [3] [2]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[4] [1]
3. Slowly pull out the paper [1] wrapped around the new
Primary Fixing Roller in the direction as shown in the
figure.
[1]
642
4. While rotating the gear of the Primary Fixing Roller

Unit by hand, clean the surface [A] of the Primary NOTE:
Fixing Roller with the dry Cleaning Sheet [1]. 2. While pressing the [A] part to release the tension,
remove the Timing Belt [1].
[A]
[A]
[1]
[1]
NOTE:
Cleaning the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt
When replacing the Primary Fixing Roller with a new one,
be sure to clean the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt as well.
1. Free the 2 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Heater NOTE:
Harnesses [1]. 3. Wrap a sheet of paper [2] around the Primary Fixing
• 2 Connectors [2] (with a hook) Pressure Belt [1], and remove the Primary Fixing Pressure
• 1 Connector [3] Belt Unit [3].
3x
[2]
2x
[3]
[A] [3] [A]

[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
NOTE:
4. Moisten the Cleaning Sheet [1] with alcohol, and use it
to clean the surface [A] of the whole circumference of the
Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Unit.
[A] [1]
643
NOTE: CAUTION:
5. Install the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Unit [1] by Do not deform the thermistor/thermoswitch.
aligning its shaft [A] with the [B] part of the Fixing The thermistor or thermoswitch detects the
Assembly. temperature of the Fixing Assembly, and stops power
distribution to the heater when the temperature
[B] abnormally rises.
[A]
proper contact with the Fixing Roller.
[B] If the thermistor or thermoswitch [1] is deformed so that
it does not contact the Fixing Roller [2] properly, the
[A]
temperature may be detected incorrectly, causing the
Fixing Assembly to overheat.
[2] [1]
1. Clean the Primary Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor [2]

[1]
[1]
Cleaning the Primary Fixing

Roller Sub Thermistor
■ Pre-preparation
1. “Pulling Out the Primary Fixing Assembly” on page [2]
621

page 635
3. “Disassembling the Primary Fixing Roller, Bearings,

and Insulating Bushes” on page 638 Replacing the Primary Fixing
■ Cleaning the Primary Fixing Roller
Sub Thermistor ■ Pre-preparation
621

page 635

and Insulating Bushes” on page 638
644
■ Disassembling the Primary Fixing Replacing the Primary Fixing

Roller Main Thermistor
■ Pre-preparation
621

page 635
CAUTION: 3. “Disassembling the Primary Fixing Roller, Bearings,
Do not deform the thermistor/thermoswitch. and Insulating Bushes” on page 638
abnormally rises. Roller Main Thermistor
If the thermistor or thermoswitch [1] is deformed so that
CAUTION:
[2] [1] Do not deform the thermistor/thermoswitch.
abnormally rises.
1. Remove the Primary Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor temperature may be detected incorrectly, causing the
[1]. Fixing Assembly to overheat.
• 1 Connector [2]
• 1 Lock Lever [3]
• 1 Hook [4]
[2] [1]
1x
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
645
1. Remove the Primary Fixing Roller Main Thermistor

[1]. CAUTION:
• 1 Connector [2]
• 2 Bosses [4]
abnormally rises.
1x proper contact with the Fixing Roller.
[2]
[3] If the thermistor or thermoswitch [1] is deformed so that
[1] temperature may be detected incorrectly, causing the
[2] [1]
[4]

Roller Thermoswitch
■ Pre-preparation 1. Clean the Primary Fixing Roller Thermoswitch [2]
with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol[1].
621 [1]
[2]
page 635

● Cleaning the Primary Fixing Roller

Thermoswitch

Roller Thermoswitch
■ Pre-preparation
621

page 635

646
■ Disassembling the Primary Fixing Replacing the Primary Fixing

Roller Thermoswitch
Pressure Belt Unit
■ Pre-preparation
621

page 635
CAUTION:
Do not deform the thermistor/thermoswitch. ■ Disassembling the Primary Fixing
Pressure Belt Unit
abnormally rises.
Be careful to avoid applying excessive pressure when CAUTION:
cleaning the thermistor/thermoswitch. • Do not touch the surface of the Fixing Pressure
Belt.
• Be sure to place the Fixing Pressure Belt Unit [2]
[2] [1] on a sheet of paper [1].
[1] [2]
1. Remove the Primary Fixing Roller Thermoswitch [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
• 2 Terminals [3]
• 1 Boss [5]
[2]
2x
[3]
[3]
[5]
[1]
[4]
647
1. Free the 2 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Heater

NOTE:
Harnesses [1].
Cleaning the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Lower Shaft
• 2 Connectors [2] (with a hook) 1. Clean the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Lower Shaft
• 1 Connector [3] [1] with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol [2].
3x
[2]
2x [1]
[A] [3] [A]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
2. While pressing the [A] part to release the tension ,

remove the Timing Belt [1].
[A]
[1]

Pressure Belt [1], and remove the Primary Fixing
Pressure Belt Unit [3].
[2]
[3]
[1]
648
NOTE: NOTE:
Assembling the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Unit Cleaning the Primary Fixing Roller
1. Moisten the Cleaning Sheet [1] with alcohol, and use When replacing the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt with a
it to clean the surface [A] of the whole circumference new one, be sure to clean the Primary Fixing Roller as well.
of the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Unit. 1. While rotating the gear of the Primary Fixing Roller
Unit by hand, clean the surface [A] of the Primary
[A] [1] Fixing Roller with the dry Cleaning Paper [1].
[A]
2. Install the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Unit by

aligning the [A] part of its shaft with the [B] part of the
Fixing Assembly.
[1]
[B]
[A]
[B]
[A] Replacing the Primary Fixing

Pressure Belt
■ Pre-preparation
621

page 635

Unit” on page 647
4. “When Replacing the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt”

on page 917
[1] ■ Disassembling the Primary Fixing

Pressure Belt
649
2. Stand the Fixing Pressure Belt Unit [1] to align the

CAUTION: shafts with the two holes [A] in Sub Station Inner
Note the following 2 points when handling the Primary Cover 1.
Fixing Pressure Belt Unit:
1. Be sure to place a sheet of paper.
NOTE:
Be sure to wrap the Fixing Pressure Belt [2] with paper to
avoid touching it directly with your hands.
[2]
2. Before installing the unit to the host machine, [3]

ensure that no foreign matter is attached inside the
belt.
(Otherwise, image failure may occur)
1. Remove Sub Station Inner Cover 1 [1].

• 3 Screws [2] [1]
[1]
3x [2] [4]
[A]
CAUTION:
Check that the bearing [4] is fitted in the hole.
3. While pulling the Fixing Pressure Belt Steering

Roller in the direction of the arrow (1) to widen the
650
hole [A], press the Lock Plate [2] with a flat-blade

NOTE:
screwdriver to release the tension on the roller.
Assembling the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt
1. When installing the Fixing Pressure Belt, be sure to align
UNLOCK LOCK the center of the belt [1] with the center [A] of the unit. The
Fixing Pressure Belt will be automatically positioned when
power is turned ON.
[1]
[A] [2] [A] [2]
[A]
[1]
NOTE:
2. Raise the Lock Plate [2] of the Fixing Pressure Belt
Steering Roller [1] with a flat-blade screwdriver to apply
tension on the roller.
4. Check that the tension of the Fixing Pressure Belt [1]
has been released, and then remove the belt. UNLOCK
LOCK
CAUTION:
When disassembling and assembling, do not let the [A]
parts damage the Fixing Pressure Belt [1].
[2] [2]
[A]
[A]
[1]
[1]

Pressure Belt Inner Oil Coating
Roller
■ Pre-preparation
621
651
2. “Opening/Closing the Primary Fixing Upper Unit” on Sub Station Inner Cover 1, and then place it [1]
page 635 sideways on the paper.

Unit” on page 647 [2]
4. “Disassembling the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt”

on page 649
[3]

Pressure Belt Inner Oil Coating Roller
[1]
[A]
CAUTION:
Note the following 2 points when handling the Primary
[3]
2. Move the Contact Cover [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
3. Remove the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Inner Oil

Coating Roller [3].
2. Before installing the unit to the host machine, 1x

ensure that no foreign matter is attached inside the [3]
belt.
[1]
Pressure Belt Unit [1] while avoiding contact with the
[2]
4 rollers [2], free the unit from the 2 holes [A] in the
652
NOTE: NOTE:
Assembling the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Inner Oil 3. Release your hand, tighten the screw [2] until it stops
Coating Roller with the Contact Cover [1] turned clockwise and pressed,
1. Attach the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Inner Oil and check that there is a gap [A] between the Side Plate
Coating Roller [2] on top of the Oil Coating Roller Pressure and the bearing [3] of the Oil Coating Roller.
Spring [1]. If there is no gap [A], oil cannot be applied sufficiently from
the Oil Coating Roller to the Fixing Pressure Belt.
[1] [2] [1] [2]
1x
[1]
[2]
[3]
[A]
2. Turn the Contact Cover [1] counterclockwise, and

temporarily tighten the loosened screw [2] in the screw
hole by giving it 7 or 8 turns.
4. Press the front end [B] of the Oil Coating Roller, and
check that the bearing [3] of the Oil Coating Roller moves
up and down by the width of the gap [A].
1x
[1]
[2] [B]
[3]
[A] [A]
653
the Sub Station Inner Cover 1, and then place it [1]

Replacing the Primary Fixing sideways on the paper.
Pressure Belt Pressure Pad Cover
and Primary Fixing Pressure Belt [2]
Pressure Pad
[3]
■ Pre-preparation
621

page 635 [1]

Unit” on page 647 [A]
on page 649

Inner Oil Coating Roller” on page 652

Pressure Belt Pressure Pad Cover
[3]
and Primary Fixing Pressure Belt
Pressure Pad
2. Change the direction of the Primary Fixing Pressure
Belt Unit [1].
CAUTION:
Fixing Pressure Belt Unit: [1]
2. Before installing the unit to the host machine,

belt.

4 rollers [2], remove the unit from the 2 holes [A] in
654
3. Move the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Separation 4. Remove the Retainer Plate [1] of the Primary Fixing
Roller [1] to increase the space [A]. Pressure Belt Pressure Pad Cover.
• 1 E-ring [2] • 6 Screws [2]
• 1 Spacer [3]
• 1 Bearing (Large) [4]
CAUTION:
• 2 Bearing Holders [5]
When installing/removing the 6 screws [2], do not
• 1 Parallel Pin [6]
damage the surface [A] of the Primary Fixing Pressure
• 1 Bearing (Small) [7]
Separation Roller.
[6]
[7] (Otherwise, image failure may occur)
[5]
[4] [2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[A]
[A]
[A]
5. Remove the end [B] of the Primary Fixing Pressure

Belt Pressure Pad Cover.
• 5 Bosses [3]
[3]
6x
[B]
[1]
[2]
655
6. Change the direction of the Primary Fixing Pressure 2. “Opening/Closing the Primary Fixing Upper Unit” on
Belt Unit [1]. page 635

Unit” on page 647

on page 649

[1] Pressure Belt Steering Roller
7. Remove the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Pressure

Pad Cover [1]. CAUTION:
• 5 Screws [2] Note the following 2 points when handling the Primary
[2] 1. Be sure to place a sheet of paper.
5x
[1]
8. Remove the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Pressure

Pad [1]. 2. Before installing the unit to the host machine,
belt.
• 2 Washers [3]
2x 1. Wrap a sheet of paper [3] around the Primary Fixing

[2] [2]
[3] [3]
[1]

Pressure Belt Steering Roller
■ Pre-preparation
621
656
the Sub Station Inner Cover 1, and then place it [1] 3. Remove the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Steering
sideways on the paper. Roller [1].
• 2 E-rings [2]
• 2 Washers [3]
[2]
• 2 Bearings [4]
• 1 Roller Shaft [5]
[3]
[3] [2]
[4] [4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[A]
[5] [1]

Pressure Belt Inlet Thermistor
[3]
■ Pre-preparation
2. Remove the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Steering 621
Roller (with shaft) [1].
• 2 E-rings [2]
page 635
• 2 Washers [3]
• 2 Bearings [4] 3. “Disassembling the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt
Unit” on page 647
[2]
[3]
[4] [4] 4. “Disassembling the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt”
[3] on page 649
[2]

Pressure Belt Inlet Thermistor
[1]
657
the Sub Station Inner Cover 1, and then place it [1]

CAUTION: sideways on the paper.
1. Be sure to place a sheet of paper. [2]
[3]
[1]
[A]
2. Before installing the unit to the host machine,
belt.
CAUTION:
The thermistor or thermoswitch detects the [3]
abnormally rises.
proper contact with the Fixing Pressure Belt Inlet • 2 Guides [A]
Roller.
If the thermistor or thermoswitch [1] is deformed so that [A]
it does not contact the Fixing Pressure Belt Inlet Roller 2x
[2] properly, the temperature may be detected [1]
incorrectly, causing the Fixing Assembly to overheat.
[2] [1]
1. Wrap a sheet of paper [3] around the Primary Fixing 3. Turn over the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Unit [1].
658
4. Remove the Spring Retainer Plate [2]. 8. Remove the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Inlet Main
• 2 Screws [3] Thermistor [3].
• 1 Spring [4] • 1 Screw [4]
2x
[1] [2] [A] [3] [4]
1x
[1]
2x [2]
[4]
Pressure Belt Bearings 1, 3, 4 and
5 and the Primary Fixing Pressure
[3]
Belt Bushings
■ Pre-preparation
• Guide [A] 1. “Pulling Out the Primary Fixing Assembly” on page
621
6. Remove the Contact Cover [2].
• 1 Screw [3] 2. “Opening/Closing the Primary Fixing Upper Unit” on
page 635

1x Unit” on page 647

on page 649
1x
[A]
[2]
Pressure Belt Bearings 1, 3, 4 and 5
[1] and the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt
Bushings
[3]
7. Remove the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Inlet Sub

Thermistor [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
659
2. Turn the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Unit [1].

CAUTION:
[1]
3. Remove the 2 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Bearings

1 [1], the 2 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Bushings
2. Before installing the unit to the host machine, [2], and the 2 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Bearings
ensure that no foreign matter is attached inside the 5 [2].
belt. • 1 E-ring (Small) [4]
(Otherwise, image failure may occur) • 1 Gear [5]
• 3 Parallel Pins [6]
• 2 E-rings (Large) [7]
1. Wrap a sheet of paper [3] around the Primary Fixing • 2 Spacers [8]
4 rollers [2], free the unit from the 2 holes [A] in the
Sub Station Inner Cover 1, and then place it [1] NOTE:
sideways on the paper. Be sure to replace the 2 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt
Bearings 1 [1], the 2 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt
Bushings [2], the 2 E-rings (Large) [7], and the 2 spacers
[2] [8] at the same time.
[3] [7]
[1] [8]
[8] [1]
[7] [2]
[6] [6]
[5] [3]
[4]
[3]
[6]
[1] [2]
[A]
[3]
660
4. Remove the 2 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Bearings ■ Cleaning the Primary Fixing Inlet
3 [1].
• 2 E-rings [2]
Guide
• 2 Washers [3]
[2]
[1] [1] [3]
[3]
[2]
1. Clean the Primary Fixing Inlet Guide [1] from the

inside with lint-free paper [2] moistened with
alcohol.
CAUTION:
Do not touch the Fixing Roller [3] when cleaning.
5. Remove the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Steering

Roller (with shaft) [1]. [3]
[1]
[1]
6. Remove the 2 Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Bearings

4 [1].
[2]
• 2 E-rings [2]
• 2 Washers [3] 2. Close the Primary Fixing Upper Unit [1] while
holding the [A] part of the lever (C-A5) and the tab
[B] (black flocked surface) of the plate on the rear
[3] [2]
[1] [1] side.
[3]
[2] [B]
[A]
Cleaning the Primary Fixing [1]
Inlet Guide
■ Pre-preparation
621

page 635

Unit” on page 647
661
3. Clean the Primary Fixing Inlet Guide [1] from the

outside with lint-free paper [2] moistened with CAUTION:
alcohol. • Do not touch the Primary Fixing External Heat Belt
[1].
[1]
[1] [2] • When removing the Fixing Front Upper Cover, be

sure to check the position of the Sensor Flag [1].
Replacing the Primary Fixing because the External Heat Unit of the Fixing
External Heat Belt Unit Assembly is under pressure.
■ Pre-preparation [1] [2]

621


662
• Do not damage the Fixing Roller [1] when 2. Remove the Primary Fixing Upper Cover [1].
disassembling/assembling. • 2 Screws [2] (to loosen)
• 2 Hooks [3]
[1]
[3] [1]
2x
[2]
[3] [2]
NOTE: NOTE:
Removing the Primary Fixing External Heat Unit while on Fit the 4 claws [1] of the Release Lever of the Pressure
the Host Machine Plate into the holes [2] on the Pressure Plate before
Be sure to remove the Primary Fixing Front Upper Cover installing the Fixing Upper Cover [3].
mentioned in step 1.
[1]
1. Remove the Primary Fixing Front Upper Cover [1].
[1]
2x
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2] [1]
663
3. Lift the handle [1] vertically, and move the Release 4. Hook the claw [1] of the Release Lever in the hole [A]
Lever until the Pressure Shaft [2] hits the end of the of the Pressure Plate to lock (on both front and rear
long hole [A] (on both front and rear sides). sides).
NOTE:
The Pressure Shaft (for fixing the External Heat Pressure
Shaft) [1] is pulled, which compresses the Pressure Spring
[2] and releases the pressure on the External Heat Unit
[3].
[3]
[1]
[1]
[A]
[2]
[2]
664
7. Remove the Primary Fixing External Heat Belt Unit

[1].
• 1 Screw [2]
• 2 Shafts [3]
CAUTION:
• Do not damage the Sensor Flag [1] when
[A] [1]
[1]
• Place the removed Primary Fixing External Heat

Belt Unit [1] on a sheet of paper [2].
[1]
5. Remove the External Heat Pressure Plate [1].

[1]
2x
[2]
[2]
[2]
6. Remove the Connector Mounting Plate [1].

[1] [2]
2x
[2]
665
CAUTION:
1x Points to check before assembling the Primary Fixing
External Pressure Belt Unit
1. Check the routing of the harness.
• Check that the harness [1] passes through the
guide [A].
guide [B].
[2] [3]
[1]
[1]
3x
[B]
[A]
[2]
[3]
666
2. Check that the Protection Sheet [1] is properly 3. Check the routing of the harness.
installed. • Check that the harness [1] does not protrude
• Check that the Protection Sheet [1] has not beyond the line A.
gotten under the Main Thermistor Mounting • Be sure that the harness [1] is secured inside
Plate [2]. the line A.
• Check that the harness [3] is routed on top of
the Protection Sheet [1].
[1] [A]
[3]
[1] [A]
[1] [2]
[3]
[1] [2]
667

NOTE:
• Push in the harness [1] with a finger until it
Assembling the Primary Fixing External Heat Belt Unit
stops preventing the harness [1] from coming
1. Be sure to install the 2 shafts [2] by opening the
in contact with the guide [A]. External Pressure Belt Unit [1] when assembling.
• Push in the harness [2] with a finger to the left (Otherwise, the Fixing Roller may be damaged.)
side. • 1 Screw [3]
[1]
1x
[3] [2]
[2]
[A]
After pushing in the harnesses [1][2] with a finger,

check that the harnesses [1][2] are not caught in
the line [A][B] as shown in the below figure.
[1]
[A]
[B]
[2]
[A] [A]
[1], [2]
[1], [2]
[B] [B]
2.0 mm 2.0 mm
668
2. After installing the Primary Fixing External Heat Unit

[1] to the Fixing Assembly, open and close the CAUTION:
Primary Fixing External Heat Unit [1] to check that the When installing the External Heat Pressure Plate [1],
shaft [2] is on the cam [3]. be sure to tighten the screws [2] securely.
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3]
Replacing the Primary/
Secondary Fixing External Heat
Roller Thermistor
■ Pre-preparation

621
[1]

4.

page 700
4. “Disassembling the Secondary Fixing External Heat

■ Replacing the Primary/Secondary

Fixing External Heat Roller
Thermistor
669
the upper part [1] of the Fixing External Heat Unit

NOTE:
open.
The Fixing External Heat Unit is a common unit that is
compatible between the Primary Fixing Assembly and • 2 Screws [4]
Secondary Fixing Assembly. Disassembly/assembly work • 3 Bosses [5]
should be performed using the same procedure.
CAUTION:
Do not deform the Fixing External Heat Roller Main
CAUTION: Thermistor [6] or the 2 Fixing External Heat Roller Sub
Do not deform the thermistor/thermoswitch. Thermistors [7].
[1]
abnormally rises.
proper contact with the Fixing External Heat Roller.
it does not contact the Fixing External Heat Roller [2]
properly, the temperature may be detected incorrectly,
causing the Fixing Assembly to overheat.
Be careful to avoid applying excessive pressure when [4]
2x
[2] [1]
[2]
[5]
[3]
NOTE:
The following shows an outline drawing of the Fixing
External Heat Upper Roller Thermistor [1] and the Fixing
External Heat Lower Roller Thermistor [2].
• 4 Clips [3]
[2] [1] [2]
(THM302M) (THM302S2) (THM302S1)

(THM307M) (THM307S2) (THM307S1)
[3]
[3] (9Pin)
[3] [3]
(8Pin)
(THM303S1) (THM303S2) (THM303M)
(THM308S1) (THM308S2) (THM308M)
[1] [2] [1]
1. Remove the Main Thermistor Support Plate [2] and

the Sub Thermistor Support Plate [3] while keeping
670
2. Remove the Main Thermistor Support Plate [1] and 3. Free the harness [1] from the 4 clips [2].
the Sub Thermistor Support Plate [2].
• 2 Screws [3] [1]
• 3 Bosses [4] 2x
CAUTION:
Do not deform the Fixing External Heat Roller Main
Thermistor [5] or the 2 Fixing External Heat Roller Sub
Thermistors [6].
[2]
[3]
2x
[1]
[1]
[2]
[4] [5] [4] 2x
[6]
[2]
4. Turn over the 4 Thermistor Support Plates [1], and

remove the 2 Fixing External Heat Roller Main
671
Thermistors [2] and the 4 Fixing External Heat Roller

Sub Thermistors [3]. Replacing the Primary/
• 6 Screws [4] Secondary Fixing External Heat
• 6 Bosses [5]
Cleaning Roller
[1] [2]
3x ■ Pre-preparation
[5]

621


4.
[3] [4]
page 700


[4] Secondary Fixing External Heat
3x [5]
Cleaning Roller
[2] NOTE:
[3] The Fixing External Heat Unit is a common unit that is
[3] [1] compatible between the Primary Fixing Assembly and
Secondary Fixing Assembly. Disassembly/assembly work
5. Remove the Fixing External Heat Upper Roller should be performed using the same procedure.
Thermistor [1] and the Fixing External Heat Lower
Roller Thermistor [2].
• 1 Wire Saddle [3] CAUTION:
• 2 Connectors [4] Do not touch the surface of the roller when
• Harness Guide [A] disassembling/assembling.
[2] [4]
[A] [1] [3]
672
1. Remove the Fixing External Heat Cleaning Roller [1]. For the Secondary Fixing Assembly, refer to steps 3 and
• 1 Screw [2] 4.
• 1 Shaft Fixation Plate [3]
page 700
1x 4. “Disassembling the Secondary Fixing External Heat


Lower Roller Thermoswitch
[3] [1]
[2]
NOTE:
Assembling the Fixing External Heat Cleaning Roller
When assembling the Fixing External Heat Cleaning NOTE:
Roller, be sure to align the hook [2] of the Shaft Fixation The Fixing External Heat Unit is a common unit that is
Plate [1] with the boss [3] and then secure the Shaft compatible between the Primary Fixing Assembly and
Fixation Plate [1] with the screw [4] while holding the Shaft Secondary Fixing Assembly. Disassembly/assembly work
Fixation Plate. should be performed using the same procedure.
Otherwise, the Support Plate where it is installed to may
be deformed.
CAUTION:
1x Do not deform the thermistor/thermoswitch.
abnormally rises.
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2] [2] [1]

Lower Roller Thermoswitch
■ Pre-preparation

621

673
1. Remove the Fixing External Heat Lower Roller

Assembling the Thermoswitch
• 2 Screws (W Sems) [2]
1. Check whether the type of the Thermoswitch is [1]
• 1 Screw (Binding Head Screw with washer) [3]
or [2].
• 2 Terminals [4]
• Old type [1]: [A] is short.
• 1 Hook [5]
• New type [2]: [A] is long, and there are [B] and
[3] [2] [C] parts.
3x [1]
[A]
[1]
[B] [C]
[2]
[A]
2. In the case of the old type Thermoswitch [1]

[4] [5] • Be sure that the Heater Wire is kept off the [A]
part at assembly.
• Be sure to turn the terminal [3]
counterclockwise to tighten the Heater Wire.
[A] [A]
[1]
1x
[3]
674
3. In the case of the new type Thermoswitch [2]

• Install the terminal [3] as shown in the figure CAUTION:
below. Do not deform the thermistor/thermoswitch.
[2]
1x
abnormally rises.
[3] cleaning the thermistor/thermoswitch.
[2] [1]

Upper Roller Thermoswitch
■ Pre-preparation
1. Remove the Fixing External Heat Upper Roller
For the Primary Fixing Assembly, refer to steps 1 and 2. Thermoswitch [1].
• 2 Screws (W Sems) [2]
• 1 Screw (Binding Head Screw with washer) [3]
621
• 2 Terminals [4]
2. “Disassembling the Primary Fixing External Heat • 1 Hook [5]
For the Secondary Fixing Assembly, refer to steps 3 and 3x [3] [2]
4.

page 700
[1]

Upper Roller Thermoswitch
[4] [5]
NOTE:
compatible between the Primary Fixing Assembly and
675

CAUTION: • Install the terminal [3] as shown in the figure
Assembling the Thermoswitch below.
or [2].
[2]
1x
[C] parts.
[1]
[A]
[3]
[B] [C]
[2]
[A]

2. In the case of the old type Thermoswitch [1] Secondary Fixing External Heat
• Be sure that the Heater Wire is kept off the [A] Upper Roller Heater
part at assembly.
■ Pre-preparation

621

[A] [A]

4.

page 700

[1]
1x
Upper Roller Heater
[3]
NOTE:
676
CAUTION: CAUTION:
• Do not damage the Fixing External Heat Roller Points to Note When Installing the Fixing External Heat
Heater [1] when disassembling/assembling. Pressure Arm (Front)
Do not damage the Sensor Flags [1], [2].
• Sensor Flag [1]
• Sensor Flag [2]
• Fixing External Heat Pressure Arm Fixation
Assembly [3]
• Fixing External Heat Pressure Arm (Front) [4]
• 1 Screw [5]
[1] Follow the procedure shown below to install [4] the
Fixing External Heat Pressure Arm (Front).
1. Apply fingertip pressure to the Sensor Flag [2].
2. Turn the Fixing External Heat Pressure Arm
Fixation Assembly [3]
3. Release fingertip pressure to the Sensor Flag [2].
4. Install the Fixing External Heat Pressure Arm
(Front) [4].
1. Remove the Fixing External Heat Pressure Arm

(Front) [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
[1]
1x [2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2] [5]
1x
[1]
[3]
[4]
677

(Rear) [1]. CAUTION:
Point to check when replacing the Primary/Secondary
• 1 Screw [2]
Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Heater
• Be sure to check by reversing the Fixing External
Heat Unit [1] that the Heater Connector Insulator
1x [2] and Heater Retainer [3] are installed properly.
[2] • Be sure to check that the Heater Connector
Insulator [2] and Heater Retainer Spring [4] are
installed properly.
[1]
[2]
[3]
3. Free the 3 Fixing External Heat Roller Heater

[1]
Harnesses [1].
• 1 Screw (W Sems M4x8) [2]
• 2 Screws (W Sems M3x6) [3]
• 3 Terminals [4]
3x 2x
[1] [2]
[3] [3]
[4] [2]
[1]
[1]
[A] [4]
[4] [A]
4. Remove the Fixing External Heat Upper Roller

Heater [1].
• 2 Screws (Binding Head Screw with washer) [2]
• 1 Heater Retainer Spring [3]
• 1 Heater Retainer Plate [4]
2x
[2] [4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
678

How to assemble the External Heat Roller Heater below.
Harness
[2]
or [2].
1x
[C] parts.
[1]
[A]
[3]
[B] [C]
[2]
[A]

2. In the case of the old type Thermoswitch [1] Lower Roller Heater
• Be sure that the Heater Wire is kept off the [A]
part at assembly.
■ Pre-preparation
counterclockwise to tighten the Heater Wire. For the Primary Fixing Assembly, refer to steps 1 and 2.

621

[A] [A]
4.

page 700

[1]
1x Secondary Fixing External Heat
Lower Roller Heater
[3]
NOTE:
679
CAUTION: CAUTION:
Do not damage the External Heat Roller Heater [1] Points to Note When Installing the Fixing External Heat
when disassembling/assembling. Pressure Arm (Front)
Do not damage the Sensor Flags [1], [2].
• Sensor Flag [1]
• Sensor Flag [2]
• Fixing External Heat Pressure Arm Fixation
Assembly [3]
• Fixing External Heat Pressure Arm (Front) [4]
• 1 Screw [5]
Follow the procedure shown below to install [4] the
Fixing External Heat Pressure Arm (Front).
1. Apply fingertip pressure to the Sensor Flag [2].
2. Turn the Fixing External Heat Pressure Arm
Fixation Assembly [3]
3. Release fingertip pressure to the Sensor Flag [2].
[1] 4. Install the Fixing External Heat Pressure Arm
(Front) [4].

(Front) [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
[1]
[2]
1x
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2] [5]
1x
[1]
[3]
[4]
680

(Rear) [1]. CAUTION:
Point to check when replacing the Primary/Secondary
• 1 Screw [2]
Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Heater
• Be sure to check by reversing the Fixing External
Heat Unit [1] that the Heater Connector Insulator
1x [2] and Heater Retainer [3] are installed properly.
[2] • Be sure to check that the Heater Connector
Insulator [2] and Heater Retainer Spring [4] are
installed properly.
[1]
[3]
[2]
3. Free the 3 External Heat Roller Heater Harnesses [1].

[1]
• 1 Screw (W Sems M4x8) [2]
• 2 Screws (W Sems M3x6) [3]
• 3 Terminals [4]
3x 2x [3]
[A]
[2] [4]
[3]
[1]
[4] [2]
[A]
[1]
[4]
[1]
4. Remove the Fixing External Heat Lower Roller

Heater [1].
• 2 Screws (Binding Head Screw with washer) [2]
• 1 Heater Retainer Spring [3]
• 1 Heater Retainer Plate [4]
[2]
[4]
2x
[1]
[3]
[2]
681

How to assemble the External Heat Roller Heater below.
Harness
[2]
or [2].
1x
[C] parts.
[1]
[A]
[3]
[B] [C]
[2]
4. Be sure to put the tie-wrap [1] (which controls the
[A] length of the harness) in the groove [A] of the
Harness Guide, and secure the round shape
terminal using the 2 screws [2].
2. In the case of the old type Thermoswitch [1] [1]

• Be sure that the Heater Wire is kept off the [A] 1x [A]
part at assembly.
[A] [A]
2x [2]
[1]
1x

[3]
682
Belt/Roller Bearings/Insulating 1. Turn the Fixing External Heat Belt Unit [1].
Bushes [1]
■ Pre-preparation
For the Primary Fixing Assembly, refer to steps 1, 2, 3
and 4.

621

3. “Disassembling the Primary/Secondary Fixing 2. Remove the 2 Fixing External Heat Roller Fixation
External Heat Lower Roller Heater” on page 679 Springs [1].
• 2 Hooks [2]
4. “Disassembling the Primary/Secondary Fixing
External Heat Upper Roller Heater” on page 676 [2]
For the Secondary Fixing Assembly, refer to steps 5, 6, [1]

7 and 8.
5. “Pulling Out the Secondary Fixing Assembly” on [2]

page 700


External Heat Lower Roller Heater” on page 679

External Heat Upper Roller Heater” on page 676

Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt/
Roller Bearings/Insulating Bushes
NOTE:
683
3. Wrap a sheet of paper [2] around the Fixing External External Heat Belt and the Fixing External Heat
Heat Belt [1], and remove it with the 2 Fixing External Rollers.
Heat Rollers [3].
CAUTION:
NOTE: Grease is applied to the 4 Fixing External Heat Roller
Place the removed Fixing External Heat Belt and the Bearings [1] and the 4 Insulating Bushes [2]. Remove
Fixing External Heat Rollers on the paper [1]. grease on your hands with lint-free paper so as not to
smear other parts with your greasy hand.
[2] [1]
[2] [2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1] [2]
[1]
[3]
4. Remove the 4 Fixing External Heat Roller Bearings

[1] and the 4 Insulating Bushes [2] from the Fixing
684
5. Remove the Fixing External Heat Belt [2] from the 2

Fixing External Heat Rollers [1]. Replacement of the Primary/
[1] Drawer Harness Unit
■ Preparation

621

[2]
4.
NOTE: 3. “Pulling Out the Secondary Fixing Assembly” on

Assembling the Primary/Secondary Fixing External Heat page 700
Roller Bearings/Insulating Bushes
1. The Fixing External Heat Belt [1] should be installed 4. “Disassembling the Secondary Fixing External Heat
at the center of the Fixing External Heat Rollers [2]. Belt Unit” on page 734
[1]
Drawer Harness Unit
[2] [2]
2. Assemble the bearings [1] by aligning them with the
end faces [A] of the Bearing Holders.
3. Hook the claw [4] on the hole [3] in the Fixing External 1. Free the 2 Thermistor Harnesses [1].
Heat Roller Fixation Spring [2] to install the spring. • 1 Wire Saddle [2]
[2]
[3]
[A]
[3]
[4]
1x
[1]
[1] [A] [2]
2x
[1]
685
2. Free the Thermistor Harness [1] from the guide [A]. 4. Remove the Drawer Harness Unit [1] from guides [A],
[B], [C], [D], and [E] and from the hole [F].
1x (9Pin)
5x
[A]
(8Pin)
[1]
[B]
[A]
[C]
3. Remove screws securing the terminal and cut the
Harness Band [4] securing the Drawer Harness Unit
[3].
• 4 Screws (Small) [1]
• 2 Screws (Large) [2]
6x
[2] [1]
[D] [E] [1]
[F]
[1] [2] 5. Open the Wire Saddle [1] and disconnect connectors
[2].
1x 2x
[2]
[4]
[1]
[3]
686
6. Free the Drawer Harness Unit (Displacement Sensor

Harness) [1] from guides [A], [B], and [C]. CAUTION:
Assembling the Primary/Secondary Fixing External
Heat Drawer Harness Unit
[A] 1. When installing the Drawer Harness Unit [1] to the
3x
guide [2], adjust to place the tape [A] of Drawer
Harness Unit [1] before the screw [3].
[2]
[B] [1]
[A] [3]
[1]
[C]
687
2. Check the routing of the harness. 3. Check the routing of the harness.
• Check that the Drawer Harness Unit [2] • Check that the Drawer Harness Unit [1]
passes under the Thermistor Harness [2] and passes through the guide [A].
through the hole [F]. • Check that the Drawer Harness Unit [2]
• Check that the Drawer Harness Unit [3] passes through the guide [B].
passes under the Thermistor Harness [4].
[1] [1]
[2] [2]
[F] [F]
[1]
3x
[B]
[A]
[2]
[3] [3]
[4] [4]
688
4. Check the routing of the harness. 5. Pass the Harness Band [1] through the holes [A]
• Push in the Drawer Harness Unit [1] with a of guide [2].
finger until it stops preventing the Drawer
Harness Unit [1] from coming in contact with
the guide [A]. [A]
• Push in the Drawer Harness Unit [2] with a
finger to the left side.
[1]
[1] [2]
6. Tighten the Harness Band [3] at 2 locations of the

Harness Band [A] for the Drawer Harness Unit [1]
and cut the extra part of Harness Band [3].
[B]
[2]
1x
[A]
[3]
After pushing in the Drawer Harness Unit [1][2] [2]

with a finger, check that the Drawer Harness Unit
[1]
[1][2] are not caught in the line [A][B] as shown in
the below figure.
[A] [A]
[A]
7. Route the Harness Band [A] for the Thermistor

Harness [1] to the outside of the guide [2].
[1]
1x [A]
[B]
[A] [A]
[2] [A]
[1], [2]
[1], [2]
[B] [B]
Refresh Roller
2.0 mm 2.0 mm
■ Pre-preparation
621

689
■ Disassembling the Primary Fixing 1. Insert a sheet of paper [3] between the Primary
Fixing Roller [1] and the Primary Fixing Refresh
Refresh Roller Roller [2]
[1] [2]
[3]
CAUTION:
• Do not damage the Primary Fixing Roller [1] when
disassembling and assembling.
[1]
• During assembly and disassembly of the Fixing

Refresh Roller, be sure to hold only the [A] parts
(within approx. 10 mm from the ends).
• Do not touch the surface [B].
[A] [A]
[B]
690
2. While pushing the Fixing Refresh Roller [1] in the ■ Cleaning the Primary Fixing
direction of [A], remove it in the direction of [B].
Delivery Lower Separation Claw
[A]
[1] 1. Lift up the lever (C-A5), and open the Primary Fixing
[2] [1]
[1]
[1]
2. Clean the 6 Primary Fixing Delivery Lower

Separation Claws [2] with lint-free paper [1]
[B] moistened with alcohol.
[2]
NOTE:
Be sure to remove the Protection Sheet [1] wrapped
[1]
around the New Fixing Refresh Roller, and then install the
roller in the Fixing Assembly.
[1]

■ Pre-preparation
Delivery Lower Separation Claw 621
■ Pre-preparation
621
691
■ Disassembling the Primary Fixing Cleaning the Primary Fixing

Inner Delivery Separation Air
Nozzle
■ Pre-preparation
621

Inner Delivery Unit [2]. ■ Cleaning the Primary Fixing Inner
[2] [1]
Delivery Separation Air Nozzle

[2] [1]
2. Remove the 6 Primary Fixing Delivery Lower

Separation Claws [1].
• 6 Screws [2]
• 12 Bosses [3]
[1]
6x
[1]
2. Clean the upside and downside of the Primary Fixing

Inner Delivery Separation Air Nozzle [A] with lint-free
[1]
[A]
[2]
[3]
692
2. Open the lever (C-A5) [1] slightly, and remove the 2

Replacing the Primary Fixing screws [2].
Inner Delivery Separation Air
Nozzle
2x
■ Pre-preparation
621

Inner Delivery Separation Air Nozzle [2] [2]
[1]
1. Remove the screw [1] on the rear side of the Primary
Fixing Inner Delivery Unit.
1x
[2] [1]
4. Remove the Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Cover [1].

• 3 Screws [2]
[1]
3x
[2]
693
5. Remove the duct [1]. 7. Release the Tube Clamp [1], and remove the Air Tube
• 1 Screw [2] [2] by passing it through the gap [A] in the guide.
[1]
1x
[2]
6. Remove the Separation Claw Unit [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
[1]
CAUTION:
Do not damage the harness connected to the
Separation Claw Unit [1].
[1]
[2]
[A]
CAUTION:
[2] When installing the Air Tube [2], be sure to secure it
2x with the Tube Clamp [1].
[1]
[1]
[2]
694
8. Remove the 2 Torsion Springs [1]. 10. Remove the Primary Fixing Inner Delivery
• 2 Hook Holes [A] Separation Air Nozzle [1].
• 1 Pin [2]
[1]
[2]
NOTE:
• When assembling, hook the 2 springs [1] on the 2 [A]
parts on the inside of the Primary Fixing Inner
[A] [A] [1] Delivery Separation Air Nozzle to install it.
[1]
• Be sure to install the spring with the red marking [B]
on the front side.
9. Remove the Positioning Holder [1].

• 1 Screw [2] [B]
• 1 Pin [3]
• 2 Bosses [4]
[1] [1]
1x [A] [A]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]

Inner Delivery Connection Lower
Guide and Roller
■ Pre-preparation
621
695
■ Cleaning the Primary Fixing Inner 1. Remove the screw [1] on the rear side of the Primary
Delivery Connection Lower Guide
and Roller
1x
[1]
1. Clean the Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Connection

Lower Roller [2], Primary Fixing Inner Delivery
Connection Lower Guide [A], and the Primary Fixing
Inner Delivery Upper Separation Plate [B] with lint-
free paper [1] moistened with alcohol.
[B]

[2] [1]
[2]
[A]
[1]

Inner Delivery Lower Roller 3. Remove the duct [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
■ Pre-preparation
1. “Pulling Out the Primary Fixing Assembly” on page 1x
[1]
621
■ Disassembling the Primary Fixing [2]
Inner Delivery Lower Roller
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the Primary Fixing Inner
Delivery Lower Roller.
696
4. Remove the Separation Claw Unit [1]. 5. Release the Tube Clamp [1], and remove the Air Tube
• 2 Screws [2] [2] by passing it through the gap [A] in the guide.
CAUTION:
[1]
[1]
[2]
2x
[2]
[1]
[A]
CAUTION:
When installing the Air Tube [2], be sure to secure it
with the Tube Clamp [1].
[1]
[2]
697
6. Remove the spring [1] attached to the rear side of the ■ Disassembling the Primary Fixing
Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Lower Roller.
Sub Station Air Flow Unit
[1]
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the Primary Fixing Inner
Delivery Lower Roller.
1. Remove the screw [1] on the rear side of the Primary

7. Remove the Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Lower
Roller [1].
Front side
• 1 E-ring [2]
• 1 Bearing [3] 1x
Rear side
[1]
• 1 N-ring [4]
• 1 One-way Gear [5]
• 3 E-rings [6]
• 1 Bearing [7]
• 1 Spacer [8]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[6] [7]
[8]
[3] [2] [1]
[2]
[1]

Sub Station Air Flow Unit
■ Pre-preparation
621
698
3. Remove the duct [1]. 4. Release the Tube Clamp [1], and remove the Air Tube
• 1 Screw [2] [2] by passing it through the gap [A] in the guide.
[1]
1x
[2]
[1]
[2]
[A]
CAUTION:
When installing the Air Tube [2], be sure to secure it
with the Tube Clamp [1].
[1]
[2]
699
5. Remove the Fixing Sub Station Air Flow Unit [1].

CAUTION:
• 1 Screw [2]
• Be sure to start the work after the Fixing Assembly
gets cold enough to prevent burn injury.
[2] • When the External Heat Pressure Plate [1] is
engaged with the Fixing Assembly, the 3 gear [2]
of the Fixing Assembly may rotate and catch a
finger, so do not touch the 3 gear [2] of the Fixing
Assembly.
[1] [1]
[1]
[2]
• The 3 Primary Fixing Web Unit Pressure Gears [1]

may rotate and catch your finger, so do not touch
Pulling Out the Secondary the 3 Primary Fixing Web Unit Pressure Gears [1].
Fixing Assembly
■ Pulling Out the Secondary Fixing
Assembly
[1]
1. Open the Sub Station Front Right Cover [1] and the
Sub Station Front Left Cover [2].
[2] [1]
2. Unlock the lever (C-B4) [1], and pull out the

Secondary Fixing Assembly [2].
700
1. Release the lock [1], and remove the Secondary

Fixing Web Unit [2].
[1]
[1] [2]

right and left of the rail as necessary, and pull out
the Secondary Fixing Assembly [2] to the maximum.
[2]
[2]
NOTE:
Action to take when the lever of the Secondary Cleaning
Web Unit is not turned
When installing the Primary Fixing Web Unit, the lever [3]
may not be able to be turned to the lock position because
the Lock Arm [2] hits the plate [1].
Remove the Secondary Fixing Web Unit, and assemble it
by the following procedure.
[1]
[2]
[1] [2]

Fixing Web Unit
[3]
■ Pre-preparation
page 700
2. “When Replacing the Fixing Web” on page 919

Fixing Web Unit
701
CAUTION: NOTE:
When lifting up the Fixing Web Unit Engagement/ 1. Rotate the Cam Shaft [2] while lifting up the Fixing
Disengagement Frame [1], be sure not to get your hand Web Unit Engagement/Disengagement Frame [1],
caught. and place the Fixing Web Unit.
[1]
[3] [1]
[2]
[2] [1]
2. Install the Secondary Fixing Web Unit [1] to the

Secondary Fixing Assembly, and turn the lever [2] to
lock it.
[2]
[1]
702
2. Remove the Nozzle Guide [1].

Replacing the Secondary • 1 Screw (W Sems) [2]
Fixing Refresh Roller Cleaning Air
Nozzle 1x
[1]
■ Pre-preparation
page 700

page 701
[2]
Fixing Refresh Roller Cleaning Air
Nozzle
1. Remove the [A] part at the front of the Secondary

Fixing Refresh Roller Cleaning Air Nozzle [1]. 3. Move the Tube Clamp [1] by using needlenose pliers,
• 1 Screw (W Sems) [2] and remove the Secondary Fixing Refresh Roller
• 1 Boss [3] Cleaning Air Nozzle [2].
[1]
1x
[2]
[1]
1x
[A]
[3]
[2]
703
3. “Opening/Closing the Secondary Fixing Upper Unit”

CAUTION: on page 711
• When attaching the Air Tube, check that the end
[3] of the Air Tube is connected between the 2 4. “Disassembling the Secondary Fixing Roller,
marking lines [2] (approx. 2 mm) on the Refresh Bearings, and Insulating Bushes” on page 714
Roller Cleaning Air Nozzle [1].
Fixing Roller Collection Roller
2.0 mm
[3]
[2] [1]
1. Remove the 2 N-rings [1].
• Be sure to install the Tube Clam [1] in the direction

of [B], not [A]. Otherwise, operation of the Refresh
Roller Cleaning Air Nozzle is restricted, and it may
cause cleaning failure.
[1] [1]
[1]
CAUTION:
[A] [B] Do not drop the 2 bearings [1] and the 2 bushings [2]
at both edges of the Fixing Roller Collection Roller
since they are not secured.
Replacing the Secondary [2]

[1]
Fixing Roller Collection Roller [1]
[2]
■ Pre-preparation
page 700

page 701
704
2. Free the front side bearing [1] and bushing [2] from ■ Disassembling the Secondary
the hole, and remove the Fixing Roller Collection
Roller [3]. Fixing Inner Delivery Unit
CAUTION:
[3] • Since the Fixing Assembly weighs more than 30
kg, be sure to split it as described in this procedure
to remove it from the host machine. Alternatively,
the work should be performed by 2 or more people.
• When removing the Fixing Front Upper Cover, be
[2] [1]
because the Fixing Assembly is under pressure.
NOTE:
The Fixing Roller Collection Roller [3] can be installed [1] [2]
more easily if the rear side bearing [4] and bushing [5] are
installed in the hole [A] of the Fixing Assembly.
[A]
[5]
[4]
[3]

Fixing Inner Delivery Unit
■ Pre-preparation
1. “Pulling Out the Secondary Fixing Assembly” on Follow the procedure shown below to release the
page 700 pressure on the Fixing Assembly Pressure Unit.
2. “Disassembling the Secondary Fixing Web Unit” on 2. Put the Fixing Assembly in the host machine.
page 701 3. Close the Sub Station Front Right Cover.
705
1. Remove the Secondary Fixing Front Upper Cover 4. Pass the Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Sensor
[1]. Harness [1] through the inner side of the [A] part of
• 2 Screws [2] (to loosen) the plate.
2x [1]
[A]
[2]
[1]
2. Remove the Fixing Upper Connector Protection 5. Remove the Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Unit
Cover [1]. [1].
• 1 Screw [2] • 1 Fixation Pin [2]
• 1 Screw [3]
• 1 E-ring [4]
1x
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
3. Remove the Harness Guide [1].

• 1 Wire Saddle [3] [1]
• 1 Screw [4] [4]
• 1 Boss [5]
2x 1x 1x Replacing the Secondary

Fixing Assembly (when 1 person
[4] working alone)
[1]
■ Pre-preparation
page 700
[5]
[3] page 701
[2]
3. “Disassembling the Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery
Unit” on page 705

706
■ Disassembling the Secondary 2. Remove the lever (C-B4) [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
Fixing Assembly (when 1 person
working alone) [1]
2x
1. Rotate the screws of the lever (C-B4) [1] to the

position where the lever can be removed.
• 1 Lock [2]
[2]
[2]
3. Remove the Secondary Fixing Front Lower Cover

[1].
1x
[2]
[1]
4. Loosen the screw [1] securing the Secondary Fixing

Assembly.
1x
[1]
[1]
707
5. Hold the 2 handles [1] to remove the Secondary ■ Disassembling the Secondary
Fixing Assembly (when working with
[1]
2 or more people)
CAUTION:
When removing the Fixing Font Upper Cover, be sure
is under pressure.
[2]
[1] [2]
CAUTION:
Be sure to fit the 2 pins [1] on the back of the Secondary
Fixing Assembly with the 2 holes [2] in the Fixing
[2]
[1]

Fixing Assembly (when working
with 2 or more people) Release the pressure from the External Heat Unit by
■ Pre-preparation 1. Install the Fixing Front Upper Cover.
page 700
5. Turn OFF and then ON the power of the host
machine to start the host machine again.
708
1. Remove the Secondary Fixing Front Upper Cover 3. Remove the lever (C-B4) [1].
[1]. • 2 Screws [2]
[1]
2x
2x
[1] [2] [2]
2. Rotate the screws of the lever (C-B4) [1] to the 4. Lift up the lever (C-B5), and open the Secondary
position where the lever can be removed. Fixing Inner Delivery Unit [2].
• 1 Lock [2]
[2]
[2]
[1]
5. Remove the Secondary Fixing Front Lower Cover

[1].
6. Hold the lever (C-B5), and Close the Secondary

Fixing Inner Delivery Unit [4].
[4]
1x [3]
[1]
[1] [2]
7. Loosen the screw [1] securing the Secondary Fixing

Assembly.
709
10. Remove the Secondary Fixing Assembly [1].
1x
CAUTION:
• Because the weight of the Secondary Fixing
Assembly is 30 kg or more, be sure to work with 2
or more people.
[1] • If you perform the work alone, follow the procedure
described in "Disassembling the Secondary Fixing
Assembly (when working with 1 person)".
8. Hook the handle [2] on the black sheet [A] of the [1]
9. Hook the Lock Arm [3] on the hook [4] to secure the
handle [2]. CAUTION:
Be sure to fit the 2 pins [1] on the back of the Secondary
[4] [3] Fixing Assembly with the 2 holes [2] in the Fixing
[2]
[2]
[1]
[A] [1]
Opening/Closing the
Secondary Fixing Upper Unit
■ Pre-preparation
page 700
710
■ Opening/Closing the Secondary Opening/Closing the Secondary Fixing Upper

Unit while on the Host Machine
Fixing Upper Unit
1. Remove the Secondary Fixing Front Upper Cover [1].
2x
CAUTION:
to check the position of the Sensor Flag [1]. If the
Sensor Flag is at the position [2], the Fixing Assembly
cannot be disassembled/assembled because the
External Heat Unit of the Fixing Assembly is under
pressure. [1] [2]

[1] [2] [2].
1x
[1] [2]
1x
[1] [2]

711
3. Open the Secondary Fixing Upper Unit [1]. 2. When working on the Secondary Fixing Assembly after
having removed it from the host machine, be sure to
place the Secondary Fixing Upper Cover [1] to the right
CAUTION:
of the Secondary Fixing Assembly. It then serves as a
The Secondary Fixing Upper Unit is heavy, so
base to stably open the Secondary Fixing Upper Unit [2].
when opening/closing it, be sure to hold the [A]
part of the lever (C-A5) and the handle [B] (black
[1]
flocked surface) of the plate on the rear side, and
open/close it slowly.
[A]
[B]
[2]
[1]
NOTE:
Assembling the Fixing Upper Cover
1. Fit the 4 claws [1] of the Release Lever of the
Pressure Plate into the holes [2] on the Pressure
Plate before installing the Fixing Upper Cover [3].
[1]
[2]
[1]
Opening/Closing the Secondary Fixing Upper
Unit When Removed from the Host Machine
[2]
1. Remove the Secondary Fixing Upper Cover [1].
• 2 Hooks [3] [2]
[3] [1] [3]
2x
[2]
[3] [2]
712
3. Lift up the lever (C-B5), and open the Secondary Fixing 5. Open the Secondary Fixing Upper Unit [1].
[2] CAUTION:
• The Secondary Fixing Upper Unit is heavy, so
[1]
when opening/closing it, be sure to hold the
[A] part of the lever (C-A5) and the handle [B]
(black flocked surface) of the plate on the rear
side.
[A]

[2].
[B]
1x
• When opening the Secondary Fixing Upper

Unit after having removed it from the host
machine, be sure to use the Secondary Fixing
Upper Cover [1] to support the Secondary
[1] [2]
[2]
1x
[1]
[1] [2]
[1]
713
Replacing the Secondary CAUTION:

• Do not touch the surface [1] of the Secondary
Fixing Roller, Bearings, and Fixing Roller.
Insulating Bushes
■ Pre-preparation
page 700

on page 711
3. “When Replacing the Secondary Fixing Rollers” on

[1]
page 916

Fixing Roller, Bearings, and • Do not touch the surface [1] of the Secondary
Fixing Heater.
Insulating Bushes
[1]

break the Secondary Fixing Heater [1].
[1]
714
1. Remove the Heater Retainer Plate [1]. 5. Release the front and rear locks [3] while holding the
• 1 Connector (with a hook) [2] Secondary Fixing Roller [1].
1x
[1]
[3]
1x [4]
[3]
1x
[2]
[2]
[1]
2. Free the Heater Harness [1].
[2]
1x
[1]
1x
[3]
[A]
3. Slide the Secondary Fixing Roller Heater [1] to place

it in the Secondary Fixing Roller [2].
6. Remove the Secondary Fixing Roller Unit [2] while
[2]
keeping the Secondary Fixing Roller Heater [1]
inside.
[1]
[2]
[1]
4. Wrap a sheet of paper [2] around the Secondary

Fixing Roller [1].
715
7. Pull out the Secondary Fixing Roller Heater [2] from

NOTE:
the Secondary Fixing Roller Unit [1].
How to distinguish between the Primary Fixing Roller
[1] Insulating Bush and the Secondary Fixing Roller
Insulating Bush
• The Primary Fixing Roller Insulating Bush [1] has a
blue line at the flange [A].
• The Secondary Fixing Roller Insulating Bush [2] does
not have a blue line at the flange [A].
[1] [2]
[2]
8. Disassemble the Secondary Fixing Roller Unit.

• 2 E-rings [1]
• 1 Gear [2] [A] [A]
• 1 Gear (with Key Member) [3]
[B]
• 2 Secondary Fixing Roller Insulating Bushes [4]
• 2 Secondary Fixing Roller Bearings [5]
• 1 Secondary Fixing Roller [6]
• 1 Key Member [7] CAUTION:
Identifying the Fixing Roller Unit
[6]
The following shows how to identify the Primary Fixing
Roller and the Secondary Fixing Roller.
Primary Fixing Parts number FL1-1151

[5] Roller Marking [A] [1]
[4] Wrapping pa- Pink
[2] per [B]
[1] Secondary Fix- Parts number FL1-1152
ing Roller Marking [A] Groove on the
rear side [2]
[1] Wrapping pa- Blue
per [B]
[3]
[7]
[5]
[4]
[1] [2]
[A]
[B]
716
NOTE: CAUTION:
Assembling the Secondary Fixing Roller Heater Point to check when replacing the Secondary Fixing
1. Insert the Heater Mounting Guide [1] included with Roller Heater
the new Secondary Fixing Roller into the Secondary • Be sure to check that the Heater Connector
Fixing Roller Unit [2].
Insulator [1] and Heater Retainer Plate [2] are
[1] installed properly.
• Be sure to check that the Heater Connector
Insulator [1] is installed properly to the Heater
Retainer Plate [3] and Heater Retainer Spring [4].
[2] [1]
[2]
2. Insert the Secondary Fixing Roller Heater [1] into the
Heater Mounting Guide [3] from the connector [2]
side.
[1] [2]
[3] [3]
3. Remove the Heater Mounting Guide [1] from the

connector [2] side of the Secondary Fixing Roller
Heater.
[2]
[4] [1]
[1]
717
4. While rotating the gear of the Secondary Fixing Roller

NOTE: Unit by hand, clean the surface [A] of the Secondary
Assembling the Secondary Fixing Roller Unit Fixing Roller with the dry Cleaning Sheet [1].
1. When installing a new Secondary Fixing Roller Unit,
be sure to install it without removing the paper [A]
wrapped around the new Secondary Fixing Roller.
Remove the wrapping paper only after installing the
Secondary Fixing Roller Unit [1] in the Fixing
Assembly.
2. With the Secondary Fixing Heater inside, install the
Secondary Fixing Roller Unit [1] by aligning the end
faces [A] of the bearing with the inside of the Bearing
Retainers [2] of the Fixing Assembly, and the flanges
[B] of the bearing of the Secondary Fixing Roller Unit
with the outside of the Side Plates [3] of the Fixing
Assembly.
[1]
[B]
[A] [A] CAUTION:

Be sure to clean the Secondary Fixing Pressure
Roller as well when replacing the Secondary Fixing
Roller. (Refer to step 9.)
[2] [3] [3] [2]
9. While rotating the side [A] of the Secondary Fixing

Pressure Roller, clean the surface [B] of the
Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller with the dry
[3]
Cleaning Paper [1].
[2]
[3]
[2]
[A]
[B]
[1]
Secondary Fixing Roller in the direction as shown in
the figure.
[1]
CAUTION:
Be sure to clean the Tandem Guide Upper/Lower
as well when replacing the Secondary Fixing
[1]
Roller. (See the steps 10 and 11.)
10. Lift the lever (C-A1) [1], and open the C-A1 Guide [2].
718
11. Clean the Tandem Guide Upper/Lower [3] with lint-

free paper [4] moistened with alcohol. CAUTION:
abnormally rises.
[2]
[2] [1]
[3]
[4]
1. Clean the Secondary Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor

Cleaning the Secondary Fixing [2] with lint-free paper [1] moistened with alcohol.

[1]
■ Pre-preparation
page 700

on page 711
3. “Disassembling the Secondary Fixing Roller, [2]

Bearings, and Insulating Bushes” on page 714
■ Cleaning the Secondary Fixing

Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor
■ Pre-preparation
page 700

on page 711
3. “Disassembling the Secondary Fixing Roller,

719
■ Disassembling the Secondary Replacing the Secondary

Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor
Fixing Roller Main Thermistor
■ Pre-preparation
page 700

on page 711
CAUTION:
distribution to the heater when the temperature ■ Disassembling the Secondary
abnormally rises. Fixing Roller Main Thermistor
CAUTION:
[2] [1] Do not deform the thermistor/thermoswitch.
abnormally rises.
1. Remove the Secondary Fixing Roller Sub temperature may be detected incorrectly, causing the
Thermistor [1]. Fixing Assembly to overheat.
• 1 Connector [2]
• 1 Hook [4]
[2] [1]
1x
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
720
1. Remove the Secondary Fixing Roller Main

Thermistor [1]. CAUTION:
• 1 Connector [2]
• 2 Bosses [4]
abnormally rises.
1x proper contact with the Fixing Roller.
[2]
[1] temperature may be detected incorrectly, causing the
[2] [1]
[4]
Cleaning the Secondary Fixing

Roller Thermoswitch
■ Pre-preparation 1. Clean the Secondary Fixing Roller Thermoswitch [2]
page 700 [1]
[2]
on page 711


Roller Thermoswitch

Fixing Roller Thermoswitch
■ Pre-preparation
page 700

on page 711

721
■ Disassembling the Secondary Replacing the Secondary

Fixing Roller Thermoswitch
Fixing Pressure Roller, Bearings,
and Insulating Bushes
■ Pre-preparation
page 700

CAUTION:
on page 711
The thermistor or thermoswitch detects the 3. “When Replacing the Secondary Fixing Pressure
temperature of the Fixing Assembly, and stops power Roller” on page 917
abnormally rises.
proper contact with the Fixing Roller. Fixing Pressure Roller/ Insulating
If the thermistor or thermoswitch [1] is deformed so that Bush/Bearing
[2] [1]
1. Remove the Secondary Fixing Roller Thermoswitch

[1].
• 2 Screws [2]
• 2 Terminals [3]
• 1 Boss [5]
[2]
2x
[3]
[3]
[5]
[1]
[4]
722
1. Remove the Heater Retainer Plate [1].

CAUTION:
• Do not touch the surface of the Secondary Fixing
Pressure Roller [1].
[4] [1]
1x
1x
[1]
1x
• Do not touch the surface of the Secondary Fixing

Pressure Heater [1]. [2] [3] [A]
2. Free the Heater Harness [1].

1x
[1]
[1]
1x
[2]

break the Secondary Fixing Pressure Heater [1].
[A]
3. Move the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Heater

[1] in the direction of the arrow, and remove it from
the Heater Retainer (Front) [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
4. Place your fingers over the shaft holes of the

Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Unit [2] with the
723
Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Heater [1] in the

NOTE:
unit, and remove the unit from the host machine.
Assembling the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Heater
1. Insert the Heater Mounting Guide [1] included with
the new Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller into the
Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Unit [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
5. Pull out the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Heater [2]

[2] from the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Unit
2. Insert the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Heater
[1].
[1] into the Heater Mounting Guide [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
6. Disassemble the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller 3. Remove the Heater Mounting Guide [1].
Unit.
• 2 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Bearings [1]
• 2 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Insulating
Bushes [2]
• 2 Screws [3]
• 1 Gear [4]
• 1 Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller [5]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[1]
2x
[3]
[2]
[1]
[5]
724
CAUTION:
[1]
Point to check when replacing the Secondary Fixing
Pressure Roller Heater
When the Heater Retainer Plate [1] is not installed
properly to the Heater Connector Insulator [2], the
Power Supply Cables become movable and may be
rubbed against metal part of the Fixing Assembly.
This may peel off the cable sheath and can cause a
short circuit. When a short circuit occurs, overcurrent [2]
detection breaker of the room is activated and may
induce a power failure.
[1]
[2]
725
Be sure to check that the Heater Retainer Plates on

NOTE:
both ends of the heater are properly holding the Heater
Assembling the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Unit
Connector Insulator once again after installing the
1. When installing a new Secondary Fixing Pressure
heater. Roller Unit, be sure to install it without removing the
paper wrapped around the new Secondary Fixing
Pressure Roller. Remove the wrapping paper only
after installing the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller
Unit [1] in the Fixing Assembly.
2. Install the unit so that the Secondary Fixing Pressure
Roller Bearings [1] fit in the grooves [A] of the
Pressure Roller Bearing Holders.
[1] [A]
[A] [1]
Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller in the direction as
shown in the figure.
[1]
726
4. While rotating the side [A] of the Secondary Fixing

Pressure Roller, clean the surface [B] of the
Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller with the dry Pressure Roller Sub Thermistor
Cleaning Paper [1].
[A]
[B]
CAUTION:
abnormally rises.
[1]
proper contact with the Fixing Pressure Roller.
it does not contact the Fixing Pressure Roller [2]
NOTE: properly, the temperature may be detected incorrectly,
Cleaning the Secondary Fixing Roller causing the Fixing Assembly to overheat.
When replacing the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Unit Be careful to avoid applying excessive pressure when
with a new one, be sure to clean the Secondary Fixing cleaning the thermistor/thermoswitch.
Roller as well.
1. While rotating the gear of the Secondary Fixing Roller
Unit by hand, clean the surface [A] of the Secondary [2] [1]
Fixing Roller with the dry Cleaning Paper [1].
[A]
1. Clean the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Sub

Thermistor [2] with lint-free paper [1] moistened with
alcohol.
[1] [1]
[2]

Pressure Roller Sub Thermistor
■ Pre-preparation
page 700

on page 711
3. “Disassembling the Secondary Fixing Pressure

Roller/ Insulating Bush/Bearing” on page 722
727
1. Remove the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Sub

Replacing the Secondary Thermistor [1].
Fixing Pressure Roller Sub • 1 Connector [2]
Thermistor • 1 Lock Lever [3]
• 1 Hook [4]
■ Pre-preparation
[A]
1. “Pulling Out the Secondary Fixing Assembly” on 1x [1]
[2]
page 700

on page 711


Fixing Pressure Roller Sub [4] [3]
Thermistor

Fixing Pressure Roller Main
Thermistor
■ Pre-preparation
CAUTION:
Do not deform the thermistor/thermoswitch. 1. “Pulling Out the Secondary Fixing Assembly” on
The thermistor or thermoswitch detects the page 700
on page 711
abnormally rises.
Therefore, the thermistor or thermoswitch must have 3. “Disassembling the Secondary Fixing Pressure
proper contact with the Fixing Pressure Roller. Roller/ Insulating Bush/Bearing” on page 722
causing the Fixing Assembly to overheat. Fixing Pressure Roller Main
Be careful to avoid applying excessive pressure when Thermistor
[2] [1]
728

Do not deform the thermistor/thermoswitch. Fixing Pressure Refresh Cleaning
Roller
abnormally rises.
Be careful to avoid applying excessive pressure when CAUTION:
cleaning the thermistor/thermoswitch. • During disassembly and assembly, be sure to hold
only the [A] parts about 10 mm long.
[2] [1]
[B]
[A] [A]
1. Remove the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Main

Thermistor [1].
• 1 Connector [2] 1. Lift the 2 arms [2] of the Secondary Fixing Pressure
• 1 Lock Lever [3] Refresh Cleaning Roller [1].
• 2 Bosses [4]
1x
[1] [1]
[2] [3] [2]

[4]

Fixing Pressure Refresh Cleaning
Roller
■ Pre-preparation
page 700

on page 711

729
2. Move the front and rear arms [1] in the shaft direction ■ Disassembling the Secondary
to remove the Secondary Fixing Pressure Refresh
Cleaning Roller [2]. Fixing Pressure Refresh Roller
[2]
CAUTION:
• During disassembly and assembly of the
Secondary Fixing Pressure Refresh Roller, be
[1] sure to hold only the [A] parts about 10 mm long.
[A] [A]
[2]
[B]
[1]
NOTE:
Assembling the Secondary Fixing Pressure Refresh
Cleaning Roller
1. Install the Secondary Fixing Pressure Refresh
Cleaning Roller with the end where the shaft [A]
protrudes on the front side.
1. Remove the bearing [1] at the rear end of the
Secondary Fixing Pressure Refresh Roller.
[A]

Fixing Pressure Refresh Roller
■ Pre-preparation
[1]
page 700

on page 711


Refresh Cleaning Roller” on page 729
730
2. Align the D-cut [B] of the shaft with the D-cut [A] of
NOTE:
the Bearing Retainer Plate, and remove the
Assembling the Secondary Fixing Pressure Refresh Roller
Secondary Fixing Pressure Refresh Roller [1].
1. Be sure to remove the Protection Sheet [1] wrapped
around the new Secondary Fixing Pressure Refresh
Roller, and then install the roller to the Fixing
Assembly.
[1]
[1]
[A]
[B]
2. Be sure that the rib [A] of the bearing is inside the

Bearing Retainer Plate [2].
[2] [A]
[2] [A]
731
1. Clean the Secondary Fixing Inlet Guide [1] from the

CAUTION: inside with lint-free paper [2] moistened with
Be careful not to get the Static Eliminator [1] caught alcohol.
when installing the roller.
CAUTION:
Do not touch the Fixing Roller [3] when cleaning.
[3]
[1] [1]
[1] [2]
2. Close the Secondary Fixing Upper Unit [1] while

holding the [A] part of the lever (C-B5) and the tab
[B] (black flocked surface) of the plate on the rear
side.

Inlet Guide [B]
■ Pre-preparation
page 700
[1]
2. “Opening/Closing the Secondary Fixing Upper Unit” [A]
on page 711

3. Clean the Secondary Fixing Inlet Guide [1] from the
outside with lint-free paper [2] moistened with
alcohol.
■ Cleaning the Secondary Fixing Inlet
Guide
[1] [2]
732
1. Remove the Secondary Fixing Inlet Guide [1].

Replacing the Secondary • 2 Connectors [2]
Fixing Pressure Roller • 2 Screws [3]
Thermoswitch CAUTION:
When removing the Secondary Fixing Inlet Guide [1],
■ Pre-preparation be sure to avoid damaging the Secondary Fixing Roller
[2] and the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller [3].
page 700
■ Disassembling the Secondary [3] [2]
Fixing Pressure Roller Thermoswitch
[1]
CAUTION:
The thermistor or thermoswitch detects the [2]
abnormally rises. 2x 2x
[1]
[2] [1] [3]

[1]
733
2. Remove the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller

• Do not touch the Secondary Fixing External Heat
• 3 Screws (RS W Sems) [2]
Belt [1].
• 2 Terminals [3]
• 2 Bosses [4] [1]
[4] [1]
[3]
3x
• When removing the Fixing Front Upper Cover, be
because the External Heat Unit of the Fixing
[2]
Assembly is under pressure.
[3] [2]
[1] [2]

Fixing External Heat Belt Unit
■ Pre-preparation
page 700

Fixing External Heat Belt Unit

734
• Do not damage the Secondary Fixing Roller [1] 2. Remove the Secondary Fixing Upper Cover [1].
when disassembling/assembling. • 2 Screws [2] (to loosen)
• 2 Hooks [3]
[1]
[3] [1]
2x
[2]
[3] [2]
NOTE: NOTE:
In the case of removing the Secondary Fixing External Fit the 4 claws [1] of the Release Lever of the Pressure
Heat Belt Unit with the Secondary Fixing Assembly Plate into the 4 holes [2] on the Pressure Plate before
mounted on the host machine installing the Fixing Upper Cover [3].
Be sure to remove the Secondary Fixing Front Upper
Cover in step 1.
[1]
1. Remove the Secondary Fixing Front Upper Cover [2]

[1].
2x
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1] [2]
735
3. Lift the handle [1] vertically, and move the Release 4. Hook the claw [1] of the Release Lever in the hole [A]
Lever until the Pressure Shaft [2] hits the end of the of the Pressure Plate to lock (on both front and rear
long hole [A] (on both front and rear sides). sides).
NOTE:
The Pressure Shaft (for fixing the External Heat Pressure
Shaft) [1] is pulled, which compresses the Pressure Spring
[2] and releases the pressure on the External Heat Unit
[3].
[3]
[1]
[1]
[A]
[2]
[2]
736
6. Remove the Connector Mounting Plate [1].

2x
[2]
[1]
7. Remove the Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt

Unit [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
• 2 Shafts [3]
[A] [1]
CAUTION:
• Do not damage the Sensor Flag [1] when
5. Remove the External Heat Pressure Plate [1].

[1]
[2]
2x • Place the removed Secondary Fixing External

Heat Belt Unit [1] on a sheet of paper [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
737
CAUTION:
Points to check before assembling the Secondary
1x Fixing External Pressure Belt Unit
guide [A].
guide [B].
[2] [3]
[1]
3x
[1]
[B]
[A]
[2]
[3]
738
2. Check that the Protection Sheet [1] is properly 3. Check the routing of the harness.
installed. • Check that the harness [1] does not protrude
• Check that the Protection Sheet [1] has not beyond the line A.
gotten under the Main Thermistor Mounting • Be sure that the harness [1] does not protrude
Plate [2]. beyond the line A.
• Check that the harness [3] is routed on top of
the Protection Sheet [1].
[1] [A]
[3]
[1] [A]
[1] [2]
[3]
[1] [2]
739
2. After installing the Secondary Fixing External Heat

NOTE: Unit [1] to the Fixing Assembly, open and close the
Assembling the Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt Unit Secondary Fixing External Heat Unit [1] to check that
1. Be sure to install the 2 shafts [2] by opening the the shaft [2] is on the cam [3].
External Pressure Belt Unit [1] when disassembling/
assembling.
(Otherwise, the Fixing Roller may be damaged)
• 1 Screw [3]
1x [2]
[3] [2] [3]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
740
CAUTION: CAUTION:
When installing the External Heat Pressure Plate [1], • Do not damage the Secondary Fixing Roller [1]
be sure to tighten the screws [2] securely. when disassembling/assembling.
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
• During assembly and disassembly of the Fixing

Replacing the Secondary Refresh Roller, be sure to hold only the [A] parts
(within approx. 10 mm from the ends).
Fixing Refresh Roller • Do not touch the surface [B].
[A] [A]
■ Pre-preparation
page 700

[B]
Fixing Refresh Roller
741
1. Insert a sheet of paper [3] between the Secondary 2. While pushing the Fixing Refresh Roller [1] in the
Fixing Roller [1] and the Secondary Fixing Refresh direction of [A], remove it in the direction of [B].
Roller [2]
[1] [2]
[3]
[A]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[B]
NOTE:
Be sure to remove the Protection Sheet [1] wrapped
around the new Fixing Refresh Roller, and then install the
roller in the Fixing Assembly.
[1]

Delivery Lower Separation Claws
■ Pre-preparation
page 700
742
■ Cleaning the Secondary Fixing Replacing the Secondary

Delivery Lower Separation Claws
Fixing Delivery Lower Separation
Claws
■ Pre-preparation
page 700
1. Lift up the lever (C-B5) [2] while holding the handle
[1] to open the Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Unit ■ Disassembling the Secondary
[3]. Fixing Delivery Lower Separation
[1] Claws

[1] to open the Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Unit
[3] [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
2. Clean the 6 Secondary Fixing Delivery Lower

Separation Claws [2] with lint-free paper [1]
[2]
[1]
743
2. Remove the Inner Delivery Reinforcing Plate [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
• 1 Hook [3] Inner Delivery Upper Separation
Plate
2x
■ Pre-preparation
[2] [1]
[2] 1. “Pulling Out the Secondary Fixing Assembly” on
page 700

Inner Delivery Upper Separation Plate
[3]
3. Press the 2 screws [1] and move the Separation Claw

Fixation Plate [2].
[1] [1]
[1] to open the Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Unit
[3].
[1]
[2]
4. Remove the 6 Secondary Fixing Delivery Lower

Separation Claws. [3]
[2]
• 6 Screws [2]
• 12 Bosses [3]
[1]
6x
[1]
[2]
[3]
744
2. Clean the upside and downside of the Secondary 1. Lift up the lever (C-B5) [2] while holding the handle
Fixing Inner Delivery Upper Separation Plate [A] with [1] to open the Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Unit
lint-free paper [1] moistened with alcohol. [3].
[1] [1]
[A]
[3]
[2]
[1] [A]

Fixing Inner Delivery Upper 2. Remove the Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Cover
[1].
Separation Plate • 2 Screws (RS W Sems) [2]

page 700

Fixing Inner Delivery Upper [2]
Separation Plate
[2]
745
3. Remove the 2 Torsion Springs [1].

• 2 Cut-offs [A] in the Secondary Fixing Inner
Delivery Upper Separation Plate Fixing Inner Delivery Lower Roller
• 2 Hooks (Large) [B]
■ Pre-preparation
page 700

Fixing Inner Delivery Lower Roller
[A] [A]
[1] [1]
[B] [B]
CAUTION:
4. Remove the Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Upper • Be sure to start the work after the Secondary
Separation Plate [1]. Fixing Assembly gets cold enough to prevent burn
• Screw [2] injury.
• 1 Positioning Pin plate [3] • Do not to touch the surface of the Secondary
• 1 Positioning Pin [4] Fixing Inner Delivery Lower Roller.

1x [1] to open the Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Unit
[3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
746
2. Remove the Separation Claw Unit [1]. 3. Remove the Gear Unit [1].
• 1 Edge Saddle [2] • 1 E-ring [2]
• 2 Screws [3] • 1 Gear [3]
• 2 Screws [4] (Binding Head Screw with Plain
Washer)
CAUTION:
2x
[1]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[4]
4. Remove the spring [1].

• 2 Hooks [2]
[1]
1x 2x
[1]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1]
747
5. Remove the Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Lower 1. Push the Release Button [1] to disengage the
Roller [1]. Exhaust Duct Tube [2], and remove the Sub Station
Front side Exhaust Duct [3].
• 1 E-ring [2] • 4 Screws [4]
• 1 Bearing [3]
Rear side
• 3 E-rings [4] [3]
4x
• 1 One-way Gear [5]
• 1 N-ring [6]
• 1 Bearing [7]
• 1 Spacer [8] [4]
[4]
[5] [1]
[6]
[4]
[7]
[8] [4]
[2]
[4]
2. Remove the Sub Station Right Rear Upper Cover [1].

• 6 Screws (with toothed lock washer) [2]
[3]
6x [1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
3. Move the 4 Tube Clamps [1] by using needlenose

pliers, and remove the 4 Air Tubes [2].

Refresh Air Blow Valve Unit
[1]

Refresh Air Blow Valve Unit
[2] [2]
748
4. Disconnect the 2 connectors [1]. 1. Push the Release Button [1] to disengage the
Exhaust Duct Tube [2], and remove the Sub Station
Exhaust Duct [3].
2x • 4 Screws [4]
[1]
4x [3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[4]
5. Remove the 2 Primary Fixing Refresh Air Blow Valve
Units [1] together with the Support Plate. 2. Remove the Sub Station Right Rear Upper Cover [1].
• 1 Screw [2] • 6 Screws (with toothed washers) [2]
1x 6x [1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
3. Move the 2 Tube Clamps [1] by using needlenose

[2]
Replacing the Secondary [2]
Fixing Refresh Air Blow Valve

Unit [1]

Fixing Refresh Air Blow Valve Unit [2]
749
4. Remove the Secondary Fixing Refresh Air Blow 2. Disconnect the Relay Connector [1] from the frame.
Valve Unit [1] together with the Support Plate. • 1 Connector [2]
• 1 Wire Saddle [2] • 2 Claws [3]
• 1 Connector [3]
• 1 Screw [4]
1x
[1] [4]
1x
2x
1x
[2]
1x [3]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[3]
Replacing the Atmospheric
Pressure Relief Valve Unit
■ Disassembling the Atmospheric
Pressure Relief Valve Unit

• 9 Screws [2]
9x
[1]
[2]
750
3. Move the Tube Clamp [1] to the right by using 2. Move the Tube Clamp [1] to the left by using
needlenose pliers, and remove the Atmospheric needlenose pliers, and remove the Relief Valve Unit
Pressure Relief Valve Unit [2]. [2].
• 3 Wire Saddles [3] • 1 Screw [3]
• 1 Screw [4]
[3]
1x [2]
1x
3x
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[1]
Replacing the Pressure Gauge

Unit
■ Disassembling the Pressure Gauge
Replacing the Relief Valve Unit Unit
■ Disassembling the Relief Valve Unit
1. Move the Tube Clamp [1] to the left by using

needlenose pliers, and remove the Air Tube [2].

• 9 Screws [2]
9x
[1]
[2]
751
2. Move the Tube Clamp [3] to the right by using 1. Remove the Power Unit Station Rear Cover 1 [1].
needlenose pliers, and remove the Pressure Gauge • 9 Screws [2]
Unit [4].
• 1 Screw [6] 9x
1x
[1]
[2]
1x
[1] [2]
2. Move the Tube Clamps [1] by using needlenose

[5]
[4]
[6]
[3]
[2] [1]
[1] [2]
[3]
Replacing the Air Filter Unit 3. Remove the Air Filter Unit [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
■ Disassembling the Air Filter Unit
[2]
2x
[1]
752
the mark [B] of the Air Filter Unit, and then remove
Replacing the Fixing Air Tube the Air Filter Unit [2].
Filter
■ Disassembling the Fixing Air Tube [1]
Filter
[2]

• 9 Screws [2]
[A]
9x
[B]
[1]
[2]
3. Turn the Air Filter Unit Cap (Upper) [1]

counterclockwise, align the hole [A] of the Air Filter
Unit Cap (Upper) with the rib [B] of the Air Filter Case,
2. While lowering the lever [1], turn the Air Filter Unit and then remove the Fixing Air Tube Filter Unit [2].
[2] clockwise, align the mark [A] of the holder with
[1]
[B]
[A] [2]
4. Turn the Holder (Lower) [1] counterclockwise,

remove the shaft [2] of the Holder (Upper) from the
753
cut-off [A] of the Filter Cover, and then remove the 2. Remove the Filter Cap [1].
Fixing Air Tube Filter [3]. • 2 Claws [2]
2x
[2]
[A] [3]
[1]
[2]
Replacing the Fixing Air Pump
Filter
■ Disassembling the Fixing Air Pump
Filter
[1]

• 9 Screws [2]
9x
[1]
[2]
754
3. Remove the Filter Cover [1] and the Fixing Air Pump
Filter [2].
NOTE:
When assembling, be sure to fit the 4 cut-offs [B] to the 2
guides [A] to install the Filter Cover and the Fixing Air
Pump Filter.
[A]
[B]
[A]
[B]
[2]
[1]
755
3. Remove the Harness Cover [1] in the direction of the

Pickup / Feed System arrow.
• 5 Hooks[2]
Replacing the Pre-fixing Feed

[1]
Right Unit
[2]
■ Pre-preparation
540 [2]

Unit” on page 540
■ Disassembling the Pre-fixing Feed

Right Unit
4. Disconnect the 3 connectors [1], and release the
Snap Band [2] and the 2 Edge Saddles [3].
[2]
3x
[3]
3x
• 2 Screw [2]
2. Remove the Pre-fixing Feed Lower Cover [1].

• 2 Screw[4]
[2] [1]
4x
5. Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and free the
[1] harness from the 4 Wire Saddles [2] and the Edge
Saddle [3].
[2]
[3]
5x [2]
[4]
2x
[3]
[4]
[1]
756
6. Remove the Secondary Transfer Cooling Fan [1]. 8. Remove the Leaf Spring [1].
• 1 Screw [2] • 1 Screw [2]
• 1 Connector [5] 1x [1]
[2]
1x [1] [2]
9. Remove the Pre-fixing Feed Right Unit[1] in the order

of the arrows.
4x • 2 Shafts [2]
NOTE:
Bu sure to place paper under the Pre-fixing Feed Right
1x
Unit [1] as the Toner Ejection Mouth [A] is on the bottom
surface of the unit.
[5]
[4]
[3]
[A]
7. Open the 2 Wire Saddles [1], and disconnect the 3 [1]

connectors [2].
[2]
2x [2]
3x [2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
757
2. Release the lever (B-G6) [1] and open the Duplex

CAUTION: Assembly.
There are 2 unsecured bushings [1], so be careful not
to lose them.
[1]
[1]
3. Remove the 2 screws [2] securing the lever (B-G1)

[1].
Replacing the Main Station

2x
Duplex Feed Right Unit
■ Pre-preparation
540
■ Disassembling the Main Station

[1]
[2]
4. While pushing the release button [1], turn the lever

(B-G1) to pull it out toward you.
[1]
1. Remove the Outlet Guide (Upper) [1].

• 3 Screws [2]
[2]
3x
[2]
[1]
758
5. Remove the Cross-feed Registration Front Cover [1]. 8. Remove the lever (B-G6) [1].
2x [2] 2x
[1]
[2] [1] [2]

[2]
9. Remove the Lever Support Plate [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
• 2 Screws [2]
[2]
2x
2x [2]
[1]
[1]
10. Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].

7. Remove the Pre-fixing Feed Lower Cover [1].
• 2 Screws [2] [1]
2x
2x
[1]
[1] [2]
759
11. While supporting the Main Station Duplex Feed 1. Remove the Outlet Guide (Upper) [1].
Right Unit [1] from below, remove it in the direction • 3 Screws [2]
of the arrow.
• 2 Screws [2] [2]
• 4 Pins [3] 3x
[3] [3]
2x
[1]
[1] 2. Release the lever (B-G6) [1] and open the Duplex
[2] Assembly.
NOTE:
ssembling the Main Station Duplex Feed Right Unit
Be sure to insert the 2 Positioning Pins [1] into the 2 holes
[2] at the rear on the back of the Feed Assembly.
[2]
[1]
[1]

[1].
2x

Duplex Feed Middle Unit
1. “Pulling out the Pre-registration/Feed Unit” on page [2]

540

Duplex Feed Middle Unit
760
4. While pushing the release button [1], turn the lever 7. Remove the Pre-fixing Feed Lower Cover [1].
(B-G1) to pull it out toward the front. • 2 Screws [2]
[1]
2x
[2]
[1] [2]
5. Remove the Cross-feed Registration Front Cover [1]. 8. Remove the lever (B-G6) [1].
2x 2x
[2]
[1]
[2] [1] [2]

[2]
9. Remove the 2 Lever Support Plates [1].
6. Remove the Pre-fixing Feed Upper Cover [1]. • 4 Screws [2]
• 2 Screws [2]
4x
[2] [2]
2x [2]
[1]
[1]
761

NOTE:
[1] Assembling the Fixing Feed Base Sheet
1. Prepare a new Fixing Feed Base Sheet [1].
2x
[1]
[1]
2. Remove the release paper from the double-sided
tape [1], and attach the sheet with its 2 corners
11. Remove the Fixing Feed Base Sheet [1] of the Main
aligned with the 2 corners [A] of the plate.
Station Duplex Feed Unit.
• Double-sided tape [2]
• Magnet [3]
[2]
[3] [1]
[1] [1]
NOTE:
The Fixing Feed Base Sheet cannot be reused.
[A] [A]
3. Attach the magnet [1] of the Fixing Feed Base Sheet

to the Pickup Top Plate.
[1]
762
4. Remove the Protection Sheet [1].

NOTE:
Assembling the Main Station Duplex Feed Middle Unit
[2]
[1]
[1]
12. While supporting the Main Station Duplex Feed

Middle Unit [1] from below, remove it in the direction
of the arrow.
• 2 Screws [2] Replacing the Main Station
• 4 Pins [3]
Duplex Feed Left Unit
2x [3] ■ Pre-preparation
[3]
540

[2] [1]
1. Remove the Outlet Guide (Upper) [1].

• 3 Screws [2]
[2]
3x
[1]
763
2. Release the lever (B-G6) [1] and open the Duplex 5. Remove the Cross-feed Registration Front Cover [1].
Assembly. • 2 Screws [2]
2x [2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]. 6. Remove the Pre-fixing Feed Upper Cover [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
2x
2x [2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
4. While pushing the release button [1], turn the lever
(B-G1) to pull it out toward the front. 7. Remove the Pre-fixing Feed Lower Cover [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
[1]
2x
[2]
[1] [2]
764
8. Remove the lever (B-G6) [1]. 11. Remove the Fixing Feed Base Sheet [1] of the Main
• 2 Screws [2] Station Duplex Feed Unit.
• Double-sided tape [2]
• Magnet [3]
2x
[2]
[2] [1] [2] [3] [1]
9. Remove the Lever Support Plate [1].
[2]
NOTE:
2x The Fixing Feed Base Sheet cannot be reused.
[1]
[1]
2x
[1]
765
4. Remove the Protection Sheet [1].

NOTE:
Assembling the Fixing Feed Base Sheet
1. Prepare a new Fixing Feed Base Sheet [1].
[1]
2. Remove the release paper from the double-sided

tape [1], and attach the sheet with its 2 corners
aligned with the 2 corners [A] of the plate.
[1]
12. While supporting the Main Station Duplex Feed Left

Unit [1] from below, remove it in the direction of the
arrow.
• 2 Screws [2]
• 4 Pins [3]
[3]
[3]
2x
[1] [1]
[A] [A]
3. Attach the magnet [1] of the Fixing Feed Base Sheet

to the Pickup Top Plate. [2] [1]
[1]
766
2. Clean the Pre-fixing Feed Sensor 1 [A] and the

NOTE:
Secondary Transfer Outlet Sensor [B] with lint-free
Assembling the Main Station Duplex Feed Left Unit
[B] [1] [A]
[2]
[1]
[B] [A] [2]
Cleaning the Pre-fixing Feed

Sensor 1/Secondary Transfer Replacing the Cross-feed Unit
Outlet Sensor
■ Pre-preparation
■ Pre-preparation
1. “Pulling out the Pre-registration/Feed Unit” on page 540
540
■ Disassembling the Cross-feed Unit
■ Cleaning the Pre-fixing Feed Sensor
1/Secondary Transfer Outlet Sensor
1. Open the guide (B-G3) [1].
1. Clean the Pre-fixing Feed Sensor 1 [A] and the

Secondary Transfer Outlet Sensor [B] with a blower
[1].
[1]
767
2. Turn over the Cross-feed Unit [1].

NOTE:
• 2 Screws [2] Be sure to place the Cross-feed Roller Unit [1] on a piece
of paper [2], etc. to clean it.
[1]
2x [1]
[2]
[2]
3. Remove the Cross-feed Unit [1]. 1. Remove the 3 Cross-feed Roller Cleaning Members
[1].
• 1 Connector [2]
• 3 Screws [2]
1x
3x
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2] [1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
Replacing the Cross-feed

Replacing the Cross-feed
Roller Cleaning Member
Roller
■ Pre-preparation
■ Pre-preparation
540 1. “Pulling out the Pre-registration/Feed Unit” on page
540
2. “Disassembling the Cross-feed Unit” on page 767
■ Disassembling the Cross-feed

■ Disassembling the Cross-feed
Roller Cleaning Member
Roller
CAUTION:
Be sure to replace the part at the same time when the
Cross-feed Roller Cleaning Member is replaced.
768
1. Remove the 6 screws [1], and lift the 3 Cross-feed

NOTE:
Roller Shaft Units [2] from the Cross-feed Unit.
Be sure to place the Cross-feed Roller Unit [1] on a piece
of paper [2], etc. to clean it.
[1]
[1]
6x [1] [1]
[2]
[2]
1. Remove the 3 Cross-feed Roller Cleaning Members
2. Remove the 3 Cross-feed Rollers [1] from the Cross- [1].
feed Roller Shaft Unit.
• 3 Screws [2]
• 3 E-rings [2]
3x
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2] [1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[2]
2. Clean the 3 Cross-feed Roller Cleaning Members [1]
with a blower [2].
Cleaning the Cross-feed Roller

Cleaning Member, Cross-feed [2]
Unit, and Cross-feed Rollers

■ Pre-preparation
540
[1] [1]
■ Cleaning the Cross-feed Roller
Cleaning Member, Cross-feed Unit, 3. Clean the inside [A] of the 3 Cross-feed Roller Shaft
and Cross-feed Rollers Support Plates with a blower [1].
769
● Pre-fixing Feed Belt Cleaning Procedure

[1]
1. Clean the whole circumference [A] of the Pre-fixing

Feed Belt with lint-free paper [1] moistened with
alcohol while rotating the belt.
[A]
[A]
4. Clean the 3 sidewalls [A] of the Cross-feed Rollers

with a blower [1].
[A] [1]
[1]
CAUTION:
Be sure to move the Pre-fixing Feed Belt [2] back to the
center of the Feed Roller [3] when the belt has shifted
to the front or rear at the time of cleaning.
[3]
5. Rotate the Drive Belt [1], and clean the whole

circumference of the 3 Cross-feed Rollers [3] with
lint-free paper [2] moistened with alcohol.
[3] [2]
[1]
Cleaning the Pre-fixing Feed

Belt Cleaning Brush
[2]
■ Pre-preparation
[3]
540
Pre-fixing Feed Belt Cleaning ■ Cleaning the Pre-fixing Feed Belt

Procedure Cleaning Brush
■ Pre-preparation
540
770
1. Remove the Pre-fixing Feed Belt Cleaning Brush [1]. 1. Remove the Pre-fixing Feed Left Cover [1].
• 2 Hooks [2] • 1 Screw [2]
[1] [1]
[2] [2]
1x
[2]
2. Clean the paper dust and the toner on the [A] part of 2. Remove the Connector Cover [1].
the Pre-fixing Feed Belt Cleaning Brush. • 1 Screw [2]
1x
[A]
[2]
[1]
3. Disconnect the 3 connectors [1], and free the

Replacing the Pre-fixing Feed harness from the Edge Saddle [2].
Left Unit

597 1x
540 [1]
[1]
■ Disassembling the Pre-fixing Feed [2]

Left Unit
771
4. Remove the screw [1].

Slave Roller 2, and Tandem
Guides
1x
■ Pre-preparation
[1] 621
■ Cleaning the Tandem Feed Roller 1,

Tandem Slave Roller 1, Tandem Feed
Roller 2, Tandem Slave Roller 2, and
Tandem Guides
5. Remove the Pre-fixing Feed Left Unit [1] in the
direction of the arrow.
[1]
1. Lift the lever (C-A1) [1], and open the C-A1 Guide [2].
2. Clean the Tandem Guide Upper [3], the ribs [4] of the
Tandem Guide Upper, and the Tandem Slave Roller
1 [5] with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol [6].
[2]
CAUTION:
[1]
Be sure to fit the 2 holes of the Pre-fixing Feed Left Unit
to the Positioning Pins [2] at the back of the Main
Station to install the unit.
[2]
[4] [3] [5] [4] [3]
[1] [2]
[6]
Cleaning the Tandem Feed

Roller 1, Tandem Slave Roller 1,
Tandem Feed Roller 2, Tandem
772
3. Clean the Tandem Guide Lower [1], the ribs [2] of the 6. Unlock the lever (C-B4) [1], and pull out the
Tandem Guide Lower, and the Tandem Feed Roller Secondary Fixing Assembly [2].
1 [3] with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol [4].
[2] [1] [3] [4]

[1] [2]
7. Unlock the Leaf Spring [1] of the rail, and pull the
Secondary Fixing Assembly [2] all the way out.
[2]
4. Clean the Tandem Guide Lower [1] and the ribs [2]
of the Tandem Guide Lower with lint-free paper
[1] [2]
[2]
[1] [3]
[2] [3] [1]
5. Store the Primary Fixing Assembly.
773
8. Clean the Tandem Guide Upper/Lower [1], Tandem 2. Push down the lever (C-A2) [3] and open the C-A2
Feed Roller 2 [2], and Tandem Slave Roller 2 [3] with Guide [4].
lint-free paper moistened with alcohol [4].
[2]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[3]
3. Clean the Bypass Guide [1], Bypass Feed Roller 1
[2], Bypass Feed Roller 2 [3], Bypass Feed Roller 3
[1] [4], Bypass Slave Roller 1 [5], Bypass Slave Roller 2
[6], and Bypass Slave Roller 3 [7] with lint-free paper
[4]
[2]
Cleaning the Bypass Feed

Roller 1, Bypass Slave Roller 1,
Bypass Feed Roller 2, Bypass
Slave Roller 2, Bypass Feed [1] [6] [1]
Roller 3, Bypass Slave Roller 3,
and Bypass Guide
[7] [5]
■ Pre-preparation
1. “Pulling Out the Primary Fixing Assembly” on page [2]
621 [4]
■ Cleaning the Bypass Feed Roller 1,

Bypass Slave Roller 1, Bypass Feed
Roller 2, Bypass Slave Roller 2, [3] [8]
Bypass Feed Roller 3, Bypass Slave

Roller 3, and Bypass Guide
1. Unlock the lever (C-B3) [1] and open the C-B3 Guide
[2].
774
4. Clean the Bypass Guide [1] with lint-free paper 2. Remove the Sub Station Inner Cover [1].
moistened with alcohol [2]. • 2 Screws [2]
2x
[1] [2]
3. Lift up the lever (C-A3) [1].

[1]
[2]
[1]
Replacing the Sub Station

■ Pre-preparation
1. “Pulling Out the Primary Fixing Assembly” on page 4. Remove the Sub Station Duplex Feed Cover [1].
621 • 2 Screws [2]
■ Disassembling the Sub Station

Duplex Feed Left Unit 2x
1. Remove the Tandem Feed Cover [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
[2] [1]
[1]
2x 5. Lower the lever (C-A3) [1].
[2]
[1]
775
6. Remove the Reinforcing Plate [1]. 9. Remove the 2 Fixation Plates [1].
4x 2x
[1]
[2]
[1] [2] [1] [2]
7. Remove the Connector Cover [1]. 10. Lift up the Sub Station Duplex Feed Left Unit [1] in
• 1 Screw [2] the direction of the arrow [A] and remove it in the
direction of the arrow [B].
[1]
1x CAUTION:
• Be sure to tilt the Sub Station Duplex Feed Left
Unit [1] to install or remove it.
• When installing or removing it, do not hit the guide
[3] of the Sub Station Duplex Feed Left Unit
against the Support Column [2] and damage it.
[2]
[2]
8. Open the 1 Wire Saddles [1], and disconnect the 2

connectors [2].
1x
[3] [1]
2x
[2]
[A]
[B]
[1]
[1]
776
CAUTION: CAUTION:
Assembling the Sub Station Duplex Feed Left Unit When removing the Fixing Front Upper Cover, be sure
Be sure to align the 2 Positioning Shafts [1] of the Sub to check the position of the Sensor Flag [1].
Station Duplex Feed Left Unit with the 2 mounting holes
[2] to install the unit.
[1] [2]
[2]
[1]
Replacing the Sub Station

■ Pre-preparation
621
■ Disassembling the Sub Station 1. Remove the Primary Fixing Front Upper Cover [1].
Duplex Feed Right Unit • 2 Screws [2] (to loosen)
2x
[2] [1]
777
2. Remove the lever (C-4A) [1]. 5. Install the Primary Fixing Pressure Release Lever (C-
• 2 Screws [2] A4) [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
[2]
[2]
2x
2x
[1]
[1]
Inner Delivery Unit [2]. 6. Hold the lever (C-A5), and lower the Primary Fixing
[2] [1]
[2]
[1]
4. Remove the Primary Fixing Front Lower Cover [1].

• 2 Screws [2] (to loosen) 7. Store the Primary Fixing Assembly [1] inside the Sub
Station, and rotate the Release Lever (C-A4) [2] in the
direction of the arrow to secure it.
2x
[1]
[2]
[2] [1]
778
8. Remove Sub Station Inner Cover 1 [1]. 11. Remove the Connector Cover [1].
• 3 Screws [2] • 1 Screw [2]
• 1 Hook [3]
[1]
3x [1] [2]
1x
[3]
[2]
9. Remove the Fixing Sub Reinforcing Stay [1].

• 2 Screws [2] 12. Free the harness [1] from the Wire Saddle [2], and
• 1 Screw [3] disconnect the 2 connectors [3].
3x [1]
1x
[3]
[2]
[3] 2x
[2] [1]
[2]
10. Remove the Sub Station Front Right Cover [1]. 13. Pull out the Waste Toner Receptacle Unit [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
2x
[1]
[2]
[1]
779
14. Remove the Waste Toner Right Cover [1]. 16. Remove the Sub Station Duplex Feed Right Unit [1].
CAUTION:
2x • Be sure to hold the [A] part and [B] part of the frame
to install or remove the Sub Station Duplex Feed
Right Unit [1].
[2] • Be sure to tilt the Sub Station Duplex Feed Right
Unit [1] when installing or removing it.
[1] [A]
[1]
15. Remove the 2 wrenches [1].

• 2 Reuse Bands [2]
[B]
NOTE:
Remove the [A] part of the Reuse Band [2], and then press
the [B] part to stretch the Reuse Band [2].
[A]
[B]
[A]
[2] [B]
[1]
• When installing or removing the unit, be sure to
keep the [A] part and [B] part of the Pickup Guide
from coming in contact with the [C] part and [D]
part of the frame of the host machine to prevent
them from being damaged.
[D] [C]
[2]
[A]
[B]
780
■ Disassembling the Tandem Feed

3x Unit
1. Store the Secondary Fixing Assembly Base [1].
[1] [2]
[1]
NOTE:
Assembling the Sub Station Duplex Feed Right Unit
After aligning the 2 Positioning Shafts [2] of the Sub
Station Duplex Feed Right Unit [1] with the 2 mounting
holes [3], be sure to align the 2 Positioning Bosses [4] with
the 2 mounting holes [5].
[5] [3] [2] [5]
2. Remove Sub Station Inner Cover 1 [1].

[2]
• 3 Screws [2]
[1]
3x [2]
[1] [4]
Replacing the Tandem Feed

Unit
■ Pre-preparation
page 700
2. “Disassembling the Secondary Fixing Assembly

(when working with 2 or more people)” on page
708
“Disassembling the Secondary Fixing Assembly (when
1 person working alone)” on page 707
781
3. Remove the Cooling Duct [1]. 6. Remove the Reinforcing Plate [1].
[1] [2] [1]
3x 4x
[2]
[2]
7. Move the 2 Guide Stoppers [1].

4. Remove the Tandem Feed Cover [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
• 2 Screws [2]
[1]
2x 1x 1x
[1]
[2]
[2]
5. Lift the lever (C-A1) [1], and remove the Tandem

Inner Cover [2].
• 2 Screws [3]
[2] [1]
2x 1x 1x
[1]
[2]
[3]
3x
[1]
782
9. Unlock the lever (C-A4) [1], and pull out the Primary 11. Remove the Tandem Feed Unit [1], move it toward
Fixing Assembly [2]. the front inside the host machine, and place it.
• 2 Positioning Pins [2]
[1]
• 2 Bosses [3]
CAUTION:
• The Tandem Feed Unit [1] is heavy, so be careful
not to drop it.
• When holding the Tandem Feed Unit [1], be sure
to hold the [A] and [B] parts, but never hold the 2
Feed Guides [C].
[1]
[2]

right and left of the rail, and pull out the Primary
[B]
[C]
[2]
[A]
• When installing/removing the Tandem Feed Unit

[1], do not let the 2 Feed Guides [C] and the frame
[D] of the host machine come in contact with one
another, otherwise they may be damaged.
[1]
[1] [2]
[D]
[C]
783
Replacing the Tandem Feed

[1]
Roller 1 and Tandem Feed Roller
2
■ Pre-preparation
page 700

708
3. “Disassembling the Tandem Feed Unit” on page

781
4. “When Replacing the Feed/Delivery Rollers” on

page 919
[3]
[2]
Roller 1 and Tandem Feed Roller 2
12. Remove the Tandem Feed Unit [1] while tilting it to
the left.
CAUTION:
When removing the Tandem Feed Unit [1], do not let
the harness [2] on the bottom of the Tandem Feed Unit
get caught on the frame [A].
[1]
CAUTION:
When placing the Tandem Feed Unit [1], do not deform
the Feed Guide [A].
[1]
[A]
[2]
[A]
[1]
784
1. Return the 2 Guide Stoppers [1] to their original 3. Remove the flag [1].
positions. • 1 Screw [2]
• 2 Screws [2]
1x
[2]
[1] [2] [1]
4. Remove the Tandem Feed Unit (Upper) [1].

• Positioning Pin (Right) [2]
[2]
• Positioning Pin (Left) [3]
• 2 Screws [4]
[1]
1x
2. Free the harness.

[3]
4x [2] [4]
[1]
2x
[1]
[3]
1x
[4] [2]
785

CAUTION:
When installing or removing the unit, do not damage
• 2 Screws [2]
the [A] part of the Feed Guide of the Tandem Feed Unit
(Upper) [1] and the [B] part of the Feed Guide of the
Tandem Feed Unit (Lower) [2]. [1]
1x
[1] [B]
2x
[2]
[2]
7. Remove the following parts.

• 2 E-ring [1]
• 2 Pulleys (with Parallel Pin) [2]
[A]
[2] • 1 Belt [3]
[3]
5. Remove the Motor Unit [1].
• 1 Connector [2]
• 3 Screws [3] [1]
• 1 Belt [4]
[1] [2]
1x
[3] [3]
[1]
[4] [2]
[2]
3x
8. Remove the Lower Guide Plate [1].
• 4 Screws [2]
4x
[1]
[2] [2]
When removing the Tandem Feed Roller 1
786
9. Remove the pulley (with Parallel Pin) [1] and the belt 11. Remove the Tandem Feed Roller 2 [1].
[2]. Front side
• 1 E-ring [2]
• 1 Bearing [3]
[2] Rear side
• 1 E-ring [4]
[1]
• 1 Bearing [5]
[1]
10. Remove the Tandem Feed Roller [1].

Front side
• 1 E-ring [2]
• 1 Bearing [3] [3] [4]
Rear side [5]
[2]
• 1 E-ring [4]
• 1 Bearing [5]
[3] [4] Replacing the Bypass Feed

[2] [5]
Unit
■ Pre-preparation
page 700

708
[1]
781
When removing the Tandem Feed Roller 2
■ Disassembling the Bypass Feed

Unit
787
1. Release the 2 locks of the 2 Leaf Springs [2] on the 5. Disconnect the 4 connectors [1].
right and left of the rail, and pull out the Primary
4x
[1]
[1]
6. Unlock the lever (C-A4) [1], and pull out the Primary
[1]
[2]
[1]
2. Remove the Secondary Fixing Assembly Base [1].

• 2 Screws [2] [2]

2x right and left of the rail, and pull out the Primary
[2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
3. Push in the 2 rails of the Secondary Fixing

Assembly.
4. Remove the Fan Duct Unit [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
[1]
1x
[1] [2]
8. Remove the Bypass Feed Unit [1], move it to the

right, and then place it inside the host machine.
• 1 Screw [2]
• 2 Bosses [4]
[2]
788
[3]
CAUTION: [1]
• The left side of the unit is heavy and may fall. Be 1x
sure to support the Bypass Feed Unit [1] with both
hands.
• When holding the Bypass Feed Unit [1], be sure to
[4]
hold the [A] and [B] parts, but never hold the 2
Feed Guides [C] and the roller [5].
[2]
[1]
[C]
9. Change the position to hold by the left hand, and pull

out the Bypass Feed Unit [1] from inside the host
machine.
[C] [5] [B]
[1]
[C] [C]
[A]
• When installing/removing the Bypass Feed Unit Replacing the Bypass Feed
[1], do not let the 2 Feed Guides [C] and the 2 host
machine frames [D] come in contact with one Roller 1/ Bypass Feed Roller 2/
another, otherwise they may be damaged.
Bypass Feed Roller 3
[D]
[C] [D] ■ Pre-preparation
page 700

708

[1] 781
4. “Disassembling the Bypass Feed Unit” on page

787

page 919
789
■ Disassembling the Bypass Feed 3. Remove the Sensor Support Plate [1] and the
Positioning Pin [2].
Roller 1/ Bypass Feed Roller 2/ • 1 Screw [3] securing the Sensor Support Plate [1]
Bypass Feed Roller 3 • 1 Screw [4]
[1]
[3]
2x
[2]
1. Remove the Wire Fixation Shaft Support Plate [1].

• 1 Screw [2] [4]
1x 4. Release the lock by lowering the lever [1], and

remove the Bypass Upper Unit [2].
[2]
[2] [1]
2. Remove the harness [1] and the Positioning Pin [2]. [1]

• 1 Screw [5]
When Removing the Bypass Feed Roller 1
5. Remove the Guide Plate 1 [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
[2] [4] 4x [2]

[3] [3]
3x
2x [3] [1]
1x [4]
[5] [1]
790
6. Remove the Bypass Feed Roller 1 [1]. When Removing the Bypass Feed Roller 2
• 1 E-ring [2] 5. Remove the Guide Plate 2 [1].
• 1 Bearing [3] • 6 Screws [2]
• 1 Bearing [4] (to be removed from the groove)
• 1 Belt [5]
• 1 Belt [6] 6x
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[2] [2]
[6] [1]
6. Remove the Bypass Feed Roller 2 [1].

[5] • 1 E-ring [2]
• 1 Bearing [3]
• 1 Belt [5]
• 1 Belt [6]
7. Remove the following parts from the Bypass Feed [4]

[2]
Roller 1 [1]. [3]
• 1 E-ring [2]
• 1 Pulley (with Parallel Pin) [3]
• 1 E-ring [4]
• 1 E-ring [6] [1]
• 1 Bearing [7]
[7]
[6] [5]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[6]
[1]
791
7. Remove the following parts from the Bypass Feed 7. Remove the following parts from the Bypass Feed
Roller 2 [1] Roller 3 [1]
• 1 E-ring [2] • 1 E-ring [2]
• 2 Pulleys (with Parallel Pin) [3] • 1 Pulleys (with Parallel Pin) [3]
• 1 E-ring [4] • 1 E-ring [4]
• 1 Bearing [5] • 1 Bearing [5]
[5]
[4] [5]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1] [1]
When Removing the Bypass Feed Roller 3

5. Remove the Guide Plate 3 [1]. Replacing the Fixing Merging
• 4 Screws [2]
Path Unit
4x ■ Pre-preparation
page 700

708
[2] [2] “Disassembling the Secondary Fixing Assembly (when
[1] ■ Disassembling the Fixing Merging

6. Remove the Bypass Feed Roller 3 [1]. Path Unit
• 1 E-ring [2]
• 1 Bearing [3]
• 1 Belt [5]
1. Store the Secondary Fixing Assembly Base [1].

[5]
[1]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
792
2. Remove the Fixing Merging Cover [1]. 5. Free the harness.

• 2 Screws [2] • 1 Wire Saddle [1]
2x [2]
[3]
2x
[1] 4x
3. Remove the Fixing Merging Cover (Upper) [1].

• 2 Screws [2] [3] [2] [1]
[2]
6. Release the lever (C-D3) [1] and pull out the Delivery/
2x Reverse Unit [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
4. Remove the Sub Station Inner Cover [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
7. Release the Leaf Spring [1] and pull out the Delivery/
2x Reverse Unit [2] until it stops.
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
793
8. Remove the Fixing Merging Path Unit [1].

NOTE:
• 1 Screw [2] Assembling the Fixing Merging Path Unit
After aligning the 2 Positioning Shafts [2] of the Fixing
CAUTION: Merging Path Unit [1] with the 2 holes [3], align the
• The Fixing Merging Path Unit [1] is heavy, so be Positioning Boss [3] with the hole [4].
• 1 Screw [5]
careful not to drop it.
• When installing/removing the Fixing Merging Path
[1] [3]
Unit [1], do not let the 2 [A] parts of the Feed
Guides and the frame [B] of the host machine 1x
come in contact with one another, otherwise they
may be damaged.
• When installing/removing the Fixing Merging Path
Unit [1], do not damage the duct [C].
[2]
[A] [C] [1]
[5]
[A]
[B]
[1] [4]
1x [3]
Replacing the Fixing Merging

Path Feed Belts
page 700

708
3. “Disassembling the Fixing Merging Path Unit” on

page 792
■ Disassembling the Fixing Merging

Path Feed Belts
794
1. Release the lever [1] and open the Fixing Merging 4. Remove the 8 Fixing Merging Path Feed Belts [1]
Unit (Lower) [2]. Front side (upper)
• 1 E-ring [2]
• 1 Washer [3]
• 1 Bearing [4]
Front side (lower)
• 1 E-ring [5]
• 1 Washer [6]
• 1 Bearing [7]
Rear side
[2]
• 1 E-ring [8]
[1] • 1 Washer [9]
• 1 Bearing [10]
2. Remove the Inlet Guide [1].
• 2 Screws [2] CAUTION:
• When replacing the bearings, wipe off the old
grease with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
2x • At installation, apply an appropriate amount of new
grease to the bearings.
[4]
[3]
[2]
[2] [1] [1]
3. Remove the Gear Unit [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
[7] [8]
[9]
[6]
[10]
[5]
2x
Replacing the Fixing Merging
[1]
Bypass Decurler Slave Roller and
the Fixing Merging Bypass
Decurler Drive Roller
[2]
■ Pre-preparation
page 700

708

page 792
795
4. “Disassembling the Fixing Merging Path Feed Belts” 1. Clean the Fixing Merging Unit Bypass Decurler Drive
on page 794 Roller [1] with lint-free paper [2] moistened with
alcohol.
■ Disassembling the Fixing Merging [1]
Bypass Decurler Slave Roller and the
Fixing Merging Bypass Decurler [2]
Drive Roller
1. Remove the Fixing Merging Bypass Decurler Slave

Roller [1] and the Fixing Merging Bypass Decurler CAUTION:
Drive Roller [2]. Be sure to assemble the 8 Feed Belts (Merging Unit)
to make the center of each Feed Belt [1] aligned with
[2]
the center of a roller [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
Cleaning the Fixing Merging

Unit Bypass Decurler Drive Roller
■ Pre-preparation
page 700

708
[1]
page 792
4. “Disassembling the Fixing Merging Path Feed Belts”

on page 794 Replacing the Fixing Merging
■ Cleaning the Fixing Merging Unit
Unit (Lower)
Bypass Decurler Drive Roller ■ Pre-preparation
page 700

708

page 792
796
■ Disassembling the Fixing Merging 3. Remove the Rotation Shaft [1] in the direction of the
arrow.
Unit (Lower) • 3 E-rings [2]
• 1 Bushing [3]
[2]
[2]
[3]
1. Disconnect the Connector Support Plate [1].

• 2 Screws [5]
[1]
4. Remove the Toggle Retainer Plate [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
[2] 1x
3x
[3]
[1]
2x
[1]
2x [2]
[4] [5]
5. Remove the Toggle Shaft [1] from the hole.

2. Move the Reinforcing Plate [1] in the direction of the
arrow.
• 2 Screws [2]
[2]
2x [1]
[1]
797
6. Release the lever [1] and remove the Fixing Merging 1. Free the harness.
Unit (Lower) [2]. • 3 Wire Saddles [1]
• 1 Connector [3]
[2]
[1]
Replacing the Tandem Feed [3]

4x
Roller 3
page 700

[1] [2]
708

page 792

page 919

Roller 3
798
2. Remove the Fixing Merging Unit (Upper) [1]. 4. Remove the Gear Support Plate [1].
CAUTION: 3x
Be sure to place the Fixing Merging Unit (Upper) [1] [1]
with its Feed Guide [A] up.
[A] [1]
[2]

• 3 Screws [2]
• 1 Belt [3]
[2]
3x
[1]
[3] [1]
2x
[2]
[3]
[3] 6. Move the Connector Support Plate [1].
[2] • 2 Screws [2]
[2] [1]
2x

• 1 Connector [1]
• 1 Edge Saddle [3] [2]
• 2 Reuse Bands [4]
1x [1]
[4]
6x
[2]
[3]
[2]
799
7. Shift the Right Frame [1]. 8. Remove the Guide Plate [1].
• 3 Screws (Binding) [2] (to remove) • 6 Screws [2]
• 1 Screw (TP) [3] (to remove)
1x
4x
2x [1]
[2] 4x
[2]
[3] [4] [2]
[1]
1x
[1]
[2]
800
9. Remove the Tandem Feed Roller 3 [1]. 1. Turn the Fixing Merging Path Unit [1].
Front side
• 1 E-ring [2]
[1]
• 1 Bearing [3]
Rear side
• 1 E-ring [4]
• 1 Gear (with Parallel Pin) [5]
• 1 Pulley [6]
• 1 E-ring [7]
• 1 Bearing [8]
[8]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[5]
[4]
CAUTION:
Do not deform the Feed Guide [A] of the Fixing Merging
Path Unit [1].
[1]
[1]
Replacing the Bypass Feed

[A]
Roller 4
■ Pre-preparation
page 700

708

page 792
■ Disassembling the Bypass Feed

Roller 4
801
2. Remove the Connector Support Plate [1]. 5. Remove the Rotation Shaft [1].
• 2 Wire Saddles [2] • 3 E-rings [2]
• 1 Edge Saddle [3] • 1 Bushing [3]
• 2 Screws [5] [2]
[2]
[3]
[3] [2]
3x
2x
[1]
2x
[4] [5]
[1]
6. Remove the Toggle Retainer Plate [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
[1]
1x
3. Move the Reinforcing Plate [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
[2]
[2]
2x
[1]
7. Remove the Toggle Shaft [1] from the hole.
[1]
4. Remove the Sensor Flag [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
1x
[2] [1]
802
8. Release the lever [1] and remove the Fixing Merging 9. Remove the Lower Guide 1 [1].
Unit (Lower) [2]. • 4 Screws [2]
[2]
CAUTION:
• When removing/installing the Fixing Merging Unit 4x [2]
(Lower), do not let the Feed Guide [A] of the Fixing
Merging Unit (Lower) [2] and the Feed Guide [B]
of the Fixing Merging Unit (Upper) come in contact
with one another, otherwise they may be
damaged.
[A]
[1]
[B]

[3]
• 1 E-ring [2]
• 1 Bearing [3]
[2] [4]
[2]
[3]
• Be sure to place the Fixing Merging Unit (Lower)

[2] with its Feed Guide [A] up.
[A]
[2]
[1]

• 1 E-ring [2]
• 1 Washer [3]
• 1 Gear [4]
[1] • 1 E-ring [5]
• 1 Bearing [6]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1]
803
Cleaning the Fixing Merging [2].
Path Feed Belt Opposition Roller [1]
■ Cleaning the Fixing Merging Path

Feed Belt Opposition Roller
[2] [1]
[2]
3. Clean the Fixing Merging Path Feed Belt Opposition

Roller [1] with lint-free paper [2] moistened with
alcohol.
[2] [1]
Cleaning the Tandem Feed

Roller 3, Tandem Feed Slave
804
Roller 3, and Fixing Merging Cleaning the Bypass Feed

Guide Roller 4, Bypass Feed Slave
■ Pre-preparation Roller 4, and Fixing Merging
Guide
page 700
■ Cleaning the Bypass Feed Roller 4,
■ Cleaning the Tandem Feed Roller 3, Bypass Feed Slave Roller 4, and
Tandem Feed Slave Roller 3, and Fixing Merging Guide
Fixing Merging Guide
1. Open the C-B1 Guide [1].
[2] [1]
[3].
[3] [2] [1]
[2].
[2]
[1]
3. Clean the Fixing Merging Guide Plates [1], Tandem

Feed Roller 3 [2], and Tandem Feed Slave Roller 3 [3]
with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol [4].
[1] [3]
[1]
[1]
[2] [4]
805
3. Clean the Fixing Merging Guide [1], Bypass Feed 1. Open the Sub Station Front Right Cover [1] and the
Roller 4 [2], and Bypass Feed Slave Roller 4 [3] with Sub Station Front Left Cover [2].
lint-free paper moistened with alcohol [4].
[2] [1]
[1]
[3]
[1]
2. Remove the Sub Station Inner Cover 3 [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[1]
2x
[2]
Replacing the Duplex Decurler

Unit
■ Disassembling the Duplex Decurler 3. Remove the Sub Station Duplex Inlet Cover [1].
Unit • 3 Screws [2]
[1]
3x
[2]
806
4. Remove the Duplex Decurler Unit [1]. 2. Remove the 2 springs [1].
• 4 Screws [3]
2x [1]
[1]
[2]
4x
3. Remove the 2 Positioning Pins [1].

[3] • 2 Screws [2]
[1]
4. Move the Inlet Guide Plate [3] in the direction of the
arrow, and remove it.
Replacing the Duplex Decurler [1]
Unit (Upper)
1. “Disassembling the Duplex Decurler Unit” on page [2]
806
■ Disassembling the Duplex Decurler

Unit (Upper)
[3]
1. Remove the Upper Cover [1].

• 6 Screws [2]
[2] • 1 Connector [2]
6x
[2]
[1]
807
6. Extend the Stopper Plate [3] in the direction of the 9. Remove the Duplex Decurler Unit (Upper) [1].
arrow. • 1 Belt [2]
• 2 Screws [4] • 1 Positioning Pin [3]
[4]
3x [3]
[1]
[2]
1x
[1]
2x
[2]
[3]
7. Remove the Hinge Pin [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
Replacing the Duplex Decurler

1x
Unit Feed Belts
■ Pre-preparation
1. “Disassembling the Duplex Decurler Unit” on page
806
2. “Disassembling the Duplex Decurler Unit (Upper)”

on page 807
[1]
[2] ■ Disassembling the Duplex Decurler
Unit Feed Belts
8. Turn the lever [1], and release the 2 latches [2].
[2] [2]
1. Remove the Lower Guide Plate [1] in the direction of

the arrow.
• 4 Screws [2]
4x
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
808
2. Remove the Decurler Frame [1]. 4. Remove the 8 Duplex Decurler Unit Feed Belts [1].
• 4 Screws [2]
• 1 Belt [3] CAUTION:
If the Duplex Decurler Drive Roller [2] is dirty, clean it
with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol. After
4x cleaning, apply Super Lube Grease to the contact
[1]
surfaces of the Duplex Decurler Drive Roller [2] and the
bearings.
[2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
3. Remove the Duplex Decurler Unit Feed Belt Replacing the Duplex Decurler
Assembly [1].
Rear side (right)
Slave Roller and Duplex Decurler
• 1 E-ring [2] Drive Roller
• 1 Washer [3]
• 1 Bearing [4] ■ Pre-preparation
Rear side (left)
• 1 E-ring [5] 1. “Disassembling the Duplex Decurler Unit” on page
• 1 Washer [6] 806
• 1 Bearing [7]
2. “Disassembling the Duplex Decurler Unit (Upper)”
on page 807
CAUTION:
• When replacing the bearings, wipe off the old 3. “Disassembling the Duplex Decurler Unit Feed
grease with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol. Belts” on page 808
• Apply new grease to the bearings when installing
them. ■ Disassembling the Duplex Decurler
Slave Roller and Duplex Decurler
[4] Drive Roller
[3]
[2]
[1]
1. Remove the Duplex Decurler Slave Roller [1] and the

Duplex Decurler Drive Roller [2].
[7]
[6] [2]
[5]
[1]
809
3. Release the Leaf Spring [1] and pull out the Reverse/
Pulling Out the Delivery/ Delivery Unit [2] until it stops.
Reverse Unit [2]
[1]
■ Pulling Out the Delivery/Reverse
Unit
[2] [1]
Cleaning the Delivery/Reverse
Flapper Flag
■ Pre-preparation
810
■ Cleaning the Delivery/Reverse

Flapper Flag
2. Release the lever (C-D3) [1] and pull out the Reverse/
Delivery Unit [2].
1. Open the Delivery Upper Guide Unit [1] to the lock

[2] position.
[1]
[1]
810
2. While pressing the Delivery/Reverse Upper Guide 1. Remove the Reverse Duct Cover [1].
[1], turn the Delivery/Reverse Flapper Flag [2] and • 4 Screws [2]
clean the 2 cut-offs [A] with the blower [3]. • 2 Hooks [3]
[3] [3]
[1]
[1] [2]
4x
[2]
[1]
2. Remove the Color Sensor Unit Sponge Roller [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
[2]
2x
[3]
[A]
Replacing the Color Sensor

[1]
Unit Sponge Roller
3. Remove the Sponge Roller [1] from the Color Sensor
■ Pre-preparation Unit Sponge Roller.
• 2 E-rings [2]
• 1 Timing Belt [3]
810
• 1 Gear [4]
• 1 Parallel Pin [5]
■ Disassembling the Color Sensor • 2 Bearings [6]
Unit Sponge Roller
[2] [1]
[6]
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the Color Sensor Unit [4]
Sponge Roller when disassembling/assembling. [2]
[3]
[6]
[5]
811
2. Remove the Delivery Reverse Cover 1 [1].

Replacing the Delivery • 2 Screws [2]
Decurler Slave Roller 2, Delivery
Slave Roller 1, and Delivery Slave 2x
Roller 2
■ Pre-preparation
[1]
810
[2]
■ Disassembling the Delivery

Decurler Slave Roller 2, Delivery
Slave Roller 1, and Delivery Slave
Roller 2
3. Remove the Delivery Upper Guide Cover [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
NOTE:
When removing the target parts, be sure to follow the
following procedures: 1x
• Removing the Delivery Decurler Slave Roller 2
Be sure to refer to steps 1 to 6.
• Removing the Delivery Slave Rollers 1 and 2
[1]
Be sure to refer to steps 1 to 18.
• Removing the Delivery Slave Roller 1
Be sure to refer to steps 1 to 14. [2]
• Removing the Delivery Slave Roller 2
Be sure to refer to steps 1 to 9 , 15 to 18.
1. Remove the Delivery Reverse Cover 2 [2] while lifting

the lever (C-B2) [1].
• 2 Screws [3]
[2] [1]
2x
[3]
812
4. Remove the Decurler Unit [1]. 5. Remove the Delivery Stay 3 [1].
• 1 Screw [2] • 1 Spring [2]
• 1 Positioning Pin [3] • 4 Screws [3]
1x [1]
[2]
4x
[2]
[3] [1]
[3]
[3]
6. Remove the Delivery Decurler Slave Roller 2 [1].

• 2 E-rings [2]
• 2 Bearings [3]
[2]
[3]
[3]
[2]
[1]
7. Remove the Handle Cover 1 [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
2x
[2]
[1]
NOTE:
When assembling, be sure to secure the spring attached
to the back of the Handle Cover 1 to the plate.
813
8. Remove the Delivery Duct [1]. 11. Remove the Latch (Front) [1].
• 4 Screws [2] • 1 Spring [2]
• 1 E-ring [3]
[2]
4x
[2]
[3]
[1]
[1]
12. Remove the Holder Support Plate [1].

9. Remove the Handle Cover 2 [1] of the Delivery Upper
• 2 Screws [2]
Guide Unit.
• 2 Screws [2]
2x
[1]
[2]
2x
[2]
13. While supporting with the holder [1], hold the Slave
Roller [3] with lint-free paper [2] and remove it in the
[1] [1]
10. Remove the Release Lever Plate (Front) [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
[2]
1x
[2] [3]
[1]
814
14. Remove the following parts from the Delivery Slave 17. While supporting with the holder [1], hold the Slave
Roller 1 [1]. Roller [3] with lint-free paper [2] and remove it in the
Front side direction of the arrow.
• 1 Spring [2]
• 1 Bearing Holder [3] [2] [1]
• 1 Bearing [4]
Rear side
• 1 Bearing [5]
[5]
[2]
[4] [1]
[3]
[3]
18. Remove the following parts from the Delivery Slave

Roller 2 [1].
Front side
15. Free the harness. • 1 Spring [2]
• 1 Bearing Holder [3]
• 1 Bearing [4]
Rear side
• 1 Bearing [5]
5x [2]
[5]
[2]
[4] [1]
[3]
[1]
16. Remove the Holder Support Plate [1].

• 2 Screws [2] Cleaning the Delivery Roller 1,
[1] Delivery Slave Roller 1, Delivery
2x Roller 2 and Delivery Slave Roller
2
■ Pre-preparation
810

page 919
[2]
815
■ Cleaning the Delivery Roller 1, 3. Clean the Delivery Roller 2 [1] and the Delivery Slave
Roller 2 [2] with lint-free paper [3] moistened with
Delivery Slave Roller 1, Delivery alcohol.
Roller 2 and Delivery Slave Roller 2
1. Open the Delivery Upper Guide Unit [1] to the lock

position.
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
Cleaning the Duplex Reverse
Roller and Duplex Reverse Rear
2. Clean the Delivery Roller 1 [1] and the Delivery Slave Roller
Roller 1 [2] with lint-free paper [3] moistened with
alcohol. ■ Pre-preparation
810
■ Cleaning the Duplex Reverse Roller

and Duplex Reverse Rear Roller
[3]
[2]
[1]
816
1. Remove the Reverse Lower Cover [1]. Removing the Duplex Reverse Roller
• 4 Screws [2]
• 1 Knob (C-C3) [2]
4x • 2 Screws [3]
2x
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2] [2]
2. While rotating the knobs [1], clean the Duplex

Reverse Roller [2] and the Duplex Reverse Rear [1]
Roller [3] with lint-free paper [4] moistened with
2. Remove the belt [1].
alcohol.
[3]
[1]
[1]
[2] [4]
3. Remove the Reverse Lower Cover [1].
• 4 Screws [2]
Replacing the Duplex Reverse
Roller and Duplex Reverse Rear 4x
Roller
■ Pre-preparation
810

page 919 [1]
[2] [2]
■ Disassembling the Duplex Reverse
Roller and Duplex Reverse Rear
Roller
817
4. Remove the Duplex Reverse Roller [1]. 3. Remove the belt [1].
Front side
• 1 E-ring [2]
• 1 E-ring [4]
• 1 Bearing [5]
Rear side
• 1 E-ring [6]
• 1 Bearing [7]
[1]
[1]
4. Remove the Reverse Lower Cover [1].

1. 4 Screws [2]
4x
[3] [4] [5] [7] [6]
[2]
Removing the Duplex Reverse Rear Roller

[1]
[2] [2]
1. Remove the knob (C-D2) [1] and open the lever (C-C1)
5. Remove the Duplex Reverse Rear Roller [1].
[2].
Front side
1. 1 E-ring [2]
2. 1 Pulley (with Parallel Pin) [3]
3. 1 E-ring [4]
4. 1 Bearing [5]
Rear side
1. 1 E-ring [6]
2. 1 Bearing [7]
[2]
[1]
[1]

• 3 Screws [2]
[7] [6]
[3] [4] [5]
3x
[2]
[2]
[1]
818

Replacing the Delivery • 3 Screws [2]
Reverse Roller 1 and Delivery
Reverse Roller 2 3x
■ Pre-preparation
810

Reverse Roller 1 and Delivery
[2]
Reverse Roller 2
[1]
4. Lift the Reverse Duct Cover [1] and remove it toward

you.
• 4 Screws [2]
[1]
4x
• 2 Screws [3]
[2] [1]
2x
[2]
[3]
5. Remove the belt (rear) [1].
• 2 E-rings [2]
[2]
2. Remove the knob (C-D2) [1] and open the lever (C-
C1) [2]. [3]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
Removing the Delivery Reverse Roller 2
819
6. Remove the Delivery Reverse Roller 2 [1]. 8. Remove the Color Sensor Unit Sponge Roller [1].
Front side • 2 Screws [2]
• 1 E-ring [2]
• 1 Bearing [3] [2]
Rear side 2x
• 1 E-ring [4]
• 1 Bearing [5]
[1]
9. Remove the Color Sensor Shutter HP Sensor [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
[4] • 2 Wire Saddles [3]
[2] [3] [1] [5]
[3]
1x
Removing the Delivery Reverse Roller 1 and the Color

Sensor Backup Roller 2x
7. Loosen the screw [1] to release the tension [2], and
remove the belt (front) [3]. [1] [2]
1x
[3]
[1]
[2]
820
11. Disconnect the connector [2] of the Delivery Reverse

NOTE:
Motor Harness [1], and remove the Wire Saddle [3]
When assembling, fit the Sensor Flag [1] to the [A] part of
on the harness.
the Color Sensor Shutter HP Sensor.
[A] 1x
[1] 1x
[3]
[1] [2]
12. Remove the 2 Shaft Retainer Plates [1] of the

Delivery Reverse Roller 1.
10. Remove the 2 springs [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
[1]
2x
[1]
[2]
NOTE:
When assembling, install one end of the spring [1] to the
protrusion [A] of the plate, and fit its other end to the boss
[B] located behind the hole. NOTE:
When assembling, be sure to fit the [B] part of the plate to
[A] the [A] part of the bearing.
[B]
[A]
[1] [B]
821
13. Remove the Delivery Reverse Roller 1 Unit [1]. 14. Remove the Delivery Reverse Roller 1 [1].
Front side Front side
• 1 E-ring [2] • 1 Belt [2]
• 1 Pulley (with Parallel Pin) [3] • 3 E-ring [3]
• 1 E-ring [4] • 1 Gear [4]
• 1 Bearing [5] • 1 Parallel Pin [5]
Rear side • 3 Bearings [6]
• 1 E-ring [6] • 1 Mounting Plate on the front side [7]
• 1 Bearing [7] Rear side
• 2 E-rings [8]
• 3 Bearings [9]
[6] • 1 Mounting Plate on the rear side [10]
[3] [4] [5] [7]
[2] [9] [8]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[6]
[3]
[6]
NOTE: [6]
[7]
[5]
When assembling, be sure to install the front and rear [4]
[2] [3]
bearings [2] to the Side Plates while lifting the 2 Color
Sensor Unit Sponge Roller Mounting Plates [1].
[2] [2] Replacing the S2M 30T Pulley/

Delivery Roller 1/Delivery
Reverse Front Roller
■ Pre-preparation
[1]
810

page 919
■ Disassembling the S2M 30T Pulley/

Delivery Roller 1/Delivery Reverse
Front Roller
822
1. Remove the Delivery Reverse Cover 2 [2] while lifting 4. Push in the member [1] and lower the lever (C-D3)
the lever (C-B2) [1]. [2].
• 2 Screws [3]
[2] [1]
[1]
2x
[3]
C1) [2].
[2]
5. Lift the Delivery Upper Guide Unit [1] until it locks.
[2]
[1]

• 3 Screws [2]
[1]
3x
6. Remove the Drive Belt (Rear Side) [1].
[1]
[2]
[1]
823
7. Remove the Drive Belt (Front Side) [1]. 9. Remove the Delivery Roller 1 [1].
• 2 E-rings [2] Front side
• 2 Pulleys (with Parallel Pin) [3] • 1 E-ring [2]
• 1 Bearing [3]
Rear side
• 1 E-ring [4]
[1]
• 1 S2M30T Pulley [5]
[3]
[2] • 1 E-ring [6]
• 1 Bearing [7]
• 1 Washer [8]
[3] [1]
[2]
CAUTION:
When assembling, install the Parallel Pin [1] in the hole
[2] on the rear side.
[1] [2]
[2] [8] [4]
[3] [5]
[2] [6]
[7]
[1]
CAUTION:
When assembling, be sure to install the S2M 30T
Removing the S2M30T Pulley, Delivery Roller 1
Pulley [5] with the One-way Clutch side out.
8. Remove the Delivery Lower Guide 1 [1].
• 2 Screws [2] Removing the Delivery Reverse Front Roller
10. Lift and pull the Reverse Duct Cover [1] forward to
remove it.
2x
• 4 Screws [2]
[1]
[2] 4x
[2] [1]
[2]
824
11. Free the harness. 14. Move the Lever Lock Support Plate 1 [1] in the
• 2 Wire Saddles [1] direction of the arrow.
• 2 Connectors [2] • 3 Screws (Binding) [2]
• 1 Screw (TP) [3]
2x
[1] [2]
4x
2x
[3]
[2]
[1] [2]

• 3 Screws [2]
3x
15. Remove the Delivery Reverse Front Roller [1].

Front side
• 1 E-ring [2]
[2] • 1 Bearing [3]
Rear side
• 1 E-ring [4]
[1] • 1 Bearing [5]
13. Slightly lift up (until the lock releases) and then lower
[1]
the Delivery Upper Guide Unit [1].
[3] [4]
[5]
[2]
[1]
Cleaning the Delivery Reverse

Roller 1/Delivery Reverse Roller 2/
Delivery Reverse Rear Roller
■ Pre-preparation
810
825
■ Cleaning the Delivery Reverse 3. Clean the Delivery Reverse Roller 2 [2] with lint-free
Roller 1/Delivery Reverse Roller 2/
Delivery Reverse Rear Roller
[2] [1]
1. Lift and pull the Reverse Duct Cover [1] forward to
remove it.
• 4 Screws [2]
[1]
When Cleaning the Delivery Reverse Rear Roller
4x
• 2 Screws [3]
[2] [1]
2x
[2]
[3]
When Cleaning the Delivery Reverse Roller 1
2. Clean the Delivery Reverse Roller 1 [2] with lint-free

[2]
5. Open the lever (C-C1) [1].
[1]
[1]
When Cleaning the Delivery Reverse Roller 2
6. Open the lever (C-C2) [1], and remove the Feed

Guide [2].
• 1 Screw [3]
• 1 Positioning Pin [4]
826
CAUTION: NOTE:
Do not damage the [A] part of the Feed Guide and the Be sure to align the shaft [1] of the Reverse Unit and the
guide [B] of the Reverse Unit when installing/removing. hole [A] of the Feed Guide to install the Feed Guide [2].
[B] [2]
[A]
[1]
[A] [2]
1x
[2]
[3]
[4]
Cleaning the Delivery Reverse

[1]
Front Roller
■ Pre-preparation
7. Clean the Delivery Reverse Rear Roller [2] with lint-
810
■ Cleaning the Delivery Reverse Front

Roller
[2]
[1]
827
1. Lift and pull the Reverse Duct Cover [1] forward to 1. Remove the Delivery Reverse Cover 1 [1].
remove it. • 2 Screws [2]
• 4 Screws [2]
[1]
2x
4x
[1]
[2]
[2]
2. Clean the whole circumference of the Delivery

Reverse Front Roller [2] with lint-free paper [1]
[2]
2. Move the plate [1] on the rear side of the Delivery/
Reverse Unit in the direction of the arrow.
• 4 Screws [2]
[1]
4x
[1]
[2]
Replacing the Delivery Roller

[2]
3
■ Pre-preparation
810

page 919
■ Disassembling the Delivery Roller 3
828
3. Remove the One-way Clutch Unit [1]. 6. Remove the Harness Guide [1].
• 2 Screws [2] • 1 Screw [2]
2x 1x
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]

• 2 Screws [3]
• 3 Screws [2]
[2] [1]
2x
3x
[3]
[1]
[2]
8. Loosen the screw [1] and remove the Delivery Lower

Guide 1 [2].
• 4 Screws [3]
• 1 Harness Guide [3]
1x
2x
[1] 4x
5x [2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[3] [3]
829
9. Remove the Delivery Roller 3 [1]. 1. Remove the Delivery Reverse Cover 1 [1].
Front side • 2 Screws [2]
• 1 E-ring [2]
• 1 Bearing [3]
Rear side
2x
• 1 E-ring [4]
• 1 E-ring [6]
• 1 Bearing [7]
• 1 Bearing [8] [1]
[7] [2]
[4] [2]
[5] [3]
[6]
[8]
[1]
2. Turn the Connector Support Plate [1] toward the

front.
• 1 Screw [2]
1x
Replacing the Delivery Upper [2]

[1]
Guide Unit
■ Pre-preparation
810
■ Disassembling the Delivery Upper

Guide Unit
830
3. Disconnect the connector [1]. 5. Remove the Positioning Pin (Rear) [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
1x
1x
[1] [2] [1]
4. Remove the spring [1].
[1]
6. Remove the Positioning Pin (Front) [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
1x
[1]
[2]
831
7. Remove the screw [1] and move the Slide Rail [2] in 2. “Disassembling the Delivery Upper Guide Unit” on
the direction of the arrow. page 830
■ Disassembling Delivery Guide

1x (Lower) 3
[2] [1]

• 2 Screws [2]
[1]
2x
[2]
8. Remove the Delivery Upper Guide Unit [1] in the

2. Remove the Delivery Guide (Lower) 3 [1].

• 4 Screws [2]
[2]
4x
[1]
[1]
[2] [2]
Replacing the Delivery Guide Replacing the Delivery

(Lower) 3 Decurler Slave Roller 1
810
810
832
2. “Disassembling the Delivery Upper Guide Unit” on 2. Remove the Delivery Decurler Slave Roller 1 [1].
page 830 • 2 E-rings [2]
• 2 Bearings [3]
3. “Disassembling Delivery Guide (Lower) 3” on page
832
[3] [2]
[3]
[2]
Decurler Slave Roller 1
1. Remove the Decurler Front Guide (Lower) [1].

• 2 Screws [2] [1]
CAUTION:
Be careful not to bend the plastic film sheet [1] when Replacing the Delivery Roller
removing the Decurler Front Guide (Lower).
2
[1]
■ Pre-preparation
810
2. “Disassembling the Delivery Upper Guide Unit” on

page 830

832
■ Disassembling the Delivery Roller 2

2x
[2]
[1] 1. Remove the E-ring [1] and the washer [2].

[2]
[2]
[1]
833
2. Remove the Gear Unit [1]. ■ Disassembling the Delivery

• 2 Screws [2]
• Z17 Gear [3]
Reverse Rear Roller
2x [2] [3] [1] [2]

• 1 Connector [2]
• 3 Screws [3]
• 1 Belt [4]
[4] [3]
3. Remove the Delivery Roller 2 [1]. 1x

Front side
• 1 Bearing [2]
• 1 E-ring [3]
3x
• 1 Bearing [4]
Rear side
• 1 E-ring [5]
• 1 Bearing [6]
[4] [5]
[3] [6] [1] [2]
[2]
[1]
Replacing the Delivery

Reverse Rear Roller
■ Pre-preparation
810

page 830

832
4. “Disassembling the Delivery Roller 2” on page 833
834
2. Remove the Delivery Reverse Rear Roller [1]. 1. Clean the Delivery Decurler Roller Opposition Roller
Front side [1] on the host machine side with lint-free paper [2]
• 1 E-ring [2] moistened with alcohol.
• 1 E-ring [4]
• 1 Bearing [5]
[2]
Rear side [1]
• 1 E-ring [6]
• 1 E-ring [8]
• 1 Bearing [9]
[5] [6]
[4] [7]
[3]
[8]
[2] [9]
2. Clean the Delivery Decurler Roller Opposition Roller

[1] on the Delivery Upper Guide Unit side with lint-
[1]
[2]
[1]
Cleaning the Delivery Decurler

Roller Opposition Roller
■ Pre-preparation Replacing the Delivery/
1. “Pulling Out the Delivery/Reverse Unit” on page Reverse Front Slave Roller
810

■ Pre-preparation
page 830 1. “Pulling Out the Delivery/Reverse Unit” on page
810
■ Cleaning the Delivery Decurler
Roller Opposition Roller ■ Disassembling the Delivery/
Reverse Front Slave Roller
835
1. Remove the Delivery Reverse Cover 2 [2] while lifting 4. Remove the Delivery Reverse Cover 1 [1].
the lever (C-B2) [1]. • 2 Screws [2]
• 2 Screws [3]
[2] [1]
2x
2x
[1]
[3]
[2]
C1) [2].
5. Push in the Lever Release Member [1] and lower the

lever (C-D3) [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]

• 3 Screws [2]
3x
[2]
[2]
[1]
836
6. Remove the Drive Belt (Rear Side) [1]. 8. Lift the Reverse Duct Cover [1] and remove it toward
you.
• 4 Screws [2]
[1]
[1]
4x
[2]

7. Remove the Drive Belt (Front Side) [1].
• 2 E-rings [2]
2x
[1]
[3]
2x
[2]
[3]
[2] [1] [2]

CAUTION: • 3 Screws [2]
When assembling, install the Parallel Pin [1] in the hole
[2] on the rear side.
[1] [2]
3x
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
837
11. Move the Lever Lock Support Plate 1 [1] in the 13. Remove the flapper [1].
direction of the arrow. Front side
• 3 Screws (Binding) [2] • 1 E-ring [2]
• 1 Bushing [3]
Rear side
[1] [2]
• 1 E-ring [4]
3x • 1 Bushing [5]
• 1 Torsion Spring [6]
[4]
[3] [5]
[2]
[2]
[6]
[1]
12. Remove the Delivery Reverse Front Roller [1].

Front side 14. Remove the 2 Compression Springs [1].
• 1 E-ring [2]
• 1 Bearing [3]
Rear side
• 1 E-ring [4] [1]
• 1 Bearing [5]
[1]
[1]
[3] [4]
[5]
[2] 15. While holding the Delivery/Reverse Front Slave
Roller [1] by hand, remove the Reverse Guide
(Lower) 4 [2].
• 2 Screws [3]
838
16. Remove the Delivery/Reverse Front Slave Roller [1]. 1. Move the plate [1] on the rear side of the Delivery/
• 2 Bearing Holders [4] Reverse Unit in the direction of the arrow.
• 2 Bearings [5] • 4 Screws [2]
2x 4x
[4]
[5]
[1] [2]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3] [1]
[2] [1]
Replacing the Delivery/

2. Remove the Delivery/Reverse Unit One-way Clutch
Reverse Unit One-way Clutch Unit [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
■ Pre-preparation
1x
810
[1]
■ Disassembling the Delivery/ [2]

Reverse Unit One-way Clutch
839
3. Remove the Delivery/Reverse Unit One-way Clutch 1. Remove the 2 Delivery/Reverse Unit Decurler
[1]. Backup Roller Cleaning Brushes [1].
• 1 E-ring [2] • 2 Screws [2]
• 1 Washer [3]
[1]
CAUTION: [2]
1x
When assembling, do not install the Delivery/Reverse
Unit One-way Clutch in the opposite direction.
1x
[1]
[3]
[2] [1]
[2]
Replacing the Delivery/

Reverse Unit Decurler Backup Replacing the Left/Right Deck
Roller Cleaning Brushes Unit
1. “Pulling Out the Delivery/Reverse Unit” on page 1. “When Replacing the Paper Surface Detection
810 Sensor” on page 921
■ Disassembling the Delivery/ ■ Disassembling the Left/Right Deck

Reverse Unit Decurler Backup Roller Unit
Cleaning Brushes
NOTE:
The following disassembly procedure shows the case of
removing the Main Station Right Deck Unit.
The Left Deck Unit can be disassembled in the same way.
840
1. Open the Main Station Front Right Cover [1] and the 4. Remove the Connector Cover [1].
Main Station Front Left Cover [2]. • 1 Screw [2]
[2] [1]
1x [1] [2]
5. Open the 3 Wire Saddles [1], disconnect the

2. Insert a screwdriver, etc. into the gap between the
connector [2], and free the harness from the Edge
Deck Unit and host machine, press the [A] part of the
Saddle [3].
latch [1] to release the lock, and pull out the Deck
Unit [2] towards you. [3] [1]
4x
[1]
1x
[A]
[2]
[2]
3. Release the locks of the 2 Leaf Springs [1], and pull

out the Deck Unit towards you.
[1]
[1]
841
6. Remove the Front Cover [1]. 9. Remove the 4 Cable Clips [3].
• 4 Screws [2]
[1]
• 4 Washer [3] [3]
2x
[2] [2]
[3] [3]
4x
4x
[3]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
CAUTION:
When assembling, be sure to secure the 2 Flat Cables
[1] with the 4 Cable Clips [2] and connect them to the
[3]
2 connectors [3].
[2] [1] [2] [3]
CAUTION:
In order to mark the installation position of the Front
Cover, be sure to write marking lines on the 4 screws
[A] before removing the cover.
[A]
[2]
[A]
[A]
7. Remove the Connector Cover [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
1x
[1] [2]
8. Disconnect the 2 Flat Cables [1] from the connectors

[2].
842
10. Remove the Deck Unit [1].

NOTE:
• 3 Screws [2] The following disassembly procedure shows the case of
removing the Main Station Right Deck Pickup Unit.
The Left Deck Pickup Unit can be disassembled in the
3x same way.
[2]
[2] [1]
[2] [1]
CAUTION:
Be sure to place the 4 cut-offs [2] of the Deck Unit [1]
on the 4 hooks [3] of the rail when installing the Deck
Unit.
[2]
Deck Unit and host machine, press the [A] part of the
latch [1] to release the lock, and pull out the Deck
Unit [2] towards you.
[1]
[3]
[2] [1]
[A]
[2]
[3]
3. Release the locks of the 2 Leaf Springs [1], and pull

Replacing the Left/Right Deck out the Deck Unit towards you.
Pickup Unit
[1]
■ Pre-preparation
1. “Disassembling the Left/Right Deck Unit” on page
840
■ Disassembling the Left/Right Deck

Pickup Unit
[1]
843
4. Remove the Lower Feed Cover [1]. 6. Remove the screw [1], and slowly pull out the Deck
• 5 Screws [2] Pickup Unit [2].
[2] [1]
CAUTION:
5x Do not damage the Paper Surface Detection Flag [1]
when disassembling/assembling.
[1]
5. Since there is a risk of damaging the Pickup Feed

Belt, place a sheet of A3 size paper [1] on the Side
Guide Plate on the rear side.
[1] [1]
1x
[2]
844
NOTE:
Assembling the Deck Pickup Unit
1. Place a sheet of A3 size paper on the Side Guide [2] [1]
Plate on the rear side.
2. Align the 2 rails [2] of the Deck Pickup Unit with the 2
Rail Guides [1] of the host machine to install the unit.
[1]
[1]
[2] [2]

3. Be sure to slowly push the Deck Pickup Unit to
Right Deck Unit and host machine, press the [A] part
prevent the coupling [1] on the host machine side
from being damaged by the Drive Shaft [2] of the of the latch [1] to release the lock, and pull out the
Pickup Unit. Right Deck Unit [2] towards the front.
[1]
[1]
[A]
[2]
[2]
3. Remove the paper within the Right Deck Unit.
Replacing the Left/Right Deck NOTE:

Separation Pad For the Left Deck Unit, perform the following procedure
with the Main Station Left Cover closed.
■ Pre-preparation
840
■ Disassembling the Left/Right Deck

Separation Pad
NOTE:
The following disassembly procedure shows the case of
removing the Main Station Right Deck Separation Pad.
The Left Deck Separation Pad can be disassembled in the
same way.
845
4. Remove the 2 Right Deck Separation Pads [1]. ■ Disassembling the Left/Right Deck
• 2 E-rings [2]
Lifter Motor Unit
NOTE:
[1] When replacing the Deck Lifter Motor Unit, purchase
[1]
[2] separately the WT2-5735-000 (8 Wire Saddles) and
WT2-5677-000 (1 Wire Saddle), and install them to the
new Deck Lifter Motor Unit.
1. Put the screwdriver through the hole in the Lifter

Drive Shaft [1], and lock the tension of the Lifter Wire
[2]
[2].
NOTE:
Assembling the Right Deck Separation Pad
Assemble the Right Deck Separation Pad by hooking the
end [1] of the spring on the [A] part of the Right Deck
Separation Pad and moving the Right Deck Separation
Pad [2].
[2] [2]
[1]
[1]
[A]
2. Open the 9 Wire Saddles [1], and disconnect the 3

connectors [2].
[1] [2] [1]
9x
3x
Replacing the Left/Right Deck

Lifter Motor Unit
[1] [1] [2] [1]
■ Pre-preparation
840
846
3. Remove the Switch Support Plate [1]. 6. Move the harness [1] to above the Deck Lifter Motor
• 2 Screws [2] Unit.
[1]
2x
[1] [2]
7. Remove the Deck Lifter Motor Unit [1].
4. Remove the Sensor Support Plate [1].
• 4 Screws [2]
• 1 Screw [2]
[2]
[1] 4x
1x
[2]
[1]
5. Remove the Gear Cover [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
CAUTION:
• After replacing the Deck Lifter Motor Unit, don't
1x [1] forget to remove the screwdriver [1] you used to
lock the Lifter Wire tension.
• If it is difficult to remove the screwdriver [1], move
the Lifter Drive Shaft by the amount of the
backlash of the gear using the screwdriver [2].
[2]
[1]
[2]
847
External / Auxiliary System

Upper Right Suction Filters
Upper Right Suction Filters
[1]

Upper Left Suction Filters
CAUTION:
Be sure to place the removed 3 Main Station Upper
Right Suction Filters [1] on a piece of paper [2], etc.
Upper Left Suction Filters
[1]
CAUTION:
Be sure to place the removed 3 Main Station Upper Left
[2]
Suction Filters [1] on a piece of paper [2], etc.
[2]
1. Remove the Toner Supply Right Filter Cover [1].
• 4 Claws [2]
4x
[2]
[1]
[1]
2. Remove the 3 Main Station Upper Right Suction

Filters [1].
848
1. Remove the 3 Main Station Upper Left Suction Filters

[1]. CAUTION:
Be sure to place the removed 3 Main Station Rear
• 3 Claws [2]
Ozone Filters (M/C/Bk) [1] and Main Station Rear
• 3 Hooks [3]
Ozone Filter (Y) [2] on a piece of paper [3], etc.
Otherwise, the dust of the filter may be attached to the
floor, etc.
3x
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]

[1]
[3] 2. Release the 2 Release Levers [2], and remove the
Main Station Upper Rear Cover 1 [3].
• 5 Protrusions [4]
2. Remove the Main Station Upper Left Suction Filter [4]
[2] from the Filter Cover [1].
1x
NOTE:
Remove the other 2 Main Station Upper Left Suction [3]
Filters in the same way.
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]

3. Remove the 3 Main Station Rear Ozone Filters (M/C/
Rear Ozone Filters (Y) / (M/C/Bk) Bk) [1] and the Main Station Rear Ozone Filter (Y) [2].

Rear Ozone Filters (Y) / (M/C/Bk)
849
CAUTION:
[1] [2]
Be sure to place the removed 4 Main Station Rear
Toner Filters (Y/M/C/Bk) [1] on a piece of paper [2], etc.
Otherwise, the dust of the filter may be attached to the
floor, etc.
[1] [2]
2. Release the 2 Release Levers [2], and remove the

Main Station Upper Rear Cover 1 [3].
• 5 Protrusions [4]
CAUTION:
The Ozone Filter (Y) needs to be installed in the correct [4]
direction. Be sure that the sponge area [1] comes
1x
inside when installing the filter.
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]

Rear Toner Filters (Y/M/C/Bk)
Rear Toner Filters (Y/M/C/Bk)
3. Remove the Duct Connecting Covers [1].
850
[1]
[1]
NOTE:
When installing the Duct Connecting Covers, be sure that
Disassembling/Cleaning the
the cover shaft [1] is fitted in the groove [2]. Sub Station Exhaust Duct Unit
Ozone Filter/Filter Base
[1] ■ Disassembling/Cleaning the Sub
Station Exhaust Duct Unit Ozone
Filter/Filter Base
[2]
NOTE:
• To disassemble the Sub Station Exhaust Duct Unit
Ozone Filter, follow steps 1) and 2).
• To clean the Sub Station Exhaust Duct Unit Ozone
Filter, follow steps 1), 2) and 3).
4. Remove the 4 Main Station Rear Toner Filters

(Y/M/C/Bk) [1].
851
2. Remove the Sub Station Exhaust Duct Unit Ozone

CAUTION: Filter [1].
Be sure to place the removed 3 Sub Station Exhaust
• 2 Claws [2]
Duct Unit Ozone Filters [1] on a piece of paper [2], etc.
[2] NOTE:
Remove the other 2 Sub Station Exhaust Duct Unit Ozone
Filters in the same way.
[2]
2x [1]
[1]
1. Remove the 3 Sub Station Exhaust Duct Unit Ozone

Filters [1].
• 6 Screws [2]
3. Clean the surface [A] of the 3 Sub Station Exhaust

6x [1] Duct Unit Ozone Filters with lint-free paper
moistened with water [1].
[A] [1]
[2]
NOTE:
Be sure to use a stubby screwdriver [2] when removing the
screw [1] of the lowermost Sub Station Exhaust Duct Unit 4. Remove the 2 Filter Bases [1].
Ozone Filter. • 2 Screws [2]
1x
[2] [1]
[1] [2]
852
5. Clean the 2 Filter Bases [1] with lint-free paper

moistened with water [2]. CAUTION:
Be sure to place the removed Sub Station Rear Middle
Ozone Filter Unit [1] on a piece of paper [2], etc.
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
NOTE:
When installing the units, be sure to align the 6 screw 1. Remove the Sub Station Rear Middle Ozone Filter
holes [2] of the Sub Station Exhaust Duct Unit Ozone Unit [1].
Filters [1] with the screw holes of the Sub Station Exhaust • To remove the Sub Station Rear Middle Ozone
Duct.
Filter, follow steps 1) and 2).
• To clean the Sub Station Rear Middle Ozone Filter,
follow steps 1) 2) and 3).
• 2 Screws [2]
[1]
2x
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2] [1]
Replacing/Cleaning the Sub
2. Remove the Sub Station Rear Middle Ozone Filter
Station Rear Middle Ozone Filter [1].
• 2 Claws [2]
■ Disassembling/Cleaning the Sub
Station Rear Middle Ozone Filter [2]
2x [1]
NOTE:
• To remove the Sub Station Rear Middle Ozone Filter,
follow steps 1) and 2).
• To clean the Sub Station Rear Middle Ozone Filter, 3. Clean the surface [A] of the Sub Station Rear Middle
follow steps 1) 2) and 3).
Ozone Filter with lint-free paper moistened with
water [1].
853
[A] [1] CAUTION:

Be sure to place the removed Power Unit Station
Ozone Filter [1] on a piece of paper [2], etc. Otherwise,
the dust of the filter may be attached to the floor, etc.
[2]
NOTE:
Assembling the Sub Station Rear Middle Ozone Filter [1]
When installing the unit, be sure to align the 2 screw holes
[1] of the Sub Station Rear Cover 3 with the 2 screw holes
[2] of the Sub Station Rear Middle Ozone Filter Unit.
(If they are misaligned, it means that the Sub Station Rear 1. Remove the Power Unit Station Rear Filter Cover [1].
Middle Ozone Filter Unit is installed upside down.) • 2 Claws [2]
• 2 Hooks [3]
[1]
2x
[2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
2. Remove the 2 Power Unit Station Ozone Filters [1].
Replacing the Power Unit

Station Ozone Filter
■ Disassembling the Power Unit [1]
Station Ozone Filter
854
Replacing the Sub Station Replacing the Waste Toner

Front Left Cover Container
■ Disassembling the Sub Station ■ Pre-preparation
Front Left Cover 1. “When Replacing the Waste Toner Container” on
page 910
■ Replacing the Waste Toner

Container
[2] [1]
When replacing the Waste Toner Container
1. Pull out the Waste Toner Receptacle [1].

2. Perform the procedure written on the label [2] on the
Waste Toner Container to replace the container.
2. Press the 2 Hinge Release Buttons (Upper/Lower)

[1], remove the 2 hinges [2] by moving them in the
direction of the arrow, and then remove the Sub
Station Front Left Cover [3].
[2]
CAUTION:
When releasing the 2 hinges [2] of the Sub Station
Front Left Cover, the hinges may be deformed. Be sure
to hold the Sub Station Front Left Cover to keep it
horizontal and release the lower hinge first.
[3]
[1]
[1] When disposing of waste toner

[2]
CAUTION:
[B]
• Do not put waste toner of more than one time in
[A] one bag.
• When putting toner in the Waste Toner Bag, be
sure to place it on the floor.
• Once the plastic bag is fixed with packing tape, do
not remove the tape.
1. Pull out the Waste Toner Receptacle, and take out the
Waste Toner Container.
855
2. Install the Waste Toner Joint [1] to the Waste Toner 5. Remove the Waste Toner Bag from the Waste Toner
Container [2]. Container and close the opening [1].
[1]
[1] [2]
3. Put the Waste Toner Bag [1] on the Waste Toner Joint
and fix it with the Waste Toner Band [2].
[1] [2]
6. Fold the opening [1] of the Waste Toner Bag and fix it
with packing tape [2].
[1]
4. Move the waste toner [3] from the Waste Toner

Container [1] to the Waste Toner Bag [2].
[2]
[1]
7. Remove the Waste Toner Joint and put the Waste Toner
Container back in the receptacle.

[2] Front Upper Cove
Front Upper Cover
[3]
856
1. Open the Controller Left Cover [1].

NOTE:
When assembling the Controller Left Inner Cover, be sure
[1] to store the handle [1] of the Main Controller PCB 1 in the
[A] part of the Controller Left Inner Cover to install the
cover.
[A]
[1]
2. Open the HDD Cover [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
1x
[1]
4. Remove the Controller Front Upper Cover [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
[1]
2x
[2]
3. Remove the Controller Left Inner Cover [1]. [2]

• 2 Screws [2]
2x
[2]
[2] [1]
[1]
[2]
6. Unlock the 3 Process Unit Cover Release Levers 1

[3] and the Process Unit Cover Release Lever 2 [2],
857
and remove the Process Unit Cover [4] while holding

NOTE:
the handles [3].
Assembling the Process Unit Cover
• 2 Stepped Screws [5] • When installing the Process Unit Cover, align the 2
cut-offs [A] with the 2 pins [1] on the host machine
[5] side.
2x
[1]
[4] [2]
[A] [1]
[3] [3]
[5]
[1]
• Lock the 3 Process Unit Cover Release Levers 1 [1],

and then lock the Process Unit Cover Release Lever
2 [2] while pushing the [A] part.
(Or the pin [3] of the Process Unit Cover Release
Lever 2 may not be properly set and E260-0026-05
may occur.)
[1]
[A]
[3] [2]
7. Open the Toner Replacement Outer Cover [1].
[1]
858
8. Remove the Main Station Front Upper Cover [1]. 1. Pull out the Auxiliary Caster [1].
• 3 Screws [2] • 1 Screw [2]
3x [1]
1x
[2]
[1]
[2]
[2]
2. Secure the Auxiliary Caster [1] that was pulled out.

• 1 Screw [2]
[2]
1x
Disengaging the Power Unit

Station
[1]
■ Detaching the Power Unit Station
[2]
3. Remove the Exhaust Duct [1].

• 4 Screws (TP; M x8) [2]
859
4. Disconnect the Air Hose [3]. 6. Remove the 5 Small Covers [1] on the rear of the
removed Power Unit Station.
CAUTION: • 2 Screws [2] each
Be sure to always install the tube. An error does not
occur even if the tube is left unconnected, and this may [1] [2]
result in short life of the Fixing Roller or Refresh Roller 6x
or occurrence of jams.
4x
[2]
[1]
[3]
7. Disconnect the Power Unit Station [1].
• 5 Screws (W Sems; M4x12) [2] (Use a long
screwdriver.)
[2] CAUTION:
• Be careful not to drop the screws into the Power
5. Remove the Cable Cover [1]. Unit Station.
• 4 Screws (TP; M4x12) [2] • When attaching the Power Unit Station to the Main
Station, be sure to tuck the cable into the Power
Unit Station.
[2]
5x
[2]
4x
[1]
[1]
[2] 8. Remove the Main Station Upper Rear Cover 2 [1].

• 3 Screws [2]
3x [1]
[2] [2]
860

Rear Covers
11x
1. “Detaching the Power Unit Station” on page 859

Rear Covers
(Main Station Rear Right Cover/Main Station Rear Cover 1/
Main Station Rear Cover 2/Main Station Rear Left Cover/
Main Station Rear Cover 3/Main Station Rear Cover 4)
NOTE:
When a Reader Heater is installed, disconnect the cable
[2].
1. Remove the Main Station Rear Right Cover [1].

• 4 Screws [2]
7x [1]
[1]
[1] 4x
[1] [2]
[2]
[2]
[2]
2. Remove the Main Station Rear Cover 1 [1].
• 5 Screws [2]
5x
4x
[2]
[1]
[1] [1]
[2]
861
3. Remove the Main Station Upper Rear Cover 2 [1]. 6. Remove the Main Station Rear Cover 4 [1].
8x [1] 9x
[2]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[2]
Disengaging the Sub Station

4. Remove the Main Station Rear Left Cover [1].
• 5 Screws [2] ■ Disengaging the Sub Station
5x
[2]
NOTE:
• Be sure to disconnect the delivery system options in
advance.
[2] [1]
5. Remove the Main Station Rear Cover 3 [1].
• 4 Screws [2]
[1]
4x
[2]
862
2. Disconnect the Air Hose [3]. 4. Disconnect the 7 connectors [1].
CAUTION: NOTE:
Be sure to always install the tube. An error does not When a Reader Heater is installed, disconnect the cable
occur even if the tube is left unconnected, and this may [2].
result in short life of the Fixing Roller or Refresh Roller
or occurrence of jams.
7x [1]
2x [1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2] 5. Remove the Sub Station Rear Cover 4 [1].

• 4 Screws [2] (to remove)
[3]
3x
3. Remove the Cable Cover [1]. [2]
• 4 Screws (TP; M4x12) [2]
4x
[1]
[3]
[2]
4x
[1]
[2]
863
6. Remove the 2 Relay Drawer Connector Bases [1]. 8. Disconnect the Communication Cable [1].
• 4 Screws [2] • 1 connector [2]
[1]
4x
1x
[2]
[3]
3x
[2]
CAUTION:
When installing the Relay Drawer Connector Bases [2],
be sure to route the Power Supply Harness [1] as
shown in the figure below before installing them.
[1]
(The plates of the Relay Drawer Connector Bases [2]
may damage the coating of the Power Supply Harness 9. Remove the Waste Toner Feed Connecting Window
[1].) [1].
• 4 Claws [2]
[1] [2]
[1]
4x
[2] [2]
7. Disconnect the Relay Drawer Cable [1].

[2] [1]
2x
864
10. Pull out the Waste Toner Connecting Pipe [1] on the
Main Station side from the Waste Toner Connecting CAUTION:
Mouth [2]. When connecting the Waste Toner Connecting Pipe,
make sure that there is no gap in the area [A]
[1] [2] connecting the Waste Toner Connecting Pipe [1] and
the Waster Toner Connecting Mouth [2].
[1] [2]
[A]
If there is a gap, perform the following while moving the

Waste Toner Connecting Pipe to the Waste Toner
Connecting Mouth.
• Rotate the Waste Toner Buffer Drive Motor [1] in
the direction of the arrow, and check that the
Waste Toner Feed Screw [2] rotates. Make sure
to rotate the Waste Toner Buffer Drive Motor [1]
clockwise.
• If the Waste Toner Feed Screw [2] does not rotate,
be sure to check it by rotating the motor while
moving the Waste Toner Connecting Pipe [3] to
the Waste Toner Connecting Mouth side.
[1]
[3] [2]
865
11. Open the Sub Station Front Right Cover [1] and the 14. Close the Sub Station Front Left Cover [1] and the
Sub Station Front Left Cover [2]. Sub Station Front Right Cover [2].
[2] [1] [1] [2]
12. Pull out the Tip-resistant Fixture [1] in the direction 15. Open the Main Station Front Left Cover [1].
of the arrow.
16. Release the lock by pressing the Release Button [2],
• 2 Screws [2]
remove the 2 hinges [3] by moving them in the
direction of the arrows [A] and [B], and then remove
the Main Station Front Left Cover [1].
4x
[1]
[2]
[3]
[B]
[1] [A]
[2]
17. Insert a screwdriver etc. into the clearance of the Left
Deck, and push the [A] part of the lever to release the
lock to open the Left Deck [1].
13. Secure the 2 Tip-resistant Fixtures [1].

• 2 Screws [2] each
[2]
4x
[A]
[1]
[1]
866
18. Remove the Main Station Left Insulating Cover [1]. 21. Remove the 2 wrenches [2] from the right side of the
• 3 Screws [2] Sub Station.
3x NOTE:
How to Remove the Wire Saddles
• Detach the [A] part of the Wire Saddle in the direction
[1] of the arrow.
• Release the [B] part of the Wire Saddle, and open it
in the direction of the arrow.
[2]
19. Remove the 2 Connecting Plates [1].

• 1 Screw [2] each
[1]
2x
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
20. Open the Main Station Front Right Cover [1].

[A] [B]
22. Close the Sub Station Front Right Cover [1].
867
23. Turn the 4 Hexagonal Nuts [2] counterclockwise,

and raise the 4 adjusters [3].
[1]
[3]
[3]
[2]
24. Disengage the Sub Station [1].
[1]
868
3. Rotate the gear [1] in the direction of the arrow to

Options rotate the claw [2] to the position shown in the figure
below.
Replacing the Multi-purpose [2] [1]

1x
Tray Pickup Roller
■ Disassembling the Multi-purpose
Tray Pickup Roller
1. Open the Multi-purpose Tray Unit [1].

4. Remove the gear [1] and the Shaft Support [2].
[1] • 2 Claws [3]
[2] [3] [1]
2x
2. Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Small Cover [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
5. Remove the Feed Upper Cover [1].
[1]
1x
[2]
[1]
869
6. Pull out the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller [1] 2. Lift up the Paper Guide (Rear) [4], release the 2
towards you. hooks [5] in the direction [A], and then release the 2
• 1 Resin Ring [2] claws [6] in the direction [B].
CAUTION:
4x
Be sure to remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup [6] [1] [3]
Roller [1] with care as it is stopped at the pin [2] shown
[4]
in the following figure.
[2] [1] [B]
[A] [B]
[A]
[5]
[2]
3. Lift up the Paper Guide (Middle) [1], release the 2

hooks [2] in the direction [A], and then release the 2
claws [3] in the direction [B].
NOTE:
[1] [2] The Paper Guide (Middle) can be disassembled/
assembled more easily by pushing the [C] part of the Multi-
purpose Tray Separation Roller.
2x [1] [3]
[B]
[A]
Replacing the Multi-purpose

Tray Separation Roller [2]
[C]
■ Pre-preparation
1. “Disassembling the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup
Roller” on page 869
■ Disassembling the Multi-purpose

Tray Separation Roller
1. Lift up the Paper Guide (Front) [1], release the 2

hooks [2] in the direction [A], and then release the 2
claws [3] in the direction [B].
870
4. Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller [1] 2. Remove the Sub Station Upper Front Cover [1].
in the direction of the arrow while releasing the claw • 2 Screws [2]
[2] of the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller [1].
[2] [1] 2x [1]

1x
[2]
3. Remove the Sub Station Upper Right Cover [1].

• 2 Screws [2]
[1]
2x
Replacing the DADF + Reader

Unit
■ Disassembling the DADF + Reader
Unit
[2]
4. Remove the Sub Station Left Upper Cover [1].

• 9 Screws [2]
[2] [1]
9x
Sub Station Front Left Cover [2]. [2]
[2]
[1]
[2]
871
5. Remove the External Cover (Left) [1]. 8. Remove the Sub Station Upper Rear Cover [1].
• 1 Hook [3]
[2]
5x
2x
[1]
[1]
[2]
9. Open the Controller Cover [1].

[3] [2] 10. Remove the Controller Rear Cover 1 [2].
• 3 Screws [5]
6. Push the Release Button [1] to disengage the
Exhaust Duct Tube [2], and remove the Sub Station 11. Remove the Controller Rear Cover 2 [3].
Exhaust Duct [3]. • 4 Screws [5]
• 4 Screws [4]
• 4 Screws [5]
4x [3]
11x
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[1] [4]
[5]
[2]
[4]
7. Remove the Rear Upper Face Cover [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
[5]
1x
[2]
[1]
872
13. Remove the Reader Cable Member [1]. 15. Disconnect the Reader Communication Cable [1] on
• 1 Screw [2] the Sub Station side.
• 1 Hook [3] • 10 Wire Saddles [2]
• 1 Boss [4]
3x
1x
[3]
[4]
[2] [1]
[2] [1]
14. Disconnect the Reader Communication Cable [1]

[2]
from the Controller Box. 7x
• 1 Connector [2]
[2]
1x
[1]
6x
[2]
16. Disconnect the Reader Communication Cable [1]

from the Reader Unit.
• 1 Connector [3]
[3] [3] [2] [1]

1x 1x
873
17. Disconnect the Reader Power Supply Cable [1]. 19. Remove the 2 Reader Fixation Plates [1].
• 2 Connectors [2] • 1 Screw [2] each
• 1 Wire Saddle [3] • 2 Boss [3] each
• 1 Grounding Wire [4]
• 1 Screw [5]
• 1 Toothed Washer [6] 2x
1x
[3] [1]
[2]
2x
[3]
[3]
1x [5]
[2] [1] [1] [2]
[4]
[6]
20. Remove the Reader Support Plate [1].
• 1 Screw [2]
18. Remove the Reader Right Cover [1].

[1] [2]
• 1 Screw [2]
• 1 Protrusion [3] 1x
[2]
1x [1]
[3]
874
21. Remove the Reader Support Plate A [1] and the 23. Lift the DADF + Reader Unit [1] with 2 people, and
Reader Support Plate B [2]. remove it from the host machine.
• 2 Screws [3] (The removed screws will be used in
[1]
step 22)
[1]
2x
[2]
CAUTION:
22. Install the Reader Support Plate A [1] to the reader. When lifting up the DADF + Reader Unit, be sure to
• 2 Screws [2] hold the position [1] shown in the figure.
2x
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
875
5 Adjustment
Basic Adjustment.............................. 877
When replacing parts........................ 893
5. Adjustment
<Adjustment flow>
Basic Adjustment
When the Image Reader Unit When the Printer Cover
is installed is installed
(Manual Adjustment)
Image Position Adjustment
(Semi-automatic Adjustment)
START START
■ Overview
Reader Right Angle Correction Left Edge
● Checking the paper size Amount Adjustment Skew Adjustment
• Image position adjustment is based on the assumption

that the paper size is as shown below. Take note of the value of Leading Edge
• A3 : 297 mm x 420 mm DISPLAY > IMG-REG Right Angle Adjustment
• LDR : 279 mm x 432 mm
If the trailing edge margin and the right edge margin are
Set the values in service mode Trapezoid Adjustment
not 2.5 +/- 0.5 mm after adjustment, the paper size may (Semi-automatic, 7 items)
not be correct, so check the size of the paper used.
• In leading edge right angle adjustment, it is assumed that Horizontal Scanning
Magnification Ratio
the four corners of paper are at a right angle. Check the value of Adjustment
DISPLAY > IMG-REG
● Paper type Vertical Scanning
Magnification Ratio
Following papers are recommended for the image margin Write down on the Adjustment
adjustment: Service Label
• GF-C081 (81.4 g/m2)
Left Edge
• OK Top Coated + (128 g/m2) END Margin Adjustment
• Hammermill Color Copy Digital 28 lb (105 g/m2)
• SAT023 Top Colour Zero FSC (100 g/m2)
Leading Edge
Because the foregoing papers are recommended as the Margin Adjustment
general papers, so it is acceptable to use papers which a user
frequently uses for the image position adjustment. Be sure
not to use recycled paper, textured paper, and vellum paper Write down on the
Service Label
because variation in feeding performance is more likely to
occur with them.
END
● Adjustment Flow and Standard
The following adjustment can be performed semi-
automatically only when the Image Reader Unit is installed. ■ Adjustment without Using the
Scanner (Manual Adjustment)
NOTE:
Semi-automatic adjustment : You can make adjustments
Be sure to use magenta halftone images for all the test prints
at a time by reading a test page by the reader using a guide to use for manual adjustment.
sheet. Check that each image position is within the specified range
in accordance with <Check Procedure>. If it is out of the
specified range, make an adjustment in accordance with
• When the Image Reader Unit is installed (semi- <Adjustment Procedure> for each item.
automatic adjustment): Proceed to “Adjustment Using
the Scanner (Semi-automatic Adjustment)” on page
884. CAUTION:
• When the Printer Cover is installed (manual adjustment): In the case of halftone images delivered face-down, the
Proceed to "Adjustment without Using the Scanner leading edge of the formed image comes to the trailing
(Manual Adjustment)". edge side with respect to the feed direction at the time
of output. Be sure to pay attention to the leading edge
and the trailing edge during measurement.
CAUTION:
If the Image Reader Unit has been installed at the same
time, be sure to perform "Adjusting the Reader Right
Angle Correction Amount" before performing "Semi-
automatic Adjustment".
877
5. Adjustment
● <Check Procedure> 2. Check that the obtained value is within the specified
range shown below. When the result is out of the
specified range, perform adjustment by following
the following procedure.
1. After setting the service modes (Level 1) as follows,
• L4 - L5 : Within 0 +/- 0.3 mm
press the Start key to output a test print.
Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE
• TYPE = 5
• COLOR-M = 1
• COLOR-Y = 0
• COLOR-C = 0
• COLOR-K = 0
• PG-PICK = 1 (In case of the Right Deck. Not
affected by the paper source.)
2. Check that the output image meets the standard.
3. If not, perform the <Adjustment Procedure> for the L4 L5

items that do not meet the standard.
L1
Lx2
Ly
L3 Lx
Lx1
L2
L4 L5
<Standard values of manual adjustment>

1. Standard value of left edge skew
• L4 - L5 : Within 0 +/- 0.3 mm
2. Standard value of leading edge right angle
(based on an assumption that the right angle
accuracy of the paper is correct)
• L1 - L2 : Within 0 +/- 0.5 mm
3. Standard value of trapezoid
• Lx1 - Lx2 : Within 0 +/- 0.5 mm
4. Standard value in horizontal scanning
direction
• [For A3 paper] Ly : Within 292 +/- 0.4 mm
• [For LDR paper] Ly : Within 274.4 +/- 0.4
mm
5. Standard value in vertical scanning direction
• [For A3 paper] Lx : Within 415 +/- 0.6 mm
• [For LDR paper] Lx : Within 426.8 +/- 0.6
mm
6. Standard margin value in left edge direction/
leading edge direction
• [Left edge margin] L4 : Within 2.5 +/- 0.5
mm
• [Leading edge margin] L3 : Within 2.5 +/-
0.5 mm
● 1. Left Edge Skew Adjustment

<Check Procedure>
1. Obtain the left edge skew (L4 - L5) of the image.
878
5. Adjustment
<Adjustment Procedure> ● 2. Leading Edge Right Angle Adjustment

(based on an assumption that right angle
accuracy of paper is correct)
1. Adjust the value of the following service mode (level
1). <Checking Procedure>
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ >
SKEW-FCT
• Setting range: 4 to 84 (0.04 mm per increment) 1. Calculate the leading edge right angle of the image
(L1 - L2).
NOTE:
2. Check that the obtained value is within the specified
• When L4 is smaller than L5:
When the value is increased by "1", the difference
between L4 and L5 is decreased by 0.04 mm (L4 specified range, perform adjustment by following
remains unchanged, and L5 becomes smaller). the following procedure.
• L1 - L2 : 0 ± 0.5 mm or less
L1
L5 L2
L4
• When L4 is larger than L5:
When the value is decreased by "1", the difference
between L4 and L5 is decreased by 0.04 mm (L4
remains unchanged, and L5 becomes larger).
L4 L5
Example: When L4 = 2.1 and L5 = 2.5, enter "+10"
because (2.1 - 2.5) = -0.4.
2. Output a test print again, and check that the value is

within the specified range.
3. Write down the new adjustment value in the service

label.
• SKEW-FCT
879
5. Adjustment
<Adjustment Procedure> ● 3. Trapezoid Adjustment

<Checking Procedure>
1).
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG > 1. Calculate trapezoid of the image (Lx1 - Lx2).
ANGLE-1
2. Check that the obtained value is within the specified
• Setting range: -10 to 10 (0.1 mm per increment)
specified range, perform adjustment by following
NOTE: the following procedure.
• When L1 is larger than L2: • Lx1 - Lx2 : 0 ± 0.5 mm or less
remains unchanged, L1 becomes smaller, and L2
becomes larger). Lx2
L1
Lx1
L3
L2

remains unchanged, L1 becomes larger, and L2
becomes smaller).
L1
L3
L2
Example: When L1 = 2.5 and L2 = 1.8, enter "+7" because

(2.5 - 1.8) = 0.7.


label.
• ANGLE-1
880
5. Adjustment
<Adjustment Procedure> ● 4. Horizontal Scanning Magnification

Ratio Adjustment
1. Adjust the value of the following service mode (level <Check Procedure>
1).
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG >
TRPZ-1 1. Measure the length (Ly) of the image in the
• Setting range: -10 to 10 (0.1 mm per increment) horizontal scanning direction.
2. Check that the measured value is within the

NOTE: specified range shown below. When the result is out
• When Lx1 is smaller than Lx2: of the specified range, perform adjustment by
following the following procedure.
between Lx1 and Lx2 is decreased by 0.1 mm.
• [For A3 paper] Ly: Within 292 +/- 0.4 mm
• [For LDR paper] Ly: Within 274.4 +/- 0.4 mm
Ly
<Adjustment Procedure>
• When Lx1 is larger than Lx2:
between Lx1 and Lx2 is decreased by 0.1 mm.
1. Calculate the horizontal scanning magnification
ratio of the image.
• For A3 paper : (Ly / 292 - 1) x 100 (%)
• For LDR paper : (Ly / 274.4 - 1) x 100 (%)
Example: When Lx1 = 412 and Lx2 = 411.4, enter "-6"

because (412 - 411.4) = 0.6.


label.
• TRPZ-1
881
5. Adjustment
2. Adjust the value of the following service mode (level ● 5. Vertical Scanning Magnification Ratio
1).
Adjustment
MAG-H-M <Check Procedure>
• Setting range: -100 to 100 (0.01% per increment)
NOTE: 1. Measure the length (Lx) of the image in the vertical

• When the actually measured value is smaller than the scanning direction.
nominal value:
When the value is increased by "1", the horizontal 2. Check that the measured value is within the
scanning magnification ratio is increased by 0.01% specified range shown below. When the result is out
(L4 remains unchanged, and the horizontal scanning of the specified range, perform adjustment by
magnification ratio changes). following the following procedure.
• [For A3 paper] Lx: Within 415 +/- 0.6 mm
• [For LDR paper] Lx: Within 426.8 +/- 0.6 mm
Lx
L4
• When the actually measured value is larger than the
nominal value:
When the value is decreased by "1", the horizontal <Adjustment Procedure>
scanning magnification ratio is decreased by 0.01%
(L4 remains unchanged, and the horizontal scanning
magnification ratio changes).
1. Calculate the vertical scanning magnification ratio
of the image.
• For A3 paper : (Lx / 415 - 1) x 100 (%)
• For LDR paper : (Lx / 426.8 - 1) x 100 (%)
L4
E.g. (in the case of A3 paper): When Ly = 291, (291/292 -
1) x 100 = -0.342... (The value is rounded off to two
decimal places.)
When the actually measured value is smaller than the
nominal value (292 mm), the value of the ratio becomes "-
(negative)"; therefore, the value to enter is "+34".


label.
• MAG-H-M
882
5. Adjustment
2. Adjust the value of the following service mode (level ● 6. Left Edge / Leading Edge Margin
1).
Adjustment
MAG-V-M <Checking Procedure>
• Setting range: -100 to 100 (0.01% per increment)
NOTE: 1. Measure the length of the left edge margin (L4) and
• When the actually measured value is smaller than the the leading edge margin (L3).
nominal value:
When the value is increased by "1", the vertical 2. Check that the measured value is within the
scanning magnification ratio is increased by 0.01% specified range shown below. When the result is out
(L3 remains unchanged, and the vertical scanning of the specified range, perform adjustment by
magnification ratio changes). following the following procedure.
• [left edge margin] L4 : 2.5 ± 0.5 mm or less
• [leading edge margin] L3 : 2.5 ± 0.5 mm or less
L3
L3
• When the actually measured value is larger than the

nominal value: L4
When the value is decreased by "1", the vertical
scanning magnification ratio is decreased by 0.01% <Left Edge Margin Adjustment Procedure>
(L3 remains unchanged, and the vertical scanning
magnification ratio changes).

1).
REG-LEFT
• Setting range : -30 to 30 (0.1 mm per increment)
L3 NOTE:
When the value is increased by "1", the left edge margin
is increased by 0.1 mm.
Example: When L4 = 1.3, enter "+12" because (2.5 - 1.3)
= 1.2.
E.g. (in the case of A3 paper): When Lx = 414, (414 / 415

- 1) x 100 = -0.240... (The value is rounded off to two
decimal places)
When the actually measured value is smaller than the within the specified range.
nominal value (415 mm), the value of the ratio becomes "-
(negative)"; therefore, the value to enter is "+24".
label.
• REG-LEFT

label.
• MAG-V-M
883
5. Adjustment
<Leading Edge Margin Adjustment Procedure> Guide sheet

1).
REG-TOP
• Setting range : 0 to 200 (0.06 mm per increment)
1 2 3 4
NOTE:
When the value is increased by "1", the leading edge
margin is increased by 0.06 mm.
Example: When L3 = 1.3, enter "+20" because (2.5 - 1.3) /
0.06 = 20.
Test page (2-sided)

Front side Back side

label. Blue Red
• REG-TOP
■ Adjustment Using the Scanner

(Semi-automatic Adjustment)
CAUTION: Yellow Green

• Be sure to perform this adjustment after checking
that the host machine's firmware (MN-CONT,
DCCON) is Ver.16.xx or higher.
• If the host machine's firmware version is lower
than Ver.16.xx, upgrade it to Ver.16.xx or higher,
and then perform the adjustment.
CAUTION:
• Be sure to clean the Copyboard Glass and the
Perform the following procedures to adjust the image back side of the feeder before adjustment.
position. • Use data for the guide sheet (for A3, for 11x17)
provided separately.
<Reader Right Angle Correction Amount Adjustment>
• Print the guide sheet under the following
• D = (d1 + d2)/2 conditions: When the guide sheet is not properly
<Standard values of semi-automatic adjustment> printed, accurate adjustment result may not be
obtained.
• Standard value of leading edge right angle
Use a sheet of paper whose size is the same as
ANGLE-1M : Within the range of +/- 5
the size data of the guide sheet to create a guide
• Standard value of left edge skew
sheet.
SLP-1M : Within the range of +/- 5
Paper that is 200 g/m2 or above is
• Standard value of trapezoid
recommended.
TRPZ-1M : Within the range of +/- 5
Set the magnification ratio to 100%
• Standard value in horizontal scanning direction
magnification.
MAG-H-1M : Within the range of +/- 20
• Standard value in vertical scanning direction
MAG-V-1M : Within the range of +/- 20
• Standard margin value in leading edge direction
REGIST1M : Within the range of +/- 5
• Standard margin value in left edge direction
REG-L-1M : Within the range of +/- 5
● Image Position Adjustments (Semi-

automatic Adjustment)
When the scanner is used, be sure to make adjustments by
reading a test page by the reader using a guide sheet.
884
5. Adjustment
NOTE:
• If "Adjusting the Reader Right Angle Correction 8. Place the guide sheet on the Copyboard Glass, and
Amount" has been performed just before this align the arrow mark of the guide sheet with that of
adjustment, the values scanned in the procedure can the Copyboard Glass.
be used, and the output of the first test page (steps 1
to 11) can be omitted.
• In the case of performing "Adjusting the Reader Right
Angle Correction Amount" and this adjustment
separately, it is necessary to duplicate 2 types of
paper "for adjustment" and "for checking" and output
the test page 2 times.
NOTE:
When [System Manager Information Settings] is set, it
is required to log in as a system manager in
accordance with instructions of the user
administrator.
1. Select [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] >

[Paper Settings] > [Paper Type Management 9. Align the triangle mark of the guide sheet with the
Settings]. triangle mark (blue) which is for the first scanning of
2. Select paper to use for adjustment, press the test page.
[Duplicate], and then name and save the paper.
3. Make settings of the duplicated paper (for

adjustment) in [Paper Settings].
4. Press [Paper Type Management Settings], select the

type of duplicated paper (for adjustment) from the
list, and then press [Details/Edit].
5. Press [Change] of <Adjust Image Position>, and

press [Use Scanner].
6. Set the number of test page to output to 1, and press

[Next].
7. Select the paper source where paper used for the

adjustment is loaded, and press [Start Printing] (a
test page is output).
885
5. Adjustment
10. Close the feeder, and press [Start Scanning]. 13. Add the scan result you wrote down in the previous
step to the setting value of the following service
mode (level 1).
NOTE:
Be careful not to move the guide sheet when closing the
feeder. NOTE:
Example 1: When the left edge margin is "REG-L-1M = 4"
and "REG-LEFT = 3", the addition becomes "4 + 3 = 7",
therefore enter "7" for REG-LEFT.
Example 2: When the left edge margin is "REG-L-1M = 4
11. According to the instruction on the screen, scan the
= -4" and "REG-LEFT = -3", the addition becomes "(-4) +
test page by setting the yellow, green, and red
(-3) = - 7", therefore enter "-7" for REG-L.
triangle marks for the second, third, and fourth
scanning, respectively.
Service Mode_COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG
CAUTION: Adjustment
Do not change the paper settings scanned in [Paper Scan result Setting value
Items
Settings] (or the scan results will be overwritten). Leading edge right ANGLE-1M ANGLE-1
If settings of another paper have been configured angle
before adjusting the image position, start to scan the
Trapezoid TRPZ-1M TRPZ-1
test page again.
Horizontal scan- MAG-H-1M MAG-H-M
ning magnification
ratio
Vertical scanning MAG-V-1M MAG-V-M
12. The scan results (with "1M" at the end) are displayed magnification ratio
in the following service mode (level 1). Write down
the displayed values.
Service Mode_COPIER > DISPLAY > IMG-REG Service Mode_COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ
• ANGLE-1M
• SLP-1M Adjustment Scan result Setting value
• TRPZ-1M Items
• MAG-H-1M Left edge skew SLP-1M SKEW-FCT
• MAG-V-1M Leading edge REGIST1M REG-TOP
• REGIST1M margin
• REG-L-1M Left edge margin REG-L-1M REG-LEFT
14. Perform steps 1 to 7 again to duplicate the paper

type used as "for checking" aside from the paper
type used as "for adjustment", and output a sheet of
test page.
15. Perform steps 8 to 11 again to scan the test page.
CAUTION:
Do not change the paper settings scanned in [Paper
Settings] (or the scan results will be overwritten).
If settings of another paper have been configured
before checking the standard value, scan the test page
again.
886
5. Adjustment
16. Check again that the value of the scan result (with
"1M" at the end) displayed in the following service
mode (level 1) meets the standard.
Service Mode_COPIER > DISPLAY > IMG-REG
Scan result Standard

ANGLE-1M Within the range of +/- 5 [2] [1]
SLP-1M Within the range of +/- 5
TRPZ-1M Within the range of +/- 5
MAG-H-1M Within the range of +/- 20
6. Turn the lever (B-G1) [1] in the direction of the arrow,
MAG-V-1M Within the range of +/- 20
and pull the Feed Assembly [2] until it stops while
REGIST1M Within the range of +/- 5 holding the lever (B-G1) [1].
REG-L-1M Within the range of +/- 5
17. If the value does not meet the standard, repeat steps
13 to 17.
NOTE:
If the value does not meet the standard, it is possible that
there was an input error.
18. After the adjustment, delete all the paper types that [1] [2]
have been duplicated.
7. Check that the lower left corner [1] of the paper that
has stopped in the Pre-registration Unit is between
label.
the 2 protrusions [2] of the Side Guide Plate.
• ANGLE-1
• TRPZ-1
• MAG-H-M
• MAG-V-M
• SKEW-FCT
• REG-TOP
• REG-LEFT
Adjusting the Side [2] [1]
Registration
Follow the procedure shown below to adjust variation in the
side registration position for each paper source.
1. Enter the following service mode to feed paper when

adjusting the side registration.
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > ATTRACT >
P-POSI
2. Select the entry field 1 (on the left side), and enter
the following value. 8. If the corner of the paper is not between the 2
• To feed from the Right Deck, enter "1". protrusions [1] of the Side Guide Plate, measure the
• To feed from the Left Deck, enter "2". distance from the lower left corner [2] of the paper
3. Select the entry field 2 (on the right side), enter "0",
and press [OK].
4. "JAM" is displayed.
887
5. Adjustment
to the center (6 mm from the protrusions) [3] using 16. Repeat steps 1 to 7 to check that the lower left corner
a scale, etc. of the paper is between the 2 protrusions of the Side
Guide Plate.
NOTE: 17. After performing this adjustment, be sure to adjust
If it is between the 2 protrusions [1], the value is within the the Deck Open/Close Solenoid (refer to “When
specified range, but it is recommended to adjust it to be at Replacing the Deck/Deck Open/Close Solenoid
the center.
(Deck Open/Close Solenoid Adjustment)” on page
920)
[2]
Density Adjustment of Color

6mm Sensor (Only When imagePRESS
[3]
6mm
Server Is Installed)
This procedure describes the service mode adjustment item
[1] for adjusting the density so that the density value of Color
Sensor is close to the density value detected by the used
colorimeter during Fiery calibration using Color Sensor
9. Open the deck of the location selected in service (Canon iPRC10000VP Series Inline).
mode.
10. Loosen the 2 screws [2] of the Latch Claw [1] on the CAUTION:
right side of the deck. 1. Be sure that the following adjustments have been
completed and that uneven density and lines do
11. Adjust the Latch Claw [1] by moving it forward or
not occur on the halftone image.
backward by the distance measured in step 8. (One
• Checking the Height of the Primary Charging
scale mark is equivalent to 2 mm.)
Assembly
• To move the paper to the rear side, move the Latch
• Auto Adjust Gradation (Full Adjust)
Claw to the front side [A].
• Registering Paper to Adjust *
• To move the paper to the front side, move the Latch
• Correct Shading
Claw to the rear side [B].
• Auto Correct Color Tone Settings (Register
Correction Pattern) *
[2] [1] * Execute if necessary.
2. Be sure to use the same paper type as that
specified during auto gradation adjustment. If you
do not have the specified paper, use high
whiteness plain paper (80 to 105) or plain paper
used for Fiery calibration.
[A] [B]
3. This procedure is not necessary if Fiery calibration
is executed using the scanner or a colorimeter
12. Tighten the 2 screws of the Latch Claw. such as i1Pro2.
13. Adjust the Latch Claw on the left side in the same
way.
14. Grasp the lever (B-G2) [1], open the Pre-registration

Unit, and remove the paper [2].
[1]
[2]
15. Cancel the job on the "System Monitor" screen.
888
5. Adjustment
< Fiery Calibration Using Color Sensor >
4. Select the following items, and press [Print].

• Instrument: Canon iPRC10000VP Series Inline
1. Start Fiery Color Profiler Suite, and press • Patch set: Calibration
[Calibrator].
5. Select [MEDIA], check that the settings are correct,

2. Select the Fiery server, and press [Next]. and press [OK].
• Media type: Check that the selected paper type
NOTE: corresponds to the paper type specified in step 3.
• If the server that needs to be adjusted is not • Paper source: Check that the paper source where
displayed, add the server and then select it. the specified paper type is loaded is selected.
• Be sure that "Recalibrate" is selected. • Output paper size: Check that A3 or fixed size
paper of 11 x 17 or larger is selected.
NOTE:
Press [OK] to output the calibration page and perform
automatic measurement using Color Sensor. The output
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
calibration page will not be used.
3. Select the calibration name, and press [Next].

• Calibration Name: Plain (60-150 gm2)
889
5. Adjustment
6. Write down the maximum density values (D Max 8. Select the information of paper used for the
values) read by Color Sensor, and press [Apply/ calibration and the instrument, and press
Close]. [Continue].
• Calibrate for: Select "Plain (60-150 gm2)".
• Paper source: Select the same paper type as that
used for color measurement using Color Sensor.
• Measurement method: Select the colorimeter (X-
Rite i1Pro2) used as the target of density
correction.
< Fiery Calibration Using a Colorimeter >
7. Start Command WorkStation, and press [Calibrate].

• Password : Fiery.1
9. The calibration page is output.

CAUTION:
Use single-byte upper case to enter F of "Fiery.1".
Use single-byte lower case to enter other characters.
10. If the colorimeter has not been connected yet,
connect the colorimeter to imagePRESS Server and
press [OK].
11. Follow the instructions on the screen to scan the

strip of each color.
12. After completion of the scanning, press [View

Measurements].
890
5. Adjustment
< Cyan difference table >
13. Write down the maximum density values read by the deltaDens DFEDMX-C
colorimeter, and press [Apply/Close]. -0.21 or lower +70
(The Color Sensor density value is
low.)
-0.20 to -0.16 +50
-0.15 to -0.11 +30
-0.10 to -0.06 +10
-0.05 to 0.00 0
0.00 to +0.05 0
+0.06 to +0.10 -10
+0.11 to +0.15 -30
+0.16 to +0.20 -50
+0.21 or higher -70
high.)
< Difference Adjustment > < Magenta difference table >
deltaDens DFEDMX-M
-0.21 or lower +70
14. In accordance with the "deltaDens" value, which is (The Color Sensor density value is
the difference value of (the maximum density value low.)
of Color Sensor) - (the maximum density value of -0.20 to -0.16 +50
colorimeter), enter the "DFEDMX-x" value in service -0.15 to -0.11 +30
mode (Level 1). -0.10 to -0.06 +10
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > P-PASCAL > -0.05 to 0.00 0
DFEDMX-Y 0.00 to +0.05 0
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > P-PASCAL >
+0.06 to +0.10 -10
DFEDMX-M
+0.11 to +0.15 -30
+0.16 to +0.20 -50
DFEDMX-C
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > P-PASCAL > +0.21 or higher -70
DFEDMX-K (The Color Sensor density value is
high.)
NOTE:
If the calculated "deltaDens" value does not conform to the < Yellow difference table >
difference table, perform measurement using the
colorimeter again, and calculate the "deltaDens" value deltaDens DFEDMX-Y
(the difference from the value measured by Color Sensor).
-0.13 or lower +75
low.)
Example: -0.12 to -0.10 +55
If the maximum density value of cyan measured by Color -0.09 to -0.07 +35
Sensor in step 6 is "1.48" and the maximum density -0.06 to -0.04 +15
value of cyan measured by colorimeter in step 13 is
-0.03 to 0.00 0
"1.39", the calculation is "1.48 - 1.39 = +0.09".
0.00 to +0.03 0
"+0.09" corresponds to "+0.06 to +0.10" in the cyan
difference table, so enter "-10" for DFEDMX-C. +0.04 to +0.06 -15
Calculate the difference also for magenta, yellow, and +0.07 to +0.09 -35
black in the same way, and find out the value to be +0.10 to +0.12 -55
entered for "DFEDMX-x" from the difference table for +0.13 or higher -75
each color. (The Color Sensor density value is
high.)
891
5. Adjustment
< Black difference table >
deltaDens DFEDMX-K
-0.29 or lower +75
low.)
-0.28 to -0.22 +55
-0.21 to -0.15 +35
-0.14 to -0.08 +15
-0.07 to 0.00 0
0.00 to +0.07 0
+0.08 to +0.14 -15
+0.15 to +0.21 -35
+0.22 to +0.28 -55
+0.29 or higher -75
high.)
15. Using Fiery Color Profiler Suite, perform "calibration

using Color Sensor" in steps 1 to 6 again, and
calculate the difference from the value measured by
colorimeter.
If the value does not conform to the target value, go back
to step 14 and adjust the DFEDMX-x value again.
* It is possible to make a fine adjustment by entering an
intermediate value that is not shown on the difference
table (e.g. +20).
• Cyan: Within +/-10
• Magenta: Within +/-10
• Yellow: Within +/-0.06
• Black: Within +/-0.14
CAUTION:
It is necessary to perform calibration using Color
Sensor again in order to reflect the service mode
values changed in the previous step.
892
5. Adjustment
6. When the user generates and adds the encryption

When replacing parts key, certificate and/or CA certificate, request the
user to generate them again.
7. Executing “Auto Adjust Gradation (Full Adjust)”

Main Controller
Settings/Registration mode: Adjustment/Maintenance >
Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation
■ Removing the HDD
● Actions before Replacement CAUTION:
HDD used later cannot be accessed from a PC due to
Backup the Settings/Registration data.
enhanced security.
1. Select the following so that the service mode setting
values can be exported on remote UI ( SMD-EXPT:
[1]). ■ Removing the Main Controller PCB
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER > SMD- 1
EXPT
2. Execute the collective export on remote UI. ● Actions before Replacement

1. Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Backup the Settings/Registration data.
Data Management > Import/Export All > Export
2. Settings/Registration > Management Settings >
values can be exported on remote UI (SMD-EXPT:
Data Management > Back Up
[1]).
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER > SMD-
CAUTION: EXPT
Collective export cannot be executed in the following
cases. 2. Execute the collective export on remote UI.
• Job is being executed, or job is being waited for Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data
(various functions set by transmission, forwarding, Management > Import/Export All > Export
I-FAX reception, report print and timer)
• Individual import/export is being executed
CAUTION:
• The address book is being remotely referenced by
• Job is being executed, or job is being waited for
another imageRUNNER ADVANCE
(various functions set by transmission, forwarding,
• Device information is being distributed
I-FAX reception, report print and timer)
• An error has occurred
• Individual import/export is being executed
• Box is being backed up
• The address book is being remotely referenced by
another imageRUNNER ADVANCE
• Device information is being distributed
● Actions after Replacement
• An error has occurred
1. HDD format • Box is being backed up
1. Start the machine in safe mode (turn ON the main
power switch while simultaneously pressing 2+8
keys).
2. Execute Formatting All Partitions using SST. 1. Restore the backup data.
2. Download the system software (refer to Upgrade). Use the remote UI. Follow the steps below to specify the
DCM file stored earlie.
3. Initialize the key/certificate/C certificate ( Service Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data
Mode: Lv.2) Management > Import/Export All > Import
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CA-
KEY ■ Removing the Main Controller PCB
4. Turn OFF and then ON the power. 2
5. Restore the backup data.
● Actions before Replacement
Use the remote UI. Follow the steps below to specify the
DCM file stored earlie. Backup the Settings/Registration data.
Data Management > Import/Export All > Import
values can be exported on remote UI (SMD-EXPT:
[1]).
Data Management > Restore
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER > SMD-
EXPT
893
5. Adjustment
2. Execute the collective export on remote UI. • Temporarily backing up SRAM data to a USB
1. Settings/Registration > Management Settings > memory device (recommended)
Data Management > Import/Export All > Export USB memory device where the system software for
this machine has been registered using the SST or,
USB memory device formatted as FAT32 which
CAUTION: has been checked that it can be recognized by the
Collective export cannot be executed in the following host machine
cases. In order to let the USB memory device recognized
• Job is being executed, or job is being waited for in service mode, create an empty folder on the USB
(various functions set by transmission, forwarding, memory device and name the folder with the same
I-FAX reception, report print and timer) name used when registering the system software
• Individual import/export is being executed for this machine using the SST.
• The address book is being remotely referenced by (e.g.: iPRC10K)
another imageRUNNER ADVANCE 1. Select the following service mode, and then
• Device information is being distributed press [OK].
• An error has occurred Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION >
SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD
• Box is being backed up 2. Connect the USB memory device where
system software of the model to be connected
3. Backup of the SRAM is stored.
• Temporarily backing up SRAM data to an HDD 3. The download Mode (USB) will appear on the
(only when the HDD Data Encryption Kit is not touch panel. Press the [5] key on the Control
installed) Panel.
1. Select the following service mode, and then 4. The Backup Menu (USB) will appear. Press
press [OK]. the [7] key.
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > 5. Press the [0] key to confirm, and then the
SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD SRAM data is stored in the USB memory
2. When the download Menu (HDD) appears, device.
press the [5] key on the Control Panel. 6. Press the [C] key to return to the download
3. When the Backup Menu (HDD) appears, press Menu (HDD).
the [6] key on the Control Panel. 7. Press the [Reset] key to shut down the host
4. Press the [0] key to confirm, and then the machine.
SRAM data is stored in the internal HDD.
5. Press the [C] key to return to the download ● Actions after Replacement
Menu (HDD).
6. Press the [Reset] key to shut down the host 1. Restore of the Backup SRAM
machine. Use the remote UI. Follow the steps below to specify the
DCM file stored earlie.
Data Management > Import/Export All > Import
894
5. Adjustment
2. Restore the SRAM backup data. ● Before Replacement

When SRAM data is temporarily backed up to an HDD
1. After replacing the PCB, start the machine by 2+8 1. Execute the service mode (Lv. 2) for backing up the
startup. DCON service mode setting values.
2. When the download Menu (HDD) appears, press Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM >
the [8] key on the Control Panel. DSRAMBUP
3. When the download Menu 2nd (HDD) appears, "ACTIVE" is displayed and then "OK!" is displayed about
press the [2] key on the Control Panel. 2 minutes later. Back up is complete.
4. Press the [0] key for confirmation. *Execute the following service mode so that the settings
5. When the Restore Menu (HDD) appears, press the can be specified manually again if required (just in case).
[2] key on the Control Panel. Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > P-
6. Press the [0] key to confirm, and then the SRAM PRINT
data is restored from the internal HDD.
7. Press the [C] key to return to the download Menu
CAUTION:
(HDD).
8. Press the [Reset] key to shut down the host Even if the result of DSRAMBUP is "OK!", the backup
machine. data cannot be saved to the HDD.
When SRAM data is temporarily backed up to an USB In order to back up the data without fail, wait for 10
memory device minutes after occurrence of an event log (exceptional
1. After replacing the PCB, start the machine by 2+8 operation, error code, or reboot) and start of automatic
startup. creation and saving of a debug log without performing
2. Connect the USB memory device to USB I/F (Host) any operation, and then execute DSRAMBUP.
of the machine. When the download Menu (USB) Condition which results in failure in the backup:
appears, press the [8] key on the Control Panel. DSRAMBUP was executed when an event log
3. The download Menu 2nd (USB) will appear. Press (exceptional operation, error code, or reboot) has
the [2] key. occurred and a debug log is automatically being
4. Press the [0] key for confirmation. created and saved.
5. The Restore Menu (USB) will appear. Press the [2] Cause:
key. If DSRAMBUP is executed while a debug log is being
6. Press the [0] key to confirm, and then the SRAM created and saved, "OK!" is displayed without a backup
data is restored from the USB memory device. file of the DC Controller being createdEven if a backup
7. Press the [C] key to return to the download Menu file that was created before exists in the HDD, after the
(USB). backup file ideleted, a file that cannot be restored is
8. Press the [Reset] key to shut down the host written to the HDD. When restoration is executed,"NG!"
machine. is displayed because there is no backup file that can
be restored.Therefore restoration ends in failure.
3. When the user generates and adds the encryption Remedy:
key, certificate and/or CA certificate, request the Execute DSRAMBUP after completion of creation/
user to generate them again. saving of the debug log.
4. Executing “Auto Adjust Gradation (Full Adjust)”
Settings/Registration mode: Adjustment/Maintenance >
2. Turn OFF the main power when the above work is
Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation
complete.
CAUTION: ● After Replacement

Do not transfer the following parts to another machine
(a machine of a different serial number.). 1. Restore the backup data in the service mode (Lv. 2).
The machine will not start up normally, and may Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM >
become unrecoverable in some cases. DSRAMRES
• Main Controller PCB 1 "ACTIVE" is displayed and then "OK!" is displayed about
• Main Controller PCB 2 (with the Memory PCB 2 minutes later. Restoration is complete.
unremoved)
2. When backup data cannot be uploaded before
• Memory PCB
replacement due to reasons such as damage of the
DC Controller PCB, enter the value of each service
mode item described on the service label.
■ When Replacing the DC controller
3. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
PCB 1-1
4. Execute forced warm-up rotation in service mode
● How to Replace the Parts (Lv. 2).
Refer to "Removing the DC Controller PCB 1-1." Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P >
INTR-EX
895
5. Adjustment
5. Execute the ITB edge profile measurement mode in

service mode. Laser Exposure System
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL >
INIT-ITB ■ When replacing laser scanner unit
6. Execute Auto Correct Color Mismatch control in the ● 1. Moire adjustment
service mode.
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > AT- 1. Initialize the adjustment value
IMG-X Enter 0 for the service mode that corresponds to the
color of the replaced Laser Scanner Unit.
7. Execute auto gradation adjustment control in
Service Mode_COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > M-ADJ-
Settings/Registration.
Y
Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > M-ADJ-Y = 0
Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation > Full M-ADJ-M = 0
Adjust M-ADJ-C = 0
8. Write down the current values in each item of the M-ADJ-K = 0
service label. Service Mode_COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > M-ADJ2-
Y
M-ADJ2-Y = 0
■ When Replacing the DC controller M-ADJ2-M = 0
PCB 1-2 M-ADJ2-C = 0
M-ADJ2-K = 0
● How to Replace the Parts
2. Execute color displacement correction
Refer to "Removing the DC Controller PCB 1-2."
• Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance >
● Prohibited Operation Adjust Image Quality > Auto Correct Color
Mismatch
1. Execute the forcible warm-up rotation mode of the
3. Execute Auto Adjust Gradation
Service Mode (Lv.2).
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P >
Adjust Image Quality > Full Adjust
INTR-EX
NOTE:
■ Primary Charging High Voltage PCB The following moire adjustment is for colors M, C and
(HV1) K. Since moire is not visible in the color Y, there is no
need for adjustment.
● After Replacement
1. Execute potential control in service mode. 4. Adjust the scanner phase
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > DPC Output a PG for phase adjustment (PG 23 outputs the
[Time required] Approx. 80 sec. total three sheets of test chart of M, C, and K). *Output
by color is not available.
■ Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB Service Mode_COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE
TYPE = 23
(HV2), Post-secondary Transfer PG-QTY = 3
Static Elimination High Voltage PCB PG-PICK = Select the paper source where A3 or LDR
size paper is loaded
(HV3), Secondary Transfer High
In the service mode that corresponds to the color, enter
Voltage PCB (HV4), Developing High the median of the values of the areas where moire has
Voltage PCB (HV5), ITB Cleanig High not occurred in the output chart.
Service Mode_COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > LSADJ1-
Voltage PCB (HV6), Secondary M
Transfer Cleaning High Voltage PCB LSADJ1-M = Enter the median of the values (M) of
the areas where moire has not occurred.
(HV8) LSADJ1-C = Enter the median of the values (C) of the
areas where moire has not occurred.
● Prohibited Operation LSADJ1-K = Enter the median of the values (K) of the
There is no particular work to do. areas where moire has not occurred.
* See "How to see the chart for moire adjustment" for
how to check the chart
896
5. Adjustment
5. Adjust the scanner magnification ratio

Output a PG for magnification ratio adjustment (PG24
outputs the total three sheets of test chart of M, C, and
K).* Output by color is not available.
Service Mode_COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE
TYPE = 24
PG-QTY = 3
PG-PICK = Select the paper source where A3 or LDR
size paper is loaded
In the service mode that corresponds to the color, enter
the median of the values of the areas where moire has
not occurred in the output chart.
Service Mode_COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > LSADJ1-
M
LSADJ2-M = Enter the median of the values (M) of
the areas where moire has not occurred.
LSADJ2-C = Enter the median of the values (C) of the
LSADJ2-K = Enter the median of the values (K) of the
6. Write the post-adjustment values of the following

items in the host machine's service label: ● 2. Adjustment of the Leading Edge Right
Service Mode_COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > M-ADJ- Angle (Based on an Assumption That the
Y
M-ADJ-Y, M-ADJ-M, M-ADJ-C, M-ADJ-K
Right Angle Accuracy of the Paper Is
Service Mode_COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > M-ADJ2- Correct) (Perform only when replacing the
Y M-color Laser Scanner Unit)
M-ADJ2-Y, M-ADJ2-M, M-ADJ2-C, M-ADJ2-K
1. After setting the service modes as follows, press the
<How to see the chart for moire adjustment> Start key to output a test print.
Check the following for each of the 2 columns of the
TYPE = 5
chart:
COLOR-M = 1
1. Starting from +15, look for the location where moire COLOR-Y = 0
has disappeared. COLOR-C = 0
COLOR-K = 0
2. Starting from -15, look for the location where moire PG-PICK = 1 (for the Right Deck)*
has disappeared. *: Not affected by the paper source.
3. Take note of the numeric value obtained by adding 2. Calculate the leading edge right angle of the image
the two numbers and then dividing it by two. (L1 - L2).
4. Check the other side (column) in the same manner, 3. Check that the obtained value is within the specified
and take note of the numeric value. range shown below. When the result is out of the
5. The value to be entered in service mode is the one specified range, perform adjustment by following
obtained by adding the two numbers and then the following procedure.
dividing it by two. Enter "0" if judgment is difficult. • L1 - L2 : 0 ± 0.5 mm or less
L1
L2
897
5. Adjustment
<Adjustment Procedure>
Image Formation System
1. Adjust the value of the following service mode.
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG > ■ When Releasing Pressure of the
ANGLE-1
• Setting range: -10 to 10 (0.1 mm per increment)
Intermediate Transfer Unit
1. When you release the Intermediate Transfer Unit
NOTE: pressure, be sure to execute color displacement
• When L1 is larger than L2: correction control after pressure is applied.
When the value is increased by "1", the difference Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > AT-
between L1 and L2 is decreased by 0.1 mm (L3 IMG-X
remains unchanged, L1 becomes smaller, and L2
becomes larger). [1]
L1
L3
L2
[2]
Co Parts name
de
between L1 and L2 is decreased by 0.1 mm (L3 [1] Intermediate Transfer Unit Release Lever
remains unchanged, L1 becomes larger, and L2 [2] Intermediate Transfer Unit Cover
becomes smaller).
■ When Replacing the Primary

L1 Charging Wire
1. Clean the Charging Wire.
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING >
WIRE-EX
L3 [Time required] Approx. 45 sec.
2. Execute potential control.

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > DPC
L2 [Time required] Approx. 80 sec.
3. Execute Auto Adjust Gradation (PASCAL).

Example: When L1 = 2.5 and L2 = 1.8, enter "+7" because
Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust
(2.5 - 1.8) = 0.7.
Gradation(Vinitialized) > Full Adjust
4. Execute Correct Shading (horizontal scanning

2. Output a test print again, and check that the value is shading).
within the specified range. • Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance >
3. Write down the new adjustment value in the service Adjust Image Quality > Correct Shading
label.
• ANGLE-1 ■ When Replacing the Grid Cleaning
Pad
1. Clean the Charging Wire.
WIRE-EX
[Time required] Approx. 45 sec.
898
5. Adjustment
2. Execute potential control. ■ When Replacing the Primary

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > DPC
Charging Assembly
3. Execute Auto Adjust Gradation (PASCAL). START
• Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > (*1)
Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Service Mode
Gradation(Vinitialized) > Full Adjust Output Image for adjusting the primary grid height
FUNCTION > MISC-P > GRID-ADJ
■ When Replacing the Primary Grid No

There is density difference
Plate between the front and rear A
1. Clean the Charging Wire. Yes

WIRE-EX Rear side
Which side is darker?
2. Execute potential control. Front side (*2) (*2)

Adjustment screw: Adjustment screw:
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > DPC 1/2-turn 1/2-turn
[Time required] Approx. 80 sec. clockwise counterclockwise
3. Execute Auto Adjust Gradation (PASCAL). (*1)

Service Mode
• Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Output Image for adjusting the primary grid height
Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust FUNCTION > MISC-P > GRID-ADJ
Gradation(Vinitialized) > Full Adjust Density difference
No There is no density difference Reference:
between the front and rear Delta D = 0.2 or less
Estimated variance:
with 1/2-turn of the
A Yes screw, Delta D is
Service Mode varied by 0.05
Execute cleaning of the charging wire
FUNCTION > CLAENING > WIRE-EX
(Duration:approximately 45 sec)
Service Mode
Execute potential control
FUNCTION > DPC > DPC
(Duration:approximately 80 sec)
Settings/Registration Settings/Registration
Execute Auto Adjust Gradation >Adjustment/Maintenance
(PASCAL) >Adjust Image Quality
>Auto Adjust Cradation(Vinitialized)
>Full Adjust
Settings/Registration Settings/Registration
Execute Correct Shading >Adjustment/Maintenance
(horizontalscanning shading) >Adjust Image Quality
>Correct Shading
END
*1 Image for height adjustment
By executing the following service mode, the image for height

adjustment is printed.
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > GRID-
ADJ
CAUTION:
Be sure to satisfy the following conditions for paper and
paper sources to be used.
• Paper sources: Right Deck
• Paper size: A3 or LDR
• Paper type setting: Plain paper or thin paper
If any of the conditions cannot be satisfied, the image
for height adjustment cannot be printed as follows.
899
5. Adjustment
Rear side ■ When Replacing the Developing

Assembly
CAUTION:
Status [1] of the host machine changes to "READY"
only if paper is loaded in the deck.
"SPLY-H," "STIR," and "INISET" service modes
executed in the procedures below do not work correctly
unless "READY" is displayed for the status of the host
machine.
Front side
*2 Procedure to adjust the height of the Primary

Charging Assembly
1. Loosen the 2 screws [1] of the Primary Charging

Assembly.
2. Turn the screw [2] for height adjustment.
3. Tighten the 2 screws [1] of the Primary Charging
Assembly. NOTE:
Prepare the starter separately, as the developer is not
[1] [2] [1]
included in a new Developing Assembly.
● Before Replacement
• Let the starter adapt to the installation environment.
1. Give the starter a good shake (approx. 20 times).
2. Open the cap and remove the inner lid.
3. Return the cap, and temporarily keep the starter

where it can be protected against dust.
• Switching the ACR discharge amount of the

Developing Assembly
4. Switch the Developing Assembly according to the

CAUTION: print speed of the machine.
Be sure to print the image for height adjustment after Example: For the iPR C10000VP, set the switch to "100".
step 3 (securing the 2 screws [1]).
1. Open the Main Station Front Cover.
NOTE:
When the front side is lowered: Turn the adjustment screw 2. Remove the Process Unit Cover.
clockwise.
When the front side is lifted: Turn the adjustment screw 3. Install the Switch ON Tool [1] to the Drum Heater
counterclockwise. Switch [2].
One turn of the adjustment screw can lower/lift the height
by 0.35 mm.
900
5. Adjustment
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
9. Install the Supply Funnel [1] to the Supply Mouth [2]
of the Developing Assembly.
CAUTION: [1] [2]

If the power is turned ON without performing step 3
while the Process Unit Cover is removed, "E062"
occurs, so be sure to perform the proper operations. At
power-on and during power distribution, this equipment
monitors the state of power distribution to the Drum
Heater.
4. Turn ON the main power switch while the Main

Station Front Cover is open.
5. Disable the warm-up rotation in the service mode

(set "1" for the setting value of AINR-OFF).
AINR-OFF
10. Select the color to supply developer for in the

NOTE: service mode (multiple colors can be selected).
When you execute the following service mode in Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL >
subsequent steps, the setting value of AINROFF returns
CLR-SET
to "0" automatically.
INISET CAUTION:
Execute the following service mode to supply
developer in step 11 described below.
6. Enter the values written on the label attached to the Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL
Process Unit (ALF-Y/ALF-M/ALF-C/ALF-K) and write > SPLY-DV
them on the service label. When performing the operation, "READY" and "Check
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > ALF-Y the Developer" are displayed on the service mode
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > ALF-M screen (upper right). Check the status of the
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > ALF-C Developing Assembly, and press [OK].
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > ALF-K
7. Install the 2 Switch ON Tools to the Front Cover

11. Execute the developer supply mode in service
Switch.
mode.
8. Release the claw [1] and remove the Developer Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL >
Supply Mouth Cover [2] of the Developing SPLY-DV
Assembly. [Time required] Approx. 360 sec.
NOTE:
In approx. 20 to 25 seconds after SPLY-DV execution, the
Supply Screw starts to be rotated.
901
5. Adjustment
12. After checking that the Supply Screw is rotated 17. Execute the developer stir mode in the service
(visual check from the Developer Supply Mouth), mode.
pour the starter to the Supply Funnel [1] little by little Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL >
while rotating the bottle. STIR
18. Select the color in the service mode (multiple colors

can be selected).
[1] Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL >
CLR-SET
CAUTION:
Execute the Developing Assembly initial installation
service mode in step 19 described below.
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL
> INISET
When performing the operation, be sure that "READY"
is displayed on the service mode screen (upper right)
and press [OK].
19. Execute the Developing Assembly initial installation

mode in the service mode.
INISET
CAUTION: [Time required] Approx. 150 sec.
Be sure to pour the starter of the same color as the
Developing Assembly.
CAUTION:
Do not turn OFF the power during the INISET
execution.
NOTE:
If pouring the starter is not completed within the SPLY-DV
operation time, execute SPLY-DV again and pour the
remaining starter.
20. Turn OFF the main power switch.
13. Remove the Supply Funnel and install the Developer

Supply Mouth Cover.
14. Remove the 2 Switch ON Tools from the Front Cover

Switch Assembly (do not remove the Switch ON
tools from the Drum Heater Switch Assembly).
15. Close the Main Station Front Cover.
16. Select the color to stir developer for in the service

mode (multiple colors can be selected).
CLR-SET
CAUTION:
Execute the following service mode to stir developer in
step 17 described below.
> STIR
and press [OK].
902
5. Adjustment
21. Remove the Switch ON Tool of the Drum Heater 24. Execute forced warm-up rotation in service mode
Switch and install the Process Unit Cover to the (Lv. 2).
original position. Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P >
INTR-EX
CAUTION: [Time required] Approx. 150 sec.
Points to note when installing the Process Unit Cover 25. Execute auto gradation adjustment control.
Be sure to turn up the lever (small) [3] while pushing
the [A] part toward the rear side after turning up the 3
Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation > Full
levers [2] of the Process Unit Cover [1]. If the lever
Adjust
(small) [3] is turned with the cover [1] out of contact with
the machine, the pin [4] is not set properly and the E062 26. Print a solid image and check that no white line
error occurs. appears. When any foreign matter is mixed between
the Developing Cylinder and Developing Blade,
remove the foreign matter by using a transparency
sheet, etc.
[1]
CAUTION:
Points to Note when Removing the Foreign Matter
• Do not use a paper. Otherwise, the paper lint may
be mixed.
• At the time of shipment, a gap of approx. 400
micrometers is retained between C and B
(Developing Cylinder and Developing Blade).
When transparency is used, be sure to use the one
with 300 micrometers or less in thickness and
handle it with care not to damage the cylinder. In
addition, be sure not to remove the blade.
[A]
■ When Engaging/Disengaging the

Developing Assembly
• Print a solid image and check that no white line appears.
[3] [2] When any foreign matter is mixed between the
Developing Cylinder and Developing Blade, remove the
22. After closing the Main Station Front Cover, turn ON foreign matter by using a transparency sheet, etc.
the main power switch.
23. Write the following service mode values (control CAUTION:

voltage value of the Toner Density Sensor of each Points to Note when Removing the Foreign Matter
color and ATR patch density target value of each • Do not use a paper. Otherwise, the paper lint may
color) in the corresponding field of the service label be mixed.
• At the time of shipment, a gap of approx. 400
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > CONT-
micrometers is retained between C and B
Y
(Developing Cylinder and Developing Blade).
When transparency is used, be sure to use the one
M
with 300 micrometers or less in thickness and
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > CONT--
handle it with care not to damage the cylinder. In
C
addition, be sure not to remove the blade.
K
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > SIGG-Y
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > SIGG-M
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > SIGG-C
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > SIGG-K
NOTE:
The values displayed in COPIER > ADJUST > DENS >
SIGG-Y/M/C/K and COPIER > DISLAY> DENS > D-Y/M/
C/K-TRGT are the same.
903
5. Adjustment
■ When Replacing the Developer 3. Attach the switch ON tool [1] to the drum heater
switch area [2].
CAUTION:
Status [1] of the host machine changes to "READY"
only if paper is loaded in the deck.
"RECV," "SPLY-DV," "STIR," and "INISET" service
modes executed in the procedures below do not work
correctly unless "READY" is displayed for the status of
the host machine.
[2]
[1]
Since the same bottle is used for the starter for this machine
CAUTION:
(imagePRESS C10000VP series) and that for the
Be sure to follow the instructions otherwise "E062"
conventional machine (imagePRESS C7000VP/C7000VPS
error occurs if skipping Step 3) with the process unit
series), it is possible that the wrong bottle may be used by
cover detached to turn ON the power.Thismachine
mistake.
monitors the conductive state to the heater when the
This document is to announce how to distinguish between
machine is turned ON or the power is distributed.
the starters of these machines.
< How to distinguish the starter>
Distinguish by the identification number on the bottle.
4. Remove the Intermediate Transfer Unit Cover.
A concrete example is shown below:
5. Follow the following steps 5 to 13 to remove the
Torque Limiter only for the Y-color Developing
Assembly.
CAUTION:
After removing the Torque Limiter, be sure to perform
steps return the Intermediate Transfer Unit to the
pressurized state and the Feed 12 and 13 to Unit to the
locked state in order that the following developer
service mode may work correctly.
imagePRESS C10000VP Series 6. Pull out the Intermediate Transfer Assembly.
7. Lift the Intermediate Transfer Belt Unit.

15B12LKH
8. Remove the Torque Limiter Cover [1].
imagePRESS C7000VP/C7000VPS Series
• 2 Screws [2]
15B12LKF
"H" at the end of the number: For imagePRESS C10000VP

series
"F" at the end of the number: For imagePRESS C7000VP/
C7000VPS series
● How to Remove the Developer

1. Open the main station front doors.
2. Detach the process unit cover.
904
5. Adjustment
9. Remove the Torque Limiter [1]. 16. In the case of the developing assembly for yellow
only, remove the handle [1].
• 2 screws [2]
[1]
CAUTION:
Points to Note when Installing the Torque Limiter Cover
Be sure to fit the protrusions of the Torque Limiter [1] [2]
into the holes on the Torque Limiter Cover [2] to install.
17. Hook the waste developer container [1] onto the
screw [2] and attach.
[1]
[2]
18. Loosen the screw [1] and slide out the shutter [2].
10. Lower the Intermediate Transfer Belt Unit.
11. Push the Intermediate Transfer Assembly into the

machine.
12. Return the Release Lever of the Intermediate

Transfer Assembly to the original position.
13. Return the lever (B-E1) [1] to the original position to

lock the Feed Assembly.
14. With the main station's front doors open, turn on the
main power.
15. Attach the 2 switch ON tools to the front cover switch [2] [1]
area.
905
5. Adjustment
19. In the following service mode, select the color of the ● Actions after Replacement
developer. (More than 1 color can be selected.)
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CLR-SET 1. Open the Main Station Front Cover.
2. Remove the Process Unit Cover.

CAUTION:
3. Install the Switch ON Tool [1] to the Drum Heater
In step 20), execute a developer ejection mode
Switch [2].
(COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > RECV) in service
mode.
When executing, be sure that "READY" is displayed on
the upper right side on the service mode screen before
pressing [OK] button.
20. Execute a developer ejection mode. Select: COPIER

> FUNCTION > INSTALL > RECV [2]
[Duration] approx. 260 sec
21. Push the shutter [1] and tighten the screw [2].
[1]
CAUTION:
Points to Note when Removing the Foreign Matter
Do not use a paper. Otherwise, the paper lint may be
mixed.
At the time of shipment, a gap of approx. 400
micrometers is retained between C and B (Developing
Cylinder and Developing Blade). When transparency
is used, be sure to use the one with 300 micrometers
[1] [2]
or less in thickness and handle it with care not to
damage the cylinder. In addition, be sure not to remove
22. Remove the waste developer container [1].
the blade.
4. Turn ON the main power switch while the Main

Station Front Cover is open.
5. Install the 2 Switch ON Tools to the Front Cover

Switch.
6. While holding and gently pressing down the end of

the Developer Supply Mouth Cover [1], pull it out.
[1]
● Before Replacement
1. Give the starter a good shake (approx. 20 times).
[1]
2. Open the cap and remove the inner lid.
3. Return the cap, and temporarily keep the starter

where it can be protected against dust.
906
5. Adjustment
7. Install the Supply Funnel [1] to the Supply Mouth [2]

of the Developing Assembly.
[1] [2]
[1]
8. Select the color to supply developer for in service

mode (multiple colors can be selected).
CAUTION:
Be sure to pour the starter of the same color as the
CLR-SET
Developing Assembly.
CAUTION:
Execute the following service mode to supply
NOTE:
developer in step 9 described below.
If pouring the starter is not completed within the SPLY-DV
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL operation time, execute SPLY-DV again and pour the
> SPLY-DV remaining starter.
When performing the operation, check that "READY"
and "Check the Developer" are displayed on the
service mode screen (upper right), and press [OK]. 11. Remove the Supply Funnel and install the Developer
Supply Mouth Cover.
9. Execute the developer supply mode in service

mode. CAUTION:
When storing the Developing Assembly into the
host machine, be sure that the Developer Supply
SPLY-DV
Mouth Cover [2] is secured with the claw [1].
NOTE:
In approx. 20 to 25 seconds after SPLY-DV execution, the
Supply Screw starts to be rotated. [2]
CAUTION:
By pressing the STOP key during the SPLY-DV
execution, the operation can be stopped. However, if
the operation is stopped in the middle of the process,
image error may occur because the toner is not
sufficiently stirred.
[1]
10. After checking that the Supply Screw is rotated
(visual check from the Developer Supply Mouth),
pour the starter to the Supply Funnel [1] little by little 12. Remove the 2 Switch ON Tools from the Front Cover
while rotating the bottle. Switch Assembly (do not remove the Switch ON
tools from the Drum Heater Switch Assembly).
13. Close the Main Station Front Cover.
907
5. Adjustment
14. Select the color to stir developer for in service mode 19. Remove the Switch ON Tool of the Drum Heater
(multiple colors can be selected). Switch and install the Process Unit Cover to the
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > original position.
CLR-SET
CAUTION:
CAUTION: Points to note when installing the Process Unit Cover
Execute the following service mode to stir developer in Be sure to turn up the lever (small) [3] while pushing
step 15 described below. the [A] part toward the rear side after turning up the 3
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL levers [2] of the Process Unit Cover [1]. If the lever
> STIR (small) [3] is turned with the cover [1] out of contact with
When performing the operation, be sure that "READY" the machine, the pin [4] is not set properly and the E062
is displayed on the service mode screen (upper right) error occurs.
and press [OK].
[1]
15. Execute the developer stir mode in service mode.
STIR
16. Select the color in service mode (multiple colors can

be selected).
CLR-SET
CAUTION:
Execute the following Developing Assembly initial
installation service mode in step 17 described below. [A]
> INISET
and press [OK].
[3] [2]
17. Execute the Developing Assembly initial installation 20. After closing the Main Station Front Cover, turn ON
mode in service mode. the main power switch.
21. Write the following service mode values (control
INISET
voltage value of the Toner Density Sensor of each
color and ATR patch density target value of each
color) in the corresponding field of the service label
CAUTION: Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > CONT-
Do not turn OFF the power during the INISET Y
execution. Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > CONT-
M
18. Turn OFF the main power switch. C
K
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > SIGG-Y
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > SIGG-M
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > SIGG-C
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > SIGG-K
NOTE:
The values displayed in COPIER > ADJUST > DENS >
SIGG-Y/M/C/K and COPIER > DISLAY> DENS > D-Y/M/
C/K-TRGT are the same.
908
5. Adjustment
22. Execute forced warm-up rotation in the service 3. Execute auto color displacement correction control
mode (Lv. 2). in service mode.
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > AT-
INTR-EX IMG-X
[Time required] Approx. 150 sec. [Time required] Approx. 95 sec.
23. Execute auto gradation adjustment control in 4. Execute Auto Adjust Gradation (PASCAL).
Settings/Registration. • Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance >
• Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust
Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Gradation(Vinitialized) > Full Adjust
Adjust
■ When Replacing the Primary
■ When Replacing the Photosensitive Transfer Roller/Secondary Transfer
Drum Inner Roller Unit
1. Perform "Specify the color of the Photosensitive
1. Execute auto color displacement correction control
Drum that was replaced" in service mode (Lv.1).
in service mode.
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > AT-
CLR-SET
IMG-X
2. Perform "Forcible execution of drum replacement [Time required] Approx. 95 sec.
mode" in service mode (Lv.1).
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > ■ When Replacing the ITB Cleaning
DRMRESET Brush Roller/Cleaning Blade
The value of the drum counter is also cleared by 1. Execute auto color displacement correction control
performing this work. in service mode.
3. Execute auto gradation adjustment control in Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > AT-
Settings/Registration. IMG-X
Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation > Full
Adjust ■ When Replacing the Secondary
4. Execute horizontal scanning shading in Settings/ Transfer Outer Belt Unit and the Drive
Registration. Roller
The rotation speed of the Driver Roller in the Secondary
Adjust Image Quality > Correct Shading
Transfer Outer Belt Unit is adjusted to correct for variations
generated in the manufacturing process.
■ When Replacing the ITB When replacing the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt Unit [1],
When an ITB displacement control error (E075-0003) occurs be sure to enter the value (1 to 5) on the Rank Label [2] affixed
following the ITB replacement and power-on of the host to the unit as shown in the figure below in service mode
machine, open the Main Station Front Right Cover, and (2TRRTSP).
execute the following service mode: In addition, when replacing the Drive Roller [3], affix the Rank
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INIT- Label included with the Drive Roller over the Rank Label [2]
ITB affixed to the existing Secondary Transfer Outer Belt Unit,
When "OK" is displayed, turn OFF the host machine, correct and be sure to enter the value (1 to 5) written on the new label
the installation position of the ITB by hand, close the Main in service mode (2TRRTSP).
Station Front Cover, turn ON the host machine, and then Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-TR >
perform the following steps 1 to 4. 2TRRTSP

(Lv. 2).
INTR-EX
2. Execute the ITB edge profile measurement mode in

service mode.
INIT-ITB
909
5. Adjustment
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1]
2. Set the now empty Waste Toner Container. The

■ When Replacing the Secondary error/alarm status will be automatically canceled if
the Waste Toner Full Detection Sensor detects that
Transfer Cleaning Brush Roller there is no toner.
(Right/Left) 3. If the error/alarm status is not canceled after step 2,
remove the sticker [1] attached to the Waste Toner
1. Execute Exe Sec Trns Cln Brsh Roll ini inst mode in
Full Detection Window, and replace it with a new
service mode.
sticker (FC6-8560).
INS-2TCL
■ When Replacing Parts Around the

Photosensitive Drum/ITB
(Lv. 2).
[1]
INTR-EX
■ When Replacing / Cleaning the

NOTE:
Manually execute the image stabilization control Drum Patch Sensor
performed at first power-on warm-up rotation
Details ● Replacement Procedure
1. Potential Control
2. Patch potential control 1. Write down the numeric value [1] (Drum Patch
3. ATVC control Sensor initial correction value) on the label included
4. Leading edge registration sensor light intensity in the package of the Drum Patch Sensor.
adjustment
5. ITB cleaning
6. Color displacement correction (fine adjustment) VoP(B):4567
VoS(B):8901
VoP(A):2345
■ When Replacing the Waste Toner

Container
[1]
When replacing with a new part
There is no special action to take. 2. Affix the label [1] included with the Drum Patch
After replacing the Waste Toner Container, the error/alarm Sensor over the Process Unit label.
status will be automatically canceled if the Waste Toner Full
Detection Sensor detects that there is no toner.
When reusing the Waste Toner Container (and only
disposing of the waste toner)
1. Tap the outside of the area around the Waste Toner

Full Detection Window [1] on the Waste Toner
Container to knock down the toner stuck to the
inside of the Waste Toner Full Detection Window.
910
5. Adjustment
2. Pull out the Process Unit.
CAUTION:
The space between the drum surface and Potential
Sensor is narrow, so if the operation is performed with
the drum installed, the drum surface may be damaged.
For this reason, be sure to perform the operation after
removing the drum.
3. Remove the Waste Toner Case [1] from the [A] part.

1. If the Drum Patch Sensor has been replaced, enter
the values written on the label attached to the Drum
Patch Sensor (ALF-Y/ALF-M/ALF-C/ALF-K) and
write them on the service label.
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > ALF-Y
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > ALF-M
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > ALF-C
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > ALF-K

(Lv. 2).
INTR-EX
3. Execute Auto Adjust Gradation (PASCAL).

■ When Replacing the Potential

Sensor and Potential Control PCB
CAUTION:
The Potential Sensor and Potential Control PCB must
be replaced at the same time, as they are adjusted
together.
Use the Potential Sensor Adjustment Tool (Tool number:

FY9-3057) for the adjustment after replacement of the
Potential Sensor.
1. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly and

Dustproof Glass, and then remove the
Photosensitive Drum.
911
5. Adjustment
4. Remove the Primary Exhaust Duct [2] .

CAUTION:
• 3 Screws [3]
When installing the Primary Exhaust Duct (Lower), be
• 3 Hooks [4]
sure to insert the 3 hooks of the Primary Exhaust Duct
[3] (Lower) properly. If the Light-blocking Plate of the
Primary Exhaust Duct (Lower) is not oriented in the
correct direction, the laser light path may be blocked
and the drum may not be irradiated by the laser.
[1]
[A]
5. Remove the Potential Sensor [1].
• 2 Screws [3]
[2]
3x 2x
[3]
[4]
[2]
CAUTION:
Points to Note at Installation/Removal:
If the black harness is pulled by the hook of the Primary [1]
Exhaust Duct (Lower), the connector [1] may be
disconnected. Be sure to check that the connector is
connected properly. 6. Remove the Potential Sensor [1] from the Potential
Sensor Holder.
[1]
7. Pull out the Potential Sensor Cable to the outside of

the machine. Put the cable connector [2] through the
[1]
912
5. Adjustment
hole [1] (to insert the Dustproof Glass) of the 13. Disable the warm-up rotation in service mode (set
Process Unit, and then pull it out. "1" for the setting value of AINR-OFF).
[2] AINR-OFF
14. Install the Switch ON Tool to the Front Cover Switch

(2 areas).
[1]
CAUTION:
When performing the following steps 15 and 20, be
sure that "READY" is displayed on the service mode
screen (upper right) and press [OK].
15. Execute Potential Sensor offset adjustment in

service mode.
8. Install the Photosensitive Drum, Process Unit, and Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > OFST
Primary Charging Assembly to the original After the offset adjustment is executed, the calculated
positions. offset value is set in the following service modes (Lv. 2).
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT >
The Dustproof Glass does not need to be returned to its
EPOT-O-Y
original position.
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT >
9. Connect the Potential Sensor Cable to the connector EPOT-O-M
[2] of the Potential Sensor [1]. Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT >
EPOT-O-C
10. Align the Potential Sensor [1] with the 2 protrusions Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT >
[A] of the Potential Sensor Adjustment Tool [3] to EPOT-O-K
install. Write down this value in the corresponding field of the
11. Connect the Electrode Clip [4] for checking the service label (affixed on the inside of the Main Station
Potential Sensor to the frame (GND). Upper Rear Cover 2 [1]).
Purpose: Re-entry of the offset value is required after the
[4] [2] [1] RAM clear of the DC Controller.
[1]
[3]
[A]
CAUTION:
When installing the Potential Sensor to the electrode
for checking the Potential Sensor, be careful not to
install in the wrong direction.
16. Turn OFF the main power switch.
17. Remove the Potential Sensor Adjustment Tool and

install the Potential Sensor to the original position.
18. Turn ON the main power switch after installing the

removed parts to their original positions.
12. After installing the Switch ON Tool to the Drum
Heater Switch, turn ON the main power.
913
5. Adjustment
19. Enable the warm-up rotation in the service mode (set ■ When Replacing the Waste Toner
"0" for the setting value of AINR-OFF).
Full Sensor
AINR-OFF
1. Check the amount of waste toner collected in the
20. Execute potential control in service mode. Waste Toner Container. If waste toner has
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > DPC accumulated to the position of the toner full
detection window, perform one of the following
21. Execute auto gradation adjustment control in measures.
Settings/Registration. • Replace the Waste Toner Container with a new
• Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > one.
Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation > Full • Dispose of the waste toner in the Waste Toner
Adjust Container and reattach the now empty Waste
Toner Container.
■ When Replacing the Leading Edge 2. Execute Waste Toner Full Sensor offset adjustment
Registration Patch Sensor in service mode.
1. Execute forced warm-up rotation in service mode WTN-OFST
(Lv. 2).
■ When Replacing the Waste Toner
INTR-EX
[Time required] Approx. 150 sec. Buffer Full Sensor
1. Install the sensor harness to the Waste Toner Buffer
■ When Replacing / Cleaning the Full Sensor. Do not install the sensor to the Waste
Registration Patch Sensor Toner Buffer yet.

CAUTION:
(Lv. 2).
The sensor offset adjustment performed below must be
executed without waste toner in the buffer. Be sure to
INTR-EX
execute adjustment without installing the sensor to the
buffer, because the inside of the buffer cannot be
2. Execute Auto Adjust Gradation (PASCAL). visually checked.
Gradation(Vinitialized) > Full Adjust 2. Turn ON the main power switch.
3. Perform Waste Toner Buffer Full Sensor offset

■ When Replacing the ITB Patch adjustment in service mode.
Sensor Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P >
WTNBUFOF
1. If the ITB Patch Sensor of a color has been replaced
in service mode (Lv. 2), register the target light ■ When Replacing / Cleaning the
intensity of the Guide Plate for the color of the
replaced sensor.
Color Sensor Unit
2. Execute forced register the target light intensity This unit is comprised of two parts; the Color Sensor
value in service mode (Lv. 2). Holder Unit and White Plate Holder Unit. Since light
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SENS-ADJ > intensity adjustment has been performed at the time of
PCHINITF shipment, these two parts must be replaced together for
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SENS-ADJ > each color.
PCHINITC 1. Execute auto gradation adjustment control (printer
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SENS-ADJ > PASCAL) in Settings/Registration.
PCHINITR
Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance >
3. Execute Auto Adjust Gradation ( PASCAL). Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation
• Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance > (Vinitialized) > Full Adjust
914
5. Adjustment
2. After executing auto gradation adjustment, the ● Check Procedure

offset value is set for all the items in P-PASCAL in
service mode. 1. Place paper in the Right Deck.
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > P-PASCAL > Paper type: 2-sided coated paper (use paper that is 120
CS2MID-Y g/m2 to 130 g/m2)
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > P-PASCAL > Paper size: A4 or LTR
CS1MID-K
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > P-PASCAL > 2. Set the paper setting of the deck that you placed the
CS3MID-M paper in (the Right Deck) to plain paper (80 g/m2 to
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > P-PASCAL > 105 g/m2).
CS4MID-C Settings/Registration > Preferences > Paper Settings >
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > P-PASCAL > Paper Settings
CS1OFF-K
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > P-PASCAL > 3. After setting the following service mode, press the
CS2OFF-Y Start key to output a test print.
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > P-PASCAL > Service Mode_COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE
CS3OFF-M TYPE = 5
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > P-PASCAL > DENS-Y = 0
CS4OFF-C DENS-M = 255
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > P-PASCAL > DENS-C = 255
CS1OFW-K DENS-K = 0
4. Place the test print that is output in the Right Deck
CS2OFW-Y
with the solid blue image facing up.
CS3OFW-M
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > P-PASCAL > CAUTION:
CS4OFW-C Be sure to place the paper in the Right Deck. The nip
Write down the values for these items in the measurement mode can feed paper only from the Right
corresponding fields of the service label (affixed on the Deck.
inside of the Sub Station Upper Front Cover [1]).
Purpose: Re-entry of the offset value is required after the
RAM clear of the DC Controller. 5. Execute the nip measurement mode (set the
following service mode setting to "0").
• For the Primary Fixing Assembly
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING
> FX1-NIP1
[1] • For the Secondary Fixing Assembly
> FX2-NIP1
Fixing System
■ Checking the Amount of Fixing Nip
Check whether the fixing nip is normal when replacing a fixing
related part (Fixing Roller, Pressure Belt Unit, or Pressure
Roller) or when image failure occurs.
915
5. Adjustment
6. Measure the amount of nip of the solid blue image ● When the Amount of Nip Does Not
on the output paper and confirm whether it complies
Comply with the Standard Value
with the standard value.
Nip cannot be adjusted in the field. Perform operations in the
• For the Primary Fixing Assembly
following order.
[Measurement position]
• 30 mm from the paper edge 1. If fixing failure occurs immediately after replacing a
• 150 mm from the paper edge part, remove the part that was replaced and install it
[Standard value] again.
a = 3.8 mm +/- 0.6 mm
b = 25 mm +/- 30 mm 2. Remove the Fixing Roller, Pressure Belt Unit
c = 32 mm +/- 40 mm (Primary Fixing Assembly), Pressure Roller
Confirm that the widths of a, b, and c comply with (Secondary Fixing Assembly), and attach them
the standard value. again.
3. Replace the Pressure Belt Unit or Pressure Roller.
4. Replace the Fixing Roller.
30mm 5. Replace the Fixing Assembly.

a
■ When Replacing the Primary Fixing
b
150mm Roller
c 1. Clean the Fixing Roller and Pressure Belt (using an
alcohol solution and lint-free paper).
CAUTION:
Do not apply more force than necessary when
cleaning. Doing so may damage the surface of the
Fixing Roller/Pressure Belt and cause image failure.
30mm 2. Check the amount of nip (see “Checking the Amount

of Fixing Nip” on page 915).
• For the Secondary Fixing Assembly
[Measurement position]
• 30 mm from the paper edge Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING
• 150 mm from the paper edge > FX1-NIP1
[Standard value]
b = 7.0 mm to 9.0 mm ■ When Replacing the Secondary
(a - c) = 0.3 mm or less Fixing Rollers
1. Clean the Fixing Roller and Pressure Roller (using
an alcohol solution and lint-free paper).
30mm
a CAUTION:
Do not apply more force than necessary when
cleaning. Or the surface of the rollers may be damaged
150mm
and an image failure may occur.
b 2. Check the amount of nip (see “Checking the Amount


> FX2-NIP1
c
30mm
916
5. Adjustment
● When Replacing the Secondary Fixing 2. Apply 0.1 ml of silicon oil to the center of the roller
surface [1] (30 mm inside of both edges) while
Pressure Roller
rotating the Oil Coating Roller, and spread the oil
1. After replacing the Secondary Fixing Pressure evenly using the piece of paper [2].
Roller, be sure to refresh (polish) the Secondary
Fixing Pressure Roller in service mode.
FX-CLN [1] 30mm
NOTE: [2]
Since a new Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller has high
smoothness, it can be easily damaged when the
Separation Claw is in contact with it.
30mm
■ When Replacing the Primary Fixing

Pressure Belt 3. Apply 0.1 ml of silicon oil to the center of the Inlet
Roller surface [1] (30 mm inside of both edges), and
spread the oil evenly using the piece of paper [2].
CAUTION:
Spread the oil over the area about 1/4 of one roller
rotation.
Be sure to note the following 2 points when handling the
Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Unit
[1] 30mm
[2]
30mm
4. Turn the Inlet Roller so that the surface with oil

applied [1] is hidden inside the unit.
This work is performed to prevent the Pressure Belt
2. Ensure that there is no foreign matter inside the belt from scraping off the oil that has been applied when
before installing it to the host machine. the belt is installed.
1. Apply silicon oil to the following locations.

• Oil Coating Roller surface: 0.1 ml
• Inlet Roller surface: 0.1 ml
[1]
[Tool used]
• Silicon oil (parts number: FY9-6011)
• Dropper
1. Prepare a piece of paper for applying the oil. Cut

off approx. 1/8 of an A4 sheet of paper, and fold it
2. Clean the Primary Fixing Fixing Roller and Primary
about three times.
Fixing Pressure Belt (using an alcohol solution and
lint-free paper).
3. Check the amount of nip (see “Checking the Amount


> FX1-NIP1
917
5. Adjustment
■ When Replacing the Primary Fixing 4. Apply 0.2 ml of silicon oil to the center of the roller
surface [1] (30 mm inside of both edges) while
Pressure Belt Unit-related turning the Oil Coating Roller, and spread the oil
Consumable Parts evenly using the piece of paper [2].
The work to perform when replacing the following

consumable parts at the same time is described here.
• Pressure Belt
• Pressure Pad [1] 30mm
• Pad Cover
• Oil Coating Roller [2]
1. Apply silicon oil to the following locations.

• Pad Cover surface: 0.4 ml
• Oil Coating Roller surface: 0.2 ml 30mm
• Inlet Roller surface: 0.1 ml
• Pad Cover surface between the Separation Roller
and Pad Cover: 0.1 ml
5. Apply 0.1 ml of silicon oil to the center of the Inlet
Roller surface [1] (30 mm inside of both edges), and
[Tool used] spread the oil evenly using the piece of paper [2].
• Silicon oil (parts number: FY9-6011) Spread the oil over the area about 1/4 of one roller
• Dropper rotation.
1. Prepare a piece of paper for applying the oil. Cut

off approx. 1/8 of an A4 sheet of paper, and fold it
[1] 30mm
about three times.
2. Apply 0.4 ml of silicon oil to the center of the Pad [2]
Cover surface [1] (30 mm inside of both edges),
and spread the oil evenly using the piece of paper
[2].
30mm
[1] 30mm
6. Turn the Inlet Roller so that the surface with oil
[2] applied [1] is hidden inside the unit.
This work is performed to prevent the Pressure Belt
from scraping off the oil that has been applied when
the belt is installed.
30mm
3. Apply 0.1 ml of silicon oil to the center [1] of the Pad

Cover surface that is opposite the Separation
Roller (30 mm inside of both edges), and spread
[1]
the oil evenly using the piece of paper [2].
30mm
[1]
[2] 2. Clean the Primary Fixing Roller and Primary Fixing

Pressure Belt (using an alcohol solution and lint-free
paper).
30mm
3. Check the amount of nip (see “Checking the Amount

> FX1-NIP1
918
5. Adjustment
■ When Replacing the Primary Fixing 1. Be sure to apply grease to both ends of the shaft
when replacing the following consumables parts
External Heat Belt (rollers).
• Tandem Feed Roller 1
1. After replacement, execute the following service
mode.
• COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING > F1EX-INT
• Bypass Feed Roller 1
Executing the service mode drives the Primary Fixing
External Heat Belt Displacement Control. (Approx. 3
minutes)
• Delivery Roller 1
If the replacement completes successfully, "OK!" is
displayed.
In the event of a problem, "E007" error occurs.
• Delivery Pre-reverse Roller
• Delivery Post-reverse Roller
■ When Replacing the Secondary • Delivery Reverse Roller 1
Fixing External Heat Belt • Duplex Reverse Roller
• Duplex Post-reverse Roller
1. After replacement, execute the following service
mode.
[Tool used]
• COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING > F2EX-INT Super Lube grease (parts number: FY9-6005)
Executing the service mode drives the Secondary Fixing
External Heat Belt Displacement Control. (Approx. 3
minutes)
■ When Replacing the Paper Length
If the replacement completes successfully, "OK!" is Sensor
displayed.
In the event of a problem, "E007" error occurs. 1. After measuring the length of the paper to use in the
feed direction, enter the value in the following
service mode.
■ When Replacing the Fixing Web
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SENS-ADJ >
1. Clean the Refresh Roller/Refresh Cleaning Roller INPUT-L
(using an alcohol solution and lint-free paper).
2. Execute the Paper Length Sensor distance
adjustment mode in the following service mode.
NOTE: Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SENS-ADJ >
This cleaning is an item for periodical servicing that is PL-D-EXE
performed at the same time as replacing the Fixing Web.
3. Confirm that the feed speed (the display value for the
following service mode) when adjusting the
distance between the Paper Length Sensors is
NOTE:
With this model, it is not necessary to clear the Fixing Web within the appropriate range (750 +/- 15).
Counter to clear the Fixing Web absence error that Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SENS-ADJ >
occurred in previous models. PL-SNS-V
After replacing the Fixing Web with a new one, the error is
automatically cleared when the machine detects that the
Fixing Web is available.
■ When Replacing the Registration
Sensor
1. Use the following service mode to execute light
Pickup Feed System intensity adjustment for the Registration Sensor.
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SENS-ADJ >
■ When Replacing the Feed/Delivery REG-SNS
Rollers
919
5. Adjustment
■ When Replacing the Paper 2. Remove the Connector Cover [1] in the direction of
the arrow.
Thickness Sensor • 1 Screw [2]
1. Enter the value written on the label attached to the [1] [2]
Paper Thickness Sensor in the following service
mode.
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > MISC > DF-S-RK
Text on label DF-S-RK input value

A 1
B 2
C 3
D 4
E 5

2. Enter the changed setting value on the service label
of the Main Station.
■ When Replacing the Paper 4. For the Upper/Middle Deck, release the 2 claws [4],
and disconnect the connector [5].
Separation Fan and Fan Duct
[3] [2]
1. Remove all paper from the corresponding deck
(Right Deck or Left Deck).
2. Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch. After

startup, the air volume of the Paper Separation Fan
is automatically adjusted.
NOTE:
• The deck will not open while the air volume is being
adjusted, even if the Deck Open/Close Button is
pressed. [1] [4]
• The air volume adjustment is successful if the LED
indicating that paper is out lights up or if the deck
opens when the Deck Open/Close Button is pressed.
[5]
■ When Replacing the Deck/Deck

Open/Close Solenoid (Deck Open/ 5. As an indication to be used when installing the Deck
Close Solenoid Adjustment) Front Cover [1], write down the position on the scale
engraved around each of the screws.
• Upper/Middle Deck [2] 4 locations
CAUTION:
• Lower Deck [2], [3] 5 locations
Be sure to adjust the solenoid position of the deck when
you have moved the latch claw when adjusting the side [2]
registration (see “Adjusting the Side Registration” on
page 887) or when you have replaced the deck or Deck
Open/Close Solenoid.
If you do not perform adjustment, the deck may not
open when the Deck Open/Close Button is pressed.
[3]
1. Press the Deck Open/Close Button to open the deck.
[2] [2]
[1]
920
5. Adjustment
6. Loosen the 2 screws (red) [2] of the Solenoid [1]. [2]
[1]
[1] [a] [b]
[A] [B]
[2]
7. Push in the deck [1], close the latch claw when its
end [2] reaches the top of the roller [3], and tighten 10. Return the harness back to its original position and
the loosened 2 screws (red) [4] of the solenoid. install the Connector Cover.
11. Close the deck.

[1]
■ When Replacing the Paper Surface

Detection Sensor
1. After replacing the Paper Surface Detection Sensor,
[2] return the Paper Surface Detection Sensor Support
Plate [1] back to its original position.
[3] • Adjustment screw [2]
CAUTION:
[4]
Be sure to secure the Paper Surface Detection Sensor
Support Plate [1] to the position with the red mark [3].
8. Install the Deck Front Cover.
[1]
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to trap the harness.
• Be sure to install the washer so that it is on the top
of the Deck Front Cover.
[3]
[2]
9. Move the Deck Front Cover in the direction that you

moved the latch claw [1] when you adjusted the side
registration (see “Adjusting the Side Registration”
on page 887) based on the position of the scale you
made a note of in step 5, and tighten the screws.
• If you moved the latch claw to the front side [A], also
move the Deck Front Cover toward [a].
• If you moved the latch claw to the rear side [B], also
move the Deck Front Cover toward [b].
■ When Replacing the Multi-purpose
Tray
1. Open the Multi-purpose Tray.
921
5. Adjustment
2. Load A4 paper in the landscape direction on the

Multi-purpose Tray, and slide the Multi-purpose Tray
Width Guides so that the distance between them
matches the width of loaded paper.
3. Use the following service mode to register the basic

width for A4R for the Multi-purpose Tray.
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CST > MF-
A4R
4. Also load paper in the Multi-purpose Tray and

register the basic width in the service mode for A6R
and A4 paper.
• For A6R paper
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CST >
MF-A6R
• For A4 paper
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CST >
MF-A4
Press the Reset key several times after registration to
exit the service mode.
5. Load paper of your choice in the Multi-purpose Tray,

and then set the paper size and type by following the
instructions displayed on the Control Panel.
6. Print or copy something, and then check that the

paper was properly picked up from the Multi-
purpose Tray.
922
6 Troubleshooting
Making Initial Checks........................ 924
Test Print...........................................925
Image Adjustment Basic Procedure
.......................................................930
Troubleshooting Items.......................935
Image failure..................................... 944
Faulty Feeding.................................. 969
Controller Self Diagnosis...................984
Debug log..........................................991
Version upgrade..............................1007
6. Troubleshooting
Making Initial Checks
List of Initial Check Items

Item No. Detail Check
Site Environment 1 The voltage of the power supply is as rated (±10%).
2 The site is not a high temperature / humidity environment (near a water faucet,
water boiler, humidifi er), and it is not in a cold place. The machine is not near a
source of fire or dust.
3 The site is not subject to ammonium gas.
4 The site is not exposed to direct rays of the sun. (Otherwise, provide curtains.)
5 The site is well ventilated, and the floor keeps the machine level.
6 The machine's power plug remains connected to the power outlet.
Checking the Paper 7 The paper is of a recommended type.
8 The paper is not moist or dry. Try paper fresh out of package.
Checking the Placement of 9 Check the deck to see if the paper is not in excess of a specific level.
Paper 10 If a transparency is used, check to make sure that it is placed in the correct
orientation.
Checking the Durables 11 Check the table of durables to see if any has reached the end of its life.
Checking the Periodically 12 Check the scheduled servicing table and the periodically replaced parts table,
Replaced Parts and replace any part that has reached the time of replacement.
924
6. Troubleshooting
Test Print
Overview
This machine has several test print types shown in the table below. A circle in each image check item shows the availability to
check the different type of image faults. If the faulty image shown in the output does not appear in the appropriate test print type,
the cause may lie in PDL input or the reader
PG TYPE Items Origi-

TYPE Pattern Grada- Fog- Trans- Black White Uneven Uneven Color Right Straight nator
tion ging fer line line Density Density dis- Angle Lines
Fault at the place-
Front / ment
Rear
0 Normal ----
copy /
print
1 to 3 (For ----
R&D)
4 16-Gra- Yes Yes Yes Yes Main
dation control-
ler PCB
5 Full Area Yes Yes Yes Yes Main
Half control-
Tone ler PCB
6 Grid Yes Yes Main
control-
ler PCB
10 MCYBk Yes Yes Main
Horizon- control-
tal Line ler PCB
12 64-Gra- Yes Main
dation control-
ler PCB
14 Full Col- Yes Yes Main
or 16- control-
grada- ler PCB
tion
Selecting Test Print TYPE

1. Set the copy count, paper size, and pickup mode (single-sided or double-sided).
2. Select the following service mode.

Service Mode_COPIER > TEST > PG
3. Enter the appropriate TYPE No. using the keypad, and press the OK key.
4. Set the density in the following service mode (valid only if TYPE=5).
Service Mode_COPIER > TEST > PG > DENS-Y
• DENS-Y, DENS-M, DENS-C, DENS-K
5. Set the image mode in the following service mode.

Service Mode_COPIER > TEST > PG > TXPH
6. Press the start key.
925
6. Troubleshooting
How to check test print

■ 16-Gradation (TYPE=4)
This test print can mainly check gradation performance, image fogging, white line, and density unevenness at the rear/front.
CAUTION:
Setting the following service mode (COLOR-Y/COLOR-M/COLOR-C/COLOR-K) to "1" should be limited to 2 colors or less.
If it is set to "1" for 3 colors or more, the amount of toner deposit becomes too large, which may result in an image quality
defective.
Service Mode_COPIER > TEST > PG > COLOR-Y
16-Gradation
1. Gradation
If there is no 16-step density gradation, it may be caused by fault of drum unit or laser scanning system.
2. Foggy image
If there is foggy image only at the white area as shown in the figure below, it may be caused by fault of drum unit or laser
scanning system.
3. Vertical white/black line
If white or black lines occur with a particular color, the possible cause is an error in the Drum Unit of the color, an error in the
Developing Assembly, or soiling on the laser light path.
If white or black lines occur at the same position with all the colors, the possible cause is deterioration of the Intermediate
Transfer Unit or Fixing Assembly.
4. Density unevenness at the rear/front
If there is density unevenness at the rear/front, it may be caused by fault of drum unit, laser scanning system or transfer unit.
■ Full Area Half Tone (TYPE=5)

This test print can mainly check transfer failure, black line, white line, and pitch unevenness.
• Output by every developing color is available by specifying the developing color (COLOR-Y/COLOR-M/COLOR-C/COLOR-
K) in the following service mode:
Service Mode_COPIER > TEST > PG > COLOR-Y
• In the case of changing density of the test print, execute followings in service mode for density setting:
Service Mode_COPIER > TEST > PG > DENS-Y
• DENS-Y, DENS-M, DENS-C, DENS-K
CAUTION:
The total of the setting values of the service mode for the 4 colors (DENS-Y/DENS-M/DENS-C/DENS-K) should be limited
to 512 or less. If the total is larger than this value, it may result in an image quality defective.
926
6. Troubleshooting
COLOR-M=1, COLOR-Y/C/K=0
1. Transfer failure
If there is transfer failure, it may be caused by fault of transfer (intermediate transfer/secondary transfer) unit.
2. Horizontal unevenness
If there is horizontal unevenness, it may be caused by fault of photosensitive drum drive unit, drum ITB motor, or drum unit.
3. Vertical unevenness
If there is vertical unevenness, it may be caused by soiled LDE lens, fault of drum unit, or deterioration of intermediate transfer
belt.
■ Grid (TYPE=6)
This test print can mainly check color displacement, right angle accuracy and linearity.
1. Color displacement
If there is color displacement, it may be caused by fault of each laser scanning system, transfer (intermediate transfer/
secondary transfer) unit or photosensitive drum drive unit.
2. Right angle accuracy and linearity
If there is fault of right angle accuracy or linearity, it may be caused by fault of laser scanning system, or defective shape of
registration (upper/lower) roller or the secondary transfer outer roller.
■ MCYBk Horizontal Line (TYPE=10)

This test print can mainly check the dark area density of each color, balance among each color and white line by developing.
927
6. Troubleshooting
4.0 ± 0 .5 mm
2.5 ± 0.5 mm
1. Solid density of each color and balance among each color.

• Density is not extremely light.
• In the case of light density with a certain color, it may be caused by the developer of the color in question, or fault of
primary transfer roller, laser scanning system or high voltage system.
2. White/black line
If white or black lines occur with a particular color, the possible cause is an error in the Drum Unit of the color, an error in the
Developing Assembly, or soiling on the laser light path.
If white or black lines occur at the same position with all the colors, the possible cause is deterioration of the Intermediate
Transfer Unit or Fixing Assembly.
3. Density unevenness at the rear/front
If there is density unevenness with a certain color, it may be caused by fault of drum unit, laser scanning system or transfer
(intermediate transfer/secondary transfer) unit.
If there is density unevenness with all colors, it may be caused by deterioration of intermediate transfer unit.
■ 64-Gradation (TYPE=12)
YMCBk64 gradation test print can mainly check gradation performance of each color (YMBCk) at one time.
■ Full Color 16-gradation (TYPE=14)

Full color 16-gradation test print can mainly check gray balance, gradation performance of each color (YMCBk) and foggy image.
928
6. Troubleshooting
Light Areas
White Area White Area
1. Gray balance
Check to see if the output comes with even density of each color at gray scale area.
2. Gradation performance
Check gradation performance and density difference of each color (YMCBk)
3. Foggy image
If there is foggy image at the white area, it may be caused by fault of developing system or photosensitive drum, or correction
fault of laser scanning system.
929
6. Troubleshooting
Image Adjustment Basic Procedure
Making Pre-Checks
Execute Auto Adjust
Gradation (Full Adjust).
TYPE = 5 (halftone)
TXPH =1 (photo mode)
Output 6 PG (TYPE=5)
DENS-Y/M/C/K = 64 for each color
in full color, A3 size
COLOR-Y/M/C/K = 1 for each color
PG-PICK = Paper source for A3
PG-QTY =6
Do lines or dots appear at Yes Replace the drum of

265 mm intervals? the corresponding color.
No
Do lines or dots appear at Yes Replace the Developing Assembly

45 to 57 mm intervals? ofthe corresponding color.
No
Does image failure such as a No

dot occur at a similar position Check/clean/replace the ITB.
on the 1st and 6th sheets? *1: Errors on the 2nd to 5th sheets
*1 cannot be extracted.
Yes
Does uneven density occur Yes

Check the Primary Transfer Roller.
at 50 mm intervals?
No
Are there lines, dots,

Yes Check the Secondary
or uneven density
Transfer Inner Roller.
at 66 mm intervals?
No

Yes Check the Secondary
or uneven density
Transfer Outer Belt.
at 198 mm intervals?
No

Yes
or uneven density Check the Fixing Roller.
at 251 mm intervals?
No
Is the back side Yes Check the Secondary

of paper soiled? Transfer Cleaning Unit*2
No
* 2:Check the Secondary Transfer Cleaning Unit.
Proceed to Density - Check whether toner remains in the Secondary Transfer Inlet Guide Assembly.
Difference Adjustment. => Clean it.
- Check whether toner slips through the Cleaning Blade.
=> Install the Cleaning Blade again.
930
6. Troubleshooting
Gradient adjustment in density between the front side and the rear
side
TYPE = 5 (halftone)
Output PG (TYPE=5) TXPH =1 (photo mode)
Does the density differ between DENS-Y/M/C/K = 64 for each color
the front andrear COLOR-Y/M/C/K = 1 for each color
sides?
Yes
Clean the Dustproof Glass.
It exists in
Does the density all colors Check the transfer system
difference exist depending
(secondary transfer).*3
on the color?
It exists in certain colors only
Check the Primary

Charging Assembly.*1 *1: Check the Primary Charging Assembly.
Check the installation status, and adjust the height of the Primary Grid.
Check the Developing *2: Check the Developing Assembly.

Assembly.*2 Is the pressure correctly applied to the Developing Assembly?
=> Remove and install it, and correctly apply pressure to it.
Check the transfer system. *3: Check the transfer system

(Primary transfer)*3 (Primary transfer)
Primary Transfer Roller: Check for soiling and pressure
(Secondary transfer)
Secondary Transfer Outer Belt: Check for damage
Secondary Transfer Inner Roller: Check for soiling
Execute Correct Shading
(horizontal scanning shading) in Settings/Registration.
Settings/Registration>
>Adjustment/Maintenance>Adjust Image Quality>Correct Shading
Go to Density
Adjustment.
931
6. Troubleshooting
Adjustment of density difference (1/3)

Execute Auto Adjust Gradation
(Full Adjust).*1
*1: Needs to be executed again after executing
Correct Shading (horizontal scanning shading)
Output PG (TYPE=4). Within the standard

Is the density of the darkest area (1.4 to 1.8) or dark (>1.8)
among the 16 gradations A
within the standard?
Standard: +/- 0.2 of <Specification value>
standard value Y: 1.6
Light (<1.40) M: 1.55
C: 1.55
Execute DPC in service mode. K: 1.7
DISPLAY > DPOT > No Clean the Dustproof Glass.

VFF-Y/M/C/K</=400V Replace the drum.
in service mode? Replace the Laser Scanner Unit.
Yes END
Does the value of ADJUST > No Enter data again,

DEN in service mode match and feed 50 sheets.
the label value?
END
Yes
Is the density No
light in all colors? B
Yes
Check the values of temperature

and humidity in service mode:
- DISPLAY > ANALOG > HUM/TEMP
- DISPLAY > ANALOG > HUM2/TEMP2 *2: Check the Environment Sensor.
- Check if the ITB Connector is physically removed.
- Replace the Environment Sensor PCB
No Check the Environment

Are the values of temperature
and humidity normal? Sensor.*2
*3: Check the transfer system.

Yes (Primary transfer)
Check the transfer Primary Transfer Roller: Check for soiling and pressure
system.*3 (Secondary transfer)
END
932
6. Troubleshooting
No
Does fogging occur? END
Yes
No Execute FUNCTION > DPC >

Is the Primary Charging
Assembly soiled? DPC in service mode.
Yes
Is the difference between Check if the Primary Charging

DISPLAY > DPOT > V00-Y/M/C/K No High Voltage Connector is
Clean or replace the Primary
and DPOT-Y/M/C/K 50 or more physically removed.Replace the
Charging Wire.Replace the
when solid white image is Primary Charging High Voltage PCB.
Primary Charging Assembly Grid
output? Replace the drum.
Plate.Replace the Grid Plate
Cleaning Pad.
Yes
*1 Check the developing

system.
*1: Check the developing system.

- Is the pressure correctly applied to theDeveloping Assembly?
=> Remove and install it, and correctly apply pressure to it.
- Is the developing bias correctly output?
Are there any No Replace the drum and the
=> DISPLAY > DENS > DEV-DC-Y/M/C/K
- Is toner evenly coated on the Developing Cylinder? faulty locations? developer of all colors
=>Remove foreign matter on the blade if any.
- Is the magnetic pole of the Developing Cylinder correctly positioned?
=> Install the Positioning Plate correctly. Yes
Correct the faulty

locations.
END
933
6. Troubleshooting
Compare the values of DISPLAY> DENS 1*: Check the transfer system.
> DENS-S-Y,M,C,K (detected values) (Primary transfer)
and the values of '<0&.75*7 Primary Transfer Roller: Check for soiling and pressure
(target values). (Secondary transfer)
Is the difference
betweenthe detected value and No Check the transfer
the target value of each system.*1
color -120 or less?
Yes END
Check the developing system*2

& check toner supply.*3
Correct the faulty locations.
Clean the surface of
Patch Sensor.
*2: Check the developing system.
- Is the pressure correctly applied to the Developing Assembly?
=> Remove and install it, and correctly apply pressure to it. END
- Is the developing bias correctly output?
=>DISPLAY > DENS > DEV-DC-Y/M/C/K
- Is toner evenly coated on the Developing Cylinder?
=>Remove foreign matter on the blade if any.
- Is the magnetic pole of the Developing Cylinder correctly positioned?
=> Install the Positioning Plate correctly.
*3 Check toner supply

- Is toner in the Sub Hopper?
=> Check if the Sub Hopper Toner Sensor Connector is physically removed, or clean the brush.
934
6. Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Items
List of Troubleshooting Items

Description Reference
Failure diagnosis of the air flow in the fixing system “ Failure diagnosis of the air flow in the fixing system” on page
935
Wrinkles in the Pressure Belt “ Wrinkles in the Pressure Belt” on page 938
Forcible stop of paper feed “Forcible stop of paper feed” on page 938
Message "Adjusting the fixing assembly" does not disappear “Message "Adjusting the fixing assembly" does not disappear” on
page 940
Power Supply Error Diagnosis Flow “ Power Supply Error Diagnosis Flow” on page 940
Failure diagnosis of the air flow in the fixing system
Air Filter Unit

Pressure Gauge Unit
Relief Valve Unit
Atmospheric
Pressure
Relief Valve Unit
Compressor
Compressor Driver PCB Cooling Fan
Fixing Air Pump Unit
935
6. Troubleshooting
Primary Fixing Secondary Fixing

Refresh Air Blow Refresh Air Blow
Valve Unit Valve Unit
Primary Fixing
Separation Air Blow
Valve Unit
1. Error code that appears due to air flow-related failures
Error codes Cause Details of the Error

and Field Remedy
E130-0001 (Air Pump error) Compressor Driver PCB error Refer to “Error Code” on
Fixing Air Pump Unit error page 1083
E130-0002 (Air Pump error) Compressor Driver PCB error
Fixing Air Pump Unit error
Pressure Gauge Unit error
E130-0003 (Air Pump error) Compressor Driver PCB error
E130-0104 (Air Pump error) Primary Fixing Separation Air Blow Valve Unit error
E130-0105 (Air Pump error) Primary Fixing Refresh Air Blow Valve Unit error
E130-0205 (Air Pump error) Secondary Fixing Refresh Air Blow Valve Unit error
E197-00A6 (Serial communication error) Atmospheric Pressure Relief Valve Unit error
E805-1601 (Fixing Fan error) Compressor Cooling Fan error
936
6. Troubleshooting
2. When an error is not displayed
Symptom Cause Check items Field Remedy

Separation failure The cause is either of the Perform the check • When the value of the Pressure Gauge significantly ex-
jam in the Primary following: mode (1) to check the ceeds 0.3 MPa
Fixing Assembly • Relief Valve Unit er- value of the Pressure 1. Replace the Relief Valve Unit.
(J0114, J0115, ror Gauge. Perform the following procedure when the problem is
J0128) • Pressure Gauge Unit not solved.
or error 2. Replace the Pressure Gauge Unit.
Image failure due to • Air Filter Unit error Perform the following procedure when the problem is
separation failure • Atmospheric Pres- not solved.
sure Relief Valve 3. Replace the Air Filter Unit.
Unit error • When the value of the Pressure Gauge is significantly be-
• Primary Fixing Inner low 0.3 MPa
Delivery Unit error 1. Replace the Pressure Gauge Unit.
• Primary Fixing Sep- Perform the following procedure when the problem is
aration Air Blow not solved.
Valve Unit error 2. Replace the Atmospheric Pressure Relief Valve Unit.
Perform the following procedure when the problem is
not solved.
3. Replace the Air Filter Unit.
Perform the following procedure when the problem is
not solved.
4. Replace the Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Unit.
• When the value of the Pressure Gauge is steadily around
0.3 MPa
Perform the check mode (2) to check the value of the Pres-
sure Gauge.
• The value of the Pressure Gauge does not vary
Replace the Primary Fixing Separation Air Blow Valve
Unit.
• The value of the Pressure Gauge varies
Replace the Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Unit.
Image failure • Soiling on the Pri- Perform the check • The value of the Pressure Gauge does not vary when the
(lines in the vertical mary Fixing Refresh mode (2) to check the Primary Fixing Refresh Roller Air Nozzle is operating
direction) Roller value of the Pressure Replace the Primary Fixing Refresh Air Blow Valve Unit.
• Damage of the Pri- Gauge. • The value of the Pressure Gauge varies when the Primary
mary Fixing Roller Fixing Refresh Roller Air Nozzle is operating
Replace the Primary Fixing Refresh Roller Air Nozzle.
• Soiling on the Sec- • The value of the Pressure Gauge does not vary when the
ondary Fixing Re- Secondary Fixing Refresh Roller Air Nozzle is operating
fresh Roller Replace the Secondary Fixing Refresh Air Blow Valve Unit.
• Damage of the Sec- • The value of the Pressure Gauge varies when the Secon-
ondary Fixing Roller dary Fixing Refresh Roller Air Nozzle is operating
Replace the Secondary Fixing Refresh Roller Air Nozzle.
Check mode (1)

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK > CMP-PRSS
• Turn ON the Air Pump. (0.3 MPa, for 30 seconds)
Check mode (2)

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK > CMP-AIR
• Open and close the Primary Fixing Separation Air Blow Valve (3 times at 1 second interval).
• Open and close the Primary Fixing Refresh Air Blow Valve (3 times at 1 second interval).
• Open and close the Secondary Fixing Refresh Air Blow Valve (3 times at 1 second interval).
937
6. Troubleshooting
Wrinkles in the Pressure Belt
Wrinkles
[Location]
Pressure Belt in the Primary Fixing Assembly
[Cause]
The Pressure Belt consists of the PFA tube in the surface layer, rubber in the elastic layer, and the polyimide in the base
layer.
Since the thermal expansion rate of the PFA tube and that of the rubber differ, wrinkles may occur temporarily on the surface
layer when the belt is stretched while heat is applied, and then the belt is cooled down by the power-off of the machine.
They tend to appear especially near the rollers.
[Field Remedy]
Not necessary.
The wrinkles on the surface that appear during the cooling process of the Pressure Belt are a temporary symptom, and will
naturally disappear as the belt is further cooled down, or as the belt is heated after the power is turned on again.
[CAUTION]
As the wrinkles that appear during the cooling process of the Pressure Belt are not errors and will not cause any problem to
the usage, do not replace the Pressure Belt only by recognizing the wrinkles.
Forcible stop of paper feed

[Function Overview]
Forcibly stop the paper at a specified position.
Next time a job occurs, the paper is forcibly stopped at the stop position (leading edge) shown in the figure.
938
6. Troubleshooting
㹙38,39㹛
㹙41㹛㹙36,37㹛㹙50,51㹛
㹙34,35㹛
㹙32,33㹛
㹙40㹛㹙20,21㹛
㹙22,23,99㹛
㹙30,31㹛
㹙32,33㹛
㹙73㹛㹙74㹛㹙75㹛㹙2㹛
㹙70㹛㹙1㹛
㹙72㹛㹙76㹛㹙4㹛
㹙71㹛㹙3㹛
Stop po- Stop position Stop po- Stop position

sition ID sition ID
Pickup to 1 Immediately after pickup from Pre-/Post- 30 Before primary fixing
Vertical Path Right Deck fixing
2 Merging at Right Deck 31 Before primary fixing (on the 2nd side)
3 Immediately after pickup from 32 Before primary fixing (common to Tandem
Left Deck and Bypass)
4 Merging at Left Deck 33 After primary fixing (common to Tandem and
Bypass) (on the 2nd side)
Pre-registra- 20 Before pre-registration 34 Before secondary fixing
tion 21 Before pre-registration (on the 35 Befpre secondary fixing (on the 2nd side)
2nd side)
22 Before registration 36 After secondary fixing
23 Before registration (on the 2nd 37 After secondary fixing (on the 2nd side)
side)
99 Before registration (when 38 Before tandem merging
checking the image)
Reverse, 70 After duplex reverse 39 Before tandem merging (on the 2nd side)
Duplex 71 Before duplex decurler 50 Tandem pass
standby
72 After duplex decurler 51 Tandem pass (on the 2nd side)
73 Before Sub Station delivery Delivery 40 After reverse*
74 After Sub Station delivery 41 Before delivery*
75 Duplex re-pickup position
76 After Duplex Standby Sensor 6
* 1-sided print job (face-down delivery) only
[Use case]
• When bent paper/skew/wrinkles occur
• When jam occurs frequently
• When checking an image on the ITB
[Points to note when using]

• Remove the paper being stopped with the normal jam removal procedure. After jam removal, the job is automatically
recovered.
• Display of standard jam code indicates that a jam occurs somewhere other than the specified position.
• When a job in which the paper does not pass the specified stop position is executed, the setting to forcibly stop the paper
becomes disabled.
• Unfixed toner may be attached depending on the stop position. Use caution when handling it.
939
6. Troubleshooting
[How to use]
1. Set the stop position ID in the following service mode.
Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > P-STOP > PRINTER
2. Execute a job (copy or test print).
3. Paper stops at the designated position, and a jam code "00AAxx" is displayed.
00AAxx
Location Cause of jam ID of
00 : PRINTER 01 : Delay stop position
01 : ADF 02 : Stationary
02 : Finisher 0A : Power ON
AA : Forcible stop of
paper feed
Message "Adjusting the fixing assembly" does not disappear

[Overview]
Under a normal environment, the message "Adjusting the fixing assembly. Wait a moment..." appears and printing cannot
be performed. The machine cannot be recovered even if the power is turned OFF and then ON, and after one hour the Deck
Environment Sensor error detection alarm (040066) occurs.
[Cause]
The Right Deck Environment Sensor (UN604) is disconnected.
Since there is no function to detect the disconnection of the Right Deck Environment Sensor, it is judged as low temperature
environment, and no error occurs.
[Field Remedy]
Replace the Right Deck Environment Sensor (UN604).
Power Supply Error Diagnosis Flow

■ Overview
Current machine (imagePRESS C7010VP Series)
It was not possible to identify the precise location of a power supply error.
It took time to identify the location of an error.
This machine
A diagnosis flow has been implemented to classify and efficiently deal with power supply errors of conventional models
(imagePRESS C7010VP series).
940
6. Troubleshooting
■ Error Detection Sequence
Power ON
12V and 5V started
Error state
12V or 5V error detected
No error
24V started
Constant monitoring
Error state
Entire power supply
error detected
No error ERROR
* When an error in the 12V or 5V system is detected, the 24V system does not start up, so all the power supply systems including
the 24V system are judged to be in an error state.
■ Power Supply Error Diagnosis Flow
ERROR
E260-0Fxx
Check the error code
E260-00xx
Single power supply error Multiple power supply errors

Remedy in accordance with Check in service mode
the error code list
*Same as before
Identify the multiple power

supply errors
Remedy in accordance with

the error code list
* Check the bits of all the errors.
941
6. Troubleshooting
When multiple power supply errors occur: E260-0Fxx

Perform the following procedure:
1. Use service mode to check the group(s) where the multiple power supply errors occur. (Refer to “ Display of the Power Supply
Error Port in Service Mode” on page 942)
(Example) The power supply error bit is ON at PWR-GP7 (GP7): 0000 0000 1000 0000
2. See the error bit table to find out the bit where the error occurs. (Refer to “Error Bit Table” on page 943)
(Example) Check the value where GP7 and bit 7 intersect on the error bit table.
3. Perform the remedy in accordance with the error code list.
(Example) Perform the remedy for "E260-002F". ("xx" in "E260-00xx" represents the value you checked in step 2.)
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 until errors stop.
■ Display of the Power Supply Error Port in Service Mode

< Display in service mode (Lv.2) >
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC > PWR-GP1
COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC >

PWR-GP1 PWR-GP9
PWR-GP2 PWR-GP10
PWR-GP3 PWR-GP11
PWR-GP4 PWR-GP12
PWR-GP5 PWR-GP13
PWR-GP6 PWR-GP14
PWR-GP7 PWR-GP15
PWR-GP8 PWR-GP16
• The power supply error bit of each group is displayed in service mode.
• When multiple power supply errors occur, this shows the group(s) (GP) where the errors occur.
942
6. Troubleshooting
■ Error Bit Table

bit
Gr Power
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Gr1 12V_1 - - E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Gr2 5V_1 1E 1D 1C 1B 1A 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 F
Gr3 5V_2 - - - - - - - - 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 1F
Gr4 5V_3 - - - - - - - - - 81 80 7F 7E 7D 7C 7B
Gr5 12V_2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 83 82
Gr6 24V - - - - - 92 8D 89 61 59 4A 40 34 2B
Gr7 24VA - - - - - - - 30 2F 2E 2D 2C 2A 29 28 27
Gr8 24VB - - - - - 3C 3B 3A 39 38 37 36 35 33 32 31
Gr9 24VC - - - - - - - 46 45 44 43 42 41 3F 3E 3D
Gr10 24VD - - - - - - 55 54 53 52 51 50 4F 49 48 47
Gr11 24VE - - - - - - - 5D 5C 5B 5A 58 57 56 4D 4C
Gr12 24VF - 6D 6C 6B 6A 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 60 5F 5E
Gr13 24VF - - - - - - 75 74 73 72 71 70 6F 6E 4E 4B
Gr14 24VHIJ 96 95 94 93 91 90 8F 8E 8C 8B 8A 88 87 86 85 84
Gr15 38V - - - - - - - - 99 98 97 7A 79 78 77 76
Gr16 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
This table shows the bits of power supply errors of each group (GP).
• The values shown in the bit column indicate the bit displayed when a single power supply error occurs.
• There is a bit string of 16 bits for each group from GP 1 to GP 16.
• The bit string of each group (GP) is displayed in hex form.
• Both the total number of single power supply errors and that of multiple power supply errors are 153.
* When multiple power supply errors occur, it is possible to identify the PCB(s) where the errors occur on the basis of the
combination with the service mode display.
■ Points to Note at Service Visit

When multiple power supply errors occur: E260-0Fxx
In order to accurately identify the location of failure, it is necessary to enter service mode at the customer's site and check
the display of the power supply error port. It is therefore necessary to bring parts that would be necessary for replacement/
repair on the basis of information from UGW, etc. when the technician visits the customer.
943
6. Troubleshooting
Image failure
Image with Crepe Marks/Image with Scrawled Marks

Item Image Sample
Image with crepe marks:
Image failure on the 2nd side of 13x19 inch coated paper (thin
paper: 70g/m2)
Image with scrawled marks:

Image failure on the 2nd side of 13x19 inch plain paper (thin
paper: 80 g/m2)
[Location]
[Cause]
Depending on the installation environment, there may be a displacement at the point where the Main Station and
the Sub Station are connected.
This causes the height of the Inlet Guide of the Primary Fixing Assembly to change. As a result, the position where
paper comes in contact with the Inlet Guide when it is fed changes, thuscausing the risk of image failure.
[Condition]
When thin paper is fed
944
6. Troubleshooting
[Field Remedy]
Correct the height of the Inlet Guide of the Primary Fixing Assembly to a specified position.
1. Measure the distance [T] between the Main Station's Fixing Inlet Guide [1] and the Sub Station's Pre-fixing Feed
Guide Plate [2].
CAUTION:
If the scale is inserted too far, it may hit and damage the Fixing Roller.
Do not insert the scale to a position that may cause [T] to be 75 mm or more.
1. Place the scale vertically to the Pre-fixing Feed Guide Plate

2. Slide the scale until it hits the Fixing Inlet Guide.
[T]
[1]
[2]
2. When the measurement result [T] exceeds the reference value (59.6 mm +/- 5 mm), perform the following:
• <In the case of T = -5 mm or less>
Turn the 4 adjusters (shown in the figure below) counterclockwise by half turn.
945
6. Troubleshooting
• <In the case of T = -10 mm or less>

Turn the 4 adjusters (shown in the figure below) counterclockwise by one turn.
• <In the case of T = +5 mm or more>

Turn the 4 adjusters (shown in the figure below) clockwise by half turn.
• <In the case of T = +10 mm or more>
Turn the 4 adjusters (shown in the figure below) clockwise by one turn.
3. Execute a test print of Bk half tone image in service mode to check that the image failure has alleviated.
1. Load 13x19 inch coated paper (thin paper: 70 g/m2).
2. Execute a test print of Bk half tone image in service mode.
<Settings for test print of Bk half tone image>
TYPE = 5
DENS-Y = 0
DENS-M =0
DENS-C =0
DENS-K = 96
2-SIDE = 1
3. Check that no crepe marks appear on the image.
946
6. Troubleshooting
4. Execute a test print of blue solid image in service mode to check that the image failure has alleviated.
1. Load 13x19 inch plain paper (thin paper: 80 g/m2).
2. Execute a test print of blue solid image in service mode.
<Settings for test print of blue solid image>
TYPE = 5
DENS-Y = 0
DENS-M =255
DENS-C =255
DENS-K = 0
2-SIDE = 1
3. Check that no scrawled marks appear on the image.
Image of separation failure in the Primary Fixing Assembly

[Image Sample]
[Location]
[Cause]
The cause is either of the following:
• Relief Valve Unit error
• Pressure Gauge Unit error
• Air Filter Unit error
• Atmospheric Pressure Relief Valve Unit error
• Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Unit error
• Primary Fixing Separation Air Blow Valve Unit error
[Check items]
Execute the following service mode to check the value of the Pressure Gauge.
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK > CMP-PRSS
: Turn ON the Air Pump. (0.3 MPa, for 30 seconds)
[Field Remedy]
• When the value of the Pressure Gauge significantly exceeds 0.3 MPa
1. Replace the Relief Valve Unit.
Perform the following procedure when the problem is not solved.
2. Replace the Pressure Gauge Unit.
947
6. Troubleshooting
• When the value of the Pressure Gauge is significantly below 0.3 MPa
1. Replace the Pressure Gauge Unit.
2. Replace the Atmospheric Pressure Relief Valve Unit.
4. Replace the Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Unit.
• When the value of the Pressure Gauge is steadily around 0.3 MPa
: Open and close the Primary Fixing separation Air Blow Valve (3 times at 1 second interval). Next, open and close the
Primary Refresh Air Blow Valve (3 times at 1 second interval). Lastly, open and close the Secondary Refresh Air Blow
Valve (3 times at 1 second interval).
• The value of the Pressure Gauge does not vary
Replace the Primary Fixing Separation Air Blow Valve Unit.
• The value of the Pressure Gauge varies
Replace the Primary Fixing Inner Delivery Unit.
Lines in the vertical direction

[Location]
Primary Fixing Assembly or Secondary Fixing Assembly
[Cause]
• In the case of Primary Fixing Assembly
• Soiling on the Primary Fixing Refresh Roller
• Damage of the Primary Fixing Roller
• In the case of Secondary Fixing Assembly
• Soiling on the Secondary Fixing Refresh Roller
• Damage of the Secondary Fixing Roller
[Check items]
: Open and close the Primary Fixing separation Air Blow Valve (3 times at 1 second interval). Next, open and close the
Primary Refresh Air Blow Valve (3 times at 1 second interval). Lastly, open and close the Secondary Refresh Air Blow Valve
(3 times at 1 second interval).
[Field Remedy]
• In the case of Primary Fixing Assembly
• The value of the Pressure Gauge does not vary when the Primary Fixing Refresh Roller Air Nozzle is operating
Replace the Primary Fixing Refresh Air Blow Valve Unit.
• The value of the Pressure Gauge varies when the Primary Fixing Refresh Roller Air Nozzle is operating
Replace the Primary Fixing Refresh Roller Air Nozzle.
• In the case of Secondary Fixing Assembly
• The value of the Pressure Gauge does not vary when the Secondary Fixing Refresh Roller Air Nozzle is operating
Replace the Secondary Fixing Refresh Air Blow Valve Unit.
• The value of the Pressure Gauge varies when the Secondary Fixing Refresh Roller Air Nozzle is operating
Replace the Secondary Fixing Refresh Roller Air Nozzle.
Soiled image on the 1st side of 2-sided print

[Overview]
Soiling of many small black spots appears on the 1st side of 2-sided print.
948
6. Troubleshooting
[Cause]
When continuously feeding paper containing a high proportion of calcium carbonate (especially Mondi or UPM Fine, etc.),
the PFA (material of belt surface) of the Pressure Belt Unit in the Primary Fixing Assembly is abraded when paper passes
through the Primary Fixing Assembly and adhered to the back side of paper. This soiling is fed to the Secondary Fixing
Assembly and transferred onto the Pressure Roller (which soils the Pressure Roller).
When 2-sided printing is performed in this state, the soiling of the Pressure Roller is adhered to the image on the 1st side
on which toner is deposited at the time the 2nd side passes through the Secondary Fixing Assembly.
[Field Remedy]
Execute the following service mode to perform forced Pressure Roller cleaning:
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > FX2PR-CL
After the execution of cleaning, feed 3 to 10 sheets of waste paper (2-sided solid Y-color, 13 x 19 / coated paper) in order
to remove the soiling. (until the black soiling disappears on the solid Y color)
[CAUTION]
The soiling is not completely removed even if the forced Pressure Roller cleaning is performed. However, if it does not affect
images, replacement is not necessary.
Soiled trailing edge/soiled paper edge on both sides of 2-sided print

[Image Sample]
[Location]
Post-secondary Transfer Guide
[Cause]
Ejection of Bk toner increases at continuous output of low duty image or in the high temperature environment, causing the
Post-secondary Transfer Guide to be excessively soiled by toner. When 2-sided printing is performed in this state, this Bk
toner is attached for 20 mm around the center of the paper leading (trailing) edge or of the paper edge on the 1st and 2nd
sides of 2-sided print.
949
6. Troubleshooting
[Field Remedy]
Clean the Post-secondary Transfer Guide.
Soiling of spots at Secondary Transfer Outer Belt intervals

[Image Sample]
[Location]
[Cause]
Mixture of toner and paper dust, etc. is fixed on the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt, causing spots to appear at the Secondary
Transfer Outer Belt (approx. 200 mm) intervals.
[Field Remedy]
Clean the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
[Caution]
Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt Unit from the host machine to clean the belt. (The Cleaning Brush Roller is
engaged to the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt, to which large amount of toner is attached. If alcohol on the Secondary
Transfer Outer Belt has not been vaporized when attached toner is cleaned by rotating the belt, the toner in the brush may
be agglomerated or the toner may be re-attached onto the belt)
In addition, be careful not to bend the belt when cleaning as force is applied to the belt to some extent. Clean the belt where
there is the Tension Roller (metal roller) inside. (Do not clean the belt where there is the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
inside as it is a sponge roller which can easily be deformed)
Soiling of spots at ITB intervals

[Image Sample]
[Location]
ITB
950
6. Troubleshooting
[Cause]
Foreign matter is fixed on the ITB, causing soiling of spots at ITB intervals.
[Check item]
How to check whether the spots appear at ITB intervals: Spots appear at intervals of approx. 5 A3-size sheets at continuous
output. If it can be confirmed that the positions of the spots in the horizontal scanning direction are always the same, the
spots can be judged to be attributed to the ITB. When it is highly possible that the ITB is the cause, check its surface.
[Field Remedy]
Dry wipe the foreign matter attached to the ITB surface.
[Caution]
Do not clean the ITB with alcohol.
Bk soiling at the front edge on the back side

[Image Sample]
[Location]
[Cause]
Toner always exists on the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt due to the scattering of ejected toner and waste toner; the toner
is fixed onto the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt by the engagement pressure of Secondary Transfer Outer Belt against the
ITB and the difference of peripheral speeds between the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt and the ITB. Toner may newly be
attached onto the fixed toner, which has been accumulated as the life advances, causing toner to attach to the back side of
the paper when it passes through the secondary transfer area.
[Field Remedy]
Clean the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
[Caution]
Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt Unit from the host machine to clean the belt. (The Cleaning Brush Roller is
engaged to the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt, to which large amount of toner is attached. If alcohol on the Secondary
Transfer Outer Belt has not been vaporized when attached toner is cleaned by rotating the belt, the toner in the brush may
be agglomerated or the toner may be re-attached onto the belt)
In addition, be careful not to bend the belt when cleaning as force is applied to the belt to some extent. Clean the belt where
there is the Tension Roller (metal roller) inside. (Do not clean the belt where there is the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
inside as it is a sponge roller which can easily be deformed)
951
6. Troubleshooting
Vertical white line on solid image of each color

[Image Sample]
[Location]
Developing Assembly of each color
[Cause]
Foreign matter is stuck in the SB (cylinder - blade) gap in the Developing Assembly of each color.
[Field Remedy]
Remove foreign matter by the following procedure:
1. Remove the Developing Cylinder Upper Cover [1]. (2 Screws [2])
[1]
[2]
2. After inserting the "Toner Congestion Removal Sheet [1]" packed with the host machine between the Developing
Cylinder and the blade, remove foreign matter by moving the sheet like you draw circles.
[1]
3. Output about 10 test prints to verify the effect.
952
6. Troubleshooting
Vertical lines due to poor transfer at the ITB

[Image Sample]
[Location]
ITB
[Cause]
There is resistance fluctuation of the ITB until about 1,000,000 sheets. If uneven resistance occurs partially, vertical lines
occur at about 4 mm intervals especially on halftone image area of coated paper.
(As the mentioned number of sheets is fed, the uneven resistance of the ITB becomes stable.)
[Field Remedy]
Configure the setting to display user mode (image adjustment-related items) in the following service mode.
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > IMGC-ADJ
In the displayed user mode (log in as an administrator), set the value of "Adjust Primary Transfer Voltage" to "-10" for all
colors.
User mode > Settings/Registration > Preferences > Paper Settings > Paper Type Management Settings > Adjust Primary
Transfer Voltage
[Caution]
When primary transfer voltage is set to "-10" for all colors, RGB density may decrease. In that case, make an adjustment by
changing the setting value to the positive direction to make vertical lines less noticeable.
Pinhole soiling (ring mark)

[Image Sample]
[Location]
[Cause]
Pinhole soiling may occur due to fine foreign matter entered the Developing Assembly.
953
6. Troubleshooting
Since this foreign matter is low resistance material, leak from between the drum and the Developing Cylinder causes pinhole
soiling on an output image.
[Field Remedy]
Replace the developer of the corresponding color. If it does not work, replace the Developing Assembly of the corresponding
color.
Soiled image due to paper dust

[Overview]
Paper dust is adhered to the image. Or, soiling of white spots appears.
[Cause]
Paper dust may be accumulated in the paper feed path when poorly-cut paper or paper with much paper dust is fed.
When paper is fed in this state, paper dust is adhered to paper or to the Feed Roller, causing soiled image.
[Field Remedy]
Clean the paper dust accumulated in the paper feed path with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
954
6. Troubleshooting
955
6. Troubleshooting
Lined image at the trailing edge of the 2nd side of 2-sided print
[Overview]
Scratch-like soiling appears at the trailing edge of the 2-side of 2-sided print. Scratch-like soiling may appear also in the
margin.
956
6. Troubleshooting
[Cause]
The soiling adhered to the rib of the Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery Unit is rubbed against paper when paper is fed, and
transferred onto the image, causing lines or soiling to occur.
[Field Remedy]
Wrap lint-free paper around a plate-like member such as a scale, and clean the rib of the Secondary Fixing Inner Delivery
Unit.
Lined image on the 1st side of 2-sided print

[Overview]
Lines of 10 mm in width whose gloss level is low or high appear either at approx. 40 mm, 80 mm or 120 mm from the center
on the 1st side of 2-sided print.
957
6. Troubleshooting
Lines
㸦Gloss level: Low㸧
Lines
㸦Gloss level: High㸧
[Cause]
The surface of the Pressure Roller may have thin scratch due to the engaged Fixing Separation Claw.
If paper is fed in this state, the gloss level of the portion where the Fixing Separation Claw is engaged is lowered, causing
lines of low gloss level to occur.
On the other hand, when the Pressure Roller is soiled due to paper or toner scattered inside the machine, the soiling of the
portion where the Fixing Separation Claw is engaged is removed, causing lines of high gloss level to occur.
[Field Remedy]
Execute refreshing of the Pressure Roller according to the gloss level of the lines in service mode.
• When the gloss level of the lines is low
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > FX-CLN
• When the gloss level of the lines is high
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > FX2PR-CL
After executing the above service mode, output 10 sheets of 2-sided solid yellow image in the following service mode
using heavy paper of 151 g/m2 or more or coated paper that are A3/LDR or lager size in order to remove the soiling
scraped at the time of cleaning.
TYPE = 5
DENS-Y = 255
COLOR-Y = 1
COLOR-M = 0
COLOR-C = 0
COLOR-K = 0
2-SIDE = 1
PG-QTY = 10
[Caution]
If the Pressure Roller is refreshed successively, the scratch on the Pressure Roller is worsened, or the Pressure Roller and
the Pressure Refresh Roller wear faster; therefore do not execute refreshing frequently.
958
6. Troubleshooting
Image failure due to poor gradation performance

[Image Sample]
<Image of poor gradation>
C100 M100 Y100 C100 M100 Y100
<Image of in-plane unevenness>
[Field Remedy]
Perform the following flow for checking image failure due to poor gradation performance.
959
6. Troubleshooting
Flow for checking image failure due to poor gradation performance
Not known Does the image failure No

occur in the case of a single
color as well?
Yes
Check again by setting not to Are input source
perform color processing on No
(target) and output
the external controller. profile customized?
Yes
Check the gradation performance

by the standard profile of the
Calibration using a colorimeter
external controller.
Does the gradation performance worsen when a colorimeter
is used to perform calibration on the external controller? [Case of countermeasures]
When the use of a colorimeter to perform calibration If calibration is executed using a colorimeter while the engine suffers from
worsens the gradation performance, alleviate in-plane high in-plane unevenness, gradation performance may worsen.
unevenness as shown in the case of countermeasures, => Alleviate in-plane unevenness by such measures as Correct Shading and
and then execute calibration again. Charging Assembly height adjustment, and then execute calibration again.
No [Case of countermeasures]
When the correction pattern is set to "Patter 1", the gradation performance
Automatic color tone correction may worsen.
=> Use "Pattern 2" and above that are registered besides "Pattern 1".
Does the gradation performance improve when executing Even with registered correction patterns, the gradation performance may
automatic color tone correction again by using patterns worsen when the state of an engine significantly varies.
other than "Pattern 1"? => Check the density of a single color (such as in-plane unevenness and
No density), and execute auto gradation adjustment again.
Set "Off" for Copy/Print in "Job Type to Apply To" of Auto Correct Color Tone
Settings, and check whether automatic color tone correction is the cause of
the poor gradation performance. If that is the case, use the machine with this
Auto gradation adjustment setting being "Off".
Execute auto gradation adjustment again by changing the [Case of countermeasures]
settings as shown in the case of countermeasures on the 1. Execute "Initialize When Using Full Adjust", and then execute auto
right. gradation adjustment again.
2. Execute auto gradation adjustment by increasing the number of "Sheets".
3. If "paper to adjust" that has been registered is used for auto gradation
adjustment, change it back to standard paper, and then execute it again.
4. Register relatively-heavy plain paper of about 100 g/m2 whose opacity
(thickness) is even (such as GF-C104, Hammermill 105, and mondi 100),
and execute auto gradation adjustment using the "paper to adjust".
5. Execute auto gradation adjustment again after cleaning paper dust in the
Reverse/External Delivery area and the Color Sensor Unit.
960
6. Troubleshooting
Soiled back (Slip-through of patch-like toner)

[Image Sample]
[Location]
Secondary Transfer Outer Belt Unit
[Cause]
Due to cleaning failure of the Secondary Transfer Cleaning Brush Roller (Right)/(Left), a part of patch (Y)/(M)/(C) that is
formed by real-time multiple tone control and is transferred on the Secondary Transfer Outer Belt slips through the roller and
it attaches to the back side of paper.
[Field Remedy]
Execute the following service mode once. If the symptom persists, repeat the operation.
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INS-2TCL
Toner soiling at the edge of 13 x 19 size paper

[Image Sample]
[Location]
[Cause]
Toner soiling may occur at the edge of paper, mainly 13 x 19 size paper, due to dropping of toner accumulated on
the Edge Sheet (Front)/(Rear).
[Field Remedy]
1. Clean toner accumulated on the Edge Sheet (Front)/(Rear).
2. Adjust the upper limit of the target toner density of the color corresponding to the toner soiling.
1. Cleaning toner accumulated on the Edge Sheet (Front)/(Rear)

1. Remove the Developing Assembly.
961
6. Troubleshooting
2. Place the Developing Assembly with the Developing Cylinder [A] on the upper side, and remove the Developing Cylinder
Upper Cover [1].
• 2 Screws [2]
CAUTION:
• Do not touch the Developing Cylinder [A].
• Do not remove the screws other than the screw [2]. Otherwise, the amount of gap between the Developing Cylinder
and the Blade is changed and a developing failure may occur.
• Be careful not to damage the 2 Scraper Sheets [3].
[3]
[1]
2x
[A]
[2]
[2]
CAUTION:
Hold the Developing Assembly with its upper part on the upper side, and secure it with the 2 screws [2] while holding down
the 2 [A] parts of the Developing Cylinder Upper Cover [1].
[2]
[2]
2x [A]
[1]
962
6. Troubleshooting
3. Drop toner on the Edge Sheet (Front) [1] and the Edge Sheet (Rear) [2] onto paper and clean them with dry lint-free
paper.
NOTE:
Toner is likely to be accumulated on the upper part [A] of the Developing Assembly.
[1]
[2]
[A]
[A]
4. If there is toner accumulated at the storage location of the Developing Assembly in the Process Unit, clean the
Developing Assembly Lower Plate.
5. After cleaning, install the Developing Assembly to the host machine.
2. Adjusting the upper limit of the target toner density of the color corresponding to the toner soiling
1. Execute the service mode.
The recommended setting value is "-4".
(* HLMT-PTY / HLMT-PTM / HLMT-PTC / HLMT-PTK)
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > HLMT-PTY
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > HLMT-PTM
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > HLMT-PTC
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > HLMT-PTK
NOTE:
* HLMT-PT (setting of the upper limit of TD ratio)
As the value is changed by 1, it is changed by 0.5%. (Default: 0)
2. After the execution, output an image and check that the problem is solved. If the same symptom occurs after performing
the foregoing remedy, perform the following remedy.
■ Displacement/loose of the Edge Sheet (Front)/(Rear)

[Cause]
Soiling may occur due to lines caused by displacement/loose of the Edge Sheet (Front)/(Rear) or dropping of
accumulated toner.
[Field Remedy]
Perform the following remedy.
2. Remove the Developing Cylinder Upper Cover. Refer to “Toner soiling at the edge of 13 x 19 size paper” on page
961
3. Check the status of the Edge Sheet (Front)/(Rear).

• If replacement is not needed because of minor displacement or loose, perform cleaning by referring to “Toner dropping
from the bearing at the edge of the Developing Cylinder (Lower)” on page 966 and then reinstall the Edge Sheet
(Front)/(Rear).
• If it is bent or deformed, replace it by referring to the following procedure.
963
6. Troubleshooting
4. Turn over the Edge Sheet (Front) [1] and the Edge Sheet (Rear) [2], drop toner on the back onto paper and clean
them with dry lint-free paper.
• 3 Screws [3]
• 2 Edge Sheet Retainers [4]
NOTE:
Because replacement of the Edge Sheet (Front)/(Rear) will be performed in a later step, dry wipe them with lint-free paper on the
basis of necessity to prevent toner scattering.
[3]
3x
[4]
[3]
[4]
[2] [1]
CAUTION:
• Be sure to install the Edge Sheet Retainers [4] in the correction direction because the orientation is reversed according
to the location (front or rear) of the Edge Sheet.
• When installing the Edge Sheet Retainer [4], be sure to tighten the screw while holding the retainer with your fingers
to prevent it from rotating.
5. Drop toner on the 2 bearings [1] onto paper and clean them with dry lint-free paper.
[1] [1]
6. Remove the Edge Sheet (Front) [1] and the Edge Sheet (Rear) [2].
• 6 Double-sided tapes [3]
[2] [1]
[3]
[3]
964
6. Troubleshooting
7. Clean the areas where the Edge Sheets are affixed with lint-free paper.
8. Install a new Edge Sheet (Front)/(Rear).
CAUTION:
Be sure to secure the upper and lower sides of the Edge Sheet (Front)/(Rear) first, and then secure the center of it with
double-sided tapes.
1. Affix the upper side of the Edge Sheet (Front)/(Rear).

• [A] : Align the edge of the Edge Sheet [2] with the edge of the Developing Blade [1]. Standard +/- 0.5 mm
• [B] : Align the edge of double-sided tape on the Edge Sheet [2] with the edge of the Developing Blade [1]. Standard:
0 to + 0.5 mm
[2] [2]
[A] [A]
+ +
- -
[1] [1]
[B] [B]
2. Affix the lower side of the Edge Sheet (Front)/(Rear).

• Align the edges [C] and [D] of double-sided tape on the Edge Sheet [2] with the Collection Roller Retainer [1].
Standard: 0 to + 0.5 mm
[C] [2]
[2] [C]
+ +
- -
[D] [D]
[1] [1]
- + + -
965
6. Troubleshooting
3. With the center [A] of the Edge Sheet (Front)/(Rear) being pushed against the clearance between the Developing
Cylinders (Upper)/(Lower) (1), press the double-sided tape [1] from straight above and affix the sheet while paying
attention not to put too much force which cause the tape [1] slides aside (2).
NOTE:
Although illustrations of the front side are used, affix the rear side in the same manner.
[A]
[1]
CAUTION:
• Loose of the double-sided tape is not acceptable. (The area where the tape is loose becomes cloudy [A]. Press the
entire area of the double-sided tape with ball of a finger and the entire area of the tape becomes darker in color [B].)
• Double-sided tape must not be wrinkled.
[B]
[A]
9. After replacement, install the Developing Assembly to the host machine.
10. Output an image and check that the problem is solved.
■ Toner dropping from the bearing at the edge of the Developing Cylinder
(Lower)
[Cause]
Soiling may occur due to dropping of accumulated toner from the bearing at the edge of the Developing Cylinder
(Lower).
[Field Remedy]
2. Remove the Developing Cylinder Upper Cover. Refer to “Toner soiling at the edge of 13 x 19 size paper” on page
961
966
6. Troubleshooting
3. Check the status of the Edge Sheet (Front)/(Rear).

• If it is bent or deformed, replace it by referring to the “Displacement/loose of the Edge Sheet (Front)/(Rear)” on page
963.
• If replacement is not needed because of minor displacement or loose, perform cleaning by referring to the following
procedure and then reinstall the Edge Sheet (Front)/(Rear).
4. Turn over the Edge Sheet (Front) [1] and the Edge Sheet (Rear) [2], drop toner on the back onto paper and clean
them with dry lint-free paper.
• 3 Screws [3]
• 2 Edge Sheet Retainers [4]
CAUTION:
Do not remove the 6 double-sided tapes [1] on the Edge Sheet.
[1]
[1]
[3]
3x
[4]
[3]
[4]
[2] [1]
CAUTION:
• Be sure to install the Edge Sheet Retainers [4] in the correction direction because the orientation is reversed according
to the location (front or rear) of the Edge Sheet.
• When installing the Edge Sheet Retainer [4], be sure to tighten the screw while holding the retainer with your fingers
to prevent it from rotating.
967
6. Troubleshooting
5. Drop toner on the 2 bearings [1] onto paper and clean them with dry lint-free paper.
[1] [1]
6. After cleaning, install the Developing Assembly to the host machine.
■ Slip-through the Drum Cleaning Blade

[Cause]
Line-like soiling may occur due to adhesion of foreign matters on the Drum Cleaning Blade or the chipped Drum
Cleaning Blade.
[Field Remedy]
1. Remove the Drum Cleaning Blade Unit.
2. If there are any foreign matters, remove them.
3. Replace the Drum Cleaning Blade as necessary.
4. After performing the remedy work, install the Drum Cleaning Blade to the host machine.
Actions to Be Taken When Hue Variation Occurs (imagePRESS

Server B4100/B5100 Series)
[Description]
When the image output after Fiery calibration using a colorimeter (refer to NOTE 1) and the image output after Fiery calibration
using the color sensor are compared and a significant difference in hue is found, the image may be improved by executing
the adjustment shown below.
“Density Adjustment of Color Sensor (Only When imagePRESS Server Is Installed)” on page 888
Before working the adjustment, be sure to cleaning the color sensor.
“Cleaning the Color Sensor Unit” on page 608
NOTE 1:
This calibration can be executed by using the utility software (CWS or Fiery Color Profiler Suite). However, this calibration
using the color sensor is available only with CWS.
968
6. Troubleshooting
Faulty Feeding
Measure against 0110JAM (Secondary Transfer Outlet Sensor Delay

Jam)
[Location]
Secondary Transfer Outlet Sensor area
[Cause]
When the burr of paper is large (burr height is high) as a result of the cutting of paper, paper passes over the Secondary
Transfer Outlet Sensor (PS166) where it is outside a detection range, without being sufficiently attracted to the Secondary
Transfer Belt.
[Field Remedy]
Don't use when feeding paper with large burr (whose height is high) formed when paper was cut.
Measure against 0112JAM (Pre-fixing Feed Sensor 2 Delay Jam)

[Location]
Inlet of the Primary Fixing Assembly
[Cause]
Downward curl is increased at post-fixing (1st side) when 2-sided printing is performed using paper with high moisture content.
Since paper is curled upwards at fixing of the 2nd side, the leading edge is caught on the Fixing Upper Cover (plate), causing
corner bend or jam.
[Field Remedy]
Execute either of the following to correct the curl:
• Enter administrator mode and reduce the temperature control at the time of fixing.
1. In Settings/Registration > Preferences > Paper Settings > Paper Type Management Settings, select a paper type
and press [Duplicate].
2. Press [Details/ Edit] of the duplicated paper type, and press [Change] for <Gloss/Fine Black Adjustment>.
3. Change the value of [Gloss] to "the current value minus 2".
• Enter the administrator mode, and forcibly turn ON the Duplex Decurler.
1. In Settings/Registration > Preferences > Paper Settings > Paper Type Management Settings, select a paper type
and press [Duplicate].
2. Press [Details/ Edit] of the duplicated paper type, and press [Change] for <Adj. Paper Convey. (2-Sided)>.
3. Set the value of [Adj. Paper Convey. (2-Sided)] to "1".
Measure against 0300JAM (wrong detection of double feed) at

feeding of Washi (JPN Paper)
[Location]
Pre-registration area
[Cause]
When Washi (JPN Paper) such as "Kiku (93 g/m2)" is fed, the output of the sensor may be reduced due to the principle of
the Double Feed Sensor, resulting in the incorrect detection of double feed.
[Field Remedy]
Turn OFF double feed detection. (Set the following service mode (Lv.2) to "1".)
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > DUP-SNS
Actions to Take When Paper Double Feed Occurs

Double feed of paper is mainly caused by the following three factors:
• The paper used does not match the settings on the Control Panel (the fan level settings are not appropriate, etc.).
• The paper is not appropriately set in the deck. (The Paper Guide is not correctly set, etc.)
969
6. Troubleshooting
• The paper used has burrs or is curled.

If double feed occurs when paper is picked up from the host machine's deck or the POD Deck, follow the procedure shown below
to improve the failure.
■ 1. Checking the Fan Level Settings

1. Check that the weight and type of paper used match the settings on the Control Panel. (If the weight and type of
paper used do not match the pickup settings, it causes double feed and frequent jams.)
• If they match the settings, proceed to the next item.
• If they don't match the settings, configure the weight and type of the paper used.
If the symptom is not improved by changing the settings, proceed to the next step.
2. In Settings/Registration > Preferences > Paper Settings > Paper Type Management Settings > Adj. Fan Level for
Paper Sep., check that the Side Fan is set to "0" and the Separation Fan is set to "0". (If the fan level settings have
been changed to extremely high or low values, it causes double feed and frequent jams.)
• If both settings have been set to "0", proceed to the next item.
• Since the host machine automatically adjusts the fan levels in accordance with the paper and usage environment, if
the settings have been changed from the default value "0", change the fan level settings to "0".
If the symptom is not improved by changing the settings, proceed to the next step.
■ 2. Checking the Paper and Whether the Paper Is Correctly Set

1. Check that the paper is correctly set (whether or not the paper is loaded at an angle or haphazardly, and whether
or not there is a gap between the Trailing Edge Guide Plate/Side Guide Plate and the paper).
• If the paper is correctly set, proceed to the next step.
• If the paper is not correctly set, neatly and correctly set the paper.
If the symptom is not improved by performing this remedy, proceed to the next step.
2. Check the conditions of the paper (check for paper sticking together, burrs, soiling, or scratches).
• If the paper is in good condition, proceed to the next step.
• Remove the faulty paper, and flip through all four edges of the paper.
3. Check whether or not the stack of paper is curled. Turn over the paper, and check if it is curled in the opposite
direction.
• If the paper is not curled, proceed to the next item.
• If the paper is curled, set the whole stack of paper upside down (for information on the acceptable degree of curl, refer
to the media guide).
■ 3. Adjustment of the Fan Level for Paper Separation

Adjust the settings of "Adj. Fan Level for Paper Sep." in the Settings/Registration menu.
NOTE:
The fan level for paper separation basically does not require adjustment because the host machine automatically specifies the fan
level.
However, "double feed of thick coated paper" and "corner bend of thin paper" can be improved by changing the settings of "Adj.
Fan Level for Paper Sep." in some cases.
Be sure to understand "Mechanism of "Adj. Fan Level for Paper Sep."" and make the adjustment while checking the behavior of
the paper.
970
6. Troubleshooting
● Mechanism of "Adj. Fan Level for Paper Sep."

1. Set "1" in the following service mode.
Service mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > IMGC-ADJ
This allows you to configure the settings of "Adj. Fan Level for Paper Sep." for each paper type in "Settings/Registration"
shown below.
(The default value is 0, and the adjustment range is -5 to +5.)
• Settings/Registration > Preferences > Paper Settings > Paper Type Management Settings > Adj. Fan Level for Paper
Sep.
971
6. Troubleshooting
2. The settings of the Side Fan and Separation Fan at paper pickup are decided by selecting the most appropriate value from
the parameter values (1 to 25) in the table below on the basis of the paper size, surface nature, weight, and usage
environment.
The parameter value decided as shown above corresponds to the default value "0" of "Adj. Fan Level for Paper Sep." in the
Settings/Registration menu.
The fan levels of the Side Fan and the Separation Fan at paper pickup are decided on the basis of this value. When the
values of "Adj. Fan Level for Paper Sep." are changed from "0", the parameter value is changed accordingly.
Fan level image table

7 High 11 17 20 23 25
6 10 16 19 22 24
5 6 9 12 13 15 18 21
Overhead Fan
4 3 5 8 14
setting
3 4 7
2 2
1 Low 1
Low䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷䚷High
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Side Fan setting
• Side Fan
When printing is started, flotation air is blown onto the paper from the 3 Air Flotation Nozzles via the Flotation Air Duct.
The flotation air floats approx. 10 to 20 sheets of the surface layer paper.
[1] [2]
No. Name
[1] Air Flotation Nozzle
[2] Flotation Air Duct
972
6. Troubleshooting
• Separation Fan (Overhead FAN)

When printing is started, the Deck Pickup Solenoid is turned ON, the Suction Shutter opens, and air around the Suction
Duct is sucked out by the Paper Suction Fan. This makes paper attracted to the Attraction Belt.
At the same time, separation air is blown from the 6 Separation Nozzles via the Separation Air Duct to separate and
pick up the topmost sheet of paper.
[1]
[2] [4]
[3]
[5]
No. Name
[1] Deck Pickup Solenoid
[2] Attraction Belt
[3] Suction Duct
[4] Separation Nozzle
[5] Separation Air Duct
3. Usage environments fall into the following three environment types ("normal-temperature and low-humidity", "normal-
temperature and humidity", and "high-temperature and humidity") on the basis of the temperature and humidity measured
by the host machine.
Use environment table
Environment type Temperature (deg C) Humidity (%)

Normal-temperature and low-humidity 20 to 27 Up to 24
Normal-temperature and humidity 20 to 27 24 to 60
High-temperature and humidity From 28 From 61
The temperature and humidity can be checked in the following service mode.
• Display of the temperature (deg C)
Service mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG > TEMP2
• Display of the humidity (%)
Service mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG > HUM2
973
6. Troubleshooting
4. The table below is used to decide the most appropriate value for the fan level parameter at paper pickup on the basis of the
paper size (or the length in the feed direction and the paper width), surface nature, weight, and usage environment.
Fan level table by paper
Paper size Paper sur- Use Envi- Paper weight

face nature ronment 63 64 80 106 129 151 181 210 257 301
g/m2 g/m 2 g/m 2 g/m 2 g/m 2 g/m 2 g/m 2 g/m 2 g/m 2 g/m2
or to 79 to 105 to 128 to 150 to 180 to 209 to 256 to 300 to 350
less g/m2 g/m2 g/m2 g/m2 g/m2 g/m2 g/m2 g/m2 g/m2
B5-R/EXE-R Non-coated Normal- 1 5 9 9 15 15 15 19 22 25
(Length: less than paper *1 tempera-
270 mm, Width: 226 ture and
mm or less) low-hu-
midity
Normal- 1 5 9 9 15 15 15 19 22 25
tempera-
ture and
humidity
High-tem- 1 6 9 9 15 15 15 19 22 25
perature
and hu-
midity
Coated pa- Normal- 2 14 15 16 16 19 19 21 25
per *2 tempera-
ture and
low-hu-
midity
Normal- 5 14 15 16 16 22 22 23 25
tempera-
ture and
humidity
High-tem- 6 14 15 16 16 22 22 23 25
perature
and hu-
midity
B5/EXE Non-coated Normal- 3 6 15 15 15 15 15 19 22 25
mm or less) low-hu-
midity
Normal- 3 6 15 15 15 15 15 19 22 25
tempera-
ture and
humidity
High-tem- 3 6 15 15 15 15 19 22 22 25
perature
and hu-
midity
Coated pa- Normal- 9 15 15 16 16 22 22 23 25
per *2 tempera-
ture and
low-hu-
midity
Normal- 9 15 15 16 16 22 22 23 25
tempera-
ture and
humidity
High-tem- 15 15 15 16 16 22 22 23 25
perature
and hu-
midity
974
6. Troubleshooting

g/m2 g/m2 g/m2 g/m2 g/m2 g/m2 g/m2 g/m2 g/m2 g/m2
A4/LTR Non-coated Normal- 3 11 11 20 20 20 20 23 23 23
mm or less) low-hu-
midity
Normal- 3 11 11 23 23 23 23 23 23 23
tempera-
ture and
humidity
High-tem- 3 11 11 23 23 23 23 23 23 25
perature
and hu-
midity
Coated pa- Normal- 9 15 15 19 19 23 23 21 23
per *2 tempera-
ture and
low-hu-
midity
Normal- 11 15 15 19 19 23 23 23 23
tempera-
ture and
humidity
High-tem- 9 16 19 22 22 23 23 23 25
perature
and hu-
midity
LTR-R/A4-R Non-coated Normal- 2 10 10 16 17 20 20 23 23 25
330 mm) ture and
low-hu-
midity
Normal- 2 10 10 16 20 20 23 23 23 25
tempera-
ture and
humidity
High-tem- 2 10 10 16 20 20 23 23 23 25
perature
and hu-
midity
Coated pa- Normal- 8 9 17 17 17 20 23 21 25
per *2 tempera-
ture and
low-hu-
midity
Normal- 9 9 17 20 20 23 23 23 25
tempera-
ture and
humidity
High-tem- 9 9 17 20 20 23 23 23 25
perature
and hu-
midity
LGL/B4 Non-coated Normal- 7 9 9 16 20 20 23 23 23 25
370 mm) ture and
low-hu-
midity
975
6. Troubleshooting

LGL/B4 Non-coated Normal- 8 9 9 16 20 20 23 23 23 25
370 mm) ture and
humidity
High-tem- 8 9 9 16 20 20 23 23 23 25
perature
and hu-
midity
Coated pa- Normal- 8 9 16 20 20 23 23 23 25
per *2 tempera-
ture and
low-hu-
midity
Normal- 10 10 16 20 20 23 23 23 25
tempera-
ture and
humidity
High-tem- 10 10 16 20 20 23 23 23 25
perature
and hu-
midity
A3/LDR Non-coated Normal- 9 17 17 20 20 20 23 23 23 23
440 mm) ture and
low-hu-
midity
Normal- 9 17 17 20 20 20 23 23 23 23
tempera-
ture and
humidity
High-tem- 9 17 17 23 23 23 23 23 23 23
perature
and hu-
midity
Coated pa- Normal- 10 10 17 20 20 23 23 23 23
per *2 tempera-
ture and
low-hu-
midity
Normal- 10 10 17 20 20 23 23 23 23
tempera-
ture and
humidity
High-tem- 10 10 17 20 20 23 23 23 23
perature
and hu-
midity
SRA3/12x18/13x19 Non-coated Normal- 9 17 17 20 20 23 23 23 23 23
(Length: 440 mm or paper *1 tempera-
more) ture and
low-hu-
midity
Normal- 9 17 17 20 20 23 23 23 23 23
tempera-
ture and
humidity
976
6. Troubleshooting

SRA3/12x18/13x19 Non-coated High-tem- 9 17 17 23 23 23 23 23 23 23
(Length: 440 mm or paper *1 perature
more) and hu-
midity
Coated pa- Normal- 10 10 17 23 20 23 23 23 23
per *2 tempera-
ture and
low-hu-
midity
Normal- 10 10 17 23 20 23 23 23 23
tempera-
ture and
humidity
High-tem- 10 10 17 23 20 23 23 23 23
perature
and hu-
midity
*1: Surface nature of paper that belongs to "non-coated paper" indicates those other than the foregoing three types such as
"uncoated paper, recycled paper, label paper, and tab paper".
*2: Surface nature of paper that belongs to "coated paper" indicates "2-sided coated, 1-sided coated, and matte coated".
Example: In the case of A4R plain paper, temperature: 20 deg C, humidity: 40 %, paper weight: 80 g/m2
According to the usage environment table, this usage environment falls into a normal-temperature and humidity environment.
According to the fan level table by paper, the fan level parameter value is "10". In this case, the setting value of the Side Fan is
"3", and the setting value of the Separation Fan is "6".
When the fan level parameter value is "10", the default value of "Adj. Fan Level for Paper Sep." is "0".
With respect to the default value "0" of "Adj. Fan Level for Paper Sep.", the fan levels of the Side Fan and the Separation Fan
can be respectively adjusted in the range between +5 (plus direction) and -5 (minus direction).

7 High 11 17 20 23 25
6 10 16 19 22 24
5 6 9 12 13 15 18 21
Overhead Fan
4 3 5 8 14
setting
3 4 7
2 2
1 Low 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Side Fan setting
977
6. Troubleshooting
CAUTION:
The Side Fan and the Separation Fan can be independently adjusted.
For example, in order to change the parameter from "10" to "12" in the table above, increase the Side Fan setting by "1"
and decrease the Separation Fan setting by "1".
As shown in the table of combination above, there are 25 patterns of default fan level parameter for "Adj. Fan Level for
Paper Sep."
In the range of the 9 levels for the Side Fan or the 7 levels for the Separation Fan, the setting value of each fan level can
be increased/decreased by up to 5 with respect to the default fan level parameter.
However, the fan level is not adjusted to a value that exceeds the upper limit (or the lower limit) of the range of the 9 levels
for the Side Fan or the 7 levels for the Separation Fan.
For example, in the case of increasing the setting value of the Separation Fan by 3 with respect to the fan level parameter
"10", the actual result is the same with the case of increasing the setting value of the Separation Fan by 1.
● Operation Procedure of "Adj. Fan Level for Paper Sep."

The operation procedures for two use case examples are shown below.
a. Double feed of A3 thick coated paper of 128 g/m2 in a high-temperature and humidity environment
In a high-temperature and humidity environment, sheets of paper tend to stick together, and this may cause double feed.
1. Check the fan level table by paper and find the fan level parameter (the default value of "Adj. Fan Level for Paper
Sep.") on the basis of the conditions (high-temperature and humidity environment, A3 paper, thick paper of 128
g/m2, and coated paper) where this symptom occurs.
In this case, the default value of the fan level parameter is "17" according to the fan level table by paper, and this corresponds
to the default value "0" of "Adj. Fan Level for Paper Sep.".
2. Adjust the fan level for paper separation

The Separation Fan setting is already "7", which is the strongest level.
In the case of double feed like this, the double feed can be improved by changing the fan level parameter to "20", where the
Side Fan setting is increased with the Separation Fan setting unchanged (by increasing the Side Fan setting by 1 from the
default value "0").

7 High 11 17 20 23 25
6 10 16 19 22 24
5 6 9 12 13 15 18 21
Overhead Fan
4 3 5 8 14
setting
3 4 7
2 2
1 Low 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Side Fan setting
b. Corner bend on A4 thin paper of 60 g/m2 in a normal-temperature and low-humidity environment

When paper is curled downward, the interval between sheets becomes too long depending on the Separation Fan setting, and
the edge of paper tends to droop.
As a result, the paper bumps against the guide and the corner of the paper is bent in some cases.
1. This symptom occurs because the paper edge tends to droop due to curl, so lower the setting value of the Separation
Fan and set the paper upside down.
This makes the paper curled upward, which is advantageous for preventing corner bend, and solves the problem in some
cases.
2. Check the fan level table by paper and find the fan level parameter (the default value of "Adj. Fan Level for Paper
Sep.") on the basis of the conditions (normal-temperature and low-humidity environment, A4 paper, thin paper of
60 g/m2, and non-coated paper) where this symptom occurs.
In this case, the default value is "3" according to the fan level table by paper, and this corresponds to the default value "0"
of "Adj. Fan Level for Paper Sep.".
978
6. Troubleshooting
3. Adjust the fan level for paper separation

In this case, the corner bend is improved by decreasing the Separation Fan setting to "1" (by decreasing the Separation Fan
setting by 3 from the default value "0") without changing the Side Fan setting.

7 High 11 17 20 23 25
6 10 16 19 22 24
5 6 9 12 13 15 18 21
Overhead Fan
4 3 5 8 14
setting
3 4 7
2 2
1 Low 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Side Fan setting
■ 4. How to Check Paper Behavior

1. Pull out the host machine's deck, and turn OFF the main power switch.
2. Remove the Lower Feed Cover [1].

• 5 Screws [2]
[2] [1]
5x
3. Remove the Connector Cover [1].

• 1 Screw [2]
1x [1] [2]
979
6. Troubleshooting
4. Free the harness from the 3 Wire Saddles [1] and the Edge Saddle [2], and straighten the folded harness [a]. Secure
the harness with the 2 Wire Saddles [1] and the Edge Saddle [2] again.
CAUTION:
• Do not damage the harnesses with the edge of the plate.
• Do not disconnect the connector. If the connector is disconnected when the power is turned ON, forced shutdown
needs to be performed.
[2] [1]
4x
[a]
980
6. Troubleshooting
5. Remove the Deck Front Cover [1].

• 4 Screws [2]
• 4 Washers [3]
CAUTION:
Before removing the Deck Front Cover, be sure to write marking lines on the 4 screws [A] in order to mark the installation
position of the Deck Front Cover.
[A]
[A]
[A]
[2] [2]
[3] [3]
4x
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
6. Open the 4 Wire Saddles [1] and the Reuse Band [2] on the back side of the Deck Front Cover, and free the harness
in the area [a] indicated with a red circle.
981
6. Troubleshooting
7. Set approx. 500 sheets of paper [4] in the deck [3], and close the deck [3].
CAUTION:
• Do not damage the harnesses with the edge of the plate.
• When closing the deck, be careful not to scratch the Front Cover against the floor and damage the external surface.
[4]
4x
[3]
[a]
[1]
[2]
8. Select the host machine's deck, and make a 1-sided copy on 100 sheets.
During this operation, check the condition of the paper [1] from the red frame shown in the picture below.
[1]
If the fan level is appropriate

The floating sheets of paper are almost evenly separated from each other, and the number of floating sheets of paper [a] is
stable at 10 to 20 sheets.
The uppermost sheet of the floating paper is approx. 10 mm [b] below the ceiling in the deck.
The leading edge of paper is not pushed downward or finely vibrated by the air.
982
6. Troubleshooting
If the fan level is too strong

Some sheets of paper are floating in a bundle [b] near the ceiling [a] in the deck.
If the fan level is too weak

No more than 5 sheets of paper [a] are floating.
The number of sheets that are floating keeps changing approximately every 10 sheets.
983
6. Troubleshooting
Controller Self Diagnosis
Introduction
Operation of the (2 types of) error diagnosis tools added to the main body and remedy for errors are described. These tools can
reduce time to determine cause of errors occurred in field and improve the accuracy of specifying error locations.
This manual can be applied when the main body is placed in the following conditions.
• An error is suspected to have occurred in the Main Controller PCB 1/2 and other related PCBs (child PCBs such as SDRAM
or TPM mounted in the Main Controller PCB 1/2).
• Startup takes too long (the progress bar seems to stop halfway), or the Touch Panel of the Control Panel is slow to respond.
(<S.M.A.R.T Check>)
PCBs and units diagnosed by each tool are as follow:
Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool

• Main Controller PCB 1 side <Main Controller PCB 1, SDRAM, TPM PCB>
• Main Controller PCB 2 side <Main Controller PCB 2, SDRAM (M0, M1), SDRAM (P), SDRAM (S), Memory PCB, Open I/F
PCB>
• Rizer PCB / HDD
Overview
Error diagnosis tools are installed in this machine, and stored in the locations shown below.
Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool covers the components shown in the blue frame (dotted line).
'&&RQWUROOHU
3&%
+'' 5HDGHU
2SWLRQ
Flash PCB
Controller system
failure diagnosis
tool
0DLQ 0DLQ
5LVHU3&%
&RQWUROOHU3&% &RQWUROOHU3&%
2SHUDWLRQ $OOQLJKW 2SWLRQ

SDQHO 1RQDOOULJKW
3RZHU6XSSO\
■ Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool

This tool automatically checks the Main Controller PCB 1/2, child PCBs mounted on the Main Controller PCB 1/2, and HDD, and
display the result on the Control Panel.
984
6. Troubleshooting
● Layout Drawing
Layout Drawing of PCBs Subject to Diagnosis
Riser
SRAM FLASH
Counter
Main
Controller 2
Memory TPM
1GB
HDD
Memory 512MB
VIDEO
Main Controller 1
Main Controller PCB 1
DDR2-SDRAM DDR2-SDRAM
(On Board) (DIMM)
J12
J13 㻰㻵㻼㼋㻿㼃㼋㻭㻌㻮㻻㻭㻾㻰
BAT1
External I/F
Internal I/F
J1010 J14
Riser
Bypass I/F
/ open I/F
J22
Reader
985
6. Troubleshooting
Basic Flowchart
Check all of the items shown below.
Turn O N the m ain power s witc h.
Does the Power Supply LED

No
on the Control Panel light up? Ex ec ute bas ic c hec k.
Yes
No Ex ec ute Controller Sy s tem Error

Does the main body boot c orrec tly ?
Diagnos is Tool.
Yes
Take an ac tion appropriate f or

the error.
Basic Check Items

1. Check if the Leakage Breaker is turned OFF
2. Check if the Power Supply Plug is disconnected.
3. Check if the Connection Cable between the Main Controller PCB 1 and Control Panel is disconnected.
4. Check if the Connection Main Controller PCB 1 and Main Controller PCB 2 definitely?
5. Check if the Connection An All-night Power Supply. Change Non-all-night Power Supply if not recovered.
Controller System Error Diagnosis

■ Boot Method
1. Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the numeric keys '2' and '4' simultaneously.
986
6. Troubleshooting
2. Keep pressing the numeric keys (for approx. 20 seconds) until the following screen appears on the Control Panel.
NOTE:
When this tool is not installed correctly, the following regular screen is displayed.
In this case, perform the following remedy.

Turn OFF the Main Power Supply Switch again, and execute step 1 and 2 shown above.
If this tool still does not boot, it means that BCT is deleted. So, install BCT.
If BCT is not installed correctly, "--.--" is displayed in Service Mode in the main body.
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION > BCT
3. Wait for a while until the diagnosis is completed.

Diagnosis is completed in approx. 3 minutes.
<When the diagnosis result is normal>
<When an error is detected by diagnosis>

Detailed information is displayed under the judgment result. In detailed information, the name of the test where the error
was detected is displayed.
Judgment
result
Detailed
information
987
6. Troubleshooting
■ When an error is detected by diagnosis

Detailed information is displayed under the judgment result.
[no] means that optional PCBs are not mounted. When [no] is displayed although an optional PCB is mounted, it means that an
error has been occurring.
[NG] means that an error occurred to PCBs mounted as standard.
● Controller System Error Diagnosis Table

The error locations are identified according to the following table.
Test Name Description Assumed Error Location Remedy Error Code

SN-1 Check an error between the • Main Controller PCB 1 1. Replace the Main Controller -
MN-DDR2 Main Controller PCB 1 and • SDRAM on Main Controller PCB 1.
SDRAM SDRAM on the Main Control- PCB 1
ler PCB 1.
SN-2 Check an SM bus error in • Main Controller PCB 1 1. Replace the Main Controller -
SM BUS MN SDRAM (outside) on the • SDRAM (outside) on Main PCB 1.
DIMM1 Main Controller PCB 1. Controller PCB 1
SM BUS MN Clock Generator on the Main PCB 1.
DIMM2 Controller PCB 1.
SM BUS MN Clock Gen on the Main Con- PCB 1.
Clock Gen troller PCB 1.
SN-5 Check an SM bus error in the • Main Controller PCB 1 1. Check the connection of the -
SM BUS SOC Main Controller PCB 1 and • Main Controller PCB 2 Main Controller PCB 1, and the
DIMM2 the Main Controller PCB 2. • SDRAM on Main Controller Main Controller PCB 2.
PCB 2 2. Check the installation of
SDRAM (M0) on the Main Con-
troller PCB 2.
3. Replace SDRAM (M0) on the
Main Controller PCB 2.
4. Replace the Main Controller
PCB 2.
PCB 1.
SN-6 Check a PCI bus error in the • Main Controller PCB 1 1. Check the connection of the -
PCI Configura- Main Controller PCB 1 and • Main Controller PCB 2 Main Controller PCB 1, and the
tion Maestro the Main Controller PCB 2. • SDRAM on Main Controller Main Controller PCB 2.
PCB 2 2. Replace the Main Controller
PCB 1.
PCB 2.
SN-7 Check a LAN chip error on • Main Controller PCB 1 1. Replace the Main Controller -
PCI Configura- the Main Controller PCB 1. PCB 1.
tion LANC
SN-9 Check failure of CPLD chip • Main Controller PCB 1 1. Replace the Main Controller -
CPLD on the Main Controller PCB PCB 1.
1.
SN-10 Check failure of LANC SPI on • Main Controller PCB 1 1. Replace the Main Controller -
LANC FLASH the Main Controller PCB 1. PCB 1.
SN-11 Check failure of RTC on the • Main Controller PCB 1 1. Replace the Main Controller -
RTC CHECK Main Controller PCB 1. PCB 1.
988
6. Troubleshooting

SN-12 Check failure of the TPM • Main Controller PCB 1 1. Check the installation of the E746
TPM PCB on the Main Controller • TPM PCB TPM PCB.
PCB 1 2. Replace the TPM PCB.
* TPM PCB is not installed in 3. Replace the Main Controller
products for China. So, the PCB 1.
diagnosis results NG.
SN-13 Check an error between • Main Controller PCB 2 1. Check the installation of -
M-DDR2 SDRAMs on the Main Con- • SDRAM (M0) on Main Con- SDRAM (M0) on the Main Con-
SDRAM troller PCB 2. troller PCB 2 troller PCB 2.
2. Replace SDRAM (M0) on the
PCB 2.
SN-14 Check failure of CPU ROM • Main Controller PCB 2 1. Replace the Main Controller -
FLASH ROM (IC60) on the Main Controller PCB 2
PCB
SN-15 Check an error between the • SDRAM (P) on Main Control- 1. Check the connection of the E747 / E748
P-DDR3 Main Controller PCB 2 and ler PCB 2 Open I/F board.
SDRAM SDRAM (P) on the Main Con- • Open I/F board 2. Replace the Main Controller
troller PCB 2. PCB 2
SN-16 Check failure of Rchip • Main Controller PCB 2 1. Check the connection of the E747 / E748
GOR(R)-DDR2 SDRAM on the Main Control- • Open I/F PCB Open I/F board.
SDRAM ler PCB 2.
SN-17 Check failure of Schip • Main Controller PCB 2 1. Replace the Main Controller E747 / E748 /
S-DDR3 SDRAM on the Main Control- PCB 2 E732
SDRAM ler PCB 2.
SN-18 Check failure of Ochip • Main Controller PCB 2 1. Check the connection of the E747 / E748
GOR(O)-DDR2 SDRAM on the Open I/F • Open I/F PCB Open I/F board.
SDRAM PCB. 2. Replace the Open I/F PCB.
PCB 2
Supplementary Information: If the
Open I/F PCB is not installed, [no] is
displayed for the diagnosis result.
SN-19 Check a GUBUS error on the • Main Controller PCB 2 1. Check the installation of the E747 / E748
GU BUS Main Controller PCB 2. • Open I/F PCB Open I/F PCB on the Main Con-
troller PCB 2.
2. Replace the Open I/F PCB on
the Main Controller PCB 2.
PCB 2
SN-20 Check failure between the • Main Controller PCB 2 1. Check the installation of the E355
FRAM Main Controller PCB 2 and • Memory PCB Memory PCB on the Main Con-
the Memory PCB. troller PCB 2
2. Replace the Memory PCB on
the Main Controller PCB 2.
PCB 2.
SN-21 Check failure of SDRAM and • Main Controller PCB 2 1. Replace the Main Controller E246 / E350 /
SRAM battery exhaustion on the PCB 2. E355
SN-22 Check an HDD I/F error. • Main Controller PCB 2 1. Check the cable connection of -
HDD • HDD Cable the HDD.
• HDD 2. Check the connection of the
Main Controller PCB 1, and the
3. Replace the HDD.
SN-23 Fan rotation check • Main Controller PCB 1 1. Check the connection of the
FAN • Riser PCB Fan Connector (J15) of the IA
PCB (Main Controller PCB 1).
2. Check the connection of the
Fan Connector (J109/J110) of
the Riser PCB.
989
6. Troubleshooting

SN-100 HDD S.M.A.R.T information • HDD • If the result(S.M.A.R.T Check)
HDD HEALTH collection and performance is not [0], recommend the back-
CHECK check (Refer to the display up of user data.
example shown below.) • If "Performance" is [20 MB/s] or
less, recommend to replace the
HDD.
• If the result(CheckResult) is
CAUTION, recommend the
backup of user data.
• If the result(Exec SN-100 HDD
HEALTHCHECK) is NG, re-
place the HDD.
● Display HDD S.M.A.R.T

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SN-23 FAN check start. . .
Exec SN-23 FAN => [OK] S.M.A.R.T Check -----
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SN-100 HDD HEALTH CHECK check start. . .
05: Reallcated Sectors Count:[000000000000] Refer to <S.M.A.R.T Check>.
S.M.A.R.T Check -----
05 : Reallocated Sectors Count :[00000000000000] See below.
c5 : Current Pending Sector Count :[00000000000000] C5: Current Pending Sector Count:[000000000000]
c6 : Uncorrectable Sector Count :[00000000000000]
Read Performance Check ----- C6: Uncorrectable Sector Count:[000000000000]
136. 8 [MB/s]
CheckResult => [NORMAL]
Exec SN-100 HDD HEALTH CHECK => [OK]
========================================== Read Performance Check ----- If "Performance" is [20 MB/s] or less,
Exec SCENARIO-1 Processing BoxMode => [OK]
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% [90.8MB/s] recommend to replace the HDD.
%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%% %%%%% %%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%% %%%%%%%% %%%% %%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%% %% %%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%%%% CheckResult => [NORMAL]
%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%
%%%%%%% %%%%%%%% %%%%%%% %%%%
%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%%
If the result is CAUTION,
%%%%%%%%%%% %%%%%%%%%% %%%%%% %%%%%%% Exec SN-100 HDD HEALTH CHECK => [OK] recommend the backup of user data.
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
>> The result of Box chexcker is displayed below. ===================================
[NO] : SN-8 PCI Configuration PCI-Bridge
[NO] : SN-18 GOR(0)-DDR2 SDRAM
Exec SCENARIO-1 Preocessing BoxMode => [OK]
--- Please hit Reset Key to start shutdown. ---
If the result is NG, replace the HDD.
<S.M.A.R.T Check>
S.M.A.R.T Check Explanation Countermeasure

05: Reallcated Sectors Count: Count of reallocated sectors. [If the result is not [0000000000000], recommend the backup
[000000000000] of user data.
C5: Current Pending Sector Count: Current count of unstable sectors. If the result is not [0000000000000], recommend the backup
[000000000000] (waiting for remapping) of user data.
C6: Uncorrectable Sector Count: Quantity of uncorrectable errors. If the result is not [0000000000000],
[0000000000000] • recommend the backup of user data.
• eplace the HDD.
* Alarm 31-0008 may occur in the main body.
NOTE:
Correspondence at the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit use.
The SMART contents are diagnosis results of the master HDD.
In case the master HDD cannot be located, turn OFF/ ON the power to check whether the green LED is lit on the LED PCB.
The firstly blinked green LED (ChA or ChB) in a high speed tells the Master HDD, which is accessed firstly.The green LED not
lit on a channel tells the location of Backup HDD.
● Restrictions
<Controller System Error Diagnosis>
• Regarding the diagnosis for the test names (SN-1, 2, 7, 15, 21), if an error occurs in the diagnosis under the test names, this
diagnosis tool will not boot.
• When no PCBs are installed on the Main Controller PCB 1/2, the following judgment results are displayed.
• Standard PCB: [NG]
• Optional PCB: [OK]
However, [no] is displayed in detailed error information for optional PCBs.
990
6. Troubleshooting
Debug log
Purpose
When the Canon quality-appointed staff determines the need for an analysis of debug log by the R&D department, we ask the
field to collect log for an investigation to determine the cause.
Overview
■ Function Overview
Debug log is an integrated log for failure analysis that gathers logs prepared by the software modules in the device for debug
purpose.
In the case of a field failure that is hard to be reproduced, this measure is intended to improve efficiency in failure analysis and
reduce the time for failure support by collecting debug log at the user site (which was created immediately after the failure) and
sending it to the R&D.
When the Canon quality-appointed staff determines the need for an analysis of firmware debug log by the R&D department, we
ask the field to collect log for an investigation to determine the cause.
● Effective Instances of Collecting Debug Log

• The error occurs only at the customer site and cannot be reproduced by the sales company or the Canon staff who is in
charge of quality follow-up.
• When the error frequency is low.
• When the error is suspected of links with firmware rather than a mechanical/electrical failure.
* Collection of Sublog is not necessary when the reproduction procedure is identified and the error can be reproduced by
the sales company HQ or the Canon staff who is in charge of quality follow-up.
■ Conditions for Obtaining Logs

● Cases where Logs Cannot Be Obtained
In the following cases, the procedure for obtaining logs is not required because logs cannot be obtained.
• When the background of the Control Panel is solid black and an error code is displayed in text
• When the device is frozen on the startup screen
• When the device repeats the startup process and does not become available
● Prerequisites for Obtaining Logs

• If a problem has occurred, suspend operations where possible. If operations are continued or jobs are executed even after
a problem has occurred, the log of the problem may not be able to be obtained because it is overwritten.
• While the problem is occurring or quickly after the problem occurs, save the debug log to a backup area before turning OFF
and then ON the power.
• Ask the user to make a note of the date and time when the problem occurred and the procedure.
• If the user notifies the log has been saved, collect the log.
• The DEBUG PCB ASS'Y Board may need to be installed to obtain the log, depending on the problem.
NOTE:
The DEBUG SRAM PCB ASS'Y Board is required when the following problems occur.
• Problems relating to restart
• Problems that cause the Control Panel to become inoperable
• Problems relating to recovery from deep sleep
■ Obtaining Logs
● Flow of Determining the Procedure for Obtaining Logs
Check the following flow to determine the procedure for obtaining logs according to the type of problem.
991
6. Troubleshooting
Service call for trouble
<DEBUG SRAM PCB ASSY Board: Required>
Does the problem See Case A of

repeat restart? the "Procedure for Obtaining Logs"
Does the problem

See Case B of
cause the Control Panel
the "Procedure for Obtaining Logs"
to be locked?
Is the problem related See Case C of

to the sleep mode? the "Procedure for Obtaining Logs"
<DEBUG SRAM PCB ASSY Board: Not required>
Is the problem still See Case D of

occurring or just finished the "Procedure for Obtaining Logs"
occurring?
See Case D of the "Procedure

for Obtaining Logs"
Case Details of Problem DEBUG SRAM PCB Procedure for Obtaining Logs
ASS'Y Board
Case A Problem that repeats restart Necessary 1. Install the DEBUG SRAM PCB ASS'Y Board.
2. Save the log in the HDD immediately after restart.
3. Collect the log from the HDD with SST, etc.
Case B Problem causing the Control Necessary 1. Install the DEBUG SRAM PCB ASS'Y Board.
Panel to be locked 2. Turn OFF and then ON the power immediately after
the Control Panel is locked.
3. Save the log in the HDD after startup.
Case C Problem related to the sleep Necessary 1. Install the DEBUG SRAM PCB ASS'Y Board.
mode 2. After the problem occurs, turn OFF and then ON the
power if necessary, and save the log in the HDD.
Case D Problem when executing a job Not needed. 1. Save the log in the HDD while the problem is occur-
(Example: Printing is not per- ring.
formed, etc.) 2. Collect the log from the HDD with SST, etc.
When an E code error has oc- Not needed. 1. Collect the log from the HDD with SST, etc.
curred However, if the background of the Control Panel is solid
black and an error code is displayed in text, logs cannot
be obtained.
Case E Problems other than above Not needed. 1. Collect the log from the HDD with SST, etc.
Check with the user on the date and time when the prob-
lem occurred and the procedure.
<Remarks>
DEBUG SRAM PCB ASS'Y Board is a service tool.
992
6. Troubleshooting
An installation example is shown below.
DEBUG SRAM PCB
● Types of Logs
There are continuous logs, event logs, and manual logs.
<Manual log collection procedure>
1. Hold down the [Counter] button (10 seconds or longer).
2. Press 1 on the numeric keypad.

While logs are being obtained, the screen is locked. It takes approx. 10 minutes before obtaining the logs is completed and
the user can work on the screen.
● Conditions of Log Collection

Logs can be collected on a PCB-by-PCB basis. (SUBLOG, SUBLOG_RCON, SUBLOG_DCON)
Location File name Automatic collection Manual collection

Logs generated while Event log Manual log
the host machine is When an event has oc-
being operated curred
Main Controller SUBLOG Yes Yes Yes
Reader Controller SUBLOG_RCON No Yes Yes
DC Controller SUBLOG_DCON No Yes Yes
● Collection of Logs
1. Connect SST or a USB memory to the host machine.
993
6. Troubleshooting
2. Select the following service mode, and then select [OK] to start log collection.
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD
● Description of Log to be Collected

When operation from the Control Panel or an event log (exceptional operation, error code, or reboot) occurs, the number of logs
increases.
Logs are stored from the latest one, and the latest file is always stored.
Logs earlier than those logs are overwritten and deleted from the oldest log.
When collecting logs from the machine, the log file in the machine is deleted.
NOTE:
The number of files stored differs depending on the model and situation.
Previous !me
Delete 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
This !me
Delete Delete 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Collecting System Information

■ Collection Destination
To retrieve debug log to an external location from the device, use a USB flash drive, FTP server or SST (Ver. 4.75 or later).
● Collection Method
Retrieve debug log from the machine by any of the following methods.
• Make the machine recognize the USB flash drive. In the following service mode, press [OK].
• Use SST on a PC with the network cable connected to transfer the debug log.
• Transfer the debug log to a USB flash drive that stores the system of the machine.
● File Name of Sublog

Whether the file is new or old can be judged by the year, month, day, hour, and minute.
SUBLOG04_0014_0515204388.Z
Layer number mmddhhmm
Sequence number
● Collecting Debug Log (USB flash drive)
NOTE:
When the data is sent to the USB flash drive: USB flash drive where the system software for this machine has been registered
using the SST.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the machine.
USB Port
994
6. Troubleshooting
2. Select the following service mode, and then press [OK].

3. [5] Execute [BACKUP].
>>>>>GRZQORDG0HQX86%@@@@@@@@@@@

>@8SJUDGH$XWR
>@8SJUDGHZ&RQILUPDWLRQ
>@8SJUDGH2YHUZULWHDOO
>@)RUPDW+''
>@%DFNXS
>@&OHDUGRZQORDGHGILOHV
>@GRZQORDG0HQX
>@2WKHU0HQX
>5HVHW@6KXWGRZQ
4. [1] Execute [Sublog].
㼇㼇㼇㼇㼇㻌㻮㼍㼏㼗㼡㼜㻌㻹㼑㼚㼡㻌㻔㼁㻿㻮㻕㻌㼉㼉㼉㼉㼉㼉㼉㼉㼉㼉㼉㼉
ーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーー
㼇㻝㼉㻦㻌㻿㼡㼎㼘㼛㼓
㼇㻠㼉㻦㻌㻿㼑㼞㼢㼕㼏㼑㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠
㼇㻡㼉㻦㻌㻺㼑㼠㼏㼍㼜
㼇㻢㼉㻦㻌㻿㻾㻭㻹㻔㻴㻰㻰㻕
㼇㻣㼉㻦㻌㻿㻾㻭㻹㻔㼁㻿㻮㻕
㼇㻯㼉㻦㻌㻾㼑㼠㼡㼞㼚㻌㼠㼛㻌㻹㼍㼕㼚㻌㻹㼑㼚㼡
● When the data is sent to the USB flash drive

A folder of the year, month, day, hour, and minute is created in the USB flash drive. The log file is saved in the folder.
995
6. Troubleshooting
Example: Folder 201205241821
■ Uploading Data by SST

The following shows a method to collect a log by connecting a PC with SST (Ver. 4.75 or later) running to the machine.
Preconditions:
In addition to continuous logs, obtained manual logs (holding down the counter + 1, 2, and 3 keys) and event logs (DEBUG-1)
are stored in the machine.
A PC where SST is running is connected to the machine, and the machine is in download mode.
NOTE:
Executing a log collection by SST deletes logs in the machine.
1. Start SST (Ver. 4.75 or later) and select iPRC800 from Model List. Press the Start button.
996
6. Troubleshooting
2. Press the Upload Data button.
3. Select the data to be uploaded, then click [Start] button.

When there is no log in the machine, it results in blank option items for "data to upload". When the file name is longer than
the frame, it displays that it is a log in the comment column just below.
It is displayed as "log" in the figure below.
NOTE:
The log is not stored when You cancel it before pushing the Start button.
It is deleted from the main body.
4. Press the "Save" button.
997
6. Troubleshooting
5. Check that the data storage is completed and click the "OK" button.
6. Check that the log is stored in the specified location in the PC.
Initial setting:
Windows(C:) > ServData > iPRC800(Model) > JWH00003(Serial number) > 20120524192934-Log(yymmddhhmm)
When to Obtain Logs

The assumed procedure to be taken when a request for log collection has been received is shown below.
■ Preconditions
When the Canon staff who is in charge of quality follow-up determines the need for an analysis of debug log by the R&D
department, log collection is requested via sales company HQ. Logs are used to determine the cause.
998
6. Troubleshooting
■ Anticipated log collection procedure
NOTE:
• Prepare a USB flash drive of 2 GB or more in capacity as the USB flash drive used for log collection. It is necessary in order
to secure enough capacity when logs are obtained multiple times.
• As for the collected logs, all the logs moved to the USB flash drive should be sent.
• The logs are directly saved to the HDD. It is assumed that logs of a day (if various operations are continuously performed) or
logs of approx. 30 days (in the case of common use) can be stored. In the case of logs within the foregoing assumed storage
period, it is rare that the logs are overwritten and need to be collected again.
1. Contact the user to identify the date and time the failure to be analyzed occurred.
The date and time of occurrence is used to judge whether it is included in the dates and times of the obtained log files.
In order to shorten the time required for analysis, be sure to obtain the date and time of occurrence together with the collected
logs.
If multiple failures have occurred, the dates and times of those failures need to be informed.
The date and time of occurrence do not always need to be accurate.
2. At the user’s site, enter download mode and obtain logs.
3. Check that files of around the specified date are included in the logs.
4. If the symptom can be reproduced, reproduce it.
5. Press the counter + 1, 2, and 3 keys to obtain logs.
6. Collect all the obtained logs.
■ Checking the name of the log file

Check the date of the file whose name begins with SUBLOG00_00. It is highly possible that files of around the date and time the
symptom occurred contain information recorded at the time when the failure occurred.
SUBLOG04_0014_0515204388.Z
Layer number mmddhhmm
Sequence number
An example of log acquisition when the occurrence date has been specified
An example of a failure which occurred around 20:38 on October 3:
Around 20:38 on October 3

↓
The time when the status is assumed It is highly possible that logs recorded
The time when the symptom is
to have changed from normal operation at the time when the symptom
assumed to have occurred.
to occurrence of the symptom occurred are included.
↑ ↑
SUBLOG00_0024_1003193499.Z SUBLOG00_0025_1003205099.Z
19:34 on October 3 20:50 on October 3
NOTE:
If the obtained log file name contains "SHT", it means that the log was recorded at the time of shutdown.
• Example: SUBLOG00_0001_0918140788SHT.TXT
When checking the occurrence date and time with the user, if the performed operations include turning OFF the power, use
the file name "SHT" as a clue for identifying the date and time.
If the number of seconds is expressed as "99 + three-digit number", the number shows the cause which triggered the log
acquisition (e.g. acquisition due to an error code E[three-digit number]).
• Example: SUBLOG00_0001_0918140799747.TXT (When an error code E747 occurred)
When checking the occurrence date and time with the user, if an error code has occurred, use E[three-digit number] as a clue
for identifying the date and time.
999
6. Troubleshooting
Network Packet Capture

■ Overview
This function enables the network packet data sent and received by the device to be collected (captured) to the hard disk without
using a special device.
It enables network related trouble to be efficiently resolved.
Use SST or a USB device to collect the network packets saved to the hard disk.
CAUTION:
The network packet capture function may fail to collect a part of packet in a high-loaded network environment.
● Overall flow
The overall flow of operations is indicated below. For details on each procedure, see the related section.
1. Enable network packet capture function
2. Perform initial settings
3. Start network packet capture
4. Stop network packet capture
5. Save the obtained data
6. Disable network packet capture
● List of Related Service Mode

The service mode related to this function is indicated below.
No Service Mode Description Setting value

1 CAPOFFON Setting for enabling/disabling this function 0: Disable, 1: Enable
2 STT-STP Setting for starting/stopping network capture 0: Stop, 1: Start
3. CAPSTATE The operation status of the capture function (displayed only) -
4 PONSTART Whether to automatically start capturing when the machine is turned on 0: Do not automatically start
1: Automatically start
5 OVERWRIT Whether to overwrite old data when there is no space in the hard disk 0: Do not overwrite
1: Overwrite
6 PAYLOAD Whether to discard customer information when obtaining data 0: Do not discard
1: Discard
7 FILE-CLR Delete packet data in the hard disk -
8 SIMPFILT Whether to use the filter function 0: Do not use, 1: Use
■ Enabling This Function

● Overview
Since network packet data includes customer information, this function is not available by default. To use this function, it needs
to be activated as a license option as well as service mode needs to be enabled.
When enabling this function, make sure to first explain it to the customer and obtain their approval.
● Procedure for Enabling This Function

The procedure for enabling this function is indicated below.
1. Enter a license in the following menu to enable network capture.

[ Settings/ Registration ] > [ Management Settings ] > [ License/ Other ] > [ Register License ]
1000
6. Troubleshooting
2. Enable the setting (ON) in the following menu.

[ Settings/ Registration ] > [ Preferences ] > [ Network ] > [ Store Network Packet Log ]
3. Set "1" in the following service mode (Lv.2).

Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > CAPOFFON
The function is now enabled.
■ Initial Settings
● Overview
When the network capture function has been enabled/started, specify the initial settings before performing network capture.
● Setting the Overwrite Function

To enable this function, set "1" in the following service mode (Lv.2).
Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > OVERWRIT
NOTE:
When the HDD space becomes full after starting the capture, the oldest file is deleted and the captured data continues to be saved;
therefore, it is necessary to set "1: Overwrite" in advance.
The following shows the machine behavior when the HDD space reaches full.
• When the overwriting setting is ON
• The oldest packet file is deleted. The oldest file is determined by the last update time of the file (not by the date and time
attached to the file).
• When the HDD space reaches full during packet collection, the oldest file is deleted to continue collecting packet data
to the currently-stored file.
• CAPSTATE of capturing continues to be "RUNNING".
• When the overwriting setting is OFF
• Capturing is stopped.
• CAPSTATE of capturing becomes "HDDFULL". Note that STT-STP remains as start state (1). Capturing is started again
by changing the value from STT-STP (0) to STT-STP (1).
• If the HDDFULL state is cleared when starting capturing again, capturing is started.
• CAPSTATE of capturing becomes "RUNNING".
• If the HDDFULL state is not cleared, starting data capturing results in an error.
• CAPSTATE of capturing remains as "HDDFULL".
• When a command of stopping data capturing is given during the "HDDFULL" state, CAPSTATE of capturing remains
as "STOP".
● Setting the Encryption Function

Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > ENCDATA
• 0: Data is encrypted at data extraction (factory setting value).
• 1: Data is not encrypted at data extraction.
• 2: Two types of files (one in encrypted format and another in clear text format) are extracted at data extraction.
When the encryption setting is enabled, the extension of the extracted packet data is XXX.can.
When the encryption setting is disabled, the extension of the extracted packet data is XXX.cap.
This setting applies only when using USB memory device for data extraction.
1001
6. Troubleshooting
NOTE:
When collecting data using SST, the above service mode setting is not reflected and both files in encrypted format and clear text
format are always collected.
● Setting the Payload Discard Function

Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > PAYLOAD
• 0: Payload is not discarded (factory setting value)
• 1: Payload is discarded
The obtained packet data includes a header part and data part. The header part includes data such as the TCP header and IP
header. The data part includes the actual data.
Enabling this function discards the actual payload data and extracts only the data from the header part, which has the following
effects.
• Can be used when customer data is not allowed to be extracted
• Can be used in an environment where traffic is highly overloaded
Header part
Data part
Discarded part
● Setting the Filter Function

Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > SIMPFILT
• 0: Filtering is not performed. All the data is collected (factory default setting).
• 1: Filtering is performed.
If this function is enabled, only packet data that includes the machine's MAC address in the packet header is captured.
● Setting the Collection Function at Startup

Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > PONSTART
• 0: Data is not automatically collected at startup (factory setting value).
• 1: Data is automatically collected at startup.
Setting this service mode automatically starts collecting packet data if the condition of network packet capture operation is satisfied
when the main power of the host machine is turned ON. Completion of packet data collection needs to be executed manually.
● Deleting Files
Execute the following service mode (Lv.2) to delete the obtained packet data.
Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > FILE-CLR
Delete all the network packet capture data stored on the hard disk.
■ Start / Stop the Network Packet Capture Function

● Operation
To start or stop capturing network packets, set "0" or "1" in the following service mode (Lv.2).
Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > STT-STP
• 0: The capture function is not available.(factory setting value)
• 1: The capture function is available.
CAUTION:
Be sure to stop the network packet capture function after collecting network packet capture data.
● Checking the Status of Capturing

Execute the following service mode (Lv.2) to check the status of capturing.
Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > CAPSTATE
1002
6. Troubleshooting
The following types of status are displayed.

• RUNNING: Packets are being captured.
• STOP: Packet capturing is stopped.
• HDDFULL: The maximum amount of 1 GB of packets has been captured.
NOTE:
Packets are not collected if the machine enters deep sleep mode while capturing.
However, capturing is resumed when the machine recovers from sleep mode.
■ Disabling This Function

● Overview
Disable this function when the required network packets have been obtained.
● Procedure for Disabling This Function

The procedure for disabling this function is indicated below.
1. Disable the following items.

• [Settings/ Registration ] > [ Preference ] > [ Network ] > [ Store Network Packet Log]
The function is now disabled.

When this setting is disabled, all the service mode settings are initialized.
CAUTION:
Be sure to disable the network packet capture function once analysis of network failure is complete. It is required to disable
and transfer the license; however, the further step, LMS license transfer, is not required.
■ Network Packet Capture Data Collection by SST

● Overview
• Collect the network packet capture data that has been stored in the machine using SST.
1003
6. Troubleshooting
• When using SST for collecting data, the setting of encryption function (service mode: Lv.2) is disabled and files in clear text
format/encrypted format can be always collected.
Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > ENCDATA
● Collecting Network Capture Data

1. Start the machine by download mode , and connect SST.
2. Select a model to connect, and click the [ Single ] and the [Start] buttons.
3. Click the [Upload Data] button.
4. When a list of packet files stored in the device appears, select target data files to upload.
NOTE:
When using SST to collect data, you can select both files in encrypted format and clear text format.
1004
6. Troubleshooting
● Confirm the network packet capture data

1. Open the following folder and check the capture data.
In the case of the default installation destination for SST:
• C drive > ServData > target model (e.g.: iAC3300) > Device's serial number
Three types of files are collected; a file in clear text format (xxx.cap), a file in encrypted format (xxx.can), and a list of
collected network packet capture files (ufset.txt).
2. Use free software to analyze the collected network packet capture data in clear text format (xxx.cap) if it can be
analyzed.
NOTE:
When the analysis work fails, send the file in encrypted format (xxx.can) to sales company's Support Dept.
■ USB Network Packet File Collection

● Overview
Collect the network packet capture data that has been stored in the machine using a USB memory device.
Make sure to store the system software of the machine to connect to in the USB device to connect with.
● Collect the network packet capture data

1. Connect the USB memory device to the USB port.
2. Enter download mode.

When the machine recognizes the USB memory device, download Menu (USB) appears on the Control Panel.
3. Select [8]: Download File.
>>>>>>>>>>>5RRW0HQX86%@@@@@@@@@@@

>@6HOHFW9HUVLRQ
>@&OHDU)RUPDW
>@%DFNXS5HVWRUH
>@'RZQORDG)LOH
>5HVHW@6WDUWVKXWGRZQVHTXHQFH
>@KDVEHHQVHOHFWHG([HFXWH"
2.&$1&(/$Q\RWKHUNH\V
1005
6. Troubleshooting
4. Select [5]: Netcap Download, and select [0]: OK.
>>>>>>>'RZQORDG)LOH0HQX86%@@@@@@@

>@68%/2*'RZQORDG
>@6HUYLFH3ULQW'RZQORDG
>@1HWFDS'RZQORDG
>&@5HWXUQWR0DLQ0HQX
>5HVHW@6WDUWVKXWGRZQVHTXHQFH
Store all the network packet capture data stored in the machine on the USB memory device.
5. When “---Please hit any key---” appears, press any key.
6. Press the [C] key to return to the download Menu (HDD).
7. Press the [Reset] key to shut down the machine.
● Collect the network packet capture data

1. Check that the network packet capture files are stored on the USB memory device.
Two types of files are collected; a file in clear text format (xxx.cap) and a file in encrypted format (xxx.can).
2. Use free software to analyze the collected network packet capture data in clear text format (xxx.cap).
NOTE:
• When the analysis work fails, send the file in encrypted format (xxx.can) to the Support Dept. of your sales company.
• Captured data collected as plain text is discarded.
1006
6. Troubleshooting
Version upgrade
Overview
■ Overview of Version Upgrade
The system software version is upgraded in 2 steps, downloading and writing the new version of the system software.
● Downloading System Software

This machine supports the following 3 downloading methods.
1. Download via the service support tool (hereinafter “SST”)
Connect this machine to the PC by the cross cable to download the system software using SST installed in the PC.
2. Download using the USB flash drive storage device
Insert the USB flash drive storage device storage device to the slot of the machine and download the system software stored
in the device.
3. Download via Contents Delivery System (hereinafter “CDS”)
Access to CDS via Internet to download the system software directly to the machine.
System CD SST Host Machine

System Software System Software
Download mode
Normal mode / (Safe mode)
Copy the
System Software USB menu
USB flash drive System Software

Temporary Memory Space
System
CDS/Local CDS Updater Restart
System Software
Write the
system software
Automatically restarted
Done
Activate the machine with the

new system software version
● Writing System Software

The system software downloaded in either of the above-mentioned methods is stored in the temporary memory space.
After the system software is successfully downloaded, restart the machine to write the software in the machine.
In case the main power switch is turned OFF during the writing process, the machine may not be started.
This machine supports the remote version upgrade via CDS. When upgrading the system software via CDS, the warning message
is shown on the control panel to alert the user not to turn OFF the power switch.
1007
6. Troubleshooting
When the system software is successfully written, the machine is automatically restarted to activate the downloaded system
software.
If any error occurs during the writing process, the error code, E753-0001, is shown.
The name of the system software component is shown to the left of the error log message, “version up…..error”. Check the name
if the software is for the option not attached to the machine. If so, turn OFF / ON the machine to recover the error (see
Troubleshooting for details).
Log
version up...
error massage
Error
massage
■ Download Mode
When the version is upgraded via SST or with the USB flash drive storage device storage device, start the machine in Download
mode. This machine has the following 2 Download modes similarly with other iR-series models.
● Normal mode(recommend):
• Start from the following service mode.
• Conventionally, the main power switch of this machine was turned ON while pressing 1 and 7 keys. However, the procedure
above automatically assigns a static IP address and enables the download same as before.
• You can obtain the version information and avoid unnecessary download and errors.
NOTE:
When entering Download mode, be sure to go into Service mode after all items of main menu have been displayed.
This machine reads the version information of system software when it starts. You must start Download mode after the version
information has been obtained.
● Safe mode:
• Press 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric keypad when turning on the power.
Be sure to use "Single mode" when using SST. SST "Assist mode" cannot be used in safe mode. Any mode can be used
when using USB.
■ System Software Components

The table below shows the system software components for this machine.
Host Machine
1008
6. Troubleshooting
Software to be upgraded Display on SST How to upgrade versions Remarks

Regis- Name of SST USB flash CDS
tered Re- system drive
marks software
name of
product
Host Machine
Main Controller iPRC10K SYSTEM Yes Yes No
Language Module LANGUAGE Yes Yes No
Remote UI Contents RUI Yes Yes No
RUI portal RPTL Yes Yes No
Accessibility ACSBT Yes Yes No
UI-BOX BOX Yes Yes No
UI-COPY COPY Yes Yes No
UI-SEND SEND Yes Yes No
MEAP Libraly MEAPCONT Yes Yes No
Paper Type Information File MEDIA Yes Yes No
Service Mode Contents SMCNT Yes Yes No
DC Controller DCON Yes Yes No
DSUB1 Yes Yes No
DSUB2 Yes Yes No
DSUB13 Yes Yes No
Box Checker BCT Yes Yes No
WebDAV Contents WebDAV Yes Yes No
Custom Menu Application CSTMN Yes Yes No
Error Recovery System ERS Yes Yes No
Reader Controller iPRC800 RCOND Yes Yes No
Extensions System Option
Voice Synthesis Dictionary iPRC10K TTS Yes Yes No
Resources for Web Browser BROWSER Yes Yes No
Option
Software to be upgraded Display on SST How to upgrade versions Remarks

Registered Name of sys- SST USB flash CDS
Remarks tem software drive
name of prod-
uct
Finisher - AM1/Saddle Stitch Finisher - AM2
Finisher Con- FIN_AN FIN_CON Yes Yes No
troller
Document Insertion Unit-M1 ISU_N1 IST_CON Yes Yes No
OP_CON Yes Yes No
Booklet Trimmer-D1 BT_D1 TRM_CON Yes Yes No
Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer-A1 2KT_A1 TRM_CON Yes Yes No
Perfect Binder-D1 BND_E1 CUTTR Yes Yes No
MST_CON Yes Yes No
SLV_CON Yes Yes No
OP_CON Yes Yes No
POD Deck-D1 Deck_D1 DK_CON Yes Yes No
Puncher Unit-BT1 MPCH_A1 MP_CM Yes Yes No
Puncher Unit-BS1 MP_IFB Yes Yes No
Puncher Unit-BU1
MP_MN Yes Yes No
High Capacity Stacker-H1 HSTK_F1 FP_APP Yes Yes No
FP_OS Yes Yes No
Paper Folding Unit-J1 PFU_J1 FLD_CON Yes Yes No
1009
6. Troubleshooting
The finisher for this machine supports version upgrade via the host machine in any of the above-mentioned methods, i.e., via
SST, USB flash drive storage device storage device or CDS. Note that the External 2-hole Puncher UNIT B1T does not support
version upgrade via the host machine. To upgrade versions, connect the option with the PC using the downloader PCB to
download the system software via SST.
■ Note on Download Process

Never turn OFF the power during the download / writing process.
Turning off the power during the download / writing process may cause a failure of machine start-up at power-on.
If this occurs, start the machine in Safe mode (by pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric keypad).
When the machine is successfully started in Safe mode, execute formatting of BOOTDEV partition, retry downloading the system
software.
Selection of download mode

It is recommended to use normal mode when using download mode.
Be sure to use normal mode when using download mode except in a case where it is not possible to start this machine and enter
service mode.
In safe mode, version information of SYSTEM, MEAPCONT, LANGUAGE, RUI, and SDICT can be obtained, but version
information of other system software such as DCON and RCON cannot be obtained. Therefore the following points to note are
required when downloading in safe mode.
[RCON]
The version is not upgraded except in a case where Single mode of SST is used or when "Overwrite all" of USB download
menu is used.
[DCON and others]

The following symptoms occur when SST (Single mode) or USB download menu (Auto) is used.
• The time for download/write becomes longer because the software is overwritten even when system software of the
same version is being written.
• A confirmation message is not displayed when a lower version is going to be downloaded.
error code E753-0001

When an error occurs during writing process of the system software downloaded using SST or USB flash drive, error code
E753-0001 is displayed.
Check if the target option is properly installed and see if the software to download is for the correct target option, and then execute
downloading again.
Version Upgrade via SST

■ Overview
The system software can be downloaded either of the two modes below via SST.
• Assist mode (recommended)
• Single mode
Assist mode provides the following features.
• Attached option types are automatically recognized.
• The new versions of the system software for attached option types are automatically searched.
• The set of system software with interactive behavior confirmed is automatically downloaded.
• The accessories attached to the host machine are automatically recognized to download the system software for each
accessory.
This machine holds a number of system software components that mutually interacts during operation. Behaviors of such system
software should be confirmed when these are downloaded as the set. Thus, Assist mode is basically recommended to download
the system software for this machine.
NOTE:
Use Single mode only when any of the following conditions is met.
• When downloading some the system software components, i.e. DCON, RCON or options.
• When uploading/ downloading the backup data.
1010
6. Troubleshooting

System software is saved in the temporary storage area on HDD after downloaded with SST. Restart the machine after download
so that it will be written to the system area, and the flash ROM.
After the writing has been completed normally, this machine automatically restarts with the new system software.
1) Download the system software

- - - Download Mode - - -
[ iR2270i-JPjaxxxx-MN.dsh ] - - - - - - - - - - Complete
[ iR2270iM-JPjaxxxx-1F77-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete
[ iR2270iM-ZZjaxxxx-49AD.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete
[ iR2270iW-JPjaxxxx-5C16-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete
[ iR2270iW-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete
[ iR2270iF-JPjaxxxx-DE96-ICC.PRG ] - - - - Complete
[ iR2270iG-JPjaxxxx-EC30-ICC.PRG ] - - - - Complete
HDD
System System
Software Software
7HPSRUDU\
PHPRU\VSDFH
2) ୺㟁※ࢫ࢖ࢵࢳOFF/ON
3) The system software is written
<<<<< download shell >>>>>
HDD
[ SYSTEM JPja-m ] - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM JPja-w ] - - - - Upgrading complete
[ FONT F ] - - - - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
[ FONT G ] - - - - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
+++ Switch OFF the power then ON. +++
System
Software
7HPSRUDU\
PHPRU\VSDFH
6\VWHP
PHPRU\DUHD
FLASH
ROM 5) Start with the new version.
■ Copying System Software

● System CD to SST
Copy the system software stored in the system CD to SST.
NOTE:
The system software is compressed if the file size exceeds the CD memory capacity.
If the above is the case, decompress the file before copying it to SST.
Steps to copy the system software

Preparation
Requirements:
• PC with SST Ver.4.75 or later installed
• The system CD for this machine
1. Start the PC
2. Set the system CD in the PC
3. Start SST
1011
6. Troubleshooting
4. Click “Register Firmware” button.
5. Select the drive where the system CD is set and click “Search” button.
6. The system software stored in the system CD is listed.

Uncheck the box(es) for unnecessary folder(s) and/or system software and click “Copy” button.
1012
6. Troubleshooting
7. The message is shown when the system software is successfully copied. Click “OK” button.
■ Connection
The following IP address is automatically set for this machine at start-up in Download mode.
• IP address:172.16.1.100
• Subnet mask:255.255.255.0
When the PC with SST installed is connected to this machine, change the PC network address to the following.
• IP address:172.16.1.160
• Subnet mask:255.255.255.0
• Default gateway: arbitrary
CAUTION:
If the PC has the connection to the network, the settings changed to the abovementioned may cause network failures due
to redundant IP addresses, etc. Ensure that the PC is disconnected from the network when you change the PC network
settings. Alternatively use the cross cable to connect the PC to this machine.
● Steps
Preparation
Requirements
• PC with SST Ver. 4.75 or later installed and the system software for this machine is stored
• Cross cable
• 10Base-T : Category 3 or 5
• 100Base-T : Category 5
• 1000Base-T : Enhanced Category 5 (CAT5e) or later
CAUTION:
Disconnect USB flash drive storage device storage devices if connected.
Communication to SST is disabled in this machine if any USB flash drive storage device storage device is recognized. SST
and the USB flash drive storage device storage device cannot be used concurrently.
1. Use the cross cable to connect the machine to the PC with SST installed.
2. Turn on the main power switch of this machine.
3. Start download mode from the following service mode, and press [OK].
1013
6. Troubleshooting
4. Check the IP address of the PC.

Go to Start menu to select Program > Accessory > Command Prompt.
Type IPCONFIG and press [Return] to see the network settings of the PC.
If any discrepancies from the description in the figure below are found, change the network settings of the PC.
CAUTION:
The network settings are not shown with IPCONFIG if the PC is disconnected from the network. To check the settings,
connect the PC to this machine at power-on by the cross cable.
■ Downloading System Software (Assist mode)

1. Start the machine, and start download mode from the following service mode.
2. Connect the PC to this machine and start SST.
3. Click “Start Assist mode” button.

Skip this step when starting SST in Assist mode.
1014
6. Troubleshooting
If the upgraded set of the system software is stored in SST, the new set is automatically selected.
NOTE:
If no upgrade is stored, the existing system software set is unchanged. At any rate, any versions of the system software can be
downloaded by manual selection.
NOTE:
<When assist mode is used to connect to the machine in safe mode>
Version information can be obtained for only the system software of SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI, MEAPCONT and SDICT.
4. Click “Start” button
When download is completed, the machine is automatically restarted to initiate the writing process.
The machine may repeat restarting several times depending on option configuration.
Upon the system software written, the machine is restarted again and the main menu is displayed.
NOTE:
Download Confirmation Message Modes
Download is confirmed in any of the three message modes.
• Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded versions
Upgraded versions are downloaded without message.
Skip download of the existing versions.
Confirm whether to download downgraded versions.
• Confirm whether to download the existing versions / downgraded versions
Confirm whether to download and overwrite the existing versions.
• Overwrite all versions
Regardless of version upgrade or downgrade, all versions of the system software are downloaded without message.
By default, “Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded versions” is selected.
1015
6. Troubleshooting
5. Click"Next"button.
6. Disconnect the cross cable from the machine.
7. Enter Service mode to check the system software versions.
8. Click"OK"button.
The main menu is displayed.
■ Downloading System Software (Single mode)

The following is the sample steps to download DCON (the other components of the system software can be downloaded similarly).
1. Start the machine in an appropriate Download mode.
2. Connect the PC to this machine to start SST.
3. Select the model to be connected and “Single”, check the network settings. Click “Start” button.
1016
6. Troubleshooting
NOTE:
The following device information is shown at the right top of SST screen.
• IP address
• Model name
• Download mode
4. Select the DCON version to be downloaded and click “Start” button.

Multiple files can be selected in this step.
NOTE:
Download Confirmation Message Modes
Download is confirmed in any of the three message modes.
• Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded versions
Skip download of the existing versions.
• Confirm whether to download the existing versions / downgraded versions
Confirm whether to download and overwrite the existing versions.
• Overwrite all versions.
Regardless of version upgrade or downgrade, all versions of the system software are downloaded without message.
By default, “Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded
1017
6. Troubleshooting
5. When download is completed, click “OK” button.
The main menu is displayed.
NOTE:
If it is before restarting the machine, the downloaded system software can be deleted not written on HDD or Flash ROM. (Refer
to “ Procedure to delete system software stored in the temporary storage area” on page 1019)
6. Click “Shutdown / Restart” button.
7. Click “Restart” button.
The machine is restarted.

The downloaded system software is written on HDD or Flash ROM.
8. Click "OK" button.
9. Enter Service mode to check the versions.
1018
6. Troubleshooting
● Procedure to delete system software stored in the temporary storage area

1. Click “Clear” button.
2. Click “Execute Clear” button.

The system software, which is stored in the temporary memory space of HDD, is deleted.
3. Click “OK” button.

Return to the previous screen.
■ Formatting HDD
● Overview
This machine probides the following two types of HDD Formatting.
• ALL:to format the whole HDD
• When HDD set as the service parts (the new HDD) is mounted
• When clearing the system software and data completely from HDD and reloading the system software.
Once Format ALL is executed in your machine, all the user data and MEAP applications held in HDD will be cleared. Ensure
to gain an agreement from the user before formatting.
• BOOTDEV: to format the system software storage area on HDD.
• When clearing the system software storage area and reloading the system software
• To delete only the system software area
User data is not deleted.
HDD needs not to be formatted at version upgrade.
HDD can be formatted only in Single mode. After HDD is formatted, the machine cannot be started before the system software
is downloaded.
After Format ALL is executed, the machine is automatically restarted to reflect formatting to HDD. At this time, the machine
automatically starts in Download mode. For BOOTDEV format, the machine is ready to download the system software without
restarting.
1019
6. Troubleshooting
After formatting, enter either Assist mode(recommended) or Single mode to download the system software.
When executing format ALL

When executing format BOOTDEV
startup in normal mode
Execute format BOOTDEV Execute format ALL
Automatically restart
Select download mode Select download mode

([1]: Upgrade (AUTO)is recommended) ([1]: Upgrade (AUTO)is recommended)
Download the system software Download the system software

for the main controller
Automatically restart Automatically restart
Writing process Writing process
Start in the new version Start in the new version

of the system software of the system software
1020
6. Troubleshooting
When executing format ALL startup in normal mode

When executing format BOOTDEV When executing format ALL
Execute format ALL Execute format ALL
Select Download mode Select Download mode

(preferably in assist mode) (preferably in assist mode)

Start in Download mode

Start in Download mode
of Normal mode
of Normal mode
Download the system software for

Since there is no system software DCON/RCON/option
to be downloaded,
the shutdown sequence is executed
restart the machine manually
Writing process
Start in the same version
of the system software Automatically restart
Start in the new version

of the system software
● Steps of Formatting
1. Enter Download mode.
Enter Safe mode when you mount the new HDD or when the machine is unable to start normally due to HDD failures, etc
2. Connect the PC to the machine to start SST.
1021
6. Troubleshooting
3. Select the model to be connected and “single”. Check the network settings and click “Start” button.
4. Click“Format HDD”button.
5. Select "BOOTDEV" or "ALL" to click "Start".
1022
6. Troubleshooting
6. Click "Execute Format" button.
HDD is formatted.
7. Download the system software in any Download mode (Assist mode recommended). See the steps to download the
system software for details.
CAUTION:
After HDD is formatted, ensure to download the system software. If the system software is not downloaded, E602 error is
triggered at power-on.
CAUTION:
Restarting takes more time after HDD is formatted and the system software is downloaded (to write the downloaded
software).
Down time may be approx. 10 minutes in maximum to proceed the writing process. Never turn OFF the machine while
Starting screen is shown.
● Mounting New HDD

After HDD set as the service parts is mounted, the new HDD should be formatted initially. In this case, the message is shown to
confirm if the new HDD is mounted.
The figure below shows the abbreviated steps.
1023
6. Troubleshooting
5HSODFLQJ+''V
6WDUWWKHPDFKLQHLQ6DIHPRGH
E\SUHVVLQJDQGNH\VVLPXOWDQHRXVO\RQWKHQXPHULFNH\SDG
&RQQHFWWR667
&RQILUPWKDWWKHQHZ+''LVVXFFHVVIXOO\PRXQWHG
)RUPDW+'')RUPDW$//
)ROORZWKHVWHSVDVGHVFULEHGLQ)RUPDW$//VHFWLRQ
1. When the new HDD is mounted, the machine cannot be started in the normal procedure. Start the machine in Safe
mode as Download mode.
When gaining connection to SST, the message is shown to confirm if the new HDD is mounted.
2. Click "Yes".
An HDD initialization confirmation message is displayed.
1024
6. Troubleshooting
3. Click “Initialize” button.

Initialization of the HDD (Format ALL) is executed. Follow the steps described in Format ALL section to download the system
software.
■ Backup
● Overview
At the time of replacing controller PCBs, the backup function enables to save data held in the PCB to migrate them to the new
PCB.
Backup via SST
Backup data Downloaded/Uploaded file names

Backup data RAM SramImg.bin(to be uploaded / downloaded)
Debug log Sublog.bin(to be uploaded) (Refer to “Debug log” on page 991)
Service Print The text file of the contents which You output to paper with a service mode(Uploadable).
• Backup RAM holds the data from Backup RAM of the Main Controller PCB 2.
Because setting data of service mode for the parts counter and the Main Controller are stored, be sure to back up the data
when replacing the Main Controller PCB and the DC Controller PCB.
• MeapBack holds MEAP applications and their data stored in HDD
Backup via Service mode

Data is stored in HDD.
• Backup data: Backup of Reader Controller PCB (Service mode Lv.2)
• Backup:
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > RSRAMBUP
• Restore:
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > RSRAMRES
• Backup data: Backup of DC Controller PCB (Service mode Lv.2)
• Backup:
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMBUP
• Restore:
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMRES
NOTE:
• Before replacing the Reader Controller PCBs, back up the data from Service mode. The backup data can be restored from
Service mode when the PCBs are replaced. This enables to maintain the setting data including Service mode stored in the
old Reader Controller PCB.
• Before replacing the DC controller PCBs, back up the data from Service mode. The backup data can be restored from Service
mode when the PCBs are replaced. This enables to maintain the setting data including Service mode stored in the old
Controller PCB.
• Before replacing the Main Controller PCB 2, upload SramImg.bin. By downloading SramImg.bin after replacement, the new
Main Controller PCB 2 inherits the data including Service mode stored in the old PCB
● Steps to Upload Data
CAUTION:
• When the Canon quality-appointed staff determines the need for an analysis of debug log by the R&D department, we
ask the field to collect log for an investigation to determine the cause.
• The backup data can be downloaded only on the machine from which the data were uploaded.
1025
6. Troubleshooting
imagePRESS Series
Service PC
SST
iR ----
Upload/Download Main controller PCB1
System
MeapBack
/ SramImg.bin

SRAM
HDD
SramImg.bin
Meapback.bin
Main controller
Listed below are the sample steps to upload MeapBack.
1. Enter Download mode.
2. Connect the PC to the machine to start SST.
3. Select the model to be connected and “Single”. Check the network settings and click “Start”.
4. Click “Upload Data” button.
1026
6. Troubleshooting
5. Select “MeapBack.bin” to click “Start” button.
6. Enter the file name to be saved and comments when necessary. Click “Save” button.
7. Click “OK” button.
● Steps to Download Data
CAUTION:
• The backup data can be downloaded to the machine from which the data were uploaded.
• Store Meapbackup.bin; and "Settings/Registration > Data Management> Initialize All Data/Setings"; Restore it; even
if it, cannot log in to SMS. Restore Meapbackup.bin which backed up after "Initialize All Data/Setings"; store it.
Listed below were the sample steps to download MeapBack.
1. Enter Download mode
2. Connect the PC to the machine and start SST.
1027
6. Troubleshooting
3. Select the model to be connected and “Single”. Check the network setting and click “Start” button.
4. Click “Download Data” button.
5. Select the data to be downloaded and click “Start” button.
6. When the data are successfully downloaded, click “OK” button.
1028
6. Troubleshooting
Version Upgrade using USB flash drive Storage Device

■ Relation between SST and USB flash drive storage device Storage Device
When using the USB flash drive storage device storage device for version upgrade, the system software should be copied to the
USB flash drive storage device storage device. By inserting the USB flash drive storage device storage device to the slot of the
machine, the system software can be upgraded.
The figure below shows the relation between SST and USB flash drive storage device storage device.
PC imagePRESS
SST
System
System software
Copying the System Software
USB memory
storage device HDD
Downloading the
SST system software
System
System software Flash ROM
When downloading the system software, enter any of Download modes below
• Normal mode (recommended)
Select the following service mode, and then press [OK].
• Safe mode (only when any system error occurs or the machine is unable to start normally;
turn ON the main power switch by pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric keypad)

Copy the system software from SST to the USB flash drive storage device storage device.
Right after download from the USB flash drive storage device storage device, the system software is stored in the temporary
memory space in HDD. The system software is written in the system memory area, Boot area and Flash ROM upon the machine
restarted.
When the writing process is successfully completed, the machine is automatically restarted with the new version of the system
software.
1029
6. Troubleshooting
Tasks in the customer site

1) Download the system software
- - - Download Mode - - -
[ iR2270i-JPjaxxxx-MN.dsh ] - - - - - - - - - - Complete
[ iR2270iM-JPjaxxxx-1F77-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete
[ iR2270iM-ZZjaxxxx-49AD.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete
[ iR2270iW-JPjaxxxx-5C16-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete
[ iR2270iF-JPjaxxxx-DE96-ICC.PRG ] - - - - Complete
[ iR2270iG-JPjaxxxx-EC30-ICC.PRG ] - - - - Complete
Task in the office
HDD
System System System
Software Software Software
Temporary
memory space
Copying the system software
3) The system software is written
<<<<< download shell >>>>>
HDD
[ SYSTEM JPja-m ] - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM JPja-w ] - - - - Upgrading complete
[ FONT F ] - - - - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
[ FONT G ] - - - - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
+++ Switch OFF the power then ON. +++
System
Software
Temporary
memory space
System
memory area
FLASH
ROM 5) Start with the new version.
■ Copying System Software

● System CD to SST
Copy the system software stored in the system CD to SST.
NOTE:
The system software is compressed if the file size exceeds the CD memory capacity.
If the above is the case, decompress the file before copying it to SST.

Preparation
Requirements:
• PC with SST Ver. 4.75 or later installed
• The system CD for this machine
1. Start the PC.
2. Set the system CD to the PC.
3. Start SST.
1030
6. Troubleshooting
4. Click “Register Firmware” button.
5. Select the drive where the system CD is set and click “Search” button.
NOTE:
“XXXX” in the figure describes the version of system software.
6. The list of the system software components stored in the system CD is shown on the screen.
Uncheck the box(es) of unnecessary folder(s) and/or system software component(s) and click “Copy” button.
1031
6. Troubleshooting
7. The message is shown when the system software is copied. Click “OK” button.
● SST to USB flash drive Storage Device

Copy the system software stored in SST to the USB flash drive storage device storage device.

Preparation
Requirements:
• PC with SST Ver. 4.75 or later installed
• USB flash drive storage device (*)
*: USB flash drive can be used.
Interface: USB 1.1 or later (USB 2.0 is recommended)
Flash drive capacity: 1GB or more is recommended (the total file size of the system software is approx. 500MB).
Format: FAT (FAT 16), FAT32 (NTFS and HFS are not supported). The memory is formatted in a partition (multiple
partitions are not supported)
Unavailable USB flash drive: memory that is protected by a password or the encryption technology.
1. Start the PC.
2. Insert the USB flash drive storage device storage device to the slot of the PC.
3. Start SST.
4. Click the USB icon shown in "Select the target" Screen.
1032
6. Troubleshooting
5. Select the drive (removable disk) where the USB flash drive storage device storage device is inserted.
6. Select “Series” and “Version” (the System Version).
NOTE:
The signs shown in the field of “Firmware registration static” indicate the following:
• Y: Stored in SST
• N: Not stored in SST
7. Click “Start” button.

Start copying the system software to the USB flash drive storage device storage device.
NOTE:
When the accessory configuration is known for the machine where the system software is to be downloaded, uncheck the boxes
of unnecessary accessories. E753-0001 is triggered if the software for an unnecessary accessory is downloaded. (If this occurred,
turn OFF/ON the power to recover the error.)
1033
6. Troubleshooting
8. Click “OK” when the system software is successfully copied in the USB flash drive storage device storage device.
■ Connection
CAUTION:
This machine does not communicate with SST once it recognizes a USB flash drive storage device; therefore, SST and a
USB flash drive storage device cannot be used at the same time.
● Connection procedure
Preparation
Item to prepare:
• A USB flash drive storage device, which the system software for this machine is stored.
1. If a cross cable is connected to this machine, remove the cross cable.
2. Connect the USB flash drive storage device to the USB port.
USB Port
3. Switch to the download mode to use.

• In the case of normal mode (Recommended)
Select the following service mode, and then press [OK].
• In the case of safe mode (This mode should not be used as general rule. To be used only when normal startup fails,
such as a system error, etc.)
While pressing 2 + 8 keys at the same time, turn ON the Main Power Switch.
Once this machine recognizes the USB flash drive storage device, the following menu is displayed on the Control Panel.
1034
6. Troubleshooting
>>>>>GRZQORDG0HQX86%@@@@@@@@@@@

>@8SJUDGH$XWR
>@)RUPDW+''
>@%DFNXS
>@GRZQORDG0HQX
>@2WKHU0HQX
>5HVHW@6KXWGRZQ
CAUTION:
Depending on the manufacturer or the model, this machine may not recognize the USB flash drive storage device.
This machine retries the detection of a USB flash drive storage device for up to 60 seconds after power-ON. The above
menu is not displayed if the recognition of a USB flash drive storage device is failed within the time period.
In such a case, use another USB flash drive storage device.
■ Upgrading System Software

● Menu/Function Overview
>>>>>GRZQORDG0HQX86%@@@@@@@@@@@

>@8SJUDGH$XWR
>@)RUPDW+''
>@%DFNXS
>@GRZQORDG0HQX
>@2WKHU0HQX
>5HVHW@6KXWGRZQ
Downloading System Software

• [1]: Upgrade(Auto)
To download/write the system software (automatic)
• [2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation)
To download the system software (confirmation)
• [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all)
To download the system software (overwriting)
• [4]: Format HDD
To format the HDD/BOOTDEV partition
• [5]: Backup
Collection of debug Log or Service Print(Because You are for R&D review, do not use it other than the following.)
• [7]: Clear downloaded files
To clear the system software immediately after downloading (before writing)
• [8]: Download Menu 2
To move to Download Menu 2
• [9]: Other Menu
Others (e.g.: version information)
• [Reset]: Shutdown
To execute shutdown sequence
Press the key on the Control Panel to select/execute the functions.
1035
6. Troubleshooting
● Points to Note When Operating/Using System Software
NOTE:
The following download method is recommended to execute normal download of the system software (any download work other
than downloading after replacing/formatting the HDD):
• Download mode: Normal mode
• Download menu: [1]: Upgrade (Auto)
Prohibition to turn OFF the power during downloading/writing

Do not turn OFF the power during downloading or writing of the system software;
otherwise, this machine may not be started even if the power is turned ON.
If the machine fails to be started even if the power is turned ON, start the machine in safe mode (pressing 2 + 8 keys).
When the machine can be started in safe mode, be sure to download the system software once again.
If the machine fails to be started, replace the HDD and then download the system software.
Note when the power is turned OFF

Be sure to execute shutdown sequence to quit download mode.
Pressing the [Reset] key and then the [0] key on the menu screen executes the shutdown sequence. Once the message on the
touch panel disappears, turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
■ Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic)

● [1]: Upgrade (Auto)
The version is compared between the host machine/option and the system software in the USB flash drive storage device to
download only the system software with newer version in the USB flash drive storage device to the temporary storage area of
the HDD.
In safe mode, only the following system software can retrieve the version information (the version is compared).
• SYSTEM
• LANGUAGE
• RUI
• MEAPCONT
• SDICT
As for system software of the host machine whose version information cannot be obtained, the software for RCON is not
downloaded, but other software are downloaded.
For the system software of the option that is not connected, it is handled as follows:
• <In the case of startup in normal mode (Recommended)>
For the option that is not connected, the system software is not to be downloaded.
• <In the case of startup in safe mode>
The system software of the options which are not connected are not downloaded.
After downloading is complete, this machine is automatically restarted to write the downloaded system software to the HDD
system area/flash ROM.
1036
6. Troubleshooting
3. Press the key on the Control Panel.

• [1] -> [0]: To execute downloading
• Any key other than [0] key: To return to the menu screen.
>>>>>GRZQORDG0HQX86%@@@@@@@@@@@

>@8SJUDGH$XWR
>@)RUPDW+''
>@%DFNXS
>@GRZQORDG0HQX
>@2WKHU0HQX
>5HVHW@6KXWGRZQ
During downloading, download status is displayed on the Control Panel.
Once downloading is complete, this machine is automatically restarted to start writing to the HDD system area/flash ROM.
The screen shows the countdown once writing process is properly complete.
Once the countdown shows 0, this machine is automatically restarted.
1037
6. Troubleshooting
4. When the main menu is displayed, press the removal key at the lower right on the touch panel and select removal
of the memory media, and then remove the USB flash drive storage device.
CAUTION:
After HDD formatting and downloading, this machine takes a long time (for writing the software).
This machine, in some cases, stays in standby screen up to 10 min during writing. At this time, do not turn off the main
power switch.
■ Downloading System Software (Confirmation)

● [2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation)
The version is compared between the host machine/option and the system software in the USB flash drive storage device to
download the system software with newer version in the USB flash drive storage device to the temporary storage area of the
HDD.
When the system software version in the USB flash drive storage device is the same or older, a confirmation message is displayed
on the Control Panel so that the user can select whether to overwrite or not.
In safe mode, only the following system software can retrieve the version information (the version is compared).
• SYSTEM
• LANGUAGE
• RUI
• MEAPCONT
• SDICT
As for system software of the host machine whose version information cannot be obtained, the software for RCON is not
downloaded, but other software are downloaded.
For the system software of the option that is not connected, it is handled as follows:
• <In the case of startup in normal mode (Recommended)>
For the option that is not connected, the system software is not to be downloaded.
• <In the case of startup in safe mode>
The system software of the options which are not connected are not downloaded.
Unlike menu [1], this machine is not automatically started despite completion of downloading. By manually turning OFF/ON the
power, the system software is written at the time of startup. In this case, starting the machine in safe mode deletes the downloaded
system software saved in the temporary storage area; therefore, do not press the numeric keys (2 + 8), but execute normal startup
to execute writing.

>>>>>GRZQORDG0HQX86%@@@@@@@@@@@

>@8SJUDGH$XWR
>@)RUPDW+''
>@%DFNXS
>@GRZQORDG0HQX
>@2WKHU0HQX
1038
6. Troubleshooting
NOTE:
When the system software version in the USB flash drive storage device is the same or older than the system software in the HDD,
a message is displayed in each case to confirm whether to overwrite or not. Press the key on the Control Panel.
• [0]: To overwrite
• Any key other than [0]: Not to overwrite
Once downloading is complete, a message is displayed to encourage pressing the “Reset” key.
4. Press the “Reset” key.

Shutdown sequence is executed.
5. Once the message on the touch panel disappears, turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
6. Remove the USB flash drive storage device.
7. Ensure the LED at the lower right on the Control Panel is turned OFF, and turn ON the Main Power Switch.
Writing to the HDD system area/flash ROM is started after the startup. The screen shows the countdown once the writing
process is properly completed.
The screen shows the countdown once the writing process is properly completed. This machine is restarted with the
downloaded system software at the count of 0.
■ Downloading System Software (Overwriting)

● [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all)
Regardless of the system software version in the host machine, all the system software in the USB flash drive storage device is
downloaded.
Unlike menu [1], this machine is not automatically started despite completion of downloading. By manually turning OFF/ON the
power, the system software is written at the time of startup. In this case, starting the machine in safe mode deletes the downloaded
system software saved in the temporary storage area; therefore, do not press the numeric keys (2 + 8), but execute normal startup
to execute writing.
1039
6. Troubleshooting
3. Press the key on the Control Panel

>>>>>GRZQORDG0HQX86%@@@@@@@@@@@

>@8SJUDGH$XWR
>@)RUPDW+''
>@%DFNXS
>@GRZQORDG0HQX
>@2WKHU0HQX
CAUTION:
In overwriting download mode of the USB flash drive storage device, all the system software stored in the USB flash drive
storage device is downloaded as well. Therefore, be sure to keep the following in mind: If the USB flash drive storage device
includes the system software of non-connecting option, E753-0001 is displayed when the writing process is completed.
In the case of an error in downloading of the non-connecting option, the machine can be recovered by turning OFF/ON the
power.
To prevent such error, uncheck the applicable system software so that the system software of the non-connecting option
is not downloaded when downloading the system software from SST to USB.
Once downloading is complete, a message is displayed to encourage pressing the “Reset”
4. Press the “Reset” key.

Shutdown sequence is executed.
5. Once the message on the touch panel disappears, turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
6. the USB flash drive storage device.
7. After checking that the LED is turned OFF at the lower right on the Control Panel, turn ON the Main Power Switch.
Writing to the HDD system area/flash ROM is started after the startup. The screen shows the countdown once the writing
process is properly complete.
When the countdown shows 0, this machine is restarted with the downloaded system software.
1040
6. Troubleshooting
■ Formatting HDD
● HDD Format Overview
The following 2 types of formatting methods are available with this machine:
• ALL: To initialize the entire HDD
• In the case of installing the HDD provided as a service part (a new HDD).
• In the case of cleaning the entire software and data in the HDD to reinstall the system software.
All the user data and MEAP application in the HDD is deleted when executing Format ALL with the machine in use; therefore,
be sure to obtain agreement from the user to execute Format ALL.
• BOOTDEV: to format the system software storage area on HDD.
• In the case of normal upgrading by cleaning the storage area of the system software
User data will not be deleted.
To reinstall the system software, HDD formatting is not required.
After formatting, this machine cannot be started unless the system software is downloaded.
When Format ALL is executed, initialization process is reflected to the HDD so that this machine is automatically restarted to
automatically enter download mode. In the case of formatting BOOTDEV, the machine is not automatically restarted, but the
system software can be downloaded.
After formatting is executed, be sure to download the system software by “[1]: Upgrade (AUTO)” in main menu.
When executing format ALL

When executing format BOOTDEV
startup in normal mode
Execute format BOOTDEV Execute format ALL
Select download mode Select download mode

([1]: Upgrade (AUTO)is recommended) ([1]: Upgrade (AUTO)is recommended)

Start in the new version Start in the new version

of the system software of the system software
● [4]: Format HDD

This mode executes formatting of BOOTDEV partition or the entire HDD.
2. Connect the USB flash drive storage device to the USB port
1041
6. Troubleshooting

• [4] -> [0]: To execute formating
>>>>>GRZQORDG0HQX86%@@@@@@@@@@@

>@8SJUDGH$XWR
>@)RUPDW+''
>@%DFNXS
>@GRZQORDG0HQX
>@2WKHU0HQX

• [1] -> [0]: To execute formatting BOOTDEV
• Any key other than [0]: To return to the menu
• [2] -> [0]: To execute formatting the entire HDD
• Any key other than [0]: To return to the menu screen.
• [C]: To return to the menu screen.
• When formatting of BOOTDEV has been executed

When the formatting is completed, a message prompting the user to press the key is displayed.
1. Press any key.
Return to the menu screen.
2. Download the system software.
Refer to “Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic)” for details.
• When formatting of the entire HDD has been executed
When the formatting is completed, the machine is automatically restarted.
1. The machine starts in safe mode, and the main menu of download is displayed.
2. Download the system software.
Refer to “Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic)” for details.
1042
6. Troubleshooting
■ Backup
● [5]: Backup
CAUTION:
The USB flash drive collecting log uses the USB flash drive where You registered a system software for this Host machine
with by SST. As for the system software, only one system software application of the host machine (e.g. LANG) needs to
be stored, and it is not necessary to store the full set of software.
3. Press the key on the Control Panel. ([5] -> [0])
4. SRAM backup of Main Controller PCB 2

• [1] Sublog -> Collect debugging log.
• [4] ServicePrint -> Save the service data which P-PRINT or etc. output to paper with a text format.
• [5] Netcap: Capture network packets.
• [6] SRAM (HDD): Temporarily save the SRAM data to the host machine HDD.
• [7] SRAM (USB): Temporarily save the SRAM data to a USB memory.
㼇㼇㼇㼇㼇㻌㻮㼍㼏㼗㼡㼜㻌㻹㼑㼚㼡㻌㻔㼁㻿㻮㻕㻌㼉㼉㼉㼉㼉㼉㼉㼉㼉㼉㼉㼉
ーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーー
㼇㻝㼉㻦㻌㻿㼡㼎㼘㼛㼓
㼇㻠㼉㻦㻌㻿㼑㼞㼢㼕㼏㼑㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠
㼇㻡㼉㻦㻌㻺㼑㼠㼏㼍㼜
㼇㻢㼉㻦㻌㻿㻾㻭㻹㻔㻴㻰㻰㻕
㼇㻣㼉㻦㻌㻿㻾㻭㻹㻔㼁㻿㻮㻕
■ Clearing Download File

● [7]: Clear downloaded files
This menu clears the system software stored in the temporary storage area of the HDD.
This function is used to clear the downloaded file without writing it after downloading the system software in menu [2] or [3].
1. Execute the menu [2] or [3] to download data.
2. Press the [Reset] key to execute the shutdown sequence.
3. Once the display on the screen disappears, turn OFF the main power switch.
4. Start the machine in safe mode (while pressing 2 + 8 keys at the same time, turn ON the Main Power Switch).
If the system software is stored in the HDD temporary storage area when starting the machine in safe mode, the system
software is deleted. In such a case, the following message is displayed on the touch panel.
“All downloaded file is deleted.”
5. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
6. Remove the USB flash drive storage device.
1043
6. Troubleshooting
■ Download Menu 2
● [8]: Download Menu 2
• [8] > [1]: Change the service mode password back to the password at the time of shipment.
• [8] > [C]: To return to the menu screen.
㼇㼇㼇㼇㼇㻌㼐㼛㼣㼚㼘㼛㼍㼐㻌㻹㼑㼚㼡㻌㻞㼚㼐㻌㻔㼁㻿㻮㻕㻌㼉㼉㼉㼉㼉㼉

㼇㻝㼉㻦㻌㻿㼑㼞㼢㼕㼏㼑㻌㻹㼛㼐㼑㻌㻼㼍㼟㼟㼣㼛㼞㼐㻌㻯㼘㼑㼍㼞
㼇㻞㼉㻦㻌㻾㼑㼟㼠㼛㼞㼑
■ Other Menu
● [9]: Other Menu
This mode displays other menu.

• [9] -> [0]: To display other menu.
● [1]: Version Information

This mode displays the version of download mode.

• [9] > [1]: To display the version of download mode.
• [9] > Any key other than [1] key: To return to the menu screen.
Troubleshooting
■ Error Code: E753-0001
Cause
In the case of an error during writing process of the system software or in the case of writing
the system software of the option that is not installed, an error is determined to display E753-0001.
Remedy
The result of writing process is displayed at the upper side of E753-0001 error display.
Be sure to check the system software with the error (error or NG) displayed. Check if the target option is properly installed
and see if the software to download is for the correct target option, and then execute downloading again.
Upgrading by SST
Be sure to use Assist mode as a general rule because the system software of the non connecting option is not to be
downloaded in Assist mode.
In Single mode, it is available to download the system software of the option that is not installed.
In the case of downloading the Finisher’s system software, make the download mode of the Host Machine in normal
mode and connect to SST, and then download just the system software of the Finisher with the version information
displayed at the right side of the SST screen.
1044
6. Troubleshooting
Version Upgrade via CDS

■ Overview
Among the 5 methods in which service technicians provide firmware install services, the following 4 methods are available using
Updater functions.
• a. UGW-linked Download and Update (Full-remote Update)“a. UGW-linked Download and Update (Full-remote Update)” on
page 1050
• b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)“b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)” on page
1050
• c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)“c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update
from Service Mode)” on page 1052
• d: Update via SST
Firmware
Market Release
㼐
㼍 H
㼎
㼏
Distribution
Firmware acquisition 㻾㼑㼓㼕㼟㼠㼑㼞㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌
Setting to UGW
(UGW-linked)*1 㼒㼕㼞㼙㼣㼍㼞㼑㻌㼕㼚㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㻸㻯㻰㻿
Distribution setting & Distribution setting & Distribution setting & 㻱㼤㼑㼏㼡㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼠㼍㼟㼗㻌
Download Download Download
Automatic download Via Service mode 㻿㼏㼔㼑㼐㼡㼘㼑㼐㻌㼐㼛㼣㼚㼘㼛㼍㼐 Via Download via SST 㼒㼞㼛㼙㻌㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㻌
Via
(Local UI) Settings/Registration Settings/Registration 㻲㼕㼞㼙㼣㼍㼞㼑㻌㼁㼜㼐㼍㼠㼑
Apply (Update) Apply (Update) Apply (Update)

Automatic update Via Service mode 㻿㼏㼔㼑㼐㼡㼘㼑㼐㻌㼡㼜㼐㼍㼠㼑 Via Via Update via SST Automatic update
*1: Schedules for UGW-linked distribution are maintained on CDS.
NOTE:
• See User Manual of the device for how to connect the device to the external network.
• When needed, perform the communication test before actual download to check if the communication with the distribution
server is normal. (Refer to “3.Communication Test” on page 1048)
■ Preparation
● Overview of Preparation
The following should be prepared before using Updater.
For updating of firmware
Service Mode COPIER > FUNC- COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW
TION > INSTALL
CDS-CTL CDS- CDS-FIRM LOCLFIRM
UGW
Installation Method Setting Sales Com- Net- Ena- Enabling [Update Enabling [Manual
pany’s HQ work bling Firmware] Button Update] Button of
Set- UGW Remote UI
tings Link
UGW-linked Download and Update Yes Yes Yes - -
UGW-linked Download Yes Yes Yes - -
Manual Download and Update Yes Yes - - -
Manual Download and Update via Local UI Yes Yes - Yes -
Manual Download and Update via Remote UI Yes Yes - Yes -
1045
6. Troubleshooting
Service Mode COPIER > FUNC- COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW
TION > INSTALL
CDS-CTL CDS- CDS-FIRM LOCLFIRM
UGW
Installation Method Setting Sales Com- Net- Ena- Enabling [Update Enabling [Manual
pany’s HQ work bling Firmware] Button Update] Button of
Set- UGW Remote UI
tings Link
Special Download and Update via Remote UI Yes - - - Yes
● Setting Sales Company's HQ

When using devices input in the markets listed below, the default setting of Sales Company’s HQ should be changed before
obtaining firmware distributed from CDS. Unless the setting is changed properly, the desired firmware may not be able to be
selected.
Market Default Setting of Sales Company's HQ Setting of Sales Company's HQ after

Change
Canada US CA
Latin America US/SG LA
Hong Kong SG HK
Go to the following screen to change the setting of Sales Company's HQ.

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CDS-CTL
NOTE:
The list below shows the setting of Sales Company’s HQ for CDS-CTS by market. Check and adhere to the appropriate setting
for your market.
<List of Sales Company’s HQ and the settings for CDS-CTL>
Country/Region Code Country/Region Code

Japan JP China CN
USA US Hong Kong HK
Singapore SG Australia AU
Europe NL Canada CA
Korea KR Latin America LA
● Network Settings
1.Connecting to External Network
The method of connecting to external network is similar to a normal network connection method. Refer to user manual of the
device for details.
NOTE:
Before using UGW link or Settings/Registration, see the sections below to prepare as required.
• "Enabling UGW Link"
• "Enabling [Update Firmware] Button of Settings/Registration"
• "Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of Settings/Registration"
2.Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server

This section describes how to confirm the URL setting of the distribution server.
1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.
1046
6. Troubleshooting
1047
6. Troubleshooting
5. Ensure to enter “https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif” in the field beside the [Delivery Server URL]
button.
If the URL is not entered or a wrong URL is entered in the field, click [Delivery Server URL] button to show the virtual keypad.
Check the URL and enter the correct one.

3.Communication Test
1048
6. Troubleshooting
7. Press [OK] button to exit this operation.
● Enabling UGW Link

When installing the firmware in the method of “UGW-linked Download and Update” or “UGW-linked Download”, the following
should be set before actually using UGW link.
The service technician configures the following settings.
1. Change the following service mode setting to "1".

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-UGW
2. Configure the UGW Web-Portal setting.

On the [Customer Management] screen, change the setting of firmware distribution from "Do not distribute firmware" to
"Distribute firmware".
1049
6. Troubleshooting
NOTE:
• See “imageWARE Remote Operator’s Manual / e-Maintenance Business Operation Manual“ for how to operate UGW
WebPortal.
• [Distribute Firmware] should be set on [Customer Management] screen for staff in charge of setting for [Enter customer
information] or [Command for firmware distribution] in order to allow them to select the desired device on [Firmware Distribution
Information] screen.
• When using the Device Firmware Update Plug-in and Local CDS, it is necessary to disable "UGW linkage".
■ a. UGW-linked Download and Update (Full-remote Update)

See the figure below for the operational flow of “UGW-linked Download and Update”.
STEP 1
Scheduling
via UGW
● STEP1: Scheduling via UGW

The firmware distribution schedule to the certain device should be set on UGW.
See “UGW-linked Download and Update” in chapter 5 of Operation Manual of Content Delivery System V1.0 for Firmware
Distribution for details.
The device checks the schedule concerned every 12 hours on UGW. This allows the device to register the firmware distribution
setting, enabling automatic firmware download and update.
CAUTION:
[Devices without Wait for EOJ (end of job) Function]
• Firmware update will delete print jobs in the queue. Ensure to notify users of this before you start updating. It is
recommended to perform firmware update during non business hours.
[Devices with Wait for EOJ Function]
• Firmware update will not be triggered when any of the following jobs remains in the queue.
See “Limitations and Cautions” on page 313 for more detailed information.
NOTE:
To contacts registered for E-mail notification on UGW, the E-mail is sent from UGW upon completing firmware update.
■ b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)

See the figure below for the operational flow of “UGW-linked download”.
STEP 1 STEP 2
Scheduling Update using
via UGW Updater
● STEP 1: Scheduling via UGW

The firmware distribution schedule to the certain device should be set on UGW.
See “UGW-linked Download” in Operation Manual of Content Delivery System (for Firmware Distribution) for details.
NOTE:
The firmware downloaded by scheduling via UGW can be checked/deleted from Settings/Registration, but cannot be updated. If
a user download the other firmware, the firmware downloaded with "UGW-linked Download" is overwritten.
1050
6. Troubleshooting
● STEP 2: Update using Updater

The firmware downloaded on the device can be updated using Updater functions.
3. Press [Update Firmware] button.
4. Press [Apply Firmware] button.
1051
6. Troubleshooting
5. Confirm the downloaded firmware and press [Yes] button.
6. The firmware is applied to the device. The device is automatically restarted when the firmware is successfully
applied.
7. When the device is restarted, confirm the version of the firmware.

1. Press [Check Counter Key] button on the control panel.
2. Press [Check Device Configuration] button.
3. Confirm if the updated firmware version corresponds to [Controller Version].
Now the firmware is successfully updated in the method of “Manual Download and Update”.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
To contacts registered for E-mail notification on UGW, the E-mail is sent from UGW upon completing firmware update.
■ c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)

The figure below shows the operational flow of “Manual Download and Update”.
STEP 1 STEP 2
Download using Update using
Updater Updater
● STEP 1: Download using Updater

The firmware can be downloaded from CDS to the device using Updater.
1052
6. Troubleshooting
4. Confirm the firmware to be updated in either of the following 2 ways.

• To update to the official edition, press [Confirm Applicable Firmware] button and go to Step 6.
• To update to the individual response edition, press [Special Firmware] and go to Step 5.
1053
6. Troubleshooting
5. [Special Firmware] screen is shown as below. Enter the fields and press [OK] button.
• [Retrieval ID]: Enter numeric up to 8 characters.

• [Password]: Enter numeric up to 8 characters.
6. [New Firmware] screen is shown as below. Check the contents and press [Next] button.
• [Version]: The current firmware version is shown.

• [Applicable Firmware]: Select the firmware applicable to the device from the dropdown list.
• [Additional Languages]: If there are any additional languages, they are displayed. More than 1 language can be selected,
and it is possible to add another language when upgrading the firmware. Up to 8 languages can be added, including
Japanese and English. The languages already registered in the device are always selected, and SST is used to delete
an unnecessary language from the device.
• [Release Note]: If any release note is published, the contents are shown here.
NOTE:
To update to the individual response edition, the firmware corresponding to the ID and password that you input is displayed in
[Applicable Firmware].
1054
6. Troubleshooting
7. [Delivery Settings] screen is shown as below. Enter the fields and press [OK] button.
• [Delivery Time]: Press either [Now] or [Set Time] button.

• [Now]: The firmware is downloaded immediately after distribution schedule is set.
• [Set Time]: Be sure to specify the date (within 30 days) and time. The firmware is downloaded on specified date
and time. Enter the date and time using the numeric keypad in the format of “yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss”
• [Timing to Apply]: Press either [Auto] or [Manual] button.
• [Auto]: The firmware is applied automatically upon firmware downloaded.
• [Manual]: The firmware is automatically downloaded. Go to [Apply Firmware] to set up for updating the downloaded
firmware.
• [Updated Module Only]: Press either [On] or [Off] button.
• [On]: Only difference between the current and new firmware is downloaded.
• [Off]: The firmware to be applied is wholly downloaded.
• [E-mail]: E-mails concerning update statuses are sent from the device to the contact registered here Enter the E-mail
address of the service technician in charge. Enter 1-byte alphanumeric or symbols up to 64 characters.
• [Comments]: Enter the comment in 1-byte alphanumeric or symbols up to 128 characters. Enter the comment to be
automatically included in E-mail. Model Name in the comment will be helpful to identify the device relevant to the E-
mail.
NOTE:
[Timing to Apply]
• For firmware versions with no remote update permission, [Auto] cannot be selected in [Timing to Apply].
[Updated Module Only]
• For firmware versions with difference-only delivery disabled, only [OFF] can be selected in [Updated Module Only].
[E-mail]
• To send E-mails to multiple destinations, each E-mail address should be delimited with comma (,) or semi-colon (;).
• For E-mail addresses entered in this field, a notification E-mail is sent at the following timing.
• Distribution Set
• Distribution Started
• Distribution Finished
• Update Started
• Update Finished
• Error Occurred
1055
6. Troubleshooting
8. Confirm Export Criteria screen is shown as below. Check the contents and press [Accept] button.
9. One of the screens below is shown according to the setting.

• When Distribution Time and Timing to Apply of Distribution Setting are set to [Now] and [Auto], respectively:
Firmware is downloaded and updated automatically to the device. The device is automatically restarted upon update
completed. Now STEP 1 is successfully completed.
• When Distribution Time and Timing to Apply of Distribution Setting are set to [Now] and [Manual], respectively:
Confirm the firmware and press [OK] button. Now STEP 1 is successfully completed.
1056
6. Troubleshooting
• When Distribution Time is set to [Set Time] in Distribution Setting:

Confirm the distribution schedule and press [OK] button. Now STEP 1 is successfully completed.
● STEP 2: Update using Updater

The firmware downloaded to the device can be updated using Updater functions.
When Timing to Apply is set to [Auto] in Distribution Setting in STEP 1, the firmware is updated automatically. Only when Timing
to Apply is set to [Manual], follow the steps below to update the firmware.
1057
6. Troubleshooting
applied.

Now the firmware is successfully updated in the method of “Manual Download and Update”.
CAUTION:
■ Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule

This section describes how to delete firmware distribution schedule set by Updater.
1058
6. Troubleshooting
4. Press [Delete Scheduled Delivery] button.
5. Confirm the contents of the distribution schedule and press [Yes] button.
6. Confirm the result of deletion shown on the screen and press [OK] button.
Now the firmware distribution schedule is successfully deleted.
■ Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware)

This section describes how to update the downloaded firmware.
1059
6. Troubleshooting
applied.

1060
6. Troubleshooting

Now the firmware is successfully updated in the method.
■ Deleting Downloaded Firmware

This section describes how to delete the downloaded firmware using Updater.
4. Press [Delete Firmware] button.
1061
6. Troubleshooting
5. Confirm the downloaded firmware to be deleted and press [Yes] button.
6. Confirm the result of deletion and press [OK] button.

Now the downloaded firmware is successfully deleted.
■ Troubleshooting on Firmware Installation

Symptom 1: I can’t find the firmware to be updated using Updater.
Cause:
Preparation has not been properly done.
Action:
From [Service Mode], set the following service mode setting value to "JP".
Cause 2:
The version currently in use is not available for update.
Action 2:
Download the release note from CDS separately to upgrade to the version available for update.
Cause 3:
You try to download firmware from Settings/Registration. You can download only the latest version of firmware from Settings/
Registration.
Action 3:
Be sure to execute "UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)" or "Manual Download and Update (On-site Update
from Service Mode)".
<Settings/Registration>
1062
6. Troubleshooting
<Service Mode>
Symptom 2: Firmware download is aborted during operation using Updater functions.

Cause:
The network cable is disconnected or the power went off due to blackout and the like.
Action:
Retry download. Firmware under download is cancelled upon aborted.
Symptom 3: Firmware update is aborted during operation using Updater functions and the device
cannot be started.
Cause:
The power went off due to blackout and the like.
Action:
Service technicians should follow the steps below via SST.
1. Press [2] and [8] buttons at a time to start the device. Turn on the power and hold down [2] and [8] buttons at a time on
the control panel.
2. [Download Mode] is shown on Local UI.
If the operation above does not trigger the download mode, BOOT (Flash Memory service parts) should be replaced
(takes up to 1 minute for rewriting).
If the operation above successfully triggers the download mode, go to the next steps below.
3. Via SST, format the HDD of BOOT Dev only.
4. Via SST, install the firmware in the device.
Symptom 4: Firmware has not been downloaded according to the distribution schedule.
Cause 1:
Other firmware distribution schedule is set.Since only 1 distribution schedule is held, the registered schedule may be
overridden by the new firmware distribution schedule.
Action 1:
Once the schedule is overridden, the firmware cannot be downloaded. Distribution should be rescheduled for the firmware.
Cause 2:
At the scheduled distribution date and time, the firmware registered was not found on CDS.
Action 2:
Distribution should be rescheduled for the firmware.
1063
6. Troubleshooting
Cause 3:
After distribution is scheduled, device is updated to other version of firmware via SST. (Status of the firmware in the device
is changed.)
Action 3:
Cause 4:
The power of the device was off at scheduled date and time.
Action 4:
Cause 5:
The network between the updater and the CDS server has stopped.
Remedy 5:
Conduct a communication test and check the state of network.
There are some cases where the network is stopped only at night, during which update is performed. If the communication
test ended in success, check the state of network during the period when update is scheduled.
Symptom 5: The firmware presumed to be downloaded to the device cannot be found.

Cause:
Since only 1 firmware can be held on the device, the firmware previously downloaded was overridden by the newly
downloaded one.
Action:
Retry the firmware download.
■ Information required for Reports

● Information required for Service Technicians to Obtain on Site
• Update Logs
• System Logs (Log Level: 4)
● Information to Report
• Symptom occurred
• Location of the device
• Date and Time that symptom occurred
• Steps taken for reproduction
• Firmware / Application you tried to install
• Occurrence frequency
• Model dependency (if the same symptom occurred in other models)
• Dependency on firmware/MEAP application/system option
• Conditions of symptom occurrence
• Model
• Firmware version installed on the device
• List of MEAP applications installed on the device
• Network setting information of the device
• Service mode setting information
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-UGW
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-FIRM
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-MEAP
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > LOCLFIRM
* As many as the items listed above should be obtained on site. More information provided will be helpful for investigation.
■ Debug Logs
● Obtaining Log Files
Updater log files can be obtained by copy & paste from remote UI.
This procedure is shown below.
1064
6. Troubleshooting
1. Check that the “CDS-MEAP” or “CDS-FIRM” is enabled in the service mode. If they are not enabled, change the
value to “1” and then restart the device.
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-MEAP
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-FIRM
2. Log in the remote UI (URL: http://<device’s IP address or host name>) using the system administrator right.
3. From “Display Logs/Communication Test” screen, obtain System Logs (log level 4) and Update Logs by copy &
paste.
Top page (Remote UI) > [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [License/Others] > [Register/Update Software]
> “Display Logs/Communication Test”
NOTE:
See "Setting Log Level" in chapter 2 for details of changing Log Level“Setting Log Level” on page 322
4. If the value of CDS-MEAP or CDS-FIRM was changed in the service mode, return to the original value and then restart
the device to enable this setting.
Obtaining the log files is completed.
■ Error Messages
● Error messages displayed in Updater
Error messages displayed in LUI on a device are shown below. As to error codes, see the next list.
Reference * : Refer to “Information required for Reports” on page 1064
No. Messages Timing of display Cause Remedy

1 An error occurred with In communicating System error occur- Obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Support Div. of
the delivery server. with the delivery red in server. the sales company.
Contact your sales server.
representative.
Error Code: [xxx]
2 Delivery server is stop- In communicating Delivery server stop- Check the delivery server stop information. After the delivery
ped. with the delivery ped. server starts, perform the operation from this application.
Wait a while and then server. When the delivery server stop information is not available,
try to perform the op- contact the sales company's Support Department.
eration again.
Check the following
URL for details.
<Stopped Delivery
Server URL>
1065
6. Troubleshooting

3 Failed to connect to In communicating Communication error Set correct CDS URL in the Updater settings.
delivery server. with the delivery due to incorrect set-
Check the delivery server. tings of CDS URL.
server and network. Excluding delivery Check if the network environment is correct to solve the cause
server stop, commu- of the error occurrence.
nication error to the If the network environment of the device is correct, obtain the
delivery server occur- log etc. (Reference *) and contact Support Div. of the sales
red. company.
4 Download was stop- At the time of file Communication error Check if the network environment is correct to solve the cause
ped because an error download to the delivery server of the error occurrence.
occurred with the file occurred. If the network environment of the device is correct, obtain the
server. log etc. (Reference *) and contact Support Div. of the sales
Check the network. company.
5 Downloaded files are At the time of file The received file is After checking the network environment of the device, re-ex-
invalid. Check the net- download broken. ecute the job.
work. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
port Div. of the sales company.
6 Failed to retrieve infor- Acquisition of appli- No information exists Enter the correct firmware ID or Password applicable to the
mation of special firm- cable firmware in- about firmware for firmware information.
ware. formation special firmware re- If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
Check the retrieval ID trieval ID or Pass- port Div. of the sales company.
and password. word is invalid.
7 Scheduled delivery in- Acquisition of appli- Delivery information Register the delivery schedule again. If this occurs at the time
formation of firmware cable firmware in- with specified deliv- of canceling file download, deleting downloaded firmware or
does not exist. formation ery ID does not exist. deleting scheduled delivery, no remedy is required.
Check it because it
may already have
been deleted.
8 Failed to apply firm- Firmware applica- Error due to the ap- Obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Support Div. of
ware. tion error plication (NLM) the sales company.
9 Delivery Server : Con- Communication In the communication Check the network environment of the device, and re-execute
nect Failed test, etc. (communi- test, failed to connect the job.
File Server : Retrieve cation test result to the delivery server. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
Failed dialogue) In SOAP communi- port Div. of the sales company.
Error Code: [xxxx] cation, failed to suc-
cess after 1 min retry.
ID and Password re- Set proxy and restart the communication test.
quired for proxy to If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
connect to the inter- port Div. of the sales company.
net are not config-
ured in device.
The access to the Set the user environment to make the access to the following
network is limited. domain available.
https://device.cdsknn.net/
http://cdsknn.net.edgesuite.net/
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
Delivery server stop- Contact Field Support Group in the sale company.
ped. After confirmation that the delivery server has been restored,
restart the communication test.
port Div. of the sales company again.
10 Delivery Server : Con- Delivery Server : Due to no return of Check the network environment of the device and re-execute
nect OK Connect OK data for the commu- the job.
File Server : Retrieve File Server : Re- nication test, time-out If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
Failed trieve Failed (in HTTP communi- port Div. of the sales company.
Error Code: [xxxx] Error Code: [XXXX] cation, no response
for 1min) occurred.
After that, retried but
failed to connect to
server.
1066
6. Troubleshooting

10 Delivery Server : Con- Delivery Server : The network cable Reconnect the network cable and then restart the communi-
nect OK Connect OK was disconnected cation test.
File Server : Retrieve File Server : Re- during data download If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
Failed trieve Failed in the communication port Div. of the sales company.
Error Code: [xxxx] Error Code: [XXXX] test.
The file server stop- Contact the sales company's Support Department.
ped during data After confirmation that the delivery server has been restored,
download in the com- restart the communication test.
munication test. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
port Div. of the sales company again.
Hash value in the Check the network environment and re-execute the job.
communication test If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
file is incorrect. port Div. of the sales company.
11 An error occurred. communication test, The max value Check if the log file exceeded the max value.
Error Code: [xxx] etc. (main screen) (space/file) was ex- <Update log>
ceeded and new log Max space: 128KB/file
was not accepted. Max file number: 4
Normally an old log <System log>
file is deleted before Max space: 512KB/file
the max value Max file number: 4
(space/file) is excee- If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
ded, but error may port Div. of the sales company.
occur due to other el-
ement (e.g. I/O er-
ror).
Notice of version in- Failed to acquire ver- Re-execute the job.
formation (main sion information of If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
screen) device due to no CDS port Div. of the sales company.
registration of firm-
ware version of de-
vice.
At the time of notify- Check if the network environment is correct to solve the cause
ing version informa- of the error occurrence.
tion, failed to connect
to the delivery server.
No return of notifying If the network environment of the device is correct, obtain the
version information log etc. (Reference *) and contact Support Div. of the sales
company.
Network cable was Re-connect the network cable and re-execute the job.
disconnected during If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
notice of version in- port Div. of the sales company.
formation.
Failed to send notice Re-execute the job.
of version information If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
since the main power port Div. of the sales company.
was turned OFF and
then ON during the
sending.
Server stopped at the Check the network environment of the device and re-execute
time of sending no- the job.
tice of version infor- If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
mation. port Div. of the sales company.
An internal error oc- Obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Support Div. of
curred at the time of the sales company.
sending notice of ver-
sion information.
UGW linkage (main UGW linkage was For a device using eRDS, turn ON the eRDS. For a device not
screen) turned ON when using eRDS, turn OFF the UGW linkage.
eRDS was OFF. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
An internal error oc- Re-execute the job.
curred at the time of If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
acquiring delivery in- port Div. of the sales company.
formation.
1067
6. Troubleshooting

11 An error occurred. On-site (error dia- An internal error oc- Re-execute the job.
Error Code: [xxx] logue) curred at the time of If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
acquiring applicable port Div. of the sales company.
firmware information.
sending approval in- port Div. of the sales company.
formation.
delivery order port Div. of the sales company.
Immediate down- An internal error oc- Re-execute the job.
load (error dialogue) curred at the time of f it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
requesting firmware port Div. of the sales company.
delivery information.
During the download, After adding vacant space of the storage disk, re-execute the
all space in the stor- job.
age disk was occu- If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
pied. (DiskFull) port Div. of the sales company.
At the end of receipt, Re-execute the job.
an internal error oc- If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
curred. port Div. of the sales company.
Manual update (er- At the update start, Re-execute the job.
ror dialogue) an internal error oc- If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
Automatic update At the update start, Re-execute the job.
(error dialogue) an internal error oc- If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
Deletion of down- At the time of notify- Re-execute the job.
loaded firmware ing cancellation, an If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
internal error occur- port Div. of the sales company.
red.
12 An error occurred. UGW linkage (main eRDS sent an order Conduct a communication test to analyze the cause of the er-
Check the Update screen) but Updater failed to ror. After solving the cause, resend the order from the eRDS.
Firmware screen connect to server. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
Delivery server stop- Contact the sales company's Support Department.
ped. After confirming restoration of the delivery server, re-execute
the job.
Scheduled date and Do the delivery setting from UGW again.
time acquired from If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
the delivery server port Div. of the sales company.
was before current
time (15 or more min
had passed.)
Scheduled data and Do the delivery setting from UGW again.
time acquired from If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
the delivery server port Div. of the sales company.
did not exist.
Immediate down- At the time of imme- Re-execute the job.
load (main screen) diate download, If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
turned OFF and then port Div. of the sales company.
ON the power of de-
vice main body.
Manual update Updated version was Re-execute the job.
(main screen) different from the or- If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
Automatic update dered version. port Div. of the sales company.
(main screen) After the update, Check the network environment and re-execute the job.
failed to connect to If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
the delivery server. port Div. of the sales company.
1068
6. Troubleshooting

12 An error occurred. Manual update After the update, de- Contact the sales company's Support Department. After con-
Check the Update (main screen) livery server stopped. firming restoration of the delivery server, re-execute the job.
Firmware screen Automatic update If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
(main screen) port Div. of the sales company.
After the update, the Re-connect the network cable and re-execute the job.
network cable was If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
disconnected. port Div. of the sales company.
After the update, Obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Support Div. of
server returned an the sales company.
error.
After the update, an If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
internal error occur- port Div. of the sales company.
red.
13 Delivery Error UGW linkage (Up- eRDS sent an order Conduct a communication test to analyze the cause of the er-
Error Code: [xxx] date Firmware but Updater failed to ror. After solving the cause, resend the order from the eRDS.
screen) connect to the server. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
The delivery server Contact the sales company's Support Department. After con-
stopped. firming restoration of the delivery server, re-execute the job.
The scheduled data Do the delivery setting from UGW again.
and time acquired If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
from delivery server port Div. of the sales company.
does not exist.
14 Delivery Error UGW linkage (Up- The scheduled date Do the delivery setting from UGW again.
Delivery Time date Firmware and time acquired If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
Delivery Firmware La- screen) from delivery server port Div. of the sales company.
bel was before current
Delivery Firmware ver- time (15 or more min
sion had passed).
Error Code: [ xxx ] Immediate down- At the time of imme- Re-execute the job.
load (Update Firm- diate download, If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
ware screen) turned OFF and then port Div. of the sales company.
ON the power of de-
vice main body.
15 Applicable firmware is On-site (error dia- At the user site, no This means the current firmware is the latest, so this error has
not registered. logue) latest firmware ex- no impact.
ists. But when the latest firmware to be retrieved must exist e.g.
released new firmware information has been notified, contact
Field Support Group in the sales company.
No applicable firm- Contact the sales company's Support Department.
ware exists on CDS,
so the service person
can't select any appli-
cable firmware.
16 Restart failed. Manual update (er- An error occurred at After turning OFF and then ON the main power of the device,
Turn the main power ror dialogue) the time of the device re-execute the job.
OFF and ON. restart. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
Automatic update An error occurred at After turning OFF and then ON the main power of the device,
(error dialogue) the time of the device re-execute the job.
restart. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Reference *) and contact Sup-
17 Specify [E-Mail Ad- At the time of peri- The specified E-mail Specify E-mail address within 64 characters.
dress] with up to 64 odical update set- address exceeded 64
characters. ting characters.
18 The following charac- At the time of peri- The E-mail address Do not specify E-mail address with characters which cannot
ters cannot be used for odical update set- was including the be used.
the [E-Mail Address]: ting characters which
,:;"()[]<>\ could not be used.
1069
6. Troubleshooting

19 Specify [Comments] At the time of peri- Comments exceeded Specify comments within 128 characters.
with up to 128 charac- odical update set- 128 characters.
ters. ting
20 The [Delivery Server In setting with the The specified deliver Enter the right URL(https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/
URL] is incorrect. deliver server URL. server URL is wrong. updaterif)
■ Error Code
● Explanation on Error Codes and Their Remedies
The following shows the error codes displayed on CDS error dialogs and the Control Panel of the device (local UI) and explanation
of those error codes.
How to read an error code

An error code consists of a number of eight digits (hexadecimal number) displayed on the UI shown below.
Local UI
Error Message dialogue
84014206 Code Value Contents
The first digit 8 Error

Error field
The second digit 0 Not defined.
Operator 1 CDS server
2 Updater
3 UGW
4 Service person
5 IT administrator (User)
6 Scheduled Update
The 3rd - 4th digits xx Method
Method category
The 5th digit 0 Not categorized.
Category code 1 Operation
2 I/O
3 Device
4 SOAP communication
5 HTTP communication
6 Socket communication
7 Other internal codes
The 6 - 8th digits 000- See Error code list
Description code
1070
6. Troubleshooting
Remedy by Error Code
Remedy to Be Taken When an Error Code Starting with [81------] Is Displayed

The remedy for an error code whose first two digits are "81" is shown below.
1. Refer to "List of Error Codes Starting with 81", and try the remedy.
2. If the symptom is not resolved by performing the remedy shown in the error code list, report it to the support
department of the sales company with the following information.
• Time of occurrence
• Serial number of the device
Remedy to Be Taken When an Error Code Starting with a Number Other than [81------] Is Displayed
The remedy for an error code whose first two digits are not "81" is shown below.
1. Check the last four digits of the code, and try the remedy shown in "List of Error Codes Starting with a Number
Other than 81".
2. In the case of an error message with a check mark on the "Network" column of "Cause of error" in the error code
list, try the remedy shown below.
• Execute the operation again.
Perform a communication test on the Touch Panel of the device.
Check the status of the network equipment (disconnection of the LAN cable, etc.).
Check the network settings of the device.
Check that there is no restriction on the network environment of the site (e.g. restriction on communication at night).
Check the proxy server of the customer. If it does not work properly, perform the remedy. If the problem still persists,
clear the cache of the proxy server.
3. If the symptom is not resolved by performing the foregoing remedy, report it to the support department of the sales
company with the following information.
• The generated error code
• The Sublog of the device
• The update log of the device (Set the log level to 4, and then collect the log.)
■ Error Code List

● List of Error Codes Starting with 81
The list of error codes starting with 81 is shown below. This error is related to the CDS server.
Report the error to the support department of the sales company with the time of occurrence and the serial number of the device.
Error Description Remedy Cause of error

Code CDS server UP DATER
81--0001 No value is set in a mandatory data entry item Contact the support department of the sales Yes Yes
company.
81--0002 In the case of [81--0002] except follows. In a string (Attach information on the time of occur- Yes Yes
type of a data entry item, digit number and/or char- rence and the serial number of the device.)
acter type is/are set against the regulations is dis-
played in the following cases:
81040002 • The number of digits of the registration ID or Enter the correct ID and password for Spe- Yes Yes
password is not 8. cial Firmware. (User)
• The registration ID or password includes
characters other than single-byte numeric
characters.
1071
6. Troubleshooting

81060002 • The number of digits or type of characters Register the correct e-mail address. Yes Yes
used for Firm Type, Firmware Version, Firm- If it occurs again, contact the support de-
ware Group Version, or Firmware Label does partment of the sales company. (Attach in-
not meet the specified number of digits or formation on the time of occurrence and the
type of characters. serial number of the device.)
• The character string of Firmware Group Ver- (Canon Inc. Only) In the case of an error in
sion (firmGroupVersion) includes characters Firm Type, Firmware Version, or Firmware
other than numeric values. Group Version, register the correct firmware
• The number of digits of E-mail Address (mai- again.
lAddress) is larger than 128.
• Characters other than single-byte alphanu-
meric characters and symbols are used for E-
mail Address (mailAddress).
• An invalid e-mail address was input (The do-
main name is missing, . (dot) was input in-
stead of , (comma), etc.)
81--0003 In an data entry item, the value is set against the Contact the support department of the sales Yes Yes
regulations company.
(E.g. the set value is other than "Operator: 4. Serv- (Attach information on the time of occur-
ice person, 5. User") rence and the serial number of the device.)
81--0004 No applicable delivery information exists Yes -
81--0005 Error in the system settings Yes -
Operation
81--1001 In the case of [81--0001] except follows. Inconsis- If distribution of the firmware is necessary, Yes Yes
tency between the current firmware component in search the applicable firmware again, and
the data entry item and delivery information (E.g. perform distribution of the firmware.
the conditions for automatic update are not met.
The settings of a mandatory additional set are in-
valid)
81071001 A cancellation notification was sent to CDS when Yes Yes
the distribution status was not correct. (CDS has
not received the status change due to a network
failure, etc.)
81091001 • The firmware information of the device at the Yes Yes
time of execution of distribution differs from
the firmware information of the device at the
time of registration of the distribution sched-
ule.
• The firmware was upgraded without using
CDS when distribution schedule for the de-
vice that supports the UGW-linked function
had been registered. As a result, the firmware
information of the CDS server at the time of
execution of distribution differs from the firm-
ware information of the CDS server at the
time of registration of the distribution sched-
ule.
When the remote update setting for the firm-
ware to be updated was disabled after distri-
bution schedule was registered using auto
update.
81--1002 In a notice of delivery-allowed information, an in- Contact the support department of the sales Yes -
stall-set was release to the market, but the market company.
release was stopped during the delivery (Attach information on the time of occur-
81--1003 No mail template file exists rence and the serial number of the device.) Yes -
81--1004 The device serial number in the data entry item Yes -
differs from that in delivery information
81--1005 User is selected as Operator in the data entry Yes -
items and the retrieval type is other than the latest
1072
6. Troubleshooting

81--1006 The retrieval type in the data entry item is special Contact the support department of the sales Yes -
and registration ID and individual Password are company.
not set (* Operator did not enter registration ID and (Attach information on the time of occur-
individual Password) rence and the serial number of the device.)
81--1007 The retrieval type in the data entry item is special Yes -
and Operator is not Service person
81--1008 As to the device serial number in the data entry Contact the support department of the sales Yes -
items, there is no applicable device code product Company.
(Attach information on the time of occur-
rence and the serial number of the device.)
(Canon Inc. Only) Check registration of
LMS.
81--1009 The retrieval type in the data entry items is special Enter correct ID and the password. Yes -
and there are no basic-set applicable to the reg-
istration ID and Password (* When wrong regis-
tration ID or Password was entered by an opera-
tor)
81--100A The delivery status is Applying After 2 hours and 30 minutes have passed Yes -
After the firmware was updated and when an up- since the failed attempt to distribute the firm-
date completion notification has not been sent to ware, search the applicable firmware again,
CDS, distribution of the firmware was attempted and perform distribution of the firmware.
again before update time-out is processed in CDS.
81--100B No approval information exists about EULA or the Contact the support department of the sales Yes -
export criteria when the delivery is determined company.
81--100C The delivery status is Distributing/Distributed/ Search the applicable firmware again, and Yes -
Applying/Finished/Failed perform distribution of the firmware.
When the distribution status was not correct, dis-
tribution information was obtained from CDS.
(CDS has not been notified of the status change
due to a network failure, etc.)
81--100D The delivery status is Distributing/Distributed/ Yes -
Applying/Finished/Failed
8108100D When the distribution status was not correct, Yes -
schedule information was checked with CDS.
(CDS has not been notified of the status change
due to a network
81--100E The delivery status is New/Waiting to Distribute/ Contact the support department of the sales Yes -
Distributed/Applying/Finished/Failed company.
81--100F The delivery code is other than Distributing. (Attach information on the time of occur- Yes -
(Firmware distribution) rence and the serial number of the device.)
81--1010 The delivery status is New/Waiting to Distribute/ Search the applicable firmware again, and Yes -
Distributing/Applying/Finished/Failed perform distribution of the firmware.
810B1010 An update start notification was sent to CDS with Yes -
an invalid status. (The CDS server failed to receive
the status change due to a network error, etc.)
81--1011 The delivery status is Distributing/Distributed/ Contact the support department of the sales Yes -
Applying/Finished/Failed company.
81--1012 Device is "Not applicable to CDS" Register the device as a CDS device. Yes -
(Firmware distribution)
* It occurs only when a device that can access
CDS is managed.
81--1013 When the specified distribution time was within the Contact the support department of the sales Yes -
time frame of CDS distribution stop. company.
(Firmware distribution) (Attach information on the time of occur-
1073
6. Troubleshooting

81--1014 When confirmation of the firmware distribution set- Search the applicable firmware again, and Yes -
tings ended in time-out. perform distribution of the firmware.
CDS was not accessed within 30 minutes after the
distribution time. The device has been turned
OFF, the network has been disconnected, etc.
81--1015 When firmware distribution time-out occurs. Yes -
A reception completion notification was not sent to
CDS within 24 hours after the start of the distribu-
tion. The device has been turned OFF, the net-
work has been disconnected, etc.
81--1016 Firmware update time-out occurred. Check the device to see if the update has Yes -
An update completion notification had not been been completed. When the update has
sent to CDS even after 2 hours since the start of ended in failure, execute the operation
the update. again if there is no problem with the device.
81--1017 When the firmware distribution information notifi- Contact the support department of the sales Yes -
cation showed an error in processing the distribu- company.
tion information. (Attach information on the time of occur-
81--1018 When the firmware distribution information notifi- rence and the serial number of the device.) Yes -
cation showed an error in processing the sched-
uled update information.
81--1019 When the status of the scheduled update infor- Yes -
mation is "Set", "Finished", or "Failed".
81--1020 When the status of the scheduled update infor- Contact the support department of the sales Yes -
mation is "Waiting to Transmit" or "New". company.
81--1021 When the status of the scheduled update infor- (Attach information on the time of occur- Yes -
mation is "Set". rence and the serial number of the device.)
81--1022 The scheduled update setting information differs Yes -
between the input information and the distribution
information.
81--1023 When the distribution status is "Cancel". Yes -
I/O
81--2014 Device information corresponding to the target de- Contact the support department of the sales Yes -
vice serial number does not exist. company.
(There is no relevant information on the device (Attach information on the time of occur-
firmware group.) rence and the serial number of the device.)
● List of Error Codes Starting with a Number Other than 81

The list of error codes starting with a number other than 81 is shown below. If such an error has occurred, search the remedy
using the last four digits of the error code.
Report the error to the support department of the sales company with the Sublog and update log of the device.
The "CDS server" in the "Cause of error" column includes CDS distribution servers and CDS file servers.

Code CDS serv- UP DATER Network
er
8X-- 1001 Processing exclusively Start the operation again after termi- - Yes -
nating other Updater operations being
executed simultaneously
1002 Stopped Restart the device, and start the oper- - Yes -
ation again.
1101 Failed to process preparation for use Contact the support department of the - Yes -
1102 Failed to process use end sales company. - Yes -
(Attach the Sublog and update log of
1103 Time out during restart of readiness prepa- - Yes -
the device.)
ration
1104 Session time-out excluding after applica- Start the operation again from the be- - Yes -
tion inquiry (after issuing delivery ID) ginning
1105 CDS URL is not set Set CDS URL - Yes -
1106 Another job existed immediately before the Start the operation again after termi- - Yes -
firmware update processing. nating the job of the device
1074
6. Troubleshooting

er
1202 Specifying of scheduled update for a model Contact the support department of the Yes - -
that does not support scheduled update sales company.
1203 Firmware processing for a model that does (Attach the Sublog and update log of Yes - -
not support firmware processing the device.)
1301 Security Token verification error - - Yes
1302 Privilege check error Perform the authentication as a correct - - Yes
user.
1303 Parameter error Contact the support department of the - - Yes
1304 There is no distribution information from the sales company. - - -
server. (Attach the Sublog and update log of
the device.)
1305 Version notification is not required. - - -
1306 Connection server information mismatch Check the connection server settings. - - Yes
error
I/O
21X An internal error about file operation Contact the support department of the - Yes -
X sales company.
22X An internal error about XML file operation (Attach the Sublog and update log of - Yes -
X the device.)
2301 Failed to output the license file - Yes -
2401 Failure in creation of an auto shutdown stop - Yes -
file
2402 Failure in deletion of the auto shutdown - Yes -
stop file
Device
31X An internal error in CPCA Contact the support department of the - Yes -
X sales company.
32X An internal error in IMI (Attach the Sublog and update log of - Yes -
X the device.)
33X An internal error in SMS - Yes -
X
34X An internal error in NLM - Yes -
X
35X Configuration Service property setting error - Yes -
X
36X An internal error related to APL_CDS par- - Yes -
X tition
37X DCM-related service error - Yes -
X
SOAP communication
4101 The processing thread stopped Contact the support department of the - Yes -
4102 Processing SOAP communication now sales company. - Yes -
4103 The function type is not matched - Yes -
the device.)
4104 An invalid SOAP response error Check the network environment. Yes - -
When this problem recurs, contact the
support department of the sales com-
pany.
4105 No network cable connection (device side) Check the network environment. Yes - -
If it occurs again, contact the support
department of the sales company.
the device.)
4201 An internal error about application informa- Contact the support department of the - Yes -
tion sales company.
4202 Config.xml is not found (Attach the Sublog and update log of - Yes -
the device.)
4203 Type.xml is not found - Yes -
4204 An error in binding type.xml - Yes -
1075
6. Troubleshooting

er
4205 An error in creating a service tab Contact the support department of the - Yes -
4206 A runtime error in performing the web meth- sales company. - Yes Yes
od (Attach the Sublog and update log of
the device.)
4207 An unknown host error in performing the • Check the network environment of Yes Yes Yes
web method the device and start the operation
again
• Check if the URL settings of the
CDS server are correct, and start
the operation again after resetting
4301 The delivery server is stopped Contact the support department of the Yes - -
sales company.
the device.)
4302 <In the case of scheduled update> <In the case of scheduled update> Yes Yes -
In response to a download start notification Specify the distribution settings again,
sent from the device, the distribution server making sure that the distribution server
returned an error and stopped the operation maintenance time and the scheduled
of the device within a certain period of time update time do not overlap.
before the distribution server maintenance <In the case of distribution executed by
time. specifying the date and time>
<In the case of distribution executed by Specify the distribution settings again,
specifying the date and time> making sure that the firmware version
The firmware version of the device at the of device at the time when the distribu-
time when the distribution settings were tion settings are specified and the ver-
specified and the version at the time imme- sion at the time immediately before up-
diately before update are different. date are the same.
HTTP communication
5101 Specified Hash Algorithm is unknown Contact the support department of the - Yes -
sales company.
the device.)
5102 Download file URL is invalid Check the URL setting of CDS server, - Yes -
reset the setting, and then start the op-
eration again.
5103 No network cable connection (device side) Check the network environment of the - Yes -
device, and start the operation again.
5201 Invalid HTTP request Contact the support department of the Yes Yes Yes
sales company.
the device.)
5202 Failed to connect to the server Check the network environment of the Yes Yes Yes
device (check for any problem in the
DNS server), and start the operation
again.
5203 Failed to find the server Check the network environment of the Yes Yes Yes
device (the proxy settings, etc.), and
start the operation again.
5204 An input/output error occurred during the Check that no problem is found in the Yes Yes Yes
connecting process to the server two items displayed during the commu-
5205 Failed to read a HTTP response nication test. If any problem was found, Yes Yes Yes
check the network environment.
5206 Error in a HTTP response Check the network environment. Yes Yes Yes
5207 Generation of secure socket failed. Contact the support department of the Yes Yes Yes
5208 Certificate check error sales company. Yes Yes Yes
5209 Connection time-out - Yes Yes
the device.)
5301 Failed to retrieve the data stream Contact the support department of the - Yes Yes
5302 Failed to create the file object for receipt sales company. - Yes Yes
the device.)
1076
6. Troubleshooting

er
5303 Failed to create the data stream of the file Contact the support department of the - Yes Yes
for receipt sales company.
the device.)
5304 Failed to receive the data Check the network environment of the Yes Yes Yes
5305 An error about reserving the file data for re- Check that no problem is found in the - Yes -
ceipt HDD.
When this error occurs again, contact
Support Group of sales companies.
5306 Failed to close the data stream Contact the support department of the - Yes -
5307 Failed to close the file data for receipt sales company. - Yes -
the device.)
5308 Invalid hash code of the download file Check the network environment of the Yes Yes Yes
5309 The proxy authentication method is not Check the proxy authentication method - Yes Yes
supported, or access to the CDS file server being used, change the setting to use
is not permitted. a supported proxy authentication, and
then start the operation again.
Check that access to the following URL
is permitted.
• device.c-cdsknn.net (protocol:
https)
• cdsknn.net.edgesuite.net (proto-
col: http)*
* The following URL in the product
of after iR-ADV C2200 series.
a02.c-cdsknn.net (protocol: https)
But, it excludes iR-ADV
C5200/9200/7200 series.
Socket communication
6101 Failed to connect the eRDS Contact the support department of the - Yes Yes
6102 No response from eRDS sales company. - Yes Yes
6103 No notice of start from the eRDS - Yes Yes
the device.)
6104 Error of socket reading - Yes Yes
6105 Socket communication time-out - Yes Yes
Other internal codes
71X An error by using invalid API Contact the support department of the - Yes -
X sales company.
72X An internal error in SMS (Attach the Sublog and update log of - Yes -
X the device.)
7301 No existence of delivery ID - Yes -
7302 Invalid delivery ID - Yes -
7303 The updated firmware information is not - Yes -
identical with the firmware information after
activation of the Updater
7304 The process of firmware downlo d is incom- - Yes -
plete
It occurs when the power of the device is
turned OFF during download.
7305 The update process is incomplete - Yes -
The power was turned OFF after comple-
tion of download and before start of update
processing.
7401 Failed to retrieve delivery information - Yes -
7501 Failed to execute the delivery process - Yes -
1077
6. Troubleshooting

er
7502 The scheduled distribution had not been Scheduled deliveries not executed - Yes -
executed even after a certain period of time within the defined period of time are
due to the power of the device being OFF abandoned, so register a scheduled
at the scheduled time or other reasons. delivery again.
When setting the date and time of the
scheduled delivery, be sure to desig-
nate a time when the device is ON
7503 The download results could not be ob- Contact the support department of the - Yes -
tained. sales company.
7504 There is no download list information. (Attach the Sublog and update log of - Yes -
the device.)
AXX Communication error in the internal module - Yes -
X
● List of Error Codes Related to Local CDS

A list of error codes related to Local CDS is shown below.
Error Code Description Remedy

81--F003 Firmware information not registered. Contact the sup-
Firmware information corresponding to the target device serial number does not exist. port department
81--F007 Invalid firmware version. of the sales com-
The firmware version at the time of registration of the distribution schedule differs from the current pany
firmware version.
81--F008 Invalid firmware information. Firmware information to be distributed does not exist.
81--F009 Forcible termination. Distribution information is forcibly terminated from the server UI.
81--F00F Invalid distribution status. Distribution status of the server is in a condition where a requested method
from the client cannot be accepted.
81--F010 Invalid parameter. Requested parameter from the client is not correct.
81--F011 Version information not registered. Version information corresponding to the specified serial number
has not been registered.
81--F012 Distribution time-out. Distribution has not been completed even after a certain period of time from the
start of the distribution.
81--F013 Unable to judge the necessity of distribution
Version information from a device has not been registered in the local CDS.
Since the local CDS does not know the version information of the device, it cannot respond to the
distribution request from updater. As a result of that, an error
occurred when the request has been made.
81--FFFE DB error. General error to access DB.
81--FFFF DB error. Internal error other than error to access DB (file I/O, etc.).
8X--1204 L-CDS update process for a model that does not support L-CDS
● Error Codes When Using the UGW-linked Function

Codes displayed as eRDS errors when the UGW-linked function is used

8--X0000 An unexpected error occurred in the device. Restart the device, and perform the operation again.
When this problem recurs, the firmware of the device needs to be re-
installed (upgraded).
8--X0002 A time-out error occurred due to no response from Obtain the sublog, and contact the support department of the sales
Updater within the specified time (3 seconds). company.
8--X0101 Processing in the device (event processing) Restart the device, and perform the operation again.
failed. Restart the device, and perform the oper- When this problem recurs, the firmware of the device needs to be re-
ation again. installed (upgraded).
8--X0303 Queue could not be sent due to failure of process- Restart the device, and perform the operation again.
ing in the device (event processing). When this problem recurs, the firmware of the device needs to be re-
installed (upgraded).
1078
6. Troubleshooting

8--X0304 An error occurred in control of synchronization or Wait for a while, and perform a communication test again.
interruption processing between processes being
handled in parallel.
8--X0706 Communication with Updater failed. Restart the device, and perform the operation again after checking that
8--X0707 Updater has been started.
When this problem recurs, obtain the sublog, and contact the support
8--X0708
department of the sales company.
8--X0709 At the time of firmware update, the Tracking ID Obtain the sublog, and contact the support department of the sales
ordered by UGW and the one to which the Updater company
responded did not match.
● Error Codes Not Included in the Error Code List and Remedy for Them
Scenes Where an Error Occurs
When an error code not included in the error code list is displayed, one of the errors shown in the following scenes may have
occurred.
Scenes Where an Error Occurs
Scenes Where an Error Occurs Content

Communication test, etc. (main Log could not be written due to maximum value (capacity/the number of files) being exceeded.
screen)
Version information notification (main Retrieval of device version information ended in failure because the firmware version of the
screen) device was not registered in CDS.
Connection to the delivery server failed at the time of notification of version information.
The network cable was disconnected during notification of version information.
Notification of version information ended in failure because the device was restarted during
notification of version information.
UGW linkage (main screen) UGW linkage was turned ON while eRDS was OFF
On-site (error dialog) An internal error occurred when obtaining the applicable firmware information
Immediate download (error dialog) An internal error occurred at the time of request of firmware delivery information.
Free space in the storage destination disk ran out during download. (DiskFull)
Manual/auto update (error dialog) An internal error occurred at start of update.
Deletion of downloaded firmware An internal error occurred at the time of cancellation notification.
Remedy
Check that the log files shown below do not exceed the maximum values.
When this problem recurs, obtain the log, and contact the support department of the sales company.
Logs and maximum capacity / number
Log name Maximum capacity Maximum number of files

Update log 128KB/ file 4
System log 512KB/ file 4
1079
7 Error/Jam/Alarm
Over View........................................1081
Error Code.......................................1083
Jam Code........................................1733
Alarm Code..................................... 1760
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Over View
For PRISMAsync model, refer to PRISMAsync service manual.
This chapter describes various codes which are displayed when a failure occurs on the product. These are classified into 3 codes
as follows.
Code type Explanation Reference

Error code This code is displayed when an error occurs on the machine. “Error Code” on page 1083
Jam code This code is displayed when a jam occurs inside the machine. “Jam Code” on page 1733
Alarm code This code is displayed when a function of the machine is malfunc- “Alarm Code” on page 1760
tioned.
Location Code
Error code and jam code include the location information.
Location information is displayed as 2-digit numbers as follows.
In the error and jam display screen, the “L” row corresponds to the location code.
Device JAM ERR ALARM

imagePRESS C10000VP series 00 Main Controller = 00 04,
Printer engine = 05 Other than those
below
Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-K1 01 04 02,50
POD Deck Lite-C1 00 05 04
POD Deck-D1 11,12 11,12 04
Secondary POD Deck-D1 11,12 11,12 04
High Capacity Stacker-H1 - 51,52 -
Perfect Binder-E1 61 61 66
Multi Function Professional Puncher-A1 31 31 -
Document Insertion Unit-N1 71 71 67
Paper Folding Unit-J1 02 02 -
Finisher-AN1/Saddle Finisher-AN2 02 02 61,62,64,65
Booklet Trimmer-D1 02 02 -
Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer-A1 02 02 -
Pickup position code

When jam occurs, pickup location is indicated with the following pickup position code.
In the jam display screen, the “P” row corresponds to the pickup position code.
Pickup position Pickup position code

Paper Deck of the Main Unit Right Deck 01
Left Deck 02
LONG SHEET TRAY-A1 05
POD Deck Lite-C1 06
POD Deck-D1 Upper deck 08
Middle deck 09
Lower deck 10
Secondary POD Deck-D1 Upper deck 11
Middle deck 12
Lower deck 13
Duplex F0
1081
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Pickup size
When a jam occurs, a paper size is displayed. (The row displaying "SIZE" on the jam screen refers to the paper size.)
Due to the limitation of displayable number of characters, some paper size names are omitted. The following is the list of displayed
row of texts and corresponding paper sizes.
* The following is based on the display specification and not all paper sizes can actually be used.
Display Paper Size Display Paper Size

A0 A0 LDR LEDGER
A1 A1 LDRFB LEDGERFULLBLEED
A2 A2 LGL LEGAL
A3 A3 LTR LETTER
A3FB A3FULLBLEED EXE EXECUTIVE
A4 A4 STMT STATEMENT
A5 A5 10x8 10x8
A6 A6 12x18 12x18
A7 A7 13x19 13x19
I-B0 ISOB0 15x11 15x11
I-B1 ISOB1 17x22 17x22
I-B2 ISOB2 18x24 18x24
I-B3 ISOB3 A-FLS Australian-FOOLSCAP
I-B4 ISOB4 ALGL Argentina-LEGAL
I-B5 ISOB5 ALTR Argentina-LETTER
I-B6 ISOB6 OFI OFICIO
I-B7 ISOB7 A-OFI Argentina-OFICIO
I-C0 ISOC0 B-OFI Bolivia-OFICIO
I-C1 ISOC1 E-OFI Ecuador-OFICIO
I-C2 ISOC2 M-OFI Mexico-OFICIO
I-C3 ISOC3 KLGL Korea-LEGAL
I-C4 ISOC4 GLGL Government-LEGAL
I-C5 ISOC5 GLTR Government-LETTER
I-C6 ISOC6 IND-LGL India-LEGAL
Points to Note When Clearing MN-CON

• Execution of clearing MN-COM deletes all data in Forwarding Settings, Settings/Registration (Preferences), Adjustment/
Maintenance, Function Settings, Management Settings, TPM Settings, etc. Before execution of this operation, ask user to
back up the data and get approval for this operation.
• When clearing MN-CON while any login application other than Default Authentication is, error such as not displayed login
screen occurred. In this case, access SMS once and switch login application to Default Authentication to recover to the
normal status.
Points to Note When Clearing HDD

As a remedy for error codes (E602-XXXX), HDD partition is selected and the target partition may be cleared.
When clearing partition, be sure to check which data will be deleted by referring Detail of HDD partition and explain to the user
before starting work.
1082
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Error Code
Error Code Details

E000-0101-05 Fixing temperature rising detection error
Detection Description The temperature of the Primary Fixing Roller Main Heater did not reach 10 deg C within 50 sec at
warn-up.
Remedy [Related parts] R1.00
- Harnesses from the Primary Fixing Heater Driver PCB to the Primary Fixing Roller Heater
1. Primary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN306/J4310P) to Drawer Unit (J7026D) (Unit of
replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 1)
2. Drawer Unit (J7026L) to Primary Fixing Roller Heater (H306/J7626 and J7627) (Unit of
replacement: CABLE, HEATER)
- Harnesses from the Primary Fixing Outer Driver PCB to the Primary Fixing Roller Main Thermistor
1. Primary Fixing Outer Driver PCB (UN304/J4193P) to Drawer Unit (J7026) to Relay Connector
(8P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 1)
2. Relay Connector (8P) to Primary Fixing Roller Main Thermistor (THM301/J5400) (Unit of
- Primary Fixing Roller Heater (H306)
- Primary Fixing Roller Main Thermistor (THM301)
- Primary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN306) (Unit of replacement: FIXING HEATER DRIVER PCB
ASS'Y)
- Primary Fixing Outer Driver PCB (UN304) (Unit of replacement: FIXING OUTER DRIVER PCB
ASS'Y)
[Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
After performing the remedy work, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER>
FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR.

Detection Description The temperature of the Primary Fixing Roller Main Heater did not reach 10 deg C within 100 sec
at warn-up rotation.
- Harnesses from the Primary Fixing Heater Driver PCB to the Primary Fixing Roller Heater
1. Primary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN306/J4310P) to Drawer Unit (J7026D) (Unit of
2. Drawer Unit (J7026L) to Primary Fixing Roller Heater (H306/J7626 and J7627) (Unit of
- Harnesses from the Primary Fixing Outer Driver PCB to the Primary Fixing Roller Main Thermistor
2. Relay Connector (8P) to Primary Fixing Roller Main Thermistor (THM301/J5400) (Unit of
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
1083
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The temperature of the Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Heater did not reach 20 deg C
within 50 sec at warn-up.
- Harnesses from the Primary Fixing Heater Driver PCB to the Primary Fixing External Heat Upper
Roller Heater
1. Primary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN306/J4312P) to Relay Connector (12P) (Unit of
replacement: CABLE, FIRST FIXING DRAWER)
2. Relay Connector (12P) to Drawer Unit (J7027F) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 1)
3. Drawer Unit (J7027M) to Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Heater (H308) (Unit of
replacement: DRAWER UNIT)
- Harnesses from the Primary Fixing Outer Driver PCB to the Primary Fixing External Heat Upper
1. Primary Fixing Outer Driver PCB (UN304/J4191P) to Drawer Unit (J7027F) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, DRAWER, 1)
2. Drawer Unit (J7027M) to Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Main Thermistor
(THM302M/J8797) (Unit of replacement: DRAWER UNIT)
- Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4081 and J4082) and the Primary
Fixing Outer Driver PCB (UN304/J4181P and J4182P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING
DUPLEXING, LEFT)
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1070, J1071 and J1072) and the Fixing
Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4071WH, J4072WH and J4070) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
FIXING DUPLEXING DRAWER)
- Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Main Thermistor (THM302M)
- Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Heater (H308)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
- Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311) (Unit of replacement: FIXING DUPLEX FEED PCB
ASS'Y)
- DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB 1-2 ASSEMBLY)
1084
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The temperature of the Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Heater did not reach 20 deg C
within 50 sec at warn-up.
- Harnesses from the Primary Fixing Heater Driver PCB to the Primary Fixing External Heat Lower
Roller Heater
3. Drawer Unit (J7027M) to Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Heater (H307)
- Harnesses from the Primary Fixing Outer Driver PCB to the Primary Fixing External Heat Lower
CABLE, DRAWER, 1)
2. Drawer Unit (J7027M) to Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Main Thermistor
DUPLEXING, LEFT)
- Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Main Thermistor (THM303M)
- Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Heater (H307)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
1085
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The temperature of the Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Heater did not reach the standby
temperature at warm-up.
- Harnesses from the Primary Fixing Heater Driver PCB to the Primary Fixing External Heat Upper
Roller Heater
3. Drawer Unit (J7027M) to Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Heater (H308) (Unit of
replacement: DRAWER UNIT)
- Harnesses from the Primary Fixing Outer Driver PCB to the Primary Fixing External Heat Upper
CABLE, DRAWER, 1)
2. Drawer Unit (J7027M) to Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Main Thermistor
DUPLEXING, LEFT)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
1086
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The temperature of the Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Heater did not reach the standby
temperature at warm-up.
- Harnesses from the Primary Fixing Heater Driver PCB to the Primary Fixing External Heat Lower
Roller Heater
3. Drawer Unit (J7027M) to Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Heater (H307)
- Harnesses from the Primary Fixing Outer Driver PCB to the Primary Fixing External Heat Lower
CABLE, DRAWER, 1)
2. Drawer Unit (J7027M) to Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Main Thermistor
DUPLEXING, LEFT)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
1087
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The temperature of the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Heater did not reach 17 deg C within 50 sec
at warm-up rotation.
- Harnesses from the Primary Fixing Heater Driver PCB to the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Heater
2. Relay Connector (12P) to Drawer Unit (J7026D) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 1)
3. Drawer Unit (J7026L) to Relay Connector (3P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 1)
4. Relay Connector (3P) to Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Heater (H305/J7628 and J7629) (Unit of
- Harnesses from the Primary Fixing Outer Driver PCB to the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Main
Thermistor
1. Primary Fixing Outer Driver PCB (UN304/J4192P) to Drawer Unit (J7026D) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, DRAWER, 1)
3. Relay Connector (7P) to Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Main Thermistor (THM300M/J5402) (Unit
of replacement: CABLE, THERMISTOR, RIGHT)
DUPLEXING, LEFT)
- Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Main Thermistor (THM300M)
- Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Heater (H305)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
1088
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The temperature of the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Heater did not reach 6 deg C within 100 sec
at warn-up.
- Harnesses from the Primary Fixing Heater Driver PCB to the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Heater
4. Relay Connector (3P) to Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Heater (H305/J7628 and J7629) (Unit of
- Harnesses from the Primary Fixing Outer Driver PCB to the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Main
Thermistor
1. Primary Fixing Outer Driver PCB (UN304/J4192P) to Drawer Unit (J7026D) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, DRAWER, 1)
3. Relay Connector (7P) to Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Main Thermistor (THM300M/J5402) (Unit
of replacement: CABLE, THERMISTOR, RIGHT)
DUPLEXING, LEFT)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
1089
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E000-0130-05 Fixing Motor overrun error

Detection Description Overrun of the Primary Fixing Motor was detected.
- Paper wrapping in the Fixing Assembly
- Failure of the break of the Primary Fixing Motor
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 to the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB
1. DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1070) to Drawer Unit (J7479D) (Unit of replacement: DRAWER
ASSEMBLY)
2. Drawer Unit (J7479L) to Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4071) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING DRAWER)
- Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4082) and the Primary Fixing
Outer Driver PCB (UN304/J4182P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING, RIGHT)
- Harness between the Primary Fixing Outer Driver PCB (UN304/J4165) and the Primary Fixing
Drive Motor (M300/J5310) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MOTOR)
- Primary Fixing Drive Motor (M300)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
[Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Check the Fixing Roller and the External Heat Belt in the Fixing Assembly. If paper is wrapped
around them, remove it.
2. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.

Detection Description Overrun of the Primary Fixing Motor was detected.
- After occurrence of E000-0130, the main power was turned OFF and then ON without replacing
the Primary Fixing Inner Driver.
ASSEMBLY)
- Harness between the Primary Fixing Outer Driver PCB (UN304/J4165) and the Primary Fixing
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
1090
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The temperature of the Secondary Fixing Roller Heater did not reach 10 deg C within 50 sec at
warn-up.
- Harnesses from the Secondary Fixing Heater Driver PCB to the Secondary Fixing Roller Heater
1. Secondary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN307/J4310S) to Relay Connector (12P) (Unit of
replacement: CABLE, SECOND FIXING DRAWER)
3. Drawer Unit (J7028L) to Secondary Fixing Roller Heater (H300/J7630 and J7631) (Unit of
replacement: CABLE, MAIN HEATER)
- Harnesses from the Secondary Fixing Outer Driver PCB to the Secondary Fixing Roller Main
Thermistor
1. Secondary Fixing Outer Driver PCB (UN305/J4193S) to Drawer Unit (J7028D) (Unit of
3. Relay Connector (8P) to Secondary Fixing Roller Main Thermistor (THM306/J5405) (Unit of
- Harnesses from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4087, J4086 and J4024) to the
Secondary Fixing Outer Driver PCB (UN305/J4182S, J4181S and J4150S) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING, RIGHT, CABLE, FIXING POWER SUPPLY)
- Secondary Fixing Roller Main Thermistor (THM306)
- Secondary Fixing Roller Heater (H300)
- Secondary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN307) (Unit of replacement: FIXING HEATER DRIVER
PCB ASS'Y)
- Secondary Fixing Outer Driver PCB (UN305) (Unit of replacement: FIXING OUTER DRIVER
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
1091
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The temperature of the Secondary Fixing Roller Heater did not reach 10 deg C within 100 sec at
warn-up rotation.
- Harnesses from the Secondary Fixing Heater Driver PCB to the Secondary Fixing Roller Heater
1. Secondary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN307/J4310S) to Relay Connector (12P) (Unit of
replacement: CABLE, SECOND FIXING DRAWER)
3. Drawer Unit (J7028L) to Secondary Fixing Roller Heater (H300/J7630 and J7631) (Unit of
replacement: CABLE, MAIN HEATER)
- Harnesses from the Secondary Fixing Outer Driver PCB to the Secondary Fixing Roller Main
Thermistor
1. Secondary Fixing Outer Driver PCB (UN305/J4193S) to Drawer Unit (J7028D) (Unit of
3. Relay Connector (8P) to Secondary Fixing Roller Main Thermistor (THM306/J5405) (Unit of
PCB ASS'Y)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
1092
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The temperature of the Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Heater did not reach 20 deg
C within 50 sec at warn-up.
- Harnesses from the Secondary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN307/J4312S) to the Drawer Unit
(J7029) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SECOND FIXING DRAWER, CABLE, DRAWER, 1)
- Harness between the Secondary Fixing Outer Driver PCB (UN305/J4191S) and the Drawer Unit
(J7029) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 1)
- Harness connecting from the Drawer Unit (J7029) to the Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper
Roller Heater (H302/J7029) and Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Main Thermistor
- Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4086) and the Secondary Fixing
Outer Driver PCB (UN305/J4181S) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING, RIGHT)
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1071) and the Drawer Unit (J7480) (Unit
of replacement: DRAWER ASSEMBLY)
- Harness between the Drawer Unit (J7480) and the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/
J4072) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING DRAWER)
- Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Main Thermistor (THM307M)
- Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Heater (H302)
PCB ASS'Y)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
1. Pull out the Secondary Fixing Assembly, and check that the Drawer Connector is free of toner
or foreign matter.
1093
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The temperature of the Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Heater did not reach 20 deg
C within 50 sec at warn-up.
- Harness connecting from the Drawer Unit (J7029) to the Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower
Roller Heater (H301/J7029) and Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Main Thermistor
- Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Main Thermistor (THM308M)
- Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Heater (H301)
PCB ASS'Y)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1094
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The temperature of the Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Heater did not reach the
standby temperature at warm-up.
PCB ASS'Y)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1095
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The temperature of the Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Heater did not reach the
standby temperature at warm-up.
PCB ASS'Y)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1096
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The temperature of the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Heater did not reach 6 deg C within 80
sec at warn-up.
- Harness between the Drawer Unit (J7028) and the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Heater
(H303/J7604) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 1)
- Harnesses from the Drawer Unit (J7028) to the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Main
Thermistor (THM310/J8782) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 1, CABLE, ENTRANCE
SENSOR)
- Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Main Thermistor (THM310)
- Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Heater (H303)
PCB ASS'Y)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.

Detection Description Overrun of the Secondary Fixing Motor was detected.
- Paper wrapping in the Fixing Assembly
- Failure of the break of the Secondary Fixing Motor
ASSEMBLY)
Outer Driver PCB (UN305/J4182S) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING, LEFT)
- Harness between the Secondary Fixing Outer Driver PCB (UN305/J4165) and the Secondary
Fixing Drive Motor (M305/J5310) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MOTOR)
- Secondary Fixing Drive Motor (M305)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
1097
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Overrun of the Secondary Fixing Motor was detected.
- After occurrence of E000-0230, the main power was turned OFF and then ON without replacing
the Secondary Fixing Inner Driver.
ASSEMBLY)
- Harness between the Secondary Fixing Outer Driver PCB (UN305/J4165) and the Secondary
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
1098
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E001-00FF-05 Fixing high temperature detection error

Detection Description A connection error was detected by one fixing-related thermistor after another.
- Harnesses connecting from the Primary Fixing Outer Driver PCB (UN304/J4191P) to the Primary
Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Thermistor and Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller
Thermistor (THM302/J8797 and THM303/J8798) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 1,
DRAWER UNIT)
- Harnesses from the Primary Fixing Outer Driver PCB (UN304/J4192P) to the Primary Fixing
Pressure Belt Thermistor (THM300/J5402) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 1, CABLE,
DRAWER, 1, CABLE, THERMISTOR, RIGHT)
Fixing Roller Thermistors (THM301/J5400 and THM304/J5401) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
DRAWER, 1, CABLE, DRAWER, 1)
- Harnesses connecting from the Secondary Fixing Outer Driver PCB (UN305/J4191S) to the
Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Thermistor (THM307/J8801) and Secondary Fixing
External Heat Lower Roller Thermistor (THM308/J8802) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER,
1, DRAWER UNIT)
Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Thermistors (THM310/J8782 and THM311/J8783) (Unit of
replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 1, CABLE, DRAWER, 1, CABLE, ENTRANCE SENSOR)
Secondary Fixing Roller Thermistors (THM306/J5405 and THM309/J5406) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, DRAWER, 1, CABLE, DRAWER, 1)
Primary Fixing Outer Driver PCB (UN304/J4181P, J4182P and J4150P) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING, LEFT, CABLE, POWER LEFT, UPPER)
- Harnesses connecting from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1003) to the Primary Fixing
Heater Driver PCB (UN306/J4300P) and the Secondary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN307/
J4300S) (Unit of replacement: DRAWER ASSEMBLY, CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING DRAWER)
- All thermistors (THM302, THM300, THM301, THM304, THM307, THM308, THM310, THM311,
THM306 and THM309)
ASS'Y)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
1099
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E001-0111-05 Fixing high temperature detection error

Detection Description The Primary Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor detected an error of hardware overheating.
- Harness between the Primary Fixing Outer Driver PCB (UN304/J4193P) and the Drawer Unit
- Harness between the Drawer Unit (J7026) and the Primary Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor
(THM304/J5401) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 1)
Outer Driver PCB (UN304/J4181P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING, LEFT)
- Primary Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor (THM304)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
1. Pull out the Primary Fixing Assembly, and check that the Drawer Connector is free of toner or
foreign matter.

Detection Description The Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Main Thermistor detected an error of hardware overheating.
- Harnesses from the Drawer Unit (J7026) to the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Main Thermistor
(THM300M/J5402) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 1, CABLE, THERMISTOR, RIGHT)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1100
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Sub Thermistor detected an error of hardware overheating.
- Harnesses from the Drawer Unit (J7026) to the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Sub Thermistor
(THM300S/J5402) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 1, CABLE, THERMISTOR, RIGHT)
- Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Sub Thermistor (THM300S)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Detection Description The Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Main Thermistor detected an error of hardware
overheating.
- Harness between the Drawer Unit (J7027) and the Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller
Main Thermistor (THM302M/J8797) (Unit of replacement: DRAWER UNIT)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1101
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub Thermistor 1 detected an error of hardware
overheating.
Sub Thermistor 1 (THM302S1/J8797) (Unit of replacement: DRAWER UNIT)
- Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub Thermistor 1 (THM302S1)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Detection Description The Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub Thermistor 2 detected an error of hardware
overheating.
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1102
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Main Thermistor detected an error of hardware
overheating.
- Harness between the Drawer Unit (J7027) and the Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Detection Description The Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub Thermistor 1 detected an error of hardware
overheating.
- Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub Thermistor 1 (THM303S1)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1103
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub Thermistor 2 detected an error of hardware
overheating.
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Detection Description The Primary Fixing Roller Main Thermistor detected an overheating error.
- Harness between the Drawer Unit (J7026) and the Primary Fixing Roller Main Thermistor
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1104
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Primary Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor detected an overheating error.
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Detection Description The Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Main Thermistor detected an overheating error.
- Harnesses from the Drawer Unit (J7026) to the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Main Thermistor
(THM300M/J5402) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 1, CABLE, THERMISTOR, RIGHT)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1105
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Sub Thermistor detected an overheating error.
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Detection Description The Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Main Thermistor detected an overheating error.
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1106
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub Thermistor 1 detected an overheating error.
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Detection Description The Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub Thermistor 2 detected an overheating error.
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1107
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Main Thermistor detected an overheating error.
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Detection Description The Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub Thermistor 1 detected an overheating error.
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1108
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub Thermistor 2 detected an overheating error.
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Detection Description The Secondary Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor detected an error of hardware overheating.
- Harness between the Drawer Unit (J7028) and the Secondary Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor
- Secondary Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor (THM309)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1109
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Main Thermistor detected an error of hardware overheating.
- Harnesses from the Drawer Unit (J7028) and the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Main
SENSOR)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.

Detection Description The Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Sub Thermistor detected an error of hardware overheating.
- Harnesses from the Drawer Unit (J7028) to the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Sub Thermistor
(THM311/J8783) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 1, CABLE, ENTRANCE SENSOR)
- Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Sub Thermistor (THM311)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1110
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Main Thermistor detected an error of hardware
overheating.
- Harness between the Drawer Unit (J7029) and the Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.

Detection Description The Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub Thermistor 1 detected an error of hardware
overheating.
- Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub Thermistor 1 (THM307S1)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1111
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub Thermistor 2 detected an error of hardware
overheating.
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.

Detection Description The Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Main Thermistor detected an error of hardware
overheating.
- Harness between the Drawer Unit (J7029) and the Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1112
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub Thermistor 1 detected an error of hardware
overheating.
- Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub Thermistor 1 (THM308S1)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.

Detection Description The Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub Thermistor 2 detected an error of hardware
overheating.
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1113
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Secondary Fixing Roller Main Thermistor detected an overheating error.
- Harness between the Drawer Unit (J7028) and the Secondary Fixing Roller Main Thermistor
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.

Detection Description The Secondary Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor detected an overheating error.
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1114
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Main Thermistor detected an overheating error.
- Harnesses from the Drawer Unit (J7028) and the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Main
SENSOR)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.

Detection Description The Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Sub Thermistor detected an overheating error.
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1115
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Main Thermistor detected an overheating error.
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.

Detection Description The Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub Thermistor 1 detected an overheating error.
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1116
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub Thermistor 2 detected an overheating error.
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.

Detection Description The Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Main Thermistor detected an overheating error.
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1117
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub Thermistor 1 detected an overheating error.
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.

Detection Description The Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub Thermistor 2 detected an overheating error.
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1118
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E003-0101-05 Fixing low temperature detection error

Detection Description The Primary Fixing Roller Main Thermistor detected a temperature lower than the specified value
by 30 deg C or more for 1 sec or longer.
- Harness between the Drawer Unit (J7026) and the Primary Fixing Roller Main Thermistor
- Harnesses from the Primary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN306/J4310P) to the Drawer Unit
(J7026) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIRST FIXING DRAWER, CABLE, DRAWER, 1)
- Harnesses from the Drawer Unit (J7026) to the Primary Fixing Roller Heater (H306/J7626) (Unit
of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 1, CABLE, MAIN HEATER)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1119
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Primary Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor detected a temperature lower than the specified value
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1120
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Main Thermistor detected a temperature lower than the specified
value by 50 deg C or more for 1 sec or longer.
- Harness between the Drawer Unit (J7026) and the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Sub Thermistor
(ThM300S/J5402) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 1)
- Harnesses from the Drawer Unit (J7026) to the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Heater (H305/J7601)
(Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 1, CABLE, HEATER)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1121
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Sub Thermistor detected a temperature lower than the specified
- Harness between the Drawer Unit (J7026) and the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Main Thermistor
(THM300M/J5400) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 1)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1122
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Main Thermistor detected a temperature lower than
the specified value by 80 deg C or more for 1 sec or longer.
- Harness connecting from the Drawer Unit (J7027) to the Primary Fixing External Heat Upper
Roller Heater (H308/J7027M) and Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Main Thermistor
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1123
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub Thermistor 1 detected a temperature lower
than the specified value by 80 deg C or more for 1 sec or longer.
Roller Heater (H308/J7027M) and Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub Thermistor 1
(THM302S1/J8797) (Unit of replacement: DRAWER UNIT)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1124
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Main Thermistor detected a temperature lower than
the specified value by 80 deg C or more for 1 sec or longer.
- Harness connecting from the Drawer Unit (J7027) to the Primary Fixing External Heat Lower
Roller Heater (H307/J7027M) and Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Main Thermistor
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1125
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub Thermistor 1 detected a temperature lower
Roller Heater (H307/J7027M) and Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub Thermistor 1
- Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub Thermistor (THM303S1)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1126
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub Thermistor 2 detected a temperature lower
Roller Heater (H308/J7027M) and Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub Thermistor 2
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1127
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E003-010A-05 Fixing low temperature detection error

Detection Description The Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub Thermistor 2 detected a temperature lower
Roller Heater (H307/J7027M) and Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub Thermistor 2
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1128
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Secondary Fixing Roller Main Thermistor detected a temperature lower than the specified
- Harness between the Drawer Unit (J7028) and the Secondary Fixing Roller Main Thermistor
(J7028) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 1, CABLE, SECOND FIXING DRAWER)
- Harnesses from the Drawer Unit (J7028) to the Secondary Fixing Roller Heater (H300/J7630)
(Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 1, CABLE, MAIN HEATER)
PCB ASS'Y)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1129
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Secondary Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor detected a temperature lower than the specified value
PCB ASS'Y)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1130
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Main Thermistor detected a temperature lower than the
specified value by 50 deg C or more for 1 sec or longer.
- Harnesses from the Drawer Unit (J7028) to the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Main
SENSOR)
PCB ASS'Y)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1131
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Sub Thermistor detected a temperature lower than the
specified value by 50 deg C or more for 1 sec or longer.
PCB ASS'Y)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1132
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Main Thermistor detected a temperature lower
PCB ASS'Y)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1133
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub Thermistor 1 detected a temperature lower
Roller Heater (H302/J7029) and the Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub Thermistor
1 (THM307S1/J8801) (Unit of replacement: DRAWER UNIT)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1134
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Main Thermistor detected a temperature lower
PCB ASS'Y)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1135
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub Thermistor 1 detected a temperature lower
Roller Heater (H301/J7029) and Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub Thermistor 1
PCB ASS'Y)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1136
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub Thermistor 2 detected a temperature lower
Roller Heater (H302/J7029) and the Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub Thermistor
2 (THM307S2/J8801) (Unit of replacement: DRAWER UNIT)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1137
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E003-020A-05 Fixing low temperature detection error

Detection Description The Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub Thermistor 2 detected a temperature lower
Roller Heater (H301/J7029) and Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub Thermistor 2
PCB ASS'Y)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
E004-0101-05 Fixing relay welding detection error

Detection Description Welding of the primary fixing relay was detected.
Remedy Replace the Primary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN306). (Unit of replacement: FIXING HEATER
DRIVER PCB ASS'Y)
1138
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E004-0102-05 Fixing temperature detection error

Detection Description An error in temperature difference between the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Main Thermistor and
the Sub Thermistor was detected.
- Harnesses from the Primary Fixing Outer Driver PCB to the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt
Thermistor
2. Relay Connector (7P) to Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Thermistor (THM300/J5402) (Unit of
replacement: CABLE, THERMISTOR, RIGHT)
- Harness between the Primary Fixing Outer Driver PCB (UN304/J4181P and J4182P) and the
Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4081 and J4082) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING
DUPLEXING, RIGHT)
- Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4071 and J4072) and the DC
Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1070 and J1071) (Unit of replacement: DRAWER ASSEMBLY)
- Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Thermistor (Main: THM300M, Sub: THM300S)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)

Detection Description An error in temperature difference among the Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Main
Thermistor and the Sub Thermistors was detected.
Roller Main Thermistor (THM302M/J8797) and Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub
Thermistor 1 and 2 (THM302S1 and THM302S2/J8797) (Unit of replacement: DRAWER UNIT)
- Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub Thermistor 1 and 2 (THM302S1 and THM302S2)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1139
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error in temperature difference among the Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Main
Roller Main Thermistor (THM303M/J8798) and Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub
- Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub Thermistor 1 and 2 (THM303S1 and THM303S2)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Detection Description It was detected that temperature difference between the Primary Fixing Roller Main Thermistor
and the Sub Thermistor was 100 deg C or more.
- Harness connecting from the Drawer Unit (J7026) to the Primary Fixing Roller Main Thermistor
(THM301/J5400) and Primary Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor (THM304/J5401) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, DRAWER, 1)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1140
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description It was detected that temperature difference between the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Main
Thermistor and the Sub Thermistor was 100 deg C or more.
- Harnesses connecting from the Drawer Unit (J7026) to the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Main
Thermistor (THM300M/J5402) and Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Sub Thermistor (THM300S/
J5402) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 1, CABLE, THERMISTOR, RIGHT)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Detection Description It was detected that temperature difference between the Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller
Main Thermistor and the Sub Thermistor 1 was 100 deg C or more.
Thermistor 1 (THM302S1/J8797) (Unit of replacement: DRAWER UNIT)
- Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4086) and Primary Fixing Outer
Driver PCB (UN304/J4181P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING, LEFT)
- Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Main Thermistor (ThM302M)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1141
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description It was detected that temperature difference between the Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1142
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Sub Thermistor 1 and the Sub Thermistor 2 was 30 deg C or more.
Roller Sub Thermistor 1 and 2 (THM302S1 and THM302S2/J8797) (Unit of replacement:
DRAWER UNIT)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1143
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Sub Thermistor 1 and the Sub Thermistor 2 was 30 deg C or more.
DRAWER UNIT)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
E004-0150-05 Fixing Power Supply error

Detection Description A connection error of the Primary Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor was detected.
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1144
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A connection error of the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Sub Thermistor was detected.
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Detection Description A connection error of the Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Main Thermistor was detected.
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1145
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A connection error of the Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Main Thermistor was detected.
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Detection Description A connection error of the Primary Fixing Roller Heater was detected.
- Harness between the Drawer Unit (J7609) and the Primary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN306/
J4300P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING DRAWER)
Heater Driver PCB (UN306/J4301P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER LEFT, UPPER)
- Harness between the Primary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN306/J4302S) and the Relay
Connector Base Unit (J7882F) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HEATER, AC)
- Primary Fixing Roller Thermoswitch (TP300)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1146
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A connection error of the Primary Fixing Roller Sub Heater was detected.
- Harnesses from the Drawer Unit (J7026) to the Primary Fixing Roller Sub Heater (H306S/J7626)
- Primary Fixing Roller Thermoswitch (TP300)
- Primary Fixing Roller Sub Heater (H306S)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Detection Description A connection error of the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Heater was detected.
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1003) and the Drawer Unit (J7609D) (Unit
- Harness between the Drawer Unit (J7609L) and the Primary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN306/
- Harness between the Primary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN306/J4303S) and the Relay
- Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Thermoswitch (TP301)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1147
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A connection error of the Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Heater was detected.
Heater (H308/J7027M) (Unit of replacement: DRAWER UNIT)
- Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Thermoswitch (TP302)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Detection Description A connection error of the Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub Heater was detected.
Sub Heater (H308/J7027M) (Unit of replacement: DRAWER UNIT)
- Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Thermoswitch (TP302)
- Primary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub Heater (H308)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1148
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A connection error of the Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Heater was detected.
Heater (H307/J7027M) (Unit of replacement: DRAWER UNIT)
- Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Thermoswitch (TP303)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Detection Description A connection error of the Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub Heater was detected.
Sub Heater (H307/J7027M) (Unit of replacement: DRAWER UNIT)
- Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Thermoswitch (TP303)
- Primary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub Heater (H307)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
E004-0201-05 Fixing relay welding detection error

Detection Description Welding of the secondary fixing relay was detected.
Remedy Replace the Secondary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN307). (Unit of replacement: FIXING HEATER
DRIVER PCB ASS'Y)
1149
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error in temperature difference among the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Main Thermistor
and the Sub Thermistor was detected.
- Harnesses connecting from the Drawer Unit (J7028) to the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller
Main Thermistor (THM310M/J8782) and Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Sub Thermistor
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.

Detection Description An error in temperature difference among the Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Main
Roller Main Thermistor (THM307M/J8801) and Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub
- Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub Thermistor 1 and 2 (THM307S1 and
THM307S2)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1150
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error in temperature difference among the Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Main
Roller Main Thermistor (THM308M/J8802) and Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub
- Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub Thermistor 1 and 2 (THM308S1 and
THM308S2)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.

Detection Description It was detected that temperature difference between the Secondary Fixing Roller Main Thermistor
and the Sub Thermistor was 100 deg C or more.
- Harness connecting from the Drawer Unit (J7028) to the Secondary Fixing Roller Main Thermistor
(THM306/J5405) and Secondary Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor (THM309/J5406) (Unit of
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
1151
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description It was detected that temperature difference between the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Main
Thermistor and the Sub Thermistor was 100 deg C or more.
- Harnesses connecting from the Drawer Unit (J7028) to the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller
Main Thermistor (THM310M/J8782) and Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Sub Thermistor
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.

Detection Description It was detected that temperature difference between the Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper
Roller Main Thermistor and the Sub Thermistor 1 was 100 deg C or more.
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN124/J1071) and the Drawer Unit (J7480) (Unit of
replacement: DRAWER ASSEMBLY)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1152
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description It was detected that temperature difference between the Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.

- Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN124/J1071) and the Drawer Unit (J7480) (Unit of
replacement: DRAWER ASSEMBLY)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1153
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.

Roller Sub Thermistor 1 and the Sub Thermistor 2 was 30 deg C or more.
DRAWER UNIT)
THM307S2)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1154
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Roller Sub Thermistor 1 and the Sub Thermistor 2 was 30 deg C or more.
DRAWER UNIT)
THM308S2)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.

Detection Description A connection error of the Secondary Fixing Roller Sub Thermistor was detected.
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1155
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A connection error of the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Sub Thermistor was detected.
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.

Detection Description A connection error of the Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Thermistor was detected.
THM307S2)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1156
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A connection error of the Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Thermistor was detected.
THM308S2)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.

Detection Description A connection error of the Secondary Fixing Roller Heater was detected.
- Harness between the Drawer Unit (J7610) and the Secondary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN307/
J4300S) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING DRAWER)
Heater Driver PCB (UN307/J4301S) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING POWER SUPPLY)
- Harness between the Secondary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN307/J4302P) and the Relay
- Secondary Fixing Roller Thermoswitch (TP304)
PCB ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1157
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A connection error of the Secondary Fixing Roller Sub Heater was detected.
- Harnesses from the Drawer Unit (J7028) to the Secondary Fixing Roller Sub Heater (H300/J7630)
- Secondary Fixing Roller Thermoswitch (TP304)
- Secondary Fixing Roller Sub Heater (H300)
PCB ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.

Detection Description A connection error of the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Heater was detected.
- Harnesses from the Drawer Unit (J7028) to the Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Heater (H303/
J7604) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 1, CABLE, FIXING BELT HEATER)
- Harness between the Secondary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN307/J4303P) and the Relay
- Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Thermoswitch (TP305)
PCB ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1158
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A connection error of the Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Heater was detected.
Heater (H302/J7029) (Unit of replacement: DRAWER UNIT)
- Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Thermoswitch (TP306)
PCB ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.

Detection Description A connection error of the Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Sub Heater was detected.
Sub Heater (H302/J7029) (Unit of replacement: DRAWER UNIT)
- Secondary Fixing External Heat Upper Roller Thermoswitch (TP306)
- Secondary Fixing External Hear Upper Roller Sub Heater (H302)
PCB ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1159
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A connection error of the Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Heater was detected.
Heater (H301/J7029) (Unit of replacement: DRAWER UNIT)
- Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Thermoswitch (TP307)
PCB ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.

Detection Description A connection error of the Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub Heater was detected.
- Harness between the Secondary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN307/J4313S) to the Drawer Unit
Sub Heater (H301/J7029) (Unit of replacement: DRAWER UNIT)
- Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Thermoswitch (TP307)
- Secondary Fixing External Heat Lower Roller Sub Heater (H301)
PCB ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
E005-0101-05 Fixing Web detection error

Detection Description Absence of the web was detected before the number of Primary Fixing Web take-ups reached the
specified value.
- Harness between the Primary Fixing Inner Driver PCB (UN316/J4374P) and the Primary Fixing
Web Absence Advance Notice Sensor (PS311/J5098) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR
UNIT)
- Primary Fixing Web Absence Advance Notice Sensor (PS311)
- Primary Fixing Web (Unit of replacement: ROLLER, CLEANING)
- Web Level Detection Arm 1 and 2 (Unit of replacement: ARM, REMNANT DETECT, 1, 2)
- Primary Fixing Inner Driver PCB (UN316) (Unit of replacement: FIXING INNER DRIVER PCB
ASS'Y)
1160
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E005-0201-05 Fixing Web detection error

Detection Description Absence of the web was detected before the number of Secondary Fixing Web take-ups reached
the specified value.
- Harness between the Secondary Fixing Inner Driver PCB (UN317/J4374S) and the Secondary
Fixing Web Absence Advance Notice Sensor (PS320/J5110) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
SENSOR UNIT)
- Secondary Fixing Web Absence Advance Notice Sensor (PS320)
- Secondary Fixing Web (Unit of replacement: ROLLER, CLEANING)
- Web Level Detection Arm 1 and 2 (Unit of replacement: ARM, REMNANT DETECT, 1, 2)
- Secondary Fixing Inner Driver PCB (UN317) (Unit of replacement: FIXING INNER DRIVER PCB
ASS'Y)
E007-0101-05 Fixing Belt full displacement error

Detection Description Full displacement of the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt was detected.
- Harness connecting from the Primary Fixing Inner Driver PCB (UN316/J4381P) to the Primary
Fixing Pressure Belt Position Sensor (Front/Rear) (PS301/J5101 and PS302/J5102), Primary
Fixing Pressure Belt Displacement HP Sensor (PS308/J5100) and Primary Fixing Pressure Belt
Displacement Retry Sensor (PS352/J5065) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FUSER SENSOR,1)
Inlet Sensor (PS304/J5106) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FUSER SENSOR,1)
Pressure Belt Displacement Control Motor (M304/J7722) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MOTOR,
1)
- Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Position Sensor (Front) (PS301)
- Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Position Sensor (Rear) (PS302)
- Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Displacement HP Sensor (PS308)
- Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Displacement Retry Sensor (PS352)
- Primary Fixing Inlet Sensor (PS304)
- Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Displacement Control Motor (M304)
- Separation Roller
ASS'Y)
- Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Unit (Unit of replacement: FIXING PRESSURE BELT ASSEMBLY)
1161
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Full displacement of the Primary Fixing External Heat Belt was detected.
External Heat Belt HP Sensor (PS905/J7680D) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR UNIT)
Fixing External Heat Belt Position Front Sensor and Primary Fixing External Heat Belt Position
Rear Sensor (PS906/J8821 and PS907/J8823) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER,
1,DRAWER UNIT)
DUPLEXING, LEFT)
Outer Driver PCB (UN304/J4150P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER LEFT, UPPER)
- Primary Fixing External Heat Belt HP Sensor (PS905)
- Primary Fixing External Heat Belt Position Front Sensor (PS906)
- Primary Fixing External Heat Belt Position Rear Sensor (PS907)
- Primary Fixing External Heat Belt Displacement Control Motor (M335)
- Primary Fixing External Heat Belt Unit (Unit of replacement: BELT, FIXING EXTERNAL HEAT)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
E007-0110-05 Fixing Belt HP detection error

Detection Description Home position error was detected after the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Displacement Control
Motor was driven. (From rear side to front side)
1)
ASS'Y)
1162
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Home position error was detected after the Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Displacement Control
Motor was driven. (From front side to rear side)
1)
ASS'Y)

Detection Description Home position error was detected after the Primary Fixing External Heat Belt Displacement Control
Motor was driven. (From rear side to front side)
1,DRAWER UNIT)
DUPLEXING, LEFT)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
1163
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Home position error was detected after the Primary Fixing External Heat Belt Displacement Control
Motor was driven. (From front side to rear side)
1,DRAWER UNIT)
DUPLEXING, LEFT)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)

Detection Description Full displacement of the Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt was detected.
Fixing External Heat Belt HP Sensor (PS908/J7680SD) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR
UNIT)
- Harnesses connecting from the Secondary Fixing Inner Driver PCB (UN317/J4191S) to the
Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt Position Front Sensor and Secondary Fixing External Heat
Belt Position Rear Sensor (PS909/J8804 and PS910/J8815) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
DRAWER, 1, DRAWER UNIT)
- Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4087 and J4086) and the
Secondary Fixing Outer Driver PCB (UN305/J4182S and J4181S) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
FIXING DUPLEXING, RIGHT)
Outer Driver PCB (UN305/J4150S) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING POWER SUPPLY)
- Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt HP Sensor (PS908)
- Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt Position Front Sensor (PS909)
- Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt Position Rear Sensor (PS910)
- Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt Displacement Control Motor (M336)
- Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt Unit (Unit of replacement: BELT, FIXING EXTERNAL HEAT)
ASS'Y)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
1164
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Home position error was detected after the Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt Displacement
Control Motor was driven. (From rear side to front side)
UNIT)
ASS'Y)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)

Detection Description Home position error was detected after the Secondary Fixing External Heat Belt Displacement
Control Motor was driven. (From front side to rear side)
UNIT)
ASS'Y)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
1165
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E008-0101-05 Fixing Motor error

Detection Description Torque overload of the Primary Fixing Motor was detected.
- Primary Fixing Pressure Belt (Unit of replacement: BELT, FIXING)
- Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Inner Oil Coating Roller (Unit of replacement: ROLLER, OIL)
- Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Pressure Pad (Unit of replacement: PAD, PRESSURE)
- Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Pressure Pad Cover
- Gears in the Primary Fixing Drive Unit
[Remedy] Check/replace the related parts.
[CAUTION]
- When replacing the Pressure Belt Unit, execute "Adjustment During Pressure Belt Unit
Replacement" in situation mode.
- Apply Silicon Oil to the Pad Cover when replacing the parts.

Detection Description Torque overload of the Secondary Fixing Motor was detected.
Remedy Check the gears, Pressure Bearing, Insulating Bush in the Secondary Fixing Drive Unit for any
damage, and replace the part if necessary.
E012-0140-05 Drum ITB drive error

Detection Description The home position of the Drum Encoder (Y) was not detected within the specified period of time.
- Harness connecting from the Drum Driver PCB (Y) (UN125/J1620Y) to the Drum Encoder Sensor
A (Y) (PS226/J5064B), Drum Encoder Sensor B (Y) (PS225/J5064A) and Drum HP Sensor (Y)
(PS187/J5064HP)
- Drum Encoder Sensor A (Y) (PS226)
- Drum Encoder Sensor B (Y) (PS225)
- Drum HP Sensor (Y) (PS187)
- Drum Encoding Wheel (Unit of replacement: WHEEL, ENCODING)
- Drum Driver PCB (Y) (UN125) (Unit of replacement: DRUM DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY)
1. Remove soiling on the Drum Encoding Wheel.

Detection Description The home position of the Drum Encoder (Y) was not detected within the specified period of time.
- Harness connecting from the Drum Driver PCB (Y) (UN125/J1620Y) to the Drum Encoder Sensor
A (Y) (PS226/J5064B), Drum Encoder Sensor B (Y) (PS225/J5064A) and Drum HP Sensor (Y)
(PS187/J5064HP)
- Drum Encoder Sensor A (Y) (PS226)
- Drum Encoder Sensor B (Y) (PS225)
- Drum HP Sensor (Y) (PS187)
- Drum Drive Motor (Y) (M142)
1166
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The home position of the Drum Encoder (M) was not detected within the specified period of time.
- Harness connecting from the Drum Driver PCB (M) (UN126/J1620M) to the Drum Encoder
Sensor A (M) (PS230/J5067A), Drum Encoder Sensor B (M) (PS229/J5067B) and Drum HP
Sensor (M) (PS177/J5067HP)
- Drum Encoder Sensor A (M) (PS230)
- Drum Encoder Sensor B (M) (PS229)
- Drum HP Sensor (M) (PS177)
- Drum Driver PCB (M) (UN126) (Unit of replacement: DRUM DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description The home position of the Drum Encoder (M) was not detected within the specified period of time.
- Harness connecting from the Drum Driver PCB (M) (UN126/J1620M) to the Drum Encoder
Sensor A (M) (PS230/J5067A), Drum Encoder Sensor B (M) (PS229/J5067B) and Drum HP
Sensor (M) (PS177/J5067HP)
- Drum Encoder Sensor A (M) (PS230)
- Drum Encoder Sensor B (M) (PS229)
- Drum HP Sensor (M) (PS177)
- Drum Drive Motor (M) (M141)

Detection Description The home position of the Drum Encoder (C) was not detected within the specified period of time.
- Harness connecting from the Drum Driver PCB (C) (UN127/J1620C) to the Drum Encoder Sensor
A (C) (PS228/J5070A), Drum Encoder Sensor B (C) (PS227/J5070B) and Drum HP Sensor (C)
(PS179/J5070HP)
- Drum Encoder Sensor A (C) (PS228)
- Drum Encoder Sensor B (C) (PS227)
- Drum HP Sensor (C) (PS179)
- Drum Driver PCB (C) (UN127) (Unit of replacement: DRUM DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description The home position of the Drum Encoder (C) was not detected within the specified period of time.
- Harness connecting from the Drum Driver PCB (C) (UN127/J1620C) to the Drum Encoder Sensor
A (C) (PS228/J5070A), Drum Encoder Sensor B (C) (PS227/J5070B) and Drum HP Sensor (C)
(PS179/J5070HP)
- Drum Encoder Sensor A (C) (PS228)
- Drum Encoder Sensor B (C) (PS227)
- Drum HP Sensor (C) (PS179)
- Drum Drive Motor (C) (M139)
1167
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The home position of the Drum Encoder (Bk) was not detected within the specified period of time.
- Harness connecting from the Drum Driver PCB (Bk) (UN128/J1620K) to the Drum Encoder
Sensor A (Bk) (PS224/J5073A), Drum Encoder Sensor B (Bk) (PS232/J5073B) and Drum HP
Sensor (Bk) (PS182/J5073HP)
- Drum Encoder Sensor A (Bk) (PS224)
- Drum Encoder Sensor B (Bk) (PS232)
- Drum HP Sensor (Bk) (PS182)
- Drum Driver PCB (Bk) (UN128) (Unit of replacement: DRUM DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description The home position of the Drum Encoder (Bk) was not detected within the specified period of time.
- Harness connecting from the Drum Driver PCB (Bk) (UN128/J1620K) to the Drum Encoder
Sensor A (Bk) (PS224/J5073A), Drum Encoder Sensor B (Bk) (PS232/J5073B) and Drum HP
Sensor (Bk) (PS182/J5073HP)
- Drum Encoder Sensor A (Bk) (PS224)
- Drum Encoder Sensor B (Bk) (PS232)
- Drum HP Sensor (Bk) (PS182)
- Drum Drive Motor (Bk) (M140)

Detection Description The home position of the ITB Encoder was not detected within the specified period of time.
- Harness connecting from the ITB Driver PCB (Middle) (UN217/J1314) to the ITB Drive Roller
Encoder Sensor A and B (PS221/J5165 and PS222/J5166) and ITB Drive Roller HP Sensor
(PS223/J5026) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, I.T.BELT UNIT RELAY)
- ITB Drive Roller Encoder Sensor A (PS221)
- ITB Drive Roller Encoder Sensor B (PS222)
- ITB Drive Roller HP Sensor (PS223)
- ITB Encoder Wheel (Unit of replacement: ENCODER ASSEMBLY)
- ITB Driver PCB (Middle) (UN217) (Unit of replacement: I.T.B. DRIVER PCB ASS'Y, MD.)
1. Remove soiling on the ITB Encoder Wheel.

Detection Description The home position of the ITB Encoder was not detected within the specified period of time.
1168
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Timeout error of stable drive of the ITB was detected.
E012-FFF0-05 Drum ITB drive error

Detection Description Unexpected error was detected at ITB Drive Motor control.

Detection Description An error in the Drum Drive Motor (Y) was detected at ITB Drive Motor control.
1169
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error in the Drum Drive Motor (M) was detected at ITB Drive Motor control.

Detection Description An error in the Drum Drive Motor (C) was detected at ITB Drive Motor control.

Detection Description An error in the Drum Drive Motor (Bk) was detected at ITB Drive Motor control.
1170
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E013-0001-05 Waste toner lock detection error

Detection Description The Drum Waste Toner Lock Switch detected locked state.
- Harnesses from the Pre-fixing Feed Driver PCB to the Drum Waste Toner Lock Switch
1. Pre-fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN107/J1559) to Relay Connector (4P) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
2. Relay Connector (4P) to Drum Waste Toner Lock Switch (SW109/J5628) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, LOCK SENSING SWITCH)
- Drum Waste Toner Lock Switch (SW109) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SWITCH)
- Waste Toner Feed Pipe (Unit of replacement: WASTE TONER FEEDER ASSEMBLY)
- Pre-fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN107)
1. Tap the Waste Toner Feed Pipe and remove the clogged toner.

Detection Description The Waste Toner Ejection Lock Switch detected locked state.
- Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4034) and the Waste Toner
Ejection Lock Switch (SW300/J5630) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SWITCH)
- Waste Toner Ejection Lock Switch (SW300) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SWITCH)
- Waste Toner Collection Pipe (Unit of replacement: WASTE TONER PIPE ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)
1. Tap the Waste Toner Feed Pipe and remove the clogged toner.

Detection Description The Transfer Waste Toner Lock Switch detected locked state.
- Harnesses from the Pre-fixing Feed Driver PCB to the Drum Waste Toner Lock Switch
1. Pre-fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN107/J1559) to Relay Connector (4P) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
2. Relay Connector (4P) to Transfer Waste Toner Lock Switch (SW110/J5629) (Unit of
replacement: CABLE, LOCK SENSING SWITCH)
- Transfer Waste Toner Lock Switch (SW110) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SWITCH)
- Waste Toner Buffer Ejection Pipe (Unit of replacement: WASTE TONER BUFFER ASSEMBLY)
- Pre-fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN107)
1. Tap the Waste Toner Buffer Ejection Pipe and remove the clogged toner.
1171
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description It was detected that output of the Waste Toner Full Sensor adjustment result was either 0.6 V or
less or 2.78 V or higher.
- Harness between the Pre-fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN107/J1559) and the Waste Toner Buffer
Full Sensor (TS128/J7413) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
- Harnesses connecting from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4032) to the Waste
Toner Full Sensor 1 and 2 (TS301/J5556 and TS300/J5555) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN
BODY, RIGHT, CABLE, WASTE TONER, CABLE, WASTE TONER FULL DETECT)
- Waste Toner Buffer Full Sensor (TS128)
- Waste Toner Full Sensor 1 (TS301)
- Pre-fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN107) (Unit of replacement: FIXING/FEEDER DRIVER PCB
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
- Waste Toner Bottle
1. Remove soiling on the window of the Waste Toner Bottle Sensor.
2. Check the sensor of the Waste Toner Buffer Unit.
E013-0010-05 Secondary Transfer Drive Motor error

Detection Description Rotation error of the Secondary Transfer Drive Motor was detected.
- Harnesses from the Secondary Transfer/Duplex Driver PCB to the Secondary Transfer Drive
Motor
1. Secondary Transfer/Duplex Driver PCB (UN106/J1504) to Relay Connector (5P) (Unit of
replacement: CABLE, MOTOR)
2. Relay Connector (5P) to Secondary Transfer Drive Motor (M183/J7702) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, MOTOR CONNECTING)
- Secondary Transfer Drive Motor (M183)
- Secondary Transfer/Duplex Driver PCB (UN106) (Unit of replacement: 2ND TRANSFER/
DUPLEX PCB ASS'Y)
- Secondary Transfer Belt Unit (Unit of replacement: SECONDARY TRANSFER ASSEMBLY)
- Secondary Transfer Belt Cleaner Unit (Unit of replacement: BELT CLEANER ASSEMBLY)
1. Check that the Secondary Transfer Belt Unit and the Secondary Transfer Cleaner Unit are
installed properly.
E013-0011-05 Secondary Transfer Drive Motor error

Detection Description Rotation error of the Secondary Transfer Drive Motor was detected.
- Harnesses from the Secondary Transfer/Duplex Driver PCB to the Secondary Transfer Drive
Motor
1. Secondary Transfer/Duplex Driver PCB (UN106/J1504) to Relay Connector (5P) (Unit of
replacement: CABLE, MOTOR)
2. Relay Connector (5P) to Secondary Transfer Drive Motor (M183/J7702) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, MOTOR CONNECTING)
- Secondary Transfer Drive Motor (M183)
DUPLEX PCB ASS'Y)
- Secondary Transfer Belt Unit (Unit of replacement: SECONDARY TRANSFER ASSEMBLY)
- Secondary Transfer Belt Cleaner Unit (Unit of replacement: BELT CLEANER ASSEMBLY)
1. Check that the Secondary Transfer Belt Unit and the Secondary Transfer Cleaner Unit are
installed properly.
1172
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E013-0012-05 Waste toner feed path lock error

Detection Description An error in the speed of the Secondary Transfer Waste Toner Feed Motor was detected.
- Harness between the Secondary Transfer/Duplex Driver PCB (UN106/J1523) and the Secondary
Transfer Waste Toner Feed Motor (M210/J7205) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR)
- Secondary Transfer Waste Toner Feed Motor (M210)
- Secondary Transfer Waste Toner Pipe (Unit of replacement: WASTE TONER PIPE ASSEMBLY)
DUPLEX PCB ASS'Y)
- Waste Toner Buffer Unit (Unit of replacement: WASTE TONER BUFFER ASSEMBLY)
1. Tap the Secondary Transfer Waste Toner Pipe and remove the clogged toner.

Detection Description It was detected that output of the Waste Toner Full Sensor 1 was 0.6 V or less for 5 consecutive
sec.
- Harnesses from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4032) to the Waste Toner Full
Sensor 1 (TS301/J5556) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN BODY, RIGHT, CABLE, WASTE
TONER, CABLE, WASTE TONER FULL DETECT)
ASS'Y)

Detection Description It was detected that output of the Waste Toner Full Sensor 2 was 0.6 V or less for 5 consecutive
sec.
- Harnesses from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4032) to the Waste Toner Full
Sensor 2 (TS300/J5555) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN BODY, RIGHT, CABLE, WASTE
TONER, CABLE, WASTE TONER FULL DETECT)
ASS'Y)

Detection Description It was detected that output of the Waste Toner Buffer Full Sensor was 0.6 V or less for 5
consecutive sec.
ASS'Y)

Detection Description A sensor level error was detected in recovery mode after replacement of the Waste Toner Bottle.
ASS'Y)
- Waste Toner Bottle
1. Remove soiling on the window of the Waste Toner Bottle Sensor.
1173
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Lock signal was not detected consecutively although 2 sec had passed since the start of the
Primary Fixing Motor.
- Harness between the Primary Fixing Outer Driver PCB (UN304/J4165P) and the Primary Fixing
DUPLEXING, LEFT)
Drive Motor (M300/J5310P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER LEFT, UPPER)
- Primary Fixing Outer Driver PCB (UN304)
- Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311)

Secondary Fixing Motor.
- Harness between the Secondary Fixing Outer Driver PCB (UN305/J4165S) and the Secondary
Drive Motor (M305/J8735) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING POWER SUPPLY)
- Secondary Fixing Outer Driver PCB (UN305)
E015-0060-05 Feed system error

Detection Description An error of the Cross-feed Angle HP Sensor was detected after the start of the driving of the Cross-
feed Angle Adjustment Motor.
- Harnesses from the Registration Feed Driver PCB (Right) to the Cross-feed Angle Adjustment
Motor
1. Registration Feed Driver PCB (Right) (UN104/J1273) to Relay Connector (4P) (Unit of
replacement: PRE-REGIST. FEEDER LOWER ASS'Y)
2. Relay Harness (4P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MOTOR, 3)
3. Relay Connector (4P) to Cross-feed Angle Adjustment Motor (M400/J5215) (Unit of
replacement: CABLE, MOTOR, 3)
- Harnesses from the Registration Feed Driver PCB (Right) to the Cross-feed Angle HP Sensor
1. Registration Feed Driver PCB (Right) (UN104/J1280) to Relay Connector (J7127) (Unit of
replacement: CABLE, SENSOR)
2. Relay Connector (J7127) to Relay Connector (6P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR)
3. Relay Harness (6P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MOTOR, 3)
4. Relay Connector (6P) to Cross-feed Angle HP Sensor (PS400/J5152) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, MOTOR, 3)
- Cross-feed Angle Adjustment Motor (M400)
- Cross-feed Angle HP Sensor (PS400)
- Registration Feed Driver PCB (Right) (UN104) (Unit of replacement: REG. FEED DRIVER PCB
ASS'Y, RT.)
- Registration Unit (Unit of replacement: REGIST. PAPER FEEDER ASSEMBLY)
1174
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error of the Flapper HP Sensor was detected after the start of the driving of the Fixing Flapper
Motor.
- Harnesses from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4900) to the Fixing Flapper Motor
(M309/J7716) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MOTOR, CABLE, FEED MOTOR, 1)
- Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4030) and the Flapper HP Sensor
(PS324/J5080) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER LEFT, UPPER)
- Fixing Flapper Motor (M309)
- Flapper HP Sensor (PS324)
ASS'Y)
- Tandem Lower Unit (Unit of replacement: FIXING/FEED ASS'Y, RIGHT LOWER)
1. Correct the bending of the Flapper Drive Arm.

Detection Description An error of the Cross-feed Pressure Release Motor HP Sensor was detected after the start of the
driving of the Pre-registration Pressure Release Motor.
- Harness between the Registration Feed Driver PCB (Right) (UN104/J1272) and the Pre-
registration Pressure Release Motor 1 (M160/J5212)
- Harnesses from the Registration Feed Driver PCB (Right) (UN104/J1284A) to the Cross-feed
Pressure Release Motor HP Sensor 1 (PS142/J5129) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR,
CABLE, DRIVER SENSOR)
- Pre-registration Pressure Release Motor 1 (M160)
- Cross-feed Pressure Release Motor HP Sensor 1 (PS142)
ASS'Y, RT)
- Pre-registration Feed Lower Unit (Unit of replacement: PRE-REGIST. FEEDER LOWER ASS'Y)

Detection Description An error of the Registration Roller Release HP Sensor 1 was detected after the start of the driving
of the Cross-feed Release Motor.
- Harness between the Registration Feed Driver PCB (Left) (UN100/J1280B) and the Registration
Roller Release HP Sensor 1 (PS147/J5013) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR)
- Harness between the Registration Feed Driver PCB (Left) (UN100/J1222) and the Cross-feed
Release Right Motor (M169/J5220) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRIVER MOTOR)
- Registration Roller Release HP Sensor 1 (PS147)
- Cross-feed Release Right Motor (M169)
- Cross-feed Roller Pressure Release HP Sensor 1 (PS152)
- Cross-feed Pressure Release Motor Unit
- Registration Feed Driver PCB (Left) (UN100) (Unit of replacement: REG. FEED DRIVER PCB
ASS'Y, LF)
1175
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error of the Delivery Decurler HP Sensor was detected after the start of the driving of the
Delivery Decurler Compression Distance Adjustment Motor.
- Harness between the Reverse/Outer Delivery Driver PCB (UN310/J4120) and the Delivery
Decurler Compression Distance Adjustment Motor 1 (M315/J5308) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
PAPER DELIVERY MOTOR, 1)
Decurler HP Sensor 1 (PS332/J5087) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR)
- Delivery Decurler Compression Distance Adjustment Motor 1 (M315)
- Delivery Decurler HP Sensor 1 (PS332)
- Decurler Flag Pulley (30T)
- Reverse/Outer Delivery Driver PCB (UN310) (Unit of replacement: PAPER DELIVERY PCB
ASSEMBLY)
- Reverse Unit (Unit of replacement: REVERSE ASSEMBLY)
1. Check if the Decurler Flag Pulley (30T) is damaged or deformed, and replace it if necessary.

Detection Description An error of the Registration Roller Release HP Sensor was detected after the start of the driving
of the Registration Release Motor.
- Harness between the Registration Feed Driver PCB (Left) (UN100/J1220) and the Registration
Release Motor (M165/J5217) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRIVER MOTOR)
- Harnesses from the Registration Feed Driver PCB (Left) to the Registration Roller Release HP
Sensor 1
1. Registration Feed Driver PCB (Left) (UN100/J1280) to Relay Connector (J7127) (Unit of
2. Relay Connector (J7127) to Registration Roller Release HP Sensor 1 (PS147/J5013) (Unit of
- Registration Release Motor (M165)
- Registration Roller Release HP Sensor 1 (PS147)
ASS'Y, LF.)

Detection Description An error of the Delivery Reverse Flapper HP Sensor was detected after the start of the driving of
the Delivery Reverse Flapper Motor.
- Harnesses from the Reverse/Outer Delivery Driver PCB (UN310/J4121) to the Delivery Reverse
Flapper Motor (M319/J7729) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, PAPER DELIVERY MOTOR, 1,
CABLE, MOTOR)
- Delivery Reverse Flapper Motor (M319)
- Delivery Reverse Flapper HP Sensor (PS334)
- Flapper Cam
ASSEMBLY)
1. Check for any dusts or foreign matters on the home position detection part of the Flapper Cam,
and remove them with a blower if any.
1176
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

ASS'Y, RT)

Detection Description An error of the Cross-feed Roller Pressure Release HP Sensor was detected after the start of the
driving of the Cross-feed Release Middle Motor.
Release Middle Motor (M170/J5221) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRIVER MOTOR)
- Harness between the Registration Feed Driver PCB (Left) (UN100/J1280B) and the Cross-feed
Roller Pressure Release HP Sensor 2 (PS153/J5009) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR)
- Cross-feed Release Middle Motor (M170)
ASS'Y, LF)

Detection Description An error of the Delivery Decurler HP Sensor was detected after the start of the driving of the
Delivery Decurler Compression Distance Adjustment Motor.
Decurler Compression Distance Adjustment Motor 2 (M316/J5309) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
PAPER DELIVERY MOTOR, 1)
Decurler HP Sensor 2 (PS333/J5088) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR)
- Delivery Decurler Compression Distance Adjustment Motor 2 (M316)
- Delivery Decurler HP Sensor 2 (PS333)
- Decurler Flag Pulley (30T)
ASSEMBLY)
1. Check if the Decurler Flag Pulley (30T) is damaged or deformed, and replace it if necessary.
1177
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error of the Registration Roller Slide HP Sensor was detected after the start of the driving of
the Registration Swing Motor.
- Harness between the Registration Feed Driver PCB (Left) (UN100/J1221) and the Registration
Swing Motor (M166/J5218) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRIVER MOTOR)
- Harness between the Registration Feed Driver PCB (Left) (UN100/J1280B) and the Registration
Roller Slide HP Sensor (PS150/J5015) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR)
- Registration Swing Motor (M166)
- Registration Roller Slide HP Sensor (PS150)
ASS'Y, LF)
- Registration Slide Drive Unit (Unit of replacement: REGISTRATION SLIDE DRIVE ASS'Y)

ASS'Y, RT)

Detection Description An error of the Cross-feed Roller Pressure Release HP Sensor was detected after the start of the
driving of the Cross-feed Release Left Motor.
Release Left Motor (M171/J5222) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRIVER MOTOR)
Roller Pressure Release HP Sensor 3 (PS154/J5010) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR)
- Cross-feed Release Left Motor (M171)
ASS'Y, LF)
1178
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error of the Duplex Decurler HP Sensor was detected after the start of the driving of the Duplex
Decurler Compression Distance Adjustment Motor.
- Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4901) and the Duplex Decurler
Compression Distance Adjustment Motor (M325/J5299) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MOTOR,
RIGHT)
- Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4033) and the Duplex Decurler
HP Sensor (PS343/J5085) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN,2)
- Duplex Decurler Compression Distance Adjustment Motor (M325)
- Duplex Decurler HP Sensor (PS343)
- Decurler Upper Roller
ASS'Y)
- Duplex Decurler Unit (Unit of replacement: DUPLEXING DECURLER ASSEMBLY)
1. Check for any paper lint or foreign matters on the Decurler Upper Roller, and remove them if
any.

Detection Description An error of the Cross-feed Push-on Plate HP Sensor was detected after the start of the driving of
the Cross-feed Push-on Plate Jogging Motor.
Push-on Plate Jogging Motor (M167/J255) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRIVER MOTOR)
Push-on Plate HP Sensor (PS149/J5012) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR)
- Cross-feed Push-on Plate Jogging Motor (M167)
- Cross-feed Push-on Plate HP Sensor (PS149)
- Registration Jogging Unit (Unit of replacement: REGISTRATION JOGGING ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y, LF)
[Reference] After replacement of the Registration Jogging Unit, perform adjustment by the
following procedure.
- Skew adjustment: COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ> SKEW-FCT
- Left edge margin adjustment: COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ> REG-LEFT

Detection Description An error of the Bypass Decurler Engagement/Disengagement Motor HP Sensor was detected after
the start of the driving of the Bypass Decurler Engagement/Disengagement Motor.
- Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4901) and the Bypass Decurler
Engagement/Disengagement Motor (M333/J5333) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MOTOR,
RIGHT)
- Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4031A) and the Bypass Decurler
Engagement/Disengagement Motor HP Sensor (PS353/J5195) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
- Bypass Decurler Engagement/Disengagement Motor (M333)
- Bypass Decurler Engagement/Disengagement Motor HP Sensor (PS353)
- Decurler Upper Roller
- Merging Path Upper Unit (Unit of replacement: FIXING/FEED ASS'Y, LEFT UPPER)
ASS'Y)
1. Check for any paper lint or foreign matters on the Decurler Upper Roller, and remove them if
any.
1179
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Home position error and roller engagement/disengagement error were detected after the Color
Sensor Shutter Motor was driven.
- Harness between the Reverse/Outer Delivery Driver PCB (UN310/J4129) and the Color Sensor
Shutter Motor (M337/J8777)
(Unit of replacement: CABLE, REVERSE/OUTER DELIVERY DRIVER PCB)
- Harnesses from the Reverse/Outer Delivery Driver PCB (UN310/J4129) to the Color Sensor
Shutter HP Sensor (PS914/J5195)
(Unit of replacement: CABLE, REVERSE/OUTER DELIVERY DRIVER PCB,CABLE,COLOR
SENSOR SHUTTER HP SENSOR)
- Color Sensor Shutter Motor (M337)
- Color Sensor Shutter HP Sensor (PS914)
- Reverse/Outer Delivery Driver PCB (UN310) (Unit of replacement: REVERSE/OUTER
DELIVERY DRIVER PCB)
- White Plate Unit
E016-0100-05 Drum Cleaner Motor error

Detection Description Lock signal was not detected consecutively although 2 sec had passed since the start of the Drum
Cleaner Motor (Y).
- Harnesses from the Process Unit Driver PCB (Y) (UN161/J1371Y) to the Drum Cleaner Motor
(Y) (M134/J5237) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN, CABLE, P- KIT DRUM)
- Drum Cleaner Motor (Y) (M134)
- Process Unit Driver PCB (Y) (UN161) (Unit of replacement: P- KIT DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY)

Cleaner Motor (M).
- Harnesses from the Process Unit Driver PCB (M) (UN162/J1371M) to the Drum Cleaner Motor
(M) (M128/J5238) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN, CABLE, P- KIT DRUM)
- Drum Cleaner Motor (M) (M128)
- Process Unit Driver PCB (M) (UN162) (Unit of replacement: P- KIT DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY)

Cleaner Motor (C).
- Harnesses from the Process Unit Driver PCB (C) (UN163/J1371C) to the Drum Cleaner Motor
(C) (M116/J5239) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN, CABLE, P- KIT DRUM)
- Drum Cleaner Motor (C) (M116)
- Process Unit Driver PCB (C) (UN163) (Unit of replacement: P- KIT DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY)

Cleaner Motor (Bk).
- Harnesses from the Process Unit Driver PCB (Bk) (UN164/J1371K) to the Drum Cleaner Motor
(Bk) (M122/J5240) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN, CABLE, P- KIT DRUM)
- Drum Cleaner Motor (Bk) (M122)
- Process Unit Driver PCB (Bk) (UN164) (Unit of replacement: P- KIT DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY)
1180
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E016-FFFF-05 Drum Cleaner Motor error

Detection Description System error
Remedy Contact to the sales company.
E019-0001-05 Waste Toner Feed Motor error

Waste Toner Feed Motor.
- Harness between the Pre-fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN107/J1559) and the Drum Waste Toner
Feed Motor (M180/J5286) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
- Harness between the Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB (UN102/J1828) and the Drum
Waste Toner Feed Motor (M180/J5286P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY)
- Drum Waste Toner Feed Motor (M180)
ASS'Y)
- Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB (UN102) (Unit of replacement: POWER SUPPLY
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

Detection Description Lock signal was not detected consecutively although 2 sec had passed since the start of the Waste
Toner Feed Motor.
- Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4042) and the Waste Toner Feed
Motor (M314/J5319) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING POWER SUPPLY)
- Waste Toner Feed Motor (M314)
ASS'Y)

Detection Description Lock signal was not detected consecutively although 2 sec had passed since the start of the Waste
Toner Buffer Motor.
Motor (M179/J5287) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
- Harness between the Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB (UN102/J1828) and the Waste
Toner Buffer Motor (M179/J5288P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY)
- Waste Toner Buffer Motor (M179)
ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1181
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E020-0111-05 ATR output error

Detection Description It was detected consecutively that ATR output (SigD) of the Patch Sensor (Y) fell within the range
from 615 to 970 during printing.
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198/J1047) and the Developing High Voltage
PCB (Y) (UN133/J3201Y) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, CENTER UPPER)
- Drum Patch Sensor Shutter (Y) (Unit of replacement: SENSOR UNIT, PATCH SENSING,Y/M)
- Drum Unit (Unit of replacement: HOLDER UNIT, DRUM UNIT)
- Developing Assembly (Y)
- Developing High Voltage PCB (Y) (UN133) (Unit of replacement: DEV. HIGH VOLTAGE PCB
ASSEMBLY)
- DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1)
1. Check that the Developing Assembly and the Drum Unit are installed properly.
2. Check the drum, and remove soiling.
[Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2
min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES

Detection Description It was detected that ATR output (SigD) of the Patch Sensor (Y) fell within the range from 525 to
970 when executing the initial installation mode of the Developing Assembly
(COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INISET or INIPATCH).
ASSEMBLY)
1182
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description It was detected that ATR output (SigD) of the Patch Sensor (Y) fell within the range from 16 to 175
when executing the initial installation mode of the Developing Assembly
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198/J1039) and the Primary Charging Assembly
High Voltage PCB (Y) (UN137/J3000Y) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, CENTER UPPER)
- Harness between the Laser Interface PCB (UN950/J8722) and the Laser Scanner Unit (Y) (J8076
and J8725Y) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL)
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (Y) (UN161/J1392Y) and the Drum Patch Sensor
(Y) (PS120/J5132Y)
- Drum Patch Sensor (Y) (PS120)
- Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage PCB (Y) (UN137) (Unit of replacement: 1ST CHARGE
H.V. PCB ASSEMBLY)
ASSEMBLY)
- Laser Interface PCB (UN950) (Unit of replacement: LASER INTERFACE PCB ASSEMBLY)
- Laser Scanner Unit (Y) (Unit of replacement: SCANNER ASSEMBLY)
E020-01A8-05 ATR output error

Detection Description It was detected that output (Vsig_ind) of the Developing Toner Density Sensor (Y) was 15 or less.
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (Y) (UN161/J1390Y) and the Developing Toner
Density Sensor (Y) (TS129/J5034Y) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR)
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1006 and J1007) to the Process Unit Driver
PCB (Y) (UN161/J1360Y and J1361Y) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, RIGHT UPPER, P-
KIT DRAWER ASSEMBLY, DRAWER CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY)
- Developing Toner Density Sensor (Y) (TS129)
E020-01B8-05 ATR output error

Detection Description The Developing Toner Density Sensor (Y) detected an inductance DA value error when executing
the initial installation mode of the Developing Assembly (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>INISET
or INIPATCH).
Density Sensor (Y) (TS129/J5034Y) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR)
PCB (Y) (UN161/J1360Y and J1361Y) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, RIGHT UPPER, P-
1183
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description It was detected consecutively that ATR output (SigD) of the Patch Sensor (M) fell within the range
PCB (M) (UN134/J3201M) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, CENTER UPPER)
- Drum Patch Sensor Shutter (M) (Unit of replacement: SENSOR UNIT, PATCH SENSING,Y/M)
- Developing Assembly (M)
- Developing High Voltage PCB (M) (UN134) (Unit of replacement: DEV. HIGH VOLTAGE PCB
ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description It was detected that ATR output (SigD) of the Patch Sensor (M) fell within the range from 525 to
ASSEMBLY)
1184
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description It was detected that ATR output (SigD) of the Patch Sensor (M) fell within the range from 16 to 175
High Voltage PCB (M) (UN138/J3000M) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, CENTER UPPER)
- Harness between the Laser Interface PCB (UN950/J8721) and the Laser Scanner Unit (M) (J8070
and J8725M) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL)
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (M) (UN162/J1392M) and the Drum Patch Sensor
(M) (PS117/J5132M)
- Drum Patch Sensor (M) (PS117)
- Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage PCB (M) (UN138) (Unit of replacement: 1ST CHARGE
H.V. PCB ASSEMBLY)
ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description It was detected that output (Vsig_ind) of the Developing Toner Density Sensor (M) was 15 or less.
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (M) (UN162/J1390M) and the Developing Toner
Density Sensor (M) (TS124/J5034M) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR)
PCB (M) (UN162/J1360M and J1361M) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, RIGHT UPPER, P-
- Developing Toner Density Sensor (M) (TS124)

Detection Description The Developing Toner Density Sensor (M) detected an inductance DA value error when executing
or INIPATCH).
Density Sensor (M) (TS124/J5034M) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR)
PCB (M) (UN162/J1360M and J1361M) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, RIGHT UPPER, P-
1185
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description It was detected consecutively that ATR output (SigD) of the Patch Sensor (C) fell within the range
PCB (C) (UN135/J3201C) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, CENTER UPPER)
- Drum Patch Sensor Shutter (C) (Unit of replacement: SENSOR UNIT, PATCH SENSING,C/K)
- Developing Assembly (C)
- Developing High Voltage PCB (C) (UN135) (Unit of replacement: DEV. HIGH VOLTAGE PCB
ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description It was detected that ATR output (SigD) of the Patch Sensor (C) fell within the range from 525 to
ASSEMBLY)
1186
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description It was detected that ATR output (SigD) of the Patch Sensor (C) fell within the range from 16 to 175
High Voltage PCB (C) (UN139/J3000C) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, CENTER UPPER)
- Harness between the Laser Interface PCB (UN950/J8731) and the Laser Scanner Unit (C) (J8752
and J8725C) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL)
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (C) (UN163/J1392C) and the Drum Patch Sensor
(C) (PS111/J5132C)
- Drum Patch Sensor (C) (PS111)
- Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage PCB (C) (UN139) (Unit of replacement: 1ST CHARGE
H.V. PCB ASSEMBLY)
ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description It was detected that output (Vsig_ind) of the Developing Toner Density Sensor (C) was 15 or less.
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (C) (UN163/J1390C) and the Developing Toner
Density Sensor (C) (TS126/J5034C) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR)
PCB (C) (UN163/J1360C and J1361C) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, RIGHT UPPER, P-
- Developing Toner Density Sensor (C) (TS126)

Detection Description The Developing Toner Density Sensor (C) detected an inductance DA value error when executing
or INIPATCH).
Density Sensor (C) (TS126/J5034C) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR)
PCB (C) (UN163/J1360C and J1361C) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, RIGHT UPPER, P-
1187
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description It was detected consecutively that ATR output (SigD) of the Patch Sensor (Bk) fell within the range
PCB (Bk) (UN136/J3201K) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, CENTER UPPER)
- Drum Patch Sensor Shutter (Bk) (Unit of replacement: SENSOR UNIT, PATCH SENSING,C/K)
- Developing Assembly (Bk)
- Developing High Voltage PCB (Bk) (UN136) (Unit of replacement: DEV. HIGH VOLTAGE PCB
ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description It was detected that ATR output (SigD) of the Patch Sensor (Bk) fell within the range from 525 to
ASSEMBLY)
1188
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description It was detected that ATR output (SigD) of the Patch Sensor (Bk) fell within the range from 16 to
High Voltage PCB (Bk) (UN140/J3000K) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, CENTER UPPER)
- Harness between the Laser Interface PCB (UN950/J8726) and the Laser Scanner Unit (Bk)
(J8751 and J8725K) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL)
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (Bk) (UN164/J1392K) and the Drum Patch Sensor
(Bk) (PS115/J5132K)
- Drum Patch Sensor (Bk) (PS115)
- Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage PCB (Bk) (UN140) (Unit of replacement: 1ST CHARGE
H.V. PCB ASSEMBLY)
ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description It was detected that output (Vsig_ind) of the Developing Toner Density Sensor (Bk) was 15 or less.
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (Bk) (UN164/J1390K) and the Developing Toner
Density Sensor (Bk) (TS125/J5034K) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR)
PCB (Bk) (UN164/J1360K and J1361K) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, RIGHT UPPER, P-
- Developing Toner Density Sensor (Bk) (TS125)

Detection Description The Developing Toner Density Sensor (Bk) detected an inductance DA value error when executing
or INIPATCH).
Density Sensor (Bk) (TS125/J5034K) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR)
PCB (Bk) (UN164/J1360K and J1361K) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, RIGHT UPPER, P-
1189
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E023-0100-05 Developing Motor error

Developing Motor (Y).
- Harness between the Drum Driver PCB (Y) (UN125/J1622Y) and the Developing Motor (Y)
(M133/J5233) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MOTOR)
- Harnesses from the Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB to the Developing Motor (Y)
1. Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB (UN102/J1846) to Relay Connector (2P) (Unit of
replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY)
2. Relay Connector (2P) to Developing Motor (Y) (M133/J5233P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
MOTOR POWER SUPPLY)
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198/J1035) and the Drum Driver PCB (Y)
(UN125/J1611Y) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, CENTER UPPER)
- Developing Motor (Y) (M133)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
- DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198) (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER - PCB ASS'Y, 1)

Developing Motor (M).
- Harness between the Drum Driver PCB (M) (UN126/J1622M) and the Developing Motor (M)
- Harnesses from the Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB (UN102/J1846) to the Developing
Motor (M) (M127/J5234P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY, CABLE, MOTOR
POWER SUPPLY)
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198/J1036) and the Drum Driver PCB (M)
(UN126/J1611M) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, CENTER UPPER)
- Developing Motor (M) (M127)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
- DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198) (DC CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 1)
1190
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Developing Motor (C).
- Harness between the Drum Driver PCB (C) (UN127/J1622C) and the Developing Motor (C)
Motor (C) (M115/J5235P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY, CABLE, MOTOR
POWER SUPPLY)
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198/J1037) and the Drum Driver PCB (C)
(UN127/J1611C) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, CENTER UPPER)
- Developing Motor (C) (M115)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

Developing Motor (Bk).
- Harness between the Drum Driver PCB (Bk) (UN128/J1622K) and the Developing Motor (Bk)
Motor (Bk) (M121/J5236P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY, CABLE, MOTOR
POWER SUPPLY)
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198/J1038) and the Drum Driver PCB (Bk)
(UN128/J1611K) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, CENTER UPPER)
- Developing Motor (Bk) (M121)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
E024-0100-05 Developing Assembly connection error

Detection Description A connection error of the Developing Knock Motor (Y) was detected.
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (Y) (UN161/J1380Y) and the Developing Knock
Motor (Y) (M203/J7034Y)
- Developing Knock Motor (Y) (M203)
1191
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A connection error of the Developing Assembly Environment Sensor PCB (Y) was detected.
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (Y) (UN161/J1390Y) and the Developing
Assembly Environment Sensor PCB (Y) (UN405/J5030Y) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR)
- Developing Assembly Environment Sensor PCB (Y) (UN405) (Unit of replacement:
ENVIRONMENT SENSOR PCB ASS'Y)

Detection Description A connection error of the Developing Knock Motor (M) was detected.
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (M) (UN162/J1380M) and the Developing Knock
Motor (M) (M204/J7034M)
- Developing Knock Motor (M) (M204)

Detection Description A connection error of the Developing Assembly Environment Sensor PCB (M) was detected.
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (M) (UN162/J1390M) and the Developing
Assembly Environment Sensor PCB (M) (UN406/J5030M) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
SENSOR)
- Developing Assembly Environment Sensor PCB (M) (UN406) (Unit of replacement:

Detection Description A connection error of the Developing Knock Motor (C) was detected.
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (C) (UN163/J1380C) and the Developing Knock
Motor (C) (M205/J7034C)
- Developing Knock Motor (C) (M205)

Detection Description A connection error of the Developing Assembly Environment Sensor PCB (C) was detected.
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (C) (UN163/J1390C) and the Developing
Assembly Environment Sensor PCB (C) (UN407/J5030C) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
SENSOR)
- Developing Assembly Environment Sensor PCB (C) (UN407) (Unit of replacement:

Detection Description A connection error of the Developing Knock Motor (Bk) was detected.
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (Bk) (UN164/J1380K) and the Developing Knock
Motor (Bk) (M206/J7034K)
- Developing Knock Motor (Bk) (M206)
1192
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A connection error of the Developing Assembly Environment Sensor PCB (Bk) was detected.
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (Bk) (UN164/J1390K) and the Developing
Assembly Environment Sensor PCB (Bk) (UN408/J5030K) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
SENSOR)
- Developing Assembly Environment Sensor PCB (Bk) (UN408) (Unit of replacement:
E025-0100-05 Hopper Motor error

Detection Description Lock signal was not detected consecutively although 2 sec had passed since the start of the Hopper
Motor (Y).
- Harness between the Hopper Driver PCB (Y) (UN165/J1421Y) and the Hopper Motor (Y) (M195/
J5253) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HOPPER MOTOR)
- Hopper Motor (Y) (M195)
- Hopper Driver PCB (Y) (UN165) (Unit of replacement: HOPPER DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description Overcurrent error was detected when the Toner Container Motor (Y) was driven.
- Harness between the Hopper Driver PCB (Y) (UN165/J1420Y) and the Toner Container Motor
(Y) (UN146/J5249) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HOPPER DRIVE)
- Toner Container Motor (Y) (M146)

Detection Description Overcurrent error was detected when the Sub Hopper Motor (Y) was driven.
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (Y) (UN161/J1374Y) and the Sub Hopper Motor
(Y) (M137/J5261) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN)
- Sub Hopper Motor (Y) (M137)
1. Check for any foreign matters on the Sub Hopper Motor Shaft, and remove them if any.

Detection Description The Developing Toner Density Sensor (Y) consecutively detected a value that was DENS value
+4% or higher.
(TD ratio: 13% or higher)
Density Sensor (Y) (TS129/J5034Y) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSING)
- SUB HOPPER ASSEMBLY
1. Remove soiling on the Sub Hopper Filter.
1193
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Developing Toner Density Sensor (Y) consecutively detected a value that was DENS value
-6% or less.
(TD ratio: 3% or less)
Density Sensor (Y) (TS129/J5034Y) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSING)
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (Y) (UN161/J1374Y) and the Sub Hopper Toner
Level Sensor 1 (Y) (TS106/J5546) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN)
- Sub Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1 (Y) (TS106)

Motor (M).
- Harness between the Hopper Driver PCB (M) (UN166/J1421M) and the Hopper Motor (M) (M198/
- Hopper Motor (M) (M198)
- Hopper Driver PCB (M) (UN166) (Unit of replacement: HOPPER DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description Overcurrent error was detected when the Toner Container Motor (M) was driven.
- Harness between the Hopper Driver PCB (M) (UN166/J1420M) and the Toner Container Motor
(M) (M145/J5250) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HOPPER DRIVE)
- Toner Container Motor (M) (M145)

Detection Description Overcurrent error was detected when the Sub Hopper Motor (M) was driven.
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (M) (UN162/J1374M) and the Sub Hopper Motor
(M) (M131/J5262) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN)
- Sub Hopper Motor (M) (M131)

Detection Description The Developing Toner Density Sensor (M) consecutively detected a value that was DENS value
+4% or higher.
Density Sensor (M) (TS124/J5034M) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSING)
1194
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Developing Toner Density Sensor (M) consecutively detected a value that was DENS value
-6% or less.
Density Sensor (M) (TS124/J5034M) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSING)
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (M) (UN162/J1374M) and the Sub Hopper Toner
Level Sensor 1 (M) (TS104/J5548) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN)
- Sub Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1 (M) (TS104)

Motor (C).
- Harness between the Hopper Driver PCB (C) (UN167/J1421C) and the Hopper Motor (C) (M197/
- Hopper Motor (C) (M197)
- Hopper Driver PCB (C) (UN167) (Unit of replacement: HOPPER DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description Overcurrent error was detected when the Toner Container Motor (C) was driven.
- Harness between the Hopper Driver PCB (C) (UN167/J1420C) and the Toner Container Motor
(C) (M143/J5251) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HOPPER DRIVE)
- Toner Container Motor (C) (M143)

Detection Description Overcurrent error was detected when the Sub Hopper Motor (C) was driven.
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (C) (UN163/J1374C) and the Sub Hopper Motor
(C) (M119/J5263) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN)
- Sub Hopper Motor (C) (M119)

Detection Description The Developing Toner Density Sensor (C) consecutively detected a value that was DENS value
+4% or higher.
Density Sensor (C) (TS126/J5034C) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSING)
1195
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Developing Toner Density Sensor (C) consecutively detected a value that was DENS value
-6% or less.
Density Sensor (C) (TS126/J5034C) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSING)
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (C) (UN163/J1374C) and the Sub Hopper Toner
Level Sensor 1 (C) (TS100/J5550) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN)
- Sub Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1 (C) (TS100)

Motor (Bk).
- Harness between the Hopper Driver PCB (Bk) (UN168/K1421K) and the Hopper Motor (Bk)
(M196/J5256) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HOPPER MOTOR)
- Hopper Motor (Bk) (M196)
- Hopper Driver PCB (Bk) (UN168) (Unit of replacement: HOPPER DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description Overcurrent error was detected when the Toner Container Motor (Bk) was driven.
- Harness between the Hopper Driver PCB (Bk) (UN168/J1420K) and the Toner Container Motor
(Bk) (M144/J5252) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HOPPER DRIVE)
- Toner Container Motor (Bk) (M144)

Detection Description Overcurrent error was detected when the Sub Hopper Motor (Bk) was driven.
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (Bk) (UN164/J1374K) and the Sub Hopper Motor
(Bk) (M125/J5264) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN)
- Sub Hopper Motor (Bk) (M125)

Detection Description The Developing Toner Density Sensor (Bk) consecutively detected a value that was DENS value
+4% or higher.
Density Sensor (Bk) (TS125/J5034K) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSING)
1196
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Developing Toner Density Sensor (Bk) consecutively detected a value that was DENS value
-6% or less.
Density Sensor (Bk) (TS125/J5034K) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSING)
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (Bk) (UN164/J1374K) and the Sub Hopper Toner
Level Sensor 1 (Bk) (TS102/J5552) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN)
- Sub Hopper Toner Level Sensor 1 (Bk) (TS102)
E027-0101-05 Toner Feed Motor error

Detection Description Lock error of the Toner Feed Motor (Y) was detected.
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (Y) (UN161/J1374Y) and the Toner Feed Screw
HP Sensor (Y) (PS121/J5123) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN)
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (Y) (UN161/J1373Y) and the Toner Feed Motor
- Toner Feed Screw HP Sensor (Y) (PS121)
- Toner Feed Motor (Y) (M138)

Detection Description Rotation error of the Toner Feed Motor (Y) was detected.
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (Y) (UN161/J1373Y) and the Toner Feed Motor
- Toner Feed Motor (Y) (M138)

Detection Description Lock error of the Toner Feed Motor (M) was detected.
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (M) (UN162/J1374M) and the Toner Feed Screw
HP Sensor (M) (PS118/J5124) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN)
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (M) (UN162/J1373M) and the Toner Feed Motor
- Toner Feed Screw HP Sensor (M) (PS118)
- Toner Feed Motor (M) (M132)
1197
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Rotation error of the Toner Feed Motor (M) was detected.
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (M) (UN162/J1373M) and the Toner Feed Motor
- Toner Feed Motor (M) (M132)

Detection Description Lock error of the Toner Feed Motor (C) was detected.
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (C) (UN163/J1374C) and the Toner Feed Screw
HP Sensor (C) (PS112/J5125) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN)
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (C) (UN163/J1373C) and the Toner Feed Motor
- Toner Feed Screw HP Sensor (C) (PS112)
- Toner Feed Motor (C) (M120)

Detection Description Rotation error of the Toner Feed Motor (C) was detected.
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (C) (UN163/J1373C) and the Toner Feed Motor
- Toner Feed Motor (C) (M120)

Detection Description Lock error of the Toner Feed Motor (Bk) was detected.
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (Bk) (UN164/J1392K) and the Toner Feed Screw
HP Sensor (Bk) (PS115/J5126) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN)
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (Bk) (UN164/J1373K) and the Toner Feed Motor
- Toner Feed Screw HP Sensor (Bk) (PS115)
- Toner Feed Motor (Bk) (M126)

Detection Description Rotation error of the Toner Feed Motor (Bk) was detected.
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (Bk) (UN164/J1373K) and the Toner Feed Motor
- Toner Feed Motor (Bk) (M126)
1198
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E028-000E-05 Toner Container Slide Motor error

Remedy Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
If the error is not cleared, collect debug log and contact the sales company.
E029-0001-05 Registration Patch Sensor error

Detection Description An error of the Registration Patch Sensor Shutter HP Sensor was detected.
- Harness between the Registration Patch Sensor Driver PCB (UN159/J1458) and the Registration
Patch Sensor Shutter HP Sensor (PS133/J5042)
- Registration Patch Sensor Shutter HP Sensor (PS133)
- Registration Patch Sensor Shutter Motor (M155)
- Registration Patch Sensor Driver PCB (UN159) (Unit of replacement: REGIST. PATCH SENSOR
PCB ASS'Y)
E029-0100-05 Drum Patch Sensor error

Detection Description The Drum Patch Sensor (Y) detected LED light intensity error.
(Y) (PS120/J5132Y)
1. Check the Drum Patch Sensor (Y), and remove soiling.

Detection Description Home position error of the Drum Patch Sensor Shutter (Y) was detected.
- Harness connecting from the Process Unit Driver PCB (Y) (UN161/J1391Y) to the Drum Patch
Sensor Shutter Solenoid (Y) (SL400/J5245Y) and Patch Sensor Shutter Solenoid Sensor (Y)
(PS401/J5173Y) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, PATCH SHUTTER)
- Drum Patch Sensor Shutter Solenoid (Y) (SL400)
- Patch Sensor Shutter Solenoid Sensor (Y) (PS401)
1. Check the wire pulley of the Process Unit. If wire has come off, put it on the pulley.

Detection Description Patch P-wave light intensity error of the Drum Patch Sensor (Y) was detected when executing the
initial installation mode of the Developing Assembly (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INISET
or INIPATCH).
(Y) (PS120/J5132Y)
1199
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error in the detected background value of the Drum Patch Sensor (Y) was detected.
(Y) (PS120/J5132Y)

Detection Description It was detected that the background, patch value and dark current value of the Drum Patch Sensor
(Y) were out of the specified range.
(Y) (PS120/J5132Y)

Detection Description The Drum Patch Sensor (M) detected LED light intensity error.
(M) (PS117/J5132M)
1. Check the Drum Patch Sensor (M), and remove soiling.

Detection Description Home position error of the Drum Patch Sensor Shutter (M) was detected.
- Harness connecting from the Process Unit Driver PCB (M) (UN162/J1391M) to the Drum Patch
Sensor Shutter Solenoid (M) (SL401/5245M) and Patch Sensor Shutter Solenoid Sensor (M)
(PS402/J5173M) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, PATCH SHUTTER)
- Drum Patch Sensor Shutter Solenoid (M) (SL401)
- Patch Sensor Shutter Solenoid Sensor (M) (PS402)
1200
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Patch P-wave light intensity error of the Drum Patch Sensor (M) was detected when executing the
or INIPATCH).
(M) (PS117/J5132M)

Detection Description An error in the detected background value of the Drum Patch Sensor (M) was detected.
(M) (PS117/J5132M)

(M) were out of the specified range.
(M) (PS117/J5132M)

Detection Description The Drum Patch Sensor (C) detected LED light intensity error.
(C) (PS111/J5132C)
1. Check the Drum Patch Sensor (C), and remove soiling.
1201
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Home position error of the Drum Patch Sensor Shutter (C) was detected.
- Harness connecting from the Process Unit Driver PCB (C) (UN163/J1391C) to the Drum Patch
Sensor Shutter Solenoid (C) (SL402/5245C) and Patch Sensor Shutter Solenoid Sensor (C)
(PS403/J5173C) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, PATCH SHUTTER)
- Drum Patch Sensor Shutter Solenoid (C) (SL402)
- Patch Sensor Shutter Solenoid Sensor (C) (PS403)

Detection Description Patch P-wave light intensity error of the Drum Patch Sensor (C) was detected when executing the
or INIPATCH).
(C) (PS111/J5132C)

Detection Description An error in the detected background value of the Drum Patch Sensor (C) was detected.
(C) (PS111/J5132C)

(C) were out of the specified range.
(C) (PS111/J5132C)
1202
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Drum Patch Sensor (Bk) detected LED light intensity error.
(Bk) (PS114/J5132K)
1. Check the Drum Patch Sensor (Bk), and remove soiling.

Detection Description Home position error of the Drum Patch Sensor Shutter (Bk) was detected.
- Harness connecting from the Process Unit Driver PCB (Bk) (UN164/J1391K) to the Drum Patch
Sensor Shutter Solenoid (Bk) (SL403/5245K) and Patch Sensor Shutter Solenoid Sensor (Bk)
(PS404/J5173K) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, PATCH SHUTTER)
- Drum Patch Sensor Shutter Solenoid (Bk) (SL403)
- Patch Sensor Shutter Solenoid Sensor (Bk) (PS404)

Detection Description Patch P-wave light intensity error of the Drum Patch Sensor (Bk) was detected when executing
the initial installation mode of the Developing Assembly (COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL>
INISET or INIPATCH).
(Bk) (PS114/J5132K)

Detection Description An error in the detected background value of the Drum Patch Sensor (Bk) was detected.
(Bk) (PS114/J5132K)
1203
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

(Bk) were out of the specified range.
(Bk) (PS114/J5132K)
E029-4001-05 Leading Edge Registration Patch Sensor error

Detection Description An error of the Leading Edge Registration Sensor Shutter HP Sensor was detected after startup
of the Leading Edge Registration Patch Sensor Shutter Motor.
- Harness between the ITB Driver PCB (Right) (UN219/J1333) and the Leading Edge Registration
Sensor Shutter HP Sensor (PS105/J5027) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR
CONNECTING)
- Harness between the ITB Driver PCB (Right) (UN219/J1332) and the Leading Edge Registration
Patch Sensor Shutter Motor (M114/J5232)
- Leading Edge Registration Sensor Shutter HP Sensor (PS105)
- Leading Edge Registration Patch Sensor Shutter Motor (M114)
- ITB Driver PCB (Right) (UN219) (Unit of replacement: I.T.B. DRIVER PCB ASS'Y, RIGHT)
- Leading Edge Registration Detection Unit (Unit of replacement: EDGE REGISTRATION DETECT
ASS'Y)
E029-5001-05 ITB Patch Sensor error

Detection Description The ITB Patch Sensor (M) detected an error in the light intensity correction value at auto gradation
adjustment.
- Harness between the Registration Patch Sensor Driver PCB (UN159/J1453) and the ITB Patch
Sensor (M) (PS902/J7249)
- Harness connecting from the Registration Feed Driver PCB (Right) (UN104/J1271) to the Pre-
registration Motor 3 and 4 (M158/J246, M159/J247) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MOTOR)
- ITB Patch Sensor (M) (PS902)
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y, RT)
1. Remove soiling on the ITB Patch Sensor (M).
3. Select [Settings/Registration]>[Adjustment/Maintenance]>[Adjust Image Quality]>[Auto Adjust
Gradation]>[Initialize When Using Full Adjust].
1204
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The ITB Patch Sensor (Y) detected an error in the light intensity correction value at auto gradation
adjustment.
Sensor (Y) (PS903/J7250)
- ITB Patch Sensor (Y) (PS903)
PCB ASS'Y)
1. Remove soiling on the ITB Patch Sensor (Y).
3.Select [Settings/Registration]>[Adjustment/Maintenance]>[Adjust Image Quality]>[Auto Adjust

Detection Description The ITB Patch Sensor (C) detected an error in the light intensity correction value at auto gradation
adjustment.
Sensor (C) (PS904/J7251)
- ITB Patch Sensor (C) (PS904)
PCB ASS'Y)
1. Remove soiling on the ITB Patch Sensor (C).
E060-0002-05 Primary Charging Wire error

Detection Description Overcurrent error was detected after startup of the ITB Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor.
- Harness between the ITB Driver PCB (Middle) (UN217/J1311) and the ITB Pre-transfer Charging
Wire Cleaning Motor (M110/J5230)
- ITB Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M110)
1. Check that the Cleaning Pad of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly is installed properly.

Detection Description Home position error was detected after operation of the cleaning member of the Primary Charging
Wire (Y).
- Harnesses connecting from the Process Unit Driver PCB (Y) (UN161/J1375Y) to the Primary
Charging Wire Cleaning Motor HP Sensor (Y) and Primary Charging Contact PCB B (Y) (PS240/
J8791 and UN927/J5241D) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN, CABLE, CORONA CLEANER)
- Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor HP Sensor (Y) (PS240)
- Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (Y) (M136)
- Primary Charging Contact PCB B (Y) (UN927) (Unit of replacement: CONTACT PCB ASS'Y)
- Primary Charging Contact PCB A (Y) (UN923) (Unit of replacement: CONTACT PCB
ASSEMBLY)
- Primary Charging Wire Unit (Y) (Unit of replacement: CORONA ASSEMBLY)
1. Check the Primary Charging Wire. If the cleaning member is displaced or claw is disengaged,
correct it.
1205
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Overcurrent of the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (Y) was detected.
- Harnesses from the Process Unit Driver PCB (Y) (UN161/J1375Y) to the Primary Charging
Contact PCB B (Y) (UN927/J5241D) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN, CABLE, CORONA
CLEANER)
- Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (Y) (M136)
- Primary Charging Contact PCB B (Y) (UN927) (Unit of replacement: CONTACT PCB ASS'Y)
- Primary Charging Contact PCB A (Y) (UN923) (Unit of replacement: CONTACT PCB
ASSEMBLY)
correct it.

Detection Description The Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor HP Sensor (Y) detected HP error while the drum was
being driven.
- Harnesses from the Process Unit Driver PCB (Y) to the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor
HP Sensor (Y)
1. Process Unit Driver PCB (Y) (UN161/J1375Y) to Relay Connector (5P) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, FAN)
2. Relay Connector (5P) to Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor HP Sensor (Y) (PS240/J8791)
(Unit of replacement: CABLE, CORONA CLEANER)
- Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor HP Sensor (Y) (PS240)
- Primary Charging Assembly Shutter Unit (Unit of replacement: SHUTTER UNIT)

Detection Description An error of charging efficiency was detected at potential control for the Primary Charging Assembly
(Y).
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1095) to the Potential Measurement Relay
PCB (Y) (UN409/J4603Y) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, RIGHT UPPER, CABLE,
ENVIRONMENT CONNECTING)
- Harness between the Potential Measurement Relay PCB (Y) (UN409/J6401Y) and the Potential
Measurement PCB (Y) (UN129/J6402Y) (Unit of replacement: POTENTIAL MEASURING ASS'Y,
LF.)
- Harness between the Potential Measurement PCB (Y) (UN129/J339Y) and the Potential Sensor
(Y) (UN209/J341Y)
- Primary Charging Assembly Grid Plate (Y) (Unit of replacement: PLATE, ETCHING GRID)
- Primary Charging Assembly Shutter (Unit of replacement: SHUTTER UNIT)
- Primary Charging Assembly (Y) (Unit of replacement: PRIMARY CORONA ASSEMBLY)
- Potential Sensor (Y) (UN209)
- Potential Measurement Relay PCB (Y) (UN409) (Unit of replacement: CONNECTING PCB
ASS'Y)
- Potential Measurement PCB (Y) (UN129) (Unit of replacement: POTENTIAL MEASURING UNIT)
- DC Controller PCB 1-2 (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB 1-2 ASSEMBLY)
1. Check that the related parts are installed properly.
1206
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Wire (M).
- Harnesses connecting from the Process Unit Driver PCB (M) (UN162/J1375M) to the Primary
Charging Wire Cleaning Motor HP Sensor (M) and Primary Charging Contact PCB B (M) (PS241/
- Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor HP Sensor (M) (PS241)
- Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M) (M130)
- Primary Charging Contact PCB B (M) (UN928) (Unit of replacement: CONTACT PCB ASS'Y)
- Primary Charging Contact PCB A (M) (UN924) (Unit of replacement: CONTACT PCB
ASSEMBLY)
- Primary Charging Wire Unit (M) (Unit of replacement: CORONA ASSEMBLY)
correct it.

Detection Description Overcurrent of the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M) was detected.
- Harnesses from the Process Unit Driver PCB (M) (UN162/J1375M) to the Primary Charging
Contact PCB B (M) (UN928/J5242D) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN, CABLE, CORONA
CLEANER)
- Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M) (M130)
- Primary Charging Contact PCB B (M) (UN928) (Unit of replacement: CONTACT PCB ASS'Y)
- Primary Charging Contact PCB A (M) (UN924) (Unit of replacement: CONTACT PCB
ASSEMBLY)
correct it.

Detection Description The Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor HP Sensor (M) detected HP error while the drum was
being driven.
- Harnesses from the Process Unit Driver PCB (M) to the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor
HP Sensor (M)
1. Process Unit Driver PCB (M) (UN162/J1375M) to Relay Connector (5P) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, FAN)
2. Relay Connector (5P) to Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor HP Sensor (M) (PS241/J8792)
- Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor HP Sensor (M) (PS241)
1207
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

(M).
PCB (M) (UN410/J4603M) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, RIGHT UPPER, CABLE,
- Harness between the Potential Measurement Relay PCB (M) (UN410/J6401M) and the Potential
Measurement PCB (M) (UN130/J6402M) (Unit of replacement: POTENTIAL MEASURING ASS'Y,
LF.)
- Harness between the Potential Measurement PCB (M) (UN130/J339M) and the Potential Sensor
(M) (UN208/J341M)
- Primary Charging Assembly Grid Plate (M) (Unit of replacement: PLATE, ETCHING GRID)
- Primary Charging Assembly (M) (Unit of replacement: PRIMARY CORONA ASSEMBLY)
- Potential Sensor (M) (UN208)
- Potential Measurement Relay PCB (M) (UN410) (Unit of replacement: CONNECTING PCB
ASS'Y)
- Potential Measurement PCB (M) (UN130) (Unit of replacement: POTENTIAL MEASURING
UNIT)

Wire (C).
- Harnesses connecting from the Process Unit Driver PCB (C) (UN163/J1375C) to the Primary
Charging Wire Cleaning Motor HP Sensor (C) and Primary Charging Contact PCB B (C) (PS242/
- Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor HP Sensor (C) (PS242)
- Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (C) (M118)
- Primary Charging Contact PCB B (C) (UN929) (Unit of replacement: CONTACT PCB ASS'Y)
- Primary Charging Contact PCB A (C) (UN925) (Unit of replacement: CONTACT PCB
ASSEMBLY)
- Primary Charging Wire Unit (C) (Unit of replacement: CORONA ASSEMBLY)
correct it.

Detection Description Overcurrent of the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (C) was detected.
- Harnesses from the Process Unit Driver PCB (C) (UN163/J1375C) to the Primary Charging
Contact PCB B (C) (UN929/J5243D) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN, CABLE, CORONA
CLEANER)
- Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (C) (M118)
- Primary Charging Contact PCB B (C) (UN929) (Unit of replacement: CONTACT PCB ASS'Y)
- Primary Charging Contact PCB A (C) (UN925) (Unit of replacement: CONTACT PCB
ASSEMBLY)
correct it.
1208
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor HP Sensor (C) detected HP error while the drum was
being driven.
- Harnesses from the Process Unit Driver PCB (C) to the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor
HP Sensor (C)
1. Process Unit Driver PCB (C) (UN163/J1375C) to Relay Connector (5P) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, FAN)
2. Relay Connector (5P) to Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor HP Sensor (C) (PS242/J8793)
- Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor HP Sensor (C) (PS242)
- Laser Scanner Unit (C) (Unit of replacement: SCANNER ASSEMBLY)

(C).
PCB (C) (UN411/J4603C) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, RIGHT UPPER, CABLE,
- Harness between the Potential Measurement Relay PCB (C) (UN411/J6401C) and the Potential
Measurement PCB (C) (UN131/J6402C) (Unit of replacement: POTENTIAL MEASURING ASS'Y,
RT.)
- Harness between the Potential Measurement PCB (C) (UN131/J339C) and the Potential Sensor
(C) (UN206/J341C)
- Primary Charging Assembly Grid Plate (C) (Unit of replacement: PLATE, ETCHING GRID)
- Primary Charging Assembly (C) (Unit of replacement: PRIMARY CORONA ASSEMBLY)
- Potential Sensor (C) (UN206)
- Potential Measurement Relay PCB (C) (UN411) (Unit of replacement: CONNECTING PCB
ASS'Y)
- Potential Measurement PCB (C) (UN131) (Unit of replacement: POTENTIAL MEASURING UNIT)

Wire (Bk).
- Harnesses connecting from the Process Unit Driver PCB (Bk) (UN164/J1375K) to the Primary
Charging Wire Cleaning Motor HP Sensor (Bk) and Primary Charging Contact PCB B (Bk) (PS243/
- Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor HP Sensor (Bk) (PS243)
- Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (Bk) (M124)
- Primary Charging Contact PCB B (Bk) (UN930) (Unit of replacement: CONTACT PCB ASS'Y)
- Primary Charging Contact PCB A (Bk) (UN926) (Unit of replacement: CONTACT PCB
ASSEMBLY)
- Primary Charging Wire Unit (Bk) (Unit of replacement: CORONA ASSEMBLY)
correct it.
1209
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Overcurrent of the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (Bk) was detected.
- Harnesses from the Process Unit Driver PCB (Bk) (UN164/J1375K) to the Primary Charging
Contact PCB B (Bk) (UN930/J5244D) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN, CABLE, CORONA
CLEANER)
- Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (Bk) (M124)
- Primary Charging Contact PCB B (Bk) (UN930) (Unit of replacement: CONTACT PCB ASS'Y)
- Primary Charging Contact PCB A (Bk) (UN926) (Unit of replacement: CONTACT PCB
ASSEMBLY)
correct it.

Detection Description The Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor HP Sensor (Bk) detected HP error while the drum was
being driven.
- Harnesses from the Process Unit Driver PCB (Bk) to the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor
HP Sensor (Bk)
1. Process Unit Driver PCB (Bk) (UN164/J1375K) to Relay Connector (5P) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, FAN)
2. Relay Connector (5P) to Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor HP Sensor (Bk) (PS243/J8794)
- Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor HP Sensor (Bk) (PS243)

(Bk).
PCB (Bk) (UN412/J4603K) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, RIGHT UPPER, CABLE,
- Harness between the Potential Measurement Relay PCB (Bk) (UN411/J6401K) to the Potential
Measurement PCB (Bk) (UN132/J6402K) (Unit of replacement: POTENTIAL MEASURING ASS'Y,
RT.)
- Harness between the Potential Measurement PCB (Bk) (UN132/339K) and the Potential Sensor
(Bk) (UN207/J341K)
- Primary Charging Assembly Grid Plate (Bk) (Unit of replacement: PLATE, ETCHING GRID)
- Primary Charging Assembly (Bk) (Unit of replacement: PRIMARY CORONA ASSEMBLY)
- Potential Sensor (Bk) (UN207)
- Potential Measurement Relay PCB (Bk) (UN412) (Unit of replacement: CONNECTING PCB
ASS'Y)
- Potential Measurement PCB (Bk) (UN132) (Unit of replacement: POTENTIAL MEASURING
UNIT)
1210
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E061-0111-05 Potential control error

Detection Description It was detected that Vgrid value (Y) at potential control was 400 V or less.
PCB (Y) (UN409/J4603Y) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, RIGHT UPPER,CABLE,
LF.)
(Y) (UN209/J341Y)
- Harnesses from the Process Unit Driver PCB (Y) (UN161/J1375Y) to the Pre-exposure LED (Y)
(LED100/J5600) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN, CABLE, LED CONNECTING)
ASS'Y)
- Pre-exposure LED (Y) (LED100) (Unit of replacement: LED ARRAY)
H.V. PCB ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description It was detected that Vgrid value (Y) at potential control was 1200 V or higher.
PCB (Y) (UN409/J4603Y) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, RIGHT UPPER,CABLE,
LF.)
(Y) (UN209/J341Y)
- Harnesses from the Process Unit Driver PCB (Y) (UN161/J1375Y) to the Pre-exposure LED (Y)
ASS'Y)
- Pre-exposure LED (Y) (LED100) (Unit of replacement: LED ARRAY)
H.V. PCB ASSEMBLY)
1211
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description It was detected that the difference between Vd and Vl was 200 V or less while the potential control
laser power (Y) was at the maximum.
(Y) (UN209/J341Y)
- Harness between the Laser Interface PCB (UN950/J8722) and the Laser Scanner Unit (Y)
(J8725Y and J8076) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL)
- Primary Charging Assembly (Unit of replacement: PRIMARY CORONA ASSEMBLY)
- Small-diameter Coaxial Cable for signal (Y)
1. Remove soiling on the Dustproof Glass.
2. Remove and then reinstall the Drum Unit.
3. Remove and then reinstall the Primary Charging Assembly.
[Reference] If the values of COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> V00-Y to VFF-Y are almost the same,
it means that laser does not light up.

Detection Description It was detected that the difference between Vls with the maximum and minimum potential control
laser power (Y) was 100 V or less.
(Y) (UN209/J341Y)
1212
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Lower limit error of the laser power (Y) for patch at patch potential control was detected.
(Y) (UN209/J341Y)

Detection Description Upper limit error of the laser power (Y) for patch at patch potential control was detected.
(Y) (UN209/J341Y)
1213
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description It was detected that Vgrid value (M) at potential control was 400 V or less.
LF.)
(M) (UN208/J341M)
- Harnesses from the Process Unit Driver PCB (M) (UN162/J1375M) to the Pre-exposure LED (M)
ASS'Y)
UNIT)
- Pre-exposure LED (M) (LED101) (Unit of replacement: LED ARRAY)
H.V. PCB ASSEMBLY)
1214
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description It was detected that Vgrid value (M) at potential control was 1000 V or higher.
LF.)
(M) (UN208/J341M)
ASS'Y)
UNIT)
- Pre-exposure LED (M) (LED101) (Unit of replacement: LED ARRAY)
H.V. PCB ASSEMBLY)

laser power (M) was at the maximum.
(M) (UN208/J341M)
- Harness between the Laser Interface PCB (UN950/J8721) and the Laser Scanner Unit (M)
(J8725M and J8070) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL)
- Laser Scanner Unit (M) (Unit of replacement: SCANNER ASSEMBLY)
- Small-diameter Coaxial Cable for signal (M)
UNIT)
[Reference] If the values of COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> V00-M to VFF-M are almost the same,
1215
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

laser power (M) was 100 V or less.
(M) (UN208/J341M)
UNIT)

Detection Description Lower limit error of the laser power (M) for patch at patch potential control was detected.
(M) (UN208/J341M)
UNIT)
1216
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Upper limit error of the laser power (M) for patch at patch potential control was detected.
(M) (UN208/J341M)
UNIT)

Detection Description It was detected that Vgrid value (C) at potential control was 400 V or less.
- Harness between the Potential Measurement PCB (C) (UN411/J6401C) and the Potential
RT.)
(C) (UN206/J341C)
- Harnesses from the Process Unit Driver PCB (C) (UN163/J1375C) to the Pre-exposure LED (C)
ASS'Y)
- Pre-exposure LED (C) (LED102) (Unit of replacement: LED ARRAY)
H.V. PCB ASSEMBLY)
1217
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description It was detected that Vgrid value (C) at potential control was 1000 V or higher.
- Harness between the Potential Measurement PCB (C) (UN411/J6401C) and the Potential
RT.)
(C) (UN206/J341C)
ASS'Y)
- Pre-exposure LED (C) (LED102) (Unit of replacement: LED ARRAY)
H.V. PCB ASSEMBLY)

laser power (C) was at the maximum.
(C) (UN206/J341C)
- Harness between the Laser Interface PCB (UN950/J8731) and the Laser Scanner Unit (C)
(J8725C and J8752) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL)
- Small-diameter Coaxial Cable for signal (C)
[Reference] If the values of COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> V00-C to VFF-C are almost the same,
1218
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

laser power (C) was 100 V or less.
(C) (UN206/J341C)

Detection Description Lower limit error of the laser power (C) for patch at patch potential control was detected.
(C) (UN206/J341C)
1219
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Upper limit error of the laser power (C) for patch at patch potential control was detected.
(C) (UN206/J341C)

Detection Description It was detected that Vgrid value (Bk) at potential control was 400 V or less.
- Harness between the Potential Measurement Relay PCB (Bk) (UN412/J6401K) and the Potential
RT.)
- Harness between the Potential Measurement PCB (Bk) (UN132/J339K) and the Potential Sensor
(Bk) (UN207/J341K)
- Harnesses from the Process Unit Driver PCB (Bk) (UN164/J1375K) to the Pre-exposure LED
(Bk) (LED103/J5603) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN, CABLE, LED CONNECTING)
ASS'Y)
UNIT)
- Pre-exposure LED (Bk) (LED103) (Unit of replacement: LED ARRAY)
H.V. PCB ASSEMBLY)
1220
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description It was detected that Vgrid value (Bk) at potential control was 1000 V or higher.
- Harness between the Potential Measurement Relay PCB (Bk) (UN412/J6401K) and the Potential
RT.)
(Bk) (UN207/J341K)
ASS'Y)
UNIT)
- Pre-exposure LED (Bk) (LED103) (Unit of replacement: LED ARRAY)
H.V. PCB ASSEMBLY)

laser power (Bk) was at the maximum.
(Bk) (UN207/J341K)
(J8725K and J8751) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL)
- Laser Scanner Unit (Bk) (Unit of replacement: SCANNER ASSEMBLY)
- Small-diameter Coaxial Cable for signal (Bk)
UNIT)
[Reference] If the values of COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> V00-K to VFF-K are almost the same,
1221
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

laser power (Bk) was 100 V or less.
(Bk) (UN207/J341K)
UNIT)

Detection Description Lower limit error of the laser power (Bk) for patch at patch potential control was detected.
(Bk) (UN207/J341K)
UNIT)
1222
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Upper limit error of the laser power (Bk) for patch at patch potential control was detected.
(Bk) (UN207/J341K)
UNIT)
E062-0100-05 Drum heater error

Detection Description Temperature of the Drum Heater (Y) was not raised more than 0.5 deg C.
- Harnesses from the Environment Heater Driver PCB (UN101/J4400 and J4405) to the Drum
Heater Interlock Switch (SW120/J5653) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HEATER, AC, CABLE,
SWITCH CONNECTING, AC)
- Harnesses from the Environment Heater Driver PCB (UN101/J4400) to the AC Harness Relay
Connector Base (J7856) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HEATER, AC, AC CABLE MOUNT
ASSEMBLY)
- Harnesses from the Environment Heater Driver PCB (UN101/J4402) to the Process Unit Driver
PCB (Y) (UN161/J1350Y) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HEATER, AC, P- KIT DRAWER
ASSEMBLY, DRAWER CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY)
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (Y) (UN161/J1376Y) and the Drum Surface
Temperature Sensor (Y) (UN183/J123Y)
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198/J1054) and the Environment Heater Driver
PCB (UN101/J4404) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, LEFT UPPER)
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1007) to the Process Unit Driver PCB (Y)
(UN161/J1361Y) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, RIGHT UPPER, P- KIT DRAWER
- Drum Heater Interlock Switch (SW120) (Unit of replacement: INTERLOCK SWITCH ASSEMBLY)
- Drum Surface Temperature Sensor (Y) (UN183)
- Environment Heater Driver PCB (UN101) (Unit of replacement: ENV. HEATER DRIVER PCB
ASS'Y)
[Caution] Turn OFF the main power and the breaker during checking/replacement work.
1223
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description After temperature of the Drum Heater (Y) reached the control temperature, a temperature of 96.5
deg C or higher was detected consecutively.
ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)
1224
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description After temperature of the Drum Heater (Y) reached the control temperature, a temperature of 22.5
deg C or lower was detected consecutively.
ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)
1225
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Temperature of the Drum Heater (M) was not raised more than 0.5 deg C.
ASSEMBLY)
PCB (M) (UN162/J1350M) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HEATER, AC, P- KIT DRAWER
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (M) (UN162/J1376M) and the Drum Surface
Temperature Sensor (M) (UN184/J61)
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1008) to the Process Unit Driver PCB (M)
(UN162/J1360M) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, RIGHT UPPER, P- KIT DRAWER
- Drum Surface Temperature Sensor (M) (UN184)
ASS'Y)
1226
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description After temperature of the Drum Heater (M) reached the control temperature, a temperature of 96.5
ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)
1227
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description After temperature of the Drum Heater (M) reached the control temperature, a temperature of 22.5
ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)
1228
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Temperature of the Drum Heater (C) was not raised more than 0.5 deg C.
Heater Interlock Switch (SW120/J5653) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HEATER, AC,CABLE,
ASSEMBLY)
PCB (C) (UN163/J1350C) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HEATER, AC, P- KIT DRAWER
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (C) (UN163/J1376C) and the Drum Surface
Temperature Sensor (C) (UN185/J62)
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1010) to the Process Unit Driver PCB (C)
(UN163/J1360C) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, RIGHT UPPER, P- KIT DRAWER
- Drum Surface Temperature Sensor (C) (UN185)
ASS'Y)
1229
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description After temperature of the Drum Heater (C) reached the control temperature, a temperature of 96.5
ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)
1230
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description After temperature of the Drum Heater (C) reached the control temperature, a temperature of 22.5
ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)
1231
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Temperature of the Drum Heater (Bk) was not raised more than 0.5 deg C.
ASSEMBLY)
PCB (Bk) (UN164/J1350K) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, HEATER, AC, P- KIT DRAWER
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (Bk) (UN164/J1376K) and the Drum Surface
Temperature Sensor (Bk) (UN186/J5192K)
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1010) to the Process Unit Driver PCB (Bk)
(UN164/J1360K) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, RIGHT UPPER, P- KIT DRAWER
- Drum Surface Temperature Sensor (Bk) (UN186)
ASS'Y)
1232
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description After temperature of the Drum Heater (Bk) reached the control temperature, a temperature of 96.5
ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)
1233
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description After temperature of the Drum Heater (Bk) reached the control temperature, a temperature of 22.5
ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)
E065-0101-05 Primary charging/developing high voltage output error

Detection Description Leak signal was detected consecutively after the start of outputting the primary charging (Y) high
voltage.
- Primary Charging Assembly Grid Plate Cleaning Pad (Y) (Unit of replacement: GRID CLEANING
UNIT)
- Primary Charging Assembly Grid Plate (Y) (Unit of replacement: PRIMARY CORONA
ASSEMBLY)
- Photosensitive Drum (Y) (Unit of replacement: HOLDER UNIT, DRUM UNIT)
- High Voltage GND Harness (J3003Y)
- Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage PCB (Y) (Unit of replacement: 1ST CHARGE H.V. PCB
ASSEMBLY)
1. Check the installation of the Primary Charging Wire, Grid Plate and Cleaning Pad, and check
that they are free of foreign matter.
2. Check for any abrasion or damage on the drum surface.
3. Check/replace the related parts.

Detection Description Leak signal was detected consecutively after the start of outputting the developing AC (Y).
- Developing Assembly (Y) (Unit of replacement: DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY)
- Photosensitive Drum (Y) (Unit of replacement: HOLDER UNIT, DRUM UNIT)
- Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage PCB (Y) (Unit of replacement: 1ST CHARGE H.V. PCB
ASSEMBLY)
1234
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Disconnection of the Pre-exposure LED (Y) was detected.
- Harnesses from the Process Unit Driver PCB (Y) to the Pre-exposure LED (Y)
1. Process Unit Driver PCB (Y) (UN161/J1375Y) to Relay Connector (5P) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, FAN)
2. Relay Connector (5P) to Pre-exposure LED (Y) (LED100/J5600) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
LED CONNECTING)
- Pre-exposure LED (Y) (LED100) (Unit of replacement: PRE-EXPOSURE UNIT)

Detection Description Disconnection of the Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Y) was detected.
- Harnesses from the Process Unit Driver PCB (Y) (UN161/J1375Y) to the Drum Cleaning Pre-
exposure LED (Y) (LED110/J5604) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN, CABLE, LED
CONNECTING, CABLE, P- KIT LED)
- Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Y) (LED110) (Unit of replacement: PRE-EXPOSURE UNIT)

Detection Description Leak signal was detected consecutively after the start of outputting the primary charging (M) high
voltage.
- Primary Charging Assembly Grid Plate Cleaning Pad (M) (Unit of replacement: GRID CLEANING
UNIT)
- Primary Charging Assembly Grid Plate (M) (Unit of replacement: PRIMARY CORONA
ASSEMBLY)
- Photosensitive Drum (M) (Unit of replacement: HOLDER UNIT, DRUM UNIT)
- High Voltage GND Harness (J3003M)
- Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage PCB (M) (Unit of replacement: 1ST CHARGE H.V.
PCB ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description Leak signal was detected consecutively after the start of outputting the developing AC (M).
- Developing Assembly (M) (Unit of replacement: DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY)
- Photosensitive Drum (M) (Unit of replacement: HOLDER UNIT, DRUM UNIT)
- Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage PCB (M) (Unit of replacement: 1ST CHARGE H.V.
PCB ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description Disconnection of the Pre-exposure LED (M) was detected.
- Pre-exposure LED (M) (LED101) (Unit of replacement: PRE-EXPOSURE UNIT)
1235
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Disconnection of the Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (M) was detected.
- Harnesses from the Process Unit Driver PCB (M) (UN162/J1375M) to the Drum Cleaning Pre-
exposure LED (M) (LED111/J5605) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN, CABLE, LED
- Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (M) (LED111) (Unit of replacement: PRE-EXPOSURE UNIT)

Detection Description Leak signal was detected consecutively after the start of outputting the primary charging (C) high
voltage.
- Primary Charging Assembly Grid Plate Cleaning Pad (C) (Unit of replacement: GRID CLEANING
UNIT)
- Primary Charging Assembly Grid Plate (C) (Unit of replacement: PRIMARY CORONA
ASSEMBLY)
- Photosensitive Drum (C) (Unit of replacement: HOLDER UNIT, DRUM UNIT)
- High Voltage GND Harness (J3003C)
- Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage PCB (C) (Unit of replacement: 1ST CHARGE H.V.
PCB ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description Leak signal was detected consecutively after the start of outputting the developing AC (C).
- Developing Assembly (C) (Unit of replacement: DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY)
- Photosensitive Drum (C) (Unit of replacement: HOLDER UNIT, DRUM UNIT)
- Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage PCB (C) (Unit of replacement: 1ST CHARGE H.V.
PCB ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description Disconnection of the Pre-exposure LED (C) was detected.
- Pre-exposure LED (C) (LED102) (Unit of replacement: PRE-EXPOSURE UNIT)

Detection Description Disconnection of the Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (C) was detected.
- Harnesses from the Process Unit Driver PCB (C) (UN163/J1375C) to the Drum Cleaning Pre-
exposure LED (C) (LED112/J5606) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN, CABLE, LED
- Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (C) (LED112) (Unit of replacement: PRE-EXPOSURE UNIT)
1236
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Leak signal was detected consecutively after the start of outputting the primary charging (Bk) high
voltage.
- Primary Charging Assembly Grid Plate Cleaning Pad (Bk) (Unit of replacement: GRID CLEANING
UNIT)
- Primary Charging Assembly Grid Plate (Bk) (Unit of replacement: PRIMARY CORONA
ASSEMBLY)
- Photosensitive Drum (Bk) (Unit of replacement: HOLDER UNIT, DRUM UNIT)
- High Voltage GND Harness (J3003K)
- Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage PCB (Bk) (Unit of replacement: 1ST CHARGE H.V.
PCB ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description Leak signal was detected consecutively after the start of outputting the developing AC (Bk).
- Developing Assembly (Bk) (Unit of replacement: DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY)
- Photosensitive Drum (Bk) (Unit of replacement: HOLDER UNIT, DRUM UNIT)
- Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage PCB (Bk) (Unit of replacement: 1ST CHARGE H.V.
PCB ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description Disconnection of the Pre-exposure LED (Bk) was detected.
- Pre-exposure LED (Bk) (LED103) (Unit of replacement: PRE-EXPOSURE UNIT)

Detection Description Disconnection of the Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Bk) was detected.
- Harnesses from the Process Unit Driver PCB (Bk) (UN164/J1375K) to the Drum Cleaning Pre-
exposure LED (Bk) (LED113/J5607) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN, CABLE, LED
- Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (Bk) (LED113) (Unit of replacement: PRE-EXPOSURE UNIT)
E069-0190-05 Transfer high voltage output leak error

Detection Description Leak signal was detected consecutively after the start of outputting the primary transfer high
voltage (Y).
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1041A) to the Primary Transfer High Voltage
PCB (Y) (UN112/J3050Y) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, CENTER UPPER, CABLE,
DRAWER POWER SUPPLY, 3)
- Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (Y) (UN112) (Unit of replacement: HVT2 PCB ASSEMBLY)
1237
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

voltage (M).
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1041B) to the Primary Transfer High Voltage
PCB (M) (UN113/J3050M) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, CENTER UPPER, CABLE,
- Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (M) (UN113) (Unit of replacement: HVT2 PCB ASSEMBLY)

voltage (C).
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J9940A) to the Primary Transfer High Voltage
PCB (C) (UN114/J3050C) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, CENTER UPPER, CABLE,
- Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (C) (UN114) (Unit of replacement: HVT2 PCB ASSEMBLY)

voltage (Bk).
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J9940B) to the Primary Transfer High Voltage
PCB (Bk) (UN115/J3050K) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, CENTER UPPER, CABLE,
- Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (Bk) (UN115) (Unit of replacement: HVT2 PCB ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description Leak signal was detected consecutively after the start of outputting the secondary transfer high
voltage.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198/J1034A) to the Secondary Transfer High
Voltage PCB (UN116/J3150) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, CENTER UPPER, I.T.B.
DRAWER ASSEMBLY, A2, CABLE, H.V. POWER SUPPLY RELAY)
- Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB (UN116) (Unit of replacement: HV4 PCB ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description Leak signal was detected consecutively after the start of outputting the post-secondary transfer
static elimination high voltage.
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1050A) and the Post-secondary Transfer
Static Elimination High Voltage PCB (UN108/J3100) (Unit of replacement: 2ND TRNSFR.
DRAWER ASS'Y)
- Post-secondary Transfer Static Elimination High Voltage PCB (UN108) (Unit of replacement: HV3
PCB ASSEMBLY)
1238
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Leak signal was detected consecutively after the start of outputting from the ITB Pre-transfer
Charging High Voltage PCB.
Remedy Check/replace the ITB Pre-transfer Charging High Voltage PCB (option).

Detection Description Leak signal was detected consecutively after the start of outputting the secondary transfer cleaner
high voltage (-).
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1043B) and the Secondary Transfer
Cleaner High Voltage PCB (-) (UN972/J8) (Unit of replacement: 2ND TRNSFR. DRAWER ASS'Y)
- Secondary Transfer Cleaner Fur Brush (Unit of replacement: ROLLER, CLEANING BRUSH)
- Secondary Transfer Cleaner High Voltage PCB (-) (UN972) (Unit of replacement: HIGH
VOLTAGE PCB ASSEMBLY)
2. Remove soiling on the contact point of the secondary transfer cleaner high voltage.

Detection Description Leak signal was detected consecutively after the start of outputting the secondary transfer cleaner
high voltage (+).
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1043A) and the Secondary Transfer
Cleaner High Voltage PCB (+) (UN971/J3350) (Unit of replacement: 2ND TRNSFR. DRAWER
ASS'Y)
- Secondary Transfer Cleaner Fur Brush (Unit of replacement: ROLLER, CLEANING BRUSH)
- Secondary Transfer Cleaner High Voltage PCB (+) (UN971) (Unit of replacement: HIGH
2. Remove soiling on the contact point of the secondary transfer cleaner high voltage.
E075-0001-05 ITB displacement control error

Detection Description There was no change from when the ITB HP Sensor detected home position after the ITB was
driven.
- Harness between the ITB Driver PCB (Middle) (UN217/J1317 and J1318) and the ITB HP Upper/
Lower Sensor (PS102/J5020 and PS101/J5021) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR
CONNECTING)
- ITB HP Lower Sensor (PS101)
- ITB HP Upper Sensor (PS102)
1. Remove soiling on the ITB HP Sensor and the Transfer Belt HP Seal.
1239
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Steering HP signal was not detected after ASIC has started ITB steering HP detection.
- Harness between the ITB Driver PCB (Middle) (UN217/J1316) and the ITB Steering Motor HP
Sensor (PS104/J5023)
- ITB Steering Motor HP Sensor (PS104)
- ITB Steering Cam
1. Check the operation of the ITB Steering Cam.
2. Remove soiling on the HP Sensor.

Detection Description The ITB Edge Sensor detected the ITB edge although the ITB was being stopped/rotated.
- Harnesses from the ITB Driver PCB (Middle) (UN217/J1317) to the ITB Edge Sensor (PS100/
J5022) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR CONNECTING, CABLE, SENSOR)
- ITB Edge Sensor (PS100)
a. If the error occurred during normal operation,
a-1. Check the ITB Edge Sensor Flag.
a-2. Check the operation of the ITB Steering Roller and check if the roller is soiled.
a-3. Remove soiling on the ITB Edge Sensor.
a-4. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
b. If the error occurred after replacement of the ITB,
b-1. Open the Front Door, and execute COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> INIT-ITB to initialize
the ITB edge profile. Then, turn OFF the main power.
b-2. Pull out the ITB Unit, and adjust the installation position of the ITB again.
b-3. Put the ITB Unit back into the machine, and turn ON the main power.

Detection Description The ITB neutral position was not stable.
1. Check the ITB Edge Sensor Flag.
2. Check the operation of the ITB Steering Roller and check if the roller is soiled.
3. Remove soiling on the ITB Edge Sensor.

Detection Description An error was detected in the number of collected data on ITB rotation.
1. Check the ITB Edge Sensor Flag.
2. Check the operation of the ITB Steering Roller and check if the roller is soiled.
3. Remove soiling on the ITB Edge Sensor.
1240
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

If the error is not cleared, contact the sales company.
E077-0001-05 Secondary Transfer Roller engagement/disengagement error

Detection Description Engagement/disengagement of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller was not completed within the
specified period of time.
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
- Remove and then install the Secondary Transfer Frame/Pre-fixing Feed Assembly.
- Check operation of the handle of the Main Station Feed Pullout Frame.
- Check that there is no damage or deformation at the front and rear positioning points of the
Secondary Transfer Outer Holder.
- Check that there is no damage or deformation at the drive section/Cam Shaft of the Secondary
Transfer Base Plate Unit.
- Adjust the Main Station Feed Pullout Frame position again.
E078-0001-05 ITB Cleaner Motor error

Detection Description Lock signal was not detected after the ITB Cleaner Motor was being driven.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1046A) to the ITB Cleaner Motor (M108/
J5229S) (Unit of replacement: 2ND TRNSFR. DRAWER ASS'Y, I.T.B. DRAWER ASSEMBLY, B)
- Harnesses from the Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB (UN102/J1845) to the ITB Cleaner
Motor (M108/J5229P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY, CABLE, DRAWER
POWER SUPPLY, 1)
- ITB Cleaner Motor (M108)
- ITB Cleaner Drive (Unit of replacement: I.T.B. CLEANER DRIVE ASSEMBLY)
- ITB Cleaner Unit (Unit of replacement: I.T.B. CLEANER ASSEMBLY)
- ITB Cleaner Waste Toner Screw (Unit of replacement: I.T.B. WASTE TONER FEED ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
E100-0101-05 Laser Scanner Motor BD error

Detection Description The PLOCK signal (Y) could not be detected while the Laser Scanner Motor BD was rotated.
(J8725Y and J8076D) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL)
- Harness between the Laser Interface PCB (UN950/J1102 and J1103) and the Laser Scanner
Unit (Y) (J2000Y and J2001Y)
- Harness between the Laser Interface PCB (UN950/J8743) and the Main Station Power Supply
Relay PCB (UN102/J1848) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
[Reference] If the same error is not reproduced by replacing the Laser Scanner with another one
for different color, cause of the error can be narrowed down to the scanner.
1241
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The PLOCK signal (M) could not be detected while the Laser Scanner Motor BD was rotated.
(J8725M and J8070D) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL)
Unit (M) (J2000M and J2001M)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

Detection Description The PLOCK signal (C) could not be detected while the Laser Scanner Motor BD was rotated.
(J8725C and J8752D) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL)
Unit (C) (J2000C and J2001C)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

Detection Description The PLOCK signal (Bk) could not be detected while the Laser Scanner Motor BD was rotated.
(J8725K and J8751D) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL)
Unit (Bk) (J2000K and J2001K)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1242
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E102-0101-05 EEPROM error

Detection Description An error in check sum of EEPROM on the Laser Scanner (Y) was detected.
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

Detection Description An error in check sum of EEPROM on the Laser Scanner (M) was detected.
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

Detection Description An error in check sum of EEPROM on the Laser Scanner (C) was detected.
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1243
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error in check sum of EEPROM on the Laser Scanner (Bk) was detected.
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
E102-0F01-05 EEPROM error

Detection Description An error in writing to EEPROM on the Laser Scanner Unit was detected.
E104-0101-05 Abnormal laser light emission

Detection Description An error was detected when operating voltage of laser (Y) was checked at power-on.

Detection Description An error was detected when operating voltage of laser (M) was checked at power-on.

Detection Description An error was detected when operating voltage of laser (C) was checked at power-on.
1244
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error was detected when operating voltage of laser (Bk) was checked at power-on.
E110-0101-05 Laser Scanner Motor FG error

Detection Description The VLOCK signal (Y) could not be detected while the Laser Scanner Motor FG was rotated.
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

Detection Description The VLOCK signal (M) could not be detected while the Laser Scanner Motor FG was rotated.
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

Detection Description The VLOCK signal (C) could not be detected while the Laser Scanner Motor FG was rotated.
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1245
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The VLOCK signal (Bk) could not be detected while the Laser Scanner Motor FG was rotated.
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
E130-0001-05 Air Pump error

Detection Description Low current error was detected consecutively while pump of the Air Compressor was in operation.
- Connector between the Compressor Driver PCB (UN931/J6151) and the Air Pump (UN914)
- Harness between the Power Unit Limiter PCB (UN401/J6015) and the Compressor Driver PCB
(UN931/J6152) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, PUMP UNIT)
- Harness between the Power Unit Limiter PCB (UN401/J6024) and the Main Station Power Supply
Relay PCB (UN102/J7868L) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER LIMITER MAIN)
- Harness between the Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB (UN102/J1812) and the Power Unit
Limiter PCB (UN401/J7868D) (Unit of replacement: DC CABLE MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
- Harness between the Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB (UN102/J1810) and the DC
Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1001) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, LEFT UPPER)
- Compressor Driver PCB (UN931) (Unit of replacement: PUMP DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY)
- Power Unit Limiter PCB (UN401) (Unit of replacement: LIMITER PCB ASSEMBLY)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
- Air Pump (UN914)
1. Check that voltage of the supplied power is within the range of 170 V to 264 V.
2. Drive the Air Compressor using service mode. If the value of the Pressure Gauge is 0.3 MPa or
higher, perform pressure adjustment.
3. If the value of the Pressure Gauge is 0.3 MPa or less when the Air Compressor is driven, check
for clogging in the Air Hose.
[Reference] Air Compressor drive: COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> CMP-AIR
1246
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Motor lock error was detected consecutively while pump of the Air Compressor was in operation.
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
- Air Pump (UN914)
1. Check that voltage of the supplied power is within the range of 170 V to 264 V.
2. Drive the Air Compressor using service mode. If the value of the Pressure Gauge is 0.3 MPa or
higher, perform pressure adjustment.
3. If the value of the Pressure Gauge is 0.3 MPa or less when the Air Compressor is driven, check
for clogging in the Air Hose.
[Reference] Air Compressor drive: COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> CMP-AIR

Detection Description An error condition was detected consecutively after the Air Compressor relay signal was tuned
ON.
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
- Air Pump (UN914)

Detection Description Error of the Air Separation Blow Valve was detected.
- Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4050) and the Air Separation
Blow Valve Unit (UN916/J8771) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER LEFT, UPPER)
- Air Separation Blow Valve Unit (UN916) (Unit of replacement: SOLENOID VALVE UNIT)
ASS'Y)
1247
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Error of the Primary Fixing Refresh Air Cleaning Blow Valve was detected.
Refresh Air Cleaning Blow Valve Unit (UN917/J8772) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER
LEFT, UPPER)
- Primary Fixing Refresh Air Cleaning Blow Valve Unit (UN917) (Unit of replacement: SOLENOID
VALVE UNIT)
ASS'Y)

Detection Description Error of the Secondary Fixing Refresh Air Cleaning Blow Valve was detected.
Refresh Air Cleaning Blow Valve Unit (UN918/J8773) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING
POWER SUPPLY)
- Secondary Fixing Refresh Air Cleaning Blow Valve Unit (UN918) (Unit of replacement:
SOLENOID VALVE UNIT)
ASS'Y)
E193-0110-05 Communication error

Detection Description The Main Controller could not receive the image write start request signal (Y) from the Laser
Interface PCB.
- Harness between the Laser Interface PCB (UN950/J9950) and the Riser PCB (UN985/J9951)
(Unit of replacement: CABLE, DDI)
- Connector between the Riser PCB (UN985/J101) and the Main Controller PCB 2 (UN986/J14)
- Riser PCB (UN985) (Unit of replacement: RISER PCB ASSEMBLY)
- Main Controller PCB 2 (UN986) (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y, 2)

Detection Description The Main Controller could not receive the image write start request signal (M) from the Laser
Interface PCB.

Detection Description The Main Controller could not receive the image write start request signal (C) from the Laser
Interface PCB.
1248
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Main Controller could not receive the image write start request signal (Bk) from the Laser
Interface PCB.
E194-0051-05 Auto registration patch error

Detection Description ITB scratch data error was detected during ITB scratch detection control.
Patch Sensor (Front, Middle, and Rear) (PS134/J7252, PS135/J7253 and PS136/J7254)
- Registration Patch Sensor (Front, Middle and Rear) (PS134, PS135 and PS136) (Unit of
replacement: REGIST. SENSOR PCB ASSEMBLY)
- ITB (Unit of replacement: BELT, TRANSFER)
PCB ASS'Y)
1. Check if the Registration Patch Sensor is soiled, and clean it if necessary.
2. Check the ITB. If it is soiled, execute the following: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TBLT-
CLN.

Detection Description Scratch on the ITB was detected during ITB scratch detection control.
Patch Sensor (Front, Middle, and Rear) (PS134/J7252, PS135/J7253 and PS136/J7254)
- Registration Patch Sensor (Front, Middle and Rear) (PS134, PS135 and PS136) (Unit of
replacement: REGIST. SENSOR PCB ASSEMBLY)
- ITB (Unit of replacement: BELT, TRANSFER)
PCB ASS'Y)
CLN.
1249
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error in reading of patch on the front/rear side was detected when executing auto registration.
Patch Sensor (Front and Rear) (PS134/J7252 and PS136/J7254)
- Registration Patch Sensor (Front and Rear) (PS134 and PS136) (Unit of replacement: REGIST.
SENSOR PCB ASSEMBLY)
PCB ASS'Y)
CLN.

Detection Description An error in reading of patch on the front/rear side was detected during fine adjustment of auto
registration.
Patch Sensor (Front and Rear) (PS134/J7252 and PS136/J7254)
- Registration Patch Sensor (Front and Rear) (PS134 and PS136) (Unit of replacement: REGIST.
SENSOR PCB ASSEMBLY)
PCB ASS'Y)
CLN.

Detection Description The Registration Patch Sensor (Front) detected that the LED light intensity adjustment result
exceeded the specified value when executing auto registration.
Patch Sensor (Front) (PS134/J7252)
- Registration Patch Sensor (Front) (PS134) (Unit of replacement: REGIST. SENSOR PCB
ASSEMBLY)
PCB ASS'Y)
[Remedy]
1250
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Registration Patch Sensor (Front) detected that the light intensity reflected from the ITB
ASSEMBLY)
PCB ASS'Y)
CLN.

Detection Description The Registration Patch Sensor (Front) detected that the light intensity reflected from patch
ASSEMBLY)
PCB ASS'Y)
- Developing Assembly
- Primary/GRID High Voltage Harness (Bk) (J3002K)
- Laser Scanner (Unit of replacement: SCANNER ASSEMBLY)
CLN.

Detection Description The Registration Patch Sensor (Front) detected an error in the intervals of magenta patches when
executing auto registration.
ASSEMBLY)
PCB ASS'Y)
- Primary/GRID High Voltage Harness (Y) , (M) (J3002Y,J3002M)
CLN.
1251
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Registration Patch Sensor (Middle) detected that the LED light intensity adjustment result
Patch Sensor (Middle) (PS135/J7253)
- Registration Patch Sensor (Middle) (PS135) (Unit of replacement: REGIST. SENSOR PCB
ASSEMBLY)
PCB ASS'Y)
CLN.

Detection Description The Registration Patch Sensor (Middle) detected that the light intensity reflected from the ITB
ASSEMBLY)
PCB ASS'Y)
CLN.

Detection Description The Registration Patch Sensor (Middle) detected that the light intensity reflected from patch
ASSEMBLY)
PCB ASS'Y)
CLN.
1252
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Registration Patch Sensor (Middle) detected an error in the intervals of magenta patches when
ASSEMBLY)
PCB ASS'Y)
CLN.

Detection Description The Registration Patch Sensor (Rear) detected that the LED light intensity adjustment result
Patch Sensor (Rear) (PS136/J7254)
- Registration Patch Sensor (Rear) (PS136) (Unit of replacement: REGIST. SENSOR PCB
ASSEMBLY)
PCB ASS'Y)
CLN.

Detection Description The Registration Patch Sensor (Rear) detected that the light intensity reflected from the ITB
ASSEMBLY)
PCB ASS'Y)
CLN.
1253
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Registration Patch Sensor (Rear) detected that the light intensity reflected from patch
ASSEMBLY)
PCB ASS'Y)
CLN.

Detection Description The Registration Patch Sensor (Middle) detected an error in the intervals of magenta patches when
ASSEMBLY)
PCB ASS'Y)
CLN.

Detection Description The Registration Patch Sensor (Front) detected an error of the specified value when executing
auto registration.
ASSEMBLY)
PCB ASS'Y)
CLN.
1254
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Registration Patch Sensor (Middle) detected an error of the specified value when executing
auto registration.
ASSEMBLY)
PCB ASS'Y)
CLN.

Detection Description The Registration Patch Sensor (Rear) detected an error of the specified value when executing
auto registration.
ASSEMBLY)
PCB ASS'Y)
CLN.
E197-0001-05 Serial communication error

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 and the Left Deck Pickup Driver PCB
was detected.
- Harness between the Left Deck Pickup Driver PCB (UN703/J7051) and the Main Station Power
Supply Relay PCB (UN102/J1822) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY)
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198/J1064) and the Left Deck Pickup Driver
PCB (UN703/J2051L) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, PAPER PICK-UP DRIVER)
- Left Deck Pickup Driver PCB (UN703) (Unit of replacement: PAPER PICK-UP DRIVER PCB
ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1255
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 and the Right Deck Pickup Driver PCB
was detected.
- Harness between the Right Deck Pickup Driver PCB (UN603/J7050) and the Main Station Power
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198/J1060) and the Right Deck Pickup Driver
PCB (UN603/J2051R) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, PAPER PICK-UP DRIVER)
- Right Deck Pickup Driver PCB (UN603) (Unit of replacement: PAPER PICK-UP DRIVER PCB
ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver
PCB was detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1070, J1071 and J1073) to the Fixing
Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4071, J4072 and J4092) (Unit of replacement: DRAWER
ASSEMBLY, CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING DRAWER)
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1072) and the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver
PCB (UN311/J4070)
- Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4000 and J4001) and the Power
Unit Limiter PCB (UN401/J6011 and J6012) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING POWER
SUPPLY)
ASS'Y)

PCB was detected.
PCB (UN311/J4070)
SUPPLY)
ASS'Y)
1256
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

PCB was detected.
PCB (UN311/J4070)
SUPPLY)
ASS'Y)

PCB was detected.
PCB (UN311/J4070)
SUPPLY)
ASS'Y)

PCB was detected.
PCB (UN311/J4070)
SUPPLY)
ASS'Y)
1257
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Primary Fixing Inner Driver
PCB was detected.
- Harnesses from the Primary Fixing Inner Driver PCB (UN316/J4360P and J4361P) to the Fixing
Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4080 and J4079) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 2,
CABLE, DRAWER, 3, CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING, LEFT)
PCB (UN311/J4070)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
E197-000A-05 Serial communication error

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Secondary Fixing Inner Driver
PCB was detected.
- Harnesses from the Secondary Fixing Inner Driver PCB (UN317/J4360S and J4361S) to the
Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4085 and J4084) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
DRAWER CONNECTOR, 2, CABLE, DRAWER, 3, CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING, RIGHT)
PCB (UN311/J4070)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
E197-000D-05 Serial communication error

Detection Description Discrepancy between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 internal program and the internal circuit
configuring the program was detected.
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power of the host machine.
2. Replace the DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124). (Unit of replacement: DC CONTROLLER PCB
1-2 ASSEMBLY)
E197-000E-05 Serial communication error

Detection Description Connection of a Registration Patch Detection Unit for another model was detected.
Remedy Replace the Registration Patch Detection Unit with the one for this model. (Unit of replacement:
REGIST. PATCH SENSOR PCB ASS'Y)
1258
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 and the Riser PCB was detected.
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198/J1092) and the Riser PCB (UN985/J8713)
(Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL)

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 and the Laser Interface PCB was
detected.
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198/J1090) and the Laser Interface PCB
(UN950/J8717) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL)

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 and the Registration Feed Driver PCB
(Right) was detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-1 to the Registration Feed Driver PCB (Right)
1. DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198/J1020) to Drawer Unit (Unit of replacement: REGISTRATION
DRAWER ASSEMBLY)
2. Drawer Unit to Relay Connector (20P) (Unit of replacement: REGIST. DRAWER MOUNTING
ASS'Y)
3. Relay Connector (20P) to Registration Feed Driver PCB (Right) (UN104/J1260) (Unit of
replacement: CABLE, REGIST. DRAWER RELAY, 2)
ASS'Y, RT.)
1. Pull out the Registration Feed Assembly, and check that the Drawer Connector is free of toner
or foreign matter.
1259
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

DRAWER ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y, RT.)
or foreign matter.

(Left) was detected.
of replacement: REGISTRATION DRAWER ASSEMBLY)
- Harnesses connecting the Drawer Unit (J7002), the Relay Connector (40P) and the Registration
Feed Driver PCB (Left) (UN100/J1210) (Unit of replacement: REGIST. DRAWER MOUNTING
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y, LF.)
or foreign matter.
1260
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

ASS'Y)
ASS'Y, LF.)
or foreign matter.

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 and the Primary Charging Assembly
High Voltage PCB (Y) was detected.
H.V. PCB ASSEMBLY)

High Voltage PCB (M) was detected.
H.V. PCB ASSEMBLY)
1261
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

High Voltage PCB (C) was detected.
H.V. PCB ASSEMBLY)

High Voltage PCB (Bk) was detected.
H.V. PCB ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 and the Developing High Voltage PCB
(Y) was detected.
ASSEMBLY)
E197-001B-05 Serial communication error

(M) was detected.
ASSEMBLY)
1262
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E197-001C-05 Serial communication error

(C) was detected.
ASSEMBLY)

(Bk) was detected.
ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 and the Drum Driver PCB (Y) was
detected.
E197-001F-05 Serial communication error

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 and the Drum Driver PCB (M) was
detected.
1263
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 and the Drum Driver PCB (C) was
detected.

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 and the Drum Driver PCB (Bk) was
detected.

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 and the ITB Driver PCB (Right) was
detected.
of replacement: I.T.B. DRAWER ASSEMBLY, C)
- Harness between the Drawer Unit (J7025) and the ITB Driver PCB (Right) (UN219/J1331)
1. Pull out the ITB Unit, and check that the Drawer Connector is free of toner or foreign matter.

detected.
1264
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 and the ITB Driver PCB (Middle) was
detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-1 to the ITB Driver PCB (Middle)
1. DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198/J1033) to Relay Connector (40P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
REAR, CENTER UPPER)
2. Relay Connector (40P) to Drawer Unit (J7024) (Unit of replacement: I.T.B. DRAWER
ASSEMBLY, D)
3. Drawer Unit (J7024) to ITB Driver PCB (Middle) (UN217/J1302)

detected.
REAR, CENTER UPPER)
ASSEMBLY, A2)
1265
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 and the Secondary Transfer High
Voltage PCB was detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-1 to the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB
REAR, CENTER UPPER)
ASSEMBLY, A2)
3. Drawer Unit (J7023) to Relay Connector (15P)
4. Relay Connector (15P) to Relay Connector (15P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, H.V. POWER
SUPPLY RELAY)
5. Relay Connector (15P) to Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB (UN116/J3150)

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 and the ITB Pre-transfer Charging
High Voltage PCB was detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-1 to the ITB Pre-transfer Charging High Voltage PCB
REAR, CENTER UPPER)
ASSEMBLY, C)
3. Drawer Unit (J7025) to ITB Pre-transfer Charging High Voltage PCB (UN150/J3300)
- ITB Pre-transfer Charging High Voltage PCB (UN150)

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 and the Vertical Path/Lower Feed
Driver PCB was detected.
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198/J1018) and the Vertical Path/Lower Feed
Driver PCB (UN105/J1700V) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, LEFT UPPER)
- Vertical Path/Lower Feed Driver PCB (UN105) (Unit of replacement: V.PATH/L.FEED DRIVER
PCB ASS'Y)
1266
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

PCB ASS'Y)

PCB ASS'Y)

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 and the Right Deck Driver PCB was
detected.
- Harness between the Right Deck Pickup Driver PCB (UN603/J2056R) and the Right Deck Driver
PCB (UN602/J2102R) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FLAT, 1)
- Right Deck Driver PCB (UN602) (Unit of replacement: DECK DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)
1267
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 and the Left Deck Driver PCB was
detected.
- Harness between the Left Deck Pickup Driver PCB (UN703/J2056L) and the Left Deck Driver
PCB (UN702/J2102L) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FLAT, 1)
- Left Deck Driver PCB (UN702) (Unit of replacement: DECK DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 and the Environment Heater Driver
PCB was detected.
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198/J1051) and the Main Station Power Supply
ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 and the Primary Transfer High Voltage
PCB (Y) was detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-1 to the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (Y)
REAR, CENTER UPPER)
2. Relay Connector (30P) to Drawer Unit (J7020)
3. Drawer Unit (J7020) to Relay Connector (32P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER POWER
SUPPLY, 3)
4. Relay Connector (32P) to Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (Y) (UN112/J3050Y)
1268
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

PCB (M) was detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-1 to the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (M)
REAR, CENTER UPPER)
SUPPLY, 3)
4. Relay Connector (32P) to Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (M) (UN113/J3050M)

PCB (C) was detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-1 to the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (C)
REAR, CENTER UPPER)
SUPPLY, 5)
4. Relay Connector (32P) to Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (C) (UN114/J3050C)
1269
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

PCB (Bk) was detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-1 to the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (Bk)
REAR, CENTER UPPER)
SUPPLY, 5)
4. Relay Connector (32P) to Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (Bk) (UN115/J3050K)

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Hopper Driver PCB (Y) was
detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 to the Hopper Driver PCB (Y)
REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
2. Relay Connector (27P) to Hopper Driver PCB (Y) (UN165/J1410Y) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, HOPPER DRIVE SIGNAL)

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Hopper Driver PCB (M) was
detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 to the Hopper Driver PCB (M)
REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
2. Relay Connector (29P) to Hopper Driver PCB (M) (UN166/J1410M) (Unit of replacement:

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Hopper Driver PCB (C) was
detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 to the Hopper Driver PCB (C)
REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
2. Relay Connector (27P) to Hopper Driver PCB (C) (UN167/J1410C) (Unit of replacement:
1270
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Hopper Driver PCB (Bk) was
detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 to the Hopper Driver PCB (Bk)
REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
2. Relay Connector (29P) to Hopper Driver PCB (Bk) (UN168/J1410K) (Unit of replacement:

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Process Unit Driver PCB (Y)
was detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 to the Process Unit Driver PCB (Y)
REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
2. Relay Connector (24P) to Drawer Unit (J7008) (Unit of replacement: P- KIT DRAWER
ASSEMBLY)
3. Drawer Unit (J7008) to Process Unit Driver PCB (Y) (UN161/J1360Y) (Unit of replacement:
DRAWER CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY)
1. Pull out the Process Unit, and check that the Drawer Connector is free of toner or foreign matter.

was detected.
REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
ASSEMBLY)
1271
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Process Unit Driver PCB (M)
was detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 to the Process Unit Driver PCB (M)
REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
ASSEMBLY)
3. Drawer Unit (J7010) to Process Unit Driver PCB (M) (UN162/J1360M) (Unit of replacement:

was detected.
REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Process Unit Driver PCB (C)
was detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 to the Process Unit Driver PCB (C)
REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
ASSEMBLY)
3. Drawer Unit (J7012) to Process Unit Driver PCB (C) (UN163/J1360C) (Unit of replacement:
1272
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

was detected.
REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Process Unit Driver PCB (Bk)
was detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 to the Process Unit Driver PCB (Bk)
REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
ASSEMBLY)
3. Drawer Unit (J7014) to Process Unit Driver PCB (Bk) (UN164/J1360K) (Unit of replacement:

was detected.
REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
ASSEMBLY)
1273
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Secondary Transfer/Duplex
of replacement: 2ND TRNSFR. DRAWER ASS'Y)
- Harness between the Drawer Unit (J7005) and the Secondary Transfer/Duplex Driver PCB
(UN106/J1513) (Unit of replacement: 2ND TRNSFR. DRAWER ASS'Y)
DUPLEX PCB ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.

DUPLEX PCB ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Pre-fixing Feed Driver PCB
was detected.
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1026) and the Pre-fixing Feed Driver PCB
(UN107/J1553) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
ASS'Y)

was detected.
ASS'Y)
1274
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

was detected.
ASS'Y)

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the ITB Cleaning High Voltage
PCB (Upstream) was detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 to the ITB Cleaning High Voltage PCB (Upstream)
REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
ASSEMBLY, B)
3. Drawer Unit (J7022) to ITB Cleaning High Voltage PCB (Upstream) (UN148/J3250P)
- ITB Cleaning High Voltage PCB (Upstream) (UN148) (Unit of replacement: I.T.B. CLEANER H.V.
PCB ASS'Y)

PCB (Downstream) was detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 to the ITB Cleaning High Voltage PCB (Downstream)
REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
ASSEMBLY, B)
3. Drawer Unit (J7022) to ITB Cleaning High Voltage PCB (Downstream) (UN149/J3250S)
- ITB Cleaning High Voltage PCB (Downstream) (UN149) (Unit of replacement: HV6-2 PCB
ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Post-secondary Transfer Static
Elimination High Voltage PCB was detected.
- Harness between the Drawer Unit (J7040) and the Post-secondary Transfer Static Elimination
High Voltage PCB (UN108/J3100) (Unit of replacement: 2ND TRNSFR. DRAWER ASS'Y)
PCB ASSEMBLY)
or foreign matter.
1275
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

PCB was detected.
ASS'Y)

PCB was detected.
ASS'Y)

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Primary Fixing Heater Driver
PCB was detected.
ASS'Y)

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Secondary Fixing Heater
PCB ASS'Y)
1276
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Main Station Power Supply
Relay PCB was detected.
Relay PCB (UN102/J1811) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, LEFT UPPER)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Registration Patch Sensor
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 to the Registration Patch Sensor Driver PCB
REAR, LEFT UPPER)
2. Relay Connector (40P) to Drawer Unit (J7015) (Unit of replacement: REGIST. PATCH DRAWER
ASS'Y)
3. Drawer Unit (J7015) to Registration Patch Sensor Driver PCB (UN159/J1450) (Unit of
replacement: REGIST. PATCH SENSOR PCB ASS'Y)
PCB ASS'Y)
1. Pull out the Registration Patch Sensor Unit, and check that the Drawer Connector is free of toner
or foreign matter.

REAR, LEFT UPPER)
ASS'Y)
PCB ASS'Y)
1. Pull out the Registration Patch Sensor Unit, and check that the Drawer Connector is free of toner
or foreign matter.

1277
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

PCB was detected.
ASS'Y)

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Reverse/Outer Delivery Driver
PCB was detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 to the Reverse/Outer Delivery Driver PCB
1. DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1076) to Drawer Unit (J7754) (Unit of replacement: DRAWER
ASSEMBLY)
2. Drawer Unit (J7754) to Drawer Unit (J7016) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING
DRAWER)
3. Drawer Unit (J7016) to Reverse/Outer Delivery Driver PCB (UN310/J4114) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, COLLAR SENSOR DRAWER)
ASSEMBLY)
1. Pull out the Delivery Reverse Unit, and check that the Drawer Connector is free of toner or
foreign matter.

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Color Sensor Control PCB
was detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 to the Color Sensor Control PCB
ASSEMBLY)
DRAWER)
3. Drawer Unit (J7016) to Color Sensor Control PCB (UN904/J4501) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
COLLAR SENSOR DRAWER)
- Color Sensor Control PCB (UN904) (Unit of replacement: DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY, IRIS)
foreign matter.
1278
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Secondary Transfer Cleaner
High Voltage PCB (+) was detected.
- Harness between the Drawer Unit (J7006) and the Secondary Transfer Cleaner High Voltage
PCB (+) (UN971/J3350) (Unit of replacement: 2ND TRNSFR. DRAWER ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.

High Voltage PCB (-) was detected.
PCB (-) (UN972/J8) (Unit of replacement: 2ND TRNSFR. DRAWER ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.

PCB was detected.
ASS'Y)

Detection Description A communication error between the Reverse/Outer Delivery Driver PCB and the Fixing Duplex
Feed Driver PCB was detected.
- Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4090) and the Drawer Unit
(J7031) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING DRAWER)
- Harness between the Drawer Unit (J7031) and the Reverse/Outer Delivery Driver PCB (UN310/
J4110) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, PAPER DELIVERY REVERSE)
ASS'Y)
ASSEMBLY)
foreign matter.
1279
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

ASS'Y)
ASSEMBLY)
foreign matter.

Detection Description A communication error between the Fixing Relay PCB and the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB
was detected.
- Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4013) and the Fixing Relay PCB
(UN402/J6303) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING DRAWER)
PCB (UN311/J4070)
- Fixing Relay PCB (UN402) (Unit of replacement: FIXING AC RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)

Detection Description A communication error between the Primary Fixing Inner Driver PCB and the Fixing Duplex Feed
- Harnesses from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB and the Primary Fixing Inner Driver PCB
1. Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4080) to Relay Connector (19P) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING, LEFT)
2. Relay Connector (19P) to Drawer Unit (J7017) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 3)
3. Drawer Unit (J7017) to Primary Fixing Inner Driver PCB (UN316/J4360P) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, DRAWER, 2)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1280
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- Harnesses from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB to the Primary Fixing Inner Driver PCB
CABLE, DRAWER, 2)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Detection Description A communication error between the Primary Fixing Outer Driver PCB and the Fixing Duplex Feed
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)

ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)

Detection Description A communication error between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB and the Secondary Fixing
Inner Driver PCB was detected.
- Harnesses from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB and the Secondary Fixing Inner Driver PCB
CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING, RIGHT)
3. Drawer Unit (J7018) to Secondary Fixing Inner Driver PCB (UN317/J4360S) (Unit of
replacement: CABLE, DRAWER CONNECTOR, 2)
- Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UNs311) (Unit of replacement: FIXING DUPLEX FEED PCB
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1281
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Inner Driver PCB was detected.
- Harnesses from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB to the Secondary Fixing Inner Driver PCB
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.

Outer Driver PCB was detected.
ASS'Y)
PCB ASS'Y)

Outer Driver PCB was detected.
ASS'Y)
PCB ASS'Y)

Detection Description A communication error between the Right Deck Pickup Driver PCB and the Right Deck Driver PCB
was detected.
ASS'Y)
1282
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

was detected.
ASS'Y)

Detection Description A communication error between the Left Deck Pickup Driver PCB and the Left Deck Driver PCB
was detected.
ASS'Y)

was detected.
ASS'Y)

Detection Description A communication error between the Pre-fixing Feed Driver PCB and the Drum Waste Toner Lock
Switch was detected.
- Harnesses from the Pre-fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN107/J1559) to the Drum Waste Toner Lock
Switch (SW109/J5628) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, RIGHT UPPER, CABLE, LOCK
SENSING SWITCH)
ASS'Y)

Detection Description A communication error between the Pre-fixing Feed Driver PCB and the Transfer Waste Toner
Lock Switch was detected.
- Harnesses from the Pre-fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN107/J1559) to the Transfer Waste Toner
Lock Switch (SW110/J5629) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, RIGHT UPPER, CABLE, LOCK
SENSING SWITCH)
ASS'Y)
1283
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A communication error between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB and the Waste Toner Ejection
Ejection Lock Switch (SW300/J5630) (Unit of replacement: WASTE TONER PIPE ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)
E197-00A6-05 Serial communication error

Detection Description A communication error between the Air Pressure Release Solenoid Valve Unit and the Power Unit
Limiter PCB was detected.
- Harness between the Power Unit Limiter PCB (UN401/J6030) and the Air Pressure Release
Solenoid Valve Unit (UN915/J6031) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, PUMP UNIT)
- Air Pressure Release Solenoid Valve Unit (UN915) (Unit of replacement: ELECTROMAGNETIC
VALVE UNIT)

Detection Description PLL (Y) lock error of the Laser Interface PCB was detected.
If the error is not cleared, replace the Laser Interface PCB (UN950). (Unit of replacement: LASER
INTERFACE PCB ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description A checksum error was detected when reading the Serial Flash (Y) on the Laser Interface PCB.

Detection Description A connection error between the Primary Fixing Inner Driver PCB and the Primary Fixing Web
Solenoid was detected.
- Harness between the Primary Fixing Inner Driver PCB (UN316/J4374PA) and the Primary Fixing
Web Solenoid (SL302/J5574) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR UNIT)
- Primary Fixing Web Solenoid (SL302)
ASS'Y)

Detection Description A connection error between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB and the Primary Fixing Pressure
Belt Cooling Switch Solenoid was detected.
Pressure Belt Cooling Switch Solenoid (SL410/J5625) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER
LEFT, UPPER)
- Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Cooling Switch Solenoid (SL410)
ASS'Y)
1284
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A connection error between the Primary Fixing Inner Driver PCB and the Primary Fixing Refresh
Roller Reciprocation Motor was detected.
- Harness between the Primary Fixing Inner Driver PCB (UN316/J4374PB) and the Primary Fixing
Refresh Roller Reciprocation Motor (M338/J7677D) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR
UNIT)
- Primary Fixing Refresh Roller Reciprocation Motor (M338)
ASS'Y)

Detection Description The machine did not enter stop mode at communication with the Primary Fixing Assembly.
- Harnesses from the Primary Fixing Inner Driver PCB (UN316/J4360P and J4361P) to the Fixing
Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4080 and J4079) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 2,
CABLE, DRAWER, 3, CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING, LEFT)
PCB (UN311/J4070)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)

Detection Description PLL (M) lock error of the Laser Interface PCB was detected.

Detection Description A checksum error was detected when reading the Serial Flash (M) on the Laser Interface PCB.

Detection Description A connection error between the Secondary Fixing Inner Driver PCB and the Secondary Fixing Web
Solenoid was detected.
- Harness between the Secondary Fixing Inner Driver PCB (UN317/J4374SA) and the Secondary
Fixing Web Solenoid (SL303/J5575) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR UNIT)
- Secondary Fixing Web Solenoid (SL303)
ASS'Y)
1285
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A connection error between the Secondary Fixing Inner Driver PCB and the Secondary Fixing
Separation Claw Disengagement Solenoid was detected.
- Harnesses from the Secondary Fixing Inner Driver PCB (UN317/J4374SA) to the Secondary
Fixing Separation Claw Disengagement Solenoid (SL412/J5137) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
SENSOR UNIT, CABLE, SECOND INNER SENSOR)
- Secondary Fixing Separation Claw Disengagement Solenoid (SL412)
ASS'Y)

Detection Description A connection error between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB and the Secondary Fixing Pressure
Roller Cooling Switch Solenoid was detected.
Pressure Roller Cooling Switch Solenoid (SL411/J5520) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING
POWER SUPPLY)
- Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Cooling Switch Solenoid (SL411)
ASS'Y)

Detection Description A connection error between the Secondary Fixing Inner Driver PCB and the Secondary Fixing
Refresh Roller Reciprocation Motor was detected.
- Harness between the Secondary Fixing Inner Driver PCB (UN317/J4374SB) and the Secondary
Fixing Refresh Roller Reciprocation Motor (M339/J7677SD) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
SENSOR UNIT)
- Secondary Fixing Refresh Roller Reciprocation Motor (M339)
ASS'Y)

Detection Description The machine did not enter stop mode at communication with the Secondary Fixing Assembly.
- Harness between the Secondary Fixing Inner Driver PCB (UN317/J4360S and J4361S) and the
Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4085 and J4084) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING
DUPLEXING, RIGHT)
PCB (UN311/J4070)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
1286
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An initial communication error of the Double Feed Detection PCB (Reception) was detected.
- Harnesses from the Registration Feed Driver PCB (Right) (UN104/J1284B) to the Double Feed
Detection PCB (Reception) (UN123/J5151D) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR, CABLE,
DRIVER SENSOR)
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198/J1021) to the Registration Feed Driver PCB
(Right) (UN104/J1261) (Unit of replacement: REGISTRATION DRAWER ASSEMBLY, REGIST.
DRAWER MOUNTING ASS'Y, CABLE, REGIST. DRAWER RELAY, 2)
- Double Feed Detection PCB (Reception) (UN123) (Unit of replacement: DOUBLE FEED
DETECTION KIT)
ASS'Y, RT)

Detection Description Timeout error was detected at communication with the Double Feed Detection PCB.
- Harnesses from the Registration Feed Driver PCB (Right) (UN104/J1283) to the Double Feed
Detection PCB (Transmission) (UN122/J7777) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR, CABLE,
SENSOR CONNECTING)
DRIVER SENSOR)
(Right) (UN104/J1261) (Unit of replacement: REGISTRATION DRAWER ASSEMBLY,REGIST.
DRAWER MOUNTING ASS'Y,CABLE, REGIST. DRAWER RELAY, 2)
- Double Feed Detection PCB (Transmission) and (Reception) (UN122 and UN123) (Unit of
replacement: DOUBLE FEED DETECTION KIT)
ASS'Y, RT)
1287
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 and the Double Feed Detection PCB
was detected.
- Harnesses from the Registration Feed Driver PCB (Right) (UN104/J1283) to the Double Feed
Detection PCB (Transmission) (UN122/J7777) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR, CABLE,
SENSOR CONNECTING)
DRIVER SENSOR)
(Right) (UN104/J1261) (Unit of replacement: REGISTRATION DRAWER ASSEMBLY,REGIST.
DRAWER MOUNTING ASS'Y,CABLE, REGIST. DRAWER RELAY, 2)
- Harnesses from the Registration Feed Driver PCB (Right) (UN104/J1251) to the Main Station
Power Supply Relay PCB (UN102/J1830) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER POWER
CONNECTING, REGIST. DRAWER MOUNTING ASS'Y, CABLE, REG. POWER SUPPLY)
- Double Feed Detection PCB (Transmission) and (Reception) (UN122 and UN123) (Unit of
replacement: DOUBLE FEED DETECTION KIT)
ASS'Y, RT)

Detection Description The number of read/write job data exceeded 100.
[Reference] Data (device information) is reset by turning OFF and then ON the main power.

Detection Description PLL (C) lock error of the Laser Interface PCB was detected.

Detection Description A checksum error was detected when reading the Serial Flash (C) on the Laser Interface PCB.

Detection Description PLL (Bk) lock error of the Laser Interface PCB was detected.

Detection Description A checksum error was detected when reading the Serial Flash (Bk) on the Laser Interface PCB.
1288
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E197-0F10-05 Serial communication error

(This error occurs when serial communication error was detected in multiple locations.)

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 and the Laser Interface PCB was
detected.
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198/J1090) and the Laser Interface PCB

DRAWER ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y, RT.)
or foreign matter.
1289
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

DRAWER ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y, RT.)
or foreign matter.

ASS'Y)
ASS'Y, LF)
or foreign matter.
1290
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

ASS'Y)
ASS'Y, LF)
or foreign matter.

High Voltage PCB (Y) was detected.
H.V. PCB ASSEMBLY)

High Voltage PCB (M) was detected.
H.V. PCB ASSEMBLY)
1291
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

High Voltage PCB (C) was detected.
H.V. PCB ASSEMBLY)

High Voltage PCB (Bk) was detected.
H.V. PCB ASSEMBLY)
E197-0F1A-05 Serial communication error

(Y) was detected.
ASSEMBLY)
1292
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E197-0F1B-05 Serial communication error

(M) was detected.
ASSEMBLY)
E197-0F1C-05 Serial communication error

(C) was detected.
ASSEMBLY)
E197-0F1D-05 Serial communication error

(Bk) was detected.
ASSEMBLY)
1293
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E197-0F1E-05 Serial communication error

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 and the Drum Driver PCB (Y) was
detected.
E197-0F1F-05 Serial communication error

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 and the Drum Driver PCB (M) was
detected.

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 and the Drum Driver PCB (C) was
detected.

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 and the Drum Driver PCB (Bk) was
detected.
1294
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

detected.

detected.

detected.
REAR, CENTER UPPER)
ASSEMBLY, D)
1295
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

detected.
REAR, CENTER UPPER)
ASSEMBLY, A2)

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 and the Secondary Transfer High
Voltage PCB was detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-1 to the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB
REAR, CENTER UPPER)
ASSEMBLY, A2)
3. Drawer Unit (J7023) to Relay Connector (15P)
4. Relay Connector (15P) to Relay Connector (15P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, H.V. POWER
SUPPLY RELAY)
5. Relay Connector (15P) to Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB (UN116/J3150)
- Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB (UN116)
1296
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 and the ITB Pre-transfer Charging
High Voltage PCB was detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-1 to the ITB Pre-transfer Charging High Voltage PCB
REAR, CENTER UPPER)
ASSEMBLY, C)
3. Drawer Unit (J7025) to ITB Pre-transfer Charging High Voltage PCB (UN150/J3300)

PCB ASS'Y)

PCB ASS'Y)
1297
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

PCB ASS'Y)

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 and the Right Deck Driver PCB was
detected.
ASS'Y)

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 and the Left Deck Driver PCB was
detected.
ASS'Y)
1298
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 and the Environment Heater Driver
PCB was detected.
- Harness between the Power Unit Relay PCB (UN400/J6107) and the 12V Power Supply PCB B
(UN531/J101B) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, 24V POWER SUPPLY)
- Harness between the Power Unit Limiter PCB (UN401/J6001) and the 12V Power Supply PCB
B (UN531/J201B) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY LIMITER)
ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

PCB (Y) was detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-1 to the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (Y)
REAR, CENTER UPPER)
SUPPLY, 3)
4. Relay Connector (32P) to Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (Y) (UN112/J3050Y)
1299
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

PCB (M) was detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-1 to the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (M)
REAR, CENTER UPPER)
SUPPLY, 3)
4. Relay Connector (32P) to Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (M) (UN113/J3050M)

PCB (C) was detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-1 to the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (C)
REAR, CENTER UPPER)
SUPPLY, 5)
4. Relay Connector (32P) to Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (C) (UN114/J3050C)
1300
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

PCB (Bk) was detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-1 to the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (Bk)
REAR, CENTER UPPER)
SUPPLY, 5)
4. Relay Connector (32P) to Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (Bk) (UN115/J3050K)

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Hopper Driver PCB (Y) was
detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 to the Hopper Driver PCB (Y)
REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
2. Relay Connector (27P) to Hopper Driver PCB (Y) (UN165/J1410Y) (Unit of replacement:

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Hopper Driver PCB (M) was
detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 to the Hopper Driver PCB (M)
REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
2. Relay Connector (29P) to Hopper Driver PCB (M) (UN166/J1410M) (Unit of replacement:
1301
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Hopper Driver PCB (C) was
detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 to the Hopper Driver PCB (C)
REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
2. Relay Connector (27P) to Hopper Driver PCB (C) (UN167/J1410C) (Unit of replacement:

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Hopper Driver PCB (Bk) was
detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 to the Hopper Driver PCB (Bk)
REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
2. Relay Connector (29P) to Hopper Driver PCB (Bk) (UN168/J1410K) (Unit of replacement:

was detected.
REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
ASSEMBLY)

was detected.
REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
ASSEMBLY)
1302
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

was detected.
REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
ASSEMBLY)

was detected.
REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
ASSEMBLY)

was detected.
REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
ASSEMBLY)
1303
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

was detected.
REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
ASSEMBLY)

was detected.
REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
ASSEMBLY)

was detected.
REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
ASSEMBLY)
1304
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

DUPLEX PCB ASS'Y)

DUPLEX PCB ASS'Y)

was detected.
ASS'Y)

was detected.
ASS'Y)
1305
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

was detected.
ASS'Y)

PCB (Upstream) was detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 to the ITB Cleaning High Voltage PCB (Upstream)
REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
ASSEMBLY, B)
3. Drawer Unit (J7022) to ITB Cleaning High Voltage PCB (Upstream) (UN148/J3250P)
PCB ASS'Y)

PCB (Downstream) was detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 to the ITB Cleaning High Voltage PCB (Downstream)
REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
ASSEMBLY, B)
3. Drawer Unit (J7022) to ITB Cleaning High Voltage PCB (Downstream) (UN149/J3250S)
ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Post-secondary Transfer Static
Elimination High Voltage PCB was detected.
- Harness between the Drawer Unit (J7040) and the Post-secondary Transfer Static Elimination
High Voltage PCB (UN108/J3100) (Unit of replacement: 2ND TRNSFR. DRAWER ASS'Y)
PCB ASSEMBLY)
1306
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

PCB was detected.
ASS'Y)

PCB was detected.
ASS'Y)

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Primary Fixing Heater Driver
PCB was detected.
ASS'Y)

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Secondary Fixing Heater
PCB ASS'Y)
1307
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Main Station Power Supply
Relay PCB was detected.
Relay PCB (UN102/J1811) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, LEFT UPPER)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

REAR, LEFT UPPER)
ASS'Y)
PCB ASS'Y)

REAR, LEFT UPPER)
ASS'Y)
PCB ASS'Y)

1308
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

PCB was detected.
ASS'Y)

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Reverse/Outer Delivery Driver
PCB was detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 to the Reverse/Outer Delivery Driver PCB
ASSEMBLY)
DRAWER)
3. Drawer Unit (J7016) to Reverse/Outer Delivery Driver PCB (UN310/J4114) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, COLLAR SENSOR DRAWER)
ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Color Sensor Control PCB
was detected.
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-2 to the Color Sensor Control PCB
ASSEMBLY)
DRAWER)
3. Drawer Unit (J7016) to Color Sensor Control PCB (UN904/J4501) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
COLLAR SENSOR DRAWER)
- Color Sensor Control PCB (UN904) (Unit of replacement: DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY, IRIS)

High Voltage PCB (+) was detected.
PCB (+) (UN971/J3350) (Unit of replacement: 2ND TRNSFR. DRAWER ASS'Y)
1309
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

High Voltage PCB (-) was detected.
PCB (-) (UN972/J8) (Unit of replacement: 2ND TRNSFR. DRAWER ASS'Y)

PCB was detected.
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1073) and the Drawer Unit (J7895D) (Unit
(J7895L) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING DRAWER)
ASS'Y)

(J7031D) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING DRAWER)
- Harness between the Reverse/Outer Delivery Driver PCB (UN310/J4110) and the Drawer Unit
(J7031L) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, PAPER DELIVERY REVERSE)
ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)

ASS'Y)
ASSEMBLY)
1310
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A communication error between the Fixing Relay PCB and the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB
was detected.
- Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4013) and the Fixing Relay PCB
(UN402/J6303) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING DRAWER)
- Harnesses from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4000) to the Power Unit Limiter
PCB (UN401/J6011) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING POWER SUPPLY,POWER CORD
TERMINAL ASSEMBLY, CABLE, PUMP UNIT)
PCB (UN311/J4070)
- Fixing Relay PCB (UN402) (Unit of replacement: FIXING AC RELAY PCB ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)

- Harnesses from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB and the Primary Fixing Inner Driver PCB
CABLE, DRAWER, 2)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)

- Harnesses from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB to the Primary Fixing Inner Driver PCB
CABLE, DRAWER, 2)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
1311
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)

ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)

Detection Description A communication error between the Secondary Fixing Inner Driver PCB and the Fixing Duplex
- Harnesses from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB and the Secondary Fixing Inner Driver PCB
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)

Detection Description A communication error between the Secondary Fixing Inner Driver PCB and the Fixing Duplex
- Harnesses from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB to the Secondary Fixing Inner Driver PCB
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
1312
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A communication error between the Secondary Fixing Outer Driver PCB and the Fixing Duplex
ASS'Y)
PCB ASS'Y)

Detection Description A communication error between the Secondary Fixing Outer Driver PCB and the Fixing Duplex
ASS'Y)
PCB ASS'Y)

was detected.
ASS'Y)

was detected.
ASS'Y)

was detected.
ASS'Y)
1313
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

was detected.
ASS'Y)

Detection Description A communication error between the Pre-fixing Feed Driver PCB and the Drum Waste Toner Lock
Switch was detected.
- Harnesses from the Pre-fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN107/J1559) to the Drum Waste Toner Lock
Switch (SW109/J5628) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, RIGHT UPPER, CABLE, LOCK
SENSING SWITCH)
ASS'Y)

Detection Description A communication error between the Pre-fixing Feed Driver PCB and the Transfer Waste Toner
- Harnesses from the Pre-fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN107/J1559) to the Transfer Waste Toner
Lock Switch (SW110/J5629) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, RIGHT UPPER, CABLE, LOCK
SENSING SWITCH)
ASS'Y)

Detection Description A communication error between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB and the Waste Toner Ejection
Ejection Lock Switch (SW300/J5630) (Unit of replacement: WASTE TONER PIPE ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)

Detection Description Reset of the Laser Interface PCB was detected.
1314
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A communication error between the Laser Driver PCB (Y) and the Laser Interface PCB was
detected.
Unit (Y) (J2000Y and J2001Y) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL, YELLOW)

Detection Description A communication error between the Laser Driver PCB (M) and the Laser Interface PCB was
detected.
Unit (M) (J2000M and J2001M) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL, MAGENTA)

Detection Description A communication error between the Laser Driver PCB (C) and the Laser Interface PCB was
detected.
Unit (C) (J2000C and J2001C) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL, CYAN)

Detection Description A communication error between the Laser Driver PCB (Bk) and the Laser Interface PCB was
detected.
Unit (Bk) (J2000K and J2001K) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL, BLACK)
E199-0150-05 Sequence error

Detection Description Process prohibition error (Y) of the software was detected.
Remedy Collect debug log and contact to the sales company.
[Reference] By setting "COPIER (LEVEL2)> OPTION> FNC-SW> SELF-CHK" to "1", it is handled
as an error.

Detection Description Process prohibition error (M) of the software was detected.
as an error.
1315
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Process prohibition error (C) of the software was detected.
as an error.

Detection Description Process prohibition error (Bk) of the software was detected.
as an error.
E202-0001-04 Reader Scanner Unit HP error

Detection Description The Reader Scanner Unit could not detect the home position when starting scanning operation.
- Harness between the Scanner Unit HP Sensor (SR2/J5202) and the Reader Controller PCB
(PCB1/J102) (Unit of replacement: DF MOUNT ASSEMBLY, L)
- Harness between the Scanner Motor (M1/J601) and the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1/J108)
(Unit of replacement: CABLE, MOTOR)
- Scanner Unit HP Sensor (SR2)
- Scanner Motor (M1)
- Reader Controller PCB (PCB1) (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB
ASSEMBLY)
[Reference] Before replacing the Reader Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
- Backup: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
- Restoration: COPIER (LEVEL2)> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES

Detection Description The Reader Scanner Unit could not detect the home position when completing scanning operation.
ASSEMBLY)
1316
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error in the Reader Scanner Unit position was detected when reading of a job was started.
ASSEMBLY)
E202-0101-04 DADF Scanner Unit HP error

Detection Description The DADF Scanner Unit could not detect the home position when starting scanning operation.
- Harnesses from the Glass HP Sensor to the DADF Driver PCB
1. Glass HP Sensor (SR11/J708) to Relay Connector (6P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, READ 2
SENSOR)
2. Relay Connector (6P) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: PAPER DELIVERY
ASSEMBLY)
3. Relay Connector (9P) to Relay Connector (9P)
4. Relay Connector (9P) to DADF Driver PCB (PCB1/J411) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN
SENSOR)
- Harnesses from the Glass Shift Motor to the DADF Driver PCB
1. Glass Shift Motor (M9/J714) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FRONT
MOTOR)
3. Relay Connector (9P) to DADF Driver PCB (PCB1/J409) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MOTOR)
- Glass HP Sensor (SR11)
- Glass Shift Motor (M9)
- DADF Driver PCB (PCB1) (Unit of replacement: DF DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY)
E202-0102-04 DADF Scanner Unit HP error

Detection Description The DADF Scanner Unit could not detect the home position when completing scanning operation.
- Harnesses from the Glass HP Sensor to the DADF Driver PCB
1. Glass HP Sensor (SR11/J708) to Relay Connector (6P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, READ 2
SENSOR)
2. Relay Connector (6P) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: PAPER DELIVERY
ASSEMBLY)
SENSOR)
- Harnesses from the Glass Shift Motor to the DADF Driver PCB
1. Glass Shift Motor (M9/J714) to Relay Connector (9P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FRONT
MOTOR)
- Glass HP Sensor (SR11)
- Glass Shift Motor (M9)
1317
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E227-0001-04 Power supply error

Detection Description The Reader Controller PCB did not detect 24 V when the main power was turned ON.
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1/J111) and the DADF Driver PCB (PCB1/
J418) (Unit of replacement: ADF CABLE, POWER SUPPLY)
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1/J101) and the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver
PCB (UN311/J4027) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER LEFT, UPPER)
- Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4002) and the 24V Power Supply
PCB H (UN527/J202Z) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY/LIMITER)
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J22) and the Reader Controller PCB
(PCB1/J109) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, INTERFACE)
ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)
- 24V Power Supply PCB H (UN527) (Unit of replacement: POWER SUPPLY PCB ASSEMBLY)
- Measure the voltage between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB using a
tester.
1. When 24 V is output to the Reader Controller PCB (J111/pin 1), measure the voltage of the
DADF Driver PCB (J418/pin 1) using a tester.
2. When 24 V is output to the DADF Driver PCB (J418/pin 1), replace the DADF Driver PCB.
3. When 24 V is not output to the DADF Driver PCB (J418/pin 1), replace the harness between
the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB.
4. When 24 V is not output to the Reader Controller PCB (J111/pin 1), replace the Reader Controller
PCB.
- Measure the voltage between the Reader Controller PCB and the 24V Power Supply PCB H
using a tester.
1. When 24 V is output to the Reader Controller PCB (J101/pin 1 and 2), replace the Reader
Controller PCB.
2. When 24 V is not output to the Reader Controller PCB (J101/pin 1 and 2), measure the voltage
of the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (J4027/pin 3 and 5) using a tester.
3. When 24 V is output to the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (J4027/pin 3 and 5), replace the
harness between the Reader Controller PCB and the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB.
4. When 24 V is not output to the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (J4027/pin 3 and 5), measure
the voltage of the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (J4002/pin 1, 3, 4 and 5) using a tester.
5. When 24 V is output to the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (J4002/pin1, 3, 4 and 5), replace the
Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB.
6. When 24 V is not output to the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (J4002/pin1, 3, 4 and 5), measure
the voltage of the 24V Power Supply PCB H (J202Z/pin 1, 3, 4 and 5) using a tester.
7. When 24 V is output to the 24V Power Supply PCB H (J202Z), replace the harness between
the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB and the 24V Power Supply PCB H.
8. When 24 V is not output to the 24V Power Supply PCB H (J202Z), replace the 24V Power Supply
PCB H.
- Check/replace the harness between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Reader Controller PCB
and parts.
1318
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The DADF Driver PCB did not detect 24 V when the main power was turned ON.
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1/J111) and the DADF Driver PCB (PCB1/
J418) (Unit of replacement: ADF CABLE, POWER SUPPLY)
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1/J101) and the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver
PCB (UN311/J4027) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER LEFT, UPPER)
PCB H (UN527/J202Z) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY/LIMITER)
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J22) and the Reader Controller PCB
(PCB1/J109) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, INTERFACE)
ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)
- 24V Power Supply PCB H (UN527) (Unit of replacement: POWER SUPPLY PCB ASSEMBLY)
- Measure the voltage between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB using a
tester.
1. When 24 V is output to the Reader Controller PCB (J111/pin 1), measure the voltage of the
DADF Driver PCB (J418/pin 1) using a tester.
2. When 24 V is output to the DADF Driver PCB (J418/pin 1), replace the DADF Driver PCB.
3. When 24 V is not output to the DADF Driver PCB (J418/pin 1), replace the harness between
the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB.
4. When 24 V is not output to the Reader Controller PCB (J111/pin 1), replace the Reader Controller
PCB.
- Measure the voltage between the Reader Controller PCB and the 24V Power Supply PCB H
using a tester.
1. When 24 V is output to the Reader Controller PCB (J101/pin 1 and 2), replace the Reader
Controller PCB.
2. When 24 V is not output to the Reader Controller PCB (J101/pin 1 and 2), measure the voltage
of the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (J4027/pin 3 and 5) using a tester.
3. When 24 V is output to the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (J4027/pin 3 and 5), replace the
harness between the Reader Controller PCB and the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB.
4. When 24 V is not output to the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (J4027/pin 3 and 5), measure
the voltage of the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (J4002/pin 1, 3, 4 and 5) using a tester.
5. When 24 V is output to the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (J4002/pin1, 3, 4 and 5), replace the
Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB.
6. When 24 V is not output to the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (J4002/pin1, 3, 4 and 5), measure
the voltage of the 24V Power Supply PCB H (J202Z/pin 1, 3, 4 and 5) using a tester.
7. When 24 V is output to the 24V Power Supply PCB H (J202Z), replace the harness between
the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB and the 24V Power Supply PCB H.
8. When 24 V is not output to the 24V Power Supply PCB H (J202Z), replace the 24V Power Supply
PCB H.
- Check/replace the harness between the DC Controller PCB 1-2 and the Reader Controller PCB
and parts.
1319
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E240-0000-05 Controller communication error

Detection Description A communication error between the Main Controller PCB and the DC Controller PCB was detected.
- Harnesses between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 and 1-2 (UN198/J1092 and UN124/J1093) and
the Riser PCB (UN985/J8713 and J8750) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SIGNAL)

Detection Description Image output request waiting status was detected.

Detection Description A sequence error was detected during image output.
1320
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description A communication error was detected during image output.
E246-0001-00 System error






Detection Description Reading error was detected when the Main Controller PCB read the Reader backup value in the
Reader Controller PCB.
Remedy [Remedy] Check/replace the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1). (Unit of replacement: READER
CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description The Main Controller PCB failed writing of the Reader backup value in the Reader Controller PCB.
1321
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Main Controller PCB detected an error at inspection after completion of writing of the Reader
backup value in the Reader Controller PCB.

Detection Description The Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB did not detect 12 V.
Possible causes of the error are as follow: caught harness/poor connection of the connector or
poor conduction.
- Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4070) and the DC Controller PCB
1-2 (UN124/J1072) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING DRAWER)
- 12V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB
- DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124)

Detection Description The Secondary Transfer/Duplex Driver PCB did not detect 12 V.
Possible causes of the error are as follow: caught harness or open circuit of the harness/poor
connection of the connector or poor conduction.
- Harness between the Secondary Transfer/Duplex Driver PCB (UN106/J1501 and J1502) and the
Drawer Unit (J7004) (Unit of replacement: 2ND TRNSFR. DRAWER ASS'Y)
- Harness between the Drawer Unit (J7004) and the Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB
(UN102/J1832) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY)
- Harness between the Drawer Unit (J7004) and the DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1025) (Unit
DUPLEX PCB ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1. Pull out the Registration/Feed Unit, and check that the Drawer Connector is free of toner or
foreign matter.

Detection Description The DC Controller PCB 1-1 did not detect 12 V.
Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198/J1051) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1322
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The ITB Driver PCB (Middle) did not detect 12 V.
Or overcurrent was detected.
- Harness between the ITB Driver PCB (Middle) (UN217/J1301 and J1302) and the Drawer Unit
(J7024) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER POWER SUPPLY, 4)
- Harnesses from the Drawer Unit (J7024) to the Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB (UN102/
J1844) (Unit of replacement: I.T.B. DRAWER ASSEMBLY, D, CABLE, POWER SUPPLY)
- Harnesses from the Drawer Unit (J7024) to the DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198/J1033) (Unit of
replacement: I.T.B. DRAWER ASSEMBLY, D, CABLE, REAR, CENTER UPPER)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1. Pull out the Intermediate Transfer Unit, and check that the Drawer Connector is free of toner or
foreign matter.

Detection Description The ITB Driver PCB (Right) did not detect 12 V.
- Harness between the ITB Driver PCB (Right) (UN219/J1321 and J1330) and the Drawer Unit
J1845) (Unit of replacement: I.T.B. DRAWER ASSEMBLY, C, CABLE, POWER SUPPLY)
replacement: I.T.B. DRAWER ASSEMBLY, C, CABLE, REAR, CENTER UPPER)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1323
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Process Unit Driver PCB (C) did not detect 12 V.
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (C) (UN163/J1351C and J1361C) and the Drawer
Unit (J7011) (Unit of replacement: DRAWER CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY)
replacement: P- KIT DRAWER ASSEMBLY, CABLE, REAR, RIGHT UPPER)
- 12V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Process Unit Driver PCB (C)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1. Pull out the Process Kit (C), and check that the Drawer Connector is free of toner or foreign
matter.

Detection Description The Process Unit Driver PCB (Bk) did not detect 12 V.
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (Bk) (UN164/J1351K and J1361K) and the Drawer
- 12V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Process Unit Driver PCB (Bk)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1. Pull out the Process Kit (Bk), and check that the Drawer Connector is free of toner or foreign
matter.
1324
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Process Unit Driver PCB (M) did not detect 12 V.
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (M) (UN162/J1351M and J1361M) and the Drawer
- 12V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Process Unit Driver PCB (M)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1. Pull out the Process Kit (M), and check that the Drawer Connector is free of toner or foreign
matter.

Detection Description The Process Unit Driver PCB (Y) did not detect 12 V.
- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (Y) (UN161/J1351Y and J1361Y) and the Drawer
- 12V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Process Unit Driver PCB (Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1. Pull out the Process Kit (Y), and check that the Drawer Connector is free of toner or foreign
matter.
E260-000A-05 Power supply error

Detection Description The Vertical Path/Lower Feed Driver PCB did not detect 12 V.
- Harness between the Vertical Path/Lower Feed Driver PCB (UN105/J1715) and the Main Station
Power Supply Relay PCB (UN102/J1829) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY)
- Harness between the Vertical Path/Lower Feed Driver PCB (UN105/J1701) and the DC Controller
PCB 1-1 (UN198/J1019) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, LEFT UPPER)
PCB ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1325
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E260-000B-05 Power supply error

Detection Description The Registration Feed Driver PCB (Left) did not detect 12 V.
- Harnesses from the Registration Feed Driver PCB (Left) (UN100/J1201) to the Drawer Unit
(J7003) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRIVER CONNECTING, REGIST. DRAWER MOUNTING
ASS'Y)
(UN102/J1831) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REG. POWER SUPPLY)
- Harness between the Registration Feed Driver PCB (Left) (UN100/J1211) and the Drawer Unit
(J7003) (Unit of replacement: REGIST. DRAWER MOUNTING ASS'Y)
ASS'Y, LF)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
E260-000C-05 Power supply error

Detection Description The Registration Feed Driver PCB (Right) did not detect 12 V.
- Harnesses from the Registration Feed Driver PCB (Right) (UN104/J1251) to the Drawer Unit
(J7001) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER POWER CONNECTING, REGIST. DRAWER
MOUNTING ASS'Y)
(J7001) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REGIST. DRAWER RELAY, 2, REGIST. DRAWER
MOUNTING ASS'Y)
ASS'Y, RT)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1326
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E260-000D-05 Power supply error

Detection Description The Registration Patch Sensor Driver PCB did not detect 12 V.
- Harness between the Registration Patch Sensor Driver PCB (UN159/J1450 and J1452) and the
Drawer Unit (J7015) (Unit of replacement: REGIST. PATCH SENSOR PCB ASS'Y)
(UN102/J1825) (Unit of replacement: REGIST. PATCH DRAWER ASS'Y)
of replacement: CABLE, REAR, LEFT UPPER)
PCB ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1. Pull out the Registration Patch Detection Unit, and check that the Drawer Connector is free of
toner or foreign matter.
E260-000E-05 Power supply error

- 12V line and parts to which power is supplied from the DC Controller PCB 1-2
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
E260-000F-05 Power supply error

Detection Description The Laser Interface PCB did not detect 3.3 V.
poor conduction.
- Harness between the Laser Interface PCB (UN950/J8717) and the DC Controller PCB 1-1
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1327
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- 5V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Secondary Transfer/Duplex Driver PCB
DUPLEX PCB ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

- 5V line and parts to which power is supplied from the ITB Driver PCB (Middle)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1328
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- 5V line and parts to which power is supplied from the ITB Driver PCB (Right)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
matter.
1329
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
matter.

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
matter.
1330
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
matter.

- 5V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Vertical Path/Lower Feed Driver PCB
PCB ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

Detection Description The Pre-fixing Feed Driver PCB did not detect 5 V.
- Harness between the Pre-fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN107/J1550) and the Main Station Power
- Harness between the Pre-fixing Feed Driver PCB (UN107/J1553) and the DC Controller PCB 1-2
- 5V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Pre-fixing Feed Driver PCB
ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1331
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Drum Driver PCB (C) did not detect 5 V.
- Harness between the Drum Driver PCB (C) (UN127/J1600C) and the Main Station Power Supply
- Harness between the Drum Driver PCB (C) (UN127/J1611C) and the DC Controller PCB 1-1
(UN198/J1037) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, CENTER UPPER)
- 5V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Drum Driver PCB (C)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

Detection Description The Drum Driver PCB (Bk) did not detect 5 V.
- Harness between the Drum Driver PCB (Bk) (UN128/J1600K) and the Main Station Power Supply
- Harness between the Drum Driver PCB (Bk) (UN128/J1611K) and the DC Controller PCB 1-1
- 5V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Drum Driver PCB (Bk)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1332
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Drum Driver PCB (M) did not detect 5 V.
- Harness between the Drum Driver PCB (M) (UN126/J1600M) and the Main Station Power Supply
- Harness between the Drum Driver PCB (M) (UN126/J1611M) and the DC Controller PCB 1-1
- 5V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Drum Driver PCB (M)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

Detection Description The Drum Driver PCB (Y) did not detect 5 V.
- Harness between the Drum Driver PCB (Y) (UN125/J1600Y) and the Main Station Power Supply
- Harness between the Drum Driver PCB (Y) (UN125/J1611Y) and the DC Controller PCB 1-1
- 5V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Drum Driver PCB (Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

Detection Description The Hopper Driver PCB (Bk) did not detect 5 V.
- Harnesses from the Hopper Driver PCB (Bk) (UN168/J1400K) to the Main Station Power Supply
Relay PCB (UN102/J1823) (Unit of replacement: DRUM DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY,
CABLE, HOPPER/REG. POWER)
- Harness between the Hopper Driver PCB (Bk) (UN168/J1410K) and the DC Controller PCB 1-2
- 5V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Hopper Driver PCB (Bk)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1333
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Hopper Driver PCB (C) did not detect 5 V.
- Harness between the Hopper Driver PCB (C) (UN167/J1400C) and the Hopper Driver PCB (Bk)
(UN168/J1401K) (Unit of replacement: DRUM DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY)
- Harness between the Hopper Driver PCB (C) (UN167/J1410C) and the DC Controller PCB 1-2
- 5V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Hopper Driver PCB (C)

Detection Description The Hopper Driver PCB (M) did not detect 5 V.
- Harness between the Hopper Driver PCB (M) (UN166/J1400M) and the Hopper Driver PCB (C)
(UN167/J1401C) (Unit of replacement: DRUM DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY)
- Harness between the Hopper Driver PCB (M) (UN166/J1410M) and the DC Controller PCB 1-2
- 5V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Hopper Driver PCB (M)

Detection Description The Hopper Driver PCB (Y) did not detect 5 V.
- Harness between the Hopper Driver PCB (Y) (UN165/J1400Y) and the Hopper Driver PCB (M)
(UN166/J1401M) (Unit of replacement: DRUM DRIVE DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY)
- Harness between the Hopper Driver PCB (Y) (UN165/J1410Y) and the DC Controller PCB 1-2
- 5V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Hopper Driver PCB (Y)
1334
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

ASS'Y)
- 5V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Registration Feed Driver PCB (Left)
ASS'Y, LF)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

MOUNTING ASS'Y)
MOUNTING ASS'Y)
- 5V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Registration Feed Driver PCB (Right)
ASS'Y, RT)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1335
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- 5V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Registration Patch Sensor Driver PCB
PCB ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

Detection Description The Right Deck Driver PCB did not detect 5 V.
- Harness between the Right Deck Driver PCB (UN602/J2102R) and the Right Deck Pickup Driver
- 5V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Right Deck Driver PCB
ASS'Y)

Detection Description The Left Deck Driver PCB did not detect 5 V.
- Harness between the Left Deck Driver PCB (UN702/J2102L) and the Left Deck Pickup Driver
- 5V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Left Deck Driver PCB
ASS'Y)
1336
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Environment Heater Driver PCB did not detect 5 V.
Possible causes of the error are as follow: improper lock position of the Process Unit Cover Release
Lever, caught harness/poor connection of the connector or poor conduction.
- Harness between the Environment Heater Driver PCB (UN101/J4403) and the Main Station
Power Supply Relay PCB (UN102/J1826) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, LEFT UPPER)
- Harness between the Environment Heater Driver PCB (UN101/J4404) and the DC Controller
- 5V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Environment Heater Driver PCB
ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1. Check the installation of the Process Unit Cover and lock positions of the Process Unit Cover
Release Lever 1 and 2 by referring to "Parts Replacement and Cleaning Procedure> Replacing
the Process Unit Cover" in the Service Manual.

Detection Description The Power Unit Limiter PCB detected overcurrent. (24VA-1)
It is highly possible that caught harness is the cause of the error.
- Harnesses from the Power Unit Limiter PCB (UN401/J6022) to the DC Controller PCB 1-1
(UN198/J1053) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER LIMITER MAIN, DC CABLE MOUNT
ASSEMBLY, CABLE, REAR, LEFT UPPER)
- Harnesses and parts in 24VA-1 line to which power is supplied from the Power Unit Limiter PCB
1. If there is electrical continuity between the pin 1 of J6021 on the Power Unit Limiter PCB and
the grounding, check/replace the harnesses in 24VA-1 line to which power is supplied from the
Power Unit Limiter PCB.
2. If there is no electrical continuity,
2-1. Check/replace the harnesses and connectors from the Power Unit Limiter PCB to the DC
Controller PCB 1-1.
2-2. Check/replace the related parts.
1337
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- Harnesses for power supply
1. Harnesses from the Power Unit Limiter PCB (UN401/J6021) to the Main Station Power Supply
Relay PCB (UN102/J1800) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER LIMITER MAIN, DC CABLE
MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
2. Harnesses in 24VA-2 line to which power is supplied from the Main Station Power Supply Relay
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
- Parts in 24VA-2 line to which power is supplied from the Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB
the grounding, check/replace the harnesses for power supply.
Controller PCB 1-1.

MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
2. Harness between the Power Unit Limiter PCB (UN401/J6015) and the Main Station Rear Upper
Cooling Fan (FM417/J8700) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, PUMP UNIT)
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
Controller PCB 1-1.
1338
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Pick-up Option Communication Driver PCB detected overcurrent. (POD DECK LITE)
- Harness between the Lattice for POD Deck Lite (UN144/J7032) and the Main Station Power
Supply Relay PCB (UN102/J1847) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DECK LIGHT)
- Harnesses from the Lattice for POD Deck Lite (UN144/J7032) to the DC Controller PCB 1-1
(UN198/J1056) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DECK LIGHT, CABLE, REAR, LEFT UPPER)
- Harnesses in 24V line in the POD Deck Lite
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

Detection Description The Power Unit Limiter PCB did not detect 24 V. (24VA)
A (UN520/J202A) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY LIMITER)
- Harnesses and parts in 24VA line to which power is supplied from the Power Unit Limiter PCB
- 24V Power Supply PCB A (UN520) (Unit of replacement: DC POWER SUPPLY PCB
ASSEMBLY)

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1339
7. Error/Jam/Alarm




CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1340
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Power Unit Limiter PCB detected overcurrent. (24VB-1)
MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
2. Harnesses in 24VB-1 line to which power is supplied from the Main Station Power Supply Relay
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
- Parts in 24VB-1 line to which power is supplied from the Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB
Controller PCB 1-1.

MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
2. Harness between the Power Unit Limiter PCB (UN401/J6015) and the Main Station Rear Lower
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
Controller PCB 1-1.
1341
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
Controller PCB 1-1.

Detection Description The Power Unit Limiter PCB did not detect 24 V. (24VB)
- Harnesses and parts in 24VB line to which power is supplied from the Power Unit Limiter PCB
- 24V Power Supply PCB B (UN521) (Unit of replacement: DC POWER SUPPLY PCB
ASSEMBLY)

ASS'Y)
1342
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Right Deck Pickup Driver PCB did not detect 24 V.
- Harness between the Right Deck Pickup Driver PCB (UN603/J2050R) and the Main Station
- Harness between the Right Deck Pickup Driver PCB (UN603/J2051R) and the DC Controller
PCB 1-1 (UN198/J1060) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, PAPER PICK-UP DRIVER)
- 24V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Right Deck Pickup Driver PCB
ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

ASS'Y)

ASS'Y)
1343
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Left Deck Pickup Driver PCB did not detect 24 V.
- Harness between the Left Deck Pickup Driver PCB (UN703/J2050L) and the Main Station Power
- Harness between the Left Deck Pickup Driver PCB (UN703/J2051L) and the DC Controller PCB
1-1 (UN198/J1064) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, PAPER PICK-UP DRIVER)
- 24V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Left Deck Pickup Driver PCB
ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

ASS'Y)

Detection Description The Right Deck Indicator Driver PCB did not detect 12 V.
- Harness between the Right Deck Indicator Driver PCB (UN601/J2151R) and the Right Deck
Driver PCB (UN602/J2108R) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, INDICATION CONNECTING)
- Right Deck Indicator Driver PCB (UN601) (Unit of replacement: INDICATOR DRIVER
ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)
1344
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Left Deck Indicator Driver PCB did not detect 12 V.
- Harness between the Left Deck Indicator Driver PCB (UN701/J2151L) and the Left Deck Driver
PCB (UN702/J2108L) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, INDICATION CONNECTING)
- Left Deck Indicator Driver PCB (UN701) (Unit of replacement: INDICATOR DRIVER ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)

Detection Description The Power Unit Limiter PCB detected overcurrent. (24VC-1)
MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
2. Harnesses in 24VC-1 line to which power is supplied from the Main Station Power Supply Relay
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
- Parts in 24VC-1 line to which power is supplied from the Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB
Controller PCB 1-1.
1345
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
Controller PCB 1-1.

MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
Controller PCB 1-1.
1346
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Power Unit Limiter PCB did not detect 24 V. (24VC)
C (UN522/J202C) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY LIMITER)
- Harnesses and parts in 24VC line to which power is supplied from the Power Unit Limiter PCB
- 24V Power Supply PCB C (UN522) (Unit of replacement: DC POWER SUPPLY PCB
ASSEMBLY)

- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (C) (UN163/J1350C) and the Drawer Unit (J7012)
(Unit of replacement: DRAWER CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
matter.
1347
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (Bk) (UN164/J1350K) and the Drawer Unit (J7014)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
matter.

- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (M) (UN162/J1350M) and the Drawer Unit (J7010)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
matter.
1348
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- Harness between the Process Unit Driver PCB (Y) (UN161/J1350Y) and the Drawer Unit (J7008)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
matter.

- Harness between the Registration Patch Sensor Driver PCB (UN159/J1460) and the Drawer Unit
(J7016) (Unit of replacement: REGIST. PATCH SENSOR PCB ASS'Y)
PCB ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1349
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Pre-fixing Feed Driver PCB did not detect 24 V. (24VC)
ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

Detection Description The Power Unit Limiter PCB detected overcurrent. (24VD-1)
MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
2. Harnesses in 24VD-1 line to which power is supplied from the Main Station Power Supply Relay
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
- Parts in 24VD-1 line to which power is supplied from the Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB
Controller PCB 1-1.
1350
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
Controller PCB 1-1.

MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
Controller PCB 1-1.
1351
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Power Unit Limiter PCB did not detect 24 V. (24VD)
D (UN523/J202D) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY LIMITER)
- Harnesses and parts in 24VD line to which power is supplied from the Power Unit Limiter PCB
- 24V Power Supply PCB D (UN523) (Unit of replacement: DC POWER SUPPLY PCB
ASSEMBLY)

- Harness between the ITB Driver PCB (Right) (UN219/J1320) and the Drawer Unit (J7021) (Unit
of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY CONNECTING, CABLE, DRAWER POWER SUPPLY,
5)
of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER POWER SUPPLY, 6)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1352
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The ITB Cleaning High Voltage PCB (Upstream) did not detect 24 V.
- Harness between the ITB Cleaning High Voltage PCB (Upstream) (UN148/J3251P) and the
Drawer Unit (J7022) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER POWER SUPPLY, 1)
J1845) (Unit of replacement: I.T.B. DRAWER ASSEMBLY, B, CABLE, POWER SUPPLY)
Drawer Unit (J7022)
replacement: I.T.B. DRAWER ASSEMBLY, B, 2ND TRNSFR. DRAWER ASS'Y)
- 24V line and parts to which power is supplied from the ITB Cleaning High Voltage PCB (Upstream)
PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Detection Description The ITB Cleaning High Voltage PCB (Downstream) did not detect 24 V.
- Harness between the ITB Cleaning High Voltage PCB (Downstream) (UN149/J3251S) and the
ITB Cleaning High Voltage PCB (Upstream) (UN148/J3251P)
Drawer Unit (J7022)
- 24V line and parts to which power is supplied from the ITB Cleaning High Voltage PCB
(Downstream)
ASSEMBLY)
PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1353
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The ITB Pre-transfer Charging High Voltage PCB did not detect 24 V.
- Harness between the ITB Pre-transfer Charging High Voltage PCB (UN150/J3301) and the ITB
Driver PCB (Right) (UN219/J1320) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY
CONNECTING)
- Harness between the ITB Pre-transfer Charging High Voltage PCB (UN150/J3300) and the
foreign matter.

Detection Description The Pre-fixing Feed Driver PCB did not detect 24 V. (24VD)
ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1354
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

1355
7. Error/Jam/Alarm



Detection Description The Power Unit Limiter PCB detected overcurrent. (24VE-1)
MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
2. Harnesses in 24VE-1 line to which power is supplied from the Main Station Power Supply Relay
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
- Parts in 24VE-1 line to which power is supplied from the Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB
Controller PCB 1-1.
1356
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
Controller PCB 1-1.

MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
Controller PCB 1-1.
1357
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Power Unit Limiter PCB did not detect 24 V. (24VE)
E (UN524/J202E) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY LIMITER)
- Harnesses and parts in 24VE line to which power is supplied from the Power Unit Limiter PCB
- 24V Power Supply PCB E (UN524) (Unit of replacement: DC POWER SUPPLY PCB
ASSEMBLY)

- Harness between the ITB Driver PCB (Middle) (UN217/J1300) and the Drawer Unit (J7023) (Unit
J1844) (Unit of replacement: I.T.B. DRAWER ASSEMBLY, A2, CABLE, POWER SUPPLY)
- 24V line and parts to which power is supplied form the ITB Driver PCB (Middle)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1358
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Vertical Path/Lower Feed Driver PCB did not detect 24 V. (24VE-1)
PCB ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

PCB ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1359
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- Harness between the Secondary Transfer/Duplex Driver PCB (UN106/J1515) and the Drawer
Unit (J7005) (Unit of replacement: 2ND TRNSFR. DRAWER ASS'Y)
J1832) (Unit of replacement: 2ND TRNSFR. DRAWER ASS'Y, CABLE, POWER SUPPLY)
DUPLEX PCB ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Detection Description The Power Unit Limiter PCB detected overcurrent. (24VF-1)
MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
2. Harnesses in 24VF-1 line to which power is supplied from the Main Station Power Supply Relay
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
- Parts in 24VF-1 line to which power is supplied from the Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB
Controller PCB 1-1.
1360
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
Controller PCB 1-1.

MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
Controller PCB 1-1.
1361
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Power Unit Limiter PCB did not detect 24 V. (24VF)
F (UN525/J202F) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY LIMITER)
- Harnesses and parts in 24VF line to which power is supplied from the Power Unit Limiter PCB
- 24V Power Supply PCB F (UN525) (Unit of replacement: DC POWER SUPPLY PCB
ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description The Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage PCB (C) did not detect 24 V.
- Harness between the Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage PCB (C) (UN139/J3001C) and
the Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB (UN102/J1838) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER
SUPPLY)
the DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198/J1040) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, CENTER
UPPER)
H.V. PCB ASSEMBLY)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

Detection Description The Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage PCB (Bk) did not detect 24 V.
- Harness between the Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage PCB (Bk) (UN140/J3001K) and
SUPPLY)
UPPER)
H.V. PCB ASSEMBLY)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1362
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage PCB (M) did not detect 24 V.
- Harness between the Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage PCB (M) (UN138/J3001M) and
SUPPLY)
UPPER)
H.V. PCB ASSEMBLY)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

Detection Description The Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage PCB (Y) did not detect 24 V.
- Harness between the Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage PCB (Y) (UN137/J3001Y) and
SUPPLY)
UPPER)
H.V. PCB ASSEMBLY)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1363
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (Bk) did not detect 24 V.
- Harness between the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (Bk) (UN115/J3050K and J3051K) and
the Drawer Unit (J7021) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER POWER SUPPLY, 5)
J1838) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, CENTER UPPER, CABLE, POWER SUPPLY)
of replacement: CABLE, REAR, CENTER UPPER)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Detection Description The Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (C) did not detect 24 V.
- Harness between the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (C) (UN114/J3051C) and the Primary
Transfer High Voltage PCB (Bk) (UN115/J3051K)
- Harness between the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (C) (UN114/J3050C) and the Drawer
Unit (J7021) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER POWER SUPPLY, 5)
foreign matter.

Detection Description The Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (M) did not detect 24 V.
- Harness between the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (M) (UN113/J3050M and J3051M) and
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1364
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (Y) did not detect 24 V.
- Harness between the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (Y) (UN112/J3051Y) and the Primary
Transfer High Voltage PCB (M) (UN113/J3051M)
- Harness between the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (Y) (UN112/J3050Y) and the Drawer
foreign matter.

Detection Description The Post-secondary Transfer Static Elimination High Voltage PCB did not detect 24 V.
- Harness between the Post-secondary Transfer Static Elimination High Voltage PCB (UN108/
J3351) and the Secondary Transfer Cleaner High Voltage PCB (+) (UN971/J6)
J3100) and the Drawer Unit (J7040)
PCB ASSEMBLY)
foreign matter.

Detection Description The Secondary Transfer Cleaner High Voltage PCB (+) did not detect 24 V.
- Harness between the Secondary Transfer Cleaner High Voltage PCB (+) (UN971/J6) and the
Secondary Transfer Cleaner High Voltage PCB (-) (UN972/J9) (Unit of replacement: 2ND
TRNSFR. DRAWER ASS'Y)
Drawer Unit (J7006)
foreign matter.
1365
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Secondary Transfer Cleaner High Voltage PCB (-) did not detect 24 V.
- Harness between the Secondary Transfer Cleaner High Voltage PCB (-) (UN972/J8 and J9) and
the Drawer Unit (J7006)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Detection Description The Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB did not detect 24 V.
- Harnesses from the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB (UN116/J3151) to the Drawer Unit
(J7020L) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, I.T.B. H.V., CABLE, H.V. POWER SUPPLY RELAY,
CABLE, DRAWER POWER SUPPLY, 3)
- Harnesses from the Drawer Unit (J7020D) to the Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB (UN102/
- Harness between the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB (UN116/J3150) and the Drawer
Unit (J7023) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, H.V. POWER SUPPLY RELAY)
replacement: I.T.B. DRAWER ASSEMBLY, A2, CABLE, REAR, CENTER UPPER)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1366
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Developing High Voltage PCB (C) did not detect 24 V.
- Harness between the Developing High Voltage PCB (C) (UN135/J3202C) and the Main Station
- Harness between the Developing High Voltage PCB (C) (UN135/J3201C) and the DC Controller
PCB 1-1 (UN198/J1048) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, CENTER UPPER)
ASSEMBLY)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

Detection Description The Developing High Voltage PCB (Bk) did not detect 24 V.
- Harness between the Developing High Voltage PCB (Bk) (UN136/J3202K) and the Main Station
- Harness between the Developing High Voltage PCB (Bk) (UN136/J3201K) and the DC Controller
ASSEMBLY)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1367
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- Harness between the Registration Feed Driver PCB (Right) (UN104/J1250) and the Drawer Unit
(J7000) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER POWER CONNECTING)
J1830) (Unit of replacement: REGISTRATION DRAWER ASSEMBLY, CABLE, REG. POWER
SUPPLY)
(J7000)
ASS'Y, RT)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Detection Description The Developing High Voltage PCB (M) did not detect 24 V.
- Harness between the Developing High Voltage PCB (M) (UN134/J3202M) and the Main Station
- Harness between the Developing High Voltage PCB (M) (UN134/J3201M) and the DC Controller
ASSEMBLY)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1368
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Developing High Voltage PCB (Y) did not detect 24 V.
- Harness between the Developing High Voltage PCB (Y) (UN133/J3202Y) and the Main Station
- Harness between the Developing High Voltage PCB (Y) (UN133/J3201Y) and the DC Controller
ASSEMBLY)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1369
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

ASS'Y)
ASS'Y, LF)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.


A (UN532/J202G) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY LIMITER)
- 38V Power Supply PCB A (UN532) (Unit of replacement: 38V POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY)
1370
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

DUPLEX PCB ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1371
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

PCB ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

ASS'Y)
ASS'Y, LF)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1372
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

1-2 (UN124/J1072)
ASS'Y)

1-2 (UN124/J1072)
ASS'Y)

Detection Description The Reverse/Outer Delivery Driver PCB did not detect 5 V.
- Harness between the Reverse/Outer Delivery Driver PCB (UN310/J4101 and J4111) and the
Drawer Unit (J7030) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, PAPER DELIVERY REVERSE)
- Harnesses from the Drawer Unit (J7030) to the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4022)
(Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING DRAWER, CABLE, MAIN BODY, RIGHT)
- 5V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Reverse/Outer Delivery Driver PCB
ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1373
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Primary Fixing Inner Driver PCB did not detect 5 V.
- Harness between the Primary Fixing Inner Driver PCB (UN316/J4350P and J4360P) and the
Drawer Unit (J7017) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 2)
(Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 3, CABLE, POWER LEFT, UPPER)
(Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 3, CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING, LEFT)
- 5V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Primary Fixing Inner Driver PCB
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Detection Description The Primary Fixing Outer Driver PCB did not detect 5 V.
- Harness between the Primary Fixing Outer Driver PCB (UN304/J4150P) and the Fixing Duplex
Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4223) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER LEFT, UPPER)
Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4082) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING, LEFT)
- 5V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Primary Fixing Outer Driver PCB
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)

Detection Description The Secondary Fixing Inner Driver PCB did not detect 5 V.
Drawer Unit (J7017) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER CONNECTOR, 2)
(Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 3, CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING, RIGHT)
- 5V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Secondary Fixing Inner Driver PCB
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.
1374
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Secondary Fixing Outer Driver PCB did not detect 5 V.
- Harness between the Secondary Fixing Outer Driver PCB (UN305/J4150S) and the Fixing Duplex
Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4024) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING POWER SUPPLY)
Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4087) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING, RIGHT)
- 5V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Secondary Fixing Outer Driver PCB
PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)

ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

PCB (UN401/J6011) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING POWER SUPPLY, POWER CORD
1-2 (UN124/J1072)
ASS'Y)
1375
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB detected overcurrent. (24VH-1)
- Harness for power supply
1. Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4027) and the Reader Unit
(J7088) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER LEFT, UPPER)
- Harness for error notification
1. Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4070) and the DC Controller
PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1072)
ASS'Y)
1. If there is electrical continuity between the pin 3, 4 or 5 of J4002 on the Fixing Duplex Feed
Driver PCB and the grounding, check/replace the harness for power supply.
2. If there is no electrical continuity, check/replace the harness for error notification, connector and
parts.

1. Harnesses from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4052) to the Primary Fixing Heat
Exhaust Fan (FM312/J8757) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER LEFT, UPPER, CABLE,
EXHAUST FAN)
2. Harness connecting from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4062) to the Secondary
Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan and Fixing Uneven Gloss Prevention Left Fan (FM314/J5456 and FM381/
J7420) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN,2)
3. Harness connecting from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4053) to the Station
Interval Cooling Fan 1, 2, 6, 7 and 8 (FM408/J5483, FM409/J5484, FM326/J5488, FM327/J5489
and FM328/J5490) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER LEFT, UPPER)
4. Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4042) and the Secondary Fixing
Heat Exhaust Fan (FM314/J5319)
PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1072)
ASS'Y)
Driver PCB and the grounding, check/replace the harnesses for power supply.
parts.
1376
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

1. Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4036) and the Delivery Option
Communication Driver PCB (UN920/J8204E) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING
DRAWER)
2. Harnesses connecting from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4062) to the Delivery
Lower Cooling Fan, Delivery Upper Cooling Fan and Duplex Decurler Fan (FM318/J5453, FM319/
J5452 and FM320/J5454) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN,2, PAPER DELIVERY FAN
ASSEMBLY)
3. Harnesses connecting from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4052) to the Main
Station Upper Exhaust Fan and Main Station Lower Exhaust Fan (FM354/J5801 and FM355/
J5802) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER LEFT, UPPER, CABLE, EXHAUST FAN)
4. Harness connecting from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4007) to the Sub Station
Lower 24V Power Supply Cooling Fan and Sub Station Upper 24V Power Supply Cooling Fan
(FM414/J4741 and FM415/J4740) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY/LIMITER)
5. Harnesses connecting from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4032) to the Waste
PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1072)
ASS'Y)
- Delivery Option Communication Driver PCB (UN920) (Unit of replacement: TRANSCEIVER PCB
ASSEMBLY, CAN)
parts.

Detection Description The Delivery Option Communication Driver PCB detected overcurrent.
Remedy PERFECT BINDER-E1/FIN-AN1/SADDLE FIN-AN2
- Check that the harness/cable between the Delivery Option Communication Driver PCB and the
Driver PCB on the option side is not short circuited (caught).
- Check/replace the Driver PCB on the option side.

Remedy INSERTION UNIT-N1/PUNCHER UNIT/HC STACKER-H1
1377
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB did not detect 24 V. (24VH)
PCB H (UN527/J202Z) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY LIMITER)
1-2 (UN124/J1072)
- Harnesses and parts in 24VH line to which power is supplied from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver
PCB (UN311)
ASS'Y)
- 24V Power Supply PCB H (UN527) (Unit of replacement: DC POWER SUPPLY PCB
ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description The Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB detected overcurrent. (24VI-1)
1. Harness connecting from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4054) to the Tandem
Guide Upper Cooling Fan, Tandem Guide Lower Cooling Fan, Bypass Guide Front Cooling Fan
and Bypass Guide Rear Cooling Fan (FM357/J5803, FM358/J5804, FM359/J5805 and FM360/
J5806) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER LEFT, UPPER)
2. Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4062) and the Merging Guide
Rear Fan (FM362/J5809) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN,2)
3. Harnesses connecting from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4900) to the Fixing
Flapper Motor, Tandem Feed Motor, Bypass Feed Motor, Merging Path Feed Motor, Duplex Feed
Motor 6, 7, and 5 (M309/J7716, M310/J7717, M311/J7718, M312/J7719, M327/J7714, M329/
J7715 and M330/J7713) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MOTOR, CABLE, FEED MOTOR, 1,
CABLE, FEED MOTOR, CABLE, MOTOR, 2)
PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1072)
ASS'Y)
parts.
1378
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

1. Harness connecting from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4120) to the Delivery
Decurler Compression Distance Adjustment Motor 1 and 2 (M315/J7733 and M316/J7734) (Unit
of replacement: CABLE, PAPER DELIVERY MOTOR, 1)
2. Harnesses from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4121) to the Delivery Reverse
CABLE, MOTOR)
3. Harnesses from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4122) to the Duplex Reverse Rear
Motor (M322/J7732) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, PAPER DELIVERY MOTOR, 1, CABLE,
MOTOR CONNECTING)
4. Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4129) and the Color Sensor
Shutter Motor (M337/J7684) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR)
5. Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4130) and the Delivery Decurler
Cooling Fan (FM350/J5497) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, COOLING FAN)
6. Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4128) and the Reverse Outer
Delivery Cooling Fan (FM336/J5513) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR)
7. Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4140) and the Delivery Feed
Motor 2 Cooling Fan (FM427/J5532) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR)
PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1072)
ASS'Y)
parts.

Motor, Duplex Decurler Compression Distance Adjustment Motor, Duplex Feed Motor 7, Bypass
Decurler Engagement/Disengagement Motor and Bypass Decurler Drive Motor (M318/J7790,
M325/J7711, M331/J7712, M333/J7736 and M334/J7737) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MOTOR)
2. Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4900) and the Duplex Feed
Motor 4 (M328/J7709) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MOTOR)
PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1072)
ASS'Y)
parts.
1379
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB did not detect 24 V. (24VI)
PCB I (UN528/J202I) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY LIMITER)
1-2 (UN124/J1072)
- Harnesses and parts in 24VI line to which power is supplied from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver
PCB (UN311)
ASS'Y)
- 24V Power Supply PCB I (UN528) (Unit of replacement: DC POWER SUPPLY PCB ASSEMBLY)

ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1380
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB detected overcurrent. (24VJ-1)
1. Harness connecting from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4372, J4373P, J4370P
and J4370S) to the Primary Fixing Separation Cooling Fan 4, Primary Fixing Main Thermistor
Cooling Fan, Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Pressure Motor and Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller
Pressure Motor (FM334/J5527, FM421/J7673, M303/J7723 and M308/J7726)
2. Harness connecting from the Primary Fixing Inner Driver PCB (UN316/J4374PA and J4371P)
to the Primary Fixing Web Solenoid, Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Displacement Control Motor and
Secondary Fixing Separation Claw Disengagement Solenoid (SL302/J5574, M304/J7722 and
SL412/J5137)
3. Harness connecting from the Primary Fixing Outer Driver PCB (UN304/J4163P and J4164P) to
the Primary Fixing External Heat Roller Pressure Motor and Primary Fixing Web Pressure Motor
(M301/J7720 and M302/J7721)
4. Harness connecting from the Secondary Fixing Inner Driver PCB (UN317/J4373S and J4374SA)
to the Secondary Fixing Main Thermistor Cooling Fan and Secondary Fixing Web Solenoid
(FM420/J5528 and SL303/J5575)
5. Harness connecting from the Secondary Fixing Outer Driver PCB (UN305/J4163S and J4164S)
to the Secondary Fixing External Heat Roller Pressure Motor and Secondary Fixing Web Pressure
Motor (M306/J7724 and M307/J7725)
PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1072)
ASS'Y)
parts.
1381
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

1. Harness connecting from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4050) to the Primary
Fixing Inner Delivery Cooling Fan, Air Separation Blow Valve Unit and Primary Fixing Refresh Air
Cleaning Blow Valve Unit (FM313/J5450M, UN916/J8771 and UN917/J8772)
Inner Delivery Cooling Fan (FM315/J5451)
3. Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4051) and the Primary Fixing
Pressure Belt Cooling Switch Solenoid (SL410/J5625)
Fixing Pressure Roller Cooling Switch Solenoid and Secondary Fixing Refresh Air Cleaning Blow
Valve Unit (SL411/J5520 and UN918/J8773)
PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1072)
ASS'Y)
parts.

1. Harness connecting from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4060 and J4051) to the
Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Cooling Fan 5 and Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Cooling Fan 5
(FM337/J7659 and FM338/J5619)
PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1072)
ASS'Y)
parts.
1382
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB did not detect 24 V. (24VJ)
PCB J (UN529/J202J) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY LIMITER)
1-2 (UN124/J1072)
- Harnesses and parts in 24VJ line to which power is supplied from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver
PCB (UN311)
ASS'Y)
- 24V Power Supply PCB J (UN529) (Unit of replacement: DC POWER SUPPLY PCB ASSEMBLY)

poor conduction.
- Harnesses from the Primary Fixing Inner Driver PCB to the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB
1. Primary Fixing Inner Driver PCB (UN316/J4360P, J4361P and J4350P) to Drawer Unit
(J7017LA, J7017LB and J7017L) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 2)
2. Drawer Unit (J7017DA, J7017DB and J7017D) to Relay Connector (19P, 17P and 4P) (Unit of
3. Relay Connector (19P, 17P and 4P) to Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4080, J7079
and J4023) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING, LEFT, CABLE, POWER LEFT,
UPPER)
- Primary Fixing Inner Driver PCB (UN316)

ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
1383
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Possible causes of the error are as follow: open circuit of the harness or poor connection/poor
conduction of the connector.
- Harnesses from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4024) to the Secondary Fixing
Inner Driver PCB (UN317/J4350S) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING POWER SUPPLY,
CABLE, DRAWER, 2, CABLE, DRAWER CONNECTOR, 2)
Inner Driver PCB (UN317/J4360S) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER CONNECTOR, 2,
CABLE, DRAWER, 3, CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING, RIGHT)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)

PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)

Detection Description The Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB did not detect 38 V. (38VB)
PCB B (UN533/J201D) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER/LIMITER 38V)
1-2 (UN124/J1072)
- Harnesses and parts in 38VB line to which power is supplied from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver
PCB (UN311)
ASS'Y)
- 38V Power Supply PCB B (UN533) (Unit of replacement: 38V POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY)
1384
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Detection Description The Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB did not detect 38 V. (38VC)
PCB C (UN534/J201C) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER/LIMITER 38V)
1-2 (UN124/J1072)
PCB (UN311)
ASS'Y)
- 38V Power Supply PCB C (UN534) (Unit of replacement: 38V POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY)
E260-0F01-05 Power supply error

(This error occurs when power supply error was detected in multiple locations.)
Remedy Since power supply error occurs in multiple locations, identify the detail code by referring to
"Remedy When E260-0Fxx (Power Supply Error in Multiple Locations) Occurs" in FAQ and perform
the remedy of the corresponding code.
[Related parts] R1.01
1-2 (UN124/J1072) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING DRAWER)
ASS'Y)
1385
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

DUPLEX PCB ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198/J1051) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1386
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1387
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
matter.

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
matter.
1388
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
matter.

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
matter.
1389
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E260-0F0A-05 Power supply error

PCB ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
E260-0F0B-05 Power supply error

ASS'Y)
ASS'Y, LF)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1390
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E260-0F0C-05 Power supply error

MOUNTING ASS'Y)
MOUNTING ASS'Y)
ASS'Y, RT)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
E260-0F0D-05 Power supply error

PCB ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1391
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E260-0F0E-05 Power supply error

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
E260-0F0F-05 Power supply error

Detection Description The Laser Interface PCB did not detect 3.3 V.
- Harness between the Laser Interface PCB (UN950/J8717) and the DC Controller PCB 1-1
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1392
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

DUPLEX PCB ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

- 5V line and parts to which power is supplied from the ITB Driver PCB (Middle)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1393
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
matter.
1394
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
matter.

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
matter.
1395
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
matter.

PCB ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1396
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Pre-fixing Feed Driver PCB did not detect 5 V.
ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1397
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1398
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1399
7. Error/Jam/Alarm



1400
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

ASS'Y)
ASS'Y, LF)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1401
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

MOUNTING ASS'Y)
MOUNTING ASS'Y)
ASS'Y, RT)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

PCB ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1402
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

ASS'Y)

ASS'Y)
1403
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Environment Heater Driver PCB did not detect 5 V.
- Harness between the Environment Heater Driver PCB (UN101/J4403) and the Main Station
Power Supply Relay PCB (UN102/J1826) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, LEFT UPPER)
- Harness between the Environment Heater Driver PCB (UN101/J4404) and the DC Controller
- 5V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Environment Heater Driver PCB
ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

- Harnesses and parts in 24VA-1 line to which power is supplied from the Power Unit Limiter PCB
the grounding, check/replace the harnesses in 24VA-1 line to which power is supplied from the
Power Unit Limiter PCB.
Controller PCB 1-1.
1404
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
Controller PCB 1-1.
1405
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
2. Harness between the Power Unit Limiter PCB (UN401/J6015) and the Main Station Rear Upper
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
Controller PCB 1-1.

Detection Description The Pick-up Option Communication Driver PCB detected overcurrent. (POD DECK LITE)
- Harness between the Lattice for POD Deck Lite (UN144/J7032) and the Main Station Power
Supply Relay PCB (UN102/J1847) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DECK LIGHT)
- Harnesses from the Lattice for POD Deck Lite (UN144/J7032) to the DC Controller PCB 1-1
(UN198/J1056) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DECK LIGHT, CABLE, REAR, LEFT UPPER)
- Harnesses in 24V line in the POD Deck Lite
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1406
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

A (UN520/J202A) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY LIMITER)
- 24V Power Supply PCB A (UN520) (Unit of replacement: DC POWER SUPPLY PCB
ASSEMBLY)

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

1407
7. Error/Jam/Alarm



CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1408
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
Controller PCB 1-1.
1409
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
2. Harness between the Power Unit Limiter PCB (UN401/J6015) and the Main Station Rear Lower
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
Controller PCB 1-1.
1410
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
Controller PCB 1-1.

Detection Description The Power Unit Limiter PCB did not detect 24 V. (24VB)
- Harnesses and parts in 24VB line to which power is supplied from the Power Unit Limiter PCB
- 24V Power Supply PCB B (UN521) (Unit of replacement: DC POWER SUPPLY PCB
ASSEMBLY)
1411
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

ASS'Y)

Detection Description The Right Deck Pickup Driver PCB did not detect 24 V.
- Harness between the Right Deck Pickup Driver PCB (UN603/J2050R) and the Main Station
- Harness between the Right Deck Pickup Driver PCB (UN603/J2051R) and the DC Controller
PCB 1-1 (UN198/J1060) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, PAPER PICK-UP DRIVER)
- 24V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Right Deck Pickup Driver PCB
ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

ASS'Y)
1412
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

ASS'Y)

Detection Description The Left Deck Pickup Driver PCB did not detect 24 V.
- Harness between the Left Deck Pickup Driver PCB (UN703/J2050L) and the Main Station Power
- Harness between the Left Deck Pickup Driver PCB (UN703/J2051L) and the DC Controller PCB
1-1 (UN198/J1064) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, PAPER PICK-UP DRIVER)
- 24V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Left Deck Pickup Driver PCB
ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

ASS'Y)
1413
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Right Deck Indicator Driver PCB did not detect 12 V.
- Harness between the Right Deck Indicator Driver PCB (UN601/J2151R) and the Right Deck
Driver PCB (UN602/J2108R) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, INDICATION CONNECTING)
- Right Deck Indicator Driver PCB (UN601) (Unit of replacement: INDICATOR DRIVER
ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)

Detection Description The Left Deck Indicator Driver PCB did not detect 12 V.
- Harness between the Left Deck Indicator Driver PCB (UN701/J2151L) and the Left Deck Driver
PCB (UN702/J2108L) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, INDICATION CONNECTING)
- Left Deck Indicator Driver PCB (UN701) (Unit of replacement: INDICATOR DRIVER ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)
1414
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
Controller PCB 1-1.
1415
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
Controller PCB 1-1.
1416
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
Controller PCB 1-1.

Detection Description The Power Unit Limiter PCB did not detect 24 V. (24VC)
C (UN522/J202C) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY LIMITER)
- Harnesses and parts in 24VC line to which power is supplied from the Power Unit Limiter PCB
- 24V Power Supply PCB C (UN522) (Unit of replacement: DC POWER SUPPLY PCB
ASSEMBLY)
1417
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
matter.

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
matter.
1418
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
matter.

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
matter.
1419
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

PCB ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

Detection Description The Pre-fixing Feed Driver PCB did not detect 24 V. (24VC)
ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1420
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
Controller PCB 1-1.
1421
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
Controller PCB 1-1.
1422
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
Controller PCB 1-1.

Detection Description The Power Unit Limiter PCB did not detect 24 V. (24VD)
D (UN523/J202D) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY LIMITER)
- Harnesses and parts in 24VD line to which power is supplied from the Power Unit Limiter PCB
- 24V Power Supply PCB D (UN523) (Unit of replacement: DC POWER SUPPLY PCB
ASSEMBLY)
1423
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY CONNECTING, CABLE, DRAWER POWER SUPPLY,
5)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Detection Description The ITB Cleaning High Voltage PCB (Upstream) did not detect 24 V.
J1845) (Unit of replacement: I.T.B. DRAWER ASSEMBLY, B, CABLE, POWER SUPPLY)
Drawer Unit (J7022)
- 24V line and parts to which power is supplied from the ITB Cleaning High Voltage PCB (Upstream)
PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1424
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The ITB Cleaning High Voltage PCB (Downstream) did not detect 24 V.
ITB Cleaning High Voltage PCB (Upstream) (UN148/J3251P)
Drawer Unit (J7022)
- 24V line and parts to which power is supplied form the ITB Cleaning High Voltage PCB
(Downstream)
ASSEMBLY)
PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Detection Description The ITB Pre-transfer Charging High Voltage PCB did not detect 24 V.
- Harness between the ITB Pre-transfer Charging High Voltage PCB (UN150/J3301) and the ITB
Driver PCB (Right) (UN219/J1320) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY
CONNECTING)
- Harness between the ITB Pre-transfer Charging High Voltage PCB (UN150/J3300) and the
foreign matter.
1425
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Pre-fixing Feed Driver PCB did not detect 24 V. (24VD)
ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1426
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1427
7. Error/Jam/Alarm



1428
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
Controller PCB 1-1.
1429
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
Controller PCB 1-1.
1430
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
Controller PCB 1-1.

Detection Description The Power Unit Limiter PCB did not detect 24 V. (24VE)
E (UN524/J202E) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY LIMITER)
- Harnesses and parts in 24VE line to which power is supplied from the Power Unit Limiter PCB
- 24V Power Supply PCB E (UN524) (Unit of replacement: DC POWER SUPPLY PCB
ASSEMBLY)
1431
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

PCB ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1432
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

PCB ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

DUPLEX PCB ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1433
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
Controller PCB 1-1.
1434
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
Controller PCB 1-1.
1435
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

MOUNT ASSEMBLY)
PCB
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
Controller PCB 1-1.

Detection Description The Power Unit Limiter PCB did not detect 24 V. (24VF)
F (UN525/J202F) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY LIMITER)
- Harnesses and parts in 24VF line to which power is supplied from the Power Unit Limiter PCB
- 24V Power Supply PCB F (UN525) (Unit of replacement: DC POWER SUPPLY PCB
ASSEMBLY)
1436
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage PCB (C) did not detect 24 V.
SUPPLY)
UPPER)
H.V. PCB ASSEMBLY)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

Detection Description The Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage PCB (Bk) did not detect 24 V.
SUPPLY)
UPPER)
H.V. PCB ASSEMBLY)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1437
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage PCB (M) did not detect 24 V.
SUPPLY)
UPPER)
H.V. PCB ASSEMBLY)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

Detection Description The Primary Charging Assembly High Voltage PCB (Y) did not detect 24 V.
SUPPLY)
UPPER)
H.V. PCB ASSEMBLY)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1438
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (Bk) did not detect 24 V.
- Harness between the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (Bk) (UN115/J3050K and J3051K) and
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Detection Description The Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (C) did not detect 24 V.
- Harness between the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (C) (UN114/J3051C) and the Primary
Transfer High Voltage PCB (Bk) (UN115/J3051K)
- Harness between the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (C) (UN114/J3050C) and the Drawer
foreign matter.
1439
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (M) did not detect 24 V.
- Harness between the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (M) (UN113/J3050M and J3051M) and
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Detection Description The Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (Y) did not detect 24 V.
- Harness between the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (Y) (UN112/J3051Y) and the Primary
Transfer High Voltage PCB (M) (UN113/J3051M)
- Harness between the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB (Y) (UN112/J3050Y) and the Drawer
foreign matter.
1440
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Post-secondary Transfer Static Elimination High Voltage PCB did not detect 24 V.
J3351) and the Secondary Transfer Cleaner High Voltage PCB (+) (UN971/J6)
J3100) and the Drawer Unit (J7040)
PCB ASSEMBLY)
foreign matter.

Detection Description The Secondary Transfer Cleaner High Voltage PCB (+) did not detect 24 V.
Secondary Transfer Cleaner High Voltage PCB (-) (UN972/J9) (Unit of replacement: 2ND
TRNSFR. DRAWER ASS'Y)
Drawer Unit (J7006)
foreign matter.
1441
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Secondary Transfer Cleaner High Voltage PCB (-) did not detect 24 V.
- Harness between the Secondary Transfer Cleaner High Voltage PCB (-) (UN972/J8 and J9) and
the Drawer Unit (J7006)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Detection Description The Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB did not detect 24 V.
- Harnesses from the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB (UN116/J3151) to the Drawer Unit
(J7020L) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, I.T.B. H.V., CABLE, H.V. POWER SUPPLY RELAY,
CABLE, DRAWER POWER SUPPLY, 3)
- Harnesses from the Drawer Unit (J7020D) to the Main Station Power Supply Relay PCB (UN102/
- Harness between the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB (UN116/J3150) and the Drawer
Unit (J7023) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, H.V. POWER SUPPLY RELAY)
replacement: I.T.B. DRAWER ASSEMBLY, A2, CABLE, REAR, CENTER UPPER)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1442
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Developing High Voltage PCB (C) did not detect 24 V.
- Harness between the Developing High Voltage PCB (C) (UN135/J3202C) and the Main Station
- Harness between the Developing High Voltage PCB (C) (UN135/J3201C) and the DC Controller
ASSEMBLY)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

Detection Description The Developing High Voltage PCB (Bk) did not detect 24 V.
- Harness between the Developing High Voltage PCB (Bk) (UN136/J3202K) and the Main Station
- Harness between the Developing High Voltage PCB (Bk) (UN136/J3201K) and the DC Controller
ASSEMBLY)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1443
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

(J7000) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER POWER CONNECTING)
J1830) (Unit of replacement: REGISTRATION DRAWER ASSEMBLY, CABLE, REG. POWER
SUPPLY)
(J7000)
ASS'Y, RT)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Detection Description The Developing High Voltage PCB (M) did not detect 24 V.
- Harness between the Developing High Voltage PCB (M) (UN134/J3202M) and the Main Station
- Harness between the Developing High Voltage PCB (M) (UN134/J3201M) and the DC Controller
ASSEMBLY)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1444
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Developing High Voltage PCB (Y) did not detect 24 V.
- Harness between the Developing High Voltage PCB (Y) (UN133/J3202Y) and the Main Station
- Harness between the Developing High Voltage PCB (Y) (UN133/J3201Y) and the DC Controller
ASSEMBLY)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1445
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

ASS'Y)
ASS'Y, LF)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

1446
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

A (UN532/J202G) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY LIMITER)
- 38V Power Supply PCB A (UN532) (Unit of replacement: 38V POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY)

DUPLEX PCB ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1447
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

PCB ASS'Y)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
1448
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

ASS'Y)
ASS'Y, LF)
CONNECT PCB ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

1-2 (UN124/J1072)
ASS'Y)
1449
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

1-2 (UN124/J1072)
ASS'Y)

ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1450
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

- Harness between the Primary Fixing Inner Driver PCB (UN316/J4350P and J4360P) and the
Drawer Unit (J7017) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 2)
(Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 3, CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING, LEFT)
- 5V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Primary Fixing Inner Driver PCB
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
1451
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Drawer Unit (J7017) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER CONNECTOR, 2)
(Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 3, CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING, RIGHT)
- 5V line and parts to which power is supplied from the Secondary Fixing Inner Driver PCB
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
or foreign matter.

PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
1452
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

PCB (UN401/J6011) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING POWER SUPPLY, POWER CORD
1-2 (UN124/J1072)
ASS'Y)
1453
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

1. Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4027) and the Reader Unit
(J7088) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER LEFT, UPPER)
PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1072)
ASS'Y)
parts.

1. Harnesses from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4052) to the Primary Fixing Heat
Exhaust Fan (FM312/J8757) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER LEFT, UPPER, CABLE,
EXHAUST FAN)
Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan and Fixing Uneven Gloss Prevention Left Fan (FM314/J5456 and FM381/
J7420) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN,2)
3. Harness connecting from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4053) to the Station
Interval Cooling Fan 1, 2, 6, 7 and 8 (FM408/J5483, FM409/J5484, FM326/J5488, FM327/J5489
and FM328/J5490) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER LEFT, UPPER)
Heat Exhaust Fan (FM314/J5319)
PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1072)
ASS'Y)
parts.
1454
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

1. Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4036) and the Delivery Option
Communication Driver PCB (UN920/J8204E) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING
DRAWER)
2. Harnesses connecting from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4062) to the Delivery
Lower Cooling Fan, Delivery Upper Cooling Fan and Duplex Decurler Fan (FM318/J5453, FM319/
J5452 and FM320/J5454) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN,2, PAPER DELIVERY FAN
ASSEMBLY)
3. Harnesses connecting from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4052) to the Main
Station Upper Exhaust Fan and Main Station Lower Exhaust Fan (FM354/J5801 and FM355/
J5802) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER LEFT, UPPER, CABLE, EXHAUST FAN)
4. Harness connecting from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4007) to the Sub Station
Lower 24V Power Supply Cooling Fan and Sub Station Upper 24V Power Supply Cooling Fan
(FM414/J4741 and FM415/J4740) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY/LIMITER)
5. Harnesses connecting from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4032) to the Waste
PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1072)
ASS'Y)
- Delivery Option Communication Driver PCB (UN920) (Unit of replacement: TRANSCEIVER PCB
ASSEMBLY, CAN)
parts.

Remedy PERFECT BINDER-E1/FIN-AN1/SADDLE FIN-AN2

Remedy INSERTION UNIT-N1/PUNCHER UNIT/HC STACKER-H1
1455
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB did not detect 24 V. (24VH)
PCB H (UN527/J202Z) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY LIMITER)
1-2 (UN124/J1072)
- Harnesses and parts in 24VH line to which power is supplied from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver
PCB (UN311)
ASS'Y)
- 24V Power Supply PCB H (UN527) (Unit of replacement: DC POWER SUPPLY PCB
ASSEMBLY)

1. Harness connecting from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4054) to the Tandem
Guide Upper Cooling Fan, Tandem Guide Lower Cooling Fan, Bypass Guide Front Cooling Fan
and Bypass Guide Rear Cooling Fan (FM357/J5803, FM358/J5804, FM359/J5805 and FM360/
J5806) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER LEFT, UPPER)
2. Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4062) and the Merging Guide
Rear Fan (FM362/J5809) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN,2)
3. Harnesses connecting from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4900) to the Fixing
Flapper Motor, Tandem Feed Motor, Bypass Feed Motor, Merging Path Feed Motor, Duplex Feed
Motor 6, 7, and 5 (M309/J7716, M310/J7717, M311/J7718, M312/J7719, M327/J7714, M329/
J7715 and M330/J7713) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MOTOR, CABLE, FEED MOTOR, 1,
CABLE, FEED MOTOR, CABLE, MOTOR, 2)
PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1072)
ASS'Y)
parts.
1456
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Decurler Compression Distance Adjustment Motor 1 and 2 (M315/J7733 and M316/J7734) (Unit
of replacement: CABLE, PAPER DELIVERY MOTOR, 1)
2. Harnesses from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4121) to the Delivery Reverse
CABLE, MOTOR)
3. Harnesses from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4122) to the Duplex Reverse Rear
Motor (M322/J7732) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, PAPER DELIVERY MOTOR, 1, CABLE,
MOTOR CONNECTING)
4. Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4129) and the Color Sensor
Shutter Motor (M337/J7684) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR)
5. Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4130) and the Delivery Decurler
Cooling Fan (FM350/J5497) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, COOLING FAN)
6. Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4128) and the Reverse Outer
Delivery Cooling Fan (FM336/J5513) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR)
7. Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4140) and the Delivery Feed
Motor 2 Cooling Fan (FM427/J5532) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR)
PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1072)
ASS'Y)
parts.
1457
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Motor, Duplex Decurler Compression Distance Adjustment Motor, Duplex Feed Motor 7, Bypass
Decurler Engagement/Disengagement Motor and Bypass Decurler Drive Motor (M318/J7790,
M325/J7711, M331/J7712, M333/J7736 and M334/J7737) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MOTOR)
2. Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4900) and the Duplex Feed
Motor 4 (M328/J7709) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MOTOR)
PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1072)
ASS'Y)
parts.

Detection Description The Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB did not detect 24 V. (24VI)
PCB I (UN528/J202I) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY LIMITER)
1-2 (UN124/J1072)
- Harnesses and parts in 24VI line to which power is supplied from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver
PCB (UN311)
ASS'Y)
- 24V Power Supply PCB I (UN528) (Unit of replacement: DC POWER SUPPLY PCB ASSEMBLY)
1458
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.
1459
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

1. Harness connecting from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4372, J4373P, J4370P
and J4370S) to the Primary Fixing Separation Cooling Fan 4, Primary Fixing Main Thermistor
Cooling Fan, Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Pressure Motor and Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller
Pressure Motor (FM334/J5527, FM421/J7673, M303/J7723 and M308/J7726)
2. Harness connecting from the Primary Fixing Inner Driver PCB (UN316/J4374PA and J4371P)
to the Primary Fixing Web Solenoid, Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Displacement Control Motor and
Secondary Fixing Separation Claw Disengagement Solenoid (SL302/J5574, M304/J7722 and
SL412/J5137)
3. Harness connecting from the Primary Fixing Outer Driver PCB (UN304/J4163P and J4164P) to
the Primary Fixing External Heat Roller Pressure Motor and Primary Fixing Web Pressure Motor
(M301/J7720 and M302/J7721)
4. Harness connecting from the Secondary Fixing Inner Driver PCB (UN317/J4373S and J4374SA)
to the Secondary Fixing Main Thermistor Cooling Fan and Secondary Fixing Web Solenoid
(FM420/J5528 and SL303/J5575)
5. Harness connecting from the Secondary Fixing Outer Driver PCB (UN305/J4163S and J4164S)
to the Secondary Fixing External Heat Roller Pressure Motor and Secondary Fixing Web Pressure
Motor (M306/J7724 and M307/J7725)
PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1072)
ASS'Y)
parts.
1460
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

1. Harness connecting from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4050) to the Primary
Fixing Inner Delivery Cooling Fan, Air Separation Blow Valve Unit and Primary Fixing Refresh Air
Cleaning Blow Valve Unit (FM313/J5450M, UN916/J8771 and UN917/J8772)
Inner Delivery Cooling Fan (FM315/J5451)
3. Harness between the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4051) and the Primary Fixing
Pressure Belt Cooling Switch Solenoid (SL410/J5625)
Fixing Pressure Roller Cooling Switch Solenoid and Secondary Fixing Refresh Air Cleaning Blow
Valve Unit (SL411/J5520 and UN918/J8773)
PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1072)
ASS'Y)
parts.

1. Harness connecting from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4060 and J4051) to the
Secondary Fixing Pressure Roller Cooling Fan 5 and Primary Fixing Pressure Belt Cooling Fan 5
(FM337/J7659 and FM338/J5619)
PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1072)
ASS'Y)
parts.
1461
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB did not detect 24 V. (24VJ)
PCB J (UN529/J202J) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER SUPPLY LIMITER)
1-2 (UN124/J1072)
- Harnesses and parts in 24VJ line to which power is supplied from the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver
PCB (UN311)
ASS'Y)
- 24V Power Supply PCB J (UN529) (Unit of replacement: DC POWER SUPPLY PCB ASSEMBLY)

poor conduction.
- Harnesses from the Primary Fixing Inner Driver PCB to the Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB
1. Primary Fixing Inner Driver PCB (UN316/J4360P, J4361P and J4350P) to Drawer Unit
(J7017LA, J7017LB and J7017L) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER, 2)
2. Drawer Unit (J7017DA, J7017DB and J7017D) to Relay Connector (19P, 17P and 4P) (Unit of
3. Relay Connector (19P, 17P and 4P) to Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4080, J7079
and J4023) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING, LEFT, CABLE, POWER LEFT,
UPPER)
- Primary Fixing Inner Driver PCB (UN316)

ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)
1462
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Possible causes of the error are as follow: open circuit of the harness or poor connection/poor
conduction of the connector.
Inner Driver PCB (UN317/J4350S) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING POWER SUPPLY,
CABLE, DRAWER, 2, CABLE, DRAWER CONNECTOR, 2)
Inner Driver PCB (UN317/J4360S) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DRAWER CONNECTOR, 2,
CABLE, DRAWER, 3, CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING, RIGHT)
ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)

PCB ASS'Y)
ASS'Y)

Detection Description The Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB did not detect 38 V. (38VB)
PCB B (UN533/J201D) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER/LIMITER 38V)
1-2 (UN124/J1072)
PCB (UN311)
ASS'Y)
- 38V Power Supply PCB B (UN533) (Unit of replacement: 38V POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY)
1463
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

ASSEMBLY)
ASS'Y)
foreign matter.

Detection Description The Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB did not detect 38 V. (38VC)
PCB C (UN534/J201C) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, POWER/LIMITER 38V)
1-2 (UN124/J1072)
PCB (UN311)
ASS'Y)
- 38V Power Supply PCB C (UN534) (Unit of replacement: 38V POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY)
1464
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E261-0101-05 Error in Zero Cross

Detection Description Zero cross signal of the Primary Fixing Roller Main/Sub Heater was not detected while relay was
ON.
- Harnesses connecting the Primary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN306/J4300P), the Drawer Unit
(J7609) and the DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1003) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING
DUPLEXING DRAWER)
- Harness between the Primary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN306/J4302S and J4303S) and the
Fixing Sub Station Relay Connector Base (J7882 and J7881) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
HEATER, AC)
- Harness between the Fixing Sub Station Relay Connector Base (J7882 and J7881) and the Power
Unit Sub Station Terminal Base Unit (J7863 and J7864) (Unit of replacement: CONNECTOR
MOUNT UNIT)
- Primary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN306)
- Terminal Base Unit (Unit of replacement: POWER CORD TERMINAL ASSEMBLY)
1. Press the Reset button of the breaker.

Detection Description Zero cross signal of the External Heat Roller Heater/Belt Heater of the Primary Fixing Assembly
was not detected while relay was ON.
- Harnesses connecting the Primary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN306/J4300P), the Drawer Unit
(J7609) and the DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1003) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING
DUPLEXING DRAWER)
- Harness between the Primary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN306/J4302S and J4303S) and the
Fixing Sub Station Relay Connector Base (J7882 and J7881) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
HEATER, AC)
MOUNT UNIT)
- Primary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN306)

Detection Description Zero cross signal of the Secondary Fixing Roller Main/Sub Heater was not detected while relay
was ON.
- Harnesses connecting the Secondary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN307/J4300S), the Drawer
Unit (J7610) and the DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1004) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING
DUPLEXING DRAWER)
- Harness between the Secondary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN307/J4302P and J4303P) and
the Fixing Sub Station Relay Connector Base (J7882 and J7900) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
HEATER, AC)
MOUNT UNIT)
- Secondary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN307)
1465
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Zero cross signal of the External Heat Roller Heater/Belt Heater of the Secondary Fixing Assembly
was not detected while relay was ON.
- Harnesses connecting the Secondary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN307/J4300S), the Drawer
Unit (J7610) and the DC Controller PCB 1-2 (UN124/J1004) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING
DUPLEXING DRAWER)
- Harness between the Secondary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN307/J4302P and J4303P) and
the Fixing Sub Station Relay Connector Base (J7882 and J7900) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
HEATER, AC)
MOUNT UNIT)
- Secondary Fixing Heater Driver PCB (UN307)
E270-0001-04 Vertical scanning synchronous signal error

Detection Description The vertical scanning synchronous signal (VSYNC) was not transmitted appropriately at the
Document Reading Sensor (for paper front) side communicating with the Reader Controller PCB.
- Harness between the Reader Scanner Unit (J1101) and the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1/J106)
(Unit of replacement: FLEXIBLE FLAT CABLE UNIT)
- Harness between the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1/J109) and the Main Controller PCB 2 (UN82/
J22) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, INTERFACE)
- Reader Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: SCANNER UNIT, READER)
ASSEMBLY)
E270-0002-04 Horizontal scanning/vertical scanning synchronous signal error

Detection Description The vertical scanning synchronous signal (VSYNC) was not transmitted due to horizontal scanning
synchronous signal (HSYNC) error.
- Harness between the DADF Scanner Unit (J1102) and the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1/J105)
- DADF Scanner Unit (Unit of replacement: SCANNER UNIT, ADF)
ASSEMBLY)
1466
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E270-0101-04 Vertical scanning synchronous signal error

Detection Description The vertical scanning synchronous signal (VSYNC) was not transmitted appropriately at the
Document Reading Sensor (for paper back) side communicating with the Reader Controller PCB.
ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description Communication between the Reader Controller PCB and the Reader Scanner Unit was not
completed within the specified period of time.
ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description Disconnection of FFC between the Reader Controller PCB and the Reader Scanner Unit was
detected.

Detection Description Communication between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Scanner Unit was not
completed within the specified period of time.
ASSEMBLY)
1467
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Disconnection of FFC between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Scanner Unit was
detected.
E302-0001-04 Error in paper front white shading

Detection Description An access error to the paper front white shading RAM or a paper front white shading value that
was higher than the specified value was detected.
ASSEMBLY)
E302-0002-04 Error in paper front black shading

Detection Description An access error to the paper front black shading RAM or a paper front black shading value that
ASSEMBLY)
E302-0101-04 Error in paper back white shading

Detection Description An access error to the paper back white shading RAM or a paper back white shading value that
ASSEMBLY)
1468
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E302-0102-04 Error in paper back black shading

Detection Description An access error to the paper back black shading RAM or a paper back black shading value that
ASSEMBLY)
E315-000E-00 Image processing device error

Detection Description An error was detected at software decoding.
Remedy [Related parts]
- DDR2-SDRAM (M1) on the Main Controller PCB (Unit of replacement: MEMORY PCB
ASSEMBLY)
- HDD (Unit of replacement: HDD, WD10EURX, WESTEM DIGITAL)
1. Check that the DDR2-SDRAM (M1) on the Main Controller PCB 2 is installed properly by
removing and then installing it again.
2. Replace the DDR2-SDRAM (M1) on the Main Controller PCB 2.
3. Replace the HDD.
[CAUTION] When replacing the HDD, execute "Adjustment after the HDD replacement" in situation
mode.
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1.
[CAUTION] If there are any optional PCBs installed on the old Main Controller PCB 1, transfer
them to the new PCB.


E351-0000-00 Main Controller PCB 2 communication error

Detection Description Communication function of the Main Controller PCB 2 did not work properly.
Remedy [Remedy] Replace the Main Controller PCB 2 (UN82). (Unit of replacement: MAIN CONTROLLER
PCB ASS'Y, 2)
[CAUTION]
- When replacing the Main Controller PCB 2, execute "Adjustment after the Main Controller PCB
2 replacement" in situation mode.
- If there are any optional PCBs installed on the old Main Controller PCB 2, transfer them to the
new PCB.


1469
7. Error/Jam/Alarm




Detection Description A communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB was
detected.
- Harness between the DADF Driver PCB (PCB1/J401) and the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1/
J104) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FLAT)
J111) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, ADF POWER SUPPLY)
ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description A communication error between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB was
detected.
ASSEMBLY)
1470
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description - Disconnection of the harness between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB
was detected.
- In the case of no CPU, disconnection of the harness between the Reader Controller PCB and
the Relay PCB (ADF side) was detected.
ASSEMBLY)
E401-0001-04 Pickup Roller Unit Lifting HP Sensor error

Detection Description The Pickup Roller Unit Lifting HP Sensor in the DADF did not detect the ON status.
- Harnesses from the Pickup Roller Unit Lifting HP Sensor to the DADF Driver PCB
1. Pickup Roller Unit Lifting HP Sensor (SR12/J614) to Relay Connector (7P) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, PAPER PICK-UP REAR, UP.)
SENSOR)
- Harness between the Pickup Roller Unit Lifting Motor (M10/J617) and the DADF Driver PCB
(PCB1/J403) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR MOTOR, 2)
- Pickup Roller Unit Lifting HP Sensor (SR12) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN SENSOR)
- Pickup Roller Unit Lifting Motor (M10)
E401-0002-04 Pickup Roller Unit Lifting HP Sensor error

Detection Description The Pickup Roller Unit Lifting HP Sensor in the DADF did not detect the OFF status.
- Harnesses from the Pickup Roller Unit Lifting HP Sensor to the DADF Driver PCB
1. Pickup Roller Unit Lifting HP Sensor (SR12/J614) to Relay Connector (7P) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, PAPER PICK-UP REAR, UP.)
SENSOR)
- Harness between the Pickup Roller Unit Lifting Motor (M10/J617) and the DADF Driver PCB
(PCB1/J403) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR MOTOR, 2)
- Pickup Roller Unit Lifting HP Sensor (SR12) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, MAIN SENSOR)
- Pickup Roller Unit Lifting Motor (M10)
1471
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E407-0001-04 Tray Lifting Motor error

Detection Description The Tray HP Sensor in the DADF did not detect the ON/OFF status within the specified period of
time.
- Harnesses from the Tray HP Sensor to the DADF Driver PCB
1. Tray HP Sensor (SR13/J603) to Relay Connector (3P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, TRAY,
LOWER)
SENSOR)
- Harness between the Tray Lifting Motor (M8) and the DADF Driver PCB (PCB1/J416) (Unit of
replacement: CABLE, REAR MOTOR, 2)
- Tray HP Sensor (SR13)
- Tray Lifting Motor (M8)
E407-0002-04 Tray Lifting Motor error

Detection Description The Paper Surface Sensor in the DADF was not turned ON within the specified period of time when
lifting up the lifter.
- Harnesses from the Paper Surface Sensor to the DADF Driver PCB
1. Paper Surface Sensor (SR6/J613) to Relay Connector (7P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
PAPER PICK-UP REAR, UP.)
SENSOR)
- Paper Surface Sensor (SR6)
- Tray Lifting Motor (M8)
E412-0001-04 Fan error

Detection Description Rotation of fan was detected after the stop signal for the Scanner Unit Cooling Fan was transmitted.
- Harnesses from the Scanner Unit Cooling Fan to the Reader Controller PCB
1. Scanner Unit Cooling Fan (FM2/J125) to Relay Connector (3P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
FAN)
2. Relay Connector (3P) to Relay Connector (3P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN
CONNECTING, 2)
3. Relay Connector (3P) to Reader Controller PCB (PCB1/J103) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
FAN)
- Scanner Unit Cooling Fan (FM2)
ASSEMBLY)
1472
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Stop of fan was detected after rotation signal for the Scanner Unit Cooling Fan was transmitted.
- Harnesses from the Scanner Unit Cooling Fan to the Reader Controller PCB
1. Scanner Unit Cooling Fan (FM2/J125) to Relay Connector (3P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
FAN)
2. Relay Connector (3P) to Relay Connector (3P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN
CONNECTING, 2)
3. Relay Connector (3P) to Reader Controller PCB (PCB1/J103) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
FAN)
- Scanner Unit Cooling Fan (FM2)
ASSEMBLY)

Detection Description Rotation of fan was detected after the stop signal for the DADF Cooling Fan 3 was transmitted.
- Harnesses from the DADF Cooling Fan 3 to the DADF Driver PCB
1. DADF Cooling Fan 3 (FM3/J616) to Relay Connector (3P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN)
2. Relay Connector (3P) to Relay Connector (12P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SENSOR,
FRONT)
SENSOR)

Detection Description Stop of fan was detected after rotation signal for the DADF Cooling Fan 3 was transmitted.
- Harnesses from the DADF Cooling Fan 3 to the DADF Driver PCB
1. DADF Cooling Fan 3 (FM3/J616) to Relay Connector (3P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FAN)
FRONT)
SENSOR)

Detection Description Rotation of fan was detected after the stop signal for the DADF Cooling Fan 1/2 was transmitted.
- Harness between the DADF Cooling Fan 1 (FM1/J614) and the DADF Driver PCB (PCB1/J404)
(Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR MOTOR, 2)
- DADF Cooling Fan 1 (FM1)
1473
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Stop of fan was detected after rotation signal for the DADF Cooling Fan 1/2 was transmitted.
E413-0001-04 Disengagement HP Sensor timeout error

Detection Description Disengagement HP Sensor 1 in the DADF did not detect the ON status within the specified period
of time.
- Harnesses from the Disengagement HP Sensor 1 to the DADF Driver PCB
1. Disengagement HP Sensor 1 (SR15/J702) to Relay Connector (12P) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, SENSOR, FRONT)
FRONT)
SENSOR)
- Harnesses from the Disengagement Motor 1 to the DADF Driver PCB
1. Disengagement Motor 1 (M6/J716) to Relay Connector (6P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
FRONT MOTOR)
2. Relay Connector (6P) to Relay Connector (11P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE GUIDE UNIT)
3. Relay Connector (11P) to DADF Driver PCB (PCB1/J405) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
MOTOR)
- Disengagement HP Sensor 1 (SR15)
- Disengagement Motor 1 (M6)

Detection Description Disengagement HP Sensor 1 in the DADF did not detect the OFF status within the specified period
of time.
FRONT)
SENSOR)
FRONT MOTOR)
3. Relay Connector (11P) to DADF Driver PCB (PCB1/J405) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
MOTOR)
1474
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description Disengagement HP Sensor 2 in the DADF did not detect the ON status within the specified period
of time.
FRONT)
SENSOR)
FRONT MOTOR)

Detection Description Disengagement HP Sensor 2 in the DADF did not detect the OFF status within the specified period
of time.
FRONT)
SENSOR)
FRONT MOTOR)
E423-0001-04 SDRAM error in the Reader Controller PCB

Detection Description Either an access error to SDRAM in the Reader Controller PCB or an error at data inspection was
detected.
Remedy Replace the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1). (Unit of replacement: READER CONTROLLER PCB
ASSEMBLY)
1475
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E490-0001-04 Different DADF model error

Detection Description A wrong DADF was installed.
- Flat Cable between the DADF Driver PCB (PCB1/J401) and the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1/
ASSEMBLY)
1. Check if the installed DADF model matches the model set in "COPIER> OPTION> CUSTOM>
SCANTYPE". If not matched, install the appropriate DADF.

Detection Description CAN network connection error between the host machine and an option was detected.
- Harness between the Delivery Option Communication Driver PCB (UN920/J8204E) and the
Fixing Duplex Feed Driver PCB (UN311/J4036) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING
DUPLEXING DRAWER)
- Harness between the Pick-up Option Communication Driver PCB (UN921/J8204K) and the DC
- Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198/J1059) to the Delivery Option Communication
Driver PCB (UN920/J8203E) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FIXING DUPLEXING DRAWER,
DRAWER ASSEMBLY)
- Harness between the DC Controller PCB 1-1 (UN198/J1058) and the Pick-up Option
Communication Driver PCB (UN921/J8203K) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, REAR, LEFT UPPER)
- Delivery Option Communication Driver PCB (UN920)
- Pick-up Option Communication Driver PCB (UN921)
1. Check power supply (outlet/breaker/power supply cable) of the target option.
2. Check the CAN Communication Cable of the target option.
E500-0001-51 Arcnet Communication Error

Detection Description Arcnet Communication Fail
Remedy Check Arcnet cable connection
E500-0001-52 Arcnet Communication Error

Detection Description Arcnet Communication Fail
Remedy Check Arcnet cable connection
E500-0004-05 POD Deck communication error

Detection Description A communication error of the POD Deck was detected.
1476
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description FIN-AN1/SADDLE FIN-AN2A communication error between the host machine and the Finisher
was detected. Or the drive did not stop due to a software failure.
Remedy FIN-AN1/SADDLE FIN-AN2
[Remedy] If the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the main power, contact to the
sales company.

Detection Description FIN-AN1/SADDLE FIN-AN2
A communication error between the host machine and the Finisher was detected. Or the drive did
not stop due to a software failure.
[Remedy] If the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the main power, contact to the
sales company.

Detection Description INSERTION UNIT-N1
Communication failed 5 consecutive times.
Remedy 1. Check the connector of the Insertion Unit controller PCB.
2. Check the connector of the option controller PCB.
3. Check the connection of the harness between the Insertion Unit controller PCB and the option
controller PCB.
4. Replace the option controller PCB.
5. Replace the Insertion Unit controller PCB.
E501-0080-61 Communication error between the Master Controller PCB and the Slave Controller PCB in
the Perfect Binder
Detection Description The same communication alarm was detected for the specified period of time or longer when the
Master Controller PCB communicates with the Slave Controller PCB.
Remedy 1. Disconnection of the connector of the Master Controller PCB
2. Disconnection of the connector of the Slave Controller PCB
3. Master Controller PCB error
4. Slave Controller PCB error
E501-0081-61 Communication error between the Master Controller PCB and the Slave Controller PCB in
the Perfect Binder
Slave Controller PCB communicates with the Master Controller PCB.
2. Disconnection of the connector of the Slave Controller PCB
E501-0082-61 Communication error between the Relay PCB (Option Controller) and the Master Controller
PCB in the Perfect Binder
Detection Description Communication between the Relay PCB (Option Controller) and the Master Controller PCB was
not established within the specified period of time, or an error was detected.
2. Disconnection of the connector of the Relay PCB (Option Controller)
4. Relay PCB (Option Controller) error
E501-0083-61 Communication error between the Slave Controller PCB and the Cutter Controller PCB in
the Perfect Binder
Slave Controller PCB communicates with the Cutter Controller PCB.
Remedy 1. Disconnection of the connector of the Slave Controller PCB
2. Disconnection of the connector of the Cutter Controller PCB
4. Cutter Controller PCB error
1477
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E501-0084-61 Communication error between the Slave Controller PCB and the Cutter Controller PCB in
the Perfect Binder
Cutter Controller PCB communicates with the Slave Controller PCB.
Remedy 1. Disconnection of the connector of the Slave Controller PCB
2. Disconnection of the connector of the Cutter Controller PCB
E501-FF01-71 Communication error (Insertion Unit-N1)

Detection Description Timeout error of communication start between the inserter control PCB and the option controller
PCB
- Harnesses from the Insertion Unit Controller PCB (PCB3) to the Option Controller PCB
- Insertion Unit Controller PCB
- Option Controller PCB
[Reference] When replacing the Insertion Unit Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Adjustment
when Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.
E501-FF02-71 Communication error (Insertion Unit-N1)

Detection Description Timeout error of communication end between the inserter control PCB and the option controller
PCB
- Harnesses from the Insertion Unit Controller PCB (PCB3) to the Option Controller PCB
- Insertion Unit Controller PCB
- Option Controller PCB
[Reference] When replacing the Insertion Unit Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Adjustment
when Replacing the Parts" in the Service Manual.

Detection Description FIN-AN1/SADDLE FIN-AN2/PAPR FOLDING UNIT-J1
A communication error between the Finisher and the Paper Folding Unit was detected.
Remedy FIN-AN1/SADDLE FIN-AN2/PAPR FOLDING UNIT-J1
[Related parts]
- AC Cable of the Paper Folding Unit
- Cable between the Finisher and the Paper Folding Unit
- Paper Folding Unit Controller PCB
- Finisher Controller PCB (UN3) (Unit of replacement: FINISHER CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y)
[Points to note at work] When checking the harness/cable or connector, perform the following work.
1. Disconnect and then connect the connector to check that there is no bent pin and cable
disconnection.
2. Visually check that the harness is not caught or open circuit.
3. If there is any error, replace the corresponding harness/cable.
1. Check that the breaker of the Paper Folding Unit is ON.
2. Check that the Power Supply Cable is connected to the Paper Folding Unit/there is electrical
current in the outlet.
[Reference] After replacement of the Finisher Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Adjustment
when Replacing the Parts> Points to Note when Replacing the Finisher Controller PCB" in the
Service Manual for the Finisher.
[Reference] After replacement of the Paper Folding Unit Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustments>
Adjustment when Replacing the Parts> Points to Note when Replacing the DC Controller PCB" in
the Service Manual for the Paper Folding Unit.
1478
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E503-0051-31 Communication error in the Multi Function Professional Puncher

Detection Description M.F PRO PUNCHER-A1
A communication error was detected in the Multi Function Professional Puncher.
Remedy M.F PRO PUNCHER-A1
- Harness between the BOARD, COMMUNICATION and the BOARD, OPCON PCB
- BOARD, COMMUNICATION
- BOARD, OPCON PCB

- The puncher did not become start status within 3 sec although the operation start signal was sent
when starting a job.
- The puncher did not become stop status within 3 sec although the end signal was sent at
completion of a job.
- Harness between the BRACKET, INTERLOCK, FRONT DOOR and the BOARD,
COMMUNICATION
- BRACKET, INTERLOCK, FRONT DOOR
[Remedy]
1. If there is any residual paper in the Multi Function Professional Puncher, remove it.
2. If the Door Open message does not disappear, check/replace the related harness/cable,
connector and parts between the BOARD, COMMUNICATION and the BRACKET, INTERLOCK,
FRONT DOOR.

- Status of the ready-to-operate signal did not become ON at power-on or recovery from energy
saver mode.
- Version information could not be communicated within the Multi Function Professional Puncher.
- Harness between the BRACKET, INTERLOCK, FRONT DOOR and the BOARD,
COMMUNICATION
- BRACKET, INTERLOCK, FRONT DOOR
- BOARD, OPCON PCB
[Remedy]
1. If there is any residual paper in the Multi Function Professional Puncher, remove it.
2. If the Door Open message does not disappear, check/replace the related harness/cable,
connector and parts between the BOARD, COMMUNICATION and the BRACKET, INTERLOCK,
FRONT DOOR.
3. Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts between the BOARD,
COMMUNICATION and the BOARD, OPCON PCB.
1479
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

The status of connection signal from the puncher did not become ON at power-on.
- BOARD, OPCON PCB
[Remedy]
1. Check the connector connection between the BOARD, COMMUNICATION and the BOARD,
OPCON PCB.

A communication error between the Finisher and the Trimmer was detected.
- AC Cable of the Trimmer
- Cable between the Finisher and the Trimmer
[Actions after clearing the error]
If the customer sets the limited functions mode, log in as an administrator and clear the limited
functions mode by the following procedure.
Settings/Registration> Management Settings> Device Management> Limited Functions Mode>
OFF

A communication error between the Finisher and the Paper Folding Unit was detected.
- AC Cable of the Paper Folding Unit
- Cable between the Finisher and the Paper Folding Unit
1. Check that the breaker of the Paper Folding Unit is ON.
2. Check that the Power Supply Cable is connected to the Paper Folding Unit/there is electrical
current in the outlet.
OFF
E505-0001-61 Error in EEPROM of the Perfect Binder

Detection Description PERFECT BINDER-E1
The value written in EEPROM and the value read from EEPROM were not matched.
Remedy PERFECT BINDER-E1
Master Controller PCB error
1480
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E505-0001-71 Backup data error (failed data reading)

Data failed to be read properly
Remedy Replace the Insertion Unit controller PCB.
E505-0002-61 Error in EEPROM of the Perfect Binder

The EEPROM was not recovered from the busy status when writing data in EEPROM.
Master Controller PCB error
E505-0002-71 Backup data error (failure in writing data)

Data could not be written correctly.
Remedy INSERTION UNIT-N1
Replace the Insertion Unit controller PCB.
E505-0008-02 Backup data error (failed data reading)

Detection Description PAPER FOLDING UNIT-J1
Data failed to be read properly
Remedy Replace the DC controller PCB.
E505-0009-02 Data could not be written correctly.

Data could not be written correctly.
Remedy PAPER FOLDING UNIT-J1
DC Controller PCB replacement
E508-0082-61 Communication error between the Perfect Binder and the Inserter
Detection Description Failure in initialization communication occurred while a connection with the Inserter was detected.
1. Connector of the Inserter Controller PCB
2. Connector of the Master Controller PCB
3. Relay Connector between the Inserter and the Perfect Binder
4. Inserter Controller PCB error
1. Check that the breaker of the Insertion Unit is ON.
2. Check that the Power Supply Cable is connected to the Insertion Unit/there is electrical current
in the outlet.
E508-0083-61 Communication error between the Perfect Binder and the Inserter
Detection Description Communication error between the Perfect Binder and the Inserter occurred.
1. Connector of the Inserter Controller PCB
2. Connector of the Master Controller PCB
3. Relay Connector between the Inserter and the Perfect Binder
4. Inserter Controller PCB error
1. Check that the breaker of the Insertion Unit is ON.
2. Check that the Power Supply Cable is connected to the Insertion Unit/there is electrical current
in the outlet.
E509-0001-51 Internal Software Error

Detection Description Internal Software Error
Remedy -
1481
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E509-0001-52 Internal Software Error

Detection Description Internal Software Error
Remedy -
E509-0002-02 Software authentication error

An error in the combination of the BOOTROM and the firmware was detected.
Reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory.
E509-0002-11 Mismatch of software in the POD Deck

Detection Description POD DECK-D1
The ACC identification code written in the software for the POD Deck was not matched.
Remedy POD DECK-D1
1. Connect the POD Deck (POD DECK-D1) for this model.
2. Reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory.
E509-0002-12 Mismatch of software in the POD Deck

Detection Description SECONDARY POD DECK-D1
The ACC identification code written in the software for the POD Deck was not matched.
Remedy SECONDARY POD DECK-D1
1. Connect the POD Deck (SECONDARY POD DECK-D1) for this model.
2. Reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory.
E509-0003-61 Software combination error of the Perfect Binder

Detection Description a. Combination of the host machine and the Perfect Binder ID was not correct.
b. Product codes for the Option Controller PCB and the Perfect Binder were not matched.
c. Version of the firmware was not supported by the Perfect Binder.
Remedy 1. Option Controller PCB error
E509-0004-02 Software authentication error

The wrong Trimmer was connected.
[Remedy] Connect the Trimmer-D1.
OFF
E509-0051-31 Mismatch of software in the Multi Function Professional Puncher.

Mismatch of software in the Multi Function Professional Puncher was detected.
E509-0052-31 Mismatch of version in the Multi Function Professional Puncher.

Mismatch of version of software in the Multi Function Professional Puncher was detected.
E510-0001-51 Stacker CTS powerfailure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in the Stacker CTS motor(M2)
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker CTS motor[21M2]".
Check wiring harness and connections,repair if necessary.
1482
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E510-0001-52 Stacker CTS powerfailure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in the Stacker CTS motor(M2)
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker CTS motor[21M2]".
E510-0002-51 Stacker input drive21M1a power failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in the Stacker Input Motor1a
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker Input Mo-tor [21M1a]".
Check the wiring harness and connec-tions, repair if necessary
Check / Replace "PBA, Stacker Spider IO[21PBA02] "
E510-0002-52 Stacker input drive21M1a power failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in the Stacker Input Motor1a
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker Input Mo-tor [21M1a]".
Check the wiring harness and connec-tions, repair if necessary
Check / Replace "PBA, Stacker Spider IO[21PBA02] "
E510-0003-51 Stacker reg inputdrive power failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in the Stacker RegistrationInput Motor
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker RegistrationInput Motor [21M31]".
Check wiring harness and connections,repair if necessary
Check / Replace the "PBA, Stacker SpiderIO [21PBA02] "
E510-0003-52 Stacker reg inputdrive power failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in the Stacker RegistrationInput Motor
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker RegistrationInput Motor [21M31]".
E510-0004-51 Stacker tra drivepower failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in the Stacker TrajectoryMotor
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker TrajectoryMotor [21M32]".
E510-0004-52 Stacker tra drivepower failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in the Stacker TrajectoryMotor
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker TrajectoryMotor [21M32]".
E510-0005-51 Stacker input drive21M1b power failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in the Stacker Input Motor1
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker Input Mo-tor [21M1b]"
Check / Replace "PBA, Stacker Spider IO[21PBA02] ".
E510-0005-52 Stacker input drive21M1b power failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in the Stacker Input Motor1
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker Input Mo-tor [21M1b]"
1483
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E512-0001-51 Stacker out sensors21B6 / 21B9/13/8 / 21B23power failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in one of the Stacker OutputSensors 21B6, 21B8, 21B9, 21B13 or 21B23
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker Top Sensor[21B6]".
Check / Replace the "Stacker OutputUpper Sensor [21B8]".
Check / Replace the "Stacker OutputLower Sensor [21B9]".
Check / Replace the "Stacker OutputMiddle Sensor [21B13]".
Check / Replace the "Stacker Top EmptySensor [21B23]".
E512-0001-52 Stacker out sensors21B6 / 21B9/13/8 / 21B23power failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in one of the Stacker OutputSensors 21B6, 21B8, 21B9, 21B13 or 21B23
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker Top Sensor[21B6]".
Check / Replace the "Stacker OutputUpper Sensor [21B8]".
Check / Replace the "Stacker OutputLower Sensor [21B9]".
Check / Replace the "Stacker OutputMiddle Sensor [21B13]".
Check / Replace the "Stacker Top EmptySensor [21B23]".
E512-0002-51 Stacker output 1drive power failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in the Stacker Output Motor1
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker OutputMotor 1 [21M33]"



1484
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E514-8001-02 Processing Tray HP error

The Processing Tray HP Sensor was not turned ON although 5 sec had passed after the Assist
Motor operation started.
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Processing Tray HP Sensor
1. Finisher Controller PCB (UN3/J139) to Relay Connector (31P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
JOG-T)
2. Relay Connector (31P) to Relay Connector (16P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, JOG-U)
3. Relay Connector (16P) to Processing Tray HP Sensor (PS13) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
BJOG)
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Assist Motor
JOG-T)
2. Relay Connector (J12P) to Assist Motor (M12/J632) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, JOG-U)
- Processing Tray HP Sensor (PS13)
- Assist Motor (M12)
OFF
E514-8002-02 Processing Tray HP error

The Processing Tray HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 5 sec had passed after the Assist
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Processing Tray HP Sensor
JOG-T)
3. Relay Connector (16P) to Processing Tray HP Sensor (PS13) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
BJOG)
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Assist Motor
JOG-T)
2. Relay Connector (J12P) to Assist Motor (M12/J632) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, JOG-U)
- Processing Tray HP Sensor (PS13)
- Assist Motor (M12)
OFF
1485
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E518-8001-02 Fold Feed Motor (M11) error

A lock signal was detected consecutively for a certain period of time since the Fold Feed Motor
started to be driven.
Remedy 1. Disconnection of the connector of the Fold Feed Motor
2. Fold Feed Motor error
E530-8001-02 Rear Alignment Guide HP error

The Rear Alignment Guide HP Sensor was not turned ON although 5 sec had passed after the
Rear Alignment Motor operation started.
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Rear Alignment Guide HP Sensor
JOG-T)
3. Relay Connector (16P) to Rear Alignment Guide HP Sensor (PS12/J608) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, BJOG)
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Rear Alignment Motor
JOG-T)
3. Relay Connector (16P) to Rear Alignment Motor (M10/J612) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
BJOG)
- Rear Alignment Guide HP Sensor (PS12)
- Rear Alignment Motor (M10)
OFF
1486
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E530-8002-02 Rear Alignment Guide HP error

The Rear Alignment Guide HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 5 sec had passed after the
Rear Alignment Motor operation started.
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Rear Alignment Guide HP Sensor
JOG-T)
3. Relay Connector (16P) to Rear Alignment Guide HP Sensor (PS12/J608) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, BJOG)
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Rear Alignment Motor
JOG-T)
3. Relay Connector (16P) to Rear Alignment Motor (M10/J612) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
BJOG)
- Rear Alignment Guide HP Sensor (PS12)
- Rear Alignment Motor (M10)
OFF
E531-8001-02 Staple HP error

The Staple HP Sensor was not turned ON although 0.5 sec had passed after the Staple Motor
operation started.
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Staple HP Sensor
1. Finisher Controller PCB (UN3/J122) to Relay Connector (15P) (Unit of replacement: HOLDER,
STAPLER CABLE, UPPER)
2. Relay Connector (15P) to Staple HP Sensor (PS27/J678) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
STAPLE SENSOR)
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Staple Unit
1. Finisher Controller PCB (UN3/J123) to Staple Driver PCB (UN6/J311) (Unit of replacement:
HOLDER, STAPLER CABLE, UPPER)
2. Staple Driver PCB (UN6/J315 and J316) to Staple Unit (J672 and J673) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, STAPLE ASSEMBLY)
- Staple Driver PCB (UN6) (Unit of replacement: STAPLE DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY)
- Staple HP Sensor (PS27)
- Stapler (Unit of replacement: STAPLER ASSEMBLY)
OFF
1487
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

The Staple HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 0.5 sec had passed after the Staple Motor
operation started.
STAPLE SENSOR)
2. Staple Driver PCB (UN6/J315 and J316) to Staple Unit (J672 and J673) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, STAPLE ASSEMBLY)
- Stapler (Unit of replacement: STAPLER ASSEMBLY)
OFF

The Staple HP Sensor was not turned ON although 10 sec had passed after the Staple Shift Motor
operation started.
STAPLE SENSOR)
2. Staple Driver PCB (UN6/J317) to Staple Move Motor (M21/J671) (Unit of replacement:
- Staple Move Motor (M21)
OFF
1488
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

The Staple HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 2 sec had passed after the Staple Shift Motor
operation started.
STAPLE SENSOR)
2. Staple Driver PCB (UN6/J317) to Staple Move Motor (M21/J671) (Unit of replacement:
- Staple Move Motor (M21)
OFF
E535-8001-02 Swing Guide HP error

The Swing Guide HP Sensor was not turned ON although 5 sec had passed after the Swing Guide
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Swing Guide Motor
JOG-T)
3. Relay Connector (6P) to Swing Guide Motor (M18/J630) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, YDG-
M)
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Swing Guide HP Sensor
JOG-T)
3. Relay Connector (3P) to Swing Guide HP Sensor (PS44/J616) (Unit of replacement:
OPERATION ASSEMBLY)
- Swing Guide Motor (M18)
- Swing Guide HP Sensor (PS44)
OFF
1489
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E535-8002-02 Swing Guide HP error

The Swing Guide HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 5 sec had passed after the Swing Guide
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Swing Guide Motor
JOG-T)
3. Relay Connector (6P) to Swing Guide Motor (M18/J630) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, YDG-
M)
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Swing Guide HP Sensor
JOG-T)
3. Relay Connector (3P) to Swing Guide HP Sensor (PS44/J616) (Unit of replacement:
OPERATION ASSEMBLY)
- Swing Guide Motor (M18)
- Swing Guide HP Sensor (PS44)
OFF
E537-8001-02 Front Alignment Guide HP error

The Front Alignment Guide HP Sensor was not turned ON although 5 sec had passed after the
Front Alignment Motor started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Front Alignment Guide HP Sensor
JOG-T)
3. Relay Connector (14P) to Front Alignment Guide HP Sensor (PS11/J605) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, FJOG)
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Front Alignment Motor
JOG-T)
3. Relay Connector (14P) to Front Alignment Motor (M9/J606) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
FJOG)
- Front Alignment Guide HP Sensor (PS11)
- Front Alignment Motor (M9)
OFF
1490
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E537-8002-02 Front Alignment Guide HP error

The Front Alignment Guide HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 5 sec had passed after the
Front Alignment Motor operation started.
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Front Alignment Guide HP Sensor
JOG-T)
3. Relay Connector (14P) to Front Alignment Guide HP Sensor (PS11/J605) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, FJOG)
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Front Alignment Motor
JOG-T)
3. Relay Connector (14P) to Front Alignment Motor (M9/J606) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
FJOG)
- Front Alignment Guide HP Sensor (PS11)
- Front Alignment Motor (M9)
OFF
E539-8001-02 Delivery angle change HP error

The Delivery Angle HP Sensor was not turned ON although 5 sec had passed after the Delivery
Angle Adjustment Motor started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Delivery Angle HP Sensor
JOG-T)
2. Relay Connector (25P) to Delivery Angle HP Sensor (PS45/J650) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
JOG-U)
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Delivery Angle Adjustment Motor
JOG-T)
2. Relay Connector (19P) to Delivery Angle Adjustment Motor (M28/J651) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, JOG-U)
- Delivery Angle HP Sensor (PS45)
- Delivery Angle Adjustment Motor (M28)
OFF
1491
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E539-8002-02 Delivery angle change HP error

The Delivery Angle HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 5 sec had passed after the Delivery
Angle Adjustment Motor started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Delivery Angle HP Sensor
JOG-T)
2. Relay Connector (25P) to Delivery Angle HP Sensor (PS45/J650) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
JOG-U)
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Delivery Angle Adjustment Motor
JOG-T)
2. Relay Connector (19P) to Delivery Angle Adjustment Motor (M28/J651) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, JOG-U)
- Delivery Angle HP Sensor (PS45)
- Delivery Angle Adjustment Motor (M28)
OFF
E540-8001-02 Tray A (Upper Tray) lifting error

The Tray A Lifting Motor Rotation Sensor was not turned OFF although 800 sec had passed after
the Tray A Lifting Motor started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Tray A Lifting Motor
1. Finisher Controller PCB (UN3/J109A) to Tray A Motor Driver PCB (UN10/J292A) (Unit of
replacement: CABLE ASSEMBLY, A)
2. Tray A Motor Driver PCB (UN10/J291A) to Tray A Lifting Motor (M22) (Unit of replacement:
STEPPING MOTOR UNIT)
- Tray A Lifting Motor Rotation Sensor (PS34)
- Tray A Lifting Motor (M22)
- Tray A Motor Driver PCB (UN10) (Unit of replacement: MOTOR DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY)
OFF
1492
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E540-8002-02 Tray A (Upper Tray) area error

- Tray A (Upper Tray) was detected as being at a lower position than Tray B (Lower Tray).
- The Tray A Position Sensor detected a non-contiguous area.
- Harness between the Finisher Controller PCB (UN3/J109B) and the Tray A Third Position Sensor
(PS49/J2534) (Unit of replacement: CABLE ASSEMBLY, A)
- Harness between the Finisher Controller PCB (UN3/J109B) and the Tray A Fourth Position
Sensor (PS50/J2533) (Unit of replacement: CABLE ASSEMBLY, A)
- Tray A Third Position Sensor (PS49)
- Tray A Fourth Position Sensor (PS50)
OFF
E540-80FF-02 Tray A (Upper Tray) shift timeout error

The lifting operation did not complete although 25 sec had passed after the Tray A Lifting Motor
started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Tray A Lifting Motor
1. Finisher Controller PCB (UN3/J109A) to Tray A Motor Driver PCB (UN10/J292A) (Unit of
replacement: CABLE ASSEMBLY, A)
2. Tray A Motor Driver PCB (UN10/J291A) to Tray A Lifting Motor (M22) (Unit of replacement:
- Tray A Lifting Motor Rotation Sensor (PS34)
- Tray A Lifting Motor (M22)
- Tray A Motor Driver PCB (UN10) (Unit of replacement: MOTOR DRIVER PCB ASSEMBLY)
OFF
1493
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E542-8001-02 Tray B (Lower Tray) lifting error

The Tray B Lifting Motor Rotation Sensor was not turned OFF although 800 sec had passed after
the Tray B Lifting Motor started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Tray B Lifting Motor
1. Finisher Controller PCB (UN3/J108A) to Tray B Motor Driver PCB (UN11/J292B) (Unit of
replacement: CABLE ASSEMBLY, B)
2. Tray B Motor Driver PCB (UN11/J291B) to Tray B Lifting Motor (M23) (Unit of replacement:
- Tray B Lifting Motor Rotation Sensor (PS35)
- Tray B Lifting Motor (M23)
OFF
E542-8002-02 Tray B (Lower Tray) area error

- Tray A (Upper Tray) was detected as being at a lower position than Tray B (Lower Tray).
- The Tray B Position Sensor detected a non-contiguous area.
- Harness between the Finisher Controller PCB (UN3/J108B) and the Tray B First Position Sensor
(PS51/J2543) (Unit of replacement: CABLE ASSEMBLY, B)
- Harness between the Finisher Controller PCB (UN3/J108B) and the Tray B Third Position Sensor
(PS52/J2542) (Unit of replacement: CABLE ASSEMBLY, B)
- Harness between the Finisher Controller PCB (UN3/J108B) and the Tray B Fourth Position
Sensor (PS53/J2541) (Unit of replacement: CABLE ASSEMBLY, B)
- Tray B First Position Sensor (PS51)
- Tray B Third Position Sensor (PS52)
- Tray B Fourth Position Sensor (PS53)
OFF
1494
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E542-80FF-02 Tray B (Lower Tray) shift timeout error

The lifting operation did not complete although 25 sec had passed after the Lower Tray Lifting
Motor started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Tray B Lifting Motor
1. Finisher Controller PCB (UN3/J108A) to Tray B Motor Driver PCB (UN11/J292B) (Unit of
replacement: CABLE ASSEMBLY, B)
2. Tray B Motor Driver PCB (UN11/J291B) to Tray B Lifting Motor (M23) (Unit of replacement:
- Tray B Lifting Motor Rotation Sensor (PS35)
- Tray B Lifting Motor (M23)
OFF
E544-0001-02 Upper Neat Stack Unit Return Roller HP error

The Upper Neat Stack Unit Return Roller HP Sensor was not turned ON although 1 sec had passed
after the Upper Neat Stack Unit Return Roller Lifting Motor started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Neat Driver PCB to the Upper Neat Stack Unit Return Roller Lifting Motor
1. Neat Driver PCB (UN201/J505) to Relay Connector (17P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, UPPER
NEAT)
2. Relay Connector (17P) to Upper Neat Stack Unit Return Roller Lifting Motor (M209) (Unit of
replacement: CABLE, UPPER NEAT UNIT)
- Harnesses from the Neat Driver PCB to the Upper Neat Stack Unit Return Roller HP Sensor
NEAT)
2. Relay Connector (13P) to Upper Neat Stack Unit Return Roller HP Sensor (PS209) (Unit of
- Upper Neat Stack Unit Return Roller Lifting Motor (M209)
- Upper Neat Stack Unit Return Roller HP Sensor (PS209)
1495
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E544-0002-02 Upper Neat Stack Unit Return Roller HP error

The Upper Neat Stack Unit Return Roller HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 1 sec had
passed after the Upper Neat Stack Unit Return Roller Lifting Motor started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Neat Driver PCB to the Upper Neat Stack Unit Return Roller Lifting Motor
NEAT)
2. Relay Connector (17P) to Upper Neat Stack Unit Return Roller Lifting Motor (M209) (Unit of
- Harnesses from the Neat Driver PCB to the Upper Neat Stack Unit Return Roller HP Sensor
NEAT)
2. Relay Connector (13P) to Upper Neat Stack Unit Return Roller HP Sensor (PS209) (Unit of
- Upper Neat Stack Unit Return Roller Lifting Motor (M209)
- Upper Neat Stack Unit Return Roller HP Sensor (PS209)
E548-0001-02 Lower Neat Stack Unit Return Roller HP error

The Lower Neat Stack Unit Return Roller HP Sensor was not turned ON although 1 sec had passed
after the Lower Neat Stack Unit Return Roller Lifting Motor started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Neat Driver PCB to the Lower Neat Stack Unit Return Roller Lifting Motor
1. Neat Driver PCB (UN201/J506) to Relay Connector (29P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, JOG-
T)
3. Relay Connector (5P) to Lower Neat Stack Unit Return Roller Lifting Motor (M208/J2511) (Unit
of replacement: CABLE, LWR-NEAT-RTN-RLR-UP-M)
- Harnesses from the Neat Driver PCB to the Lower Neat Stack Unit Return Roller HP Sensor
T)
4. Relay Connector (3P) to Lower Neat Stack Unit Return Roller HP Sensor (PS208/J2517) (Unit
of replacement: CABLE, YDG)
- Lower Neat Stack Unit Return Roller Lifting Motor (M208)
- Lower Neat Stack Unit Return Roller HP Sensor (PS208)
1496
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E548-0002-02 Lower Neat Stack Unit Return Roller HP error

The Lower Neat Stack Unit Return Roller HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 1 sec had
passed after the Lower Neat Stack Unit Return Roller Lifting Motor started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Neat Driver PCB to the Lower Neat Stack Unit Return Roller Lifting Motor
T)
3. Relay Connector (5P) to Lower Neat Stack Unit Return Roller Lifting Motor (M208/J2511) (Unit
of replacement: CABLE, LWR-NEAT-RTN-RLR-UP-M)
- Harnesses from the Neat Driver PCB to the Lower Neat Stack Unit Return Roller HP Sensor
T)
4. Relay Connector (3P) to Lower Neat Stack Unit Return Roller HP Sensor (PS208/J2517) (Unit
of replacement: CABLE, YDG)
- Lower Neat Stack Unit Return Roller Lifting Motor (M208)
- Lower Neat Stack Unit Return Roller HP Sensor (PS208)
E550-0001-51 +24V not presentor too low

Detection Description 24V is not detected on the IO board within apredetermined period of time after activating thepower
supply
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker PowerSupply Unit"
E550-0001-52 +24V not presentor too low

Detection Description 24V is not detected on the IO board within apredetermined period of time after activating thepower
supply
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker PowerSupply Unit"
E550-0002-61 Error in power supply check signal in Perfect Binder

Detection Description The 24V1 check signal of the Master Controller PCB showed disconnection of the power although
the Front Cover was closed.
Remedy 1. Front Cover Switch (MSW1/2/4/5/6/7) error

Detection Description a. The Master Controller PCB detected the open status of the Upper Cover Switch although the
Front Cover and the Upper Cover were closed.
b. The 24V2 check signal of the Master Controller PCB showed disconnection of the power
although the Front Cover and the Upper Cover were closed.
Remedy 1. Upper Cover Switch (MSW3) error
2. Upper Cover Open/Close Sensor (S4) error

Detection Description The 24V2 check signal of the Slave Controller PCB showed disconnection of the power although
the Front Cover and the Upper Cover were closed.
Remedy 1. Upper Cover Switch (MSW3) error
2. Upper Cover Open/Close Sensor (S4) error
4. Slave controller PCB error
1497
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The 24V3 check signal of the Slave Controller PCB showed disconnection of the power although
the Front Cover was closed.
Remedy 1. Front Cover Switch (MSW1/2/4/5/6/7) error
E551-0001-02 Power Supply Cooling Fan error

Operation was not performed although 15 sec had passed after the operation of the Power Supply
Cooling Fan 1 and 2 started.
[Related parts]
- Harness between the Finisher Controller PCB (UN3/J103) and the Power Supply Cooling Fan 1
(FM1/J1003) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DC)
- Harness between the Finisher Controller PCB (UN3/J103) and the Power Supply Cooling Fan 2
(FM4/J1020) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, DC)
- Power Supply Cooling Fan 1and 2 (FM1 and FM4)
disconnection.
E551-0001-61 Perfect Binder Power Supply Cooling Fan (Right) (FM1) error
A lock signal of the Power Supply Cooling Fan (Right) was detected.
1. Power Supply Cooling Fan (Right) (FM1) error
E551-0001-71 Power Supply Fan (F1) error

-Lock signal ON was detected while the Power Supply Fan was being driven.
- Lock signal OFF was detected while the Power Supply Fan was stopped.
Remedy INSERTION UNIT-N1
1. Power Supply Fan connector disconnection
2. Replace the Power Supply Fan.
1498
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E551-0002-02 Feed Cooling Fan error

Operation was not performed although 15 sec had passed after the Feed Cooling Fan operation
started.
[Related parts]
-Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Feed Cooling Fan 1
FEED UNIT)
2. Relay Connector (3P) to Feed Cooling Fan 1 (FM2/J518L)
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Feed Cooling Fan 2
FEED UNIT)
- Feed Cooling Fan 1 (FM2)
disconnection.
E551-0002-61 Feed Cooling Fan error

The Feed Cooling Fan 1 and 2 did not work although 15 sec had passed since the start of operation.
FEED UNIT)
FEED UNIT)
E551-0003-61 Error in Power Supply Cooling Fan (Left) (FM3) of Perfect Binder
Detection Description The lock signal of the Power Supply Cooling Fan (Left) was detected.
Remedy 1. Power Supply Cooling Fan (Left) (FM3) error
E551-0004-02 Power Supply Fan (F1) error

- Lock signal ON was detected while the Power Supply Fan was being driven.
- Lock signal OFF was detected while the Power Supply Fan was stopped.
Remedy PAPER FOLDING UNIT-J1
1. Power Supply Fan connector disconnection
2. Power Supply Fan error
1499
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E551-0004-61 Error in Spine Plate Lower Cooling Fan (Front) (FM10) of Perfect Binder
Detection Description The lock signal of the Spine Plate Lower Cooling Fan (Front) (FM10) was detected.
Remedy 1. Spine Plate Lower Cooling Fan (Front) (FM10) error
E551-0005-61 Error in Spine Plate Lower Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM11) of Perfect Binder
Detection Description The lock signal of the Spine Plate Lower Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM11) was detected.
Remedy 1. Spine Plate Lower Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM11) error
E551-0006-61 Error in Spine Plate Upper Cooling Fan (Front) (FM12) of Perfect Binder
Detection Description The lock signal of the Spine Plate Upper Cooling Fan (Front) (FM12) was detected.
Remedy 1. Spine Plate Upper Cooling Fan (Front) (FM12) error
E551-0007-61 Error in Spine Plate Upper Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM13) of Perfect Binder
Detection Description The lock signal of the Spine Plate Upper Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM13) was detected.
Remedy 1. Spine Plate Upper Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM13) error
E551-0008-61 Error in Signature Cooling 2 Fan (Front) (FM6) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The lock signal of the Signature Cooling 2 Fan (Front) (FM6) was detected.
Remedy 1. Signature Cooling 2 Fan (Front) (FM6) error
E551-0009-61 Error in Signature Cooling 2 Fan (Rear) (FM7) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The lock signal of the Signature Cooling 2 Fan (Rear) (FM7) was detected.
Remedy 1. Signature Cooling 2 Fan (Rear) (FM7) error
E551-000A-61 Error in Signature Cooling 1 Fan (Front) (FM8) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The lock signal of the Signature Cooling 1 Fan (Front) (FM8) was detected.
Remedy 1. Signature Cooling 1 Fan (Front) (FM8) error
E551-000B-61 Error in Signature Cooling 1 Fan (Rear) (FM9) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The lock signal of the Signature Cooling 1 Fan (Rear) (FM9) was detected.
Remedy 1. Signature Cooling 1 Fan (Rear) (FM9) error
E551-000C-61 Error in Glue Supply Cooling Fan (Upper) (FM4) of Perfect Binder
Detection Description The lock signal of the Glue Supply Cooling Fan (Upper) (FM4) was detected.
Remedy 1. Glue Supply Cooling Fan (Upper) (FM4) error
E551-000D-61 Error in Glue Supply Cooling Fan (Lower) (FM5) of Perfect Binder
Detection Description The lock signal of the Glue Supply Cooling Fan (Lower) (FM5) was detected.
Remedy 1. Glue Supply Cooling Fan (Lower) (FM5) error
E551-000E-61 Error in Blower Fan (FM14).

The lock signal of the Blower Fan (FM14) was detected.
Remedy 1. Blower Fan (FM14) error
1500
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E551-000F-61 Exhaust FAN (right)(FM15) error

The lock signal of the Exhaust FAN (right)(FM15) was detected.
Remedy 1. Exhaust FAN (right)(FM15) error
E551-0010-61 Exhaust FAN (left)(FM16) error

The lock signal of the Exhaust FAN (left) (FM16) was detected.
Remedy 1. Exhaust FAN (left)(FM16) error
E551-800E-61 Error in Blower Fan(FM14).

The lock signal of the Blower Fan(FM14) was detected.
Remedy 1. Blower Fan(FM14) error
E551-800F-61 Exhaust FAN (right)(FM15)error

The lock signal of the Exhaust FAN (right) (FM15) was detected.
Remedy 1. Exhaust FAN (right)(FM15) error
E551-8010-61 Exhaust FAN (left)(FM16) error

The lock signal of the Exhaust FAN (left) (FM16) was detected.
Remedy 1. Exhaust FAN (left)(FM16) error
E562-8001-02 Error in Deceleration Timing Sensor (S30)

The light-receiving amount was not within the threshold level although the light-emitting amount
of the sensor was adjusted to be within the threshold level.
Remedy 1. Disconnection of the connector of the Deceleration Timing Sensor
2. Sensor error
E562-8002-02 Error in Disengagement Timing Sensor (S31)

Remedy 1. Disconnection of the connector of the Disengagement Timing Sensor
2. Sensor error
E562-8003-02 Error in Folding Position Accuracy Sensor (S32)

Remedy 1. Disconnection of the connector of the Folding Position Accuracy Sensor
2. Sensor error
E562-8004-02 Error in Upper Stopper HP Sensor (S23)

Remedy 1. Disconnection of the connector of the Upper Stopper HP Sensor
2. Sensor error
1501
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E566-0001-51 Stacker SZ slidepower failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in SZ registration slide assy
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker RegistrationSledge Carriage"
E566-0001-52 Stacker SZ slidepower failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in SZ registration slide assy
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker RegistrationSledge Carriage"
E566-8001-02 Side Registration Detection Unit HP error

The Side Registration Detection Unit HP Sensor was not turned ON although 3 sec had passed
after the Side Registration Detection Unit Shift Motor started the operation.
- Harness between the Feed Motor Driver PCB (UN5/J281) and the Side Registration Detection
Unit Shift Motor (M6/J530)
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Side Registration Detection Unit HP Sensor
FEED UNIT)
2. Relay Connector (3P) to Side Registration Detection Unit HP Sensor (PS7/J512) (Unit of
replacement: DETECT DRIVE ASSEMBLY)
- Side Registration Detection Unit Shift Motor (M6)
- Side Registration Detection Unit HP Sensor (PS7)
OFF
E566-8002-02 Side Registration Detection Unit HP error

The Side Registration Detection Unit HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 3 sec had passed
after the Side Registration Detection Unit Shift Motor started the operation.
- Harness between the Feed Motor Driver PCB (UN5/J281) and the Side Registration Detection
Unit Shift Motor (M6/J530)
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Side Registration Detection Unit HP Sensor
FEED UNIT)
2. Relay Connector (3P) to Side Registration Detection Unit HP Sensor (PS7/J512) (Unit of
replacement: DETECT DRIVE ASSEMBLY)
- Side Registration Detection Unit Shift Motor (M6)
- Side Registration Detection Unit HP Sensor (PS7)
OFF
1502
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E566-8002-51 Stacker SZ framepower failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in SZ registration frame assy
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker RegistrationSledge Frame".
E566-8002-52 Stacker SZ framepower failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in SZ registration frame assy
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker RegistrationSledge Frame".
E566-8003-51 Stacker reg inputsolenoid 21Y2 power failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in Stacker Registration InputSolenoid 1
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker RegistrationInput Solenoid 1 [21Y2]".

Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker RegistrationInput Solenoid 1 [21Y2]".

Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker RegistrationInput Solenoid 2 [21Y3] "

Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker RegistrationInput Solenoid 2 [21Y3] "
E566-8005-51 Stacker SZ sensorpower failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in SZ registration sensorassy
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker RegistrationSensor assy".
E566-8005-52 Stacker SZ sensorpower failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in SZ registration sensorassy
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker RegistrationSensor assy".
1503
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E567-8001-02 Shift Roller Unit HP error

The Shift Roller Unit HP Sensor was not turned ON although 5 sec had passed after the operation
started.
- Harness between the Feed Motor Driver PCB (UN5/J282) and the Side Registration Shift Motor
(M7/J532)
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Shift Roller Unit HP Sensor
FEED UNIT)
2. Relay Connector (3P) to Shift Roller Unit HP Sensor (PS8/J513) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
SHIFT)
- Side Registration Shift Motor (M7)
- Shift Roller Unit HP Sensor (PS8)
OFF
E567-8002-02 Shift Roller Unit HP error

The Shift Roller Unit HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 5 sec had passed after the operation
started.
- Harness between the Feed Motor Driver PCB (UN5/J282) and the Side Registration Shift Motor
(M7/J532)
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Shift Roller Unit HP Sensor
FEED UNIT)
2. Relay Connector (3P) to Shift Roller Unit HP Sensor (PS8/J513) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
SHIFT)
- Side Registration Shift Motor (M7)
- Shift Roller Unit HP Sensor (PS8)
OFF
1504
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E568-8001-02 Feed Roller HP error

The Feed Roller HP Sensor was not turned ON although 5 sec had passed after the Feed Roller
Disengagement Motor started the operation.
- Harness between the Feed Motor Driver PCB (UN5/J286) and the Feed Roller Disengagement
Motor (M8/J535) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, GUIDE UPPER)
- Harness between the Feed Motor Driver PCB (UN5/J286) to the Feed Roller HP Sensor (PS9/
J538) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, GUIDE UPPER)
- Feed Roller Disengagement Motor (M8)
- Feed Roller HP Sensor (PS9)
OFF
E568-8002-02 Feed Roller HP error

The Feed Roller HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 5 sec had passed after the Feed Roller
- Harness between the Feed Motor Driver PCB (UN5/J286) and the Feed Roller Disengagement
Motor (M8/J535) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, GUIDE UPPER)
- Harness between the Feed Motor Driver PCB (UN5/J286) to the Feed Roller HP Sensor (PS9/
J538) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, GUIDE UPPER)
- Feed Roller Disengagement Motor (M8)
- Feed Roller HP Sensor (PS9)
OFF
E569-8003-02 Upper Stopper Motor failed to leave HP

The sensor was not turned OFF although the Upper Stopper Motor was driven by the specified-
pulse while the Upper Stopper HP Sensor was ON.
Remedy 1. Check the connector of the upper stopper motor (M8).
2. Replace the upper stopper motor.
3. Check the connector of the upper stopper HP sensor (S23).
4. Replace the upper stopper HP sensor.
1505
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E569-8004-02 Upper Stopper Motor failed to return to HP

The sensor was not turned ON although the Upper Stopper Motor was driven by the specified-
pulse while the Upper Stopper HP Sensor was OFF.
Remedy 1. Check the connector of the upper stopper motor (M8).
2. Replace the upper stopper motor.
3. Check the connector of the upper stopper HP sensor (S23).
4. Replace the upper stopper HP sensor.
E56A-8001-02 C-fold Stopper Motor failed to leave HP

The sensor was not turned OFF although the C-fold Stopper Motor was driven by the specified-
pulse while the C-fold Stopper Motor HP Sensor was ON.
Remedy 1. Disconnection of the connector of the C-fold Stopper Motor (M9)
2. C-fold Stopper Motor error
3. Disconnection of the connector of the C-fold Stopper Motor HP Sensor (S24)
4. C-fold Stopper Motor HP Sensor error
E56A-8002-02 C-fold Stopper Motor failed to return to HP

The sensor was not turned ON although the C-fold Stopper Motor was driven by the specified-
pulse while the C-fold Stopper Motor HP Sensor was OFF.
Remedy 1. Check the connector of the C-fold stopper motor (M9).
2. Replace the C-fold stopper motor.
3. Check the connector of the C-fold stopper motor HP sensor (S24)
4. Replace the C-fold stopper motor HP sensor.
E56B-8001-02 Fold Tray Motor failed to leave HP

The sensor was not turned OFF although the Fold Tray Motor was driven by the specified-pulse
while the Fold Tray HP Sensor was ON.
Remedy 1. Check the connector of the folding tray motor (M7).
2. Replace the folding tray motor.
3. Check the connector of the folding tray HP sensor (S28)
4. Replace the folding tray HP sensor.
E56B-8002-02 Fold Tray Motor failed to return to HP

The sensor was not turned ON although the Fold Tray Motor was driven by the specified-pulse
while the Fold Tray HP Sensor was OFF.
Remedy 1. Check the connector of the folding tray motor (M7).
2. Replace the folding tray motor.
3. Check the connector of the folding tray HP sensor (S28)
4. Replace the folding tray HP sensor.
E56C-0001-51 Stacker coverpower failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in the safety interlocks
Remedy Check wiring harness and connectionsbetween the Cover Switches and the"PBA, Stacker Spider
IO [21PBA02] ",repair if necessary
E56C-0001-52 Stacker coverpower failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in the safety interlocks
Remedy Check wiring harness and connectionsbetween the Cover Switches and the"PBA, Stacker Spider
IO [21PBA02] ",repair if necessary
E56C-0002-51 Stacker tra sensor21B7 power failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in Stacker Transport Inputsensor
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker TransportInput Sensor [21B7]".
1506
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E56C-0002-52 Stacker tra sensor21B7 power failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in Stacker Transport Inputsensor
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker TransportInput Sensor [21B7]".
E56C-0003-51 Stacker CTSsolenoid power failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in the CTS DeflectorSolenoid
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker CTS Deflec-tor Solenoid [21Y1]"
Check the wiring harness and connec-tions, repair if necessary.
E56C-0003-52 Stacker CTSsolenoid power failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in the CTS DeflectorSolenoid
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker CTS Deflec-tor Solenoid [21Y1]"
Check the wiring harness and connec-tions, repair if necessary.
E56C-0004-51 Stacker flipsolenoid power failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in the Stacker Flip DeflectorSolenoid
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker Flip Deflec-tor Solenoid [21Y4]".
E56C-0004-52 Stacker flipsolenoid power failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in the Stacker Flip DeflectorSolenoid
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker Flip Deflec-tor Solenoid [21Y4]".
E56C-0005-51 Stacker topsolenoid power failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in the Stacker Top DeflectorSolenoid
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker Top Deflec-tor Solenoid [21Y5]".
E56C-0005-52 Stacker topsolenoid power failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in the Stacker Top DeflectorSolenoid
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker Top Deflec-tor Solenoid [21Y5]".
E56C-0006-51 Illegal power state+24V RED

Detection Description Error detected in safety circuit of RED zone
Remedy Check / Replace the "PBA, Stacker SpiderIO [21PBA02] "
E56C-0006-52 Illegal power state+24V RED

Detection Description Error detected in safety circuit of RED zone
E56C-0007-51 Illegal power state+24V BLUE

Detection Description Error detected in safety circuit of BLUE zone
E56C-0007-52 Illegal power state+24V BLUE

Detection Description Error detected in safety circuit of BLUE zone
E56C-0008-51 Illegal power state+24V GREEN

Detection Description Error detected in safety circuit of GREEN zone
1507
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E56C-0008-52 Illegal power state+24V GREEN

Detection Description Error detected in safety circuit of GREEN zone
E56C-0009-51 STADFD5V_Power Fail

Detection Description DFD Interface Power 5V Fail
Remedy Check DFD Interface Connection
E56C-0009-52 STADFD5V_PowerFail
Detection Description DFD Interface Power 5V Fail
Remedy Check DFD Interface Connection
E56C-0010-51 Illegal power state +24V

Detection Description Illegal power state +24V
Remedy 1 Check / Replace the PBA, Stacker Spider IO
Check wiring harness and connections, repairif necessary.
E56C-0010-52 Illegal power state +24V

Detection Description Illegal power state +24V
Remedy 1 Check / Replace the PBA, Stacker Spider IO
Check wiring harness and connections, repairif necessary.
E56C-0011-51 Stacker input sen-sors 21B3 21B4 power failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in Stacker Input In sensoror Stacker Input Out sensor
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker Input InSensor [21B3]".
Check / Replace the "Stacker Input OutSensor [21B4]".
Check wiring harness and connection,repair if necessary.
E56C-0011-52 Stacker input sen-sors 21B3 21B4 power failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in Stacker Input In sensoror Stacker Input Out sensor
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker Input InSensor [21B3]".
Check / Replace the "Stacker Input OutSensor [21B4]".
Check wiring harness and connection,repair if necessary.
E56C-0012-51 Stacker CTS sen-sor 21B5 power failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in Stacker Copy Turn sensor
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker Copy TurnSensor [21B5]".
E56C-0012-52 Stacker CTS sen-sor 21B5 power failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in Stacker Copy Turn sensor
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker Copy TurnSensor [21B5]".
E56C-0013-51 Stacker reg inputsensor 21B18 power failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in Stacker Registration Inputsensor
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker Reg InputSensor [21B18]".
E56C-0013-52 Stacker reg inputsensor 21B18 power failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in Stacker Registration Inputsensor
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker Reg InputSensor [21B18]".
1508
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E56E-8001-02 Leading Edge Retainer Guide Motor failed to leave HP

The sensor was not turned OFF although the Leading Edge Retainer Guide Motor was driven by
the specified-pulse while the Leading Edge Retainer Guide HP Sensor was ON.
Remedy 1. Check the connector of the Leading Edge Retainer Guide Motor (M10)
2. Replace the Leading Edge Retainer Guide Motor
3. Check the connector of the Leading Edge Retainer Guide HP Sensor (S25)
4. Replace the Leading Edge Retainer Guide HP Sensor
E56E-8002-02 Leading Edge Retainer Guide Motor failed to return to HP

The sensor was not turned ON although the Leading Edge Retainer Guide Motor was driven by
the specified-pulse while the Leading Edge Retainer Guide HP Sensor was OFF.
Remedy 1. Check the connector of the Leading Edge Retainer Guide Motor (M10)
2. Replace the Leading Edge Retainer Guide Motor
3. Check the connector of the Leading Edge Retainer Guide HP Sensor (S25)
4. Replace the Leading Edge Retainer Guide HP Sensor
E56F-8001-02 Inlet Roller HP error

The Inlet Roller HP Sensor was not turned ON although 5 sec had passed after the Inlet Roller
- Harnesses from the Feed Motor Driver PCB to the Inlet Roller Disengagement Motor
1. Feed Motor Driver PCB (UN5/J278) to Relay Connector (11P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
FEED UNIT)
2. Relay Connector (11P) to Inlet Roller Disengagement Motor (M27/J542) (Unit of replacement:
ESTRANGEMENT MOTOR ASS'Y)
- Harnesses from the Feed Motor Driver PCB to the Inlet Roller HP Sensor
FEED UNIT)
2. Relay Connector (11P) to Inlet Roller HP Sensor (PS43/J544) (Unit of replacement:
- Inlet Roller Disengagement Motor (M27)
- Inlet Roller HP Sensor (PS43)
OFF
1509
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E56F-8002-02 Inlet Roller HP error

The Inlet Roller HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 5 sec had passed after the Inlet Roller
- Harnesses from the Feed Motor Driver PCB to the Inlet Roller Disengagement Motor
FEED UNIT)
2. Relay Connector (11P) to Inlet Roller Disengagement Motor (M27/J542) (Unit of replacement:
- Harnesses from the Feed Motor Driver PCB to the Inlet Roller HP Sensor
FEED UNIT)
2. Relay Connector (11P) to Inlet Roller HP Sensor (PS43/J544) (Unit of replacement:
- Inlet Roller Disengagement Motor (M27)
- Inlet Roller HP Sensor (PS43)
OFF
E577-8001-02 Paddle rotation HP error

The Paddle Rotation HP Sensor was not turned ON although 5 sec had passed after the Paddle
Rotation Motor started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Paddle Rotation Motor
JOG-T)
3. Relay Connector (5P) to Paddle Rotation Motor (M14/J628) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, PDL-
ROT-M-T)
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Paddle Rotation HP Sensor
JOG-T)
3. Relay Connector (3P) to Paddle Rotation HP Sensor (PS20/J619) (Unit of replacement:
OPERATION ASSEMBLY)
- Paddle Rotation Motor (M14)
- Paddle Rotation HP Sensor (PS20)
OFF
1510
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E577-8002-02 Paddle rotation HP error

The Paddle Rotation HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 5 sec had passed after the Paddle
Rotation Motor started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Paddle Rotation Motor
JOG-T)
3. Relay Connector (5P) to Paddle Rotation Motor (M14/J628) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, PDL-
ROT-M-T)
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Paddle Rotation HP Sensor
JOG-T)
3. Relay Connector (3P) to Paddle Rotation HP Sensor (PS20/J619) (Unit of replacement:
OPERATION ASSEMBLY)
- Paddle Rotation Motor (M14)
- Paddle Rotation HP Sensor (PS20)
OFF
E577-8003-02 Paddle lifting HP error

The Paddle Lifting HP Sensor was not turned ON although 5 sec had passed after the Paddle
Lifting Motor started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Paddle Lifting Motor
JOG-T)
2. Relay Connector (19P) to Paddle Lifting Motor (M15/J627) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, JOG-
U)
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Paddle Lifting HP Sensor
JOG-T)
2. Relay Connector (25P) to Paddle Lifting HP Sensor (PS21/J613) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
JOG-U)
- Paddle Lifting Motor (M15)
- Paddle Lifting HP Sensor (PS21)
OFF
1511
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E577-8004-02 Paddle lifting HP error

The Paddle Lifting HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 5 sec had passed after the Paddle
Lifting Motor started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Paddle Lifting Motor
JOG-T)
2. Relay Connector (19P) to Paddle Lifting Motor (M15/J627) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, JOG-
U)
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Paddle Lifting HP Sensor
JOG-T)
2. Relay Connector (25P) to Paddle Lifting HP Sensor (PS21/J613) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
JOG-U)
- Paddle Lifting Motor (M15)
- Paddle Lifting HP Sensor (PS21)
OFF
E578-8001-02 Feed knurling HP error

The Feed Belt HP Sensor was not turned ON although 5 sec had passed after the Feed Shift Motor
started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Feed Belt Shift Motor
FEED UNIT)
2. Relay Connector (11P) to Feed Belt Shift Motor (M17/J640) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
KNURLED UNIT)
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Feed Belt HP Sensor
FEED UNIT)
2. Relay Connector (11P) to Feed Belt HP Sensor (PS25/J639) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
KNURLED UNIT)
- Feed Belt Shift Motor (M17)
- Feed Belt HP Sensor (PS25)
OFF
1512
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E578-8002-02 Feed knurling HP error

The Feed Belt HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 5 sec had passed after the Feed Shift
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Feed Belt Shift Motor
FEED UNIT)
2. Relay Connector (11P) to Feed Belt Shift Motor (M17/J640) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
KNURLED UNIT)
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Feed Belt HP Sensor
FEED UNIT)
2. Relay Connector (11P) to Feed Belt HP Sensor (PS25/J639) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
KNURLED UNIT)
- Feed Belt Shift Motor (M17)
- Feed Belt HP Sensor (PS25)
OFF
E57A-8001-02 Process Tray HP error

The Process Tray HP Sensor was not turned ON although 5 sec had passed after the Process
Stopper Shift Motor started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Process Stopper Shift Motor
JOG-T)
3. Relay Connector (14P) to Process Stopper Shift Motor (M11/J607) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, FJOG)
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Process Tray HP Sensor
JOG-T)
3. Relay Connector (16P) to Process Tray HP Sensor (PS13/J611) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
BJOG)
- Process Stopper Shift Motor (M11)
- Process Tray HP Sensor (PS13)
OFF
1513
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E57A-8002-02 Process Tray HP error

The Process Tray HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 5 sec had passed after the Process
Stopper Shift Motor started the operation.
JOG-T)
CABLE, FJOG)
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Process Tray HP Sensor
JOG-T)
3. Relay Connector (16P) to Process Tray HP Sensor (PS13/J611) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
BJOG)
- Process Tray HP Sensor (PS13)
OFF
E57A-8003-02 Process Stopper operation error

Operation could not be started because the Process Stopper interfered with the Stapler.
JOG-T)
CABLE, FJOG)
OFF
1514
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E57B-8001-02 Paper Trailing Edge Drop Guide HP error

The Paper Trailing Edge Drop Guide HP Sensor was not turned ON although 5 sec had passed
after the Paper Trailing Edge Drop Motor started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Feed Motor Driver PCB to the Paper Trailing Edge Drop Guide HP Sensor
1. Feed Motor Driver PCB (UN5/J277) to Relay Connector (7P)
2. Relay Connector (7P) to Paper Trailing Edge Drop Guide HP Sensor (PS24/J510) (Unit of
replacement: CABLE, DNSORT SENSOR)
- Paper Trailing Edge Drop Motor (M16)
- Paper Trailing Edge Drop Guide HP Sensor (PS24)
OFF
E57B-8002-02 Paper Trailing Edge Drop Guide HP error

The Paper Trailing Edge Drop Guide HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 5 sec had passed
after the Paper Trailing Edge Drop Motor started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Feed Motor Driver PCB to the Paper Trailing Edge Drop Guide HP Sensor
1. Feed Motor Driver PCB (UN5/J277) to Relay Connector (7P)
2. Relay Connector (7P) to Paper Trailing Edge Drop Guide HP Sensor (PS24/J510) (Unit of
replacement: CABLE, DNSORT SENSOR)
- Paper Trailing Edge Drop Motor (M16)
- Paper Trailing Edge Drop Guide HP Sensor (PS24)
OFF
1515
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E57C-8001-02 Upper Guide HP Error

The Upper Guide HP Sensor was not turned ON although 5 sec had passed after the Upper Guide
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Upper Guide Motor
FEED UNIT)
2. Relay Connector (11P) to Upper Guide Motor (M20/J641) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
KNURLED UNIT)
- Harness between the Finisher Controller PCB (UN3/J127) and the Upper Guide HP Sensor
(PS26/J638) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FEED UNIT)
- Upper Guide Motor (M20)
- Upper Guide HP Sensor (PS26)
OFF
E57C-8002-02 Upper Guide HP Error

The Upper Guide HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 5 sec had passed after the Upper Guide
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Upper Guide Motor
FEED UNIT)
2. Relay Connector (11P) to Upper Guide Motor (M20/J641) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
KNURLED UNIT)
- Harness between the Finisher Controller PCB (UN3/J127) and the Upper Guide HP Sensor
(PS26/J638) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, FEED UNIT)
- Upper Guide Motor (M20)
- Upper Guide HP Sensor (PS26)
OFF
E580-8001-51 Stacker lift powerfailure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in the Stacker Lift motor(M9)
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker Main DriveLift"
E580-8001-52 Stacker lift powerfailure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in the Stacker Lift motor(M9)
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker Main DriveLift"
1516
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E580-8002-51 Stacker eject drivepower failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in the Stacker Eject Motor
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker Eject Motor[21M8]"
E580-8002-52 Stacker eject drivepower failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in the Stacker Eject Motor
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker Eject Motor[21M8]"
E583-8001-02 Stack Delivery Auxiliary Tray HP error

The Stack Delivery Auxiliary Tray HP Sensor was not turned ON although 5 sec had passed after
the Stack Delivery Auxiliary Tray Motor started the operation.
- Harnesses connecting the Stack Delivery Auxiliary Tray Motor (M13/J629), the Relay Connector
(J629/J633) and the Finisher Controller PCB (UN3/J140)
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Stack Delivery Auxiliary Tray Motor
JOG-T)
2. Relay Connector (19P) to Stack Delivery Auxiliary Tray Motor (M13/J629) (Unit of replacement:
MOTOR, STEPPING, DC)
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Stack Delivery Auxiliary Tray HP Sensor
JOG-T)
3. Relay Connector (4P) to Stack Delivery Auxiliary Tray HP Sensor (PS14/J617) (Unit of
replacement: TRAY AUXILIARY PLATE ASSEMBLY)
- Stack Delivery Auxiliary Tray Motor (M13)
- Stack Delivery Auxiliary Tray HP Sensor (PS14)
OFF
1517
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E583-8002-02 Stack Delivery Auxiliary Tray HP error

The Stack Delivery Auxiliary Tray HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 5 sec had passed after
the Stack Delivery Auxiliary Tray Motor started the operation.
- Harnesses connecting the Stack Delivery Auxiliary Tray Motor (M13/J629), the Relay Connector
(J629/J633) and the Finisher Controller PCB (UN3/J140)
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Stack Delivery Auxiliary Tray Motor
JOG-T)
2. Relay Connector (19P) to Stack Delivery Auxiliary Tray Motor (M13/J629) (Unit of replacement:
MOTOR, STEPPING, DC)
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Stack Delivery Auxiliary Tray HP Sensor
JOG-T)
3. Relay Connector (4P) to Stack Delivery Auxiliary Tray HP Sensor (PS14/J617) (Unit of
replacement: TRAY AUXILIARY PLATE ASSEMBLY)
- Stack Delivery Auxiliary Tray Motor (M13)
- Stack Delivery Auxiliary Tray HP Sensor (PS14)
OFF
E585-8001-02 Stack Retainer HP error

The Stack Retainer HP Sensor was not turned ON although 0.25 sec had passed after the Stack
Retainer Motor started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Stack Retainer Motor
JOG-T)
2. Relay Connector (7P) to Stack Retainer Motor (M201/J2598) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
JOG-U)
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Stack Retainer HP Sensor
JOG-T)
2. Relay Connector (7P) to Stack Retainer HP Sensor (PS201/J2599) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, JOG-U)
- Stack Retainer HP Sensor (PS201)
- Stack Retainer Motor (M20)
OFF
1518
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E585-8002-02 Stack Retainer HP error

The Stack Retainer HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 0.25 sec had passed after the Stack
Retainer Motor started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Stack Retainer Motor
JOG-T)
2. Relay Connector (7P) to Stack Retainer Motor (M201/J2598) (Unit of replacement: CABLE,
JOG-U)
- Harnesses from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Stack Retainer HP Sensor
JOG-T)
2. Relay Connector (7P) to Stack Retainer HP Sensor (PS201/J2599) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, JOG-U)
- Stack Retainer HP Sensor (PS201)
- Stack Retainer Motor (M20)
OFF
E588-8001-51 Stacker Flipunitpower failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in the Flipping Unit
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker Flip Unit".
E588-8001-52 Stacker Flipunitpower failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in the Flipping Unit
E588-8002-51 Stacker lift heightsensor 21B16 status not OK

Detection Description The Stacker Lift Height Sensor (21B16) is nottoggled inactive-active-inactive within a predeter-
mined period of time after the start of the StackerFlip Hammer Motor (M15)
Check / Replace the "PBA, Stacker SpiderIO [21PBA02] ".
E588-8002-52 Stacker lift heightsensor 21B16 status not OK

Detection Description The Stacker Lift Height Sensor (21B16) is nottoggled inactive-active-inactive within a predeter-
mined period of time after the start of the StackerFlip Hammer Motor (M15)
E588-8003-51 Stacker slide doorpower failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in the Slide Door assy
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker Slide Door".
1519
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E588-8003-52 Stacker slide doorpower failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in the Slide Door assy
E588-8004-51 Stacker slide doorsensor status not OK

Detection Description Stacker Slide Up sensor en Stacker Slide down 2sensor are simultaneously active
E588-8004-52 Stacker slide doorsensor status not OK

Detection Description Stacker Slide Up sensor en Stacker Slide down 2sensor are simultaneously active
E588-8005-51 Stacker eject sensorstatus not OK

Detection Description Stack Eject Out sensor and Stack Eject In sensorare simultaneously active
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker Eject TableIn Sensor [21B10]"..
Check / Replace the "Stacker Eject TableOut Sensor [21B11]"
E588-8005-52 Stacker eject sensorstatus not OK

Detection Description Stack Eject Out sensor and Stack Eject In sensorare simultaneously active
E588-8006-51 Stacker eject sensorpower failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in Stack Eject Out sensoror Stack Eject In sensor
E588-8006-52 Stacker eject sensorpower failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in Stack Eject Out sensoror Stack Eject In sensor
E588-8007-51 Stacker eject emptysensor power failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in Stacker Lift Table Homesensor or Stacker Eject Table Empty sensor
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker Eject TableEmpty Sensor [21B12] "
Check / Replace the "Stacker Lift TableHome Sensor [21B15]"
E588-8007-52 Stacker eject emptysensor power failure

Detection Description Short circuit detected in Stacker Lift Table Homesensor or Stacker Eject Table Empty sensor
Remedy Check / Replace the "Stacker Eject TableEmpty Sensor [21B12] "
Check / Replace the "Stacker Lift TableHome Sensor [21B15]"
1520
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E590-8000-02 Punch Motor detection error

Detection Description PUNCHER UNIT-BS1/BT1/BU1
The punch did not move although 0.2 sec had passed after the Punch Motor started the operation.
Remedy PUNCHER UNIT-BS1/BT1/BU1
- Harness between the Finisher Controller PCB (UN3/J131) and the Punch Motor (M24/J571) (Unit
of replacement: CABLE, PUNCH)
- Harness between the Finisher Controller PCB (UN3/J130) and the Punch Motor Clock Sensor
(PS38/J575) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, PUNCH)
- Harness between the Finisher Controller PCB (UN3/J130) and the Punch Front Sensor (PS37/
J573) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, PUNCH)
- Harness between the Finisher Controller PCB (UN3/J130) and the Punch 2/3 Hole Sensor (PS39/
- Harness between the Finisher Controller PCB (UN3/J130) and the Punch Motor HP Sensor
- Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PS38) (Unit of replacement: 4 HOLD PUNCH ASSEMBLY/5 HOLD
PUNCH ASSEMBLY)
- Punch Front Sensor (PS37) (Unit of replacement: 4 HOLD PUNCH ASSEMBLY/5 HOLD PUNCH
ASSEMBLY)
- Punch 2/3 Hole Sensor (PS39) (Unit of replacement: 4 HOLD PUNCH ASSEMBLY/5 HOLD
PUNCH ASSEMBLY)
- Punch Motor HP Sensor (PS36) (Unit of replacement: 4 HOLD PUNCH ASSEMBLY/5 HOLD
PUNCH ASSEMBLY)
- Punch Motor (M24) (Unit of replacement: 4 HOLD PUNCH ASSEMBLY/5 HOLD PUNCH
ASSEMBLY)
- Punch Unit (Unit of replacement: PUNCHER UNIT-BS1/BT1/BU1)
OFF
1521
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E590-8001-02 Punch Motor HP error

The Punch Motor HP Sensor was not turned ON although 500 sec had passed after the Punch
PUNCH ASSEMBLY)
ASSEMBLY)
PUNCH ASSEMBLY)
PUNCH ASSEMBLY)
ASSEMBLY)
OFF
1522
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E590-8002-02 Punch Motor HP error

The Punch Motor HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 500 sec had passed after the Punch
PUNCH ASSEMBLY)
ASSEMBLY)
PUNCH ASSEMBLY)
PUNCH ASSEMBLY)
ASSEMBLY)
OFF
1523
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E590-8004-02 Punch switching error

The Punch Motor home position could not be detected when switching the 2-hole/3-hole and 2-
hole/4-hole (France) operations.
PUNCH ASSEMBLY)
ASSEMBLY)
PUNCH ASSEMBLY)
PUNCH ASSEMBLY)
ASSEMBLY)
OFF
E5A1-0081-61 Error in Grip Motor (M43) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Grip HP Sensor (S93) was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed at
a grip operation.
Remedy 1. Grip Motor (M43) error
2. Grip HP Sensor (S93) error

Detection Description The Grip HP Sensor (S93) was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed at
a grip release operation.

Detection Description The Grip End Sensor (S94) was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed
at a grip release operation.
2. Grip End Sensor (S94) error
1524
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Grip End Sensor (S94) was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed at
a grip operation.

Detection Description The Grip HP Sensor (S93) was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed at
a grip operation.

Detection Description The Grip HP Sensor (S93) was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed at
a grip release operation.

Detection Description The Grip End Sensor (S94) was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed
at a grip release operation.

Detection Description The Grip End Sensor (S94) was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed at
a grip operation.
E5A2-0081-61 Error in Waste Buffer Shift Motor (M37) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Waste Buffer HP Sensor (Left) (S103) was not turned OFF although a specified period of time
had passed while moving from the left home position.
Remedy 1. Waste Buffer Shift Motor (M37) error
2. Waste Buffer HP Sensor (Left) (S103) error

Detection Description The Waste Buffer HP Sensor (Left) (S103) was not turned ON although a specified period of time
had passed while returning to the left home position.

Detection Description The Waste Buffer HP Sensor (Right) (S100) was not turned OFF although a specified period of
time had passed when the Waste Buffer moved from the right home position.
2. Waste Buffer HP Sensor (Right) (S100) error
1525
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Waste Buffer HP Sensor (Right) (S100) was not turned ON although a specified period of time
had passed when the Waste Buffer returned to the right home position.

Detection Description The Waste Buffer Clock Sensor (S101) was not turned ON although a specified period of time had
passed during rotation of the Waste Buffer Shift Motor.
2. Waste Buffer Clock Sensor (S101) error

Detection Description The Paper Retainer Plate Sensor (S104) was not turned OFF although a specified period of time
had passed during rotation of the Waste Buffer Shift Motor.
2. Paper Retainer Plate Sensor (S104) error

Detection Description The Paper Retainer Plate Sensor (S104) was not turned ON although a specified period of time

Detection Description The Waste Buffer HP Sensor (Left) (S103) was not turned OFF although a specified period of time
had passed while moving from the left home position.

Detection Description The Waste Buffer HP Sensor (Left) (S103) was not turned ON although a specified period of time
had passed while returning to the left home position.

Detection Description The Waste Buffer HP Sensor (Right) (S100) was not turned OFF although a specified period of
time had passed when the Waste Buffer moved from the right home position.

Detection Description The Waste Buffer HP Sensor (Right) (S100) was not turned ON although a specified period of time
had passed when the Waste Buffer returned to the right home position.
1526
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Waste Buffer Clock Sensor (S101) was not turned ON although a specified period of time had
passed during rotation of the Waste Buffer Shift Motor.
2. Waste Buffer Clock Sensor (S101) error

Detection Description The Paper Retainer Plate Sensor (S104) was not turned OFF although a specified period of time

Detection Description The Paper Retainer Plate Sensor (S104) was not turned ON although a specified period of time
E5A3-0081-61 Error in Stacking Buffer Tray Motor (M39) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Stacking Buffer Tray HP Sensor (S78) was not turned OFF although a specified period of time
had passed when the Stacking Buffer Tray moved from the home position.
Remedy 1. Stacking Buffer Tray Motor (M39) error
2. Stacking Buffer Tray HP Sensor (S78) error

Detection Description The Stacking Buffer Tray HP Sensor (S78) was not turned ON although a specified period of time
had passed when the Stacking Buffer Tray returned to the home position.

Detection Description The Stacking Buffer Tray HP Sensor (S78) was not turned OFF although a specified period of time
had passed when the Stacking Buffer Tray moved from the home position.

Detection Description The Stacking Buffer Tray HP Sensor (S78) was not turned ON although a specified period of time
had passed when the Stacking Buffer Tray returned to the home position.
E5A4-0081-61 Error in Press Motor (M36) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Press HP Sensor (S90) was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed
at a press operation.
Remedy 1. Press Motor (M36) error
2. Press HP Sensor (S90) error
1527
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Press HP Sensor (S90) was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed at
a press release operation.

Detection Description The Press End Sensor (S87) was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed
at a press release operation.
2. Press End Sensor (S87) error

Detection Description The Press End Sensor (S87) was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed

Detection Description The Press Limit Sensor (S89) was turned ON.
Remedy 1. The Press Plate moved to the press release limit position.
2. Press Motor (M36) error
3. Press Limit Sensor (S89) error

Detection Description The Press HP Sensor (S90) was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed

Detection Description The Press HP Sensor (S90) was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed at
a press release operation.

Detection Description The Press End Sensor (S87) was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed
at a press release operation.

Detection Description The Press End Sensor (S87) was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed
1528
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5A5-0081-61 Error in Slide Motor (M44) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Slide HP Sensor (S82) was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed
when the slide moved from the home position.
Remedy 1. Slide Motor (M44) error
2. Slide HP Sensor (S82) error

Detection Description The Slide HP Sensor (S82) was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed
when the slide returned to the home position.

Detection Description The Slide HP Sensor (S82) was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed
when the slide moved from the home position.

Detection Description The Slide HP Sensor (S82) was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed
when the slide returned to the home position.
E5A7-8011-02 Transport Hook Home Position Sensor detection error

Detection Description BOOKLET TRIMMER-D1
The Transport Hook Home Position Sensor was not turned ON.
Remedy BOOKLET TRIMMER-D1
[Related parts]
- Harnesses connecting the Transport Hook Home Position Sensor (PI04/J104), the Relay
Connector (J6) and the Trimmer Controller PCB (QPM-220/CON10)
- Harnesses connecting the Transport Hook Motor (M02/J21), the Relay Connector (J14) and the
Trimmer Controller PCB (QPM-220/CON103)
- Transport Hook Home Position Sensor (PI04)
- Transport Hook Motor (M02)
disconnection.
[Reference] After replacement of the Transport Hook Home Position Sensor, refer to
"Adjustments> Home Position Calibration" in the Service Manual.
1529
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5A7-8012-02 Transport Hook Home Position Sensor detection error

The Transport Hook Home Position Sensor was not turned OFF.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses connecting the Transport Hook Home Position Sensor (PI04/J104), the Relay
- Harnesses connecting the Transport Hook Motor (M02/J21), the Relay Connector (J14) and the
Trimmer Controller PCB (QPM-220/CON103)
- Transport Hook Home Position Sensor (PI04)
- Transport Hook Motor (M02)
disconnection.
E5A7-8021-02 Top-bottom Guide Home Position Sensor detection error

The Top-bottom Guide Home Position Sensor was not turned ON.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses connecting the Top-bottom Guide Home Position Sensor (PI03/J103), the Relay
- Harnesses between the Top-bottom Guide Motor (M03/J22) and the Stepper Motor Driver PCB
(QPW-727/CON104)
- Top-bottom Guide Home Position Sensor (PI03)
- Top-bottom Guide Motor (M03)
disconnection.
E5A7-8022-02 Top-bottom Guide Home Position Sensor detection error

The Top-bottom Guide Home Position Sensor was not turned OFF.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses connecting the Top-bottom Guide Home Position Sensor (PI03/J103), the Relay
- Harnesses between the Top-bottom Guide Motor (M03/J22) and the Stepper Motor Driver PCB
(QPW-727/CON104)
- Top-bottom Guide Home Position Sensor (PI03)
- Top-bottom Guide Motor (M03)
disconnection.
1530
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5A7-8025-02 EEPROM error (Booklet Trimmer)

A numerical value error was detected for the retained home position.
Replace the Trimmer Controller PCB (QPM-220).
[Reference] After the replacement, refer to "Adjustments> Home Position Calibration" in the
Service Manual.
E5A7-8033-02 Trim Section Transport Motor Driver error

An error was detected in the Trim Section Transport Motor Driver PCB.
[Related parts]
- Harness between the Trim Section Transport Motor (M04) and the Trim Section Transport Motor
Driver PCB (A04/CN3)
- Trim Section Transport Motor (M04)
- Trim Section Transport Motor Driver PCB (A04)
disconnection.
E5A7-8043-02 Knife Motor Driver error

An error was detected in the Knife Motor Driver PCB.
[Related parts]
- Harness between the Knife Motor (M05) and the Trim Section Transport Motor Driver PCB (A04/
CN3)
- Knife Motor (M05)
- Knife Motor Driver PCB (A05)
disconnection.
E5A7-8044-02 Upper Knife Upper Limit Sensor detection error

The Upper Knife Upper Limit Sensor was not turned ON although the Upper Knife moved a certain
amount.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses connecting the Upper Knife Upper Limit Sensor (PI06/J106), the Relay Connector
(J3) and the Trimmer Controller PCB (QPM-220/CON10)
- Harness between the Knife Motor (M05) and the Knife Motor Driver PCB (A05/CN3)
- Upper Knife Upper Limit Sensor (PI06)
- Knife Motor (M05)
- Knife Motor Driver PCB (A05)
- Trimmer Controller PCB (QPM-220)
disconnection.
[Reference] After replacement of the Trimmer Controller PCB, refer to "Adjustments> Home
Position Calibration" in the Service Manual.
1531
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5A7-8051-02 Stopper Home Position Sensor detection error

The Stopper Home Position Sensor was not turned ON.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses connecting the Stopper Home Position Sensor (PI05/J105), the Relay Connector (J3)
and the Trimmer Controller PCB (QPM-220/CON10)
- Harnesses connecting the Stopper Move Motor (M06/J23), the Relay Connector (J3) and the
Stepper Motor Driver PCB (QPW-727/CON104)
- Stopper Home Position Sensor (PI05)
- Stopper Move Motor (M06)
- Stepper Motor Driver PCB (QPW-727)
disconnection.
E5A7-8052-02 Stopper Home Position Sensor detection error

The Stopper Home Position Sensor was not turned OFF.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses connecting the Stopper Home Position Sensor (PI05/J105), the Relay Connector (J3)
and the Trimmer Controller PCB (QPM-220/CON10)
- Harnesses connecting the Stopper Move Motor (M06/J23), the Relay Connector (J3) and the
Stepper Motor Driver PCB (QPW-727/CON104)
- Stopper Home Position Sensor (PI05)
- Stopper Move Motor (M06)
- Stepper Motor Driver PCB (QPW-727)
disconnection.
E5A7-8055-02 EEPROM error

An error with the numerical value for the retained home position of the Knife Stopper Positioning
Motor was detected.
Service Manual.
1532
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5A7-8061-02 Delivery Roller Home Position Sensor detection error

The Delivery Roller Home Position Sensor was not turned ON.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses connecting the Delivery Roller Home Position Sensor (PI14/J114), the Relay
Connector (J37/J1) and the Trimmer Controller PCB (QPM-220/CON12)
- Delivery Roller Motor (M08)
- Delivery Roller Home Position Sensor (PI14)
disconnection.
[Reference] After replacement of the Delivery Roller Home Position Sensor, refer to "Adjustments>
Home Position Calibration" in the Service Manual.
E5A7-8062-02 Delivery Roller Home Position Sensor detection error

The Delivery Roller Home Position Sensor was not turned OFF.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses connecting the Delivery Roller Home Position Sensor (PI14/J114), the Relay
Connector (J37/J1) and the Trimmer Controller PCB (QPM-220/CON12)
disconnection.
E5A7-8065-02 EEPROM error

An error with the numerical value for the retained home position of the Delivery Roller Motor was
detected.
Service Manual.
E5A7-8073-02 Main Drive Motor Driver error

An error was detected in the Main Drive Motor Driver PCB.
[Related parts]
- Harness between the Main Drive Motor (M10) and the Main Drive Motor Driver PCB (A10/CN3)
- Main Drive Motor (M10)
- Main Drive Motor Driver PCB (A10)
disconnection.
1533
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5A7-8088-02 Command transmission retry error

Sending of a command to the Two-Knife Trimmer was retried 4 times.
disconnection.
[Remedy]
Check the harness between the Booklet Trimmer and the Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer.
E5A7-8089-02 Command transmission retry error

Detection Description BOOKLET TRIMMER-F1
Reception failure command from the Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer was received 5 consecutive
times.
Remedy Check/replace the harness between the Booklet Trimmer and the Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer.
E5A7-80A7-02 Switching Power Supply Cooling Fan error

Detection Description 2-KNIFE TRIMMER
Output pulse from the Switching Power Supply Cooling Fan was not detected.
Remedy 2-KNIFE TRIMMER
[Related parts]
- Harness between the Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer Controller PCB (QPM-254/CON10) and the
Power Supply (G00/CON2)
- Power Supply (G00)
- Remote Power Relay (K00)
- Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer Controller PCB (QPM-254)
[Reference] After replacement of the Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer Controller PCB, refer to
E5A7-80A8-02 Power Supply error

Power supply of 24 VDC was not detected.
Meltdown of 24V fuse
[Related parts]
E5A7-80A9-02 Power Supply error

Power supply of 5 VDC was not detected.
Meltdown of 5V fuse
[Related parts]
1534
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5A8-0001-61 Error in Rotation Motor 1 (M42) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Rotation HP Sensor1 (S95) was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed
while moving from the home position.
Remedy 1. Rotation Motor 1 (M42) error
2. Rotation HP Sensor 1 (S95) error

Detection Description The Rotation HP Sensor1 (S95) was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed
while returning to the home position.

Detection Description The Rotation HP Sensor1 (S95) was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed
while moving from the home position.

Detection Description The Rotation HP Sensor1 (S95) was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed

Detection Description The Rotation HP Sensor 2 (S91) was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had
passed while moving from the home position.
Remedy 1. Rotation 2 (M41) error

Detection Description The Rotation HP Sensor 2 (S91) was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed
Remedy 1. Rotation 2 (M41) error

Detection Description The Rotation HP Sensor 2 (S91) was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had
passed while moving from the home position.

Detection Description The Rotation HP Sensor 2 (S91) was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed
1535
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5AA-0001-61 Error in Cutter Motor (M35) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Cutter Area Sensor 2 (S85) was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had passed
during a cutting operation from the front side.
Remedy 1. Cutter Motor (M35) error
2. Cutter Area Sensor 2 (S85) error

Detection Description The Cutter Area Sensor 2 (S85) was not turned ON although a specified period of time had passed
when the Trimming Blade moved to the rear (cutting operation was released).

during a cutting operation from the rear side.

when the Trimming Blade moved to the front (cutting operation was released).

when the Trimming Blade moved from the front to the rear.

when the Trimming Blade moved from the rear to the front.

Detection Description The Cutter Limit Sensor (S86) was turned ON.
Remedy 1. The Trimming Blade moved to the limit position.
2. Cutter Motor (M35) error
3. Cutter Limit Sensor (S86) error

during a cutting operation from the front side.
1536
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

when the Trimming Blade moved to the rear (cutting operation was released).

during a cutting operation from the rear side.

when the Trimming Blade moved to the front (cutting operation was released).

when the Trimming Blade moved from the front to the rear.

when the Trimming Blade moved from the rear to the front.
E5AB-0001-61 Error in Booklet Lifting Tray Motor (M38) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Booklet Lifting Tray HP Sensor (S79) was not turned OFF although a specified period of time
had passed when the Booklet Lifting Tray moved from the home position.
Remedy 1. Booklet Lifting Tray Motor (M38) error
2. Booklet Lifting Tray HP Sensor (S79) error

Detection Description The Booklet Lifting Tray HP Sensor (S79) was not turned ON although a specified period of time
had passed when the Booklet Lifting Tray returned to the home position.

Detection Description The Booklet Lifting Tray Clock Sensor (S102) was not turned ON although a specified period of
time had passed during rotation of the Booklet Lifting Tray Motor.
2. Booklet Lifting Tray Clock Sensor (S102) error
1537
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Booklet Lifting Tray HP Sensor (S79) was not turned OFF although a specified period of time
had passed when the Booklet Lifting Tray moved from the home position.

Detection Description The Booklet Lifting Tray HP Sensor (S79) was not turned ON although a specified period of time
had passed when the Booklet Lifting Tray returned to the home position.

Detection Description The Booklet Lifting Tray Clock Sensor (S102) was not turned ON although a specified period of
time had passed during rotation of the Booklet Lifting Tray Motor.
2. Booklet Lifting Tray Clock Sensor (S102) error
E5AC-0001-61 Error in Stacking Motor (M34) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Stacking Tray HP Sensor (S80) was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had
passed when the Stacking Tray moved from the home position.
Remedy 1. Stacking Motor (M34) error
2. Stacking Tray HP Sensor (S80) error

Detection Description The Stacking Tray HP Sensor (S80) was not turned ON although a specified period of time had
passed when the Stacking Tray returned to the home position.

Detection Description The Stacking Tray HP Sensor (S80) was not turned OFF although a specified period of time had
passed when the Stacking Tray moved from the home position.

Detection Description The Stacking Tray HP Sensor (S80) was not turned ON although a specified period of time had
passed when the Stacking Tray returned to the home position.
E5AD-0001-61 Error in Trimming Blade Plate Shift Motor (M40) of Perfect Binder
Detection Description The Trimming Blade Plate HP Sensor (S83) was not turned OFF although a specified period of
time had passed when the Trimming Blade Plate moved from the home position.
Remedy 1. Trimming Blade Plate Shift Motor (M40) error
2. Trimming Blade Plate HP Sensor (S83) error
1538
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Detection Description The Trimming Blade Plate HP Sensor (S83) was not turned ON although a specified period of time
had passed when the Trimming Blade Plate returned to the home position.
Detection Description The Trimming Blade Plate HP Sensor (S83) was not turned OFF although a specified period of
time had passed when the Trimming Blade Plate moved from the home position.
Detection Description The Trimming Blade Plate HP Sensor (S83) was not turned ON although a specified period of time
had passed when the Trimming Blade Plate returned to the home position.
E5AE-0001-61 Error in Booklet Stacking Door Lock Solenoid (SL5) of Perfect Binder
Detection Description The Stacking Door Open Sensor (S98) detected the door open while the Stacking Door was locked.
Remedy 1. Booklet Stacking Door Lock Solenoid (SL5) error
2. Stacking Door Open Sensor (S98) error
E5AE-8001-61 Error in Booklet Stacking Door Lock Solenoid (SL5) of Perfect Binder
Detection Description The Stacking Door Open Sensor (S98) detected the door open while the Stacking Door was locked.
Remedy 1. Booklet Stacking Door Lock Solenoid (SL5) error
2. Stacking Door Open Sensor (S98) error
E5AF-8013-02 Rear Knife Up/Down Drive Motor Driver error

Detection Description 2-KNIFE TRIMMERAn error was detected in the Rear Knife Up/Down Drive Motor Driver PCB.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses connecting the Rear Knife Up/Down Drive Motor (M20), the Robot Cable (11/J24 to
11/J22) and the Rear Knife Up/Down Drive Motor Driver PCB (A20/CN4)
- Rear Knife Up/Down Drive Motor (M20)
- Rear Knife Up/Down Drive Motor Driver PCB (A20)
disconnection.
1539
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5AF-8019-02 Rear Knife Up/Down Drive Motor detection error

Detection Description 2-KNIFE TRIMMERThe pulses required to reach the booklet press position from the home position
were not input.
[Related parts]
disconnection.
E5AF-801A-02 Rear Knife Up/Down Drive Motor detection error

Detection Description 2-KNIFE TRIMMERThe pulses required to reach the lower limit from the home position were not
input.
[Related parts]
disconnection.
E5AF-801B-02 Rear Knife Up/Down Drive Motor detection error

Detection Description 2-KNIFE TRIMMERThe pulses required to reach the trimming completion position from the home
position were not input.
[Related parts]
disconnection.
1540
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5AF-8023-02 Front Knife Up/Down Drive Motor Driver error

Detection Description 2-KNIFE TRIMMERAn error was detected in the Front Knife Up/Down Drive Motor Driver PCB.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses connecting the Front Knife Up/Down Drive Motor (M30), the Robot Cable (14/J34 to
14/J32) and the Front Knife Up/Down Drive Motor Driver PCB (A30/CN4)
- Front Knife Up/Down Drive Motor (M30)
- Front Knife Up/Down Drive Motor Driver PCB (A30)
disconnection.
E5AF-8029-02 Front Knife Up/Down Drive Motor detection error

Detection Description 2-KNIFE TRIMMERThe pulses required to reach the booklet press position from the home position
were not input.
[Related parts]
disconnection.
E5AF-802A-02 Front Knife Up/Down Drive Motor detection error

Detection Description 2-KNIFE TRIMMERThe pulses required to reach the lower limit from the home position were not
input.
[Related parts]
disconnection.
1541
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5AF-802B-02 Front Knife Up/Down Drive Motor detection error

Detection Description 2-KNIFE TRIMMERThe pulses required to reach the trimming completion position from the home
position were not input.
[Related parts]
disconnection.
E5AF-8031-02 Rear Jog Guide Home Position Sensor detection error

Detection Description 2-KNIFE TRIMMERThe Rear Jog Guide Home Position Sensor was not turned ON.
[Related parts]
- Harness between the Rear Jog Guide Home Position Sensor (PI122/J29) and the Rear Jog Guide
Relay PCB 2 (A22/CON1)
- Harness between the Rear Jog Guide Motor (M21) and the Rear Jog Guide Relay PCB 2 (A22/
CON1)
- Rear Jog Guide Home Position Sensor (PI122)
- Rear Jog Guide Motor (M21)
disconnection.
[Reference] After replacement of the Rear Jog Guide Home Position Sensor, refer to
E5AF-8032-02 Rear Jog Guide Home Position Sensor detection error

The Rear Jog Guide Home Position Sensor was not turned OFF.
[Related parts]
- Harness between the Rear Jog Guide Home Position Sensor (PI122/J29) and the Rear Jog Guide
Relay PCB 2 (A22/CON1)
- Harness between the Rear Jog Guide Motor (M21) and the Rear Jog Guide Relay PCB 2 (A22/
CON1)
- Rear Jog Guide Home Position Sensor (PI122)
- Rear Jog Guide Motor (M21)
disconnection.
[Reference] After replacement of the Rear Jog Guide Home Position Sensor, refer to
1542
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5AF-8041-02 Front Jog Guide Home Position Sensor detection error

Detection Description 2-KNIFE TRIMMERThe Front Jog Guide Home Position Sensor was not turned ON.
[Related parts]
- Harness between the Front Jog Guide Home Position Sensor (PI132/J39) and the Front Jog
Guide Relay PCB 2 (A32/CON1)
- Harness between the Front Jog Guide Motor (M31) and the Front Jog Guide Relay PCB 2 (A32/
CON1)
- Front Jog Guide Home Position Sensor (PI132)
- Front Jog Guide Motor (M31)
disconnection.
[Reference] After replacement of the Front Jog Guide Home Position Sensor, refer to
E5AF-8042-02 Front Jog Guide Home Position Sensor detection error

The Front Jog Guide Home Position Sensor was not turned OFF.
[Related parts]
- Harness between the Front Jog Guide Home Position Sensor (PI132/J39) and the Front Jog
Guide Relay PCB 2 (A32/CON1)
- Harness between the Front Jog Guide Motor (M31) and the Front Jog Guide Relay PCB 2 (A32/
CON1)
- Front Jog Guide Home Position Sensor (PI132)
- Front Jog Guide Motor (M31)
disconnection.
[Reference] After replacement of the Front Jog Guide Home Position Sensor, refer to
E5AF-8051-02 Knife Front/Rear Move Home Position Sensor detection error

Detection Description 2-KNIFE TRIMMERThe Knife Front/Rear Move Home Position Sensor was not turned ON.
[Related parts]
- Harness between the Knife Front/Rear Move Home Position Sensor (PI141/J41) and the Two-
Knife Booklet Trimmer Controller PCB (QPM-254/CON9)
- Harnesses connecting the Knife Front/Rear Move Motor (M40), the Knife Front/Rear Move Motor
Driver PCB (A40/CN3/CN2) and the Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer Controller PCB (QPM-254/
CON13)
- Knife Front/Rear Move Home Position Sensor (PI141)
- Knife Front/Rear Move Motor (M40)
disconnection.
[Reference] After replacement of the Knife Front/Rear Move Home Position Sensor, refer to
1543
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5AF-8052-02 Knife Front/Rear Move Home Position Sensor detection error

The Knife Front/Rear Move Home Position Sensor was not turned OFF.
[Related parts]
- Harness between the Knife Front/Rear Move Home Position Sensor (PI141/J41) and the Two-
Knife Booklet Trimmer Controller PCB (QPM-254/CON9)
- Harnesses connecting the Knife Front/Rear Move Motor (M40), the Knife Front/Rear Move Motor
Driver PCB (A40/CN3/CN2) and the Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer Controller PCB (QPM-254/
CON13)
- Knife Front/Rear Move Home Position Sensor (PI141)
disconnection.
[Reference] After replacement of the Knife Front/Rear Move Home Position Sensor, refer to
E5AF-8063-02 Transport Motor Driver error

Detection Description 2-KNIFE TRIMMERAn error was detected in the Transport Motor Driver PCB.
[Related parts]
- Harness between the Transport Motor (M10) and the Transport Motor Driver PCB (A10/CN3)
- Transport Motor (M10)
- Transport Motor Driver PCB (A10)
disconnection.
E5AF-8071-02 Delivery Roller Home Position Sensor detection error

Detection Description 2-KNIFE TRIMMERThe Delivery Roller Home Position Sensor was not turned ON.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses connecting the Delivery Roller Home Position Sensor (PI14), the Relay Connector
(J114/J37) and the Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer Controller PCB (QPM-254/J1)
- Harness between the Delivery Roller Motor (M08) and the Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer Controller
PCB (QPM-254/J1 (CON13))
disconnection.
1544
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5AF-8072-02 Delivery Roller Home Position Sensor detection error

The Delivery Roller Home Position Sensor was not turned OFF.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses connecting the Delivery Roller Home Position Sensor (PI14), the Relay Connector
(J114/J37) and the Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer Controller PCB (QPM-254/J1)
- Harness between the Delivery Roller Motor (M08) and the Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer Controller
PCB (QPM-254/J1 (CON13))
disconnection.
E5AF-8085-02 EEPROM error

Detection Description 2-KNIFE TRIMMEREither the initial setting of EEPROM which stores each home position value
has not made, or data is corrupted (normally, this occurs when the Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer
Controller PCB is replaced).
[Related parts] Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer Controller PCB P100211 (QPM-254)
disconnection.
1. Turn OFF the main power of the Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer, and then set "2" of DIP SW1 of
the Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer Controller PCB to ON.
2. Turn ON the main power of the Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer, and then after the initialization
process of the EEPROM is finished, turn OFF the main power of the Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer,
and return "2" of DIP SW1 to OFF.
3. Set each home position value described in the home position seal affixed to the Two-Knife
Booklet Trimmer from the LCD panel of the Booklet Trimmer.

Detection Description 2-KNIFE TRIMMERAn EEPROM write error occurred.
Replace the Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer Controller PCB (QPM-254).
Service Manual.

Detection Description 2-KNIFE TRIMMERAn EEPROM checksum error occurred.
Service Manual.
1545
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5AF-8096-02 Knife Front/Rear Move Motor home position return not completed
Detection Description 2-KNIFE TRIMMERThe paper stack information or the booklet delivery command from the Booklet
Trimmer was received before receiving the operation start command.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses connecting the Two-Knife Booklet Trimmer Controller PCB (QPM-254/CON13), the
Knife Front/Rear Move Motor Driver PCB (A40/CN2) and the Knife Front/Rear Move Motor (M40)
disconnection.
E5AF-8097-02 Knife Front/Rear Move Motor setting position shift not completed
Detection Description 2-KNIFE TRIMMERAfter the operation start command was received and the guide was initialized,
the delivery command from the Booklet Trimmer was received before receiving the paper stack
information.
[Related parts]
Knife Front/Rear Move Motor Driver PCB (A40/CN2) and the Knife Front/Rear Move Motor (M40)
disconnection.
E5AF-80A8-02 Command transmission retry error

Detection Description 2-KNIFE TRIMMERSending of a command to the Booklet Trimmer was retried 4 times.
Service Manual.
E5AF-80A9-02 Command NACK reception count error

NACK was received 5 or more times for the same command sent to the Booklet Trimmer.
Service Manual.
1546
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5AF-80AA-02 Interlock Safety Unit error

Detection Description 2-KNIFE TRIMMERAn error occurred in the Interlock Safety Unit.
[Related parts]
- Harnesses connecting the Diode PCB (QPW-793/CON404, CON401), the Interlock Safety Unit
(A100) and the Top Cover Switch (SW01)
Interlock Safety Unit (A100)
- Interlock Safety Unit (A100)
- Diode PCB (QPW-793)
disconnection.
E5AF-80AB-02 Power Supply error

Detection Description 2-KNIFE TRIMMERAn alarm signal was received from the Power Supply (24 VDC).
[Related parts]
disconnection.
E5AF-80AC-02 Interlock error

Detection Description 2-KNIFE TRIMMERWhen the Top Cover was opened, the Interlock Relay 2 was turned OFF but
the Interlock Relay 1 was not turned OFF.
[Related parts]
Interlock Safety Unit (A100/J201), the Top Cover Switch (SW01), and Interlock Relay 1 (K01)
- Top Cover Switch (SW01)
- Interlock Relay 1 (K01)
disconnection.
1547
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5AF-80AD-02 Interlock error

When the Top Cover was opened, the Interlock Relay 1 was turned OFF but the Interlock Relay
2 was not turned OFF.
[Related parts]
Interlock Safety Unit (A100/J201), the Top Cover Switch (SW01), and Interlock Relay 2 (K02)
- Top Cover Switch (SW01)
- Interlock Relay 2 (K02)
disconnection.
E5B0-0001-61 Error in Heater (HTR1) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Temperature Detection Thermistor (S56) could not detect +/-5 deg C of the setting temperature
although 600 sec had passed since the release of energy saver mode.
Remedy 1. Heater (HTR1) error
2. Temperature Detection Thermistor (S56) error

Detection Description The Temperature Detection Thermistor (S56) detected 200 deg C or higher for 1 sec.

Detection Description The Temperature Detection Thermistor (S56) detected 5 deg C or lower for 1 sec (the detection
operation starts 10 sec after a booting).

Detection Description The Temperature Detection Thermistor (S56) could not detect 140 deg C or higher within 200 sec
since a detection of 50 deg C.

Detection Description The Temperature Detection Thermistor (S56) detected 135 deg C or lower for 10 sec or longer
after completion of temperature control.

Detection Description An error in the Abnormal Temperature Thermistor (S57) was detected.
2. Abnormal Temperature Thermistor (S57) error
1548
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error in the Thermostat (THSW) was detected.
2. Thermostat (THSW) error

Detection Description The Level Thermistor (S58) detected 170 deg C or higher for 10 sec or longer after completion of
warm-up.
2. Level Thermistor (S58) error

Detection Description The Level Thermistor (S58) detected 100 deg C or lower for 10 sec or longer after completion of
warm-up.
E5B0-000B-61 Error in Heater (HTR1) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description An open circuit of the Abnormal Temperature Thermistor (S57) was detected.
E5B0-000C-61 Error in Heater (HTR1) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description An open circuit of the Level Thermistor (S58) was detected.
E5B0-000D-61 Error in internal temperature of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Machine Temperature Thermistor (S105) detected 80 deg C or higher for 1 sec.
Remedy 1. Machine Temperature Thermistor (S105) error
E5B0-000E-61 Error in internal temperature of Perfect Binder

Detection Description An open circuit of the Machine Temperature Thermistor (S105) was detected.
E5B0-000F-61 Error in internal temperature of Perfect Binder

Detection Description There was 10 deg C or larger gap between the 1-minute fixed data detected by the Machine
Temperature Thermistor (S105) and the last 1-second row data for the specified period of time or
longer.

Detection Description Temperature of the heater was not +/-5 deg C of the setting temperature although the setting
temperature of the glue vat was increased according to the detected temperature of the Machine
Temperature Thermistor (S105). (Temperature is not detected for 100 sec after the completion of
warm-up.)
2. Machine Temperature Thermistor (S105) error
1549
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

temperature of the glue vat was decreased according to the detected temperature of the Machine
warm-up.)

Detection Description Warm-up was not completed although 500 sec had passed since the start of temperature control.
E5B0-0013-61 Error in internal temperature of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Machine Temperature Thermistor (S105) detected 0 deg C or lower.
Remedy 1. The environment is out of the specified range.

Detection Description The Temperature Detection Thermistor (S56) could not detect +/-5 deg C of the setting temperature
although 600 sec had passed since the release of energy saver mode.

Detection Description The Temperature Detection Thermistor (S56) detected 200 deg C or higher for 1 sec.

Detection Description The Temperature Detection Thermistor (S56) detected 5 deg C or lower for 1 sec (the detection
operation starts 10 sec after a booting).

Detection Description The Temperature Detection Thermistor (S56) could not detect 140 deg C or higher within 200 sec
since a detection of 50 deg C.

Detection Description The Temperature Detection Thermistor (S56) detected 135 deg C or lower for 10 sec or longer
after completion of temperature control.

Detection Description An error in the Abnormal Temperature Thermistor (S57) was detected.
1550
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description An error in the Thermostat (THSW) was detected.
2. Thermostat (THSW) error

Detection Description The Level Thermistor (S58) detected 170 deg C or higher for 10 sec or longer after completion of
warm-up.

Detection Description The Level Thermistor (S58) detected 100 deg C or lower for 10 sec or longer after completion of
warm-up.
E5B0-800B-61 Error in Heater (HTR1) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description An open circuit of the Abnormal Temperature Thermistor (S57) was detected.
E5B0-800C-61 Error in Heater (HTR1) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description An open circuit of the Level Thermistor (S58) was detected.
E5B0-800D-61 Error in internal temperature of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Machine Temperature Thermistor (S105) detected 80 deg C or higher for 1 sec.
E5B0-800E-61 Error in internal temperature of Perfect Binder

Detection Description An open circuit of the Machine Temperature Thermistor (S105) was detected.
E5B0-800F-61 Error in internal temperature of Perfect Binder

Detection Description There was 10 deg C or larger gap between the 1-minute fixed data detected by the Machine
Temperature Thermistor (S105) and the last 1-second row data for the specified period of time or
longer.

temperature of the glue vat was increased according to the detected temperature of the Machine
warm-up.)
1551
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

temperature of the glue vat was decreased according to the detected temperature of the Machine
warm-up.)

Detection Description Warm-up was not completed although 500 sec had passed since the start of temperature control.
E5B0-8013-61 Error in internal temperature of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Machine Temperature Thermistor (S105) detected 0 deg C or lower.
Remedy 1. The environment is out of the specified range.
E5B2-0001-61 Error in glue vat level detection of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Level Thermistor (S58) detected that the glue level was lower than the lower limit for 4
consecutive times during glue supply.
Remedy 1. Operation failure in glue supply mechanism

Detection Description The Level Thermistor (S58) detected that the glue level had not risen above the upper limit although
a specified amount of glue was supplied without applying glue while the glue level was higher than
the lower limit.

Detection Description The Level Thermistor (S58) detected that the glue level had not lowered below the upper limit
although a specified amount of glue was applied without supplying it.
Remedy 1. Operation failure in glue application mechanism

Detection Description An error in the adjustment value of the Level Thermistor (S58) was detected.
Remedy 1. Level Thermistor (S58) error

Detection Description The Level Thermistor (S58) detected that the glue level was lower than the lower limit for 4
consecutive times during glue supply.

Detection Description The Level Thermistor (S58) detected that the glue level had not risen above the upper limit although
a specified amount of glue was supplied without applying glue while the glue level was higher than
the lower limit.
1552
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Level Thermistor (S58) detected that the glue level had not lowered below the upper limit
although a specified amount of glue was applied without supplying it.
Remedy 1. Operation failure in glue application mechanism

Detection Description An error in the adjustment value of the Level Thermistor (S58) was detected.
Remedy 1. Level Thermistor (S58) error
E5B4-0001-61 Perfect Binder sensor auto adjustment error

Detection Description The A/D input value did not fall within the specified range although the D/A output value of the
Timing Sensor (S5) was changed up to the upper limit.
Remedy 1. Soiling on the Timing Sensor (S5)
2. Timing Sensor (S5) error

Cover Registration Sensor (S21) was changed up to the upper limit.
Remedy 1. Soiling on the Cover Registration Sensor (S21)
2. Cover Registration Sensor (S21) error

Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor (S) (S71) was changed up to the upper limit.
Remedy 1. Soiling on the Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor (S) (S71)
2. Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor (S) (S71) error

Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor (L) (S72) was changed up to the upper limit.
Remedy 1. Soiling on the Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor (L) (S72)
2. Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor (L) (S72) error

Stack Delivery Sensor (S64T/S64L) was changed up to the upper limit.
Remedy 1. Soiling on the Stack Delivery Sensor (S64T/S64L)
2. Stack Delivery Sensor (S64T/S64L) error

Leading Edge Sensor (S65T/S65L) was changed up to the upper limit.
Remedy 1. Soiling on the Leading Edge Sensor (S65T/S65L)
2. Leading Edge Sensor (S65T/S65L) error

Detection Description The A/D input value did not fall within the specified range although the D/A output value of the Inlet
Path Sensor (S92T/S92L) was changed up to the upper limit.
Remedy 1. Soiling on the Inlet Path Sensor (S92T/S92L)
2. Inlet Path Sensor (S92T/S92L) error
1553
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Registration Sensor (S88T/S88L) was changed up to the upper limit.
Remedy 1. Soiling on the Registration Sensor (S88T/S88L)
2. Registration Sensor (S88T/S88L) error

Timing Sensor (S5) was changed up to the lower limit.
Remedy 1. Timing Sensor (S5) error

Cover Registration Sensor (S21) was changed up to the lower limit.
Remedy 1. Cover Registration Sensor (S21) error

Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor (S) (S71) was changed up to the lower limit.
Remedy 1. Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor (S) (S71) error

Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor (L) (S72) was changed up to the lower limit.
Remedy 1. Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor (L) (S72) error

Stack Delivery Sensor (S64T/S64L) was changed up to the lower limit.
Remedy 1. Stack Delivery Sensor (S64T/S64L) error

Leading Edge Sensor (S65T/S65L) was changed up to the lower limit.
Remedy 1. Leading Edge Sensor (S65T/S65L) error

Path Sensor (S92T/S92L) was changed up to the lower limit.
Remedy 1. Inlet Path Sensor (S92T/S92L) error

Registration Sensor (S88T/S88L) was changed up to the lower limit.
Remedy 1. Registration Sensor (S88T/S88L) error
1554
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Timing Sensor (S5) was changed up to the upper limit.
Remedy 1. Soiling on the Timing Sensor (S5)
2. Timing Sensor (S5) error

Cover Registration Sensor (S21) was changed up to the upper limit.
Remedy 1. Soiling on the Cover Registration Sensor (S21)
2. Cover Registration Sensor (S21) error

Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor (S) (S71) was changed up to the upper limit.
Remedy 1. Soiling on the Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor (S) (S71)
2. Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor (S) (S71) error

Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor (L) (S72) was changed up to the upper limit.
Remedy 1. Soiling on the Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor (L) (S72)
2. Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor (L) (S72) error

Stack Delivery Sensor (S64T/S64L) was changed up to the upper limit.
Remedy 1. Soiling on the Stack Delivery Sensor (S64T/S64L)

Leading Edge Sensor (S65T/S65L) was changed up to the upper limit.
Remedy 1. Soiling on the Leading Edge Sensor (S65T/S65L)

Path Sensor (S92T/S92L) was changed up to the upper limit.
Remedy 1. Soiling on the Inlet Path Sensor (S92T/S92L)

Registration Sensor (S88T/S88L) was changed up to the upper limit.
Remedy 1. Soiling on the Registration Sensor (S88T/S88L)
1555
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Timing Sensor (S5) was changed up to the lower limit.
Remedy 1. Timing Sensor (S5) error

Cover Registration Sensor (S21) was changed up to the lower limit.
Remedy 1. Cover Registration Sensor (S21) error

Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor (S) (S71) was changed up to the lower limit.
Remedy 1. Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor (S) (S71) error

Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor (L) (S72) was changed up to the lower limit.
Remedy 1. Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor (L) (S72) error

Stack Delivery Sensor (S64T/S64L) was changed up to the lower limit.
Remedy 1. Stack Delivery Sensor (S64T/S64L) error

Leading Edge Sensor (S65T/S65L) was changed up to the lower limit.
Remedy 1. Leading Edge Sensor (S65T/S65L) error

Path Sensor (S92T/S92L) was changed up to the lower limit.
Remedy 1. Inlet Path Sensor (S92T/S92L) error

Registration Sensor (S88T/S88L) was changed up to the lower limit.
Remedy 1. Registration Sensor (S88T/S88L) error
E5B5-0001-61 Error in Leading Edge Sensor (S65T/S65L) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Leading Edge Sensor (S65T/S65L) could not detect presence of paper.
Remedy 1. Adhesion of paper stack to the Main Gripper
2. Remain of paper stack between the Main Gripper and the Cover Feed Assembly
1556
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5B5-0002-61 Error in Inlet Path Sensor (S92T/S92L) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Inlet Path Sensor (S92T/S92L) could not detect presence of paper.
Remedy 1. Remain of paper stack between the Cover Feed Assembly and the Stack Rotation Assembly
E5B5-0003-61 Error in Registration Sensor (S88T/S88L) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Registration Sensor (S88T/S88L) could not detect presence of paper.
Remedy 1. Remain of paper stack in the Stack Rotation Assembly
E5B5-0006-61 Error in Stack Delivery Sensor (S64T/S64L) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Stack Delivery Sensor (S64T/S64L) could not detect absence of paper.
Remedy 1. Remain of paper stack in the Cover Feed Assembly at power-on

Detection Description The Inlet Path Sensor (S92T/S92L) could not detect presence of paper at auto delivery operation.
Remedy 1. Remain of paper stack between the Cover Feed Assembly and the Stack Rotation Assembly at
auto delivery operation after an error
E5B5-0008-61 Error in Main Gripper Paper Sensor (S55) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Main Gripper Paper Sensor (S55) could not detect presence of paper.
Remedy 1. Remain of paper stack in the Sub Gripper Assembly
2. Main Gripper Paper Sensor (S55) error

Detection Description The Inlet Path Sensor (S92T/S92L) could not detect absence of paper.
Remedy 1. Remain of paper stack in the Trimming Assembly

Detection Description The Registration Sensor (S88T/S88L) could not detect absence of paper.
Remedy 1. Remain of paper stack at the Lifting Tray at auto delivery operation after an error
E5B5-0014-61 Error in Stack Arrival Sensor (S76) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Stack Arrival Sensor (S76) could not detect absence of paper.
Remedy 1. Remain of paper stack at the Lifting Tray
2. Stack Arrival Sensor (S76) error
1557
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5B5-0016-61 Error in waste paper detection of Perfect Binder

Detection Description a. Waste paper with the specified size or larger was detected between the Waste Paper Buffer
and the Paper Retainer Plate after waste paper processing.
b. The waste paper full alarm due to jammed waste paper was not released although initialization
of buffer by opening/closing the door was performed 3 times.
* Waste paper jam is detected by the Paper Retainer Plate Sensor (S104) and the volume of
jammed waste paper is detected according to the positional relationship between the Waste Paper
Buffer and the Pressing Plate.
Remedy 1. Remain of waste paper in the Waste Paper Buffer Assembly
2. Remain of waste paper between the Waste Paper Buffer Assembly and the Pressing Plate
E5B5-0017-61 Error in Sub Gripper Paper Sensor (S39) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Sub Gripper Paper Sensor (S39) could not detect absence of paper.
2. Sub Gripper Paper Sensor (S39) error

Detection Description The Main Gripper Paper Sensor (S55) could not detect absence of paper.
Remedy 1. Remain of paper stack in the Main Gripper Assembly
E5B5-8001-61 Error in Leading Edge Sensor (S65T/S65L) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Leading Edge Sensor (S65T/S65L) could not detect presence of paper.
Remedy 1. Adhesion of paper stack to the Main Gripper
2. Remain of paper stack between the Main Gripper and the Cover Feed Assembly

Detection Description The Inlet Path Sensor (S92T/S92L) could not detect presence of paper.
Remedy 1. Remain of paper stack between the Cover Feed Assembly and the Stack Rotation Assembly

Detection Description The Registration Sensor (S88T/S88L) could not detect presence of paper.
Remedy 1. Remain of paper stack in the Stack Rotation Assembly
E5B5-8006-61 Error in Stack Delivery Sensor (S64T/S64L) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Stack Delivery Sensor (S64T/S64L) could not detect absence of paper.
Remedy 1. Remain of paper stack in the Cover Feed Assembly at power-on

Detection Description The Inlet Path Sensor (S92T/S92L) could not detect presence of paper at auto delivery operation.
Remedy 1. Remain of paper stack between the Cover Feed Assembly and the Stack Rotation Assembly at
auto delivery operation after an error
1558
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Main Gripper Paper Sensor (S55) could not detect presence of paper.

Detection Description The Inlet Path Sensor (S92T/S92L) could not detect absence of paper.
Remedy 1. Remain of paper stack in the Trimming Assembly

Detection Description The Registration Sensor (S88T/S88L) could not detect absence of paper.
Remedy 1. Remain of paper stack at the Lifting Tray at auto delivery operation after an error
E5B5-8014-61 Error in Stack Arrival Sensor (S76) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Stack Arrival Sensor (S76) could not detect absence of paper.
Remedy 1. Remain of paper stack at the Lifting Tray
2. Stack Arrival Sensor (S76) error
E5B5-8016-61 Error in waste paper detection of Perfect Binder

Detection Description a. Waste paper with the specified size or larger was detected between the Waste Paper Buffer
and the Paper Retainer Plate after waste paper processing.
b. The waste paper full alarm due to jammed waste paper was not released although initialization
of buffer by opening/closing the door was performed 3 times.
* Waste paper jam is detected by the Paper Retainer Plate Sensor (S104) and the volume of
jammed waste paper is detected according to the positional relationship between the Waste Paper
Buffer and the Pressing Plate.
Remedy 1. Remain of waste paper in the Waste Paper Buffer Assembly
2. Remain of waste paper between the Waste Paper Buffer Assembly and the Pressing Plate
E5B5-8017-61 Error in Sub Gripper Paper Sensor (S39) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Sub Gripper Paper Sensor (S39) could not detect absence of paper.
2. Sub Gripper Paper Sensor (S39) error

Detection Description The Main Gripper Paper Sensor (S55) could not detect absence of paper.
Remedy 1. Remain of paper stack in the Main Gripper Assembly
E5B6-0001-61 Error in Stack Thickness Volume Sensor (S50) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The result of paper stack thickness detection was smaller than the AD value(-30) of minimum value
(0 mm) at the time of adjustment.
Remedy 1. Stack Thickness Volume Sensor (S50) error

Detection Description The result of paper stack thickness detection was larger than the maximum AD value (25 mm) at
the time of adjustment.
1559
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The paper stack thickness detection value was not changed despite an open/close operation of
the Main Gripper Assembly.

Detection Description The result of paper stack thickness detection was smaller than the AD value(-30) of minimum value
(0 mm) at the time of adjustment.

Detection Description The result of paper stack thickness detection was larger than the maximum AD value (25 mm) at
the time of adjustment.

Detection Description The paper stack thickness detection value was not changed despite an open/close operation of
the Main Gripper Assembly.
E5B7-0001-61 Error in Glue Vat Shift Motor (M32) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description a. The Glue Vat Shift HP Sensor (S73) was not turned ON although the Glue Vat Shift Motor was
driven for a specified period of time when the Glue Vat moved to the rear HP.
b.The Glue Vat Shift HP Sensor (S73) was already turned OFF when the Glue Vat moved to the
front HP.
Remedy 1. Glue Vat Shift Motor (M32) error
2. Glue Vat Shift HP Sensor (S73) error
E5B7-0002-61 Error in Glue Vat Shift Motor (M32) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description a. The Glue Vat Shift HP Sensor (S73) was not turned OFF although the Glue Vat Shift Motor was
driven for a specified period of time when the Glue Vat moved to the front side.
b. The Glue Vat Shift HP Sensor (S73) was already turned ON when the Glue Vat moved to the
rear HP.
Remedy 1. Glue Vat Shift Motor (M32) error
2. Glue Vat Shift HP Sensor (S73) error
E5B8-0001-61 Error in Glue Vat Roller Motor (M25) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Glue Vat Roller Rotation Sensor (S59) could not detect rotation of the Glue Vat Roller when
it was driven.
Remedy 1. Glue Vat Roller Motor (M25) error
2. Glue Vat Roller Rotation Sensor (S59) error
E5B8-8001-61 Error in Glue Vat Roller Motor (M25) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Glue Vat Roller Rotation Sensor (S59) could not detect rotation of the Glue Vat Roller when
it was driven.
Remedy 1. Glue Vat Roller Motor (M25) error
2. Glue Vat Roller Rotation Sensor (S59) error
1560
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5B9-0001-61 Error in Glue Supply Motor (M33) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Glue Supply HP Sensor (S75) was not turned ON although the Glue Supply Motor was driven
for a specified period of time during glue supply.
Remedy 1. Glue Supply Motor (M33) error
2. Glue Supply HP Sensor (S75) error

Detection Description The Glue Supply HP Sensor (S75) was not turned OFF although the Glue Supply Motor was driven

Detection Description The Glue Supply HP Sensor (S75) was not turned ON although the Glue Supply Motor was driven

Detection Description The Glue Supply HP Sensor (S75) was not turned OFF although the Glue Supply Motor was driven
E5BA-0001-61 Error in Spine Bending Motor (Left) (M28) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description a. The Spine Bending HP Sensor (Left) (S60) was not turned ON although the Spine Bending
Motor (Left) was driven for a specified period of time when opening the Spine Bending Plate.
b. The Spine Bending HP Sensor (Left) (S60) had been already turned OFF when closing the Spine
Bending Plate.
Remedy 1. Spine Bending Motor (Left) (M28) error
2. Spine Bending HP Sensor (Left) (S60) error

Detection Description a. The Spine Bending HP Sensor (Left) (S60) was not turned OFF although the Spine Bending
Motor (Left) was driven for a specified period of time when closing the Spine Bending Plate.
b. The Spine Bending HP Sensor (Left) (S60) had been already turned ON when opening the Spine
Bending Plate.

Detection Description a. The Spine Bending Closed Sensor (Left) (S61) was not turned ON although the Spine Bending
Motor (Left) was driven for a specified period of time when closing the Spine Bending Plate.
b. The Spine Bending Closed Sensor (Left) (S61) had been already turned OFF when opening the
Spine Bending Plate.
2. Spine Bending Closed Sensor (Left) (S61) error
1561
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description a. The Spine Bending Closed Sensor (Left) (S61) was not turned OFF although the Spine Bending
Motor (Left) was driven for a specified period of time when opening the Spine Bending Plate.
b. The Spine Bending Closed Sensor (Left) (S61) had been already turned ON when closing the

Detection Description The Spine Bending HP Sensor (Left) (S60) and the Spine Bending Closed Sensor (Left) (S61)
were turned ON at the same time.
E5BB-0001-61 Error in Spine Bending Motor (Right) (M29) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description a. The Spine Bending HP Sensor (Right) (S66) was not turned ON although the Spine Bending
Motor (Right) was driven for a specified period of time when opening the Spine Bending Plate.
b. The Spine Bending HP Sensor (Right) (S66) had been already turned OFF when closing the
Remedy 1. Spine Bending Motor (Right) (M29) error
2. Spine Bending HP Sensor (Right) (S66) error

Detection Description a. The Spine Bending HP Sensor (Right) (S66) was not turned OFF although the Spine Bending
Motor (Right) was driven for a specified period of time when closing the Spine Bending Plate.
b. The Spine Bending HP Sensor (Right) (S66) had been already turned ON when opening the
2. Spine Bending HP Sensor (Right) (S66) error

Detection Description a. The Spine Bending Closed Sensor (Right) (S69) was not turned ON although the Spine Bending
Motor (Right) was driven for a specified period of time when closing the Spine Bending Plate.
b. The Spine Bending Closed Sensor (Right) (S69) had been already turned OFF when opening
the Spine Bending Plate.
2. Spine Bending Closed Sensor (Right) (S69) error

Detection Description a. The Spine Bending Closed Sensor (Right) (S69) was not turned OFF although the Spine
Bending Motor (Right) was driven for a specified period of time when opening the Spine Bending
Plate.
b. The Spine Bending Closed Sensor (Right) (S69) had been already turned ON when closing the
1562
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Spine Bending HP Sensor (Right) (S66) and the Spine Bending Closed Sensor (Right) (S69)
3.Spine Bending Home position Sensor (Right) (S66) error.
E5BC-0001-61 Error in Spine Plate Shift Motor (M26) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Spine Plate Open Sensor (S62) was not turned ON although the Spine Plate Shift Motor (M26)
was driven for a specified period of time when opening the Spine Plate.
Remedy 1. Spine Plate Shift Motor (M26) error
2. Spine Plate Open Sensor (S62) error

Detection Description The Spine Plate Open Sensor (S62) was not turned OFF although the Spine Plate Shift Motor
(M26) was driven for a specified period of time when closing the Spine Plate.
2. Spine Plate Open Sensor (S62) error

Detection Description The Spine Plate Closed Sensor (S63) was not turned ON although the Spine Plate Shift Motor
(M26) was driven for a specified period of time when closing the Spine Plate.
2. Spine Plate Closed Sensor (S63) error

Detection Description The Spine Plate Closed Sensor (S63) was not turned OFF although the Spine Plate Shift Motor
(M26) was driven for a specified period of time when opening the Spine Plate.
2. Spine Plate Closed Sensor (S63) error
E5BD-0001-61 Error in Front Cover Lock Release Sensor (S30) of Perfect Binder
Detection Description The Front Cover Lock Release Sensor (S30) was not turned OFF although the Front Cover was
locked.
Remedy 1. Front Cover Lock Release Sensor (S30) error
Detection Description The Front Cover Lock Release Sensor (S30) was not turned ON although the Front Cover was
lock released.
Detection Description Open status of the Front Cover was detected although the Front Cover Lock Release Sensor (S30)
was OFF.
Detection Description The Front Cover Lock Release Sensor (S30) was not turned OFF although the Front Cover was
locked.
1563
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Detection Description The Front Cover Lock Release Sensor (S30) was not turned ON although the Front Cover was
lock released.
Detection Description Open status of the Front Cover was detected although the Front Cover Lock Release Sensor (S30)
was OFF.
E5C0-0001-61 Error in Switchback Flapper Motor (M8) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Switchback Flapper HP Sensor (S10) was not turned ON although the Switchback Flapper
Motor (M8) was driven for a specified period of time when lifting up the Switchback Flapper.
Remedy 1. Switchback Flapper Motor (M8) error
2. Switchback Flapper HP Sensor (S10) error

Detection Description The Switchback Flapper HP Sensor (S10) was not turned OFF although the Switchback Flapper
Motor (M8) was driven for a specified period of time when lifting down the Switchback Flapper.

Detection Description The Switchback Flapper HP Sensor (S10) was not turned ON although the Switchback Flapper
Motor (M8) was driven for a specified period of time when lifting up the Switchback Flapper.

Detection Description The Switchback Flapper HP Sensor (S10) was not turned OFF although the Switchback Flapper
Motor (M8) was driven for a specified period of time when lifting down the Switchback Flapper.
E5C1-0001-61 Error in Trailing Edge Retaining Lever Motor (M3) of Perfect Binder
Detection Description The Trailing Edge Retaining Lever HP Sensor (S3) was not turned ON although the Trailing Edge
Retaining Lever Motor (M3) was driven for a specified period of time when releasing the Trailing
Edge Retaining Lever.
Remedy 1. Trailing Edge Retaining Lever Motor (M3) error
2. Trailing Edge Retaining Lever HP Sensor (S3) error
Detection Description The Trailing Edge Retaining Lever HP Sensor (S3) was not turned OFF although the Trailing Edge
Retaining Lever Motor (M3) was driven for a specified period of time when actuating the Trailing
1564
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Detection Description The Trailing Edge Retaining Lever HP Sensor (S3) was not turned ON although the Trailing Edge
Retaining Lever Motor (M3) was driven for a specified period of time when releasing the Trailing
Detection Description The Trailing Edge Retaining Lever HP Sensor (S3) was not turned OFF although the Trailing Edge
Retaining Lever Motor (M3) was driven for a specified period of time when actuating the Trailing
E5C2-0001-61 Error in Alignment Motor (Front) (M4) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Alignment Home Position Sensor (Front/small) (S12) was not turned ON although the
Alignment Motor (Front) (M4) was driven for a specified period of time to move small size paper
to the home position.
Remedy 1. Alignment Motor (Front) (M4) error
2. Alignment HP Sensor (Front/small) (S12) error

Detection Description The Alignment Home Position Sensor (Front/small) (S12) was not turned OFF although the
Alignment Motor (Front) (M4) was driven for the specified period of time to push small size paper.

Detection Description The Alignment Home Position Sensor (Front/large) (S14) was not turned ON although the
Alignment Motor (Front) (M4) was driven for a specified period of time to move large size paper to
the home position.
2. Alignment HP Sensor (Front/large) (S14) error

Detection Description The Alignment Home Position Sensor (Front/large) (S14) was not turned OFF although the
Alignment Motor (Front) (M4) was driven for the specified period of time to push large size paper.

Detection Description The Alignment Home Position Sensor (Front/small) (S12) was not turned ON although the
Alignment Motor (Front) (M4) was driven for a specified period of time to move small size paper

Detection Description The Alignment Home Position Sensor (Front/small) (S12) was not turned OFF although the
Alignment Motor (Front) (M4) was driven for the specified period of time to push small size paper.
1565
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Alignment Home Position Sensor (Front/large) (S14) was not turned ON although the
Alignment Motor (Front) (M4) was driven for a specified period of time to move large size paper to
the home position.

Detection Description The Alignment Home Position Sensor (Front/large) (S14) was not turned OFF although the
Alignment Motor (Front) (M4) was driven for the specified period of time to push large size paper.
E5C3-0001-61 Error in Alignment Motor (Rear) (M5) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Alignment Home Position Sensor (Rear/small) (S13) was not turned ON although the
Alignment Motor (Rear) (M5) was driven for the specified period of time to move small size paper
Remedy 1. Alignment Motor (Rear) (M5) error
2. Alignment Home Position Sensor (Rear/small) (S13) error

Detection Description The Alignment Home Position Sensor (Rear/small) (S13) was not turned OFF although the
Alignment Motor (Rear) (M5) was driven for the specified period of time to push small size paper.

Detection Description The Alignment Home Position Sensor (Rear/large) (S15) was not turned ON although the
Alignment Motor (Rear) (M5) was driven for the specified period of time to move large size paper
2. Alignment Home Position Sensor (Rear/large) (S15) error

Detection Description The Alignment Home Position Sensor (Rear/large) (S15) was not turned OFF although the
Alignment Motor (Rear) (M5) was driven for the specified period of time to push large size paper.

Detection Description The Alignment Home Position Sensor (Rear/small) (S13) was not turned ON although the
Alignment Motor (Rear) (M5) was driven for the specified period of time to move small size paper

Detection Description The Alignment Home Position Sensor (Rear/small) (S13) was not turned OFF although the
Alignment Motor (Rear) (M5) was driven for the specified period of time to push small size paper.
1566
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Alignment Home Position Sensor (Rear/large) (S15) was not turned ON although the
Alignment Motor (Rear) (M5) was driven for the specified period of time to move large size paper

Detection Description The Alignment Home Position Sensor (Rear/large) (S15) was not turned OFF although the
Alignment Motor (Rear) (M5) was driven for the specified period of time to push large size paper.
E5C4-0001-61 Error in Switchback Roller Lift Motor (M7) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Switchback Roller Upper/Lower Home Position Sensor (S11) was not turned ON although the
motor was driven for the specified period of time to lift up the Switchback Roller.
Remedy 1. Switchback Roller Lift Motor (M7) error
2. Switchback Roller Upper/Lower Home Position Sensor (S11) error

Detection Description The Switchback Roller Upper/Lower Home Position Sensor (S11) was not turned OFF although
the motor was driven for the specified period of time to lower the Switchback Roller.

Detection Description The Switchback Roller Upper/Lower Home Position Sensor (S11) was not turned ON although the
motor was driven for the specified period of time to lift up the Switchback Roller.

Detection Description The Switchback Roller Upper/Lower Home Position Sensor (S11) was not turned OFF although
the motor was driven for the specified period of time to lower the Switchback Roller.
E5C5-0001-61 Error in Stacking Tray Lift Motor (M2) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Tray Lower Limit Sensor (S7) was not turned ON although the motor was driven for the
specified period of time to lower the Stacking Tray.
Remedy 1. Stacking Tray Lift Motor (M2) error
2. Tray Lower Limit Sensor (S7) error

Detection Description The Tray Lower Limit Sensor (S7) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven for the
specified period of time to lift up the Stacking Tray.
1567
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Paper Surface Sensor (Front) (S1) was not turned ON although the motor was driven for the
2. Paper Surface Sensor (Front) (S1) error

Detection Description The Paper Surface Sensor (Front) (S1) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven for the

Detection Description The Paper Surface Sensor (Rear) (S2) was not turned ON although the motor was driven for the
2. Paper Surface Sensor (Rear) (S2) error

Detection Description The Paper Surface Sensor (Rear) (S2) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven for the

Detection Description The Stacking Tray Overflow Sensor (S6) was not turned ON although the motor was driven for the
2. Stacking Tray Overflow Sensor (S6) error

Detection Description The Stacking Tray Overflow Sensor (S6) and the Tray Lower Limit Sensor (S7) were turned ON
at the same time.

Detection Description The Stacking Tray Overflow Sensor (S6) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven for
the specified period of time to remove paper on the Stacking Tray.
E5C5-000A-61 Error in Stacking Tray Lift Motor (M2) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Stacking Tray Overflow Sensor (S6) was OFF when lifting up the Stacking Tray while the Tray
Empty Sensor (S8) was OFF and the Paper Surface Sensor (Front) (S1)/Paper Surface Sensor
(Rear) (S2) was ON.
5. Tray Empty Sensor (S8) error
1568
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Tray Lower Limit Sensor (S7) was not turned ON although the motor was driven for the

Detection Description The Tray Lower Limit Sensor (S7) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven for the

Detection Description The Paper Surface Sensor (Front) (S1) was not turned ON although the motor was driven for the

Detection Description The Paper Surface Sensor (Front) (S1) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven for the

Detection Description The Paper Surface Sensor (Rear) (S2) was not turned ON although the motor was driven for the

Detection Description The Paper Surface Sensor (Rear) (S2) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven for the

Detection Description The Stacking Tray Overflow Sensor (S6) was not turned ON although the motor was driven for the

Detection Description The Stacking Tray Overflow Sensor (S6) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven for
the specified period of time to remove paper on the Stacking Tray.
1569
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5C5-800A-61 Error in Stacking Tray Lift Motor (M2) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Stacking Tray Overflow Sensor (S6) was OFF when lifting up the Stacking Tray while the Tray
Empty Sensor (S8) was OFF and the Paper Surface Sensor (Front) (S1)/Paper Surface Sensor
(Rear) (S2) was ON.
5. Tray Empty Sensor (S8) error
E5C6-0001-61 Error in Stacking Tray Shift Motor (M9) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Stacking Tray Shift Home Position Sensor (S9) was not turned ON although the motor was
driven for the specified period of time to return the Stacking Tray back to the home position.
Remedy 1. Stacking Tray Shift Motor (M9) error
2. Stacking Tray Shift Home Position Sensor (S9) error

Detection Description The Stacking Tray Shift Home Position Sensor (S9) was not turned OFF although the motor was
driven for the specified period of time to shift the Stacking Tray from the home position.

Detection Description The Stacking Tray Shift Home Position Sensor (S9) was not turned ON although the motor was
driven for the specified period of time to return the Stacking Tray back to the home position.

Detection Description The Stacking Tray Shift Home Position Sensor (S9) was not turned OFF although the motor was
driven for the specified period of time to shift the Stacking Tray from the home position.
E5C7-0001-61 Error in Stack Weight Shift Motor (M6) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Stack Weight Shift Home Position Sensor (S16) was not turned ON although the motor was
driven for the specified period of time to return the stacking weight back to the home position.
Remedy 1. Stack Weight Shift Motor (M6) error
2. Stack Weight Shift Home Position Sensor (S16) error

Detection Description The Stack Weight Shift Home Position Sensor (S16) was not turned OFF although the motor was
driven for the specified period of time to shift the stacking weight from the home position.

Detection Description The Stack Weight Shift Home Position Sensor (S16) was not turned ON although the motor was
driven for the specified period of time to return the stacking weight back to the home position.
1570
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Stack Weight Shift Home Position Sensor (S16) was not turned OFF although the motor was
driven for the specified period of time to shift the stacking weight from the home position.
E5C9-0001-61 Error in Disengage Motor (Left) (M15) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Shift Home Position Sensor (Left) (S27) was not turned ON although the motor was driven for
the specified period of time to return the left cover path back to the home position.
Remedy 1. Shift Motor (Left) (M15) error
2. Shift Home Position Sensor (Left) (S27) error

Detection Description The Shift Home Position Sensor (Left) (S27) and the Shift Open Sensor (Left) (S28) were turned
ON at the same time.
2. Shift Home Position Sensor (Left) (S27) error
3. Shift Open Sensor (Left) (S28) error

Detection Description The Shift Open Sensor (Left) (S28) was not turned ON although the motor was driven for the
specified period of time to shift the left cover path to the open position.
2. Shift Open Sensor (Left) (S28) error
E5CA-0001-61 Error in Disengage Motor (Right) (M16) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Shift Home Position Sensor (Right) (S22) was not turned ON although the motor was driven
for the specified period of time to return the right cover path back to the home position.
Remedy 1. Shift Motor (Right) (M16) error
2. Shift Home Position Sensor (Right) (S22) error

Detection Description The Shift Home Position Sensor (Right) (S22) and the Shift Open Sensor (Right) (S23) were turned
ON at the same time.
2. Shift Home Position Sensor (Right) (S22) error
3. Shift Open Sensor (Right) (S23) error

Detection Description The Shift Open Sensor (Right) (S23) was not turned ON although the motor was driven for the
specified period of time to shift the right cover path to the open position.
2. Shift Open Sensor (Right) (S23) error
E5CB-0001-61 Error in Cover Horizontal Registration Motor (M31) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Registration Unit Home Position Sensor (S70) was not turned ON although the motor was
driven for the specified period of time to return the Registration Unit back to the home position.
Remedy 1. Cover Horizontal Registration Motor (M31) error
2. Registration Unit Home Position Sensor (S70) error
1571
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5CB-0002-61 Error in Cover Horizontal Registration Motor (M31) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Registration Unit Home Position Sensor (S70) was not turned OFF although the motor was
driven for the specified period of time to perform side registration of the cover.
Remedy 1. Cover Horizontal Registration Motor (M31) error
2. Registration Unit Home Position Sensor (S70) error
E5D0-0001-61 Error in Sub Gripper Lift Motor (M17) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Sub Gripper Home Position Sensor (S37) was not turned ON although the motor was driven
for the specified period of time to lift up the Sub Gripper.
Remedy 1. Sub Gripper Lift Motor (M17) error
2. Sub Gripper Home Position Sensor (S37) error

Detection Description The Sub Gripper Home Position Sensor (S37) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven
for the specified period of time to lower the Sub Gripper.

Detection Description The Sub Gripper Home Position Sensor (S37) was not turned ON although the motor was driven
for the specified period of time to lift up the Sub Gripper.

Detection Description The Sub Gripper Home Position Sensor (S37) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven
for the specified period of time to lower the Sub Gripper.
E5D1-0001-61 Error in Size Shift Motor (M19) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description a.The Size Shift Home Position Sensor (S38) was not turned ON although the motor was driven
for the specified period of time to open the Sub Gripper in the horizontal direction.
b.When the Sub Gripper was moved to closed position from the opened position of the cross
direction, the Size Shift Home Position Sensor (S38) was already OFF.
Remedy 1. Size Shift Motor (M19) error
2. Size Shift Home Position Sensor (S38) error

Detection Description a. The Size Shift Home Position Sensor (S38) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven
for the specified period of time to close the Sub Gripper in the horizontal direction.
b. When the Sub Gripper was moved to opened position from the closed position of the cross
direction, the Size Shift Home Position Sensor (S38) was already ON.
1572
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description a. The Size Shift Home Position Sensor (S38) was not turned ON although the motor was driven
for the specified period of time to open the Sub Gripper in the horizontal direction.
b. When the Sub Gripper was moved to closed position from the opened position of the cross
direction, the Size Shift Home Position Sensor (S38) was already OFF.

Detection Description a. The Size Shift Home Position Sensor (S38) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven
for the specified period of time to close the Sub Gripper in the horizontal direction.
b. When the Sub Gripper was moved to opened position from the closed position of the cross
direction, the Size Shift Home Position Sensor (S38) was already ON.
E5D2-0001-61 Error in Sub Gripper Motor (M20) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Sub Gripper Open Sensor (S40) was not turned ON although the motor was driven for the
specified period of time to open the Sub Gripper.
Remedy 1. Sub Gripper Motor (M20) error
2. Sub Gripper Open Sensor (S40) error

Detection Description The Sub Gripper Open Sensor (S40) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven for the
specified period of time to close the Sub Gripper.

Detection Description The Sub Gripper Closed Sensor (S41) was not turned ON although the motor was driven for the
2. Sub Gripper Closed Sensor (S41) error

Detection Description The Sub Gripper Closed Sensor (S41) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven for the

Detection Description The Sub Gripper Open Sensor (S40) and the Sub Gripper Closed Sensor (S41) were turned ON
at the same time.

Detection Description The Sub Gripper Open Sensor (S40) was not turned ON although the motor was driven for the
1573
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Sub Gripper Open Sensor (S40) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven for the

Detection Description The Sub Gripper Closed Sensor (S41) was not turned ON although the motor was driven for the

Detection Description The Sub Gripper Closed Sensor (S41) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven for the
E5D3-0001-61 Error in Stack Shift Motor (M18) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Stack Shift Home Position Sensor (S34) was not turned ON although the motor was driven
for the specified period of time to return the Sub Gripper back to the home position.
Remedy 1. Stack Shift Motor (M18) error
2. Stack Shift Home Position Sensor (S34) error

Detection Description The Stack Shift Home Position Sensor (S34) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven
for the specified period of time when the Sub Gripper delivered a stack.

Detection Description a. The Stack Shift Main Gripper Position Sensor (S35) was not turned ON although the motor was
driven for the specified period of time when the Sub Gripper delivered a stack.
b. The Main Gripper had gripped a stack at the rotation home position when the Sub Gripper
delivered a stack.
Remedy 1. Remain of stack in the Main Gripper Assembly
2. Stack Shift Motor (M18) error
3. Stack Shift Main Gripper Position Sensor (S35) error

Detection Description The Stack Shift Main Gripper Position Sensor (S35) was not turned OFF although the motor was
driven for the specified period of time to return the Sub Gripper back to the home position.

Detection Description The Main Gripper Rotation Enable Sensor (S36) was not turned ON although the motor was driven
for the specified period of time to return the Sub Gripper back to the home position.
2. Main Gripper Rotation Enable Sensor (S36) error
1574
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Main Gripper Rotation Enable Sensor (S36) was not turned OFF although the motor was
driven for the specified period of time when the Sub Gripper delivered a stack.
2. Main Gripper Rotation Enable Sensor (S36) error

Detection Description The Stack Shift Home Position Sensor (S34) and then Stack Shift Main Gripper Position Sensor
(S35) were turned ON at the same time.
E5D4-0001-61 Error in Main Gripper Lift Motor (M22) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description a. The Main Gripper Home Position Sensor (S44) was not turned ON although the motor was
driven for the specified period of time to lift up the Main Gripper.
b. The Main Gripper Home Position Sensor (S44) had been already turned OFF when lowering
the Main Gripper.
Remedy 1. Main Gripper Lift Motor (M22) error
2. Main Gripper Home Position Sensor (S44) error

Detection Description a. The Main Gripper Home Position Sensor (S44) was not turned OFF although the motor was
driven for the specified period of time when lowering the Main Gripper.
b. The Main Gripper Home Position Sensor (S44) had been already turned ON when lifting up the
Main Gripper.

Detection Description The Main Gripper Locking Sensor (Small) (S48) was not turned ON although the motor was driven
for the specified period of time to lift up the Main Gripper from the stack registration position.
2. Main Gripper Locking Sensor (Small) (S48) error

Detection Description The Main Gripper Locking Sensor (Small) (S48) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven
for the specified period of time to lower the Main Gripper to the stack registration position.

Detection Description The Main Gripper Locking Sensor (Large) (S49) was not turned ON although the motor was driven
for the specified period of time to lower the Main Gripper to the cover pressing position.
2. Main Gripper Locking Sensor (Large) (S49) error

Detection Description The Main Gripper Locking Sensor (Large) (S49) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven
for the specified period of time to lift up the Main Gripper from the cover pressing position.
1575
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Stack Delivery Sensor (S64T/S64L) was not turned ON although the motor was driven for the
specified period of time when delivering a stack from the Main Gripper to the Stack Delivery Roller.

Detection Description The Main Gripper Home Position Sensor (H) (S45) was not turned ON although the motor was
2. Main Gripper Home Position Sensor (H) (S45) error

Detection Description The Main Gripper Home Position Sensor (H) (S45) was not turned OFF although the motor was
driven for the specified period of time to lower the Main Gripper.

Detection Description a. The Main Gripper Home Position Sensor (S44) was not turned ON although the motor was
b. The Main Gripper Home Position Sensor (S44) had been already turned OFF when lowering
the Main Gripper.

Detection Description a. The Main Gripper Home Position Sensor (S44) was not turned OFF although the motor was
driven for the specified period of time when lowering the Main Gripper.
b. The Main Gripper Home Position Sensor (S44) had been already turned ON when lifting up the
Main Gripper.

Detection Description The Main Gripper Locking Sensor (Small) (S48) was not turned ON although the motor was driven
for the specified period of time to lift up the Main Gripper from the stack registration position.

Detection Description The Main Gripper Locking Sensor (Small) (S48) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven
for the specified period of time to lower the Main Gripper to the stack registration position.

Detection Description The Main Gripper Locking Sensor (Large) (S49) was not turned ON although the motor was driven
for the specified period of time to lower the Main Gripper to the cover pressing position.
1576
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Main Gripper Locking Sensor (Large) (S49) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven
for the specified period of time to lift up the Main Gripper from the cover pressing position.

Detection Description The Stack Delivery Sensor (S64T/S64L) was not turned ON although the motor was driven for the
specified period of time when delivering a stack from the Main Gripper to the Stack Delivery Roller.

Detection Description The Main Gripper Home Position Sensor (H) (S45) was not turned ON although the motor was

Detection Description The Main Gripper Home Position Sensor (H) (S45) was not turned OFF although the motor was
driven for the specified period of time to lower the Main Gripper.
E5D5-0001-61 Error in Rotation Motor (M21) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description a. The Rotation Home Position Sensor (S43) was not turned ON although the motor was driven
for the specified period of time when the Main Gripper moved to the stack delivery position.
b. The Main Gripper was not at the rotation home position while the Sub Gripper had a stack at a
position other than the home position.
Remedy 1. Remain of stack in the Sub Gripper Assembly
2. Rotation Motor (S21) error
3. Rotation Home Position Sensor (S43) error

Detection Description The Rotation Home Position Sensor (S43) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven for
the specified period of time when the Main Gripper moved to the binding position.
Remedy 1. Rotation Motor (S21) error

Detection Description The Rotation Binding Position Sensor (S42) was not turned ON although the motor was driven for
the specified period of time when the Main Gripper moved to the binding position.
Remedy 1. Rotation Motor (M21) error
2. Rotation Binding Position Sensor (S42) error

Detection Description The Rotation Binding Position Sensor (S42) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven
for the specified period of time when the Main Gripper moved to the stack delivery position.
1577
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Rotation Binding Position Sensor (S42) and the Rotation Home Position Sensor (S43) were
turned ON at the same time.
E5D6-0001-61 Error in Main Gripper Motor (Rear) (M24) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Main Gripper Open Sensor (Rear) (S47) was not turned ON although the motor was driven
for the specified period of time to open the Main Gripper.
Remedy 1. Main Gripper Motor (Rear) (M24) error
2. Main Gripper Open Sensor (Rear) (S47) error

Detection Description The Main Gripper Open Sensor (Rear) (S47) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven
for the specified period of time to close the Main Gripper.

Detection Description The Main Gripper Closed Sensor (Rear) (S54) was not turned ON although the motor was driven
2. Main Gripper Closed Sensor (Rear) (S54) error

Detection Description The Main Gripper Closed Sensor (Rear) (S54) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven

Detection Description The signal of the Main Gripper Encoder (Rear) (S46) was not changed although the motor was
driven for the specified period of time to open/close the Main Gripper.
2. Main Gripper Encoder (Rear) (S46) error

Detection Description The Main Gripper Open Sensor (Rear) (S47) and the Main Gripper Closed Sensor (Rear) (S54)

Detection Description The Main Gripper Open Sensor (Rear) (S47) was not turned ON although the motor was driven
1578
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The Main Gripper Open Sensor (Rear) (S47) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven

Detection Description The Main Gripper Closed Sensor (Rear) (S54) was not turned ON although the motor was driven

Detection Description The Main Gripper Closed Sensor (Rear) (S54) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven

Detection Description The signal of the Main Gripper Encoder (Rear) (S46) was not changed although the motor was
2. Main Gripper Encoder (Rear) (S46) error
E5D7-0001-61 Error in Main Gripper Motor (Front) (M23) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Main Gripper Open Sensor (Front) (S51) was not turned ON although the motor was driven
Remedy 1. Main Gripper Motor (Front) (M23) error
2. Main Gripper Open Sensor (Front) (S51) error

Detection Description The Main Gripper Open Sensor (Front) (S51) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven

Detection Description The Main Gripper Closed Sensor (Front) (S53) was not turned ON although the motor was driven
2. Main Gripper Closed Sensor (Front) (S53) error

Detection Description The Main Gripper Closed Sensor (Front) (S53) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven
1579
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description The signal of the Main Gripper Encoder (Front) (S52) was not changed although the motor was
2. Main Gripper Encoder (Front) (S52) error

Detection Description The Main Gripper Open Sensor (Front) (S51) and the Main Gripper Closed Sensor (Front) (S53)

Detection Description The Main Gripper Open Sensor (Front) (S51) was not turned ON although the motor was driven

Detection Description The Main Gripper Open Sensor (Front) (S51) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven

Detection Description The Main Gripper Closed Sensor (Front) (S53) was not turned ON although the motor was driven

Detection Description The Main Gripper Closed Sensor (Front) (S53) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven

Detection Description The signal of the Main Gripper Encoder (Front) (S52) was not changed although the motor was
2. Main Gripper Encoder (Front) (S52) error
E5D8-0001-61 Error in Stack Delivery Path Shift Motor (M30) of Perfect Binder
Detection Description The Stack Delivery Path Home Position Sensor (S67) was not turned ON although the motor was
driven for the specified period of time to disengage the Stack Delivery Roller.
Remedy 1. Stack Delivery Path Shift Motor (M30) error
2. Stack Delivery Path Home Position Sensor (S67) error
1580
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
Detection Description The Stack Delivery Path Home Position Sensor (S67) was not turned OFF although the motor was
driven for the specified period of time to engage the Stack Delivery Roller.
Detection Description The Stack Delivery Path Sensor (S68) was not turned ON although the motor was driven for the
specified period of time to engage the Stack Delivery Roller.
2. Stack Delivery Path Sensor (S68) error
Detection Description The Stack Delivery Path Sensor (S68) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven for the
specified period of time to disengage the Stack Delivery Roller.
Detection Description The Stack Delivery Path Home Position Sensor (S67) was not turned ON although the motor was
driven for the specified period of time to disengage the Stack Delivery Roller.
Detection Description The Stack Delivery Path Home Position Sensor (S67) was not turned OFF although the motor was
driven for the specified period of time to engage the Stack Delivery Roller.
Detection Description The Stack Delivery Path Sensor (S68) was not turned ON although the motor was driven for the
specified period of time to engage the Stack Delivery Roller.
Detection Description The Stack Delivery Path Sensor (S68) was not turned OFF although the motor was driven for the
specified period of time to disengage the Stack Delivery Roller.
E5D9-0001-61 Error in Stack Delivery Roller Motor (M27) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Leading Edge Sensor (S65T/S65L) was not turned ON although the motor was driven for the
specified period of time when delivering a stack from the Stack Delivery Roller.
Remedy 1. Stack Delivery Roller Motor (M27) error
1581
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5D9-8001-61 Error in Stack Delivery Roller Motor (M27) of Perfect Binder

Detection Description The Leading Edge Sensor (S65T/S65L) was not turned ON although the motor was driven for the
specified period of time when delivering a stack from the Stack Delivery Roller.
Remedy 1. Stack Delivery Roller Motor (M27) error
E5F0-8001-02 Saddle Leading Edge Stopper HP error

The Saddle Leading Edge Stopper Home Position Sensor was not turned ON although 5.5 sec
had passed after the Saddle Leading Edge Stopper started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB to the Saddle Leading Edge Stopper Home
Position Sensor
1. Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (UN101/J213) to Relay Connector (17P) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, SADDLE SENSOR, FRONT)
2. Relay Connector (17P) to Relay Connector (17P) (Unit of replacement: SADDLE ASSEMBLY)
3. Relay Connector (17P) to Saddle Leading Edge Stopper Home Position Sensor (PS105/J929)
(Unit of replacement: EDGE STOPPER ASSEMBLY)
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB to the Saddle Lead Edge Stopper Motor
3. Relay Connector (17P) to Saddle Lead Edge Stopper Motor (M103/J925) (Unit of replacement:
EDGE STOPPER ASSEMBLY)
- Saddle Leading Edge Stopper Home Position Sensor (PS105)
- Saddle Leading Edge Stopper Motor (M103)
- Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (UN101) (Unit of replacement: SADDLE DRIVER PCB ASS'Y)
OFF
1582
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5F0-8002-02 Saddle Leading Edge Stopper HP error

The Saddle Leading Edge Stopper Home Position Sensor was not turned OFF although 5.5 sec
had passed after the Saddle Leading Edge Stopper started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB to the Saddle Leading Edge Stopper Home
Position Sensor
3. Relay Connector (17P) to Saddle Leading Edge Stopper Home Position Sensor (PS105/J929)
(Unit of replacement: EDGE STOPPER ASSEMBLY)
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB to the Saddle Lead Edge Stopper Motor
3. Relay Connector (17P) to Saddle Lead Edge Stopper Motor (M103/J925) (Unit of replacement:
- Saddle Leading Edge Stopper Home Position Sensor (PS105)
- Saddle Leading Edge Stopper Motor (M103)
OFF
1583
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5F1-8000-02 Saddle Fold/Feed Motor error

The Saddle Fold/Feed Motor did not rotate although 1 sec had passed after the motor started the
operation.
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB to the Saddle Fold/Feed Motor
SADDLE ASSEMBLY)
2. Relay Connector (2P) to Saddle Fold/Feed Motor (M106/J902) (Unit of replacement: MOTOR,
DC)
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB to the Saddle Fold/Feed Motor Rotation
Sensor
2. Relay Connector (5P) to Saddle Fold/Feed Motor Rotation Sensor (PS114/J946) (Unit of
replacement: CABLE, LED PCB)
- Harness between the Finisher Controller PCB (UN3/J103) and the Relay PCB (UN7/J413) (Unit
of replacement: CABLE, DC)
- Saddle Fold/Feed Motor (M106)
- Saddle Fold/Feed Motor Rotation Sensor (PS114)
OFF
1584
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

The Saddle Fold/Feed Motor Rotation Sensor was not turned ON although paper was fed for the
specified distance after the sensor was turned OFF.
Sensor
SADDLE ASSEMBLY)
DC)
OFF

The Saddle Fold/Feed Motor Rotation Sensor was not turned OFF although paper was fed for the
specified distance after the Saddle Fold/Feed Motor started the operation.
Sensor
SADDLE ASSEMBLY)
DC)
OFF
1585
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5F2-8001-02 Saddle Roller Guide HP error

The Saddle Roller Guide HP Sensor was not turned ON although 1 sec had passed after the Saddle
Roller Guide Motor started the operation.
- Harness between the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (UN101/J209) and the Saddle Roller Guide
HP Sensor (PS107/J944) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SADDLE SENSOR, RIGHT)
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB to the Saddle Roller Guide Motor
SADDLE ASSEMBLY)
2. Relay Connector (4P) to Saddle Roller Guide Motor (M104/J905) (Unit of replacement: MOTOR,
STEPPING, DC)
- Saddle Roller Guide HP Sensor (PS107)
- Saddle Roller Guide Motor (M104)
OFF
E5F2-8002-02 Saddle Roller Guide HP error

The Saddle Roller Guide HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 1 sec had passed after the
Saddle Roller Guide Motor started the operation.
- Harness between the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (UN101/J209) and the Saddle Roller Guide
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB to the Saddle Roller Guide Motor
SADDLE ASSEMBLY)
2. Relay Connector (4P) to Saddle Roller Guide Motor (M104/J905) (Unit of replacement: MOTOR,
STEPPING, DC)
- Saddle Roller Guide HP Sensor (PS107)
- Saddle Roller Guide Motor (M104)
OFF
1586
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5F3-8001-02 Saddle Alignment Plate HP error

The Saddle Alignment Plate HP Sensor was not turned ON although 1.5 sec had passed after the
Saddle Alignment Guide Motor started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB to the Saddle Alignment Plate HP Sensor
3. Relay Connector (17P) to Saddle Alignment Plate HP Sensor (PS106/J928) (Unit of
replacement: EDGE STOPPER ASSEMBLY)
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB to the Saddle Alignment Guide Motor
3. Relay Connector (17P) to Saddle Alignment Guide Motor (M102/J923) (Unit of replacement:
- Saddle Alignment Plate HP Sensor (PS106)
- Saddle Alignment Guide Motor (M102)
OFF
1587
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5F3-8002-02 Saddle Alignment Plate HP error

The Saddle Alignment Plate HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 1.5 sec had passed after
the Saddle Alignment Guide Motor started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB to the Saddle Alignment Plate HP Sensor
3. Relay Connector (17P) to Saddle Alignment Plate HP Sensor (PS106/J928) (Unit of
replacement: EDGE STOPPER ASSEMBLY)
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB to the Saddle Alignment Guide Motor
3. Relay Connector (17P) to Saddle Alignment Guide Motor (M102/J923) (Unit of replacement:
- Saddle Alignment Plate HP Sensor (PS106)
- Saddle Alignment Guide Motor (M102)
OFF
E5F4-8001-02 Saddle Staple (Rear) error

The Saddle Staple HP Sensor was not turned ON although 0.8 sec had passed after the Saddle
Staple Unit started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Saddle Staple Unit to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
1. Saddle Staple Unit (J904) to Relay Connector (10P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SADDLE
STOPPER)
2. Relay Connector (10P) to Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (UN101/J207) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, SADDLE SENSOR, RIGHT)
- Saddle Staple Unit (Unit of replacement: SADDLE STAPLER ASSEMBLY)
OFF
1588
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5F4-8002-02 Saddle Staple (Rear) error

The Saddle Staple HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 0.5 sec had passed after the Saddle
Staple Unit started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Saddle Staple Unit to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
1. Saddle Staple Unit (J904) to Relay Connector (10P) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SADDLE
STOPPER)
2. Relay Connector (10P) to Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (UN101/J207) (Unit of replacement:
- Saddle Staple Unit (Unit of replacement: SADDLE STAPLER ASSEMBLY)
OFF
E5F6-8001-02 Saddle Paper Thrust Plate HP error

The Saddle Paper Thrust Plate HP Sensor was not turned ON although 0.8 sec had passed after
the Saddle Paper Thrust Plate Motor started the operation.
- Harness between the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (UN101/J209) and the Saddle Paper Thrust
Plate HP Sensor (PS108/J937) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SADDLE SENSOR, RIGHT)
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paper Thrust Plate Motor to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
SADDLE ASSEMBLY)
3. Relay Connector (4P) to Saddle Paper Thrust Plate Motor (M105/J901) (Unit of replacement:
MOTOR, DC)
- Saddle Paper Thrust Plate HP Sensor (PS108)
- Saddle Paper Thrust Plate Motor (M105)
OFF
1589
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5F6-8002-02 Saddle Paper Thrust Plate HP error

The Saddle Paper Thrust Plate HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 0.3 sec had passed after
the Saddle Paper Thrust Plate Motor started the operation.
- Harness between the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (UN101/J209) and the Saddle Paper Thrust
Plate HP Sensor (PS108/J937) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SADDLE SENSOR, RIGHT)
- Harnesses from the Saddle Paper Thrust Plate Motor to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB
SADDLE ASSEMBLY)
3. Relay Connector (4P) to Saddle Paper Thrust Plate Motor (M105/J901) (Unit of replacement:
MOTOR, DC)
- Saddle Paper Thrust Plate HP Sensor (PS108)
- Saddle Paper Thrust Plate Motor (M105)
OFF
E5FA-8000-02 Saddle Press Motor error

The Saddle Press Motor did not move although 0.2 sec had passed after the motor started the
operation.
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB to the Saddle Press Position Sensor
3. Relay Connector (9P) to Saddle Press Position Sensor (PS116/J913) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, PRESS SENSOR)
- Saddle Press Motor (M108)
- Saddle Press Position Sensor (PS116)
OFF
1590
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5FA-8001-02 Saddle press position detection error

The Saddle Press Position Sensor was not turned ON although 10 sec had passed after the Saddle
Press Motor started the operation.
OFF
E5FA-8002-02 Saddle press position detection error

The Saddle Press Position Sensor was not turned OFF although 1 sec had passed after the Saddle
Press Motor started the operation.
OFF
1591
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5FB-8001-02 Saddle Pull-in Roller HP error

The Saddle Pull-in Roller HP Sensor was not turned ON although 0.5 sec had passed after the
Saddle Pull-in Roller Disengagement Motor started the operation.
- Harness between the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (UN101/J204) and the Saddle Pull-in Roller
Disengagement Motor (M114/J1012) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SADDLE SENSOR, RIGHT)
- Saddle Pull-in Roller Disengagement Motor (M114)
- Saddle Pull-in Roller HP Sensor (PS122)
OFF
E5FB-8002-02 Saddle Pull-in Roller HP error

The Saddle Pull-in Roller HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 0.5 sec had passed after the
Saddle Pull-in Roller Disengagement Motor started the operation.
Disengagement Motor (M114/J1012) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SADDLE SENSOR, RIGHT)
- Saddle Pull-in Roller Disengagement Motor (M114)
- Saddle Pull-in Roller HP Sensor (PS122)
OFF
E5FC-8001-02 Saddle Paper Tapping HP error

The Saddle Paper Tapping HP Sensor was not turned ON although 0.5 sec had passed after the
Saddle Tapping Motor started the operation.
- Harness between the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (UN101/J204) and the Saddle Tapping
Motor (M113/J910) (Unit of replacement: SADDLE ASSEMBLY)
- Harness between the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (UN101/J209) and the Saddle Paper
Tapping HP Sensor (PS118/J945) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SADDLE SENSOR, RIGHT)
- Saddle Tapping Motor (M113)
- Saddle Paper Tapping HP Sensor (PS118)
OFF
1592
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5FC-8002-02 Saddle Paper Tapping HP error

The Saddle Paper Tapping HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 0.5 sec had passed after the
Saddle Tapping Motor started the operation.
- Harness between the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (UN101/J204) and the Saddle Tapping
Motor (M113/J910) (Unit of replacement: SADDLE ASSEMBLY)
- Harness between the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (UN101/J209) and the Saddle Paper
Tapping HP Sensor (PS118/J945) (Unit of replacement: CABLE, SADDLE SENSOR, RIGHT)
- Saddle Tapping Motor (M113)
- Saddle Paper Tapping HP Sensor (PS118)
OFF
E5FD-8001-02 Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer Shift HP error

The Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer Shift HP Sensor was not turned ON although 3 sec had passed
after the Saddle Trailing Edge Shift Motor started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB to the Saddle Trailing Edge Shift Motor
2. Relay Connector (14P) to Saddle Trailing Edge Shift Motor (M111/J911) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, GUIDE)
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB to the Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer Shift
HP Sensor
2. Relay Connector (14P) to Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer Shift HP Sensor (PS119/J916) (Unit
of replacement: CABLE, GUIDE)
- Saddle Trailing Edge Shift Motor (M111)
- Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer Shift HP Sensor (PS119)
OFF
1593
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5FD-8002-02 Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer Shift HP error

The Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer Shift HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 3 sec had passed
after the Saddle Trailing Edge Shift Motor started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB to the Saddle Trailing Edge Shift Motor
2. Relay Connector (14P) to Saddle Trailing Edge Shift Motor (M111/J911) (Unit of replacement:
CABLE, GUIDE)
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB to the Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer Shift
HP Sensor
2. Relay Connector (14P) to Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer Shift HP Sensor (PS119/J916) (Unit
of replacement: CABLE, GUIDE)
- Saddle Trailing Edge Shift Motor (M111)
- Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer Shift HP Sensor (PS119)
OFF
E5FE-8001-02 Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer HP error

The Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer HP Sensor was not turned ON although 0.5 sec had passed
after the Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer Motor started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB to the Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer Motor
2. Relay Connector (14P) to Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer Motor (M110/J915) (Unit of
replacement: CABLE, GUIDE)
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB to the Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer HP
Sensor
2. Relay Connector (14P) to Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer HP Sensor (PS121/J917) (Unit of
- Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer Motor (M110)
- Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer HP Sensor (PS121)
OFF
1594
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5FE-8002-02 Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer HP error

The Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 0.5 sec had passed
after the Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer Motor started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB to the Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer Motor
2. Relay Connector (14P) to Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer Motor (M110/J915) (Unit of
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB to the Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer HP
Sensor
2. Relay Connector (14P) to Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer HP Sensor (PS121/J917) (Unit of
- Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer Motor (M110)
- Saddle Trailing Edge Retainer HP Sensor (PS121)
OFF
E5FF-8001-02 Saddle Clamp HP error

Detection Description FIN-AN1/SADDLE FIN-AN2The Saddle Clamp HP Sensor was not turned ON although 1 sec had
passed after the Saddle Clamp Motor started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB to the Saddle Clamp Motor
SADDLE ASSEMBLY)
2. Relay Connector (3P) to Saddle Clamp Motor (M115/J2002) (Unit of replacement: SADDLE
ASSEMBLY)
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB to the Saddle Clamp HP Sensor
SADDLE ASSEMBLY)
2. Relay Connector (7P) to Saddle Clamp HP Sensor (PS123/J2004) (Unit of replacement: CLAMP
ASSEMBLY)
- Saddle Clamp Motor (M115) (Unit of replacement: CLAMP ASSEMBLY)
- Saddle Clamp HP Sensor (PS123) (Unit of replacement: CLAMP ASSEMBLY)
OFF
1595
7. Error/Jam/Alarm
E5FF-8002-02 Saddle Clamp HP error

The Saddle Clamp HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 1 sec had passed after the Saddle
Clamp Motor started the operation.
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB to the Saddle Clamp Motor
SADDLE ASSEMBLY)
2. Relay Connector (3P) to Saddle Clamp Motor (M115/J2002) (Unit of replacement: SADDLE
ASSEMBLY)
- Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB to the Saddle Clamp HP Sensor
SADDLE ASSEMBLY)
2. Relay Connector (7P) to Saddle Clamp HP Sensor (PS123/J2004) (Unit of replacement: CLAMP
ASSEMBLY)
- Saddle Clamp Motor (M115) (Unit of replacement: CLAMP ASSEMBLY)
- Saddle Clamp HP Sensor (PS123) (Unit of replacement: CLAMP ASSEMBLY)
OFF
E602-0001-00 HDD error

Detection Description HDD failed to be Ready, or HDD was not formatted.
When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be
recorded in the error log.
- Harness between the Riser PCB (UN985/J106 and J107) and the HDD1 (Unit of replacement:
DRAWER CABLE ASSEMBLY, IVDR)
- HDD1 (Unit of replacement: HDD, WD2500HHTZ-04N21V1)
1. Check the related harness/cable and connector.
2. Turn ON the main power, and check whether the error is cleared.
3. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "0", and execute "HD-CLEAR". Then,
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
[Reference] All the partitions that can be deleted are deleted.
4. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD and reinstall the system software
using SST or a USB memory.
[CAUTION] When replacing the HDD, execute "Adjustment During HDD Replacement" in situation
mode.
1596
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description There was no system for the main CPU.
mode.

Detection Description Some of HDD data in BootDevice was corrupted.
Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. R1.00
a. If screen does not transition to another screen, and E-code is displayed,
a-1. Turn OFF the power and then execute (1+9) startup. (Detection and recovery of the corrupted
HDD data starts.)
a-2. The process is complete when the screen turns white. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
(Required time: Approx. 50 min)
b. If the service call request screen is displayed,
b-1. Select COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE> "0", and execute "HD-CHECK". Then,
b-2. Enter safe mode using (2+8) startup. Then format the HDD and reinstall the system software
b-3. Replace the HDD1. (Unit of replacement: HDD, WD2500HHTZ-04N21V1)
mode.

Detection Description There was no system for the sub CPU.
mode.
1597
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description There was no ICC Profile.
mode.

Detection Description There was no Font file in /BOOTDEV/BOOT.
mode.

Detection Description There were no Chinese, Korean, and Taiwan font files.
mode.

Detection Description There were no Chinese, Korean, and Taiwan font files.
mode.
1598
7. Error/Jam/Alarm

Detection Description There was no file in which the Web browser refers to.

imagePRESS C10000VP Series Service Manual - en - 13.0 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

imagePRESS C10000VP Series Service Manual - en - 13.0 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Revision 13.

Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation

Check visually. Insert the claw.

Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation

Disconnect the connector. Connect the power cable.

Connect the connector. Disconnect the power cable.

Remove the cable/wire from the Turn on the power.

Install the cable/wire to the cable Turn off the power.

Remove the screw. Loosen the screw.

Install the screw. Tighten the screw.

Cleaning is needed. Measurement is needed.

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

3. Periodical Service........................................................................................ 377

Delivery Reverse Unit........................................................................................................................ 409

4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning............................................................... 417

Opening/Closing the Primary Fixing Upper Unit................................................................................... 635

Replacing the Secondary Fixing Pressure Refresh Cleaning Roller.......................................................729

Image Position Adjustment.................................................................................................................877

Alarm Code Details..........................................................................................................................1760

8. Service Mode.............................................................................................. 1963

Preparing the Starter....................................................................................................................... 2697

Installation Outline Drawing..............................................................................................................2787

10. Operator Maintenance............................................................................. 2823

Refurbishing the Fixing Assembly.....................................................................................................2848

11. Maintenance Assist Tool......................................................................... 2849

Handling of Laser System

Diese Maschine ist der Klasse 1 der Laserprodukte zugeordnet.

Turn power switch ON

Toner on Clothing or Skin

Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery

Points to Note before Servicing

1. Turn OFF the main power of the host machine.

Points to Note at Cleaning

imagePRESS C10000VP imagePRESS C8000VP

*: The speed of the host machine is determined by the license option.

Pickup/Delivery System Options

LONG SHEET TRAY-A1

POD Deck-D1 Secondary POD Deck-D1

Long Sheet Tray-C1

Two-Knife Booklet Finisher-AN1 Paper Folding

Product name Required options, conditions, etc. Remarks

Scanning System Options

Product name Required options, conditions, etc. Remarks

Product name Required options, conditions, etc. Remarks

Function expansion system options

HDD Data Encryption

Voice Guidance Kit-F2

Product name Required options, conditions, etc. Remarks

High Primary High High

High Secondary High

Laser Scanner Unit

Primary Charging Assembly

ITB Patch Sensor

Adoption of Secondary Transfer Outer Belt

Canon Maintenance Assist Tools Version 1.0.0

Support Service General

ALL Right Reserved Canon Inc., 2015

■ Improved Parts Lives

Current model This machine

0 30 100 150 200 300

Life (unit: 10,000 sheets)

■ Introduction of Operator Maintenance

No screws needed for Fixing Web

㻿㼃㻝㻿㼃㻞㻿㼃㻟㻿㼃㻠

㻿㼃㻝㻿㼃㻞㻿㼃㻟㻿㼃㻠